JP2019097788A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of improving amusement of games.SOLUTION: An operation presentation is performed in which identification symbols corresponding to information stored in storage means are displayed, and of which presentation mode can be varied by the operation of operation means. Further, an identification symbol presentation is performed in which identification symbols being displayed become possible to be varied by the operation of the operation means. If the operation presentation and the identification symbol presentation are performed during overlapping periods, amusement of games can be improved due to a specific presentation to be performed on the basis of the operation means having operated during the overlapping periods.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 486

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, prior to the notification of the lottery result, one has been proposed that is configured to be able to execute an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means as a suggested effect for suggesting the lottery result.

JP, 2013-090780, A

  However, there has been a problem that the interest of the game is reduced.

  The present invention has been made to solve the problems and the like exemplified above, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine in which the interest of the game is improved.

  In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 comprises an acquisition means capable of acquiring information, a storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and information stored in the storage means A discriminator capable of performing discrimination based on the above, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means, dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information An identification means for displaying an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means on the display means, and an operation means operable by the player and the operation means are operated Operation effect execution means capable of executing operation effects whose effect aspect is variable, and identification symbol effect which makes it possible to change the aspect of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means When the special identification symbol effect executing means, and the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are performed in overlapping periods, the specific effect is performed based on the operation of the operation means in the overlapping periods. And a specific effect executing means capable of

  The game machine according to claim 2 is the game machine according to claim 1, wherein the setting to set the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period It has a means, and the suggestion mode which shows about the above-mentioned operation production used as the object changed by operating the above-mentioned operation means or the above-mentioned identification symbol production is included in the above-mentioned specific production.

  The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein in the overlapping period, the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is varied based on the operation of the operation means. The number of times of operation is set to be different.

  According to the gaming machine of claim 1, the discrimination is performed based on the acquisition means capable of acquiring information, the storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and the information stored in the storage means. Executable determination means, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means, dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means, and storage in the storage means And an identification symbol display means for causing the display means to display an identification symbol corresponding to the information being displayed, and an operation means operable by the player and the operation mode thereof are operated to change the effect mode Operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect, and an identification symbol effect real capable of executing an identification symbol effect which makes it possible to vary the aspect of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means When it is executed in a period in which the operation effect and the identification symbol effect overlap, the specific effect can be performed based on the operation of the operation means in the overlapping period And an execution means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine of the first aspect, the following effect is exerted. That is, it has setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the operation means is operated for the specific effect The indication aspect which shows about the said operation production or the said identification symbol production which becomes the object changed by being done is contained.

  Therefore, it is possible to recognize in advance the target to be changed when operating the operation means, and it is possible to play an easy-to-understand game.

  According to the gaming machine of the third aspect, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine of the first aspect or the second aspect, the following effect is exhibited. That is, in the overlapping period, the number of times of operation in which the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is varied is set to be different based on the operation of the operation means.

  Therefore, there is an effect that it is easy to distinguish between the operation effect and the identification symbol effect even in the overlapping period.

It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIb-VIb of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a partial front view of a pachinko machine, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line VIIb-VIIb in FIG. 7 (a). It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an operation device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the operation device. (A) is a front view of the tilting device, (b) is a side view of the tilting device in the direction of arrow XIVb in FIG. 14 (a), and (c) is an XIV c- in FIG. 14 (a). It is sectional drawing of the tilting apparatus in an XIVc line. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a tilting device. It is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid of the tilting device. (A) is a front view of a drive device, (b) is a side view of the drive device in the arrow XVIIb direction view of Fig.17 (a). It is a front disassembled perspective view of a drive device. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a transmission shaft. (A) is a side view of the left disc cam in the arrow XXa direction view of FIG. 18, (b) is a side view of the left disc cam in the arrow XXb direction of FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of a releasing member and a rotating claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the XXXIX-XXXIX line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the XXII-XXII line | wire of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a side view of the slide claw member in the second embodiment, (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member, and (c) is a side view of the release member. (A) And (b) is a side view of a releasing member, a rotating plate member, and a slide claw member. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is a side view of the tilting device in a 3rd embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. It is a side view of the tilting device in a 4th embodiment. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a side view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the operating device in 5th Embodiment. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower frame member and a vibrating device. (A) is a side view of the lower frame member, (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a), and (c) is FIG. 59 (a) FIG. 18 is a partial top view of the lower frame member in the direction of the arrow LIXc of FIG. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the vibration apparatus in the LXa-LXa line of FIG. 59 (a). (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the transmission apparatus 5410 in the LIXb-LIXb line | wire of Fig.59 (a), and the accommodating member 5430. FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive device. (A) is a front perspective view of a right disk cam, (b) is a back surface perspective view of a right disk cam. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a transmission shaft. (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in the arrow LXVa direction view of FIG. 62, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the right disc cam taken along line LXVb-LXVb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. (A) is a front view of the right disk cam in the arrow LXVa direction view of Drawing 62, (b) is a sectional view of the right disk cam in the LXVIb-LXVIb line of Drawing 66 (a). (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a) It is. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device along a line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and (b) is a partial rear view of the operating device in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68 (a) It is. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the drive device in 6th Embodiment. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a disc member, a ring member, and a 2nd transmission member of a left disc cam. It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). It is sectional drawing of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. 6 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disc cam in 7th Embodiment, (b) is a rear view of a right disc cam. FIG. 74 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam taken along line LXXVa-LXXVa in FIG. 74 (a); FIG. It is. (A) is a front view of a ring member, (b) is a rear view of the ring member, (c) is a side view of the ring member in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76 (a). (A) is a front view of an engagement member, (b) is a side view of the engagement member in the arrow LXXVIIb direction view of FIG. 77 (a). (A) is a front view of the right disk cam, (b) is a side view of the right disk cam as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIb in FIG. 78 (a), (c) is a right disk cam (D) is a side view of the right disc cam in the direction of arrow LXXVIIId of FIG. 78 (c), (e) is a front view of the right disc cam, (f) These are side views of the right disc cam in the arrow LXXVIII f direction view of FIG. 78 (e). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. FIG. 7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operating device at a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6; (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the line corresponding to the XXII-XXII line of FIG. FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device at a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the operating device at a line corresponding to line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6; It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 8th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state which opened the inner frame to the outer frame (deployment). It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state (deployment) which opened the back pack to the inner frame in the state where the inner frame was opened to the outer frame. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state which closed the inner frame to the outer frame and opened (expanded) the front frame. It is a front view of a pachinko machine in the state where a front frame was removed. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the front frame which the structural member arrange | positioned below the window part of a front frame disassembles and is shown in figure. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front frame which the structural member arrange | positioned below the window part of a front frame disassembles and is shown in figure. (A) is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame, (b) is a front perspective view of a binding movable member in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member are illustrated side by side. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner of a front frame, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in an XCIVb-XCIVb line of Drawing 94 (a). (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame which shows the lower left corner of a front frame, (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the front frame in the XCVb-XCVb line of Drawing 95 (a). (A) is a back side schematic diagram which illustrates a binding movable member and a harness typically, (b) is an upper surface schematic diagram of Fig.96 (a), (c) is a binding movable member and a harness It is a back surface schematic diagram illustrated typically, (d) is an upper surface schematic diagram of FIG. 96 (c). (A) And (b) is an upper surface schematic diagram of a front frame, an inner frame, a binding movable member, and a harness which illustrate a binding movable member and a harness typically. It is a front view of a passage formation unit. It is an enlarged front view of the 1st bending field. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a front frame. It is a rear exploded perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a right panel unit. It is a front view of a support plate part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a heavy plate unit. (A) is a side view of a right panel unit, (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of the right panel unit in the CXIIb-CXIIb line | wire of Fig.112 (a). (A) is a side view of a right panel unit, (b) is a partial expanded sectional view of a right panel unit in the CXIIIb-CXIIIb line of Drawing 113 (a). (A) is a side view of the right panel unit, (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit, and (c) is a side view of the right panel unit. (A) is a side schematic diagram of a light guide member, (b) is sectional drawing of the light guide member in the CXVb-CXVb line | wire of Fig.115 (a). It is a partial rear view of a right panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper panel unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an upper side frame member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper side frame member. FIG. 5 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly. FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of the speaker assembly. (A) is a rear view of the front assembly, (b) is a front view of the rear assembly. (A) is a rear view of a speaker assembly, (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb of FIG. 124 (a), and (c) is a view of FIG. 124 (a) FIG. 124 is a top view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVc direction, and FIG. 124 (d) is a partial bottom view of the speaker assembly in the arrow CXXIVd direction of FIG. 124 (a). (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of the front assembly in the CXXVa-CXXVa line of FIG. 124 (a), a rear assembly, an upper side frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side plate member, (b) is FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the front assembly in the CXXVb-CXXVb line of a, rear assembly, an upper side frame member, a main body frame, and an upper side board member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board and an inner frame. (A) is a rear view of a game board, (b) is a front view of an inner frame. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the inner frame in the CXXVIIIa-CXXVIIIa line | wire of FIG. 127 (b). (A) And (b) is a side view of the board support apparatus and game board which showed the board support apparatus and game board typically. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support apparatus. (A) is a front perspective view of a board support apparatus, (b) is a back perspective view of a board support apparatus. It is an exploded front perspective view of a board support device. It is an exploded back perspective view of a board support device. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board support apparatus. (A) And (b) is a side view of a board support apparatus. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the pachinko machine in the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an outer frame and an inner frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a ball launch unit, (b) is a rear perspective view of a ball launch unit. (A) And (b) is a disassembled front perspective view of a ball | bowl emission unit. (A) to (c) is a front view of a ball launch unit showing the sending situation of the ball by the ball feed device in time series. It is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting. (A) is a front view of a ball | bowl emission unit, (b) is a partial top view of the ball | bowl emission unit in the arrow CXLVIb direction view of Fig. 146 (a). (A) is a front view of a ball | bowl emission unit, (b) is a front perspective view of the metal member for cutting which shows the relationship between the thread | yarn and the metal member for cutting in the state of Fig.147 (a). FIG. 5 is a partial front view of the ball launch unit, the inner rail and the outer rail after firing of the ball. It is a front view of a game board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a presentation operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a presentation operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a presentation operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device. FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of the petal operation device in the CLIV-CLIV line of FIG. 153; It is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal operation device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a petal operation device. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member, (b) is a disassembled back perspective view of a petal, a flat member, and a slide member. It is a front view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slit member. It is a front perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. (A) And (b) is a back perspective view of a slide member and a drive motor. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a central axis rotating device and a loose fitting device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a central axis rotating device and a loose fitting device. It is a rear perspective view of a petal operation device, a drive side arm member, and a driven side arm member. It is a front perspective view of a backplate. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a backplate, a side base material, and a 2nd presentation member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a drive side arm member, a slide board, and a 2nd presentation member. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advancing and retracting operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advancing and retracting operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an operation unit. It is a front view of a petal operation device, an advancing and retracting operation unit, and a back plate. It is a rear view of a petal operation device and an operation unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view omitting the central axis rotating device and showing through the petal operating device It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operating device Is a rear perspective view of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view omitting the central axis rotating device and showing through the petal operating device It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operating device Is a rear perspective view of FIG. (A) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device, (b) is a front view of the petal operating device, and (c) is a front view omitting the central axis rotating device and showing through the petal operating device It is a figure, (d) is a front view of a slit member and a rotating plate. (A) is a front view of a rotary plate, (b) is a rear view of a petal operating device, (c) is a rear view of a petal and a flat plate member, (d) is a petal operating device Is a rear perspective view of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the channel | path formation unit in 9th Embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front view of a ball launch unit. It is a front perspective view of the channel | path formation unit in 10th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front perspective view of a passage formation unit. It is a front view of an inner frame and a saucer passage formation member in a 11th embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail. It is a partial enlarged front perspective view of an outer rail. (A) And (b) is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a partial front enlarged view of a foul ball passage. It is a rear perspective view of the loose fitting apparatus in 12th Embodiment. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operation apparatus. (A) And (b) is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front view of a petal operation device. (A) And (b) is a front view of a petal operation apparatus. It is a front view of a petal operation device. It is a partial enlarged front view of the slit member and slide member in another example of 12th Embodiment. It is a partial enlarged front view of a slit member and a slide member. It is a front perspective view of the operation device in 13th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) And (b) is a front perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front view of the operating device, (b) is a side view of the operating device as viewed in the direction of arrow CCIIIb in FIG. 203 (a), (c) is a bottom view of the operating device, (D) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCIIId-CCIIId line of Drawing 203 (a), and (e) is a sectional view of the operation device in the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of Drawing 203 (a). (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame in 14th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. (A) is a partial rear view of the front frame in 15th Embodiment, (b) and (c) is a rear view of a fraud detection apparatus. FIG. 206 (a) is a partial back view of the right panel unit in the sixteenth embodiment, and (b) schematically represents an upward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in a region CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). FIG. 206 is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guide member, and FIG. 206C is a partial enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVIc of FIG. 206 (a) And (d) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member schematically showing a downward concave portion recessed in the light guide member in the region CCVId of FIG. 206 (a), and FIG. It is a partially expanded perspective view of the light guide member which represents typically the upward concave part concavely provided by the light guide member in area | region CCVIe of (a). It is a front view of a pachinko machine in a 17th embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front view of a front frame. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. (A) And (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the operation device in the CCXVa-CCXVa line of FIG. It is a front perspective view of an operating device. It is a rear perspective view of the operation device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operating device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an operating device. (A) is a front perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover, (b) is a rear perspective view of a left front cover and a right front cover. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower tray unit. (A) is a schematic cross section of a right side reinforcing rib, (b) is a schematic cross section of a left side reinforcing rib. (A) is a top view of a lower tray unit, (b) is a front view of a lower tray unit. (A) is a bottom view of a lower tray unit, (b) is a rear view of a lower tray unit. (A) is a right view in the arrow L direction view of a lower tray unit, (b) is a left view in the arrow R direction view of a lower tray unit. It is a rear view of a lower tray unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit at line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), (b) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit at line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229 (a), (C) is sectional drawing of the lower tray unit in the CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc line | wire of FIG. 229 (a). It is sectional drawing of the lower tray unit in the CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV line | wire of FIG. 229 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a top effect apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper presentation apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a top effect apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an upper presentation apparatus. (A) is a front view of a back side unit, (b) is a front view of a light decoration board. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a back side unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a back side unit. (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of the division member in the CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa line | wire of FIG. 241, an electric decoration board | substrate, a back surface support member, and an acoustic device, (b) is a division member in CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb line | wire of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration substrate, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of the division member in the CCXLVa-CCXLVa line of FIG. 241, an electric decoration board | substrate, a back surface support member, and an acoustic device, (b) is a division member in CCXLVb-CCXLVb line of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration substrate, a back support member, and an acoustic device. (A) is a fragmentary sectional view of the division member in the CCXLVIa-CCXLVIa line | wire of FIG. 241, an electric decoration board | substrate, a back surface support member, and an acoustic device, (b) is a division member in CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb line | wire of FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of a decoration substrate, a back support member, and an acoustic device. It is a side schematic diagram of an upper effect apparatus. It is sectional drawing of the back side unit in the CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII line of FIG. 241 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front side unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front side unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit and a to-be-guided unit, (b) is a rear view of a division unit and a to-be-guided unit. (A) is a front view of a division unit, (b) is a rear view of a division unit. (A) is a front view of a board guide unit, (b) is a rear view of a board guide unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the division unit and the guided unit on line CCLIVa-CCLIVa in FIG. 251 (b), (b) is a division unit and guided unit on line CCLIVb-CCLIVb in FIG. 251 (b) FIG. 251C is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit and the guided unit on line CCLIVc-CCLIVc in FIG. 251 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a division unit and a guided unit. (A) is a front view of a light transmission unit and an outer frame member, (b) is a rear view of a light transmission unit and an outer frame member. (A) is a disassembled front perspective view of a light transmission unit and an outer frame member, (b) is a disassembled back perspective view of a light transmission unit and an outer frame member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an optical transmission unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of an optical transmission unit. (A) is a front view of the transparent tubular member, (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member, (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member, (d) is It is a right elevation view in the arrow L direction view of a transparent cylindrical member, (e) is a rear view of a transparent cylindrical member. (A) is a front view of the light transmission unit, (b) is a top view of the light transmission unit, (c) is a bottom view of the light transmission unit, (d) is a light transmission unit FIG. 6E is a right side view in the direction of the arrow L in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of the back side unit in a CCLXIII-CCLXIII line of FIG. 241, an acoustic device, and a light transmission unit. (A) is a front view schematically showing the arrangement of the first illumination unit, and (b) is a front view schematically showing the arrangement of light viewed through the light transmission unit. . It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front frame. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a side effect apparatus. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a side effect apparatus. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a side effect apparatus. (A) is a front view of a base member and an electric decoration board, (b) is a left side view of a base member, (c) is a right side view of a base member, (d) is It is a top view of a base member, (e) is a bottom view of a base member, (f) is a sectional view of a base member and a decoration board in the CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf line of Drawing 269 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a covering unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a covering unit. (A) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a front view of the light receiving member, (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member. FIG. 272 (a) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a), and (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. (A) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member, (b) is a rear view of the light receiving member, and (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member. (A) is sectional drawing of the horizontal rendering apparatus in the CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa line of FIG. 274 (b), (b) is sectional drawing of the light receiving member in the CCLXXVb-CCLXXVb line of FIG. 274 (b). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a flat plate member, a curved plate member, and a cover member. FIG. 272 (a) is a cross section of the base member, the electric decoration substrate, and the light receiving member taken along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272 (b), and FIG. 272 (b) is the base member taken along line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb in FIG. It is a sectional view of an electric decoration board and a light sensing member, and (c) is a sectional view of a base member, an electric decoration board, and a light sensing member in a CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line of Drawing 272 (b). FIG. 280 is a schematic view of a base member, an electric decoration substrate, and a light receiving member schematically showing a cross section of FIG. 280 (a). It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 18th Embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine. (A) is sectional drawing of the presentation apparatus in the CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa line | wire of FIG. 282, (b) is a schematic diagram of the illumination decoration board | substrate of the presentation apparatus in arrow CCLXXXIVb direction view of Fig.284 (a). It is a side view of the cover in 19th Embodiment. FIG. 229 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit in the twentieth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front frame in a 21st embodiment, an operation device, and a lower tray unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lower tray unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a vibrating device. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a vibrating device. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a vibration motor and a covering member. It is a front perspective view of a covering member. It is a front view of a covering cover member. (A) is a top view of a lower tray unit, (b) is sectional drawing of the lower tray unit in the CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb line of FIG. 296 (a). It is a rear view of a lower tray unit. It is sectional drawing of the lower tray unit in the CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII line of FIG. 296 (a). (A) is a partial upper surface schematic view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial side schematic view of the lower tray unit in the direction of arrow CCXCIXb in FIG. 299 (a). is there. (A) is a partial top view of the lower tray unit schematically illustrating the lower tray unit, and (b) is a partial side schematic view of the lower tray unit in the direction of the arrow CCCb in FIG. 300 (a). is there. It is a partial upper surface schematic diagram of a lower tray unit which illustrates a lower tray unit typically. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in a 22nd embodiment. It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine which shows the state which opened the front frame to the inner frame (deployment). It is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine in the state where a front frame was removed. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board, a center frame, a lottery unit, and an operation unit. FIG. 307 (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board in a range A5a of FIG. 302, and FIG. 307 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb of FIG. 307 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a game board, an outer edge member, and a metal plate-like member. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a lottery unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a lottery unit. (A) is a side view of the engagement member in which the engagement member is viewed from the rotational axis direction, and (b) is a front view of the engagement member in the direction of the arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. c) is a cross-sectional view of the engagement member taken along line CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc in FIG. 312 (b). It is a disassembled back perspective view of a main body member, an engagement member, and a drive device unit. (A) And (b) is a side view of an electrically-driven workpiece, an engaging member, and an electromagnetic solenoid. (A) And (b) is sectional drawing of the lottery unit in the line corresponding to the CCCXIIc-CCCXIIc line | wire of FIG. 312 (b). (A) is a top view of an operation | movement unit, (b) is a side view of the operation | movement unit in the arrow L direction view of FIG. 302. FIG. It is a rear view of a game board and an operation unit. FIG. 304 is a partial cross-sectional view of the gaming board and the operating unit taken along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG. 302. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a front view of an operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of an operation | movement unit. It is a front perspective view of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a rear perspective view of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front cover. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front cover. (A) is a front view of an electric decoration board | substrate and a board | substrate fixed plate, (b) is sectional drawing of the electric decoration board | substrate and board | substrate fixing plate in the CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb line of Fig.331 (a). (A) is a front view of an electric decoration board | substrate and a board | substrate fixed plate, (b) is sectional drawing of the electric decoration board | substrate and substrate fixing plate in the CCCXXXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line | wire of FIG. 332 (a). It is a disassembled front perspective view of a front side unit and a rear side unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a front side unit and a back side unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front side unit of a 1st operation | movement unit, and a rear side unit. FIG. 7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit and the rear unit of the first operation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 1st displacement member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 1st displacement member. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. (A) is a front view of the front unit, (b) is a rear view of the front unit, (c) is a partial cross-sectional view of the first operation unit taken along line CCCXXXIXc-CCCXXXIXc of FIG. It is a rear view of a front side unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit along the line CCCXLVIb-CCCCLVlb in FIG. 344 (a) is there. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. It is a front view of a 1st operation unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) And (b) is a front view of a 1st operation | movement unit. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the pinned gear and the same phase member, (b) is a front perspective view of the pinned gear and the same phase member on the left side, and the right side is the pinned gear and the same phase member It is a rear perspective view. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a 2nd displacement member. It is a disassembled back perspective view of a 2nd displacement member. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a back side unit. (A) And (b) is a rear view of a back side unit. It is a rear view of a back side unit. It is sectional drawing of the back side unit in the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line of FIG. 356 (a). It is a schematic diagram which shows the rotation angle of the pin gear gear and the same phase member on the basis of an initial angle. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 2nd operation unit and a back case. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a 2nd operation unit. It is a front disassembled perspective view of a presentation unit. It is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a presentation unit. It is a disassembled front perspective view of the rotary body of a presentation unit. It is a disassembled back perspective view of the rotary body of a presentation unit. It is a rear view of a 1st rotation member. (A) is a front disassembled perspective view of a support part, (b) is a front disassembled perspective view of a 2nd support part. (A) is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a support part, (b) is a back surface disassembled perspective view of a 2nd support part. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-like part. It is a front disassembled perspective view of an upper lid part and a box-like part. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a box-like part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. It is a disassembled front perspective view of a box-like part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a top view of an upper cover part, a box part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism, (b) is a front view of an upper cover part, a box part, an upper layer transmission mechanism, and a lower layer transmission mechanism. (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of Fig.376 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member FIG. 37D is a front view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 376 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 377 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member Fig. 377 (d) is a top view of the first rotating member in the direction of arrow D in Fig. 377 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 378 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member FIG. 3D is a front view of the first rotating member in a direction of arrow D in FIG. 378 (c). (A) is a front view of a 1st rotation member, (b) is a top view of the 1st rotation member in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 379 (a), (c) is a 1st rotation member FIG. 3D is a front view of the first rotating member in a direction of arrow D in FIG. 379 (c). (A) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 380 (a), (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (D) is a top view of an effect unit in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 380 (c). (A) is a front view of the effect unit, (b) is a top view of the effect unit in the direction of arrow D in FIG. 381 (a), (c) is a front view of the effect unit, (D) is a top view of an effect unit in the arrow D direction view of FIG. 381 (c). It is a front view of a cyclic | annular front cover and a rotary body. It is an upper surface schematic diagram which shows typically the 1st rotation member in 23rd Embodiment. It is a rear view of the front unit in 24th Embodiment. FIG. 345 (a) is a cross-sectional view along the line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339 (a) of the first operation unit according to the twenty-fifth embodiment, and FIG. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit along the line corresponding to FIG. (A) And (b) is a front view of the displacement apparatus in 26th Embodiment. (A) And (b), it is a rear view of the back side unit in 27th Embodiment. It is a rear view of a back side unit. (A) is a figure which showed typically the display area of the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is a display mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example It is a schematic diagram showing an example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a back mode with a low expectation of a probability change state among back modes displayed by the third symbol display device in the first control example, (b), It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the back mode with high expectation of a probability change state among the back modes displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the example of the 1st control. Among the back modes displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, an example of the display mode of the back mode in which the continuation of the positive change state is determined at least until all the holding balls at the start of fluctuation are digested FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the start of the definite variation continuation suggestion production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st example of control. (A) is a figure which showed an example of the display mode of the attack pattern of a low expectation degree in the definite variation continuation suggestion production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st example of control, and (b) is the 1st It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of the attack pattern of high expectation degree in the definite variation continuation suggestion production displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in a control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed typically transition of the state after the probability change big hit end in a 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode under execution of depression stop production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is a 3rd symbol in the 1st control example It is a figure showing an example of a display mode in case a player performs the 1st operation (depression) to PUSH button, during execution of the press stop production displayed on a display. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode under execution of the chance charge turning effect displayed with the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st control example, and (b) is the 3rd in the 1st control example. It is a figure showing an example of a display mode under execution of chance charge production performed after a stop of a chance charge symbol in a symbol display device. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example, and (b) is a third symbol in the first control example It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of gas gauge consumption displayed on a display. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect in execution of the fluctuation display production in which the press stop production in the 1st control example was set. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in execution of the interruption continuous hit production | presentation displayed with the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) It is a figure which showed typically the output mode of the audio | voice while continuous hitting operation with respect to PUSH button is performed during execution of the interruption continuous hitting production in the 1st example of control, and (b) is the 1st control It is the figure which showed typically the correspondence of the execution timing of continuous hitting operation, and the subtraction number of a monster during execution of the interruption continuous hitting production in an example. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation display production in which the interruption continuous hitting production | presentation in the 1st control example was set. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of a reservation batch change production displayed on the 3rd symbol display device in the 1st example of control. (A), (b) is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of a player pressing a PUSH button during execution of a pending collective change effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the first control example. is there. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in the 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in a 1st control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the first control example. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the special symbol big hit random number table in the 1st control example, and (b) shows the prescription contents of the usual hit random number table in the 1st control example typically (C) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the fall lottery table in the 1st example of control. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) is a special-figure 1 jackpot table in the first control example It is the figure which showed the prescription content typically, and (c) is the figure which showed the prescription content of the special figure 2 jackpot table in the 1st control example typically. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example, and (b) configures the variation pattern selection table in the first control example It is the figure which showed the prescription content of the table for common use typically. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the table for probability variation and time saving which constitutes the fluctuation pattern selection table in the 1st example of control. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the 1st example of control. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the first control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the first control example is there. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the back mode lottery table in the 1st example of control. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the pending change lottery table in the 1st control example, (b) showed the prescription contents of the change point calculation table in the 1st control example typically FIG. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the definition content of the batch change lottery table in the first control example, and (b) schematically shows the definition content of the chance charge lottery table in the first control example FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the continuation suggestion production choice table in the 1st example of control. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the interruption continuous hitting lottery table in the 1st example of control. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example. (A)-(c) is an explanatory view explaining the image at the time of the power activation in the example of the 1st control. (A) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface A in a 1st control example, (b) is explanatory drawing explaining the back surface B-D in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the display data table in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the transfer data table in a 1st control example. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the drawing list | wrist in a 1st control example. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the audio | voice output apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process performed by MPU in the main control in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting winning a prize process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetch process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the normal symbol change process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the through gate passage process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit control processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit operation setting process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the abnormality processing performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the starting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation update process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press stop production | presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the interruption continuous hit presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the package change production process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of a control. It is a flowchart which shows the charge consumption process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows stop operation detection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous hit operation detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows change operation detection processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize information command processing performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is a flow chart which shows a reservation notice lottery process performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 1st example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the hit related command processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation | variation display setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st example of a control. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation production setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation suggestion production | presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation mode selection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is a flowchart which shows the boot process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example It is a flowchart which shows V interruption processing. It is a flowchart which shows the command determination processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flowchart which shows stop classification command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the discontinuation command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows the opening command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is a round performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example It is the flowchart which showed several command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ending command processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart which shows a back image change command process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example, (b) is performed by MPU in a display control apparatus in a 1st control example Is a flowchart showing an error command process. It is the flow chart which showed the display setting processing performed by MPU in the display in the 1st example of control. (A) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example Is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. (A) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, and (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example It is a flowchart showing a resident image transfer setting process. It is the flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting processing performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the drawing process performed by MPU in the display control apparatus in a 1st control example. (A) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example, and (b) is a command executed by the MPU in the audio output device in the first control example It is the flowchart which showed the interruption processing. It is the flowchart which showed the command decision processing which is executed by MPU inside the audio output device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the continuous tapping sound command processing performed by MPU in the audio | voice output device in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the interruption command processing which is executed by MPU inside the voice output device in the 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the audio | voice setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice output device in a 1st control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode in the temple search mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd control example, (b) is the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd control example It is a figure showing an example of a display mode at the time of small hitting A in the middle of a temple search displayed. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display mode at the time of the big hit in the odds variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is the third symbol display in the second control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode at the time of the definite variation middle and small hitting A winning which is displayed with the device. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a stray mode predetermined timing (99 rounds after a big hit) effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a second It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the pattern which has been won by falling in the stray mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in a control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in serif mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A), (b) is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in serif mode displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in a 2nd control example. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode of depression effect among variable operation effects displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd control example, and (b) is a 2nd example in the 2nd control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of pushing up production among variable operation production displayed with 3 symbol display devices. It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode of touch production among variable operation production displayed by the 3rd symbol display device in the 2nd example of control. (A) is a figure showing an example of a display mode in a pending change waiting effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the second control example, and (b) is a third symbol display in the second control example It is the figure which showed an example of the display mode in the production | presentation after the pending | holding change waiting displayed with an apparatus. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation production | presentation (special figure prize pattern in 1st period) in a 2nd control example. (A)-(c) is the figure which showed typically the time-dependent change of the production | presentation aspect of the fluctuation production | presentation (special figure winning pattern in 2nd period) in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the transition method of the state in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of the various counters in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the main control device in the second control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a jackpot type selection 2 table set in the ROM of the main control device in the second control example, and (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot for the special control 1 in the second control example It is the figure which showed the prescription content of the table typically, and (c) is the figure which showed the prescription content of 2 tables for special figure 2 jackpots in the 2nd control example typically. (A) is a figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the small hitting random number 2 table in the 2nd control example, (b), the teaching contents of the small hitting classification selection 2 table in the 2nd control example It is the figure shown to (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the time saving end condition selection table in the 2nd control example. (A) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the voice lamp control device in the second control example, and (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device in the second control example is there. (A) is a figure which showed typically the correspondence of each symbol in the 2nd control example, (b) is a serif mode related table set in ROM of the voice lamp control device in the 2nd control example It is the block diagram which showed the structure, (c) is the figure which showed typically the prescription | regulation content of the serif state setting table in the 2nd control example. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the character selection table in the 2nd example of control. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the words selection table in the 2nd example of control. It is the figure which showed typically the prescription contents of the operation production switching table in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start process 2 performed by MPU in the main control in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows out-of-time variation processing performed by MPU in the main control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end process 2 performed by MPU in the main control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the main process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the presentation update process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation presentation process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the 2nd period setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the press detection process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation detection process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable performance management process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the variable operation means management process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows pending reservation lottery processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the execution timing setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flow chart which shows change production setting processing 2 performed by MPU in a voice lamp control device in the 2nd example of control. It is a flowchart which shows the normal presentation setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the serif mode setting process performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back mode lottery process 2 performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. It is a flowchart which shows the back surface mode setting process after the time saving end performed by MPU in the audio | voice lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the attached drawings. First, Figure 1 to Figure 4
Referring to 4, as a first embodiment, the present invention pachinko machine (hereinafter simply "pachinko machine"
An embodiment in the case of being applied to 10) will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a substantially rectangular combination of wooden frames, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. And an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached to upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12.
The inner frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable to the front near side with the side on which is provided as an opening and closing axis.

In the inner frame 12, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63, 64 and the like is detachably mounted from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a ball game. In the inner frame 12, a ball emitting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) for emitting balls to the front area of the game board 13 and a ball for guiding balls emitted from the ball emitting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13 Rails (not shown) and the like are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the upper front side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, a front view (
1) Metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side, and the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be able to open and close to the front near side with the side provided with the hinges 19 as an open / close axis. ing. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling a decorative resin part, an electric part, and the like, and a window portion 14 c having an opening formed in a substantially elliptical shape is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two glass sheets is disposed on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface projecting to the front side, and prize balls, lending balls, etc. are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed to be inclined downward to the right as viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination thereof guides the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 to the ball firing unit 112a (see FIG. 4). Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is, for example, a third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 2).
The game is operated by the player, for example, in the case of changing the stage of the effect displayed in the reference) or changing the content of the effect of the super reach.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emission mode by lighting up or flashing according to the change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit, a predetermined reach time, etc., and play a role of enhancing the rendering effect during the game. At the periphery of the window portion 14c, electrical decoration portions 29 to 3 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs.
Three are provided. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as a big hit lamp, and at the time of big hit or reach production etc., each electric decoration part 29 to 33 is lit by lighting and blinking of the built-in LED. Alternatively, it blinks to notify that it is in the middle of a jackpot, or that it is in reach before the jackpot. Moreover, the front view of the front frame 14 (FIG. 1
Reference) In the upper left part, a light emitting means such as an LED is incorporated and provided with a display lamp 34 capable of displaying the fact that the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs.

A small window 35 is formed on the right side below the electric decoration 32 so that a transparent resin is attached from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be seen, and the bonding space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) is made visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin plated with chromium is attached to the area around the electric decoration parts 29 to 33 in order to create more refreshingness.

Under the window portion 14c, a ball rental operation unit 40 is disposed. The rental ball operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball rental button 42, and a return button 43. Pachinko machine 1
When the rental ball operation unit 40 is operated in a state where bills or cards are inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of 0, lending of a ball is made according to the operation. To be done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which the remaining amount information of a card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the remaining amount is displayed as a number as remaining amount information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded in the card etc. (recording medium), and the lending ball supplies the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present in the card etc. Be done. Return button 4
3 is operated when it is requested to return a card or the like inserted in the card unit. In the case of a pachinko machine in which a ball is lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without passing through a card unit, a so-called cash machine does not require the ball operating unit 40. In this case, the ball operating unit 40 is used. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation part of to make the part configuration common. A pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine can be shared.

In the lower tray unit 15 located below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that can not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface on the left side thereof There is. Lower plate 5
On the right side of 0, an operating handle 51 and an operating device 300 operated by the player to drive a ball into the front of the game board 13 are disposed. The operation device 300 will be described later.

Inside the operation handle 51, a touch sensor 51a for permitting driving of the ball firing unit 112a, and a firing stop switch 51 for stopping firing of the ball during a pressing operation.
b and a variable resistor (not shown) for detecting the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the operation handle 51 based on a change in electric resistance. When the operation handle 51 is turned clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on, and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of the turning operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the (shooting strength), whereby the ball is struck to the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, in a state where the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the emission stop switch 51b are off.

At the front lower portion of the lower plate 50, a ball removing lever 52 for operating when discharging the balls stored in the lower plate 50 downward is provided. The ball release lever 52 is always urged in the right direction, and by sliding it in the left direction against the urging, the bottom surface opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. A ball falls naturally from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball release lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "seven box") for receiving the ball discharged from the lower plate 50 below the lower plate 50. The operating handle 51 is disposed on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in a front view,
Other than a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding a ball and a windmill (not shown), the rails 61 and 62, the general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 330, and the through Gate 67,
The variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).
Mounted on the back side of the The base plate 60 is made of a light transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side. General winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 640, variable display unit 8
0 is disposed in the through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The front center portion of the game board 13 has an inner frame 12 through a window 14 c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
Can be viewed from the front side of the Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front of the game board 13
An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is planted at the inner position of the outer rail 62. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and back are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is a front area of the game board 13 and is divided by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a prize opening and the like are provided,
The area where the fired ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball fired from the ball launch unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the top of the game board 13. The end portion of the inner rail 61 (FIG. 2
The ball holder 68 is attached to the upper left portion of the) to prevent the ball guided to the top of the game board 13 from being returned to the ball guide passage again. At the end of the outer rail 62 (the upper right part in FIG. 2), the rubber return 69 is attached to a position corresponding to the largest flying portion of the ball, and the ball fired with a predetermined momentum strikes the rubber return 69 Is bounced toward the central part while being attenuated.

First symbol display devices 37A and 37B provided with a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are disposed on the lower left side of the game area (the lower left side in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B perform display according to each control performed by the main control unit 110 (see FIG. 4), and display of the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly performed. In the present embodiment, in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second
It is configured to be used properly depending on whether or not the winning opening 640 is won. In particular,
When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A is activated, while,
When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a steady change, a time-short or a normal, by means of LEDs, or indicate whether it is in fluctuation by means of an on-light condition. The stop symbol indicates whether the symbol corresponds to the probability variation big hit or the symbol corresponding to the normal big hit or not by the lighted state, or indicates the number of holding balls by the lighted state, and by the 7-segment display device, the round of the big hit Display numbers and errors. Note that multiple L
The ED is configured such that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can indicate various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed in response to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 having a winning. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not the jackpot is successful (jump lottery), and when it is determined that the jackpot is made, the jackpot type is also determined. As jackpot types determined here, 15R probability variation jackpots, 4R probability variation jackpots, and 15R regular jackpots are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B
Not only is it shown whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation,
If it is a jackpot, a symbol according to the jackpot type is shown.

Here, "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot where the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after 15 round jackpots, and "4R probability variation jackpot" is a maximum number of round jackpots with 4 rounds It is a probability change jackpot to shift to a high probability state after. In addition, “15R normal jackpot” is the maximum number of rounds after 15 rounds of jackpot,
While transitioning to the low probability state, for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuation numbers) is a jackpot that becomes a short time state.

Also, "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as added value after the end of the jackpot, so-called probability fluctuation (during a definite change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special gaming state The state of The high probability state (during a definite change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 by increasing the hitting probability of the second symbol described later. The term "low probability state" refers to a time when the probability of change is not positive, and a state where the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that of probability change. Moreover, with the time saving state (time saving) of the "low probability state", the jackpot probability is a normal state, and only the jackpot probability of the second symbol is increased with the jackpot probability unchanged, and the second winning opening 640 To say the state of the game where the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, the state of the game which is neither definite nor
It is a state where neither the jackpot probability nor the hit probability of the second symbol is up).

During a definite change or during a time cut, not only is the probability of hitting the second symbol up, but the second winning opening 64
The time for which the motorized accessory 640a attached to 0 is opened is also changed, and a longer time is normally set as compared with the middle. When the motorized part 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball reaches the second winning opening 640 compared to when the motorized part 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It becomes easy condition. Therefore, the ball is likely to be won in the second winning opening 640 during a definite change or during a time cut, and it is possible to increase the number of times a jackpot lottery is performed.

In addition, in addition to changing the opening time of the motorized role thing 640a attached to the second winning a prize opening 640 during a definite change or during a short time, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric operation per hit A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 640 a is released more than in the normal mode. In addition, the probability of hitting the second symbol does not change during positive or negative, and the second winning opening 640
At least one of the time during which the motorized accessory 640a attached to and the number of times the motorized accessory 640a is opened per one operation may be changed. In addition, the time during which the electric winning combination 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is open or the number of times the electric combination 640a is opened per hit does not occur during a certain change or during a short time, and the second symbol is hit Only the probability may be changed to be up relative to normal.

In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is disposed in the central portion of the game area. The first symbol display device 37A, 37B is triggered by a winning (start winning) on the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 in the variable display unit 80.
The third symbol display device 81 configured with a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") performing the variable display of the third symbol while being synchronized with the variable display in and the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 as a trigger A second symbol display device (not shown) composed of LEDs for fluctuating display of the second symbol is provided. Further, a center frame 86 is disposed in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is configured of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle and lower 3 One symbol column is displayed. Each symbol row is constituted by a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 by horizontally scrolling these third symbols for each symbol row It is supposed to be. The third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment is the first symbol display device 37A, 37B in which the display of the gaming state accompanied by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is performed, but the first A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. The third symbol display device 81 may be configured using, for example, a reel instead of the display device.

The second symbol display device alternately turns on the symbol “o” and the symbol “x” as display symbols (the second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through gate 67 It is a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. If it is a result of the winning lottery, if it is a hit, the symbol of "o" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is out of alignment, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed after the variation display of the third symbol in the second symbol display device.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, a symbol of "o"), the motorized role 640a attached to the second winning opening 640
Is activated (opened) for a predetermined time.

The time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the probability change or during the time saving than when the gaming state is normal. As a result, since the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the definite change and during the short time, it is possible to perform the winning lottery more frequently than in the middle.
Therefore, since the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, it is possible to give the player a lot of opportunities for the electric winning combination 640 a of the second winning opening 640 to be in the open state. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and during the time saving.

In addition, the second winning opening 640 during the definite change or time reduction by other methods, such as increasing the open probability and increasing the opening time and opening number of the motorized combination 640a per hit, which increases the hit probability during definite change or time reduction. When the ball is in a state in which it is easy to win, the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time taken for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter during the definite change or during the short time than during the normal time, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the gaming state, and a single hit The opening time and the number of times of opening of the motorized role product 640a with respect to may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right areas of the variable display unit 80, and is configured to allow passage of a part of the ball fired to the game board 13. When the ball passes through gate 67, a lottery for winning the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a hit, the symbol of "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and the result of the winning lottery is out For example, the symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball passes through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of balls held is indicated by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol hold lamp (not shown) Is also displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81.

In addition, as in the present embodiment, the second symbol display device performs the variable display of the second symbol by switching on and off the plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device, as well as the first symbol display device 37A,
37B and a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second
The lighting of the symbol holding lamp may be performed by part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of holding balls for the passage of the ball of the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, through gate 67
The number of assembly is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right of the variable display unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display unit 80. Also, the first symbol display device 37A
, 37B indicate the number of holding balls, so the second symbol holding lamp may not perform the lighting display.

Below the variable display unit 80, there is disposed a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can be won. When the ball is won in the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A lottery for a big hit is made at (see FIG. 4), and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first winning opening 64 in a front view, a second winning opening 640 in which a ball can win is disposed. When a ball is won in the second winning opening 640, a second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control unit 110 is turned on due to the second winning opening switch being turned on. A lottery for a big hit is made (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is the first
It is shown by the symbol display device 37B.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as winning balls when the balls win. In the present embodiment,
Although the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball has won the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the second winning opening 640 has the ball are configured the same, the first winning hole 64 to the ball The number of winning balls to be paid out when the player wins a prize and the number of winning balls to be paid out when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, for example, a prize to be paid out when the ball wins to the first winning opening 64 The number of balls may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball has won the second winning opening 640 may be five.

The second winning opening 640 is accompanied by a motorized role 640 a. The electric role object 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally, the electric role object 640a is in a closed state (shrinkage state), and it is difficult for the ball to win the second prize opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol of "o" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the fluctuation display of the second symbol performed triggered by the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged State), the ball is the second winning opening 6
It becomes easy to win to 40.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second pattern is higher than that during normal change during and after a certain period of time,
In addition, since the time taken to change the second symbol is also short, in the second symbol's variable display, "○"
The symbol of the symbol becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

Therefore, during the normal operation, there are many cases in which the motorized prize associated with the second winning opening 640 is in the closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640, and therefore, it is directed to the first prize opening 64 without the electric jack. Fire the ball so that the ball passes the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called
), It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a jackpot by obtaining many opportunities for a jackpot lottery by winning in the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
As the motorized role piece 640a attached to 0 is in an open state and is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize at the second prize opening 640, the ball passes the right of the variable display 80 toward the second prize opening 640 Shoot a ball at the same time (so-called "right-handed"), pass through gate 67 to open the motorized part, and aim to become a 15R positive variation jackpot by winning the second prize opening 640 , It is advantageous for the player.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board 13 is left-right symmetric, so aiming at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" may also aim at the second winning opening 640 by "left-handed". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (permanent change, in time, during normal, during normal). It can be unnecessary to change "right-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the troublesomeness which changes how to hit a ball can be eliminated.

A variable winning device 330 (see FIG. 11) is disposed below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed, the stop symbol of the big hit and The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the occurrence of the jackpot is indicated. Thereafter, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) in which the ball is easy to win. As this special game state,
The specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have elapsed or 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning hole 65a is closed when a predetermined time passes, and after the closing, the specific winning hole 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning hole 65a can be repeated, for example, 15 times (15 rounds) at the maximum. The state in which the opening and closing operation is being performed is a form of special gaming state advantageous to the player, and the player is paid out a larger amount of prize balls than usual as the provision of the gaming value (game value). Is done.

In addition, the special gaming state is not limited to the above-mentioned form. A large opening is provided in the game area, which is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time The game state that the large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined period of time for a predetermined number of times during the opening of the specific winning opening 65a, triggered by the ball winning into the specific winning opening 65a It may be formed as a state. In addition, the specific winning a prize opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or more (for example, three) may be disposed, and the disposition position is also the lower right side of the first winning a prize opening 64 or the first Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display unit 80 may be used.

In the lower right corner of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label or the like is provided, and a test piece stamped on the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be viewed through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball flowing down the game area, which has not won any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640, is guided to the ball discharging path (not shown) through the out port 71. The out-ports 71 are arranged in pairs on the left and right of the specific winning hole 65a.

A large number of nails are implanted in the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (features) such as a windmill are disposed.

As shown in FIG. 3, control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is integrated with a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control apparatus 113), and a display control board (display control apparatus 114). In the control board unit 91, a delivery control board (delivery control device 111), a emission control board (firing control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116 are mounted and unitized.

In the back pack unit 94, a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used as an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port to communicate with various devices, a random number generator used in various lottery, time counting and synchronization etc. Clock pulse generation circuits etc. are mounted as needed.

The main control unit 110, the audio lamp control unit 113 and the display control unit 114, the payout control unit 111 and the emission control unit 112, the power supply unit 115, and the card unit connection board 116.
Are housed in the substrate boxes 100 to 104, respectively. Substrate box 100 to 10
4 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate the control devices and the substrates.

In addition, the substrate box 100 (main controller 110) and the substrate box 102 (dispensing controller 111 and firing controller 112) connect the box base and the box cover unsealably (sealing structure) by a sealing unit (not shown) Consolidated). Further, a seal seal (not shown) is pasted over the box base and the box cover at the connection portion between the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and is intended to peel off the sealing seal to open the substrate box 100, 102,
When the substrate box 100 or 102 is forcibly opened, it is cut into the box base side and the box cover side. Therefore, by confirming the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it can be known whether or not the substrate box 100, 102 has been opened.

Dispensing unit 93 is located at the top of back pack unit 94 and opens upward, tank 130, tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and downstream of tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side, and a dispensing device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 for dispensing balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) ing. The balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are successively replenished to the tank 130, and the required number of balls are paid out by the payout device 133 as appropriate. The tank rail 131 is attached with a vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131.

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with the state recovery switch 120, and
2 is provided with a control knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a dispensing error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) portion, for example. The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the launch force of the launch solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on in order to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. There is a RAM 203
Besides, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 causes the jackpot lottery and the first symbol display device 3 to
The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 is executed such as setting of display in 7A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81 and drawing of display result in the second symbol display device.

Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

The RAM 203 is a stack area in which various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc. are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, etc. Working area where values are stored (
Work area). Note that the RAM 203 is supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off and holds data (backup).
The configuration is such that all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up.

When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by a main process (not shown), and restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in a start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When it is input, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205
Drive open / close to the front side centering on the lower side of the opening / closing plate of payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, first symbol display devices 37A, 37B, second symbol display device, second symbol hold lamp, specified winning opening 65a A solenoid 209 composed of a large opening solenoid for driving the motor or a solenoid for driving the motorized part is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

The input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown) and a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotational position detection sensor R, and the power supply 1.
The RAM 201 is connected to a RAM erase switch circuit 253, which will be described later, and the MPU 201 receives signals output from the various switches 208 and R output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.
Various processing is executed based on the AM cancellation signal SG2.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

Similar to the RAM 203 of the main control unit 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control unit 111 is M.
A stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the PU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and a work area (work area) in which values such as various flags and counters and I / O are stored. have. RAM 213 is a pachinko machine 10
Even after the power is turned off, the backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 also receives a power failure signal SG from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
1 is configured to be input, and when the power failure signal SG1 is input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. In addition, the prize ball detection switch is a payout control device 1
11, but not to the main control unit 110.

The firing control device 112 is configured such that when the main control device 110 instructs firing of the ball, the ball firing unit 112 is configured to have the ball launching strength according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51.
It controls a. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the firing stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off.
Under the condition that it is not operated, the firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotational operation (rotational position) of the operation handle 51, and the ball is emitted with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound in a sound output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34) Display control device 114 such as display and notice effect
It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed in the above. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. Input / output port 22
The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the other unit 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the unit 5, respectively. Other device 2
28 includes a drive motor 342 and a voice coil motor 352.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors an input from the frame button 22 and, when the frame button 22 is operated by the player,
It instructs the display control device 114 to change the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81 or to change the contents of the effect at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. The voice lamp control device 113
Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81, the voice corresponding to the display content is output from the voice output device 226, and is made to correspond to the display content. It controls lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227.

The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol display device 81.
It controls the display of the fluctuation effect of the third symbol in. In addition, the display control device 11
4 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice from the voice output device 226 in accordance with the display content indicated by the display command, whereby the third symbol display device 8 is produced.
1 and the audio output from the audio output device 226 can be combined.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power supply interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch 122 (FIG. 3).
And the RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 is an AC 2 supplied from the outside.
Take in a voltage of 4 volts and use various switches such as various switches 208 and
Generate a voltage of 12 volts for driving solenoids such as 9 motors, a motor, etc., a voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. Necessary voltages are supplied to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 generates the MPU of the main control unit 110 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.
The circuit 201 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and the power failure occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts.
The power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111, judging that the power is turned off and the power is shut off. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111
The interrupt process (not shown) can be successfully executed and completed.

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

FIG. 5 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 5, the operation device 3
00 is arranged at the lateral center of the inner frame 12 in a front view (that is, the lateral center of the pachinko machine 10).

The operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 configured to be capable of tilting operation by being pushed into a player, and in a region constituted by a housing recess 17a recessed in the front-rear direction along the outer frame of the upper plate 17. It is arranged. When the player operates the tilting device 310 to tilt (rotate), a signal is input to the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1).

There is a gap between the tilting device 310 and the housing recess 17a so that at least a finger of the hand can enter without difficulty. As a result, the player can prepare to operate the tilting device 310 in a mode in which the fingertip is disposed on the back side of the upper surface of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 7).

Since the player holds the operation handle 51 with the right hand, the operation of the tilting device 310 is often performed with the left hand. Therefore, in the following description, the explanation will be made on the premise that the player operates the tilting device 310 with the left hand.

Fig.6 (a) is a partial front view of the pachinko machine 10, FIG.6 (b) is VI of FIG. 6 (a).
7 is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line b-VIb, and FIG.
It is a partial front view of 0, and Drawing 7 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of pachinko machine 10 in the VIIb-VIIb line of Drawing 7 (a).

In FIGS. 6 and 7, the vicinity of the operation device 300 of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated. Note that FIG. 6 shows that the tilting device 310 is disposed in the first state (initial state in the present embodiment) in which the operation surface 312a1 is directed vertically, and FIG. 7 shows the tilting device 310 from the first state. The state in which the operation surface 312a1 is disposed in the second state facing upward and backward by being raised around the shaft portion 314 is illustrated. Note that, in FIG. 7, an example of a player's hand operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The tilting device 310 is configured to be automatically operable by the driving force of the driving device 340 between the first state and the second state. The details of the drive device 340 will be described later.

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. The operation of the tilting device 310 is, for example, a specific display on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) (for example, a display of “press button”
When the player appears.

Here, for example, when pushing the operation of the tilting device 310 by a method of vigorously dropping the hand downward as in the case of pushing the button moving forward and backward, the position of the operation surface 312a1 is shifted to the near side depending on the degree of tilting. In this mode, the face of the hand and the operation surface 312a1 are easily rubbed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a sense of discomfort, and it is possible to suppress the player from performing the pressing operation by a method of vigorously dropping his hand downward.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 7, the fingertip is placed near the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310, and the palm is lowered downward with the fingertip as a fulcrum, keeping the palm integrated with the operation surface 312a1. The tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation by the method of lowering the palm downward with the fingertip as the fulcrum so that the hand is not vigorously dropped downward. Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

The difference in the appearance of the tilting device 310 from the player's point of view will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow VIII direction view of FIG. 6, and FIG. 9 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300 in the arrow IX direction view of FIG. In FIGS. 8 and 9, the shape of the pachinko machine 10 is partially illustrated by an imaginary line. Also, in FIG. 9, an example of a player's hand for pressing the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the operation surface 312a1 of the tilting device 310 is visible in the first state from the player's viewpoint, while the area is reduced to the extent of being invisible in the second state. (The operation surface 312a1 is directed to the outside of the player's viewpoint). By this, the first
The appearance of the tilting device 310 can be largely changed between the state and the second state.

In the present embodiment, in the process of changing from the first state to the second state, the protective lens member 31 is
The light amount of the LED device 341f (see FIG. 12) disposed inside the operation device 300 is gradually recognized as it is configured in such a manner that the area 1i becomes gradually larger.
The difference (the degree of light and dark) of the amount of light visible to the player between the first state and the second state is large, and the appearance of the tilting device 310 can be largely changed between the first state and the second state. .

An example of the operation of the tilting device 310 will be described. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG.
By placing the outer side of the little finger near the shaft 314 (see FIG. 7) of the tilting device 310 and lowering the palm downward with the outer side portion of the little finger as a fulcrum (by rotating the wrist about the axis) While the palm of the hand is integrated with the operation surface 312a1, the tilting device 310 can be pressed and operated comfortably.

Therefore, the player can be guided to perform the operation in a method of lowering the palm downward with the outer side surface portion of the little finger as a fulcrum so as not to force the hand to drop the hand downward.
Thus, the degree of impact applied to the tilting device 310 by the operation of the player can be reduced, and the possibility of damage to the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

Next, the operation device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. Figure 10
FIG. 11 is a front perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 11 is a rear perspective view of the operation device 300. As shown in FIG. 10, the operation device 300 is rotatably supported around a shaft 314 on which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rear end.

Further, as shown in FIG. 11, a voice coil motor 352 that applies an impact in the straight direction to the tilting device 310 and a detection sensor 324L, 32 that detects a pressing operation from the first state.
4R is disposed outside the lower frame member 320 which encloses the tilting device 310 from the lower side.

As described above, by disposing a sensor for detecting the position of the tilting device 310, a voice coil motor for giving a driving force, and the like on the outer side of the lower frame member 320, a large area inside the lower frame member 320 is used. The device 310 can be housed in the lower frame member 320. By this,
A large movable amount of the tilting device 310 can be secured.

FIG. 12 is a front exploded perspective view of the operation device 300, and FIG. 13 is an operation device 30.
FIG. 10 is a rear exploded perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the operation device 300 includes a tilting device 310 including ring members BR1 disposed respectively at the left and right ends at the rear end (the rear end in FIG. 12) and the tilt device 310 A lower frame member 320 having a lower bearing portion 323 for supporting the ring member BR1 of the device 310 from the lower side and defining a pressing end of the tilting device 310, and a ring member BR1 for the tilting device 310 from the upper side A member having a concave portion disposed facing to the main frame and having a large opening at the central portion, and is fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 320 in such a manner as to arrange the tilting member 310 with the lower frame member 320 Together with the tilting device 3
The driving force is applied to the tilting device 310 via the upper frame member 330 which determines the disposition in the second state 10 and the arm member 345 which is fastened and fixed to the lower side of the lower frame member 320 and which constitutes the tilting device 310 and the link mechanism. A driving device 340 for transmitting, and a protective cover device 3 which is fastened and fixed to the driving device 340 and which protects the driving device 340 from three sides in the lateral direction and the rear direction.
And 50 are mainly provided.

The lower frame member 320 is a cup-shaped member configured such that the left and right portions of the bottom surface are inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate portion 321 is inclined downward toward the front side, and the bottom plate 321 Horizontal part 3 composed of a plate-like member arranged horizontally at the upper end on the back side of the
22 and a semi-circular receiving portion opened upward in the vicinity of the rear end portion of the horizontal portion 322, and a lower bearing portion 323 receiving the shaft portion 314 of the tilting device 310 from the lower side; The left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R which are disposed as a left and right pair on the side
And an opening 325 which is an opening formed by scraping a portion disposed below the horizontal portion 322 at the center position of the bottom plate 321 in the left-right direction.

The bottom plate portion 321 determines the movement end of the tilting device 310 by coming into contact with the tilting device 310 and has a plurality of openings, through which the portion of the tilting device 310 is the bottom plate 3
It is configured to be able to pass 21.

The bottom plate portion 321 includes a transmission hole 321a drilled at the front side central portion, a detection hole 321b drilled along the detection grooves of the left and right detection sensors 324L and 324R, and an opening 325
And an insertion hole 321c which is drilled symmetrically on the left and right sides.

The transmission hole 321a is disposed at a front position of the voice coil motor 352 of the protective cover device 350, and is formed to have a size through which the projecting convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 can pass. By driving the voice coil motor 352 in a state in which the protruding convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 protrudes to the lower side of the bottom plate portion 321, driving force in the linear movement direction can be given to the tilting device 310.

The detection hole 321 b is a detection piece 311 gL, 311 which is provided so as to protrude from the lower surface of the tilting device 310.
It is a through hole configured to allow insertion of gR. Detection piece 31 protruding from the detection hole 321b
The 1 gL and 311 gR are arranged in the detection grooves of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, so that the posture of the tilting device 310 can be detected.

The insertion hole 321c has a size capable of inserting the shaft portion 311c disposed on the flange of the tilting device 310 and the arm member 345 of the driving device 340, and the arm member when the driving device 340 is operated. The through holes are formed to a position where interference with 345 can be avoided.

The horizontal portion 322 forms a flat surface for fastening and fixing the lower frame member 320 and the drive device 340, and is configured to extend upward from the upper surface and to have a U-shaped cross section having an open portion on the near side. The locking portion 322a is provided.

The locking portion 322a is a portion that locks one end of the torsion spring 315 of the tilting device 310 so as not to move backward. When the locking portion 322a locks the torsion spring 315, the biasing force of the torsion spring 322a acts to move the tilting device 310 to the second state.

The detection sensors 324L and 324R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the position of the tilting device 310. The detection sensors 324 </ b> L and 324 </ b> R are the bottom plate 32 of the lower frame member 320.
It arrange | positions in the position where the separation distance (position of a detection groove) from 1 becomes equal in the right and left.

A photocoupler type sensor includes a light emitting unit for emitting light and a light receiving unit for receiving light from the light emitting unit, and a gap (slit, detection groove) into which a portion to be detected can be inserted. Means a sensor disposed substantially in a U-shape.

The opening 325 is a through hole for enabling the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340, the rotating claw member 347, and the like to intrude into the lower frame member 320. Therefore, the lateral width is made larger than the lateral width of the pair of rotary claw members 347.

On the other hand, with regard to the vertical width, since the drive device 340 is configured to project the LED device 341f in the upper front side (see FIG. 17B), the LED device 341f has the opening 325
By pushing the drive device 340 upward after passing through the
f can be disposed above the opening 325, and the LED device 341f
The upper and lower widths of the opening 325 can be shortened as compared with the upper and lower widths including seven.

The upper frame member 330 is opposed to the opening 331 which is an opening having a size to which the extension portion 311 h extended from the lower end surface of the tilting device 310 to the front side is caught, and the lower receiving portion 323 of the lower frame member 320 And an upper bearing portion 332 configured of a semicircular shape whose lower side is opened and supporting the ring member BR1 of the tilting device 310.

The protective cover device 350 is configured to be vertically dividable so as to be covered in three directions excluding the front side, and has a main body cover 351 fastened and fixed to the lower end portion of the drive device 340 and its main body cover 351. A voice coil motor 352 supported by a bottom plate and disposed on the front side and having a vibrating surface directed obliquely upward in the front direction, a left side detection sensor 353L which is a detection sensor having a detection groove above the bottom plate of a body cover 351, And a detection sensor 353R.

Note that FIG. 12 illustrates a state in which the main body cover 351 is partially broken in order to make the right side detection sensor 353R disposed on the opposite side of the left side detection sensor 353L with respect to the left and right center visible.

The voice coil motor 352 has a vibrating surface in the lower frame member 3 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
It is disposed in a posture substantially parallel to the bottom plate portion 321 of FIG. Thus, the driving force can be efficiently transmitted to the tilting device 310 by driving the voice coil motor 352 when the tilting device 310 protrudes the overhanging convex portion 311j downward through the transmission hole 321a.

The detection sensors 353L and 353R are photocoupler type sensors that detect the phases of the disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340. Disc cam 344L, 3 of drive unit 340
44R is arrange | positioned in the aspect arrange | positioned inside the detection groove | channel of detection sensor 353L, 353R.
The detection holes 344eL and 344eR of the disk cams 344L and 344R are detection sensors 353L and 3
It is possible to detect whether or not the disc cams 344L and 344R are disposed in a specific phase by detecting whether or not they are disposed in the detection grooves of 53R.

In the present embodiment, since the left and right disk cams 344L and 344R of the drive device 340 have the detection holes 344eL and 344eR in different phases, the detection sensors 353L and 353 are provided.
There are two specific phases that can be detected by 3R.

Next, the tilting device 310 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. Figure 14 (a
Is a front view of the tilting device 310, FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the tilting device 310 in the arrow XIVb direction view of FIG. 14 (a), and FIG. ) XIVc
-Is a cross-sectional view of the tilting device 310 along line XIVc. FIG. 15 is a front exploded perspective view of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 16 is a rear exploded perspective view of the lid 312 of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 14 to FIG. 16, the tilting device 310 is configured to cover the case main body 311 configured of a box-shaped body having a side fan-shaped opening having upper and lower openings and the upper opening of the case main body 311. A mode in which the lid 312 fastened and fixed to the case main body 311, the spherical lens member 313 fastened and fixed to the front end of the lid 312 and hanging down downward, and the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312 are pinched , The torsion spring 315 wound around the shaft 314, and the case main body 3 at the rear end of the case main body 311 and the lid 312.
11 mainly includes a ring-shaped ring member BR1 that fixes the lid 11 and the lid 312 indivisiblely.

The case body 311 has a bottom plate portion 311a which is inclined downward from the back side to the front side in the first state, an opening 311b opened at the center of the bottom plate portion 311a, and left and right of the opening 311b. A cylindrical shaft 311c extending to the center in the left-right direction from the flange projecting downward along the edge of the frame, and a recess 311d having a semicircular cross section supporting the shaft 314 at its rear end. And an insertion groove 311e which is a groove disposed at a position where both arms 315a of the torsion spring 315 can be inserted, and a hook portion 311f which is formed in a hook shape and which locks the central portion 315b of the torsion spring 315 A left side detection piece 311gL provided on the lower side of the bottom plate portion 311a, a right side detection piece 311gR (see FIG. 15), and a predetermined amount side from a front side end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a A protective lens member 311i which is disposed on the upper side of the front end portion of the bottom plate portion 311a and has a shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 and is formed of a light transmitting material. And an overhanging projecting portion 311j which is provided so as to project downward from the central portion in the left-right direction at the front side end of the bottom plate portion 311a.

The bottom plate portion 311 a is a lower frame member 3 when the tilting device 310 is pushed downward from the player.
20 is a portion that comes in contact with the bottom plate portion 321 of FIG.

The opening 311 b is configured as an opening through which the LED device 341 f of the drive device 340 and the arm member 345 of the drive device 340 can be inserted.

The shaft portion 311 c is a guide hole 3 of the arm member 345 (see FIG. 17 (b)) of the drive device 340.
The cylindrical member 45b is inserted into the cylindrical portion 45b and serves as a portion for transmitting the driving force to the driving device 340.

The left detection piece 311gL and the right detection piece 311gR are portions that are inserted into the detection grooves of the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection sensor 324R (see FIG. 15) of the lower frame member 320, respectively. Is longer than the right detection piece 311gR.

In the present embodiment, an angle from the tip of the right detection piece 311gR to the tip of the left detection piece 311gL about the axial portion 314 is about 3 ° (see FIG. 22) and the pressing end (see FIG. 22) The left detection piece 311gL is extended as compared to the right detection piece 311gR so that the rotation angle of the tilting device 310 is the rotation angle of the tilting device 310).

The extending portion 311h is a portion that protrudes from the lower end portion of the protective lens member 311i to the front side and protrudes to a position where it is locked to the opening 331 of the upper frame member 330 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10). Configured in an aspect.

The protective lens member 311i is configured in a curved shape in top view (FIG. 14 (a)
(See FIG. 14 (c)), so that the load when the player pushes the tilting device 310 can be easily released (easy to flow).
Thereby, the durability of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The overhanging convex portion 311j is provided to project at a right angle from the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 311a, and has a cross-sectional shape smaller than the transmission hole 321a of the lower frame member 320.
In the state (see FIG. 29) in which the push-in operation is performed, the distal end is extended downward of the lower frame member 320 through the transmission hole 321a.

As shown in FIG. 16, the lid 312 includes a top plate member 312a having an operation surface 312a1, an intermediate plate member 312b fastened and fixed to the lower surface of the top plate member 312a, and an intermediate plate member 31 thereof.
The LED device 34 is fixed in the first state (see FIG. 6) while fixing 2b to the top plate member 312a.
And a cylindrical member 312c having a cylindrical shape with a size surrounding 1f.

In the first state (see FIG. 6), the cylindrical member 312c is a cylinder whose light is emitted from the LED device 341f to the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 6) while improving the strength of the lid 312 by axial rigidity. In the second state (see FIG. 7), while being held inside the member 312c, such limitation is released so that the light from the LED device 341f can be emitted widely.

The lens member 313 is formed of a light transmitting material, and has upper and lower end portions extending forward in the form of a flange, and the extending end portions are configured to match the curved shape of the protective lens member 311i. , And a spherical shell portion 313a formed in a spherical shell shape at the central portion.

The torsion spring 315 is wound around the shaft portion 314 by a pair of left and right torsion parts, and is provided with both arm parts 315a extending rearward from the left and right outer ends of the torsion parts and a central part 315b connecting the pair of torsion parts. And.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 will be described. 17 (a) is a front view of the drive device 340, FIG. 17 (b) is a side view of the drive device 340 in the direction of arrow XVIIb in FIG. 17 (a), and FIG. It is a front exploded perspective view of FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the drive device 340 is a main body member 341 that constitutes a framework by bending a plate-like sheet metal member, and a drive motor that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 341 and generates a driving force. 342, a transmission shaft 343 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor 342, and a pair of disc cams 344 (not rotatably fixed to both ends of the transmission shaft 343)
Left disc cam 344L, right disc cam 344R), and connecting pin 344d of the disc cam 344
And a release member 346 rotatably supported by the first overhang portion 344c1 and the second overhang portion 344c3 of the disk cam 344 while being pivotally supported by the shaft portion 341c of the main body member 341. And a rotation claw member 347 coaxially supported by the release member 346 and operating relative to the release member 346 as the release member 346 rotates, and a coil spring that generates a biasing force directed in a direction to lower the rotation claw member 347 First spring SP1, which is a spring member of the
A second spring SP2 which is a torsion spring-like spring member that generates a biasing force in a direction to cause the two to move away from each other between the second and third rotating claw members 347 is mainly provided.

The main body member 341 is bent rearward to the left and right, and is formed in a U-shape in a top view as viewed from above.
A shaft support hole 341b which is drilled at the same position of the oppositely arranged plate portion of the motor housing portion 341a and supports the disk cam 344 and an axis parallel to the shaft of the shaft support hole 341b A shaft portion 341c which is convexly provided in the left-right direction at a position deviated to the front side from the shaft support hole 341b in an aspect which has, an extending portion 341d which is extended from the motor housing portion 341a below the shaft portion 341c, A lighting support portion 341 extending forward and upward from the housing portion 341a
and e, an LED device 341f disposed at an upper end portion of the illumination support portion 341e and in which an LED light source is disposed.

The LED device 341f is a triangular member on the upper surface thereof and is a portion that refracts light (
A portion for refracting light). As a result, the light of the LED device 341f can be uniformly emitted upward and downward.

The drive motor 342 is a motor housing portion 34 inside the U-shape of the motor housing portion 341 a.
It has a fixing member 342a fastened and fixed to 1a.

The fixing member 342a supports the rotary gear of the drive motor 342, and supports the transmission shaft 343 in such a manner that the transmission gear 343b meshes with the rotary gear.

The arm member 345 is drilled in one end portion in a perfect circle shape and is bored in a rectangular shape at the other end portion, and a pivot hole 345a axially supported by the connection pin 344d of the disk cam 344 And a guide hole 345b through which the shaft portion 311c (see FIG. 15) of the tilting device 310 is inserted.

The guide hole 345b is formed at a position where the opposite end of the shaft support hole 345a abuts on the shaft portion 311c in the first state of the tilting device 310, and the opposite end is at least one rotation of the disk cam 344 It is formed in a position sufficient to be rotatable.

The transmission shaft 343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a front exploded perspective view of the transmission shaft 343. As shown in FIG. The transmission shaft rod 343 has a cylindrical member 343a to which the disk cam 344 (see FIG. 18) is fixed at both ends, and a driving motor 342 which is pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
Of the transmission gear 343b meshing with the rotary gear of the second embodiment, and a movable clutch 343c which can switch whether or not the driving force is transmitted between the transmission gear 343b and the cylindrical member 343a by axial movement, and the movable clutch 343c And a coil spring 343 d for pressing the transmission gear 343 b.

The cylindrical member 343a has a fixing portion 3 having a D-shaped cross section for fixing the disk cam 344 at both ends thereof.
43a1 and 433a2, and the fixing portion 343a2 on the right side is formed longer in the center side than the fixing portion 343a1 on the left side. Here, the fixed portion 343a2 is, in detail, the movable clutch 3
When 43c moves against the biasing force of the coil spring 343d, it is formed to have a length that can move to a position not interfering with the transmission gear 343b.

The transmission gear 343b has a perfect circular insertion hole 343b1 through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
And a clutch portion 343b2 in which projections and depressions along the axial direction are formed at circumferential positions around the axis from the surface opposed to the movable clutch 343c.

Since the insertion hole 343b1 has a perfect circular shape, the transmission gear 343b can rotate (idle) with respect to the cylindrical member 343a even when the cylindrical member 343a is fixed.

The movable clutch 343c has an angle fixing hole 3 with a D-shaped cross section through which the cylindrical member 343a is inserted.
43c1 and a clutch portion 343c2 having concavities and convexities along the axial direction at a circumferential position in the axial center from a surface opposed to the transmission gear 343b, and configured to be engageable with the clutch portion 343b2 .

In the present embodiment, the clutch portions 343b2 and 343c2 have an apex angle of about 100.
It is composed of 凸 -shaped convex and concave parts.

By setting the angle fixing hole 343c1 to be D-shaped in cross section, relative rotation with respect to the cylindrical member 343a of the movable clutch 343c becomes impossible, so the clutch portion 343b of the transmission gear 343b
The driving force transmitted from the drive motor 342 to the transmission gear 343b is engaged with the cylindrical member 34 via the movable clutch 343c by the engagement of the clutch 2 and the clutch portion 343c2 of the movable clutch 343c.
It is transmitted to 3a. Thus, the disc cam 3 is rotated by rotating the drive motor 342.
It becomes possible to rotate 44 (see FIG. 18).

The movable clutch 343c is normally transmitted by the transmission gear 3 by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.
It is arrange | positioned in the position which adjoins 43b, and the engagement relation of the clutch parts 343b2 and 343c2 is maintained. On the other hand, by applying an axial load to the movable clutch 343c, the fixed portion 3 is
43a2 is configured to be movable along a direction away from the transmission gear 343b.

The disk cam 344 will be described with reference to FIG. In the disk cam 344, the left disk cam 344 L and the right disk cam 344 R are roughly shaped like a mirror copy, and the difference is the detection hole 3.
Since only the positions 44eL and 344eR are present, only the left disc cam 344L will be described, and the description of the right disc cam 344R will be omitted.

20 (a) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L in the arrow XXa direction view of FIG. 18, and FIG. 20 (b) is a side view of the left disc cam 344L in the arrow XXb direction of FIG. is there. 20 (a) and 20 (b), as shown in FIG. 18, a state in which the drive device 340 is in the first initial state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (b), the left disk cam 344L is a member having a portion protruding from both sides of a perfectly circular disk, and at the center position of the disk A central shaft portion 344a which is convex in a cylindrical shape in the inward direction, a circular rib 344b which is convex in an inward direction as a ring-shaped rib centering on the central shaft portion 344a, and the outer side of the circular rib 344b It is provided with an inward convexity as a rib whose height is lower than that of the circular rib 344b.
An engagement rib 344c having a radially outward projecting portion at a portion, and a circular rib 344b
Between the arm and the engagement rib 344c, and the arm member 3
It mainly includes a connecting pin 344d connected to 45 (see FIG. 18) and a detection hole 344eL formed in the vicinity of the outer periphery.

The right disc cam 344R is different from the detection hole 344eL only in that the detection hole 344eR is disposed at an angle of 60 ° with the detection hole 344eL, and the other is configured by mirroring the shape of the left disc cam 344L. .

The central shaft portion 344a has a cross section D whose inner periphery engages with both ends of the cylindrical member 343a (see FIG. 19).
It is comprised by the letter shape, and it comprises by the shape by which the outer periphery is internally fitted by the axial support hole 341b (refer FIG. 18). That is, the disk cam 344 is rotatably supported by the shaft support hole 341b.

The circular rib 344b is protruded to a position where it can contact the left and right wall surfaces of the motor housing portion 341a (see FIG. 18) in a state where the disk cam 344 is pivotally supported by the shaft support hole 341b. Thereby, misalignment of the disk cam 344 can be suppressed.

In the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c protrudes radially outward at a position shifted by 80 ° from the position where the detection hole 344eL is disposed in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 20A). An overhanging portion 344c1 and a first lead-in portion 344c2 which retracts radially inward at a position deviated from the first overhanging portion 344c1 by an angle θ1 (in the present embodiment, the angle θ1 = 50 °), and from the first overhanging portion 344c1 At the position shifted by the angle θ2 (in the present embodiment, the angle θ2 = 150 °), the second overhanging portion 344c3 that is projected outward in the radial direction again, and the second overhanging portion 344c
And a second lead-in portion 344c4 which is recessed inward in the radial direction at a position deviated from the angle 3 by an angle θ3 (in the present embodiment, the angle θ3 = 20 °).

In the first initial state of the drive device 340, the connection pin 344d is disposed at a position with the longest distance from the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 22). That is, the connecting pin 344d is disposed on the opposite side of the shaft portion 311e of the tilting device 310 in the first state with respect to the central shaft portion 344a.

The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 will be described with reference to FIG. The release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are disposed in a pair on the left and right, and since their configurations are the same on the left and right, only one will be described.

21 (a) and 21 (b) are front views of the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347. FIG. 21 (a) shows a large angle state in which the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to the end position in the biasing direction of the second spring SP2 with respect to the release member 346, and FIG. 21 (b) shows the release member 346. On the other hand, a small angle state in which the rotation claw member 347 is rotated to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2 is illustrated.

The state in which the release member 346 is rotated by coming into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the convex pin 346b is disposed at the middle position of the guide long hole 347b). State (see FIG. 35).

As shown in FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the release member 346 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has a support hole 346a pivotally supported by a shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18), From an axial support hole 346a, a convex pin 346b convex in the thickness direction and having an arc shape centered on the central axis of the axial support hole 346a, an insertion hole 346c into which an end portion of the second spring SP2 is inserted, and And an engaging portion 346d configured as an overhanging portion with a maximum diameter.

The engagement portion 346d is engaged with the engagement rib 34 of the disk cam 344 in the assembled state (see FIG. 10).
4c (see FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the engaging portion 346
By curving the outer periphery of d, contact with the engagement rib 344 can be performed smoothly.

The rotating claw member 347 is formed of a substantially rectangular plate member, and has an arcuate shape centered on the central support axis of the axial support hole 347a and the axial support hole 347a supported by the shaft portion 341c (see FIG. 18). A guide long hole 347b (in a size including the movement trajectory of the convex pin 346b on the inside) drilled so as to guide the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 along the second spring SP2
Of the first spring (see FIG. 18), and an insertion hole 347c through which the end portion of the first end portion is inserted, a hooked portion 347d which is provided in the form of a hook downwardly projecting at the opposite end of the shaft support hole 347a. And 3) a pull-down hole 347e which is pierceable.

In the present embodiment, the release member 346 is disposed at the end position in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 21A) with respect to the rotating claw member 347 in the large angle state shown in FIG. Therefore, when a load in the pressing direction is applied to the engaging portion 346d in the large angle state, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 integrally rotate in the backward direction while the engaging portion in the large angle state. When a load in the push-up direction is applied to 346 d, only the release member 346 can be rotated to maintain the posture of the rotary claw member 347 until the angle small state shown in FIG. 21B is reached.

Next, an operation example of the operation device will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an operation example in the case where the player performs the pushing operation in the state where the tilting device 310 is disposed in the first state will be described. In the following description of the operation example, the illustration of the lid 312 is simplified to facilitate understanding.

22 to 24 show an operation device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG.
FIG. Note that FIG. 22 shows the tilt device 310 in the first state, and FIG. 23 shows the player pushing the tilt device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG. Then, the state after return operation of the tilting device 310 from the state of FIG. 23 to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 22 to FIG. 24, an example of the hand of the player who operates the tilting device 310 continuously is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 22, the tilting device 310 receives an urging force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) by the torsion spring 315, and the bottom plate portion 311a is a hooked portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347.
It is hooked to Thereby, the attitude of the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state. That is, in the first state, a biasing force in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 22) is constantly applied to the tilting device 310.

In the state shown in FIG. 22, the left detection piece 311gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left detection sensor 324L (ON state), while the right detection piece 311gR is the right detection sensor 32.
It is arranged in front of the 4R detection groove (OFF state, see FIG. 11).

As shown in FIG. 23, when the player performs an operation of pushing the tilting device 310, the tilting device 31 is operated.
0 rotates about 3 ° in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 23). In this state, the left detection piece 3
11gL is inserted into the detection groove of the left side detection sensor 324L (ON state), and similarly, the right side detection piece 311gR is inserted into the detection groove of the right side detection sensor 324R (ON state).

Therefore, it is possible to determine that the tilting device 310 has been pushed into the player from the first state by determining the change in the detection state of the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection sensor 324R.

Here, when continuously operating the tilting device 310, the state shown in FIG. 22 and the state shown in FIG. 23 are alternately repeated, but depending on the time interval in which the player continuously drives, the torsion spring 31 may be used.
Since the return of the tilting device 310 by 5 is not in time, the pushing operation is performed at a halfway position, and the player may feel discomfort.

Conventionally, it has been possible to cope with this by increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315. However, in the present embodiment, when the spring constant of the torsion spring 315 is increased, the tilting device 310 is resisted against the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. It is necessary to increase the driving force of the driving motor 342 (see FIG. 18) to be pushed down, and there is a need to increase the size of the driving motor 342. As a result, there is a problem that the product cost increases and space saving can not be achieved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 capable of producing effects by the vibration operation is disposed at a position facing the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 in a state where the tilting device 310 is pressed. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 24, by driving this voice coil motor 352 in the extension direction from the state shown in FIG. 23, the tilting device 31 can be increased without increasing the spring constant of the torsion spring 315.
A return operation of 0 can be performed quickly.

Here, when the voice coil motor 352 is always driven when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, for example, when the player holds the tilting device 310 for a long time, the voice coil motor 352 is driven. Since an unnecessary load is given, the player may feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state, the number of times the right side detection sensor 324R is switched between the ON state and the OFF state in a predetermined period is calculated. By driving the motor 352, it is possible to improve the load for returning the tilting device 310 only when the player performs the continuous hitting operation. By this,
The player can operate the tilting device 310 comfortably.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25 to FIG. 30, a case (first operation mode) will be described where the tilting device 310 starts an operation (rounding operation) reciprocating back and forth from the first state. 25 to 3
0 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII in FIG.

Note that FIG. 25 illustrates the tilting device 310 in the first state, and FIG.
A state where the disk cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. 25 and the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is changed is illustrated. In FIG. 27, the disk cam 344 is a predetermined amount from the state shown in FIG. The state in which the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is returned by only rotating in the forward rolling direction is illustrated in FIG.
The manner in which the tilting device 310 reciprocates and turns is illustrated. In FIG. 29, the state in which the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state of FIG. 28 is illustrated. The plate cam 344 rotates in the forward direction by a predetermined amount to engage the engagement rib 34.
A state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 of 4c has reached a second initial state in which the second projecting portion 344c3 abuts on the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346 is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 28, the tilting device 3 in the state of FIG.
Ten positions are illustrated in phantom lines, and in FIG. 29, an example of a player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated in phantom lines.

As shown in FIG. 25, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the cylindrical member 31 of the lid 312 is
The upper end portion (prism portion) of the LED device 341f is accommodated inside 2c. Therefore, while the light quantity of the light irradiated to the radial direction of the cylindrical member 312c is suppressed by the thickness of the cylindrical member 312c, the light quantity of the light irradiated to the axial direction can be secured large. As a result, the cylindrical member 312 c can improve the strength as a rib of the lid 312 and can adjust the irradiation intensity of the light of the LED device 341 f in the first state of the tilting device 310.

As shown in FIG. 26, in the state shown in FIG. 25 in which the tilting device 310 is in the first state and the driving device 340 is in the first initial state, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward (FIG. When the first protruding portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344 depresses the engaging portion 346d of the releasing member 346, the releasing member 346 rotates in the backward rolling direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 26). Along with this, the rotation claw member 347 rotates in the backward direction to a position where the engagement with the bottom plate portion 311 a of the tilting device 310 is released.

The posture change of the release member 346 is determined by the first pull-in portion 344c2 of the engagement rib 344c and the engagement portion 34.
Since the disc cam 344 is maintained until it faces the state 6d, the tilting device 310 is lifted by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 (rotated clockwise in FIG. 26).

At this time, in the state shown in FIGS. 25 and 26, the shaft portion 311c of the tilting device 310 is disposed at one end position of the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345 (end position far from the rotation axis of the disk cam 344). Since the upward movement of the tilting device 310 is restricted by the arm member 345, the rising movement of the tilting device 310 is an operation mode corresponding to the rotation angle of the disc cam 344.

As shown in FIG. 27, the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 27),
When the first lead-in portion 344c2 of the disc cam 344 passes the engagement portion 346d of the release member 346, the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated forward by the biasing force of the first spring SP1 (FIG. And the rotation claw member 347 returns to a state where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (the state shown in FIG. 25). At this time, the biasing force of the second spring SP2 acts in a direction to increase the angle between the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 (the upper angle in FIG. 27), so the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 rotates while maintaining the state (large angle state) shown in FIG.

In this state, the lid 312 retracts to the upper side of the LED device 341f, and the tilting device 31 in the case where the area in which the protective lens member 311i can be visually recognized from the player's viewpoint is the first state
Since it increases compared to 0, the light of the LED device 341f is directed in the front direction (the direction toward the player)
It also becomes possible to irradiate. Therefore, when the attitude of the tilting device 310 changes, the LED device 3 is
The traveling direction of the light emitted from 41f can be changed, and the effect of the light can be improved.

In this state, the right side detection sensor 353R of the protective cover device 350 is turned on, and the start point of the up and down reciprocation operation can be detected.

As shown in FIG. 28, the disk cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 28) from the state shown in FIG. 27, and subsequently the disk cam 344 is rotated backward by the same amount Figure 2
28) by repeatedly performing the operation of rotating it clockwise).
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilt device 310 appears to the player, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, the area of the portion projecting above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 repeatedly moving up and down in the range of the angle D1. Therefore, it is possible to change the light amount of the light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light irradiated from the LED device 341f in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 28, the spherical shell portion 313 a of the lens member 313 is an LED device 3.
Since it is disposed on the front side 41f (left side in FIG. 28), the irradiation range of light emitted from the LED device 341f should be expanded not only in the front-rear direction or the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction in FIG. Can.

According to the present embodiment, as described above, when the tilting device 310 is disposed in the first state, the light of the LED device 341 f travels upward, and the irradiation range is narrowed by the cylindrical member 312 c. (See Figure 25). On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 moves upward from the first state, the light of the LED device 341f is also irradiated in the direction (front direction) directed to the player, and the irradiation range is expanded by the lens member 313.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time according to the change of the attitude of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 29, the player can push in the tilting device 310 while the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. In the state of FIG. 28, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction of lowering the tilting device 310 (even if the arm member 345 moves upward, the shaft 311 c Only move the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load occurs).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 28, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 29, in the process from the state shown in FIG. 28 to the push-in end of the tilting device 310, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the collar portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347 to push it forward. The member 347 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29), and the bottom plate portion 311a is formed into a hooked portion 347d by subsequently pressing the tilting device 310.
, The rotary claw member 347 returns to the position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted by the rotating claw member 347 from moving upward.

Therefore, the player tilts the device 31 from the state in which the tilt device 310 shown in FIG. 28 is moved up and down.
After depressing 0, when the player releases the hand, the tilting device 310 can be maintained in the first state.

In the state shown in FIG. 29, the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). As a result, after the tilting device 310 is pushed in and pushed to the end, it is possible to perform an effect of transmitting a vibration to the player who continues to put his hand on the tilting device 310.

That is, the purpose of the voice coil motor 352 is to generate a driving force for assisting the ascent of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 24), and to perform vibration rendition by vibrating the tilting device 310 disposed at the pressing end position. It can be used to

Note that, as shown in FIG. 30, when the player releases the tilting device 310 and the tilting device 310 returns to the first state, the projection convex portion 311j of the tilting device 310 is the lower frame member 320.
And the contact with the voice coil motor 352 is released. Therefore, the vibration effect is effective only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 into the end.

Therefore, compared to a gaming machine in which the operation button is simply vibrated, whether or not the voice coil motor 352 generates vibration at the pressing end when the tilting device 310 is pressed and operated,
Only the player who has pushed in the tilting device 310 can grasp.

Here, whether or not the lottery is a big hit does not depend on the pressing operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, depending on the player, there is a possibility that the tilting device 310 may not be operated at all, in which case the value of the tilting device 310 as the operating means becomes low.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the player can feel the vibration of the voice coil motor 352 for the first time by pushing the tilting device 310.

Here, for example, by controlling the voice coil motor 352 so as to produce vibration when the big hit is determined, the player can improve the sense of expectation when the tilting device 310 is pushed in, and the tilting device 310 Can improve the value as a means of pre-reading.
Thus, the player can easily operate the tilting device 310, and the value of the tilting device 310 as an operation means can be increased.

As shown in FIG. 30, from the state shown in FIG.
The drive device 340 can be brought into the second initial state by rotating the disc cam 344 in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 29) by a predetermined amount until the disc contacts the engaging portion 346d of the release member 346. .

In the second initial state, as in the first initial state, the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 abut in the rotational direction. In the first initial state, the first overhang portion 344c1 abuts on the engagement rib 344c, while in the second initial state, the second overhang portion 344c3 abuts on the engagement rib 344c.

From the state of FIG. 29, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 29) to cause the first projecting portion 344c1 of the engagement rib 344c to pass the engagement portion 346d, and then reverse rotation. The driving device 340 can be returned from the state shown in FIG. 29 to the first initial state shown in FIG. In this case, the load in the direction of pushing up the release member 346 is applied to the release member 346, and only the release member 346 is rotated forward (FIG.
Can be rotated counterclockwise).

Next, referring to FIGS. 31 to 34, when tilting device 310 is moved up and down (turning operation) from the state where tilting device 310 is in the first state and driving device 340 is in the second initial state The second operation mode will be described. In this case, the tilting device 310 starts an operation (rounding operation) reciprocating back and forth through the second state.

31 to 34 show the operation device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 31, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward from the state shown in FIG.
31 shows that the releasing member 346 and the rotating claw member 347 are rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 31), and in FIG.
Shows a state in which the tilt device 310 has reached the second state by rotating by a predetermined amount, and in FIG.
3 shows that the disk cam 344 performs a reciprocating rotation operation from the state shown in FIG.
A state where the player has pushed the tilting device 310 to the end position from the state shown in FIG.
In FIG. 33, the position of the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG.
In FIG. 34, an example of the player's hand for pushing and operating the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 31, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 30, the engagement between the rotary claw member 347 and the tilting device 310 is released, The device 310 operates in the upward direction.

At this time, since the guide hole 345 b of the arm member 345 extends (has a space) in the direction in which the shaft portion 311 c of the tilting device 310 moves, the tilting device 310 has the disc cam 344 via the arm member 345. The tilting device 310 can be moved upward with low resistance, and the tilting device 310 can be changed from the first state to the second state in a short time.

As shown in FIG. 32, the posture of the disk cam 344 is rotated by about 10 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 31 (the state where the engagement between the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 is released). Posture where it is possible to arrange 310 in the second state (from the first initial state, the disk cam 344 is 180 °
It can be in a rotated attitude). Therefore, when the rising speed of the tilting device 310 is large, and the tilting device 310 tries to reach the second state in a short period of time from the state of FIG. It is possible to prevent the cam 344 from rotating slowly by a predetermined angle and taking a long time until the tilting device 310 is brought into the second state.

As shown in FIG. 33, the disc cam 344 is rotated forward by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 32) from the state shown in FIG. 32, and subsequently the disc cam 344 is rotated backward by the same amount Figure 3
By repeatedly performing the operation of rotating it clockwise (clockwise), the angle D2 shown in FIG.
The tilting device 310 can be repeatedly operated up and down within the range of. As a result, it is possible to change how the tilt device 310 appears to the player, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In addition, the area of the portion projecting above the upper frame member 331 of the protective lens member 313 changes in response to the movement of the tilting device 310 repeatedly moving up and down in the range of the angle D2. Therefore, it is possible to change the light amount of the light visible through the protective lens member 313 among the light irradiated from the LED device 341f in accordance with the operation of the tilting device 310. Therefore, the brightness of the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the player's attention to the operation device 300 can be improved.

In the state shown in FIG. 33, the spherical shell portion 313 a of the lens member 313 is an LED device 3.
Since it is disposed on the front side 41f (left side in FIG. 33), the irradiation range of light emitted from the LED device 341f should be expanded not only in the front-rear direction or the vertical direction but also in the horizontal direction (vertical direction in FIG. Can.

That is, according to the present embodiment, it is possible not only to change the irradiation direction of light but also to change the irradiation range of the light at the same time according to the change of the attitude of the tilting device 310. Thereby, the attention degree of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

The range of the angle D2 shown in FIG. 33 is different from the range of the angle D1 shown in FIG. That is, in the present embodiment, the vertical movement shown in FIG. 28 as the vertical movement of the tilting device 310;
Two types of up and down movements (turning movements) with the up and down movement shown in FIG. 33 can be performed immediately after the restriction of the movement of the tilting device 310 in the upward direction by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Therefore, two types of modes can be made to operate the tilting device 310 in the first state by the driving force of the drive motor 342.

As a result, compared with the case where the operation member 310 performs the same operation every time, the operation mode can have a different meaning (for example, the difference in the expectation of the jackpot), and the tilting device 310
The player's attention to the game can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 33, in the state where the tilting device 310 is moving up and down in FIG. 32, the player can push in the tilting device 310. In the state of FIG. 33, the load applied from the arm member 345 to the tilting device 310 is only the load in the direction in which the tilting device 310 is pulled downward (the shaft portion does not move even if the arm member 345 moves upward). 311
c only moves the guide hole 345b of the arm member 345, and no load is generated to lift the shaft 311c from the arm member 345).

Therefore, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310 in the state of FIG. 33, it is possible to prevent the player from being given a load by the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18). At this time, only the load by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is given to the player. Thereby, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, the occurrence of a large load on the player is suppressed, so that the player can operate the operation device 300 comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 34, the bottom plate portion 311a of the tilting device 310 pushes the collar portion 347d of the rotating claw member 347 in the process of bringing the tilting device 310 into a pushing operation, whereby the rotating claw member 347 is rotated backward. When the bottom plate portion 311a passes the hook portion 347d by rotating in the direction (clockwise direction in FIG. 34) and subsequently pushing the tilting device 310. The rotating claw member 347 returns to a position where it can be engaged with the tilting device 310 (rotates in the forward rolling direction). Therefore, the tilting device 310 is restricted by the rotating claw member 347 from moving upward.

Therefore, the player tilts the device 31 from the state in which the device 310 shown in FIG.
When the player releases the hand after pressing 0 (see FIG. 34), the tilting device 310
Can be maintained in the first state.

Then, referring to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, after the player performs the pushing operation, the rotating claw member 3
The operation of setting the disc cam 344 to the second initial state without releasing the restriction of the tilting device 310 by the angle 47 will be described. According to this method, it is possible to alternately perform two types of up and down operations (tiling operations) of the tilting device 310 or to continuously perform one side.

35 to 37 show the operation device 300 in line XXII-XXII of FIG.
FIG. In FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is rotated backward from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the release member 346 is rotated in the forward direction (FIG. 35 counterclockwise) by rotating clockwise is shown. In FIG. 36, the rotating cam 344 is in the backward direction (FIG. 35) more than the state shown in FIG. The state in which the disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35) to a position where the disc cam 344 abuts on the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346 is illustrated. The disc cam 344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the left side detection sensor 353L of 50 is in the ON state is illustrated. In FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, an example of the player's hand swinging from above to the tilting device 310 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 35, when the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 34) from the state shown in FIG. 34, the second lead-in portion 344c4 of the engagement rib 344c is the engagement portion of the release member 346. Contact with 346 d. In this case, although the posture of the release member 346 changes as the engagement rib 344c pushes up the release member 346, the convex pin 346b of the release member 346 moves in the space portion of the guide long hole 347b of the rotating claw member 347. Staying, the rotating claw member 347 is shown in FIG.
The posture shown in 5 is maintained.

That is, in the process of further rotating the disc cam 344 in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35) from the state shown in FIG. 35 and releasing the engagement between the engagement rib 344c and the release member 346 Regulation of the elevation of the tilting device 310 can be maintained.

In the state shown in FIG. 35, the disc cam 344 is further rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 35), and then the rotary cam 344 is rotated in the forward direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 35). The drive 340 can be in a second initial state, as shown in FIG.

In the present embodiment, since there is no sensor for detecting the second initial state, it is difficult to accurately stop the disc cam 344 in the state shown in FIG. 36. However, the second initial state shown in FIG. It is possible. Therefore, as described above, by operating the disk cam 344 from the state shown in FIG. 36, it is possible to perform the up and down movement (rotational movement) from the second initial state in the range of the angle D2.

Here, the player pushing in the tilting device 310 may perform an operation of leaving the hand on the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation, even if a special display such as “long press” is not displayed. is there.

This is an operation that occurs, for example, by forgetting to release the hand that has pushed the over-tilt device 310 to concentrate on the effect, but in this case, the tilt device 310 ascends even if the regulation by the rotating claw member 347 is released. Even if the disc cam 344 performs a reciprocating operation (forward / reverse switching operation) for moving the tilting device 310 up and down in the range of the angle D2,
The attitude of the tilting device 310 can not be changed. In this case, the rotation of the drive motor 342 is wasted, and if the rotation can be omitted, the life of the drive motor 342 can be extended.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 324L of the lower frame member 320 (FIG. 1) in the state of rotating the disc cam 344 in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise in FIG. 36) from the state shown in FIG.
5) does not reversely rotate the disk cam 344 while maintaining the ON state (while the tilting device 310 is tilted below the first condition), as shown in FIG. In the first initial state of the drive device 340 in which the left side detection sensor 353L (see FIG. 14) is turned on, the rotation of the disc cam 344 is stopped (the drive of the drive motor 342 is stopped).

In the state shown in FIG. 36 and FIG. 37, the tilting device 310 does not move upward as the player's hand is placed on the upper side of the tilting device 310. In this case, the state shown in FIG.
A change to the state shown in 7 occurs by rotating the drive motor 342 in one direction.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the player's hand continues to be placed above the tilting device 310, and the driving motor 342 is reciprocated (forward and reverse switching until the tilting device 310 can not move up and down). Operation can be avoided, the load placed on the drive motor 342 can be reduced, and the motor life can be extended.

When the disk cam 344 is rotated by a predetermined amount (up to the state shown in FIG. 31) from the state shown in FIG. 36, the left side detection sensor 324L (see FIG. 15) maintains the ON state. Instead of rotating the plate cam 344, the plate cam 344 may be controlled to immediately reversely rotate to return to the state shown in FIG. 36. As a result, the drive device 340 can be returned to the second initial state early, and unnecessary load is not applied to the drive device 340, whereby the motor life of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) can be extended.

A device for preventing the drive device 340 from being broken will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39. FIG. 38 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6A, and FIG. 39 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXXIX-XXXIX of FIG. In FIG. 38, the tilting device 310 is in the second state.
The player's hand for gripping and fixing is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 39, the upper member of the main body cover 351 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 38, when the player grips and fixes the tilting device 310, the arm member 34
Since the movement of 5 is restricted, the disc cam 344 can not be rotated from the state of FIG. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) starts to rotate, the drive motor 342
There is a risk that a high load will occur between the drive motor and the transmission gear 343b, and if left free, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) may fail.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the transmission gear 343 b is configured to be able to idle with respect to the transmission rod 343 a that fixes the disc cam 344, failure of the drive motor 342 can be prevented.

That is, as shown in FIG. 39, the drive motor 342 starts driving with the disc cam 344 fixed, and the transmission gear 343 b is biased in the rotational direction, whereby the clutch portion 343 b
Power is transmitted through the 2343c 2 and the movable clutch 343c moves in a direction away from the transmission gear 343b. Thereby, the engagement between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c can be released, and the transmission gear 343b can be idled. Thus, the drive motor 3
42 can be prevented from breakdown.

When the player does not grip the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 passes through the first state if the disc cam 344 is rotated once due to the configuration of the operation device 300. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the lower frame member 3 is rotated while the drive motor 342 is rotated by a predetermined angle (for example, 360.degree.).
If the left side detection sensor 324L of 20 is not turned on (if the tilting device 310 is not in the first state), it is determined that the player intentionally performs an unnecessary operation of holding and fixing the tilting device 310 The rotation of the drive motor 342 is stopped while notifying by displaying on the third symbol display device 81, for example, so as to stop the gripping operation.

As a result, it is possible to select the case where the player intentionally performs an erroneous operation, and to notify that the erroneous operation is stopped only at that time, and to stop the drive motor 342 early.
Failure can be prevented.

When the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c are separated and a phase shift occurs,
The initial phase of the drive motor and the initial phase of the disc cam 344 which is in phase with the movable clutch 343c are shifted. Therefore, if the drive motor 342 is controlled continuously (by the number of steps etc.) from the state before the phase shift occurs, the disk cam 344 can not be operated accurately (the phase shift can not be corrected).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the left side detection sensor 353 L of the protective cover member 350 is turned on.
Since it is possible to identify that the drive device 340 has entered the first initial state by detecting that the state has been reached, the control of the drive motor 352 is resumed with the state as the initial position. By setting the initial phase), even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343 b and the movable clutch 343 c, control is performed in a state where the phase of the drive motor 342 and the phase of the disk cam 344 are realigned It can be performed.

Thereby, when performing an effect by operating the tilting device 310, the drive motor 342
It is prevented that a shift occurs between the operation to be performed by the tilting device 310 and the operation actually performed by the tilting device 310 by the rotation control of the above. Therefore, even after a phase shift occurs between the transmission gear 343b and the movable clutch 343c, the tilting device 310 can be appropriately operated to perform effects.

Here, as shown in FIG. 39, the movable clutch 343c is configured to idle around the transmission gear 343b regardless of the rotational direction of the transmission gear 343b. The necessity is explained below.

40, 41, 42 and 43 are cross-sectional views of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. 6 (a). In FIG. 40, the disc cam 3 is started from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the wheel 44 is rotated 180 degrees in the forward rolling direction (arrow CCW direction) is illustrated. In FIG. 41, a state in which the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CCW direction from the state illustrated in FIG. Also, in FIG. 42, the disc cam 344 is in the backward rolling direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 38.
The state where the disk cam 344 is further rotated in the arrow CW direction from the state shown in FIG. 42 is illustrated in FIG. 43.

As shown in FIG. 41, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the arrow CCW direction, the tilting device 31
In the 0 state, the standing state operates toward the second state via the first state shown in FIG. Meanwhile, FIG.
As shown in 3, when the disc cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the tilting device 310 is configured in such a manner as to maintain that state in the first state shown in FIG.

This is not only due to the fact that the engagement rib 344c moves away from the release member 346 as it moves from the state shown in FIG. 42 to the state shown in FIG.
When the wheel rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, even if the engagement rib 344c abuts on the release member 346, the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 is not released. That is, when the disk cam 344 rotates in the direction of the arrow CW, the engagement rib 344c abuts on the release member 346 from below, but in this case the release member 346 is lifted by the engagement rib 344c, and the rotation claw Member 3
There is no load in the direction of pushing up 47. Therefore, the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is not released.

Here, when the operation of the tilting device 310 is viewed from the player's viewpoint, FIGS. 38 to 40 and FIG.
Until the first state shown in, both appear to operate in the same way, and the subsequent movement after the first state is either the operation in FIG. 41 or FIG. 43 is different.

For example, the difference in the operation after the tilt device 310 reaches the first state is
It may be generated by the control (refer to FIG. 39), but the player notices the mode of the control being performed by the difference in the change of the drive sound due to the change of the rotational speed of the drive motor 342. There is a possibility that the player may grasp the interest of the player. Also, the tilting device 3
When the operation of rapidly stopping 10 is performed by the rapid stop of the drive motor 342, the load on the drive motor 342 is increased, and the durability of the drive motor 342 may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the tilting device 310 is moved toward the first state from the state shown in FIG. 38 and the operation of the tilting device 310 thereafter is differentiated, the drive motor 342
Since the direction of rotation is different only in the direction of rotation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the direction of rotation in the drive mode (vibration, sound, etc.). Therefore, for example, when the degree of expectation of the effect changes depending on whether the tilting device 310 gets up from the first state or the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state, the tilting device 310 is moving toward the first state In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the change in the degree of expectation. Thereby, the attention to the operation of the tilting device 310 can be improved.

On the other hand, when the tilting device 310 reaches the first state and the driving motor 342 further rotates, it is confirmed whether the tilting device 310 is raised or maintained in the first state.
Since the player can grasp the change in the degree of expectation of the effect, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state (see FIG. 38) to the player and moves toward the first state by the drive motor 342, It can be arranged to watch the movement of the tilting device 310.

That is, when the tilting device 310 is in the second state, it is possible to prevent the player from holding the tilting device 310. Therefore, when the drive motor 342 is driven, the player erroneously operates the tilting device 310 and the drive. The device 340 can be prevented from being overloaded.

In addition, since it is not necessary to stop the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 39) in order to provide an effect to stop the tilting device 310 rapidly, the drive motor 3 is required to be stopped suddenly.
It is possible to eliminate the burden imposed on the motor 42, and to improve the durability of the drive motor 342.

Next, referring to FIG. 44, the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down without being restricted by the rotating claw member 347 even when the player presses the tilting device 310 (third operation mode) explain.

FIG. 44 is a cross-sectional view of the operation device 300 taken along line XXII-XXII of FIG. In FIG. 44, the disc cam 3 is started from the first initial state (see FIG. 25) of the drive device 340.
44 is shown in a state in which it has been rotated in the forward direction by a predetermined amount (counterclockwise in FIG. 44).
Disc cam 344 at an angle at which the overhanging portion 344 c 1 does not pass through the engaging portion 346 d of the release member 346
The outer shape of the tilting device 310 after rotating in the backward rotation direction (clockwise in FIG. 44) is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 44, in a state where the release member 346 is pushed down by the first overhang portion 344c1 of the disk cam 344, the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first lead-in portion 344c2 By reciprocating the disk cam 344 while maintaining the positional relationship not to pass 346 d, the tilting device 310 can be reciprocated up and down while maintaining the posture of the release member 346.

In this case, the posture of the rotating claw member 347 is in the backward direction (along with the posture change of the release member 346).
44 is maintained in the state of being rotated clockwise), the tilting device 31 shown in FIG.
When 0 moves up and down, even if the player pushes the tilting device 310, the tilting device 310 and the rotating claw member 347 are not engaged, and the player releases the hand to tilt the tilting device 310.
Can move upward as compared with the first state (the position where the tilting device 310 is restricted from rising when the rotary claw member 347 engages with the tilting device 310), and can carry out an operation mode that continues the up and down movement. .

Therefore, for example, as the operation mode of the tilting device 310, by providing a difference in rendering between the first operation mode and the second operation mode described above and the third operation mode shown in FIG. The operation of the device 300 can have a meaning different from the conventional one. That is, according to the present embodiment, the tilt device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode only when the player pushes the tilt device 310 and then releases the tilt device 310. It is possible to know whether it was up or down in the third operation mode.

As a difference in presentation, when the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the first operation mode or the second operation mode (the tilting device 310 is maintained in the first state when the hand is released after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310) Is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 moves up and down in the third operation mode (when the tilting device 310 continues to move up and down even if the hand is released after pushing the tilting device 310). If there is a difference that the expectation of the jackpot is high, the expectation of whether or not to hit the jackpot is recognized not only when the player pushes the tilting device 310 but also when releasing the hand from the tilting device 310 Since an opportunity can be obtained, it is possible to provide many timings for the player to focus on the operation device 300. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device 300 can be improved.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 49. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the rotary claw member 347 is maintained when the release member 346 is pushed up has been described, but in the operation device 2300 in the second embodiment, the drive device 2340 has the slide claw member 2348 Slide claw member 23 when the release member 2346 is pushed up.
48 is configured to slide. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, differences from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG.

FIG. 45 (a) is a side view of the slide claw member 2348 in the second embodiment, and FIG.
5 (b) is a side view of the rotary plate member 2347, and FIG. 45 (c) is a side view of the release member 2346.

46 (a) and 46 (b) are side views of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347 and the slide claw member 2348 showing the interlocking movement of the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347 and the slide claw member 2348. .

In FIG. 46 (a), the rotating plate member 2347 has a second spring S with respect to the releasing member 2346.
The large angle state of rotating to the end position in the biasing direction of P2 is illustrated, and in FIG. 46 (b), the rotating plate member 2347 against the release member 2346 rotates to the end position against the biasing force of the second spring SP2. An angle small state is illustrated. The state in which the release member 2346 is rotated by coming into contact with the disc cam 344 is a state between the large angle state and the small angle state (the convex pin 3
The state in which 46b is arrange | positioned in the intermediate position of the guide long hole 347b (refer FIG. 48).

As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, the drive device 2340 (see FIG. 47) has a shaft 341c (see FIG.
47) is disposed on the opposite side of the release member 2346 with the release member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the rotary plate member 2347 interposed therebetween as the functional members pivotally supported by FIG. And a slide claw member 2348 configured to be slidable along an arc track centering on the rotation axis of the reference). In the releasing member 2346, the rotary plate member 2347, and the slide claw member 2348, the same reference numerals are given to components having the same functions as those in the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 45 (a), the slide claw member 2348 has a curved portion 2348a formed in a curved shape so as to be slidably fitted in the rail portion 2347f, and the front end at the upper end portion of the curved portion 2348a. (The left side in FIG. 45) is provided with a ridged portion 2348b convexly formed in a ridged shape, and the curved portion 2348a and the ridged portion 2348b overlappingly disposed in the thickness direction (vertical direction in FIG. 47A). A reinforcing portion 2348c formed of a curved plate shape wider than the curved portion 2348a, and a projecting pin 2348d projecting in a cylindrical shape toward the release member 2346 at the lower end portion of the reinforcing portion 2348c are mainly included. Prepare.

The length of the curved portion 2348a is set to a length slightly shorter than the separation width of the rail portion 2347f. Therefore, the curved portion 2348 a of the slide claw member 2348 is the rail portion 2.
In the state of being internally fitted to 347f, it is configured to be slidable relative to the rotary plate member 2347.

The collar portion 2348 b is similar in shape to the collar portion 347 d of the first embodiment, and a magnetic material is disposed on the lower side surface thereof. This magnetic material is a bottom plate portion 2311 of the tilting device 2310 described later.
a is a magnetic material for generating a magnetic force to be adsorbed.

The reinforcing portion 2348c is a portion facing the opposite surface of the surface facing the slide claw member 2348 of the rotary plate member 2347 in the assembled state (see FIG. 46), and is formed wider than the curved portion 2348a. , And a portion for reinforcing the slide claw member 2348.

The projecting pin 2348 d is a cylindrical member inserted into the function long hole 2346 e of the release member 2346, and is formed of a metal rod inserted and fixed to the main body plate portion 2348 e. Release member 234
6 is rotated relative to the rotary plate member 2347 so that the projecting pin 2348 d functions as a long hole 23.
The slide claw member 2348 slides and is pushed by the side surface 46e.

The rotary plate member 2347 includes a shaft support hole 347a, a guide long hole 347b, and an insertion hole 347c.
In addition to the pull-down holes 347e, there are provided a rail portion 2347f for guiding the slide operation of the slide claw member 2348, and a support long hole 2347g through which the projecting pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348 is inserted.

The rail portion 2347f is formed of a pair of plate-shaped portions extending from the upper end portion of the rotating plate member 2347, and the rotating plate member 2347 is in the forward rolling direction (see FIG. The shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47) in the state of being placed at the end position of 46 counterclockwise).
Is formed from a curved shape along a circular arc centered on.

The support elongated holes 2347g are formed in a curved shape along an arc centered on the shaft portion 314 (see FIG. 47), as with the rail portion 2347f. Protruding pins 2348 in the support long holes 2347g
When sliding the slide claw member 2348 in a state where d is inserted, the slide claw member 2348 can be supported by the rail portion 2347f and the support long hole 2347g, and the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented from being shaken. it can.

The release member 2346 has a functional long hole 2346e which is a long hole drilled in the thickness direction, in addition to the shaft support hole 346a, the convex pin 346b, the insertion hole 346c, and the engagement portion 346d. .

The function long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d of the slide claw member 2348, and has a first length formed from a curved shape along an arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. A hole 2346e1 and a second long hole 2346e2 extending from a first end of the first long hole 2346e in a direction inclined in the direction opposite to the support hole 346a;
Mainly to

As shown in FIG. 46, when the release member 2346 rotates with respect to the rotary plate member 2347 and the state changes between the large angle state and the small angle state, the slide claw member 2348 forms the rail portion 234.
Slide along the curved shape of 7f.

Since the function long hole 2346e is configured as a long hole slightly wider than the diameter of the protruding pin 2348d, the moving speed of the releasing member 2346 is moved as it is without moving the releasing member 2346. Reflected in the speed.

That is, if the release member 2346 is rotated quickly, the slide claw member 2348 slides quickly, while if the speed at which the release member 2346 is rotated is decreased, the operation speed of the slide claw member 2348 also decreases.

As shown in FIG. 46 (a), in the large angle state, even if the slide claw member 2348 is pulled in the sliding direction, the first arc portion 2346e1 has a shape along the arc centered on the pivot hole 346a. As a result, the load applied from the protruding pin 2348 d to the functional elongated hole 2346 e is directed in a linear direction passing through the axial support hole 346 a. Therefore, a force for rotating the release member 2346 is not generated, and the sliding movement of the slide claw member 2348 can be prevented.

That is, in the present embodiment, the slide claw member 2 is rotated by rotating the release member 2346.
Although the sliding movement of the sliding member 347 may occur, the sliding movement of the sliding claw member 2347 is not caused by the pulling movement of the sliding claw member 2347 in the large angle state. Therefore, as in the first embodiment, when the tilting device 2310 is disposed in the first state, the elevation of the tilting device 2310 can be restricted by engaging the slide claw member 2348 with the tilting device 2310.

FIGS. 47 to 49 are diagrams illustrating the change in posture of the tilting device 2310 in time series, and are cross-sectional views of the operation device 2300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 47, the second lead-in portion 344c4 of the disk cam 344 is the release member 234.
47 shows that the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 47) from the state shown in FIG. 47 to engage the release member 2346. The state in which the portion 346d is pushed up is illustrated. In FIG. 49, the disc cam 344 is rotated in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) from the state shown in FIG. 48, and the releasing member 2346 is the second spring SP.
The state returned by the biasing force of 2 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the bottom plate portion 2311a of the tilting device 2310 includes a magnet portion 2311a1 that is fixed to the upper side surface in the vicinity of the lower edge of the opening 311b and is made of a magnetic material.

In the state shown in FIG. 47, the magnet portion 2311a1 and the bowl-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the magnetic force. When the player pushes the tilting device 2310 from this state, the tilting device 2310 is operated.
Since the adsorption of the magnet portion 2311a1 and the bowl-shaped portion 2348b is released due to the posture change of 10, a large load is not given to the slide claw member 2348 from the tilting device 2310.

As shown in FIG. 48, when the release member 2346 is pushed up, the slide claw member 2348 slides in the upward direction in conjunction with the operation. At this time, since the magnet portion 2311a1 and the bowl-shaped portion 2348b are attracted by the magnetic force, when the release member 2346 operates quickly, the operation of the tilting device 2310 also becomes quick.

Therefore, by sliding the slide claw member 2348 at a speed different from the speed at which the tilting device 2310 rotates in the upward direction by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, the slide claw member 2348 is rotated backward (clockwise in FIG. 48). The tilting device 2310 can be moved up and down at a speed different from that in the case of releasing the restriction on the rising movement of the tilting device 2310 by the rotation of the tilting device 2310 (fourth operation mode). That is, the speed at which the tilting device 2310 moves in the upward direction can be changed.

As shown in FIG. 49, when the engagement between the disc cam 344 and the release member 2346 is released, the release member 2346 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 48) by the biasing force of the second spring SP2. Thereby, the slide claw member 2348 is returned to the first state.

By enabling the operation modes shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the tilting device 2310 can be operated in four operation modes in combination with the first to third operation modes described in the first embodiment. . As the operation mode increases, by associating the operation mode with the expectation of the jackpot, the player can more easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so that the operation device 2300 for the player can be obtained. The degree of attention can be improved.

Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 48, when raising the tilting device 2310 by raising the slide claw member 2348, the hooked portion 234 of the slide claw member 2348
8b and the magnetic device 2310a1 of the tilting device 2310 by magnetic attraction between the device and the tilting device 2310
Is increased, the load exerted on the tilting device 2310 can be increased by securing a large magnetic force as compared with the case where the tilting device 2310 is raised by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315.

That is, normally, when the player places his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310, it is prevented that the tilting device 2310 is lifted by the weight of the hand when the restriction by the slide claw member 2348 is released. (If the biasing force by the torsion spring 315 is not large enough to lift the weight of the hand), if the magnetic force is large enough to lift the weight of the hand, FIG.
In the state shown in, the tilt device 2310 can be raised in a manner of lifting the player's hand.

Thereby, when raising the tilting device 2310, it is possible to make a difference in the load in the rising direction (the force to maintain the posture of the tilting device 2310 with respect to the downward load). Therefore, a player who plays a game by putting his hand on the top of the tilting device 2310 before pressing the tilting device 2310 can feel the difference in the load.

For example, by associating the difference in the load with the expectation of the jackpot, the player can easily use the operation device 2300 as a means of pre-reading, so the degree of attention of the operation device 2300 for the player It can be improved.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 to 52. In the first embodiment, it is described that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where it is pressed by the player. However, the operation device 3300 in the third embodiment Is configured in such a manner that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and in the state of being pushed into the player or in the state of being pushed into the player. Ru. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 50 is a side view of the tilting device 3310 in the third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 50, the tilting device 3310 has the same position (rotation of the tilting device 3310) as the right side detection piece 311gR extended downward from the bottom plate portion 311a of the case main body 3311 and the left side detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment. And a left detection piece 3311gL extended at a position opposite to the right detection piece 311gR with respect to a plane which is a plane perpendicular to the axis and which is disposed at a central position in the rotation axis direction. The left detection piece 3311gL has a longer extension than the right detection piece 311gR,
Compared with the left detection piece 311gL in the first embodiment, the extension length thereof is shortened.

51 (a) and 51 (b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG.
In 1 (a), the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, and in FIG. 51 (b), the tilting device 331 is in the first state.
A state in the middle of pressing 0 is illustrated. Also, FIG. 51 (a) and FIG. 51 (b).
In order to facilitate understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, while the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are indicated by solid lines. While being illustrated, the portion where each detection sensor 324L, 324R and each detection piece 3311gL, 311gR overlap is schematically illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 51 (a), when the tilting device 3310 is in the first state, the left detection piece 3 is
311gL is not inserted into the left side detection sensor 324L and the right side detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the OFF state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

As shown in FIG. 51 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of pushing operation from the first state to the pushing end, the left detection piece 3311gL is the left detection sensor 324L.
The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).
.

If the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where the pushing end is pressed by detecting the change in the state of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, the state is in the middle of pushing. It is possible to detect whether it is in the middle of or on the way back.

That is, when the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where the pushing end is pressed. Left side detection sensor 324L is in OFF state and right side detection sensor 324
By detecting that R is changed from the OFF state, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the pushing operation.

52 (a) and 52 (b) are side views of the operation device 3300. FIG. Note that FIG.
2 (a), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is pushed in and pushed to the end, is shown in FIG.
In 2 (b), a state in which the tilting device 3310 is in the process of pushing from the end to the first state is illustrated. Further, in FIGS. 51 (a) and 51 (b), in order to facilitate understanding, the outlines of the lower frame member 320, the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines, The detection sensors 324L and 324R and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines, and the overlapping portions of the detection sensors 324L and 324R and the detection pieces 3311gL and 311gR are illustrated schematically.

As shown in FIG. 52 (a), in the state where the tilting device 3310 is pushed down to the final end, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted into the left detection sensor 324L and the right detection piece 3
11gR is inserted into the right side detection sensor 324R (the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the ON state).

As shown in FIG. 52 (b), when the tilting device 3310 is in the state between the first state and the state where the pushing end is disposed, the left detection piece 3311gL is inserted through the left detection sensor 324L. The right detection piece 311gR is not inserted into the right detection sensor 324R (the left detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state).

When the left side detection sensor 324L is in the ON state and the right side detection sensor 324R is in the OFF state, the tilting device 3310 is in the middle of the first state and the state where the push-in end is pressed. Sensor 324L is ON and right side detection sensor 324R is ON
By detecting that the state is changed, it can be determined that the tilting device 3310 is in the process of returning to the first state.

Here, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 is transmitted to the tilting device 3310 to
When an auxiliary load for raising 310 is given, the voice coil motor 352 is tilted while the tilting device 3310 is lifting as compared to causing the voice coil motor 352 to collide with the tilting device 3310 while the tilting device 3310 is lowering. The collision with the device 3310 can effectively apply a load to raise the tilting device 3310.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the operation direction of the tilting device 3310 is determined from the detection history of each of the detection sensors 324L and 324R, and the tilting device 3310 is on its way up and reaches the first state. By driving the voice coil motor 352 when not in use, the driving force of the voice coil motor 352 can be effectively transmitted to the tilting device 3310, and the rising speed of the tilting device 3310 can be improved.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed in order to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18), the tilting device 3 after pressing the tilting device 3310 from the first state 3
Ascending speed of 310 becomes slower. In this case, even if the player continuously operates the tilting device 3310, the raising operation of the tilting device 3310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation can not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, the tilting device 3310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 3310 is operated to rise by only the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Because the speed of rising can be improved, the tilting device 3310
It is possible to perform the continuous hitting operation comfortably.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 55. In the first embodiment, it is described that the detection sensors 324L and 324R can detect whether the tilting device 310 is in the first state or in a state where the player is pushed in. However, the operation device 4300 in the fourth embodiment In this mode, the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 during the transition from the second state to the first state is detected, and the driving method of the voice coil motor 352 is changed according to the detection result. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 53 is a side view of the tilting device 4310 according to the fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 53, the tilting device 4310 includes a front detection piece 4311k which is provided in a plate shape so as to protrude from the front side of the protruding portion 311j of the case main body 4311.

The front detection piece 4311k is configured to be able to pass through the detection grooves (slits) of the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e (see FIG. 54) disposed on the bottom plate 4321 of the lower frame member 4320. It is a part for determining the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 based on the detection timing of the sensors 4321 d and 4321 e.

54 (a) and 54 (b) are side views of the operating device 4300 illustrating the pressing operation of the operating device 4300 in chronological order. In FIG. 54 (a), the tilting device 431 is
In FIG. 54 (b), the tilt device 4310 is set from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a).
Is illustrated in a state in which the front detection piece 4311k is passed downward with the lower detection sensor 4321e. Also, in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the outer shapes of the lower frame member 4320, the upper frame member 330, and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated by imaginary lines in order to facilitate understanding. The detection sensors 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and the voice coil motor 352 are illustrated by solid lines.

As shown in FIGS. 54 (a) and 54 (b), the lower frame member 4320 is provided with an upper detection sensor 4321d and a lower detection sensor 4321e at the front side of the bottom plate 4321. The upper side detection sensor 4321 d and the lower side detection sensor 4321 e are photocoupler type sensors, and are disposed in a posture in which the detection grooves are directed in the direction in which the front detection piece 4311 k can pass. In the present embodiment, the upper side detection sensor 4321 d and the lower side detection sensor 4321 e are arranged at an interval of 20 ° on a circular arc orbit centering on the rotation axis of the tilting device 4310.

When the player changes the state shown in FIG. 54 (b) by pushing the tilting device 4310 from the state shown in FIG. 54 (a), the front detection piece 4311k is the upper side detection sensor 4
321 d and the lower detection sensor 4321 e are sequentially passed. By detecting the interval of the timing of the passage, the magnitude of the operating speed of the tilting device 4310 can be determined, and it is selected whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 or not.

Here, when the inclining device 4310 is operated from the second position, the inclining device is longer than the operation button whose indenting length is short because the indenting length is long (because the period in which acceleration is applied is long). The upper limit of the operating speed of 4310 is increased. Therefore, when the player does not have any means for deceleration, the tilting device 4310 needs to be made strong as a safety measure for the player to push in with full force, and the tilting device 4310 tends to be heavy. A problem arises.

Further, it is possible to incorporate an elastic spring for applying a biasing force to the tilting device 4310 only when the tilting device 4310 is disposed near the pushing end, and to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the biasing force of the elastic spring. However, in this case, for a player with weak force or a player who decides to push in gently, the fact that the reaction force is always large near the push-in position becomes a burden of the push-in operation, making it easy to feel fatigue. Therefore, there is a possibility that the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 can not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the upper detection sensor 4321 d and the lower detection sensor 4321 e
It is possible to apply a strong reaction force to the tilting device 4310 when it is not necessary by determining whether to drive the voice coil motor 352 according to the interval of the timing when the voltage switches between the ON state and the OFF state. Can be prevented.

That is, for example, when the interval between the timing when the upper detection sensor 4321d and the lower detection sensor 4321e switch between ON and OFF is longer than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the voice coil motor 352 is used. When the interval of the above-mentioned timing is shorter than a predetermined period while not driving, the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be driven.

Thereby, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is slow, the reaction force that the player feels from the tilting device 4310 is only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315, and the weak force facilitates the tilting device 4310. It can be pushed in.

Furthermore, when the operation speed of the pushing operation of the tilting device 4310 is high, the tilting device 4310
Not only the biasing force generated by the torsion spring 315 but also the driving force generated by the voice coil motor 352 can be applied as a reaction force against the force. Therefore, the operation speed of the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), the protruding convex portion 3 of the tilting device 4310
The voice coil motor 352 is driven before 11j projects below the lower frame member 4320, and the movable member of the voice coil motor 352 is controlled to be pushed out in advance to the side close to the tilting device 4310. Ru.

As a result, the tilting device 4310 is pushed in the middle of pushing out the movable member of the voice coil motor 352.
The impact applied to the tilting device 4310 can be suppressed as compared with the case where the voice coil motor 352 collides with the voice coil motor 352.

55 (a) and 55 (b) are side views of the operation device 4300. FIG. Note that FIG.
5 (a) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 is in the process of being pushed from the first state to the pushing end, and FIG. 55 (b) shows a state in which the tilting device 4310 has reached the pushing end.

Also, in FIGS. 55 (a) and 55 (b), the lower frame member 4 is shown to facilitate understanding.
While the outlines of the upper frame member 330 and the protective cover device 350 are illustrated in phantom lines 320,
Each detection sensor 324L, 324R, 4321d, 4321e and voice coil motor 35
2 is illustrated by a solid line.

As shown in FIG. 55 (a), when the tilting device 4310 is pushed in at high speed from the second state, the overhanging protrusion of the tilting device 4310 is in a state where the tilting device 4310 is pushed in from the first state and reaches the end. The arrangement portion 311 j and the voice coil motor 352 abut on each other.

By pushing in the tilting device 4310, the direction in which the protruding and projecting portion 311j moves the voice coil motor 352 is the direction along the expansion direction D41 of the voice coil motor 352, so the voice coil motor 352 is reduced. The power of the pushing operation can be consumed by moving it to the Therefore, while the movement of the tilting device 4310 continues, a load in the direction of pushing up the tilting device 4310 can be applied by the driving force of the voice coil motor 352, and the tilting device 4310 can be decelerated.

At this time, the voice coil motor 352 is not a structure that applies a load by friction like a disk brake, but is a structure that applies a load by an electromagnetic force, so damage to members can be suppressed and durability can be ensured.

In the state shown in FIG. 55 (a), since the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 are already in contact, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a) (the left detection sensor 324L By gradually increasing the current flowing to the voice coil motor 352 from the ON state), the reaction force applied from the voice coil motor 352 to the tilting device 4310 can be gradually increased.

Therefore, while suppressing the reaction force felt by the player at the timing when the overhanging convex portion 311j of the tilting device 4310 and the voice coil motor 352 abut, deceleration of the tilting device 4310 on the way from the first state toward the end The effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 55 (b), when the tilting device 4310 is disposed at the pushing end position, the right side detection sensor 324R is turned ON. In this state, the tilting device 4310 abuts on the lower frame member 4320 in the rotational direction, and the lowering is stopped. Therefore, it is not necessary to decelerate the tilting device 4310 by the voice coil motor 352.

In the present embodiment, in the state shown in FIG. 55 (b), the voice coil motor 352 performs a vibration operation (operation of repeating movement in the extension direction and movement in the reduction direction). By this,
After pushing the tilting device 4310 to the end, the effect of transmitting the vibration to the player who keeps putting his hand on the tilting device 4310 can be performed.

That is, the voice coil motor 352 can be used for the purpose of reducing the speed of the pressing operation of the tilting device 4310 and the purpose of performing vibration rendition by vibrating the tilting device 4310 disposed at the pressing end position.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 56 to 68, an operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the tilting device 31 is operated by vibrating the voice coil motor 352.
Although the case has been described where vibration is transmitted to the player pushing in 0, the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment is a weight member 5 disposed on the lower frame member 5320 at a position where the center of gravity is eccentric.
A drive motor 5411 is provided to rotate 412, and vibration is transmitted to the player touching the lower frame member 5320 based on the rotation of the drive motor 5411. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57.

56 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation device 5300 in the fifth embodiment, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 5300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 56 and 57, in the operation device 5300, the lower frame member 320 is a lower frame member 5320 as compared to the operation device 300 in the first embodiment, and the drive device 340 is used.
Is the driving device 5340 and the voice coil motor 35 from the protective cover member 350.
2 is omitted. The tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 are configured the same as in the first embodiment.

The lower frame member 5320 is provided with a vibration device 5400 provided with a drive motor 5411, and the drive device 5340 is provided with a disc cam 5344 fixed to the transmission shaft 5534 by one touch. First, the vibration device 5400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 61, and then the disk cam 5344 will be described.

FIG. 58 is an exploded front perspective view of the lower frame member 5320 and the vibrating device 5400. As shown in FIG. 58, the vibration device 5400 is a transmission device 5 that rotationally drives the fan-shaped weight member 5412.
A flexible member 5420 which accommodates the drive motor 5411 of the transmission device 5410 and the transmission device 5410 and is made of a flexible material, and is formed in a bottomed dish shape whose upper surface is opened, and which has a weight member 5412 and a flexible member And the lower frame member 53
And a housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 5321 of the twenty.

The transmission device 5410 includes a drive motor 5411 formed of a rotary drive electric motor and a weight member 5412 whose outer shape is fan-shaped and a portion corresponding to the main part of the fan is pivotally supported on the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. And mainly.

The drive motor 5411 is provided with a fixing portion 5411 a which is disposed in a pair on the left and right and which is formed in a flange shape from a metal material on the side surface on which the shaft projects.

The weight member 5412 has a radius Ra and is eccentrically supported by the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is rotationally driven, the position of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is changed, and the drive motor 5411 can vibrate together.

The flexible member 5420 has a body portion 5421 having a cylindrical container shape in which the drive motor 5411 is inserted along the axial direction and having a bottom on the opposite side of the side where the drive motor 5411 is inserted. Connecting between a pair of rib-like legs 5422 projecting in the form of a pair of ribs in the radial direction left and right and downward, and rib-like legs 5422 projecting left and right on the open side of the main body 5421 Posture maintenance unit 5423 in which fixing unit 5411a is embedded
And a pair of pillars 5424 projecting upward from the top surface of the main body 5421.

The main body portion 5421 has the same depth as the axial length of the drive motor 5411, and the depth of the container shape is configured. Therefore, when the drive motor 5411 is completely inserted into the main body 5421, the end face on the shaft side of the drive motor 5411 and the end face on the opening side of the main body 5421 are formed on the same plane. Further, in this state, fixing portion 5411 a is embedded in posture maintaining portion 5423.

The ribbed legs 5422 are formed on the left and right sides and the lower side of the main body 5421, but the ribbed legs 5422 on the left and right sides are the same as the posture maintaining part 5423 is disposed on the left and right sides. The deformation resistance is larger than that of the lower rib-like leg 5422.

The convex leg portion 5424 is provided in a columnar shape so that the load can be easily concentrated at one point in contact with the tilting device 310 described later. Accordingly, when the flexible member 5420 is deformed by the tilting of the tilting device 310, the flexible member 54 with respect to the tilting angle of the tilting device 310.
The resolution of 20 deformation degrees can be made finer.

The housing member 5430 is, in the assembled state, a first housing portion 5431 in which the drive motor 5411 and the flexible member 5420 are housed, and the weight member 5 provided adjacent to the first housing portion 5431.
The second housing portion 5432 in which the second housing portion 412 is housed, and the first housing portion 5431 and the second housing portion 5
And a concave groove 5433 which is recessed downward from the upper surface in the connection surface 432.

The depth of the first accommodation portion 5431 is such that the flexible member 54 is formed until the lower rib-like leg portion 5422 is attached to the bottom.
When the load 20 is inserted and the load applied at the time of insertion is released (assembly load released state), the projection leg 5424 has a depth protruding from the upper surface.

The depth of the second accommodation portion 5432 is a depth which is recessed outward beyond the rotation locus of the weight member 5412 in the assembled load release state, while the player applies a load to the convex leg 5424 so that the flexible member is flexible. When 5420 is deformed (assembled load state), the depth of interference with the rotation trajectory of the weight member 5412 is set.

The recessed groove 5433 has a width dimension slightly larger than the diameter of the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411, and a depth dimension extends slightly lower than the rotation shaft of the drive motor 5411 in the assembled load state. Ru.

59 (a) is a side view of the lower frame member 5320, and FIG. 59 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the lower frame member 5320 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a). ) Is
FIG. 60 is a partial top view of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the direction of arrow LIXc in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 59A, a portion corresponding to the vibration device 5400 is partially viewed in cross section. Also,
In FIG. 59 (a), the first region S51, which is the region occupied by the tilting device 310 when the tilting device 310 is brought into the first state, and the first state, are pushed three times into the player, A termination area S52, which is an area occupied by the tilting device 310 when disposed at the termination position, is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), the convex leg 5424 is provided so as to protrude in a direction along a circular orbit formed with the central axis of the arc of the lower bearing portion 323 as the rotation axis. Therefore, the tilting device 310
It is possible to ensure the maximum amount of deformation of the convex leg 5424 in response to the change in angle (see FIG. 56).

As shown in FIG. 59 (b), the weight member 5412 is separated from the second accommodation portion 5432 in the assembled load release state where no load is applied to the convex leg 5424.

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the protruding leg portions 5424 are arranged symmetrically with respect to the left and right center line of the lower frame member 5320 as viewed in the extending direction thereof. Therefore, since the convex leg 5424 can be pushed uniformly in the left and right at the bottom of the tilting device 310, the flexible member 5420 can be prevented from tilting to the left and right (in the paper surface of FIG. 59 (b)) when pushing. The projection leg 5424 can be pushed in while maintaining the posture of FIG. 59 (b).

As shown in FIG. 59 (c), the bottom plate 5321 of the lower frame member 5320 has a convex leg 5424.
And a pair of through holes 5321d which can be inserted. Since the through hole 5321d has a width in the left-right direction slightly larger than the diameter of the convex leg 5424, the tilting device 310 is pushed by the player, and the lower surface of the tilting device 310 is convexly provided. When the leg portion 5424 is pressed, deformation of the convex leg portion 5424 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.
Therefore, deformation of the shape of the convex leg 5424 is suppressed, and the convex leg 5424 together with the main body 5421 is used.
Can be easily translated downward (FIG. 59 (b) downward).

60 (a) and 60 (b) are cross-sectional views of the vibration device 5400 taken along line LXa-LXa in FIG. 59 (a). In FIG. 60 (a), the assembly load released state is shown in FIG.
At 0 (b), in the state where the tilting device 310 occupies the end region S52 (see FIG. 59A), the assembled load state after the convex installation leg 5424 is pushed inward of the first accommodation portion 5431 is It is illustrated. The outer shapes of the second housing portion 5432 and the weight member 5412 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 60 (a) and 60 (b), the vibratory device 540 is released from the assembled load release state.
When a load is applied to 0 and the assembly load state is established, the convex leg 5424 and the lower rib-like leg 5
As 422 is deformed, the drive motor 5411 and the weight member 5412 are displaced downward.

In the assembled load state, as shown in FIG. 60 (b), the flexible member 5420 is elastically deformed by being pushed by the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57). The elastic recovery force of this deformation acts as a force for pushing back the tilting device 310, and the force increases as the tilting device 310 approaches the flexible member 5420. Therefore, the tilting device 310 is pushed when it is pushed to the end position The impact when 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320 (see FIG. 57) can be mitigated.
Further, because the load is elastic recovery force, even when the tilting device 310 moves at high speed, the load can be generated without time delay.

Here, when the biasing force of the torsion spring 315 is suppressed to suppress the driving force of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 57), from the first state (the state in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rising end, see FIG. 38) The raising speed of the tilting device 310 after the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 is slowed. In this case, even if the player performs the continuous striking operation on the tilting device 310, the raising operation of the tilting device 310 does not follow the movement of the player's hand, and the continuous hitting operation can not be performed comfortably.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by effectively using the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420, the tilting device 310 is compared with the case where the tilting device 310 performs the rising operation only by the biasing force of the torsion spring 315. Since the rising speed can be improved, the continuous hitting operation of the tilting device 310 can be performed comfortably.

As shown in FIG. 60 (a), in the assembled load release state, the weight member 5412 does not contact the inner wall of the second accommodation portion 5432 regardless of its posture. Therefore, even if driving of the drive motor 5411 is started in the assembly load release state, vibration due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 does not occur.

Further, the vibration of the drive motor 5411 itself and the fine vibration generated in the drive motor 5411 due to the movement of the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 are absorbed by the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 and
Transmission to 0 is prevented. This makes it difficult for the player to grasp the drive start timing of the drive motor 5411.

As shown in FIG. 60 (b), the main body portion 542 of the flexible member 5420 is in an assembled load state.
1 is configured in such a manner that the upper convex leg 5424 and the lower rib-like leg 5422 are deformed to allow displacement up and down.

When the flexible member 5420 moves downward, the state of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed on the lower side of the main body 5421 changes to a state of being compressed more vertically, and the rib-like leg 5422 is slightly cured. Therefore, the damping effect of the vibration by the rib-like leg 5422 can be weakened, and the vibration generated by the vibration device 5400 can be easily transmitted to the player.

Further, the main body portion 5421 of the flexible member 5420 is formed in a cylindrical shape, and the lower rib-like leg portion 54 is formed.
Since the 22 is extended along the axial direction of the cylinder of the main body 5421 and arranged in a left-right pair at uniform intervals from the central axis to the left and right, the ribbed leg can be moved by moving the flexible member 5420 downward. The radially outer end portion 5422 is deformed in such a manner as to move to the left and right outwards (where the resistance is smaller at the connection position between the main body 5421 and the rib-like leg 5422) (see FIG. 60B).
In this case, the projecting direction of the rib-like leg 5422 disposed below the main body 5421 has a left-right direction component, so that the elastic force of the rib-like leg 5422 can be applied in the left-right direction. . Therefore, in the assembled load state, the load in the left-right direction that may occur when the weight member 5421 and the second accommodation portion 5432 collide with each other is the rib-like leg 54 on the lower side of the main body 5421.
It can be partially absorbed by the elastic force of 22. As a result, positional deviation of the drive motor 5411 in the left-right direction can be suppressed.

61 (a) and 61 (b) are cross-sectional views of the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 taken along line LIXb-LIXb of FIG. 59 (a).

61 (a) and 61 (b) show an assembled load state, and FIG. 61 (a) shows a state where the center of gravity of weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis. In b), the state in which the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed below the rotation axis is illustrated. In addition, FIG.
1 (a) and FIG. 61 (b), the tilting device 310 is pushed into the player, and the end area S52 is
The state of the vibration device 5400 in the state of occupying

The operation of the transmission device 5410 based on the rotation of the weight member 5412 will be described. First, in the present embodiment, when the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed on the upper side in the assembled load state, the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is at a position where the distance from the lower bottom of the second accommodation portion 5432 is the distance Q1. The axis is arranged. In the present embodiment, the distance Q1 is equal to the radius Ra of the weight member 5412 (Q1 = Ra).

That is, when the weight member 5412 rotates in the assembled load state, the outer peripheral side surface thereof is the second housing portion 543.
Contact with 2 (scrub). Therefore, compared to the assembly load release state, the vibration generated by the rotation of the weight member 5412 changes, and different types of vibration can be transmitted to the player.

As a repulsive force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second housing portion 5432, the weight member 5412
Is generated upward (FIG. 61 (b) upward). Here, since the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432 move close to each other along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57), the direction of the repulsive force is the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310 (upward It can be easy to turn to). The flexible member 5 together with the drive motor 5411 supporting the weight member 5412 by this repulsive force.
As 420 moves upward, the flexible member 5420 can reinforce the pushing force of the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward (in the direction along the moving direction of the tilting device 310).

Thus, the flexible member 542 pushes the tilting device 310 (see FIG. 57) upward.
Adjustment of the pushing force of the tilting device 310 is performed by a combination of forces generated as an elastic recovery force of 0 and forces generated separately by the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432. be able to.

That is, after the tilting device 310 starts to abut on the projecting leg 5424, the end region S52 (see FIG. 59).
Until going to (a), the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420 is generated as a force that pushes the tilting device 310 back, and after the tilting device 310 reaches the end region S52, the weight member 5412
The repulsive force between the second housing portion 5432 and the second housing portion 5432 is added to the force that pushes the tilting device 310 back. Thereby, in the vicinity of the end region S52, the force for pushing back the tilting device 310 can be particularly increased, so that the lightness of the operation of the tilting device 310 and the alleviation of the impact at the time of pushing operation can be favorably achieved. This adjustment can be performed in a state in which the rotation of the drive motor 5411 is maintained. Therefore, it is unnecessary to perform complicated control.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the length of the left detection piece 311gL and the length of the right detection piece 311gR are different (see FIG. 57), and the tilt device 310 (see FIG. 57) It is determined whether or not the operation speed of (a) is greater than a specific speed (for example, 40 km / hour), and the arrangement of the weight member 5412 is changed according to the determined operation speed.

For example, if it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than a specific speed, the flexible member 5420 may be used to reduce the impact when the tilting device 310 collides with the lower frame member 5320.
It is desirable to increase the load on the tilting device 310. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the operating speed of the tilting device 310 is higher than the specific speed, the weight member 5412 is operated in advance to be in the downward posture (see FIG. 61B).

Thus, the end of the descent operation of the drive motor 5411 is performed by the rotation shaft of the second accommodation portion 543.
From the lower end of the inner wall of 2, it can be raised to a position raised by a radius Ra. Thereby, in the upper side of the drive motor 5411 as compared with the case where the weight member 5432 is disposed upward (see FIG. 61A) (when it can be lowered downward from the state shown in FIG. 61A). The movable area of the flexible member 5420 can be narrowed in the vertical direction.

That is, the compression dimension of the portion of the flexible member 5420 that is the upper portion of the drive motor 5411 can be increased when the convex leg 5424 is depressed by the tilting device 310 by the same amount. Therefore, the repulsive force applied from the flexible member 5420 to the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the load for braking the tilting device 310 can be increased.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, by keeping the drive motor 5411 stopped upward (see FIG. 61A), a force for pushing back the tilting device 310 is generated by the elastic recovery force of the flexible member 5420. It is also possible not to generate a force due to the contact between the weight member 5412 and the second accommodation portion 5432.

Here, the abutment of the members occurs between the transmission device 5410 and the housing member 5430 fastened and fixed to the lower frame member 5320, and does not occur between the transmission device 5410 and the tilting device 310. Therefore, the vibration transmitted to the hand of the player pushing the tilting device 310 can be changed, and the transmission range of the vibration can be expanded. That is, the vibration can be transmitted to a portion other than the portion touching the tilting device 310, for example, the portion touching the casing of the pachinko machine 10.

That is, when the player pushes in the tilting device 310, vibration can be transmitted to the lower frame member 5320. Therefore, a palm placed on the lower frame member 5320 as a pressing fulcrum or a part of the side of the hand Vibration can be transmitted to the player through This makes it possible to avoid a situation in which no vibration is transmitted to the player.

As shown in FIGS. 61 (a) and 61 (b), the player tilts the device 310 (see FIG. 56).
Weight member 5 only when the vibrating device 5400 forms an assembled load state.
As a result, the vibration 412 occurs.

Therefore, even if the drive motor 5411 is previously rotated, the timing at which the vibration is transmitted to the player can be limited to the timing at which the tilting device 310 is pushed in. Therefore, the pushing operation of the player is detected The vibration can be easily transmitted to the player as compared with the case where the vibration is generated.

That is, when the player performs the pushing operation in a mode of releasing the hand immediately after the player performs the pushing operation of the tilting device 310 (a mode of pushing in a pulse), the vibration is generated after detecting that the tilting device 310 is pushed. In that case, there is a possibility that vibration can not be generated (the vibration start can not be made in time) by the time the player releases the hand, and there is a possibility that the player can not feel the effect by the vibration. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the drive motor 5411 is rotated in advance and the vibration generation is prepared before the tilting device 310 is pushed, the vibration can be transmitted simultaneously with the pushing of the tilting device 310. Thus, the player can experience the effects of the vibration.

Further, the flexibility of the flexible member 5420 can prevent the vibration of the main body of the drive motor 5411 from being transmitted to the first accommodation portion 5431. Therefore, the drive motor 5411 is
Can be prevented from being transmitted to the player before the pushing operation of the tilting device 310.

Therefore, it is possible to realize that the vibration is transmitted by pushing the tilting device 310 by driving the drive motor 5411 before pushing the tilting device 310 in advance.

Next, the drive device 5340 will be described. The difference between the drive device 5340 and the drive device 340 in the first embodiment is the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343. The other components are the same as those of the driving device 340 of the first embodiment, and therefore the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of drive device 5340. FIG. As shown in FIG. 62, a long hole concave portion C1 is formed in the central portion of a pair of disc cams 5344 configured by a left disc cam 5344L and a right disc cam 5344R.

FIG. 63 (a) is a front perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R, and FIG. 63 (b) is a back perspective view of the right disc cam 5344R. Right disc cam 5344 R and left disc cam 534
Since 4L is configured in a symmetrical shape, only the right disk cam 5344R will be described, and the description of the left disk cam 5344L will be omitted.

The difference between the right disk cam 5344R and the right disk cam 344R in the first embodiment is that a pair of holding arms A1 sandwiching the transmission shaft rod 5343 is disposed at the connection portion with the transmission shaft rod 5343. It is.

That is, the right disk cam 5344R is a circular rib 344 from the disk portion at its center position.
b) in the form of a cylindrical support cylindrical portion P1 extending in a cylindrical shape, and in the axial direction of the support cylindrical portion P1 to a position about a half of the extending distance, in an axisymmetric elongated hole shape From the axial end of the long hole recess C1 recessed from the disc portion and the support cylindrical portion P1 recessed by the long hole recess C1, extending toward the disc portion along the axial direction And a pair of sandwiching arms A1.

The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion for supporting the cylindrical member 5343a by making the inner diameter thereof equal to the diameter of the cylindrical member 5343a of the transmission shaft 5534. The support cylindrical portion P1 is a portion in which the arrangement in the axial direction is the same as the region recessed in the long hole recess C1, and includes a deformed portion P1a remaining without being recessed in the long hole recess C1.

The deformation portion P1a is a pair of connecting rod portions disposed so as to sandwich the long hole concave portion C1, and is elastically deformed when the right disk cam 5344R is axially collapsed with respect to the transmission shaft rod 5343 (see FIG. 62). It is configured as a part to

The long hole concave portion C1 is formed to have a width that is slightly longer than the width of the holding arm A1. Therefore, the pinching arm portion A1 is in the direction perpendicular to the width direction of the concave section of the long hole concave portion C1 (
In the longitudinal direction).

Further, the facing surface of the long hole concave portion C1 is configured to engage with the D-shape of the fixing portion 5343a1 of the cylindrical member 5343a. That is, one side surface is formed from a plane, and the other side surface is formed from an arc shape along the outer shape of the cylindrical member 5343a. Thereby, the cylindrical member 5
343a can be prevented from rotating relative to the disc cam 5344.

The holding arm A1 is formed of a pair of arm parts formed on the side facing the other arm,
An engagement convex portion A1a is provided so as to be convex toward a direction approaching the arm on the other side. Engaging convex part A1a
When engaged with the transmission shaft 5343, it engages with the tip of the cylindrical member 5343a, and prevents the cylindrical member 5343a from coming off the disc cam 5344.

The tip shape of the engagement convex portion A1a is the engagement groove 5343a of the cylindrical member 5343a (see FIG. 64).
It is composed of a shape conforming to the arc shape of 4. Thereby, the overlapping length in the radial direction in the state where the engagement convex portion A1a is engaged with the engagement groove 5343a4 as compared with the case where the tip shape is flat or the center is a convex curved surface (FIG. (B) Longitudinal length) can be secured.

In the engagement convex portion A1a, a side surface close to the connection pin 344d in the axial direction is a side surface of the right disk cam 5344R, and a concave surface portion C2 concaved along the axis near the axis It is arrange | positioned in the position used as the surface side with the side surface by the side of the opening of C1.

Thereby, the engagement between the cylindrical member 5343a and the engagement convex portion A1a can be completed on the side of the support cylindrical portion P1 (lower side of FIG. 63B) than the recessed surface portion C2 (FIG. 65 (b)). reference). Therefore, in the outer side (upper side in FIG. 63 (b)) of the recessed surface portion C2, compared with the case where the e-ring is fitted to the cylindrical member 5343a,
The thickness of the e-ring can be shortened (see FIG. 65 (b)).

In addition, it is not necessary to secure a space for inserting the e-ring (a space required for placing and sliding the e-ring on a surface) in the extending direction (direction parallel to the surface) of the right disk cam 5344R. Therefore, the recess width (radial width) of the recess surface portion C2 can be reduced.
Thereby, the design freedom of the shape of the right disk cam 5344R can be improved.

The transmission shaft 5343 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 shows the transmission shaft 5343
It is a front exploded perspective view of FIG. The difference between the transmission shaft 5343 and the transmission shaft 353 in the first embodiment is a cylindrical member 5343 a.

The cylindrical member 5343a has a D-shaped fixing portion 5343a1 for fixing a disc cam 5344 formed at both ends thereof and a fixing portion 5343a1 on the left side in a front view, and a fitting groove 5343a3.
A clutch operating portion 5343a2 having a D-shaped cross section formed from the same cross-sectional shape as the fixing portion 5343a1 with a groove between which the e-ring is fitted and the disc cam 534 by the e-ring
In the case where the disc cam 5344 is inserted until it reaches the inset groove 5343a3 for positioning in the axial direction of 4 and the e-ring inserted in the inset groove 5343a3, the engagement convex of the holding arm A1 An engagement groove 5343a4, which is a groove engaged with the portion A1a, is mainly provided. In the assembled state, the fitting grooves 5343a3 are disposed on the outside in the left-right direction of a pair of plates in which the shaft support holes 341b are bored.

The clutch operation portion 5343a2 is a portion inserted into the fixed angle hole 343c1 of the movable clutch 343c, and in the assembled state, is a portion where the movable clutch 343c slides by the biasing force of the coil spring 343d.

Since the e-ring is used to form a portion where the diameter is partially increased in the cylindrical member 5343a by later inserting the e-ring into the insertion groove 5343a3, the cylinder is inserted before the e-ring is inserted. The diameter of the member 5343a can be made uniform.

With this diameter being uniform, a predetermined amount of cylindrical member 5343a is inserted into the axial support hole 341b (see FIG. 62), and then the e-ring is fitted, whereby the axial direction of the cylindrical member 5343a with respect to the axial support hole 341b by the e-ring In addition, the e-ring can prevent the axial displacement of the disk cam 5344.

According to the above-described configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343, the disk cam 5344
Can be assembled to the transmission shaft 5343 with one touch. That is, in the case where the disc cam 5344 is assembled to the transmission shaft 5343, the cylindrical member 5343 a is one of the end portions of the support cylindrical portion P1 of the disc cam 5344 on the side on which the engagement convex portion A1 a is disposed. From the opposite end, the engagement groove 5
343a4 is inserted to a position where the engagement convex portion A1a is fitted. At this time, the engagement groove 5343a4
Before the insertion of the engaging convex portion A1a into a position where the engaging convex portion A1a is inserted, the distal end portion of the cylindrical member 5343a is inserted between the engaging convex portions A1a, so that the pair of engaging convex portions A1a can expand the distance between each other. The clamping arm A1 elastically deforms in a manner. Thereafter, when the front end of the cylindrical member 5343a passes the engagement convex portion A1a, the engagement convex portion A1a and the engagement groove 5343a4 are disposed opposite to each other, and the engagement convex portion A1a is fitted into the engagement groove 5343a4. Thus, the holding arm A1 elastically recovers, and the disc cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 are assembled (see FIG. 65 (b)).

On the other hand, the configuration of the disk cam 5344 and the transmission shaft 5343 serves not only as a one-touch assembly but also as a structure for preventing breakage in this embodiment. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 65 and 66.

FIG. 65 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R in the arrow LXVa direction view of FIG. 62, and FIG. 65 (b) is a right disk cam 53 at line LXVb-LXVb in FIG.
FIG. 65 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the right disk cam 5344R taken along line LXVc-LXVc in FIG. 65 (a). 66 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 5344R viewed in the direction of arrow LXVa in FIG. 62, and FIG. 66 (b) is L in FIG. 66 (a).
It is sectional drawing of the right disk cam 5344R in a XVIb-LXVIb line | wire.

In FIG. 66, the right disk cam 5344R after deformation in the case where the player overloads the non disk loaded right disk cam 5344R shown in FIG. 65 is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 65 and 66, in the present embodiment, the cylindrical member 5343a is supported by the extended tip end portion of the support cylindrical portion P1 at a position separated from the disk portion of the right disk cam 5344R. In the vicinity of the portion, the engagement convex portion A1a only engages with the engagement groove 5343a4. Therefore, when an overload is applied to the cylindrical member 5343a or the right disk cam 5344R, the cylindrical member 5343a is configured to be capable of axial collapse with the extended distal end portion of the support cylindrical portion P1 as an axis.

As shown in FIG. 65 (b), since the space of the long hole concave portion C1 is disposed in the direction in which the pair of holding arms A1 oppose each other, the resistance of the axial tilt displacement of the cylindrical member 5343a is reduced. While
As shown in FIG. 65 (c), in the direction in which the support cylindrical portion P1 and the connection pin 344d are connected,
The cylindrical member 5343a and the right disk cam 5344R are in contact with each other in the axial direction of the right disk cam 5344R, so that the resistance of the shaft falling displacement of the cylinder member 5343a is increased.

Therefore, when an overload is given to the right disk cam 5344 R by, for example, the player forcibly pressing (pulling up) the tilting device 310 (displacement of the connecting pin 344 d via the arm member 345 (see FIG. 62)). Of the right disk cam 5344 R relative to the cylindrical member 5343 a can be restricted.

That is, since the right disk cam 5344R is deformed in the direction of smaller resistance, as shown in FIG.
As shown in (a) and FIG. 66 (b), when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded,
The disc portion is axially collapsed and deformed about a support axis r1 connecting the connecting pin 344d and the center of the support cylindrical portion P1 on a surface parallel to the surface of the disc portion. Thereby, the tip position of the connecting pin 344d is in the circumferential direction of the right disc cam 5344R as compared with the position shown in FIG.
Displace.

67 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along the line corresponding to line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 67 (b) is operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIb in FIG. 67 (a) FIG. 26 is a partial rear view of device 5300. In FIG. 67 (b), the protective cover device 350 is omitted, and only the disk cam 5344, the arm member 345 and the release member 346 are shown. Further, in FIG. 67 (a), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 is illustrated by a solid line, overload is given, and shaft collapse occurs. The outline of the condition is shown in phantom.

In FIG. 67 (a), the second state of the tilting device 310 is shown, the hand of the player holding the tilting device 310 is shown, and the state near the connecting pin 344d is shown enlarged. .

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) starts to operate, the left disk cam 5344L is likely to start rotating, but the player restricts the displacement of the tilting device 310. As a result, a load occurs between the arm member 345 trying to stay in place and the connecting pin 344d of the left disc cam 5344L that is about to rotate. Since the right disk cam 5344 R can perform the above-described shaft collapse deformation when this load occurs, the load can be alleviated.

In FIG. 67 (a), the outer shape of the right disk cam 5344R after its axis tilt deformation is illustrated by an imaginary line. The change of the connection mode with the arm member 345 due to the shaft tilting deformation will be described with reference to the enlarged view.

In FIG. 67 (a), when the outer periphery of the right disk cam 5344R is rotated clockwise by the dimension Rd by the start of the operation of the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62), only the dimension Rd,
The axial support hole 345a of the arm member 345 and the connection pin 344d will be misaligned,
In order to absorb this, the right disk cam 5344R is subjected to axial tilt deformation.

67A, the connecting pin 344d falls in the direction perpendicular to the paper surface of FIG. 67A. Therefore, the center Pb on the base side of the connecting pin 344d and the center Pt on the tip end of the protruding pin are right circles. It is displaced along the circumferential direction of the plate cam 5344R. This misalignment is the right disk cam 534
Since positional deviation between the connecting pin 344d and the arm member 345 due to rotation of the 4R dimension Rd can be partially absorbed, the drive motor 342 (while the tilting device 310 is held)
When driving (see FIG. 62), the load applied to the drive motor 342 can be alleviated.

As shown in FIG. 67 (b), the disc cam 5344 and the release member 346 come into contact with each other in face contact due to the axis camber deformation of the disc cam 5344. As a result, the driving force of the drive motor 342 is consumed by the frictional force generated between the release member 346 and the disc cam 5344. Therefore, the drive motor 342 is driven in a state where the player holds and holds the tilting device 310. In this case, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 67 (a), when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the backward direction (arrow CW direction), the release member 346 is pushed upward by the frictional force, but in a direction to repel it, the second spring The elastic force of SP 2 acts on the disc cam 5344 via the release member 346. In this case, the rotation claw member 347 is stopped by the movement of the bottom plate 5321 and stops.
The state of the first spring SP1 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

On the other hand, when the disk cam 5344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (arrow CCW direction, see FIG. 68), the release member 346 is pushed downward by the frictional force, but the elastic force of the first spring SP1 in the direction to repel it. Disc cam 5344 through the release member 346 and the rotating claw member 347
Act on. In this case, since the relative positional relationship between the rotation claw member 347 and the release member 346 does not change, the state of the second spring SP2 does not change (the elastic force does not change).

Therefore, when the releasing member 346 and the disc cam 5344 abut against each other and the releasing member 346 operates along the operating direction of the disc cam 5344, the first member does not depend on the rotational direction of the disc cam 5344.
Disc cam 5344 within the elastic force of either spring SP1 or second spring SP2
The elastic force acting on the disc cam 5344 can be increased in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the disc.
Thus, the load exerted by the release member 346 on the disc cam 5344 can be increased.
Since the amount of consumption of the driving force of the drive motor 342 can be increased, the arm member 34
The load applied to 5 can be reduced regardless of the rotational direction of the disk cam 5344.

In the present embodiment, since the right disk cam 5344R is formed in a line symmetrical shape with respect to a straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point (a direction perpendicular to the straight line passing through the connecting pin 344d and the central point In the same manner, regardless of the rotational direction of the right disk cam 5344R (regardless of the displacement direction of the connecting pin 344d with respect to the arm member 345), the right disk cam 5344R is similarly deformed. The shaft can be deformed by resistance.

68 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the operating device 5300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 6 (a), and FIG. 68 (b) is an operation in the direction of arrow LXVIIIb in FIG. 68 (a) FIG. 26 is a partial rear view of device 5300. In FIG. 68 (b), the protective cover device 350 is omitted. Also, in FIG. 68 (a), to facilitate understanding,
The outline of the right disk cam 5344R vertically inserted into and fixed to the transmission shaft 5343 of the right disk cam 5344R is illustrated by a solid line, and the outline of a state in which an overload is given and the axis is collapsed is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIG. 68 (a), the tilting device 310 is driven from the second state by the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) and falls down by an angle D2, and the tilting device 310 is operated in the middle of the operation of the drive motor 342. The player's hand holding the is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 68A, when the player holds the tilting device 310 during the operation of the tilting device 310, the right disk cam 5344 is used regardless of whether the tilting device 310 is in the second state or not.
The tip of the connection pin 344d can be displaced in the circumferential direction of the right disk cam 5344R by the axial fall of R, thereby reducing the load generated between the arm member 345 and the right disk cam 5344R. The load applied to the drive motor 342 can be reduced.

The items described as the right disk cam 5344R are items that apply to the left disk cam 5344L as well.

As shown in FIGS. 67 (b) and 68 (b), according to the present embodiment, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 62) operates in a state where the player holds the tilting device 310, causing an overload. When,
The right disk cam 5344R tilts in the axial direction.

Therefore, by detecting the degree of tilting movement in the axial direction, it is possible to notice the occurrence of an overload early. That is, for example, according to the configuration of the first embodiment, the drive motor 34
If 2 is driven during a period in which the right disk cam 344R rotates once, the detection hole 3 of the right disk cam 344R
Although the 44eR passes the right side detection sensor 353R, the right disk cam 344R does not rotate even if the drive motor 342 is rotated when the player holds the tilting device 310,
Since the detection hole 344eR does not pass through the right side detection sensor 353R and the input to the right side detection sensor 353R does not change, it is detected that an overload occurs.

In this case, until the occurrence of an overload is detected, the right disc cam 3 in the state where no overload occurs.
Since a period required to rotate 44 R by a predetermined angle is required, there is a problem that the detection of the overload is delayed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, when the right disk cam 5344R is overloaded and the right disk cam 5344R is tilted with respect to the axial direction (see FIG. 66 (b)) Occurrence can be detected. Therefore, the occurrence of overload can be detected early. As a method of detection, for example, the engagement rib 34 is provided between the support cylinder P1 and the engagement rib 344c.
The method by the notification device E1 fixed to 4c is illustrated (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 66 (a))
.

The notification device E1 is a detection device that outputs a signal when an object contacts the input unit, and is disposed in a pair at a position where a straight line connecting the pair of holding arms A1 intersects the engagement rib 344c. And the input portion is disposed in such a manner as to project toward the support cylindrical portion P1. The notification device E1 and the support cylindrical portion P1 are separated in the unloaded state (see FIG. 65 (b)), and the notification device E1 and the support cylindrical portion P1 are formed in contact with each other in the overloaded state (FIG. 66 (b)). Thus, by determining the output from the notification device E1, it is possible to quickly determine whether the disk cam 5344 is overloaded.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 73, an operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344d, and the engagement rib 344c are integrally formed has been described. However, the operation device 6300 in the sixth embodiment includes the disc cam 344 and the engagement rib 344c and other members are configured to be rotatable relative to each other. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. First, the difference in configuration from the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. FIG.

69 is an exploded front perspective view of the drive device 6340 in the sixth embodiment, and FIG. 70 is a front exploded perspective view of the disc member 6344L1, the ring member 6344L2, and the second transmission member 6348 of the left disc cam 6344L. It is. Although the right disk cam 6344R is also different from the configuration of the first embodiment, the right disk cam 6344R is configured in a mirror-like shape with respect to the left disk cam 6344L, so the description of the left disk cam 6344L The description of the right disk cam 6344 R is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 69, the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the configuration of the left disk cam 6344L and the shape of the fixing member 6342a, and a second transmission device 6348 is added.

The left disk cam 6344L has a circular rib 344b connecting pin 344d, as in the first embodiment.
And a detection hole 344eL, and a disc member 6344L1 pivotally supported by the cylindrical member 343a.
And a ring member 3344L2 that is supported coaxially with the disk member 6344L1 and rotates relative to the disk member 6344L1.

The disc member 3344L1 has an annular shape in the axial direction at a position where the central shaft portion 344a of the first embodiment is disposed at the center position of the disc portion and radially outward from the outer peripheral portion of the circular rib 344b. An annular rib 6344f is provided so as to be convexly provided along.

The ring member 3344L2 has the same outer periphery diameter as the engagement rib 344c in the first embodiment, and an annular main body 6344g configured by a ring shape whose inner periphery diameter is slightly larger than the outer periphery diameter of the circular rib 344b A cover plate portion 6344h which is disposed at an axial end of the ring body 6344g and which covers the opening of the ring shape of the ring body 3344g, and the thickness increases from the cover plate portion 6344h to the opposite side of the ring body 6344g And receiving gear teeth 6344i disposed radially outward at the thickened portion.

The inner circumferential diameter of the annular main body 6344g is formed larger than the outer circumferential diameter of the circular rib 344b, so that in the assembled state, the annular main body 3344g is externally fitted to the circular rib 344b to form the central shaft portion 344a. The ring member 3344L2 is supported so as to be relatively rotatable about the

In addition, the end face of the disk member 3344L1 side of the axial direction of the annular main body 3344g is the annular rib 63.
Contact 44f. Thus, the annular rib 3344f is not formed, and the disc member 634
The contact area can be reduced and the frictional resistance can be reduced, as compared with the case of contact with 4L1. Accordingly, relative rotation between the disk member 3344L1 and the ring member 3344L2 can be smoothly performed.

The receiving gear teeth 6344i are engaged with the reduction transmission gear 6348c of the second transmission device 6348. Therefore, based on the rotation of the second transmission device 6348, the ring member 3344L2 rotates. In the present embodiment, the number of rotations of the ring member 3344L2 is equal to that of the disk member 6344L1.
Of the number of rotations of the disk (when the ring member 3344L2 makes three revolutions, the disc member 63
The number of teeth of the second transmission gear 6348b, the reduction transmission gear 6348c, and the receiving gear teeth 6344i is set in such a manner that the 44L1 rotates once.

The second transmission device 6348 is a device rotatably supported by the fixing member 6342a along with the transmission shaft rod 343. The second transmission device 6348 is an auxiliary post member 6348 disposed in a posture parallel to the cylindrical member 343a.
a and a second of the auxiliary column members 6348a fixed thereto and meshed with the transmission gear 343b.
The transmission gear 6348 b and the ring member 63 are fixed to both ends of the auxiliary pillar 6348.
44L2 mainly includes a reduction transmission gear 6348c engaged with the reception gear tooth 6344i.

With reference to FIGS. 71 to 73, it will be described that the raising operation of the tilting device 310 is constituted by a plurality of types after the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 is removed from the first state of the tilting device 310.

FIGS. 71, 72, and 73 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 6300 along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. 71 shows a state similar to the state shown in FIG. 36. In FIG. 72, the ring member 3344R2 rotates in the backward rolling direction (arrow CW direction) from the state shown in FIG. 71 (right) , And after being rotated by more than one rotation, it is considered to be a posture rotated reversely by that amount), and the disk member 6344R1 is rotated 1/3 rotation in the backward rolling direction (arrow CW direction) Is illustrated. Further, in FIG. 73, FIG.
The ring member 3344L2 is rotated by a predetermined angle in the forward rolling direction (arrow CCW direction) from the state shown in FIG.

Here, from the state shown in FIG. 71, when the ring member 3344R2 is rotated in the forward rolling direction (arrow CCW direction) to release fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is biased by the torsion spring 315. It rises instantly and reaches the second state (see FIG. 34).

In the operation device 300 according to the first embodiment, the reaching position when the tilting device 310 ascends in an instant (without waiting for the rotation of the disk cam 344) after releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347 in the second state It was limited to the position (refer FIG. 34) arrange | positioned.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the disc member 3344R1 and the ring member 3344R2 rotate relative to each other, the connecting pin 344d, which is a supporting portion of the arm member 345 connected to the tilting device 310, and the engagement rib 344c. Can change the relative relationship of the
It is possible to increase the types of arrival positions of 0.

That is, when releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG.
10 instantaneously ascends due to the biasing force of the torsion spring 315, and reaches a state of being tilted downward by an angle D6 than the second state (see FIG. 73). Thus, the tilting device 310 is instantaneous (disk cam in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 71 and in the case of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. Without waiting for 344 rotation)
You can change the position to rise and reach.

Thereby, for example, when configuring the gaming machine in a mode in which the degree of expectation of the effect is changed by the difference in height at which the tilting device 310 instantaneously rises and reaches from the first state, the attentional power of the tilting device 310 It can be improved. In this case, it is not limited whether to increase the degree of expectation that the tilting device 310 rises higher or to increase the degree of expectation of the lower reaching position of the tilting device 310 to the lower one.

However, the elevation reaching position of the normal tilting device 310 is suppressed low (see FIG. 73), and the expectation is achieved by reaching the second state (see FIG. 34) when the expectation is maximum. And the amount of displacement by which the player pushes the tilting device 310 can be associated, and the player can easily understand the difference in the degree of expectation due to the displacement of the tilting device 310.

In this case, the player can be motivated to confirm to which position the tilting device 310 is moving up, so the movement of the tilting device 310 can be watched by the player until the operation timing of the tilting device 310. Can be driven to Therefore, the tilting device 3
Regardless of the effect mode of 10, it is possible to inhibit the game method of operating the tilting device 310 in a chaotic manner.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 74 to 85, an operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment will be described.

In the first embodiment, the case where the disc cam 344, the connection pin 344 d and the engagement rib 344 c are integrally formed has been described, but in the operation device 7300 in the seventh embodiment, the disc cam 7344 is a disc member The 7344R1 and the connection pin 344d are disposed as separate members, and these separate members are configured to be capable of forming a fixed state fixed to each other and a slid state capable of relative rotation. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals.
The explanation is omitted. First, with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75, the features of the disc cam 7344 used as a substitute for the disc cam 344 in the first embodiment will be described.

FIG. 74 (a) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the seventh embodiment, and FIG.
(B) is a rear view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 75 (a) is LX of FIG. 74 (a).
FIG. 75B is a cross sectional view of the right disk cam 7344R taken along line XVa-LXXVa.
FIG. 73 is a partial side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the direction of the arrow LXXVb in FIG. 74 (a). In addition, since the right disk cam 7344L is configured from the symmetrical shape of the mirror copy of the right disk cam 7344R, the description will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the right disk cam 7344R is a disk member 7344R having a central shaft portion 344a to which the cylinder member 343a (see FIG. 62) is inserted and fixed in the assembled state.
1 and the ring member 73 inserted along the axial direction from the opening side of the disk member 7344 R 1
44R2 and an engaging member 7 having an engaging portion 7630 which is made immovable in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1 in the assembled state and fitted in the equally-distributed concave portion 7522 of the ring member 7344R2
344R3 mainly.

The disc member 7344R1 is formed in a cup shape having a central shaft portion 344a at the center,
A detection hole 344eR is formed in a portion extending in a flange shape radially outward from the edge of the cup
And the engagement rib 344c is partially omitted (the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first
It is a member constituted from the shape which is omitted between the lead-in portion 344c2.

The disk member 7344R supports the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 of the ring member 7344R2 by a surface in an assembled state, and is a first circular recessed portion 7 which is a circular recessed portion centered on the central shaft portion 344a.
And a second circular recess 7420 which is a circular recess having a diameter smaller than that of the first circular recess 7410 and which is deep in the axial direction, and a first overhanging portion 344c1 and a first lead-in 344c2 Radially outward from an L-shaped insertion hole 7430 bored in the radial direction and a side surface on the back side of the second circular recessed portion 7420 near the insertion hole 7430 (the outer peripheral side of the disc member 7344R1) And a fixing protrusion 7440 which is provided in a convex manner.

The insertion hole 7430 is located at an intermediate position between the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first lead-in portion 344c2.
From the bottom end of the first elongated hole 7341 which is a rectangular elongated elongated portion extending in the axial direction of the disc member 7344R1 at the shifted position, and the first elongated hole 7341 of the disc member 7344R1 A second long hole 74 which is a rectangular long hole portion extended along the circumferential direction of the disk member 7344R1.
32 and a second long hole 74 with the first long hole 7431 side of the lower end portion of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum
And a return portion 7433 configured to project to the 32 side.

The dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the second long hole 7432 is smaller than the dimension in the width direction (short side direction) of the first long hole 7431, and the width of the engagement portion 7630 of the engagement member 7344R3. direction(
Smaller than the dimension in the short direction).

The return portion 7433 is configured to be elastically deformable with the lower end portion (the lower end portion in FIG. 75B) of the second long hole 7432 as a fulcrum. Due to this elastic deformation, the return portion 7433 is moved to the second elongated hole 743.
It is formed to be movable outward of two.

The fixing protrusion 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1 of the engagement member 7344R3 and has a convex height sufficient to fix the position of the coil spring SC1.

Next, the ring member 7344R2 will be described with reference to FIG. Fig. 76 (a)
Is a front view of the ring member 7344R2, and FIG. 76 (b) is a ring member 7344R2
76C is a side view of the ring member 7344R2 as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIc in FIG. 76A.

As shown in FIGS. 76 (a) to 76 (c), the ring member 7344R2 is connected to the connecting pin 3
A ring plate portion 7510 having a ring plate shape and a ring plate portion 7510 on which the 44 d is projected.
And a thick portion 7520 which is extended in the thickness direction of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 and in which a star-shaped through hole is formed at the central portion.

The ring-shaped plate portion 7510 has a thickness equal to the depth of the first circular recess 7410 and an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the first circular recess 7410. Ru. Thereby, in the assembled state, the axes of the ring member 7344R2 and the disk member 7344R1 can be made to coincide with each other, and the resistance of relative rotation can be prevented from becoming excessive.

In the thick portion 7520, the extension length from the side surface of the ring-shaped plate portion 7510 is a length that does not interfere with the second long hole 7432 in the assembled state (see FIG. 75A), and the outer peripheral diameter Is slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of the second circular recess 7420. Thus, in the assembled state, the engagement member 7344R3 can be operated in the radial direction (vertical direction in FIG. 75A) while preventing the resistance of the relative rotation between the ring member 7344R2 and the disc member 7344R1 from becoming excessive. can do.

The thick-walled portion 7520 is formed into an irregular shaped through hole 7521 bored along the axial direction, and the irregular shaped through hole 7521 is concaved radially outward at equal intervals in the circumferential direction (five equal parts in this embodiment). And an equal-portion recessed portion 7522 to be provided.

The shape of the deformed through hole 7521 is such that the inner circumferential shape thereof is arranged radially outward of the engaging portion 7630 when the engaging member 7344R3 described later is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1. Configured

FIG. 77 (a) is a front view of the engagement member 7344R3, and FIG. 77 (b) is a front view of FIG. 77 (a).
In the direction of arrow LXXVIIb).

As shown in FIGS. 77 (a) and 77 (b), in the assembled state (see FIG. 74 (b)), the engagement member 7344R3 has the radial outside of the first overhang portion 344c1 and the first lead-in portion 344c2. As shown in FIG. 77 (see FIG. 77), the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 is disposed in the
b) an extending portion 7620 extending in the thickness direction from the right end portion, and an engagement extending along the front-rear direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 77 (b)) from the extending end of the extending portion 7620 A portion 7630 and a coil spring CS1 formed of a coil spring disposed on the side facing the engaging portion 7630 of the arc-shaped plate portion 7610 are mainly included.

The arcuate plate portion 7610 is provided with a spring fixing projection 7611 which is a projection into which the coil spring CS1 is fitted at a position facing the tip of the engaging portion 7630 on the side surface on the inner peripheral side.

The extension portion 7620 is a portion inserted into the second elongated hole 7432 in the assembled state, and
When the coil spring CS1 is pushed radially inward in opposition to the elastic force of the coil spring CS1, the extending tip end is configured to have an extending length which protrudes inward from the inner peripheral surface of the ring member 7344R2.

The engaging portion 7630 has a dimension in the width direction slightly shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the first elongated hole 7431, and extends in a length passing through the deformed through hole 7521 of the thick portion 7520 in the assembled state. (See FIG. 75 (a)).

As described later, the engaging member 7344R3 has both a function as a member that receives a load from the release member 346 and a displacement, and a function of positioning the ring member 7344R2 with respect to the disc member 7344R1. Therefore, the number of members can be reduced.

A method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 78 (a)
Is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R, and FIG. 78 (b) is an arrow LXX of FIG. 78 (a).
FIG. 78 (c) is a front view of the right disk cam 7344R in the VIIIb direction view, and FIG. 78 (d) is an arrow LXXVIII in FIG. 78 (c).
FIG. 78 (e) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R in the d direction, and FIG.
FIG. 78 (f) is a front view of the 344R, and FIG. 78 (f) is a side view of the right disk cam 7344R as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXVIIIf in FIG. 78 (e).

In FIGS. 78 (a), 78 (b), 78 (c) and 78 (d), the disc member 7 is not shown.
A state in which only the engaging member 7344R3 is inserted into the 344R1 is illustrated, and in FIG. 78 (e) and FIG. 78 (f), the ring member 7344R2 and the engaging member 7344 are attached to the disk member 7344R1.
A state in which R3 is inserted is illustrated. Also, to facilitate understanding, FIG. 78 (b),
In FIG. 78 (d) and FIG. 78 (f), the circular plate portion 7610 and the coil spring CS1 are not shown.

As a method of assembling the right disk cam 7344R, first, the engagement member 734 is attached to the first long hole 7431.
The engaging part 7630 of 4R3 is inserted (refer FIG. 78 (a) and FIG. 78 (b)). As described above, since the dimension in the width direction of the second elongated hole 7432 is shorter than the dimension in the width direction of the engaging portion 7630, the engaging portion 7630 is erroneously inserted into the second elongated hole 7432. It can be prevented. Therefore, assembly errors can be prevented.

Next, along the extending direction of the second elongated holes 7432, in the depth direction of FIG.
The engaging member 7344R3 is slidingly moved to a position where the positions of 630 and the fixing projection 7440 coincide with each other.

At the position after this movement, the fixing projection 7440 is inserted into the coil spring CS1, and the engagement member 7344R3 suppresses the positional deviation of the disc member 7344R1 in the circumferential direction (the left and right direction in FIG. 78). The member 7344R3 can be held immovably in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1.

In addition, the movement of the engagement member 7344R3 in the circumferential direction is restricted by the return portion 7433. This will be described. First, in a state in which the engaging portion 7630 is inserted into the first long hole 7431, the return portion 7433 is driven outward of the second long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (b)). Subsequently, when the engaging member 7344R3 is slid in the extending direction of the second elongated hole 7342, the vertical contact between the engaging member 7344R3 and the return portion 7433 is released, and the return portion 7433 is moved by the elastic recovery force. It enters into the long hole 7432 (see FIG. 78 (d)).

In the state in which the second long hole 7432 is inward, the tip end of the return portion 7433 abuts on the extending portion 7620 of the engagement member 7344R3, but the contact direction is the longitudinal direction of the return portion 7433 (the deformation resistance is large (See FIG. 78 (d)), movement of the extension portion 7620 (movement to the right in FIG. 78 (f)) is suppressed. Thereby, the engagement member 73
Since the circumferential movement of 44R3 can be limited, it is possible to prevent the position of the engaging member 7344R3 from shifting during operation.

Once the engaging member 7344R3 is held by the disk member 7344R1, the engaging member 734 is thereafter engaged.
In a state where 4R3 is pushed inward in the radial direction of the disk member 7344R1, the disk member 734
The ring member 7344R2 is inserted from the opening side of 4R1. By releasing the load from the engagement member 7344 R 3, the engagement portion 7630 moves in the radially outward direction D 7 by the elastic force of the coil spring CS 1. By this movement, the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated in the equally-divided recess 7522 of the ring member 7344R2, whereby the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disc member 7344R1.

The right disk cam 7344R can be easily assembled by the process described above. Note that
The right disc cam 7344L is configured to have a symmetrical shape of a mirror copy of the right disc cam 7344R, and can be assembled in the same process as the right disc cam 7344R.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81, the operation of the engaging member 7344R3 when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction will be described. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81 are partial cross-sectional views of the operation device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 79 (a), FIG. 79 (b), FIG. 80 (a), FIG. 80 (b) and FIG.
And the disk cam 7344 is illustrated as a center, and illustration of other unnecessary parts is omitted.

The rotating claw member 7347 in the present embodiment differs from the first embodiment in the length of the guide long hole 7347b. That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the raised position when the engagement rib 344c abuts from below and passes through, the convex pin 346b becomes the movement end.

The release member 7346 differs from the first embodiment in that the rear upper portion (upper right portion in FIG. 80A) of the main body portion is obliquely cut in order to minimize interference with the engagement rib 344c.

In FIGS. 79 (a), 79 (b), 80 (a), 80 (b) and 81, the disc cam 7344 rotates in the backward direction (clockwise in FIG. 79 (a)). Are illustrated in chronological order.

In FIG. 79 (a), the release member 7346 is an engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R.
Is in contact and the release member 7346 starts to rotate, and in FIG. 79 (b), the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 79 (a), and FIG.
In (a), the state in which the engaging member 7344R3 is pushed into the disc member 7344R1 and pushed to the end is illustrated, and in M6-2 (b), the disc member 73 is removed from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the 44R1 is further rotated in the backward direction is illustrated. In FIG. 81, the right disk cam 7344R is rotated in the backward direction from the state shown in FIG. 80 (b), and the engagement member 7344R3 is the release member 7
The situation after leaving 346 is illustrated. 79 (a), 79 (b) and 80.
In (a) and FIG. 80 (b), a state (a small angle state) in which the release member 7346 has reached the end of the relative rotatable range with respect to the rotary claw member 7347 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the state immediately after the engagement member 7344R3 and the release member 7346 start contact, the elastic force of the coil spring CS1 is set larger than the elastic force of the second spring SP2. And the engaging member 7344R3 is not pushed inward,
The state of projecting outward is maintained.

As shown in FIG. 79 (b), the release member 734 is provided on the side surface of the outermost diameter of the engagement member 7344R3.
In a state where the six engaging portions 346d abut on each other, the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347 are set to a small angle state.

In this embodiment, in the small angle state where the release member 7346 rotates in the forward direction and the rotating claw member 7347 is pressed against the side surface of the insertion hole 321c of the lower frame member 320, the arc plate 7610 Inner circumferential surface and first overhang portion 344c1 of engagement rib 344c and first lead-in portion 3
The disc cam 7344 is disposed in such a positional relationship that the outer peripheral surface of the engagement member 7344R3 rubs against the release member 346 in a state where the 44c2 is in contact with the 44c2 (see FIG. 80A).

That is, as shown in FIG. 80 (a), when the disc cam 7344 is rotated, the release member 7346 is rotated toward the small angle state, and when it is in a state where it can not rotate any more (small angle state), the release member From 7346, a load is applied to the engaging member 7344R3 to push the engaging member 7344R3 radially inward of the disc cam 7344.

Then, as shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the state where the engaging member 7344R3 protrudes radially outward, the rotation in the backward direction can not be continued, so based on the rotation of the disk cam 7344. The engagement member 7344R3 is pushed radially inward (see FIG. 80 (a)). In this pushed-in state, the engaging portion 7630 is disposed radially inward of the minimum diameter portion of the deformed through hole 7521.

Therefore, the load in the circumferential direction is not transmitted to the ring member 7344R2 via the engaging portion 7630, and hence, as shown in FIG. 80 (b), the disc member 734 is not shown from the state shown in FIG. 80 (a).
Even when 4R1 is rotated, the ring member 7344R2 does not follow the rotation and maintains the posture.

Due to the deviation of the amount of rotation, the engaging portion 7630 is one equal-portion recessed portion 75 originally disposed.
As it moves from the point 22 to another equal-portion recessed portion 7522, the phase of the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 relatively rotates by an amount (72 degrees) of one recessed portion.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81, when the right disk cam 7344R is further rotated, the engagement member 73 is engaged.
Since the contact between 44 R 3 and the release member 7346 is released, the engagement member 7344 R 3 is projected radially outward, and the engagement portion 7630 is again accommodated in the equal-portion recessed portion 75 22. In this process, the equally-portioned recessed portion 7522 in which the engaging portion 7630 is accommodated is displaced by one.

That is, by progressing the process shown in FIG. 79 (a) to FIG. 81, the arrangement of the engagement rib 344c and the arrangement of the connection pin 344d arranged on the ring member 7344R2 are equally divided concave portions 7522. It can be relatively shifted by the arrangement interval (72 degrees) of the indented portion.

Referring to FIG. 82, engaging member 73 when disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rolling direction.
The operation of the 44R3 will be described. 82 (a), 82 (b), 83 (a) and 8
3 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 82, the release member 7346, the rotary claw member 7347, and the disc cam 7344 are illustrated as a center, and the illustration of the other unnecessary portions is omitted.

In FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), a state in which the disk cam 7344 rotates in the forward rolling direction (counterclockwise direction in FIG. 82 (a)) is illustrated in time series. In FIG. 82 (a), the release member 734
6 shows the state immediately before the engagement member 7344R3 of the right disk cam 7344R abuts, and in FIG. 82 (b), the engagement member 7344R3 abuts on the release member 7346 to start lowering. In FIG. 83 (a), the disc cam 7344 is further rotated in the forward rolling direction from the state shown in FIG. 82 (b). In FIG. 83 (b), the releasing member 7346 and A state after the engagement member 7344R is separated is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a) to FIG. 83 (b), when the disc cam 7344 rotates in the forward rolling direction, the releasing member 7346 and the rotating claw member 7347 rotate in the backward direction (FIG. 82 (a) clock). When rotating in the rotating direction, there is no member that restricts the movement of the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 7347, and the elastic force of the first spring SP1 causes the release member 7346 and the rotation claw member 734 to
7 can only be loaded in the forward direction.

Therefore, no load is generated to push the engagement member 7344R3 radially inward, and the engagement member 7344 is engaged from when the engagement member 7344R3 abuts against the release member 7346 until it is separated.
R3 maintains the radially outward projecting state. Therefore, when the disk cam 7344 is rotated in the forward direction, relative rotation between the disk member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be prevented.

By switching the rotational direction of the disc cam 7344 from these configurations, the disc member 7 is
Whether or not the 344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 rotate relative to each other can be switched. Therefore, in the rotational direction (see FIGS. 82 and 83) in which relative rotation does not occur, it is possible to repeatedly perform the effect of tilting the tilting device 310 with the same tilting width as in the first embodiment, Unlike the first embodiment, the tilt width of the tilt device 310 can be changed in the rotational direction (see FIGS. 79, 80 and 81) causing relative rotation.

Further, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the disk member 7344R1 for relatively rotating the disk member 744R1 and the ring member 7344R2 is opposite to the direction of releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 7347 (the direction not releasing the fixing). Since they coincide with each other, the tilting device 310 is in the first state (FIG. 84).
The disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 can be rotated relative to each other in the state (the posture is kept constant) maintained (see reference).

As a result, a state in which the player does not pay attention (a state in which the tilting device 310 is stopped) is
It can be used as a state for changing the relative attitude between the disc member 7344R1 and the ring member 7344R2 where the player can not see it.

With reference to FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, it will be described that a plurality of types of modes can be formed in which the tilting device 310 is operated to rise from the first state. 84 and 85 are cross-sectional views of the operating device 7300 taken along the line corresponding to the line XXII-XXII in FIG. In FIG. 84, by releasing the fixation by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 is immediately changed from the first state to the second state shown in FIG. 7 (b) (disc cam 7344).
Of the ring member 7344R2 is fixed to the disk member 7344R1 in a phase relationship that can be displaced (without rotating the disc), and in FIG. 85, from the state shown in FIG.
A state in which the ring member 7344R2 is rotated relative to the disk member 7344R1 by one of the equally-divided portions 7522 through the process described in FIG. 79 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 84 and 85,
In either case, the state in which the second overhang portion 344c3 abuts on the engaging portion 346d is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 84 and 85, according to the present embodiment, the rotating claw member 347 is in the first state.
By releasing the fixing by the above, it is possible to change the moving range in which the tilting device 310 moves immediately (without rotating the disk cam 7344R2).

That is, from the state shown in FIG. 84, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 310 moves to the second state (the state where the tilting device 310 is moved to the uppermost end of the movement range).

On the other hand, when the fixing is released by rotating the rotating claw member 347 from the state shown in FIG. 85, the position of the connecting pin 344d is displaced rearward and downward relative to the position shown in FIG. It moves to the state sunk below 2 states.

Therefore, by releasing the fixing by the rotating claw member 347, the tilting device 3 can be started from the first state.
It is possible to change the position reached 10 (without the rotation of the disk cam 7344) immediately by the upward movement. As a result, the types of effects produced by the operation of the tilting device 310 can be increased, and the power of attention as the effect device of the operation device 7300 can be improved.

Next, a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 179.

In the first embodiment, the front side of the operation device 300 is exposed. However, the pachinko machine 8010 in the eighth embodiment includes the cover 370 that covers the lower portion of the operation device 300 from the front side. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the paper front side is referred to as the front (front) side, and the paper back side is referred to as the rear (back) side. With respect to the pachinko machine 8010 in the state shown in FIG. 86, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left (left Each side will be described. Furthermore, arrows U-D, L-R, and F-B in the figure (see, for example, FIG. 86) are pachinko machines 8010.
The vertical direction, the left and right direction, and the front and back direction of are shown. Also, the definition of this direction is shown in FIG.
The same applies to the description with reference to the previous drawings.

First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 8010 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 90. FIG. 86 is a front view of a pachinko machine 8010 according to the eighth embodiment, and FIG.
FIG. 88 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is opened (expanded) with respect to the outer frame 11, and FIG. 88 is a view showing the back pack 92 in the state where the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11. Inner frame 1
FIG. 89 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state (deployed) open to two, and FIG.
FIG. 90 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 8010 showing a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is opened (expanded), and FIG. 90 is a pachinko in a state in which the front frame 14 is removed. 80 is a front view of the machine 8010. FIG. In FIG. 90, for convenience, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board 13 are omitted.

  The outer frame 11 is formed in a frame shape in which wooden plate members are used as upper and lower sides and aluminum plate members are used as left and right sides. The pachinko machine 8010 is installed in the game arcade by fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. In the pachinko machine 8010, the outer frame 11 is not an essential component and has the same inner shape as the outer frame 11 or the outer frame 11, and the inner frame 12 support structure (hinge 18 etc.) of the outer frame 11 and the locking structure It is good also as composition provided with the member which it has to the game arcade.

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12 and the left side is a rotation base end side (opening and closing base end side) in front view, and the right side is a rotation tip end side It is possible to turn forward as (opening and closing tip side).

Further, as shown in FIG. 88, the back pack unit 94 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 12, and the left side is a rotation base end side (opening and closing base end side) in a front view, and the right side is rotated. It can be pivoted backward as a moving tip side (opening and closing tip side).

As shown in FIG. 87, the inner frame 12 is provided with a locking mechanism 20RK at its rotating tip and functions to lock the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 to the outer frame 11 so as not to be opened. And, the front frame 14 has a function to lock the inner frame 12 so as not to be opened. In each of these locking states, as shown in FIG. 86, a dedicated key is inserted into the key hole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 of the locking mechanism 20RK exposed on the front face of the pachinko machine 8010 to perform the unlocking operation. It is canceled by each.

The front frame 14 is rotatably attached to the front side of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 86, front door mounting brackets 57, 58 are provided on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, and the front door mounting brackets 57, 58 (the metal fitting 57 is a cylindrical portion, and the metal fitting 58 is a shaft When the metal plate having a hole is engaged with the inner frame 12, the front frame 14 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 12.

In detail, the front door mounting bracket 57 is extended from the front end of the inner frame 12 to the front side at the lower position of the hinge 19 on the upper side of the inner frame 12 and the front door mounting bracket 57 is inside from the tip to the rear side It is pivotally supported by a shaft support plate portion 12e having a fitting recess 12e1 (see FIG. 126) which is recessed with a fittable size. Further, the front door mounting bracket 58 is a stepped cylindrical shape projecting upward from the lower hinge 19 of the inner frame 12 (in the configuration in which cylinders having different diameters are continuously provided in the upper and lower directions) Is externally supported by the support pin 19a having a small shape).

As shown in FIG. 89, the front frame 14 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same outer shape as the inner frame 12. The front frame 14 is provided with a main body frame 14 a formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape by a metal plate. Various members (electric decoration parts 8029-8033 etc.) on the front side and the back side of the main body frame 14a
The front frame 14 is configured by fastening and fixing the units (the operation device 300, the operation handle 51, and the like).

The front frame 14 is provided with a window portion 14c which is smaller than the glass unit 16 so that the outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 16 is not exposed in a front view (see FIG. 86). This window 1
4c is covered by the glass unit 16 from the rear side, the front frame 14 to which the glass unit 16 is attached covers almost the entire area of the front side of the inner frame 12. Therefore, the game board 1
The front center portion 3 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14 c (see FIG. 89) of the front frame 14.

As shown in FIG. 89, the glass unit 16 is a fixed frame (not shown) that integrates a pair of front and rear transparent glasses 16a and 16b having transparency larger than the window portion 14c and transparency. And have. The fixed frame is a transparent glass 16a made of synthetic resin.
, 16b, and the outer peripheral edge of the transparent glass 16a, 16b is bonded to the fixed frame, so that the glass unit 16 is an integrated multilayer glass.

In addition, although the glass unit 16 is formed colorless and transparent by transparent glass 16a, 16b, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin, and it is a glass unit from the pachinko machine 8010 front. If the game area can be viewed through 16, the game area may not be colorless and transparent but may be colored and transparent.

As shown in FIG. 86, a plurality of electric decoration portions 8029 to 8033 incorporating light emitting means such as LEDs are provided around the window portion 14c in the front frame 14. These electric decoration parts 8029-8
At 033, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a jackpot or a predetermined reach. Further, the electric decoration portion 8030 on the upper side of the window portion 14c incorporates a light emitting means which is turned on at the time of a predetermined error such as a shortage of balls for discharging, and a light emitting means which is lighted during the prize ball being paid out.

Further, on the upper right side and the upper left side of the window portion 14c, a speaker cover 27 (a thin plate member formed of punching metal) covering a speaker assembly 450 to which sound effects and the like according to the game state are output is provided. . Below the window portion 14c, as shown in FIG. 86, an upper plate 17 and a lower plate 50 are disposed so as to be bulging toward the front side, and are vertically juxtaposed.

The upper tray 17 has a function of temporarily storing the gaming balls paid out from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) and guiding them to the ball firing unit 112a side while aligning them in a line. Also, lower plate 50
Has a function of storing the game balls which become surplus in the upper plate 17. A ball guide opening 53 which is opened in the front-rear direction and in which the ball is guided to the lower plate 50 is formed on the back side surface of the lower plate 50.

In addition, it is not necessary to divide the upper plate 17 and the lower plate 50 and provide a part for storing game balls in a plurality of places, and as a configuration having only one storage part where the lower plate 50 is eliminated and only the upper plate 17 is Also good.

On the front side of the upper tray 17 (the storage area of the game balls), an operation device 300 manually operated by players is provided. The operation device 300 is an operation device used when an effect corresponding to the operation of the player is performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 or the like. The operation device 300 may be provided at another portion such as the lower plate 50 and the like other than the upper plate 17,
It may be provided at a plurality of places, and may be a push button type switch as an operation method, or may be configured to be able to input information by another operation method such as a touch sensor or a non-contact type sensor.

As shown in FIG. 89, a passage forming unit 140 is attached to the back side of the front frame 14. The passage forming unit 140 is formed of a synthetic resin, and includes a front door upper tray passage portion 141 communicating with the upper tray 17, a front door side lower tray passage portion 142 communicating with the lower tray 50, and a ball passage passage 145 See FIG. 92).

At the upper corner of the passage forming unit 140 (the corner at the rotation base end side of the front frame 14), a dispensing ball receptacle part 143 which protrudes backward and is opened upward is formed. A passage inlet of the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 and a passage inlet of the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 are formed by the left and right portions 143 being divided by the partition wall 144.

The foul ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92) is a portion that forms a passage for discharging the game ball that did not reach the game area among the game balls fired from the ball firing unit 112a as the far ball to the lower tray 50.

As shown in FIG. 89, the foul ball passage portion 145 is provided with a foul ball receiving portion 146 opened upward. The balls received in the ball receiving portion 146 are discharged to the lower tray 50 after flowing down the inner passage of the ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 92). The far ball passage portion 145 may be connected to the upper plate 17 instead of the lower plate 50, and the far ball may be discharged to the upper plate 17.

Incidentally, the ball passage portion 145 joins with the ball releasing passage 147 (see FIG. 92), which is a passage through which the unfired ball flowing down from the upper plate 17 to the lower plate 50 is guided by the player performing the ball releasing operation. Formed as.

On the back side of the front frame 14, there are attached resin cover members that are fastened and fixed to upper left and right corners, and multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 that bulge out to the back side. On the front side of the multi-function cover members 171 and 172, a connector of wiring for conducting electricity to the electric decoration 8030 and the speaker assembly 450, the inner substrate of the electric decoration 8031 and 8032 along the front frame 14, and one end An electronic board to which the other end of the connector to which the parts are connected is connected is disposed, and the electronic board and the connector are covered by the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172.

In the portions of the front frame 14 covered by the multi-function cover members 171 and 172, the wiring through grooves 14h communicated to the left and right electric decorative parts 8031 and 8032 and the wiring through grooves 14h pass through the electric decorative parts 8031, 31 An electronic substrate 14i to which the wiring drawn out from 8032 is connected is formed (see FIG. 103), and the terminals of each wiring are drawn backward through the wiring through grooves 14h and inserted into the electronic substrate 14i from the back side. Be

Therefore, when the multi-function cover members 171 and 172 are removed (see FIG. 103), electricity is applied to the decorative portion 8030 and the speaker assembly 450 from the back side of the front frame 14 (from the front side of FIG. 89). It is possible to easily insert and remove the connector of the wiring to be conducted and the connector in which one end portion is connected to the internal substrate of the electric decorative portions 8031 and 8032 with respect to the electronic substrate 14i.

A multi-functional cover member 171 attached to the pivoting tip side of the front frame 14 is disposed in a pair at the top and bottom of the pivoting tip side of the inner frame 12 and holds the base plate 60 of the game board 13
The upper device of 0 (see FIG. 126) has a positional relationship facing the front and back, and can be brought into contact with each other depending on the situation, but the details will be described later.

It is a container-shaped member in which the front side formed of a resin material is opened on the back side of the front frame 14 and is disposed in contact with the front frame 14 at the lower corner and is formed between the front frame 14 The long cover member 173 which accommodates the wiring in the space is mounted from the back side. The long cover member 173 is configured to have a smaller cross-sectional area as it moves from the pivoting tip side of the front frame 14 to the pivoting base end side, and the lower wall portion 173a constituting the lower side of the space for accommodating the wiring An upper wall portion 173b which is disposed in parallel to the lower side of the front frame 14 and is disposed opposite to the upper side of the lower wall portion 173a and which constitutes the upper side of the space for accommodating the wiring coincides with the lower wall of the passage forming unit 140 Composed of shapes.

The long cover member 173 is a wall portion disposed in contact with the front frame 14 in the same manner as the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b, and on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14, the lower wall portion 173a and the upper An upwardly extending wall portion 173c is provided to extend upward from the wall portion 173b.

The upper extending wall portion 173c is curved in such a manner that the end on the side where the lower wall portion 173a and the upper wall portion 173b are continuously provided is extended in a semicircular shape toward the rotation base end side of the front frame 14. A space which can be bent in a semicircular shape in the opposite direction is further secured in the opposite direction from the upper end of the curved portion, and the movable base end side of the front frame 14 is opened at the upper end.

That is, while the wiring accommodated in the upper extending wall portion 173c is gently curved in a wave shape (wave shape corresponding to one cycle of a sine wave), rotation of the front frame 14 from the upper end position of the upper extending wall portion 173c It is projected to the proximal side. Therefore, by bending the wiring in the curved portion of the wiring, it is possible to absorb the positional change of the wiring (see FIG. 96) which occurs when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and it is possible to prevent the wiring from expanding and contracting. It is possible to reduce the possibility of disconnection of the wiring.

On the back side of the front frame 14, an upwardly extending wall portion 173c of the long cover member 173 (a front frame 14
(A portion closest to the proximal end side of the pivot) and a plate portion which is a part of the main body frame 14a and which is a plate portion elongated vertically at the proximal end side of the pivot of the front frame 14 There is disposed a reverse cup portion 178 having a reverse cup shape which opens downward.

For example, the reverse cup portion 178 spreads the pivoting base end side of the front frame 14 illegally, inserts a piano wire from near the lower hinge 18 and takes measures against the cheating which is performed by entering the game area It is. That is, even when the piano wire is inserted between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 from the vicinity of the lower hinge 18, the tip of the piano wire enters the reverse cup shape of the reverse cup portion 178 from below. Since the progress of the piano wire can be prevented, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

Further, since the reverse cup portion 178 and the long cover member 173 are formed of a resin material,
It is possible to take measures against the fraudulent acts performed by heating the tip of the piano wire. That is, when the piano wire whose tip is heated is made to enter and pressed against the reverse cup portion 178, the heat from the reverse cup portion 178
As well as being able to melt and pass through the reverse cup portion 178.
It also melts. Then, when the piano wire whose tip is heated passes through the long cover member 173, the wiring accommodated on the front side of the long cover member 173 is burnt out, so that it is detected that the wiring is broken. Can make it easier to detect fraud.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the wall portion 178a on the long cover 173 side of the reverse cup portion 178 is formed in a shape that matches the shape of the long cover member 173, and abuts on each other (adjacent). Further, since the normal to the lower surface of the reverse cup 178 in the wall 178a is directed downward, the piano wire can be pressed against the lower surface of the wall 178a when entering the reverse cup 178 from below. Since the sex can be enhanced and the long cover 173 can be melted with high probability if the reverse cup portion 178 is melted, it is possible to make it easy to detect a fraud.

The wall portion 178a has an effect of guiding the piano wire in the left and right direction when the end of the piano wire is not heated. That is, when the piano wire inserted from the gap forcibly opened on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 reaches the upper bottom of the inverted cup portion 178, if the piano wire is further inserted deeper, the tip is the wall portion It is pushed to 178a.

The wall 178a conforms to the curved portion of the upper extension wall 173c, so that if the piano wire is inserted deeper, the tip of the piano wire moves along the wall 178a and the tip of the piano wire It is guided below the lower wall portion 173a. Furthermore, even if the piano wire is inserted deeply, the front end of the piano wire travels in the space below the lower wall portion 173a toward the rotation front end side of the front frame 14 (
Since it progresses in the left-right direction, the piano wire can be prevented from reaching the game area.

In addition, since it is possible to prevent the tip of the piano wire from reaching the game area while preventing the reaction force given to the person who performs the fraudulent action through the piano wire from becoming large, for example, the lower wall portion By arranging the detection device for detecting the entry of the piano wire in the space below 173a, it is possible to make it easy to secure a wrongdoer by finding a wrongdoer before the wrongdoer escapes. .

That is, even if the piano wire is guided to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, the person who performs the injustice can not distinguish it, and therefore thinks that the piano wire is on its way to the game area . Then, until the end of the piano wire reaches the game area (for example, the window 14 c
It is possible to make the person who cheats the action of inserting the piano wire deeply further (without making the doubt that the piano wire has not been inserted properly) until the tip of the piano wire is seen from the front side. . Therefore, it is possible for a wrongdoer to be aware that the wrongdoing has been detected, and to prolong the time for the escape.

The detection device may be a device configured by a photo coupler, a magnetic sensor, or a button device. Further, the arrangement of the detection device is not limited to the space below the lower wall portion 173a, and various arrangements are permitted. For example, it may be disposed on the locking mechanism 20RK, or may be disposed on the back side of the operation handle 51. In the case of being disposed on the operation handle 51, for example, a detection device conventionally disposed on the operation handle 51 may also be used to determine the approach of the piano wire.

The ball firing unit 112 a is a device exposed to the front side when the front frame 14 is opened as shown in FIG. 89, and is provided in the front lower side portion of the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. 90, in this ball launch unit 112a, an electromagnetic launch solenoid 701 provided as a launch device, and a game ball launched by the launch solenoid 701 are made of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. Rail 730 for guiding the game ball to be emitted toward the area between
And a ball feeding device 720.

Ball feed device 720 fires game balls stored in upper tray 17 (see FIG. 89) rail 730
Supply one by one on top. In this case, the supplied gaming balls are disposed on the projecting path of the plunger 702 provided as a launch portion in the launch solenoid 701. Then, the input of an electrical signal to the firing solenoid 701 causes the plunger 702 to move to the firing rail 7.
It moves toward the game ball on 30 and the game ball is launched toward the game area. The electric actuator of the ball launch unit 112a is not limited to the launch solenoid 701, and a launch motor or the like may be used. The detailed configuration of the ball launch unit 112a will be described later.

On the left side of the inner frame 12 and on the left side of the firing rail 730, as shown in FIG. 90, a board 167 provided with a plurality of connectors CN1 to CN3 to which the countersink passage forming member 160 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are connected It is set up. The inner frame 12 is provided with a through hole penetrating in the front-rear direction a portion where the plate passage forming member 160 is provided, and the plate passage forming member 160 is fastened to the inner frame 12 so as to cover the through hole from the front side. It is fixed.

As shown in FIG. 90, the countersink passage forming member 160 has a main body upper countersink passage portion 161 and a main body lower countersink passage portion 162. The main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 are
The passage is internally open so that one end is open toward the back side so as to be able to communicate with the through-hole that penetrates the inner frame 12 in the front-rear direction, and the other end is opened downward. Form a curved passage whose direction changes by 90 degrees (changes from the front-rear direction to the up-down direction). In this configuration,
The ball dispensed from the dispensing device 133 passes through the through hole of the inner frame 12 and enters the plate passage forming member 160 from one end of the plate passage forming member 160 and is discharged from the other end.

When the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the front frame 1 is formed on the lower portion of the countersink passage forming member 160.
The dispensing ball receptacle portion 143 (see FIG. 89) of the passage forming unit 140 provided in 4 is inserted. The front door upper tray passage portion 141 is disposed below the main body upper tray passage portion 161, and the front door lower tray passage portion 142 is disposed below the main body lower tray passage portion 162.

As shown in FIG. 90, the lower side portion of the countersink passage forming member 160 is a main body side upper countersink portion 161.
And the shutter 163 which controls the outflow of the game ball from the main body side lower plate passage part 162 is provided. The shutter 163 narrows the outlet part of both the passages and the blocking position for blocking the outflow of the gaming ball,
It is provided to be switchable to both of the allowable position where the game balls are allowed to flow out.

Further, an urging member (coil spring etc.) for urging the shutter 163 toward the blocking position is attached to the inner frame 12, and when the front frame 14 is opened relative to the inner frame 12, the urging member is attached. The shutter 163 is configured to stay in the blocking position by the force. Thereby, when the front frame 14 is opened in a state where gaming balls are stored in the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 or the main body side lower plate passage portion 162, a disadvantage that the storage spheres spill out is avoided. There is.

On the other hand, when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12, the shutter 163 resists the biasing force by the outer peripheral portion of the dispensing ball receiving portion 143 provided in the passage forming unit 140 of the front frame 14. Is pushed back to the permitted position. In this state, the main body side upper plate passage portion 161 and the front door side upper plate passage portion 141 communicate with each other, and the main body side lower plate passage portion 162 and the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 communicate with each other. Permissible.

The substrate 167 includes a connector CN1 to which the harness HN1 is connected, a connector CN2 to which the harness HN2 is connected, and a connector CN3 to which the harness HN3 is connected. In the substrate 167, the portion where the connectors CN1 and CN2 are disposed and the portion where the connector CN3 is disposed are formed of different substrates. This is because connectors CN1 and CN2 are main controller 1
10 is used for transmission, while the connector CN3 is used for transmission with the audio lamp control device 113. Since the target of transmission is different, the intention is to prevent malfunction by previously using another substrate. by.

A portion of the front frame 14 below the window portion 14 c will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14 in which constituent members disposed below the window 14 c of the front frame 14 are disassembled and illustrated. FIG. 92 is a window of the front frame 14 It is a disassembled front perspective view of the front frame 14 in which the structural member arrange | positioned below 14c is disassembled and shown in figure.

As shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the main body frame 14 is located below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14.
The operation device 300 is disposed on the front side of the upper plate 17 at a position on the front side of the upper plate 17 and at the upper right of the lower plate 50 and at the center of the front frame 14 in the left-right direction.
A cover 370 is disposed on the front side of the cover.

The covering cover 370 is a member fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 in a positional relationship covering the lower part of the operation device 300 from the front side, and is configured to have a left-right width substantially the same as the left-right width of the front frame 14. That is, the left and right end portions of the covering cover 370 are disposed vertically below the electric decorative portions 8031 and 8032, respectively.

The covering cover 370 is fixed to the front frame 14 by fastening portions 370a formed at least at the left and right ends, and the main body bending portion 371 configured to have a curved shape in which the left and right center portions protrude to the front side It is extended downward from the lower edge of the main body bending portion 371 at an intermediate position between the left and right center portion and the left and right direction end portion of the portion 371 toward the mutually approaching side in the width direction. Hanging portion 372 and body bending portion 371 and hanging portion 3
A light transmitting portion 373 which is a plate-like member closing the opening surrounded by the light source 72 and is formed of a light transmitting resin material and is fastened and fixed to at least one of the main body bending portion 371 or the hanging portion 372; A left flat support portion 374 formed as a flat on the upper surface of the left end of the left side flat surface, a right flat support portion 375 formed as a flat on the upper surface of the right end of the main body curved portion 371, and the right flat support portion 375 It mainly includes a support groove 376 which is a recessed groove and whose recessed width becomes larger (tapered) toward the rear side.

The body curved portion 371 is configured such that the front side edge has a rounded curved shape, and the back side edge is shaped to match the front side edge of the upper plate 17 and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) 1
7 and the rear left edge 371a abutting in the front-rear direction with the front side edge, and the front side edge of the upper frame member 330 of the operation device 300 continuously connected to the rear left edge 371a A back middle edge 371b abutting against the frame member 330 in the front-rear direction, and a back middle edge 37
1b, a back right edge 371c continuously connected on the opposite side of the back left edge 371a and having a shape that matches the front side edge of the rental ball operation unit 40 and abuts in the front and back direction Mainly to

The hanging portion 372 is a plate portion that covers the operation device 300 together with the main body bending portion 371 from the front side, and is a plate portion on which the operation handle 51 is supported, and is disposed at the right corner portion of the front frame 14
It is a portion that prevents access to the operation device 300 from the front side by forming a shape that does not form a gap between 0 and 0 (a shape in which the contact positions with the right corner cover 380 match each other). The hanging portion 372 is a recessed portion 1 at a position on the front side of a recessed portion 15a described later.
A screw inserted from below is screwed into the bottom plate on which the recess 5a is formed, and the screw is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate on which the recess 15a is formed.

The light transmitting portion 373 is a portion capable of transmitting light irradiated from the operation device 300 to the front side and capable of rendering with light, and is formed from a curved shape that matches the shape of the lower frame member 320 of the operation device 300 In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), it is disposed close to the lower frame member 320.

In the first embodiment, the case where the LED device 341f is arranged to emit light at least upward has been described (see FIG. 32). The arrangement of the LED devices is an arbitrary matter, and in the present embodiment, the LED devices 341f are arranged to emit light at least upward and downward. Specifically, light is emitted upward (disposed on the upper surface of the illumination support portion 341e)
Six LEDs, which emit light downward (located on the lower surface of the lighting support 341e)
Are arranged, respectively.

Among the LED devices 341f, light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes different numbers of members depending on the state of the operation device 300. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state (see FIG. 22), light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the tilting device 310 and the lower frame member 320 and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373 Do. On the other hand, the tilting device 3
When 10 is in the second state (see FIG. 32), the light emitted from the LED that emits light downward passes through the lower frame member 320 without passing through the tilting device 310 and then passes through the light transmitting portion 373 .

Thus, for example, if the amount of light emitted from the LED emitting light downward is kept constant, the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 is compared when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. Then, the case where the tilting device 310 is in the second state is stronger. Therefore, while making it unnecessary to change the amount of light emitted from the LED that emits light downward (while reducing the control burden by omitting the control to change the amount of light), it is possible to match the state change of the tilting device 310 An effect of changing the amount of light visible through the light transmitting portion 373 can be performed.

Moreover, it is also possible to perform control which changes the light quantity of the light irradiated from LED which irradiates light downward according to the change of the state of the tilting apparatus 310 as another presentation control method. For example, as the tilting device 310 changes from the second state (see FIG. 32) to the first state (see FIG. 22), the light amount is made stronger (stepwise), while the tilting device 310 The light that can be viewed through the light transmitting portion 373 according to the change of the state of the tilting device 310 by controlling the light quantity to be weakly (stepwise) changed according to the change from the 1 state to the second state The degree of change in the amount of light can be reduced (or eliminated depending on the setting).

The left flat support portion 374 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8031 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a load directed downward is applied to the electric decoration portion 8031 and the electric decoration portion 8031 is displaced downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the left plane support portion 374 toward the electric decoration portion 8031. . Thereby, the position shift to the lower part of the electric decoration part 8031 can be suppressed.

The right side flat support portion 375 contacts the lower end of the electric decoration portion 8032 at the top and bottom in the assembled state (FIG. 86). That is, when a load directed downward is applied to the electric decoration portion 8032 and the position of the electric decoration portion 8032 shifts downward, an upward reaction force is generated from the right side plane support portion 375 toward the electric decoration portion 8032. . Thereby, the position shift to the lower part of the electrical decoration part 8032 can be suppressed.

In addition, although the details will be described later, the electric decoration portion 8031 and the electric decoration portion 8032 are the upper panel unit 40.
When the upper panel unit 400 is displaced downward by coming into contact with the lower surface of 0, the electric decorative portion 803
An upward reaction force is generated from 1803 toward the upper panel unit 400. for that reason,
According to the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported on a wide area by the electric decoration portion 8031, the electric decoration portion 8032 and the covering cover 370 which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a. Can widely disperse the force required to support the

The support groove 376 functions as a receiving groove for receiving the lower end portion of the decorative portion 8032 from the rear side. In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the electric decoration part 8032 is in a state where it has entered to the deepest position of the support groove 376, and in this state, the front lower corner end of the electric decoration part 8032 and the front side end of the right flat support part 375 And the position agrees.

Details of the engagement relationship between the support groove 376 and the electric decoration portion 8032 will be described later. By connecting the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 by the engagement relationship described later, the assembling state can be configured by fastening and fixing the covering cover 370 and the electric decoration part 8032 to the main body frame 14a, It is possible to eliminate the need for separate fixing portions for fastening the cover 370 and the illumination portion 8032 to each other.

Below the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the resin plate-like plate member 14d is disposed on the main body frame 14a on the back surface of the main body frame 14a (or another member (upper plate 17) Of the main body frame 14a), and the passage forming unit 140 is disposed on the main body frame 14a or the plate member 14d (or on the front side of the main body frame 14a) on the back side of the plate member 14d. And the metal plate-like sheet metal member 150 is the main body frame 14a or a plate in such a manner that the passage forming unit 140 is covered from the rear side. It is fastened and fixed to the member 14d (or to another member disposed on the front side of the main body frame 14a (such as a member constituting the upper plate 17) with the main body frame 14a interposed therebetween).

The sheet metal member 150 is a front frame even if the passage forming unit 140 formed of a synthetic resin penetrates (for example, a wire having a heated tip or a piano wire is pressed and melted). It functions as an entry prevention member which makes entry impossible from the front side of 14 to the inner frame 12 side. That is, the sheet metal member 150 made of metal does not penetrate even when a wire or the like whose tip is heated is pressed, and the illustrated wire can be prevented from entering the back side of the front frame 14 .

The sheet metal member 150 is formed to cover the lower end portion of the lower door passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the far ball passage portion 145 in the left front view, and the open front side is the passage forming unit It mainly includes a fitting box portion 151 fitted to 140, and a flat plate-like plate portion 152 covering the back of the lower side of the far ball passage portion 145 and the ball removing passage 147.

The fitting box 151 covers the lower end portion of the front door lower countersink portion 142 and the upper and lower sides of the lower end portion of the far ball channel portion 145. Therefore, the lower end portion of the front door lower countersink portion 142 and the far ball channel portion Not limited to the case where the passage forming unit 140 is penetrated in the front-rear direction at the lower end portion of 145,
Even in the case of penetrating in the left-right direction or the up-down direction, the illustrated wire forms the passage forming unit 1
It is possible to prevent entry beyond 40.

Since the plate-like portion 152 covers the back of the far ball passage portion 145 and the ball removal passage 147, when the wire exemplified in the passage forming unit 140 is pressed and the through hole is opened on the right side of the lower plate 50. Even in this case, the unauthorized member can be prevented from entering the back side of the passage forming unit 140. As a case where such a situation occurs, for example, the exemplified wire is pressed against a location where the operation device 300 is removed and the front and rear thickness is reduced accordingly (a location obliquely upward behind the recessed portion 15a) As a result, the through hole is opened and the illustrated wire enters.

Furthermore, the front frame 14 is provided with an operation portion back member 155 fastened from the back side to the left end portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the cylinder lock 20 is disposed in the assembled state (see FIG. 86). It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a at the upper and lower positions of the position to be fixed.

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 91, the operation portion back member 155 is a member configured to increase the dimension in the front-rear direction by the ribs formed in the front-rear direction mainly from the outer edge portion of the left and right long plate members. And the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 can be penetrated so as to be penetrated by the plate member, and the through hole 1
A pair of insertion holes 157 which are drilled at the top and bottom of 56 and into which screws for fastening and fixing the operation portion back member 155 are inserted in the body frame 14a and a portion (left end) overlapped on the back side of the passage forming unit 140 It mainly includes a pair of connection insertion holes 158 bored in parallel to each other, and an open / close restricting portion 159 which protrudes to the back side on the rotation base end side of the through hole 156.

The connection insertion hole 158 is a connection portion 1 formed at the left end of the passage forming unit 140.
It is arranged to match 48 in the front-rear direction. Here, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 is connected to the connecting through hole 1 at a position where it is aligned with the upper connecting through hole 158 in the front-rear direction.
It is inserted in the insertion hole 158 for connection at a position where the projection 148a protruding on the back side with a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of 58 and the lower connection insertion hole 158 in the front-rear direction And a screwing portion 148b which is drilled as a hole into which a screw can be screwed.

With this configuration, when the operation portion back surface member 155 is stacked on the back surface side of the passage forming unit 140 and assembled, the passage forming unit 140 and the operation portion back surface are inserted by passing the projecting portion 148a through the upper connection insertion hole 158. By performing alignment with the member 155 and thereafter screwing the screw passing through the lower connection insertion hole 158 into the screwing portion 148b, the operation portion rear member 1 is easily made.
55 can be fastened and fixed to the passage forming unit 140.

An L-shaped wall portion 158a is formed by forming the left side edge and the lower side edge of the left end portion of the operation portion back surface member 155 in which the connection insertion hole 158 is formed at a right angle. On the other hand, the connecting portion 148 of the passage forming unit 140 includes an extending wall portion 148c extending from the plate forming the frame of the passage forming unit 140 to the back side so as to partition the region, and the extending wall portion 148c is
In the assembled state (see FIG. 89), it is formed in an L shape that can face the wall portion 158a at the top, bottom, left, and right.

Therefore, in addition to passing the protruding portion 148a through the connecting insertion hole 158 as alignment when assembling the operation portion back member 155 to the passage forming unit 140, the wall portion 158a is vertically moved relative to the extending wall portion 148c. By making the left and right face contact, the position and posture of the operation portion back member 155 with respect to the passage forming unit 140 can be quickly and easily adjusted.

The open / close restricting portion 159 is a portion disposed opposite to the panel support device 600 (see FIG. 90) disposed on the inner frame 12 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), and the details will be described later.
The front frame 1 is brought into contact with the board support device 600 or the game board 13 under predetermined conditions.
The effect of regulating 4 being in the closed state is achieved.

In the present embodiment, the open / close restricting portion 159 is a portion extending toward the back side of the operation portion back member 155 and formed of a synthetic resin, and a cross section in the extending direction to secure rigidity The shape is formed in a U-shape. Therefore, it is more difficult to bend than when formed in a flat plate with the same thickness, and the amount of material necessary while securing rigidity compared to when extending in a lump shape that fills the U-shaped open part Can be reduced. Therefore, the thickness is the same as the thickness of the other portion of the operation portion back member 155 (for example, the strength does not matter even if the strength is low because it is sufficient to rely on the main body frame 14a) It is possible to secure the strength of the open / close restricting portion 159 while improving the formability by being able to be formed by the plate thickness).

The cross-sectional shape of the open / close restricting portion 159 may be any shape as long as rigidity can be ensured and the shape can be maintained, and is not limited to the U-shape. For example, the cross section may be a curved (wave) shaped cross section, a stepped cross section, a rectangular wave cross section, or a cylindrical cross section as compared to a flat cross section.

Further, the opening and closing restricting portion 159 is not a part of the operation portion back member 155, and the main body frame 14
It may be bent and extended from a to the back side, or may be formed of a metal portion extended from the other member fixed to the back side of the main body frame 14a to the back side. However, as in the present embodiment,
Forming the open / close restricting portion 159 from synthetic resin prevents the disc support device 600 from being chipped or dented when it comes in contact with the disc support device 600 (see FIG. 90) formed from a metal member. can do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the risk of an operator who changes the state of the board supporting device 600 and detaches the gaming board 13 from touching the chip or the dent formed on the board supporting device 600 and causing injury.

Here, since the open / close restricting portion 159 is disposed closer to the pivot base end side of the front frame 14 than the through hole 156 in which the cylinder lock 20 is disposed, the cylinder lock disposed further to the pivot tip end side A long distance between the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 at the 20 points can be secured. Therefore, the possibility that the cylinder lock 20 and the locking mechanism 20RK arranged at the rotating tip end side are erroneously locked is lowered in a state where the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is in contact with the board supporting device 600 or the game board 13 it can.

For example, a path that passes through a gap of the operation device 300 is assumed as a path through which a foreign object such as a wire is made to enter. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 91 and 92, the operation device 300 is configured to be separable from the front side of the main body frame 14a. In other words, since the structure of the operation device 300 is completed on the front side of the main body frame 14a, it is difficult to enter the back surface of the main body frame 14a even if the gap between the operation device 300 is traced.

A harness HN3 (see FIG. 96) for supplying power to the operation device 300 is a wiring through hole 14 drilled in the front-rear direction of the main body frame 14a at the right end position of the long cover member 173.
a1 (see FIG. 103), the harness HN3 of the protective cover device 350
It connects with the operation device 300 via the connector (not shown) fixed to the lower right outer peripheral wall lower corner of FIG.

Thereby, even if foreign matter such as a wire is made to enter the inside of the operation device 300 through the gap of the operation device 300, the wire etc. is made to reach the harness HN3 connected to the outside of the operation device 300 configured substantially in a case shape. It is difficult to prevent the entry of foreign matter such as a wire to the back side of the main body frame 14a.

A liquid can be considered as a foreign matter that enters the operation device 300. For example, a player who feels sick in the game result may put drinking water or the like on the pachinko machine 10. that time,
The operating device 300 in a convenient position is likely to be a bait for drinking drinking water, and if no countermeasure is taken, the drive motor 342 (see FIG. 18) or the voice coil motor 352 (see FIG. 1).
3) may be broken.

Furthermore, if liquids such as drinking water enter the back of the main body frame 14a, it may cause a failure of the electronic board etc., but as described above, in the present embodiment, the operation device 300 is on the front side of the main body frame 14a. Since the configuration is separable and independent, it is possible to prevent the liquid such as the drinking water applied to the operation device 300 from entering the back side of the main body frame 14a.

In the bottom plate upper surface (the surface facing the operation device 300) of the lower tray unit 15, a concave portion 15a is formed in a T shape in top view. The recess 15a is configured as a deep recess.
It is not perfect case-like, and in some places gaps are formed (see, eg, FIG. 13,
Through the inside of the operation device 300,
The recess 15a plays a role of temporarily storing the liquid falling downward of the operation device 300.

In the operation device 300, since the drive motor 342 is disposed near the rear side of the opening 325, the tilting device 310 plays the role of an umbrella (see FIGS. 13 and 17B), and further, connection with the wiring. Since the portion is disposed below the horizontal plate portion disposed between the motor housing portion 341e and the illumination support portion 341e (see FIGS. 17 (b) and 18), the liquid such as drinking water is driven by the driving motor 3
42 can be directly applied to prevent failure.

Further, since the voice coil motor 352 communicates in the vertical direction through the transmission hole 321a, there is a possibility that liquid such as drinking water may be applied, but since the other part is covered by the bottom plate portion 321, The liquid remains adhering to the vibrating surface (upper surface), and the adhered liquid flows downward on the front side due to the inclination of the vibrating surface itself of the voice coil motor 352 (see FIGS. 13 and 22). Therefore, the voice coil motor 352 can be prevented from breakdown.

With the above-described configuration, even if a player such as drinking water is put on the player at the time of return, the next player can play the game as normal as long as the user touches only the upper part of the operation device 300 and touches it. Since it can do, it can prevent that the maintenance time of the operation device 300 puts pressure on business hours.

On the lower side than the window portion 14c of the front frame 14, the binding movable member 180 is fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d on the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 on the back side of the main body frame 14a. Next, the binding movable member 180 will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 to 96. Note that FIG. 93 to FIG.
6, a state in which the passage forming unit 140 and the sheet metal member 150 are removed from the front frame 14 as illustrated in FIG. 91 is illustrated.

FIG. 93 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 93 (b) is a front perspective view of the binding movable member 180 in which the released state and the fixed state of the binding movable member 180 are shown side by side. is there. In FIG. 93 (b), the binding movable member 180 in the released state is shown on the upper side, and the binding movable member 180 in the fixed state is shown on the lower side.

The binding movable member 180 is a member that is in a fixed state in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) and binds the harnesses HN1 to HN3 that are extended leftward from the upper end of the upper extending wall portion 173c.

In the present embodiment, the harness HN1 connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92)
The harness HN2 connected to the rental ball operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) is guided to the binding movable member 180 without the relay board, and is bound to the binding movable member 180, respectively.

On the other hand, each of the lighting units 8029 to 8033, the operation device 300 or the frame button 22 (FIG. 86).
The harnesses respectively connected to (see) are once connected (collected) to a relay board disposed in the space on the front side of the long cover member 173, and from the relay board to a bundle of extension harness HN
3 goes to the binding movable member 180, and the extension harness HN3 is bound to the binding movable member 180 (see FIG. 96).

The binding movable member 180 is a member formed of a synthetic resin material, and pivots to a main body portion 181 fastened and fixed to the plate member 14d from the back side and a screw fastened and fixed to the main body portion 181 in the vertical direction Movable arm portion 182 pivotally supported, and a side of the movable arm portion 182 facing the main body portion 181 along the lower edge of the movable arm portion 182 in the rotational direction of the movable arm portion 182 (FIG. 93A) Flexible pair of binding arms 183 extending from the opposite side of the
Is a U-shaped portion disposed on the other side surface (the side surface facing the main body 181 in FIG. 93A) of the rotation direction of the upper surface view, and the binding arm 183 can be locked Pair of locking parts 184
And a temporary fixing portion 185 extending downward from the lower edge of the movable arm 182 at a position (intermediate position) between the pair of binding arms 183 and having an opening.

In addition, while the flexibility of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be high, the binding movable member 180 is formed to have lower flexibility (high rigidity) than at least the binding arm portion 183.

The main body portion 181 has a cross section whose upper side is formed substantially in a horseshoe shape and has a through hole through which a screw passes in the center, and the left and right lower corners of the fixed portion 181a project toward the plate member 14d. A pair of detent protrusions 181b provided, and an intermediate retaining portion extending downward from the lower edge of the front end of the fixed portion 181a and having its extending tip curved close to the plate member 14d side 181c and a plate-like support plate portion 181d extending leftward along the lower edge of the fixed portion 181a
(See FIG. 96 (a)) and a cylindrical fastening portion formed in a cylindrical shape whose outer diameter is smaller than the diameter of the head of a screw which is a portion disposed on the upper portion of the support plate portion 181d 181e,
Mainly to

The plate member 14d is provided with a hole group 14d1 composed of through holes arranged at the position where the binding movable member 180 is fixed, which matches the arrangement of the fixed portion 181a and the pair of rotation preventing portions 181b.

When fastening and fixing a screw penetrating the fixed portion 181a to the corresponding fastening hole of the hole group 14d1 of the plate member 14d, the pair of rotation preventing convex parts 181b are fitted in the corresponding fitting hole of the hole group 14d1. Thus, the binding movable member 180 can be prevented from rotating about the screw passing through the fixed portion 181a at the time of fastening, and the plate member 14 of the binding movable member 180 at the time of fastening
The attitude to d can be defined.

The intermediate stoppers 181c maintain the respective harnesses HN1 to HN3 between the intermediate stops 181c and the plate member 14d.
In this embodiment, it is possible to prevent the harnesses HN1 to HN3 from slipping downward by narrowing the distance between the extension end (lower end) and the plate member 14d, and the center is on the plate member 14d side. A region that accommodates the harnesses HN1 to HN3 while suppressing stress concentration due to deformation by the shape that is curved along the arranged circle (the plate member 14d and the intermediate stopper 18)
It is possible to secure a large cross-sectional area of the region sandwiched by 1c.

The support plate portion 181 d forms a flat surface for guiding the rotation of the movable arm portion 182, and the cylindrical fastening portion 181 d
As for e, the outer peripheral surface thereof is fitted in the base end side portion of the movable arm portion 182 to pivotally support the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 96).

The movable arm portion 182 is a base end portion having a shape that is smoothly coupled to the plane OS1 offset from the pivotally supported position of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e with the portion axially supported by the cylindrical fastening portion 181e as the proximal end It mainly includes a thin plate portion 182b in the shape of a long thin plate which is continuously provided on the opposite side of the pivotally supported position of the base end portion 182a.

The base end portion 182a is a left and right end portion (a portion where a straight line connecting with the axis is parallel to the plane OS1) and a back side end portion (the plane OS1 and the outermost portion) Side walls in the rotational direction are extended from the approaching portion). Each side wall is formed in an arc shape in which the centers of curvature radius are arranged on the same side, and the distance between them gradually shortens as it approaches the plane OS1, and when it reaches the plane OS1, the thin plate portion 182b It becomes equivalent to thickness.

Accordingly, the rigidity of the proximal end portion 182a is maintained higher than that of the thin plate portion 182b. In the present embodiment, the proximal end 182a is designed with a design concept (high rigidity) not intended for elastic deformation, and the thin plate part 182b is designed with a design concept (low rigidity) intended for elastic deformation depending on the situation. .

Since the binding arm portion 183 is configured in the same shape as each other, only one will be described and the other description will be omitted. In the binding arm portion 183, a small-width portion 183a formed with a width equal to the width of the root near the tip end and a large-width portion 183b formed wider than the small-width portion 183a are alternately arranged at equal intervals. It is formed. In the fixed state, the binding arm portion 183 is inserted from below into the through hole formed between the locking portion 184 and the movable arm portion 182 (see FIG. 93B).

The large-width portion 183 b of the binding arm portion 183 is formed to be slightly thicker than the small-width portion 183 a. In the present embodiment, a space can be secured on the inner peripheral side of the binding arm portion 183 by forming the thickened portion on the outer peripheral side in the fixed state (see the lower side in FIG. 93B).

The locking portion 184 includes a large opening 184 a formed on the movable arm 182 side and the large opening 1.
A small opening 184b is formed mainly on the opposite side of the movable arm 182 across the 84a and has a smaller opening width than the large opening 184a (see FIG. 96).

The large opening 184a is sized so that the binding arm 183 can pass without depending on the position of the binding arm 183, and the small opening 184b allows passage of the small width portion 183a of the binding arm 183. The large width portion 183 b is sized to be impassable (locked).

According to the present embodiment, when it is desired to move the binding arm 183 relative to the locking part 184, the binding arm 183 is disposed on the large opening 184a side (the side where the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 is reduced). ,
When it is desired to lock the binding arm 183 to the locking part 184, the size (tightness) of the inner area surrounded by the binding arm 183 can be easily adjusted by arranging the binding arm 183 on the small opening 184b side. can do.

The temporary fixing portion 185 is provided at its central portion with a through hole through which the binding band can be inserted. Even when the bundling arm portion 183 is broken due to long-term use and it becomes impossible to bind the harnesses HN1 to HN3, a commercially available bundling band is inserted through the through hole of the temporary fixing portion 185 and fixed. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be made bindable.

The movable range of the binding movable member 180 will be described. Fig. 94 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and Fig. 94 (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line XCIVb of Fig. 94 (a).
95 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 showing the lower left corner of the front frame 14, and FIG. 95 (b) is a partial sectional view of the front frame 14 taken along line XCIVb; a) XCV
It is a fragmentary sectional view of front frame 14 in a b-XCVb line.

In FIGS. 94 (a) and 94 (b), a state in which the movable arm 182 is closest to the plate member 14d (one limit state of the movable range) is illustrated, and FIGS. In b)
A state (the other limit state of the movable range) in which the movable arm portion 182 pivots in a direction away from the plate member 14d and abuts against a vertically elongated metal portion constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a is illustrated. .

As shown in FIGS. 94 and 95, the movable arm portion 182 is an axis parallel to the rotation axis of the front frame
It is configured to be able to rotate about 160 degrees about an axis (facing the vertical direction). This angle is usually used from the situation where the pachinko machine 8010 is installed in a game arcade (a situation in which the pachinko machine 8010 is arranged side by side and may collide with the next pachinko machine 8010 when rotated 90 degrees or more). It is sufficiently larger than the turning angle at the time of opening and closing required for the front frame 14 at the time of doing.

Therefore, during normal use, the movable arm 182 does not elastically deform and can not exceed the range in which it can rotate relative to the main body 181 (the range between the state shown in FIG. 94 and the state shown in FIG. 95) Since the movable arm portion 182 is not deformed, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the movable arm portion 182 is deteriorated and broken due to the elastic deformation.

Then, the support aspect of harness HN1-HN3 is demonstrated. Harnesses HN1 to HN
The arrangement 3 is defined by being supported by the binding movable member 180, so that it is possible to prevent, for example, accidental pinching between the outer frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and disconnection.

96 (a) is a schematic rear view schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3. FIG. 96 (b) is a top schematic view of FIG. 96 (a). c) is a schematic rear view schematically showing the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3, and FIG. 96 (d) is a schematic top view of FIG. 96 (c).

In FIGS. 96 (a) and 96 (b), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 96 (c) and 96 (d), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 96, the intermediate stopper 181c is disposed at a position moved to the rotation base end side of the front frame 14 from an opening opened toward the left at the upper end of the upper extension wall 173c. Ru. That is, since the horizontal lines of the intermediate stopper 181c and the opening opened to the left at the upper end of the upper extending wall 173c are the same, they are extended from the upper extending wall 173c. The harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be extended substantially horizontally and supported by the middle stopper 181c.

The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are supported by the intermediate stopper 181c in the vicinity of the cylindrical fastening portion 181e, which is the pivotal support position of the movable arm 182, so that the upwardly extending wall portion 173c sandwiching the intermediate stopper 181c.
Of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 on the opposite side of the movable arm 18 of the binding movable member 180.
It can be made to conform to the shape of 2. Thus, as shown in FIG. 96 (b) and FIG. 96 (d).
As shown in the above, the shapes of the bent portions of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 become a curved shape, and it is possible to prevent the occurrence of extreme bending deformation.

Further, by arranging the locking portion 184 on the side close to the plate member 14d, the binding arm portion 18 is provided.
The area surrounded by 3 can be disposed on the opposite side of the plate member 14 d with the movable arm 182 interposed therebetween. Therefore, in the state where the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 96 (b)), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be curved with a sufficiently large radius of curvature. Thereby, disconnection due to the bending of the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented.

97 (a) and 97 (b) show a front frame 14, an inner frame 12, a binding movable member 180 and harnesses HN1 to HN schematically illustrating the binding movable member 180 and the harnesses HN1 to HN3.
3 is a schematic top view of FIG. In FIG. 97 (a), one limit state of the binding movable member 180 is illustrated, and in FIG. 97 (b), the other limit state of the binding movable member 180 is illustrated.

Also, in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), a rotation center point P57 indicating the center axis position of the front door mounting bracket 57 (see FIG. 86) is illustrated, and the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are schematically shown. A member which is fixed to each of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 and is pivotally supported by the rotation center point P57 is schematically illustrated by a solid line. The rotation center point P57 is shown as the rotation axis of the front frame 14, and the binding movable member 180 fixed to the front frame 14 is also similar to the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12 centering on the rotation center point P57. Rotate.

From one limit state shown in FIG. 97 (a) to the other limit state shown in FIG. 97 (b),
The inner frame 12 is rotated by rotating the proximal end 182a of the movable arm 182 about the cylindrical fastening portion 181e.
Since the opening and closing of the front frame 14 are supported, the thin plate portion 182b is not given a large load, and the shape deformation of the thin plate portion 182b can be suppressed, whereby the durability can be improved (FIG. 9).
6 (b), see also FIG. 96 (d)).

As shown in FIGS. 97 (a) and 97 (b), the harnesses HN1 to HN3 supported by the binding movable member 180 are the front frame 14 regardless of the open / close state of the front frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 12.
In the vertically elongated metal portion (FIG. 96 (d)) constituting the left side portion of the main body frame 14a of FIG.
It is arranged in a path passing near the portion abuts the proximal end 182a of the movable arm 182). In other words, the harness HN 1 to HN 3 are forcibly routed to bypass
It is possible to prevent the curved portions 1 to HN3 from coming close to the pivoting tip side of the front frame 14.

As a result, at the time of opening and closing the front frame 14, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 can be prevented from interfering with the work of the worker, and the harness H when the front frame 14 is closed
It is possible to improve the accommodation of N1 to HN3 (the accommodation which is bent only once on the rotation base end side) (see FIGS. 96 (b) and 97 (a)).

In the present embodiment, the intermediate stopper 181 c is disposed vertically above the reverse cup 178 regardless of the position of the movable arm 182 (see FIG. 91). For example, the tip of a wire or a piano wire is heated to a high temperature to melt the reverse cup portion 178 and penetrate it by the support mode in which the intermediate stopping portion 181c disposed vertically above the reverse cup portion 178 supports the harnesses HN1 to HN3. Thus, it is possible to take measures against fraudulent action in which the wire is made to enter between the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12.

That is, when pressing the wire against the lower surface of the reverse cup portion 178, melting it to penetrate the wire and advancing the wire to the gaming area side, if the wire advances vertically upward from the upper bottom portion of the reverse cup portion 178 Harness H in which the tip of the heated wire is supported by the intermediate stopper 181c
N1 to HN3 are pushed. Therefore, the harnesses HN1 to HN3 are burned off, and conduction is disabled.

In response to the interruption of the continuity of the harnesses HN1 to HN3, an error signal can be output and an alarm can be sounded (for example, an error screen can be displayed) so that fraud can be quickly detected. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudster from gaining the benefits of fraud.

More specifically, since the harness HN1 is connected to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN1 is burned out, the ball can be fired even if the operation handle 51 is rotated. It disappears. Therefore, it is possible to shorten the period until the cheating is detected after the cheating is made (the early detection of the cheating can be achieved).

In this case, after allowing the wire to enter the game area and tampering with the game area (for example, after bending the nails and making it easier to win illegally), the ball is made the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2), etc. By making a prize, it is possible to prevent the firing of the ball to the person who performs the fraudulent act that gets the prize ball illegally, it is possible to prevent giving the profit of the fraud. That is, it is possible to make it impossible to conduct a specific fraudulent act.

Further, since the harness HN2 is connected to the ball lending operation unit 40 (see FIG. 92) as described above, when the harness HN2 burns out, the operation of the ball lending button 42 (see FIG. 89) and the return button The operation of 43 (see FIG. 89) is disabled. Therefore, those who do wrongdo
Since there is a risk that it will not be possible to collect the ball for the balance of the bill or card inserted into the above-mentioned card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) by its own fraudulent activity, it exerts a deterrent against fraudulent activity. be able to.

Furthermore, in the case where the risk of not being able to collect the balls of the balance of the bill and the card inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) is eliminated and the fraudulent act is carried out, the card unit (ball lending Even though the remaining amount of the unit) is 0 yen, since the cheating will be conducted without leaving the seat, the gaming machine store side can easily notice the cheating.

First of all, when the harness HN2 is disconnected, the card unit (ball lending unit) (
In the gaming machine store where a disconnection error (CR error) is output, the disconnection error (C) is not shown.
By confirming the R error, it is possible to easily grasp the possibility of fraud.

FIG. 98 is a front view of the passage forming unit 140. FIG. In FIG. 98, the sheet metal member 15
An outline of 0 and an outline of the ball guide opening 53 are illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIG. 98, the ball guide opening 53 is disposed at the lower end portion of the front door side lower countersink passage portion 142 and the lower end portion of the far ball passage portion 145. In the present embodiment, the lower door passage portion 1 on the front door side
The lower end of the ball guide opening 53 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53 in the left part of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the far ball passage part 145 remains in the right part of the ball guide opening 53. Partition plate portion 53 a so as to occupy a region (a region of about 1/3 of the lateral width dimension of the ball guide opening 53)
Divided by

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the far ball passage portion 145 are passages extending respectively from the disbursed ball receiving portion 143 and the far ball receiving portion 146 so that the ball can flow downward to the lower plate 50. And the extension direction is at least once on both the left and right sides (switched) S-shaped path SL1, S
Each has L2.

Since the flow path length of the front door side lower countersink passage portion 142 can be lengthened while keeping the upper and lower dimensions of the passage forming unit 140 short by the S-shaped path SL1, it stays in the front door side lower countersink passage portion 142. The number of possible spheres can be increased. Thereby, the window portion 14c (see FIG. 86)
Since the number of balls that can stay on the upstream side of the lower plate 50 can be increased while ensuring a large upper and lower dimension of the lower plate 50, the upper and lower dimensions of the game area and the effect area are secured large. Due to the large number of balls that can be temporarily placed on the upstream side), the stress on ball replacement given to the player (if the balls in the lower plate 50 minutes are exhausted, it is required to refill the balls from the two boxes) The pachinko machine 8010 can be configured.

The front door side lower tray passage portion 142 and the far ball passage portion 145 respectively have bending regions NEa1, NEa2, NEb1, and NEb2 as regions where the extending direction is bent in the vertical direction and the horizontal direction, and they are common It has features. That is, the front door side lower plate passage portion 142 has a first bending area NEa1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are disposed on the upstream side of the first bending area NEa1. And a region NEa2.

In addition, the far ball passage portion 145 has a first bending area NEb1 formed on the downstream side, and a second bending area NE in which the left and right of the characteristic portion are disposed on the upstream side of the first bending area NEb1.
and b2. In the description of the characteristic portions, the characteristics of the first bending area NEa1 will be described, and the descriptions of the other bending areas NEa2, NEb1 and NEb2 will be omitted.

FIG. 99 is an enlarged front view of the first bending area NEa1. As shown in FIG. 99, in the first bending area NEa1, of the left and right side walls of the lower door channel portion 142 on the front door side, the side wall Na disposed on the opposite side of the direction in which the S-shaped path SL1 extends to the left and right A ceiling wall Nb disposed above the side wall Na in a manner intersecting the extending direction of the side wall Na, and extending downward from the ceiling wall Nb and approaching the side wall Na toward the extending end portion Adjacent walls Nc, and each of these walls Na,
Nb and Nc are extended from the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 to the front side.

The adjacent wall Nc is formed by curving the opposite surface Nc1 of the ceiling wall Nb along the S-shaped path SL1, and the surface Nc1 functions as a guiding surface of the ball. On the other hand, the surface Nc2 (surface facing the ceiling surface Nb) on the opposite side of the surface Nc1 restricts the traveling direction of the wire HM (a thin metal represented by a wire, a piano wire, etc.) improperly inserted. Function, but the details will be described later. Note that the gap Nin between the adjacent wall Nc and the side wall Na at the extended lower end is the wire H
It is set larger than the width dimension (diameter) of M.

As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM incorrectly inserted due to the shape of the first bending area NEa1.
Can be prevented from entering deeper. That is, as shown in FIG. 99, the front door side lower countersink passage portion 14 with the ball guide opening 53 as the entrance as an entering path of the wire HM to be incorrectly inserted.
Where a route going up to the upstream side of 2 is considered, in this case, the person who cheats is wire H.
It will be made to advance, pressing M against the side wall of the lower door passage part 142 on the front door side.

When the wire HM is pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 by a fraudster, the wire HM enters the gap Nin while the wire HM is not pressed against the side wall Na in the first bending area NEa1 Even in this case, the wire HM advances to the right by the S-shaped path SL1 of the lower door passage portion 142 on the front door side, so it is pressed against the side wall Na in the second bending area NEa2 and enters the gap Nin It will be. That is, one pair of bending areas NEa1,
By arranging the NEa 2 so as to be horizontally reversed, the wire HM can be made to enter the gap Nin without leakage.

One example of the travel path of the wire HM when entering the gap Nin is shown in FIG. The tip position of the wire HM at each timing is illustrated by a black circle, and the advancing direction of the wire HM at that time is illustrated by an arrow. As shown in FIG. 99, the wire HM entering the gap Nin enters a tapered dead end portion formed between the ceiling wall Nb and the proximity wall Nc. Here, when the wire HM is caught (clamped), it is possible to prevent the further progress of the wire HM, and also to prevent the wire HM from being held, and to quickly detect a fraud. it can.

On the other hand, even when the wire HM does not get caught and travels further, when the wire HM protrudes from the gap Nin, the tip protrudes in a posture facing downward, so the wire HM is more than that.
, The tip of the wire HM will advance downward. Therefore, the wire HM
Are disposed on the upstream side of the dispensing ball receptacle 143, and the foul ball receptacle 146
It is possible to prevent the game area located on the upstream side of the game from reaching the game area.

As a result, the wire HM reaches the payout device 133 (see FIG. 3) and causes the payout device 133 to malfunction, thereby obtaining an illegal payout ball, or causing the wire HM to reach the game area and causing the electric utility product 64.
By forcibly opening the movable device such as 0a (see FIG. 2) and making it easy to make an illegal prize, it is possible to prevent an illegal performer from gaining an illegal profit by obtaining an illegal payout ball or the like. .

Referring back to FIG. The fur ball passage portion 145 is formed with a vertical width of a portion downstream from the merging region CE joining the ball opening passage 147 in a size about twice (2 or more times in the present embodiment) the diameter of the ball. Thus, when the balls flowing down the ball extracting passage 147 are arranged in the merging area CE, the balls flowing down the far ball passage 145 enter the merging flow path CE (the balls simultaneously move into the merging area CE) Even if the two balls are vertically aligned, the possibility of the balls being caught and engaged in the upper and lower wall portions can be extremely reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the flow of the ball from being impeded in the portion downstream from the confluence area CE.

The foul ball passage portion 145 is formed between the first bending region NEb1 and the second bending region NEb2, and includes a passage portion 145a connecting the bending regions NEb1 and NEb2 up and down. The passage portion 145 a is set to have a width slightly larger than the diameter of the ball, and the passage forming unit 1
The back side bottom plate portion 40 is formed to project to the front side as it goes downward.

In the region upstream of the passage portion 145a, the rear bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140 faces the upstream end of the passage portion 145a, and in the region downstream of the passage portion 145a, the passage forming unit 140 The rear bottom plate portion is positioned at the downstream end of the passage portion 145a.

That is, in the case of the far ball passage portion 145, the region on the upstream side of the passage portion 145 a is the passage portion 14.
The front-rear width is set to be larger than the downstream region of 5a. In the present embodiment, the far ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-rear width thereof is slightly larger than the diameter of the ball downstream of the passage portion 145a.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the far ball passage portion 145 is set such that the front-rear width thereof is slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the ball upstream of the passage portion 145a. Therefore, the ball passage portion 145
When the balls stay in the upper stream of the passage portion 145, a plurality of balls can be arranged by shifting their positions back and forth, so that the number of stay can be increased, and the center of the balls in the front-back direction Since alignment is prevented (it will be slightly shifted to the left and right and up and down), two balls can be prevented from entering the passage part 145a at the same time.

In other words, it is possible to regulate the ball entry into the passage portion 145a one by one. As a result, even when two or more far balls flow in series in the far ball passage portion 145, it is possible to prevent the far balls from simultaneously reaching the merging region CE, so the balls in the merging region CE It is possible to reduce the possibility of being caught and engaged with the upper and lower wall portions.

The foul ball receiving portion 146 is extended in a plate shape on the front side from the rear side bottom plate portion of the passage forming unit 140, and the left end portion is connected to the left side wall portion and the flowing surface of the ball is directed to the right And an inclined plate portion 146a, which is inclined downward, and the ball receiving portion 1 of the far ball vertically below the inclined plate portion 146a.
46 and a passage forming unit 1 below the inclined plate 146a.
And a curved guide plate portion 146c which is extended in a plate shape from the back surface side bottom plate portion 40 to the back surface side and is curved in such a manner that the extending direction is directed upward toward the back surface side.

The ball is guided to the far ball passage portion 145 side (front side) along the upper surface of the curved guide plate portion 146c, while the far ball receiving portion 1 is formed by the action of the inclined plate portion 146a and the closing portion 146b.
The passing position of the ball passing through 46 to the front side can be brought close to the right side of the far ball receptacle 146. That is, the ball rolling down on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 146a can flow to the right, and the blocking portion 146b prevents the ball from passing through the left side of the ball receiving portion 146. Can.

As a result, it is possible to lengthen the time period until the ball that has passed through the far ball reception port 146 reaches the S-shaped path SL2. That is, since it is possible to finish the vertical bouncing of the ball before the ball reaches the S-shaped path SL2 (from the fact that the variation in the vertical position of the ball can be reduced), the far ball passage portion in the S-shaped path SL2 By setting the width of 145 small (slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere), the flow of the sphere can be smoothed.

The far ball passage portion 145 is a range that forms the S-shaped path SL2 (for example, the passage portion 145a
Since the passage width is set to be small (a little larger than the diameter of the ball), it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool having a larger outer diameter from passing through the ball passage portion 145.

Next, the structure of the front side of the front frame 14 will be described. FIG. 100 is a front exploded perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 101 is a rear exploded perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIGS. 100 and 101, a state in which the constituent members of the upper panel unit 400 constituting the electric decorative portion 8030 are disassembled from the main body frame 14a is illustrated.

The upper panel unit 400 is a unit formed to be long in the left and right, and the left and right end portions are supported by the right panel unit 500 that constitutes the electric decoration portion 8031 and the electric decoration portion 8032. In this lower support structure, at the lower end portion of the right end portion of the upper panel unit 400, similarly to the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370, a tapered supported groove 417 recessed from the back side to the front side (See FIG. 118) is formed, and fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) formed in the upper end portion of the right panel unit 500 are engaged with the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417. The upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 50 by
0 is linked.

Thus, the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 can be connected and fixed to each other by fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400 and the right panel unit 500 directly to the main body frame 14a, respectively. From the shape of the supported groove 417 of the upper panel unit 400, the assembling order to the main body frame 14a is defined in the order of fastening and fixing the upper panel unit 400 after fastening and fixing the right panel unit 500. The details of the upper panel unit 400 will be described later.

Further, the fitting grooves 522b and 562b (see FIGS. 108 and 109) respectively disposed in the heavy plate units 500R and 500L of the right panel unit 500 divided into left and right Heavy plate unit 500 R, 5 depending on the structure in which
It is possible to prevent 00L from being separated to the left and right. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the right panel unit 500 from being disassembled in the assembled state (the fitted state, see FIG. 86).

FIG. 102 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14, and FIG. 103 is an exploded back perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 102 and FIG. 103, the body frame 14a is on the front side of the body frame 14a.
A state in which the upper side plate member 14e and the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 sandwiched between the front and rear panel units 400 (see FIG. 89) are disassembled from the main body frame 14a is illustrated.

The upper side plate member 14e is a member for sandwiching the speaker assembly 450 with the upper frame member 410 (see FIG. 101), and the recessed portions 462 and 482 of the speaker assembly 450 (FIG. 12).
1 and FIG. 122) and includes a cylindrical fastening portion 14e1.

The fastening portion 14e1 is provided with a through hole through which a screw is inserted from the back surface side, and the screw passing through the through hole is fastened to the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 101) of the upper frame member 410. It is a portion for fastening and fixing the member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e.

FIG. 104 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 14. In FIG. 104, the main body frame 14a
The right panel unit 500 fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a by a screw inserted from the rear side into the insertion hole drilled in the main body frame 14a is shown disassembled from the upper panel unit 400 and the upper side plate member 14e. And while illustration of the multifunctional cover members 171 and 172 is omitted, the covering cover 370 is illustrated for reference.

The cover 370 is assembled to the main body frame 14a after the panel unit 500 is assembled to the main body frame 14a as an actual assembly procedure. Also, in the right panel unit 500, the right side wall forms the right side edge of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86).

105 is an exploded front perspective view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 106 is an exploded back perspective view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 107 is a front view of the support plate portion 510,
108 and 109 are exploded front perspective views of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R. In FIG. 108, a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side is shown, and in FIG. 109, a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 105 to 109, the right panel unit 500 includes the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R which are overlapped in the left-right direction, and the heavy plate units 50.
The upper and lower long plate-like support plate portions 510 are mainly provided, in which OL and 500R are fastened and fixed and are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104).

The heavy plate unit 500 is inserted into the support plate portion 510 from the rear side to the front side.
L and 500 R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and in that state, the support plate portion 510
It is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a (see FIG. 104) by a screw which is inserted from the rear side to the front side to the front side 4a.

The support plate portion 510 is formed in an L-shaped cross section by extending in a plate shape an extending portion 511a extending from the outer edge (right edge) on the side opposite to the main body frame 14a to the back surface. (Figure 86
A fixed plate 511 whose inner wall (left side wall) of the extending portion 511 abuts the outer surface of the main body frame 14a, a substrate member 512 fastened and fixed to the fixed plate 511 on the front side of the fixed plate 511, A plurality of cover side through holes 513 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the left side of the substrate member 512, a plurality of lens side through holes 514 drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the substrate member 512, and the lens side through holes And a pin support hole 515 which is drilled in the fixing plate 511 on the right side of the hole 514.

The fixing plate 511 is provided with a pedestal 511b which is in a shape overlapping with the substrate 512 in a front view and the side of the substrate 512 protrudes to the front side in a trapezoidal shape, and the substrate member in a state in which it faces the front of the pedestal 511b. 512 are fastened and fixed to the fixing plate 511.

The platform 511b is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the heavy plate unit 500L, 500R.
(See Fig. 115 (b)), the heavy plate unit 500L, 50
It is possible to suppress the fall in the left and right direction of 0R. That is, the posture of the heavy plate units 500L and 500R with respect to the support plate portion 510 can be easily maintained.

In the present embodiment, on the right side surface of the fixed plate 511, the extending portion 51 is extended more than the base portion 511b.
1a is displaced to the right by the thickness of the outer cover member 560, so that the extension portion 511 is provided.
While the outer cover member 560 abuts against the support plate portion 510 in the front-rear direction on the front side of the a.
The rear side end of the inner cover member 520 is the rear side end of the support plate 510 by being formed up to the rear side end as a side surface and a plane side surface of the base portion 511 b on the left side of 11. The inner side surface 521b1 of the inner cover member 520 is in contact with the left side surface 511c of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The substrate member 512 is an electronic substrate (printed substrate) on which the plurality of LEDs 512a are disposed on the front side. In the present embodiment, the plurality of LEDs 512a are arranged on a line that is curved in accordance with the curved shape of the light guide member 540 with a predetermined interval (in the present embodiment, an interval of 11 mm) next to each other. . That is, the plurality of LEDs 512a are disposed inside the shape in which the light guiding member 540 is projected from the front, and the light is directed in parallel to the light axis toward the light guiding member 540 from directly behind the light guiding member 540 Irradiate (see FIG. 107).

The width of the end face of the light guide member 540 on the side of the LED 512a is longer than the width of the LED 512a (right and left width of the light emitting part) (see the imaginary line in FIG. 107). The light is incident on 540 and emitted from any surface of the light guide member 540, but the light in / out and its path will be described later.

The cover side through hole 513 is a hole through which a back fastening portion 527 disposed in the inner cover member 520 is positioned, and a screw fastened to the back fastening portion 527 is inserted from the back side. The inner cover member 520 is supported by the support plate portion 51 by fastening the screw to the rear surface fastening portion 527.
It is fixed to 0.

The lens side through hole 514 is a hole for positioning the back surface fastening portion 556 disposed in the outer lens member 550 and through which a screw fastened to the back surface fastening portion 556 is inserted from the back surface side. The outer lens member 550 is supported by the support plate portion 51 by fastening the screw to the rear surface fastening portion 556.
It is fixed to 0.

The pin support hole 515 is a through hole through which the projection 566 of the outer cover member 560 is inserted.
The pin supporting hole 515 is set such that the lateral width is slightly larger than the diameter of the projecting portion 566, while the vertical width is set to a length about twice the diameter of the projecting portion 566. Therefore, while the left and right positions of the outer cover member 560 are strictly defined, it is possible to improve the working efficiency when the outer cover member 560 abuts on the support plate portion 510 and is fastened and fixed.

That is, in the fastening preparation state in which the heavy plate units 500L and 500R abut the support plate portion 510 from the front side, the plate units 500L and 500R are slightly misaligned vertically with respect to the support plate portion 510 (protrusion portion 566 The projection 566 can be inserted into the pin support hole 515 even when the position is shifted up and down by about the diameter of. Thereby, the protrusion 566
Are inserted into the pin support holes 515, and then the heavy plate unit 500L with respect to the support plate portion 510,
By moving the 500R up and down by the amount of positional deviation, the positional deviation can be eliminated and fastening and fixing can be performed easily.

As shown in FIGS. 108 and 109, the left heavy plate unit 500L has a window 14c (FIG. 86).
Inner cover member 520 that forms the right edge of the reference) and is formed of a non-transparent resin material
And an inner lens member 530 which is fastened and fixed to the inner cover member 520 from the right side and is formed of a light transmitting colorless resin material.

The right heavy plate unit 500R is a light guide member 540 disposed opposite to the left heavy plate unit 500L.
And an outer lens member 550 which is in contact with the light guide member 540 in the left-right direction and whose front end is disposed opposite to the front-rear direction and is made of a light transmitting white resin material, and the outer lens member The light guide member 54 is disposed on the right side of the 550 and is made of a non-transparent resin material.
And an outer cover member 560 to which the 0 and outer lens members 550 are fastened and fixed.

Next, details of each member will be described. 110 and 111 show the heavy plate unit 50.
It is an exploded front perspective view of 0L and 500R. In FIG. 110, a perspective view in which the right side is directed to the front side, and in FIG. 111, a perspective view in which the left side is directed to the front side is illustrated, and five plate members constituting heavy plate units 500L and 500R. Are illustrated in an exploded manner.

The inner cover member 520 is a main plate portion 521 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and an upper fastening portion 52 disposed on the upper end of the main plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560.
2, a lower fastening portion 523 disposed at the lower end of the main body plate portion 521 and fastened and fixed to the outer cover member 560, a plurality of openings 524 opened in the main body plate portion 521, and the inner lens member 5
A plurality of short fastening parts 525 which are cylindrical parts to be inserted into 30 and into which screws for fixing the inner lens member 530 to the inner cover member 520 are screwed, and are formed longer than the short fastening parts 525 The outer cover member 560 is a cylindrical portion that is inserted into the lens member 530.
And a plurality of back fastening portions that are provided on the right side of the main body plate portion 521 while being screwed into and screwed in to fix the support plate portion 510 from the back side. 527
And mainly.

The front side end portion 521a of the main body plate portion 521 has a wave shape, and the connection plate portion 521c which connects the front side end portion 521a and the back side base portion 521b in a short width portion (a portion close to the back side) of the wave shape. Equipped with

The rear side base portion 521b is the base portion 511 of the support plate portion 510 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
b An inner side surface 521b1 is provided which comes into surface contact with the left side surface (the shape is matched).

The connecting plate portion 521c is a plate-like portion which is disposed in a posture inclined to the left toward the back side, and the opening 524 is partitioned by the connecting plate portion 521c.

In the present embodiment, the connection plate portions 521c are not arranged at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and are arranged such that the intervals become wider in order from the lower side to the upper side (see FIG. 114). Thereby, the opening sizes of the plurality of openings 524 are made different, and the effect of the light is displayed in the openings 524.
It can be different every time.

The upper fastening portion 522 is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed in, and is recessed in the left and right direction on a pair of fastening portions 522a juxtaposed in the front and back direction And a fitting groove 522b.

The fitting groove 522b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower fastening portion 523 includes a fastening portion 523a which is a cylindrical portion into which a screw for fastening and fixing the outer cover member 560 is screwed, and a fitting groove 523b which is recessed in the left and right direction on the left outside surface. That is, screws are inserted through the outer cover member 560 at two places at the upper end and at one place at the lower end, and fastened and fixed to the inner cover 520.

The fitting groove 523b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of the covering cover 370 (see FIG. 92) are fitted.

The openings 524 are juxtaposed at four upper and lower positions and the inner lens member 530 in the assembled state.
Act as a window to view the Each outer shape portion of the opening 524 is formed in a curved shape that protrudes rightward with the connection plate portion 521c as an end portion (left end portion). That is, each opening 524 is arranged to be recessed rightward from the left end of the connection plate 521 c (see FIG. 114).

The short fastening portion 525 is disposed at the boundary between the back side base portion 521b and the connection plate portion 521c (see FIG. 110). This boundary portion is shaped like the design in the present embodiment, the inner cover member 52
The surface of 0 (left side) corresponds to the part which overhangs to the left (see FIG. 111). Back side base 52
The surface of 1b is curved in a concave shape to the right, like a design, between the boundaries described above.
That is, the surface of the back side base portion 521 b is formed in a wave shape which waves in the left and right directions as it proceeds in the vertical direction.

In this case, the short fastening portion 525 is disposed on the back surface side of the portion projecting to the design-like surface side. In the case where the inner cover member 520 is formed to have a uniform thickness, conversely, the back surface of the design-like overhanging portion is formed with a recess which is likely to be a dead space. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the dead space can be effectively used by arranging the short fastening portion 525 in the recess of the inner cover member 520, and the space on the back surface side (inner lens member 530 side) of the inner cover member 520. Efficiency can be improved.

The inner lens member 530 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions conforms to the shape of the front and rear end portions of the inner cover member 520. That is, the inner lens member 530 is formed into a main plate portion 5 which is formed in a vertically long plate shape.
The front end 531a of the front cover 31 has a wave shape that substantially matches the shape of the front end 521a of the inner cover member 520.

The front side end portion 531a forms a curved surface extending rightward from the front side edge of the main body plate portion 531, and is drilled in the front and rear direction at the switching position of the curve forming the wave shape in the front and rear direction. And a support hole 531 through which the convex portion 551b (see FIG. 109) of the outer lens member 550 is inserted.
b, 531 c.

The support hole 531b is formed in a wave-like front portion of the front end 531a, and a through hole 531b1 through which a screw for fastening and fixing the short fastening portion 525 of the inner cover member 520 is formed on the back side. That is, since the screw is fastened and fixed behind the support hole 531b, the support hole 5
Even if a load is applied to the vicinity of 31 b, it is possible to prevent the support hole 531 b from being deformed or displaced.

The support hole 531c is formed in the wave-like rearward portion of the front end 531a, and on the back side thereof, an inclined rib portion 532 extended to a position capable of coming into contact with the light guide member 540 is disposed. . That is, since the rigidity behind the support hole 531 c is strengthened in the inclined rib portion 532, the support hole 5
Even when a load is applied to the vicinity of 31c, the support hole 531c can be prevented from being deformed or displaced.

The main body plate portion 531 is provided with a through hole 531 d drilled in the left-right direction with a size capable of inserting the long fastening portion 526 at a position between the support hole 531 b and the support hole 531 c in the vertical direction. By inserting the long fastening portion 526 into the through hole 531 d, alignment between the inner cover member 520 and the inner lens member 530 can be performed.

The inclined rib portion 532 is disposed at a position (right side position) corresponding to the connection plate portion 521c of the inner cover member 520, and is a pair of upper and lower plate portions 53 extending rightward from the upper and lower edge portions of the connection plate portion 521c.
2a and a plurality of reinforcing plate portions 532 vertically connecting between the pair of upper and lower plate portions 532a.
and b.

The upper and lower plate portions 532a are extended in such a manner as to fill a gap with the light guide member 540. That is,
Similar to the inner cover member 520, the inner lens member 530 is shaped to project leftward as it goes to the back side, so that the lateral width becomes longer as it goes to the back side (the front end in the top view is tipped Triangle shape).

The inner lens member 530 includes an overhanging portion 533 which is formed to project leftward from the main body plate portion 531 in a manner passing through the opening 524. The overhanging portion 533 is provided with a light scattering portion 533a which is provided in a wavelike convex shape and has a wavelike curved surface so as to scatter light on the opposite side to the overhanging side.

The light guiding member 540 is made of a thermoplastic resin, and has concave portions that change the traveling direction of light emitted from the LED 512a disposed on the back side in the left and right direction as a dot pattern arranged in a grid shape It is a so-called light guide plate to be formed. That is, at least a part of the light emitted from the LED 512 a to the rear end of the light guide member 540 is directed in the left-right direction via the light guide member 540, and is emitted to the inner lens member 530 or the outer lens member 550. Ru. The light guide member 540 is thermally bent into a curved shape corresponding to the arrangement of the LEDs 512a (see FIGS. 105 and 107), and the width dimension in the thickness direction is the front end from the end face on the back side (LED 512a side) It is formed of a shape that gradually tapers towards the end face.

Here, the concave portion is a so-called edge light type light source (in the present embodiment, the LED 512a).
) Is a processing unit for changing the light from (1) into uniform surface emission. The recessed portion is a notch-shaped recessed portion that is recessed from the left and right sides, and reflects or refracts incident light from the LED 512 a to form the light guide member 5.
It emits from the surface of 40 left and right sides.

In this embodiment, as an example, the concave portion is a thermoplastic plate having a pattern in which conical portions having a tilt angle of 45 ° with respect to the bottom and a diameter of about 1 mm of the bottom circle are dispersed in a grid at intervals of about 3 mm. It is formed by pressing (hot pressing) on a resin. Among the light emitted from the LED 512 a, the light reaching the concave portion is reflected by the concave portion, and is emitted from the left and right side surfaces of the light guide member 540 in a substantially vertical direction.

Although the thermoplastic resin used in the present invention is not particularly limited, those having transparency are preferable, and acrylic resins (methacrylic resins), polycarbonate resins, polyvinyl chloride resins, noncrystalline polyester resins, noncrystalline olefin resins are preferable. Resin, polystyrene resin, AS resin (
An acrylonitrile, a styrene copolymer compound) can be illustrated. Among these, by using an acrylic resin, in particular, the light guide member 540 having high average luminance and little decrease in luminance distribution.
You can get

In the present embodiment, the thickness of the light guide member 540 at the LED 512 a side end is set to 5 mm. By setting the thickness to 3 mm to 8 mm, the light from the LED 512a can be efficiently guided, and the retention of the shape after the thermal bending process is improved, and a practical strength can be obtained.

In the assembled state (see FIG. 86), the light guide member 540 is formed in a wave shape in which the shape of the front end is slightly shifted to the back side from the front end 531a of the inner lens member 530 It is also formed from rippling wave shapes.

The left and right wave shapes are not exact in the present invention. For the degree of corrugation,
There is no particular limitation, but the radius of curvature (R) is 200 mm or more and 700 mm in the curved surface portion.
It is preferred that By setting such a radius of curvature (R), it is possible to provide a design capable of giving three-dimensional freedom while reducing distortion after thermal bending and keeping practical mechanical properties well. .

In addition, although the detail of the wave shape which ripples right and left is mentioned later (refer FIG. 114), the inner cover member 520 is mentioned.
The left side at a position corresponding to the connecting plate portion 521c, and the right side (apart from the inner cover member 520) at a position between the positions corresponding to the adjacent connecting plate portions 521c It has a wave shape.

The wave shape in the left-right direction is formed by subjecting the base on which the concave portion is formed to thermal bending as described above. The heat bending method of the present invention includes a concave surface (female mold) and a convex surface (female mold) which are curved in a state of being heated to a heating temperature of +10 to 40 ° C. of the deflection temperature under load of the thermoplastic resin serving as the base material.
The mold is made by pressing the substrate to a mold having a male mold. More specifically, when a thermoplastic resin has acrylic resin as a main component, heating temperature can be 110 degreeC or more and 150 degrees C or less. Specifically, the temperature is preferably 130 ° C. or more and 150 ° C. or less.

The heating temperature of the base material at this time is below the melting point of the thermoplastic resin. By setting the temperature of the substrate during heating to the deflection temperature under load + 40 ° C. or less and the melting point or less, the shape of the light guide pattern provided on the surface of the substrate is not broken, and the light source light before and after the thermal bending process It can be suppressed that the reflection angle of As a result, it is possible to prevent the brightness reduction and the unevenness of the brightness distribution in the light guide plate. Moreover, distortion to a light-guide plate can be suppressed by setting it as such heating temperature conditions.

The light guide member 540 includes a curved plate-shaped main plate portion 541 constituting the light guide plate, and the main plate portion 5 thereof.
A fastening portion 542 is mainly provided, which extends vertically from upper and lower end portions of the screw 41 and through which a screw fastened to the outer cover member 560 is inserted.

The light guide member 540 includes a fastening portion 542 and a recess 541 a for retracting from the long fastening portion 526.
In the other position, there is no part penetrating in the left and right direction. That is, since the light guide member 540 is constituted by a single plate without a hole at least on the inner side of the projection surface which projects the opening 524 in the left-right direction, the effect of the effect by the light passing through the opening 524 is improved. be able to. The rear end of the light guide member 540 is substantially flush with the rear end of the inner lens member 530.

The outer lens member 550 is disposed on the upper and lower end portions of the main body plate portion 551 which is formed in a vertically long plate shape and the main body plate portion 551 and the fastening portion 542 of the light guide member 540 is internally fitted and supported. Internal fit 5
52 and a plurality of insertion holes 553 which can be configured as through holes into which screws fastened to the outer cover member 560 are inserted, and a region extending rightward in a region surrounded by the plurality of insertion holes 553 A protruding portion 554 that can be visually recognized, a plurality of through holes 555 through which the long fastening portion 526 of the inner cover member 520 is inserted, and a back surface side of the main body plate portion 551 It mainly comprises a plurality of back fastening parts 556 into which screws for fixing 510 are screwed.

The outer lens member 550 is formed so that the shape of the front and rear end portions conforms to the shape of the front and rear end portions of the light guide member 540. That is, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 extends leftward from the front side edge of the main body plate 551 and forms a curved surface substantially matches the shape of the front end of the light guiding member 540. It has a wave shape and is disposed slightly offset to the front side with respect to the front end of the light guide member 540. In the present embodiment, the front side end of the light guide member 540 and the front side end 551a of the outer lens member 550 are formed to be equally spaced in the longitudinal direction at any position in the vertical direction. Ru.

The front side end 551a is at the switching position in the front-rear direction of the curve forming the wave shape,
A plurality of convex portions 551b are provided so as to be convex to the front side and fit in the support holes 531b and 531c in an assembled state (see FIG. 86).

The surface on the opposite side of the front end 551a opposite to the light guide member 540 is disposed on the front side,
The bulging part 551a1 (refer FIG. 115 (a)) bulging to side view semicircle shape is formed innumerably up and down. The bulging portion 551a1 functions to scatter the light emitted from the front end face of the light guide member 540, so that even if the LEDs 512a are spaced apart at a predetermined distance, The light emission at the front side end face can be made into a band-like light emission aspect that continues vertically.

The insertion hole 553 is disposed in a recessed deep portion having a shape that is recessed on the inner side (the inner side of the surface of the main body plate portion 551) as the shape of the projecting portion 554. Thereby, the fastening of the outer lens member 550 to the outer cover member 560 can be made strong, and the outer lens member 550 can be prevented from being peeled off from the outer cover member 560.

In the right heavy plate unit 500R, the rear fastening portion 556 into which a screw for fastening and fixing to the support plate portion 510 is screwed is disposed on the outer lens member 550 and is not disposed on the outer cover member 560. Therefore, the arrangement of the outer cover member 560 can be arranged as close as possible to the right side edge (the outer side edge of the pachinko machine 8010) of the support plate portion 510 (arranged regardless of the screw diameter and the arrangement of screws it can). Thereby, the area (the area on the left side of the right panel unit 500) arranged to face the player can be enlarged.

The surface of the main body plate portion 551 on the side facing the light guide member 540 is curved to match the surface shape (curved shape) of the light guide member 540, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) 5
The surface 40 abuts on the main body plate 551 (see FIG. 114 (b)).

Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being displaced in the direction in which the light guide member 540 is disposed to face the main body plate portion 551. In addition, since the main body plate portion 551 is directly fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, the support plate portion 510 and the light guide member 540 are aligned via the main body plate portion 551.

Therefore, the LEDs 512 a disposed on the substrate member 512 fixed to the support plate portion 510,
Misalignment with the light guide member 540 can be prevented, and light can be accurately incident on the light guide member 540 from the LED 512 a.

The outer cover member 560 has a main plate portion 561 formed in a vertically long plate shape, and a receiving surface capable of receiving the fastening portion 522 a of the inner cover member 520 at the upper end portion of the main plate portion 561. A plurality of longitudinal holes each having a longitudinal width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 522a and a transverse oval shape having a lateral width longer than the longitudinal width and a plurality of screws to be inserted from the opposite side It is a receiving surface which can receive the fastening portion 523a of the inner cover member 520 at the lower end portion of the upper side fastened portion 562 having the screw receiving portion 562a and the main body plate portion 561,
A lower-side fastened with a screw receiving portion 563a which is formed in an elongated hole shape having a vertical width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the fastening portion 523a and a horizontal width longer than the vertical width The long fastening portion 5 of the inner cover member 520 at the front side end of the portion 563 and the main body plate portion 561.
26 is a receiving surface capable of receiving H.26, having a longitudinal width slightly larger than the diameter of the screw hole of the long fastening portion 526, and a transverse elongated hole shape longer than the longitudinal width and from the opposite side A plurality of screw receiving portions 564 through which screws are inserted, an opening portion 565 which is formed with an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the projecting portion 554 of the outer lens member 550, and a convex configuration from the main body plate portion 561 to the back side And a plurality of projecting portions 566.

The upper to-be-fastened portion 562 includes a fitting groove 562 b recessed in the lateral width direction at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the fitting groove 522 b of the upper fastening portion 522. The fitting groove 562b is formed as a groove into which the left and right claws constituting the supported groove 417 (see FIG. 118) of the upper panel unit 400 are fitted.

The lower to-be-fastened portion 563 is provided with a fitting groove 563 b recessed in the lateral width direction at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the fitting groove 523 b of the lower fastening portion 523. The fitting groove 563 b is a cover 3
The left and right claws constituting the support groove 376 of 70 (see FIG. 92) are formed as grooves to be fitted.

That is, the right panel unit 500 is engaged with the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 by the upper and lower fitting grooves 562 b and 563 b. Here, the right panel unit 500 is in contact with the upper panel unit 400 and the covering cover 370 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 86), so the right panel unit 500 is projected to the front side by the covering cover 370. However, the upper panel unit 400 can be supported by the stably supported right panel unit 500. Therefore, the allowable weight of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased.

The opening 565 is formed in a shape into which the overhanging portion 554 of the outer lens member 550 is fitted (see FIG.
It forms from the inner shape equivalent to the external shape of the overhang | projection part 554). Therefore, the path for accessing the gap in the left-right direction between the opening 565 and the overhanging portion 554 can be narrowed, so that it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of peeling the outer lens member 550 from the outer cover member 560.

Referring to FIGS. 112 and 113, left heavy plate unit 500L and right heavy plate unit 500.
A method of assembling R will be described. FIG. 112 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 112 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIb-CXIIb in FIG. 112 (a). a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 113 (b) is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the right panel unit 500 taken along line CXIIIb-CXIIIb in FIG. 113 (a).

In addition, in FIG. 112 (a) and FIG. 112 (b), the state by which the convex part 551b is arrange | positioned at the back side of the support hole 531b is illustrated, and in FIG. 113 (a) and FIG. Part 55
A state in which 1b is inserted through the support hole 531b is illustrated.

The right panel unit 500 is assembled in such a manner that the left end portion of the main plate portion 531 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and the front end 551a of the right heavy plate unit 500R are in contact in the left and right direction (FIG. 11)
2 (b), the left heavy plate unit 500L can be brought close to the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R, and the convex portions 551b and 551c can be inserted into the support holes 531b.

Thus, at the front end of the right panel unit 500, the convex portions 551b and 551 are provided.
By adopting a configuration in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fixed by inserting and fitting c into the support holes 531b, design freedom of the front end of the right panel unit 500 is improved. be able to.

For example, in the present embodiment, as a result of adopting the above configuration, the front end portion of the right panel unit
It is possible to reduce the number of screws disposed on the front side of the front side surface of the light guide member 540 and fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, whereby the light is blocked by the screws Since the area can be reduced, the light emitted from the end face on the front side of the light guide member 540 can be easily viewed in the form of a strip extending in the vertical direction.

Also, for example, in the present embodiment, the number of screws (fastening points) for fastening and fixing the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R at the front end of the right panel unit 500 is reduced. The light guide 540 is loaded by applying a load to the light member 540.
Can reduce the range where there is a risk of breakage. Therefore, the range in which the light guide member 540 can be disposed can be expanded to the vicinity of the front end of the right panel unit 500 (near the tapered end). Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the light guide member 540 from being interrupted and visually recognized near the front end of the right panel unit 500.

When the left heavy plate unit 500L is brought close to the front side of the right heavy plate unit 500R and the convex portions 551b and 551c are inserted into the support holes 531b, the inclined rib portion 532 of the inner lens member 530 of the left heavy plate unit 500L and , The light guide member 540 of the right heavy plate unit 500R,
The surfaces in parallel relation to each other are configured along the front-rear direction, and the surfaces are in a positional relationship that can be in contact with each other. That is, the contact surface between the inclined rib portion 532 and the light guide member 540 is the left heavy plate unit 500L.
Functions as a guide surface (guide) when moving the right heavy plate unit 500R in the front-rear direction, so that the right panel unit 500 can be easily assembled.

Here, a method for disassembling the right panel unit 500 in maintenance or the like will be described. The right panel unit 500 includes the left heavy plate unit 5 at the support plate portion 510 as described above.
While the 00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are assembled by fastening and fixing, at least two procedures can be considered for the assembling procedure.

The first procedure is a method in which the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to each other and then fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510, and the second procedure is the right heavy plate unit 500R. By fastening the left heavy plate unit 500L close to the right heavy plate unit 500R, and inserting the convex portions 551b and 551c into the support holes 531b.
In this method, the left heavy plate unit 500L is fastened and fixed to the right heavy plate unit 500R and the support plate portion 510, respectively. And these two kinds of procedures can be adopted similarly at the time of disassembly of the right panel unit 500.

As described above, since assembling and disassembling can be performed in two procedures, the operator who performs maintenance or the like can use the right panel unit 50 in either of the procedures depending on the location of the parts that need to be replaced.
It is possible to select whether 0 is disassembled or assembled, and the working time can be shortened.

It should be noted that in order to disassemble the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, regardless of which procedure is taken, the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R
It is necessary to slide each other in the plane direction. Convex part 551b, 551c and support hole 531b
It is necessary to release the engagement with the When the left heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are mutually slid in the surface direction, it is necessary to disassemble at least one from the support plate portion 510.

As described above, in the configuration in which the convex portions 551b and 551c are fitted to the support holes 531b, the right panel unit 500 is pricked (disassembled) from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86). It helps to prevent fraudulent activity that travels inside the 500 and enters the interior of the pachinko machine 8010.

That is, in the case where the front side portion of the right panel unit 500 is fixed by fastening the screw, the right panel unit 500 can be easily disassembled by removing the screw, and while it is possible to easily perform a fraudulent act, As in the present embodiment, the left heavy plate unit 5 of the right panel unit 500
00L and the right heavy plate unit 500R are fastened and fixed to the support plate portion 510 by screws inserted from the back side of the support plate portion 510, and the left side is not removed from the back side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 104). By making it difficult to disassemble the heavy plate unit 500L and the right heavy plate unit 500R, it is possible to make it difficult to disassemble the right panel unit 500 from the outside of the pachinko machine 8010. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act of passing along the inside of the right panel unit 500 and entering the inside of the pachinko machine 8010.

With reference to FIG. 114, the shape of the light guide member 540 of the right panel unit 500 and the effect in rendering will be described. FIG. 114 (a) is a side view of the right panel unit 500, FIG. 114 (b) is a rear view of the right panel unit 500, and FIG. 114 (c) is a side view of the right panel unit 500. . In FIGS. 114 (a) to 114 (c),
The illustration of the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

The light emitted from the LED 512a (see FIG. 105) of the support plate portion 510 is irradiated from the back side to the light guide member 540, and the light incident on the light guide member 540 is Be turned in the direction. At this time, light is emitted in the direction orthogonal to the surface of the light guide member 540.

Since the light guide member 540 is curved in the lateral direction (see FIG. 114B), the light is condensed on the side forming the concave shape, and the light is diffused on the side forming the convex shape. For example, at a position corresponding to the uppermost opening 524 of the plurality of openings 524, the light guiding member 540 has a concave shape with a radius of curvature R1 on the opening 524 side (left side). The light emitted from the light member 540 toward the opening 524 can be condensed to produce effects. Thereby, the intensity of light viewed through the opening 524 can be improved.

In addition, since the opposite side (right side) has a convex shape, the light guide member 540 to the outer lens member 550 side at the position corresponding to the opening 524 disposed at the top among the plurality of openings 524. The light emitted to the light can be diffused and used for effect.

As described above, in the present embodiment, even if the upper and lower positions are the same, the difference is in the form (whether it is condensed or diffused) of the effects of light performed on the left and right with the light guide member 540 as the boundary. It can be provided to improve the rendering effect.

In addition, the difference in the aspect of light production is not caused only by the curved shape of the light guide member 540, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it is possible to make the aspect of the effect of light on both the left and right sides different by dividing the shape of the concave portion notched in the light guide member 540 according to the area or dividing the thickness of the light guide member 540 according to the area. .

The light guiding member 540 is always formed in a concave shape on the side of the opening 524 at a position facing the opening 524, and the radius of curvature of the concave shape changes corresponding to the size of the opening 524. That is, for the upper three openings 524, the curvature radius of the concave surface of the light guide member 540 is also the second opening from the top, corresponding to the increase in the vertical width as the openings 524 move upward. The radius of curvature R2 at the position corresponding to the portion 524 is shorter than the radius of curvature R1 (R1
> R2) Similarly, the curvature radius R3 at the position corresponding to the third opening 524 from the top is shorter than the curvature radius R2 (R1>R2> R3).

As a result, even when the arrangement interval of the LEDs 512a arranged on the substrate member 512 is not changed, the number of LEDs 512a that emit the light collected for each opening 524 is different. The amount of light to be emitted can be changed for each opening 524. That is, according to the present embodiment, the amount of light to be visually recognized can be larger in the upper opening 524 than in the lower opening 524.

In addition, the radius of curvature R4 at the position corresponding to the lowermost opening 524, ie, the fourth opening 524 from the top, is formed equal to the radius of curvature R1 (R4 R R1) and the center of the concave surface It has a shape in which the normal coming out of is slightly inclined upward. Therefore, the amount of light visually recognized through the openings 524 at the upper and lower ends can be intensified, light effects can be sharpened, and the light emitted through the lower opening 524 can be viewed by the player. It can be emitted upwards.

The upper and lower widths W1 to W4 of the openings 524 are illustrated as lengths connecting the middle point of the upper side of the opening 524 and the middle point of the lower side in a side view, as shown in FIG. 114 (c). The width of the opening 524 opposite to the curvature radius R1 is the vertical width W1, the width of the opening 524 opposite to the curvature radius R2 is the vertical width W2, and the curvature radius R3 The width of the opening 524 oppositely disposed is the vertical width W3, and the width of the opening 524 oppositely disposed to the portion of the curvature radius R4 is the vertical width W4.

In the present embodiment, the upper and lower widths W1 to W4 of the respective openings 524 are reduced in the lower opening 524 (W1>W2>W3> W4). That is, in the portion of the curvature radiuses R1 to R3, the magnitude relationship between the curvature radii R1 to R3 and the magnitude relationship between the upper and lower widths W1 to W3 of the opening 524 are associated. Thereby, the location where the degree of light collection is weak (for example, the curvature radius R
In part 1), the vertical width W1 of the opening 524 is large so that the light is sufficiently incident on the opening 524, while in a portion where the degree of light collection is strong (for example, a portion with a radius of curvature R3) The upper and lower width W3 of the opening 524 is smaller than the upper and lower width W1 to prevent the light from being excessively incident on the opening 524. Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, the light emission mode for each opening 524 can be made uniform.

The center points of the radius of curvatures R1 to R4 shown in FIG. 114 (b) correspond to the focal point of the light emitted to the left of the light guide member 540, and the vertical widths W1 to W4 in the vertical direction It is arranged in the approximately middle position of.

The light guide member 540 has a convex shape to the left in the area KE at the boundary of the opening 524. Here, the area KE is a band-like area extending in the front-rear direction, and is defined as an area in which the upper and lower ends do not interfere with the adjacent opening 524. That is, as shown in FIG. 114 (c), the region K
The upper end of E coincides with the lower end of the opening 524 adjacent to the upper side, and the lower end of the area KE coincides with the upper end of the opening 524 adjacent to the lower side. Therefore, in the area KE, the LED 512
The light emitted in the front-rear direction from a is a left side view of the right panel unit 500 (FIG. 114 (c).
In the reference), it advances in the state where it is concealed by connecting plate part 521c.

In the region KE, the light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 is the inner cover member 520.
Therefore, even if the light collecting action is reduced, the difference in the amount of light visually recognized by the player is small.

On the other hand, the light guide member 54 is formed by forming a convex surface to the left side instead of the flat surface in the region KE.
Since the shape of 0 can be formed from a curved shape having no corner and stress concentration can be prevented, the durability of the light guide member 540 can be improved.

Further, by forming a convex shape to the left side in the region KE, a concave shape can be formed on the right side, and a portion to which light is diffused inside the opening 565 of the outer cover member 560 and a portion to which light is condensed Can be formed. Thereby, the rendering effect of the rendering of the light visually recognized through the opening 565 can be improved.

That is, it is possible to change the light viewed through the opening 565 while suppressing the change in the light viewed through the opening 524 depending on whether the light is made incident from the LED 512 a to the area KE. .

For example, the LED 512a that causes light to enter the area KE is turned off, and the other LEDs 5a are turned off.
It is also possible to irradiate light without gaps to the inside of the opening 524 and the opening 565 by turning on 12a. At this time, by making the shape on the right side of the light guide member 540 concave on the upper and lower sides of the area KE, the lights emitted to the right from the upper and lower positions of the area KE intersect at the right side of the outer cover member 560 As a result, it is possible to prevent the outer lens member 550 from being viewed dark in the region KE.

In addition, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the light emitted from the area KE is condensed and emitted in the form of an edge, which is viewed by the player at the edge The amount of light can be increased. Therefore, the overhang portion 554 (FIG. 106).
The light emission aspect of (see) can be sharpened.

The light guide member 540 may be configured as a flat surface at the boundary of the opening 524. In this case, by turning on the LED 512a disposed at a position corresponding to the inside of the area KE, the corresponding portion (the portion corresponding to the area KE) of the overhanging portion 554 (see FIG. 106) emits light in a strip shape. It can be done.

In the region KE, the front-rear width of the right panel unit 500 is shortened (the distance from the LED 512 a is shortened) as compared with the upper and lower parts thereof. Therefore, light incident on the area KE is likely to reach the front end even if the light quantity is weak. The effect may be performed using the light reaching the front end.

That is, although it can not be visually recognized through the connecting plate portion 521c, the front side end portion 5 of the inner lens member 530
31a (see FIG. 105) A visual effect of light visible (visible from the front side of the right panel unit 500) is prepared, and the jackpot expectation of the effect is set high to set the position of the player's eyes , Can be moved to the side away from the game board 13 than the front end of the right panel unit 500. Thereby, the degree of tiredness of the player's eyes can be reduced, and the player can play the game for a long time without stress.

Here, the light incident on the area KE is blocked by the connecting plate portion 521c when viewed from the left side surface, and is viewed by the player through the outer lens member 550 (see FIG. 106) from the right side surface. Therefore, the player who sits on the left side of the right panel unit 500 and is not visually recognized by the player playing the pachinko machine 8010 is notified by visible light to the clerk who visually recognizes the right panel unit 500 from the right side be able to.

As a result, the clerk can execute an error notification that can be easily noticed while not being noticed by the player who is performing the injustice, so that the player who is performing the injustice attempts to escape. It can be prevented.

By reversing the left and right shapes of the right panel unit 500, the light effect in the area KE may be visible only to the player and invisible to the store clerk.

FIG. 115 (a) is a schematic side view of the light guide member 540, and FIG. 115 (b) is a schematic view of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the light guide member 540 in the CXVb-CXVb line | wire of (a).

The light guide member 540 is shaped to be gradually tapered toward the front side from the end surface (approximately 5 mm in thickness) on the LED 512 a side. The front end of the light guiding member 540 (the LED 512)
The portion farthest from a) is designed to be 3 mm for the purpose of maintaining mechanical strength, and the lateral width dimension is reduced at the same gradient over the entire region in the vertical direction.

Therefore, the front end face of the light guide member 540 is not formed to the same width dimension (thickness). That is, the end face of the portion of the inner lens member 530 opposite to the support hole 531b (see FIG. 111) is compared with the end face of the portion opposite to the support hole 531c (see FIG. 111).
Since the distance from the end face on the side of 12a becomes long, it is tapered more and the width dimension (thickness) becomes thinner. By doing this, it is possible to suppress the difference between the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531 b and the light emission mode visually recognized in the vicinity of the support hole 531 c.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the vicinity of the support hole 531c is disposed at a position where the support hole 531b is vertically sandwiched by the portion near the support hole 531b and recessed on the back side, the difference in the distance in the front-rear direction and the support hole 531b
Due to the shadow created by the nearby part, the part near the support hole 531 c is more likely to be recognized darker than the vicinity of the support hole 531 b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light guide member 54 of the portion disposed opposite to the support hole 531 b
Since the width dimension (thickness) of the end face of the portion of the light guide member 540 disposed opposite to the support hole 531c is larger than the end face of 0, the light irradiated from the LED 512a is received. Thus, a large area of the light emitting surface can be secured.

Therefore, even if the amount of light emitted from any of the LEDs 512a among the plurality of LEDs 512a is the same, the amount of light visually recognized in the portion near the support hole 531c is the support hole 53
The amount of light visually recognized in the portion near 1 b can be increased, and the difference in distance in the front-rear direction and the degree of darkening due to shadows can be mitigated. Thus, the front end 531 of the inner lens member 530
It is possible to make it easy to make the degree of light emission visually recognized at the front side end of the right panel unit 500 up and down uniformly (a difference in strength is small), with a as the front surface.

FIG. 116 is a partial rear view of the right panel unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 116, the support plate portion 510 is not shown, and the light guide member 540 is visible. Also, in FIG. 116, an example of the path (traveling direction) of the light emitted through the light guide member 540 is illustrated by an imaginary arrow.

As shown in FIG. 116, light emitted from the light guiding member 540 toward the inner lens member 530 is condensed as an effect of curving the light guiding member 540, and slightly passes through the inner lens member 530. It spreads and travels to the outside.

Conversely, the light emitted toward the outer lens member 550 is diffused as an effect of the light guide member 540 being curved. Therefore, the LED 51 that generates light incident on the light guide member 540
While the arrangement of 2a is constant, it is possible to make the light emission modes (rough, light and dark) different on both sides of the light guide member 540. In other words, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light in a light emission mode different from the light emission mode expected from the arrangement interval of the LEDs 521a.

In addition, light emitted toward the inner lens member 530 side (player side) is the inner lens member 53.
By 0 being curved as shown in FIG. 115 (b), it is not right next to the player but refracted toward the player (see the arrow of an imaginary line in FIG. 115 (b). Imagination in FIG. 115 (b) Line arrows are
An example of the advancing direction of the light which passes the light guide member 540 is shown. As a result, it is possible to make the player easily recognize the light, and it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

Referring back to FIGS. 100 and 101, description will be made. The upper panel unit 400 includes the upper side plate member 14
Fitting grooves 522b and 562b which are fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a through e and are disposed at the upper end portion of the right panel unit 500 at the lower right end portion thereof (see FIGS. 108 and 109).
And a unit that is supported from the lower side and is disposed at the upper end of the front frame 14.

FIG. 117 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper panel unit 400, and FIG. 118 is an exploded rear perspective view of the upper panel unit 400. As shown in FIGS. 117 and 118, the upper panel unit 400 is fixed to the upper side plate member 14e by sandwiching the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 100), the upper frame member 410 and the front face of the upper frame member 410. And a speaker assembly 450 disposed on the back side of the upper frame member 410 and held by the upper frame member 410 and the upper side plate member 14e. ,
Mainly to In FIGS. 117 and 118, the speaker assembly 450 is omitted (see FIGS. 100 and 101).

The electric decoration unit 401 is a unit to be decorated to indicate the model name etc. on the front side, and L
A substrate on which a plurality of EDs are arranged is contained. By emitting light from the included LED,
Perform effects by light.

The electric decoration unit 401 includes a main body portion 402 formed in a box shape from a light transmitting resin material, a corrugated wall portion 403 formed in a corrugated shape on the back outer wall portion of the main body portion 402, and a corrugated wall portion 403 thereof. A plate-like portion 404 extending in the form of a horizontally long plate from the lower edge to the back side, and a portion projecting cylindrically from the wavy wall portion 403 to the back side above the plate-like portion 404 A cylindrical portion 405 whose shape is formed through the wavy wall portion 403, and a plurality of fastening portions 406 disposed on the back side of the main body portion 402 and to which screws inserted into the upper frame member 410 are fastened. , Mainly.

The main body portion 402 is formed in a box shape in such a manner that the front and rear plate members overlap the open side, and a space is formed inside. In addition, the contained LED is disposed on the electronic substrate,
The electronic substrate is fixed to the main body portion 402.

The wavy wall portion 403 engages with the wavy wall portion 412 formed on the front side wall of the upper frame member 410 to easily determine the assembly position in the left-right direction.
It is a part which improves the workability of assembling of 01.

The plate-like portion 404 is formed to be capable of coming into contact with the lower surface of the wavy wall portion 412 of the upper side frame member 410, and is a portion that suppresses the vertical displacement of the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper side frame member 410. In the front side wall of the upper side frame member 410, a laterally long groove shape which sandwiches the plate-like portion 404 vertically is formed concavely.

The cylindrical portion 405 has a function as a through hole for passing through the wiring of the electronic substrate in which the LED contained in the main body portion 402 is disposed to the upper frame member 410 side.

The electrical decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed to the upper frame member 410 by fastening screws to the plurality of fastening portions 406 through the upper frame member 410. Here, when the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), a closed space including the speaker assembly 450 is formed between the upper side plate member 14e and the upper side plate member 14e. It is formed to be difficult. That is, the upper frame member 410 is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14 e and the main body frame 14 a after the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed.

FIG. 119 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper side frame member 410, and FIG. 120 is an upper side frame member 41.
FIG. 10 is an exploded rear perspective view of 0. As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the upper frame member 410 is
A lower edge plate member formed of a main body member 411 to which the electric decoration unit 401 is fastened and fixed, and a curved shape along the lower edge of the main body member 411, and fastened and fixed from the back side along the lower edge of the main body member 411 420, a right corner support member 430R fastened and fixed to the body member 411 from the back side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the right corner of the body member 411, and a front side of the lower edge plate member 420 at the left corner of the body member 411. The left corner support member 430L to be fastened and fixed to the main body member 411, and the main body member 411 is inserted from the rear side to a position projecting to the front side from the opening 414, and is pressed from the rear side to the right corner support member 430R. And a lens member 440 which is restricted from falling off to the rear side and which constitutes the electric decoration portion 8033.

The main body member 411 has an opening formed on the left and right sides for passing the vibration wave (sound) generated from the speaker assembly 450, and is a long elongate member on which the speaker cover 27 is disposed to cover the opening. In the front side, a corrugated wall portion 412 formed in a wavy shape in top view, and a portion of the corrugated wall portion 412 disposed so as to face the cylindrical portion 405 of the decorative unit 401 than the outer shape of the cylindrical portion 405 A support through hole 413 which is formed with a slightly larger inner shape,
And an opening 414 which is formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner.

The wavy wall portion 412 is formed in substantially the same wave shape as the wavy wall portion 403 of the electric decoration unit 401. Thereby, the position alignment in the left-right direction when inserting the electric decoration unit 401 into the main body member 411 from the front side of the upper frame member 410 can be easily performed.

The cylindrical portion 405 is inserted through the support through hole 413 in the assembled state (see FIG. 86).
Thus, the wire protruding through the cylindrical portion 405 can be passed through the support through holes 413 to the back side of the main body member 411. Therefore, since the other end of the wiring whose one end is connected to the electronic substrate contained in the electric decoration unit 401 can be connected to the terminal on the back side of the main body member 411, the front frame 14 is closed. Can prevent the other end of the wiring from being detached.

The support through holes 413 define the position of the cylindrical portion 405 when the cylindrical portion 405 is inserted.
Thus, the support through holes 413 can be used for positioning the electric decoration unit 401 with respect to the upper frame member 410.

The opening 414 is an opening that allows the lens member 440 to be visible in a front view. In the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100), the LED 14 is positioned at a position coincident with the lens member 440 in the front-rear direction
The light e2 is disposed, and the light emitted from the LED 14e2 can be viewed by the player through the opening 414.

The main body member 411 has a wavy side portion 416 formed in a wavy shape in top view on the back side, a supported groove 417 recessed from the back side at the lower right end face, and a recessed side from the back side at the lower left end face Supported groove 418, a fastening portion 419 which is disposed at a symmetrical position in the vicinity of the upper end and in which a screw is threadably formed, and a screw is threadably formed at a position near the top and bottom The fastening portion 419 b is mainly provided.

The wavy side portion 416 has a shape that matches the shape of the opposing position of the lower edge plate member 420 (the shape of the wavy wall portion 422 formed on the lower edge front side end). Thereby, positioning in the lateral direction when fastening and fixing the lower edge plate member 420 to the main body member 411 can be easily performed.

The supported groove 417 has a shape that allows the left and right claws to be fitted to the fitting groove 522b and the fitting groove 562b (see FIGS. 105 and 106) of the right panel unit 500, and the fitted state (FIG. 86)
In the reference), a load (such as weight) given from the upper panel unit 400 can be given to the right panel unit 500 via the surface on which the supported groove 417 is formed.

The supported groove 418 has a shape that can be fitted to the upper end portion of the electric decoration portion 8031, and the fitted state (
86), the upper panel unit 40 is formed via the surface on which the supported groove 418 is formed.
It is configured to be able to apply a load (such as weight) given from 0 to the electric decoration portion 8031.

The fastening portion 419 is disposed at a position where the screws inserted in the through holes 463a and 483a (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450 can be fastened, and protrudes in a rib shape to a position where the screw does not reach the tip portion. And an enlarged rib 419a.

As described later, the enlarged rib 419a is formed by fastening the screws inserted through the through holes 463a and 483a to the fastening portion 419 so that the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e can be assembled into the main body frame 14a. , And the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, in the enlarged ribs 419a, ribs of the same shape are disposed at three locations at intervals of 120 ° around the fastening portion 419 along the fastening direction of the screw to the fastening portion 419.

The second fastening portion 419 b (see FIG. 118) is a fastening portion 14 e 1 (see FIG. 100) of the upper side plate member 14 e and the recessed portion 46 of the speaker assembly 450 at a lower position of the main body member 411.
No. 2, 482 (see FIG. 122), and in the upper position of the main body 411, in the same position as the recesses 462, 482 (see FIG. 122) of the speaker assembly 450, Details will be described later.

The lower edge plate member 420 includes a main body member 421 formed by curving a long plate, a wavy wall portion 422 formed in a wave shape in a bottom view at the lower edge front side edge of the main body member 421, and After extending from the upper edge of the wavy wall portion 422 to the front side, it is extended upward from the extending end portion, and the section L
And a plurality of L-shaped extension portions 423 formed in the shape of a letter, which are disposed at equal distances left and right from the left and right center position of the main body plate portion 421 (upper end position of curved shape) And an opening 424 composed of a small diameter through hole.

The lower surface of the L-shaped extension portion 423 contacts the upper surface of the lower plate 416a having the corrugated side portion 416 in the back surface, with the corrugated wall portion 422 and the corrugated side portion 416 of the main body member 411 abutting on the front and rear A portion which is a part of the L-shaped extending portion 423 and extends upward is fastened and fixed to the main body member 411 in the front-rear direction.

Accordingly, the substantial thickness of the upper panel unit 400 can be increased at the portion where the L-shaped extending portion 423 and the lower plate 416a abut on the upper and lower sides, and the strength can be improved.

The opening 424 is a speaker 45 in the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 123).
1 is an opening through which the vibration wave (sound) output to the inside of the speaker assembly 450 from the rear side of 1 is passed (discharged to the outside). The right corner support member 430R and the left corner support member 430L have circular openings 430R1 and 430L1, which are circular openings in the speaker assembly 450, for passing the vibration generated toward the front side.

The right corner support member 430R is provided with a laterally long rectangular through hole 430R2 formed to penetrate in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the opening 414 of the upper frame member 410 in the front-rear direction. Through hole 430R2
The light emitted to the lens member 440 through the lens is visible to the player through the opening 414.

121 is an exploded front perspective view of the speaker assembly 450, and FIG. 122 is an exploded back perspective view of the speaker assembly 450. In addition, in FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the speaker connection line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line in order to facilitate understanding.

The speaker assembly 450 is composed of a pair of left and right assemblies 450R and 450L, which are fastened together to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) by screws inserted into the connection holes 469, and left and right ends, The lower end portion is fastened and fixed to the upper side plate member 14e. In addition, the speaker assembly 450 is a pair of speaker assemblies 450R and 45 having a substantially symmetrical shape.
The speaker assembly 450R will be described because it consists of 0 L.
Description of 50L is omitted.

The speaker assembly 450R is a speaker (cone-type speaker) 451 which is an acoustic device for converting an electric signal into an audible sound wave to be audible, and the front flange 452 of the speaker 451 is inserted through the through hole 466. A front assembly 460 fastened and fixed from the front side, and an outer contour that substantially matches the outer contour of the front assembly 460 in a front view,
A rear assembly 48 which forms a space between the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460 in the assembled state (see FIG. 100).
0, and mainly.

The speakers 451 close the through holes 466 of the front assembly 460 and the front assembly 460.
The speaker 451 is used to emit presentation sound in connection with a game.
Through-hole in which a speaker connecting line 453 (for example, a copper wire and an electric wire comprising a covering portion covering the copper wire) extended at one end is connected to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 102) , And the terminal connector of the speaker connection line 453 is connected to the electronic board 14i (FIG. 102).
Are configured to be connected to the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

A front surface portion of the speaker 451 is covered with a protective cover 454 made of a synthetic fiber material that allows the sound emitted from the speaker 451 to pass therethrough. And this protective cover 4
The speaker 451 whose 54 is covered is attached to the front assembly 460 with the front portion thereof aligned with the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, the front part of the speaker 451 is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86) through the speaker cover 27 (see FIG. 86), and the reproduced sound from the speaker 451 is hidden. High-quality sound can be played back and output without In addition, the front cover of the speaker 451 can be suitably protected by the protective cover 454 without causing deterioration in sound quality.

The front side assembly 460 is a main body 46 which is formed in a cup shape whose left and right sides are long and whose rear side is open.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 462 recessed in a semicircular tip shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 461 toward the upper and lower width center, and the back surface of the recessed portion 463 b having the same shape as the recessed portion 462 An extending plate 463 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower width outwards to the upper and lower side edges of the main body 461, and the main body 461
A wire passage recess 464 recessed from the rear side end of the main body to the front side, a light passage through hole 465 penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body 461, and a speaker 451 at the right side of the main body 461 And a plurality of passage forming ribs 467 extending like ribs from the cup-shaped bottom plate (front side plate) of the main body 461 to the rear side, and the rear assembly 480. A plurality of fastening portions 468 to which the above-mentioned screws are fastened and fixed, connection holes 469 through which screws for fastening the left and right speaker assemblies 450L and 450R to the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100) are inserted The lower portion of the portion 461T mainly includes a front recessed portion 471 which is recessed from the back side to the front side.

The main body 461 is, as a region divided in the left and right direction, a base end side main body 461B disposed on the side where the through hole 466 is formed, and a center side in the left and right direction of the base end side main body 461B (FIG. 12).
1) mainly includes an intermediate main body portion 461M continuously provided on the left side) and a tip side main body portion 461T continuously provided on the center side (left side in FIG. 121) of the intermediate main body portion 461M in the left-right direction. A space formed between the proximal main body 461 B, the intermediate main body 461 M, and the distal main body 461 T and the rear assembly 480 is continuously formed.

The main body 461 includes a back side wall 461 H formed as a wall surrounding substantially the entire circumference of the outer shape in a front view. The rear side wall portion 461H has an edge without an inner side (an edge without a flange or the like formed inside).

The recessed portion 462 is a recessed portion in which the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle, and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1. Be done.

The extending plate 463 is provided with a through hole 463a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 463
Screws inserted into a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-clamping hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1
The through hole 483a of the rear assembly 480 is inserted through the coe-clamping hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of 4e.
And passes through the through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 120) of the main body member 411.

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, the screw inserted into the through hole 463a from the back side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the main body member 411, so that the extension plate 463 is tightened. It is pressed against the rear assembly 480. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is firmly fixed to each other by being tightened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body member 411.

According to this configuration, the speaker assembly 450 is fastened and fixed to the main body frame 14a made of metal with the upper side plate member 14e interposed therebetween (fastened and fixed to a hard material sandwiching the resin material). Thereby, the acoustic effect of the speaker 451 can be improved.

The wire passage recess 464 forms a part of an opening through which the speaker connecting wire 453 connected to the speaker 451 passes. The recessed width of the wiring passage recessed portion 464 is formed smaller than the cross-sectional outer shape of the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453. As a result, pressure is applied to the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 passing through the wiring passage recess 464, and a gap can be prevented from being generated between the wiring passage recess 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of the problem that the sound effect is reduced by the sound leakage from the opening through which the speaker connection line 453 is passed. In FIG. 121 and FIG. 122, the illustration of the rear side wall portion 461H is omitted (broken) for the sake of convenience, and the wiring passage concave portion 464 is illustrated so as to be visible.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the wiring passage recess 464 is formed not on the rear assembly 480 but on the front assembly 460 to which the speaker 451 is assembled, when the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are assembled, The speaker connecting line 453 connected to the speaker 451 can be easily passed through the wiring passage recess 464 in advance. Thereby, the workability of the assembly operation of the speaker assembly 450 can be improved.

The light passing through holes 465 are LEDs 14e disposed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through hole through which light emitted from the lens 2 toward the lens member 440 passes.

The passage forming rib 467 is in close contact with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480 without any gap, and is a bent passage (curved into the space formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480).
(Refer to FIG. 123). The bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes. The front end of the passage forming rib 467 is connected to the front side plate of the main body 461. This prevents the formation of a gap on the front side of the passage forming rib 467.

The front concave portion 471 is formed to have a size that surrounds the outer shape of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) (extends slightly outward from the outer shape).

The rear assembly 480 is a main body portion 48 which is formed in a cup shape whose left and right long front sides are open.
1 and a plurality of recessed portions 482 recessed in a semicircular tip shape from the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481 toward the upper and lower width center, and the back surface of the recessed portion 483 b having the same shape as the recessed portions 482 An extending plate 483 extending in a plate shape from the side edge to the upper and lower width outer side to the upper and lower side edges of the main body portion 481, and the main body portion 481
From the wiring pressing convex portion 484 provided on the front side of the front face, the light passing through hole 485 formed penetrating in the front-rear direction at the upper right corner of the main body portion 481, and the cup-shaped bottom plate (rear side plate) of the main body portion 481 A plurality of passage forming ribs 487 extending like ribs toward the front side, and a fastening portion 4 of the front side assembly 460
A plurality of through holes 488 formed as through holes into which screws are inserted at positions corresponding to the front and rear direction 68 and a front side from the front side at a position corresponding to the front concave portion 471 of the front assembly 460 in the front and rear direction And a rear-side recessed portion 491 which is recessed toward the main body.

The main body portion 481 is extended in a plate shape on the front side so as to surround the outer periphery of the main body portion 481 at a position moved inward by the thickness of the main body portion 461 of the front assembly 460 than the outer shape of the back side plate. Front side wall portion 48 formed from a shape that is internally fitted to the inner side surface of the rear side wall portion 461H
It has 1H.

Since the speaker assembly 450R includes double wall portions fitted by the back side wall 461H and the front side wall 481H all around the outer periphery, air can be prevented from leaking from the outer peripheral position . As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the sound effect is reduced due to the sound leakage from the outer peripheral position.

The front side wall portion 481H is a pair of auxiliary convex portions provided to project to the front side beyond the wiring pressing convex portion 484 at a position sandwiching the wiring pressing convex portion 484 with an interval allowing passage of the speaker connection line 453. It has 481 Ha.

The auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are a pair of convex portions that prevent the position of the speaker connecting line 453 temporarily fixed to the wiring passage concave portion 464 from shifting when the rear assembly 480 is assembled to the front side assembly 460. That is, since the inner side surfaces of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha are tapered so as to expand to the left and right toward the front side (the tip end side) (see FIG. 124 (c)), the speaker connecting line 45
Even if 3 is separated from the wiring passage recessed portion 464 and shifted to the left and right, the shift can be corrected by the taper of the pair of auxiliary convex portions 481Ha.

Thus, the speaker connecting line 453 can be returned to the wiring passage recess 464 in the process of assembly, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 100), the speaker connecting wire 453 is formed of the wiring passage recess 464 and the wiring pressing projection 484. Can be easily accommodated in the opening.

The recessed portion 482 is formed in the same shape in front view as the outer shape of the recessed portion 462, and the fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e (see FIGS. 100 and 101) is disposed on the center side of the circle. It is a recessed portion and is used for positioning with the fastening portion 14e1.

The extension plate 483 is provided with a through hole 483a through which a screw is inserted from the back side. Through hole 483
Screws inserted into a are inserted from the back side of the main body frame 14a into the co-clamping hole 14a2 and the upper side plate member 1
The through hole 483a and the front assembly 46 are inserted into the coe-clamping hole 14e3 (see FIG. 102) of 4e.
It passes through the zero through hole 463a and is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411 (see FIG. 101).

That is, in the speaker assembly 450R, a screw inserted into the through hole 483a from the back surface side of the main body frame 14a through the upper side plate member 14e is screwed into the fastening portion 419 of the main body member 411. The plate 483 is pressed against the extension plate 463 of the front assembly 460. Therefore, the speaker assembly 450R is fastened together with the main body frame 14a, the upper side plate member 14e and the main body member 411, and is firmly fixed to each other.

The wire pressing convex portion 484 is provided along the upper edge of the back side plate of the main body portion 481 so as to have a width fitted in the wire passing recess 464 and has a width greater than the recess depth of the wire passing recess 464. The speaker connecting line 453 is convexly provided with a convex length which is slightly shorter than the outer diameter of the covering portion of the speaker connecting line 453.

That is, the speaker connection line 4 is formed in the opening surrounded by the wiring pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage concave portion 464.
By passing through 53, the covering portion of the speaker connection line 453 is compressed, and a gap is generated between the opening formed by being surrounded by the wire pressing convex portion 484 and the wiring passage recess portion 464 and the speaker connection line 453. Can be prevented. Thus, the speaker connection line 453
It is possible to suppress the occurrence of the problem that the sound effect is reduced by the sound leakage from the opening for letting through.

The light passing through hole 485 is an LED 14e disposed in the upper side plate member 14e (see FIG. 100).
2 is a through hole through which light emitted from the lens 2 toward the lens member 440 passes. The light passage through hole 485 is formed of a circular opening that surrounds the LEDs one by one. The light passing through hole 465 is a through hole having a larger cross sectional shape than the light passing through hole 485, and is formed in a tapered shape in which the cross sectional shape becomes larger toward the front side, and the assembled state (see FIG. 100) ), The light passing through holes 465 and 485 communicate in the front-rear direction.

The passage forming rib 487 is formed in the same position as the passage forming rib 467 of the front assembly 460 in a front view, and abuts each other with no gap in front and back, and a plurality of spaces are formed between the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 It is a rib which forms a bending passage (refer to FIG. 123) which turns in a turn. The bending passage is a passage through which the vibration wave (sound) emitted from the speaker 451 to the back side passes.

The passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall portion 481H and at the same time, the front side wall portion 481H.
The front and rear ends and the surface position of the That is, the rear end of the passage forming rib 487 is the main body portion 48.
Connect with the back side plate of 1. This prevents the formation of a gap on the back side of the passage forming rib 487.

Here, the passage forming rib 487 is designed to have a dimension such that a compression force is generated in the front-rear direction, although the front end is in contact with the passage forming rib 467. That is, a compression force directed from the passage formation rib 467 to the back side is applied to the passage formation rib 487, and the compression force produces the passage formation rib 4.
67 and 487 close the gap between them while being elastically deformed in the front and rear direction (Fig. 124 (b)
reference).

At this time, the rigidity in the left-right direction of the passage forming rib 487 is weak, and if it is bent to the left and right, the compression force does not work well, and there is a possibility that the gap can not be closed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the passage forming rib 487 is fixed to the front side wall 481H, the rigidity in the left-right direction is determined by the strength of the front side wall 481H (see FIG. 100). It is possible to strengthen the side wall portion 461 H). Therefore, the rigidity in the left-right direction of the passage forming rib 487 can be strengthened, and bending of the passage forming rib 487 can be suppressed from left to right, so that the gap with the passage forming rib 467 can be closed well. Can.

The rear concave portion 491 is formed in a shape inverted from the front concave portion 471 and forms an opening in cooperation with the front concave portion 471. The opening is formed to a size (extends slightly outward from the outer shape) of the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120), and in the assembled state (see FIG. 86) It is placed at a position surrounding the outer shape.

FIG. 123 (a) is a rear view of the front assembly 460, and FIG. 123 (b) is a rear assembly 48.
It is a front view of 0. In FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), in order to facilitate understanding,
The speaker connecting line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and a state in which the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, which are disposed to face each other, is developed with the surfaces facing each other toward the front side in the drawing. That is, the contact positions of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be obtained by folding the drawing of FIG. 123 (a) and FIG. 123 (b) around a line (not shown) drawn longitudinally to the left and right center of the paper. It can be adjusted. That is, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e and the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e can be brought into contact with each other in the front-rear direction.

In the assembled state of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 (speaker assembly 450, see FIG. 100), the interior of the speaker assembly 450 includes the proximal main body 46 of the front assembly 460.
An acoustic chamber is formed on the back side of 1B. Then, an acoustic passage serving as a passage for the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the back side of the speaker 451 is extended toward the distal end side main body portion 461 T with the acoustic chamber as a base end. This acoustic passage is configured as a bending passage by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.

As shown in FIGS. 123 (a) and 123 (b), the passage forming rib 467 is formed on the inner side (left side) in the left and right direction with respect to the wiring passage recess 464 through which the wiring passes. Rib portions 467a and 467b disposed at a plurality of locations (five locations in the present embodiment)
, 467c, 467d, and 467e.

By forming the respective rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction than the wiring passage recessed portion 464 through which the wiring passes, the respective rib portions 467 are assembled.
a, 467 b, 467 c, 467 d, 467 e and respective rib portions 487 a of the rear assembly 480
Wiring can be prevented from being sandwiched between 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e are connected to the main body portion 461 and the rear side wall portion 461H, so the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467d are connected.
, 467 e can enhance the rigidity of the main body 461.

The rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e, together with the passage forming rib 487 of the rear assembly 480, form a bent passage through which the vibration wave Ws generated from the back side of the speaker 451 passes.

Here, when there is no passage forming rib 467 and a horizontally long cavity is formed, the speaker 451 is
In this embodiment, the vibration wave Ws travels while avoiding the passage forming rib 467.

That is, as illustrated as an example of the advancing path in FIG. 123 (a), the vibration wave Ws is located on the left side of the passage forming rib 467 (for example, the rib 467a) on the left side (arrow When the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) closest to the left and right direction is disposed on the L side and is disposed on the lower side, the traveling direction between the ribs is the upper left direction (arrows L and U).

On the other hand, the vibration wave Ws is disposed on the left side (arrow L side) of the passage forming rib 467 after the rib portion (for example, the rib portion 467b) of the passage forming rib 467 is disposed on the lower side When the rib portion 467c) is disposed on the upper side, the traveling direction is the lower left direction (in the directions of arrows L and D).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 4 are provided.
When 67e is alternately arranged up and down, the traveling path of the vibration wave Ws can be a path bent up and down, and the traveling path length of the vibration wave Ws is secured longer than the horizontal width of the space can do.

This makes it easy to adjust the traveling path length until the vibration wave Ws passes through the opening formed by the pair of recessed portions 471, 491, and suppresses the generation of the standing wave by the vibration wave Ws. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same function as the passage forming rib 467 is provided by the recessed portions 462 and 463b.
Can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is directed to the upper left direction between the recessed portion 462 disposed in the immediate vicinity of the front recessed portion 471 and the recessed portion 463 b located above and on the right side (arrow R side) It can be made to advance (in the directions of arrows L and U).

Therefore, the recessed portions 462 and 463b have the effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws, in addition to the effect exhibited at the time of assembly.

As shown in FIG. 123 (b), the passage forming rib 487 is provided with the wire pressing convex portion 4 for pressing the wire.
The rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 4 are formed on the inner side (left side) in the left-right direction with respect to the 84 and alternately arranged vertically at a plurality of places (five places in the present embodiment).
87 d and 487 e are provided.

Since each rib 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is connected with the main body 481 and the front side wall 481H, each rib 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d
, 487e can enhance the rigidity of the main body portion 481.

Here, each of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d, 487e is a front assembly 4
Each rib portion 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, and 467e is formed to have a shape corresponding to the six rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, and 467e in the front-rear direction.

The actions of the rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d and 487e are similar to the actions of the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d and 467e described above, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same function as the passage forming rib 487 is obtained by forming the recessed portions 482 and 483b.
Can also be generated by That is, the vibration wave Ws is located at the upper left between the recessed portion 482 disposed closest to the rear-side recessed portion 491 and the recessed portion 483 b located above and on the right side (arrow R side). It can be made to advance in the direction (arrow L, U direction). Therefore, the recess 48
In addition to the effect exerted at the time of assembly, 2, 483 b also exerts an effect of defining the traveling direction of the vibration wave Ws.

Here, the space formed inside the speaker assembly 450R is reduced in height as it goes away from the speaker 451, and is narrowed at a position where the recessed portions 462, 482 and the recessed portions 463b, 483b are vertically aligned. Further, the vertical width is expanded at a stretch at a position away from the speaker 451 and then communicated with the opening formed by the recessed portions 471 and 491. This can improve the acoustic effect.

In the present embodiment, in the longitudinal direction of the speaker assembly 450, the speaker 451 is
Since the proximal body portion 461 B side to which the speaker is assembled is sealed by the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480, the vibration wave Ws (sound) output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is
The outlet is sought to advance toward the tip side main body 461 T which is the opposite side in the longitudinal direction. Tip side main body 4
The vibration wave Ws (voice) reached to 61 T passes through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, the opening 424 of the lower edge plate member 420 (see FIG. 120) in order, and the speaker assembly Sound is emitted to the outside of the solid 450R (outside of the pachinko machine 8010 (see FIG. 86)).

That is, the speaker assembly 450 is configured as a bass reflex type speaker box, and the back surface portion of the speaker 451 is an internal path of the speaker assembly 450, the recess portion 47.
Since it is in direct contact with the atmosphere outside the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening and the opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed by 1,491, the sound output from the back side of the speaker 451 can be It is possible to reproduce and output with high sound quality without making you hesitate.

The bass reflex type speaker assembly 450 resonates the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 451 to invert the phase, and the sound in the same phase as the sound output from the front of the speaker 451 is recessed portions 471, 491. It is possible to emit sound from the opening formed by That is, in the bass reflex type speaker assembly 450, the sound output from the rear side of the speaker 450 can be superimposed and emphasized in the same phase without canceling out due to the reverse phase of the sound output from the front side. That is, it becomes possible to amplify a deep bass. By this,
The pachinko machine 8010 according to the present embodiment makes it possible to perform an effect full of reality,
It is possible to enhance the player's interest and excitement in the game.

In the present embodiment, the upper panel unit 400 in which the opening 424 is formed is disposed on the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 91), so the bass output from the rear side of the speaker 451 is a speaker assembly Using the internal space 450 as an enclosure, it is discharged to the front side of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 100) (the front side of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) is discharged downward). As a result, it is possible to appropriately provide the player who plays the game on the front side of the front frame 14 with an effect of the game by the low sound emitted from the front frame 14 to the front side.

Tuning of the sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice), setting the volume of the speaker assembly 450 or
This can be performed by setting the path length of the vibration wave Ws. For example, in the present embodiment, the respective rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d and 467e of the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48 are provided.
A path of the vibration wave Ws is defined as a path avoiding the respective rib portions 487a, 487b, 487c, 487d and 487e of zero. Therefore, each rib 467a, 467b, 467c, 46
The sound of the vibration wave Ws (voice) can be tuned by individually setting the arrangement of the 7 d and 467 e and the rib portions 487 a, 487 b, 487 c, 487 d and 487 e and the extension length in the vertical direction.

In the present embodiment, the rib portions 467a, 467b, 467c, 4 of the front side assembly 460 are provided.
67 d, 467 e and the respective rib portions 487 a, 487 b, 487 c, 487 of the rear side assembly 480.
In addition to the above-described purpose, the d 487 e is disposed at a portion to which a load is applied at the time of fastening and fixing the speaker assembly 450 to reinforce the speaker assembly 450.

For example, the respective rib portions 467c, 487c, 467d, 487d can be reinforced in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488 by being disposed in the vicinity of the fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Loads applied to the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 when screws are screwed in can prevent the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 from being broken.

The extending plates 463 and 483 are sandwiched between the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 and the upper side plate member 14e in the assembled state and pressed (see FIG. 125 (a)).
7c, 487c, 467d, 487d are disposed closer to the extension plates 463, 483 than the closest fastening portion 468 and the through hole 488. Therefore, even after the front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 are fastened and fixed by screwing the screw into the fastening portion 468, the extension plates 463 and 48 are provided.
When the upper frame member 410, the upper side plate member 14e, and the main body frame 14a are fastened and fixed, the ribs 467c and 4 are screwed into the fastening portions 419 that are inserted into the three through holes 463a and 483a.
The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 48 are brought into contact by bringing the 87c, 467d and 487d into contact with each other.
A deformation of 0 can be prevented. That is, each rib portion 467c, 487c, 467d, 48
The front assembly 460 and the rear assembly 480 can be reinforced by 7 d.

Also, for example, the rib portions 467 b and 487 b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482. Here, the recessed portions 462 and 482 are portions to which the fastening portions 14e1 (see FIGS. 102 and 125) of the upper side plate member 14e are aligned downward in the assembled state, and the speaker assembly 450 is configured as the upper side plate member. In the state before fastening and fixing to 14e, the speaker assembly 45
The zero recessed portions 462 and 482 ride on the fastening portion 14e1. Therefore, recessed part 462
, 482 are loaded upward from the fastening portion 14e1 as a reaction force generated when the fastening portion 14e1 supports the weight of the speaker assembly 450.

Therefore, it is considered that the recessed portions 462 and 482 are easily damaged. In the present embodiment, since the rib portions 467 b and 487 b are connected to the upper end portions of the recessed portions 462 and 482, the recessed portions are formed from the fastening portion 14 e 1 The load applied to the portions 462 and 482 can be reinforced, and the durability of the recessed portions 462 and 482 can be improved.

An opening 424 (see FIG. 120) formed of a plurality of small diameter through holes functions as a bass reflex port. Here, as compared with the case where the opening 424 is formed from a single large-diameter through hole, a cheating attempt is made to illegally intrude a wire, a piano wire, etc. into the pachinko machine 8010 through the opening 424. It can be made easy to control.

In such an illegal act, a wire, a piano wire or the like is illegally intruded into the game area to deform a nail or the like. In the present embodiment, the speaker assembly 450 includes the front concave portion 471. In addition to being formed in a box shape sealed except for the opening formed by the rear side recessed portion 491 and the opening formed by the wiring passage concave portion 464 and the wiring pressing convex portion 484, the wiring passage concave portion 464 and The gap of the opening formed by the wire pressing convex portion 484 is closed by the speaker connecting line 453. Therefore, when a wire, a piano wire or the like is made to enter the speaker assembly 450 through the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, the speaker assembly passes through the opening different from the part where it enters It is possible to make it difficult for the tip of a wire, a piano wire, or the like to reach the game area through a through hole formed as an opening for passing the speaker connection line 453 to the upper side plate member 14e.

In addition, since the through holes formed as openings for passing the speaker connection lines 453 in the upper side plate member 14e are arranged closer to the left and right ends of the upper side plate member 14e according to the arrangement of the speakers 451, wires and piano wires The distance between the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491, which is a place where the speaker assembly 450 and the like are inserted, can be increased.

Therefore, even if such fraudulent activity is performed, the success rate of the fraudulent activity can be lowered, and it is possible to make it easy to prevent the occurrence of fraudulent benefits.

124 (a) is a rear view of the speaker assembly 450R, and FIG. 124 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the speaker assembly 450R taken along line CXXIVb-CXXIVb in FIG. 124 (a), FIG. 124 (a) is a top view of the speaker assembly 450R in the direction of arrow CXXIVc in FIG. 124 (a), and FIG. 124 (d) is an arrow CXXI in FIG. 124 (a).
It is a partial bottom view of speaker assembly 450R in Vd direction. Figure 124 (a).
And FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connecting line 453 is illustrated by an imaginary line to facilitate understanding, while in the partially enlarged view of FIG. 124 (c), the speaker connecting line 453 is omitted. .

As enlarged and illustrated in FIG. 124 (b), the inner side surface 461Hi (the lower surface of FIG. 124 (b)) of the rear side wall 461H of the front assembly 460 has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side. , The outer surface 481Ho of the front side wall 481H of the rear assembly 480 (FIG. 124 (b)
The upper surface has a tapered shape that inclines inward toward the rear side and the inner side surface 461H
It is shaped to fit with i in the assembled state. Thereby, the working efficiency of the work of inserting the front side wall portion 481H of the rear side assembly 480 into the rear side wall portion 461H of the front side assembly 460 can be improved.

In FIG. 124 (b), the position of the front end of the rib 487c in the assembled state is illustrated by a solid line, and the position of the front end of the rib 487c before assembly is illustrated by an imaginary line. That is, in the assembled state, the rib portion 487c receives an compressive load from the rib portion 467c and is elastically deformed. Since a compressive force acts from the rib 487c toward the rib 467c by the restoring force generated by this elastic deformation, the gap between the rib 467c and 487c can be filled. In addition, each rib part 467a, 467b, 467c, 467d, 467e, 487a
, 487b, 487c, 487d, and 487e are designed to have a dimensional relationship in which a compressive load is generated between the abutting rib portions.

As shown in FIG. 124 (c), the intermediate main body 461M is formed to have a short front-rear dimension as compared with the proximal main body 461B and the distal main body 461T. Therefore, the tip side main body 46
Compared to 1T, the cross-sectional area of the path through which the vibration wave Ws can pass can be reduced (squeezed) in the intermediate main body portion 461M. Thereby, the acoustic effect can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 124 (d), the internal space of the distal end side main body portion 461T disposed above the opening formed by the front side recessed portion 471 and the rear side recessed portion 491 is the inside of the intermediate main body portion 461M. It is largely secured in a bulging manner in the front-rear direction as compared with the space. As a result, the vibration wave Ws that has reached the distal end side main body portion 461T can be temporarily retained by the distal end side main body portion 461T and released at low speed. As a result, it is possible to improve the acoustic effect, for example, it is possible to make it easy to hear a deep bass by the vibration wave Ws.

FIG. 125 (a) is a front assembly 46 taken along line CXXVa-CXXVa of FIG. 124 (a).
124 is a partial cross-sectional view of the rear assembly 480, the upper frame member 410, the main body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e, and FIG. 125 (b) is a front assembly 460 at the CXXVb-CXXVb line in FIG. It is a fragmentary sectional view of side assembly 480, upper frame member 410, body frame 14a, and top board member 14e.

As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the enlarged rib 419a of the fastening portion 419 is a through hole 463a,
The screw inserted into 483 a is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion 419, whereby the front assembly 460 is assembled.
The rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e are parts that sandwich the body assembly 14a.
That is, by arranging the enlarged rib 419a at the surface position on the front side of the extending plate 463, it is possible to prevent the front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e from being displaced in the front-rear direction. The front assembly 460, the rear assembly 480, the upper side plate member 14e, and the metal body frame 14a can be firmly fixed.

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the second fastening portion 419 b is fastened to the fastening portion 14 e 1 of the upper side plate member 14 e at the lower position of the upper frame member 410, and the speaker assembly at the upper position of the upper frame member 410. It is formed at a position coinciding with the recessed portions 462 and 482 of 450.

The second fastening portion 419 b and the fastening portion 14 e 1 are disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (by passing through without being in contact with the recessed portions 462 and 482 in the fastening direction), the front assembly 460
And it is comprised as a part which fastens the upper side frame member 410 and the upper side board member 14e, without passing through the rear side assembly 480.

The body frame 14a and the upper side plate member 14e are fastened together at the second fastening portion 419b at the upper position of the main body member 411, and the second fastening portion 419b at the lower position of the main body member 411 is the upper side plate member 14e is fastened and fixed, and the body frame 14a is not fastened and fixed.

Further, at the upper position of the main body member 411, the second fastening portion 419b (see FIG. 118) is disposed inside the recessed portions 462 and 482 (a portion extending to the back side is disposed inside). In the lower position of the main body member 411, the fastening portion 14e1 (see FIG. 100) is a recessed portion 462,
It is disposed inside of 482 (the part extending to the front side is disposed inside).

In the present embodiment, since the left and right separate speakers 451 are disposed in the independent speaker assemblies 450R and 450L, respectively, the other speaker assembly 450R,
The conflict with the sound reproduced and output from the speaker 451 disposed at 450 L is avoided, and the sound can be reproduced with high quality as a transparent sound without causing the reproduced sound.

In the present embodiment, the extension plate 483 and the upper side plate member 14e of the rear assembly 480 are abutted against each other at the top of the speaker assembly 450 (see FIG. 125A). In the lower part, the back surface of the rear assembly 480 and the front surface of the upper side plate member 14e are separated, and the front surface portion of the upper side plate member 14e is projected to the front side in a portion opposite to the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 The projecting portion abuts on the lower end portion of the rear assembly 480 in the front-rear direction. That is,
The speaker assembly 450 is not in contact (sticking) with the upper side plate member 14 e over the entire surface, and in particular, is in contact with the upper side plate member 14 e in line contact at the lower end.

In this case, a portion which is provided so as to protrude from the upper side plate member 14 e and abuts on the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 can function as an insulator, so that the acoustic effect of the sound output from the speaker 451 can be improved.

In the present embodiment, a portion protruding from the upper side plate member 14e and in contact with the lower end portion of the speaker assembly 450 is integrally formed with the upper side plate member 14e (formed of synthetic resin)
However, it is not limited to this.

For example, a metal member may be disposed between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e, or a member formed of an ebony may be disposed, or a glass member is disposed. Alternatively, a member made of concrete may be provided, a soft resin material may be provided, or another commercially available member may be provided.

In particular, when disposing a metal member, it is desirable that the specific gravity is high. For example, it is desirable to employ cast iron, zinc, brass, lead, steel or the like. By using these metals, it is possible to make the sound thick.

Moreover, it is desirable that it is a member with high hardness. For example, cast iron, steel, glass, ceramics (ceramics) etc. correspond. By using these members, the sound rising performance can be improved.

Further, with regard to the shape, it may be provided in the form of a long plate, may be provided in the form of spikes, or may be provided in the form of dotted dots. Also, the upper side plate member 14e and the speaker assembly 450 are not limited to being fixed, and may be connected in a floating manner.

Note that the arrangement of the part that functions as the above-described insulator is the speaker assembly 45
It is not limited to the back of the lower end of 0. For example, the back of the top end of the speaker assembly 450 may be used, or the back of the left and right ends of the speaker assembly 450 may be used.
It may be 50 sides or front.

For example, when arranging on the back of the upper end, a member functioning as an insulator is cylindrical, arranged between the rear assembly 480 and the upper side plate member 14e, and a screw inserted through the through hole 483a is inserted. It may be positioned by In this case, a separate locking member for positioning a member functioning as an insulator can be dispensed with, and it can function as a rear assembly 480, an upper side plate member 14e and an insulator depending on the degree of tightening of a screw inserted into the through hole 483a. The acoustic effect can be adjusted by adjusting the degree of contact (load applied to each other) with the member to be processed.

At this time, even if the screw inserted into the through hole 483a is loosened, the speaker assembly 450 can be inserted into the connection hole 469 (see FIG. 123A) or the connection hole
And a screw inserted through the through hole provided on the opposite side of the connection hole 469 in the left-right direction and the through hole provided in the lower end of the speaker assembly 450 at the left and right positions where the through hole is provided. Thus, the speaker assembly 450 can be prevented from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e.

Further, with regard to fixing to the upper side plate member 14 e of the upper side frame member 410, the upper side frame member 41 is
0 is a fastening portion 14e1 of the upper side plate member 14e other than the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (see FIG. 1).
A screw that is inserted from the rear surface side at 00) is screwed into the fastening portion 419 (see FIG. 125 (b)), and fastening and fixing are performed. As described above, in fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, a load is not applied to the speaker assembly 450, so by firmly fastening and fixing the fastening portion 14e1 and the fastening portion 419, It is possible to prevent the upper frame member 410 from being detached from the upper side plate member 14e while loosely fastening the screw inserted into the through hole 483a (while adjusting the fastening condition).

Moreover, the same thing as the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the upper side plate member 14e described above,
The same can be said of the relationship between the speaker assembly 450 and the main body frame 14a connected and fixed via the upper side plate member 14e. That is, the main body frame 14a made of metal can be functioned as an insulator, and in the same manner as the contents described above, the material and the relationship of contact can be designed.

FIG. 126 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12, FIG. 127 (a) is a rear view of the game board 13, and FIG. 127 (b) is a front view of the inner frame 12. . Note that Figure 127.
In (b), the inner frame 12 in a state in which the game board 13 is removed is illustrated.

First, in order to explain the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the support portion 12a,
12b will be described. As shown in FIG. 126, at the upper and lower corner portions of the inner surface of the left side wall of the inner frame 12, the left end front support 12a and the left end rear support 12b are separated in the front and back for the purpose of supporting the left end of the game board 13. It is arranged.

The left end front supporting portion 12a is formed with an inclined surface 12a1 which is inclined rearward as it goes leftward from the right end portion of the rear end surface disposed opposite to the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89). A flat surface 12a2 is formed extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the left. In the assembled state, the flat surface 12a2 and the front surface of the game board 13 abut on each other.

The outer end of the left end rear support portion 12b is formed in a rectangular shape in a front view, and the front end surface is formed on one surface so as to be abuttable with the back surface of the game board 13 and formed in a cup shape with an open central portion. . The left rear end support portion 12b includes an elastic support portion 12b1 having one end disposed inside and a portion protruding from the front end surface of the cup-shaped portion.

The elastic support portion 12b1 is disposed in a posture in which the elastic support portion 12b1 protrudes to the front side as it goes leftward in the state of the natural length. That is, the elastic support portion 12b1 cooperates with the inclined surface 12a1 of the left end front support portion 12a,
The tapered shape is formed to expand to the side (right side) where the game board 13 is disposed in the left-right direction. Thereby, the workability at the time of an operator assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved. Next, with reference to FIGS. 128 and 129, the procedure for fixing the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 will be described.

128 (a) and 128 (b) are the same as CXXVIIIa-CXXV in FIG. 127 (b).
129 (a) and 129 (b) are side views of the board support device 600 and the game board 13 schematically showing the board support apparatus 600 and the game board 13. FIG. It is. In FIG. 128 and FIG. 129, the process of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 is illustrated in time series, and in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 where the left end is started to be pushed into the inner frame 12 is illustrated. In FIGS. 128 (b) and 129 (a), the game board 13 immediately before the completion of assembly in the inner frame 12 is illustrated, and in FIG. 129 (b), the game board 13 after the assembly in the inner frame 12 is completed. It is illustrated. In addition, in FIGS. 128 and Z39, in order to facilitate understanding,
The configuration of part of the game board 13 and the inner frame 12 is omitted and illustrated.

When the operator assembles the game board 13 into the inner frame 12, first, the game board 13 is temporarily placed on the upper surface of the plate passage forming member 160, and after aligning the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 to some extent, the game board 13
The left end of the slider is slid between the left front support 12a and the left rear support 12b. At this time, as shown in FIG. 128 (a), the game board 13 is slid in the attitude in which it is rotated with respect to the inner frame 12 about an axis directed in the vertical direction. Although there is a possibility that the part 12b and the game board 13 may interfere with each other, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface 12 is formed on the left front support 12a.
Since a1 is formed, the range (position) where the game board 13 and the left end front support 12b interfere with each other
Can be reduced. This can improve the workability.

Then, as shown in FIG. 128 (b), the left end portion of the game board 13 (specifically, the inclined surface 12a
The game board 13 is rotated so as to be close to the inner frame 12 with the back side edge of 1 and the contact position of the front face of the game board 13 as an axis. In the process of this rotation, the front surface of the game board 13 is disposed to face the flat surface 12a2, and a biasing force is applied from the elastic support 12b1 to the game board 13. That is,
The front surface of the game board 13 is pressed against the flat surface 12a2 by the biasing force applied from the elastic support 12b1. Thereby, the game board 13 can be temporarily fixed to the inner frame 12.

In the process of rotating the game board 13, the upper and lower positions of the game board 13 are the support bottom 1 of the inner frame.
Regulated by 2c. The support bottom portion 12c is a plate-like portion formed on the inner frame 12 along the left-right direction with an arrangement and a length corresponding to the lower bottom surface of the game board 13, and in an assembled state (see FIG. 90)
Guide rib 1 supporting the game board 13 from below and cutting off the front upper end as an inclined surface
A plurality of 2c1 is provided across the left and right direction.

With this configuration, in the process of changing the state from FIG. 128 (a) to FIG. 128 (b), the rear edge of the bottom surface of the game board 13 passes the front edge of the guide rib 12c1 in top view. Each time the game board 13 rides on the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1, rotation of the game board 13 can be progressed smoothly by causing the game board 13 to ride on the guide rib 12c1 sequentially from the left side . Therefore, the workability of the work of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 can be improved.

The inclination angle of the inclined surface with respect to the upper surface of the guide rib 12c1 is set to about 15 ° as an angle larger than the after-inclination (about 10 °) at the time of installation in the pachinko machine 8010 pachinko machine. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the inclination of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 from being reversed in the front-rear direction by the rear inclination of the pachinko machine 8013 at the time of installation.
The workability at the time of assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12 without being inclined to the rear slope of 013 can be improved.

Further, the present invention is not limited to this, and the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the guide rib 12c1 may be formed to be the same as the inclination angle after the installation of the game arcade. In this case, the guide rib 1 on which the game board 13 runs
The inclined surface of 2c1 can be made horizontal.

In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), as shown in FIG. 129 (a), the gaming board 13 is sandwiched between the board supporting devices 600 which are arranged vertically and are in the released state described later, and the rear face of the gaming board 13 rotates. It abuts on the front surface of the rear claw member 640.

Here, in the released state of the board supporting device 600, the front claw member 620 for rotation and the front claw member for restriction 630 (a part disposed on the front side of the position where the game board 13 is fixed)
Since it retract | saves from the approach path | pass of (1), the workability of the assembly | attachment operation | work of the game board 13 can be improved.

Then, as shown in FIG. 129 (b), by pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the back side, a load is applied to the post-rotation claw member 640 via the game board 13, and the board support device 60
0 changes to the fixed state described later, and the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12. That is, the game board 13
At the time of fixing, the upper and lower surface supporting devices 600 change in state almost simultaneously.

The gaming board 13 is supported by the support bottom 12c to be restricted in the vertical position. Figure 129 (a
And as shown in FIG. 129 (b), the lower end portion of the game board 13 is not in contact with the lower surface of the game board 13 between the released state and the fixed state of the board support device 600 (the game board 13 is And the vertical position of the game board 13 does not change. Therefore, the floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d can be stably detached as the state of the panel supporting device 600 is changed between the released state and the fixed state.

Here, when pushing the vicinity of the right end of the game board 13 to the back side, the game board 13 is rotated with the vicinity of the left end as a fulcrum, so that the post-rotation claw member 64 is rotated via the game board 13 according to the principle.
The force required for applying a load to 0 can be weakened by the width dimension of the game board 13 being long, and even a weak worker can assemble the game board 13 into the inner frame 12 without any problem.

When assembling the game board 13 to the inner frame 12, the game board 13 has the left end portion, the left front support 12a.
And because it is supported at two upper and lower positions by the left end rear support 12b (see FIG. 126), for example,
When the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 when the right end of the game board 13 is not sufficiently fixed (when at least one of the upper and lower board supporting devices 600 is not in the fixed state) Even if it exists, the extent to which the game board 13 falls forward can be reduced.

For example, when the upper board support device 600 is in the released state (see FIG. 134 (a)), the game board 13 is pushed back by closing the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) against the inner frame 12. The degree of tilting back and forth can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the state of the panel supporting device 600 from being changed by the reaction in which the front frame 14 is pushed to close the inner frame 12 (the possibility can be reduced).

In a state in which the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12, the left end of the game board 13 is the support 12a.
, 12b, the right end is fixed by the surface supporting device 600, and the lower end is restricted by the support bottom 12c in the vertical position.

In the state where the game board 13 is fixed to the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 129 (b)), the game board 13 is
Is connected to various members disposed on the game board 13 and wires connected to various devices, and is supported by the game board 13 so that the position of the game board 13 can be changed in the surface direction A floating connector 13a and a receiving connector 12d disposed on the inner frame 12 near the lower surface support device 600 and connected with a control board unit 91 (see FIG. 3) and the like on the rear surface It is connected in the rotation direction of the game board 13.

The floating connector 13a and the receiving connector 12d are disposed in an inclined posture in which the connection direction is directed in the direction along the rotation direction of the game board 13 in order to reduce the resistance of the connection in the rotation direction of the game board 13. (See FIG. 126 for the receiving connector 12d).

The inner frame 12 is provided with a panel support device 600 which is disposed in the vicinity of the right corner of the inner frame 12 such that a pair of upper and lower members face each other. In addition, since the thing of the same structure arranges facing each other of a pair of upper and lower panel support apparatus 600, the one panel surface support apparatus 600 is demonstrated, and the description of the other panel support apparatus 600 is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 130 (a) is a front perspective view of the panel support apparatus 600, FIG. 130 (b) is a rear perspective view of the panel support apparatus 600, and FIG. 131 (a) is a front perspective of the panel support apparatus 600. FIG. 131 (b) is a rear perspective view of the panel support device 600. Note that Figure 130.
In (a) and FIG. 130 (b), a fixed state in which the board support device 600 fixes the game board 13 is illustrated, and in FIG. 131 (a) and FIG. 131 (b), the game board 1 by the board support device 600.
A release state where the fixing of 3 is released is illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the panel support device 600, the open side of the U-shape formed by the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

FIG. 132 is an exploded front perspective view of the panel support device 600, and FIG. 133 is an exploded rear perspective view of the panel support device 600. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 133, the board support device 60.
0 is a frame member 610 formed in a rectangular frame shape in top view, a pre-rotation claw member 620 rotatably supported by a first shaft member P61 inserted through and fixed to the frame member 610, and its rotation A regulated front claw member 630 rotatably supported by the second shaft member P62 disposed on the front side of the front claw member 620 and inserted and fixed to the front claw member 620, and a rear side of the front claw member 620 Post-rotation claw member 6 rotatably supported by the third shaft member P63 inserted and fixed to the pre-rotation claw member 620
And 40 are mainly provided.

The frame member 610 is a main body plate portion 611 which is formed in a rectangular frame shape by bending a sheet metal member at a right angle at a corner portion, and a pair of the main body plate portion 611 which are disposed opposite to each other. A pair of support holes 612 formed in a straight line in the plate portion 611a, and arc holes 613 drilled in the plate portion 611a along the arc centered on the support hole 612 on the front side of the support hole 612 Plate portion 6 along the arc centering on the support hole 612 on the back side of the support hole 612
11a, and the plate 61 at a position vertically above the support hole 612.
The inner frame 12 is formed of a rod-shaped control rod 615 inserted and fixed to the screw 1a and a screw which is extended in a flange shape from the plate portion 611a to the left and right and is inserted through the through hole 616a in the assembled state (see FIG. And a pair of fixing plates 616 fastened and fixed thereto.

The support holes 612 are through holes into which the first shaft member P61 is inserted and fixed. First shaft member P61
Is formed as a cylindrical metal rod member whose end on the insertion proximal side is expanded in diameter, and after being inserted into the support hole 612, the end on the insertion tip side is pressed, whereby the support hole 612 is formed.
It is fixed to The fixing method and the shape of the shaft member are the same as those of the second shaft member P62 and the third shaft member P.
Since 63 is the same, the description is omitted. When the first shaft member P61 is inserted into the support hole 612, the first shaft member P61 is also inserted into the supported hole 622 of the pre-rotation claw member 620 at the same time.

Similar to the frame member 610, the rotation front claw member 620 is a main body plate portion 621 in which a sheet metal member is bent at a right angle at a corner and formed in a T-shape in side view, and a part of the main body plate portion 621 A pair of supported holes 622 which are formed in a straight line in plate portions 621a opposite to each other on the left and right and axially supported by the first shaft member P61, and in a straight line in upper front corner portions of plate portions 621a. A pair of support holes 623 which are formed and through which the second shaft member P62 is inserted and fixed;
It mainly includes a pair of support holes 624 formed penetrating in a straight line on the back side of a and through which the third shaft member P63 is inserted and fixed.

In addition, when the second shaft member P62 is inserted into the support hole 623, the front claw member 63 is simultaneously
The second shaft member P62 is inserted through the supported hole 632 of zero, and the third shaft member P63 is a support hole 624.
The third shaft member P63 is also inserted into the supported hole 642 of the claw member 640 after rotation.
Is inserted.

The main body plate portion 621 is a portion disposed opposite to each other in the left and right direction, and the long portion 621a1 long in the front and back direction
And a pair of plate portions 621a formed in a T-shape in a side view by an extending portion 621a2 extending in the vertical direction from the front end of the long portion 621a1, and the upper edge of the plate portion 621a is connected A connection plate portion 621b to be fixed, a back side extension plate 621c extending downward from the rear end of the connection plate portion 621b by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface of the connection plate portion 621b, and extending Section 621a
A drop back plate 621d extending perpendicularly to the plate 621a from the rear end of the back 2 to the plate 621a on the opposite side, and a drop drop back plate 621d from the lower end of the drop back plate 621d And a front side extending plate 621e which is inclined to the front side by about 45 degrees with respect to the surface.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane orthogonal to the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b. The side surface of the long portion 621a1 and the connecting plate portion 621b are at right angles, and the lower surface of the long portion 621a1 and the back side surface of the drop back plate portion 621d are formed to be perpendicular to each other.

The rear side extending plate 621c is disposed on the lower surface thereof so as to be able to abut on the torsion spring NBb. In this embodiment, the torsion spring NBb abuts in the released state, and the arm portion of the torsion spring NBb is separated from the main body plate portion 611 (see FIG. 134A). By retracting NBb upward, the torsion spring NBb
Start to abut.

Thereby, when the operator starts pushing the game board 13 into the board support device 600, the play board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600 while preventing the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb from being generated to the worker side. Just before finishing, the repulsive force of the torsion spring NBb can be generated to the worker side. That is, while reducing the force required at the start of pushing, the momentum of the rotation of the game board 13 can be suppressed by the repulsive force immediately before the game board 13 is fixed to the board support device 600.

The hanging back plate portion 621d is a portion that abuts the game board 13 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 89) and regulates the front and back position of the game board 13. The front side extending plate 621e functions as a guide when inserting the game board 13 into the back side of the hanging back plate 621d.

A torsion spring NBa is wound around the second shaft member P62. The torsion spring NBa generates a biasing force in a direction to bring the regulated front claw member 630 and the hanging back plate portion 621d into close proximity. A torsion spring NBb is wound around the third shaft member P63. The torsion spring NBb generates a biasing force in the direction of causing the lower end portion of the claw member 640 to move away from the rear side wall of the main body plate portion 611 after rotation.

The restriction front claw member 630 is a main body plate portion 631 formed in a letter shape for side view by bending the sheet metal member at right angles at the corner, and a part of the main body plate portion 631 oppositely disposed to the left and right A pair of supported holes 632 formed in a straight line through the plate portion 631a and supported by the second shaft member P62 and inclined from the lower end portion of the front connecting plate 631b connecting the plate portion 631a to the front side And a curved surface 634 curved as an upper end surface of the plate portion 631a.

The inclined extension plate 633 is a plate portion disposed to face the front frame 14, and is a panel support device 600.
Is the portion closest to the front frame 14 in the front-rear direction when it is in the released state.

The curved surface 634 is a surface that abuts on the control rod 615 in the assembled state (see FIG. 126), whereby the free posture change of the control front claw member 630 is restricted.

The post-rotation claw member 640 is a part of the main body plate 641 that is formed in a rectangular shape in a side view vertical rectangular shape by bending the sheet metal member at right angles in the corner, and is disposed opposite to the left and right of the main body plate 641. From the lower end portion of the front connection plate 641b connecting the pair of supported holes 642 formed in a straight line to the movable plate portion 641a and supported by the third shaft member P63 and the pair of plate portions 641a An inclined extension plate 643 which is inclined and extended is mainly provided.

The front connection plate 641b abuts against the back side of the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 89), and regulates the front-rear position of the game board 13.

The inclined extension plate 643 is a portion that receives a load from the game board 13 when the game board 13 is pushed in, and is at an inclination angle that makes a surface contact with the back of the game board 13 in the released state (see FIG. 129A). It is formed.

134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b) are side views of the panel support device 600. FIG. In FIGS. 134 (a), 134 (b), 135 (a) and 135 (b), the process of changing the panel supporting device 600 from the released state to the fixed state is illustrated in time series. Moreover, FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG.
In (b), the arrangement of the multi-function cover member 171 disposed close to the board supporting apparatus 600 and the game board 13 fixed to the board supporting apparatus 600 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

That is, in FIG. 134 (a), the released state of the panel supporting device 600 is as shown in FIG.
The fixed state of the board support device 600 is illustrated respectively. In the fixed state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the third shaft member P63 is disposed directly behind the first shaft member P61 (on the rear side in the horizontal direction). As a result, the post-rotation claw member 640 rotates too much about the first shaft member P61 simply by performing a simple operation of pushing the post-rotation claw member 640 back through the game board 13 (third process) The shaft member P63 can be prevented from moving upward than the first shaft member P61. Therefore, after rotation, the claw member 640 can be accurately moved to the position in the fixed state.

Here, as described above, the biasing force of the direction in which the regulating front claw member 630 approaches the dropping back plate portion 621d is added by the torsion spring NBa. Therefore, in the case where no other external force acts, the front regulation claw member 630 is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d. While
When the curved surface 634 of the front regulation claw member 630 abuts on the regulation rod 615, the change in posture of the front regulation claw member 630 is restricted.

That is, as shown in FIG. 134 (a), FIG. 134 (b), FIG. 135 (a) and FIG. 135 (b), as the panel support device 600 changes from the released state to the fixed state
20 is inclined on the front side where the extension portion 621a2 is disposed, and the front side of the restricting front claw member 630 rises in a mode of separating from the hanging back plate portion 621d.

Specifically, the control rod 615 is a front side portion of the curved surface 634, and the second shaft member P
While contacting with a resistance portion 634a intersecting with a circle centered at 62 (FIGS. 134 (a) to 13
5 (a)), the front end of the restricting front claw member 630 rises with the tilting operation of the rotation front claw member 620. In other words, the restriction front claw member 630 moves in the direction opposite to the movement direction of the front rotation claw member 620.

On the other hand, a non-resistance portion 634b, which is a portion continuously provided on the back side of the resistance portion 634a and has an arc shape along a circle centered on the second shaft member P62, is disposed opposite to the regulation rod 615.
When the control rod 615 and the curved surface 634 do not contact in the circular direction centering on the second shaft member P62, the rising operation of the front restriction claw member 630 is released, and the inclined extension plate 633 side of the front restriction claw member 630 The tip end portion is disposed close to the hanging back plate portion 621d (FIG. 135 (a) to FIG. 135).
(B)).

Angle range in which the front claw member 630 is raised and operates (from FIG. 134 (a) to FIG. 135 (a
In the range between), even if a downward load, which is a load in a direction to tilt the front side end of the regulated front claw member 630, is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, the downward load operates. Since the posture change of the regulation front claw member 630 at the time of the restriction becomes the posture change (the posture change in the rising direction) facing the downward load, the reaction force against the downward load becomes excessive and the restriction front claw member against the downward load Attitude change of 630 is regulated.

In addition, the game board 13 restricts the rotation of the front claw member 620 without the game board 13 being pushed back by the game board 13 coming into contact with the back surface of the back side extension plate 621 c.

As a result, a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630, thereby rotating the front claw member 620.
Can be suppressed. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the restricting front claw member 630 from the front frame 14, it is possible to suppress the tilting operation of the front rotation claw member 620. In the present embodiment, in the released state of the panel supporting device 600, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 is brought into contact with the inclined extension plate 633 of the front claw member 630. The shape of the front connection plate 631b, the length of the inclined extension plate 633, and the inclination angle are set.

Also, in the state shown in FIG. 134 (b), when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side by the game board 13 coming into contact with the back of the back side extending board 621c, the back side extending board 621c
Friction occurs between the game board 13 and the game board 13. Thus, in the state of FIG. 134 (b), the game board 1 is
3 can be prevented from moving (tilting) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) described later applies a load to the game board 13,
It can suppress that the upper end part vicinity of the game board 13 moves to the front side (inclination) by the reaction.

Here, when the front frame member 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed in the released state of the panel supporting device 600, the front claw member 620 is rotated by the load from the front frame 14. When the panel support device 600 reaches the fixed state and the panel support device 600 does not reach the fixed state due to the contact aspect of the multi-function cover member 171 and the restricting front claw member 630 that are provided There may be cases where

The panel supporting device 600 is stabilized at a half angle, and in that state, the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89)
Can be closed, the distance between the back surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 86) and the front surface of the game board 13 becomes short, which may affect the game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration that suppresses the rotation of the front claw member 620 due to the load from the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89), the multifunction installed in the front frame 14 When the cover member 171 and the regulation front claw member 630 abut on each other, the front frame 14 is prevented from closing. This makes it possible for the clerk who has been closing the front frame 14 to notice that the board supporting device 600 is not in the fixed state.

If this is noticed, the clerk will push the game board 13 until the board support device 600 is in a fixed state, and the back of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 when the front frame 14 (see FIG. 89) is closed. The distance from the front can be stabilized.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 135A, in the state immediately before the front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the multifunctional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14 and the restriction front claw are provided. Depending on the contact aspect of the member 630, there is a low possibility that the panel support 600 will reach a fixed state or the panel support 600 will not reach a fixed state and stabilize at a half angle (exclusively The board support device 600 reaches a fixed state).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the multifunctional cover member 171 is extended to a position where it can abut on the front claw member 630 when the front frame 14 is in the closed position, and in the state shown in FIG. The regulation front claw member 630 is configured not to be regulated in posture by the regulation rod 615.

In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the contact between the back surface of the back extension plate 621c and the game board 13 is released, and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is restricted by the game board 13 There is not.

That is, when a downward load is applied to the regulated front claw member 630 immediately before the front claw member 620 is in the fixed state, the front end of the front claw member 620 is allowed to tilt. There is.

As a result, when the game board 13 is disposed at a position immediately before the board support device 600 is fixed (for example, when the clerk can not push the game board 13 slightly, 9
In the case where the front frame 14 is not closed up (when installed in a stable manner), the situation where the front frame 14 is not closed is eliminated, and in this case, the multi-functional cover member 171 disposed on the front frame 14
If a load is applied to the board, the load can change the board supporting device 600 to a fixed state.

Therefore, the workability of the operation of fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be improved. In the present embodiment, the gaming board 13 is disposed on the board supporting device 600 in the released state so that the back surface of the gaming board 13 and the inclined extension plate 643 of the board supporting device 600 abut (see FIG. 1).
34 (a)), the game board 13 can be fixed by pushing the game board 13 to the back side. That is, the post-rotation claw member 640 is displaced by the game board 13, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 is rotated accordingly, and the board support device 600 is changed to a fixed state. According to this method, a downward load is not applied to the front end of the regulation front claw member 630, so that the surface support device 600 can be changed from the released state to the fixed state with little resistance.

In the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the front of the game board 13 abuts against the surface of the hanging back plate 621d of the board supporting device 600 facing the game board 13 in the front-rear direction. Game board 13 in this state
When it moves (tilts) to the front side, it moves (tilts) while pushing away the hanging back plate portion 621d, so that the torsion spring NBb given to the rotation front claw member 620 via the claw member 640 after rotation. Is applied as a resistance to the movement (tilting) of the game board 13 to the front side. Thus, in the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the possibility of the game board 13 moving (tilting) to the front side can be reduced. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) to be described later applies a load to the game board 13, the game board 13 is caused by its reaction.
It is possible to suppress movement (tilting) of the vicinity of the upper end portion of the front side.

Also, between the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) and the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the front claw member 630 is inclined by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, and the non-resistance portion 634b is disposed opposite to the restriction rod 615. (See FIG. 135 (b)). In this state, when the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side and the game board 13 rotates the front claw member 620 by pushing the hanging back plate 621 d, the first shaft member P61 is centered. In the direction along the circular arc, the non-resistance portion 634b abuts against the control rod 615, and the resistance to movement (tilting) to the front side of the game board 13 is increased accordingly.

Thus, from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (b),
It is possible to reduce the possibility that the game board 13 moves (tilts) to the front side. Therefore, when the lower board support device 600 (see FIGS. 136 to 139) to be described later applies a load to the game board 13, the upper end portion of the game board 13 moves to the front by reaction (tilting). Can be suppressed.

In addition, the non-resistance portion 634b of the curved surface 634 is the regulation rod 615 in the state shown in FIG.
A curved surface is formed such that the radius centered on the second shaft member P62 gradually increases from the portion in contact with the portion to the portion in contact with the control rod 615 in the state shown in FIG. 135 (b).

As a result, from the state shown in FIG. 135 (a), the inclined extension plate 633 is pushed to the back side by the multi-function cover member 171, and the pre-rotation claw member 620 is rotated, thereby the second shaft member P62.
Is displaced, the non-resistance portion 634b and the control rod 615 separate from each other for only a moment. Therefore, when the resistance given from the regulation rod 615 to the regulation front claw member 630 is reduced only for a moment, the regulation front claw member 630 vigorously approaches the drop back plate portion 621d by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa, as shown in FIG. The state changes to the state shown in (b).

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, in the fixed state of the panel supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (b), the multi-functional cover member 171 has a dimensional relationship in which it separates from the restricting front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. Also, by setting the front frame 14 in the closed position immediately before the fixed state of the panel supporting device 600 shown in FIG. 135 (a), the multifunctional cover member 171 is restricted to the front claw member 630 and the inclined extension plate 633. , And then, the board supporting device 600 can be fixed.

In the present embodiment, when the game board 13 is not fixed to the board support device 600, the front frame 14 can be disposed at the closed position regardless of the state of the board support device 600.
That is, in a state where the back side of the back side extension plate 621c does not abut on the game board 13 and the rotation of the front claw member 620 is not restricted by the game board 13, the board support device 600 It is made operable without interference (for example, it is possible to change the state from the state shown in FIG. 134 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 135 (a)). Therefore, it is possible to avoid restricting the closing of the front frame 14 only when the game board 13 is not arranged (for example, when the front frame 14 is temporarily closed when replacing the board). , Can improve the work efficiency of the worker.

In the case where the panel support device 600 is to be released from the fixed state, the inclined extension plate 633
Is pulled upward in the front direction, and the restriction front claw member 630 is rotated against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBa. At this time, the load received from the control rod 615 is small (the curved surface 634 and the control rod 6 in the rotational direction).
(15) and so it is possible to rotate the front claw member 630 with light force,
By continuing the rotation as it is, the board support device 600 can be brought into the released state.

When the board support device 600 is released while the gaming board 13 is fixed, the gaming board 13 is pushed out to the front side by the post-rotation claw member 640 (see FIG. 134A). Therefore, the workability of the work of removing the game board 13 can be improved as compared with the case where the front and back position of the game board 13 does not change when the board support device 600 is released.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129 (a) and 134 (a), in the released state, the game board 1 is not available.
The upper end surface of the third contact panel 3 abuts on the lower surface of the rear extension plate 621 c of the panel support device 600. As a result, when both of the upper and lower board support devices 600 are in the released state, the possibility of the game board 13 falling to the front side can be eliminated.

In addition, it is possible to perform operation which switches a release state and a fixed state one by one, upper and lower board support apparatus 600. FIG. Here, as in the present embodiment, in the configuration in which the game board 13 moves back and forth according to the state change of the board support device 600, when the board support device 600 is operated one by one, the front and back position of the game board 13 deviates vertically. The load applied to the game board 13 may be excessive.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation of the pre-regulation claw member 630 operated when the panel support device 600 is brought into the release state, the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 64.
The behavior of 0 does not match. In other words, as shown in FIGS. 135 (a) and 135 (b), the pre-rotation claw member 6 supporting the game board 13 in comparison with the amount for displacing the restriction front claw member 630.
20 and the amount by which the claw member 640 is displaced after rotation is smaller.

Therefore, in the case of displacing the pre-rotation pawl member 630 to such an extent that the pre-regulation pawl member 630 does not return to the fixed state (the degree to which the regulation rod 615 regulates the return), the pre-rotation pawl member 620 and the post-rotation pawl member 640 Since the amount of displacement can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the front and back position of the game board 13 at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. Therefore, the load imposed on the game board 13 can be suppressed.

In addition, since the post-rotation pawl member 640 is rotatably supported by the pre-rotation pawl member 620, the same effect is produced. That is, from the fixed state (see FIG. 135 (b)) to the released state (FIG. 13)
4 (a)), the post-rotation claw member 640 can be displaced in the direction to widen the angle between the pre-rotation claw member 620 and the post-rotation claw member 640 against the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb. It is assumed.

Therefore, as compared with the displacement amount of the front claw member 620, the displacement amount of the game board 13 being pushed out by the claw member 640 after rotation can be suppressed, so the game board at the portion supported by the upper and lower board support devices 600. It is possible to suppress the deviation of the front and back position of 13. Thereby, the game board 1
The load that can be applied to 3 can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 136 to FIG. 139, the relationship between the lower panel support device 600 and the front frame 14 will be described. 136 to 139 are CXXXVI-- of FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of pachinko machine 8010 in the CXXXVI line. 136 to 139, the front frame 14 is illustrated in a simple shape, and the closed state of the front frame 14 is illustrated.

Also, in FIG. 136, the release state of the panel support device 600 is, in FIG. 137, the fixation state of the panel support device 600, and in FIG. The rotated state is illustrated in FIG. 139 while the state immediately before the board supporting device 600 is fixed is illustrated, and the thick portion of the game board 13 supported by the board supporting device 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line Be done.

136 to 139, the relationship between the panel support device 600 and the open / close restricting portion 159 fixed to the front frame 14 will be described. Note that, for ease of understanding, FIG. 136 and FIG.
In FIG. 138 and FIG. 139, the open / close restricting portion 159 seen in cross section at 37 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

As shown in FIG. 136, when the panel support device 600 is in the released state, when the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (see FIG. 136), interference between the open / close restricting portion 159 and the panel support device 600 is avoided. However, the game board 13 interferes with the operation unit back member 155 above the opening / closing restricting portion 159. Therefore, in the released state of the board support device 600, the game board 13
In the state in which the front frame 14 is detached, it is permitted to close the front frame 14, but in the state in which the game board 13 is disposed, the closing of the front frame 14 is regulated.

As shown in FIG. 137, when the panel support device 600 is in a fixed state, when the front frame 14 is disposed in the closed position (see FIG. 137), interference between the open / close restricting portion 159 and the panel support device 600 is avoided. . In addition, the game board 13 is disposed on the back side as compared to the arrangement when the board support device 600 is in the released state, thereby causing interference between the game board 13 and the operation portion back member 155 above the opening / closing restriction part 159. Is avoided. Therefore, in the fixed state of the board support device 600, closing the front frame 14 is permitted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13.

As shown in FIG. 138, when the front claw member 620 of the surface support device 600 is rotated from the released state to the fixed side by a predetermined angle, the front frame 14 is placed in the closed position (FIG.
38), the open / close restricting portion 159 interferes with the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600.

Further, in this state, even if it is attempted to rotate the front claw member 620 by applying a load directed to the back side to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation direction of the front claw member 620 is operated by the action of the regulating rod 615. (FIG. 138 clockwise direction) and the rotation direction of the restricting front claw member 630 (FIG. 138)
Since the reaction force becomes excessive when the counterclockwise direction is reversed, the difficulty with a normal load is as described above (see FIG. 134 (b)).

Therefore, in the state of the board support device 600 shown in FIG. 138, closing of the front frame 14 is restricted regardless of the presence or absence of the game board 13. In particular, in the state where the game board 13 is disposed, the lower end on the front side of the game board 13 and the back side extension plate 621c may come in contact with each other in the vertical direction (see FIG. 138). The action of regulating the closing of the frame 14 becomes strong.

As shown in FIG. 139, when the front claw member 620 of the panel supporting device 600 is brought into a state immediately before the fixing state, when the front frame 14 is arranged in the closing position (see FIG. 139), And the inclined extension plate 633 of the board support device 600 interfere with each other.

Further, in this state, when it is intended to rotate the front claw member 620 by applying a load in the back direction to the inclined extension plate 633, the rotation of the front claw member 620 is performed by the action of the regulation rod 615. 138 (clockwise direction in FIG. 138) and the rotational direction of the front claw member 630 (see FIG. 13).
The counterclockwise direction is not reversed, and the fact that it can be easily pushed in with a normal load is as described above (see FIG. 135 (a)).

Therefore, in the state of the panel support device 600 shown in FIG. 139, by pushing in the front frame 14, the control front claw member 630 is pushed in via the opening / closing control portion 159, and the panel support device 600.
Can be fixed, so that the front frame 14 can be closed.

FIG. 140 is an exploded front perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 141 is an exploded rear perspective view of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12. As shown in FIG. FIGS. 140 and 141 illustrate a state in which the cover members for closing the back surfaces of the ball firing unit 112 a and the back pack 92 are disassembled from the inner frame 12.

The detailed structure of the ball launch unit 112a will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 to 148. FIG. 142 (a) is a front perspective view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 142 (b).
These are back surface perspective views of the ball | bowl emission unit 112a. FIGS. 143 (a) and 143 (b) are exploded front perspective views of the ball firing unit 112a. In FIG. 143 (a), a state in which the cover member 721 is disassembled after being opened is illustrated, and in FIG. 143 (b), a state in which the ball receiving member 731 is disassembled and then inverted back and forth is illustrated. . That is, in FIG. 143 (b),
Only the ball receiving member 731 is shown on the back side.

As shown in FIGS. 142 and 143, the ball firing unit 112a is a base member 710 formed of metal or die cast, and a base member centered on the right side of a resin base member 711 assembled to the base member 710. A closed state partially covering the front surface of the base 710 (see FIG. 142 (a)) and an open state opening the front surface of the base member 710 (see FIG.
a) Ball feed device 720 having a cover member 721 pivotally supported pivotally between
And mainly.

The base member 710 is a member for supporting the cover member 721, and is a base member 711 which is engaged with the base member 710 by means of a hook or the like that is elastically deformed and disposed on the front side of the base member 710. , A launch solenoid 701 disposed on the front side, a launch rail 730 for guiding the ball P8 launched by the launch solenoid 701 toward the game area, and the regulation of the attitude of the ball receiving member 731 A plurality of fastening portions 716 which are cylindrically convex on the front side at a middle position of the bulging portion 716a which is bulging out in a straight line from the base member 710 in a cylindrical shape and screwed in for fastening the ball receiving member 731 And a plurality of positioning projections 719.

The base member 711 has a pair of receiving portions 712 through which the rod-like portion 722 is inserted at the right corner portion, and a locking portion 7 drilled so as to be able to lock the hook portion 723 on the opposite side of the receiving portion 712 in the left-right direction.
13, a convex portion 714 convexly provided on the front side in proximity to the right side of the locking portion 713, and an opposing arrangement to the attraction force generation solenoid 741 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A). And the defect determination convex part 715 convexly provided.

The convex portion 714 is a portion which covers the upper surface side of the cutting metal member 725 in the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142A), and in the closed state of the cover member 721 An opposing flat surface 714a disposed opposite to the side surface 724c and formed as a plane parallel to the left inner side surface 724c, and a surface on the opposite side to the opposing flat surface 714a and inclined to the right toward the back surface side The surface 714 b is mainly provided.

When the attraction force generation solenoid 741 is fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, the defect determination convex portion 715 does not contact the attraction force generation solenoid 741 while the attachment force of the attraction force solenoid 741 is loosened ( In the state of being floated from the cover member 721), the cover member 721 is in contact with the cover member 721 and has a height at which the cover member 721 is restricted.

Therefore, the cover member 721 can be prevented from being closed when the suction force generation solenoid 741 is loosely engaged, and the cover member 721 can not be closed, thereby forming a case where the suction force is applied to the store clerk. It can be noticed that the engagement of the generation solenoid 741 is loosened. Therefore, repair (fastening and fixing the attracting force generating solenoid 741 to the cover member 721 without loosening) can be performed before occurrence of a defect of the ball firing unit 112a.

The ball feeding device 720 includes a cover member 721 rotatably supported on the base member 711;
Switching controlled so as to change state in a restricted state that restricts the flow-down of the ball P8 that has entered the inside of the cover member 721, and a permitted state that allows the flow-down of the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) to the firing rail 730 And the device 740.

The cover member 721 is formed in a cup shape in which the rear surface side (the front side in the posture in FIG. 143A) is opened from the light transmitting resin material, and the pair is loosely fitted in the receiving portion 712 of the base member 711 The rod portion 722, the hook portion 723 formed in a hook shape on the left and right opposite side of the rod portion 722, and the ball P at a position displaced toward the rod portion 722 from the hook portion 723
The ball passage opening 724 has a size allowing 8 (see FIG. 144) to pass through and a positional relationship extending slightly upward from the lower edge at the inner end of the ball passage opening 724 A cutting metal member 725 and a shaft rod portion 72 for supporting the ball guiding arm member 742 of the switching device 740.
6 and mainly.

The switching device 740 is an attraction force generating solenoid 741 fastened and fixed to the cover member 721 and a synthetic resin member having one end loosely fitted to the shaft rod portion 726.
A ball guide arm member 742 which rotates and changes its posture depending on whether or not a magnetic force is generated, and a sheet metal member engaged with the upper surface of the ball guide arm member 742 and attracted by an attraction force generating solenoid 741 A metal plate 743, a guide inclined portion 744 which is a part of the ball guide arm member 742 and is disposed below the ball passage opening 724 and inclined downward as it is separated from the ball passage opening 724; Is extended by an interval that can accommodate the ball P8, and the extended end
And a regulation overhang portion 745 projecting toward the ball passage opening 724 along a plane orthogonal to 6.

The ball passage opening 724 is an opening that forms a passage capable of guiding the ball P8 (see FIG. 144), and is a flow-down plate portion 724 that descends and inclines in a direction away from the hook portion 723 along the rotation radial direction.
a and a rib portion 724b disposed opposite to the flow-down plate portion 724a and extending downward from the upper surface of the ball passage opening 724 and inclined downward as the extended front end surface is directed to the back side;
A left inner side surface 724 continuously formed with the left end portion of the flow-down plate portion 724a and having a surface formed along the vertical direction
c, and mainly. With these configurations, the sphere P8 that has flowed into the sphere passage opening 724 flows downward toward the back and to the right.

In the closed state of the cover member 721 (see FIG. 142 (a)), when the ball P8 (see FIG. 144) enters the ball passage opening 724, the ball P8 abuts on the inclined surface 714b and the inclination of the inclined surface 714b Flow down to the back side while shifting to the right along the Therefore, ball P8
Flows downward from the cutting metal member 725 in the lateral direction, the cutting metal member 7
Even if the ball 25 is arranged in a projecting manner inside the ball passage opening 724, collision between the ball P8 and the metal member for cutting 725 can be prevented.

The firing rail 730 is a rail member extended to be inclined upward from the middle position of the base member 710 toward the left side. In the vicinity of the lower end of the rail member, a ball P8 (see FIG. 14).
A ball bearing member 731 is disposed at an interval smaller than the diameter of the reference numeral 4).

The ball receiving member 731 is a long plate member which is restricted to a posture in which the extending direction of the firing rail 730 and the direction to be elongated are parallel to each other and is fastened and fixed to the base member 710. A through hole 731a formed as a long long hole along the direction and for passing a fastening screw
Similarly to the bulging portion 716a, the bulging portion 716a is formed in a straight line (a straight line passing through the through hole 731a and directed toward the long hole direction of the through hole 731a), having a width slightly larger than the width of the bulging portion 716a And a control groove 731b formed with a groove depth slightly larger than the protruding height.

When the ball receiving member 731 is fastened and fixed to the base member 710, when selecting which position of the through hole 731a is to be aligned with the fastening portion 716 and the fastening and fixing is selected, the ball receiving member 731 is bulged.
It is possible to slide along the straight line where 6a is bulging, and this allows the ball P8 (FIG.
4) can be adjusted (the distance from the plunger 702). Therefore, by adjusting the position of the ball receiving member 731, the firing strength of the ball P 81 (operation handle 51
The launch intensity when the same rotation (see FIG. 86) is performed can be easily adjusted.
In addition, since the restriction groove 731b of the ball receiving member 731 is guided by the bulging portion 716a, the posture of the ball receiving member 731 can be kept unchanged.

The firing rail 730 is formed into a substantially M-shaped cross-sectional shape by bending a metal plate, and is formed into a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and rolling is performed with a rolling plate portion 730 a extending upward and to the left Mounting plate portions 730 b and 730 c depending from the front and rear sides of the plate portion 730 a, and the mounting plate portion 73
The base member 710 is attached to the base member 710 by screws inserted into attachment holes 732 formed in plurality (two in this embodiment) at 0 b and 730 c.

In addition, a rail guard 733 formed of a synthetic resin material is provided along the longitudinal direction between the mounting plate portions 730b and 730c, and sounds, vibrations, etc. generated by the contact between the metal rail and the metal game ball. It is suppressed.

The rolling plate portion 730a has a rolling surface having a substantially V-shaped cross-sectional shape, and a ball P8 (FIG. 146 (b
) And the ball P8 is configured to be in contact with the front and rear two points on the circumferential surface of the peripheral surface to guide the ball P8 upward.

FIGS. 144 (a) to 144 (c) are front views of the ball launch unit 112a showing the ball sending status by the ball feed device 720 in time series. Note that FIG. 144 (a) to FIG.
In (c), the illustration of the cover member 721 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

In the ball feeding device 720, as shown in FIG. 144 (a), the switching device 740 is in a restricted state (the supply of power to the attraction force generating solenoid 741 is stopped and the ball guiding arm member 742 is lowered by gravity). When it is, the regulation overhang part 745 is arranged at a position corresponding to the back side open end of the ball passage opening 724, and abuts on the game ball P8 which has entered the ball passage opening 724, and flows down from the back side open end. Is regulated.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144 (b), when the switching device 740 is changed to the allowable state (the power is supplied to the adsorption force generating solenoid 741 and the ball guiding arm member 742 is lifted), the restriction overhang portion 745 The ball P8 retreats above the ball and the flow restriction of the ball P8 is released, whereby the ball P8 flows above the guiding inclined portion 744. In this state, the ball P <b> 8 abuts on the front side wall of the base member 711 so that the further flow is restricted, and the ball P <b> 8 stays on the upper surface of the guide slope 744.

Next, as shown in FIG. 144 (c), the ball guiding arm member 742 is returned to the restricted state again, so that the ball P8 on the guiding inclined portion 744 descends to a position where it does not contact the front side wall of the base member 711. Be done. Thereby, the sphere P8 is guided to the back side according to the inclination of the guiding inclined portion 744 and is guided to the firing rail 730.

Since the state of the ball guide arm member 742 in FIG. 144 (c) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 144 (a), the ball entering the ball passage opening 724 is also shown in the state shown in FIG. Flow is regulated. Thus, one ball at a time can be supplied to the firing rail 730. The sphere P8 entering the sphere passage opening 724 is a sphere supplied from the opening formed at the downstream end of the upper plate 17 (see FIG. 86), and is a sphere stored in the upper plate 17 is there.

FIG. 145 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725. FIG. The cutting metal member 725 is a metal plate member fastened and fixed to the cover member 721, and a through hole 725a into which a screw screwed into the cover member 721 can be inserted, and a flow-down plate portion 724a. Between the lower blade portion 725b having the upper surface and the upper side substantially along the upper surface and the lower blade portion 725b, and the tip thereof forms an acute-angled notch and the same plate as the plate on the base end side of the lower blade portion 725b Upper blade 72 extended from the
Mainly equipped with 5c.

The upper blade portion 725c is formed such that the tip is inclined toward the back side more than the lower blade portion 725b, and the lower side protrudes upward than the flow-down plate portion 724a. The lower side of the upper blade portion 725c is inclined downward toward the proximal end (left side), and the upper side of the lower blade portion 725b is inclined upward toward the proximal end (left side). That is, the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b form a tapered shape in front view.

The cut between the upper blade portion 725c and the lower blade portion 725b is for cutting a thread member such as a tacho thread fixed to a ball. Then, referring to FIG. 146 and FIG.
A description will be given of how the yarn Y8 is treated when the yarn Y8 is fixed to the yarn 8 and entered.

FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of the ball launch unit 112a, and FIG. 146 (b) is a front view thereof.
Fig. 147 (a) is a front view of the ball firing unit 112a, and Fig. 147 (b) is a partial top view of the ball firing unit 112a when viewed in the direction of arrows CXLV Ib of 46 (a). FIG. 148 is a front perspective view of the cutting metal member 725 showing the relationship between the yarn Y8 and the cutting metal member 725 in the state of FIG.
12a is a partial front view of an inner rail 61 and an outer rail 62. FIG. 146 and FIG.
7, the illustration of some components of the ball launch unit 112a is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 146 (a) and 146 (b), the sphere P guided to the firing rail 730
8 remains in contact with the left lower edge of the ball receiving member 731 (see FIG. 146 (a)), and current is supplied to the firing solenoid 701 from this state, causing the plunger 702 to vigorously expand. The ball P8 is given a firing force, and the ball P8 is shot along the firing rail 730 (see FIG. 147 (a)).

Here, the ball P8 is punched out in a state in which one end of the yarn Y8 is fixed to the ball P8, and the other end of the yarn Y8 left at hand is moved and the yarn Y8 is pulled It is known that cheating is caused by repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening by loosening the ball.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 is configured to be cuttable using the momentum of the ball P8. More specifically, when the ball P8 is placed at the launch standby position (see FIG. 146 (a)), the yarn Y8 rides on the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a in such a manner as to approach the back side to the right (See FIG. 146 (b)).

In this state, when the ball P8 is launched, it passes under the falling plate portion 724a and passes through the firing rail 730.
When the yarn Y8 moves by being pulled by the ball P8 rolling the middle portion of the yarn Y8, the middle portion of the yarn Y8 moves along the upper surface of the flow-down plate portion 724a. It enters into the lower side of the portion 725c, and enters the incision formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c.

The end (other end) of the front side of the yarn Y8 is held by the player, and a load associated with the firing of the ball P8 is applied to one end of the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8. Is subjected to a large tensile force. As a result, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the cut formed by the lower blade portion 725b and the upper blade portion 725c, and is finally cut (see FIG. 148). Thereby, it is possible to prevent an unfair act of repeatedly detecting the ball P8 at the winning opening.

If the firing strength of the ball P8 is weak, a sufficient tensile force may not be applied to the yarn Y8, and there is a possibility that the yarn Y8 may not be cut. In that case, the ball P8 does not reach the game area and It flows backward between the rail 61 and the outer rail 62, passes through the ball receiving portion 146, flows down the ball passage portion 145 (see FIG. 98), and is discharged to the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86). Therefore, in this state, the ball P8 does not pass through the winning opening, regardless of how much load is applied to the yarn Y8. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the occurrence of cheating in which the ball P8 is repeatedly detected in the winning opening.

Next, the rendering operation unit 1000 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 179. FIG. 149 is a front view of the game board 13, FIGS. 150 and 151 are exploded front perspective views of the rendering operation unit 1000, and FIG. 152 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rendering operation unit 1000. The main difference between the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 149 and the gaming board 13 shown in FIG. 2 is that the petal operating device 800 can be seen from the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, and so on. The configuration of is substantially the same.

In the upper frame portion of the center frame 86, a rendering operation unit 1000 shown in FIG. 150 to FIG. 152 is disposed. The rendering operation unit 1000 is configured to have a petal operation device 800, a side substrate 1000S, a substrate cover 1000C, a back plate 1100, an advancing / retracting unit 900 disposed on the back plate 1100, and the like.

The advancing / retracting operation unit 900 vertically moves the petal operating device 800 up and down by the driving force of the drive motor 921 (advancement / retraction operation, that is, an operation of advancing the inward of the display region of the third symbol display device 81; The apparatus includes a plurality of movable members involved in the operation including at least one of the operation of retracting outward of the display area of the symbol display device 81), the petal operating device 800 is connected to one end, And the arm gear 9 is pivotally supported by the back plate 1100.
A drive side arm member 910 which is pivoted by the transmission of the drive force of the drive motor 921 through 24 and a drive motor 92 which generates a drive force for driving the drive side arm member 910.
1 and the transmission means 920 comprised of a plurality of gears for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor 921 to the drive side arm member 910 and sliding movement in the left and right direction interlocking with the pivoting operation of the drive side arm member 910 A thin plate-like slide plate 930, a thin plate-like second effect member 940 that rotates in conjunction with the slide operation of the slide plate 930, and a back plate 1100 and a petal operation device on the opposite side of the drive side arm member 910 And 800 generally includes a long plate-like driven arm member 950.

Next, the structure of the petal operation device 800 will be described. 153 shows the petal operating device 80.
FIG. 154 is a front view of 0, and FIG. 154 is a cross-sectional view of a petal operation device 800 taken along line CLIV-CLIV in FIG. 153. In FIG. 154, the support base 801 is schematically illustrated by an imaginary line.

The petal operating device 800 is configured by supporting a member such as a petal 802 on a support base 801. As shown in FIG. 152, the supporting base 801 is disposed on the back side of the petals 802 and the like, and although the entire shape is hidden from other members and not shown in the figure, it is formed of a resin material and a substantially rectangular plate And a substrate disposed on the back of the plate-like portion.

A central motor 804 is fixed from the rear side at a position closer to the upper right end of the central main body of the support base 801, and the drive shaft of the central motor 804 is on the front side through a narrow gap formed in the support base 801. It protrudes and the below-mentioned 1st gear 804G (refer to Drawing 156) is being fixed to the tip.

An opening 8 at a position slightly lower left of the central motor 804 in the central body portion of the support base 801
01P is drilled, disposed to the right of the opening 801P, and extends rearward in a pair of cylindrical shapes,
A screw insertion portion 801S having an insertion hole inside and a screw insertion hole at the tip end portion is integrally formed. An arc plate 88 for detection of a loose fitting device 880, which will be described later, is provided around the screw insertion portion 801S.
A doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D recessed from the front side to the back side in a donut shape through which 0d can pass
(See FIG. 152) is formed.

The central motor 804 of the support base 801 (see FIG. 152) to which the central motor 804 is fixed
An oil damper 805 is fixed from the front side under the lower side (see FIG. 156).

A decoration member 807 is disposed and fixed on the front side of the support base 801 so as to cover the peripheral area from the front while opening the vertically elongated roughly oval area of the central portion. The decorative member 807 is configured to be divided from a horizontally long upper side portion forming the upper end portion region and a substantially U-shaped lower side portion forming the region below the upper side portion.

In the present embodiment, the support base material 801 is formed to extend slightly in the vertical direction as a whole, but since the petal operating device 800 is disposed movably in the vertical direction as described later,
The operation space can be reduced if the support base 801 is formed into a vertically long shape rather than the left and right long shapes.

At this time, the central motor 804 and the oil damper 805 are concentrically arranged to overlap at the position of the opening 801P as described later, respectively.
Because they are interlocked (linked) to G, they can be disposed at arbitrary positions as long as they are positions on the outer periphery of the second gear 830G and the third gear 810G and do not interfere with each other, but in this embodiment, The two gears 830G and the third gear 810G are respectively disposed on the right side (see FIG. 156).

Thereby, as shown in FIG. 154, by collecting the weight in the right half of the petal operating device 800 supported in a posture slightly inclined to the front side, it is possible to prevent the left half on the opposite side from drooping downward. it can. Therefore, an increase in the distance between the support base 801 and the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 152) connected to the left half of the support base 801 can be prevented, and the drive side arm member 910 Thus, the driving force can be properly transmitted to the support base 801.

Fig. 155 is an exploded front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and Fig. 156 is an exploded back perspective view of the petal operating device 800. In FIGS. 155 and 156, the support base 801 is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the petal 802 is made of a resin that is formed to simulate the shape of one of five petals separated from each other, which forms a hibiscus flower in a flowering state as a whole. And a flat plate member 803 on the back side.

FIG. 157 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the petal 802, the flat plate member 803 and the slide member 820, and FIG. 157 (b) is an exploded back perspective view of the petal 802, the flat member 803 and the slide member 820.

Each of the petals 802 has a substantially arc-shaped front shape extending in the radial direction in the arrangement state, and is shaped to curve so as to gently expand forward from the center to the outer periphery (FIG. 15)
4).

An irregular asperity including a large number of wrinkles is formed on the surface of the petal 802, and the peripheral edge is also irregularly shaped in a front view. The five petals 802 do not have exactly the same shape as one another, and although they have slight differences in asperities and the like, they are formed into approximately the same shape. Most of the petals 802 are nearly transparent with a specific color (red), and the outer peripheral edge is darkened without forming a boundary with the inner region. It is colored.

In each petal 802, a screw-in portion 802S cylindrically extending rearward and having a screw hole internally is formed integrally at two locations near the outer periphery on the back side of each petal 802 and in the radial center, respectively. There is.

The petals 802 have a rear side portion 80 than the rear side portion 802a disposed on the tip end round shape side (counterclockwise in front view, right side in FIG. 157 (a)) from the position where the petals 802 are fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 803.
The front side portion 802b disposed on the side of the front end sharp shape (the clockwise side in the front view, the left side in FIG. 157A) from 2a is disposed on the front side. In other words, the front side portion 802 b is disposed closer to the rear cover 886 of the loose fitting device 880 than the rear side portion 802 a.

The front side 802b of each petal 802 is superimposed on the front side of the back side 802a of the petal 802 adjacent to one, and the back side 802a is superimposed on the back side of the front side 802b of the petal 802 adjacent to the other. The petals 802 are arranged so as to be centered on the tip on the inner circumferential side.

The petal 802 has a shape in which the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802b are displaced in the front and rear direction, so that the rear side portion 802a and the front side portion 802 are in the gathering position (see FIGS. 174 and 175).
Since it can be in a positional relationship in which b and b are superimposed in front and back, the difference in shape (difference in size) in the entire petals 802 between the collecting position and the fully open position (see FIGS. 178 and 179) is made remarkable. be able to.

The five petals 802 have a disc-like (donut-like) rear side surface having a circular opening S1 in the center as a whole in the arrangement state (see FIG. 155).

The flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155, 156 and 157, includes the five petals 8 described above.
They are long plate-like resin members separated from each other and fixed to 02, respectively.

Each of the flat plate members 803 has a front shape extended in a substantially rectangular shape from the center to the outer peripheral side in the arrangement state, and the outer peripheral edge portion further extends forward.

Also, the vicinity of the opening S1 (near the inner periphery) on the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803 in the arranged state
A pair of screwing parts 803S cylindrically extending rearward and having a screw hole inside are integrally formed at positions separated in the circumferential direction (the short direction of the flat plate member 803).

The screwing portion 803S is formed on the both side walls in the circumferential direction (short side direction) of each flat plate member 803 so as to be substantially flush with the pair of screwed portions in portions along the both side walls of the flat plate member 803. A slide rib 803a, which is perpendicular to the straight line connecting the 803S and extends in a rectangular shape rearwardly of the rear side surface of the flat plate member 803, extends to both sides along the surface direction circumscribed with the circumferential surface of the screwed portion 803S. As such, it is integrally formed with the peripheral wall of the screwing portion 803S.

As shown in FIG. 157 (b), on the rear side of each flat plate member 803, screw insertion holes are internally provided at two places corresponding to the screwed portion 802S of the petal 802, and the petal 802 on the front side.
A screw insertion portion 803H having an insertion hole in which the screw insertion portion 802S is positioned is integrally formed.

The screw insertion portion 803H of each flat plate member 803 has a corresponding screw 8 of the petal 802.
The 02S is abutted from the front, and screws are screwed in from the rear side, whereby the flat members 803 are fixed to the corresponding petals 802 respectively.

FIG. 158 is a front view of the slit member 810, and FIG. 159 is a front perspective view of the slit member 810. In the description of FIGS. 158 and 159, FIGS. 155 and 156 will be referred to as appropriate. On the rear side of the flat plate member 803, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, a slit member 810 is disposed.

As shown in FIG. 158, the slit member 810 is a resin plate-like member having a front shape in which the same five shape portions continue in an annular shape, and a circular opening 811 is bored in the central portion As shown in FIG. 159, substantially cylindrical front and rear peripheral wall portions 812 and 813 (see FIG. 156) extend from the periphery of the circular opening 811 in the front and back directions.

Referring back to FIG. In the rear side peripheral wall portion 813, among the five places equally spaced in the circumferential direction, two places adjacent to each other and one middle place among the three places except the two places are cylindrically formed back and forth. From the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 813S having the screw hole is integrally formed and the screwing portion 813S is not formed among the above-mentioned five portions, the positioning boss 81 is formed.
3a is extended. The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is configured to bulge in the outer diameter direction at five locations corresponding to the screwing portions 813S and the positioning bosses 813a. As one of the purposes of this bulging part, sliding friction may be suppressed, but the details will be described later.

The slit member 810 is provided with a central slit 814 and a both side slit 815 as shown in FIG. The central slits 814 are each formed to extend linearly outward from a position slightly outside the circular opening 811. However, with respect to the direction from the center of the circular opening 811 toward the outside, that is, with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, the central slit 81
The reference numeral 4 extends in the counterclockwise direction in the front view along the direction D12 which is inclined by an angle θ11 (about 15 ° in the case of the pachinko machine 8010).

The both side slits 815 are formed to extend in parallel at a slight distance on both sides of the central slit 814.

As described above, a set of three slits of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 is formed at equal intervals (72 ° intervals) in five places in the circumferential direction. The respective ends of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 may be formed in a round shape (semicircular shape) in a front view, or may be formed in a rectangular shape.

In this embodiment, one end of the outer edge of the both side slits 815 located at the outermost side in the set consisting of these three slits, that is, two corners on the small diameter side among the four corners of the three slits It has a shape that is substantially rectangular in the extension direction of the 815 and slightly extends (a rectangular cut is included). The rectangular extension (cut) is for inserting the slide rib 803 a in the flat plate member 803.

The slit member 810 is connected to the side end of the flat plate on which the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 are formed, and has an outer diameter smaller than the outer peripheral end of the central slit 814 and the both sides slit 815 Is formed in an arc shape whose center coincides with the center of the circular opening 811.

Thus, the rigidity of the flat plate in which the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 are formed is enhanced by the arc plate 816. Therefore, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 81
It can suppress that the flat plate in which 5 is formed deform | transforms in the circumferential direction or axial direction.

In addition, as described above, as shown in FIG.
Since each set includes the directions D12 inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811, respectively, the five sets of central slits 814 and the both-sides slits 815 are made to be closer to the inside. , And more closely arranged and formed, the slit member 81 is also
The outer shape of 0 is compact.

In other words, it is assumed that five sets of central slits 814 and both slits 815 have circular openings 811.
When it is arranged to extend along the inclined direction D12 as described above, as compared to the case where it is arranged to extend radially along the radial direction D11 without being inclined with respect to the radial direction D11 of In this case, the five sets of central slits 814 and the two-sided slits 815 can be laid out more closely, and the outer peripheral shape of the slit member 810 can be made smaller accordingly.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 is disposed on the central slit 814 and the two-sided slit 815 from the rear side of the slit member 810. Slide member 8
As shown in FIG. 157, reference numeral 20 denotes a resin-made member having a long plate-like front shape, in which the thickness is reduced at both ends of the slide member 820, and the tip is formed in a semicircular shape in front view Extending portion, a central portion which is thicker than the effect portion at a position between the extending portions, a screw insertion hole 821 drilled in the extending portion, and a front face from the center of the slide member 820 It has a guide pin 822 which is convex on the side and is inserted through the central slit 814 in an assembled state, and a slide pin 823 fixed so as to penetrate back and forth in a manner of projecting from the center of the slide member 820 to the back side. .

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the slide member 820 has a posture in which the extending direction of the three slits of the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 820 intersects with the longitudinal direction at a right angle. And disposed so as to cross both side slits 815.

On the other hand, the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815 in the slit member 810
The screwing portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 is inserted from the front side. In the fully inserted state, the screwing portion 803S of the flat plate member 803 protrudes slightly rearward of the rear side surface of the slit member 810. In this state, washer-equipped screws (washer head screws) 824 are respectively inserted from the rear side into the screw insertion holes 821 on both sides of the slide member 820, and screwed into and fixed to the screwed portion 803S of the flat plate member 803.

Thereby, the slide member 820 interposes the slit member 810 between the flat member 8
It is fixed to the back side of 03. At this time, the guide pin 822 of the slide member 820 is inserted into the central slit 814 in the slit member 810 with almost no gap, and the slide rib 803 a of the flat plate member 803 almost along the corresponding outer edge of the both side slits 815 in the slit member 810 It is inserted without gap.

Thereby, the flat plate member 803 is slidably held by the central slit 814 and the both-side slits 815 in the slit member 810, and at this time, the flat plate member 803 is guided by the guide pin 8.
It is regulated by the slide rib 803 a so as to slide in a constant outward direction without turning about the center 22.

160 is a front perspective view of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804, and FIG.
(A) and FIG. 161 (b) are back perspective views of the slide member 820 and the central motor 804. In FIG. 161 (a), the fourth gear 880G is not shown. Note that FIG.
In the description of 0 and FIG. 161, FIGS. 155 and 156 will be referred to as appropriate.

As described above, the rotary plate 830 is disposed from the rear side on the slit member 810 to which the flat plate member 803 is slidably attached. As shown in FIGS. 160 and 161, the rotary plate 830 is a resinous disc having a circular pivot opening 831 at the center.

As shown in FIG. 160, on the front side, the rotary plate 830 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 and is provided with a guide rail 832 formed around the peripheral wall.

The guide rail 832 has a peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and this peripheral wall is
It is integrally formed on the rotary plate 830 so as to have a shape extending so as to close in a slender loop shape in a front view along the surface direction of the rotary plate 830.

The extension height of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is the same as the extension height of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831. The inner width of the guide rail 832 is such that the slide pin 823 can be inserted with a slight gap of a degree of play. The corner portion at the extension end of the peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 is formed to fall off at a corner.

From the position where the guide rail 832 contacts the outside of the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831,
It extends in a clockwise direction as viewed from the front along a substantially intermediate direction between the tangent line and the normal to the pivot opening 831 and then arcs in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front more than the intermediate direction. It extends to a position near the outer periphery of the rotary plate 830 while curving (see FIG. 175 (a)).

The peripheral wall of the guide rail 832 side end portion of the pivot opening 831, ie, the portion circumscribing the peripheral edge portion of the pivotal support opening 831 at the center side end, is integrally formed with the peripheral wall at the peripheral edge of the pivotal support opening 831 The front end portion of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 is projected to the front side of the front end portion of the peripheral wall.

Around the peripheral wall at the periphery of the pivot opening 831, four more guide rails 832 are formed in the same manner as described above, and five guide rails 832 as a whole are equally spaced apart from each other in the pivot opening 831. It extends so as to expand spirally from the periphery to the outside.

On the rear side surface of the rotary plate 830, as shown in FIG. 161, a second gear 830G having teeth is integrally formed on the outer periphery of the peripheral edge of the pivot opening 831 so as to extend rearward as a peripheral wall. The second gear 830G is disposed to mesh with the first gear 804G, and is rotationally driven by the central motor 804.

The rotary plate 830 is attached such that the pivot opening 831 is fitted on the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 as shown in FIG. At this time, the rear end portions of the five slide pins 823 projecting backward from the slide member 820 are inserted into the five guide rails 832, respectively (see FIG. 174 (c)).

The outer peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 in the slit member 810 bulges locally at five places as described above, and therefore, it is linear rather than planar with respect to the inner peripheral surface of the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 As a result, the pivot opening 831 of the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 in a state of low frictional resistance, and the rotary plate 830 is pivotally rotatably supported.

On the rear side of the second gear 830G, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), the second gear 830G is further provided.
The third gear 810G having a slightly smaller diameter and a larger diameter than the pivot opening 831 is concentrically arranged and fixed, and is arranged to mesh with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805.

In the center of the third gear 810G, a circular pivot opening 810a is bored, and the pivot opening 81
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 810b are provided at positions corresponding to three screwing parts 813S in the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 (see FIG. 156), and at positions corresponding to two positioning bosses 813a. Positioning holes 810c are respectively drilled.

The third gear 810G is disposed on the rear side of the second gear 830G externally fitted to the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810, and the rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810
On the other hand, the positioning boss 813a (see FIG. 156) is positioned by inserting it into the positioning hole 810c, and the screw (not shown) is screwed through the screw insertion hole 810b (FIG. 1).
56) fixed by screwing.

As a result, the slit member 810 is interlocked (linked) with the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the third gear 810G is prevented from coming off and the rotary plate 830 Is held by the rear side peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 so as not to be separated.

As shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, from the front side of the slit member 810, a central axis rotating device 850 is disposed. The central axis rotating device 850 mainly includes a central axial member 851 fastened and fixed to the support base 801 (see FIG. 154), and a loose fitting device 880 loosely fitted rotatably about the central axial member 851. Prepare for

FIG. 162 is an exploded front perspective view of central axis rotating device 850 and loose fitting device 880. FIG.
63 is an exploded back perspective view of the central axis rotating device 850 and the loose fitting device 880. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the central shaft member 851 has an incompletely cylindrical shaft portion 852 in which a part of the peripheral wall of the cylinder is cut off along the axial direction, and And a flange 855 formed in a disk shape so as to expand in diameter at the front end, and the shaft portion 852 and the flange 855 are integrally formed.

A central portion of the flange 855 communicates with the inside of the shaft portion 852 and opens in a circular shape, thereby forming a lumen 856 which passes through the inside of the shaft portion 852 back and forth. Around the lumen 856 on the front side of the flange 855, a front screwing portion 857 having a screw hole in the inside on two sides sandwiching the lumen 856, and the front screwing portion 857 to the lumen 856 side A holding portion 858 which is bored toward the rear side in a shape having a spot facing at the misaligned position, and two supporting protrusions 859 extending slightly short in a cylindrical shape are integrally formed. . The front end of the front screwing portion 857 and the base of the support protrusion 859 have the same extension height.

The inner circumferential surface of the lumen 856 extends cylindrically along the axial direction of the shaft 852 so as to be parallel to the two opposing locations, and extends further rearward than the rear end of the shaft 852 and internally A rear screwing portion 853 having a screw hole is integrally formed. A rear positioning boss 854 is integrally formed at a rear end of the circumferential wall of the shaft portion 852 at an equal distance from the rear screw insertion portions 853 so as to project rearward.

As shown in FIGS. 162 and 163, the LED substrate 861 is provided on the front side of the central shaft member 851.
Is placed. The LED substrate 861 is a substantially disk-shaped substrate slightly smaller in diameter than the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Screw insertion holes 862 and positioning holes 863 are formed in the LED substrate 861 at positions corresponding to the front screwing portion 857 and the front positioning bosses 854 of the central shaft member 851.

The front positioning boss 854 of the central shaft member 851 is inserted into the positioning hole 863 of the LED substrate 861 for positioning, and the screw is inserted into the central shaft member 8 through the screw insertion hole 862 of the LED substrate 861.
By screwing into the front screwing portion 857 of 51, the LED substrate 861 is fixed so as to cover the front side of the flange 855 of the central shaft member 851.

Further, an insertion hole 864 is bored in the LED substrate 861 at a position corresponding to the holding portion 858 of the central shaft member 851 so that the screwed portion 869 of the central decoration member 868 can be fitted therein.

On the front side surface of the LED substrate 861, as shown in FIG. 162, one point in the center and a large number of places arranged concentrically at equal intervals on multiple concentric circles extending around this one point, LE
Each D865 is fixed in position and emits light forward.

Horizontally oriented LEDs 866 are arranged and fixed at many places arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction in the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge on the front side and rear side of the LED board 861, and light is emitted outward along the radial direction of the LED board 861 It is supposed to The horizontally oriented LEDs 866 on the front side of the LED substrate 861 are alternately arranged concentrically with the forward LEDs 865. A connector connection portion 867 is disposed and fixed to the rear side surface of the LED substrate 861 toward the rear.

A central decoration member 868 is disposed on the front side of the LED substrate 861. Central decorative member 868
Is made of a nearly transparent resin material having a specific color (yellow), extends from the long plate-like base to the back side in a cylindrical shape, and forms a screw hole in which a screw can be screwed in the central portion And a pair of threaded portions 869.

The screwing portion 869 is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861. LE
The insertion hole 864 of the LED substrate 861 at the holding portion 858 of the flange 855 with the D substrate 861 interposed therebetween.
The central decorative member 868 is fastened and fixed to the flange 855 by screwing in the screwing portion 869 that has passed through from the front side and screwing the screwing portion 869 from the rear side of the flange 855. Thus, the central decorative member 868 functions as a retainer for the LED substrate 861.

The loose fitting device 880 is coaxial with the small diameter cylindrical member 881 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an inner peripheral surface whose inner diameter is slightly larger than the outer peripheral diameter of the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and its small diameter cylindrical member 881 And a large diameter cylindrical member 882 formed of a flanged cylindrical shape having an outer peripheral surface having an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810, and these small diameter cylindrical members 881 and the large diameter It mainly includes a flanged cylindrical member sandwiched between the cylindrical members 882, and a small diameter cylindrical member 881 and a large diameter cylindrical member 882, and a main cylindrical member 883 rotatably fitted loosely with each other.

The main cylindrical member 883 has cylindrical portions extending in the front and back directions respectively at two of one of four places equally spaced in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion, and a screwing portion 883S having a screw hole inside is integrally formed. The positioning boss 883a is extended from the tip edge of the portion where the screwing portion 883S is not formed out of the above-mentioned four places.

The main cylindrical member 8 is formed at four locations corresponding to the screwing portions 883S and the positioning bosses 883a.
83 is configured to bulge outward. In addition, the main body cylindrical member 883 is projected in the form of a rib in the outer radial direction with a projecting length similar to that of the screwing portion 883S and the positioning boss 883a at corresponding four circumferential intermediate positions. Sliding rib 88 extending over the
3b is formed.

The flange portion of the cylindrical body 883 is formed from an outer shape larger than the outer shape of the LED substrate 861, and the decorative member 884 covering the LED substrate 861 from the front side in the assembled state (see FIG. 149) A back cover 886 which is fastened and fixed near the diameter and has a bottom-off cup shape in which the outer peripheral side rises to the front side from the fastening portion and abuts from the back side to the flange portion of the main cylindrical member 883 , Is disposed.

The back cover 886 is entirely plated (yellow in the case of the pachinko machine 8010) on the front and back surfaces, whereby the side surfaces are mirror-like. Therefore, for example, by reflecting the light of the horizontally oriented LED 866 disposed on the back side surface of the LED substrate 861 in the vicinity of the outer periphery, it is possible to perform the light emission effect.

The decoration member 884 is a member that emits light by being irradiated with light from the LEDs 865 and 866 disposed on the LED substrate 861. The decoration member 884 forms a hibiscus flower shape and transmits light in a specific color (red color) A front side plate portion formed of a resin material having elasticity, and a rear side plate portion formed of a colorless and light transmitting resin material which constitutes a disk shape having a peripheral wall rising to the back side on the back side An opening 885 is drilled in the central portion in a size that allows the central decorative member 868 to be inserted.

The thus configured main cylindrical member 883 is rotatable relative to the central shaft member 851. The loose fitting device 880 is fastened and fixed to the fourth gear 880G disposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G (see FIG. 156).

On the rear side of the third gear 810G, as shown in FIG. 161 (a), a fourth gear 880G slightly smaller in diameter than the third gear 810G and larger in diameter than the pivoting opening 831 is arranged concentrically.
A pair of intermediate gears 808 rotatably supported on and intermeshing with the support base 801 is engaged.

In the intermediate gear 808, one gear meshes with the third gear 810G, and the other gear meshing with the one gear meshes with the fourth gear 880G. That is, the fourth gear 880G is an intermediate gear 8
It rotates in the opposite direction to the third gear 810G through 08.

In the center of the fourth gear 880G, a circular pivot opening 880a is bored, and the pivot opening 88
Around 0a, screw insertion holes 880b are formed at the positions corresponding to the two screwing portions 883S of the main body cylindrical member 883 and positioning holes 880c are formed at the positions corresponding to the two positioning bosses 883a. There is.

The fourth gear 880G is disposed on the rear side of the third gear 810G externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 of the central axis rotating device 850, and the positioning boss for the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 Positioning is performed by inserting the 883a (see FIG. 163) into the positioning hole 880c, and a screw (not shown) is screwed through the screw insertion hole 880b (see FIG. 16).
3) It fixes by screwing.

As a result, the loose fitting device 880 is interlocked (linked) to the damper gear 805G of the oil damper 805 via the third gear 810G and braked by the oil damper 805, and the fourth gear 880G is prevented from coming off and the slit The member 810 is held by the main body cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 so as not to be separated.

The fourth gear 880G includes a detection arc plate 880d extending toward the back side in an arc shape centering on the rotation axis on the outer peripheral side than the screw insertion hole 880b and the positioning hole 880c. In the detection arc plates 880d, five plates of the same shape are arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction.

Detection arc plate 880d is in the assembled state (see FIG. 154).
It is detected by a photocoupler type detection sensor 801C which is accommodated in 1D (see FIG. 152) and disposed so as to be able to detect a member passing through the doughnut-shaped recessed portion 801D. That is, in the present embodiment, even if the fourth gear 880G starts rotating from any position, the detection arc plate 88
It is possible to detect the rotation angle corresponding to the arrangement interval of 0 d (center angle 72 °) (minimum angle 7
Detection of 2 ° can be performed, and rotation of 72 ° or more can be secured by detection).

The assembly of the central axis rotating device 850 will be described. The shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 in which the LED substrate 861 is arranged and fixed are inserted into the circular opening 811 of the slit member 810 from the front side. When the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 and the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880 are fully inserted, the respective rear ends project slightly rearward from the pivoting opening 810a of the third gear 810G.

A rear positioning boss 854 which protrudes further rearward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 is a support base 801
(Refer to FIG. 152) is inserted into the positioning notch (not shown) in the positioning notch (not shown) and positioned, and the rear side screwing portion 853 similarly projecting backward from the rear end of the shaft portion 852 The central shaft member 851 is fixed to the support base 801 by inserting the screw into the insertion hole and fixing the screw.

At this time, a wire is connected to the connector connection portion 867 of the LED substrate 861, and the wire is drawn rearward through the lumen 856 of the central shaft member 851 and the opening 801P of the support base 801 (not shown).

With the above attachment structure, the shaft portion 852 of the central shaft member 851 is fixed to project forward with respect to the support base 801, and as shown in FIG. 154, the main cylindrical member 883 of the loose fitting device 880.
The rear peripheral wall 813 of the slit member 810 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall 8 of the large diameter cylindrical member 882.
It is attached so that 12 may fit outside.

At this time, at the outer peripheral surface of the main body cylindrical member 883 at eight places along the circumferential direction, screwed portions 883 S,
Since the positioning bosses 883a and the sliding ribs 883b locally bulge, they contact the inner peripheral surface of the rear peripheral wall portion 813 of the slit member 810 in a line, rather than in a plane, thereby the slit member 810 The rear peripheral wall portion 813 is externally fitted to the main body cylindrical member 883 in a state of low frictional resistance, and the slit member 810 is pivotally rotatably supported in a smooth manner.

164 shows the petal operating device 800, the drive side arm member 910 and the driven side arm member 95.
FIG. 165 is a rear perspective view of 0, and FIG. 165 is a front perspective view of a back plate 1100. The petal operation device 800 moves up and down (advances and retracts) by being given a load in the vertical direction from the drive side arm member 910. In the description of FIG. 164 and thereafter, FIGS.
Refer to 2 as appropriate.

The back plate 1100 is a horizontally elongated rectangular member fastened and fixed to the deepest inside of the back case 200 (see FIG. 88) fastened and fixed to the back of the game board 13, and in the lower left corner in front view A support column 1110 projecting in a cylindrical shape on the front side, and a gear housing portion 1120 in which a plurality of gears are recessed above the support column 1110 so as to be accommodated from the front side; Rail fixing portion 1130 disposed in the
And a support long hole 1140 which is formed as a long hole which is inclined downward as it approaches the rail fixing portion 1130 on the opposite side to the left and right of the support column 1110 across the support post 1110.

The support column 1110 is a cylindrical portion rotatably supporting the drive side arm member 910, and
In the vicinity of the outer periphery at the front side end, there are a pair of holes disposed on the left and right sides, and a screw-in portion 1111 formed to be able to screw a screw And a positioning boss 1112 extended to the

As shown in FIG. 164, the drive side arm member 910 is constituted of a long rod-like main body member bent in a rear view shape, and is circularly drilled in the front and rear direction at one end and supported A rotating shaft hole 911 rotatably supported by 1110, a connecting projection 912 which is convexly provided in a stepped cylindrical shape on the front side at a position near one end of the long main body member, The petal operation device 800 is supported at the other end of the long main body member and the transmission long hole 913 which is bored in the form of a straight long hole from the bending point of the main body member to the rotation shaft hole 911 side The supporting portion 914 is mainly provided.

The driving side arm member 910 has a rotation of an arm gear 924 including an inner fitting convex portion 925 internally fitted in the transmission long hole 913, and a flange portion 926 projecting radially outward to a position detected by the detection sensor 1162. In conjunction, it pivots around the support column 1110.

The gear housing portion 1120 is a concave portion in which the gear of the transmission means 920 is housed, and is constituted by three circular concave portions arranged continuously while being slightly crossed, and is disposed at the left end side and housing the motor gear 922 A first accommodating portion 1121 and a second accommodating portion 11 connected to the first accommodating portion 1121
22 and a third accommodation portion 112 in which an arm gear 924 disposed opposite to the first accommodation portion 1121 with the second accommodation portion 1122 interposed therebetween and engaged with the driving side arm member 910 is accommodated.
3 and mainly.

The rail fixing portion 1130 is a portion that supports the operation rail 1000R (see FIG. 150, not shown in FIG. 165) supported so that a plurality of metal plates are stacked so as to slide up and down. It has an insertion hole 1131 in which a screw for fastening and fixing the rail 1000R to the back plate 1100 can be inserted and a positioning boss 1132 which is engaged with the operation rail 1000R to position the operation rail 1000R. Placed on the line.
Due to the rigidity of the operation rail 1000R, the posture of the petal operation device 800 is maintained constant.

The support long hole 1140 is a long hole slidably supporting the driven side arm member 950, and is disposed so as to be lowered toward the left at an inclination angle of about 50 ° in a front view, It has an extending wall 1141 extending to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 164, the driven side arm member 950 is formed of a long rod-like main body member formed substantially in a straight line in a rear view, and is convexly provided in a cylindrical shape to the back side at one end. A supported convex portion 951 slidably supported by the support elongated hole 1140 of the face plate 1100 and a support portion 952 for supporting the petal operation device 800 at the other end are mainly included.

The supported convex portion 951 has a cylindrical collar loosely fitted, and a screw is fastened to a screwed portion 951 a formed at the tip of the supported convex portion 951 in a state where the collar is internally fitted in the support long hole 1140 Thus, the driven arm member 950 is slidably supported by the back plate 1100. That is, the inner diameter of the collar is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the supported convex portion 951, and the outer diameter is the support elongated hole 114.
It is formed slightly smaller than the width of 0.

166 is an exploded front perspective view of back plate 1100, side substrate 1000S, and second effect member 940. FIG. 167 is an exploded front perspective view of drive side arm member 910, slide plate 930, and second effect member 940. is there.

The slide plate 930 is supported by a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) supported long holes 931 drilled in the longitudinal direction in the form of long holes extending laterally and slidably on the lateral base 1000S so as to be laterally movable. It is connected with the connection convex part 912 of the drive side arm member 910 by the base end side long hole 932 drilled in the front and rear direction in the form of a long hole extending in the vertical direction disposed on the left end side and disposed on the right end side It is connected with the 2nd effect member 940 by the tip side penetration hole 933 drilled in the front and back direction.

The base end long hole 932 is extended vertically downward from the lower end of the stopping portion 932a formed along the locus of rotation of the connecting projection 912 about the support column 1110 at the upper end portion and the stopping portion 932a And displacing portion 932b.

As shown in FIG. 166, the side base member 1000S is a cylindrical portion disposed in a substantially triangular shape in a front view on the left side in a front view of the back plate 1100, and a screwed portion 1151 capable of screwing a screw at its tip A plate-like member that is fastened and fixed to the support post 1150 having a fastening plate 1001S disposed at a position corresponding to the support post 1150 and having an insertion hole through which a screw can be inserted; In the positional relationship (3 locations) corresponding to the arrangement relationship of the supported long holes 931, a support convex portion 1002S convexly formed in a cylindrical shape toward the back side, and circularly drilled in the front-rear direction in the front right corner Together with a shaft support hole 1003S for rotatably supporting the second effect member 940, and an arc concave portion 1004S recessed in an arc shape of the same center as the center of the shaft support hole 1003S, and similarly the center of the shaft support hole 1003S Same center as Ridge 1005S which is projectingly provided on the front side along the arc shape
And mainly.

The support convex portion 1002S is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter smaller than the width of the supported long hole 931 of the slide plate 930, and a flanged cylindrical collar is supported from the tip end of the support convex portion 1002S.
And a portion for supporting the slide plate 930 so that the slide plate 930 can be slidably moved by screwing in a screw for retaining from the tip of the support convex portion 1002S. Ru.

The axial support hole 1003S is a circular hole rotatably supporting the second effect member 940, and the arc concave portion 1004S and the ridge portion 1005S are disposed for the purpose of smoothing the rotational operation of the second effect member 940. Part of the In addition, although the convex streak portion 1005S does not abut when the second effect member 940 is at the regular position, the convex streak portion 1005S is formed with a convex height that can be abut when it is displaced from the regular position or bent. Be done.

The second effect member 940 has a main body portion in which a lower end portion is divided into two and an upper end portion is formed in a circular shape centering on the shaft support portion 941 and on the back side at the front right corner portion A shaft-supported column 941 which is formed in a cylindrical shape and is supported by a shaft support hole 1003S with a collar interposed therebetween, and an auxiliary protrusion which is disposed close to the shaft-supported column 941 and which protrudes in a cylindrical shape toward the back Part 942,
Mainly to

The shaft support column portion 941 is a cylindrical portion formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the collar slightly smaller in outer diameter than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole 1003S, and a screw is screwed into the tip An insertion portion 941a is provided (see FIG. 152). Shaft support hole 1003 with the collar supported by the supported column 941
The cover member 94 is inserted by screwing the screw into the screwing portion 941a in a state where the disc-shaped cover member 945 whose outer diameter is larger than the inner diameter of the pivot support hole 1003S is disposed at the tip end when inserted into S.
5 plays the role of retention. Thereby, the second effect member 940 is pivotally supported by the side base material 1000S.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is inserted into the distal end side insertion hole 933 of the slide plate 930 (see FIG. 169), and is prevented from coming off the slide plate 930 by fastening and fixing a circular resin collar at the distal end. . That is, the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 interlock with each other by the connection of the auxiliary convex portion 942 and the distal end side insertion hole 933.

The auxiliary convex portion 942 is a convex portion that displaces near the center of the width of the arc concave portion 1004S, and is formed in a cylindrical shape having a diameter slightly smaller than the width of the arc concave portion 1004S. Thereby, even if the second effect member 940 is about to be bent, the auxiliary convex portion 942 abuts on the arc concave portion 1004S to generate resistance, so that bending deformation can be suppressed.

This will be described with reference to FIG. The back plate 1100 includes three screwing portions 1161 configured to be able to screw a screw when fastening a plate-like support plate 921a that supports the drive motor 921.
A detection sensor 1162 for detecting a flange portion 926 projecting radially outward from the arm gear 924 in a range of a predetermined angle, and a collar for guiding a coil spring SP8 generating an urging force in a lifting direction of the petal operating device 800 The shaft support 1163 supported, the cover support portion 1164 arranged in a triangular shape in a front view so as to support the substrate cover 1000C at the lower right of the support elongated hole 1140, and the substrate cover 10 arranged close to the cover support portion 1164
A wiring stopping portion 1165 which is concealed in a front view at 00 C and a screwing portion 1166 into which a screw for fastening the substrate cover 1000 C is screwed in are mainly included.

Similarly, the side substrate 1000S includes screwed portions 1006S and 1007S into which screws for fastening the substrate cover 1000C are screwed. The screwing portion 1006S is disposed at a slight distance from the second effect member 940 disposed at the movement end in the movement direction of the second effect member 940 (see FIG. 168). Therefore, for example, the auxiliary convex portion 942 is broken by long-term use,
Even when the portion that restricts the counterclockwise rotation of the second effect member 940 in front view is missing,
The screwing portion 1006S can regulate the displacement of the second effect member 940.

As described above, the substrate cover 1000C is not fixed to a single member, but is fixed to the side substrate 1000S and the back plate 1100 which are stacked and arranged in the front and rear direction and are fixed to each other. 1000C, side substrate 1000S and back plate 11
00 can be firmly fixed to each other. By this, even in the case of moving a heavy device such as the petal operating device 800 up and down by rotating the driving side arm member 910, it is easy to suppress the vibration and displacement of the substrate cover 1000C and the side substrate 1000S. Can.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 173, the elevation operation of the petal operating device 800 by the advancing and retracting operation unit 900 will be described. FIGS. 168, 170 and 172 show the petal operating device 800, the advancing and retracting operation unit 900, and the back plate. FIG. 169 is a front view of 1100.
71 and FIG. 173 are back views of the petal operating device 800 and the advancing and retracting operation unit 900.

168 and 169 show a state in which the drive side arm member 910 is disposed at the upper end side of the movement range, and in FIGS. 170 and 171, the connecting convex portion 912 of the drive side arm member 910 (see FIG. 164). Is illustrated in FIG. 172 and FIG. 173 in which the driving side arm member 910 is disposed at the connection position of the stopping portion 932a of the proximal long hole 932 and the displacement portion 932b.
Is illustrated on the lower end side of the movement range.

As shown in FIGS. 169 and 173, in a state where the drive side arm member 910 is disposed at the end of the movement range, the transmission elongated hole 913 of the drive side arm member 910 is an inner fitting convex portion 925 of the arm gear 924 (see FIG. It extends in a tangential direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the arm gear 924 with a reference point 151) as a base point. Therefore, when the drive motor 921 is started, the inner fitting projection 9 is
Since only the position 25 is displaced, and the drive side arm member 910 has a range (a range in which it makes a free rotation) to maintain the posture, the resistance at the start of the drive motor 921 can be reduced.

In FIGS. 170 and 171, the arrangement of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940 is maintained while the petal operating device 800 is slightly lowered compared to the states shown in FIGS. 168 and 169. That is, when the drive side arm member 910 rotates in the downward direction, the petal operating device 800 operates in advance of the slide plate 930 and the second effect member 940.

From FIG. 170 and FIG. 171, in the range of FIG. 172 and FIG. 173, as the drive side arm member 910 and the slide plate 930 interlock, visual recognition is made as if the petal operation device 800 and the second effect member 940 interlock. It can be done.

Here, by moving the second effect member 940 in such a manner that the second effect member 940 projects to the originally arranged position of the petal operation device 800, it is as if the second effect member 940 is the petal operation device 8
It can be viewed as operating following 00.

Next, the collecting and dispersing operation of the petal operating device 800 will be described. 174 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 174 (b) is a front view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 174 (c) omits the central axis rotating device 850. FIG. 174 (d) is a front view of the slit member 810 and the rotary plate 830. FIG.

FIG. 175 (a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 175 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
FIG. 175 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and FIG. 175 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operation device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 176 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 176 (b).
FIG. 176 (c) is a front view of the petal operating device 800 with the central axis rotating device 850 omitted and FIG. 176 (d) is a slit member. FIG. 80 is a front view of a rotary plate 810 and a rotary plate 830

FIG. 177 (a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and FIG. 177 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
Fig. 177 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and Fig. 177 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

Similarly, FIG. 178 (a) is a front perspective view of the petal operating device 800, and FIG. 178 (b).
178 is a front view of the petal operating device 800, FIG. 178 (c) is a front view showing the petal operating device 800 with the central axis rotating device 850 omitted, and FIG. 178 (d) is a slit member FIG. 80 is a front view of a rotary plate 810 and a rotary plate 830

Fig. 179 (a) is a front view of the rotary plate 830, and Fig. 179 (b) is a petal operating device 8.
Fig. 179 (c) is a rear view of the petal 802 and the flat plate member 803, and Fig. 179 (d) is a rear perspective view of the petal operating device 800.

As shown in FIG. 172, when the petal operating device 800 is lowered by the elevating operation to be at the lowermost position, from the initial position (consolidated position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, FIGS.
The expansion operation (first operation) is performed to the fully open position shown in FIGS. 178 and 179 through the expansion position shown in FIG. 178, and the rotational operation (second operation) is further performed at the fully open position. The operation (third operation) is performed to return to the initial position (collection position).

In the initial position (collection position), as shown in FIG.
The slide pin 823 (see FIG. 157) has a central slit 81 in the slit member 810.
Located at the inner end (the end at the side of the circular opening 811) of 4 and, as a result, as shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, five petals 802 are the most concentrated at the central decoration member 868 of the central portion. In position, it is in a consolidating state that constitutes a hibiscus flowering state as a whole.

When the petal 802 is in the initial position (collection position) as described above, the central motor 804
When the gear 804G is rotated in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A9 in FIG. 175 (c), the second gear 830G (see FIG. 175 (d)) is interlocked therewith to rotate the rotary plate 83.
As indicated by an arrow A10, 0 is rotationally driven clockwise in the rear view.

At this time, as described above, the rotary plate 830 is externally fitted to the front peripheral wall portion 812 of the slit member 810 at the pivot opening 831 with little frictional resistance, so the torque around the front peripheral wall portion 812 easily with small torque. It can rotate. On the other hand, the slit member 810 is rotatably externally fitted to the large diameter cylindrical member 882 of the loose fitting device 880 at the circular opening 811 as described above, while the third gear 810G is interposed as described above. Since the braking is performed in conjunction with the gear 805G of the oil damper 805, it is held so as not to be able to rotate with a torque that is small enough to cause the above-mentioned rotating plate 830 to move initially.

Therefore, when the first gear 804G is rotated by the central motor 804, initially, the rotating plate 8 is
Only 30 is rotationally driven as described above, and the slit member 810 is held stationary (see FIGS. 176 and 177).

When the rotary plate 830 is rotationally driven as described above, as shown in FIG. 175 (a), on its front side, the guide rail 832 rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A11.
Along with this, a force is applied to the slide pin 823 of the slide member 820 (see FIG. 157) in such a direction as to be pushed outward along the radial direction so as to be guided by the guide rail 832.

At this time, the movement of the slide pin 823 is a slit member 81 as shown in FIG.
The slide pin 823 is linearly guided from the inner end to the outer side along the central slit 814 so that the slide pin 823 is moved.

At this time, the slide pin 823 is guided by the rotating guide rail 832 to apply some torque to the slit member 810, but the braking force of the oil damper 805 exceeds this torque, and therefore While the slit member 810 is held in the stopped state, the slide pin 823 is the central slit 8 as the rotary plate 830 rotates.
It moves linearly along 14 along the outside.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 176 and 177, the five sets of petals 802 start an expanding operation in which the petals spread radially outward from the collecting position. In this spreading operation, the slit member 8
Ten central slits 814 extend along the direction D12 inclined by an angle θ11 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view with respect to the radial direction D11 of the circular opening 811 as described above, as shown in FIG. Although a relatively large load is applied to the slide pin 823 moving outward, on the other hand, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is relatively fast due to the inclination.

That is, by inclining the central slit 814 in the counterclockwise direction in a front view in this way, the load on the slide pin 823 becomes relatively large, while the slide pin is rotated by a relatively small amount of rotation (angle) of the rotary plate 830 823 can be moved by a predetermined distance, whereby the spreading operation of the petals 802 can be performed more efficiently.

Here, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 radially extends along the radial direction D11 without this inclination, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small compared to the above case, while the slide The moving speed of the pin 823 is relatively slow, and further, for example, assuming that the central slit 814 is inclined clockwise in a front view with respect to the radial direction D11, the load on the slide pin 823 decreases and the moving speed The decline is all the more pronounced.

At this time, as described above, the guide rails 832 extend from the central end along the direction D15 between the tangent line and the normal line of the pivot opening 831 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the center as shown in FIG. After this, it extends outward while curving in an arc toward the clockwise side in the front view more than the direction D15, and extends so as to expand outward as a whole by the five guide rails 832. .

As the guide rail 832 is thus inclined in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front, the slide pin 82
As the load on 3 becomes smaller, the moving speed becomes slower. Furthermore, the guide rails 832
Is curved toward the clockwise side in a front view more than the direction D15.
Both the reduction of the load on the as well as the reduction of the moving speed become more significant.

That is, in the case of the central slit 814 described above, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively large and the moving speed is relatively high by inclining in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, while the guide is relatively In the case of the rail 832, the load on the slide pin 823 is relatively small and the moving speed is relatively slow by inclining to the clockwise side in a front view and further curving in an arc shape.

In the case of the guide rail 832, as described above, it is grooved by the peripheral wall extending forward from the front side surface of the rotary plate 830, and the tip of the slide pin 823 is fitted from the front side Therefore, if a large load is applied between the guide rail 832 and the slide pin 823, the slide pin 823 may deviate from the guide rail 832 during movement. Therefore, the load on the slide pin 823 is reduced while sacrificing the moving speed of the slide pin 823.

On the other hand, in the case of the central slit 814, since the slide pin 823 penetrates, there is less risk of deviation, and therefore the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased while the load on the slide pin 823 is increased. Is configured.

As described above, by reducing the load on the slide pin 823 by the guide rail 832, it is possible to prevent a defect such as a deviation and ensure the certainty of power transmission while the central slit 8 is maintained.
In the configuration, the moving speed of the slide pin 823 is increased at 14 so that the roles are divided.

Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 178 and FIG.
When it reaches the outer end which is the outer movement limit in 4 (see FIG. 178 (d)), the five petals 802 radially expand to the fully open position and are fully open, and the expansion operation is completed.

In the fully-opened state, as shown in FIGS. 178 and 179, the five petals 802 move radially so that they are continuously visible to the outside of the decorative member 884 in a front view. The petals 802 are arranged on the As a result, as compared with the case where only the decoration member 884 is visually recognized by the decoration member 884 and the petal 802 (see FIG. 174 (b)), it is visually recognized integrally like a hibiscus flower which is a little larger (Fig. 178 (b)).

Thus, when the slide pin 823 reaches the outer end which is the outer movement limit of the central slit 814 and can not move further outside, the slide pin 823 is
Is locked to the outer end of the central slit 814, so that a small torque that is less than the braking force of the oil damper 805 prevents the rotary plate 830 from further rotating in the same direction as before.
Therefore, when the operation of the central motor 804 is stopped, it is possible to maintain the fully open state after the widening operation is finished.

After completion of the spreading operation, rotational power in the same direction is transmitted from the central motor 804 to the rotating plate 830, and when the torque applied to the rotating plate 830 exceeds the braking force of the oil damper 805, the slit member In response to the damping by the oil damper 805, the motor 810, together with the rotary plate 830, starts rotating in the counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front as indicated by the arrow A12 in FIG. 178 (d). Thus, after the spreading operation, the petals 802 rotate in a counterclockwise direction in a front view in a fully open state as shown by an arrow A13 in FIG. 178 (b).

At this time, if rotational power is continuously applied to the rotary plate 830 without stopping the central motor 804 after the expansion operation, the operation from the expansion operation to the rotation operation will be continued immediately. It can be migrated.

When the petal 802 rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a front view in a fully open state as indicated by an arrow A13,
The decoration member 884 rotates in the reverse direction (clockwise as viewed from the front) as shown by an arrow A14 in FIG. 178 (b). Therefore, compared to the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the decoration member 8 is
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, it is possible to make the rotation speed of the petal 802 appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

After the above-mentioned rotation operation is completed, the first gear 804G is moved by the central motor 804 in the reverse direction,
When rotating in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in FIG. 179 (b), only the rotary plate 830 is first shown in FIG. 179 (while the slit member 810 is braked by the oil damper 805 and held stopped). As shown by the arrow A15 in b), it is rotationally driven in a clockwise direction as viewed from the rear, whereby a concentration operation in the reverse direction to the above-described expansion operation is performed.

That is, the slide pin 823 returns from the outer end which is the outer movement limit at the central slit 814 to the inner end which is the inner movement limit, and together with this, five sets of petals 802 from the fully open position to the central decoration member 868 of the central portion. Then, it returns to the collecting position (initial position) shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, returns to the collecting state, and the collecting operation is finished.

After this, the central motor 804 may be stopped to end the operation of the petal operating device 800, but the central motor 804 may be operated continuously without stopping it or after the central motor 804 is stopped. Again, the central motor 804 further operates the first gear 804.
When G is rotated clockwise as viewed from the rear as shown by arrow A15 in FIG.
However, as shown by arrow A16 in FIG. 174 (b), it rotates in a front view clockwise direction in the assembled state.

When the petal 802 rotates clockwise in a front view in the assembled state as shown by arrow A16, the decoration member 884 is in the opposite direction (counterclockwise as viewed in front view) as shown by arrow A17 in FIG. 174 (b). To rotate. Therefore, compared to the case where the decoration member 884 is stopped, the decoration member 8 is
Since the movement amount (relative movement amount) of the one petal 802 with respect to the predetermined position of 84 becomes large, it is possible to make the rotation speed of the petal 802 appear faster than the actual rotation speed.

From this concentration operation to the rotation operation as well, by controlling the central motor 804,
It is possible to stop and shift at a later time, or to shift immediately and continuously.

Here, in the present embodiment, the rotation of the fourth gear 880G is detected when the detection arc plate 880d passes the detection sensor 801c (see FIG. 153), so the rotation angle of the central motor 804 is not controlled. By determining the output of the detection sensor 801 c, the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4) can determine whether or not the petal operation device 800 is performing a rotation operation.

Next, a ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-like ball passage portion 145 closed with walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described. However, the passage forming in the ninth embodiment The unit 9140 is notched 9145 in the wall forming the far ball passage 9145
b is formed, and the sheet metal member 9150 is configured to protrude along the notch 9145 b. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 183. FIG.

180 is a front perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 181 is a rear perspective view of the passage forming unit 9140, and FIGS. 182 and 183 are front views of the ball firing unit 112a. is there. As shown in FIGS. 180 and 181, in comparison with the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment, the passage forming unit 9140 has an internal configuration of the far ball passage portion 9145, a lower end portion of the far ball passage portion 9145 and a front portion. The upper / lower positional relationship of the lower end portion of the door side lower tray passage portion 9142, the shape of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, and the configuration of the partition plate portion 53a are different.

That is, first, the far ball passage portion 9145 has a notch 9145 b recessed from the front end of the passage forming unit 9140 toward the back side at the lower curved inner portion of the S-shaped passage SL2 . The sheet metal member 9150 is provided with a thin plate-like thin blade portion 9153 in which a portion extending from the upper portion to the upper portion of the plate-like portion 152 is bent toward the front side in a manner covering the notch 9145b from above.

The notch 9145 b is formed in a series of ranges including the recessed direction end of the S-shaped path SL 2,
The depth of the recess is approximately the same as the radius Ra of the ball.

The upper surface of the thin plate blade portion 9153 is in contact with the lower surface of an upper stop convex portion (not shown) which is provided on the back surface side from the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91). Configured to withstand the load.

The thin plate blade portion 9153 passes the yarn Y8 through the ball ball passage portion 9145 and pulls or loosens the yarn Y8 to illegally operate the ball inside the game area to obtain an illegal profit. , And is disposed for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8 passed through the far ball passage 9145. Here, possible frauds will be described.

Referring back to FIG. As described above, the ball launch unit 112a of the eighth embodiment
In order to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball, a cutting metal member 725 is disposed. The cutting metal member 725 is a member that attempts to cut the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball by using the momentum of the ball's firing, but the yarn Y8 is broken if the momentum of the firing is weak. Without it, a ball might be fired.

On the other hand, the ball does not reach the game area, flows down to the ball receiving portion 146, passes through the ball passage portion 145, and is discharged to the lower tray 50. Therefore, there is no possibility that this ball will directly enter the game area.

On the other hand, for example, considering that the balls P8 and P9 are fixed to both ends of the yarn Y8, a new problem arises. That is, as shown in FIG. 182, the ball P fixed to one end of the yarn Y8
In the state where the ball P8 is guided to the ball receiving port 146, the yarn Y9
When the ball P9 fixed to the other end of the ball is guided to the firing rail 730, the yarn Y8 is disposed on the back side of the cutting metal member 725 (on the side of the firing solenoid 701). Even if punched out, the yarn Y8 is not cut into the cutting metal member 725.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 183, if the ball P9 is vigorously launched, the ball P9 reaches the game area without being cut off the yarn Y8. The ball P8, which has been fired in advance, is a ball passage part 1
After passing through 45, it is discharged to the front of the player and stored in the lower tray 50 (see FIG. 86).

Therefore, a wrongdoer can pull or loosen the yarn Y8 by holding the ball P8 stored in the lower plate 50 and moving the ball P8, whereby the ball P9 is used as a winning opening. 63 (see FIG. 2), etc., and it is possible to obtain an illegal benefit.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, when performing fraudulent action using the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends as described above, the thin plate blade in the far ball passage portion 145 through which the yarn Y8 inevitably passes By arranging the portion 9153, the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

That is, when a person who does wrong acts pulls the yarn Y8, the yarn Y8 rubs against the thin plate blade portion 9153 to damage the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early (see FIG. 180). ). At this time, as in the present embodiment, the notch 9145 exposing the thin plate blade portion 9153
b is formed on the side closer to the front side, that is, on the side to which the yarn Y8 is drawn when pulling the yarn Y8 from the front side, so that the yarn Y8 is disposed inside the cutout 9145b when the yarn Y8 is pulled. And the thin-film blade portion 9153 can be rubbed with the yarn Y8.

Further, as described above, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can increase the resistance to an upward load by abutting on the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) on the opposite side of the far ball passage portion 9145. This prevents the thin blade portion 9153 from bending or bending when the thin blade portion 9153 is given a load directed outward of the ball ball passage portion 9145 when the yarn Y8 is pulled. be able to. Therefore, the thin plate blade 915 from the yarn Y8
Most of the load given towards 3 can be used to damage yarn Y8.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the recessed depth of the notch 9145b is about the radius Ra of the ball P8, so that the ball P8 is prevented from passing the front side of the notch 9145b. At the same time, the ball P8 is prevented from colliding with the thin plate blade portion 9153. As a result, the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be prevented from being broken or chipped by colliding with the ball P8, so that the durability of the thin plate blade portion 9153 can be improved.

Second, in the passage forming unit 9140, the lower end portion of the ball ball passage portion 9145 is disposed lower than the lower end portion of the lower door passage portion 9142 on the front door side. In detail, it arrange | positions with an up-and-down difference of a radius Ra grade of a sphere. Thereby, it can be made easy to damage yarn Y8 by a discharge ball. In other words, because the person who cheat is afraid of the detection of cheating,
After holding the ball 8, the ball P8 should be close to the body (eg,
It is easy to carry out the cheating act such as pulling on or loosening the yarn 8 while maintaining it in the pocket of the pants. In that case, the state in which the yarn Y8 extends to the player side along the upper surface of the side wall of the lower plate 50 (abuts on the upper surface) is maintained. At this time, the yarn Y8 is passed through a position about the diameter of the ball above the bottom surface of the ball guide opening 53 (see FIG. 86).

In this state, when the winning balls are dispensed, the lower tray 5 from the lower end portion of the front door lower tray passage portion 9142
When the ball discharged to 0 collides with the lower plate 50 and bounces around, the lower plate 50 is stepped while stepping on the yarn Y8 disposed on the front side of the ball guide opening 53 or hitting the yarn Y8 (FIG. 1) (See reference), and flow downward through the bottom opening disposed behind the ball removal lever 52. That is, by disposing the lower end portion of the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142 above the lower end portion of the far ball passage portion 9145 (by raising the rising limit position when splashing), the front door side lower plate Passage 9
A ball discharged from the lower tray 142 to the lower plate 50 can abut on the yarn Y8 to increase the possibility of damaging the yarn Y8, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

Thirdly, on the bottom surface of the lower end portion of the front door side lower tray passage portion 9142, a right inclined surface 9142a which is inclined downward toward the right side is formed. The right inclined surface 9142 a can make it easy to give a rightward speed to the ball discharged from the ball guide opening 53 to the lower plate 50 through the front door side lower plate passage portion 9142.

By this, before the momentum (kinetic energy) of the ball delivered to the lower plate 50 declines, the yarn Y8
Can point the ball towards That is, the right inclined surface 9142a can force the ball discharged to the lower plate 50 along the front-rear direction to the right (toward the far ball passage 9145), and therefore, among the balls to be discharged, It is possible to increase the proportion of balls that step on yarn Y8 or hit yarn Y8.

In addition, fourthly, in the present embodiment, the lower end portion of the front door side lower countersink portion 9142 has a ball guide opening 5
The left part of 3 occupies an area of about 2/3 of the left and right width dimension of the ball guide opening 53, and the lower end of the far ball passage 9145 is the remaining area in the right part of the ball guide opening 53 (left and right of the ball guide opening 53 An area on the order of 1/3 of the width dimension is occupied, and a riding restriction step 9053 a is formed at the boundary.

As shown in FIG. 180, the riding restriction step 9053a is a right end portion (right end side) of a right inclined surface 9142a formed as a lower bottom portion of the front door side lower countersink passage portion 9142 and a foul disposed on the right side thereof. The left end (left end side) of the lower base near the outlet of the ball passage portion 9145 is connected, and is configured as a flat portion extending in the vertical direction.

A space V9 having a vertical width larger than the diameter of the ball is formed on the upper side of the riding restriction step 9053a on the back side of the ball guide opening 53, and the space V9 forms a front door side lower countersink passage 91
42 and the far ball passage 9145 communicate with each other. Therefore, before passing through the ball guide opening 53, the ball which has passed through the front door side lower countersink passage portion 9142 can flow down to the right along the space V9. Therefore, the ball can be easily brought close to the yarn Y8.

The width in the vertical direction of the riding restriction step portion 9053a is set to be equal to the radius Ra of the ball.
Accordingly, it is possible to roll the far ball passage portion 9145 and restrict the ball in contact with the riding restriction step portion 9053a to run up to the right inclined surface 9142a side. That is, the riding restriction step portion 9053a allows passage of the sphere in the space V9 in the left and right direction in one direction (direction from left to right) and restricts in the other direction (direction from right to left). Act as a directional valve.

Next, a tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the tunnel-like ball passage portion 145 closed with walls is formed between the passage forming unit 140 and the plate member 14d has been described, but the passage forming in the tenth embodiment The unit 10140 is configured such that a notch 10145c is formed in a wall forming the far ball passage 10145, and the sheet metal member 10150 projects along the notch 10145c. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted. Differences from the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 184 to 186. FIG.

184 to 186 are front perspective views of the passage forming unit 10140 in the tenth embodiment. 184 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed from the upper right, and FIG. 185 shows the passage forming unit 10140 viewed from the upper left. In FIG. 186, the passage forming unit 10140 is The state viewed obliquely from below is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 184 to 186, the passage forming unit 10140 differs from the passage forming unit 140 in the eighth embodiment only in the internal configuration of the ball passage portion 10145.

That is, the far ball passage portion 10145 is a notch 10 which is recessed from the front end portion of the passage forming unit 10140 toward the back surface side in the upper curved inner portion of the S-shaped path SL2.
It has 145c. The sheet metal member 10150 is provided with thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 which extend in the front side in a manner covering the lower side of the notch 10145c.

The notch 10145c is formed in a series of ranges including the concave direction end of the S-shaped path SL2, and the concave depth thereof is approximately equal to twice (diameter) the radius Ra (see FIG. 180) of the ball Ru. In addition, the notch 10145c has a through hole drilled in the front-rear direction along the rolling plate portion 10145d below the rolling plate portion 10145d in which the ball is guided to the passage portion 145a, and the through hole is formed in the through hole The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 of the sheet metal member 10150 are inserted from the back side.

In the present embodiment, the plate member 14d (see FIG. 91) is disposed inside the notch 10145c and has an outer shape of a front view of the far ball passage portion 10145 before the notch 10145 is formed. Auxiliary convex part 1 which is provided in a convex shape toward the back side from the side of the back side of
It has 4d2. The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is illustrated by an imaginary line in FIGS. 184 and 185, and is not illustrated in FIG.

The auxiliary convex portion 14d2 is convexly provided in such a manner that the notch 10145c is partially filled (approximately the radius Ra of the ball (see FIG. 180)), whereby the length in the front-rear direction in which the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are exposed is The radius Ra is about P8. Therefore, far ball passage part 101
Since it is possible to prevent the ball flowing down 45 from colliding with the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154, it is possible to prevent the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 from colliding or colliding with the ball P8. It is possible to improve the durability of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154.

The protruding tip end 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 is formed in an inclined shape extending toward the rear side as it goes to the far ball receiving port 146 side (closer to the right). Therefore, the width (longitudinal width) of the gap on the back surface side of the protruding end 14d3 of the auxiliary protruding portion 14d2 in the notch 10145c is equal to that of the passage portion 14
It becomes wider as it is closer to 5a. Thereby, the thin-film blade portion 1 is disposed on the yarn Y8 disposed in the passage portion 145a.
It becomes easy to insert into the gap on the back side of the protruding end 14d3 of the auxiliary protrusion 14d2, which is the gap in which the 0153 and 10154 are disposed.

The first thin plate blade portion 10153 is a thin plate portion protruding from the back side edge of the notch 10145c to the front side, and the second thin plate blade portion 10154 is a first thin plate blade portion on the front side of the first thin plate blade portion 10153 The first thin blade portion 10153 is a portion that forms a bifurcated blade portion.
It is extended to the left in a mode inclining slightly upward from the right end of the front side edge. As a result, between the first thin plate blade portion 10153 and the second thin plate blade portion 10154, the deep recess portion is an acute angle recess portion 1015 having an acute angle.
5 is formed.

The thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 are metal members disposed for the purpose of cutting the yarn Y8, similarly to the thin plate blade portion 9153 in the ninth embodiment.

The acute angle recess 10155 is disposed on the back side of the convex tip 14d3 and on the front side of the rear side edge of the notch 10145c. As a result, when the yarn Y8 enters the back side of the protruding end 14d3 of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2, the yarn Y8 enters the acute-angle recess 10155, and the yarn Y8
Can be easily damaged.

In addition, the second thin blade portion 10154 disposed on the front side is disposed on the upper side compared to the first thin blade portion 10153, whereby the yarn Y8 can be pulled diagonally downward on the front side by a person performing fraud. However, it is easy to get into the deep part of the acute angle recess 10155.

The plate-like portion continuously provided on the right side of the thin plate blade portions 10153 and 10154 is a rolling plate portion 10145d.
Abut against the lower surface of the ball, and is configured to bear the upward load generated from the inside of the ball passage portion 10145.

The extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 are disposed facing the left and right sides at a bending point at which the internal passage of the ball ball passage portion 10145 is bent in the opposite direction. Ru. That is, at these two points, the yarn Y8 is pulled in the left-right reverse direction.

For example, in order to avoid detection of a fraudulent act, a person who performs an illegal act releases the ball P8 that has come out at hand, and the ball P8 flows backward through the foul ball passage portion 10145 and is discharged through the game area. According to the present embodiment, a load in the left-right reverse direction is given to the yarn Y8 or the ball P8 at the extended end on the lower end side of the inclined plate portion 146a and the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2. Therefore, it is possible to easily cause a situation where the backflowing ball P8 is caught on the lower end surface of the auxiliary convex portion 14d2 and is retained.

As a result, the ball P8 and the yarn Y8 are allowed to stay inside the ball passage portion 10145, and the yarn Y
By lengthening the time during which the game area 8 is exposed to the game area 8, it is possible to speed up the detection of a fraud.

Alternatively, an adhesive member (such as glue or trim) may be provided in the deep portion of the acute-angled recess 10155 so as to be bonded to the yarn Y8 that has entered the acute-angled recess 10155. In this case, even if the yarn Y8 fixed to the ball P8 that came to the hand of the injustice is cut, the yarn is adhered to the adhesive member disposed in the acute angle recess 10155, and the ball P9 is in the game area Since it is not discharged | emitted from but maintained on the spot, the discovery of the fraud using thread Y8 can be quickened.

Next, an eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 187 to 190. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the ball (fowl ball) having a weak firing intensity and not reaching the game area is discharged to the lower tray 50 has been described, but the countersunk path forming member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment It has a far ball receiving port 2164 for receiving. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 187 is a front view of the inner frame 12 and the countersink passage formation member 2160 in the eleventh embodiment, and FIG. 188 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062.

As shown in FIGS. 187 and 188, the outer rail 2062 is disposed at the lower left corner of the game board 13 and has a circular arc shape similar to the outer rail 62 in the eighth embodiment from the resin material. Tip member 206 formed and positioned proximate to the ball launch unit 112a
And 2a and a guide member 2062b formed up to the vicinity of the left end of the inner frame 12 in a positional relationship having a gap V11 of a flowable possible width between the tip member 2062a and the tip member 2062a.

On the downstream side of the gap V11, a far ball passage 2062c is formed which communicates with the far ball inlet 2164 formed at the right corner inside the main body side upper bowl passage portion 161. Fool ball passage 2
The 062c is formed to have a width slightly larger than the width through which one ball can pass through, and a spare for the return ball prevention member 68 is disposed above it.

In the present embodiment, the main body side upper countersink passage portion 161 is moved leftward to the position where the main body side lower countersink passage portion 162 is disposed in the above-described embodiment. The formation is omitted. That is, the balls dispensed from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) disposed on the back side of the game board 13 are supplied exclusively to the upper tray 17 via the main body side upper tray passage portion 161. Then, when the ball of the upper plate 17 exceeds the allowable amount, the filling switch (not shown) disposed on the inner side of the flow path of the ball on the downstream side of the dispensing device 133 is turned on by the load of the ball, and the dispensing device The dispensing of the ball from 133 is configured to stop.

That is, in the present embodiment, the ball which has passed through the far ball passage 2062c is
The balls paid out from FIG. 87) are also supplied to the upper tray 17. Therefore, as described above, the balls are adhered to both ends of the yarn Y8, and one ball is passed through the far ball passage 2062c, so that the yarn Y8 is formed.
When considering cheating that is to be inserted inside the game area along the far ball passage 2062c,
The action of damaging the yarn Y8 can be produced regardless of the accumulation of the balls of the upper tray 17 by applying the discharge balls to the yarn Y8. Thereby, the yarn Y8 can be easily cut early.

FIG. 189 is a partially enlarged front perspective view of the outer rail 2062. FIG. In FIG. 189, the spare of the return ball preventing member 68 disposed in the upper part of the far ball passage 2062c is disassembled and shown side by side as a rear perspective view. Further, in the description of FIG. 189, FIG. 188 is referred to as appropriate.

The return ball preventing member 68 is temporarily fixed to the game board 13 by a metal long screw B11 in a posture in which the base member 68b1 of the support member 68b supporting the tilting gate member 68a is disposed on the front side.

In detail, on the back side of the return ball preventing member 68, the guide member 2062b is hollow. In the hollow, there is formed a support cylindrical portion 2062b2 which is cylindrically protruded from the back side surface of the guide member 2062b to the front side and in which a screw-in groove for screwing the long screw B11 is formed on the inner wall. A closing plate 2062b4, which closes the cavity of the guide member 2062b from the front side, is in surface contact with the tip of the support cylindrical portion 2062b2, and the base member 68 is placed in front of the closing plate 2062b4.
In the state where b1 is in contact, a long screw B11 is formed with a through hole drilled in advance as an attachment hole in the base member 68b1 and a through hole 2062b5 drilled in the closing plate 2062b4 at the same position as the through hole. Is inserted and screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in that state, the return ball prevention member 68 is fastened and fixed to the guide member 2062b.

The closing plate 2062b4 is formed so that the upper surface and the left surface on the side in contact with the guide member 2062b conform to the end surface of the guide member 2062b, while the lower surface avoids interference with the support member 68b. The right face (the face on the front side in FIG. 189)
It is formed as a slope of the same slope as the slope increasing portion 2062 d of 62 b.

The gradient increasing portion 2062d is inclined downward to the surface of the guide member 2062b constituting the outer frame of the game area, as it approaches the tip member 2062a. That is, the gradient increasing unit 206
A straight line L11 extended along the surface 2d toward the tip end member 2062a is lower than the upper end portion of the surface (upper surface) constituting the outer frame of the game area of the tip end member 2062a (in this embodiment, the diameter of the ball It intersects the tip member 2062a at about 1/3 lower side).

By configuring in this manner, when firing a ball toward the game area, the slope increasing portion 20
Since 62 d is retracted from the path of the ball, it is possible to prevent the ball from colliding with the lower end of the slope increasing portion 2062 d. On the other hand, when the ball that did not reach the game area flows backward, the upper end of the tip member 2062a projects inside the path of the ball rolling the gradient increasing portion 2062d, so that the ball And the possibility of returning to the ball firing unit 112 a side beyond the tip member 2062 a can be reduced.

A side surface 2062d1 on the front side of the gradient increasing portion 2062d is between the closing plate 2062b4 and
An incision 206 which is smaller than the diameter of the ball so that the yarn can enter (in this embodiment, about 2 mm)
It is recessed on the back side to a position where it can form 2b1. The location where the cut 2062b1 is formed is where the path of the ball driven into the game area and the far ball passage 2062c intersect at an acute angle.

In the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 on the right side in front view, on the front side with respect to the side surface 2062d1,
A semicircular cutout 2062b3 is provided on the side facing the slope increasing portion 2062d. The notch 2062b is provided for the purpose of exposing the long screw B11.

As described above, since the long screw B11 to be screwed into the support cylindrical portion 2062b2 in the front view right side is exposed at the front and back position where the cut 2062b1 is formed, the same as the method described in the ninth or tenth embodiment It is possible to cause the yarn Y8 to rub against the long screw B11 in the case of cheating that is performed through the yarn Y8 having the balls P8 and P9 fixed to both ends in the foul ball passage 2062c.

That is, from the arrangement of the cut 2062b1, the yarn Y8 is pressed against the long screw B11 arranged in the deep portion of the cut 2062b1 when a load is applied to pull the both ends (FIG. 190 (FIG. 190 (FIG.
a) see). In that state, since the yarn Y8 slides in the longitudinal direction, rubbing occurs with the long screw B11, and the yarn Y8 can be cut early.

In the present embodiment, the incision 2062b1 is disposed on the front side of the position through which the center of the ball passes. This prevents the cut 2062b1 from being disposed at a position where the ball to be fired abuts against the outer rail 2062 (vertical lower portion of the center of the ball), so that the cut 2062b1 collides with the ball to be fired. It is possible to prevent the influence of the orientation of the ball and the like.

In addition, a person who performs an illegal act performed through the yarn Y8 having balls P8 and P9 fixed at both ends in the far ball passage 2062c is the end of the yarn Y8 projecting to the player side (the ball P8 is fixed Since the position of the ball P9 in the game area is adjusted by pulling the end on the side (see FIG. 182) to the front side, the yarn Y8 comes close to the front side in the vicinity of the gap V11 close to the player. Therefore, arranging the cut 2062c closer to the front makes it easier for the yarn Y8 to enter the cut 2062c as compared to the case where the cut 2062c is arranged closer to the back side.

In a hollow portion formed in the guide member 2062b, a button type switch SW11 provided with a detection portion protruding downward is disposed. The button type switch SW11 is configured as a switch that can be pressed and operated with a load that is extremely weaker than the load generated when the gate member 68a rotates with the weight of the weight portion 68a2. Therefore, the possibility of the button type switch SW11 interfering with the operation of the gate member 68a can be reduced. The button type switch SW11 is for detecting the attitude of the gate member 68a, and when the attitude of the gate member 68a changes, O.
It is arranged to be able to switch N-OFF.

FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (b) are partial front enlarged views of the far ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 190 (a), the weight 68a of the gate member 68a of the return ball prevention member 68
In the state shown in FIG. 190 (b), the weight 68a2 is pushed up by the passing ball, and the gate member 68a is shown in FIG. 190 (b).
The open / close portion 68a1 side is inclined toward the far ball passage 2062c. Also,
In FIG. 190 (a), it is illustrated that the path of the yarn Y8 used in fraudulent activity is shown as a reference and the button type switch SW11 is ON, and in FIG. 190 (b), the button type switch SW11 is It is illustrated that it is made OFF.

As shown in FIG. 190 (b), the return ball preventing member 68 only gives a slight resistance to the passing ball, and gives a resistance enough to hold the ball passing through the ball passage 2062c. Not. This is because the ball flows away under its own weight, and as shown in FIG. 190 (b), even if the width of the far ball passage 2062c is narrowed by the tilting of the opening / closing part 68a1, if the ball flows away, the figure immediately Since the state shown in 190 (a) is restored, the ball passage 20 is next
This is because the state shown in FIG. 190 (a) can be restored by the timing at which the ball is guided to 62c (the shortest time after 0.6 seconds).

On the other hand, for an object which does not flow away like a sphere, for example, an object which advances while filling a passage like an endoscope, the return ball preventing member 68 provides a large resistance. This is a structure as a measure against fraud.

For example, the tip of a device such as an endoscope causes the far ball passage 2062c to travel in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the ball, reaches the inside of the game area, and tries to interfere inside the game area (for example, You bend a nail (not shown) planted in the game board 13, hold a ball and put it in the winning opening, use the tip of the device as a guide plate to the winning opening, or take out the laser from the tip Cutting nails etc.) cheating is considered.

FIG. 191 is a partial front enlarged view of the far ball passage 2062c. In FIG. 191, the outline of a device such as an endoscope that intrudes illegally is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When advancing the far ball passage 2062c in the direction opposite to the flow-down direction of the ball, the tip of a device such as an endoscope moves the gate member 68a of the return ball preventing member 68 while discharging it in this embodiment. Become. Here, when transitioning from the state shown in FIG. 191 (the state where the weight 68a2 is removed by the tip of the endoscope) to the state shown in FIG. 190 (a), it is connected to the tip of the endoscope The insertion portion (long flexible portion) is disposed below the weight portion 68a2, and the weight portion 68a
It will be maintained in a state where 2 is pushed up. Therefore, it is difficult to exclude the opening and closing part 68a1, and it is possible to prevent the tip of the endoscope from advancing further behind.

Here, in the case where the endoscope is forced to advance and the gate member 68a is broken and entered inside, it is not possible to prevent the fraud in this state. On the other hand, in this case, since the button type switch SW11 is maintained in the OFF state, the button type switch SW1 is
By controlling the alarm to sound when maintained for a predetermined time with 1 being in the OFF state, it is possible to detect fraud early.

In addition, when the button type switch SW11 is in the OFF state, control may be performed so that the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped. Even in this case, in normal use, the state in which the button type switch SW11 is turned off occurs only at the timing when the ball passes (see FIG. 190 (b)), and the button type switch SW11
Since it is N (see FIG. 190 (a)), the period in which the payout of balls from the payout device 133 is stopped can be shortened as much as possible, and the player can be prevented from feeling discomfort.
On the other hand, when the gate member 68a is illegally destroyed, the state in which the delivery of the ball from the dispensing device 133 is stopped can be maintained.

The member disposed above the ball ball passage 2062c does not have to be the return ball preventing member 68, and may be another movable member. However, as in the present embodiment, the return ball preventing member 68
By arranging the above, it is possible to replace the ball promptly when the return ball preventing member 68 disposed on the game board 13 is broken or bent by long-term use. Thereby, compared with the case where the replacement member of the return ball prevention member 68 is merely purchased as an option, the effect of being able to play a role of preventing fraud before replacement and the trouble of searching for the storage place can be omitted. The effect can be achieved. Further, it is not necessary to provide the entire configuration of the return ball preventing member 68. For example, the gate member 68a may be pivotally supported by a fixed shaft (the support member 68b may not be provided).

In addition, when the return ball prevention member 68 is broken or bent and replaced, whether or not the effect of preventing the above-mentioned fraudulent action is exhibited depends on the degree of breakage of the return ball prevention member 68 , From the person who misconducts, it does not know whether or not the exchange has been made, and
By not knowing the extent of the damage, even if it has been replaced, the deterrence of fraud can still be maintained.

Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 to 197. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the petal operating device 800 rotates only at the collecting position or the full opening position has been described, but the petal operating device 2800 in the twelfth embodiment can rotate even at the expanding position. Configured in an aspect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 192 is a rear perspective view of a loose fitting apparatus 2880 in a twelfth embodiment. Figure 192.
As shown in the drawing, the rear cover 2886 of the loose fitting device 2880 has a flange portion 2 extending radially outward from the rear end outer edge in comparison with the configuration of the rear cover 886 in the eighth embodiment.
And 887 and a restricting portion 2888 which protrudes from the extended end of the flange portion 2887 to the back side. A loose fitting device 2880 in the present embodiment is a loose fitting device 8 in the eighth embodiment.
There is only a difference in the back cover 2886 in comparison with 80, and the other parts are the same as the loose fitting device 880.

The restricting portion 2888 is protruded to a position (intermediate position) between the back side portion 802 a and the front side portion 802 b of the petal 802. That is, although the restricting portion 2888 can be in contact with the front side portion 802b, the restricting portion 2888 protrudes to a position incapable of coming into contact with the rear side portion 802a.

In the present embodiment, a single flange portion 2887 and a single restriction portion 2888 are disposed. However, the flange portion 2887 and the restriction portion 2888 may be dispersed at a plurality of locations on the back cover 2886.
Next, the operation of the flange portion 2887 and the restricting portion 2888 will be described with reference to FIGS. 193 and 194.

FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b) are front views of the petal operation device 2800, and FIG.
4 (a) and 194 (b) are partially enlarged front views of the slit member 810 and the slide member 2820. FIG. In FIGS. 193 and 194, operation examples of the petal operation device 2800 are illustrated in time series, and FIGS. 193 (a) and 194 (a), 193 (b) and 194 (b).
The state of the same point is illustrated in FIG.

In FIGS. 194 (a) and 194 (b), the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, a pair of screwed portions 2803 of the flat plate member 2803
S is viewed in cross section. Further, in FIG. 193, the petals 802 whose posture is changed by the action of the restricting portion 2888 are shown in white (the same applies to FIGS. 195 and 196).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 194 (a), the pair of screwing portions 2803S arranged inside the both-sides slit 815 has a screwing portion on the other side centering on the screw insertion portion 803H on the surface facing each other. An inclined surface 2803T inclined in a manner to be away from 2803S is provided.

The inclined surface 2803T is approximately 30 degrees with respect to the direction in which the slide member 2820 slides.
It is formed to be inclined. The action of the restricting portion 2888 on the petals 802 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and 193 (b), the petal 802 is slid in a posture in which the restricting portion 2888 is disposed radially outward along the moving direction of the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 ( When the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in a front view), the restricting portion 2888 abuts on the front side portion 802b of the petal 802, and the petal 802 receives a load from the restricting portion 2888.

With the petal 802 receiving a load from the restricting portion 2888, when the petal 802 is further slid (the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) is rotated counterclockwise in front view), the petal 802 receives the load In order to change the attitude.

At this time, the slide member 2820 fastened and fixed to the petal 802 has a normal posture (a posture in which the longitudinal direction is directed in the direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 and the both side slits 815) illustrated in FIG. From the center slit 814 as shown in FIG. 194 (b)
And, it is possible to change the posture to the inclined posture inclined with respect to the both side slits 815. Petal 8
In 02, a posture change occurs as much as possible.

As described above, the posture of the slide member 2820 and the petal 802 changes, and the restricting portion 28
While the load from 88 is received, the resistance between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 810 changes.

That is, in the normal posture shown in FIG. 194 (a), the slide member 2820 is such that the slide rib 803a having a small width only abuts on the both-side slits 815, so that the frictional resistance is suppressed.
The slide member 2820 can be smoothly moved in the longitudinal direction of the slits 814 and 815.

On the other hand, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slide member 2820 has the slide rib 803a as the outer inner wall with respect to the both side slits 815 and the inclined surface 280 as the inner inner wall.
Since 3T is respectively abutted (pressed), frictional resistance increases. In addition, since the width of the inclined surface 2803T is larger than that of the slide rib 803a, the increase in the frictional resistance becomes remarkable. In addition, since the inclined surface 2803 T is in contact with the inner inner wall of the both-sides slit 815 from both directions in the short side direction of the both-sides slit 815, an increase in frictional resistance occurs regardless of the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830. .

Therefore, in the inclined posture shown in FIG. 194 (b), the slit 814 of the slide member 2820
, 815, thereby increasing the resistance to movement in the longitudinal direction.
Slide pin 823 without waiting for 20 to reach the end of slit 814, 815
The torque applied to the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) can be made greater than the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) (the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 in the normal position and the inclined position). The braking force of the oil damper 805 can be set to a magnitude between the movement resistance of the slide member 2820 and the sliding resistance 2820).

In this case, the slit member 810 starts to rotate together with the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 155) by shaking off the braking by the oil damper 805. That is, from the state shown in FIG.
Start rotating counterclockwise in front view. Since this direction corresponds to the direction in which the petals 802 move away from the restricting portion 2888, the load applied from the restricting portion 2888 to the petals 802 can be released.

FIG. 195 is a front view of the petal operation device 2800. FIG. Note that in FIG. 195, FIG.
A state after rotation plate 830 (see FIG. 156) continues rotating in the same direction from the state of b) is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 195, the petal operating device 2800 can be rotated at the position during expansion. At this time, the back cover 2886 rotates in a direction (clockwise direction in front view) opposite to the rotation direction of the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 155). In the state shown in FIG. 195, the torque applied from slide pin 823 to rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is oil damper 805 (see FIG.
Because it exceeds the braking force (see FIG. 156), the petal 802 can be rotated in both forward and reverse directions while maintaining the position during expansion.

196 (a), 196 (b) and 197 are front views of the petal operation device 2800. FIG. In FIGS. 196 (a), 196 (b) and 197, the movement of the petals 802 from the spread position to the collecting position is illustrated in time series.

In FIG. 196 (a), the rotary plate 830 (see FIG. 156) is rotated clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 195, and the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 is pressed against the restricting portion 2888. When the rotary plate 830 further rotates in the same direction from this state, as shown in FIG. 196 (b),
The restricting portion 2888 pushes the front side portion 802b, and the posture of the petal 802 and the slide member 2820 is returned to the normal posture.

Furthermore, when the rotating plate 830 (see FIG. 156) rotates in the same direction, the braking force of the oil damper 805 (see FIG. 156) exceeds the torque applied from the slide pin 823 to the rotating plate 830. The rotational movement of 802 is settled, and the petals 802 slide toward the collecting position.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to automatically perform an operation of rotating the petals 802 at the position during expansion and thereafter returning them to the collecting position.

Although the expansion operation is performed at the position where the front side portion 802b of the petal 802 abuts against the regulating portion 2888, if the petal 802 is rotated by a small angle (the rotating plate 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front) Since the contact between the front side portion 802b and the restricting portion 2888 can be avoided, the petal 802 can be moved to the fully open position and can be rotated at the fully open position in this embodiment.

In addition, as the arrangement of the regulation portion 2888, the petals 802 do not contact the petals 802 at the collecting position or the full opening position, or the petals 802 even if they abut against the petals 802 rotating at the full opening position.
By setting the position so that it can slip through the restricting portion 2888 by slightly changing its position and setting it to be able to receive the load, the restricting portion 2888 is prevented from obstructing the rotation of the petals 802 in the fully open position. it can.

Further, as shown in the present embodiment, by arranging the restricting portion 2888 at a position protruding from the back cover 886 in a front view, the restricting portion 2888 can be used as a part of the rendering device. For example, by arranging a star-shaped pattern on the front side of the regulation portion 2888, the petal 802 is provided.
When it spreads, it can be used as a mark about whether it passes a position close to a star-shaped pattern or a distant position, and the petal 802 spreads to its maximum and the rotational motion is different in its perspective. It is possible to make a difference as to whether the rotation operation is performed by the expansion or the partial expansion.

Then, for example, by performing an effect in which the jackpot expectation differs depending on the degree of expansion at the time of rotation, the player's attention to the degree of distance between the star-shaped pattern and the petal 802 can be improved. The pattern of the mold can be made to function as an effect part. Thereby, the regulation part 2888 can be used as a part of rendering device.

The restricting portion 2888 may be disposed at a position hidden by the back cover 886 in a front view. In this case, there is no need to design the shape of the restricting portion 2888 from the viewpoint of design, so the degree of freedom in design of the restricting portion 2888 can be improved.

In the fully open position, the petal 802 may abut on the regulating portion 2888 and slightly change its posture as a rendering effect (for example, a rendering that suggests the degree of the jackpot expectation). In this case, it is possible to change the meaning content to be communicated to the player because the petal 802 is simply rotating or it is rotating while contacting the regulating portion 2888 and causing a slight posture change (with the gills). .

In the present embodiment, the position where the petal 802 abuts on the restricting portion 2888 is the tip position, but
If the contact position is closer to the center (if the arrangement of the petals 802 is different), the degree of expansion when the petals 802 change posture changes. Therefore, even if the restricting portion 2888 is fixed to the back cover 2886, it is possible to change the degree of expansion when the petal 802 changes its posture in a plurality of types.

Next, another example of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 and 199.
In the twelfth embodiment, the slit member 810 is rotated together with the rotary plate 830 regardless of the rotational direction of the rotary plate 830 at the spread position, but the petal operating device in another example of the twelfth embodiment The slit member 3810 of 3800 is configured to be switchable between the case where the slit member 3810 rotates with the rotation plate 830 and the case where the rotation plate 830 rotates independently depending on the rotation direction of the rotation plate 830. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b) are partially enlarged front views of a slit member 3810 and a slide member 2820 in another example of the twelfth embodiment. In FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, an operation example of the petal operation device 3800 when the rotary plate 830 rotates clockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a) is illustrated in time series. Also,
In FIGS. 198 (a), 198 (b), 199 (a) and 199 (b), the rotary plate 83 is shown.
The arrangement and shape of the zero guide rails 832 are illustrated in phantom lines.

When the rotary plate 830 is rotated counterclockwise in a front view from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), a load generated between the slide member 2820 and the slit member 3810 is applied from the oil damper 805 to the slit member 3810. Since it is the same as that of the 12th embodiment that the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 rotate together with the resistance which is higher than the resistance, the description is omitted here.

Further, in FIG. 198 and FIG. 199, the guide pin 822 and the slide pin 823 are viewed in cross section for convenience, and in the same cross section, the pair of screwed portions 2803S of the flat plate member 2803 are viewed in cross section.

Here, when the rotary plate 830 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 which receives a load from the guide rail 832 because the slide pin 823 is inserted in the guide rail 832 of the rotary plate 830 is the guide rail 832. Along with the displacement, it is displaced in the lower right direction of FIG. 198 (a) (see FIG. 198 (b)). And, in the present embodiment, additional concave portions 3814 a, 3815 a, 3815 on the side to receive the slide member 2820 displaced in this way.
b is formed.

That is, the slit member 3810 is different from the slit member 810 in that the central slit 814 is provided on the wall portion on the clockwise side in the front view among the wall portions extending along the radial direction of the central slit 814.
Among the walls extending along the radial direction of the central recessed portion 3814a which is recessed in a manner to widen the width and the both side slits 815 disposed on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in the front view, the clockwise side The radial direction of the both side slits 815 arranged on the clockwise side of the central slit 814 in a clockwise direction concave portion concaved in a manner to widen the width of the both side slits 815 in the wall portion of Of the wall portions extending along the two side slits 81 in the wall portion on the clockwise side in a front view
And a counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b which is recessed in such a manner as to extend the width in the short direction 5 of 5.

The clockwise recessed portion 3815a is a flat plate member 280 in the state shown in FIG. 198 (a).
It is disposed opposite to the three slide ribs 803a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the central recessed portion 3814a is a slide member 2820.
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position where it is disposed facing the guide pin 822 of FIG.
8 (a) is continuously formed.

The central recessed portion 3814a has a recessed depth deeper than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length longer than the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

In the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b is a flat plate member 28.
The rotation center side of the slit member 3810 from the position facing the inclined surface 2803T of 03 (
FIG. 198 (a) is continuously formed to the lower side.

The counterclockwise recessed portion 3815b has a recessed depth deeper than that of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a, and a radial length greater than that of the central recessed portion 3814a.

The operation when the rotary plate 830 of the petal operation device 3800 configured as described above is rotated clockwise as viewed from the front will be described. First, from the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the rotary plate 830
The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the lower right direction in FIG. 198 (a) (the direction in which the slide rib 803a at the right end enters the clockwise recessed portion 3815a) (see FIG. 198 (b)).

Thereby, the contact between the wall portion on the counterclockwise side of the both side slits 815 and the flat member 2803 is released, so that the frictional resistance between the flat member 2803 and the slit member 3810 is reduced.

When the rotary plate 830 is further rotated clockwise as viewed from the front, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 contact portions between the clockwise recessed portion 3815a and the slide rib 803a (the slide member 2820 and the flat member 2803 and the slit member It rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the front, with the 3810 as the fulcrum, as the fulcrum between the part and the 3810 (Fig. 199 (a) and 199 (b)).
)reference).

The central slit 3814a and the counterclockwise concave portion 3815b are deeper than the clockwise concave portion 3815a, and thus the slide member 2820 and the flat member 28 described above are used.
Abutment between the guide pin 822 and the central recess 3814a during rotation of the 03, and the screwed portion 280
The contact between the 3S and the counterclockwise recess 3815b is avoided.

Furthermore, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are watched with a recessed depth such that the rotating tip portion (left side portion in FIGS. 198 and 199) does not abut the central slit 814 and the both-sides slit 815 The rotation side recessed portion 3815a is recessed.

Therefore, the load applied to slit member 3810 through slide member 2820 and flat plate member 2803 is reduced, and the load generated between slide member 2820 and slit member 3810 is less than the resistance applied from oil damper 805 to slit member 3810 . As a result, the slit member 3810 and the rotary plate 830 do not rotate together.

As shown in FIG. 199 (b), in the process of reaching the posture in which the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814 of the slit member 3810 and the direction connecting the pair of screwed portions 2803S (longitudinal direction of the flat plate member 2803) are orthogonal When the radial center slide rib 803a accommodated in the clockwise side slits 815 abuts on the wall portion of the both slits 815, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are viewed from the front with the contact portion as a fulcrum Rotate counterclockwise. Thus, the slide rib 803a that has entered the clockwise recessed portion 3815a
Is moved in the counterclockwise direction in a front view than the concave base end of the clockwise recessed portion 3815a.

That is, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 move in the radial direction (FIG. 194).
Since the rotation plate 830 is continuously rotated clockwise in a front view, the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be moved radially to the center side.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the state shown in FIG. 198 (a), the slit member 3810 is rotated in accordance with the rotation plate 830 due to the difference in the rotation direction of the rotation plate 830; The position of the slit member 3810 can be switched by independently rotating the rotating plate 830.

As a result, the petal 802 (see FIG. 193A) fastened and fixed to the slide member 2820, the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 can be operated not to be realized in the twelfth embodiment.

In other words, in the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (FIG. 194 (b ), And the flat plate member 280 before returning the changed posture.
3 and the rotation operation of the petal 802 (refer to FIG. 193 (a)) to be fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 (rotation operation to rotate with the slit member 3810) (FIGS. 195 and 196)
(A) and FIG. 196 (b)).

On the other hand, in another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 change in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in front view (FIG. a) See, by rotating the rotary plate 830 clockwise in a front view, the attitudes of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 can be returned (see FIG. 199 (b))
. That is, the rotation operation (rotation operation to rotate along with the slit member 3810) of the flat plate member 2803 and the petal 802 (refer to FIG. 193A) fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 until the changed posture is returned It can be omitted.

Therefore, according to another example of the twelfth embodiment, after the postures of the slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are changed in the middle of the expansion operation accompanying the rotation of the rotary plate 830 counterclockwise in the front view (see FIG. 198 (a)), the rotating plate 830 in any state (phase or attitude)
The slide member 2820 and the flat plate member 2803 are concentrated from the flat plate member 2803 and the position of the petal 802 which is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 matched with the arbitrary state (phase or posture) by rotating clockwise from the front. It can start moving toward the position.
Thus, the petal 802 which is fastened and fixed to the flat plate member 2803 and the flat plate member 2803 (see FIG. 1).
After the rotational movement (see FIG. 195) is made during the expansion (see FIG. 198), various arrangements of the petals 802 are performed at the time of concentration operation toward the collecting position (see FIG. 197). Can be diversified, so that the operation of the petal operating device 3800 can be diversified.

Next, a thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 200 to FIG. Although the case where the curved surface which comprises the front side part of lower frame member 320 was formed from the plate without an opening was explained by a 1st embodiment, operation device 8300 in a 13th embodiment is lower frame member 8320.
A plurality of through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed through the curved wall portion 8326. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIGS. 200, 201, 202 (a) and 202 (b) are front perspective views of the operation device 8300 in the thirteenth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 200 and 202 (a) show the second state of the tilting device 310, FIG. 201 shows the first state of the tilting device 310, and FIG. 202 (b) shows the second tilting device 310. A state in the middle of changing from the 1 state to the second state is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 200 and 201, the operation device 8300 in the present embodiment has the lower frame member 8 in comparison with the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
The difference in the curved wall portion 8326 of 320 is not described, and the other configurations are substantially described in the operation devices 300 to 7300 in the above-described embodiments.
Therefore, in the following, the details of the lower frame member 8320 will be described, and the other configurations will be limited to some supplementary explanations.

The curved wall portion 8326 of the lower frame member 8320 is a curved plate-like portion which is disposed to face the protective lens member 311i of the tilting device 310 in the first state in the front-rear direction. And the inclination of the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 321 with a cross-sectional shape of a horizontally long rectangular shape in the direction along the plane of the bottom plate portion 321 at right and left of the vibrating device 5400. And a pair of second through holes 8326b in which the upper surface and the lower side surface of the bottom plate portion 321 are connected at the surface position, and a pair of third through holes having a vertically long rectangular cross section in front view And a through hole 8326c.

The through holes 8326a to 8326c are for the purpose of facilitating the passage of liquids such as drinking water described above and for the purpose of facilitating removal of coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 described below. And a through hole. The coin-shaped foreign matter is, for example, the player who feels that the operation of the tilting device 300 is in the way to forcibly stop the operation of the tilting device 300 or meaningless by the interested player, the tilting device 310 and the upper frame Member 33
It may be fitted in gaps V13 and V14 between zero and zero.

Here, since the operation device 8300 includes the tilt device 310 configured to be operable, some gaps V13 and V14 are formed between the upper frame member 330 and the tilt device 310.
By this, while the operation of the tilting device 310 can be made smooth, the gap V13
, V14 is likely to be inserted with foreign matter.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the ring member BR1 (in which the tilting device 310 is disposed at the rear end)
14 (b)), that is, since the position supported by the upper frame member 330 is closer to the rear end, the longer the length of the tilting device 310 in the longitudinal direction, It is configured to be easily displaced (deformed) laterally in the vicinity of the front end. Note that this positional deviation (deformation) may be, for example, a positional deviation using rattling caused by adding design errors incorporated from the design stage between the members, or a positional deviation caused by slightly deforming each member (Deformation) is included.

Therefore, in normal use, the gap V13 with the upper frame member 330 on both the left and right sides of the tilting device 310
However, even if the gap V13 is designed so as not to insert a coin-like foreign object (for example, 1-yen coin), the tilting device 310 is displaced to either the left or right (for example, the left). If the gap V13, which can be the other (for example, the right side), is the tilting device 310 during normal use
Gap V1 of a size obtained by adding the gap V13 formed between the upper frame member 330 on the left and right sides of the
3 and can be of a size that allows insertion of coin-like foreign objects.

That is, the gap V13 between the left and right upper frame members 330 of the tilting device 310 during normal use is set to half or less (for example, 0.5 mm or less for a 1-yen coin) of the thickness of the coin-like foreign substance If not, if the tilting device 310 is displaced to the left or right, a coin-like foreign object may be inserted.

In addition, the gap V14 between the front end of the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 in the front-rear direction is also the tilting device 3 using the play in the vicinity of the ring member BR1 (see FIG. 14B) of the tilting device 310.
Since the gap V14 can be easily expanded by applying a load in the back direction to the position 10 (deformation), coin-shaped foreign matter can be inserted into the gap V14.

In the present embodiment, either the left or right gap V13 between the tilting device 310 and the upper frame member 330 is
Alternatively, when the tilting device 310 is tilted in a state where a coin-like foreign object is inserted into the gap V14 in the front-rear direction, the coin-like foreign object may enter the lower frame member 8320.

In particular, as shown in FIGS. 202 (a) and 202 (b), when the left and right wall portions of the tilting device 310 are configured to narrow toward the left and right inside toward the upper and lower centers, they easily fit the player's fingers. And a coin-like foreign object fitted in the gap V13 in the second state (see FIG. 202 (a)) protrudes outward from above the constriction of the case body 311. Downward load from the lower frame member 8320.

If the tilting device 310 is operated with the coin-shaped foreign matter inserted in the gaps V13 and V14, the operation resistance becomes excessive, which may cause a problem in driving the tilting device 310. In addition, when the coin-like foreign substance and the protective lens member 311i are rubbed, the light transmittance of the protective lens member 311i may be deteriorated, which may cause an adverse effect on the light emission effect.

In the first place, when a coin-shaped foreign object is caught internally, and the operation of the tilting device 310 is restricted, the intended effect can not be performed by the operation device 8300, and thus the gap V13,
If it is detected that a coin-like foreign object is inserted in V14, it is desirable to remove it immediately, but in the state where the through hole is not formed in the lower frame member 320, the operation device 300 is removed to remove the coin-like foreign object. I needed to disassemble it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the through holes 8326a to 8326c are formed in the curved wall portion 8326, it is possible to remove coin-like foreign matter through the through holes 8326a to 8326c. Hereinafter, the shape and arrangement of the through holes 8326a to 8326c will be described.

FIG. 203 (a) is a front view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203 (b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 3 is a side view of the operation device 8300 as viewed in the direction of arrows CCIIIb in 3 (a), and FIG.
03 (c) is a bottom view of the operation device 8300, and FIG. 203 (d) is a diagram of FIG. 203 (a).
A partial cross-sectional view of the manipulation device 8300 at line CCIIId-CCIIId) of
Drawing 203 (e) is a sectional view of operation device 8300 in the CCIIIe-CCIIIe line of Drawing 203 (a).

The first through hole 8326a has the same left-right direction center as the left-right direction center of the vibration device 5400, and is drilled with a left-right width larger than the left-right width of the vibration device 5400 (the first accommodating portion 5431 of FIG. Ru. Therefore, even if a liquid such as drinking water is poured near the left and right center position of the gap V14, the liquid is discharged through the first through hole 8326a before reaching the vibrating device 5400. The liquid can be prevented from reaching the vibrating device 5400.

The lower edge of the first through hole 8326a is an extension portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state (see FIG. 12).
It is disposed below the upper surface of the reference). Therefore, when the coin-like foreign object inserted in the gap V14 is on the upper surface of the extending portion 311h, the inclination of the upper surface of the extending portion 311h (left and right as viewed in the vertical direction in the second state) Tilting device 3 by being curved and formed towards
In the first state of 10, the slope D81 that slopes downward to the left and right center, and the tilting device 310
The coin-like foreign matter can be easily removed through the first through hole 8326a along the slope D82 (see FIG. 201) which is inclined downward toward the front side due to the inclination.

This makes it possible to minimize the size required for the size of the first through hole 8326a while easily removing the coin-like foreign matter, so that the design freedom of the lower frame member 8320 can be maintained. . For example, the strength of the lower frame member 8320 can be easily secured compared to the case where the first through holes 8326a need to be widely spread to the left and right.

In the present embodiment, the size of the first through hole 8326a is the tilting device 310 in the first state.
A portion above the upper surface of the extended portion 311h (see FIG. 12) is larger than the size of the object assumed as the coin-like foreign object. That is, in the present embodiment, the portion above the upper surface of the extending portion 311h of the tilting device 310 in the first state has a horizontal width and a vertical width of about 30 m.
m].

The first through hole 8326a is located on the front side of the spherical shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is in the first state. The ball shell 313a is an LED device 341f
It is a portion that transmits light emitted from (see FIG. 25). In the present embodiment, the ball shell 31
Except for 3a, the plate portions of the lens members 313 continuously provided on the left, right, upper and lower sides of the spherical shell portion 313 are mirror-finished in this embodiment (members subjected to mirror-work are fixed), The light having passed through the spherical shell portion 313 is reflected.

With this arrangement, there is a difference in the amount of light which can be seen by the player through the ball shell 313a (see FIG. 15) when the tilting device 310 is brought into the first state by using the first through hole 8326a. In particular, by removing the resin member that weakens the light amount of light by the first through holes 8326a, the central portion in the left-right direction can be visually recognized bright.

When the coin-like foreign matter is disposed at a position where the first through hole 8326a is partially closed, the light amount of light which is transmitted by the ball shell 313a (see FIG. 15) and visually recognized by the player is coin-like. It becomes weaker compared to the case where there is no foreign matter (coin-like foreign matter becomes a shadow). That is, it is possible to easily notice that the coin-like foreign matter remains on the lower frame member 8320 with the amount of light and the shadow of the coin-like foreign matter as a clue, so the coin-like foreign matter is not noticed. Member 832
The possibility of remaining at 0 can be reduced. In addition, this effect is the first through hole 832
Not only when visually recognized through 6a, but also when visually recognized through the second through hole 8326b and the third through hole 8326c.

The second through hole 8326 b is a bottom plate portion 32 in which the coin-shaped foreign matter which falls on the bottom plate portion 321 falls.
It is comprised as a through-hole which can be discharged | emitted in the direction along 1 surface. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the second through hole 8326 has a width of about 30 [mm], a bottom plate 321, and a size that can discharge the largest possible coin-like foreign substance (for example, 500 yen coin). Is formed with a width of about 2 mm in the normal direction.

The second through hole 8326 b is disposed near the left and right center of the bottom plate portion 321, so it is easy even after coin-like foreign matter is slipped downward along the curved shape of the front edge of the bottom plate portion 321. The coin-like foreign matter can be removed.

The second through holes 8326 b are disposed on the left and right sides of the vibrating device 5400, and thus, for example, liquid such as drinking water flowing along the curved wall portion 8326 or flowing through the bottom plate portion 321 reaches the vibrating device 5400. The second through holes 8326 b can be used to discharge the air beforeward.

The third through hole 8326 c has a central axis disposed along the left and right edges of the tilting device 310 (FIG. 20).
3 (a)), it is formed as a through-hole which can remove the coin-like foreign matter which has entered the gap V13 along the left and right side walls of the tilting device 310 in the standing state (posture) as it is.

That is, in the present embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction of the third through hole 8326 c needs to be formed in a size capable of discharging a coin-like foreign substance in a direction view along the surface of the bottom plate portion 321. The length in the longitudinal direction of the third through hole 8326 c is about 30 [mm] and the width in the lateral direction is about 2 [mm] as viewed in the direction along the surface of the bottom plate 321.

When removing coin-like foreign matter, the cover 370 is removed and the operation device 830
By exposing 0 in front view (see FIG. 92), the operator can pass through holes 8326a to 8326c.
You can access to In addition, the covering cover 370 is a fastening portion 3 of the main body bending portion 371.
70a (see FIG. 91) is fastened and fixed to the front frame 14 by a screw inserted in the front and rear direction, and a drooping portion 372 is fastened and fixed to a bottom plate formed with a recessed portion 15a by a screw inserted in the vertical direction Therefore, the cover 370 can be easily removed by removing the screw while the front frame 14 is open (see FIG. 89). Therefore, the working time can be kept short.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, coin-shaped foreign matter that has entered the gaps V13 and V14 of the operation device 8300 can be easily removed without disassembling the operation device 8300.

The harness HN3 connected to the operation device 8300 is connected to the connector portion 8353 opened to the right outward at the lower right corner of the main body cover 351 (see FIG. 203 (b)).
. Only the harness HN3 is connected to the operation device 8300 to transmit and receive signals to and from the MPU 221 (see FIG. 4), including the above-described embodiments.

Therefore, even if a coin-like foreign matter can not be taken out, the screw for fastening the front frame 14 and the operation device 8300 is removed, and the harness HN3 is easily removed from the connector portion 8353 for easy operation. The device 8300 can be removed from the front frame 14. Therefore, if a replacement of the normal operation device 8300 is prepared, it is possible to immediately replace the operation device 8300 in which a coin-like foreign object is caught with the normal operation device 8300.

As a result, even if the normal operation is not performed due to the coin-like foreign material getting into the operation device 8300 and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is stopped, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be resumed promptly.

Next, a fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Although the case where the load from the front frame 14 is not received when the panel support device 600 is in the fixed state has been described, the panel support device 600 in the fourteenth embodiment is disposed so as to be able to contact the front frame 14 in the fixed state. The load from the front frame 14 is received via the front-rear displacement member 2652. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

204 (a) and 204 (b) is a fragmentary sectional view of the inner frame 12 in 14th Embodiment in the line corresponding to the CXXXVI-CXXXVI line of FIG. 86. FIG. Note that Figure 204
In a), the state where the front frame 14 is open to the inner frame 12 is shown (the front frame 14 is not shown), and in FIG. 204 (b), the front frame 14 is closed to the inner frame 12 The state is illustrated. In FIG. 204 (a), the shape of the inner frame 12 is simplified, and in FIG. 204 (b), the shapes of the front frame 14 and the inner frame 12 are simplified and illustrated by imaginary lines.

As shown in FIGS. 204 (a) and 204 (b), the inner frame 12 in the present embodiment includes a load transfer device 2650 as a difference from the eighth embodiment. The load transfer device 2650 is a vertical displacement member 2651 which can be vertically displaced on the front side of a plate portion (a plate portion disposed on the back side) fastened and fixed to the inner frame 12 in the main body plate portion 611; The vertical displacement member 2651
The front and rear displacement member 2652 is disposed so as to be able to abut on the lower end of the front and rear direction, and a locking portion 2653 projecting downward from the front and rear displacement member 2652 and the front and rear displacement member 26
52 is a portion that holds 52 from the top and bottom displaceably at two positions in front and rear, and is in contact with the support portion 2654 fixed to the plate portion 611 a and the support portion 2654 and the locking portion 2653 to the front side of the back and forth displacement member 2652 A biasing member 2655 such as a coil spring that applies a biasing force directed to the
Equipped with

The up-and-down displacement member 2651 is switched between a state in which it abuts on the torsion spring NBb in a fixed state of the surface supporting device 600 and a state in which it is separated. That is, in the lower position shown in FIG. 204 (a), it retracts from the torsion spring NBb, and in the upper position shown in FIG. 204 (b) (a position displaced above the lower position) abuts on the torsion spring NBb, The torsion spring NBb is deformed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 204 (a), the upper end of the vertical displacement member 2651 at the lower position is a position where the vertical displacement member 2651 is at a position where a slight gap is formed between it and the torsion spring NBb. Is set.

The front and rear displacement member 2652 is disposed by being pushed by the front frame 14 and pushed backward by the front frame 14 (see FIG. 204 (a)) which is disposed by being pushed forward by the biasing force of the biasing member 2655. At the rear position (see FIG. 204 (b)).

Here, an inclined surface 2652 a is formed at the rear end portion of the front-rear displacement member 2652 so as to be inclined downward toward the end. The inclined surface 2652a is the front and rear displacement member 26 from the vertically lower position of the vertical displacement member 2651 in the state where the front and rear displacement member 2652 is disposed at the front position.
52 is an inclined surface continuously connected to the vertically downward position of the up-and-down displacement member 2651 in the state where the second position 52 is disposed at the rear position.

The inclined surface 2652 a is a vertical displacement member 2651 at the front position of the longitudinal displacement member 2652.
Is set at the lower position, and the inclination angle and the formation range are set such that the vertical displacement member 2651 is at the upper position at the rear position of the longitudinal displacement member 2652.

With the configuration described above, in the present embodiment, by closing the front frame 14, the vertical displacement member 2651 is disposed at the upper position, and the torsion spring NBb is deformed to the side where the load becomes large by the thickness in the front and rear direction. be able to.

This makes it possible to increase the load applied by the claw members 640 after rotation to the game board 13 from the back side, and makes it easy to maintain the state where the game board 13 is in contact with the drop back plate 621 d of the front claw member 620. It is possible to easily define the distance D14 between the front of the game board 13 and the back of the front frame 14 (the back of the glass unit 16 fixed to the front frame 14). Therefore,
The thickness of the game area can be easily defined, and the flow of the ball can be stabilized.

Here, the specifications required of the board supporting device 600 in the eighth embodiment and the board supporting device 600 in the present embodiment are the same, and the game board 13 is fixed. At the time of the fixing, the board supporting device 600 pushes the game board 13 to the front side by the biasing force of the torsion spring NBb, and presses the game board 13 against the drop back plate 621d to fix it.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment, since the torsion spring NBb is further contracted by closing the front frame 14, a spring having a lower elastic coefficient than the spring employed in the eighth embodiment is adopted as the torsion spring NBb. can do.

Therefore, the load (reaction force) given to the worker from the torsion spring NBb when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600 can be reduced, and it is necessary when fixing the game board 13 to the board support device 600. The operator's freedom of choice and,
Workability can be improved.

A fifteenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
The harnesses HN1 to HN3 are covered above the reverse cup portion 178 against the fraud that the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the heated piano wire and enters the interior as it is, and the harnesses HN1 to HN3
The case where the burnout was detected by heating the piano wire to detect an early detection of fraud was described, but the fraud detection device 2280 in the fifteenth embodiment is a case where the reverse cup portion 178 is melted by the piano wire heated While detecting the heat, it is comprised so that the burnout of harness HN1-HN3 may be prevented.

FIG. 205 (a) is a partial rear view of the front frame 14 in the fifteenth embodiment, and FIG.
(B) and FIG. 205 (c) are rear views of the fraud detection device 2280. Note that Figure 205
In b), the state in which the shape memory spring 2288 is maintained in the reduced shape is shown in FIG.
In 5 (c), the state which returned to the tension | pulling shape (memory | storage shape) is shown in figure by provision of a heat | fever. Further, in FIGS. 205 (b) and 205 (c), the fraud detection device 2280 is a main body box 2.
It is viewed in cross section at the front and back middle position of 281.

The fraud detecting device 2280 is configured in a box shape having an opening on the back side and the bottom side, and the reverse cup portion 2
And a back cover member 2282 attached from the back side so as to cover the opening on the back side of the main body box portion 2281;
A space is formed between the two and the back cover 2282.

The main body box portion 2281 is made of a metal material, extends from the lower right corner portion, and is a reverse cup portion 217.
8, an extending portion 2283 in contact with the left surface of the wall portion 2178a, a narrowed portion 2284 extended from the inner wall so as to narrow the opening upward from the lower corner, and the vicinity of the edge of the upper end opening of the narrowed portion 2284 The protrusion 2285 is provided on the upper side of the main body box 2281 and is accommodated in a recess in the left side wall of the main body box 2281 from the back side. One end is projected to the outside of the main body box 2281 and the other end is main body box A first conducting portion 2286 extending in the left-right direction inside the portion 2281 and a main body box portion 228
1 is accommodated in a recess recessed from the back side in the right side wall of 1 and one end projects to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 and the other end is extended in the lateral direction inside the main body box portion 2281 and the first conduction A second conductive portion 2287 formed to have a length capable of coming into contact with the upper surface of the portion 2286, and a torsion spring SP15 generating a biasing force for pressing the second conductive portion 2287 against the first conductive portion 2286;
And a shape memory spring 2288 supported by the projection 2285 and disposed below the second conductive portion 2287.

The fraud detecting device 2280 is a device for outputting an error signal when heat is detected. In the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287, one end of a separate wire is connected to the portion protruding to the outside of the main body box portion 2281 by a method such as soldering, and the other end of the wire is the main controller And 110 (see FIG. 4). Then, the contact between the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 is released from the state where the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion 2287 are in contact and conductive (see FIG. 205 (b) (FIG. 205 (FIG. c) see), the conduction is broken,
It is controlled to output an error signal based on the fact that the conduction has been cut off.

When an error signal is output from the main control device, an alarm is output at a high volume from the speaker 451 (see FIG. 120), or the payout of the ball from the payout device 133 (see FIG. 87) is stopped, etc. Is controlled so that it is impossible to play a game.

Details of the fraud detection device 2280 will be described. As shown in FIG. 205 (a) to FIG. 205 (c), the main body box 2281 of the fraud detecting device 2280 covers the left side and the upper side of the reverse cup 2178. Here, in the reverse cup portion 2178 in the present embodiment, compared with the eighth embodiment, the formation portion of the wall portion 2178a is shifted to the left, and the extension portion 2283 is interposed between the reverse cup portion 2178 and the long cover member 173. There is a gap that can be accommodated.

Even if the wall portion 2178a is melted by the tip of the heated piano wire by the extension portion 2283 filling the gap between the wall portion 2178a and the long cover member 173, the piano wire remains the long cover 173 as it is. It is possible to prevent penetration.

According to this configuration, the piano wire which enters the reverse cup portion 2178 from the lower side and melts the upper wall portion and advances further is guided to the narrow portion 2284 and until the shape memory spring 2288 disposed in the upper opening of the narrow portion 2284 You will be guided.

The shape memory spring 2288 is formed of a shape memory alloy such as a nickel titanium alloy, maintains the shape after deformation at a low temperature state, and has a characteristic of returning to a previously stored shape by being heated to a predetermined transformation temperature or more. . In the present embodiment, the shape memory spring 2288
The transformation temperature is set to a temperature (about 80.degree.) Around the melting point of the reverse cup portion 2178, and a tensile shape (see FIG. 205 (c)) is stored in advance.

Therefore, when the shape memory spring 2288 is heated to the transformation temperature or more by the heated piano wire, the shape memory spring 2288 returns to a tensile shape, and the second conductive portion 2287 is pushed up, and the first conductive portion 2286 and the second conductive portion The conduction with the 2287 is released, and an error signal is output. Therefore, early detection of fraud can be achieved.

An extending portion 2288a extending from the upper end portion of the shape memory spring 2288 to the front side is inserted into a guide long hole 2282a drilled in the back and forth direction in the back cover member 2282 in the vertical direction long shape and on the front side Overhang. After returning to the low temperature state after the shape memory spring 2288 is in tension, the operator depresses the extension portion 2288a downward to deform the shape memory spring 2288 and reduce the state (see FIG. 205 (b)). Can be returned to). That is, even after the fraud is found, it can be repeatedly used to achieve early detection of the fraud.

Next, a sixteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the eighth embodiment,
Even though the shape of the concave portion recessed in the light guide member 540 is uniform, it has been described that the light guide member 540 is curved to cause a difference in the traveling direction of light emitted on both sides. The right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment includes recessed portions having different shapes in each area. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 206 (a) is a partial back view of the right panel unit 2500 in the sixteenth embodiment, and FIG. 206 (b) is an upward concave formed in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVIb of FIG. 206 (a). Fig. 206 (c) is a partially enlarged perspective view schematically showing the light guide member 2540 schematically showing the portion 2543b, and Fig. 206 (c) schematically shows a downward concave portion 2543c provided in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIc of Fig. 206 (a). 206D is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 shown in FIG. 206, and FIG. 206D is a light guide schematically showing a downward concave portion 2543d provided in the light guide member 2540 in the area CCVId of FIG. 206A. FIG. 206 (e) is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light member 2540, and FIG. 206 (e) is an upward concave portion 254 concaved in the light guide member 2540 in the region CCVIe of FIG. 206 (a). The e is a partially enlarged perspective view of the light guide member 2540 represented schematically. In FIG. 206 (a), the support plate portion 510 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 206 (a), the light guide member 2540 is formed in a plate shape extending straight in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the LEDs 512a (see FIG. 107) disposed on the substrate member 512 are disposed in line with each other in the vertical direction according to the shape of the light guide member 2540.

The concave portions are formed on both surfaces of the light guide member 2540 according to the arrangement described in the eighth embodiment. In the present embodiment, the concave portions 254 are formed for each area based on the curvature of the inner lens member 530.
The shape of 3 is changed.

That is, a region CCVIb disposed on the upper side and the inner lens member 530 side and a region CCVI disposed on the upper side and the outer lens member 550 with reference to the bottom of the curvature of the inner lens member 530
The shape of the concave portion 2543 is changed in a region c CCd, which is disposed on the lower side and the inner lens member 530 side, and a region CCVIe which is disposed on the lower side and the outer lens member 550 side.

As shown in FIG. 206 (b), in the region CCVIb, an upward concave portion 2543b to be concaved is formed by heat pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543b has a flat surface on the lower side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed) and a curved surface on the upper side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the lower plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult to reflect light incident on the left and right at this position. Therefore, the upward concave 2
543b refracts light exclusively at a curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550 side, and the emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIb and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in the upward inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206C, in the region CCVIc, a downward concave portion 2543c concaved is formed by heat pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543c has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult to reflect light incident on the left and right at this position. Therefore, the downward concave 2
543c refracts light exclusively at a curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is likely to be refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIc and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the downward inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (d), in the region CCVId, a downward concave portion 2543d to be recessed is formed by heat-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The downward concave portion 2543 d has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512 a (see FIG. 107) is disposed), and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult to reflect light incident on the left and right at this position. Therefore, the downward concave 2
543 d refracts light exclusively at a curved portion and emits light toward the outer lens member 550 side. The emitted light is easily refracted downward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVId and emitted to the outer lens member 550 is emitted in a downward sloping direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

As shown in FIG. 206 (e), in the region CCVIe, an upward concave portion 2543e concaved is formed by heat-pressing a convex portion having a shape obtained by dividing a sphere into 1/8 equal parts. The upward concave portion 2543e has a flat surface on the upper side and the front side (the side opposite to the side on which the LED 512a (see FIG. 107) is disposed) and a curved surface on the lower side and the rear side. The convex part used for is formed.

Here, the upper plane is parallel to the optical axis direction of the LED 512a (see FIG. 107), and the front plane is perpendicular to the optical axis of the LED 512a.
It is difficult to reflect light incident on the left and right at this position. Therefore, the upward concave 2
543e refracts light exclusively at a curved portion and emits light toward the inner lens member 530. The emitted light is likely to be refracted upward due to the influence of the curved shape. Therefore, the light refracted in the region CCVIe and emitted to the inner lens member 530 is emitted in the upward inclined direction as shown in FIG. 206 (a).

The concave portions formed on both sides of the light guide member 2540 in the area facing the bottom of the curve of the inner lens member 530 have the same shape as the eighth embodiment (the inclination angle to the bottom is 45 ° and the diameter of the bottom circle is about 1 mm conical shape). Therefore, from this part the inner lens member 5
The light emitted to the lens 30 or the outer lens member 550 is weakly refracted up and down and travels in a substantially horizontal direction.

According to this embodiment, with the above-described configuration, as shown in FIG. 206 (a), light travels toward the inner lens member 530 in the collecting direction, and travels toward the outer lens member 550 in the light spreading direction. It can be done. That is, while forming the light guide member 2540 in a flat plate shape, it is possible to make a difference in the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides, so the right panel unit 250
While suppressing the left and right width of 0, it is possible to improve the effect of the light emission effect.

A seventeenth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 281. Although the case where the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 15 is formed flat is described in the first embodiment described above, in the pachinko machine 10010 in the seventeenth embodiment, a convex portion is formed on the bottom surface of the lower tray unit 6400 Thus, the transportability of the front frame 10014 including the lower tray unit 6400 is improved. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 207 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10010 according to a seventeenth embodiment, and FIG.
Is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 10010. In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the paper front side is referred to as the front (front) side, and the paper back side is referred to as the rear (back) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10010 in the state shown in FIG. 207, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, and the right side is the right (right) side. Each side will be described. Furthermore, arrows U-D, L-R, and the like in the figure.
F-B indicates the vertical direction, the left-right direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10010, respectively.

As shown in FIGS. 207 and 208, the pachinko machine 10010 is an operation device 1030 illustrated in FIG. 207 in which the swing device member 10310 is disposed at the upward position.
0, a lower tray unit 6400 disposed below the operation device 10300 and covering the lower side of the front frame 10014, and a lateral rendering device 6700 which covers the left and right portions of the front frame 10014 and mainly performs light emission effects, It mainly includes an upper effect device 6500 which covers the upper part of the frame 10014 and mainly performs light emission effect and sound effect.

The above-described glass unit 16 is disposed in the area surrounded by the side effect device 6700 and the upper effect device 6500, and the game area in which the game ball flows down on the back side of the glass unit 16 is configured as described above. It is the same as that of the embodiment. Note that in FIG. 207, the illustration of the back side of the glass unit 16 is omitted in order to avoid the complexity of the drawing, and in FIG. 208, the illustration of the glass unit 16 and the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) It is omitted, and the inside of the outer frame 11 (see FIG. 3) is visible from the opening where the glass unit 16 is disposed.

FIG. 209 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 10010. FIG. In FIG. 209, a direction view (a radial direction view of the rotation shaft of the lever member of the operation device 10300) along the longitudinal direction of the lever member (for example, lever member 10340 (see FIG. 80)) of the operation device 10300 is illustrated. Ru.

The operation device 10300 is provided with a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 which are formed in a thin plate shape and formed to be flexible and deformable. As shown in FIG. 209, the housing recess 17a is formed as a recess having a substantially left-right symmetrical shape in which the degree of the recess directed to the back side increases as approaching the center of the left and right. It arrange | positions so that the left-right center of 10300 may correspond.

Rear end portions of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a. Therefore, the fitting position moves to the back side as it approaches the left and right center. In other words, the fitting position moves toward the main body frame (metal main body portion 10014 a) side of the front frame 10014 as it gets closer to the left and right center.

Therefore, at the left and right center position where the amount of transfer of the load at the time of operation of the operation device 10300 tends to be large, the front and back position from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position is shortened.
It is possible to suppress vertical displacement of the fitting position and to suppress displacement of the operation device 10300 in the vertical direction (load direction).

On the other hand, when the operation device 10300 is operated, the load transmission amount tends to be small at the left and
In the position away from the center to the left and right), there is no hindrance to the suppression effect of the displacement of the operation device 10300 in the vertical direction even if the longitudinal position from the metal main body 10014a to the fitting position is elongated.
Further, by arranging the fitting position in this manner, a space can be formed between the fitting position and the metal main body portion 10014a, so a wide arrangement area for the upper plate 17 and the frame button 22 etc. is secured. can do.

FIG. 210 is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 10010. FIG. In FIG. 210, outer frame 1
A state in which the front frame 10014 is opened to the front side centering on the left end portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19 is illustrated.

The front frame 10014 is provided with a rod-like portion pivotally supported by the hinge 19, and the rod-like portion is configured to be detachable from the hinge 19. The front frame 1 is obtained by removing the rod-like portion from the hinge 19.
0014 can be separated from the inner frame 12. The configurations to be newly described are respectively disposed in the front frame 10014, and therefore, the description will be given focusing on the front frame 10014 below.

FIG. 211 is an exploded back perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 212 is a front frame 1001.
5 is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. FIGS. 211 and 212 illustrate the lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 removed from the front frame 10014.

The front frame 10014 is a frame-shaped metal member that forms a frame, and includes a metal main body 10014 a configured integrally with the front door mounting bracket 58, and the lower tray unit 6400 and the operation device 10300 are metal main body 10014 a. Fastened to That is, the lower tray unit 6400
Also in the operation device 10300, a fastening portion (female screw forming portion) opened on the metal main body portion 10014a side (back side) is formed, and the metal main body portion 10014a passes through at a position corresponding to the fastening portion. A hole is drilled. The lower plate unit 6400 is inserted by inserting a fastening member (male thread) into the through hole from the back side of the metal main body 10014a and screwing and fastening the fastening part.
The operation device 10300 is fastened and fixed to the front frame 10014.

As shown in FIGS. 211 and 212, the operation device 10300 is held so as to be sandwiched between the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400. That is, the upper plate 17 is an operating device 10
The operation device 10300 is held from the upper rear of 300, and the lower unit 6400 is held from the lower front of the operation device 10300. Hereinafter, the configuration in which the operation device 10300 is held by the front frame 10014 will be described in order.

FIG. 213 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 214 is a front frame 1001.
5 is an exploded front view of FIG. In FIGS. 213 and 214, the upper half of the front frame 10014 and the lower tray unit 6400 are not shown. Also, in FIG. 213, the operation device 10
300 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a and illustrated in a direction from the back side, and for easy understanding, an assembling direction line connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and the fastening point thereof Is illustrated by an imaginary line.

When assembling the operation device 10300 into the front frame 10014 from the front side, the lower surface of the bottom member De disposed below the inner case member 10330 is the front frame 10014.
And abuts on the upper surface of a plate-like convex portion T10 which is provided in a plate-like shape on the front side of the plate.

On the lower side of the operation device 10300, a bottom member De fastened and fixed to the bottom surface of the inner case member 10330 from below is disposed. The bottom member De mainly includes a fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212) opened to the front side, and a recess De2 in which the opposite side (lower side) of the inner case member 10330 and the back side are opened. Prepare.

The recessed portion De2 is formed in a U-shape in a rear view in which the lower side is opened, and the plate-like convex portion T2 is formed.
The positioning of the operation device 10300 with respect to the front frame 10014 can be performed by fitting the plate-like convex portion T10 and the concave portion De2 so as to have a size that can be fitted to 10. Further, since the plate-like convex portion T10 is formed in a thick plate shape, the vertical position of the operation device 10300 can be maintained by the rigidity of the plate-like convex portion T10. In addition, with fitting here,
The positioning of the bottom member De with respect to the plate-like convex portion T10 may be made possible regardless of the presence or absence of the gap.

At the tip of the plate-like convex portion T10, a fastening screw can be screwed in an intermediate position between a pair of left and right cylindrical projecting portions projecting in a thin cylindrical shape toward the front side and a pair of cylindrical projecting portions. A female screw hole is formed.

The pair of cylindrical projecting portions is inserted into the recess provided in the corresponding wall portion (front side wall portion) of the recess portion De2 to align the plate-like convex portion T10 with the bottom member De. The fastening screw screwed into the female screw hole is inserted into the insertion hole drilled at the corresponding position of the recess De2, and the plate-like convex portion T10 is formed by tightening the fastening screw. The bottom member De is fastened and fixed.

As described above, while the recess De2 formed in the rear half of the bottom member De rides on the plate-like convex portion T10, the opposite front half (see FIG. 215 (a)) is a plate-like support It is disposed above the flat plate-like portion 6426 a of the portion 6426. That is, the front half of the bottom member De is a resin member 6427
It is disposed to face the flat plate-like portion 6426a in the up-down direction with the resin member 6427 in contact therewith.

In addition, a situation is not limited at all with the possibility of contact here. For example, a mode may be used in which the operating device 10300 normally abuts on the resin member 6427 by its own weight, or while the resin member 6427 and the bottom member De are usually separated, a load is applied to the operating device 10300, The mode may be such that the resin member 6427 abuts on the bottom member De when the operation device 10300 is displaced downward by executing vibration rendition.

After the operation device 10300 is fitted in the front frame 10014, the front frame 10014 is fastened to a fastening screw inserted from the rear side, whereby the operation device 10300 is the front frame 1
It is fixed to 0014.

That is, the inner case member 10330 of the operation device 10300 has a plurality of (three in the present embodiment) fastening portions 10333 formed to be able to receive fastening screws, and the fastening portions 10333 thereof.
And a metal plate portion 10334 having a through hole through which a fastening screw can be inserted and capable of receiving a compressive force as it is fastened and fixed.

The fastening portion 10333 is formed to be able to abut on the edge portion of the insertion hole H10a which is formed in the metal main portion 10014a with a diameter capable of inserting the fastening screw. An intermediate plate made of hard resin is disposed on the front side of the metal main body 10014a, but a through hole is bored in the intermediate plate around the insertion hole H10a, so that the fastening portion 10333 is made through the through hole. It can be made to contact metal body part 10014a.

Here, the insertion hole H10a corresponding to the fastening portion 10333 in which the metal plate portion 10334 is disposed.
The through hole of the intermediate plate is enlarged in the periphery of the intermediate plate compared to the other through holes H10a. The shape of the through hole is designed to have a size that does not interfere with the metal plate portion 10334 provided on the back side of the fastening portion 10333.

Thereby, along with fastening and fixing the operation device 10300 to the front frame 10014,
The metal plate portion 10334 can be in close contact with the metal main portion 10014 a. That is, since the metal plate portion 10334 and the metal main portion 10014a can be electrically conducted, the same role as a so-called ground wire can be provided. Thereby, the security of the player operating the operation device 10300 can be secured.

Further, by arranging the metal plate portion 10334 between them, the metal plate portion 10334 can have a washer function. Thereby, the operation device 10300 is moved to the metal main body portion 1001.
It can be fixed firmly to 4a.

In addition, the shape of the metal plate part 10334 is not limited to this embodiment, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, instead of forming the through holes, a pair of claws may be provided to straddle the screw holes of the fastening portion 10333. In addition, in the case where the claws are formed out of position with respect to each other, the function of a spring washer can be provided to increase the fastening strength.

The location where the operation device 10300 is fastened to the front frame 10014 is the insertion hole 6801R,
It is concentrated on the back side except for the 6801L. By concentrating the portion necessary for fastening on the back side, the design freedom on the front side can be improved, and the design can be improved.

On the other hand, simply fastening and fixing on the back side is a problem because when the load in the sinking direction (downward direction) is applied to the front side of the operation device 10300, the operation device 10300 is easily lowered and displaced. So, in this embodiment, the structure which suppresses the sinking displacement of the front side of the operation device 10300 is employ | adopted, making a fastening location concentrate on the back side. This will be described in order below.

First, the operation of the fitting recess De1 will be described. In the operation device 10300, the fitting recess De1 formed on the lower front side is fitted with the fitting portion 6426d (see FIGS. 211 and 212). As a result, the movement of the front side portion of the operation device 10300 in the vertical direction is restricted by the fitting portion 6426d, and the sinking displacement is suppressed.

Next, the operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 213 and 214, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are
The rear side edge of the upper half disposed on the rear side of the swing operation member 10310 is provided with a plate-like projecting portion.

That is, the left front cover 10321 has a plate-like overhanging portion 10321c projecting in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half and a plurality of partial overhanging portions 103 further projecting from the plate-like overhanging portion 10321c.
And 21d.

Similarly, the right front cover 10322 includes a plate-like protruding portion 10322 c that protrudes in a plate shape along the rear side edge of the upper half portion. The right front cover 10322 has a partial overhang portion 1032.
The portion corresponding to 1 d is not formed, and the periphery of the plate-like overhang portion 10322 c can be designed arbitrarily.

The plate-like overhanging portions 10321 c and 10322 c and the partial overhanging portion 10321 d
It is configured as a part that is inserted into and fitted to a. Here, the accommodation recess 17 of the present embodiment
The configuration of a will be described.

As shown in FIG. 213 and FIG. 214, in the housing recess 17a, the lower edge overhangs to the front side with substantially the same overhang width over the left and right of the housing recess 17a, and the left and right of the housing recess 17a. The lower edge overhanging portion 100 overhangs on the front side at a position at a distance slightly longer than the plate thickness of the plate overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c below the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b on both sides.
17b and a plurality of opposing overhanging portions 1 which are disposed opposite to each other and form a groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b
Perforated in the longitudinal direction at a position where the upper side is aligned laterally with the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b, a plurality of positioning holes 10017d perforated in the longitudinal direction as long holes in the surface position, and the right facing overhanging portion 10017c And an escape hole 10017e to be provided.

When assembling the operation device 10300 into the housing recess 17a, the plate-like overhanging portion 10321
c and 10322c are inserted into the groove between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposing overhanging portion 10017c, and the plurality of partial overhanging portions 10321d are respectively inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d, so that the left front cover 10321 and The right front cover 10322 is fitted and supported in the housing recess 17a.

In this case, the plate-like protruding portions 10321 c and 10322 c are lower edge protruding portions 10017 b.
By being fitted in the groove between the and the opposite overhanging portion 10017c, displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the vertical direction is suppressed.

In addition, it is possible to easily align the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 with the accommodation recess 17a by inserting (fitting) the plurality of partial overhang portions 10321d into the plurality of positioning holes 10017d. It is possible to prevent the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 from being displaced in the vertical and horizontal directions.

Furthermore, the accommodation recess 17a is formed in an arch shape that is opened on the front side, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 abut on the inside of the arch and are accommodated.
It is possible to suppress displacement of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in the left-right direction or the back side.

With this configuration, the swing operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is at the upward position, and the positional deviation of the operation device 10300 is suppressed when the player applies a load directed rearward to the swing operation member 10310. (Can be returned to the original position early).

Here, when the player operates the swing operation member 10310, it is mainly operated with the left hand, and in the general gaming posture (the posture facing the pachinko machine 10010), the left and right centers of the pachinko machine 10010 In order to operate the operation device 10300 to be arranged, since the left hand is extended diagonally to the right front, it is rare that the load at the time of the operation has no left-right direction component.

Therefore, since a load in the left-right direction is applied simultaneously with the load directed rearward on the swinging operation member 10310, the operation device 10300 may be displaced in the rear and left-right direction.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the operation device 10300 is surrounded by the arched portion of the housing recess 17a and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are disposed therebetween, the operation device 10300 is displaced. The restoring force of the deformation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may occur in the left and right direction and the front and back direction.
In the direction of returning to the original position. As a result, even if a positional deviation occurs in the operation device 10300, the position can be restored early.

From the above configurations, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 103 with respect to the housing recess 17a
The displacement of 22 can be suppressed. That is, the operation device 10 for the accommodation recess 17a
The displacement of 300 can be suppressed.

The escape hole 10017e functions as a through hole through which a fixed assembly portion 6802 described later of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is inserted. By forming the escape hole 10017e, the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be disposed at a position projecting outward beyond the plate-like overhanging portion 10321c.

Next, the periphery of the operation device 10300 will be described. First, the operation device 1030
An outline of the internal structure of 0 will be described. Figure 215 (a), Figure 215 (b), Figure 216 (a
And FIG. 216 (b) show the operation device 1 in line CCXVa-CCXVa in FIG.
FIG. 10 is a partial cross-sectional view of 0300.

In FIG. 215 (a), a state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the upward position (the initial position in this embodiment) is illustrated, and FIGS. 215 (b), 216 (a) and 216 (
In b), the swing operation member 10310 is in the downward position (depressed position in this embodiment)
It is illustrated that it is placed at

As shown in FIGS. 215 (a) and 215 (b), the operation device 10300 is a lever support shaft in which a lever member 10340 for pivotally supporting the swing operation member 10310 by the shaft support rod 10363 is fixed to the inner case member 10330. It is pivotally supported by 10331d1. Therefore, the swinging operation member 10310 operable by the player is centered on the displacement of the pivot support 10363 arranged on the arc locus centering on the lever support shaft 10331 d 1 and the pivot support 10363. It is displaceable in a combined manner with the displacement in the rotational direction, and is configured to cause the displacement by the operation of the player.

That is, by holding the swinging operation member 10310 disposed in the upward position and applying a load toward the rear, the swinging operation member 10310 can be pushed in a manner of rotational displacement about the pivot rod 10363. (Push-in operation).

Further, by holding the swinging operation member 10310 disposed at the upward position and applying a load toward the front side and the lower side, the swinging operation member 10310 is pushed down in the form of rotational displacement centering on the lever support shaft 10331d1. Can (push down operation).

Further, in the state where the swinging operation member 10310 is disposed at the downward position, the posture correction device 1
A posture (post-rolling posture) in which the swing operation member 10310 is pushed backward with respect to the lever member 10340 by the action of 0312 (the action of applying a load in a direction away from the wall member 10322b to the swing operation member 10310). From the initial position, a posture in which the lever member 10340 is rotated backward by an angle θ 17 y) is set. Therefore, since the angle of posture change of swinging operation member 10310 is smaller than the rotation angle of lever support shaft 10331d1, it is possible to suppress the change of the vibration direction of vibration device 10366 due to the rotational displacement of lever member 10340. .

In addition, in a state where the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the downward position, the swing operation member 10 is
When an operation (push operation) is performed to push the lens member 10317 which is movably supported at 310, the swing operation member 10310 is rotationally displaced centering on the pivot rod 10363 by the load at the time of the operation, and falls forward. The vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 is changed to the direction Y17c.
(See FIG. 216 (b)).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the swinging operation member 10310 is configured to be able to be provided with loads for operations from a plurality of directions, and the swinging operation member 10310 can be used if the load mode is different.
The manner of displacement of can also be configured differently.

The lever member 10340 is rotationally driven about the lever support shaft 10331 d 1 by the drive motor. Thus, even if the swinging operation member 10310 is operated to be pushed down and disposed at the downward position, the swinging operation member 10310 can be returned to the upward position by controlling the rotation of the lever member 10340 by the drive motor.

A vibrating device 10366 configured of a voice coil motor that generates linear vibration is disposed at the tip of the lever member 10340, and the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 is directly or indirectly brought into contact with the lens member 10317. Configured to be communicated.

The vibration device 10366 is a device for operating the pair of members close to each other in the linear direction by electromagnetic force so as to move them close to each other, and a bobbin member (cylindrical member with a copper wire wound around
A member arranged on the lever member 10340 side, a cylinder whose outer diameter is smaller than that of the inner peripheral surface of the bobbin member, and a cylinder whose inner diameter is larger than the outer peripheral surface of the bobbin member are arranged coaxially A pressing member connected by a disk-shaped plate (member disposed on the lens member 10317 side)
And mainly. The pressing member is formed of a magnetic material whose polarity changes in the axial direction of the inner cylinder.

The vibrating device 10366 is configured to be capable of generating linear vibration along a direction Y17a along a straight line passing through the center of the pivot support 10363. In addition, in the present embodiment, the direction Y17a is configured to coincide with the direction of displacement of the lens member 10317.

Accordingly, it is possible to vibrate (displace) the lens member 10317 by fully utilizing the energy of vibration of the vibration device 10366, and it is possible to improve the effect of the vibration of the vibration device 10366.

Next, details of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 will be described in order. FIG. 217 is a front perspective view of the operation device 10300, and FIG. 218 is a back perspective view of the operation device 10300.

As shown in FIG. 217, a left front cover 10321 and a right front cover 10322 are disposed behind the swinging operation member 10310 of the operation device 10300. Left front cover 1032
1 and the right front cover 10322 have outer ends (opposite ends of the swing operation member 10310)
Is curved, the center of the radius of curvature of the curved surface is disposed on the swing operation member 10310 side. As a result, a large space can be secured around the swinging operation member 10310, so that the movable range of the swinging operation member 10310 can be secured and the player holds the swinging operation member 10310. It is possible to secure a space for putting a finger.

Also, since the curvature of the end portion is configured in a series to surround the swing operation member 10310,
Since the designability can be improved and the deformation of the curved portion can be divided and generated as a whole, the allowable range of deformation of the curved portion can be expanded.

As shown in FIGS. 217 and 218, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322
The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are separated from the inner case member 10330 by the through holes 6801R and 6801L which are drilled in the front and back direction so that the fastening screws fastened to the left and right ends of the housing recess 17a can be inserted. Fixed assembly part 680 for fixing impossible
And 2.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have insertion holes 6 disposed at both left and right ends.
It is fastened and fixed to the accommodation recessed part 17a by 801R and 6801L. The left and right end portions are the points farthest from the load applied to the operation device 10300 (mainly the load in the direction passing through the center in the left-right direction and orthogonal to the left-right direction), and the load is hardly transmitted. 6801R
, 6801 L and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw that is fastened and fixed to the housing recess 17 a can be suppressed.

The fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed on the interface between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIG. 218, the position where the fixed assembly portion 6802 is formed is the left front cover 10
321 and the right and left direction center of the right front cover 10322 (the plate-like extended portions 10321 c and 10322
c) is a position shifted to the right from a point located on the rearmost side). That is, the left front cover 10
321 and the right front cover 10322 are not formed in a shape that is disassembled at the left and right centers, the left front cover 10321 is formed to the right beyond the left and right centers, and the formation of the right front cover 10322 stays at a position on the right side than the left and right centers. In other words, the left front cover 10321 is formed in a wider range than the right front cover 10322.

In the present embodiment, the rear side boundaries of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are offset from the center in the left-right direction, so that one member (a portion located on the most rear side) of the accommodation recess 17a In the embodiment, by inserting the left front cover 10321), the alignment with the housing recess 17a can be completed, so that the assembly can be made easier as compared to the case where alignment is performed with both members.

Further, by shifting the position of the fixed assembly portion 6802 from the center in the left-right direction, it is possible to reduce the load transmitted when operating the operation device 10300. Here, a swing operation member 10310 as a portion operated by the player may be disposed close to a portion on the back side of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 (in particular, the upward position (FIG. 21).
8), the transmission of the load at the time of operation of the operation device 10300 may loosen the fastening screw. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by disposing the fixed assembly portion 6802 laterally shifted from the left and right center where the load at the time of operation is maximum, the transmitted load is reduced compared to the load at the time of operation As a result, the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw in the fixed assembly portion 6802 can be suppressed.

In this manner, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is shifted from the left and right center to the left and right and the left front cover 1032
By similarly shifting the boundaries of the front cover 10322 and the right front cover 10322, the assembly efficiency can be improved, and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be made less likely to occur.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 both have a fixed assembly portion 680.
2 is not directly fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. That is, the fixed assembly 680
In 2, the fastening screw inserted into the right front cover 10322 is fastened to the left front cover 10321.

However, for the inner case member 10330, the fixed assembly portion 6802 is the inner case member 1
While being inserted into the through hole formed in the upper side plate portion of the 0330 (shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 220), the upper side plate portion is held by the fixed assembling portion 6802 from both sides (see FIG. 218). With this configuration, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1 are compared with the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened to the inner case member 10330, respectively.
The fastening points formed in 0322 can be reduced.

Thereby, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized. That is, when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are provided with a large number of fastening points, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may not be easily bent due to the rigidity of the fastening screw and may be easily damaged.

On the other hand, in order to make it easy to bend while maintaining the fastening point, the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be reduced. However, in this case, the durability may be reduced or an illegal action is caused. There is a risk of

On the other hand, by reducing the number of fastening points as in the present embodiment, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be sufficiently bent without being affected by the rigidity of the fastening screw. Thereby, the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be utilized without excessively reducing the thickness of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.

219 and 221 are exploded front perspective views of the operation device 10300, and FIG.
And FIG. 222 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation device 10300. Figure 219 and Figure 22
As shown in 0, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have a left cover member 103.
The right and left cover members 23 and 24 can be disassembled in the left and right direction in an integral manner.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 221 and 222, the left front cover 10321 is a left cover member 10.
In H.323, the right front cover 10322 is fastened and fixed to the right cover member 10324 at one point (adjustment elongated holes 10323a and 10324a) in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, before the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to each other, the left front cover 10321 is attached to the right front cover 1032 relative to the left cover member 10323.
Since the reference numeral 22 is movable relative to the right cover member 10324, it is easy to adjust the mounting position of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. This is explained below.

The operation device 10300 is disposed on the front side of the inner case member 10330 in such a manner that the back side is formed along the curved surface of the cover members 10344 and 10345 (see FIG. 215) and the left and right edges of the cover members 10344 and 10345 are hidden. And a right front cover 10322, and a left cover member 10323 and a right cover member 10324 fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330 in the left-right direction.

The left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 have adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a which are bored in the front-rear direction and elongated in the left-right direction at the outer upper end portion.

The adjustment long holes 10323a and 10324a are holes for fastening and fixing the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, respectively, and by being elongated in the left-right direction, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 Even if the shapes vary, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032 for the swing operation member 10310
The position in the left and right direction of 2 can be easily adjusted.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have adjustment long holes 10323 a and 1032.
4a is fastened and fixed in the front-rear direction, and is fastened and fixed in the left-right direction at the end faces opposed in the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 219, the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off in the front-rear direction in the fitting recess 10322a recessed rightward from the end face of the right front cover 10322 in contact with the left front cover 10321 A state in which the right front cover 10322 and the left front cover 10321 are assembled (see FIG. 217).
In the reference), the wall member 10322 b is held inside the fitting recess 10322 a by stopping the movement to the left by the end face of the left front cover 10321.

With such a configuration, when replacing the wall member 10322b, the right front cover 10322
The wall member 10322b can be replaced only by removing the
This is a point where the load from the posture correction device 10312 (see FIG. 215) is repeatedly received). Therefore, maintenance efficiency can be improved.

First, the procedure of the assembling operation will be described.
22 are assembled to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, respectively (see FIG. 2).
21 and 222 to FIGS. 219 and 220), after fastening and fixing, the left cover member 10323 and the right front cover are fastened by fastening the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330. 10322 is aligned and
Thereafter, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed.

Here, when the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 can not be moved relative to the left cover member 10323 or the right cover member 10324, the left cover member 10323 or the left cover member 10323 or the other is intentionally corrected Loosen the fastening of the right cover member 10324 to the inner case member 10330, and the left cover member 1032
It is necessary to make correction by shifting the arrangement of the third cover and the right cover member 10324.

Also, in anticipation of this, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are not completely tightened to the inner case member 10330, but are weakly fastened and fixed to the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 1
When the position of 0322 is determined, after the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed (downstream side of the assembly procedure), the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 103 are formed.
Since a return of the operation procedure of fastening and fixing the inner case member 24 to the inner case member 10330 (upstream of the assembly procedure) occurs and the operation itself becomes complicated, it is not preferable in terms of simplification of the operation.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be moved relative to the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be used as the inner case. After fastening and fixing to the member 10330, position adjustment of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be performed. Therefore, the assembly operation can be simplified.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover member 10322 each include shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R in which the guide portion 10344a of the upper cover member 10344 and the front edge portion thereof are opposed to each other. The shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R have a role of closing the gap generated between the upper cover member 10344 and the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 220), the piano wire enters the gap and enters the inside of the pachinko machine 10010 The gap between the guide 10344a and the guide 10344a is designed to be small (in the present embodiment, it is designed to have a clearance of 0.3 mm) as a measure against tampering or tampering that is intended to pour the liquid.

On the other hand, when the positional relationship between the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a is shifted due to the load (impact) at the time of operation and the gap is closed, the guide portion 10344a and the shield plate portion at the time of operation of the operation device 10300 6803L and 6803R may be rubbed, and there is a possibility that shavings of resin may be generated. Although shavings of resin have little influence if there is a small amount, if a large amount of clogging occurs in detection grooves of a light transmission type switch represented by so-called photo coupler type, shavings may block light and cause false detection. It is thought that there is. Therefore, there is a possibility that the freedom of selection of the switch that can be adopted is limited.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1
Since the fixed assembly portion 6802 as a fastening point of 0322 is disposed at a position separated laterally from the left and right center position (the point at which the operation load and the operation load occur at the maximum), the shock transmitted to the fastening point The load can be reduced, and loosening of the fastening screw can be made less likely to occur.

As a result, the positional relationship between the shielding plate portions 6803L and 6803R and the guide portion 10344a can be prevented from shifting, generation of shavings of the resin can be prevented, and erroneous detection can be suppressed. In the present embodiment, the detection switch FC of the photocoupler type is disposed on the front side of the shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R.

The detection switch FC is a switch for detecting an operation of pushing the swinging operation member 10310 in the backward direction, and is fixed to the connecting portion 10344c. A thin metal plate MB is fixed inside the swing operation member 10310 so as to face the detection switch FC.

Then, when the pushing operation in the backward direction with respect to the swinging operation member 10310 is performed, the metal plate MB enters the detection groove of the detection switch FC and the detection light is shielded, so it is determined that the pushing operation is performed. be able to. In the present embodiment, no load is applied to either the detection switch FC or the metal plate MB, so that the durability can be improved as compared to the case where a load is applied.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R.
Curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R formed as continuous curved surfaces on the front side and a lower plate portion 6805L continuously formed as a fan-shaped plate portion on the lower side of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, And 6805R mainly.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R have a curved shape in which the surface on the back side can contact with the curved shape portion on the front side upper portion of the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 (ie, lever support shaft 10331d1 (FIG. 215) It forms as a surface of a circular arc shape of about 90 degrees of center angles centering on a center).

The lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are projecting interference portions 68 which are projected from the surface on the back surface side to the back surface side.
It has 05a. The protruding interference portion 6805a is a left cover member 13331 in the left-right direction.
The right cover member 13332 is disposed slightly inward of the inner edge Rm1 of the right cover member 13332, and is formed to project to the rear side more than the front surface of the left cover member 13331 and the right cover member 13332 in the front-rear direction.

Thus, the protruding interference portion 6805a is formed by the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1032.
In the state where the second cover member 10323 and the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are respectively assembled (see FIG. 220), the displacement to the left and right outside is restricted by the inner edge Rm1. Therefore, the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from being displaced outward in the left-right direction, so that the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be prevented from disassembling in a manner apart from each other.

The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R.
And it is a part which connects the perimeter of lower board part 6805L and 6805R, respectively, it extends toward the front view outside, and it has connection curve parts 6806L and 6806R curved to the front side by the spread tip.

The left front cover 10321 is provided with a plurality of fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L which are formed on the right end portion in such a manner that the fastening screws can be screwed in and which are disposed in plurality at the top and bottom. Also, the right front cover 103
A plurality of through holes 68 are vertically disposed at the left end and drilled so that fastening screws can be inserted therethrough.
02 R, 6807 R, 6808 R are provided.

The left front cover 10321, the right front cover 10322, and the inner case member 10330 are fixed to one another by the plurality of fastening portions and insertion holes distributed in the vertical direction (direction along the operation direction of the operation device 10300). Thereby, the load and impact accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300 can be dispersed to each fastening portion, and the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be suppressed.

Furthermore, since it is possible to suppress the occurrence of positional deviation at the position of the cut between the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, a design portion (especially,
Lower plate portions 6805L, 6805R and connecting curved portions 6806L, 68 easily visible in front view
It is possible to prevent the performance as 06R (see FIG. 207) from being degraded. The fastening portions and the insertion holes have different roles. The following will be described in order.

The fastening portion 6802L and the insertion hole 6802R are assembled in such a manner as to sandwich the insertion hole H23a drilled in the left and right direction in a portion protruding from the upper surface of the inner case member 10330, and fixed by sandwiching the inner case member 10330 by a fastening screw. . In addition, it is not a so-called "joint tightening" mode, but it is fastened and fixed in a mode in which the tip of the cylindrical part extended from the fastening part 6802L to the right abuts on the left surface of the plate part in which the insertion hole 6802R is formed. . In other words, the compression does not occur on the part where the insertion hole H23a is formed by the fastening.

In addition, a gap is provided by designing the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L to be slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the insertion hole H23a. Even in the case where the inner case member 10330 is displaced downward due to the load at the time of operation to the operation device 10300, the operation of the fastening portion 6802L and the inner case member 10330 can be made independent within the above clearance. Therefore, when the minute displacement that may occur in the inner case member 10330 occurs, the fixed assembly portion 6
The same displacement of 802 can be avoided.

The extension length of the cylindrical portion extending rightward from the fastening portion 6802L may be slightly shortened to apply a compression load to the portion where the insertion hole H23a is formed at the time of fastening. . In this case, the restorative force of the portion where the insertion hole H23a is bored increases the fastening force.
Loosening of the fastening screw at 802 can be avoided.

The fastening portion 6807L is a portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted through an insertion hole H23b which is bored in the left-right direction is screwed in a portion projecting to the front side of the inner case member 10330. By screwing the fastening screw, the left front cover 10321 is fastened and fixed to the inner case member 10330. In the present embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion by the fastening portion 6807L and the insertion hole H23b.

The insertion hole 6807R is a through hole through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to a fastening portion T23a which is formed to be able to be screwed in the left-right direction at a portion projecting to the front side of the inner case member 10330. The right front cover 10322 is an inner case member 1 by screwing in the fastening screw.
It is fastened and fixed to 0330. In the present embodiment, a portion where only the right front cover 10322 and the inner case member 10330 are fastened and fixed is the fastening portion T23 b and the insertion hole 6807.
It is only the fastening point by R.

The fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R are portions directly fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6808R into the fastening portion 6808L. In the present embodiment, only the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed only at the fastening portion by the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the fastening portions and the insertion holes are formed at a plurality of places along the forming direction of the facing parts of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.
The combination of objects to be concluded is configured to be different. As a result, in assembling the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, it is not necessary to fasten the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 at one time, so the assembling operation can be facilitated. The assembly procedure is described below.

First, by attaching one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330 and fastening and fixing even at one place, one of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is prevented from coming off the inner case member 10330 be able to.

In this case, either the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 may be attached first. When the left front cover 10321 is attached first, the left front cover 10 is fastened and fixed in such a manner that a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6807L through the insertion hole H23b.
321 can be fixed to the inner case member 10330, and when the right front cover 10322 is attached first, the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion T23a through the insertion hole 6807R. Can be fixed to the inner case member 10330.

Then, the other case of the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322 is the inner case member 10
If attached to 330 and similarly fastened and fixed in one place, it is possible to configure a state in which the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are independently fastened to the inner case member 10330.

After this, although the order is not specified, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be formed by the inner case member 10 by screwing in and fastening the fastening screws in the fixed assembly portion 6802.
It can be integrally fixed to 330. Also, the fastening portion 6808L and the insertion hole 6808R
The left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be fastened and fixed to each other by screwing and fastening the fastening screw.

As described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are also formed by fastening the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 to the inner case member 10330, respectively. The number of fastening points can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, in the fastening operation of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, all the fastening screws are configured to be inserted from the right to the left. Therefore, compared with the case where the insertion direction of a fastening screw is constituted by right-and-left bidirectional, efficiency improvement of fastening operation can be attained.

The screwing directions of the fastening screws fixed to the fastening portions 6802L, 6807L, 6808L are uniform in the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340. Operation device 103
00 is a direction along a plane perpendicular to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, so that the direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 is the operation device 103.
The direction is orthogonal to the operation direction of each operation unit 00. That is, when the load and impact at the time of operation occur along the operation direction, no component in the screwing direction of the fastening screw occurs. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw due to a load or an impact at the time of operation of the operation device 10300.

In the present embodiment, the operation device 10300 includes a plurality of operation portions (including portions operated by operation. For example, the swing operation member 10310, the lens member 10317, and the lever member 103.
40), but since all the operation parts are designed to operate in the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, the screwing direction of the fastening screw is the left-right direction along the rotation axis of the lever member 10340.

On the other hand, when the operation portion does not operate on a plane orthogonal to the direction of the rotation axis of the lever member 10340 (for example, when there is an operation portion that operates to push in the left and right diagonal direction) The direction (for example, the middle angular direction) found as the balance (average) of the operation direction may be set as the direction of fastening, or the operation part with a high frequency of operation instructions is targeted (an operation instruction occurs rarely You may set the direction of the fastening, ignoring the operation part that you do.

Fig. 223 (a) is a front perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, and Fig. 223 (b) is a rear perspective view of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 form a gap for arranging the lever member 10340 (see FIG. 220) between the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R. With the exception of the portion to be formed and the portion in which the fitting recess 10322a is formed, the plurality of surfaces disposed opposite to each other contact vertically.

In the contacting portion, a plate-like portion is extended to the right from the left front cover 10321 on the side which is not visually recognized by the player. That is, for example, the shielding plate portion 6803L includes a lower overlapping portion 6803La extending rightward along the lower surface (see FIG. 223 (a)).

Since the shielding plate portion 6803R is supported by the lower overlapping portion 6803La, the shielding plate portion 68
It is regulated that the 03R is displaced downward with respect to the shielding plate portion 6803L. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, and it is possible to suppress that the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L.

In the present embodiment, the inner case member 10330 and the shield member 6803R and 6803L disposed below the inner case member 10330 (see FIG. 218) and a lever member 10340 in which the rear side portion is accommodated.
Or preventing the liquid from touching the drive motor for driving the lever member 10340, the transmission mechanism such as a cam or gear for transmitting the drive force of the drive motor, or the electric system (substrate or the like) for driving the drive motor. Can.

In addition, while the cut of the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L is formed on the right side of the center of the swing operation member 10310 on the right side, the cut (connection surface) of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330 is the swing operation member It is disposed on the same plane as the left and right center position of 10310. Therefore, even when the liquid passes between the shielding plate portions 6803R and 6803L, it is possible to prevent the liquid from immediately reaching the cut of the left and right members constituting the inner case member 10330.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the drive motor for driving the lever member 10340 is disposed on the left side with respect to the left and right center of the inner case member 10330 (the inner case member 10
Corresponds to the bulging part from 330 to the left, see Figure 218), Shield plate part 6803R, 6803L
If the lower part of the case gets wet, the liquid that wets the place is
Since it can flow downward along the right outer surface of the drive motor, the drive motor can be prevented from getting wet.

Further, for example, the lower plate portion 6805L includes a rear overlapping portion 6805Lb which extends rightward along the rear surface below the fitting recess 10322a. Since the lower plate portion 6805R is supported from behind by the rear overlapping portion 6805Lb, displacement of the lower plate portion 6805R relative to the lower plate portion 6805L is restricted. This can prevent the formation of a gap between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, and can suppress the passage of liquid between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L.

The liquid that has passed below the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L reaches the plate-like support portion 6426 (
232 and 234), when a large amount of liquid continues to pass, it flows between the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 and the main body box portion 6421 of the lower plate forming member 6420 toward the through hole 6412; There is a possibility of flowing along the recessed portion 6414. In particular, the through hole 6
As the liquid flows downward from 412, the liquid may flow downward from the lower surface of the outer frame of the front frame 10014, and may hit the player or wet the bin.

In the present embodiment, as described later, since the through hole 6412 is configured to be sandwiched between the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430, the passage of the liquid is easily prevented by sandwiching the through hole 6412 without a gap. As in the embodiment, since the liquid can be prevented from being applied to the player or the player can be reduced by preventing the liquid from passing between the lower plate portions 6805R and 6805L, the player can A pachinko machine 10010 that can be played comfortably can be configured.

As shown in FIGS. 223 (a) and 223 (b), shield plate portions 6803L and 6803R,
The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R and the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are provided with streak-like portions D23 formed in a streak shape in a mode of being pushed out from the front surface side to the back surface side. The line portion D23 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface, from the formation aspect thereof.

The streak-like portion D23 is a shield plate portion 6803L, 6803R, a curved plate portion 6804L, 6804R.
And it has a role as a part which adjusts the rigidity of lower plate parts 6805L and 6805R. That is,
Compared with the case where it is formed as a simple thin plate, rigidity in the direction orthogonal to the streak D23 is maintained (or reduced) while rigidity in the direction in which the streak D23 is formed is improved. (anisotropy). This will be described by taking the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R as an example.

The curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are disposed between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a (see FIG. 213), and serve as a portion that fills the gap. Here, the operation device 10300 including the lever member 10340 is configured to be displaceable slightly downward by a load or an impact at the time of operation for the purpose of preventing an excessive reaction force returned to the player at the time of operation. On the other hand, in order to keep the arrangement of the upper plate 17 unchanged, the accommodation recess 17a is configured so as not to be displaceable.

That is, when operating the operation device 10300, a gap may be generated between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a. In the present embodiment, the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are extended (elastically deformed, flexed) in the vertical direction to correspond to the change in the distance between the lever member 10340 and the housing recess 17a, and the gap Can be prevented.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the deformation resistance in the vertical direction is formed by forming the linear portion D23 along the vertical direction in which the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R are deformed (the direction in which the load at the time of operation mainly faces). Since the size is increased (the rigidity is increased), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of vibration upon shape return or deformation more than necessary. As described above, the design of the line portion D23 in the present embodiment is performed for the purpose of taking measures against problems that may occur when the operation device 10300 is operated.

Since the streak-like portions D23 of the lower plate portions 6805L and 6805R are formed in a U-shape in front view,
When a downward load is applied at the center, both the left and right sides endure upward (a tensile force is generated). That is, downward load is applied when operating the operating device 10300, and even if displacement occurs, the displacement can be returned early.

On the other hand, even if a load is generated in the direction orthogonal to the linear portion D23, the load transmitted to the V-shaped design member 6450 disposed on the downstream side due to the generation of an allowable deformation based on the flexibility of the resin. Can be reduced.

The connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R include end streaks D24 formed in a streak shape in a mode of being extruded from the front surface side to the back surface side. The line portion D24 is visually recognized as a concave portion on the front surface and as a convex portion on the back surface, from the formation mode thereof.

The end streaks D24 mainly include left and right streaks D24a formed on the left and right sides, and a central streak D24b formed on the center side, and are formed as measures against loads in different directions.

The left and right muscle portions D24a are stripe-shaped portions disposed on the upper side of the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening portions on the front side), and are formed in a shape inclined downward toward the back side. The downward inclination corresponds to the direction of the load such as an operation of pushing the lens member 10317 of the swing operation member 10310 (along the direction of the load). That is, the connecting curved portion 6 is formed by the left and right muscle portions D24a.
By improving the rigidity of the 806L and 6806R in the direction of the left and right muscle D24a, it is possible to improve the resistance to the operation load.

The inclination angles of the left and right muscle portions D24a are gradually formed in a stepwise manner with respect to the front-rear direction as compared to those disposed on the left and right sides of those disposed on the left and right sides. That is,
The streaks extend in multiple directions. Thereby, regardless of the arrangement of the swinging operation member 10310, the resistance to the load when operating the lens member 10317 can be improved.

And, the formation width of the connecting curved portions 6806L, 6806R in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed is
Those disposed on the left and right sides are made shorter than those disposed on the left and right center sides. That is, since the forming width is made shorter as the inclination with respect to the front-rear direction corresponds to a larger force (left and right), the amount of deformation allowed for the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R becomes smaller, and the resistance is increased. be able to. As a result, it is possible to improve the resistance to the load in the direction in which the inclination with respect to the front-rear direction is large as the direction in which the load at the time of operation tends to be large (the direction in which the hand is swung down).

On the other hand, the central muscle portion D24b is a streak-like portion disposed on the lower side from a position equivalent to the fastening portion 6807L (the uppermost portion of the fastening points on the front side), and has a shape that rises and inclines toward the back side It is formed from This rising inclination is the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330)
Corresponds to the direction of load when falling forward.

That is, the rigidity of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R by the central muscle D24b
By improving in the direction of 24b, it is possible to improve the resistance to forward tilting displacement of (the inner case member 10330 of) the operating device 10300 due to the load at the time of tilting operation around the rotation shaft of the lever member 10340. .

The central muscle portion D24b is formed by a total of seven at the center, one at the center and three at the left and right sides, and the left and right central muscle portions D24b incline to the left and right center side toward the back side. As a result, even when the operation device 10300 (the inner case member 10330) is tilted forward due to the load at the time of tilting operation around the rotation axis of the lever member 10340, even if the displacement in the left and right direction occurs, It is possible to improve the resistance to displacement (resistance in the lateral direction).

The central muscle D24b is formed more densely than the left and right muscles D24a. Thereby, particularly in the connection curved portions 6806L and 6806R, the lateral bending (the deformation extending and contracting in the left-right direction) is more significant than the bending in the vertical direction (the deformation expanding and contracting in the vertical direction) It will be a large deflection.

Therefore, for example, when a downward load is applied to the lower tray unit 6400 (see FIGS. 208 and 212) and the lower edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R are pushed down on the V-shaped design member 6450 (position of lower edge) Connecting curved portion 6806L, 6806R in a manner in which the
(In the case of deformation), the load (stress) applied to the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be released by bending the upper and lower intermediate portions and upper edges of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R in the left and right direction (stress) Concentration can be avoided).

Even in the case of bending deformation as described above, the lower edge overhangs are formed so that the plate-like overhangs 10321 c and 10322 c continuously formed from the connection curved portions 6806 L and 6806 R are surrounded from the back side to the left front The left front cover 10321 is supported between 10017b and the facing overhanging portion 10017c (see FIGS. 213 and 214), and the plate-like overhanging portions 10321c and 10322c are formed longer in the front-rear direction toward the left and right outer sides. And the right front cover 1032
A gap can be made less likely to be generated between the second and the housing recess 17a.

Further, by making the pliability of the connecting curved portions 6806L and 6806R different depending on the direction, the downstream side of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 of the operation device 10300 and the load generated by the operation of the operation device 10300 (V-shaped design member The ease of transmission to 6450 (see FIG. 232) can be changed depending on the direction of vibration or load.

That is, while vibrations along the vertical direction and operation load can be easily transmitted to the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 207) and the lower plate 50 via the V-shaped design member 6450, vibrations and operations in the left-right direction Load (eg, load generated when the hand holding the ball collides with the swing operation member 10310 when transferring the ball from the lower plate 50 to the upper plate 17) is transmitted to the operation handle 51 or the lower plate 50 It can be difficult to do. As a result, the swinging operation member 10 unintentionally by the player
Vibration and load are transmitted to the operation handle 51 and the lower plate 50 even when a load is applied to 310, which can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

In addition, on the left and right outsides of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, connection curved portions 6806L and 680 are provided.
Where the 6R is continuously formed, the plate-like overhanging portion 10321c, formed on the upper edge thereof
10322c is inserted between the lower edge overhanging portion 10017b and the opposite overhanging portion 10017c which are long laterally (see FIG. 214).

Here, when the shapes of the left and right end portions are shifted in the front-rear direction due to a molding error or the like in comparison with the shapes of the plate-like protruding portions 10321c and 10322c and the shapes of the lower edge protruding portion 10017b and the opposite protruding portion 10017c (For example, when the front upper end of the connecting curved portion 6806L, 6806R protrudes to the front side of the accommodation recess 17a), the plate-like overhanging portion 10321c, 10322
It is preferable to be able to cope with a molding error by deforming the curve c so as to loose the curvature (displacement of the left and right end portions to the back side).

In this respect, in the present embodiment, since the line-shaped portions D23 are formed vertically on the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R, the rigidity in the left and right direction of the curved plate portions 6804L and 6804R is compared with the rigidity in the vertical direction. Be lowered. Therefore, the plate-like projecting portions 10321c and 10322c
Since the deformation of the plate-like overhanging portions 10321 c and 10322 c can be assisted by the deformation of the curved plate portions 6804 L and 6804 R when the deformation is made to the side where the bending becomes loose, the plate-like overhang portion 1
The deformation width of 0321c and 10322c can be increased. Therefore, the size of the molding error that can be handled can be increased.

As described above, by not improving (weakening) the rigidity in the direction (left and right direction) perpendicular to the forming direction, measures are taken against problems that may occur when the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are assembled. be able to.

From these things, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10 are formed by the streak D23.
It is possible to cope with both a defect that may occur when assembling 322 (the same as when assembling the operating device 10300, see FIG. 213) and a defect that may occur when operating the operating device 10300.

Referring back to FIG. In the present embodiment, the metal main body portion 1001 of the front frame 10014
In the lower left side front face portion of 4a, a flat plate portion (ball guide opening 5) along the metal main body portion 10014a
3 (see FIG. 214) and the upper part of the upper surface of the flat plate part formed on the front side so as to be bent at the upper end configured to be inclined downward toward the right A back covering portion 10014 b formed of a resin material is disposed in a mode including a plate-like upper plate portion extended. That is, the cross section of the back covering portion 10014 b in a plane orthogonal to the straight line along the arrow L-R is formed in a substantially L shape.

The rear covering portion 10014 b is a portion that defines the upper limit position and the right limit position of the lower plate 50. That is, the lower plate 50 is abutted (connected) to the flat plate portion at the rear end, and is abutted (connected) to the upper plate portion at the right end thereof. In the region (space) formed on the side where the lower plate 50 and the rear covering portion 10014b are formed in this manner, balls, so-called far balls, etc. that can not be stored in the upper plate 17 are stored. It will be Next, details of the lower tray unit 6400 constituting the lower tray 50 will be described.

FIG. 224 is an exploded front perspective view of lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 225 is an exploded back perspective view of lower tray unit 6400. In FIG. 225, each part of the lower tray unit 6400 is illustrated at an angle looking up from the bottom.

As shown in FIGS. 224 and 225, the lower tray unit 6400 covers the front side of the metal main portion 10014a of the front frame 10014 (see FIG. 211 or 212).
A cover base member 6410 fastened and fixed to 0014a, a lower plate forming member 6420 fitted from the upper side to the cover base member 6410 to form the lower plate 50, and a plate attached from the lower side to the cover base member 6410 It is an apparatus of the shape, and ball discharge device 6430 fastened and fixed to lower tray forming member 6420 and lower tray forming member 64 from the rear side at the left end of covering base member 6410
An intermediate holding member 6440 that is assembled to the covering base member 6410 in a manner that makes it possible to prevent the 20 from coming off, while being fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014 a at the opposite side (rear side)
And a V-shaped design member 6450 which is disposed on the front upper side of the covering base member 6410 and is formed in a V-shape in a front view from a resin material.

The covering base member 6410 has a substantially flat bottom surface and a substantially box-like shape with the back surface and the top surface open, and a slightly bottom and front portion of the bottom portion of the body portion 6411 A through hole 6412 which is formed by leaving to remain, a projecting shape portion 6413 projecting downward from the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 on the center side in the left-right direction of the main body portion 6411 with reference to the through hole 6412, On the back side of the shaped portion 6413, a protruding shaped portion 641
And 3 are mainly provided with a recessed portion 6414 that is recessed so as to have a thickness substantially equal to that of the other portion of the main body 6411.

By forming the recessed shape portion 6414, it is possible to prevent the plate thickness from becoming excessively large in the vicinity of the protruding shape portion 6413. Therefore, the yield of resin molding is improved, and stress concentration occurs in the protruding shape portion 6413. Can be suppressed. The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 have a plurality of advantageous effects in the place where the operation device 10300 is held from below, but the details will be described later.

The through hole 6412 has a size substantially equal to the size of the bottom surface shape of the lower plate 50 to be described later, and is formed much larger than the size of the bottom surface port 6432 opened by sliding the ball removing lever 52.

As described above, by forming the through holes 6412 in advance in a large size, the covering base member 6410 is formed.
The ball discharge rate from the lower plate 50 can be made to correspond to the ball discharge rate corresponding to the playability realized by the pachinko machine 10010, without replacing the.

That is, the discharge speed of the balls from the lower plate 50 depends on the opening area of the bottom port 6432,
For example, when the size of the through hole 6412 is equal to the size of the bottom surface port 6432, the discharge speed of the ball can not be further increased. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the through hole 6412
If the size of the bottom opening 6432 is changed or the arrangement of the bottom opening 6432 is changed without exceeding the through hole 6412 (the design of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430) If the change is made), the discharge speed (discharge mode) of the balls from the lower plate 50 can be changed without replacing the overlying base member 6410. In other words, without changing the appearance of the lower unit 6400 that the player visually recognizes (without changing the design)
, Ball discharge rate (discharge mode) can be changed.

The demand for changing the ball discharge speed is not limited to the case where the pachinko machine 10010 has changed the playability. For example, in a game arcade, the pachinko machine 10010 is installed in a mode that requires transfer of the balls to a bin box and the case where it is not necessary to transfer the balls to the bin box (so-called "personal" In the case of

If it is necessary to transfer the balls into one and two boxes, if the balls are discharged at a high speed, the balls may overflow frequently from the two boxes, so design is made so that the balls are discharged at a slower speed than a predetermined speed. It is desirable to be done.

In the present embodiment, the bottom surface port 6432 is formed of a circular opening having a diameter of about 35 [mm], and from the comparison between the opening area and the shape of a sphere (a spherical shape having a diameter of about 11 [mm]), The upper limit of the balls discharged simultaneously from the opening is limited to about seven.

On the other hand, if it is not necessary to transfer the delivery balls to the one and two box, there is no concern for the balls to overflow from the two and one box, so the upper limit of the desired ball discharge speed changes significantly in the increasing direction. In such an installation mode, the dispensed balls flow into the automatic counting machine disposed on each of the pachinko machines 10010. Therefore, as an example of the upper limit of the discharge speed, it is incorporated in the automatic counting machine. The operating speed of the ball sink device is illustrated.

As described above, by forming the through hole 6412 large, there is an advantage that the discharge speed of the sphere can be changed without changing the design in front view, while the main body 6
There is a possibility that the strength of 411 may decrease. In particular, the bottom of the main body 6411 is a portion where there is a possibility that the load (mainly downward load) when the player operates the operation device 10300 may be transmitted, so the size and arrangement of the through holes 6412 However, there is a possibility that the load during operation can be limited to the extent that it can withstand.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are assembled to the covering base member 6410 in such a manner as to compensate for the strength reduction due to the through holes 6412. The lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 are fastened and fixed to each other with a line illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 224 and 225 as a fastening direction in a manner of sandwiching the covering base member 6410 from above and below. The edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed against the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430. Thereby, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 (for example, the long and narrow frame portion located behind the through hole 6412) can be reinforced by the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

The design mode in which the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is pressed to the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 is not limited at all. For example, the lower plate forming member 6420
Alternatively, the design may be such that the edge portion of the through hole 6412 abuts on the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 before the tightening of the ball discharging device 6430 (in the state of being arranged at the tightening preparation position) (see FIG. 233) Although a gap is generated in front of each other, the gap may be filled by tightening a fastening screw so that a pressure may be applied.

The portion to be pressed does not have to be the entire circumference of the edge portion of the through hole 6412, but may be a part of the edge portion. In this case, in particular, the vicinity of the operation device 10300 (the projecting shape portion 64
Since a large load is likely to be generated on the right side near 13) and on the back side (long plate part placed behind the through hole 6412) that may be shocked at each time of opening and closing, It is preferred to incorporate.

By thus sandwiching the edge portion of the through hole 6412 with the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430, the strength of the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be sufficiently secured,
The bottom opening 6432 can be disposed at any position without concern for the reduction in strength due to the formation of the bottom opening 6432. That is, the degree of freedom in the arrangement of the bottom surface port 6432 can be improved.

The lower plate forming member 6420 is a main box 64 formed in a substantially box shape with the lower plate 50 open at the upper surface.
21 and a discharge port 6422 which is opened in the vertical direction on the bottom of the main body box 6421, an L-shaped plate 6423 projecting in an L-shape in a bottom view from the bottom rear side of the main box 641, and its L On the inner side (front side) of the range enclosed by the plate portion 6423, a plurality of fastening portions 6424 projecting in a cylindrical shape downward and screwing together the fastening screws for fastening the ball discharging device 6430; A pair of guide ribs 6425 extending in the form of ribs along the left and right direction as an end, a plate-like support 6426 extending right from the right end of the main body box 6421, and its plate-like support 642
And a flexible resin member 6427 placed on the upper surface of the main body 6.

The outlet 6422 is formed at the front end and the right end of the lower plate 50. The upper surface of the lower portion of the lower plate 50 is configured as an inclined surface in such a manner as to be inclined downward toward the discharge port 6422, and the ball flowing into the lower plate 50 from the pachinko machine 10010 flows downward to the discharge port 6422. Since the outlet 6422 is disposed on the front side close to the player, the balls can be smoothly taken out from the lower plate 50 even if the number of balls stored in the lower plate 50 is small.

The discharge port 6422 is a plate-like support portion 6426 that easily generates a load from the operation device 10300.
In the place where it is thought that the influence of the strength reduction by having constituted the through hole is considered, measures are taken by the combination with the ball discharging device 6430, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 225, the L-shaped plate portion 6423 has different protruding lengths at the left and right positions, which corresponds to the inclination of the lower plate 50. That is, the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the main body portion 6411 is formed to be substantially planar, while the lower plate 50 is formed to be inclined downward as the lower lower surface lower surface goes to the right. To contact the top surface of the edge of the 6412)
The protruding length of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 needs to be shortened toward the right, which corresponds to that. Due to this correspondence, in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), the projecting end (lower end) of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 abuts on the edge of the through hole 6412 (abutment by line contact or surface contact) ).

The fastening portion 6424 has two places at the front end where load from the player is likely to occur, and the front frame 10
One point is formed at the back side end where load is likely to occur at the time of opening and closing of 014. By providing the fastening portion preferentially at the portion where the load is likely to occur, it is possible to prevent the positional deviation of the lower plate forming member 6420 from being displaced when the load is generated while the fastening portion is limited. .

In addition, since the fastening portion 6424 is disposed near the L-shaped plate portion 6423, the through hole 641 is formed.
The L-shaped plate portion 6423 and the covering base member 6410 while being fastened on the inside of the two (that is, while performing fastening without separately forming a through hole for positioning a fastening screw to be passed through the main body portion 6411). The contact with the edge of the through hole 6412 can be easily maintained (the relative position can be easily maintained). Therefore, the positional stability of the lower tray forming member 6420 can be improved while making the formation of the through holes other than the through holes 6412 unnecessary.

The guide rib 6425 is used both for the purpose of guiding the movement of the ball release lever 52 and for the purpose of reinforcing the bottom portion of the lower plate 50. In particular, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable that the bottom portion of the lower plate 50 is formed in the shape of a long plate from side to side, and that reinforcement in the left-right direction is required,
Since the ball extraction lever 52 slides along the left-right direction coincident with the longitudinal direction, guidance for the movement of the ball extraction lever 52 and reinforcement of the bottom portion of the lower plate 50 are suitably realized.

As described above, since the guide ribs 6425 are formed as a pair, the load applied can be dispersed. In addition, even if one of them breaks, there is no problem in use as long as the other remains, so the service life of the lower tray unit 6400 can be extended.

The material of the resin member 6427 can be designed arbitrarily. For example, it may be made of urethane, silicone, or any other flexible and appropriate repulsive force (shape restoring force)
It may be a member with

The ball discharging device 6430 is a plate-shaped main body plate portion 6431 in which the ball removing lever 52 described above is disposed.
A fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6424, which is disposed at a position overlapping vertically with a circular bottom surface port 6432 vertically formed in the main body plate portion 6431 and the fastening portion 6424 of the lower plate forming member 6420. And a plurality of fastening holes 6433 and the fastening holes 6433 thereof.
And a fitting frame portion 6434 whose outer shape is slightly smaller than the inner shape of the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410.

The ball extraction lever 52 is a grip 52a which is projected forward to allow the player to operate in a sliding manner to the left and right, and a closing plate 52b which closes the outlet 6422 in the assembled state (see FIG. 207) And a pair of rib-like portions protruding upward from the upper surface of the closing plate portion 52b and extending along the left-right direction, and the guided ribs 52 guided by the guiding ribs 6425.
c), which are integrally molded from a hard resin material.

The bottom surface port 6432 is disposed to face the discharge port 6422 of the lower plate forming member 6420 at the top and bottom, and the closing plate portion 52 b of the ball removing lever 52 is disposed therebetween. As described above, at the time of non-operation, since the ball extraction lever 52 is disposed between the discharge port 6422 and the bottom surface port 6432, the degree to which the strength is reduced by forming the opening The rigidity can be reduced by the rigidity of the portion 52b.

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile,
As in the present embodiment, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 is lowered while adopting a configuration in which the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are disposed near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (disposed in proximity to the operation device 10300). Can be prevented.

Details of a fastening mode of the lower tray forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430 will be described. The main body plate portion 6431 is provided with a collar portion 6431 a which protrudes outward more than the fitting frame portion 6434 in three directions (the flat side and the left and right sides) excluding the front side. The fitting frame 6434 is in an assembled state (FIG. 2).
In 07), the through hole 6412 of the covering base member 6410 is internally fitted with a gap,
When the ball discharging device 6430 is inserted into the through hole 6412 as it is, the collar 6431 a abuts on the lower surface of the edge portion of the through hole 6412.

On the other hand, the inner side surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is formed in such a shape as to be able to abut in the front, rear, left and right direction from the outside of the fitting frame portion 6434, and the lower end portion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 is As described above, the contact with the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the vertical direction.

In this manner, the ball discharging device 6430 can be positioned on the covering base member 6410, and the lower plate forming member 6420 can be positioned on the ball discharging device 6430. Each configuration can be fixed by passing a fastening screw through the hole 6433 and fastening. Therefore, the assembly operation can be facilitated.

The intermediate holding member 6440 is a portion through which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the covering base member 6410 is inserted, and a plurality of through holes 6441 provided on the front side and a metal main portion 10014 a (
A plurality of fastening portions 6442 which are a portion to which a screw inserted in a through hole formed in FIG. 211 is fastened and fixed and which is provided on the back side and a left upper end portion of the covering foundation member 6410 and the front and rear direction And an interference portion 6443 formed in a plate shape.

FIG. 226 is an exploded front perspective view of lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 227 is an exploded rear perspective view of lower tray unit 6400. In FIGS. 226 and 227, FIGS.
A state where the V-shaped design member 6450 is disassembled is illustrated.

The V-shaped design member 6450 has a groove shape in which the back side is opened and the opening width is narrowed as going to the left and right center, and a V-shaped main body 6451 disposed downward as going to the left and right center;
A plurality of insertion holes 6452 formed in the lower edge of the main body portion 6451 as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, a positioning portion 6453 formed in the vicinity of the lower edge central portion of the main body portion 6451, and left and right of the main body portion 6451 A plurality of overhanging fastening portions 6454 which are projected to the back side near the end portions and in which fastening screws can be screwed in and a plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 in the right side of the main body 6451 The plurality of right reinforcing ribs 6455 aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body 6451 and the plate shape extending in the width direction of the groove of the main body 6451 at the left side of the main body 6451 are aligned in the longitudinal direction of the main body 6451 And a plurality of left side reinforcing ribs 6456.

The V-shaped design member 6450 is formed to have higher rigidity than the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 described above. In this way, it is possible to limit the location where the through hole is likely to be formed in order for a person who performs fraudulent action to infiltrate an unauthorized member into the interior of the pachinko machine 10010. That is, the left front cover 10 is compared with the case where a through hole is made in the V-shaped design member 6450.
The degree of difficulty is lower in the case where the through hole is formed in the right front cover 10322 or the right front cover 10322, so that it is possible to cause an incorrect through hole to be opened in the left front cover 10321 or the right front cover 10322.

Therefore, it is possible to narrow the place to check periodically to detect fraud. That is, according to the present embodiment, since the through hole is highly likely to be formed in the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322, it is unnecessary to check the V-shaped design member 6450. Thus, the burden of checking can be reduced compared to the case where the V-shaped design member 6450 and the covers 10321 and 10322 need to be checked equally.

The main body portion 6451 is formed to be thin, and is capable of bending and deforming in the direction of narrowing the groove width (that is, capable of bending and deforming in a manner of collapsing in the vertical direction). The V-shaped design member 6450 is an operation device 103.
Since the lower front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are engaged with the 00, the vertical displacement that may occur when operating the operation device 10300 is transmitted via the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322. At the time of occurrence of this vertical displacement, the V-shaped design member 6450 is bent and deformed in a direction to narrow the groove width of the groove of the main body portion 6451, whereby the operation device 1030
At least part of the vertical displacement of 0 can be absorbed by the bending of the V-shaped design member 6450.

That is, at least a part of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 is a V-shaped design member 6
After operating at the 450 variant, it can be transmitted downstream (e.g., overlying foundation member 6410). Therefore, since the load transmitted to the main body 6411 of the covering base member 6410 disposed below the V-shaped design member 6450 can be suppressed, the displacement amount of the member below the V-shaped design member 6450 by operation And the degree of vibration can be suppressed.

The positioning portion 6453 is a fastening portion 6453L formed to be capable of screwing a fastening screw on the left side with reference to the left and right center, and a plate-like projecting portion projecting in a plate shape on the opposite side of the fastening portion 6453L. Mainly equipped with 6453R.

The insertion hole 6452 is a portion fixed to the covering base member 6410 by screwing in a fastening screw in a state where the fastening portion of the covering base member 6410 is inserted from the front side into the recess formed on the front side. is there. That is, the V-shaped design member 6450 is assembled in a mode in which it approaches from the back surface side of the covering base member 6410 (an example of the movement locus of the V-shaped design member 6450 is illustrated by imaginary lines in FIGS. 226 and 227).

Note that at least a portion of the plurality of insertion holes 6452 (in the present embodiment, the insertion hole 6 in the lower right)
In the assembled state, 452) is made invisible to the lower plate forming member 6420 in the insertion direction of the fastening screw (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the lower plate forming member 6420 is a covering base member 641.
In the state of being assembled to 0, it is not possible to loosen the fastening screw that is inserted into at least a part of the insertion holes 6452, and the lower plate forming member 6420 is a step before disassembling the V-shaped design member 6450 from the covering base member 6410. Since it is necessary to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the number of steps required to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450.

In addition, the lower plate forming member 6420 is bored in the front longitudinal portion 6426c, which will be described later, in the front-rear direction, and the fastening screw screwed into the lower left fastening portion 6453L is inserted. And an insertion portion 6426c1 fixed thereto. In addition, the insertion portion 6426
The operation device 10300 is disposed in such a manner as to block c1 in a rear view (see FIG. 232).

Therefore, on the premise of disassembling the lower tray forming member 6420, it is necessary to remove the operation device 10300 and move the insertion portion 6426c1 from the shielding position. That is, in order to disassemble the V-shaped design member 6450, it is possible to increase the number of necessary steps such as removing the operation device 10300 and disassembling the lower plate forming member 6420. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent act of removing the V-shaped design member 6450 illegally and entering the inside through the formed gap.

The plate-like projecting portion 6453R is a front longitudinal portion 6426 of the plate-like support 6426 in the assembled state.
Contact the upper surface of c (see FIG. 230 (b)). That is, the downward displacement of the plate-like protruding portion 6453R is suppressed by the plate-like support portion 6426, and conversely, the upward displacement of the plate-like support portion 6426 is suppressed by the plate-like protrusion portion 6453R.

Thereby, for example, even when the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 208) receives a load in the lifting direction from the player, the fitting recess De1 of the operation device 10300 (refer to FIG. 208)
(Refer to FIG. 219) and the fitting portion 6426d, the operation device 10300
The front side portion of the plate-like support 6426 is displaced in the ascending direction along with the displacement in the ascending direction.

Since this displacement is suppressed by the plate-like protruding portion 6453R, the operation device 10300
Can suppress the upward displacement of the

The left and right overhanging fastening portions 6454 are portions into which fastening screws to be inserted through a resin intermediate member (not shown) fixed to the metal main body portion 10014 a of the front frame 10014 are screwed, and the fastening position is The rear side (the side closer to the metal main body portion 10014 a) than the fastening position of the fastening portion 6453 L.

The right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 have a function as a rib for reinforcing the main body portion 6451 in the groove width direction and a thin shape capable of bending and deforming by itself. Together with the function as buffer means (displacement transfer suppressing means) for suppressing As shown in FIG. 227, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is disposed more closely than the right reinforcing rib 6455. The following will be described in order.

FIG. 228 (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the right side reinforcing rib 6455, and FIG. 228 (b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the left side reinforcing rib 6456. In FIG. 228 (a) and FIG. 228 (b), the cross section in the plane which divides the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 in the thickness direction is illustrated. Also, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 are designed to change the dimension in the groove width direction and the groove depth direction according to the groove width of the main body portion 6451 while being formed to have a common thickness. The basic configuration is common, so a representative example will be described.

As shown in FIG. 228 (a), the right side reinforcing rib 6455 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom of the main body 6451 to the back side, and is a coupling portion coupled to the upper plate of the main body 6451. 645
5a and an upper facing portion 6 disposed opposite to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in parallel to form a gap
A main body 6451 mainly includes a lower facing portion 6455c which is disposed to face the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in such a manner as to be inclined in such a manner as to increase the separation width toward the back side.

The upper facing portion 6455b is a portion where the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322 is fitted between the upper facing portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the right front cover 10322 is transmitted. Main body 645
1 and the upper facing portion 6455b are disposed substantially in parallel, so that contact with the right front cover 10322 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be dispersed at the front and back positions. Thereby, the load resistance of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6455b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the right front cover 10322. Thereby, the lower edge of the right front cover 10322 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6455b or the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and collision with each other and rubbing can be prevented. Therefore, the generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The lower facing portion 6455 c is closer to the operation device 10300 (rear side, right front cover 103
Since the separation width with the lower plate of the main body 6451 is lengthened toward the side where the displacement of the 22 tends to increase, the allowance for the downward displacement of the right reinforcing rib 6455 itself can be increased, and the displacement can be increased. Collision with the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 can be avoided at the time of occurrence.

Therefore, since the right side reinforcing rib 6455 serves as a buffer member, the right front cover 10
It is possible to reduce the rate at which the displacement or load transmitted through 322 is transmitted to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451.

In the present embodiment, the downstream side of the right reinforcing rib 6455 starting from the right front cover 10322 (
The operation handle 51 is disposed on the lower right side, but the right reinforcing rib 6455 plays a role as a buffer member, so that the load, displacement and vibration accompanying operation and drive of the operation device 10300 The rate of transmission can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to secure the playability in which the player can freely operate the operation handle 51 without discomfort.

As shown in FIG. 228 (b), the left reinforcing rib 6456 is a plate-like portion extending from the groove bottom of the main portion 6451 to the back side, and is a joint portion coupled to the upper plate of the main portion 6451. 645
6a and an upper facing portion 6 oppositely disposed parallel to the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 to form a gap
456 b and an overhanging portion 6456 projecting to the rear side more than the rear side edge of the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451
c and a lower facing portion 64 disposed opposite to the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451 in parallel to form a gap.
And 56d.

The upper facing portion 6456 b is a portion in which the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 is fitted between the upper facing portion of the main body portion 6451 and the load from the left front cover 10321 is transmitted. Main body 645
Since the upper facing portion 6456b is disposed substantially in parallel, contact with the left front cover 10321 at one point can be avoided, and the load can be dispersed at the front and back positions. As a result, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the gap between the upper facing portion 6456b and the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451 is formed to be equal to the thickness of the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321. Thereby, the lower edge portion of the left front cover 10321 after fitting can be prevented from separating from the upper facing portion 6456b or the upper plate portion of the main body portion 6451, and collision with each other and rubbing can be prevented. Therefore, the generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

The overhanging portion 6456c is in a direction away from the upper surface portion of the main body portion 6451 toward the back surface side (
With the upper edge sloping downward). As a result, the overhanging portion 6456c is moved to the left front cover 103.
It is not a portion always in contact with the lower edge portion 21 but formed as a portion only in contact when the amount of downward displacement of the left front cover 10321 is increased to a certain extent. That is, the overhang portion 6456c
When the amount of displacement of the left front cover 10321 becomes abnormally large, it can function as a portion (fail safe) for suppressing the displacement.

The upper surface of the overhanging portion 6456c may be formed at the same position as the upper surface of the upper facing portion 6456b. In this case, since the length of the front and rear positions at which the load transmitted through the left front cover 10321 can be dispersed can be increased, the load resistance of the left reinforcing rib 6456 can be further increased.

The lower facing portion 6456d is a portion that comes in contact with the upper surface of the rear cover portion 10014b when the rear cover portion 10014b (see FIG. 212) of the front frame 10014 is inserted between the lower facing portion and the lower plate portion of the main body portion 6451. It is. Since the lower opposing portions 6456d of the left reinforcing ribs 6456 abut the rear lining portion 10014b, the transmitted load can be dispersed, and the amount of downward displacement of the rear lining portion 10014b can be reduced. .

This makes it easy to maintain the arrangement of the rear lining portion 10014b, so the space above the lower plate 50 (a space where balls are stored and a space where the player may put his hand in)
Can be prevented from being narrowed.

That is, the rear covering portion 10014 b is provided with the left front cover 10321 through the V-shaped design member 6450.
It is possible to prevent the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 side through the left front cover 10321 from displacing the rear covering portion 10014b. As a result, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the surface constituting the lower tray 50 is displaced and collides with the gaming ball to generate abnormal noise.

As described above, the left reinforcing rib 6456 is densely arranged on the right reinforcing rib as compared to the arranging distance of 6455. Therefore, it is comprised so that it can respond to a bigger load.
In the present embodiment, the weight of the player's hand touching the ball stored in the upper plate 17 disposed on the left side is easily put on, and uneven load is likely to occur on the left and right. By arranging them, it is possible to cope with uneven load.

As described above, in the present embodiment, by making the shapes of the right side reinforcing rib 6455 and the left side reinforcing rib 6456 different, it is possible to cope with loads of different modes. That is, in the right side reinforcing rib 6455, a sufficient gap is formed between the lower plate portion and the lower facing portion 6455c of the main body portion 6451 to block transmission of the load, thereby instantaneous load or impact via the operation device 10300. Can be prevented from being transmitted to the operating handle 51, while the left reinforcing rib 6456 can support the load in a distributed manner, so that even if weight is applied for a long time through the upper plate 17, the The covering portion 10014 b can be prevented from being displaced. As described above, in the present embodiment, the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 64 can be used to cope with load modes that are likely to be problematic.
We have designed 56 shapes.

FIG. 229 (a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 229 (b) is a front view of the lower tray unit 6400, and FIG. 230 (a) is a bottom view of the lower tray unit 6400. 230 (b) is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400, FIG. 231 (a) is a right side view of the lower tray unit 6400 in the arrow L direction, and FIG. 231 (b) is a lower tray unit It is a left view in the arrow R direction view of 6400.

As shown in FIGS. 229 (a) and 230 (b), the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is disposed in such a manner as to straddle the concave shape portion 6414 of the covering foundation member 6410 to the left and right. The plate-like support portion 6426 is placed in a manner to be in surface contact with the upper portion of the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411, and is disposed away from the concave shape portion 6414. The details of the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 will be described below.

The projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are the main body portion 641 of the covering foundation member 6410.
Similar to the deformation in the case where a part of 1 is pressed from above, it is a part that constitutes the front and back of the part that bulges downward (extends) from the lower surface, and one shape of the front and back is similar to the other ing. In other words, the outer shape of the projecting shape portion 6413 in the lower surface view and the inner shape of the recessed shape portion 6414 in the upper surface view are formed as the shape whose scale is changed by the amount that can secure the plate thickness of the main portion 6411 Ru. Therefore, the shape of the other can be easily imagined from one shape.

As shown in FIG. 230 (a), the width of the protruding portion 6413 gradually increases toward the front side. And as shown to FIG. 229 (a), the plate-shaped support part 64 of the lower plate formation member 6420
26 is disposed closer to the front side than the center in the front-rear direction of the recessed portion 6414, and therefore supports the plate-like support portion 6426 at a location where the lateral width of the projecting portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 is large. be able to. As a result, when the plate-like support portion 6426 is displaced so as to sink downward, the main body portion 6411 can be partially bent sufficiently, which will be described in detail later.

Here, in the playable state, the operation device 10300 is placed on the plate-like support portion 6426, and the plate-like support portion 642 is operated by the player operating the operation device 10300.
6 can be displaced up and down. In relation to this displacement, the plate-like support 6426 and the main body 6411 are made of a resin material, and the plate-like support 6426 and the main body 64 of the covering base member 6410 are provided.
If a load is generated between itself and 11 or if it collides with or rubs against it, shavings may be generated.

If shavings are generated around the operation device 10300, for example, shavings may enter the gap and a clearance can not be secured, which may cause an operation failure or shavings may enter the detection area of the detection sensor to cause erroneous detection. It is desirable to suppress the generation of shavings because it is conceivable to do so.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by reducing the contact area between the plate-like support portion 6426 and the main body portion 6411, it is possible to suppress the generation of shavings or to reduce the generation amount thereof.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support 6426 and the main body 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed. This is based on the purpose of preventing the displacement of the plate-like support 6426 from being directly transmitted to the main body 6411.

That is, a load in the push-down direction is given to the operation device 10300, and the plate-like support 6426
In the case of the downward displacement, since the displacement is received by the projecting portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414, the displacement of the other portions such as the main portion 6411 can be made unnecessary.

On the other hand, a load in the lifting direction is given to the operation device 10300, and the plate-like support portion 642
When 6 is displaced upward, the displacement is received by the plate-like projecting portion 6453R (see FIG. 232) and converted into the deformation of the V-shaped design member 6450, so displacement of other portions such as the main portion 6411 etc. Can be unnecessary.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the plate-like support 6426 and the main body 6411 are not directly fastened and fixed, but the load applied to the operation device 10300 is indirectly transmitted to the main body 6411. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the main body portion 6411 from being deformed or damaged.

As shown in FIGS. 231 (a) and 231 (b), the lower surface of the projecting portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, while the lower surface of the main portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 is
It is formed as an inclined plane which inclines upward as it goes to the front side. This configuration works suitably, for example, when storing the front frame 10014 alone.

When the front frame 10014 is stored alone, it is generally considered that the front frame 10014 is often placed on a floor of concrete or flooring in such a manner that the lower surface of the front frame 10014 abuts on the floor. At this time, it is considered preferable that the entire lower surface abuts on the floor from the viewpoint of stability and avoidance of concentration of load, but in this case, there is a possibility that the soil on the floor adheres to the entire lower surface. The lower surface of the main body 6411 is a position where it is difficult for the player to see, but as long as it is a product, it is preferable to avoid the adhesion of dirt.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the lower surface of the projecting portion 6413 is formed as a flat surface along the front-rear direction, and the lower surface of the main portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines upward as it goes to the front side. When the shaped portion 6413 abuts on the floor surface, a gap is generated between the floor surface and the lower surface of the main body portion 6411. Therefore, a portion where the soil surface abuts and dirt adheres is a projecting shape portion 6413
It can be limited to Therefore, when installing the front frame 10014 in a game-ready state, the gaming shop side only needs to wipe off the dirt of the projecting shape portion 6413, and it becomes unnecessary to wipe the entire lower surface of the main portion 6411 .

In addition, the projecting shape portion 6413 also functions as a finger hooking portion to hold a finger when carrying the front frame 10014. In the past, the lower tray portion was arranged at the left and right center of the front frame, so it is easy to hook your hand to the lower tray portion to lift the front frame and assemble it to the frame behind (outer frame 11, inner frame 12) Although it was possible, in the front frame 10014 of the present embodiment, the lower plate 50 is disposed on the left side (the opening and closing axis side) in the left-right direction, so the hand is hooked to the lower plate 50 and the front frame 10014 is lifted.
It is considered to be difficult to assemble.

On the other hand, if the front frame 10014 is lifted by catching the hand on the operation handle 51, the weight of the front frame 10014 will be put on the root side of the operation handle 41, so there is a risk that the operation handle 51 may be damaged. Is not desirable.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the front frame 100 is hooked to the bottom of the lower tray unit 6400.
Protruding features 641 that also function as finger rests so that lifting 14 can be recommended
3 is placed at the left and right center position. The operator can easily assemble the front frame 10014 to the rear frame by hooking a hand on the projecting shape portion 6413 and lifting the front frame 10014 and pivotally supporting the front frame 10014 to the rear frame.

And by setting it as the work procedure which put in the work of wiping off the dirt before and after the time of putting a finger,
It is possible to make the operator aware of the location where the dirt needs to be wiped away in connection with the operation. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the dirt from being wiped off.

Here, the gap between the floor surface and the main body portion 6411 is configured as a gap that is not excessive or insufficient corresponding to the magnitude of the deformation amount expected for the projecting shape portion 6413. More specifically, from the shape of the lower surface of the main body portion 6411, the gap with the floor increases as it goes to the front side, which is wider as the projecting shape portion 6413 goes to the front side This corresponds to the fact that the amount of deformation (the amount of deflection) due to the load is increased.

That is, when the front frame 10014 is placed on the floor surface, the projecting shape portion 6413 is a front frame 10014.
Even in the case of bending deformation due to the weight, it is easy to secure the gap between the lower surface of the main body 6411 and the floor. On the other hand, when the projecting shape portion 6413 is bent and deformed to the limit and the gap between the lower surface of the main body portion 6411 and the floor surface disappears, the entire lower surface of the main body portion 6411 easily contacts the floor surface. Since it is possible, the weight of the front frame 10014 can be supported by the entire lower surface of the main body 6411.

Therefore, even if the front frame 10014 placed on the floor weighs more than expected or an excessive load is applied to the front frame 10014 placed on the floor, part of the main body 6411 It is possible to prevent the concentration of load on the

In addition, it is possible to form a larger amount of deformation toward the front side of the projecting portion 6413. It works well even during game play. For example, at the time of replacement of a two-storied box, a store clerk in a game shop slides the two-scene box back and forth in the lower surface of the main body 6411 and the lower side of the projecting shape portion 6413. It may collide. If the impact or load due to the collision is accumulated in the component as fatigue, the component may be broken (for example, split) when the allowable amount is exceeded, and it may be difficult to continue the game. There is.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the projecting shape portion 64 is closer to the front side which is likely to collide with the two-sided box.
The variable amount of 13 is configured to be large. Therefore, an impact or load due to a collision with the one-piece box can be easily released by deformation (flexural deformation), and breakage of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to easily maintain the player's comfortable gaming environment.

Further, on the left and right sides of the projecting portion 6413, the lower bottom surface of the main body 6411 is formed to be inclined in a manner of being raised toward the front side (see FIG. 231 (a)). Thus, the possibility of collision between the main box 6411 and the main box 6411 can be reduced on the left and right sides of the projecting portion 6413 when the second box is replaced. Thus, the possibility of breakage of the lower bottom surface of the main body 6411 can be reduced, so that the player's comfortable gaming environment can be easily maintained.

FIG. 232 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 6400. In FIG. 232, the assembled state of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 is illustrated, and other operation devices 1
The outline of 0300 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines.

As illustrated in FIG. 232, the lower edges of the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 correspond to the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 of the V-shaped design member 6450 (upper facing portions 6455b and 64, respectively).
56b (see FIGS. 228 (a) and 228 (b)).

The main body portion 6451 of the V-shaped design member 6450 is formed in a V-shape in a rear view, and the reinforcing rib 645 is formed.
Because 5, 6 and 456 are in the form of a plate extending in the groove width direction of the main body portion 6451, the reinforcing rib 6455 is
, 6456 are directed in a direction (upper diagonal direction) having a direction component for returning the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 to the left and right center. For example, reinforcing ribs 6455, 6
The restoring force from the bending deformation of 456 is directed obliquely upward.

Thus, not only the displacement of the operation device 10300 in the vertical direction, but also the displacement in the lateral direction can be coped with. For example, as in the present embodiment, even if the movement direction of the operation portion (for example, the swing operation member 10310) of the operation device 10300 does not have a horizontal direction component, the downward load given by the player is A directional component may be provided, and when such a load is applied, the entire operation device 10300 may be downwardly displaced and may be slightly displaced (oscillated) in the lateral direction.

On the other hand, the left front cover 10321 and the right side cover 10322 can respond to the displacement of the operation device 10300 in the left-right direction by bending deformation based on the curved shape of the left front cover (absorb the displacement in the left-right direction or The arrangement of the operation device 10300 can be returned), and further, the reaction device 10300 can be returned to the pre-displacement position early by the reaction force from the reinforcing ribs 6455 and 6456 pointing upward and to the left and right center. Therefore, the design (see FIG. 207) in the front view of the front frame 10014 can be easily maintained.

FIG. 233 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along line CCXXXIIIa-CCXXXIIIa in FIG. 229 (a), and FIG. 233 (b) is a CCX in FIG. 229 (a).
FIG. 233 (c) is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along line CCXXXIIIc-CCXXXIIIc in FIG. 229 (a). In FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c),
The vicinity of the edge of the through hole 6412 in the cross section is shown enlarged.

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), in the assembled state of the lower tray unit 6400, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 is a protrusion of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 at the lower plate forming member 6420 It is pressed against the installed end (lower end) and the ball discharging device 6430 (the collar 6431 a thereof). Thus, the peripheral portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced by the strength of the lower plate forming member 6420 and the ball discharging device 6430.

The inner side surface of the L-shaped plate portion 6423 (see FIG. 225) of the lower plate forming member 6420 is a fitting frame portion 64.
34 (refer to FIG. 224) and is formed in a shape that can contact in the front, rear, left and right direction from the outside,
As described above, the lower end portion 423 abuts on the edge portion of the through hole 6412 in the top-bottom direction (see FIG. 233C). Thus, the edge portion of the through hole 6412 can be reinforced, and the design freedom of the through hole 6412 can be improved.

As described above, when the ball release lever 52 is not operated, the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6
Since it will be arrange | positioned between it and 432, the degree to which intensity | strength falls by having formed opening can be reduced by the rigidity of the obstruction board part 52b (refer FIG. 233 (b)).

This can prevent the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 from becoming fragile,
As in the present embodiment, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 is lowered while adopting a configuration in which the discharge port 6422 and the bottom port 6432 are disposed near the lower portion of the operation device 10300 (disposed in proximity to the operation device 10300). Can be prevented.

As shown in FIGS. 233 (a) to 233 (c), the shape of the recessed portion 6414 is formed in such a manner that the width becomes wider and the depth of the recessed increases toward the front side. That is, the recessed portion 6414 is formed so as to be easily bent as it goes to the front side.

As a result, the concave shape portion 6414 can be provided with sufficient bending performance near the front side where the load generated when the player operates the operation device 10300 tends to be large. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where the covering base member 6410 supporting the operation device 10300 is broken (for example, broken) by the load. This will be described in detail.

As described above, the operation device 10300 is a device that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes. The operation timing and the operation mode are notified by a display device or the like, and the player operates the operation device 10300 in accordance with the notification, and has a role of drawing the player into the game. Here, the frequency for each operation mode in the notification is not constant.

For example, as an example of control, the swinging operation member 10310 is stop-controlled to the initial position from the start of the game until the specific reach effect is executed (see FIG. 215A). This state occupies most of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 in business hours.

In this state, a notification prompting an operation in the display effect (a notification such as "press a button!")
The player performs a pressing operation (pushing operation) of the lens member 10317 in order to perform an operation on the object, switching of the stage, and the like. Therefore, most of the load generated with the operation is the load generated when the lens member 10317 is pressed and operated, and the direction Y17a (see FIG. 2).
15 (a)). Since the frequency of occurrence of notification is high, the frequency of occurrence of this load is high.

On the other hand, when a specific reach effect is executed, the operation device 10300 is drive-controlled to displace the swing operation member 10310 up and down, and for example, the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the downward position. In the condition (see FIG. 215 (b)), notification to prompt the operation is executed.

The operation direction in this case is a direction Y17b which is further inclined by an angle θ17y in the front-rear direction as compared with the state in which the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the upward position (see FIG. 215 (b))
The load along the direction Y17b is generated. The occurrence frequency of notification is low since the occurrence of notification is limited to the time of specific reach effect execution.

That is, the occurrence frequency of the load along the direction Y17a is controlled to be higher than the occurrence frequency of the load along the direction Y17b. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the recessed portion 6
The width of the shape 414 is increased toward the front side, and the recess depth is increased. Therefore, the load response performance is increased as the front side is increased.

That is, compared to the case where the shape is made common in the front and back direction, it can be configured to be able to cope with the difference in load occurrence frequency at a suitable place, causing excessive deformation due to the applied load or insufficient deformation. It can be made easy to avoid becoming easy to be damaged.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the side closer to the player and the side where the load occurrence frequency at the time of operation is high are both on the front side, the concave shape portion 6414 is wider as it goes to the front side Although it was formed deep, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the initial position of the swinging operation member 10310 is set to the downward position, the occurrence frequency of the load at the time of operation is reversed. In this case, the concave shape is wider as it goes to the back side By forming in deep bottom, compared with the case where common shape is made in the front and back direction, it can be configured to be able to cope with the difference in the occurrence frequency of the load in place, and too much deformation is caused by the applied load. It is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of or the occurrence of insufficient deformation and breakage.

As shown in FIG. 233 (b) corresponding to the center cross section of the resin member 6427, the hanging plate portion 64
26 b vertically abuts on the main body 6411 at a position outside the left and right width ends of the recessed portion 6414 at the left and right sides.

Thereby, the ratio of the load transmitted from the operation device 10300 to the concave shape portion 6414 can be reduced compared to the case where the hanging plate portion 6426b abuts on the upper edge portion of the concave shape portion 6414. . Accordingly, damage due to a load when operating the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

Also, as a response to the load, not only the deflection of the recessed portion 6414 but also the recessed portion 6
The deflection of the plate-like portion from the upper edge portion of 414 to the contact position of the hanging plate-like portion 6426 b and the main body portion 6411 can also be used, so the allowable amount of load can be increased.

FIG. 234 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 6400 taken along line CCXXXIV-CCXXXIV of FIG. 229 (a). As shown in FIG. 234, the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is a flat plate-like portion 6426 a on which the resin member 6427 is placed, and the flat plate-like portion 6 thereof.
A hanging plate-like portion 6426b hanging downward from left and right and rear edges of the 426a in a plate shape and a portion connected to the front side edge of the flat plate-like portion 6426a and formed taller than the flat plate-like portion 6426a It mainly includes a front longitudinal part 6426c whose lower side is opened, and a fitting part 6426d which extends from the front longitudinal part 6426c to the back side and is fitted with the operation device 10300. In the description of FIG. 234, FIGS. 224 to 229 will be appropriately referred to.

The flat plate-like portion 6426 a is formed wider than the lateral width of the recessed portion 6414 and configured to cover the front half of the recessed portion 6414. A drooping plate-like portion 6426 b is formed between the flat plate-like portion 6426 a and the main body portion 6411 of the covering base member 6410 (between the upper and lower sides).
That is, the flat plate-like portion 6426a is not in contact with the main body portion 6411, and is formed in a U-shape in a bottom view (
When the extending end of the hanging plate-like portion 6426b abuts on the main body 6411 (see FIG. 225), the position of the flat plate-like portion 6426a with respect to the covering foundation member 6410 is determined.

Thus, the planar plate portion 6426a and the depending plate portion 6426b are not block-shaped,
Since the lower side is formed in a box-like shape, the flat plate-like portion 6426a and the hanging plate-like portion 6426 are formed.
b is configured to be easily bent and deformed. Therefore, not only the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 of the main body portion 6411 are bent and deformed with respect to the load via the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 211), but also the flat plate portion 6426a and the hanging plate portion 6426b can also be bent and deformed, and the plate-like support 6426 and the covering base member 6410 (the main body 6411, the projecting shape 6413, and the recessed shape 6414) disposed below the operation device 10300 Damage can be further prevented.

The hanging plate-like portion 6426 b is extended to the upper surface of the bottom portion of the main body portion 6411, but is not extended until it enters the recessed portion 6414. That is, there is a space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed portion 6414 (see the lower part of the rear end of the flat plate-like portion 6426a in FIG. 234). Thus, a state in which there is no framework inside the recessed portion 6414 can be maintained, so that deformation of the protruding portion 6413 can be prevented from being inhibited.

In addition, the space between the hanging plate-like portion 6426b and the recessed portion 6414 also plays a role of draining water. For example, even when the liquid intrudes from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid transmitted to the back side of the plate-like support 6426 can enter the front of the recessed portion 6414 Therefore, it is possible to weaken the back flow of the liquid. In this way, it is possible to make it easy for the front frame 10014 to stop the penetration of the liquid.

The front longitudinal portion 6426c is an operation device 1 by a fitting portion 6426d extending to the back side.
The lower part of the front side is supported by the V-shaped design member 6450. Thus, the load given to the operation device 10300 by the player is
Since the load can be dispersed by receiving not only 411 but also the V-shaped design member 6450, the load given to each configuration can be weakened.

In addition, a space is also generated between the front longitudinal portion 6426 c and the recessed portion 6414. As a result, it is possible to maintain a state in which there is no framework inside the concave shape portion 6414,
The deformation of the projecting shape portion 6413 can be prevented from being inhibited.

In addition, the space between the front longitudinal portion 6426c and the recessed portion 6414 also plays a role of draining water. For example, even when the liquid intrudes from the gap between the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 6400, the liquid transmitted to the back side of the plate-like support 6426 can enter the front of the recessed portion 6414 Therefore, it is possible to weaken the back flow of the liquid. In this way, it is possible to make it easy for the front frame 10014 to stop the penetration of the liquid.

The fitting portion 6426d is a portion elongated in the lateral direction so as to be able to be fitted to the fitting recess De1 (see FIG. 212), and is a portion that receives a load from the operation device 10300. The fitting portion 6426 d includes a pair of plate-like reinforcing ribs 6426 d 1 coupled to the lower surface and the front longitudinal portion 6426 c formed on the extension base end side.

The reinforcement rib 6426d1 can suppress the vertical displacement (deformation) of the fitting portion 6426d, and therefore, the rigidity of the fitting portion 6426d can endure even when a load for displacing the operation device 10300 is applied. As a result, displacement of the operation device 10300 can be prevented from occurring excessively.

Here, the operation member 10300 is placed on the upper side of the resin member 6427. Therefore, the load accompanying the operation and vibration of the operation member 10300 by the player is the plate-like support portion 642 via the resin member.
The plate-like support 6426 is supported on the bottom of the main body 6411 (see FIG. 233).

In the present embodiment, the bottom surface of the main body portion 6411 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines upward as it goes to the front side (see FIG. 234), so the front and back of the direction of the load transmitted from the operation member 10300 to the main body portion 6411 The directional component can be turned to the front side (the load can be released to the front side).

That is, it is possible to avoid a problem that may occur due to the load generated from the operation device 10300 being transmitted to the rear side (the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12 side). For example, the game board 13 (see FIG. 2) may shake and affect the flow-down mode of the fired ball, or the substrate box 10
It is possible to prevent a problem such as cracking of the substrate due to the load being transmitted to 0 to 104 or the electronic substrate.

Next, with reference to FIG. 235 to FIG. 264, the upper effect device 6500 will be described. FIG. 235 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG. 236 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front frame 10014. In FIG. 235 and FIG. 236, the lower tray unit 640 described above
Illustration of 0 and the operation device 10300 is omitted, and the upper effect device 6500 is a metal main body 10
The state of being disassembled forward from 014a is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 235, the upper effect device 6500 is an acoustic device 661 arranged in a pair on the left and right.
An electric decoration board 657 which is a device for covering the front side of 0 and in which light emitting means such as LEDs are disposed.
0, and each component member serving as an intermediary for delivering the light emitted from the LED to the player.

As shown in FIG. 236, on the back side of the upper rendering device 6500, a plate-like metal spring member (leaf spring) 6584d that generates an urging force in the separating direction with the metal main body 10014a is disposed.
Thereby, the fastening force of the fastening screw which fixes upper production device 6500 to metal main part 10014a can be increased (stably fastened and fixed).

FIG. 237 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 238 is an upper effect device 6.
FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of 500. In FIG. 237 and FIG. 238, the upper effect device 6500.
The upper lid member 6510 is illustrated in the state of being disassembled upward.

The upper effect device 6500 includes a plate-shaped upper lid member 6510, front units 6520 to 6550 occupying a front portion below the upper lid member 6510, and a front unit 6520 for the front units.
Rear units 6650 to 6580 disposed at the rear of 6550 are mainly provided.

The upper lid member 6510 is a member that covers the upper surface of the upper rendering device 6500 and is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014 a, and is a main plate configured as a semi-elliptical plate-like portion that divides an oval long in left and right Extending downward from the rear side portion of the main body plate portion 6511, and a plurality of insertion holes 6512 which are formed vertically in the vicinity of the front side edge portion of the main body plate portion 6511 and configured to be able to insert fastening screws. And a female screw hole is formed from the rear surface of the extended tip, and a plurality of fastening parts 6513 configured to be able to fasten a fastening screw inserted into the metal main body 10014a into the female screw hole
And mainly.

In the upper lid member 6510, the rear side portion where the fastening portion 6513 is extended is the metal main body portion 10014.
The other components of the upper effect device 6500 are supported by fastening screws fixed to a and inserted into the insertion holes 6512. That is, the mechanical rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 can be used to suppress the downward displacement of the front end side portion of the upper effect device 6500.

The fastening portion 6513 is a plate-like plate portion 6513 connected to the main body plate portion 6511 on the front side.
a. Accordingly, it is possible to suppress deformation or displacement in a manner in which the main body plate portion 6511 falls forward.

The fastening portion 6513 is inserted into the acoustic device 6610, and the plate portion 6513 is disposed to face the front surface of the plate on which the insertion hole of the acoustic device 6610 is formed. With such a configuration (see the corresponding FIG. 125 (a) described above, the fastening portion 419 is the fastening portion 6513, and the plate portion 6513a is the expanding rib 4).
The upper cover member 6510 can prevent the acoustic device 6610 from being detached from the metal main body 10014 a.

The upper lid member 6510 is recessed from the upper surface to the lower surface side, and a concavo-convex portion 6514 formed in a manner of projecting downward from the lower surface is formed as a decoration on the entire surface. This uneven portion 651
As compared with the case where the upper lid member 6510 having the same thickness is formed of a flat plate having a smooth surface, the force to resist the load in the direction perpendicular to the surface can be increased (the shape can be easily maintained). it can).

FIG. 239 is an exploded front perspective view of the upper effect device 6500, and FIG. 240 is an upper effect device 6
FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of 500. In FIG. 239 and FIG. 240, the upper effect device 6500
The upper lid member 6510 is not shown, and the front unit 6520-6550 is shown in the state of being disassembled in front of the rear unit 6650-6580. In the present embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 are directed obliquely downward to the rear units 6650 to 6580
The upper rendering device 6500 can be disassembled by moving it in the direction in which the extending plate portion 6552 is formed and the direction along the surface), but the details will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the front units 6520 to 6550 have a function of receiving, refracting, and transmitting light emitted from light emitting means such as an LED, and the rear unit 6650 to 6550.
6580 has a role as light emitting means such as an LED or the like, and a role supporting an electric decoration substrate on which the light emitting means such as an LED is disposed. First, the rear units 6500 to 6580 will be described in detail.

FIG. 241 (a) is a front view of the rear units 6500 to 6580, and FIG. 241 (b).
Fig. 242 is a front view of the electric decoration substrate 6570, Fig. 242 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear units 6560 to 6580, and Fig. 243 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear units 6650 to 6580.

As shown in FIGS. 241 to 243, the rear units 6560 to 6580 are formed of partition members 6560 formed to partition the inner space into a plurality in a front view, and a plurality of LEDs for emitting light to the partition members 6560. A pair of an electric decoration substrate 6570 arranged and a pair of layers arranged on the back side of the partitioning member 6560 and having a slight clearance with respect to the electric decoration substrate 6570 in the inner area of the outer shape And a back support member 6580.

Note that to support the surface in a state where there is a slight gap, it is possible to maintain the posture of the electric decoration substrate 6570, and support it so as to be displaceable back and forth by the gap between the partitioning member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580. It means that.

The partitioning member 6560 is disposed close to and facing the front side of the electric decoration substrate 6570.
It is comprised so that the light irradiated from each illumination part 6574-6576 of 570 may be sectioned from electric decoration board 6570 vicinity. By partitioning in this manner, the light emitted from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 can be visually recognized for each of the partitions, and the light emission aspect of the light irradiated from each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 is largely different. Also, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player.

The partitioning member 6560 includes an opposing plate portion 6561 arranged to face the electric decoration substrate 6570, a central light hole 6562 bored in the left and right center portions of the opposing plate portion 6561, and an opposing plate portion 656.
A left and right light hole 6563 drilled in the left and right lower portions of 1, a plurality of fastening portions 6564 to which fastening screws inserted into the back surface support member 6580 are fastened, and a pair of extension portions extending to the back surface of the opposing plate portion 6561 Opposite plate portion 6561 in the form of a rectangular cylinder surrounding large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 and central light hole 6562
A central tubular portion 6566 extending to the front side of the front and back, left and right tubular portions 6567 extending to the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561 in a long tubular shape surrounding the left and right light holes 6563; It mainly includes a plate-like coupling portion 6568 which is formed of a plate-like portion and which couples the opposing plate portion 6561, the central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portion 6567 on the front side of the opposing plate portion 6561.

The opposing plate portion 6561 is a flange portion 6 projecting from the upper edge thereof to the back side in a laterally long shape.
561a-6561c. The first flange portion 6561 a is formed above the central light hole 6562. The second flange portion 6561 b is formed by a left and right pair, and the first flange portion 6
It extends from the position where a cut is made from the left and right end portions of 561 a to the vicinity of the fastening portion 6564.
The third flange portion 6561 c is formed as a left and right pair, and extends from the position opposite to the end portion of the second flange portion 6561 b across the fastening portion 6564 to the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the plate-like coupling portion 6568.

Each flange portion 6561a to 6561c has a role as a shielding plate for preventing light from entering and exiting from between the dividing member 6560 and the electric decoration substrate 6570, and the cut is disposed at least on the electric decoration substrate 6570 The light emitted from the LED is configured to be less likely to leak. In other words, even if light is incident from the outside, this portion is a portion where the light is not easily mixed with the light emitted from the LED.

The cut between the first flange portion 6561a and the second flange portion 6561b is formed at a position between the central light hole 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563, and the electric decorative substrate 6 is dare
In 570, a portion where the LED is not disposed is a break. Therefore, since there is no LED that causes light leakage in the first place, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which light leaks from a break.

The cut between the second flange portion 6561 b and the third flange portion 6561 c is a fastening portion 65.
64 is formed in the place where it is arranged, and the place where the alternative part which blocks light is arranged is intentionally cut. That is, even if the light travels to the break, the light passing through the break is blocked by the fastening portion 6564, so it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the light leaks from the break.

Here, although the flanges 6561a to 6561c can be configured as a continuous series of parts, in that case, the rigidity of the flanges 6561a to 6561c can not be sufficiently secured, and the downward load applied to the dividing member 6560 It is necessary to counteract only with the force generated by the fastening screw that fastens the fastening portion 6564 to (the downward load on the member arranged forward of the partitioning member 6560, the gravity and the load given by the player). Will occur. In the present embodiment, as the number of fastening portions 6564 increases, not only the number of operation steps for fastening the fastening screws increases, but also the surface area of the electric decoration board 6570 decreases, and the places where the LEDs can be arranged are limited. It will reduce the design freedom of the 6570.

On the other hand, by dividing the flanges 6561a to 6561c to a length sufficient to ensure rigidity, the rigidity of the flanges 6561a to 6561c can counter the downward load applied to the dividing member 6560. Therefore, the number of fastening portions 6564 can be limited, and the number of operation steps can be reduced, and the design freedom of the electric decoration board 6570 can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the length in the longitudinal direction is designed according to the degree of rigidity required for the flange portions 6561a to 6561c. In the present embodiment, the shape of the upper effect device 6500 is
It is formed of a semi-elliptical shape in which the width in the front-rear direction becomes longer as it goes to the left and right center in top view (
See Figure 237). Generally, the load given by the player (for example, the hanging load) is applied at the front end of the upper rendering device 6500, so the maximum load given by the player at the left and right central portions of the upper rendering device 6500 is maximum. And become smaller gradually toward the left and right ends.

On the other hand, the flange portions 6561a to 6561c are dare different in length. Specifically, the left and right lengths of the second flange portion 6561b disposed on the left and right sides of the first flange portion 6561a formed in the central portion where the load is maximum are made longer,
Further, the third flange portion 6561c disposed on the left and right sides of the second flange portion 6561b is longer than the left and right length of the second flange portion 6561b. That is, the left and right lengths are shortest at the left and right center portions,
It gets longer gradually toward the left and right ends. As a result, it is possible to generate a counteracting force on the load given to the upper rendering device 6500 without excess or deficiency.

Thereby, since the deformation and displacement of the dividing member 6560 can be suppressed, the relative relationship (positional relationship) between the dividing member 6560 and the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be stably maintained. In addition, the maintenance of the relative relationship (positional relationship) depends on the deformation or displacement of the separation direction, and the electric decorative substrate 657
Not only when the force to hold 0 is reduced to prevent displacement of the electric decoration substrate 6570, a load in the compression direction is generated on the electric decoration substrate 6570 due to deformation or displacement in the approaching direction, and the electric decoration substrate 6570 is destroyed It also includes the case of preventing deformation.

The central light holes 6562 and the left and right light holes 6563 are LEDs disposed on the electric decoration substrate 6570.
The plurality of through holes are provided corresponding to the pattern of. The central light hole 6562 is a single L
The left and right light holes 6563 are configured as a set of through holes slightly larger than the outer shape of the ED,
It is configured as a set of through holes sized to surround a plurality of LEDs.

The fastening portion 6564 is fastened and fixed to the front plate portion 6581 of the back surface support member 6580, and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is formed to project to the back side more than the fastening portion 6564. Thus, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the positioning hole 6581 b of the front plate portion 6581, and the partitioning member 6560
And the back support member 6580 are aligned.

The large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 has a front side cylindrical portion extended to the front side in a cylindrical shape of the same diameter, and has an insertion hole 6565a drilled so as to be able to insert a fastening screw at the bottom of its tip. This insertion hole 656
A fastening screw passing through the inside of the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted from the rear surface side to 5a, and the fastening screw is fastened and fixed to a partition unit 6540 described later. By being configured like this,
The process of inserting a fastening screw into the insertion hole 6565a and screwing it into the partition unit 6540 can be performed in the assembled state of the rear units 6650 to 6580 (see FIGS. 239 and 240).

The central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 are extended until reaching the rear end of the front units 6520 to 6550. Therefore, most (or all) of the light passing through the central cylindrical portion 6566 and the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 is incident on the front units 6520-6550.

The plate-like coupling portion 6568 is a portion to which the load is transmitted through the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237) when a load (for example, a hanging load) is applied to the upper rendering device 6500. The upper surface is disposed at a position slightly higher than the upper end of the. As a result, the plate-like joint 6568 takes charge of the load prior to the central cylindrical portion 6566. Therefore, the central cylindrical portion 6566 can be prevented from being subjected to a load, and the central cylindrical portion 6566 is deformed or displaced. Can be easily avoided.

The plate-like joint 6568 extends downward until the plate-like portion reaches the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. Thus, when the load is transmitted to the plate-like joint 6568 via the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237), the load is also countered by the resistance generated by the plate-like portion reaching the left and right cylindrical portions 6567. can do. In this case, because the plate-like portion is formed, the opposing force can be generated by the bending deformation of the plate-like portion itself, so that the displacement and deformation of the left and right cylindrical portions 6567 can be suppressed.

The electric decoration substrate 6570 is a so-called printed circuit board and is a plate-shaped substrate portion 6571 and a portion which is drilled or cut out in the substrate portion 6571 and a fastening portion 656 of the dividing member 6560.
4 is inserted, a large diameter insertion portion 6573 which is inserted in the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the dividing member 6560 which is bored in the substrate portion 6571, and a plurality of members are disposed in the left and right center portions of the substrate portion 6571 First illumination unit 6574 formed of the LEDs (shown as rectangles that are uniform in FIG. 241 (b)) and a plurality of LEs disposed symmetrically with respect to the first illumination unit 6574
A second illumination unit 6575 formed from the upper and lower center portions of the substrate unit 6571,
A third lighting unit 6576 disposed in left-right symmetry along the lower end of the substrate unit 6571 and a connector 6577 for connecting an electrical wiring (not shown) are mainly included.

As shown in FIGS. 241 (a) and 241 (b), each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 is formed of a plurality of LEDs capable of emitting light on the front side along the front-rear direction, and is relative to the partitioning member 6560 It is arranged according to the specific positional relationship. That is, the first lighting unit 6574 is located at a position corresponding to the central light hole 6562, the second lighting unit 6575 is located at the position surrounded by the left and right light holes 6563, and the third lighting unit 6576 is below the partitioning member 6560. They are respectively arranged at positions below the edge. Thus, each of the lighting units 6574 to 6576 illuminates the separate area divided by the dividing member 6560. While the first lighting unit 6574 and the second lighting unit 6575 light the area inside the dividing member 6560, the third lighting unit 6576 is different from the dividing member 6560.
Shine the area outside the

The third lighting unit 6576 is illustrated as partially blocked by the dividing member 6560 in a front view. As described later, the light emitted from the third illumination unit 6576 is a light receiving member 65.
Since the light travels obliquely downward by 58, it is possible to avoid the situation where the light irradiated from the third lighting unit 6576 is blocked by the dividing member 6560, and thereby the third lighting unit 6576
And the partition member 6560 can be disposed so as to at least partially overlap in the front-rear direction.

The thickness of the substrate portion 6571 is the same as the fastening portion 65 of the dividing member 6560 in the fastening insertion portion 6572.
It is designed by the dimension which the fastening force in the fastening with 64 and the back surface support member 6580 does not act. That is, the electric decoration substrate 6570 is not fastened and fixed, but the partitioning member 6560 and the back support member 65
Supported between 80 and.

The fastening insertion portion 6572 is formed from a longitudinally long oval shape (or a shape obtained by halving an oval) in front view. Although this can improve the assembly efficiency, the details will be described later.

The back surface support member 6580 is a member that covers the acoustic device 6610 from the front side, is a pair of members configured in a substantially symmetrical shape, and is a front plate portion 6 disposed to face the electric decoration substrate 6570.
581, a flange portion 5882 extending from the upper edge of the front plate portion 6581 to the front side, and an upper plate portion extending in the form of a plate having the same plane as the upper surface of the flange portion 6582 6583
And a rear surface box portion 6584 formed in a box shape connected to the left and right edge portions (edge portions on the opposite side to the side facing the pair of members) of the front plate portion 6581 and the lower edge portion. A pair of back box 6
A lower surface box portion 6585 which is a portion of 584 and has a smooth upper surface close to the opposite rear surface box portion 6584 and is formed in a box shape opened downward, and the lower surface box portion 6585 and the front plate portion 65
81 is a plate-like portion connected to an opposing plate portion 6586 which is a plate-like portion connected to the other member (back surface supporting member 6580), and a cutting which vertically penetrates between the opposing plate portion 6586 and the lower surface box portion 6585 And a notch 6587 which is a notch.

The front plate portion 6581 is a plurality of support for fastening in which a combination of an oval rib capable of supporting the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 and an insertion hole through which a fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 6564 is inserted. It is a through hole formed from a vertically long oval shape having a horizontal width slightly longer than the diameter of the portion 6581a and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the dividing member 6560, and is disposed at a position overlapping the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the front and rear A plurality of screw insertion portions 6581c which can be inserted through fastening screws mainly formed in the lower edge portion forming the boundary between the plurality of positioning holes 6581b and the rear face box portion 6584 and for fastening and fixing the front units 6520 to 6550 The rear face box portion 658 is the same as the screw insertion portion 6581c.
Front side units 6520 to 6550 are formed in the shape of a long hole along the lower edge forming the boundary with 4
Holes for wiring which are drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of positioning elongated holes 6581d used for positioning the connector and the connector 6577 of the electric decoration board 6570 and through which the electric wiring can be passed back and forth
1e, and mainly.

The rib of the fastening support portion 6581 a has an inner width in the left-right direction that constitutes a minor axis, which corresponds to the partitioning member 656.
While the outer diameter of the zero fastening portion 6564 is slightly longer, the outer width in the left-right direction is the electric decoration substrate 65
The length is longer than the lateral width of the 70 fastening insertion portions 6572. Therefore, in the assembled state (see FIG. 235), the fastening portion 6564 is inserted into the inside of the oval shaped rib of the clamping support portion 6581a, and the electric decorative substrate 6570 is face-supported by the tip of the oval shaped rib (See FIG. 244 (a)).

The screw insertion portion 6581 c and the positioning long hole 6581 d are holes used for assembling the back surface support member 6580 and the front side units 6520 to 6550, and the front side unit 6520.
It is opened along the moving direction of ~ 6550. That is, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning elongated hole 6581d are formed to be inclined downward toward the front side (see FIGS. 244 (a) and 246 (b)).

The front units 6520-6550 have screw insertion portions 6581 c and positioning long holes 6581.
The assembly is assembled to the rear units 6560 to 6580 along the formed inclination direction of d, and the fastening screw is screwed along the direction of the descending inclination (see FIG. 247).

This makes it easier to avoid interference between the front units 6520 to 6550 and the electric decoration board 6570 compared to the case of opening in the front-rear direction, and the screw insertion portion 6581 c and the positioning long hole 65
Since the position of 81 d can be shifted to the electric decoration substrate 6570, when the front plate portion 6581 is formed to have the same size, the arrangement area of the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be secured widely, and
When the electric decoration substrate 6570 is formed to have the same size, the area in which the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed can be narrowed (can be formed compactly).

The flange portion 6582 is a portion in contact with the upper surface of the flange portions 6561 a to 6561 c of the dividing member 6560. When a load in the downward direction (load in the hanging direction) is applied to the dividing member 6560, the flange portion 6582 functions as a portion that suppresses the forward inclination of the dividing member 6560.

The upper plate portion 6583 is disposed at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 6513 (see FIG. 238), and includes a plurality of fitting recessed portions 6583a recessed so as to be fittable with the fastening portion 6513. Mating recess 6
The upper portion 583a is open at the upper side and the rear side, and is formed in a left-right direction rectangular shape (shape corresponding to the shape of the plate portion 6513a on the front side of the fastening portion 6513).

The rear face box portion 6584 is a sound transmission portion 6 made of a projecting portion 6584a projecting to the front side more than the front plate portion 6581 and a punching metal provided at an opening formed in the projecting portion 6584a.
584b, a light receiving portion 6584c formed of a light transmitting member disposed at the right end of the overhanging portion 6584a of the right side member, and a position closer to the center of the upper end (a position closer to the front plate 651) A pair of plate-like metal spring members 6584d which are provided and capable of generating an urging force in a direction to repel the metal main body 10014a in the assembled state (see FIG. 207), and an insertion hole 6512 of the upper lid member 6510 (see FIG. 237). And a pair of fastening portions 6584e to which fastening screws inserted into the housing are fastened.

The overhanging portion 6584 a is formed in such a shape that the upper edge follows the shape of the lower edge of the electric decoration substrate 6570 (
The upper surface constitutes a guide surface for guiding the front units 6520 to 6550 (see FIG. 241).

The sound transmission unit 6584 b is a portion through which the sound wave generated from the sound device 6610 (see FIG. 235) passes. The sound transmission unit 6584 b is disposed at a position facing the diaphragm 6611 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610.

The light receiving unit 6584c receives light emitted from the lighting unit 10014c (see FIG. 235) formed of a single LED disposed at the upper right corner of the front frame 10014, and shows the player as a light emission effect. It is. In the present embodiment, the illumination unit 10014 c is an illumination decoration substrate 65.
The light emission is controlled in a manner different from 70. That is, while the light emission effect of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is executed at the time of the fluctuation effect with high occurrence probability, the normal fluctuation effect and reach effect, the demonstration effect, etc., the light emission effect of the illumination unit 10014c has the occurrence probability It is executed at the time of occurrence of the extremely low and extremely advantageous for the player. Therefore, the player's attention to the lighting unit 10014c can be improved.

The lower surface box portion 6585 is a portion where the front side units 6520 to 6550 enter from the lower side, and a fastening portion 658 to which a fastening screw inserted from the back side to the metal main body portion 10014a is fastened.
5a is provided.

The notched portion 6587 is one side of the through hole through which the sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 vertically drilled on the lower surface of the left and right center portion (the portion farthest from the diaphragm 6611) of the acoustic device 6610. Form That is, the support plate portion 10014 that supports the back side of the acoustic device 6610
The sound emitted from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 passes through a through-hole in which the d and the notch 6587 form the periphery.

The voice passing through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 is output as the voice traveling to the back side with the vibration of the vibrating membrane 6611 contrary to the voice output toward the front side with the vibration of the vibrating membrane 6611 The sound is sound that is emitted to the outside from the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 through the internal cavity of the acoustic device 6610 (corresponding to the duct of the bass reflex type speaker). By providing a plurality of routes for emitting voice as described above, voices of different timbres can be generated simultaneously.

FIG. 244 (a) shows the dividing member 6 at line CCXLIVa-CCXLIVa of FIG.
FIG. 244 (b) is a sectional view of the CCXLIVb-CCXLIVb line of FIG. 241, a decorative member 6560, a decorative substrate 6570, and a back support member 6580. 245 (a) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the electric decoration substrate 6570, the back surface support member 6580, and the acoustic device 6610 taken along line CCXLVa-CCXLVa of FIG. FIG. 245 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the partitioning member 6560, the electric decoration substrate 6570, the back support member 6580 and the acoustic device 6610 taken along line CCXLVb-CCXLVb of FIG. 241. FIG. 246 (a) is a CCXLVIa of FIG. -Partition member 6560 in CCXLVIa line, electric decoration board 6 FIG. 246 (b) is a sectional view of a partition member 6560, an electric decoration board 6570, a back support member 6580 and an acoustic device 6610 taken along line CCXLVIb-CCXLVIb of FIG. FIG.

In FIG. 244 (a) to FIG. 246 (b), the periphery of the flange portion 6582 is shown enlarged. As can be seen from the enlarged view, the upper end of the electric decoration substrate 6570 and the flange portion 6
A small gap is formed at the lower edge of 582. Thereby, even when the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, it is possible to suppress the vibration (the width of the vibration) of the electric decoration board 6570 due to the vibration of the back support member 6580 .

As shown in FIGS. 244 (a) and 245 (a), the fastening screw inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a of the back surface support member 6580 is screwed into the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 across the electric decoration substrate 6570. By being inserted, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 are fastened and fixed, but the fastening force is not transmitted to the electric decoration substrate 6570. That is, the electric decoration board 657
In 0, only the fastening insertion portion 6572 is aligned with the fastening portion 6564, and it is not fixed to the dividing member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580 at the fastening point.

Further, while the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581 a abut on the back surface of the electric decoration substrate 6570, the dividing member 6560 is separated from the electric decoration substrate 6570 at the front and rear positions thereof. That is, in the present embodiment, since the electric decoration substrate 6570 is not sandwiched between the front and rear positions, the electric decoration substrate 65 is not
70 can be displaced (for example, tilting displacement) in the front-rear direction.

In addition, the lower edge portion of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is not supported by the back surface support member 6580 or by the partition member 6560. The same applies to FIGS. 244 (b) to 246 (b) described below.

As shown in FIG. 244 (b), the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is inserted into the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 and the positioning hole 6581 b of the back surface support member 6580. Here, the large diameter insertion portion 6573 and the positioning hole 6581 b are formed in an oval shape to such an extent that a gap can be formed below the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565. Similarly, the ribs of the fastening support portion 6581a are formed in an oval shape to the extent that a gap can be formed below the fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 244 (a).
)reference). By forming in this manner, the facilitation of the assembly of the partition member 6560 to the back surface support member 6580 will be described.

As in the prior art, for example, an inner shape slightly larger than the outer shape of the fastening portion 6564 has a fastening support portion 6
When the rib 581a is formed, the partition member 6560 needs to be assembled in a state in which the top, bottom, left, and right positions of the back support member 6580 are aligned.

However, in the present embodiment, since the electric decoration substrate 6570 is disposed in a non-fixed state between the dividing member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580, the back surface supporting member 6580 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is assembled when the dividing member 6560 is assembled. There is also a possibility that the work will be difficult.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, the ribs of the support portion 6581a for fastening, and the positioning holes 6581b have a long oval shape (or a shape in which the oval shape is halved). As a result, it is possible to assemble even if the upper and lower alignment is not accurate.

As an example of the assembly order, the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 is
The electric decoration substrate 6570 is attached to the dividing member 6560 so as to be inserted into the 70 large diameter inserting portions 6573. At this time, the arrangement of the electric decoration substrate 6570 with respect to the dividing member 6560 is the large diameter insertion portion 65.
It is not necessary to set in the longitudinal direction of 73, but any position may be used.

In the present embodiment, the flanges 6561 a to 6561 c are formed at positions where they can abut on the electric decoration substrate 6570, whereby the electric decoration substrate 6570 is assembled to the dividing member 6560 when the electric decoration substrate 6570 is divided Misalignment to 6560 is greatly reduced.

Next, the fastening portion 6564 of the partitioning member 6560 is used as a fastening support portion 65 of the back surface support member 6580.
Insert it inside the rib of 81a. At this time, the arrangement of the fastening portion 6564 with respect to the fastening support portion 6581a does not have to be determined in the longitudinal direction of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a, and may be any position. That is, since it is sufficient to perform rough positioning (for example, positioning to such an extent that the connector 6577 (see FIG. 243) is passed through the wiring hole 6581e (see FIG. 242) and positioning with a sufficiently long allowable width in the vertical direction) The work efficiency of inserting 6564 into the inside of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a can be improved.

Next, the partitioning member 6560 is moved relative to the back surface support member 6580 in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rib of the fastening support portion 6581a to align the fastening portion 6564 and the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a. And screw in a fastening screw (see FIG. 244 (a)).

In this state, even if the position of the electric decoration substrate 5670 is shifted, the partition member 6560 is lowered by its own weight to a position where the large diameter insertion portion 6573 is supported by the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 (see FIG. 244 (b)). And the back support member 6580.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in general, it is easy to struggle to position the electric decoration substrate 6570 that the electric decoration substrate 6570 is disposed in a non-fixed manner between the partitioning member 6560 and the back surface supporting member. By forming the fastening insertion portion 6572, the large diameter insertion portion 6573, the rib of the support portion for fastening 6581a, and the positioning hole 6581b in the form of a longitudinally long oval (or a shape in which the oval is halved). The assembly efficiency can be improved. In addition, even if the electrical decoration substrate 5670 is misaligned, it is configured to be corrected to its original position by its own weight,
It is possible to prevent the effect of the light emission effect during the game from being reduced for a long time due to the misalignment of the electric decoration substrate 5670.

The enlarged hole 6562a will be described with reference to FIG. 245 (b). Central light hole 6562
Are arranged in an inverted T-shape at the left and right center portions (arranged at four places, see FIG. 241), and are arranged in a substantially wedge shape (substantially wedge shape) outward (8 points) (See FIG. 241) which is mainly disposed at the straight inlet hole 6562b. The direct inlet hole 6562b will be described later with reference to FIG.

The enlarged hole 6562a is a long rectangular through hole through which light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 passes, and the portion forming the outer edge is raised to the front side, and the inner wall is the front side (side away from the light source) It is inclined and formed in the aspect which an opposing space | interval spreads, so that it goes to the way.

Thereby, the irradiation width of the light radiate | emitted from the 1st illumination part 6574 can be prescribed | regulated. That is, the way of showing light to the player can be changed according to the design aspect (the inclination angle of the inner wall, the height of height increase, etc.) of the enlarged hole 6562a.

In the present embodiment, the tip of the enlarged portion on the front side of the enlarged hole 6562a is raised to a position in contact with the closed portion 6521c of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (see FIG. 263). Thus, the light having passed through the enlarged hole 6562a can be made to enter the inside of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 without leaking.

In FIG. 246 (a), a screw insertion portion 6581c is illustrated, and in FIG. 246 (b), a positioning long hole 6581d is illustrated. The screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are
As described above, the front units 6520 to 6550 are assembled to the rear units 656 to 6580 and fastened and fixed along the inclination direction.

Front units 6520-6 along screw insertion portions 6581 c and positioning long holes 6581 d
Since 550 is assembled, the degree of freedom of arrangement of the component members can be improved as compared with the case of assembling in the front-rear direction.

For example, as shown in FIG. 246 (a), since the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be positioned to such an extent that it covers the area on the front side of the screw insertion portion 6581c, the size of the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be secured. . On the other hand, since the lower rear region of the front units 6520 to 6550 can also be widely used, the sizes of the rear box portion 6584 and the accommodated acoustic device 6610 can be secured.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d are formed to be inclined downward toward the front side on the left and right outside where the vibration film 6611 of the speaker is disposed. It can be formed (FIGS. 235 and 24).
6).

As shown in FIGS. 246 (a) and 246 (b), the upper edge of the screw insertion portion 6581c and the lower edge of the positioning elongated hole 6581d are inclined downward toward the front, while the upper edge is in the front-rear direction The formation (non-inclination) of the resin is caused by the fact that the resin mold used in manufacturing the back surface support member 6580 is in the front-rear direction.

In other words, in order to make the resin mold simple (consist of two resin molds which are separated in the front-rear direction), the screw insertion portion 6581c and the positioning long hole 6581d can be used as the back support member 658.
It is necessary to make it the shape which can be formed in the same extraction direction as the support part 6581 for fastening formed in 0, the fitting recessed part 6583a, etc. In the present embodiment, this extraction direction corresponds to the support portion for fastening 6581a.
The screw insertion portion 658 is set in the same longitudinal direction as the formation direction of the fitting concave portion 6583a.
The shapes of 1c and positioning elongated holes 6581d are formed in a distorted shape (a shape whose shape changes in the hole forming direction (depth direction)).

In particular, the screw insertion portion 6581c is a through hole through which a fastening screw screwed into the rear side fastening portion 6555 (see FIG. 240) is inserted, and is a portion that receives a load generated due to the fastening and fixing. As for the shape of the screw insertion portion 6581c, the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanying fastening is applied is
As it is made thinner toward the center of the hole, load imbalance tends to occur between the upper edge and the other, and there is a risk that the fastening screw may be loosened depending on the use condition and age.

In order to prevent the loosening of the fastening screw, it may be possible to adopt a fastening screw with a large diameter of the head,
The difference between the quality required for the fastening screw used at other fastening points results in an increase in cost. In other words, adopting a large diameter head screw for only the fastening point in question causes a cost increase due to the inability to turn the fastening screw into a common part, while using a large head screw for all head locations. In the case of adopting the above, the material necessary for the fastening screw is increased, which leads to an increase in cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front wall 6620 of the acoustic device 6610 oppositely disposed across the head of the fastening screw inserted into the screw insertion portion 6581 c is formed in a recessed shape in the front wall 6620 ( A retaining plate portion 6621 is formed as a plate upper portion parallel to the plate portion where the screw insertion portion 6581c is formed.

The retaining plate portion 6621 can secure an area in which the head portion of the fastening screw can be disposed between it and the rear surface support member 6580. In addition, since the retaining plate portion 6621 is disposed in the direction in which the head of the fastening screw is displaced when the fastening screw is loosened, the further progress of the fastening screw is restricted, and the fastening screw may fall off. It can be prevented.

The retaining plate portion 6621 is formed to be slightly spaced apart from the screw head when the fastening screw is not loosened. Therefore, transmission of the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 through the head of the fastening screw can be avoided.

On the other hand, when the fastening screw is loosened, the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by the abutment, so that the gap between the retaining plate portion 6621 and the head of the fastening screw is filled. At this time, the acoustic device 66
In the case of outputting sound from 10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 652 to 6550 through the head of the fastening screw.

Also, the front wall 6620 is a support for fastening 6581a (see FIG. 207) (see FIG. 207).
242) (see FIG. 242) is provided with a plurality of contact avoidance recesses 6622 recessed at the back surface position of the through hole.
The contact avoidance concave portion 6622 is inserted into the fastening support portion 6581a and the fastening portion 6564 (Fig. 243).
(Refer to the reference) screwed in to a degree (a dimension that allows a slight gap between the head and the head) so as to avoid contact with the head of the fastening screw.

Thereby, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be prevented from being transmitted to the dividing member 6560 via the fastening screw. Further, since the axial direction of the through hole of the fastening support portion 6581a is the same longitudinal direction as the resin mold extraction direction, the thickness of the plate portion to which the fastening force of the fastening screw is applied is constant in the hole direction and sufficient It can produce a fastening force. Therefore, the support 65 for fastening
Although there is a low possibility that the fastening screw inserted into 81a may be loosened, if loosening occurs in the fastening screw, the same function as the above-mentioned retaining plate portion 6621 is taken into consideration by the contact avoiding recess 6622
Can be generated.

That is, when the fastening screw is loosened, the distance between the contact avoidance recess 6622 and the head of the fastening screw is filled because the movement of the fastening screw is restricted by the abutment. At this time, the acoustic device 66
In the case of outputting sound from 10, the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 can be transmitted to the front unit 652 to 6550 through the head of the fastening screw.

As described above, it is possible to grasp the transmission of the vibration generated by the head of the fastening screw coming into contact with the retaining plate portion 6621 or the contact avoidance recess 6622 by the occurrence of the loosening of the fastening screw. The occurrence of the loosening can be noticed, and the situation in which the fastening screw is left loose can be easily avoided.

For example, it is exemplified that transmission of vibration causes generation of abnormal noise or detection of vibration.

As described in FIGS. 244 (a) to 246 (b), in the present embodiment, the electric decoration substrate 65 is used.
While being positioned close to the back support member 6580, 70 is not fixed to the back support member 6580. Accordingly, while the acoustic device 6610 and the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be disposed close to each other with the rear surface support member 6580 interposed therebetween, the vibration of the rear surface support member 6580 resulting from the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted to the electric decoration substrate 6570 and the electric decoration Breakage of the substrate 6570 can be avoided.

Here, the partitioning member 6560 is a rendering portion of the electric decoration substrate 6570 (ie, the lighting unit 6574-
6576) is connected to the back support member 6580, the area of the connection portion between the dividing member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is narrowed for the purpose of securing a large proportion of the rendering portion on the surface of the electric decoration substrate 6570. It is easy to be

Therefore, there is a problem that fixing of the partitioning member 6560 tends to be insufficient easily, and without any measures, there is a possibility that vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted through the back surface supporting member 6580 to the partitioning member 6560. By vibrating the 6560, there is a risk that the rendering effect may be poor, the fastening portion may be loosened, or the dividing member 6560 itself may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, vibration of the partitioning member 6560 is suppressed by fixing the partitioning member 6560 in another direction. This will be described with reference to FIG. 247.

FIG. 247 is a side schematic view of the upper effect device 6500. In FIG. 247, the upper effect device 65
The fastening points of the respective constituent members of 00, the direction of fastening, and the direction of fastening are schematically illustrated. That is, in FIG. 247, the fastening screw is indicated by a T, and the horizontal line of the T indicates the head of the fastening screw;
A vertical line extending from the center of the horizontal line indicates the screw portion of the fastening screw.

As shown in FIG. 247, in the upper rendering device 6500, front units 6520 to 6550 surround the front and lower surfaces of the rear units 6500 to 6580, and the front unit 6520 thereof.
Although the upper lid member 6510 is configured to support ~ 6550, the upper lid member 6510 remains fastened to the back surface support member 6580 and the front units 6520 to 6550 and is not fastened and fixed to the dividing member 6560. .

This prevents the rigidity of the upper lid member 6510 from being reinforced. In the present embodiment, since the upper lid member 6510 is formed in a thin plate shape (see FIG. 238), when the vibration of the acoustic device 6610 is transmitted through the back surface supporting member 6580, the upper lid member 6510 has a thickness direction ( It is easy to displace (deform) in the vertical direction).

Along with this displacement (deformation), the width in the front-rear direction of the upper cover member 6510 is shortened. For example, when the upper lid member 6510 is deformed so as to curve on the basis of the front-rear center, the front-rear distance of the insertion holes 6512 which are formed apart from each other in the front-rear direction is shortened. As a result, a load for displacing the partition unit 6540 to the back side is generated, and a compressive load in the front-rear direction can be applied to the partition member 6560.

That is, since the partition member 6560 can be sandwiched by the back surface support member 6580 and the partition unit 6540 to apply a load, even if the partition member 6560 vibrates due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the vibration is suppressed. Can.

Here, even if the width in the front-rear direction of the upper cover member 6510 is shortened, the division unit 6540
When the lower side is displaced to the front side (displacement to the side away from the dividing member 6560), the load given from the dividing unit 6540 to the dividing member 6560 tends to be insufficient, and the dividing member 656
There is a possibility that the action to suppress the zero vibration may be insufficient.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the displacement of the lower end of the dividing unit 6540 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the guided unit 6550, it is possible to prevent the lower side of the dividing unit 6540 from being displaced to the front. Thereby, the dividing unit 6540 to the dividing member 656
The load given to 0 can be secured sufficiently.

At this time, since the fastening screw is fastened and fixed in the direction along the plate surface of the extending plate portion 6552 at the end of the guided unit 6550 (see FIG. 254A), the acoustic device 6610 via the back support member 6580 The transmission direction of the vibration can be a direction along the plate surface of the extension plate portion 6552.

Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the bending deformation of the guided unit 6550, and to suppress the movement of the front and rear fastening points in the front-rear direction. Therefore, guided unit 6550
Even in the case where the vibration is transmitted, the function of suppressing the displacement of the lower end of the division unit 6540 in the front-rear direction can be sufficiently ensured.

By devising a fastening point as shown in FIG.
10, the electric decoration board 6570 is used as the acoustic device 6610 (or the back support member 6580) while the electric decoration board 6570 is disposed in the proximity of the electric decoration board 6570 in a non-fixed state.
The vibration of the dividing member 6560 can be suppressed by the transmission of the vibration to the dividing member 6560 which prevents the separation of the dividing member 6560 from the above.

That is, it is possible to improve the shape maintaining performance of the upper effect device 6500 while improving the durability of the electric decoration substrate 6570 disposed close to the acoustic device 6610.

In addition, the upper lid member 65 is used for one purpose of setting the fastening direction of the fastening screw in the present embodiment.
It corresponds to 10 displacement amounts. That is, the upper cover member 6510 has a fastening portion 6513.
Since the rear side is fixed and the thin plate is extended in the front and rear direction, it is possible to easily bend and displace in a mode in which the amount of front side displacement is larger than that on the rear side.

For example, when a downward load is applied to the front end of the upper lid member 6510, the shape of the upper lid member 6510 places the center of the curvature radius below the upper lid member 6510 starting from the rear end. Can be curved and displaced. In this case, the upper lid member 6510 itself is given a tensile load in the front-rear direction, while the other members disposed therebelow are given a compressive load.

Since the direction of this compressive load is along the surface of the upper lid member 6510, it is along the back and forth direction on the back side that is the base end side, but with respect to the back and forth direction It comes along the direction of falling downward to the front side.

In this embodiment, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6547b of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a direction inclined downward toward the front with respect to the front-rear direction, the fastening direction of the fastening screw and the upper lid The direction of the compressive load which arises with displacement of member 6510 can be approached.

Thereby, in addition to the fact that the resistance against the compressive load can be generated sufficiently at the fastening position, the component of the compressive load applied in the direction of shearing the fastening screw (direction orthogonal to the fastening direction) becomes smaller Can be suppressed.

The fastening screw whose fastening direction is formed in the direction of falling downward toward the front side is the plate guiding unit 6
The plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the lower side and the back side of the electric decoration substrate 6570 as it is used for fastening 550 (see the screw insertion portion 6581 c in FIG. 246A, etc.). In the present embodiment, the electric decoration substrate 6570 is disposed in a non-fixed manner and is configured to be easily displaced, and the displacement allowance amount of the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be limited by the plate guide unit 6550. That is, even if the electric decoration substrate 6570 is displaced, excessive displacement of the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be restricted by allowing contact with the plate guide unit 6550 when the amount of displacement becomes excessive.

In addition, since the plate guide unit 6550 is disposed close to the rear surface side of the electric decoration substrate 6570 (the side on which the acoustic device 6610 is disposed), the displacement of the electric decoration substrate 6570 to the rear surface side can be particularly suppressed. Accordingly, it can be suppressed that the electric decoration substrate 6570 approaches the acoustic device 6610 as a vibration generation source.

In the present embodiment, the fastening portions (supporting portions for fastening 6581a, insertion holes 6565a, etc.) along which the fastening direction is along the longitudinal direction are gathered at the left and right center side (see FIG. 242), and the fastening direction is lowered toward the front side The fastening portion (screw insertion portion 6581c, insertion plate portion 6547, etc.) along the inclined direction is
They gather to the left and right outside (see FIGS. 242 and 256), and they are not in close proximity.

Thereby, the deformation (displacement) which arises in one fastening part can control the influence which it gives to the other fastening part. That is, even if the fastening portion along the longitudinal direction is loosened and displacement occurs in the longitudinal direction, the affected portion can be limited to the fastening portion along the longitudinal direction, so the vehicle is inclined downward. It is possible to prevent the load in the direction of fastening and inclining (along the longitudinal direction) from occurring with respect to the fastening portion along the direction. Thereby, the occurrence of loosening of the screw can be suppressed.

Moreover, the resistance of the upper effect device 6500 with respect to the load in the push-down direction can be improved by fixing a location that is long in the front and rear direction, that is, the left and right center side, with a fastening portion in which the fastening direction is along the longitudinal direction.

On the other hand, the fastening portion along the direction in which the fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side is considered to have a reduced resistance to the load in the push-down direction compared to the fastening portion in which the fastening direction is along the front-rear direction In this embodiment, by arranging the fastening portions along the direction in which the fastening direction is inclined downward toward the front side to the left and right outside formed short along the front-rear direction, the resistance to the load in the depressing direction is reduced. It is possible to secure the arrangement area of the electric decoration substrate 6570 and the acoustic device 6610 while minimizing the influence of the above.

FIG. 248 is a cross-sectional view of the rear units 656 to 6580 taken along line CCXLVIII-CCXLVIII in FIG. 241 (a). In addition, a specific location is expanded and shown in figure.

As shown in FIG. 248, the large diameter insertion portion 6573 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is a partitioning member 6560.
Contact with the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction. The front and rear surfaces contact the left and right side portions of the partition member 6560 and the left and right side portions of the back support member 6580, respectively, while the contact positions thereof are formed so as not to coincide with each other.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the durability of the electric decoration substrate 6570 and adjust the ease of occurrence of displacement. This will be described in order below. First, improvement in durability of the electric decoration substrate 6570 will be described.

Here, when the front and back surfaces of the electric decoration substrate 6570 respectively contact with the partitioning member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580 at the positions where they coincide with each other, the partition for some reason (error in resin molding, fastening failure, etc.) When the distance between the contact portions of the member 6560 and the back support member 6580 is shorter than the thickness of the decorative substrate 6570, a compressive force is applied to the decorative substrate 6570, and when the load applied is large, The decorative substrate 6570 may be broken.

In addition, even when a compressive force is not applied to the electric decoration substrate 6570 at the time of assembly, the back support member 6580 vibrates due to the vibration of the moving acoustic device 6610, thereby causing a load (for example, a load in the compression direction). There is a possibility that the electric decoration board 6570 may be broken by this load.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the positions where the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 abut on the front and rear surfaces of the electric decoration substrate 6570 do not match in the front and rear. Even when a load is applied to the electric decoration substrate 6570 in the above-described manner, the load is not a load for compressing the electric decoration substrate 6570 but a load for bending the electric decoration substrate 6570.
Therefore, since it can cope by bending and deforming the electric decoration board | substrate 6570, possibility that the crack of the electric decoration board | substrate 6570 arises can be made low.

Next, adjustment of the easiness of displacement of the electric decoration substrate 6570 will be described. Electric decoration board 6570
The fastening portion 6564 (see FIG. 243) and the large-diameter cylindrical portion 6565 of the partitioning member 6560 are inserted to prevent positional deviation, and they are densely arranged in the vicinity of the left and right center in this embodiment ( See FIG. 243).

In addition, since the electric decoration substrate 6570 is in contact (contact) with the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 in the left-right direction, the contact resistance between the electric decoration substrate 6570 and the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 is secured. The large diameter cylindrical portion 65656 is formed to have a diameter larger than that of the fastening portion 6564. As a matter of course, the contact area becomes large, and the frictional resistance can be sufficiently secured.

Therefore, the generation of the displacement of the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be easily suppressed in the vicinity of the left and right center portions of the electric decoration substrate 6570. Therefore, even when surrounding members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the direction of the light emitted from the first lighting portion 6574 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be easily maintained.

On the other hand, on the left and right sides (especially the lower side) of the electric decoration substrate 6570, neither the large diameter cylindrical portion 6565 nor the fastening portion 6564 is disposed, and a load to be compressed from the front and rear is not generated either. The displacement can be made easier to occur as compared with the left and right center portions of the 6570.

Therefore, when the peripheral members vibrate due to the vibration of the acoustic device 6610, the electric decoration substrate 65
The directions of light emitted from the second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 6576 can be easily changed.

In the present embodiment, since the acoustic devices 6610 are arranged in a pair on the left and right, each acoustic device 66
The vibration mode of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is changed based on the 10 vibration modes. That is, when sound is output only from the right acoustic device 6610 and the right side of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is vibrated preferentially, and sound is output only from the left acoustic device 6610 and the left side of the electric decoration substrate 6570 is vibrated preferentially. Sound is output from both the left and right acoustic devices 6610, and the electric decoration
In the case where the left and right sides of 570 are vibrated, the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be vibrated in at least three different vibration modes.

Next, the front units 6520 to 6550 will be described. FIG. 249 is an exploded front perspective view of the front units 6520-6550, and FIG. 250 is a front unit 6520-6.
It is a disassembled back perspective view of 550. FIG. In FIGS. 249 and 250, in order to facilitate understanding, the reference numerals of the detailed configurations are not shown.

In FIGS. 249 and 250, a light transmission unit 6520 for transmitting light incident from the first lighting unit 6574 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 to the front side, and an outer frame formed to surround the light transmission unit 6520 to form an outer frame A state in which the member 6530, a guided unit 6550 guided on the top surface of the projecting portion 6584a of the back surface supporting member 6580 and the partitioning unit 6540 which abuts on the front and back with the partitioning member 6560 and similarly divides light is illustrated. Ru.

In the case of the light-emitting effect via the front units 6520-6550, the light transmission unit 6520
Receives the light from the first lighting unit 6574, the division unit 6540 receives the light from the second lighting unit 6575, and the guided unit 6550 receives the light from the third lighting unit 6576. Next, the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 will be described in detail.

FIG. 251 (a) is a front view of the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, FIG. 251 (b) is a rear view of the division unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 252 (a) is a division 252 (b) is a rear view of the division unit 6540, FIG. 253 (a) is a front view of the plate guide unit 6550, and FIG. 253 (b) is a plate guide It is a rear view of unit 6550.

FIG. 254 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the partitioning unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 along line CCLIVa-CCLIVa of FIG. 251 (b), and FIG. 254 (b) is a diagram of FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the division unit 6540 and the to-be-guided unit 6550 in the CCLIVb-CCLIVb line | wire of (b), FIG. 254 (c) is CCLIVc-CCL of FIG. 251 (b).
It is a sectional view of division unit 6540 and guided unit 6550 in the IVc line.

FIG. 255 is an exploded front perspective view of the section unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550, and FIG. 256 is an exploded rear perspective view of the section unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550.

Partition unit 6540 is formed of a milky white light transmitting resin material and formed in a substantially inverted triangle in a front view, and a central portion of milky white member 6541 is penetrated in the front-rear direction to form light transmission unit 6520 Through hole 65 formed so as to be able to insert the rear side portion
42, a pair of fastening portions 6543 which are inward protruding portions of the through holes 6542 and to which the light transmission unit 6520 is fastened and fixed, and fastening screws for fastening and fixing the outer frame member 6530 are pierced. Along the lower left and right edges of the milky white member 6541. A plurality of insertion holes 6544, a pair of after-guided fastening portions 6545 to which a fastening screw extending cylindrically to the back side and passing through the insertion holes 6565a of the partitioning member 6560 is fastened. Pair of box-like light receiving sections 6 formed in a box-like shape open to the rear side
And 546 and a plate-like portion extending downward from the lower edge of the box-like light receiving portion 6546, and a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the dividing unit 6540 to the plate guiding unit 6550 is pierced so as to be insertable. A plurality of insertion plate portions 6547 in which the insertion holes 6547 b are formed, and a shape that covers the front side of the box-like light receiving portion 6546 from a colorless and transparent light transmitting resin material, and a milk white member 6541
And a transparent covering member 6548 fitted and supported on the main body.

Similarly to the upper lid member 6510, the partition unit 6540 has a curved shape that bulges to the front in a top view as in the upper lid member 6510, is formed in a substantially inverted triangle in a front view, and the center is disposed on the back in a side Is formed into a substantially arc shape (see FIG. 254 (a)).

The milky white member 6541 is provided with a pair of fastening portions 6541a to which fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6512 (see FIG. 237) of the upper lid member 6510 are fastened on the upper surface. This fastening portion 6541
a and the upper lid member 6510 are fastened and fixed.

The front side of the through hole 6542 is formed to be inclined downward toward the rear side in correspondence with the inclination of the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) of the light transmission unit 6520 described later. Thereby, the front side end of the through hole 6542 and the contact plate portion 6525 (see FIG. 258 (b)) can be made to abut on the surface, and the attitude of the light transmission unit 6520 is prevented from changing. Can.

The fastening portion 6543 is formed in a state where the fastening hole is directed to the front side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the front side. Further, the post-guide fastening portion 6545 is formed in a state in which the fastening hole is directed to the back side. That is, the fastening screw is screwed in from the back side.

The box-like light receiving part 6546 is a portion disposed opposite to the second lighting part 6575 (see FIG. 241 (b)) of the electric decoration substrate 6570, and is disposed on the front bottom back and upper surface of the lower plate part of the box-like light receiving part 6546. Is
A jagged-shaped decoration having a short width is formed. This jagged shape is formed by the uneven | corrugated shape of the aspect which the protrusion of the cross-sectional triangle-like shape closely aligns.

With this shape, it is possible to scatter (diffuse) light incident from the back side, so that the box-like light receiving portion 6546 and the transparent covering member 6548 covering the front side can be uniformly emitted in front view.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface where light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

Insertion plate portion 6547 has a U-shaped wall portion 6547a formed in a U-shape in which the upper side is opened in a rear view shape, an insertion hole 6547b drilled in the front-rear direction, and a lower side of the insertion hole 6547b And a protruding rib 6547c protruding toward the front side in a semi-elliptical shape surrounding the.

The partition unit 6540 can be easily assembled to the guided unit 6550 by aligning the U-shaped wall portion 6547 a with the front side fastening portion 6554 of the guided unit 6550.

Insertion plate portion 6547 is formed with an insertion hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into screwing portion 6554a (see FIG. 256) is formed, and is a portion that receives a load generated due to fastening and fixing. Insertion plate 6
As for the shape of the insertion hole formed in 547, the thickness of the upper edge portion of the portion to which the load accompanied by the fastening is applied is the center of the hole in relation to the extraction direction of the resin mold (the front and back direction in this embodiment). It is made thinner toward the part (see FIG. 254 (b)).

In this case, since the load imbalance tends to occur between the upper edge and the other, the partition unit 6540
When a small positional deviation occurs repeatedly between the plate guide unit 6550 and the plate guide unit 6550, the fastening screw may be loosened.

In order to prevent the loosening of the fastening screw, it may be possible to adopt a fastening screw with a large diameter of the head,
The difference between the quality required for the fastening screw used at other fastening points results in an increase in cost. In other words, adopting a large diameter head screw for only the fastening point in question causes a cost increase due to the inability to turn the fastening screw into a common part, while using a large head screw for all head locations. In the case of adopting the above, the material necessary for the fastening screw is increased, which leads to an increase in cost in terms of material cost.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plate guide unit 6550 for the division unit 6540
It is comprised so that position shift of may be prevented in multiple places. That is, first, the board guide unit 6
The downward displacement of the plate guide unit 6550 can be prevented by supporting the screwing portion 6554a of the 550 by the protruding ribs 6547c of the partition unit 6540 (see FIGS. 247 and 254 (b)).

Second, the front upper end of the plate guide unit 6550 is engaged with the milky white member
It is configured to engage in the front-rear direction with the rear end side lower end portion of the transparent covering member 6548 to be locked at 548b (see FIG. 254 (b)). Thereby, division unit 6 of board guide unit 6550
It is possible to prevent frontward displacement relative to 540.

Thirdly, the lower end portion of the insertion plate portion 6547 is a main body resin member 655 of the plate guide unit 6550.
It is configured to be in contact with the upper surface of the first part (see FIG. 254 (b)). Thereby, the upward displacement of the plate guiding unit 6550 with respect to the dividing unit 6540 can be prevented.

The partition unit 6 of the plate guiding unit 6550 mainly by these first to third contact structures.
Since the displacement with respect to 540 can be suppressed, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw screwed into the screwing portion 6554a.

The transparent covering member 6548 is formed in a substantially V-shape in a front view, and a lower edge plate-like portion 6548a extended in a plate shape to the back side at the V-shaped lower edge connecting portion, and the upper edge to the back And a plurality of locking projections 6548 b protruding in a plate shape to the side. The left and right center portions of the box-like light receiving portion 6546 are cut away from the back side to the front side, and the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a enters so as to fill the gap.

Similar to the box-like light receiving part 6546, a jagged-shaped decoration is formed on the upper surface of the lower edge plate-like part 6548a. Thus, even if the central portion of the box-like light receiving portion 6546 is not cut out, the notch portion can be supplemented by the decorative shape of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a, so the transparent covering member 65
It is possible to emit light uniformly in the left and right direction of 48.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface where light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

Here, in the present embodiment, as described later, the lower edge of the guided unit 6550 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines upward as it goes to the back side (see FIG. 254 (c)); In order to form the 6548a at the lower bottom surface and the surface position of the guided unit 6550, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a is formed as an inclined surface which ascends toward the back side as well as the lower base of the guided unit 6550. .

If it is attempted to form this inclined surface by the box-like light receiving part 6546, the direction of extraction of the mold for forming the box-like light receiving part 6546 becomes complicated. That is, the drawing direction is the front-back direction in the vicinity of the through hole 6542, and in the vicinity of the lower edge of the box-shaped light-receiving part 6546, it rises and inclines toward the back side. In addition, the manufacturing process may be complicated.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surface is not formed by the milky white member 6541, but is instead formed by the transparent covering member 6548 (see FIG. 254 (c)). Furthermore, in the assembled state, the white partition member 6560 is disposed opposite to the back side of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent lining member 6548 that constitutes the inclined surface, so that the player can be transparently covered. Can be visually recognized with uniform color (white).

Thereby, the drawing direction of the molding die of the milky white member 6541 is unified in the front and back direction, and the shape of the transparent covering member 6548 provided on the front side of the milky white member 6541 is inclined to the side interfering in the front and rear drawing direction. The transparent covering member 654 has a shape (a shape in which the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a of the transparent covering member 6548 is inclined in the direction of entering the inward of the dividing unit 6540 in a front view).
The eight lights can be viewed by the player in a uniform light emission mode.

In other words, the rear unit of the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 65 which are adjacent to each other while the partition unit 6540 is shaped to be tapered toward the rear side (the distance between the upper and lower portions is narrowed).
Since the same decorative shape (cut) can be continuously applied to the upper surface portion of the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a 48 (see the enlarged view of FIG. 240), it is possible to perform the light emission effect of the uniform light emission aspect .

In this case, it is difficult to set the removal direction of the molding die of the transparent covering member 6548 in the front-rear direction, but the transparent covering member 6548 does not necessarily have a portion formed along the front-rear direction. Therefore, by setting the direction along the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a (the direction of rising and tilting) as the extraction direction of the molding die, the manufacturing process in which the resin is molded by the die in the longitudinal direction (one direction) The transparent covering member 6548 can be manufactured in the same manufacturing process.

Therefore, the milky white member 6541 and the transparent covering member 6548 can be easily manufactured, and a portion visible through the transparent covering member 6548 can be uniformly emitted.

The locking convex portion 6548 b is a portion locked to the upper edge of the bulging portion to the front side at a position corresponding to the box-like light receiving portion 6546 of the milky white member 6541. That is, when the transparent covering member 6548 is assembled to the milky white member 6541, the locking convex portion 6548 b is latched to the milky white member 6541.

The guided unit 6550 is formed of a colored opaque resin material in a substantially V-shape in a front view, and is guided along the upper surface of the overhanging portion 6584 a of the back surface support member 6580.
And an extending plate portion 6552 extending in the form of a plate along the lower edge of the left and right center portion of the main resin member 6551 and a back side end portion of the extending plate portion 6552 A division unit 6 disposed along a pair of left and right exhaust pressure passing holes 6553 and the left and right upper edges of the main body resin member 6551
A plurality of front side fastening portions 6554 disposed opposite to the insertion plate portion 6547 of the 540 and to which fastening screws are fastened and fixed, and a back support member 6580 disposed along the lower left and right edges of the main resin member 6551
A plurality of back surface side fastening portions 6555 to which fastening screws passing through the screw insertion portions 6581c (see FIG. 241A) are fastened and fixed, and a back surface supporting member protruding between the back surface side fastening portions 6555 A plurality of insertion rib portions 6556 which are inserted into positioning long holes 6581d (see FIG. 241A) of 6580, and a plurality of through holes 6 which are bored in the front and rear direction in the left and right arm portions
And 557, and a pair of light receiving members 6558 formed of a colorless and transparent light transmitting resin material and fitted into and fixed to the plurality of through holes 6557.

In the guided unit 6550, the direction in which the guided unit 6550 is guided along the upper surface of the overhang portion 6584a of the back surface support member 6580 is taken as the mold removal direction. That is, each component is formed along an inclined direction which is inclined upward as it goes to the rear side or a direction perpendicular to the inclined direction.

The exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed at a position facing the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235) of the acoustic device 6610. That is, the sound output through the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 reaches the player after passing through the exhaust pressure through hole 6553.

In the range opposed to the exhaust pressure transmission hole 6612 (see FIG. 235), the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is
Rather than being formed as a single large hole, it is formed with a plurality of small hole shapes (formed in small sections). In this way, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent action of a thin wire material such as a piano wire.

Further, the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 is formed such that the hole width is narrowed as it approaches the end of the hole and as it goes to the back side. This allows the hole to be clogged with the fine wire material.
After the fine wire material is advanced further into the exhaust pressure through hole 6553 or the specific member is hooked and a load is applied, the movement resistance of the fine wire material can be increased. By this,
Since the time required for fraud can be extended, fraud can be suppressed.

The front side fastening portion 6554 is a threaded portion 6554a to which a fastening screw is fastened, and the threaded portion 65
And a positioning wall portion 6554b formed in a pair of wall shapes on the left and right of 54a. The positioning wall portion 6554b is oppositely disposed at an interval slightly longer than the width of the U-shaped wall portion 6547a. Therefore, the partition unit 6540 and the guided unit 6550 can be aligned by inserting the U-shaped wall portion 6547a into the positioning wall portion 6554b.

The light receiving member 6558 is a portion guided along the upper surface of the lower edge of the main body resin member 6551 (along the direction inclined with respect to the front and rear direction), and the cross section perpendicular to the longitudinal direction is L-shaped And a plurality of rear face box-like portions 6558a formed in a box shape whose rear face side is opened on the front side of the guided portion 6558a and the back side is formed so as to be fittable into the through hole 6557
b and the central end of the guided portion 6558a (the end on the side where the pair of light receiving members 6558 are opposed)
And an upper edge extension portion 6558c extending in a plate shape along the upper edge to the back side.

The light receiving member 6558 is a third lighting unit 6576 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 (see FIG. 241 (b)).
Is a member that receives light emitted from the The above-described decorative jagged shape is formed on the inner surface of the rear box-like portion 6558b. Thus, light can be refracted many times inside the rear box-like portion 6558b, so the number of LEDs corresponding to the through holes 6557 is small (
In FIG. 241 (b), even in the case of 1 to 2), the entire rear face box-like portion 6558 b can be visually recognized as uniform light. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the number of LEDs is small (the point light source feeling can be weakened).

In addition, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 is attached in an inclined posture with respect to the front-rear direction (a posture in which the light traveling direction is inclined along the assembling direction of the plate guiding unit 6550 (the light receiving surface is the plate guiding unit 6550 Installed in a posture that intersects with the assembly direction of
Therefore, the light emitted along the front-rear direction from the LED disposed in the third lighting unit 6576 of the electric decoration substrate 6570 on the back side of the light receiving member 6558 is refracted when passing through the light receiving member 6558. It can be made to advance in the direction which inclines diagonally downward toward the front side.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface where light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The rear box-like portion 6558b is formed such that the length of the front-side bulging is shorter for the objects disposed on the left and right outside as compared with the objects disposed on the left and right inside. Thus, the rear box 6
The front of the 558b is divided into a compartment unit 6540 and a guided unit 65 connected below it.
It can be formed along the curved shape of the 50 front side edges.

The upper edge extension portion 6558 c is a portion for facilitating the assembly of the guided unit 6550 and the partitioning member 6560. The main resin member 6551 of the guided unit 6550 disposed opposite to the dividing member 6560 is formed in a planar shape particularly in the extending plate portion 6552 of the central portion, and there is no partition, so alignment with the dividing member 6560 It is difficult to do. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper edge extension portion 6558 c serves as a partition that divides the upper region of the extension plate portion 6552, the partition member 6560 can be easily aligned.

Referring back to FIG. 249, description will be made. In the description so far, the second lighting unit 6575 disposed on the left and right
And the part which light-receives the light irradiated from the 3rd illumination part 6576 was demonstrated. Hereinafter, the light transmission unit 6520 which is a portion for receiving the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 will be described.

FIG. 257 (a) is a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 257 (b) is a rear view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.
8 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530, and FIG. 258 (b) is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520 and the outer frame member 6530.

The outer frame member 6530 is a member formed of a colored (in this embodiment, orange) light impermeable resin material, and has a main portion 6531 formed in a substantially inverted triangular shape in a front view, and the main portion 653 thereof.
An opening 6532 which is drilled in the front-rear direction in a substantially wedge shape (substantially wedge shape) at a central portion of 1;
A projecting rib 6533 having a shape along the lower edge portion of the main body portion 6531 and projecting like a rib on the back side;
A plurality of fastening portions 6534, which are disposed at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6544 (see FIG. 254) of the division unit 6540, and are formed to be able to screw in fastening screws inserted into the insertion holes 6544 are mainly included.

In the outer frame member 6530, the main body portion 6531 does not transmit light, and therefore, the portion transmitting light at the inside of the outer shape is limited to the opening 6532. The shape of the opening 6532 is the first
This corresponds to the arrangement pattern of the lighting unit 6574. In other words, the edge of the opening 6532 is formed of a shape (enlarged shape) similar to the shape surrounding the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 in a front view (see FIG. 241A).

The light emitted from the first illumination unit 6574 passes through the transparent cylindrical member 6521. However, the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed to be different depending on the difference in the front and rear positions. The player visually recognizes the light having a pattern different from the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574.

For example, the upper plate portion of the transparent tubular member 6521 is formed such that the width becomes longer as approaching the opening 6532 (so that the left and right edges are inclined in the wide direction). The light viewed from the front of the opening 6532 in the vicinity of the position overlapping with the upper plate in the front-rear direction is viewed in a laterally spread pattern as compared to the arrangement pattern of the first lighting unit 6574.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to narrow the arrangement range of the first lighting unit 6574 that emits light behind the light while widening the range of light visually recognized by the player. Therefore, it is possible to perform an effect of making light visible in a wide range while suppressing the size of the first lighting portion 6574 (or the electric decoration substrate 6570). The details of the shape of the transparent tubular member 6521 will be described later.

The protruding ribs 6533 are cut out at positions corresponding to the locking projections 6548b (see FIG. 255) of the transparent covering member 6548, and are disposed at locations where the formation of the locking projections 6548b is omitted. In the present embodiment, the protruding ribs 6533 and the locking projections 6548b are formed on the same curve in a front view (in a manner of being complementary to each other and formed on a curve having the same shape as the lower edge of the outer frame member 6530). Will be

FIG. 259 is an exploded front perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 260 is an exploded rear perspective view of the light transmission unit 6520. The light transmission unit 6520 includes a transparent cylindrical member 6521 formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape extending in the front and rear direction from a colorless and transparent light transmitting resin, and a flat surface disposed in the middle of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 A flange portion 6522 extending outward in a flange shape along the outer periphery, and a cup-shaped member 6523 formed in a cup shape covering the transparent cylindrical member 6521 from a colorless light-transmissive resin A shielding member 6524 cylindrically formed so as to be insertable from the colored (white in this embodiment) light opaque resin material on the side opposite to the side on which the cup-shaped member 6523 is covered, and the shielding member 6524 Abutment plate portion 6525 formed as a flat plate portion capable of surface contact with flange portion 6522 at the front end portion, and an outer portion extending along the left and right edges and the lower edge of the abutment plate portion 6525 Frame extension And 526, mainly it comprises.

The bottomed cylindrical member 6521 is a member extended in a cylindrical shape in the front and back, and the left and right wall portions are curved in such a manner as to be constricted inward, and the front and back of the LED disposed in the first lighting portion 6574 And a plurality of light receiving and projecting portions 6521b projecting from the rear outer surface 6521a to the rear side at a position facing the LED, and a rear outer surface 6
And a plurality of light passing holes 6521d drilled in the closed portion 6521c at a position facing the LED, and at least the width and width of the upper wall and the left and right wall portions. A main body cylindrical portion 6521e whose distance is increased toward the front side, and a frame-like extending portion 6 extended to the front side of the flange portion 6522 along the shape of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e
And 521 f.

The light receiving projecting portion 6521 b is a portion to be inserted into the central light hole 6562 of the dividing member 6560. That is, by reducing the distance between the dividing member 6560 and the electric decoration substrate 6570 (FIG. 263).
Light can be made to be incident from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 to the light receiving protrusion 6521b without leaving a gap as much as the thickness of the opposing plate 6561 of the dividing member 6560). Thereby, total reflection can be easily generated.

As described above, the light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 is incident at a close distance, totally reflected, and travels to the front side as compared with the second lighting unit 6575 and the third lighting unit 657 described above.
The light emitted from the LED 6 travels in the air by the area inside the recess of the box-like light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box-like portion 6558 b which are recessed in the direction away from the LED, The front side wall portions of the light receiving portion 6546 and the rear box-like portion 6558b are caused to emit light. Therefore, the first lighting unit 65
The light emitted from the second irradiation portion 6575 and the third irradiation portion 6576 can be viewed by the player as uniform light with a low light amount, as compared with the light emitted from the light source 74.

In addition, the compartmental unit 6540 in which the box-like light receiving part 6546 is formed is formed of a light transmitting milky white resin material, and the light receiving member 6558 in which the rear face box-like portion 6558b is formed is made of a colorless and transparent light transmitting resin material. Since it is formed, it is possible to change the appearance of the light emitted from the second irradiation portion 6575 and the third irradiation portion 6576 in a stepwise manner.

Although the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f is formed substantially from the similar shape of the rear outer surface portion 6521a, the outer shape of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f is the rear outer surface portion 652f in relation to the main cylindrical portion 6521e.
It is enlarged compared to the outline of 1a.

Therefore, in comparison with the size of the area where the LED in the first lighting unit 6574 is disposed,
It can be made visible to the player as light that illuminates a large area.

The shape of the extended tip of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f is such that each portion is disposed at the same distance as the bottom rear surface (rear surface) of the cup-shaped member 6523. That is, depending on the shape of the cup-shaped member 6523, the shape of the extended tip of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f is designed.
Thereby, the frame-shaped extended portion 6521 f can be illuminated in a uniform light emission mode.

The flange portion 6522 is provided with a pair of left and right insertion holes 6522a drilled with a size that allows insertion of the circular screwing portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251A) of the partition unit 6540.

The cup-shaped member 6523 has a flat rear surface and is formed in a cylindrical shape with a bottom capable of supporting the fastening portion 6543 at a position overlapping the insertion hole 6522a in the front-rear direction, and is fastened by a fastening screw inserted in the bottom A pair of end fastening portions 6523a to which the portion 6543 is fastened and fixed, a decorative shape portion 6523b in which a light diffusion shape (decorative shape consisting of ridges having a triangular cross section) is formed on the back bottom of the cup shape And a flat surface portion 6523 c formed in a flat surface shape in a region surrounding the periphery of 6523 b.

The decorative shape portion 6523 b diffusely reflects light irradiated from the back surface to the cup-shaped member 6523. Thus, the player who looks at the cup-shaped member 6523 can visually recognize as if surface light emission is performed, so that the visibility of the cup-shaped member 6523 in front view can be improved.

Since the flat surface portion 6523c is formed in a region opposed to the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f (see FIG. 263), the light transmitted through the thick portion of the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f is not irregularly reflected on the front surface. It can be passed to the side. Thereby, the player can visually recognize the light traveling through the frame-shaped extending portion 6521 f as the clear light.

The shielding member 6524 has a rear end portion formed in the same shape as the central cylindrical portion 6566 of the dividing member 6560 and is recessed with a size capable of guiding the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251A) of the dividing unit 6540. A pair of left and right guide recesses 6524a are provided.

The contact plate portion 6525 is a fastening portion 6543 of the partition unit 6540 (see FIG. 251A).
And a pair of left and right insertion holes 6525a which are drilled with a size that allows insertion of the circular screw-in portion.

The outer frame extension portion 6526 is formed from an inner shape slightly larger than the flange portion 6522 so as to be able to accommodate the flange portion 6522, and the extension length thereof is the thickness of the flange portion 6522,
The length of the edge portion of the back side plate-like portion of the cup-like member 6523 is equal to or more than the total length.

That is, in the assembled state of the light transmission unit 6520, the plate-like portions of the flange portion 6522 and the cup-like member 6523 are accommodated inside the outer frame extension portion 6526 (see FIG. 258 (a)).
Therefore, the assembled state of the optical transmission unit 6520 can be stably maintained. Furthermore, the circular screwing portion of the fastening portion 6543 (see FIG. 251A) of the dividing unit 6540 is the insertion hole 6.
525a, the insertion hole 6522a, and the end fastening portion 6523a are inserted in order and fastened and fixed, so that the assembled state of the light transmission unit 6520 can be maintained more firmly.

According to the light transmission unit 6520, light incident from the rear end face of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is totally reflected within the thickness of the main cylindrical portion 6521e to advance it forward, and the front end of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f And the cup-shaped member 6523 can be irradiated. Cup-shaped member 6
523 is set to have a short distance from the frame-shaped extending portion 6521f, and thus the cup-shaped member 6523 is used.
The player who visually recognizes the light from the front side can be visually recognized in a light emission mode in which light is emitted in a line shape (outline shape along the corner of the cup-shaped member 6523). This makes it possible to highlight the difference between the light emission mode of the cup-shaped member 6523 and the uniform light emission mode seen by the transparent covering member 6548 described above, and therefore, it is possible to execute a light-emitting effect with sharpness. This is discussed in more detail below.

In FIG. 261, six views of the transparent tubular member 6521 are illustrated, and in FIG. 262, six views of the light transmission unit 6520 in the assembled state are illustrated. In addition, since the light transmission unit 6520 is configured to be symmetrical in the left-right direction, illustration of the left side view is omitted.

FIG. 261 (a) is a front view of the transparent tubular member 6521, FIG. 261 (b) is a top view of the transparent tubular member 6521, and FIG. 261 (c) is a bottom view of the transparent tubular member 6521. FIG. 261 (d) is a right side view of the transparent tubular member 6521 in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 261 (e) is a rear view of the transparent tubular member 6521.

262 (a) is a front view of the light transmission unit 6520, FIG. 262 (b) is a top view of the light transmission unit 6520, and FIG. 262 (c) is a bottom view of the light transmission unit 6520. 262 (d) is a right side view of the light transmission unit 6520 as viewed in the direction of arrow L, and FIG. 262 (e) is a rear view of the light transmission unit 6520. Figure 262 (e
In the drawing, the illustration of the pattern of the decorative shape portion 6523b is omitted to facilitate understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 261 (b) and 261 (d), the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is such that the left and right surface portions and the bottom surface portion are inclined such that the horizontal width and the vertical width gradually increase toward the front side. It is assumed. On the other hand, the part which interferes with the resin mold in the drawing direction can not be formed as the inclined surface because the drawing direction of the resin mold is set in the front-rear direction.

For example, even if the outer surface of the main cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when moving the resin mold on the back side in the extraction direction (rear), but the outer portion 6521 formed on the rear side
If the inner surface of a has the same inclination, interference occurs when moving the resin mold on the back side, so the inner surface of the outer portion 6521a is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction ( See Figure 263).

Similarly, even if the inner surface of the main cylindrical portion 6521e is formed as an inclined surface, it does not interfere when moving the resin mold on the front side in the extraction direction (front), but the frame shape formed on the front side If the outer surface of the extended portion 6521f has the same inclination, it interferes when moving the resin mold, so the outer surface of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f is formed as a surface (non-inclined surface) along the front-rear direction (See FIG. 263).

Here, in the present embodiment, the boundary between the front-side resin mold to be pulled forward and the back-side resin type to be pulled backward is constituted by the closed portion 6521 c and the flange portion 6522, and Where the surface is formed and the above-mentioned non-inclined surface is formed on the other hand, in the closed portion 6521c and the flange portion 6522, the length in the front-rear direction of the non-inclined surface is equal to the length in the front-back direction of the inclined surface It is formed on the side which becomes shorter.

Thereby, while the transparent tubular member 6521 has the gradually increasing shape as described above, it is possible to suppress the change of the plate thickness due to the change of the front and back position, so that the light passing through the thick inside of the transparent tubular member 6521 It is possible to suppress changes in the front and back positions of the progress mode. Therefore, when light is made to enter the inside of the wall and total reflection occurs at the boundary where the light first reaches, the transparent tubular member 6 is then made.
Since total reflection can be easily repeated until reaching the front end of the light source 521 and light leakage can be suppressed, sufficient light can be visually recognized by the player looking at the transparent tubular member 6521 from the front side.

The guide recessed portion 6524a is formed such that the vertical width decreases (tapes) toward the front side. Thereby, compared with the case where the upper and lower widths are formed to be equal in the front and rear direction, when the light transmission unit 6520 and the division unit 6540 are assembled (see FIG. 249 and FIG. 250) As 6543 (see FIG. 255) can be easily inserted, the degree of difficulty in assembly can be reduced.

FIG. 263 shows a rear unit 65 taken along line CCLXIII-CCLXIII of FIG.
60 to 6580, an acoustic device 6610, and a light transmission unit 6520. FIG. In FIG. 263, for convenience of explanation, the state in which the light transmission unit 6520 and the acoustic device 6610 are disposed at the assembly position with respect to the rear units 6560 to 6580 is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 263, the light receiving projecting portion 6521 b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is a partitioning member 6.
When inserted through the 560 direct insertion holes 6562 b, a slight gap is formed, and the tip is inserted to the surface position of the opposing plate portion 6561. Thereby, the opposing plate portion 6561
The distance between the first lighting unit 6574 and the light receiving protrusion 6521 b can be set without being affected by the thickness of the plate.

The light receiving protruding portion 6521 b is formed in a plate shape in which the direction along the shape of the rear surface outer portion 6521 a is a longitudinal direction (see FIG. 260). The dimension in the short direction intersecting with the longitudinal direction is set to be substantially equal to the width dimension of the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 disposed opposite.

Thus, in the short direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b, only light (light having a very small angle with respect to the optical axis) which travels substantially straight from the first illumination portion 6574 to the front side is made incident. It can be prevented.

The light thus incident is likely to travel to the front side inside the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.
Even when light is reflected at the boundary, total reflection is likely to occur because the angle between the transparent cylindrical member 6521 and the direction of light is small, so that light weakens before reaching the front end of the transparent cylindrical member 6521. Can be suppressed.

The dimension in the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521 b is set to about twice the dimension in the lateral direction. Therefore, with respect to the spreading direction of the surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, light which is emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 and has a large angle from the optical axis as compared with the case where the thickness direction of the surface is described. Can also be incident on the light receiving protrusion 6521b.

On the other hand, the back outer surface portion 6521a coupled with the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b is not in contact with the opposing plate portion 6561, and is disposed at a slight interval. Thereby, the first lighting unit 657
Of the lights emitted from 4, the light (light with a large angle between the optical axis and the traveling direction of the light) incident from the end face of the rear surface external portion 6521a is reflected to avoid being viewed by the player be able to.

That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize only the light traveling through the thickness of the main body cylindrical portion 6521e through the inside of the light receiving projection portion 6521b and cutting the other light (weak light). In other words, by setting the longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b, it is possible to set the limit value of the angle based on the optical axis of the light to be incident on the main body cylindrical portion 6521e.

The light emitted from the LED of the first lighting unit 6574 not disposed opposite to the light receiving protrusion 6521 b passes through the inside of the enlarged hole 6562 a and passes through the light transmitting hole 6521 d of the transparent cylindrical member 6521.
It passes (see FIG. 260) and is irradiated to the cup-shaped member 6523 (see FIG. 260). This light does not pass through the thickness of the member but travels in the air, so that the player can visually recognize the light as uniform light.

The raised tip end of the enlarged hole 6562a and the closed portion 6521c abut on the front and rear. Therefore, light can be suppressed from leaking from the gap between the raised tip and the blocking portion 6521c.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, how to look at light that has passed through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 of the light transmission unit 6520 will be described. FIG. 264 (a) is a schematic front view schematically illustrating the arrangement of the first lighting unit 6574, and FIG. 264 (b) schematically illustrates the arrangement of light viewed through the light transmission unit 6520. It is a front schematic diagram. In the description of FIG. 264, FIGS. 261 and 263 will be referred to as appropriate.

First, as described above, since the shape of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 is formed so that the width gradually increases toward the front side, it passes (totally reflects) through the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 The light (light emitted from the eight edge light emitting portions 6574a at the left and right outer sides) is visually recognized in a shape in which the shape (substantially wedge shape) formed by the arrangement of the edge light emitting portions 6574a is enlarged.

In addition, as described above, the light in the thickness direction of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 travels to the front end without being weakened, so that the edge light emitting portion 6 is also viewed from the front of the light transmission unit 6520
A position corresponding to the arrangement of 574 a emits strong light (light emission like a point light source).

Here, since the distance between light sources is longer than the distance L17b between the strong light emitting positions in a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 compared to the actual distance L17a between the light emitting units 6574a, the light is used as a point The effect of light is likely to be insufficient. This problem is caused by the fact that the strong light emitting inter-placement distance L17b of the light to be recognized is longer than the actual inter-placement distance L17a of the edge light emitting portion 6574a, so the number of LEDs actually placed is increased. It is difficult to solve the problem even if the distance between LEDs is narrowed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, the light of the edge light emitting portion 6574a is made to travel radially in the direction along the side surface of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 (longitudinal direction of the light receiving protrusion 6521b). The lights emitted from the adjacent LEDs overlap to reinforce the intensity of the light viewed at the position between the light sources.

Thereby, the linear light can be visually recognized in a front view of the light transmission unit 6520 even in a portion (between the LEDs) where the LEDs of the first lighting unit 6574 are not arranged (FIG. 2).
64 (b) see imaginary line). Therefore, it is possible to improve the condition in which light is visually recognized as a point.

In particular, the two left and right LEDs disposed at the lower end of the first lighting unit 6574
It is disposed at the boundary between the side surface 6521e1 and the bottom surface 6521e2 of 1e (FIG. 262).
See (e)). Therefore, the light traveling above the optical axis overlaps the light of the LED above it, and the light traveling below the optical axis passes through the bottom surface 6521 e 2 and the frame-like extended portion 65
21f Overlap at the lower left and right center.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 264 (a), the left and right center of the lower end portion of the first lighting unit 6574 is L.
As shown in FIG. 264 (b), the light transmission unit 6 is not disposed although the ED is not disposed.
Through 520, line-shaped light is visible at the lower left and right center.

Thus, according to the present embodiment, while reducing the arrangement space of the first lighting unit 6574, the shape formed by the light viewed through the light transmission unit 6520 is enlarged, and additionally,
It is possible to reduce the degree to which light is visually recognized as a spot and to visually recognize sharp linear light.

In addition, when the light transmission unit 6520 is viewed in a front view, the inside is made inconspicuous by the decorative shape applied to the bottom of the cup-like member 6523, so the light traveling inside the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 It is difficult to figure out where the Therefore, even if the position where the light intersects is indeterminate, it is possible to prevent the lowering of the effect of the light-emitting effect.

In addition, when the light overlap position is in the vicinity of the tip of the frame-shaped extended portion 6521f, it can be visually recognized as if a new point light source is disposed between the LEDs of the edge light emitting portion 6574a. That is, since it can be imagined as if there are more LED light sources than the actual number of LEDs, even a small number of LEDs emits light to the same extent as when a large number of LEDs are used It is possible to improve the rendering effect of the rendering.

Surface emitting unit 6574 b (first illuminating unit 6) disposed inward of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 in front view
The light emitted from the four LEDs at the center on the left and right of 574 passes through the inside of the transparent tubular member 6521. Here, the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion 6574b does not travel within the thickness of the transparent cylindrical member 6521, and additionally, the shape of the enlarged hole 6562a disposed opposite (see FIG. 2).
Proceed radially along 45) (see (b)).

Therefore, the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit 6574 b is a surface light emitting unit 6574 in a front view.
It is visually recognized as planar light spreading as an area A17 centered on the LED b. In addition, the light has a jagged shape on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523 as a decorative shaped portion 6523 b (FIG.
It diffusely reflects by being irradiated to 60), and it is visually recognized as planar light in front view.

That is, the area where the light emitted radially from the surface light emitting portion 6574b reaches (FIG. 264 (b)
Not only the imaginary line, but also the outward facing decorative shape 6 on the back side of the cup-shaped member 6523
523 b is formed (for example, the area A 17 in a front view and the frame-like extending portion 6521 f
Region) can be brightened.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the first lighting unit 6574 can be visually recognized as light having different impressions, ie, edge-shaped light and planar light. In addition, it is configured to be irradiated with the irregularly reflected light at the boundary between the edge-like light and the planar light.
It is possible to avoid the darkening of the boundary. Therefore, it is possible to change the impression of the light that is viewed stepwise and continuously.

Here, various aspects are illustrated as a change of the impression of light to be recognized. For example, it may be a change in the impression of a light emission situation such as light or dark or blinking, or may be a change in the color of light.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface where light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The partition unit 6540 visually recognized in front view on the left and right of the cup-shaped member 6523 has a curved shape that swells to the front side in the front view and the side view as described above. for that reason,
The light visually recognized on the left and right of the cup-shaped member 6523 travels in a direction (direction diffused with respect to a point on the back side) away from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the left and right and up and down.

Furthermore, as described above, the light receiving member 6558 disposed on the left and right lower sides of the division unit 6540 has light passing through the light receiving member 6558 from the position where the front side edge is positioned on the back side as the left and right outer side And proceeding from the cup-shaped member 6523 in the direction away from (in the direction of diffusion with respect to the point on the back side) left and right and up and down.

This makes it possible to give the player the impression that the light gets larger as it gets closer to the player, as compared with the case where the light is directed only in the front and back direction. It can be improved.

Next, the horizontal rendering device 6700 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 265 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, and FIG.
It is a disassembled front perspective view of.

In FIG. 265, the upper rendering device 6500, the operation device 10300, and the lower tray unit 6400 are not shown, and a direction view from the right front in a state in which the horizontal rendering device 6700 is disassembled from the metal main body 10014a is illustrated. In FIG. 266, the side effect device 6700
The direction view from the left front of the

As shown in FIG. 265 and FIG. 266, the horizontal rendering device 6700 includes a metal main body 10014a.
The effect device is disposed on the front side of the left and right vertically long portions, and is formed into a shape in which a vertically long oval shape is divided into halves in a side view.

In addition, although the apparatus of the similar shape is arrange | positioned by a left-right paired pair, since the internal configuration is equivalent, the side effect apparatus 6700 of the right side is demonstrated in detail, and the side effect apparatus 6700 of the left side effect apparatus 6700 is the same. The description is omitted.

As shown in the upper end portion of FIG.
Is configured in such a manner that covering units 6300 to 6760 covering the front side of the base member 6710 are disposed on the front side of the base member 6710 fitted to the metal main body portion 10014a.

The fastening between the base member 6710 and the metal main body 10014 a will be described. When assembling the base member 6710 to the metal main body portion 10014 a, positioning is performed by inserting a positioning convex portion (not shown) protruding from the back surface of the base member 6710 into a positioning concave portion 10014 e formed in the metal main body portion 10014 a The fastening screw inserted in the through hole of the metal main body 10014 a is fastened and fixed to a fastening hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the base member 6710.

Among the constituent members of the lateral rendering device 6700, only the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body portion 10014a. In other words, among the components of the lateral rendering device 6700,
Except for the base member 6710, there is no component that is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a.

As shown in FIG. 266, on the side toward the game area, a position where the main body curved portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750 completely covers the side surface of the base member 6710 (a position where it becomes a surface position with the back side end of the base member 6710) Are formed up to. The rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 is shown in FIG.
As shown by the unit on the left side at 5, the glass unit 16 is disposed close to and in front of and in front of the glass unit 16.

As such, the light emitted from the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 and the light emitted from the back side of the glass unit 16 can be easily and easily displayed. can do.

FIG. 267 is an exploded front perspective view of the side effect device 6700, and FIG. 268 is a side effect device 6
FIG. 7 is an exploded back perspective view of 700; In FIGS. 267 and 268, the covering units 6730 to 6
A state in which 760 is disassembled from the base member 6710 to the front side is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 267, on the front side of the base member 6710, an electric decoration board 6720 on which a plurality of LED chips D1 configured to emit light is mounted is disposed.
The covering units 6730 to 6760 are assembled to the base member 6710 in a manner of covering from the front side to zero.

That is, the lateral rendering device 6700 is a device functioning as one of the lamp display devices 227 (see FIG. 4), and supports the electric decoration board 6720 whose emission is controlled by the sound lamp control device 113 and the electric decoration board 6720 A light emitting side unit composed of a base member 6710
A covering unit 673 that receives light emitted from the light emitting side unit and causes the player to visually recognize
And the light receiving side unit composed of 0 to 6760. First, the light emitting side unit will be described.

FIG. 269 (a) is a front view of the base member 6710 and the electric decoration board 6720, and FIG.
9 (b) is a left side view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (c) is a base member 67.
26 (d) is a top view of the base member 6710, and FIG.
9 (e) is a bottom view of the base member 6710, and FIG. 269 (f) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710 and the electric decoration substrate 6720 taken along line CCLXIXf-CCLXIXf of FIG. 269 (a).

As shown in FIG. 269 (a) to FIG. 269 (f), the base member 6710 is provided with the electric decoration substrate 6
A flat plate-like support plate 6711 is disposed opposite to the substrate 720 and disposed on the back side of the electric decoration substrate 6720.
And a frame-like projecting portion 6712 projecting toward the front side of the support plate portion 6711 in a frame shape along the outer shape of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and a positioning projecting toward the front side beyond the frame-like projecting portion 6712 Projection part 67
13 and a plurality of insertion holes 6714 formed on the outer side of the electric decoration board 6720 so as to be insertable through the fastening screws at positions close to the electric decoration board 6720 in a front view and the insertion holes 6736 at two upper and lower positions A pair of fastening portions 6715 to which the fastening screws to be inserted are fastened, and the support plate 6
711 (step of the outer frame plate portion 6717) in the region on the right side of the frame-like projecting portion 6712 (the opposite side of the window surrounding the game area, the opposite side of the glass unit 16) A plurality of alignment holes 6716 formed as holes, an outer frame plate portion 6717 extended in a step-like plate shape from the right edge of the support plate portion 6711 to the back side, and a left edge of the support plate portion 6711 And an inner frame plate portion 6718 extending in a plate shape to the back side.

The protruding end of the frame-shaped protruding portion 6712 is disposed so as to face the rear surface portion in the vicinity of the outer shape portion of the electric decoration substrate 6720, and makes surface contact with the electric decoration substrate 6720. Thus, an air gap is provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the back side of the portion excluding the vicinity of the outer portion of the electric decoration substrate 6720 (see FIG. 269 (f)). Therefore, a layer of air (heat insulating layer) can be provided between the support plate portion 6711 and the electric decoration substrate 6720.

As a result, even if the base member 6710 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a and the heat transmitted to the metal main body 10014a can be transmitted to the base member 6710, the amount of heat transmitted to the electric decorative substrate 6720 Can be suppressed (suppressed low), so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect such as a malfunction due to the high temperature of the electric decoration board 6720.

The positioning projecting portion 6713 is a positioning hole 672 formed in two places of the electric decoration substrate 6720.
By being inserted into 2, the portion for aligning the electric decoration substrate 6720 with respect to the base member 6710 is provided. That is, the base member 6710 and the electric decoration board 67 are used as the electric decoration board 6720.
Positioning projecting portion 6 with reference to the arrangement in the assembled state with 20 (see FIG. 269 (a))
Positioning holes 6722 are drilled at positions corresponding to 713.

The insertion hole 6714 is a fastening portion 67 of the flat plate member 6740 of the covering unit 6730 to 6760.
44, and the fastening portion 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is provided with a cup-shaped portion that can be fitted from the front (
268), which are formed so that they can be aligned, and are through holes through which fastening screws to be fastened and fixed are inserted.

The fastening portion 6715 is engaged with and aligned with the insertion hole 6736 of the light receiving member 6730 (see FIG. 271), and is formed so as to be able to screw in a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6736. The light receiving member 6730 is fixed to the base member by being fastened and fixed to the upper and lower two fastening portions 6715.

The alignment hole 6716 is a protruding portion 6743, 676 of the covering unit 6730 to 6760.
6 (see FIG. 268) is a hole to be inserted. The covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed substantially in a cup shape in which a thin plate-like pair of members (a flat plate member 6740 and a curved plate member 6750) are disposed opposite to each other on the left and right and open on the back side (see FIG. 268). ), Fixed to the base member 6710 at the rear side (edge-like portion).

Here, the connecting portion between the base member 6710 and the covering unit 6730 to 6760 is located at a portion (outer portion) which can be touched by the player, and a load given by the player (for example, the player collides) Can be displaced by the load generated by As mentioned above, the base member 6
Since it is fixed to the rear side end of thin-walled shape at 710, it deforms when a load is applied that faces the thickness direction (for example, the left-right direction) of the flat plate member 6740 or the curved plate member 6750,
There is a possibility that positional deviation with respect to the base member 6710 may occur. In order to prevent this
Although the fixed locations (fastening locations) between the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 and the base member 6710 may be increased, there is a possibility that the number of assembling operations increases.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, while suppressing an increase in the number of fixed locations, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are base members by inserting the projecting portions 6743, 6766 into the plurality of alignment holes 6716. It is possible to suppress positional deviation (positional deviation in the left-right direction) with respect to 6710.

In addition, the inner side surface (left side surface) of the main body plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 has the frame-like protruding portion 671.
The flat plate member 6740 is in contact with the frame-like projecting portion 6712 even if a load in the left direction is applied to the flat plate member 6740 from the player because the flat plate member 6740 is placed close to the outer side surface (right side surface) of the two. Since it contacts, movement of flat member 6740 is regulated. Therefore, the covering units 6730 to 676
It is possible to suppress that 0 is deformed or displaced with respect to the base member 6710.

Accordingly, the durability of the horizontal rendering device 6700 can be improved while suppressing an increase in the number of assembly operations. The main body plate portion 6741 can disperse the load by providing the unevenness forming portion 6741a in which a fine uneven shape is formed in the contact range with the frame-like protruding portion 6712, but the details will be described later. .

The outer frame plate portion 6717 is disposed so as to face the right side surface of the metal main portion 10014a so as to face the surface, and covers (covers) the right side of the metal main portion 10014a. Thereby, the metal main body 10014a
Can be prevented from being viewed by the player.

The outer frame plate portion 6717 includes a support recess 6717a which is recessed from a part of the alignment holes 6716 in the front-rear direction. The support recess 6717a is recessed along the left side of the alignment hole 6716 on the front side of the alignment hole 6716, and is recessed along the right side of the alignment hole 6716 on the back side of the alignment hole 6716.

The support concave portion 6717a is formed in a size to be engaged with the projecting portion 6743 or to be disposed opposite to each other with a slight gap in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265). Therefore, as compared with the case where the projecting portion 6743 is supported only by the alignment hole 6716, the area capable of supporting the projecting portion 6743 can be increased (supported by the surface of the support recess 6717a), so that the flat member Misalignment of the 6740 with the base member 6710 can be suppressed. In other words, the flat plate member 6740 can be stably supported on the base member 6710.

The inner frame plate portion 6718 is a portion disposed opposite to the main body bending portion 6751 of the curved plate member 6750, and is formed in a surface shape facing the gaming area side (inner side).

The electric decoration substrate 6720 is a so-called printed circuit board, and is formed in a plate-like main body plate portion 6721.
And positioning holes 6222 drilled in two places of the main body plate portion 6721;
The LED chip D1 mainly includes a plurality of LED chips D1 mounted in an arbitrary pattern.

The main body plate 6721 is held by the base member 6710 without being fastened and fixed. That is, the positioning projection portion 6713 (see FIG. 269 (c)) is inserted into the positioning hole 6222 to restrict the movement in the left, right, up and down directions, and the movement in the front and back direction corresponds to the base member 6710 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. 280). The movement is restricted by being sandwiched between

A similar chip is mounted on the LED chip D1 in the present embodiment, but in relation to the area shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 269 (a) as the boundary of the area showing the configuration of the light receiving side units 6730 to 6760 , Divided into two types.

That is, the LED chip D1 includes an edge light emitting portion D1a disposed inside the frame of the imaginary line shown in FIG. 269 (a) and a surface light emitting portion D1b disposed outside the frame of the imaginary line. Prepare mainly. The difference between the light emitting units D1a and D1b is that light emitted from the light emitting unit D1a is easily recognized as line-shaped (edge-shaped) light, while light emitted from the light emitting unit D1b is easily recognized as planar light This corresponds to the difference in the light emission mode to be made to be recognized by the player, which will be described in detail later.

Next, the covering units 6730 to 6760 (see FIG. 267) disposed on the front side of the electric decoration board 6720 will be described. FIG. 270 is an exploded front perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760, and FIG. 271 is an exploded rear perspective view of the covering units 6730 to 6760.

As is apparent from the state shown in FIGS. 267 and 268, as shown by being disassembled and shown in FIGS. 270 and 271, the covering units 6730 to 6760 are formed of the light transmitting resin in the inside and pass through the inside. Light-receptive member 6730 capable of refracting light and covering the electric decoration substrate 6720 from the front side
And is configured to cover the front with another component.

272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, FIG. 272 (b) is a front view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 272 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730,
FIG. 273 (a) shows the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIa of FIG. 272 (a).
273 (b) is a partially enlarged view of the light receiving member 6730 in the range CCLXXIIIb of FIG. 272 (b).

Further, FIG. 274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730, and FIG. 274 (b) is a rear view.
FIG. 274 (c) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730. FIG.

FIG. 272 (a) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the left side, and FIG.
2 (c) is a front perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right, FIG. 274 (a) is a rear perspective view of the light receiving member 6730 as viewed from the right, and FIG. 274 (c) is a light receiving member 6730
It is the back perspective view which looked at from the left side. Further, in FIG. 272 (b), the covering units 6730 to 6760 are collectively illustrated for easy understanding.

The light receiving member 6730 is a member formed of a light transmitting resin material, and the electric decoration substrate 67
Bent from a light receiving surface 6731 formed in a flat plate shape and having an outer shape equivalent to the outer shape of 20 and disposed opposite to the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the inner edge (left edge in FIG. 272) of the light receiving surface 6731 in the assembled state (FIG. 207) Of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state (right side edge in FIG. 274) and the back side extending of the light receiving surface portion 6731 in the assembled state. Setting portion 6733, a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) long ribs 6734 protruding from the back surface of the light receiving surface 6731, and a base end of the long rib 6734 (the light receiving surface 6731 A plurality of (five in the present embodiment) fins 6735 extended from the front of the position where the sides to be joined coincide with each other on the front and back of the light receiving surface portion 6731 (five locations in this embodiment) 67 5 (see FIG. 269 (a)), and is formed in a shape that can be fitted with a plurality of insertion holes 6736 through which fastening screws to be fastened are inserted and a decorative projecting portion 6751 a (see FIG. 276) of curved plate member 6750 And a fitting portion 6737.

The light receiving surface portion 6731 is a portion for refracting the light emitted from the LED chip D1, and a decorative pattern including a complicated cut is formed on the back side. The decorative pattern is formed with elongated projections concentrically arranged along a plurality of circles having different diameters, centering on a location opposed to the surface light emitting portion D1b (see the enlarged view in FIG. 274 (b) ). Here, the outer peripheral surface of the small-diameter protrusion at the position facing the surface light emitting portion D1b is inclined outward (a mode in which the light emitted from the back is refracted outward along the surface of the light receiving surface portion 6731 Is inclined at
Similarly, the outer peripheral surface of the large-diameter protrusion is inclined in a manner to refract light traveling along the surface of the light receiving surface 6731 to the front side of the light receiving surface 6731 (see (b) in FIG. Figure 27.
5 (b)).

Therefore, the light irradiated from the surface light emitting portion D1b is refracted near the axis of the long protrusion and travels to the outer diameter side of the long protrusion, and then the large diameter further away from the axis of the long protrusion By refracting at a portion and advancing to the front side, a wide range of the light receiving surface portion 6731 can be made to emit light.

Furthermore, on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731 is formed a triangular shape in a front view, and a basic shape in which a substantially central portion bulges to the front side is regularly and densely aligned. A decorative concave portion 6731a concaved in a substantially hexagonal shape is provided at the front side position of D1b.

The decorative concave portion 6731 a can make the surface light emission in the light receiving surface portion 6731 strong and weak (stepwise strength and weakness can be made). That is, since light is collected to the center side of the recess due to the shape of the decoration recess 6731a, the decoration recess 6731a can be visually recognized in a strong light emission mode as compared with the other portions.

The inward extending portions 6732 and the outward extending portions 6733 are configured such that the extending end portions abut against the electric decoration substrate 6720 in the front and back direction, and the extending end portions of the inward extending portions 6732 extend over the entire upper and lower sides. A portion which abuts on the electric decoration substrate 6720 but which does not abut on the extending end portion of the outer extending portion 6733 is formed.

That is, the outer extension portion 6733 is provided with a separated end portion 6733a that is not in contact with and separated from the electric decoration substrate 6720 because the extension length is formed as short as the thickness of the electric decoration substrate 6720. In the present embodiment, since the air can be favorably moved in and out of the region between the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 by the separated end portion 6733a, heat stagnation can be prevented.

Further, as in the case of the inner extending portion 6732, when the electric decoration substrate 6720 is in contact with the entire upper and lower portions, the LED chip D1 disposed so as to protrude from the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the electric decoration substrate 6720 It can not be placed behind the extension 6732. Therefore, as the plate thickness of the inner extension portion 6732 is increased, the area in which the LED chip D1 is disposed is limited.

On the other hand, since a gap is formed between the separated end portion 6733a of the outer extended portion 6733 and the electric decoration board 6720, the separated end portion 6 of the outer extended portion 6732 is formed.
It can be placed behind the 733a. Therefore, the placement area of the LED chip D1 can be secured to the maximum while securing the plate pressure of the outer extended portion 6733 sufficiently.

The left and right wall portions of the outer extending portion 6733 are formed as smooth surfaces, while the wall portion of the left side of the inner extending portion 6732 (opposite to the outer extending portion 6733) has a rib with a semicircular cross section. An uneven shape is formed in a manner to be aligned with. As a result, the light emitted leftward through the inner extension portion 6732 emits surface light (radially spreads), making it easier for the player to visually recognize uniform light.

In the inner extending portion 6732, as will be described later, a part of the light emitted from the electric decoration substrate 6720 to the front side passes through, and the intensity of the light changes in each area. That is, fins 6735
At the peripheral position of the end of the light, a light D1m in which both the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and traveling through the long rib 6734 and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b are combined is visually recognized. In the position away from the light, the light traveling on the long rib 6734 does not reach, and the light D1p emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b is visually recognized, and the light D1m is the light D
It is recognized as light stronger than 1p (the magnitude of the light intensity corresponds to the length of the arrow).

As a result, the magnitude of the intensity of light visually recognized through the inward extending portion 6732 can be changed and visually recognized in each of the vertically aligned regions. The difference in the aspect of the light visually recognized through the inward extending portion 6732 is not limited to the intensity.

For example, by making the color of the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a different from the color of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b, the color of the light viewed through the inner extending portion 6732 can be It can be changed and visually recognized for every lined area.

The long rib 6734 is disposed on the front side of the edge light emitting portion D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265), and formed with the same thickness without tapering back and forth It mainly includes a plurality of linear ribs 6734a formed in a substantially linear shape in a rear view, and a V-shaped rib 6734b bent in a rear view and formed in a substantially V shape.

The side surface of the long rib 6734 is formed as a smooth surface. That is, unlike the case where the jagged processing on the line is formed on the surface of the long rib 6734, light does not spread (does not emit surface light) when the light reaches and passes through the side surface of the long rib 6734. Proceed to Therefore, long ribs 6
Since it is possible to avoid that the side surface of 734 emits light uniformly, when the horizontal rendering device 6700 is viewed from the left and right direction, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b It is possible to reduce the degree to which the light is mixed and visually recognized.

That is, while the long rib 6734 is formed to be long in the vertical direction and configured as a portion that can be viewed in the left-right direction, it is suppressed that light passing through the long rib 6734 reaches the eyes of the player in the surface emission mode. Since the player can visually recognize the horizontal rendering device 6700 from the left and right, it is easy to visually recognize the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface where light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

The linear ribs 6734a are arranged in twos at the top and the bottom, and are formed in a direction extending toward the center of the upper and lower sides toward the left (the center side of the front frame 10014, see FIG. 265). 6734a1 is connected with the inner extension 6732 while the right end 6734a2
Are spaced apart from the outer extension 6733.

Therefore, light traveling inside the linear rib 6734a can be directly incident on the inner extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1, while light passing through the right end portion 6734a2 is the outer extending portion 6733. The light energy is reduced in the gap between

Thereby, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right ends of the linear rib 6734a is different. That is, the portion visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is visually recognized bright, and the portion visually recognized through the outer extending portion 6733 is visually recognized dark as compared with that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right direction is deteriorated, while the left end portion 6 of the linear rib 6734 a
The light entering the inward extending portion 6732 through the 734a1 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inward extending portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction as far as the light entering the inward extending portion 6732 through the left end portion 6734a1. That is, the left end 6
In the vicinity of 734a1, the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a are recognized, and at the position away from the left end 6734a1 (the position between), the color and the brightness of light irradiated from the surface light emitting unit D1b Since it can be visually recognized, it is possible to visually recognize light of different color and brightness for the player who visually recognizes the horizontal rendering device 6700 from the left and right direction.

The V-shaped rib 6734 b is disposed at the upper and lower center position, and the middle connecting portion 673 near the bending position.
Both ends 6734b2 are connected to the outer extending portion 673 while being connected to the inner extending portion 6732 by 4b1.
Separated from 3. Note that the bending position and the middle connecting portion 6734b1 are slightly shifted as follows:
This is because the edge light emitting unit D1a (see FIG. 269 (a)) is disposed to face the bending position.

That is, the position where the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a is received is set to the middle connecting portion 6734b1.
Since the light (main light) irradiated linearly in the front-rear direction from the edge light-emitting portion D1a can be suppressed from being incident on the connection position by shifting it, the V-shaped rib 6734b
The loss of light incident on the fins 6735 can be reduced.

The V-shaped rib 6734 b has the same function as that of the linear rib 6734 a described above. That is, light traveling inside the V-shaped rib 6734b can be directly incident on the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connection portion 6734b1, while light passing through both end portions 6734b2 is the outer extending portion 6733 The light energy is reduced in the gap between

Thereby, the brightness visually recognized in the vicinity of the left and right end portions of the V-shaped rib 6734b is different. That is, the portion visually recognized through the inner extending portion 6732 is visually recognized bright, and the portion visually recognized through the outer extending portion 6733 is visually recognized dark as compared with that.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the surface light emission through the side surface of the long rib 6734 is suppressed, and the visibility of light from the left and right direction is deteriorated, while the middle connecting portion 6734 b 1 of the V-shaped rib 6734 b is The light passing through and entering the inward extending portion 6732 is surface-emitted through the surface of the inward extending portion 6732.

Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a is easily visible in the left-right direction only by the light entering the inner extending portion 6732 through the intermediate connection portion 6734b1. That is, in the vicinity of the intermediate connection portion 6734b1, it is visually recognized by the color and brightness of the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a,
At a position away from the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 (a position between), the color and brightness of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b can be visually recognized.
The player who visually recognizes 00 can be made to visually recognize light of different colors and brightness.

The fins 6735 are formed to be thinner in thickness from the extension base end to the tip side,
Mainly, a tip curved fin 6735a corresponding to the linear rib 6734a and a tip curved fin 6735b corresponding to the V-shaped rib 6734b are provided.

The upper and lower inner edge portions of the tip curved fin 6735a are curved to form a left side surface (front frame 100).
The light diffusion portion is formed by densely forming notches in a triangular wave shape (jagged shape) in the inner surface 14 of the optical fiber 14, and the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

The tip end bending fin 6735b has an inclined surface which is inclined toward the back side as the extending end goes from the upper and lower end toward the upper and lower center and intersects at the front side of the bending position of the V-shaped rib 6734b. The light diffusion portion is formed by densely forming notches in a triangular wave shape (jagged shape) in the inner surface of 10014, and the right side surface (the outer surface of the front frame 10014) is formed as a smooth surface.

These fins 6735 are formed so that the extension length becomes shorter toward the left surface side. In particular, in the tip curved fin 6735a, since the end on the left surface side is coupled to the light receiving surface 6731, light with a large amount of light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and emitted from the front end of the tip curved fin 6735a Light) is emitted from the fin 6735 near the light receiving surface 6731. Therefore, the light is extended to the inner extending portion 6732 side (rear side, root side)
It can be made to reach to the left side, and the left side of the light receiving member 6730 can be easily brightened.

In addition, the long rib 6734 and the inner extending portion 6732 are connected behind the position where the tip curved fin 6735a is connected to the light receiving surface portion 6731, and the light is transmitted to the inside by the light passing inside the long rib 6734. The portion 6732 can be illuminated. That is, since light passing through the inside of the long rib 6734 can be combined with light passing through the tip curved fin 6735a in the vicinity of the position where the tip curved fin 6735a joins with the light receiving surface portion 6731, light emission can be performed. The light-emitting effect can be improved.

In addition, this jagged shape is demonstrated as a process given to the surface where light is irradiated, and the shape is not limited at all. For example, shape processing in which the dot shape is densely formed may be used, or wavy stripe shape processing may be performed.

From the difference in the formation mode of the left side surface and the right side surface of the fin 6735, the passage mode of light passing through the side surface can be changed. That is, while the light passing through the left side can be visually recognized as uniform light from the surface emitting action by the notch, the light passing through the right side does not have the surface emitting action, so it passes through the right side Can be viewed as local light. It goes without saying that the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 function as reinforcing portions for reinforcing the base member 6710 due to their shapes.

The insertion holes 6736 are in a state in which one place is exposed in the assembled state of the horizontal rendering device 6700 (FIG. 266), and only two places are arranged at the upper and lower ends of the light receiving member 6730. Therefore, the light receiving member 6730 can be shifted in position by loosening the fastening screw inserted into the exposed insertion hole 6736 and applying a load to the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As a result, when the positional relationship between the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 and the edge light emitting unit D1a of the LED chip D1 deviates (for example, the vibration by the operation of the player, the front frame 100
Maintenance work can be carried out without disassembling the horizontal rendering device 6700, so maintenance work can be improved (the degree of difficulty is low, and the time is shortened). )be able to.

The fitting portion 6737 has an inclined shape that tapers toward the rear surface and is recessed in the left-right direction, and the alignment and alignment of the light receiving member 6730 with the components of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are performed. Is a portion which is engaged by fitting, and is provided with a single recessed portion 6737a so as to be further recessed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the light receiving member 6730 and the light receiving member 6730 are limited (while being reduced) while the disposition location of the concave portion 6737a (location where the fastening portion 6753 is disposed) on the inner extension portion 6732 side is limited to one location. In addition, positional deviation and posture deviation with constituent members of the covering units 6730 to 6760 other than the light receiving member 6730 are suppressed. This is discussed in more detail below.

Here, when the left and right side surfaces of the lateral rendering device 6700 are fastened and fixed, the fastening screw does not transmit light, and therefore, the more the fastening points are, the more the shadow is easily generated. Therefore, the side effect device 67
Even when the surface area of 00 is formed large, the light is divided at the fastening point, and there is a possibility that the effect of the light effect may be lowered. On the other hand, reducing the number of fastening points will lower the supporting power
There is a possibility that the possibility that the horizontal rendering device 6700 may be deformed from the base is increased by the load given by the player or the load generated when the front frame 10014 is opened and closed.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, maintaining the supporting force is achieved by fitting the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative projecting portion 6751a (see FIG. 276) while limiting the fastening portion to the recess 6737a. ing.

Thereby, the side effect device 6 in the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265) side
While reducing 700 fastening points (in the present embodiment, fastening points disposed between the main curved portion 6751 as a light effect site and the electric decoration board 6720), the durability of the horizontal rendering device 6700 is improved. be able to.

Further, in the present embodiment, light is formed to be able to travel to the back side through the recess 6737a. This will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 275 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the horizontal rendering device 6700 taken along line CCLXXVa-CCLXXVa in FIG. 274 (b), and FIG. 275 (b) is CCLXXVb- in FIG. 274 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the light receiving member 6730 in a CCLXXVb line | wire.

As shown in FIG. 275 (a), the concave portion 6737a is disposed in the same cross section as the intermediate connecting portion 6734b1 of the V-shaped rib 6734b disposed opposite to the edge light emitting portion D1a. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a portion through which light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a can travel (see FIG. 2).
81), the striped decorative portion 6751 through the fastening portion 6753 fitted into the recess 6737a.
The light is formed to be able to travel to the back side of the main body curved portion 6751 where the e is formed. That is, the light is formed to be able to travel toward the back surface side (the opposite side of the light irradiation direction) of the electric decoration substrate 6720.

Here, the fastening portion 6753 is a portion to which the fastening screw is fastened, and is considered unsuitable for light emission production because the fastening screw is likely to be a shadow, but in the present embodiment, intermediate connection is made on both upper and lower sides of the fastening portion 6753 Since the portion 6734b1 is formed, the light can be made to be visible to the player while suppressing the influence of the shadow of the fastening screw by the light avoiding the fastening screw up and down.
That is, by advancing the light from both the upper and lower sides of the fastening screw, the shadow of the fastening screw visually recognized by the player can be eliminated (thinned).

In FIG. 275 (b), the light receiving surface 6731 is shown enlarged. Of the light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b, light traveling in a direction having a small angle with respect to the optical axis along the front and back direction enters the inside of the light receiving surface portion 6731 while being loosely refracted and passes through the decorative recessed portion 6731a The light is further refracted and collected. Thereby, the light emission intensity of the light visually recognized via the decoration recessed part 6731a can be increased.

Thus, in the light emission mode on the front side of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the light intensity increases as the distance from the decorative concave portion 6731a increases, with the decorative concave portion 6731a at which the light intensity is increased by focusing. It is considered to be a mode that becomes lower.

At this time, since light is collected at the decorative recessed portion 6731a, the light is gathered to the optical axis side as compared to the case where the surface light emitting portion D1b is viewed as a single item, so the surface light emitting portion D1
Compared to the case where the light irradiated from b is viewed without the light receiving surface portion 6731, the intensity of the visible light can be increased.

That is, by the action of the light receiving surface portion 6731, the surface emitting portion D is made of light having high intensity (light visible in the vicinity of the decorative recessed portion 6731 a) even when the light emitted from the surface emitting portion D1b is directly viewed.
The light intensity is gradually reduced to a lower intensity light than direct observation of the light emitted from 1b,
The light having different intensities can be viewed by the player through the surface of the light receiving surface 6731.

Referring back to FIG. 270, a member covering the light receiving member 6730 will be described. On the front side of the light receiving member 6730, a cup-shaped member whose back side is open is disposed. The flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750, and the cover member 6760 constituting the cup-shaped member will be described.

FIG. 276 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 277 is a flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6
278 is an exploded front perspective view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760, and FIG. 279 is a view of the flat plate member 6740, the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760. It is a disassembled back perspective view.

After the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 are assembled from the left and right direction and united by fastening and fixing, the cover member 6760 is assembled and fitted from the front side, thereby fixing the respective members inseparably.

The flat plate member 6740 is a member formed of a colorless and transparent light transmitting resin, and is formed with a main plate portion 6741 formed of a flat plate having a shape obtained by dividing an oval shape, and a main plate portion 6741 thereof. It is a flat plate portion disposed on a plane which is translated from the plane to the left side, and the main body plate portion 6741
From the rear side end of the main body plate portion 6741 and a plurality of projecting portions 6743 projecting from the rear side end of the main body plate portion 6741 and the projecting portion 6743 A plurality of fastening portions 6744 which are disposed at spaced positions and configured such that fastening screws can be screwed in from the rear side
And a plurality of insertion holes 6745 drilled into the main body plate portion 6741 with a size capable of inserting the fastening screw.
And mainly.

The main body plate portion 6741 has a decorative shape which is recessed leftward from the left side surface and protrudes rightward from the right side surface corresponding to the concave shape, and the right end portion of the main body plate portion 6741 is , Body plate portion 674
Match the right side of 1

The unevenness forming portion 6741a forms a honeycomb structure in such a manner that a hexagonal pyramid disposed to be tapered to the left is filled, and produces an action similar to that of a reflector. Thereby, the main body plate portion 6741
The strength of the rear side (where it can be in contact with the outer frame plate portion 6717 (see FIG. 268) of the base member 6710 in the assembled state) can be improved. Can be prevented. Also, the base member 6710 is a flat plate member 67.
40, it is possible to reduce contact friction when sliding the assembly of the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 6760 for assembly.

Therefore, after the lateral rendering device 6700 is assembled to the front frame 10014, the outer frame plate portion 6717 is broken when the player gives an impact or the load is applied when the front frame 10014 is opened or closed. In addition to the fact that the durability can be improved by making it difficult, the assembly of the horizontal rendering device 6700 can be facilitated.

The to-be-fitted plate portion 6742 is a front-rear direction which is drilled in a direction along the groove portion 6742 a in a step between the plurality of groove portions 6742 a cut as a narrow groove along the front-rear direction And the holes 6742b. The groove portion 6742a and the longitudinal direction hole 6742b have a function of aligning the flat plate member 6740 and the cover member 6760, which will be described in detail later.

The protruding portion 6743 is a portion inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710, and the fastening portion 6744 is an insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (
It is a portion fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through FIG. 269 (see a).

In addition, the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744 are provided with the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730.
It is disposed at a position close to the outside of the right edge of the front view. In particular, the fastening portion 6744 is the electric decoration board 6
2 and the light receiving member 6730 (see FIGS. 269 (a) and 2).
74 (b)), the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 673 for the flat plate member
A positional shift of 0 can be suppressed.

The insertion holes 6745 are through holes through which fastening screws to be screwed into the curved plate member 6750 are inserted, and are disposed at four places in the vertical direction. The curved plate member 6750 is a flat plate member 6740 at four fastening positions.
And the fastening portion 6 formed on the back side of the curved plate member 6750.
Even if the number 753 is small, it is possible to avoid the lack of the fixing force.

The curved plate member 6750 is formed to be curved so as to expand to the left as it faces the main plate portion 6741 of the flat plate member 6740 so as to face the back side, and formed to cover the front side of the light receiving member 6730 Body curved portion 6 formed of a flexible resin and having a plurality of stripe shapes on the inner side surface
751 and a curved plate portion disposed parallel to the right side from the main body curved portion 6751. The front side edge of the main body curved portion 6751 is connected with a level difference and is opposed to the fitted plate portion 6742 Fitted plate portion 6752 and a plurality of fastening portions 6 configured such that fastening screws can be screwed in from the back side
753, a plurality of fastening portions 6754 in which fastening screws can be screwed in at positions corresponding to the insertion holes 6745, and fastening screws can be pierced in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the main body bending portion 6751 A plurality of insertion holes 6755 and a plurality of insertion holes 6756 through which fastening screws can be inserted in the front-rear direction at the front side edge portion of the fitted plate portion 6752 are mainly provided.

The main body curved portion 6751 is a triangular shape which tapers toward the back side in a region including the fastening portion 6753 in the upper and lower center, and a decorative projecting portion 6751a which protrudes from the right side to the right and the decorative projecting portion 6751a Front and rear direction holes 6751b drilled in the front and rear direction in the front side portion, a flat partition portion 6751c dividing the stripe shape with a flat surface, and a central flat portion 6751d formed from a flat surface facing in the front and rear direction And a striped decorative portion 6751e formed in a thin stripe shape on the inner surface near the rear end.

The decorative projecting portion 6751 a is configured as a portion to be fitted with the fitting portion 6737 of the light receiving member 6730. In addition, the longitudinal direction hole 6751 b has a function of aligning the connecting extension portion 6763 with the curved plate member 6750.

Accordingly, the decorative protruding portion 6751a can be configured as a portion having both the function as the decorative portion and the function as the portion for aligning the light receiving member 6730. As a result, it is possible to suppress the bending of the curved plate member 6750 even in the configuration in which only one fastening portion 6753 is disposed at the upper and lower center portion (small number) as in the present embodiment.

The flat section 6751c is formed in a region including a position where the front edge of the tip curved fin 6735a (see FIG. 272 (a)) matches the front edge in the front-rear direction and the side view. Thereby, in the case where light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207)
Since the light passes through the flat section 6751c, it can be viewed as clear light.

On the other hand, the light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip curved fin 6735a is irregularly reflected by the plurality of stripe-shaped portions divided by the flat partition portion 6751c. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip curved fin 6735a is viewed from the side, the light emission mode of the light can be made surface emission, and the light can be blurred and viewed.

The central flat portion 6751 d is formed in a region including a position coinciding with the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735 b (see FIG. 272 (a)) in the front and rear direction and the side view. Thereby, in the case where light emitted from the front edge portion of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the front (see FIG. 207)
Since the light passes through the central flat portion 6751d, it can be viewed as clear light.

On the other hand, light emitted to the inner side surface (the side surface facing the game area) of the tip bending fin 6735b is irregularly reflected by the plurality of stripe-shaped portions. Therefore, when the light emitted from the inner side surface of the tip bending fin 6735b is viewed from the side, the light emission mode of the light can be made surface emission, and the light can be blurred and viewed.

Similar to the fitted plate portion 6742 of the flat plate member 6740, the fitted plate portion 6752 has a plurality of groove portions 6752a cut out as narrow grooves along the front-rear direction on the left surface, and a main body curved portion 6751
And a longitudinal direction hole 6752b drilled in a direction along the groove portion 6752a in the step between them. The groove portion 6752 a and the longitudinal direction hole 6752 b are provided with the curved plate member 6750 and the cover member 676.
A function of alignment with 0 is provided, but the details will be described later.

The fastening portion 6753 is a portion fastened and fixed by a fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. The fastening portion 6753 is disposed at a position approaching the outside of the left edge of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view, and is arranged in such a manner as to enter the concave portions of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 (FIG. a), FIG. 274 (b
Because of this, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 with respect to the curved plate member 6750.

The fastening portion 6754 is a portion into which a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 6745 is screwed in, and is disposed at four positions corresponding to the insertion hole 6745. Since a plurality of fastening portions 6754 are disposed, the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 can be firmly fixed only by fastening in the left-right direction.

On the other hand, the flat plate member 6740 has the base member 6 by the projecting portion 6743 and the fastening portion 6744.
Since it is firmly fixed to 710, it is possible to suppress the bending of the curved plate member 6750 when the number of the fastening portions 6753 of the curved plate member 6750 is reduced. As a result, the number of fastening portions 6753 in the vicinity of the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be reduced, so that the location where the light is blocked by the fastening screw can be reduced. Large area can be secured.

The insertion holes 6755 and the insertion holes 6756 are through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted from the back side, and guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a for guiding the fastening portions 6764 (see FIG. 279) of the cover member 6760 are on the front side. Formed (see FIG. 277).

In the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a, the inner surface having a diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760 is the right side of the fastening portion 6764 (the side approaching the flat plate member 6740)
It is formed to be disposed opposite to. Thereby, the assembled state of the lateral rendering device 6700 (FIG. 2).
Since the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the reference 65) can be restricted by the fastening portion 6764 of the cover member 6760, the careless removal of the curved plate member 6750 can be prevented.

The cover member 6760 is assembled to the flat plate member 6740 and the curved plate member 6750 as the fastening portion 6764 slides back and forth in a manner along the guide wall portions 6755a and 6756a. Cover member 6760 is a flat plate portion having a shape that covers fitting plate portion 6742 of flat plate member 6740 from the right, and cover member 6760 is bent at the front side edge of main plate portion 6761 to be curved plate member 6750 The curved plate portion 6762 which is a curved plate portion shaped to cover the fitting plate portion 6742 from the left side and the curved plate portion 6762 from two positions separated by approximately the same distance from the upper and lower center position.
The connecting screw 6763 extends to the left rear and is connected at the extending end, and a fastening screw disposed on the back of the curved plate 6762 and inserted through the insertion holes 6755 and 6756 of the curved plate 6750 And a plurality of fastening portions 6764, each of which can be screwed in, and a fastening screw disposed in the rear end of the upper end of the curved plate 6762 and inserted into the insertion hole 6714 near the upper end of the base member 6710 It mainly includes a proximal end fastening portion 6765 (see FIG. 279) formed in an enterable manner, and a plurality of projecting portions 6766 projecting from the rear end of the main body plate portion 6761 to the rear side.

The body plate portion 6761 is slidable inside the groove portion 6742a at a position corresponding to the groove portion 6742a of the flat plate member 6740, and is protruded toward the left in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction A plurality of projecting ribs 6761a are provided.

The projecting rib 6761a is formed to project rearward beyond the rear side edge of the main body plate portion 6761. This projecting portion is inserted into the longitudinal direction hole 6742b. That is, the overhanging portion is disposed to face the left side surface of the main body plate portion 6741, and movement of the main body plate portion 6741 can be restricted.
Thereby, in the assembled state (FIG. 265) of the lateral rendering device 6700, the flat plate member 6740 can be prevented from being displaced to the left with respect to the cover member 6760.

Curved plate portion 6762 corresponds to groove portion 6752a of curved plate member 6750,
The inside of the groove portion 6752a is slidable, and includes a plurality of projecting ribs 6762a protruding toward the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction.

The projecting rib 6762a is formed to project rearward from the rear side edge of the curved plate portion 6762. The projecting portion is inserted into the longitudinal hole 6752b. That is, the overhanging portion is disposed to face the right side surface of the main body bending portion 6751, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. Thereby, in the assembled state (FIG. 265) of the lateral rendering device 6700, the curved plate member 67
50 can be prevented from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760.

The connecting extension portion 6763 includes a projecting rib 6763a protruding toward the right in a rib shape along a straight line in the front-rear direction at a position corresponding to the longitudinal direction hole 6751b.

The projecting rib 6763a is formed to project rearward more than the rear side edge portion at the connection position of the connecting extension portion 6763, and the projecting portion is inserted into the longitudinal direction hole 6751b. That is, the overhanging portion is disposed to face the right side surface of the decorative projecting portion 6751 a, and the movement of the main body bending portion 6751 can be restricted. Thereby, in the assembled state (FIG. 265) of the lateral rendering device 6700, the curved plate member 6750 can be prevented from being displaced to the right with respect to the cover member 6760.

As described above, the fastening portion 6764 is configured as a portion capable of restricting the leftward movement of the curved plate member 6750 in the assembled state of the lateral rendering device 6700 (see FIG. 265), whereby the curved plate member 6750 It can prevent that it is removed carelessly.

Thus, the cover member 6760 structurally restricts the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left and right. That is, the movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the right is restricted by the relationship between the protruding ribs 6762a, 6762a and the longitudinal holes 6751b, 6752b, and the fastening portion 6764 and the guide wall 6
The movement of the curved plate member 6750 to the left is restricted by the relationship with 755a and 6756a. Therefore, the arrangement of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the cover member 6760 can be stabilized.

Base end fastening portion 6765 is disposed on the back side end portion of the upper end portion of curved plate portion 6762 and can be screwed with a fastening screw inserted into insertion hole 6714 (see FIG. 267) near the upper end portion of base member 6710 Is formed. That is, the insertion hole 6714 of the base member 6710 (see FIG. 269 (a)).
The fastening screw passing through is screwed into the proximal fastening portion 6765 and the proximal fastening portion
Fastened to 10

The protruding portion 6766 is a portion that is inserted into the alignment hole 6716 (see FIG. 269 (a)) of the base member 6710. Also, the projecting portion 6766 and the proximal end fastening portion 6765 are arranged on the outer side of the right edge or the upper edge of the electric decoration board 6720 and the light receiving member 6730 in a front view and the electric decoration board 6720 for the cover member 6760 and The positional deviation of the light receiving member 6730 can be suppressed.

280 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the base member 6710, the electric decoration substrate 6720, and the light receiving member 6730 taken along line CCLXXXa-CCLXXXa in FIG. 272 (b).
) Is a base member 6710 along line CCLXXXb-CCLXXXb in FIG.
FIG. 280 is a cross-sectional view of the electric decoration substrate 6720 and the light receiving member 6730. FIG.
Base member 6710 in the CCLXXXc-CCLXXXc line of (b), the electric decoration board 67
FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the reference numeral 20 and the light receiving member 6730.

As shown in FIG. 280 (a), the front-rear distance between the long rib 6734 and the LED chip D1 is
The height of the LED chip D <b> 1 is suppressed to a level at which it protrudes from the surface of the main body plate 6721. Therefore, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is allowed to be incident on the long rib 6734 without leakage.
In addition, the inside of the long rib 6734 can be totally reflected (see FIG. 281) to facilitate advancing to the front side.

Further, the front-to-back distance between the surface light emitting portion D1b and the light receiving surface portion 6731 is maintained equal to or greater than the front-rear width (formation length) of the long rib 6734 at a location where the long rib 6734 is not disposed. Therefore, it is possible to widen the area as a portion where the light emitted from the LED chip D1 can reach the light receiving surface portion 6731.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b are irradiated based on the premise that the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted radially. Can be distinguished and easily viewed.

That is, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a is a long rib 6734 and a fin 6735
As a line-like clear light that travels by totally reflecting inside the material, or as a long rib 6734
The light emitted from the surface light emitting portion D1b is viewed through the light refracting surface portion of the light receiving surface portion 6731 or the inner extending portion 6732 while the light emitting surface portion D1b is viewed as light to brighten a small scale range through which light can travel. It is viewed as uniform light (light light).

Thus, as in the prior art, the lens for condensing the light emitted from the electric decoration substrate 6720 is disposed opposite to the electric decoration substrate 6720, and this embodiment is compared to the effect aspect in which the refreshing light is visually recognized in a small area. According to this, it is possible to visually recognize the light (planar light) spreading in the area of the electric decoration substrate 6720 while visually recognizing the refreshing light (linear light) in a small area. And these different lights can perform easily the effect which makes only one visually recognize, and makes both visually recognize by control. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of light effects.

Therefore, for example, even when the same LED chip is employed for the edge light emitting unit D1a and the surface light emitting unit D1b, light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a and light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b By making the color tone and the brightness different, it is possible to execute a light emission effect rich in gradation (a light emission effect of different color and brightness).

As shown in FIG. 280 (b), the side surface of the fin 6735 in the plate thickness direction is the right side surface (front frame 1
The outer surface of the 0014 is positioned in the front-rear direction with the long rib 6734, and the left side surface (front frame 10)
The inner surface of 014 is an inclined surface that tapers toward the front end (closes to the right).
Therefore, the normal of the left side surface is not just facing right side (direction parallel to the surface of the main body plate portion 6721 of the illumination substrate 6720, ie, direction perpendicular to the front-rear direction), but a direction having a component facing the front side Turn to Thereby, the light emitted from the left side surface of the fin 6735 is not only just beside,
It can also be directed to the front side.

As shown in FIG. 280 (c), since the long rib 6734 is connected to the inner extending portion 6732, the light emitted from the edge light emitting portion D1a and incident on the long rib 6734 is the inner extending portion 673.
It can be advanced towards 32. The progress of the light will be described using a schematic diagram.

FIG. 281 shows a base member 6710 and an electric decoration board 67 schematically showing the cross section of FIG. 280 (a).
FIG. 20 is a schematic view of the reference numeral 20 and the light receiving member 6730. In FIG. 281, arrows L23a to L23e indicating light emitted from the edge light emitting unit D1a are schematically illustrated.

Although the intensity of the light emitted from the LED decreases as the angle between the axis X23 orthogonal to the surface of the electric decoration substrate 6720 increases, the light itself is emitted radially. In the present embodiment, since the arrival position after that differs depending on the traveling direction of light, it will be described in order below.

Arrow L23a enters the end of long rib 6734, and long rib 6734 and fins 67
It shows the traveling direction of light which travels by totally reflecting inside the light source 35 and reaches the front end of the fin 6735. The light that has reached the fin 6735 along the arrow 23a is totally reflected and traveled, so the light is partially transmitted (emitted) from the side surface of the long rib 6734 or the fin 6735 as compared with the case where the light is partially transmitted (emitted) , Light energy loss can be reduced. Therefore, even when the distance from the edge light emitting unit D1a is far, it is possible to make the player easily recognize light with sufficient brightness.

The arrow L 23 b is on the left side (front frame 1001) before reaching the front end of the fin 6735.
The inside of 4) indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the side surface. As described above, since the left side surface of the fin 6735 is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emission mode.

The arrow L23c passes through the long rib 6734, advances directly to the inner extending portion 6732, and indicates the traveling direction of the light emitted from the surface. Since this light is not refracted at the end face after entering the long rib 6734 and the energy loss of the light is suppressed, the light can be visually recognized visually. Further, since the outer surface of the inward extending portion 6732 (the surface on the opposite side of the outward extending portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in a surface emission mode.

An arrow L23d indicates the light receiving surface 6 as a coupling position between the long rib 6734 and the fin 6735.
After reaching 731, it can not travel to the inside of the fin 6735 and indicates the traveling direction of the light to be reflected. That is, as described above, the fins 6735 are formed such that the length in the thickness direction is shorter than the long ribs 6734 toward the front side, and the left side surface (front frame 100
Since the jagged concave portion is formed on the inner side surface 14 of the long rib 14 in the longitudinal direction,
In this embodiment, 734 partially protrudes from the fin 6735.

Therefore, even if the light travels in the same direction in the front and back direction, the long rib 6734 and the light receiving surface 6
The entry to the fins 6735 is not possible at all of the bonding positions with 731. The entry to the fins 6735 is suppressed in a partial area (particularly, near the left side surface of the long rib 6734), The light reaching this region is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731.

Thereafter, the arrow L23d reaches the inward extending portion 6732 and is emitted. Since the outer surface of the inward extending portion 6732 (the surface on the opposite side of the outward extending portion 6733) is processed in a jagged shape, light is emitted in the form of surface light emission.

Here, as shown in FIG. 281, the light of the arrow L23d includes light traveling to the back side of the electric decoration substrate 6720. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the portion on the back side of the electric decoration substrate 6720 can be made to emit light by the electric decoration board 6720 including the LED chip D1 for emitting light to the front side on the front side (at least the electric decoration Light can be advanced to the back side of the substrate 6720 (see FIG. 281).

The inner surface of the rear end portion of the curved plate member 6750 disposed on the downstream side of the arrow L23d is formed in a lens shape in which fine semicircular cross sections are vertically aligned in a rear view (see FIG. 276).
. Thus, the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23d and reaching the rear end of the curved plate member 6750 can be emitted to the left in a uniform manner up and down, and the glass unit 16 can be brightly illuminated by this light.

Therefore, the irradiation unit disposed on the back side of the glass unit 16
Since the light effect can be performed by combining the light emitted toward the light and the light advanced by the arrow L23d, the design freedom of the effect by the light can be improved.

According to this embodiment, the difference in brightness between the light indicated by the arrow L23c and the light indicated by the arrow L23d can be alleviated. That is, at the time of incidence on the long rib 6734, the light indicated by the arrow L23d is the arrow L23c because of the difference in angle with the axis X23.
The light shown by arrow L23 is brighter than the light shown by, but when it is reflected by the light receiving surface portion 6731, an energy loss of the transmitted light occurs, so when the light reaches the inward extending portion 6732 Is visually recognized as light of substantially equal brightness. As described above, the difference in the brightness of the light according to the irradiation direction can be mitigated, and the brightness of the inner extension portion 6732 can be easily made uniform over the front and back.

Here, in the present embodiment, in the configuration of the horizontal rendering device 6700 disposed on the left side, most of the configuration of the right-side horizontal rendering device 6700 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape (or similar shape). As a special part that is not symmetrical, the formation of the long rib 6734 (protruding on the back) is omitted (the formation of the fins 6735 is maintained). Thereby, the aspect of the light effect is adjusted for each range of the game area (glass unit 16, see FIG. 265).

This adjustment is an adjustment for securing the player's visibility. That is, although it is desirable to maintain the rendering effect associated with advancing the light to the fins 6735 on the left side, on the other hand, the intention is to suppress the advancement of light to the gaming area side by the light advancing to the long rib 6734.

That is, to reduce the intensity of light emitted from the side effect device 6700 to the inside (the game area side) in order to improve the visibility of the game ball at the place where the launch ball enters the game area, which is the left side of the game area. Aim to As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the launch ball because the light effect is dazzling, and it is possible to prevent in advance that the adjustment of the launch intensity and the confirmation of the launch of the game ball become difficult.

On the other hand, on the right side of the game area, the ball fired with a right-handed (strongest firing intensity) mostly flows down, and the player lacks the need to view for adjusting the firing intensity of the ball. . In addition, since a small number of gaming balls gathered in a short time continuously flow down a narrow spot, the spot is irradiated with light and reflected on the gaming sphere to produce the effect of the effect using light Can be easily improved. Therefore, it is not necessary to weaken the light intensity on the right side of the game area, as in this embodiment, by making it easy to emit light from the side effect device 6700 to the game area (see glass unit 16, see FIG. 265). The effect of the presentation can be improved.

Arrow L23e is light emitted in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction of the long rib 6734, and of light (light that does not enter the long rib 6734) emitted in a direction having a large angle with the axis X23. It indicates the direction of travel. This light is reflected by the inner side surfaces of the left and right extending portions 6732 and 6733 or reaches the light receiving surface portion 6731 to emit light, but the long rib 6734
Is extended to a position very close to the edge light emitting portion D1a, the intensity of the light traveling in the direction of the arrow L23e is very small in the first place, so that it can be configured as light which is difficult to be recognized by the player.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the light rendering effect from being reduced by the light traveling along the arrow L23e being visually recognized in combination with the light emitted from the surface light emitting unit D1b.

Referring back to FIG. 280A, the role of the fitting portion 6737 and the light-emitting effect in the vicinity of the fitting portion 6737 will be described. The V-shaped rib 6734b is a fitting portion 67 in the middle connecting portion 6734b1.
It is connected with the recess 6737a formed in the inside of 37 (see FIG. 274). Therefore, as in the contents described above by arrows L23c and L23d, part of the light incident on the V-shaped rib 6734b passes through both wall parts of the recess 6737a and reaches the left surface of the fitting part 6737.

The recess 6737a is configured as a recess in which the fastening portion 6753 (see FIG. 278) of the curved plate member 6750 can slide back and forth, and a fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion 6753. Because there is a possibility that the effect of the light emission effect may be reduced.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, sufficient alignment (prevention of positional deviation) can be performed by matching the shapes of the fitting portion 6737 and the decorative protrusion portion 6751a, so that the light receiving member 6730 and the LED chip D1 It is possible to reduce the number of fastening screws while preventing positional deviation, and it is possible to reduce places where the light-emitting effect is reduced.

In addition, the recess 6737a is disposed in the vicinity of the fastening screw so as to avoid interference with the fastening screw, and the light passing through the recess 6737a is configured to be emitted from the surface of the inner extension portion 6732 It prevents the neighborhood from getting too dark. Thereby, the extent of the fall of the rendering effect of the light emission effect can be suppressed.

Next, an eighteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 282 to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the electric decoration substrate 6 is disposed on the front side of the acoustic device 6610 at the upper portion of the front frame 10014.
Although the case where the 570 is provided is described, the pachinko machine 18010 in the eighteenth embodiment is provided with the effect device 18800 including the electric decoration substrate 18830 on the lower right of the operation device 10300. Also in the lower part, it is possible to execute a light emission effect. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 282 is a front view of a pachinko machine 18010 according to the eighteenth embodiment, and FIG.
Is a front perspective view of a pachinko machine 18010. Pachinko machine 18010 is a front frame 180
Unlike the pachinko machine 10010 according to the seventeenth embodiment, having the rendering device 18800 as compared with the front frame 10014 according to the seventeenth embodiment has the same configuration as that of the seventeenth embodiment, so only the rendering device 18800 will be described. Description of the other configurations is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 282 and FIG. 283, the rendering device 18800 is a device for emitting light that is coupled to the covering base member 6410 on the back side and the top side on the front side of the lower tray unit 6400. It is disposed between the operation handle 51 and the like.

The effect device 18800 is configured to change the appearance of the light emission effect depending on the presence or absence of the participation in the operation effect of the operation device 10300 by structural means. Next, the internal structure of the rendering device 18800 will be described in order to explain structural ideas.

FIG. 284 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect device 18800 taken along line CCLXXXIVa-CCLXXXIVa of FIG. 282, and FIG. 284 (b) is an arrow CCLXX of FIG. 284 (a).
It is a schematic diagram of lighting board 18830 of production device 18800 in XIVb direction view. In FIG. 284 (b), the support mode of the electric decoration substrate 18830 is schematically shown.

As shown in FIG. 284 (a), the rendering device 18800 is disposed on the front side of the joint base member 18810 coupled to the lower tray unit 6400 and the joint base member 18810 with a planar gap. An intermediate fixing member 18820 which is a frame-like member and fixed to the joint base member 18810, an electric decoration substrate 18830 disposed in a gap between the joint base member 18810 and the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the electric decoration substrate 18830 The light receiving member 18840 is formed such that light emitted from the LED chip D1 can travel inside and is fixed to the front side of the intermediate fixing member 18820, and the covering member 18 attached so as to cover the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840
And 850 are mainly provided.

The joint base member 18810 is formed as an inclined surface which is inclined downward as the wall surface on the front side, which is disposed to face the electric decoration substrate 18830, goes to the back side. The inclination angle of this inclined surface is the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 when the swing device member 10310 of the operation device 10300 is disposed at the upward position and in the posture before the operation. It is formed at an inclination angle parallel to the inclined surface.

The electric decoration substrate 18830 is disposed in parallel with the front wall of the joint base member 18810. Therefore, the direction Y17a of the vibration of the vibration device 10366 is parallel to the surface of the electric decoration substrate 18830. The electric decoration substrate 18830 mainly includes the LED chip D1, a long hole 18831 formed in a shape elongated in the vertical direction, and a plate spring 18832 generating an upward biasing force.

The long hole 18831 is a hole through which the fixing portion 18821 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 is inserted for supporting the electric decoration substrate 18830. Therefore, the difference (length) between the length in the vertical direction of the long hole 18831 and the diameter of the fixing portion 18821 is designed as a length (permissible length) with which the electric decoration substrate 18830 can be mechanically displaced.

The LED chip D1 is disposed on the front side of the electric decoration substrate 18830 in an arbitrary pattern (in the present embodiment, at the apex of a pentagon), and emits light in the normal direction of the surface of the electric decoration substrate 18830. Therefore, the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is emitted in the downward and downward direction toward the front side. On the other hand, the light receiving member 18840 for receiving the light is formed to change the traveling direction of the light in the front-rear direction.

That is, since the player visually recognizes the light whose traveling direction has been changed by the light receiving member 18840, the traveling direction of the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is inclined downward toward the front side (the player's eyes Even in the direction away from (3), it is possible to prevent the decrease in the effect of the light effect.

The light receiving member 18840 is formed of a colorless and transparent light transmitting resin material, and the intermediate fixing member 1 is formed.
A plate-like portion 18841 configured to be able to close the opening on the front side of the 8820, and the plate-like portion 188
A plurality of extending plate portions 18842 which extend in a plate shape from the back surface of the plate 41 are mainly provided.

The intermediate fixing member 18820 is formed in a container shape whose front side is opened from a resin material having low light permeability, and a plurality of fixing portions are provided in a columnar shape protruding toward the joint base member 18810 and fastened and fixed to the joint base member 18810 A main body 18821 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 18822 drilled at positions and sizes that can receive the extension plate portion 18842 at the bottom on the rear side.

Note that, in the present embodiment, the extending plate portion 18842 is formed in a plate shape having the same cross section in the left-right direction because the drawing direction of the resin mold of the light receiving member 18840 is set in the left-right direction. Therefore, L
While the ED chips D1 are arranged at the apexes of the pentagon, the LED chips D1 aligned left and right at the intermediate position and the lower position can be made to correspond to the common extended plate portion 18842. Thus, the extension plate portions 18842 can be formed as plate-like portions with three different widths. Similarly, the insertion holes 18822 of the intermediate fixing member 18820 are also drilled in upper and lower three places with different widths.

Here, as shown in FIG. 284, although the extension plate portion 18842 starts extending along the normal direction of the plate portion 18841, the extension plate portion 18842 is formed in a gently curved plate shape. Although the curvature radius of curvature can be set arbitrarily, in this embodiment, the LED chip D1 of the electric decoration substrate 18830
To the extent that total reflection can be continued until light emitted from the light reaches the plate-like portion 18841,
The radius of curvature is designed in a large curved shape. Thus, the extending end of the extending plate portion 18842 (
The light incident on the rear side end portion can be made to easily reach the plate portion 18841 while maintaining the intensity.

The covering member 18850 is a member for suppressing light leakage in a portion where the light effect is not desired on the outer surface of the light receiving member 18840, and can be realized in various modes. For example, a light shielding tape (insulating tape) formed to be attachable may be used, or a member formed into a cup shape from a resin material may be used.

In the present embodiment, the covering member 18850 is configured as a cup-shaped member formed to be able to be fitted from the front side, and a pentagon based on the arrangement of the LED chip D1 at the bottom of the cup disposed on the front side. A plurality of through holes 18851 drilled for light passage are formed at the top position of the.

As described above, the arrangement of the through holes 18851 does not have to be the same as the arrangement of the LED chips D1, but may be similar shapes having slightly different sizes. L
In consideration of the progress of light emitted from the ED chip D1, the formation of the light receiving member 18840 is more important in designing the arrangement of the through holes 18851 than the arrangement of the LED chip D1. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the through hole 18851 is designed to be formed at a position which coincides with the position of the root of the extending plate portion 18842 of the light receiving member 18840 in a front view.

The operation of the rendering device 18800 will be described. As described above, the electric decoration substrate 18830 is movable in the first shift direction parallel to the surface on which the LED chip D1 is disposed with the allowable width for the long hole 18831, and the first shift direction is the operation Vibration device 1036 of device 10300
It agrees with the vibration direction Y17a of 6.

That is, when the operation device 10300 produces a vibration effect, the electric decoration substrate 1883 is produced by the vibration.
0 is configured to be slidable. When the electric decoration substrate 18830 slides, the positional relationship between the position of the LED chip D1 and the end of the extending plate portion 18842 shifts, so the LED chip D1
It becomes difficult for the light emitted from the light source to enter the extension plate portion 18842.

In this case, even in the state where the light is emitted from the LED chip D1, the light extends the plate portion 18842
The through hole 18851 is visually recognized to be dark. That is, it can not be determined whether the LED chip D1 emits light. On the other hand, in the operation device 10300, as described above, by operating the swing operation member 10310, the vibration direction Y17a of the vibration device 10366 changes in a direction different from the first shift direction.

In this case, the influence of vibration of the operation device 10300 on the electric decoration substrate 18830 is suppressed, and the electric decoration substrate 18830 returns to the initial position (upper end position) by the biasing force of the plate spring 18832. In the initial position of the electric decoration substrate 18830, the LED chip D1 and the extending plate portion 188
The rear side end portion of the LED chip 42 is disposed opposite to the light emitting diode 42, and the light emitted from the LED chip D1 is extended in the plate portion 18
It is incident on 842 and then formed to be able to travel to the front side by total internal reflection.

That is, in a state where light is emitted from the LED chip D1, even when the operation device 10300 is performing vibration representation (when the through hole 18851 is viewed dark), the swing operation member 10310 is pushed in and operated. The through holes 18851 can be viewed brightly.

Therefore, when the vibration effect is performed and the through hole 18851 is viewed dark, it is determined by operating the swing operation member 10310 whether or not the LED chip D1 emits light. Can. Here, for example, the LED chip D1 is controlled to emit light when a big hit occurs, or when transitioning to a game state advantageous to the player (ie, when a change advantageous to the player occurs). Thus, the player's interest in the presence or absence of light emission of the LED chip D1 can be improved.

As a result, the player's willingness to operate the swing operation member 10310 can be enhanced, so when the effect of operating the swing operation member 10310 is executed, the player's willingness to participate is heightened, and the player is actually asked The swing operation member 10310 can be operated to operate.

In addition, although the case where the electric decoration board | substrate 18830 is arrange | positioned on the outer side of the covering foundation member 6410 was demonstrated in this embodiment, it is not restricted to this. For example, electric decoration substrate 18830
Is disposed in such a manner as to enter the interior through the covering base member 6410, and the operation device 103
The contact with 00 may be possible.

In this case, the vibration of the operation device 10300 can be easily transmitted to the electric decoration substrate 18830, and the electric decoration substrate 18830 slides as well as the vibration, along with the pressing operation (push operation) to the lens member 10317. It can be configured as follows.

In this case, for example, the LED chip D1 may be controlled to emit light at a timing other than the timing at which the pressing instruction as the notification effect is generated. When the lens member 10317 is pressed and operated (push operation) at the timing when the LED chip D1 emits light, L
It is possible to realize a configuration in which it is difficult to grasp the presence or absence of light emission of the ED chip D1 in a front view.

In other words, when the lens member 10317 is operated to be pushed (push operation) at timing outside the notification, it can be configured to be easy to miss the notification that is advantageous for the player. Since the pressing operation to the lens member 10317 can be easily suppressed other than the timing at which the pressing instruction is generated, the operation device 10300 may fail early, or the operation device may be unnecessarily operated to generate noise. It can control nuisance.

Next, a nineteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the covers 10321 and 10322 of the operation device 10300 are formed so as to be split left and right, but the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment are
It is formed to be divisible back and forth. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 285 is a side view of the covers 19321 and 19322 in the nineteenth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 285, in the present embodiment, the upper cover 19321 and the lower cover 1932 are used.
2 are arranged to surround the swing operation member 10310 (see FIG. 207). The main configuration of the covers 19321 and 19322 has substantially the same shape as that of the covers 10321 and 10322 described above, and is mainly described as an example in which the dividing direction is changed.

Covers 19321 and 19322 are formed to be dividable in a dividing plane corresponding to reference line X19 shown in FIG. 285, and are inserted through insertion holes 19321a drilled in upper cover 19321 in a direction orthogonal to the dividing plane The cover 19322 is formed to be able to be fastened and fixed by a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 19322a of the cover 19322.

Here, the reference line X19 is set as a direction parallel to the direction Y17a (see FIG. 215) of the vibration of the vibrating device 10366 before the swing operation member 10310 is at the upward position. That is, since the fastening direction of the fastening screw fastened to the fastening portion 19322a is orthogonal to the vibration direction Y 17a in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress the fastening screw from being loosened by the impact of the vibration.

Moreover, since the swinging operation member 10310 has the same vibration direction Y17a as the pushing operation direction (pushing direction) of the lens member 10317 (see FIG. 216A), the pushing operation direction of the lens member 10317 and the fastening screw Since the fastening direction is orthogonal in a side view (see FIG. 285), it is possible to suppress the fastening screw from being loosened by an impact generated by the operation of the lens member 10317.

A twentieth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in a flat plate shape in a cross sectional view,
Although the case where the plate thickness is substantially constant in the inclined portion has been described, the protruding shape portion 16413 and the recessed shape portion 16414 in the twentieth embodiment are slightly inclined in the vertical direction. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 286 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 16400 in the twentieth embodiment taken along the line corresponding to the line CCXXXIIIb-CCXXXIIIb in FIG. 229. As shown in FIG. 286, in the present embodiment, the inclination of the left and right ends of the protruding portion 16413 and the recessed portion 16414 is compared with the protruding portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 described in the seventeenth embodiment. Is set closer to the top and bottom.

In addition, the lower end portion of the protruding shape portion 16413 (corresponding to the protruding shape portion 6413 of the seventeenth embodiment) and the upper end portion of the recessed shape portion 16414 (corresponding to the recessed shape portion 6414 of the seventeenth embodiment).
The base end of the recess is arranged on the same line in the vertical direction (vertical direction).

The hanging plate-like portion 6426 b of the plate-like support portion 6426 of the lower plate forming member 6420 is a recessed portion 16
Since the support thickness of the main body portion 6411 in the vertical direction (vertical direction) can be sufficiently secured at the support position when the base end portion 414 (the upper surface of the main body portion 6411) is abutted and supported. Main unit 6411 by the load when operating the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 207)
Can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, although the case where the inclination of the left and right end portions is changed as compared with the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto.
For example, the left and right outer surfaces of the projecting portion 6413 and the left and right inner surfaces of the recessed portion 6414 may be formed along the vertical direction (vertical direction in a sectional view) without any inclination. Even in this case, the support thickness of the main body 6411 can be sufficiently secured.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by forming in an inverted V shape in a cross sectional view, the protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are deformed when receiving an external force on the left and right center side. It can be made easy to turn on. As a result, the degree of fatigue given by the external force can be reduced compared to the case where deformation in both the left and right directions is possible, and the plate portion forming the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 is damaged early. Can be prevented. In other words, the durability of the lower tray unit 6400 can be improved.

A twenty-first embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 287 to 301. In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the supply of electricity to the lower tray unit 6400 is unnecessary is described, but the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty first embodiment is a vibration configured to be able to vibrate by conduction of electricity. A device 21500 is provided, and the lower tray unit 21400 needs to be supplied with electricity. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals.
The explanation is omitted.

FIG. 287 is an exploded front perspective view of the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300, and the lower tray unit 21400 in the twenty-first embodiment. In FIG. 287, the front frame 1001 is
Illustration of the upper half of 4 is omitted, and the lower tray unit 21400 and the operation device 10300
After disassembling from the metal main body portion 10014 a, it is illustrated in a direction view from the back side.

In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, an assembly direction line connecting the insertion holes 6801R and 6801L and the fastening point thereof is illustrated by an imaginary line, and an electrical wiring 21513 connected so as to be able to supply electricity to the vibration device 21500. The relationship of the arrangement with respect to the front frame 10014, the operation device 10300 and the lower tray unit 21400 is partially illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 287, on the lower bottom side of the operation device 10300, a bottom member 21De obtained by modifying the above-described bottom member De is fastened and fixed. The bottom member 21De includes, in addition to the above-described configuration of the bottom member De, an overhanging portion De3 that is formed to project to the right.

The overhang portion De3 has a function of applying a load to the vibration device 21500 and a function of restricting the displacement of the electrical wiring 21513 connected to the vibration device 21500. That is, as shown in FIG. 287, the electric wiring 21513 and the right front cover are removed when the lower tray unit 21400 is removed for maintenance by routing the electric wiring 21513 so as to cover the lower side of the overhang portion De3. 10322 can be prevented from rubbing.

While the overhanging portion De3 is formed to be inclined on the back side in a manner that narrows toward the overhanging end,
The front side constitutes a plane parallel to a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction. With this configuration, the metal main body portion 1001 is provided on the back side of the overhang portion De3 while securing the rigidity of the overhang portion De3.
A gap between 4a can be made.

In this clearance, the electric wiring 21513 of a length necessary for removing the lower tray unit 21400 at the time of maintenance (a wiring of a length that fills the length by which the lower tray unit 21400 is separated from the metal main portion 10014a). Not removed (metal body 1001)
It is effectively used as an area to be loosened and arranged when it is fastened and fixed to 4a. Thus, the load received by the electric wiring 21513 from the surroundings can be reduced as compared to the case where the electric wiring 21513 is disposed in a tight manner when the lower tray unit 21400 is not removed.

As shown in FIG. 287, the operation handle 51 is fitted in and supported by a handle support plate 21051, and the handle support plate 21051 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a. In the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the left side edge of the handle support plate 21051 and the right side edge of the lower tray unit 21400 are overlapped in the front and back direction.
The fastening portion is not formed over the entire area of the left side edge of 1 and the connection with the lower tray unit 21400 is performed not by fastening but by engagement (fitting by fitting in the front-rear direction).

Therefore, the lower tray unit 21400 and the handle support plate 21051 are not mechanically fixed, and are configured to be relatively displaceable in the front-rear direction.

As a result, the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 is displaced in the front-rear direction, as compared with the case where the right edge of the lower tray unit 21400 and the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 are fastened and fixed over the entire area. Accordingly, the left edge of the handle support plate 21051 can be prevented from being displaced in the front-rear direction. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the vibration of the vibration device 21500 described later from being transmitted to the operation handle 51 via the handle support plate 21051.

That is, the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be configured to be transmitted to the player from the lower tray unit 21400. For example, the lower plate unit is in contact with the hand or arm of the player holding the operation handle 51 instead of the path through which the vibration is transmitted to the player holding the operation handle 51 via the operation handle 51. The path can be limited to the right side of 21400.

FIG. 288 is an exploded front perspective view of lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 289 is an exploded rear perspective view of lower tray unit 21400. In FIG. 288 and FIG. 289, the covering base member 21
A portion corresponding to a fixing place between the lower plate forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibrating device 21500 is illustrated in association with an imaginary line.

The covering base member 21410 includes the main body 641 in addition to the configuration of the covering base member 6410 described above.
A plurality of (a pair in the present embodiment) fastening portions 21415 formed to be capable of screwing fastening screws in a region on the right side of the first concave shape portion 6414 is provided. The fastening device 21415 includes a vibrating device 21.
A fastening screw inserted into an insertion portion 21535 disposed in a pair at the top and bottom on the right side of 500 is screwed. That is, the right insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the covering base member 21410.

The lower tray forming member 21420 has a front longitudinal portion 6 in addition to the configuration of the lower tray forming member 6420 described above.
A support hole 21428 drilled in the front-rear direction is provided in a plate-like portion extending upward from the upper surface of the 426c. In the support hole 21428, a fastening portion 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450, which is a connection portion between the V-shaped design member 21450 and the vibrating device 21500, is inserted.

The V-shaped design member 21450 has a plate-like protruding portion 6 in addition to the configuration of the V-shaped design member 6450 described above.
As an alternative to the 453R (see FIG. 227), it is formed in a pillar shape on the back side in a pillar shape, and a fastening portion 21457 formed screwably in a fastening screw, and a plate shape is formed between the fastening portion 21457 and the insertion hole 6452 And a connecting plate-like portion 21458 to be connected.

The fastening portion 21457 is inserted into the support hole 21428 in an assembled state (see FIG. 208), and a fastening screw inserted into the left insertion portion 21535 of the vibrating device 21500 is screwed in and fastened and fixed. That is, the left insertion portion 21535 is fastened and fixed to the lower tray forming member 21420 and the V-shaped design member 21450.

Therefore, the vibration device 21500 is not fastened and fixed to a single member, but is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members (cover base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420, and V-shaped design member 21450). Thereby, the fastening strength of these members can be reinforced by the vibration device 21500.

Here, in the V-shaped design member 21450, as described above, the overhang fastening portions 6454 disposed at the left and right end portions are fastened and fixed to the metal main portion 10014a via the intermediate member. for that reason,
It is structured in a substantially bag shape that opens to the back side, and is structurally rigid compared to the covering base member 21410 that is mainly fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014 a at the back side edge.

That is, while the covering base member 21410 is fastened and fixed to the metal main body 10014a at a plurality of positions in the lower end and the left end on the back side, the number of fastening positions in the upper part and the right edge is suppressed ( Because it is formed in a thin box-like (substantially bag-like) shape, it has a structure (high resistance) with a high degree of freedom of displacement particularly at the right edge.

Furthermore, since the V-shaped design member 21450 is fastened and fixed to the front upper edge of the covering base member 21410, vertical (vertical) displacement of the covering foundation member 21410 can be suppressed by the V-shaped design member 21450. , Freedom of displacement of the covering base member 21410 in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction)
Can improve it. As a result, displacement of the covering base member 21410 can prevent, for example, the occurrence of a problem in which the lower plate 50 is vertically displaced and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 splashes.

According to the present embodiment, the V-shaped design member 21450 configured rigidly is used as a base (reference).
Soft (high displacement freedom) covering base member 21410 compared to V-shaped design member 21450
Can be vibrated by driving the vibrating device 21500.
The right side of 10 can be vibrated intensively (strong vibration).

In addition, the vibration transmission to the V-shaped design member 21450 and the lower plate forming member 21420 can be suppressed, so that the operation device 10300 vibrates due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 or the ball stored in the lower plate 50 vibrates. Vibration due to the vibration of the device 21500 can be avoided, and it can be said from this also that the right side portion of the covering base member 21410 can be intensively vibrated (strong vibration) by the drive of the vibration device 21500.

The connecting plate-like portion 21458 is formed in a long plate shape along the longitudinal direction of a shell-like overhanging portion 21541 described later. As a result, the connecting plate-like portion 214 extends in the longitudinal direction of the shell-like protruding portion 21541.
58 and the shell-like extended portion 21541 can be brought into contact with each other, and a large load generation area can be secured, so that stress concentration at the time of contact (at the time of pressing) can be avoided.

In the present embodiment, in the assembled state (see FIG. 208), the shell-like extended portion 21541 abuts (is pressed) on the connecting plate-like portion 21458 (see FIG. 298).
Therefore, vibration can be received via the contact position of at least the shell-like extended portion 21541 and the connection plate-like portion 21458.

This configuration is effective in a configuration in which the vibrating device 21500 is fastened and fixed to a plurality of members as in the present embodiment. That is, as compared with the case of fastening and fixing to a single member, in the case of fastening and fixing the vibrating device 21500 to a plurality of members, the deviation from the design size of each member may be accumulated. Deviations tend to be large. Therefore, the arrangement of the vibration device 21500 becomes unstable, and it becomes difficult to stabilize the transmission strength of the vibration.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in view of the possibility of the occurrence of dimensional deviations, the shell may be used regardless of how the dimensional deviation occurs (any size within the large and small limit values). The shell-like shape is stabilized by designing into a dimension in which the overhanging portion 21541 abuts on the connection plate-like portion 21458 (when the spacing is short, the abutment is performed while deforming the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 so as to crush). The overhanging portion 21541 can be in contact with the connection plate-like portion 21458. Therefore,
Vibration can be received stably.

In the present embodiment, the contact direction between the shell-like protruding portion 21541 and the connection plate-like portion 21458 is set in the front-rear direction as in the screw-in direction of the fastening screw. Therefore, even when the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced downward by the operation of the operation device 10300 as described above, the V-shaped design member 21450 is displaced so as to slide relative to the shell-like protruding portion 21541. Thus, it is possible to avoid that the depression displacement is transmitted. Therefore, the vibration device 21
500 can be suppressed from being pushed down as the operation device 10300 is operated.

In the present embodiment, the portion where the vibration device 21500 is disposed is the covering base member 21.
Since it is a flexible part 410, it is a part which is easy to be broken in the case of cheating in which the outer shell of the pachinko machine A10 is broken and intrudes into the inside (for example, the metal thin wire is made to infiltrate). That is, in the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed at a location where a person who performs fraud acts easily as an intrusion route.

Therefore, when breaking the covering base member 21410, the vibrating device 21500 may be broken or disconnected at the same time. In this case, the vibrating device 21500 is connected to the electric device 21500 to cut off the conduction of the electrical wiring 21513. By controlling the voice lamp control device 113 to output an error signal as the voice lamp control device 113 detects this, it is possible to achieve early detection of a wrongdoing.

Further, instead of the vibration device 21500, a device that outputs an error signal may be provided, but in the present embodiment, by providing the vibration device 21500, the vibration is generated in the case where no cheating has occurred. It can be used for presentation. That is, since the vibration device 21500 can be used both for vibration rendition and for detecting fraud (it can be configured as a multi-functional device), the arrangement space of the device can be reduced.

290 is an exploded front perspective view of the vibration device 21500, and FIG. 291 is a vibration device 21.
FIG. 5 is an exploded rear perspective view of 500. As illustrated in FIG. 290 and FIG.
The vibration motor 2 is formed of a vibration motor 21510 capable of generating vibration by controlling the eccentric weight 21512 to rotate and a soft resin material (silicon resin etc.).
The cover member 21520 for covering the 1510, and a material (for example, a resin material or a metal material) which is harder than the cover member 21520, and in a shape capable of partially covering the cover member 21520 from the back side Covering cover member 21530 to be formed and covering member 21
A flat opposing plate member 2154 disposed opposite to the covering cover member 21530 with the 520 interposed therebetween
And 0.

The covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 hold the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 so as to surround from the front and back, and are fastened and fixed by fastening screws. That is,
The covering cover 21530 has a plurality of (two in the present embodiment) through which the screw portion of the fastening screw can be inserted.
The counter plate member 21540 is provided with a plurality of fastening portions 21542 formed so as to be capable of screwing in the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 21532. Hereinafter, the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 to be held will be described first, and then the details of the covering cover member 21530 and the opposing plate member 21540 will be described.

292 is an exploded front perspective view of vibration motor 21510 and covering member 21520,
FIG. 293 is an exploded back perspective view of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, and FIG. 294 is a front perspective view of the covering member 21520. In FIG. 294, the covering member 21520
The perspective view of the direction view which looks down obliquely from the front upper side is illustrated.

The vibration motor 21510 has a main body 21511 whose axis is rotationally controlled by energization, an eccentric weight 21512 in a top view fan shape whose center of gravity is arranged at a position different from the axis and fixed to the axis and a lower surface of the main body 21511 And an electrical wire 21513 (electrically connected to a terminal formed on the lower surface) extending downward from the

The covering member 21520 has a cylindrical main body portion 21521 formed in an inner cylindrical shape slightly smaller than the outer shape of the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510, and a ridge extending vertically along the back surface of the cylindrical main body portion 21521 And a cylindrical main body 215
A plate-like protrusion 21523 protruding in a plate shape in the left-right direction along the lower surface of the cylindrical body 21;
And an overhanging portion 21524 projecting downward from the lower surface of the lower surface 521 in a bottom view.

The overhanging portion 21524 is the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 and the electrical wiring 21513
Is formed in an oval shape having a size that encloses the connection position with the lower surface in a bottom view, and the upper surface
Recessed to accept.

That is, as shown in FIG. 294, the overhanging portion 21524 is in the vertical direction in a region sandwiched by the recessed portion 21524a which is recessed downward from the lower surface side of the cylindrical main body portion 21521 and the recessed portion 21524a. A pair of spare holes 21524 which are drilled in the vertical direction at positions opposite to the wiring through holes 21524b between which the wiring through holes 21524b are drilled and the recessed portions 21524a.
and c.

According to the above configuration, the electrical wiring 21513 is guided to the wiring through hole 21524b while being held by the recessed portion 21524a, and is guided in the opening direction (downward) of the wiring through hole 21524b. That is, in the present embodiment, the covering member 21520 has a function of preventing the sagging of the electric wiring 21513 due to its own weight and holding it, a function of bundling the electric wiring 21513, and the electric wiring 21.
The function to guide 513 can be called back. Thereby, the number of necessary binding bands can be reduced, and the material cost can be reduced and the number of manufacturing steps can be reduced.

In addition, since a gap is generated between the covering cover 21530 and the opposing plate portion 21540 when the covering member 21520 is not assembled, a person who performs the assembling operation can cover the covering member 2152
It is possible to prevent forgetting to add 0. Therefore, as compared with the case of separately preparing the binding band and holding the electrical wiring 21513, it is possible to suppress the omission of assembly of the member for holding the electrical wiring 21513.

In the present embodiment, the electrical wiring 21513 is connected to the input / output port 225 of the audio lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). That is, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500
Is configured as a part of the other device 228, and is vibration controlled by a control signal transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113.

The preliminary hole 21524 c is formed at a position corresponding to the connection position of the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511 in the vertical direction. That is, even when the electrical wiring 21513 is about to come off the main body 21511, inserting the thin rod through the spare hole 21524c and pushing the electrical wiring 21513 pushes the electrical wiring 21513 into the main body 21511 side. it can. Accordingly, detachment of the electrical wiring 21513 from the main body portion 21511 can be avoided.

In the present embodiment, the vibration device 21500 is disposed in the lower tray unit 21400 (see FIG. 287). The lower tray unit 21400 is formed so as to be removable from the metal main body 10014 a, so if the worker performing the maintenance work accidentally removes the lower tray unit 21400 from the metal main body 10014 a too much, the electrical wiring 21513 is Excessive load may be applied, which may lead to disconnection. In addition, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 occurs, the electric wiring 215
Even when an excessive load is applied to 13, there is a risk of disconnection.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the overhanging portion 21524 is formed so as to cover the connection position of the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 2
Excessive displacement of the connection position with 1511 can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the electrical wiring 21513 of the length held by the recessed portion 21524a is secured in front of the wiring through hole 21524b, the electrical wiring 21513 should not be broken for this length. Can (can afford to afford). Also, electrical wiring 2
Even when a load is applied to 1513, it is not the connection direction of the electrical wiring 21513 and the main body portion 21511, but the longitudinal direction of the electrical wiring 21513 held by the recessed portion 21524a (that is, the longitudinal direction of the overhang portion 21524) Because the load is applied along the
It is possible to avoid falling off from 1511.

In addition, as described above, even when the electric wire 21513 is dropped from the main body 21511, the electric wire 2151 can easily be inserted by inserting a thin rod through the spare hole 21524c.
3 can be reconnected to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the maintenance work including the step of removing the lower tray unit 21400.

Note that, in the process of inserting (assembling) the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the electrical wiring 21513 is disposed on the covering member 21520 side with respect to the main body portion 21511. Therefore, at the same time as the operation of inserting the vibration motor 21510 into the covering member 21520, the operation of inserting the electric wiring 21513 into the wiring through hole 21524b can be performed, so that the assembling operation can be made more efficient.

FIG. 295 is a front view of the covering cover member 21530. FIG. In the explanation of FIG. 295,
Refer to FIGS. 290 and 291 as appropriate. The covering cover member 21530 has a main body 21531 forming a frame whose front side and lower side are opened, the above-mentioned insertion hole 21532, and the main body 2
A receiving recess 21533 which is recessed on the front side of 1531 and receives the vibration motor 21510;
The ridges 21534 are formed inward from the left and right inner surfaces of the receiving recess 21533 and extend in the front-rear direction, and are drilled in the front-rear direction at the upper and lower positions of the insertion holes 21532, Cover base member 21410, lower plate forming member 21420 and V-shaped design member 2145
0 (see FIG. 288 and FIG. 289), and a plurality of insertion parts 21535 which can be inserted through a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed.

The receiving recess 21533 includes a weight receiving recess 21533a for receiving the eccentric weight 21512, a main body receiving recess 21533b for receiving the main body 21511, and a state in which the rotation axis of the main body 21511 is disposed at the center position in the lateral direction. Receiving recess 2153
And a bearing receiving recess 21533c connecting the 3b.

The right side of the main body receiving recess 21533b is recessed relative to the left side with respect to the bearing receiving recess 21533c. On the other hand, the protruding portion 21534 is provided with an extra length protruding on the right side in comparison with the left side.
It is disposed at a substantially symmetrical position with respect to 533c.

Thus, as a holding mode of the covering member 21520, while the vibrating motor 21510 is held in the protruding end of the projecting portion 21534 in the non-excitation state (stop state) of the vibrating motor 21510, the vibration motor 21 is held.
In the excited state 510 (vibration state), the covering member 2 is formed by the deep concave portion (concave portion formed between the protruding portions 21534 arranged in parallel in the vertical direction) formed on the right side of the main body receiving concave portion 21533b.
It can respond to deformation (displacement, flow) of 1520. Thereby, the covering cover member 2
An overload can be prevented from being applied to 1530, and the durability of the covering cover member 21530 can be improved.

Since the ridges 21534 are formed along the front-rear direction, the displacement of the covering member 21520 supported in contact with the ridges 21534 in the left and right direction is affected by the engagement with the ridges 21534 and the biting. Therefore, it tends to occur in the front and rear, right and left (horizontal direction), and is suppressed in the vertical direction.

Therefore, even in the configuration where the eccentric weight 21512 is disposed at the upper end of the main body portion 21511 and the main body portion 21511 tends to tilt with the lower end as a fulcrum at the time of vibration generation, the vertical component of the vibration is suppressed. The displacement direction of the vibration motor 21510 can be corrected in the horizontal direction.

The protrusion length increases as approaching the middle portion 21531 a side (the back side) formed in a flat plate shape having a vertical width of half of the left and right side portions in the left and right middle portions of the main body portion 21531 And the covering member 215 is formed in a manner similar to the outer shape of the member 21520).
20 can be supported from the left and right and the back side.

In addition, the protrusion 21534 has an intermediate lower surface 2153 that forms the lower surface of the intermediate portion 21531a.
The lower slope portion 21534a is provided to be raised toward the intermediate lower surface 21531b from the most recent ridge portion 21534 below the side 1b.

The distance between the back inclined portion 21534a and the ridge portion 21534 just above it becomes narrower toward the back side. Therefore, when the vibration motor 21510 is displaced to the back side and the covering member 21520 is deformed in the excited state of the vibration motor 21510 as compared with the case where the interval between the upper and lower protrusions 21534 is not narrowed, the back inclined portion The load (reaction force) applied to the portion of the covering member 21520 which is inserted between the 21534a and the protruding portion 21534 just above it can be increased. Thereby, the covering member 21520 can be prevented from being excessively displaced to the back side.

The protrusions 21534 are not arranged completely symmetrical, but are partially arranged up and down. This makes it possible to avoid applying load from the left and right directions on the same horizontal surface to the covering member 21520 as compared to the case where the ridges 21534 are arranged in a completely symmetrical position. The compression load applied to the covering member 21520 can be reduced.

In addition, you may arrange | position the protrusion part 21534 completely left-right symmetric. In this case, it is preferable to select a non-fragile material as the material of the covering member 21520.

The formation of the lower half portion of the rear side wall portion of the main body portion 21531 is omitted. Therefore, the covering member 21
As a holding mode of 520, while the displacement of the covering member 21520 is regulated in the upper half of the main body portion 21531, the displacement of the covering member 21520 is permitted in the lower half portion of the main body portion 21531.

Therefore, when the covering member 21520 is displaced to the back side with the excitation of the vibration motor 21510, the upper half of the projecting portion 21522 restricted by the upper half of the main body 21531, and the lower half which is permitted to be displaced Both proceed to the open area in the lower half of the body part 21531 (
It can be deformed to flow) and works to improve the vibration effect of the vibration device 21500, which will be described in detail later.

The right side portion of the plate-like protrusion 21523 of the covering member 21520 is supported from the lower side by the protrusion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530. In addition, the left side portion is opened to the covering cover member 21530, while being supported by the support extension portion 21543 of the opposing plate member 21540 (FIG. 2).
See 91). Thus, in addition to being able to support the own weight of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520, an open part accessible from the outside can be configured on the lower side of the covering member 21520.

That is, the lower surface of the covering member 21520 is supported in such a manner that the covering cover member 21530 covers the lower part from the rear right side and the opposing plate member 21540 covers the lower part from the left front with respect to the covering member 21520. The lower left rear part of the member 21520 can be opened as an open part. The open portion functions as a portion for securing the contact between the overhang portion De3 and the covering member 21520.

The facing plate member 21540 is a covering cover member 2 from the opening portion side of the covering cover member 21530.
It is a plate-like member disposed to face 1530, and a shell-like overhang portion 21541 formed to project to the front side, the above-mentioned fastening portion 21542, and a support extension extending from the lower left end to the back side And a setting unit 21543.

The shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is formed thin as in the case of the opposing plate member 21540, and a gap is formed between the overhanging tip portion and the covering member 21520. Therefore, the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is formed.
It is possible to prevent a large load from being transmitted to the covering member 21520 even if the load in the direction of pushing (backward) is given and the shell-like protruding part 21541 is deformed.

FIG. 296 (a) is a top view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG. 296 (b) is a top view thereof.
FIG. 297 is a cross-sectional view of the lower tray unit 21400 at line CCXCVIb-CCXCVIb in 96 (a), FIG. 297 is a rear view of the lower tray unit 21400, and FIG.
It is sectional drawing of the lower tray unit 21400 in the CCXCVIII-CCXCVIII line of (a).

As shown in FIG. 296 (b), the ridges 21522 of the covering member 21520 and the bottom member 21D.
When the vibration motor 21510 is in the non-excitation state (stopped state), the overhang part De3 slightly bites into the projecting portion 21522 (protrusion part The striations 21522 are slightly deformed).

As a load is applied from the overhang portion De3 to the protruding portion 21522, the vibration device 2150
The arrangement of the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 within 0 can be moved forward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 from unintentionally stopping at a position approaching the back side.

FIG. 299 (a) is a lower tray unit 2140 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400.
299 is a partial top schematic view of 0, FIG. 299 (b) is a partial side schematic view of the lower tray unit 21400 in the arrow CCXCIXb direction view of FIG. 299 (a), and FIG. 300 (a) is a lower tray unit 21400. FIG. 300 (b) is a partial top schematic view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically showing the lower tray unit 214 in the arrow CCCb direction view of FIG. 300 (a).
It is a partial side schematic diagram of 00.

In FIGS. 299 (a) and 299 (b), as in the case of the non-excitation state of the vibration motor 21510, the state in which the vibration device 21500 is disposed at the front limit position of vibration displacement is illustrated.
In 0 (a) and FIG. 300 (b), the vibration motor 21510 is in the excited state, and the vibration device 2
The state where 1500 is arranged at the back side limit position of vibration displacement is illustrated. That is, when the vibration motor 21510 is excited and the eccentric weight 21512 rotates to generate vibration, the vibration device 21500
Is repeatedly displaced in the state shown in FIG. 299 and the state shown in FIG. In the state shown in FIG. 300, the eccentric weight 21512 is in contact with the main body portion 21531 in the front-rear direction, and the vibration is directly transmitted.

The transmission mode of the vibration of the vibration device 21500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 299 and 300. As described above, in the vibration device 21500, a plurality of portions are intentionally fastened and fixed to members having different rigidity. This aims to effectively generate the vibration of the vibration device 21500 at a specific site.

More specifically, when the member to which the whole of the vibration device 21500 is fixed is too hard, the vibration may be suppressed while the vibration may be too damp. Is fixed to the rigid side member, and the vibration device 215 is centered on the fixed position.
The soft side member fixed to the other part of 00 is configured to vibrate. Thereby, the part fixed to the other part of vibrating device 21500 can fully be displaced.

That is, the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side of the vibrating device 21500 is a V-shaped design member 214
50 (hard side) and the shell-like protruding portion 21541 abuts on the connection plate-like portion 21458 while the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side of the vibration device 21500 is a covering base member 21410 (soft Fixed on the side).

Therefore, the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 is based on the manner in which the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side is displaced (rotational displacement) with the insertion portion 21535 formed on the left side fixed as a reference (axis of vibration). By being transmitted to 21410, it is possible to vibrate the position close to the finger of the player holding the operation handle 51.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the back side due to the vibration of the vibrating device 21500, the protruding portion 21522 of the covering member 21520 is pressed against the overhanging portion De3 (see FIG. 300). As a result, since the protrusion 21522 receives a load directed from the overhanging portion De3 toward the front side, the momentum of the vibration device 21500 returning to the front side as compared with the case where the overhanging portion De3 is not formed. Can be increased.

In addition, the vibrating device 21500 is displaced in such a manner that it is rotated rearward about the left end as the vibration is caused, so that the left plate-like protrusion 21523 is pressed against the left side surface of the bottom member 21De. See (a)). Thus, the plate-like protrusion 21523 is the bottom member 21De.
Thus, it is possible to increase the force of the vibration device 21500 returning to the front side in the rotational direction about the left end as it receives a load from the left to the right.

When the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are displaced to the back side, the volume of the covering member 21520 is allowed to flow below the intermediate lower surface 21531 b by the amount of displacement restricted by the middle portion 21531 of the covering cover member 21530 From this, by concentrating the resin material constituting the covering member 21520 with the overhanging portion De3 it is possible to partially harden the covering member 21520, thereby increasing the reaction force received from the overhanging portion De3. Can. In addition, since bottom member 21De provided with overhang | projection part De3 is not a member by which the displacement of the front-back direction is assumed, it is hard to anticipate that the covering member 21520 deform | transforms by displacement of overhang | projection part De3.

Thereby, the load generated between the vibration device 21500 and the overhang portion De3 is
It can be increased in a limited manner in the excitation state of 1510. In this case, when operating the operation device 10300 or the vibration device 10366 of the operation device 10300 (see FIG. 216).
When the vibration device 21500 is de-energized at the time of the vibration presentation of the vibration device 215
By keeping the load generated between 00 and the overhang De3 small, it can be suppressed that the vibration is transmitted to the vibration device 21500 side, while in the excitation state of the vibration motor 21510, the vibration device 21500 and the overhang Vibration device 2 by increasing the load generated between part De3
The action of assisting the vibration of 1500 can be increased.

Therefore, in the non-excitation state of the vibrating device 21500, the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 can be sufficiently suppressed (covering member 215).
20, while sufficiently exerting the flexibility of 20), in the excited state of the vibrating device 21500, the compressive deformation (strain) is generated in the protruding portion 21522, whereby the load transmitted to the vibrating device 21500 via the covering member 21520 (Reaction force) can be increased.

On the other hand, since the protruding portion 21522 is a protruding portion formed of a flexible resin material, the protruding portion 2
It is possible to suppress displacement of the overhanging portion De3 by pressing the portion 1522. Therefore, the transmission of the vibration to the overhanging portion De3 can be suppressed, so that the generation of the vibration in the operation device 10300 with the vibration of the vibration device 21500 can be avoided.

When the vibrating device 21500 is displaced to the back side with the vibration of the vibrating device 21500 and then displaced so as to return to the front side, the shell-like overhanging portion 21541 is pressed against the connecting plate-like portion 21458. As a result, since the shell-like protruding part 21541 receives a load directed from the connecting plate-like part 21458 toward the back side, the vibrating device 21500 has a back surface as compared with the case where the shell-like protruding part 21541 is not formed. It can increase the momentum to return to the side.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since it is configured to assist the displacement of the vibration device 21500 in both the front and back directions, after the vibration device 21500 is in the excitation state, the vibration becomes strong to the extent that the player feels Period can be shortened.

In the above description, when operating the operation device 10300 or when the operation device 10300
Although the state in which the vibration device 21500 is de-energized at the time of the vibration presentation of the vibration device 10366 is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, vibration device 21500
The operation of the operation device 10300 may be performed during the vibration of.

In this case, the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhanging portion De3 increases, but the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the overhanging portion De3 accompanying the operation of the operation device 10300;
As the direction of the load generated between the covering member 21520 and the overhang portion De3 crosses,
The interaction between the load generated by the vibration device 21500 and the load applied to the operation device 10300 can be suppressed. Accordingly, the load is generated simultaneously from the vibration device 21500 and the operation device 10300, thereby making it possible to prevent the occurrence of a failure (bad effect) of the failure of the vibration device 21500 or the operation device 10300.

FIG. 301 is a schematic partial top view of the lower tray unit 21400 schematically illustrating the lower tray unit 21400. In FIG. 301, a state in which the main body portion 21511 of the vibration motor 21510 is restricted by the right end of the bearing entry recess 21533c of the covering cover member 21530, ie, a state in which the vibration motor 21510 is disposed at the right limit position of the displaceable area It is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, since the vibration motor 21510 is held by the covering cover member 21530 via the covering member 21520, the vibration motor 2 is deformed by the deformation or the like of the covering member 21520.
1510 is configured to be displaceable with respect to the covering cover 21530. Furthermore, as described above, the vibration device 21500 has the insertion portion 21535 formed on the right side displaced (rotational displacement) with the insertion portion 21535 on the left side (see FIG. 290) as a reference (axis of vibration). The force is loaded to the right.

That is, when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 becomes strong, the centrifugal force generated in the vibration device 21500 displaces the vibration motor 21510 rightward (see FIG. 301). Reversal cover 215
Since the ridges 21534 formed on the right side of the 30 are formed in a curved shape that approaches the left at the rear end (see FIG. 295), as the vibration motor 21510 moves closer to the right, the vibration motor 21510 The resistance received from the covering cover 21530 increases when it is displaced to the rear side. Thereby, the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 in the front-rear direction can be suppressed.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the vibration of the vibration motor 21510 is excessive, the vibration motor is suppressed by displacing in a direction intersecting the main vibration direction (front-rear direction). Since the action occurs, the vibration can be suppressed without controlling the vibration motor 21510 (for example, before the stop of the vibration motor 21510 due to the control is performed). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect due to the overvibration of the vibration motor 21510.

In addition, by configuring to be able to suppress the vibration by the displacement of the vibration motor 21510 accompanying the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510, the arrangement of the detection sensor for detecting the displacement due to the excessive vibration of the vibration motor 21510 can be eliminated. . Thereby, the product cost of the lower tray unit 21400 in the present embodiment can be reduced, and the wiring passes through the area made free by omitting the disposition of the detection sensor, and the heat generated from the vibration motor 21510 is dissipated. It can be used effectively as a space for

A twenty-second embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 381. In the first embodiment, the gaming machine frame has been mainly described, but in the twenty-second embodiment, an operation unit A300 visually recognized through the window portion 14c will be described.

FIG. 302 is a front view of a game board A13 of a pachinko machine A10 according to a twenty-second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 302, the game board A13 has a base plate A cut in a substantially square shape in a front view.
60, in addition to a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and a windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62,
The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the variable display device unit A80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1) It is fixed to

The base plate A60 is made of a light transmissive resin material, and is formed so as to allow the player to visually recognize various structures disposed on the back side of the base plate A60 from the front side. General winning hole 6
3, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable display unit A80 is disposed in the through hole formed in the base plate A60 by router processing, fixed from the front side of the game board A13 by tapping screw etc. It is done.

The front center portion of the game board A13 has an inner frame 1 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14.
It can be visually recognized from the front side of 2. In the following, referring mainly to FIG. 302, the game board A13
Will be described.

An outer rail 6 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape on the front of the game board A13
2 is planted, and at the inside position of the outer rail 62, an arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed of a strip-like metal plate like the outer rail 62 is planted. The front outer periphery of the game board A13 is surrounded by the inner rails 61 and the outer rails 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board A13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area in which a game is played is formed by the behavior of the game. The game area is the front of the game board A13 and has two rails 61, 6
An area (a winning opening and the like are provided and an area where a fired ball flows down) is formed by being divided by a resin outer edge member A 73 that connects the two and the rails.

In the present embodiment, the outer edge member A73 is a metal plate member 75 made of metal (see FIG. 308).
Is incorporated so as to strengthen the combined strength (rigidity) of the game board A13 and the outer edge member A73, which will be described in detail later.

In the game area, there are provided a plurality of general winning openings 63 in which five to fifteen balls are paid out as winning balls by winning balls. In the present embodiment, the aim of arranging the general winning a prize opening 63 differs depending on the arrangement. This will be described below.

In the present embodiment, in the game during the normal, the first passing the left side of the third symbol display device 81
Aim to launch the ball aiming to win the ball to the winning opening 64, but the first winning opening 64
A part of the ball flowing down the left area of the first winning opening 64 without reaching the first winning opening 64 wins the general winning opening 63 disposed on the left side of the game area. That is, the normal winning opening 63 disposed on the left side of the game area is disposed to aim at affecting the game during the normal game. For example, the higher the winning probability of the general winning opening 63, the more likely it is to generate a large number of winnings for the first winning opening 64 with a small number of balls during normal times.

On the other hand, in the case of a game that is under time or in a certain change, the ball will be launched aiming to win the ball to the second winning opening 640 along the route passing the right side of the third symbol display device 81. A part of the ball flowing down the right area of the second winning opening 640 without reaching the winning opening 640 wins a general winning opening 63 disposed on the right side of the game area. That is, the general winning opening 63 disposed on the right side of the game area is disposed to aim at affecting the game during the probability change or the time reduction. For example, the higher the possibility of winning to the general winning hole 63, the more or less likely it is possible to suppress ball loss during time saving.

By suppressing the ball loss, even if you do not play in the firing mode to stop the firing of the ball in a definite manner in a definite change (even if hit), win the next jackpot before the ball held in the upper plate 17 is lost Since it becomes easy to do, it is possible to reduce the stress (the feeling of fatigue) which the player receives with the game. Therefore, the number of rotations to the next jackpot frequently increases during the definite change (for example, 10
Even in the case where the number of rotations is 0 or more), it is possible to make the player perform the game comfortably.

In the game in the special gaming state, the ball will be launched aiming at winning the ball to the specified winning opening 65a by the route passing the right side of the third symbol display device 81, but the second winning opening 640
A part of the ball flowing down on the right side of the area flows to the general winning opening 63 side (right side) instead of the specific winning opening 65a side (left side), and wins to the general winning opening 63a. The winning balls associated with the winning on the general winning opening 63 are paid out as a winning ball different from the winning balls on the specific winning opening 65a, so that the player is required to be in the special game state by the end of the special game state. In addition to the winning balls based on the number of winning to the specified specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to obtain a winning ball based on the number of winning to the general winning opening 63.

That is, the general winning opening 63 disposed on the right side of the gaming area is disposed to increase the number of payout balls that the player can acquire in the special gaming state. Here, since the time efficiency of winning on the specific winning opening 65a decreases as the number of winnings on the general winning opening 63 increases, the elapsed time until the special gaming state ends tends to be longer. In other words, the number of rounds and the number of counts in the special gaming state (prescribed number of winnings in each round) are identical in control by the arrangement location of the general winning opening 63, the number of arrangement, and the design of the upstream channel. Also, the time (long and short) required until the end of the special gaming state, and the number (somewhat small) of prize balls to be paid out to the player can be made different.

In addition, the display mode in the case of displaying the number corresponding to the number of payout balls on the third symbol display device 81 in the special gaming state is not limited at all. For example, the number of payout balls based on the winning in the specific winning opening 65a and the number of payout balls based on the winning in the general winning opening 63 may be displayed separately, or the payout based on the winning in the specific winning opening 65a may be displayed. A number may be displayed which is the sum of the number of winning balls and the number of payout balls based on the winning on the general winning opening 63, or may be displayed by combining them.

As mentioned above, the probability of hitting the second pattern is higher than that during normal change during and after a certain period of time,
In addition, since the time taken to change the second symbol is also short, in the second symbol's variable display, "○"
The symbol of the symbol becomes easy to be displayed, and the number of times the motorized role piece 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) is increased. Furthermore, during definite period of time and short time, the time when the motorized accessory 640a is opened is also longer than usual. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win to the second winning opening 640 compared to the normal time during definite variation and during time saving.

Here, the probability of being a big hit is the same in either the low probability state or the high probability state in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 and the case in which the ball has won in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected when jackpot is higher is higher in the case where the ball has won in the second winning opening 640 than in the case where the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have a motorized part like the second winning opening 640, and the ball is always in a state where it is possible to win.

Therefore, during the normal operation, the electric winning combination 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640.
Aim the ball so that the ball passes to the left of the variable display unit A80 toward the 4 (so-called "left-hand"), and winning a prize in the first winning opening 64 gives a lot of chances for a big hit lottery, It is advantageous for the player to aim to be a jackpot.

On the other hand, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the second winning opening 64
As the motorized role piece 640a attached to 0 is in an open state and is in a state in which it is easy to win a prize at the second prize opening 640, the ball passes the right of the variable display 80 toward the second prize opening 640 Launch a ball (so-called “right-handed”) and let the through gate 67 pass to
It is advantageous for the player to aim at becoming a 15R certainty variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640 while opening the second opening.

In the pachinko machine A10 in the present embodiment, the configuration of the game board A13 is left-right asymmetrical, and it is required to hit the ball left and right according to the game state, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the configuration of the game board A13 may be symmetrical (see FIG. 302).
. In this case, aiming at the first winning opening 64 by “right-handed” or second winning opening 640 by “left-handed”
You can also aim for Therefore, depending on the gaming state (permanently changing, time-saving, or normal-time), the player changes the way of firing the ball to "left strike" and "right strike". Can be made unnecessary. Therefore, the troublesomeness which changes how to hit a ball can be eliminated.

In the present embodiment, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to an input / output port 225 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, other units 228, the frame button 22 and the like are connected to the input / output port 225 (see FIG. 4). Other devices 228 include a drive motor AMT1 and a drive motor AM.
T2 and a drive motor for moving up and down the effect unit A 710 are included.

FIG. 303 shows a state in which the front frame 14 is opened (expanded) with respect to the inner frame 12.
FIG. 304 is a front perspective view of 10, and FIG. 304 is a front perspective view of the pachinko machine A10 with the front frame 14 removed. In FIG. 304, a state in which the game board A13 is separated from the inner frame 12 is illustrated, and in FIG. 303 and FIG. 304, reference numerals of the internal configuration of the game board A13 are omitted for convenience.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 305 to 323, the structures of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 will be described. FIG. 305 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A 13, center frame A 86, lottery unit A 600 and operation unit A 300, and FIG. 306 is a game board A.
13 is an exploded rear perspective view of a center frame A86, a lottery unit A600 and an operation unit A300. FIG. In FIGS. 305 and 306, a part of the right side surface of the game board A13 is enlarged. In the description of FIGS. 305 and 306, FIG. 302 is referred to as appropriate.

The center frame A86 is an annular member formed of a light transmitting resin material, fitted from the front side to the through hole 13a drilled in the game board A13 and fastened and fixed in the vicinity of the peripheral edge,
A covering portion 86h provided on the game board A13 and a covering portion 86h capable of distributing balls on the left side
Distribution extending portion 86a extending from the upper end to the left side, left inclined portion 86b extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side from the upper end portion so as to descend downward from the upper end, and from the upper end A right sloped portion 86c extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a downward sloping shape toward the right and a right sloped portion 8c thereof
Right channel forming wall 86d extending from the covering portion 86h to the front side in a manner extending downward from the position where it is connected to the lower end of the 6c and disposed opposite to the turning rubber 69, and its right channel forming Wall 86d
The right channel forming wall 86d has a plurality of lateral ridges 86e protruding to the channel side (right side) as ridges extending in the longitudinal width of the right and left lateral ridges 86e. And a plurality of front ridges 86f protruding from the covering portion 86h to the channel side (front side) as a ridge extending across the channel width of the region between the outer edge member A73, and the right channel forming wall 86d A separation wall 86g is provided, which extends downward from the lower end and is configured to be separable from the other parts at the lower right corner of the through hole 13a.

FIG. 307 (a) is an enlarged front view of the game board A13 in the range A5a of FIG. 302,
FIG. 307 (b) is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board A13 taken along line CCCVIIb-CCCVIIb in FIG. 307 (a).

When the player strongly rotates the operation handle 51 to the right and plays a right-handed game, the ball flows down between the right flow path forming wall portion 86 d and the outer edge member A 73. As shown in FIG. 307 (a), the distance between the right flow passage forming wall 86d and the outer edge member A73 is the distance at which the ball can flow down (the diameter of the ball is 11 m
Since the distance is set to be a length having a slight gap of about 16 mm while it is m, the ball flows down while in contact with the right channel forming wall 86d or the outer edge member A73. Become.

Describing in more detail, the ball having reached the return rubber 69 is repelled to the left and right center side of the game area by the reaction force from the return rubber 69, and collides with the right flow path forming wall 86d. Right channel forming wall 86
Since d is formed as an inclined wall which is inclined downward toward the right, the ball falling by its own weight tries to roll down the right flow path forming wall 86d.

In the process of flowing down, the ball rides on the side ridge 86e. In the present embodiment, the lateral protrusion 8
Since the protrusive length of 6e is designed to be about 2 mm (less than 20% of the diameter of the ball) and the arrangement interval is 16 mm (the same length as the channel width), The prevention of the occurrence of ball clogging can be achieved in a well-balanced manner.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the front protrusion 86f is located at an intermediate position between the plurality of lateral protrusions 86e.
Is formed with the same protrusive length (2 mm) as the lateral projection 86e. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of the ball clogging while improving the decelerating action by setting the formation interval of the ridges to half of the channel width.

Normally, when the pachinko machine A10 is installed in a game arcade, the vertical state slightly (to 1
About a little) laid down. Therefore, the covering portion 86h is disposed as an inclined wall which is inclined downward toward the front side, and the ball flowing down by its own weight tends to flow down so as to roll the covering portion 86h. Because of this configuration, the glass unit 16 side (front side)
As compared with the case where the projecting portion is formed from the bottom to the flow path, the collision between the ball and the front projection 86f projecting from the covering portion 86h can be favorably generated. In FIG. 307 (b), the tilt angle of the game board A13 is illustrated larger than usual (about 5 degrees) in order to make it easy to grasp the tilt.

The separation wall portion 86g is a wall portion disposed to face the lottery unit A600, and the through hole 13a
In the area of, it has a role of closing and separating the area where the lottery unit A 600 is disposed. Hereinafter, assembly of the lottery unit A600 to the game board A13 will be described.

In the area where the lottery unit A600 is disposed, the through holes 13a of the game board A13
A small recess 13b protruding rightward from the substantially circular portion that receives the center frame A86 and a large recess 13c protruding downward to the right below the small recess 13b are formed. As described above, the small recess 13 b and the large recess 13 c as the arrangement area of the lottery unit A 600 can be used as the through holes 1.
Compared to the case where a plurality of independent through holes are formed (when the area necessary for forming the boundary is occupied) by forming a plurality of independent through holes by forming as a recessed portion connected to the open portion for receiving the center frame A 86 of 3a. It is possible to secure a wide area that can be used as the arrangement area of the center frame A 86 and the lottery unit A 600. The details of the lottery unit A600 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, the back of the operation unit A300 is formed in a box shape whose front side is opened from the bottom wall portion A311 and the outer wall portion A312 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion A311. A case A310 is provided.

The rear case A310 is formed in a rectangular frame shape in a front view by forming a rectangular opening A311a at the center of the bottom wall portion A311. The opening A311a is the third symbol display device 81.
Of the display area (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in a front view).

The operation unit A300 includes a plurality of first operation units A400 in which movable devices of substantially the same configuration are disposed in the inner space of the rear case A310 so as to cover the upper peripheral edge of the inner space, and the first operation unit A400. The second operation unit A 700 disposed on the lower side where the disposition of the is omitted is accommodated, and is configured as one unit.

Specifically, the first operation unit A400 is located at the upper side and the left and right sides of the opening A311a, and the second operation unit A700 is located at the lower wall portion A311 of the back case A310 at the position below the opening A311a. It is arranged. Note that FIG. 305 and FIG. 3
In 06, the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 are the rear case A31.
The state of being attached to 0 is illustrated.

The rear case A310 is extended as a flat plate (for example, disposed in parallel) along the rear surface of the game board A13 at the front end of the outer wall A312, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 304) faces the game board A13. A support plate portion A313 to support is provided.

The support plate portion A313 is a cylindrical portion projecting toward the back side from the back surface of the game board A13, and has a shape capable of positioning the fastening convex portion 13d in which a female screw portion is formed at the center Positioning convex part A313a is provided, and the approximate center position of the positioning convex part A313a (fastening convex part 13d
A through hole A 313 b of a size capable of inserting a fastening screw screwed into the fastening convex portion 13 d is bored in the position matching with the female screw in FIG.

That is, since the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 can be integrally fixed by positioning the fastening projection 13d by the positioning projection A313a and screwing the fastening screw into the fastening projection 13d, the game board can be integrated. The rigidity of the A13 and the operation unit A300 as a whole can be improved.

In addition, the shape of positioning convex part A313a is not limited at all, Various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be a convex having a shape along an annular shape having an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer shape (in the present embodiment, a circle) of the fastening convex portion 13d.
It may be a convex portion along an oval shape along the direction in which 313 is formed. Further, in the case where the fastening convex portion 13 d is formed in a rectangular column shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion A 313 a is also shaped to conform to the rectangular shape.

As shown in FIGS. 305 and 306, in the present embodiment, a large number of support plate portions A313 are disposed on the left side and upper side of the rear case A310, and the formation of the support plate portions A313 is reduced on the right side and lower side. This is a result of designing in consideration of the balance between the improvement in rigidity as a whole of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 and the space efficiency.

That is, when the game board A13 is formed of a light transmissive resin material as in the present embodiment, the movable member disposed on the back side of the game board A13 can be viewed through the game board A13. The entire rear face side of the game board A13 is effective as an area for effects to be disposed. On the other hand, at the portion where the support plate portion A313 is formed, the internal space of the back case A310 is eroded inward by the area of the support plate portion A313 in a front view,
The area in which the movable member can be disposed is narrowed. Therefore, even if the support plate portion A313 is omitted, it is possible to avoid the limitation of the movable member arrangement range by omitting the support plate portion A313 if it can be maintained while the strength problem is solved. It is.

The large number of support plate portions A313 provided on the left side and upper side of the rear case A310 in this embodiment is related to the range of the area where the player can view the fired balls, such as the game area. That is, the support plate portion A313 is formed at a position other than the range where the emitted ball is visually recognized.

More specifically, in the present embodiment, the ball fired from the launcher 112a (FIG. 304) passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 and passes through the return ball blocking member 68 to the game area. It is introduced and configured to flow down the gaming area thereafter. In ball-and-ball games, the place where the most attention is considered to be most likely to be is the place where the ball passes, and the other outer area (for example, the area on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 across the outer rail 62 and the inner rail 61 The attention to) is usually low.

Therefore, the lower left portion and the upper left portion based on the left convex arc formed by the outer rail 62 as the range where the sphere can not reach, and the upper left portion and the upper right portion based on the upwardly convex arc It is believed that the player's attention to

In addition, in the present embodiment, the outer edge member A 73 and the surfaces of the lower left and upper left portions of the outer rail 62 with respect to the outer rail 62 are formed along the outer rail 62 and disposed on the front side of the game board A13. And the block-like member 74 are formed of a light-impermeable resin material.
The back side of the game board A13 can not be viewed through the outer edge member A73 or the block-like member 74 from the front side of the game board A13.

In the present embodiment, the support plate portion A 313 is preferentially disposed at a place where the attention power is low or a place where it is not visible. Actually, the support plate portion A313 is formed in the vicinity of the corner portion of the back case A310, avoiding the central portion as the overhanging end portion of the outer rail 62 also in the left side portion and the upper side portion where the support plate portion A313 is formed in large numbers. Be done.

In other words, the operation unit A3 is selected by selecting a portion where the space is eroded by forming the support plate portion A313 from the portion with low visibility (low in rendering ability) in the first place.
While achieving the effect of ensuring the rigidity of 00 and the entire game board A13, it is possible to secure a wide area that can be viewed by the player focusing on the ball.

From this point of view, there is a common configuration for pachinko machines in which the ball fired by the ball firing unit 112a is rolled along the outer rail 62 and introduced into the game area, so the range where the ball does not flow down is the lower left, upper left It is easy to ask for department and upper right. On the other hand, it absorbs the kinetic energy of the ball at one end, and the returning rubber as a adjustable part
On the downstream side of 9, it is difficult to specify a common range in which the balls do not flow down.

That is, in the downstream of the return rubber 69, not only the relationship with the members forming the outer edge of the game area, but also the flow-down path of the ball changes according to the configuration and state of the lottery unit A 600 and the variable winning device 65. The arrangement location of the support plate portion A313 can not be determined until the specifications of the game board A13 are determined.

Compared to the configuration of the game board A13 related to the ball performance of the pachinko machine A10, the operating unit A
Since 300 can be designed freely, it is normal for the design of operation unit A300 to proceed earlier than the design of game board A13, and also for the operation unit A30.
The internal structure of 0 can be carefully elaborated. If the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13 occurs at the end of the development schedule, the position of the support plate portion A313 is changed accordingly, and the internal space of the operation unit A300 as well as the back case A310. This will lead to a design change of other devices disposed in the system, which will increase the cost of the design change.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the position corresponding to the downstream of the return rubber 69, the support plate portion A
The formation of 313 is omitted. This makes it possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation where the arrangement of the support plate portion A313 is changed due to the specification change (configuration change) of the game board A13.

In addition, in the region downstream of the return rubber 69, the inner space of the back case A310 is prevented from being eroded by the support plate portion A313, and a sufficient space for arranging the first operation unit A400 for presentation is secured. And the path in which the ball flows down and the first operation unit A
Since it is possible to overlap with the range in which 400 is disposed, the first operation unit A 400 can naturally enter the field of view of the player who pays attention to the ball.

Further, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 formed at the back position of the outer edge member A73 is
It is formed inside (left side) rather than the right side outermost end of outer wall part A312. On the other hand, the support plate portion A313 formed on the left side of the rear case A310 is formed on the outer side (left side) than the left outermost side of the outer wall portion A312. That is, the formation aspect (formation direction with respect to the outer wall part A312) of the support plate part A313 is made left-right asymmetrical.

Thereby, the distance between the outermost right end of the outer wall A312 and the right end of the game board A13 may be shortened compared to the distance between the outermost left end of the outer wall A312 and the left end of the game board A13. Since it can do, the right end of the internal space of back case A310 can be brought close to the right end of game board A13.

The right side outer wall portion A312 is not formed to face the game board A13 except for the support plate portion A313, and the edge on the front side is in contact with the back surface of the game board A13. In other words, the right outer wall portion A 312 abuts on the game board A 13 with line contact.

A substantially lower half portion of the right outer wall portion A312 is provided with a notch portion A312a which is cut out (cut out) toward the back side. The notch portion A312a is a lottery unit A60.
Notched below the top edge of 0, in the assembled state (see Figure 304),
A gap is formed between the game board A13.

By forming the notched portion A 312 a in this manner, the following effects can be achieved. For example, the gap formed by the notch portion A312a is a lottery unit A.
A wiring connected to the variable winning device 600 or the variable winning device 65 can function as a wiring through which the wiring of the rear case A 310 passes. As a result, the possibility of the wiring interfering with the first operation unit A 400 or the second operation unit A 700 can be reduced, as compared with the case where the wiring is routed up and down.

In addition, the gap formed by the notch portion A 312a can be used as an arrangement space of a configuration required for the lottery unit A 600 and the variable winning device 65. The components required for the lottery unit A 600 and the variable winning device 65 include, for example, a solenoid for generating a driving force, a flow path for flowing a ball, a substrate accompanying light emission effects, a detection sensor for detecting a ball, Other structures are exemplified. In the present embodiment, the second winning opening 6 of the lottery unit A600.
A discharge path ER through which a ball that has won a prize is discharged is configured to pass through a gap between the notch portion A 312 a and the game board A 13 (see FIG. 317).

Further, by arranging a light emitting means such as an LED in the vicinity of the notch portion A 312a, the light emitted from the light emitting means can be made easy for the player to visually recognize as a light having a blurred outline. In other words, compared to the case where the entire circumference of the back case A310 is connected to the game board A13 (when the boundary of the light emitted from the back side of the game board A13 is formed along the shape of the back case A310) This makes it possible to blur the boundaries of light viewed through the game board A13. Thereby, it is possible to avoid that the boundary of light visually recognized through the game board A13 depends on the shape of the back case A310, and it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the light emission effect.

In addition, the formation length (up-down direction length) of notch part A312a is not limited at all. For example, the notch A31 covers the entire area (upper and lower width) between the upper and lower support plate A313.
2a may be formed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the game board A13 is located on the right side of the rear case A310.
In order to consider the rigidity of the right side of the game board A13, the fastening and fixing of the game board is omitted.
It is not possible to rely on the stiffness of the operating unit A300.

As a countermeasure, in the present embodiment, a metal plate member 75 made of metal is disposed at the outer edge portion 73 at a position corresponding to the right end portion of the game board A13. Hereinafter, the metal plate member 75 will be described.

FIG. 308 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75, and FIG. 309 is an exploded back perspective view of the game board A13, the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75. In FIGS. 308 and 309, in order to facilitate understanding, the game board A13 is illustrated alone, and the illustration of the other members disposed on the game board A13 is omitted.

The outer edge member A73 is formed of a resin material and extends in a thin wall shape from the lower end portion of an arc wall portion 73a which constitutes an upper side portion and whose inner side is an arc shape and the lower end portion of the arc wall portion 73a. And an inclined wall 73c having an upper surface which is inclined downward from the lower end of the vertical wall 73b to the left. As described above, by forming the outer edge member A73 with a single member covering substantially the entire area in the vertical direction, the outer edge member A73 is formed of a plurality of members which are divided up and down. The number of assembling steps to the game board A13 can be reduced.

The vertical wall portion 73b is a plurality of plate-like protruding portions 73b1 protruding in a plate shape toward the back side along the right surface portion.
And a plurality of bent portions 73b2 formed in a U-shape in the vertical direction from the front side edge portion of the right surface portion and a cylindrical portion toward the back side at the joint portion of the arc wall portion 73a and the inclined wall portion 73c A cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 which is provided in a protruding manner, and a fastening portion 73b4 which is juxtaposed to the cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 and in which a fastening screw can be screwed in is provided.

The bending part 73b2 is arrange | positioned in the middle position of the arrangement | positioning space | interval of the plate-shaped protrusion part 73b1. Thereby, the holding force of the metal plate member 75 with respect to the vertical wall portion 73b is achieved while suppressing the formation number of the joint penetrating portions 75c formed in the metal plate member 75 in relation to the metal plate member 75 described later. Can be improved.

In other words, compared with the case where the bending of the metal plate-like member 75 is resisted only by the three plate-like protruding portions 73b1, the metal plate-like member 75 of the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 and the bent portion 73b2 As a force against bending can be generated, the load generated at one place can be reduced. In addition, by arranging the plate-like protruding portions 73b1 and the bending portions 73b2 at equal intervals, it is possible to evenly assign the load generated when the bending of the metal plate-like member 75 occurs.
It is possible to prevent an excessive load from occurring in any one place.

The metal plate member 75 is bent to the left at the back side edge of the main body plate portion 75a which is formed without creases in the longitudinal direction while the plural latitudinal directions are folded back and folded back in the longitudinal direction. A plurality of joint penetration parts 75c are formed penetrating in the front-rear direction at a joint part between the bending part 75b, the main body plate part 75a and the bending part 75b, and are formed penetrating in the front-rear direction at upper and lower end parts of the bending part 75b. And a through hole 75e through which a fastening screw can be inserted so as to be able to be inserted through a plate portion formed on the front side with the through hole 75d.

The metal plate member 75 generates a particularly strong resistance to bending in the longitudinal direction because the bending portion 75b is formed extending in the vertical direction in addition to the creased direction of the main body plate portion 75a. Therefore, the vertical wall portion 73b can be efficiently reinforced by integrally arranging the vertical wall portion 73b that is easily curved in the longitudinal direction.

The joint penetration part 75c is formed in the magnitude | size which can penetrate the plate-shaped protrusion part 73b1 of the vertical wall part 73b. In the present embodiment, the vertical wall portion 73 b and the metal plate member 75 can be integrated by inserting the plate-like protruding portion 73 b 1 into the joint through portion 75 c.

When the metal plate member 75 is assembled so as to be integrated with the vertical wall portion 73b, the front side edge of the main body plate portion 75a is sandwiched between the bent portion 73b2 and the outer side surface of the vertical wall portion 73b, Part 73b3
Are inserted into the through holes 75d. As described above, the metal plate-like member 75 and the vertical wall portion 73b are mutually positioned at a plurality of locations in the vertical direction. In this state, the outer edge member A 73 and the metal plate member 75 can be fastened and fixed by screwing the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole 75 e into the fastening portion 73 b 4.

From the above configuration, the metal plate-like member 75 is disposed over the upper and lower portions of the vertical wall portion 73b, so that the entire vertical wall portion 73b can be reinforced. Here, the plate-like projecting portion 73b1 and the cylindrical projecting portion 73b3 of the vertical wall portion 73b pierce the metal plate-like member 75 and extend to the back side, and the tip thereof engages with the game board A13. Hereinafter, the engagement between the metal plate member 75 and the game board A13 will be described.

The game board A13 receives a plurality of recessed portions 13e which are recessed so as to be able to receive the plate-like protruding portions 73b1 at the right side edge of the front, and the cylindrical protruding portions 73b3 on the upper and lower sides of the recessed portions 13e. And a plurality of positioning holes 13f formed as long holes in the upper and lower sides which are possible.

When the outer edge member A73 and the metal plate member 75 are integrated into the game board A13, the plate-like protruding portion 73b1 receives the recessed portion 13e, and the circular protruding portion 73b3 receives the positioning hole 13f. And positioned. That is, the plate-like projecting portion 73 b 1 and the circular projecting portion 7
3b3 is used not only for positioning with the metal plate-like member 75 but also for positioning with the game board A13. Thereby, the number of positioning can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the metal plate-like member 75 is assembled so as to suppress the curvature of the vertical wall 73b, so there is no need to provide sufficient rigidity to the vertical wall 73b alone. The portion 73b can be formed thin enough to be easily curved in the left-right direction by itself.

Furthermore, since the deformation of the game board A13 can be suppressed (the rigidity can be improved) by the rigidity of the metal plate member 75, even when the game board A13 and the back case A310 (see FIG. 306) are separated, the game board The shape of A13 can be maintained. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 309, formation of the fastening convex portion 13d can be omitted at the right end position of the game board A13.

Therefore, the small recessed portion 1 is located at a position where the distance to the right end of the game board A13 is short (a position very close to the right end).
The right edge of 3b and the large recessed part 13c can be arrange | positioned. Thus, the right limit position of the through hole 13a, the small recess 13b and the large recess 13c with respect to the game board A13 can be further moved to the right, and the opening shape can be enlarged.

In this case, when the game area is formed using the game board A13 having the same length in the vertical width and the horizontal width and the center frame A86 having the same opening size, the right end of the game area for the game board A13 is right Since it can be moved to the direction, the area on the left side of the center frame A 86 can be expanded. That is, it is possible to improve the design freedom (the design freedom of the position of the nail, the ball guide channel, the position of the ball passage opening, etc.) of the path along which the gaming ball flows down when hitting left.

Furthermore, at the time of the right-handed game, a distribution device (not shown) in which balls flow down (for example, a device for switching the flow path and flowing down in the order of arrival of balls), a lottery unit A600, a variable winning device 65 (FIG.
Since a large arrangement area can be secured, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the sorting device (not shown), the lottery unit A 600 and the variable winning device 65.

FIG. 310 is an exploded front perspective view of the lottery unit A600, and FIG. 311 is an exploded rear perspective view of the lottery unit A600. The lottery unit A600 is the above-described electric role product 640
It is an assembly which constitutes the 2nd prize-winning mouth 640 by which the state which can pass and the state which can not pass a ball can be switched depending on whether the electric part 640a is open or closed.

In the lottery unit A600, a second winning opening 640 is formed to form a flow-down path in which balls flow downward on the front side, and a main body member A610 fastened and fixed to the game board A13 (see FIG. 305) Engaging member A rotatably supported on the side and engaged with the electric part 640a
620 and a drive unit A 63 generating a driving force for operating the engagement member A 620.
0, a covering member A650 disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 and defining the flow-down path of the ball, and a main illumination provided on the back side of the main body member A610 and emitting light to a region corresponding to the flow-down path of the ball Auxiliary irradiation device A that irradiates light to a region that is disposed on the back side of the device A 660 and the main body member A 610 and whose visibility is reduced by the covering member A 650 and that is different from the flow-down path of the sphere
And 670.

The main body member A610 is a main body plate portion A6 having a plane parallel to the front of the game board A13 on the front side.
11 and a left extending wall portion A61 extending in a wall shape from the left edge of the main body plate portion A611 to the front side
2 and a right extending installation obstacle wall A613 extending in a wall shape from the position including the right edge of the main body plate A611 to the front side and a rectangular frame shape that encloses the second winning opening 640 in a rear view Extending rectangular frame A 614, a projection receiving portion A 615 projecting to the back side above the second winning opening 640 inside the extending rectangular frame A 614, and the right side of the extending rectangular frame A 614 And a main light emission holding frame A616 extended to the back side, and an auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 extended to the back side with the frame shape on the left side of the extended rectangular frame A614.

A through gate 67 is inserted and fixed at the upper end position of the main body plate portion A611. That is, in the present embodiment, at least a portion of the ball attempting to enter the inside of the lottery unit A 600 is
It flows downstream through the through gate 67.

The left extending wall portion A 612 is a wall portion disposed to face the separation wall portion 86 g (see FIG. 305) of the center frame A 86. That is, in the assembled state (see FIG. 304), the separation wall 86g of the center frame A 86 and the left extension wall A 612 are engaged (abut) to secure rigidity. Thus, the through hole 13a is also drawn to the center frame A86 as a lottery unit A600.
The center frame A 86 and the lottery unit A while being formed in a sufficiently large shape
It can hold stably in the mode which controls position shift of 600.

The right extending obstacle wall portion A 613 is a wall portion constituting a rolling surface of a ball. That is, the lottery unit A
The ball flowing down on 600 rolls on the upper surface of the right extending obstacle wall A 613 and flows downstream.

The extended rectangular frame A 614 includes a shaft support hole A 614 a drilled as a portion for rotatably supporting the engagement member A 620, and the extended edge can receive the front end of the drive unit A 630. It is formed from a shape. That is, the drive unit A63 is assembled by fastening the front end of the drive unit A630 to the extension end of the extension rectangular frame A614.
0 is fixed to the extended rectangular frame A 614.

The protrusion receiving portion A 615 is configured to be able to abut on the engaging member A 620 and the operating member A 632 of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL as a drive device of the drive unit A 630, and defines the movement end position. Will be described later.

The main light emission holding frame A 616 is a frame that constitutes an outer frame of light emitted from the main irradiation device A 660, and an insertion hole A 616 a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed inside thereof. This insertion hole A6
The fastening screw inserted into 16a is screwed into the fastening portion A 652a of the covering member A 650, but the fastening portion A 652a is formed at a position overlapping with the low transmission range A 651b of the covering member A 650 in front view Be done. As a result, the fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole A 616 a can be made less visible in a front view, and damage to the design of the lottery unit A 600 can be avoided.

The auxiliary light emission holding frame A617 is a frame that constitutes an outer frame of light irradiated from the auxiliary irradiation device A670, and is formed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A651b of the covering member A650 in a front view.

The engagement member A620 is rotatably supported by a shaft support hole A614a of the extended rectangular frame A614,
It is comprised so that the nail | claw-like part A622 arrange | positioned at a rotation front-end | tip part and the electrically-driven part 640a will engage. As a result, with the change of the posture of the engagement member A 620, a change of the state (open or closed state) of the motorized accessory 640a is generated. Next, the details of the engagement member A 620 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 312 (a) shows the engaging member A620 viewed from the direction of the rotation axis J1.
312 (b) is a front view of the engaging member A 620 in the direction of arrow CCCXIIb in FIG. 312 (a), and FIG. 312 (c) is a CCCXII in FIG. 312 (b).
It is sectional drawing of the engagement member A620 in a c-CCCXIIc line | wire.

The engaging member A620 is formed of a flexible resin material and is formed of a plate-like portion intersecting (orthogonal to) the rotation axis J1, and a rotation tip of the rotation arm A621. C-shaped hook-shaped portion A 622, a pair of projecting shaft portions A 623 projecting from the rotating arm portion A 621 in a cylindrical shape centering on the rotating shaft J 1, a rotating base of the rotating arm portion A 621 A proximal end side connecting rod portion A624 formed in a U-shape in a front view in a mode in which it is a rod-like portion extending radially from the end side and bent toward the other side at the extending end and then joined. And a rod-like portion extending in a direction parallel to the proximal connecting rod portion A 624 from the rotating tip end of the rotating arm A 621, which is joined after being curved toward the other end at the extending end portion A distal end side connecting rod portion A 625 formed in a front view U-shape in an aspect; That.

The pair of rotating arms A 621 are arranged opposite to each other at a distance larger than the diameter of the ball. Thus, the flow path of the ball can be formed so that the ball passes between the rotating arms A 621 (see FIG. 313), so the design freedom of the flow-down path of the ball formed by the lottery unit A 600 is improved. be able to.

The base end side connecting rod portion A 624 has a body rod portion A 624 a formed from substantially the same cross-sectional shape along the longitudinal direction of the rod and the tip end side connecting rod portion A 62 at an intermediate position of the main body rod portion A 624 a.
And a protrusion restriction portion A 624 b protruding to the 5 side. The projecting restricting portion A 624 b is configured as a portion for restricting the excessive rotation of the engaging member A 620, the details of which will be described later.

The distal end side connecting rod portion A625 is formed in a rod portion A625a extending in parallel with the rotation axis J1 so as to have a cross-sectional shape different from that of the proximal end connecting rod portion A624. That is, the rod portion A625a
The surface on the side facing the rotating arm A621 is formed in a planar shape maintaining the distance from the rotating arm A621, while the surface on the opposite side of the rotating arm A621 is directed to the rotating tip side It is formed as an inclined surface A625b which inclines in a direction away from the rotating arm A621. That is, the rod-like portion A 625 a is formed to increase in thickness and to increase in rigidity (increasing deformation resistance) toward the rotation tip end.

In addition, the rod-like portion A625a is concave in such a manner that the surface on the opposite side of the rotation arm A621 is inclined in a manner approaching the surface on the side opposite to the rotation arm A621 as it goes to the center side in the rotation axis J1 direction. It is formed as a recessed surface A625c to be provided.

The recessed surface A625c is recessed along the inclination of the inclined surface A625b. That is, when viewed in the inclined direction of the inclined surface A625b, the respective points of the recessed surface A625c which are different only in the thickness direction (the width direction of the surface opposite to the rotating arm A621) of the tip end side connecting rod A625 are the same. Visualized as a point.

The recessed surface A 625 c is recessed corresponding to the shape of the operating member A 632 so as to be able to receive the operating member A 632 of the drive unit A 630, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 313 is an exploded rear perspective view of the main body member A610, the engagement member A620, and the drive unit A630. In FIG. 313, the engagement member A620 is a support hole A6 of the main body member A610.
The state pivotally supported by 14a is illustrated.

Assembly of the engaging member A620 to the main body member A610 is performed by fitting the extending rectangular frame A614 to the inside in a state in which the engaging member A620 is deformed by applying a compressive force, and a protrusion of the axial support hole A614a and the engaging member A620 It is executed by removing the load and releasing the deformation in a state where the positioning with the spindle A 623 is matched.

That is, the engaging member A620 is gripped in the direction of the rotation axis J1 with a finger, and a compressive force is applied to deform the arrangement width of the protruding shaft portion A623 to a degree shorter than the inner width of the extending rectangular frame A614. The engagement member A 620 can be assembled to the main body member A 610 by inserting the engagement member A 620 into the inside of the extended rectangular frame A 614, aligning the position and releasing the finger.

In the present embodiment, the pair of rotating arms A621 is formed to be connected by the proximal end connecting rod A624 and the distal end connecting rod A625 which are thinner than the rotating arms A621 and which are more easily deformed. From the above, most of the deformation when applying load for assembly is the proximal connecting rod part A 624
And it can produce in tip side connecting rod part A625. Therefore, since the deformation of the rotary arm A621 related to the function of opening and closing the motorized product 640a can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the malfunction of the engaging member A620 due to the deformation at the time of assembly.

In addition, since the pair of rotating arms A 621 is connected not by a single rod but by a pair of rods (a base end connection rod A 624 and a tip connection rod A 625), the load is released. It can be made easy to avoid that the attitude | position of rotation arm part A621 comrades slips after that.

Further, by arranging a rod portion wider than the rotation base end side on the rotation tip side where the load at the time of operation tends to be large among the pair of rod portions (see FIG. 312 (c)), the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL It is possible to suppress that the postures of the rotating arm portions A621 shift when operating with the driving force of.

Furthermore, by narrowing the width of the rod portion on the rotation base end side (see FIG. 312 (c)), the deformation of the engaging member A620 necessary at the time of assembling is made near the projecting shaft portion A623 on the rotation base end side. It can be generated intensively. Therefore, while the stable operation using the engaging member A 620 is realized, the assembling of the engaging member A 620 can be facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 313, the front end of the engagement member A 620 abuts on the lower end of the protrusion receiving portion A 615, whereby further rotation is restricted. As described above, the engagement member A 620 is a portion for opening and closing the motorized product 640 a, and there is a possibility that the ball may enter the second winning opening 640 when the motorized product 640 a is open. The ball entering the second winning opening 640 is a surface that constitutes the engaging member A 620 and the extended rectangular frame A 614, is disposed opposite to the engaging member A 620, and is inclined downward to the back side. Between the lower bottom inclined surface A 614 b and the drive unit A 630.

In the present embodiment, as described above, since the rotary arm A 621 is disposed at an interval longer than the diameter (11 mm) of the ball, the ball can flow between the rotary arms A 621 facing each other. As a result, the engagement member A 620 can be disposed in such a manner as to surround the flow passage of the ball from the upper side, so the engagement member A 620 and the flow passage of the ball can be compactly arranged.

The drive unit A630 is held by the box-like main body box A631 whose front side is open and fixed to the rear end of the extended rectangular frame A614 of the main body member A610, and the upper side of the main body box A631. And a coil spring A633 that applies an urging force to the operating member A632, and an operating member A632 that slides in the front-rear direction by excitation of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL And a detection sensor A 634 for detecting passage of a sphere.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the non-excitation state, the operating member A 632 is disposed at the front side position (see FIG. 314A) by the biasing force of the coil spring A 633.
In the state where the SOL is excited, the operating member A6 against the biasing force of the coil spring A633.
32 is driven and disposed at the back side position (see FIG. 314 (b)). The front side position of the operation member A 632 is configured as a position where a disk-shaped disk portion A 632 a fixed to the tip end of the operation member A 632 abuts on the protrusion receiving portion A 615. Next, with reference to FIG. 314, the transmission path of the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL will be described.

FIGS. 314 (a) and 314 (b) are side views of the motorized accessory 640a, the engaging member A 620 and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. In FIGS. 314 (a) and 314 (b), only the motorized component 640a, the engaging member A 620 and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL are illustrated for easy understanding, and other configurations for holding these members are shown. Illustration is omitted.

Further, in FIG. 314 (a), the non-excitation state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL
The closed state of a) is shown in FIG. 314 (b).
The open state of the motorized accessory 640a is illustrated.

When the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the non-excitation state and the operation member A 632 is disposed at the front position, the engagement member A 620 is in the downward inclined posture (see FIG. 314A), and the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL is in the excitation state. When the operation member A 632 is disposed at the back side position, the engagement member A 620 is in the upward inclined position (see FIG. 314 (b)).

The motorized workpiece 640a is rotatably supported by the shaft support A653 of the covering member A650,
An eccentric projecting portion 640b is provided so as to project from the position eccentric to the rotation axis toward the back side.
The eccentric projecting portion 640b is disposed so as to be able to abut on the upper and lower sides of the hooked portion A622 of the engaging member A620, and along with the eccentric projecting portion 640b being displaced in conjunction with the hooked portion A622, The state of the motorized role piece 640a changes.

In the present embodiment, the motorized part 640a is formed of a single blade-like member, but as can be understood from the fact that there are two sets of the claws A 622 of the engaging member A 620, the motorized part 640a is mutually You may make it comprise from a pair of opposing blade-like members. In this case,
The engaging member A 620 of this embodiment can be diverted.

Referring back to FIGS. 310 and 311, description will be made. The covering member A650 is a colorless, light transmitting resin material and is disposed on the front side of the main body member A610 with the electric component 640a interposed therebetween, and is a main body plate portion A611 of the main body member A610. Between the main body plate portion A651 constituting the flow-down path of the ball, the regulation wall portion A652 projecting like a wall toward the back side of the main body plate portion A651 and restricting the flow of the ball, the back surface of the main body plate portion A651 It is provided in the shape of a column to the side, and the electric role thing 640a
And an axial support A653 rotatably supporting the

The main plate portion A651 has a high transmission range A651a in which the rear side is easily visible in front view, and a low transmission range A651 in which the light transmission is lower than the high transmission range A651a and the rear side is less visible.
and b.

In the present embodiment, a high permeability range A651a and a high permeability range A651a are formed by attaching a seal whose print surface is designed in a mode of configuring a high permeability range and a low permeability range on the front side of the main body plate portion A651. Although the low transmission range A651 b is configured, the method is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A651 may be manufactured by two-color molding of resin,
The low permeability may be formed by shaving the main body plate portion A 651 to roughen the surface.

In the present embodiment, the high transmission range A651a is formed on the front side (mainly the right side) of the flow-down path of the sphere, and the low transmission range A651b is provided with a restriction wall portion A652 for restricting the flow-down of the sphere. Side (mainly the left side). As a result, while ensuring the visibility of the flow-down path of the ball, it is possible to block the view so that the player does not view the internal structure in the range in which the ball does not flow down.

The restriction wall portion A 652 is, for example, an insertion hole A 616 a for fastening and fixing to the main body member A 610.
The fastening part A652a by which the fastening screw penetrated by is screwed in is provided. The fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion A 652a is made of metal and is non-transparent, so it is easy to make a shadow in a front view. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the fastening portion A 652a is disposed outward of the flow-down path of the ball, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the shadow produced by the fastening screw enters the flow-down path of the ball. can do. This makes it possible to prevent the concentration of the player who visually recognizes the flow-down mode of the ball from being scraped off by the shadow of the fastening screw.

The main irradiation device A 660 includes a diffusion plate A 661 accommodated inside the main light emission holding frame A 616 of the main body member A 610, and an electric decoration board A 662 on which the light emitting means A 663 such as LED is disposed on the diffusion plate A 661 side And a rear cover A664 which is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the electric decoration substrate A662 and which is fastened and fixed to the rear end of the main light emission support frame A616.

The diffusion plate A 661 is a plate-like member having an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the main light emission holding frame A 616 and having a diffusion shape for diffusing light on both front and rear surfaces. A plurality of extending portions A 661a extending in a plate shape are provided. The extending portion A 661 a is a diffusion plate A.
Reference numeral 661 denotes a position maintaining portion for preventing the diffusion plate A 661 from being inclined in a state of being accommodated in the main light emission holding frame A 616. When the diffusion plate A 661 is about to tilt, any of the extending portions A6
Since 61a abuts on the inner side surface of the main light emission holding frame A 616 and a resistance in the direction to return the inclination occurs, the attitude of the diffusion plate A 661 is maintained.

In the state where the main irradiation device A660 is assembled to the main body member A610, the electric decoration substrate A66
When the front of 2 abuts on the extending end of the extending portion A 661a, the diffusion of the diffusion plate A 661 to the back side is restricted.

The outer shape of the electric decoration substrate A662 has substantially the same shape as the outer surface of the main light emission holding frame A616,
The outer shape of the rear lid portion A664 is formed to have an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape of the electric decoration substrate A662.
That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the electric decoration substrate A662 is held in a mode in which it is pinched from the front and rear by the main light emission holding frame A616 and the rear lid portion A664 (held by contact with the surface).

Thereby, even if the thickness of the back cover A664 is thin and the rigidity of the back cover A664 alone is low, the electric decoration substrate A662 can be stably held utilizing the rigidity of the main light emission holding frame A616. it can.

Here, an insertion hole A 616 a through which a fastening screw is inserted is formed on the front side of the diffusion plate A 661. Therefore, in order to remove the fastening screw, it is necessary to pull out the diffusion plate A 661 from the main light emission holding frame A 616. Therefore, it is possible to suppress mischief by increasing the number of steps required to remove the fastening screw.

Also, as described above, the fastening screw is non-transparent and is prone to shadows, but according to the present embodiment, the light emitting means A663 and the light emitted from the light emitting means A663 are provided on the back side of the fastening screw. A diffusion plate A 661 capable of diffusing light is disposed. Therefore, the shade of the fastening screw can be thinned (shadow cast) by diffused light, and the shadow of the fastening screw can be made inconspicuous.

In particular, the light emitting means A 663 is disposed at a position where the insertion hole A 616 a does not overlap on the optical axis directed along the front and rear direction (a position where the projected outline in the front and rear direction does not overlap). Thereby, the shadow of the fastening screw can be thinned (shadow cast), and the effect of making the shadow of the fastening screw inconspicuous can be made more remarkable.

The main irradiation device A 660 is disposed on the back side of the flow path of the sphere as described above, and the light emitted from the light emitting means A 663 is irradiated to the flow path of the sphere in this embodiment. Light reaches the down flow path through. Therefore, light having a light spread can be obtained as compared with the light emitted from the light emitting means A 663 without passing through the diffusion plate. By this,
It is possible to reduce the feeling of fatigue given to the eyes of the player who pays attention to the flow path of the ball.

The auxiliary irradiation device A 670 is provided on the back side of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A 617 and on which the plurality of light emitting means A 672 are arranged and on the back side of the electric decoration substrate A 671. And a rear cover A673 formed from an outer shape substantially the same as the outer shape.

The electric decoration substrate A 671 is fixed in the same holding manner as the holding manner of the electric decoration substrate A 662. That is, the vicinity of the outer peripheral edge of the electric decoration substrate A 671 is held in a mode in which the auxiliary light emission holding frame A 617 and the rear lid A 673 are sandwiched from the front and rear (held by contact with the surface).

Thereby, even if the thickness of the back cover A673 is thin and the rigidity of the back cover A673 alone is low, the electric decoration substrate A671 can be stably held using the rigidity of the auxiliary light emission holding frame A617. it can.

Here, unlike the main irradiation device A660, in the auxiliary irradiation device A670, the electric decoration substrate A671
No diffuser plate is provided on the front side of the. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 672 is irradiated to the main body member A 610 in a state where the light emission intensity is maintained without being diffused.

Although light is emitted in such a mode, in the present embodiment, since the light emitting means A 672 is disposed at a position overlapping the low transmission range A 651 b in front view, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 672 is low. The player passes through the transmission range A651b and is visually recognized by the player. Therefore, since the player visually recognizes the light weakened in the low transmission range A 651 b, it is possible to avoid giving an excessive fatigue to the eyes of the player who saw the light.

In addition, by setting the light emission intensity to light, it is possible to prevent the light from being completely blocked in the low transmission range A 651 b. Thereby, for example, when a character corresponding to the pachinko machine A10 is drawn in the low transmission range A651b, it is possible to perform an effect of illuminating the character brightly with the light emitted from the light emitting means A672.

FIGS. 315 (a) and 315 (b) show the CCCXIIc-CCCXI of FIG. 312 (b).
It is sectional drawing of lottery unit A600 in the line corresponding to Ic line. In FIG. 315 (a), the non-energized state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, that is, the closed state of the motorized accessory 640a (FIG. 31 (a)).
4 (a)), and in FIG. 315 (b), the excitation state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL,
That is, the open state (see FIG. 314 (b)) of the motorized accessory 640a is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 315 (a), in the non-excitation state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the lower end portion of the disk portion at the tip of the operation member A632 is in contact with the concave surface A625c of the engagement member A620. Here, in addition to the fact that the disc portion of the operating member A632 is advanced to the front side to the extent that it is disposed opposite to near the middle position in the width direction of the recessed surface A625c, the recessed surface A625c moves in the front-rear direction in which the operating member A632 moves. The load applied from the engagement member A 620 to the operation member A 632 is a load mainly having a component in the vertical direction (direction orthogonal to the front-rear direction) by being a surface substantially parallel to the

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to change the posture of the engaging member A620 by moving (retracting) the operating member A632 by the load from the engaging member A620, so that the piano wire from the gap of the pachinko machine A10 It is possible to take measures against a fraudulent act to change the state to the open state by applying a load to the movable part 640a by entering a wire rod or the like.

Here, conventionally, the pachinko machine has a function of outputting an error notification when a fraudulent action is detected, but an electromagnetic solenoid is provided by illegitimately applying a load to the movable part 640a visible from the front side. If the movable part 640 can be opened regardless of the state of the ASOL, the deterrence against fraud has not been sufficient.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine A10 of this embodiment, even if a load is applied to the movable part 640 and the state is about to be changed, the movable part 640a and the movable part 640a of the movable part 640a are separated. Since the engaging member A 620 is engaged (see FIG. 314 (a)), the engaging member A
In the configuration of the present embodiment in which the posture change of 620 is difficult, it is also difficult to open the movable part 640a by applying a load to the movable part 640a.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the concave surface A is formed so that the rod-like portion A 625a becomes thicker toward the rotating tip end side of the engaging member A620, against the above-mentioned fraudulent act of applying a load to the movable character 640a.
Since the 625c is inclined, when the engaging member A 620 is forced to move upward (for example, while deforming the tip end side connecting rod portion A 625) from the state of FIG. 315 (a), the operating member A 632 and The contact position of the rod-like portion A625a shifts to the thick side (rotational tip side), and the tip-side connecting rod portion A625 becomes difficult to deform.

Therefore, every time the engaging member A 620 is lifted and displaced in the direction, the engaging member A 62 is further
Since the load necessary for displacing 0 can be increased, it is possible to suppress a cheating attempt to open the movable part 640a by applying a load to the movable part 640a.

In addition, a plane opposite to the recessed surface A625c of the rod-like portion A625a is an inclined surface that is inclined downward toward the front side. Therefore, in the state shown in FIG.
The operating member A6 when the load a received from the operating member A 632 is flexed and deformed in the thickness direction.
The reaction force given to 32 can be directed in a rising and tilting direction toward the front side.

Thereby, a load in the front-rear direction given from the rod portion A625a to the operation member A632 can be generated as a load on the front side, and the load from the rod portion A625a prevents the operation member A632 from being retracted backward. Engagement member A 62 more reliably because
It is possible to regulate the rising displacement of 0.

As shown in FIG. 315 (b), the operating member A6 is in the excited state of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL.
When the lower end of the disk portion 32 and the projection restriction portion A 624 b of the engagement member A 620 abut each other, the rear rotation operation of the engagement member A 620 (upward) before colliding with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL Motion in the direction) is regulated. That is, since the regulation of the rotation of the proximal end connecting rod portion A 624 can be performed without causing a collision with the main body box portion of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL, the proximal end connecting rod portion A 624 is a main body box of the electromagnetic solenoid ASOL. It is possible to avoid a defect that a part collides with and breaks or bends.

FIG. 316 (a) is a top view of the operation unit A300, and FIG. 316 (b) is a diagram of FIG.
FIG. 317 is a side view of the operation unit A300 in the arrow L direction view of FIG.
13 is a rear view of the operation unit A300. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 316 (a) and 316 (b), the front end face of the first operation unit A400 is disposed so as to project to the front side more than the front end of the back case A310. As described above, when the game board A13 is formed from a veneer while arranging the first operation unit A400, it is necessary to form a recess or a hole on the back side of the game board A13 to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400. In the present embodiment, since the game board A13 is formed of the resin base plate A60 in the present embodiment, if a mold is manufactured in advance so as to avoid interference with the first operation unit A400, The game board A13 can be easily formed in a shape that avoids interference.

That is, in the present embodiment, the front end face of the first operation unit A400 is formed from the back side to the front side along the left, right and upper surfaces of the base plate A60 of the game board A13 (see FIG. 306). Interference with the game board A13 and the first operation unit A400 can be easily avoided while being configured to project to the front side more than the front end of the rear case A310. By this,
Since the arrangement of the first operation unit A400 can be made closer to the player, the effect of the effect of causing the first operation unit A400 to visually recognize can be improved.

As shown in FIGS. 316 (b) and 317, the support plate portion A 313 disposed at the top of the rear case A 310 is disposed inside (lower side) than the outer side surface (upper surface) of the outer wall portion A 312.
Thereby, while the arrangement of the outer wall portion A312 at the left and right center where the support plate portion A313 is not disposed is further outward (upper side), the case where the support plate portion A313 is disposed outside the outer wall portion A312 is compared. Thus, the upper end position of the rear case A310 can be lowered.

That is, it is possible to improve the arrangement freedom of the rear case A310 with respect to the game board A13 while improving the arrangement freedom of the first operation unit A400 (or the second operation unit A700) with respect to the rear case A310.

In addition, since the left and right positions at which the support plate portion A313 at the top of the rear case A310 is disposed are outside the game area in the front view as described above, the support plate portion A313 is below the outer wall portion A312. By being placed in, it is possible to reduce the influence (disadvantage) on the game to a small extent.

As shown in FIG. 317, unlike the left side, the disposition of the support plate portion A313 is omitted except for the upper end position on the right side of the rear case A310. That is, since the space occupied when the support plate portion A313 is disposed can be omitted below the upper end position, the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310 is moved closer to the right end of the game board A13 Can.

FIG. 318 shows the game board A13 along line CCCXVIII-CCCXVIII in FIG.
And FIG. 16 is a partial cross-sectional view of the operation unit A300. As shown in FIG. 318, the base plate A60
Is a region on the inner side of the outer edge extending portion 60a, compared with the outer edge extending portion 60a extended to the rear side along the outer edge, in the region overlapping at least a part with the game area in the front and back The front and rear width of the central overhanging portion 60b that is overhanging is formed shorter.

Since the front end face of the base plate A60 is formed substantially on the same plane, the front end of the central overhanging portion 60b is disposed on the front side rather than the rear end of the outer edge extending portion 60a. Thus, the interference between the base plate A60 and the first operation unit A400 is avoided.

A recessed portion 60 recessed toward the front side between the outer edge extension portion 60a and the central overhang portion 60b
The base plate A60 is formed to be thinner than the outer edge extending portion 60a and the central overhang portion 60b in the formation range of the recessed portion 60c. That is, the degree of decrease in the energy of the light passing through the base plate A60 is determined by the outer edge extension portion 6 in the formation range of the recess portion 60c.
It can be lower than 0a and the central overhang 60b.

The center frame A86 is covered on the front side of the base plate A60, and the covering portion 86h of the center frame A86 is formed with a gap between the center frame A86 and the outer edge member A73, as shown in FIG. 318. The gap is disposed at a position overlapping the recess 60c in the front-rear direction. That is, the base plate A6 has the effect of suppressing the decrease in energy of light passing through the base plate A60.
The front side of 0 can also be maintained.

The light whose energy reduction is suppressed is used for the effect of illuminating the sphere by irradiating the sphere flowing between the center frame A 86 and the outer edge member A 73. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the degree of decrease in energy when the light used for the effect of irradiating the light to the ball passes through the game board A13 can be lowered, the light is weaker and it is more effective. The effect of making the ball glow can be performed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 318, since the inner side surface of the outer edge member A73 is disposed outward in a front view than the inner side surface of the outer edge extended portion 60a of the base plate A60, Setting unit 6
It can be made easy to arrange in the position which overlaps with 0c in front and behind. Therefore, the light having passed through the recess 60c can be easily irradiated to the sphere.

As shown in FIG. 318, the bent portion 75b of the metal plate member 75 is sandwiched between the outer edge member A73 and the base plate A60. Thus, the outer edge member A73, the base plate A60, and the metal plate member 75 can be configured to integrally and mutually support each other from the viewpoint of rigidity.

In addition, the outer edge member A is utilized by utilizing the fact that light is reflected to the metal when the bent portion 75b is irradiated with light.
The light emission intensity between 73 and the base plate A60 can be locally increased. The light emission of which intensity is locally increased in the width direction inner end portion (left end portion) of the bent portion 75 b is the outer edge member A7.
Since the light emission occurs at a location that can be visually recognized via the vertical wall portion 73b (see FIG. 30).
It can be limited to the formation range of 8) (the arc wall 73 a and the inclined wall 73 c can be removed).

Thereby, even when light is irradiated from the rear side toward the entire upper and lower sides of the metal plate-like member 75, the portion where the luminous intensity is locally increased is limited to the upper and lower length range of the vertical wall portion 73b. As a result, the line of sight of the player can be easily concentrated on the lottery unit A 600 disposed opposite to the vertical wall portion 73 b and the formation range of the flow path thereabove.

FIGS. 319, 320, 321 and 322 are front views of the operation unit A300. In the description of FIGS. 319, 320, 321 and 322, the descriptions of all the first operation units A400 and the plurality of first operation units A400 refer to the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, It means A400C, A400D. Also,
The first operation unit A400 may be described as a representative of configurations and functions that can be adopted commonly to the five first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D.

In FIG. 319, all of the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700 are the third.
It is illustrated that the retracted state is maintained without retracting to the symbol display device 81 side, as shown in FIG.
At 0, all the first operation units A400 are excited and extended to the third symbol display device 81 side, and a state where the second operation units A700 maintain the retracted state is illustrated.

FIG. 321 illustrates that all the first operation units A400 maintain the retracted state, and the second operation units A700 extend to the third symbol display device 81 side, as shown in FIG.
At 22, some of the first operation units A400B and A400C are put in the retracted state, the other first operation units A400, A400A and A400D are put in the extension state, and the second operation unit A700 is maintained in the extension state. The situation is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 319 to FIG. 322, the plurality of first operation units A400 can be used by the player in the range defined by the colored (in the present embodiment, ultra-blue) cover members A591.
Front cover A4 (in this embodiment, gold-plated on the front surface) formed in a prominent color
10 and the first displacement member A440 are configured to be mainly visually recognized, the first displacement member A440
It arrange | positions so that the edge by the side of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 may become a location which approaches closest to the 1st operation unit A400 next to.

That is, since the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are disposed in a posture along the radiation spreading outward from the inner side (center) of the third symbol display device 81, the front cover A410 and the first displacement member A440 are the centers of the radiation. The line of sight of the player can be concentrated toward the inside of the third symbol display device 81.

The side surface of the first displacement member A440 on the third symbol display device 81 side is the adjacent first displacement member A440.
As shown in FIG. 319, the side surface of the first displacement member A440 (the side surface including the side surface adjacent to the adjacent first displacement member A440) is the tip side (the third symbol display device). 8
Be chamfered to be tapered toward 1). Thereby, the next first displacement member A4
Avoid interfering with 40.

Although the starting point of the chamfering is not limited at all, in this embodiment, a straight line extended along the side surface of the first displacement member A440 is similarly extended from the adjacent first displacement member A440. The chamfering is not performed until just before the intersection crossing the straight line, but is chamfered immediately before the intersection. Thereby, while avoiding interference between the first displacement members A440,
A wide range for making the first displacement member A 440 visible can be secured.

As shown in FIG. 319, in the retracted state of the first operation unit A400, the first displacement member A4 is
In order to occupy a range extending from the rear surface side of the game board A13 to the front surface side of the third symbol display device 81, it is arranged in an attitude that becomes wide in the front and rear direction. Therefore, the area occupied by the first displacement member A440 in the front view as compared with the case where the posture of the first displacement member A440 is directed to the light emission side (the surface facing the front side in FIG. 320) facing the front side. Can be suppressed, and the visual change can be increased while suppressing the amount of displacement in front view.

This configuration is effective when there is a circumstance that the usable range for displacement of the first displacement member A440 is limited in the rotation angle range of the drive gear AMG1 (see FIG. 335) rotated by the drive motor AMT1. Details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 320, in the overhang state of the first operation unit A400, the second displacement member A4.
The first displacement member A 440 is disposed at the overhanging position (a position away from the third symbol display device 81) while 90 is disposed at the overhanging position.

Describing in detail, the first displacement member A440 is disposed wide in the front-rear direction so as to occupy a range extending from the back side of the game board A13 to the front side of the third symbol display device 81.
In order to allow the movement of the second displacement member A 490 from the state of interference with the movement trajectory of the displacement member A 490 (the retracted state of the first operation unit A 400), it is closer to the game board A13 side to allow movement of the second displacement member A 490. The state changes to the state of being disposed in (the overhang state of the first operation unit A 400).

Thereby, the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted state of the first operation unit A400,
It is possible to perform a light emission effect of emitting light to the player side without blocking the light by the second displacement member A 490 regardless of the overhang state. In particular, in the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440, the light emission mode of the long hole A 412a (see FIG. 325) disposed around the third symbol display device 81 can be switched, and the line of sight to the third symbol display device 81 And the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 321, in the second operation unit A700, the effect unit A710 is vertically movable to the center side of the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the second operation unit A700
Is provided with a rotating body A 720 configured to be operable regardless of the vertical position of the rendering unit A 710, and the rotation of the rotating body A 720 makes it possible to execute a light emission effect for advancing light in multiple directions. Will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 322, since each of the plurality of first operation units A400 is provided with a separate drive, each first operation unit A400 can perform state change and state maintenance independently. That is, the combination of the first operation unit A400 to configure the retracted state and the overhang state is not limited to that illustrated in FIG. 322, and can be set arbitrarily.

For example, it is possible to execute only the state change of any one first operation unit A400, and it is also possible to execute the state change in different first operation units A400 in order. For example, the state change may be sequentially performed clockwise in a front view from the lower left first operation unit A400, or the third first operation unit A400B clockwise from lower left.
It is also possible to execute the state change sequentially in both directions. Thus, the first operation unit A
A variety of effects can be performed using 400.

Also, for example, the first operation units A400B and A4 to be in the retracted state in FIG.
Since the second displacement member A 490 of 00 C is disposed at the extended position, the second operation unit A 700
If the first operation units A400B and A400C that may interfere with the second operation unit A700 are in the retracted state, and the other first operation units A400, A400A, and A400D are stretched. It can be put out. By this,
Compared to the case where all the first operation units A400 operate synchronously with the same drive device, the first
Variations of combinations of operations (states) of the operation unit A 400 and the second operation unit A 700 can be increased.

FIG. 323 is a front view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 323, the outer shape of the game board A13, the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 are illustrated by imaginary lines. As shown in FIG. 323, the first
The front cover A410 of the operation unit A400 is arranged to be able to effectively decorate the game area. This is explained below.

First, when the game area is defined as an area in which the ball having passed between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 flows down, the section in which the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 face each other to guide the ball (ball launch unit The section from the side 112a to the ball return prevention member 68 (see FIG. 302) is not included in the game area, and the outer frame of the game area is the inner rail 61 in this section. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400 and A400A (from the lower left to the second one) disposed on the back side of the inner rail 61 is disposed in the vicinity (outward side) of the inner rail 61. (It is unnecessary to extend to the outer rail 62).

On the other hand, the outer frame of the game area in the area after the ball passes between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 (in particular, the area where the right-handed ball flows down) is the outer rail 62. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400B, A400C (third and fourth from the lower left) disposed on the back side of the outer rail 62 is in the vicinity of the outer rail 62 (outward side) Will be placed.

Furthermore, the outer rail 62 is broken, and the outer frame of the game area in the area where the outer edge member A 73 is disposed is the outer edge member A 73. Therefore, the outer end of the front cover A410 of the first operation unit A400D (lower right first piece) disposed on the back side of the outer edge member A73 is disposed in the vicinity of the inner side surface (outward side) of the outer edge member A73. . This is a back case A310 in this embodiment.
The arrangement of the support plate part A313 is omitted in the right middle part of the game machine, and the rear case A is placed at the right end of the game board A13.
Since the right end of 310 is brought close, it can be realized.

That is, the first operation unit A400D can be packed and arranged near the right end of the game board A13 by forming the inner area of the back case A310 close to the right end of the game board A13 in a front view. Thereby, a flow path (a flow path sandwiched between the right flow path forming wall 86 d and the outer edge member A 73, which is disposed in the vicinity of the right end of the gaming board A 13 as a flow path in which the right-handed ball flows down;
1) in a manner such that the outer end of the front cover A410 is disposed on the outer side (right side) than at 02)
Operation unit A400D can be provided.

In other words, like a common right-handed machine (for example, a pachinko machine that is not a symmetrical machine),
When the right-handed flow path is extremely narrowed compared to the left-handed flow path and is disposed close to the right end of the game board A13, the right-handed inside of the rear case A310 is right-justified as in this embodiment. Thus, the movable device such as the first operation unit A400 can be disposed, so that the movable device can be disposed on the entire back side of the game area.

On the other hand, on the left side of the rear case A310, a guide portion sandwiched between the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 is formed in a front view, and the player's gaze is concentrated to this guide portion. Since it is difficult, even if the support plate portion A313 is disposed on the left side of the rear case A310 as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid lowering the degree of improvement in the decoration of the game area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the support plate portion A313 is disposed on the left side of the back case A310, and the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the right side of the back case A310 from the viewpoint of improving the decoration of the game area. It can be said that it is a choice.

As described above with reference to FIG. 323, since the plurality of front covers A 410 are effectively arranged in the game area, the game board A is designed to allow the player to pay attention to the game area.
A plurality of front covers A 410 can be configured to be viewed through 13.

As a result, by attaching a sticker or the like on which a character or the like is printed on the surface of the game board A13, it is possible to eliminate the need to decorate the game area. Also, front cover A410
The area in which is arranged is changeable in appearance depending on the arrangement of each displacement member and the light emission mode of the light emitting means as a part of the first operation unit A400, so as described above, the game board A
The variation of the aspect which decorates a game area compared with the case where a seal | sticker etc. are affixed on 13 can be increased. The details of the change in appearance will be described later.

Since the outside of the game area is hidden by the block-like member 74 (see FIG. 305),
Even if the portion where the structure is exposed or the drive unit is disposed, the appearance can be prevented from being deteriorated.

As shown in FIG. 323, the adjacent first operation units A400 are arranged close to each other with a slight gap, and the cover members A591 arranged between are adjacent first operation units A400.
The first operation unit A 400 is fastened and fixed in a manner of connecting the two. That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) first operation units A 400 disposed around the third symbol display device 81 are combined with each other to form an integral structure.

Furthermore, the outer side surface of the first operation unit A400 is disposed close to the inner side surface of the rear case A310 (see FIG. 324). Therefore, the rigidity of the entire first operation unit A400 can be improved, and the deformation of the rear case A310 can be assisted by the rigidity of the first operation unit A400, so that the above-described rear case A310 is reinforced. ,
Over reliance on the metal plate member 75 (see FIG. 308) can be avoided. Therefore,
Since the strength (rigidity, thickness) required for the metal plate member 75 can be lowered, the design freedom of the metal plate member 75 can be improved.

Thus, noise reduction as an inherent function of the metal plate-like member 75, and grounding by contacting the inner surface of the inner frame 12 (see FIGS. 303 and 304) can be easily designed in a shape that is easy to be performed. it can.

FIG. 324 is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit A300. In FIG. 324, a plurality of (five in the present embodiment) first operation units A400 are removed from the back case A310 to the front side, and a state where the second operation unit A700 is attached to the back case A310 is illustrated.

The first operation units A400 are each configured to be operable in a generally common operation mode,
A plurality of members are arranged to surround a part of the inner space of the rear case A310. As shown in FIGS. 319 and 320, each first operation unit A400 moves in the direction toward the center of the inner space of the back case A310 (the direction along the radiation emitted from the center of the inner space of the back case A310) Configured to move on.

Therefore, for example, since the influence given by gravity can be changed in each first operation unit A 400, in the present embodiment, the configuration is devised so that the operation can be realized without relying on gravity,
Details will be described later. As described above, since each first operation unit A400 has a general common configuration, the first operation unit A400 disposed at the lower left will be described in detail, and the description of the other first operation units A400 will be described. I omit it.

FIG. 325 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 326 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit A400. As shown in FIGS. 325 and 326, the area of the first operation unit A400 is a substantially rectangular area in a front view covered by the front cover A410, and a main area A400b in which a light emission effect is mainly performed, and its main body It consists of an additional area A400v provided at the end of the area A400b.

The additional area A400v is not an area that is assumed to be viewed by the player in the assembled state. In particular, a blind cover member A591 is covered at the center side that may be viewed by the player, and the back side of the cover member A591 is configured to be invisible from the player.

A configuration (for example, a drive motor AMT1, a detection sensor A426 for detecting a position, a wiring, a connector, and the like) which inevitably occurs along with effects performed in the main body area A400b is not for the purpose of making the player visually recognize in the additional area A400v. By arranging, the main body area A 400 b can be maximally used for the arrangement of members assuming that the player visually recognizes. That is,
Since it is possible to prevent the main body area A400b from being eroded to a configuration that is not for the purpose of making the player visually recognize, it is possible to dispose a large member by fully utilizing the size of the main body area A400b.

FIG. 327 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit A400, and FIG. 328 is an exploded back perspective view of the first operation unit A400. In FIG. 327 and FIG. 328, a state in which the front cover A410 is removed is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 327 and 328, the first operation unit A400 has a front cover A41.
First displaceable member A 440 displaceable in such a manner as to enter between 0 and its front cover A 410
And a rear unit BU disposed on the back side of the front unit FU.

The front cover A410 has a shape in which a thin plate is bent in a U-shape so as to cover the front side of the front unit FU on the front side of the front unit FU, and the main body A411 is fastened and fixed to the rear unit BU. And a plurality of through holes A 412 bored at positions defined in relation to the front unit FU, and a guide portion A 413 for guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A 440 of the front unit FU.

According to the configuration described above, the front cover A410 has a function of making the specific area visible through the through hole A412 while hiding most of the area of the front unit FU invisible to the player.
It mainly has a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A 440 of the front unit FU.

FIG. 329 is an exploded front perspective view of front cover A410, and FIG. 330 is a front cover A.
It is a disassembled back perspective view of 410. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 329 and 330, the front cover A41
As a configuration in which 0 is laminated on the back side of the effect central portion A411a of the main body portion A411, the light transmissive resin is disposed in a plate shape having an outer shape corresponding to the shape of the effect central portion A411a. A light emitting means A 416 a such as a diffusion plate A 415 made of a material, and an LED (shown in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 329) whose light axis is directed to the diffusion plate A 415 side An electric decoration board A 416 to be provided and the electric decoration board A
It mainly includes a substrate fixing plate A417 which is disposed opposite to the substrate 416 to fix the electric decoration substrate A 416 and to be fastened and fixed to the front unit FU.

Hereinafter, the configuration of the diffusion plate A 415, the electric decoration substrate A 416, and the substrate fixing plate A 417 and the suppression of positional deviation by the configuration will be described.

The diffusion plate A 415 is not fastened by a fastening screw or the like, but is supported by being pinched in the front-rear direction by the main body portion A 411 and the substrate fixing plate A 417, and the shaft corresponding position A 415 a The wave pattern formed from the ridges of the shape that extends concentrically centering on the center is formed, and it is drilled as a small diameter through hole smaller than the light emitting means and the recessed portion A 415 b recessed from the outer edge A plurality of small diameter holes A 415 c and a plurality of projecting plate portions A 415 d projecting in a plate shape from the side constituting the upper and lower ends to the back surface side are mainly provided.

The ridges forming a wave pattern on the back side of the diffusion plate A 415 refract the light irradiated to the axis corresponding position A 415 a side and then travel in the radial direction of a circle centered on the axis corresponding position A 415 a It forms from the shape advanced to the front side. That is, the light incident on the axis corresponding position A 415a is visually recognized by the player at a position (radially outside) away from the axis corresponding position A 415a, but the reverse is not true. That is, the light incident on a position away from the axis corresponding position A 415 a is formed to be prevented from traveling toward the axis corresponding position A 415 a.

The recessed portion A 415 b is a notch formed to avoid interference of members, and in this embodiment, the purpose is to avoid interference with a screw head of a fastening screw for fastening and fixing the electric decoration substrate A 416 to the substrate fixing plate A 417. It is formed by

The small diameter portion 415 c is a through hole A 412 of the main body portion A 411 in order to make it difficult to visually recognize in front view.
And the substrate fixing plate A41 (position facing the plate portion of the main body portion A411).
7 is a through hole formed at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar part A417f, and the diffusion plate A415,
Although it utilizes for alignment of electric decoration board | substrate A416 and the board | substrate fixed plate A417, the detail is mentioned later.

The protruding plate portion A 415 d is formed so as to be able to position the diffusion plate A 415 with respect to the substrate fixing plate A 417 by being fitted into the notch portion A 417 h of the substrate fixing plate A 417. The projection length of the projection plate portion A 415 d is about 4 mm, and the width is formed at the upper limit of about 10 mm, and has a certain degree of rigidity, so the load generated during assembly or maintenance (for example, with other members) It is possible to prevent the protrusion plate portion A 415 d from being bent or broken due to a load caused by a collision, rubbing or the like, and the function of alignment can be maintained for a long time.

The diffusion plate A 415 has a wave pattern formed on the entire area on the back surface side and can perform the light diffusion function in the entire area, but it is clearly divided into a first area AC1 and a second area AC2 from the presentation mode. That is, the first area AC1 is an area overlapping with the electric decoration substrate A416 in front view, and the second area AC2 is an area not overlapping with the electric decoration substrate A416 in front view.

In the first area AC1, the optical axis of the light emitting means A 416a of the electric decoration substrate A 416 passes, and it is possible for the player to visually recognize in a strong light emission mode even as a light emission effect. On the other hand, the second area AC2 is
It corresponds to the area formed to protrude from the side wall A417a3 on the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417 to the outside (right side) of the substrate fixing plate A417, the optical axis of the light emitting means A416a of the electric decoration substrate A416 does not pass, and the light emitting means The light from A 416a weakens and reaches.

On the other hand, the second area AC2 has a function of enhancing the rendering effect in the light-emitting effect by the first displacement member A440 of the front unit FU, but the details will be described later.

The electric decoration substrate A 416 has the above-mentioned light emitting means A 416 a, a recess A 416 b recessed inward from the outer edge, a plurality of large diameter holes A 416 c bored with a large diameter for positioning, and a small diameter penetrating A plurality of set fastening holes 416d disposed as a set of holes, a plurality of connectors A 416e disposed on the front and back and connected to the ends of the wires, and an electrical wire F for supplying electricity to the first displacement member A440
C (intermediate type (flat) cable in this embodiment) Intermediate connector A 416 f to be connected
And mainly.

The light emitting means A 416 a is a position where the intensity of light to be visually recognized by the player tends to be maximum, and in this embodiment, the light emitting means A 416 a is preferentially arranged at a position where the through hole A 412 of the front cover A 410 is formed in the front and rear direction. Ru. As a result, it is possible to easily secure the intensity of light visually recognized by the player through the through hole A412.

The recessed portion A 416 b is a notch formed to avoid interference with a screw head of a fastening screw inserted into the through hole A 417 b for fastening and fixing the substrate fixing plate A 417 to the front unit FU.

The large diameter hole A416c is a through hole drilled with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outermost diameter of the insertion columnar part A417f of the substrate fixing plate A417, and is drilled at a position corresponding to the insertion columnar part A417f. By inserting the insertion columnar part A417f into the large diameter hole A416c, the electric decoration substrate A416
Can be aligned with the substrate fixing plate A 417.

The set fastening portion A 416 d is configured of a pair of small diameter through holes arranged along the upper and lower sides. Maintenance efficiency is improved by configuring the fastening screw to be inserted into the upper through hole of the pair of through holes.

For example, for maintenance, the main unit A411 and the diffusion plate A 415 are removed in a state where the first operation unit A400 is fixed to the rear case A310, and the faulty electric decoration board A4
16 is removed from the substrate fixing plate A 417, and the normal illumination substrate A 416 is a substrate fixing plate A 417
It is assumed that the work of attaching to the front of the electric decoration board A 416 is tilted forward by its own weight before fastening and fixing. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the upper through holes (the side to which the displacement to the front side due to the front fall is large) of the pair of upper and lower through holes of the assembled fastening portion A 416 d are fixed by the fastening screws, It is possible to return the posture in the back fall direction favorably by the fastening screw that it has fallen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the attitude of the electric decorative substrate A 416 from being erroneously fixed when fastening and fixing the maintenance.

In the lower part of the assembly fastening part A416d, the columnar part of the substrate fastening part A417c which is provided on the front side of the substrate fixing plate A417 is inserted and the positioning of the electric decoration board A416 and the electric decoration board A416 are inserted. It has a function to perform temporary fastening. That is, even before the fastening screw is fastened, the lower through hole is hooked on the columnar portion of the substrate fastening portion A 417 c, so that it is possible to suppress the electric decoration substrate A 416 from falling by its own weight.

The connector A 416 e is disposed on the front side, and includes a first connector A 416 e 1 to which a wiring for performing power supply and light emission control of the light emitting unit A 416 a is connected and a wiring connected to a detection sensor A 426 fixed to the front unit FU. A second connector A 416 e 2 to be connected and a third connector A 416 e 3 to which a wire connected to a second displacement member A 490 disposed in the rear unit BU is connected are mainly included.

In these connectors A 416 e, the positions of the mating members to which the wiring is connected are fixed (first connector A 416 e 1, second connector A 416 e 2), or there is a sufficient distance between the connectors even if the mating members are movable ( Because of the third connector A 416 e 3), it can be disposed at any position. In the present embodiment, it is a position corresponding to the lower end portion of the electric decoration board A 416 so as not to cause interference with other members and to prevent the possibility of visual recognition from the player, and the additional area A
It is arranged in the part included in 400v.

On the other hand, the first displacement member A440 as a mating member to which the intermediate connector A416f is connected by wiring interposes the substrate fixing plate A417 and the area on the opposite side of the electric decoration substrate A416 (substrate fixing plate A417 and guide plate portion A430 (see FIG. Since the gap between the connectors (back and forth distance) is shortened because the gap formed between them) is displaced, the load on the wiring is excessive if the connector is misplaced. There is a risk of giving

In the present embodiment, unlike the connector A 416 e (in the present embodiment, the wiring is connected to the connector A 416 e from below) in which the wiring direction may be any direction, the middle connector A 416
The direction of f is the direction of movement of the first displacement member A 440 of the front unit FU, which is the direction of movement A
And, the stretchable (flat band of the flat cable can be easily bent and the possibility of disconnection is small) direction of the electric wiring FC is set to be along.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a main body A417a which is open in the front side and formed in a box shape capable of accommodating the electric decoration substrate A416, and has a projection on the rear side of the main body A417a that receives the fastening portion of the front unit FU. A plurality of through holes A 417 b configured to allow insertion of a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion, a fastening portion into which the fastening screw is screwed in, and a front surface from a plane common to the tip surface of the fastening portion Several board | substrate fastening parts A417c comprised by the group of the small diameter columnar part protrusively provided
And.

Further, the main body portion A417a of the substrate fixing plate A417 is parallel to the plate-like deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 connected to the rear end portion of the substrate fastening portion A417c and the deep bottom plate-like portion A417a1 and the front is the substrate fastening portion A417c. Bottom plate-like portion A4 formed on the same plane as the end face of the fastening portion of
And 17a2.

That is, the rear surface of the electric decoration substrate A 416 can be surface-supported by the tip end surfaces of the fastening portions of the plurality of substrate fastening portions A 417 c and the shallow bottom plate portion A 417 a 2.

The substrate fixing plate A 417 has a sharp overhanging portion A 417 d having a sharp tip from the deep bottom plate-like portion A 417 a 1 and the vertical width of the sharp overhanging portion A 417 d at the lower left portion of the sharp overhanging portion A 417 d. And an insertion hole A 417 e formed in a rectangular shape having the same width.

The sharp overhanging portion A 417 d is disposed at the lower left portion of the intermediate connector A 416 f in the assembled state, and has a section triangular shape in such a manner as to leave a space about the thickness of the electric wiring FC which is a flat cable with the electric decoration substrate A 416. The protrusion is formed as a linearly extending protrusion, and the extending direction of the protrusion intersects (orthogonalizes) the direction A 416 x in a front view. Then, the wiring connected to the intermediate connector A 416 f is routed to the back side through the insertion hole A 417 e,
The electrical wiring FC connected to the middle connector A 416 f is sandwiched between the substrate fixing plate A 417 and the sharp overhang portion A 417 d.

As described above, by sandwiching and supporting the electrical wiring FC between the substrate fixing plate A 417 and the sharp overhang portion A 417 d, the portion receiving the displacement of the electrical wiring FC due to the displacement of the first displacement member A 440 is an intermediate connector A 416 f. From the end position of the electrical wiring FC to be connected, the substrate fixing plate A41
It can be shifted to a position where it is sandwiched between the point 7 and the pointed out portion A 417 d. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring FC is dropped from the intermediate connector A 416 f.

The substrate fixing plate A417 has a shallow bottom plate portion A417 at a position corresponding to the large diameter hole A416c.
A plurality of insertion columnar parts A 417 f protruding in a columnar shape from the a 2 to the front side, and a shallow bottom plate part A 417
a2 and a plurality of through holes A417g formed through the boundary between the shallow bottom plate portion A417a2 and the deep bottom plate portion A417a1 and the side wall A417a3 extending from the outer shape of the main portion A417a to the front side Protruding toward the inside of the main body A417a along the front side end of a plurality of notches A417h formed with a width capable of receiving the mounting plate A415d and the side wall A417a3 obliquely formed on the right side in front view Several projecting pieces A417i
And.

The large diameter base portion is formed by projecting the tip of the side wall A417a3 with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the large diameter hole A416c of the electric decoration substrate A416c and exceeding the thickness of the electric decoration substrate A416. And a small diameter end portion protruding from the end of the large diameter base with a diameter slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the small diameter hole A 415 c of the diffusion plate A 415.

Thereby, the alignment of the electric decoration substrate A 416 and the surface support of the diffusion plate A 415 can be performed by the large diameter base, and the alignment of the diffusion plate A 415 can be performed by the small diameter tip. That is, the diffusion plate A4
15 is aligned at the small diameter end, and is surface-supported by the side wall A417a3 and the end of the large diameter base of the insertion column A417f. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the posture of the diffusion plate A 415, even though the embodiment is not directly fastening and fixing.

The through hole A 417 g forms a passage of air and has a function of suppressing the heat generation of the electric decoration substrate A 416. In this embodiment, the diffusion plate A 415 is disposed in a mode of closing the front side of the light emitting means A 416 a of the electric decoration substrate A 416, and it is difficult to form an air passage on the front side. Form. Thereby, the heat generation of the electric decoration substrate A 416 can be suppressed without reducing the rendering effect by the light emitting means A 416 a.

The notch A 417 h receives the projecting plate A 415 d of the diffusion plate A 415, and the side wall A 41
Engage in the direction along 7a3. As a result, even if the small diameter end of the insertion columnar part A417f is broken due to age-related deterioration or the small diameter end falls off due to manufacturing failure, the diffusion plate A4
It is possible to prevent the positional deviation of the projecting plate portion A 415 d in the longitudinal direction (the direction along the formation direction of the side wall A 417 a 3, the upper right direction) with respect to the substrate fixing plate A 417. Therefore,
In the support mode in which the diffusion plate A 415 is not fastened and fixed as described above, the diffusion plate A 415 can be prevented from being displaced.

The projecting piece A417i is formed in a thin plate shape capable of entering the electric decoration substrate A416 between the projecting piece A417i and the shallow bottom plate-like portion A417a2. In the present embodiment, in addition to the protrusion piece A417i being formed with a protrusion length that interferes with the electric decoration substrate A416 in a front view in the assembled state, the protrusion piece A417i
Is projected downward (obliquely downward) from the side wall A417a3. Therefore, even when the electric decoration substrate A416 receives a load in a direction in which the electric decoration substrate A falls forward due to gravity or the like, the projection piece A417i is the electric decoration substrate A416. Since the tip end side (upper right side) of the tilting is locked (stopped from the front side), it is possible to prevent the electric decoration substrate A 416 from falling forward.

The projecting piece A417i is formed inside the internal space of the operation unit A300, and the electric decoration substrate A4
Regulate the displacement of 16 to the front side (suppress the flutter). Therefore, operation unit A3
The electric decoration substrate A 416 can be stably fixed while omitting the disposition of the fastening screw inside the internal space of 00. Thus, the operation unit A3 in which the player's attention is likely to be high
The electric decoration board A 416 is fixed to the board fixing plate A 41 while avoiding the reduction of the light emission effect effect (due to a shadow being caused by the fastening screw) by arranging the fastening screw inside the internal space of 00.
It can be stably fixed to 7.

When assembling the electric decoration substrate A416 to the substrate fixing plate A417, the right side edge portion of the electric decoration substrate A416 is inserted to the back in such a manner as to enter obliquely between the shallow bottom plate portion A417a2 and the projecting piece A417i, and the insertion tip It can assemble | attach smoothly by pushing in the electric decoration board | substrate A416 back from the starting point. This will be described with reference to FIGS. 331 and 332.

FIG. 331 (a) is a front view of the electric decoration substrate A 416 and the substrate fixing plate A 417, and FIG.
1 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the electric decoration substrate A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417 taken along line CCCXXXIb-CCCXXXIb in FIG. 331 (a), and FIG. 332 (a) is an electric decoration substrate A416
And FIG. 332 (b) is a front view of the substrate fixing plate A 417. FIG.
It is a sectional view of electric decoration board A416 and board fixed plate A417 in a XXIIb-CCCXXXIIb line.

In FIG. 331 (a) and FIG. 331 (b), the state in which the electric decoration board | substrate A416 was inserted with respect to the board | substrate fixed plate A417 is illustrated, and in FIG. 332 (a) and 332 (b), the electric decoration board | substrate A416. Is shown assembled to the substrate fixing plate A 417.

Electric decoration substrate A416 is chamfered part A416g chamfered from the upper and lower ends of the right side of a substrate body.
, A 416 h. The formation mode of the chamfered portions A 416 g and A 416 h corresponds to the length from the upper and lower ends of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A 417 to the notch A 417 h adjacent thereto. That is, compared to the length up to the notch A417h at the upper end of the right side of the substrate fixing plate A417, the electric decoration substrate A4 corresponds to the shorter length up to the notch A417h at the lower end
As compared with the first chamfered portion A416g at the upper end portion of 16, the second chamfered portion A416h at the lower end portion is formed shorter in distance from the right side of the electric decoration substrate A416.

In FIG. 331, compared to the state shown in FIG. 332, the electric decoration substrate A416 is a substrate fixing plate A41.
A state of being displaced upward along the slope of the left side of 7 is illustrated. The upper limit of the length of the space formed between the first chamfered portion A 416 g and the upper side surface of the substrate fixing plate A 417 is the upper limit of the degree of this displacement. In the state of FIG. The edge of the intrudes into the gap formed by the notch A 417 h.

Contrary to the state shown in FIG. 331, when the electric decoration substrate A 416 is displaced downward, the length of the space formed between the second chamfered portion A 416 h and the lower surface of the substrate fixing plate A 417 is limited. In the state of FIG. 332, the electric decorative substrate A 416 can be shifted downward, and in the state of being shifted downward, the edge of the second chamfered portion A 416 h enters the gap formed by the notch A 417 h.

Thus, forming the chamfered portions A 416 g and A 416 h on the electric decoration substrate A 416 can improve the freedom of the position of the electric decoration substrate A 416 when inserting the electric decoration substrate A 416 into the substrate fixing plate A 417. That is, the right side of the electric decoration substrate A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417
The electric decoration substrate A 416 can be inserted into the substrate fixing plate A 417 by allowing a slight vertical displacement without setting the positional relationship as shown in FIG. By this,
The electric decoration substrate A416 can be easily inserted into the substrate fixing plate A417.

In order to change the state shown in FIG. 331 to the state shown in FIG. 332, the electric decoration substrate A 416 may be tilted so as to be close to the substrate fixing plate A 417 with its right side as an axis of tilting. On this occasion,
As shown in FIG. 331, the substrate fixing plate A41 passes through the large diameter hole A416c of the electric decoration substrate A416.
As can be seen from the fact that the insertion columnar part A417f of 7 is visible, the large diameter hole 417c is guided by the tapered insertion columnar part A417f (see FIG. 329), whereby the electric decoration substrate A4 is obtained.
The positional deviation in the vertical direction of 16 is corrected, and the state of FIG. Therefore, the vertical shift of the electric decoration substrate A416 is corrected without intentionally correcting the vertical shift of the electric decoration substrate A416,
The electric decoration substrate A416 can be easily assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417.

In the notched portion A417h, in the assembled state (see FIG. 325), the projecting plate portion A415
d is inserted and the gap is filled. Therefore, it can be avoided that the electric decorative substrate A 416 enters the notch A 417 h after assembly. That is, for the notch A 417 h,
It is possible to have a function of maintaining the arrangement of the electric decoration substrate A 416 by filling the clearance after the electric decoration substrate A 416 is assembled while having the function of widening the clearance when assembling the electric decoration substrate A 416.

As shown in FIG. 332 (b), in the state where the electric decoration substrate A416 is assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417, the projecting piece A417i protrudes to the front side of the electric decoration substrate A416 and the electric decoration substrate A
The right side of the electric decoration board A 416 is the board fixing plate A 41 because it interferes with the omission of the hole 416.
7 can be prevented from falling off.

In this embodiment, the substrate fastening portion A417 is formed in the vicinity of the right side of the electric decoration substrate A416 and the substrate fixing plate A417 by preventing the electric decoration substrate A416 from falling off by such a retention structure.
c is configured not to be disposed (arrangement of fastening screws is omitted). Thereby, while being able to ensure the arrangement | positioning area of light emission means A416a in right side edge vicinity of electric decoration board | substrate A416 and the board | substrate fixed plate A417, it can avoid that a shadow arises by a fastening screw. Therefore, the effect of the light-emitting effect in the vicinity of the right sides of the electric decoration substrate A 416 and the substrate fixing plate A 417 can be improved.

At the time of maintenance work for replacing the electric decoration substrate A 416 because the electric decoration board A 416 becomes defective, the electric decoration board A 416 is against the board fixing plate A 417 as shown in FIG. 331 (b) from the state shown in FIG. Need to tilt. At this time, the electric decoration substrate A 416 is a substrate fixing plate A.
Since the circumference is enclosed by 417, it is difficult to tilt the electric decoration board A 416 directly. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the first connector A 416 e 1 is disposed on the front side, and by drawing the wiring connected to the first connector A 416 e 1 to the front, the decorative board A 416 can be easily made. It can be inclined with respect to the substrate fixing plate A417.

Furthermore, since the first connector A 416 e 1 is disposed at a position opposite to the right end (the end located opposite to the side wall A 417 a 3) that is the starting point of the posture change of the electric decoration substrate A 416,
The electric decoration substrate A efficiently by the load applied to the wiring connected to the first connector A 416 e 1
416 can be rotationally displaced. In other words, it is possible to increase the moment of the force applied to the electric decoration substrate A 416 by the load applied to the wiring. As a result, it is possible to avoid applying an excessive (excessive) load to the electric decoration board A 416 and the wiring at the time of maintenance work.

FIG. 333 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU, and FIG.
4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU. As shown in FIGS. 333 and 334, the rear unit BU is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, and is fixed to the open front side in a manner such that the front unit FU is closed. That is, the rear unit B
The second displacement member A 490 disposed on the front side of U is configured to be capable of advancing and retracting the gap between the rear unit BU and the front unit FU.

As shown in FIG. 333, only one drive motor AMT1 is provided for each first operation unit A400. Drive force of the drive motor AMT1 is the front unit F
By being transmitted to the first displaceable member A 440 of U and the second displaceable member A 490 of the rear unit BU, the movable effect of the first operation unit A 400 is executed.

In the present embodiment, only the front unit FU and the rear unit BU are referred to as units that can be disassembled as a unit, and when the movable effect is performed, the configurations of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU Each does not work alone, but works in conjunction. For example, the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the front unit FU, while the transmission gear A461 for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 is disposed in the rear unit BU.

FIG. 335 is an exploded front perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A 400, and FIG. 336 is an exploded rear perspective view of the front unit FU and the rear unit BU of the first operation unit A 400. is there. That is, FIGS. 335 and B11 show the front cover A4.
It is an exploded perspective view of the 1st operation unit A400 in the state where 10 was removed. In FIG. 335 and FIG. 336, illustration of the wiring HC and the like is omitted. First, an outline of the configuration of the first operation unit A 400 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 335 and 336, the first operation unit A400 is a front unit FU.
And a support plate portion A420 formed in a plate shape from a light transmissive and colored (black in this embodiment) resin material, and a light transmissive and colorless resin material, and a support plate portion A42.
The first displacement member A440 is disposed on the front side of 0 with a clearance for advancing and retracting.
0, the guide plate portion A 430 fastened and fixed to the 0, the guide plate portion A 430 and the support plate portion A 42
A first displacement member A440 guided in a gap between 0 and going forward / backward displacement (slide displacement, see FIGS. 339 to 344) and a mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the first displacement member A440. Slide link A4 displaced in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A440
50, a drive motor AMT1 fastened and fixed to the support plate portion A420, and its drive motor AM
A drive gear AMG1 fastened and fixed to T1 is mainly provided.

Further, the first operation unit A400, which constitutes the rear unit BU, meshes with the drive gear AMG1 and the transmission gear group A460 whose components rotate as the drive gear AMG1 rotates and the transmission thereof A support box portion A470 rotatably supported on a gear group A460 and formed in a box shape whose front side is opened from a light-transmissive colored (black in this embodiment) resin material
And a rear plate portion A 480 which is formed of a light transmitting colorless resin material and is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A 470 with a gap and is fastened and fixed to the support box portion A 470, and a front view of the support box portion A 470 Forward and backward displacement (a gap between the support plate A420 and the support box A470) formed on the side
The second displacement member A 490 (refer to FIGS. 356 to 358) and the rack and pinion mechanism for transmitting the driving force of the drive motor AMT1 to the second displacement member A 490. The back side of the support box portion A 470 And a rack and pinion A 510 fastened and fixed thereto.

As described above, the first displacing member A 440 and the second displacing member A 490 have the transmission mechanism on the back side sandwiching the plate-like portions (the support plate portion A 420 and the bottom portion of the support box portion A 470) disposed on the back side. (Slide link A450, rack and pinion A510) has a common structure in which the slide link A4 is provided in the gap between the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470.
50 and the second displacement member A 490 are disposed together.

That is, the displacement members A440 and A490 and the transmission mechanism (slide link A45) sandwich the plate-like portion.
Slide link A 450 as a transmission mechanism of the first displacement member A 440 on the front side, and a second structure in which the rack and pinion A 510) is easily arranged bulky in the front and rear direction.
As compared with the case where the displacement member A 490 is disposed in the clearance independent in the front and back, the disposition of the plate member for forming the independent clearance can be omitted, so the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 can be omitted. The front-rear width occupied by the displacement mechanism portion of the displacement member A 490 can be suppressed. As a result, the other effect mechanism units can be disposed in the front and rear gaps that can be formed by the amount of suppression of the front and rear width, so that the effect of the first operation unit A 400 can be improved.

Next, each configuration of the first operation unit A 400 will be described in detail. As described above, the first operation unit A 400 includes the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 having different displacement modes, and the configuration required for each displacement is partially different.
The configuration required to realize the displacement of the displacement member A 440 will be described, and the second displacement member A will be described later.
The remaining components required for 490 displacement will be described.

The support plate portion A420 is a portion that constitutes the framework of the first operation unit A400 and guides the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, and is a main plate configured in a rectangular plate shape to which the drive motor AMT1 is fastened and fixed. The part A421, a plurality of guide holes A422 penetratingly formed as elongated holes extending in parallel to the direction A416x, an extraction hole A423 juxtaposed similarly to one of the guide holes A422, and the direction parallel to the direction A416x A plurality of guide ridges A424 projected on the front side as protrusions and a body plate A421 that is recessed from the right side edge of the body plate A421 along the direction A416x and the recessed end goes to the front side And a detection sensor for detecting that the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the initial position. The A426, the axis of the slide link A450 supporting hole A45
A cylindrical support member A427 projecting from the main body plate portion A421 to the back side with a circular cross section capable of pivotally supporting 2 and a cylindrical shape protruding from the main body plate portion A421 at the position corresponding to the arrangement of the transmission gear group A460 A plurality of retaining cylindrical portions A 428 to be provided are mainly provided.

The guide hole A 422 is a first guide hole A 422 a for guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A 440,
A plurality of second guide holes A for guiding the displacement of the guided protrusion A455c of the slide link A450
And 422b.

The extraction hole A423 is a through hole through which the spring hooking portion A455d of the slide link A450 passes toward the front side, and the spring hooking portion A455d is projected to the front side of the main body plate portion A421 and the coil spring ASP1 Lock the end of the hook.

The other end of the coil spring ASP1 is locked to the lower left corner of the main body plate portion A421 (is hooked), and the coil spring ASP1 generates a biasing force in a shrinking direction (lower left direction).

The guide ridges A424 straddle the guide grooves A441g of the first displacement member A440 and have a function of guiding the displacement of the first displacement member A440. The recessed portion A 425 is formed to guide the deflection of the electrical wiring FC connected to the first displacement member A 440, and the details will be described later.

The detection sensor A 426 is a photocoupler-type sensor disposed so as to be capable of determining that the first displacement member A 440 is disposed at the initial position. In the present embodiment, the detection sensor A 426 does not directly detect the position of the first displacement member A 440, but the slide link A 45.
The position of 0 to-be-detected board part A455e is detected.

In the present embodiment, the sensor disposed to determine the arrangement of the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 is the detection sensor A 426, and the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 are in the extended position. The arrangement of the detection sensor for determining the arrangement is omitted.

As a result, the member cost can be reduced and the space for arranging other displacement members can be twisted, while the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 are already disposed at the overhanging position. In spite of this, it is also assumed that problems such as the drive motor AMT1 not stopping may occur. On the other hand, even in the case where the drive motor AMT1 does not stop, it is possible to prevent an overload from being generated at the location related to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, and the first displacement member A44
We are taking measures to maintain the placement of 0, but the details will be described later.

The retaining cylindrical portion A 428 has a cylindrical shape formed by an inner diameter of approximately half of the outermost diameter of the transmission gear A 461 of the transmission gear group A 460, and the projection tip has a slight gap to transmit the transmission gear It is disposed opposite to the group A 460. That is, the retaining cylindrical portion A428 is a transmission gear A461.
Plays a function of suppressing displacement in the shaft side dropping direction.

In the present embodiment, a screw for preventing removal is fixed to the end of the shaft support of the transmission gear A 461 (not shown). Therefore, as long as the screw is not loosened or dropped, the transmission gear A 461 can be restricted from being displaced in the shaft side dropping direction by the screw. As described above, in the present embodiment, the screw and the retaining cylindrical portion A 428 are configured to suppress the retaining of the transmission gear A 461 in two steps, so that it is ensured that the transmitting gear A 461 falls off the shaft Can be prevented.

The right side edge of the guide plate portion A430 is parallel to the right side edge of the main body plate portion A421, and the main body plate portion A4 is
A plate-like main body plate portion A 431 oppositely disposed in a posture along a plane parallel to the plane formed by the numeral 21;
On the back side of the main body plate portion A431, a plurality of elongated concave portions A432 recessed in a long rectangular shape along the direction A416x, and in the front surface of the main body plate portion A431 An inclined surface A433 which is formed to be inclined toward the front side and configured to be able to assist the displacement of (the rear lid portion 443 of) the first displacement member A440, and the recessed portion A of the support plate portion A420.
A guide plate portion A 434 formed in a long plate shape along the direction A 416 x with a width corresponding to the width of 425
And mainly.

The main body plate portion A431 is provided with a plurality of insertion holes A431a in the peripheral edge portion through which fastening screws are inserted. The left side edge of the main body plate portion A431 is supported by the side wall portion A421a which is raised from the left side edge of the main body plate portion A421 of the support plate portion A420 to the front side. Guide plate portion A while the insertion hole portion A 431a disposed at the edge portion is one place.
It is possible to stably fasten and fix 430 to the support plate portion A420.

In addition, when the first displacement member A440 moves back and forth, the main body plate A4 as a position passing through the front and back.
At the right edge of 31, only one insertion hole A 431 a is disposed at the substantially central position of the vertical width, so the main body plate A 43 is compared to the case where the insertion hole A 431 a is deviated.
While being able to control the gap of the interval between the right edge portion of 1 and the support plate portion A420 over the entire location of the right edge portion, the first displacement member compared to the case where a plurality of insertion holes A431a are arranged A44
The design freedom of 0 can be improved.

The long concave portion A432 is a concave portion for guiding the displacement stop projection portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 in the direction A416x which is a displacement direction, and the displaceable length of the displacement stop projection portion A441e of the first displacement member A440 It is recessed by approximately the same length as the length. That is, the first displacement member A440
Not only is the back side guided to the guide hole A 422 of the support plate portion A 420, but the long concave portion A
The front side is also guided by 432.

Guide plate portion A 434 is an electric wiring FC configured of a flat type cable on the right edge side.
A plurality of claws A 434 a disposed at intervals slightly larger than the thickness of the
An electric wire FC whose end is connected to the first displacement member A 440 is passed through the gap between the holes 434 a and temporarily fixed. By this. Electric wiring FC which is bent and displaced by the displacement of the first displacement member A440
One end of the bending displacement can be set to the position of the claw portion A 434 a, and the position of the electric wiring FC on the left side of the claw portion A 434 a can be stabilized.

Therefore, the electric wiring FC composed of a flat type cable and the guide plate portion A434
When the first displacement member A 440 is displaced to the front side of the guide plate portion A 434 and the electrical wiring FC is similarly displaced (see FIG. 346), Interference between the displacement member A 440 and the electrical wiring FC can be avoided. The first displacement member A 440 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 337 and 338.

FIG. 337 is an exploded front perspective view of the first displacement member A440, and FIG. 338 is an exploded back perspective view of the first displacement member A440. In FIG. 338, for convenience of explanation, it is illustrated in a direction different from that in FIG. 336.

As shown in FIGS. 337 and 338, the first displaceable member A440 is a plate-like portion guided along the direction A416x between the support plate portion A420 and the guide plate portion A430.
41, a colored (in this embodiment, gold-plated in this embodiment) light-impermeable resin material, which is pivotally supported by the guided plate portion A 441 and displaced in conjunction with the guided plate portion A 441 The interlocking plate portion A 442 which is a ring-shaped portion and the interlocking plate portion A 44 are fastened and fixed to the back side of the interlocking plate portion A 442
2 and a rear cover portion 443 which forms a gap between them, a diffusion plate A444 which is formed in a plate shape from a colorless light transmitting resin material and is disposed to face the back side of the interlocking plate portion A442, and the diffusion plate A444 An electric decoration substrate A 445 is mainly provided, which is disposed opposite to the rear surface side of the rear cover portion 443 and is formed to have an outer shape substantially equal to the outer shape of the diffusion plate A 444.

Here, the interlocking plate portion A 442, the back lid portion 443, the diffusion plate A 444 and the electric decoration substrate A 445 are
As they are fixed together, they will be explained earlier. That is, interlocking plate part A442
Positioning pins A 442 a protruding from the back surface of the guide plate are a plurality of insertion holes A of the diffusion plate A 444
The interlocking plate portion A 442 and the diffusion plate A 444 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted through 444 a, and the plurality of positioning pins A 444 b protruding from the back surface of the diffusion plate A 444 are the electric decoration substrate A 44
The diffusion plate A 444 and the electric decoration substrate A 445 are positioned relative to each other by being inserted through the plurality of insertion holes A 445 a.

Then, the plurality of insertion holes 4 of the rear cover portion 443 are formed in the plurality of screwed portions A 442 b of the interlocking plate portion A 442.
Displacement of the diffusion plate A 444 and the electric decoration board A 445 between the interlocking plate portion A 442 and the rear cover portion 443 by the fastening screw having passed 43 a being fastened and fixed (positioning such that the positioning pins A 442 a and A 44 b do not fall off It is held in such a manner as to allow displacement (less than the height of the pin).
Thereby, the diffusion plate A444 and the electric decoration substrate A445 can be stably fixed without directly inserting the fastening screw into the diffusion plate A444 or the electric decoration substrate A445.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of protruding ribs 443b protruding toward the front side in the vicinity of the outer periphery of the rear lid portion 443 abut the electric decoration substrate A445 and press the interlocking plate portion A442 and the diffusion plate A444. It is formed in the dimensional relationship which a load produces. By this pressing force, the diffusion plate A
444 and the electric decoration substrate A445 can be stably fixed to the interlocking plate part A442.

The electric decoration substrate A 445 includes a plurality of light emitting means A 445 b such as an LED (shown in a substantially square chip shape in FIG. 337) whose light axis is directed to the front side and the diffusion plate A 444 side.

The diffusion plate A 444 has an axis corresponding position A 444 disposed opposite to the light emitting means A 445 b on the back side.
A wave pattern is formed which is formed of projections concentrically extending around c. The outer edge of the wave pattern is formed at a position corresponding to the opening A 442 c of the interlocking plate portion A 442.

On the front side of the diffusion plate A444, a fitting portion A444d projecting to the front side with an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape of the opening A442c of the interlocking plate portion A442 is formed. In the assembled state, the fitting portion A444d is fitted into the opening A442c Be

With this configuration, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 445 b
The player can view the light passing through the opening A 442c among the lights passing through the.

The electric decoration board A 445 is provided on the back side, and includes a connector A 445 c to which an electric wiring FC composed of a flat cable is connected. The electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A 445 c is connected to the connector A 445 c from the rotation front end side of the interlocking plate portion A 442.
Thus, the bending position of the electrical wiring FC can be formed on the rotating tip end side of the interlocking plate portion A 442, and the degree of the bending can be made gentle.

The back cover 443 is a connector A 445 c or a circuit configuration device (not shown) (such as a capacitor or a resistor).
And a through hole A 443 d formed in parallel to the direction of the direction A 416 x with respect to the aeration opening 416 c.

The tip of the electrical wiring FC connected to the connector A 445 c is disposed at the ventilation opening 443 c where the connector A 445 c is located, but the electrical wiring FC is routed to the back side of the rear lid 443 through the through hole A 443 d . As a result, the electric wiring FC can be sandwiched between the small diameter rod portion 443e for partitioning the ventilation opening 443c and the through hole A443d and the electric decoration substrate A445. Therefore, electricity between the connector A445c and the small diameter rod portion 443e Wiring FC
Can be prevented from being displaced. The through hole A 443 d also has a role of forming a space for arranging the electric wire FC, and the electric wire FC is compared with the case where the through hole A 443 d is not formed with a sufficient length along the direction A 416 x. Can reduce the load applied to the

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small-diameter rod-like portion 443 e is formed so as to protrude toward the electric decoration substrate A 445 similarly to the protruding rib 443 b. Therefore, the small diameter rod portion 443e and the electric decoration substrate A445
The distance between and will be narrowed. From such a configuration, it is possible to limit the point at which a load is applied from the rear lid portion 443 to the electric decoration substrate A 445. That is, only the protruding rib 443b and the small diameter rod portion 443e are configured to apply a load from the rear lid portion 443 to the electric decoration substrate A445.

Thus, even when the electrical wiring FC is displaced due to the displacement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring FC from being detached from the connector A445c.

Next, the connection of the interlocking plate portion A 442 and the guided plate portion A 441 and the details of the guided plate portion A 441 will be described. The interlocking plate portion A 442 is a support shaft portion A 442 d protrudingly provided in an outer circular shape.
And the shaft support hole A442e, which is a circular opening coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d, and the interlocking plate portion A442 so as to be rotatable about an axis parallel to the central axis of the support shaft portion A442d. It is a resin-made member, and is provided with roller member A442f formed in outer shape circle shape.

The to-be-guided plate portion A441 includes a body plate portion A441a formed in a long plate shape from a resin material, a support shaft portion A441b projectingly provided in an outer circular shape from an upper end portion of the body plate portion A441a, Shaft support hole A441c, which has a circular shape coaxial with the central axis of the support shaft A441b and which is bored at the lower end of the main body plate A441a, and a long straight line from the front to the front of the main body plate A441a A plurality of projecting guide projections A441d, a plurality of displacement stop projections A441e projecting toward the front side in a long shape along a direction intersecting (orthogonal) with the guiding projections A441d, An inclined surface A 441f inclined toward the outside (lower left side) toward the front side at a position opposite to the electric wiring FC connected to the connector A445c of the decoration substrate A445, and a main body plate portion A4
A plurality of guide grooves A4 formed as narrow diameter grooves along the direction A416x on the back surface side of 41a
41g, a recessed portion A441h recessed from the upper right side edge of the main body plate portion A441a along the direction A416x, and a fastening portion protruding in a manner capable of fastening a fastening screw to the back side of the main body plate portion A441a And A441i.

The support shaft portion A441b and the shaft support hole A441c are used for connection with the interlocking plate portion A442. As for how to assemble, the shaft support hole A442e of the interlocking plate portion A442 is a support shaft portion A441b.
After the interlocking plate portion A 442 is disposed so as to be arranged in the form of an axis, the interlocking plate portion A along the axis thereof
By moving 442 relative to the guided plate portion A441, the support shaft portion A is formed on the shaft support hole A442e.
The support shaft portion A 442d can be inserted into the shaft support hole A 441c to form a shaft support state. In addition, the shaft support hole A 442e, the support shaft portion A 441b, the shaft support hole A
441c and the support shaft portion A 442d are configured to be rotatable so as to form a slight clearance therebetween.

In the present embodiment, after the interlocking plate portion A 442 and the guided plate portion A 441 are axially supported by the above-described method, a screw for retaining is fixed to the tip of the support shaft portion A 441 b. The diameter of the head portion of the head is larger than the inner diameter of the shaft support hole A 442e, thereby preventing the interlocking plate portion A 442 from coming off the guide plate portion A 441.

The guide ridge portion A441d is a small diameter portion for narrowing the contact area with the back surface of the guide plate portion A430. As a result, it is possible to reduce the frictional force generated with the main body plate portion A431 of the guide plate portion A430, and to displace the guided plate portion A441 smoothly.

The displacement prevention protrusion portion A441e is formed to have a width slightly shorter than the width of the elongated recess A432 of the guide plate portion A430, and enters the elongated recess A432 in the assembled state of the first operation unit A400 (see FIG. 324). It is formed with a protuberance length.

When the guided plate portion A441 is disposed at the displacement end, the formation position of the displacement stopping projecting portion A441e is designed so that the displacement stopping projecting portion A441e is disposed at the end in the longitudinal direction of the long recess A432. Be done. Therefore, even when the guided plate portion A441 does not stop normally at the displacement end, the guided plate portion A4 can be fixed by locking the displacement stopping projecting portion A441e with the long concave portion A432.
41 displacement can be regulated.

The inclined surface A441f is an electric wiring F connected to the connector A445c of the electric decoration substrate A445.
It is a plane for receiving and guiding C. Guided plate portion A by forming inclined
It is possible to suppress the load given to the electrical wiring FC with the displacement of 441. In addition, flat type (
The mode of deflection of the electric wiring FC composed of the flat cable will be described later.

The guide groove A 441g is a groove that straddles the guide ridge A 424 of the support plate portion A 420, is formed with a groove width larger than the thickness of the guide ridge A 424, and has a half cross section from both sides toward the inside of the groove near the end of each groove. It is equipped with an overhang that overhangs in a circle. The distance between the ends of the overhanging portion is the guide ridge A424.
Slightly longer than the thickness of Thereby, the guide groove A441g and the guide ridge A4 are suppressed while the direction in which the guide groove A441g extends is prevented from shifting from the longitudinal direction of the guide ridge A424.
The frictional force generated between them and 24 can be reduced.

The recessed portion A 441 h is a relief portion recessed in order to avoid interference with a portion used for fastening by a fastening screw inserted into the insertion hole portion A 431 a on the right side of the guide plate portion A 430. Thus, in the present embodiment, the right end portion of the guided plate portion A441 can be disposed on the right side of the insertion hole portion A431a.

The fastening portion A441i is inserted through the first guide hole A422a of the support plate portion A420 in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), and is connected to the displacement side long hole A453 of the slide link A450.
That is, the driving force is transmitted to the fastening portion A 441 i through the slide link A 450, whereby the first displacement member A 440 including the guided plate portion A 441 is displaced.

Referring back to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The slide link A450 is a support plate portion A42.
Long link A 451 rotatably supported on the zero axis support A 427 and its long link A 4
51, and is supported so as to be movable in parallel along the direction A416x
And 55.

The long link A451 is a member formed in a long rod shape, and has a shaft support hole A452 drilled with a diameter through which the shaft support portion A427 can be inserted, and a long side based on the shaft support hole A452. Displacement-side long hole A453 drilled in the shape of a long hole along the long direction at the end, and the displacement-side long hole A45
Transmission-side long hole A45 drilled in the shape of a long hole along the long direction at the end opposite to the side on which 3 is disposed
And 4).

The deformed slide member A455 is disposed in the recessed portion A421b of the main body plate portion A421 which is recessed on the front side relative to the base end surface of the support plate portion A420 from which the shaft support portion A427 protrudes.
21 and plate-like main body plate portion A455a sandwiched between long link A451 and outer side of main plate portion A455a so as to protrude in a circular shape and inserted into transmission side long hole A454 of long link A451 A transmission projection A455b, and a plurality of guided projections A455c projecting in a circular shape to the front side of the main body plate A455a and inserted into the second guide holes A422b of the support plate A420;
Spring hooking portion A in which the end of the coil spring ASP1 is hooked (locked) by being protruded like a tip end to the front side of the main body plate portion A455a and inserted into the extraction hole A423 of the support plate portion A420
A detection target plate portion A455e formed in a thin plate shape capable of entering the detection gap of the detection sensor A426, and a deformed transmission portion A456 to which the driving force is transmitted from the transmission gear group A460.

The transmission gear group A460 includes a pair of transmission gears A461 each having a pair of gears rotatably supported on the support box portion A470, and one gear meshed with the drive gear AMG1, and the pair of transmission gears A461. Pinned gear A 462 is engaged on the opposite side of the drive gear AMG 1
And an in-phase member A 465 that follows the pin-mounted gear A 462 in phase.

The pin-pinted gear A 462 is a transmission projection A projecting outward from the eccentric position toward the front side.
An arc wall portion A464 formed as an arc-shaped wall portion centering on the rotation axis of the pin gear A462 with the transmission projection A463 as a base end.

The arc wall portion A464 has a center angle of about 230 degrees, and has a shorter formation length on the front side than the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, as described later, the transmission protrusion A463 is also the arc wall portion A.
Similarly, although a portion 464 also transmits the load to the deformed receiving portion A 456, the load generation point differs in the front-rear direction. That is, the load generation position via the transmission protrusion A463 (the middle point or the average point when loads occur at a plurality of points) is on the front side compared to the load generation position via the arc wall A464. It becomes. Since the displacement aspect of 1st displacement member A440 can be demonstrated by the structure mentioned above, below, the displacement aspect of 1st displacement member A440 is demonstrated.

FIG. 339 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 339 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 339 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in the XIXc line.

In order to facilitate understanding, in FIG. 339 (a), the guide plate portion A 430 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and in FIG. 339 (b), the transmission gear A 461 and the electrical wiring FC are omitted, For A 462, only the transmission protrusion A 463 and the arc wall portion A 464 are illustrated, and in FIG. 339 (c), the front cover A 410 is illustrated by an imaginary line. Further, in FIG. 339 (a) and FIG. 339 (b), the illustration of the rear unit BU is omitted unless particularly described.
The same applies to FIGS. 340 to 345 below.

In FIGS. 339 (a) to 339 (c), the first displacement member A440 is the drive motor AMT1.
A state where it is disposed at the retracted position before the excitation is illustrated. In this state, the deformed slide member A455 is disposed on the outermost side (left side), and the coil spring ASP1 has the shortest length, so that the biasing force applied to the deformed slide member A455 from the coil spring ASP1 Is the weakest.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the deformed receiving portion A456 is a portion engaged with the pin gear A462, and is a main body plate portion A45 on the projecting position (upper right) side with respect to the transmitting protrusion A463.
A protrusion plate portion A 456a protruding in a plate shape from the rear surface 5a to the back surface side, and a protrusion plate portion A 456 at a distance equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission protrusion A463 at the retracted position (lower left) side of the protrusion plate portion
a facing arrangement portion A 456b disposed facing the position a, and a projecting plate portion A 456a facing the facing arrangement portion A
And 456b, and an insertion gap A456c formed between the two.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A456a is formed longer than the length in the same direction of the facing arrangement portion A456b, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmitting protrusion A463 and the arc wall portion A46
It is possible to abut against 4 in the moving direction.

The opposing placement portion A456b can be brought into contact with the transmission protrusion A463a in the moving direction (see FIG.
On the other hand, on the other hand, the arc wall portion A464 is not in contact with the moving direction (does not overlap).
That is, the facing arrangement portion A456b and the arc wall portion A464 are formed in a dimensional relationship in which the front and rear gap is generated.

The insertion gap A456c is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A463, and a relief A456d is formed on the open end side along the moving direction of the transmission protrusion A463. The relief portion A 456 d can smoothly move (with low resistance) the forward / backward displacement of the transmission protrusion A 463 with respect to the insertion gap A 456 c.

Although illustration of the transmission gear A 461 is omitted in FIG. 339 (b), the actual assembled state (
324), a pair of transmission gears A461, which are gears of the same shape, are disposed between the drive gear AMG1 and the pinned gear A462, and the driving force of the drive gear AMG1 is input to the pinned gear A4.
Transmit to 62.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the first displacement member A44 guided to the first guide hole A 422a.
0 and the deformed slide member A 455 guided to the second guide hole A 422 b, the long link A
It is linked by 451. That is, the long link A451 is rotationally displaced about the shaft support portion A427.
As a result, the first displacement member A440 and the deformed slide member A455 are displaced in opposite directions parallel to the direction A416x.

As shown in FIG. 339 (b), the to-be-detected plate portion A455e enters the detection gap of the detection sensor A 426 in the state where the first displacement member A 440 is disposed at the retracted position.

As shown in FIG. 339 (c), in the first displacement member A440, a roller member A442f is disposed between the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470 and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410. The arrangement of the A442f is the guide wall A47 of the support box A470.
1b and the guide portion A413 of the front cover A410, the guided plate portion A44
The interlocking plate portion A 442 is configured to rotate from the pivoted support hole A 442e as a starting point in accordance with the slide displacement of (1). An action diagram for describing the displacement mode of the first displacement member A 440 in time series will be described.

FIG. 340 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 340 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 340 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in the XIXc line.

In FIGS. 340 (a) to 340 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A 442f is in the same position in the front-rear direction with respect to FIG. 339 (c).
A state in which it is in contact with the bent corner of the zero guide wall A 471 b is illustrated.

By the time of displacement from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 340, the pinned gear A 462 is rotated by the first angle d1 from the initial angle d0. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a to slide the deformed slide member A455, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall A464 can be placed so as to overlap in the front and rear with respect to the facing portion A456b. (See FIG. 340 (b)).

In the present embodiment, although the straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pin gear A 462 and the center of the transmission projection A 463 is parallel to the direction A 416 x at the initial angle d 0, the invention is not limited thereto. .

For example, a straight line connecting the rotation axis of the pin gear A 462 and the center of the transmission protrusion A 463 is inclined by 10 degrees with respect to the direction A 416 x at the initial angle d 0 (10 degrees in the reverse direction of the pin gear A 462 It may be formed as an inclined straight line. In this case, since the section equivalent to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be configured as a section that does not apply a load in the traveling direction to the protruding plate portion A456a, excessive drive resistance is generated immediately after the start of rotation. It can be avoided.

That is, a section equivalent to 10 degrees from the initial angle d0 can be used as a run-in section, and the projecting plate portion A456a can be vigorously pushed after rotating from the initial angle d0 by 10 degrees. It can control. When driving in the direction returning to the initial angle d0, a section for 10 degrees can be used as a deceleration section.

FIG. 341 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 341 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 341 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX of FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in the XIXc line.

In FIGS. 341 (a) to 341 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A442f is in contact with the middle portion of the guide wall portion A471b of the support box portion A470.

By the time of displacement from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 341, the pin gear A 462 is rotated from the initial angle d 0 by a second angle d 2. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a to slide the deformed slide member A455, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall A464 can be placed so as to overlap in the front and rear with respect to the facing portion A456b. (See FIG. 341 (b)).

FIG. 342 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 342 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 342 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in the XIXc line.

In FIG. 342 (a) to FIG. 342 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and a state in which the lengthwise direction of the long link A451 is substantially orthogonal to the direction A416x is illustrated.

By the time of displacement from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 342, the pinned gear A 462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by a third angle d3. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a to slide the deformed slide member A455, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall A464 can be placed so as to overlap in the front and rear with respect to the facing portion A456b. (See FIG. 342 (b)).

In the present embodiment, in the state where the first displacement member A440 starts sliding movement along a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction (see FIG. 342), the longitudinal direction of the long link A451 and the displacement direction of the irregular slide member A455 Since (the direction parallel to the direction A416x) is configured to be substantially orthogonal, it is possible to smoothly execute the slide displacement in one direction (the same plane) of the first displacement member A440.

That is, the direction of the load applied from the displacement-side elongated hole A453 to the fastening portion A441i is on one side (lower side in the present embodiment) based on the displacement direction of the deformed slide member A455 (direction parallel to the direction A416x). It can be limited. Thereby, during the slide displacement of the first displacement member A440, the first displacement member A440 is compared with the case where the load applied to the first displacement member A440 is reversed in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440. The rattling of the slide displacement of can be suppressed.

FIG. 343 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 343 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 343 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in the XIXc line.

In FIG. 343 (a) to FIG. 343 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the roller member A 442f moves from the state of FIG. 342 (c) to the extended position of the first displacement member A 440 (FIG.
44 (c)) is disposed at a substantially intermediate position of the displacement until reaching the state of 44 (c)).

By the time of displacement from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 343, the pinned gear A 462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the fourth angle d4. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a to slide the deformed slide member A455, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall A464 can be placed so as to overlap in the front and rear with respect to the facing portion A456b. (See FIG. 343 (b)).

FIG. 344 (a) is a front view of the front unit FU, FIG. 344 (b) is a rear view of the front unit FU, and FIG. 344 (c) is CCCXXXIXc-CCCXX in FIG.
It is a fragmentary sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in the XIXc line.

In FIG. 344 (a) to FIG. 344 (c), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the state (also referred to as the overhang state) in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhang position is illustrated.

By the time of displacement from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 344, the pinned gear A 462 is rotated from the initial angle d 0 by the fifth angle d 5. With this rotation, the transmission protrusion A463 pushes the protrusion plate portion A456a to slide the deformed slide member A455, and the slide displacement is transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451. Ru. As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A464 and the facing portion A456b, the arc wall A464 can be placed so as to overlap in the front and rear with respect to the facing portion A456b. (See FIG. 344 (b)).

When the pinned gear A 462 is further rotated from the state shown in FIG. 344, the transmission protrusion A 463 starts to be displaced in the opposite direction with respect to the direction A 416 x. Here, since the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a are formed in such a dimensional relationship that they abut in the direction A416x, the transmission projection A
Even after 463 separates from the protruding plate portion A456a, the arc wall portion A464 is a protruding plate portion A.
The displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A 455 is restricted while in contact with the 456 a.

The contact point between the arc wall A464 and the projecting plate A456a is disposed in a straight line parallel to the direction A416x, passing through the rotation axis of the pin gear A462. Therefore, since the load applied from the protruding plate portion A456a to the arc wall portion A464 is configured to pass through the rotation axis of the pin gear A462, the load from the protruding plate portion A456 a rotates the pin gear A462. Can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arc wall portion A464 is formed to be curved, the contact area between the arc wall portion A464 and the projecting plate portion A456a can be suppressed (theoretically, it can be a line contact, so the contact area Is 0). Therefore, when the pinned gear A462 further rotates from the state shown in FIG. 344, it is possible to reduce the frictional force generated between the arc wall A464 and the projecting plate A456a (theoretically, 0) Therefore, it is possible to avoid that an additional driving force for restricting the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A 455 is required. That is, the displacement of the odd-shaped slide member A 455 can be regulated only by the driving force required to rotate the pinned gear A 462.

In addition, actually, the contact area increases with age if the deformation due to wear of the resin material constituting the arc wall A464 and the protruding plate A456a is taken into consideration, and the arc wall A464 and the protruding plate A456
It is believed that the frictional force generated between a and b increases. On the other hand, a low-friction seal may be attached to the arc wall A464 and the projecting plate A456a, or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area which needs to be dealt with by the low friction seal and the lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of measures can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 344 (b), the outer surface of the transmission protrusion A463 and the outer surface of the arc wall portion A464 are formed in the same circular shape coaxial with the rotation axis of the pin gear A462. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the timing of transition from the contact state with the projection A 463 to the contact state with the arc wall portion A 464.

FIG. 345 is a rear view of the front unit FU. In FIG. 345, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position, and the state in which the transmission protrusion A463 abuts on the deformed receiving portion A456 is illustrated.

By the time of displacement from the state of FIG. 339 to the state of FIG. 345, the pinned gear A 462 is rotated from the initial angle d0 by the sixth angle d6 (360 degrees or more) (see FIG. 360). Figure 344
After that, the transmission projection A463 is displaced without contact with other members without pushing the projection plate portion A456a. Further, as shown in FIG. 345, the projecting plate portion A456a is an arc wall portion A.
The displacement is restricted by coming into contact with the 464 and maintained in the state of FIG. 344 (b) (displacement in the return direction is restricted). That is, the contact between the transmission projection A463 and the deformed transmission portion A456 occurs in a state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhanging position.

As shown in FIG. 345, the contact position between the transmission protrusion A463 and the deformed transmission portion A456 is a position on the overhanging position side of the first displacement member A440 with respect to the insertion gap A456c. That is, the portion where the load is applied to the deformed receiving portion A 456 due to the displacement of the first displacement member A 440 (insertion gap A 456 c) and the portion where the load is applied to the deformed received portion A 456 in FIG. As a result, the pin gear A462 unintentionally overrotates, and the transmission projection A4
Even in the case where an overload occurs in the D.63 and the irregular-shaped receiving portion A456, it is possible to prevent the change in the shape of the insertion gap A456c. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the displacement of the deformed slide member A 455 is affected after an overload occurs.

In the state of FIG. 345, the direction of the load applied from the transmission protrusion A463 to the deformed slide member A455 is the direction toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A440 (upper right direction).
Since the deformed slide member A 455 is disposed at the end of the movement range in this direction, displacement of the deformed slide member A 455 by the load applied from the transmission projection A 463 is avoided.

Thus, the transmission projection A4 is prevented while displacing the odd-shaped slide member A455.
The load given by the reference numeral 63 can be relieved by the elastic deformation (deflection or extension and contraction) of the facing portion A456b.

As shown in FIG. 345, the portion where the transmission protrusion A463 abuts is a side wall on the side of the detection plate portion A455e of the facing arrangement portion A456b, and the transmission protrusion A463 abuts by contact.
It gives a load to 5e. In the present embodiment, when an overload occurs in the deformed receiving portion A 456 due to the excessive rotation of the pin gear A 462, the detected plate portion A 455 e is preferentially broken. That is, compared to the transmission protrusion A463, the detection plate portion A455e is configured to be more fragile.

Thus, it is possible to avoid destruction of the structure related to the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 in the structure of the deformed receiving portion A456 due to the load caused by the excessive rotation of the pinned gear A462. Therefore, the durability of the odd-shaped slide member A 455 can be improved.

When the detection plate portion A455e is broken, the detection plate portion A455e is not detected by the detection sensor A 426 even when the first displacement member A440 returns to the retracted position.
Based on the detection failure of 455e, the possibility of over rotation of the pinned gear A 462 can be assumed, and timely maintenance can be performed.

In addition, the design aspect of to-be-detected board part A455e is not limited at all, A various aspect is illustrated. For example, the transmission protrusion A463 abuts on the deformed receiving portion A456 every series of displacement operations of the first displacement member A440, and controls the drive motor AMT1 to excite until a slight load is applied, and fatigue failure is caused by long-term use That are likely to occur (for example, transmission projection A463)
The detection target plate portion A 455 e may be designed to be broken by the accumulation of the load of the number of times of contact similar to the number of times of the operation of operation. In this case, in addition to being able to predict the possibility of over rotation of the pinned gear A 462, since it is possible to indicate the replacement time of the transmission projection A 463, it is possible to execute timely maintenance.

FIG. 346 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A400 taken along line CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa in FIG. 339 (a), and FIG. 346 (b) is a CCC in FIG. 344 (a)
It is a sectional view of the 1st operation unit A400 in a XLVIb-CCCXLVlb line. In FIG. 346 (a), the state of the first displacement member A440 in the retracted position (also referred to as the retracted state) is illustrated, and in FIG. 346 (b), the state of the first displacement member A440 in the overhanging position (also in the overhanging state). Is referred to).

As shown in FIGS. 346 (a) and 346 (b), the connector A of the first displacement member A440 is used.
An electric wire FC formed as a flat cable is connected to 445 c.
The electrical wiring FC is loosely arranged in the space between the guided plate portion A 441 and the rear lid portion 443.

As shown in FIG. 346 (a), the inclined surface A441f of the to-be-guided plate portion A441 is an electric wiring FC.
And so as not to abut. That is, the upper edge of the inclined surface A441f is pulled away from the first displacement member A440 at a position slightly behind the end of the inclined surface A433 of the guide plate portion A430 (the end facing the first displacement member A440). And the inclined surface A4.
It is possible to secure an interval between the wiring 41 f and the electrical wiring FC.

The electric wiring FC is retracted from the displacement trajectory of the second displacement member A 490 in the overhanging state of the first displacement member A 440, and is disposed in the displacement trajectory of the second displacement member A 490 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A 440. Ru. As a result, the space VE described later can be used both as a space into which the electrical wiring FC enters and a space into which the second displacement member A 490 enters, so that the space necessary for the arrangement can be reduced.

The electrical wiring FC is disposed in a space VE formed on the back side of the first displacement member A440 in the retracted state of the first displacement member A440. Thereby, the first displacement member A440 functions as a shielding means that shields the view to the electric wiring FC, and the electric wiring FC is viewed from the front, rear, left, and right.
Can be prevented from being viewed. The space VE will be described.

In the space VE, the surface on the side which allows the player to visually recognize the first displacement member A440 in the retracted state
It is a space at the back behind which is formed along with the inclination posture which turned to the 3rd symbol display device 81 side in the field where opening A442c by the side of interlocking plate part A442 is formed. Space V like this
E is easy because the first displacement member A440 is formed in a plate shape, and the first displacement member A440 is configured in an inclined posture that is easy to show to the player in the retracted state where the posture is made wide in the front-rear direction Is formed.

On the other hand, since this space VE is also a space into which a second displacement member A 490 described later enters due to displacement, it is preferable to be able to maintain a wide view in front view in consideration of the visibility of the second displacement member A 490. Since the field of view in the front view spreads at an angle around the player's eyes, it is preferable that the outline of the space VE be formed to be inclined in a direction away from the third symbol display device 81 toward the back side. In the embodiment, for ease of manufacture, space VE
The outer shell (the boundary surface on the side far from the third symbol display device 81) is formed of a non-inclined surface in the front-rear direction.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the space VE generated for improving the visibility of the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 is effectively used as an area for slackening the wiring. As a result, the slack portion of the electrical wiring FC is moved to the third position relative to the first displacement member A440 at the extended position.
It is not necessary to secure the area required for loosening the wiring when arranged on the opposite side of the symbol display device 81 (in other words, the area between the outer wall A312 of the back case A310 and the first displacement member A440) It can be done.

Therefore, the electric wiring FC is inward of the back case A310 as compared to the case where the slack portion of the electric wiring FC is disposed on the opposite side of the third symbol display device 81 with respect to the first displacement member A440 at the overhanging position. While being able to be accommodated, the displacement end of the first displacement member A440 can be brought close to the outer wall portion A312 of the back case A310.

As shown in FIG. 346, in the first displacement member A440, the front of the interlocking plate portion A442 is disposed on the front limit line FL at the overhanging position (see FIG. 346 (b)), and the first displacement member A440 is in the retracted position (FIG. 346 (a).
In the displacement process up to), at least a part (mainly, the overhanging position side) of the interlocking plate portion A 442 projects to the front side beyond the front limit line FL. This overhang is the first displacement member A44.
In the process of 0 being displaced from the retracted position, the first displacement member A 440 is in the retracted position (FIG.
c) since the change of the attitude of the first displacement member A 440 is completed (see FIG. 342 (c)) from the state of (c) reference), particularly on the retracted position side (left side of FIG. 346) of the first displacement member A 440 The first displacement member A 440 can project to the front side beyond the front limit line FL.

Therefore, since it is necessary to form a space on the front side of the front limit line FL to avoid a collision with the first displacement member A440, the arrangement of the electric decoration substrate A416 is additionally separated from the first displacement member A440 (front side In the present embodiment, the electric decoration board A 416 is
The first displacement member A4 is not formed on the retracted position side (the left side in FIG. 346) of the displacement member A440.
40 forms a space for overhang. In addition, only the diffusion plate A 415 is formed to project toward the retracted position of the first displacement member A 440 so that the area where the light emitted from the light emitting means A 416 a disposed on the electric decoration substrate A 416 is visible is the electric decoration substrate It is avoided to be limited to the formation range of A416.

As described above, the formation range of the electric decoration substrate A 416 is limited, and the diffusion plate A 415 is formed to protrude from the outer edge of the electric decoration substrate A 416, thereby forming the electric decoration substrate A 416 and the first displacement member A 44.
A range in which the light-emitting effect by the electric decoration substrate A 416 can be visually recognized can be sufficiently secured while narrowing the distance between the front and rear of 0.

From FIG. 347 to FIG. 352, a change in the appearance of the first operation unit A400 that occurs with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 will be described from the viewpoint of light emission effect. This change in appearance is a change resulting from the configuration in which the first displacement member A440 is partially visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410 in the state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the overhanging position (position after excitation). is there.

FIGS. 347 (a), 347 (b) and 348 are front views of the first operation unit A400. In FIG. 347 (a), the retracted state of the first displacement member A 440 is illustrated.
In b), the state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at an intermediate position of the displacement section (the position illustrated in FIG. 342) is illustrated, and in FIG. 348, the overhanging state of the first displacement member A440 is illustrated . 347 (b) and 348, the front cover A41 of the first displacement member A440.
The shape of the part hidden by 0 is illustrated by a hidden line.

A diffusion plate A 415 for diffusing light emitted from the light emitting means A 416 a disposed on the electric decoration substrate A 416 is disposed on the back side of the front cover A 410, and the diffusion plate A 415 is
It divides into 1st area | region AC1 and 2nd area | region AC2 which were mentioned above (refer FIG. 330).

The first displacement means 440 is disposed at the back side of the diffusion plate A 415 at least at the overhang position, and the light emitted from the light emission means A 445 b (see FIG. 337) and passing through the opening A 442 c travels toward the diffusion plate A 415. Here, although the opening A 442 c of the first displacement means 440 is displaced to a position overlapping the first area AC 1 in a front view, the electric decoration substrate A 41 is disposed in the first area AC 1
6 is disposed, the light having passed through the opening A 442c is shielded by the electric decoration substrate A 416.

Therefore, light having passed through the aperture A 442c can reach the diffusion plate A 415 in the second area AC2. In other words, in the second area AC 2, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 416 a (see FIG. 329) disposed on the electric decoration substrate A 416 and diffused to the diffusion plate A 415 and the light emitting means A 445 b of the first displacement means 440 It can be viewed in a mixed state with the light emitted from (see FIG. 337).

If it demonstrates in detail, the aspect of 2nd area | region AC2 lights the light emission means A416a, and the light emission means A
A mode in which 445b is turned off, a mode in which light emitting means A416a is turned off and a light emitting means A445b is turned on, a mode in which both light emitting means A416a and light emitting means A445b are turned on, and a mode in which both light emitting means A416a and light emitting means A445b are turned off It is configured to be switchable in at least four modes.

In the present embodiment, the aspect of the second area AC2 is visible through the through hole A412 of the front cover A410, and the front cover A410 is a front cover A as the through hole A412.
A plurality of long holes A 412 a are formed at three locations in a straight line along the edge on the third symbol display device 81 side of the 410.

As shown in FIG. 348, among the plurality of elongated holes A412a, the central elongated hole A412a is disposed opposite to the opening A442c of the first displacement means 440, and the elongated holes A412a on both sides thereof are opened A442
It is arranged outside c (not arranged opposite). Thus, the light emitting means A is more visible when viewed through the central long hole A 412 a than when viewed through the long holes A 412 a on both sides.
The visibility of the light emitted from 445 b can be increased.

For example, in the state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position, the light emitting means A44
The light irradiated from 5b can be configured to be visible through the central long hole A 412a, but to be invisible through the long holes A 412a on both sides. Thus, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 416 a and the light emitting means A 445 b is visually recognized in a mixed state through the central long hole A 412 a, and the light emitting means A 416 through the long holes A 412 a on both sides.
The light emitted from a can be visually recognized (the light emitted from the light emitting means A 445 b is made difficult to visually recognize).

Here, the aspect (emission color, brightness, etc.) of the front cover A410 is the first displacement member A440.
While the light emission means A 445 b is turned off, it depends on the light emission mode of the light emission means A 416 a (see FIG. 329). Therefore, even in the state where the first displacement member A440 is disposed at the extended position (see FIG. 348), if the light emitting means A445b is turned off, the influence of the light emitting means 416b on the light emission effect can be reduced. That is, it is possible to displace the first displacement member A 440 to the overhanging position without causing a change in aspect of the front cover A 410 in a front view.

On the other hand, when the light emitting means A 445 b is turned on in the state of being disposed at the overhanging position 440, the long holes A 412 a are formed at a position close to the third symbol display device 81 in common to each first operation unit A 400. Since the light emission mode changes, the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third symbol display device 81 side.

In addition, the effect of the change of the aspect visually recognized through through-hole A412 is not limited to this. For example, in a state where the first displacement member A440 of the first operation unit A400 disposed in one set of five is disposed at the overhang position, first, the light emitting means A445b of the first displacement member A440 disposed at the lower left is lit. The light emitting means A 445 b is turned off next, the light emitting means A 445 b of the first displacement member A 440 adjacent in the clockwise direction in front view is turned on and the light off in the next time. Light emitting means A4 of displacement member A440
The light emitting means A 445 b may be made to emit light in a mode in which the light emitting means A 445 b is turned on sequentially clockwise as viewed from the side 45 b.

In this case, by keeping the light emitting means 416b on, an effect of sequentially changing only the aspect of the light viewed through the long hole A 412a clockwise in a front view while maintaining the brightness of the front cover A 410 itself It can be done.

Here, the light emission modes of the other first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D will be described. The first operation unit A400A rotates clockwise 2 from the lower left of the front view
The first operation unit A400B is the third unit clockwise from the lower left in the front view, and the first operation unit A400C is the fourth unit clockwise from the lower left in the front view The first operation unit A400D is the fifth unit clockwise from the lower left in front view. The main difference between the first operation units A400A, A400B, A400C, and A400D from the first operation unit A400 is the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440 and the shape of the opening A442c. Therefore, the first operation units A400A, A400B, A40
The openings corresponding to the openings A 442 c of 0 C and A 400 D are referred to as the openings WA, WB, WC, and
The other components are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first operation unit A 400 for convenience.

349 (a) and 349 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400A.
In FIG. 349 (a), a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position illustrated in FIG. 342) is illustrated, and in FIG. 349 (b), the first displacement member A4
A state where 40 is disposed at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 349 (a) and 349 (b), in the first operation unit A400A,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WA is configured to overlap the long holes A 412a at both ends in a front view. Furthermore, since the width length of the opening WA changes along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A 440 (the retraction position side is longer), the opening WA and the two ends of the opening WA become closer as the first displacement member A 440 approaches the overhanging position. The overlapping area with the long hole A 412a can be increased. Thereby, the arrangement of the first displacement member A 440 and the appearance of light visually recognized through the long hole A 412 a can be changed in conjunction with each other.

FIGS. 350 (a) and 350 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400B.
Note that FIG. 350 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 350 (b) shows the first displacement member. A4
A state where 40 is disposed at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 350 (a) and 350 (b), in the first operation unit A400B,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the width WB of the opening WB is along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, in addition to the configuration that the openings WB may overlap the long holes A412a at both ends in front view. Are configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction. By this,
A central long hole A41 while the first displacement member A440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position
The area in which 2a and the opening WB overlap each other is reduced at one end with the displacement of the first displacement member A440 with the state shown in FIG. 350 (a) as a maximum, and increased again in the state shown in FIG. 350 (b) can do. Thereby, while the first displacement member A 440 is displaced in one direction, it is possible to configure the change in the appearance of light visually recognized through the central long hole A 412 a in two directions (enlargement direction and reduction direction).

FIG. 351 (a) and FIG. 351 (b) are front views of 1st operation | movement unit A400C.
In FIG. 351 (a), a state in which the first displacement member A 440 is disposed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342) is illustrated. In FIG. 351 (b), the first displacement member A4
A state where 40 is disposed at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 351 (a) and 351 (b), in the first operation unit A400C,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the width W of the opening WC extends along the displacement direction of the first displacement member A440, in addition to the configuration in which the opening WC overlaps with the long holes A412a at both ends in front view. Are configured to change so as to repeat expansion and contraction. That is, the opening W
C is widened in a tapered shape in the direction intersecting the displacement direction of the first displacement member A 440 near the upper end.

Thereby, the area in which the left and right long holes A 412 a and the opening WC overlap with each other while the first displacement member A 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position is reduced by one end with the displacement of the first displacement member A 440 and increased again. It can be configured as follows. Thereby, the first displacement member A4
The change in the appearance of light viewed through the long holes A 412a at both ends can be configured in two directions (the enlargement direction and the reduction direction) while the 40 is displaced in one direction.

FIG. 352 (a) and FIG. 352 (b) are front views of the first operation unit A400D.
Incidentally, FIG. 352 (a) shows a state in which the first displacement member A440 is disposed at an intermediate position (a position similar to the position shown in FIG. 342), and FIG. 352 (b) shows the first displacement member. A4
A state where 40 is disposed at the overhanging position is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 352 (a) and 352 (b), in the first operation unit A400D,
Unlike the first operation unit A400, the opening WD is branched in a front view. That is, the opening WD is configured to branch in a manner of spreading toward the retracted position side of the first displacement member A 440 near the lower end portion.

Accordingly, it is possible to divide the range in which the central long hole A 412 a and the opening WD overlap while the first displacement member A 440 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position. That is, the aspect of light visually recognized through the central long hole A 412 a is divided into a plurality of ranges of the central long hole A 412 a from the aspect (see FIG. 352A) in which the entire central long hole A 412 a emits light uniformly. It can be changed to a mode (see FIG. 352 (b)) to emit light.

In the first operation unit A400D, the case where the edge of the opening WD divides the central long hole A 412a has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the whole of the three long holes A 412 a may be divided so as to allow light to be viewed. That is, when the three long holes A 412 a and the openings WD overlap and it is possible to view uniform light through the three long holes A 412 a, and the opening WD is the middle long hole A 412 of the three long holes A 412 a.
By overlapping only with the long holes A 412 a at both ends without overlapping with a, it is possible to switch between cases where the visible range of light is divided into the middle long hole A 412 a and limited to both long holes A 412 a It is good.

Referring back to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The support box part A470 is formed in a box shape with the front and upper right sides open, and an axial hole which is bored in the main box part A471 and through which the rotation shaft of the pin gear A462 of the transmission gear group A460 passes. A 472 and the second displacement member A4
A bearing hole A 473 drilled so as to be able to support 90 and a notch A 474 having a notch along the arc centered on the bearing A 473, and a pillar in the vicinity of the notch A 474 And a slide rack A 511 of the rack and pinion A 510 so as to be slidably movable, and a fastening portion A 475 having a tip formed so that a fastening screw can be screwed into the through hole A 482 of the rear plate portion A 480. Rack support A 476 and its rack support A 4
And a pinion support A477 for supporting a pinion A 517 engaged with a slide rack A 511 supported by 76.

The main body box portion A471 has a projecting wall portion A471a which is provided in a wall shape so as to protrude from the back bottom edge portion to the back surface side,
The first operation unit A 400 is in the form of a wall projecting from the front upper edge toward the front side, as shown in FIG.
4) and the projecting wall A471b on the opposite side of the shaft hole A472 (see FIG. 335) with the guide wall A471b disposed opposite to the roller member A442f and the notch A474 interposed therebetween.
and a wiring guide portion A <b> 471 c disposed opposite to a.

The detailed shape of the guide wall A471b will be described later, but the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is guided in such a manner that the roller member A442f abuts on the edge of the guide wall A471b and slides or rolls (FIG. 339) Through 344).

The wiring guide portion A 471 c is designed to be able to properly correct the arrangement of the wiring HC whose shape will be described later, but the details will be described later.

The second displacement member A 490 and the reinforcing arm A 518 of the rack and pinion A 510 are connected through the bearing hole A 473 and the notch A 474. In particular, the notch A 474 is formed wide as an area through which the wire connected to the second displacement member A 490 passes, and the details will be described later.

The rack support portion A 476 is a pair of columnar portions protruding toward the back side of the main body box portion A 471 and includes a support columnar portion A 476 a inserted through the support holes A 512 of the rack and pinion A 510 and a slide rack A 511 of the rack and pinion A 510 A step-like portion A476b which extends in the sliding movement direction (direction parallel to the direction A416x) and which protrudes in a step-like shape projecting toward the rear side more than the surface on the side where the support columnar portion A476a is disposed; Prepare.

The pinion support A477 has a pinion shaft A477a on which the pinion A517 of the rack and pinion A510 is rotatably supported, and a wall shape (plate from the bottom of the main body box A471 to the back side along an arc centered on the pinion shaft A477a And an arc wall portion A477b extending in the

Through the shaft hole A 472, the pinned gear A 462 of the transmission gear group A 460 and the same phase member A
465 is linked. Here, with reference to FIG. 353, the connection aspect of the pinned gear A 462 and the same phase member A 465 will be described.

FIG. 353 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465, and FIG. 353 (b) is a front perspective view of the pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465 on the left side. It is a rear perspective view of pinned gear A462 and the same phase member A465. In FIG. 353 (a), the pin gear A 462 and the same phase member A 465 are illustrated in a posture in which the side connected with each other is the front.

As shown in FIG. 353 (a), the pin gear A 462 is provided with a plurality of phasing circumferential projections A projecting toward the same phase member A 465 from the surface on the side opposite to the same phase member A 465.
462a is provided.

The same phase member A 465 has a phase matching diameter protrusion A 465 a projecting toward the pin gear G 462 from the surface on the side opposite to the pin gear G 462 and a circular shape from the eccentric position to the back surface Arc-shaped wall portion A 467 formed as an arc-shaped wall portion centering on the rotation axis of the phase member A 465 with the transmission projection A 466 protruding and the transmission projection A 466 as a base end
And As compared with the transmission projection A 466, the arc wall portion A 467 has a shorter formation length on the back side.

The phase matching circumferential protrusion A 462 a and the phase matching diameter protrusion A 465 a will be described. A plurality of arc-shaped wall portions are formed by cutting the phase matching peripheral protrusion A 462a along the axial direction in a circular wall portion centered on the rotation axis of the pin gear A462.

In addition, the phase matching diameter protrusion A 465 a has a protrusion which is provided so as to protrude radially outward from a cylindrical projecting portion having an outer diameter slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A 462 a, and the protrusion is in phase It is formed so as to coincide with the angle (phase) at which the cut is made in the fitting peripheral protrusion A 462a. By bringing the protrusion into the notch of the phase matching peripheral protrusion A 462a, the pinned gear A 462 and the same phase member A 465 can be coupled in a state where the phase of the same phase member A 465 with respect to the pinned gear A 462 is matched. By inserting the fastening gear along the central axis of the pinned gear A462 and screwing it into the tip of the phase matching diameter projection A465a, the pinned gear A4
62 and the same phase member A 465 can be fixed.

Here, in the present embodiment, the angles between the incisions of the phase matching peripheral projection A 462a are not equal (in the case of three divisions as in the present embodiment, they are not equal to each other by 120 degrees), but are uneven. Pinned gear A462 same phase member A4 only at a specific angular relationship (see FIG. 353 (b))
And 65 are connected.

That is, the angle between the incisions of the phase matching peripheral projection A 462a is 100 degrees, 120 degrees, 140
The pinned gear A 462 and the same phase member A by combining (by making uneven)
The angular relationship which can be connected with 465 can be limited to one type.

In the present embodiment, the cut of the phase matching circumferential projection A 462 a (the phase matching diameter projection A
Although the case where 465a) is formed in three places was described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be one or two, or may be four or more, and can be appropriately selected in consideration of the rigidity in the assembled state of the pin gear A 462 and the phase member A 465.

Referring back to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. The rear plate portion A 480 is a main plate portion A 481 formed in a plate shape from a colorless light transmitting resin material, and a fastening that is drilled in the main body plate portion A 481 and screwed into a fastening portion A 475 of the support box portion A 470 A plurality of positioning projections A483 are provided to protrude toward the outer peripheral side of the through hole A482 into which the screw is inserted and the arc wall A477b of the support box A470 and abut on the outer peripheral side. And a plurality of projecting plate portions A 484 projecting from the main body plate portion A 481 to the front side so as to have a plate shape along the outer shape of the movement range of the slide rack A 511 of the rack and pinion A 510.

The outer edge (the left edge in FIGS. 335 and 336) of the back plate A480 abuts on the rear side end of the projecting wall A471a of the main body box A471, and the projection in the left-right direction Only the plate portion A 484 functions.

On the other hand, the inner edge of the rear plate portion A 480 (the right edge in FIGS. 335 and 336)
In the case where the positioning projection A483 and the arc wall portion A 477
Position alignment can be performed. Thus, the space for the outer edge can be widely secured by excluding the portion for alignment from the vicinity of the outer edge while well aligning the back plate A480 with the support box A470. In the present embodiment,
The secured space is used as a disposition space of the wiring HC (see FIG. 356 (a)), but the details will be described later.

The projecting plate portion A 484 is disposed so that its projecting tip is close to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A 471 (abuts or with a slight gap such that the wiring can not pass), and the rack and pinion A
It functions to partition the movement range of the slide rack A 511 of 510 and the outer area. This can prevent the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A 490 from entering the moving range of the slide rack A 511 of the rack and pinion A 510, the details of which will be described later.

FIG. 354 is an exploded front perspective view of the second displacement member A 490, and FIG. 355 is an exploded back perspective view of the second displacement member A 490. As shown in FIGS. 354 and 355, the second displacement member A 490 is formed of a colorless light-transmissive resin material, and is a support hole A 473 of the support box portion A 470.
Is formed in the same inner shape as the external shape of the shaft support plate A491 supported by the shaft and the shaft support plate A491 and is fitted to the shaft support plate A491 so as to cover the shaft support plate A491 from the front side. A covering member A492 formed of a colorless light transmitting resin material, and a light emitting portion A493 including an LED or the like
an electric decoration board A493 which is disposed and accommodated in the pivoted support plate A491 and the covering member A492;
Equipped with

The pivoted support plate A491 has a supported projection A491a that protrudes outward in a circular shape toward the rear surface side and is inserted into the shaft support hole A473, and has a projection length shorter than the supported projection A491a. Fastening projections A491b, a plurality of insertion holes A491c in which fastening screws can be inserted and a long hole A491d drilled in a long rectangular shape along the radial direction of the supported projection A491a , Insertion hole A491
A plurality of circular support portions A 491e protruding toward the front side in a circle (arc) shape centering on c and a plurality of narrowly protruding shapes protruding toward the front side along side wall portions forming the outer periphery And a thin projection A491f.

The circular support portion A491e and the thin protrusion A491f are in the assembled state of the second displacement member A490 (
In FIG. 335 and FIG. 336), it abuts on the outer peripheral edge portion of the electric decoration substrate A 493 and supports the electric decoration substrate A 493 from the back side.

In particular, since the thin protrusion A491f is formed at a portion where the shape of the electric decoration substrate A493 to be accommodated is narrowed, ie, where the outer peripheral side wall of the pivoted supporting plate A491 is recessed inward, the electric decoration substrate A portion where the shape of A493 is constricted can be selectively supported. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the deformation of the electric decoration board A 493 at the constricted portion where the rigidity is likely to be reduced due to the shortening of the width dimension, and it is possible to avoid the electric decoration board A 493 breaking. .

The covering member A492 is inserted through the supported portion A493b of the electric decoration substrate A493, and the insertion hole A4
A plurality of fastening portions A 492 a into which fastening screws inserted into 91 c are screwed, and the fastening portions A 49
At a position where a plurality of protruding support portions A492b protruding in the radial direction on the base side of 2a and coupled to the plate-like portion of the covering member A492 and a thin projection A491f of the shaft support plate A491 are provided. A plurality of thin projections A4 projecting toward the back side in a thin projection along the side wall forming the outer periphery
And 92c.

With the above configuration, the electric decoration substrate A493 is supported at its outer peripheral edge by the thin protrusions A491f and A492c, and the circular support A491e and the protruding support A492b are provided around the fastening screw.
Supported by Thus, the support board A491 and the covering member A4 are mounted on the electric decoration board A493.
It can be fixed well to 92.

In addition, the support aspect of electric decoration board | substrate A493 is not limited at all. For example, the electric decoration substrate A 493 may be fixed by applying a load along the fastening direction, or a dimensional relationship in which no compressive load occurs (for example, the front and rear spacing of the thin protrusions A491f and A492c is the electric decoration substrate The electric decoration substrate A is formed without causing a load by being formed in the same dimensional relationship as the thickness of A493.
The arrangement of 493 may be maintained.

The electric decoration substrate A493 is disposed on the back side of the plurality of light emitting portions A493a, the plurality of supported portions A493b which are drilled or recessed so as not to interfere with the fastening portions A492a in the front-rear direction. And a substrate side connector A 493 c to which the end (connector) of the wiring is connected.

The board-side connector A493 is fixed in a posture in which the wiring extends in the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole A491d of the shaft support plate A491, and the elongated hole A491d is elongated from the inner edge portion in the short direction Partition extension A491d1 extending until the distance from the opposite inner edge in the direction intersecting the direction is shorter than the width dimension of the board-side connector A493c (or the wiring bundle to be connected), and the partition extension A491d1 A ridge portion A491d2 is formed so as to project wide from the edge on the opposite side of the board side connector A493c to the rear side with reference to the reference.

The visible area side of the third symbol display device 81 with reference to the section extending portion A491d1 (FIG. 355)
The board side connector A 493 c is disposed on the left side, and the board side connector A 49 is
A wire connected to 3c passes through the long hole A491 d. That is, the board side connector A493c
The wiring connected to the is held between and supported by the division extension portion A491d1 and the electric decoration substrate A493.

Thereby, even if the second displacement member A 490 is displaced, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the wiring between the substrate connector A 493 c and the section extension portion A 491 d 1. Therefore, the substrate side connector is displaced when the second displacement member A 490 is displaced. It is possible to reduce the possibility of wiring coming off from A493c.

The protruding portion A491 d2 is formed to have a protruding length sufficient to enter the notch A474 of the support box A470. As a result, the wiring HC whose end is connected to the board side connector A 493 c can be drawn up so as to rise toward the back side of the shaft support plate A 491 (in the protruding direction of the protruding portion A 491 d 2). As compared with the case in which the wire HC is disposed close to the back surface of the pivoted support plate A491 and routed around the back surface of the support box portion A470, the contact of the wiring HC with the notch portion A474 can be avoided. Accordingly, disconnection of the wiring can be avoided.

In addition, since the projection A491 d 2 protrudes at a right angle with respect to the back surface of the pivoted support plate A 491, the rising angle of the wiring HC can be shifted to the right side to avoid contact with the wiring HC. The width of the notch A 474 can be reduced. Thereby, the main body box part A4
Since a large area (area) on the side of the fastening portion A 475 of 71 can be secured, the main body box portion A
While being able to ensure the rigidity of 471, the arrangement | positioning freedom degree of fastening part A475 can be improved.

Referring back to FIGS. 335 and 336, description will be made. Rack and pinion A510, direction A416x
The slide rack A 511 supported so as to be slidably movable along the gear, and the gear portion of the slide rack A 511 mesh with the shaft, is pivotally supported by the pinion shaft A 477 a of the support box A 470 and synchronized with the slide movement of the slide rack A 511 A rotating pinion A 517 and a reinforcing arm A 518 meshed with the pinion A 517 and rotated in synchronization with the rotation of the pinion A 517 are provided.

The reinforcing arm A518 is connected and fixed to the second displacement member A490 described above, and thereby the second
The displacement member A 490 is non-extractably supported by the support box portion A 470. That is, the reinforcing arm A5
At the 18 rotation center position, it is fastened to the supported projection A491a of the second displacement member A490,
It is fastened with the fastening protrusion A491b at the rotation tip side of the reinforcing arm A518 (see FIG. 355). Therefore, the rotational displacement of the reinforcing arm A518 is equivalent to the rotational displacement of the second displacement member A490.

The slide rack A511 has a pair of support holes A512 formed in a long hole shape extending along the direction A416x and having a size through which the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 can be inserted, and a plate shape along the gear portion Supported plate portion A513, a projecting plate portion A514 projecting in a plate shape on the front side at a position away from the support hole A512 in the longitudinal direction of the support hole A512, and the same phase member A465 Irregular-shaped receiving portion A5 to which driving force is transmitted from member A465
And 15.

In the support hole A512, the tip narrow diameter portion of the support columnar portion A476a of the support box portion A470 is inserted, and the large diameter portion on the base end side is formed with a diameter larger than the width of the support hole A512. By arranging the large diameter portion on the front side of the support hole A512, even if the slide rack A511 is likely to be displaced to the front side, the displacement can be prevented by the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A 476a. . As described above, the slide rack A 511 has the plate-like portion opposed to the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A 471 with a gap about at least the large diameter portion of the support columnar portion A 476 a. It is configured to be slidable along the direction A 416 x in the held state.

The supported plate portion A513 is disposed opposite to the rear end of the stepped portion A476b of the support box portion A470 with a slight gap, and the protruding plate portion A514 is slightly spaced from the back bottom portion of the main body box portion A471. It is arranged facing each other. That is, even if the slide rack A 511 is likely to be displaced to the front side, the supported plate portion A 513 and the projecting plate portion A 514 can prevent the occurrence of the displacement.

In addition, various things are illustrated as a reason which slide rack A511 displaces to the front-back direction. For example, when the player gives an impact to the pachinko machine A10 (so-called "dock") or the case where fine particles are clogged in the gap and excessive resistance occurs due to excessive meshing resistance, etc. Ru.

FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b), and 358 are rear views of the rear unit BU. Note that FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 356 (b), and FIG. 357 (a).
In FIG. 357 (b) and FIG. 358, the back plate A 480 is omitted to facilitate understanding, and the plate of the slide rack A 511 is broken so that the deformed receiving portion A 515 can be visually recognized. The state is illustrated. Also, in FIG. 358, in order to facilitate understanding, the same phase member A is used.
465 and variant receiver A 515 are shown enlarged.

In FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b) and 358,
The second displacement member A 490 extends from the retracted position (see FIG. 356 (a)) (see FIG. 358)
The state of displacement is illustrated in time series.

The second displacement member A 490 is fixed to the reinforcing arm A 518. When the same phase member A 465 rotates, the transmission protrusion A 466 pushes the slide rack A 511 along with the rotation. When the slide rack A511 is pushed, a driving force is transmitted to the reinforcing arm A518 via the pinion A517. Thus, the displacement of the second displacement member A 490 is caused by the rotation of the same phase member A 465.

  The in-phase member A 465 rotates in the same phase as the pinned gear A 462 as described above. Therefore, in synchronization with the rotation of the same phase member A 465 described in FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b) and 358, the above-described in FIGS. The rotation of the pinned gear A 462 will occur, the relationship of which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 356 (b), the deformed receiving portion A 515 is a portion engaged with the same phase member A 465, and the transmitting protrusion A 466 is made enterable and can be moved alone (slide rack A
A non-transmission recess A 515 a recessed to be movable without applying a load to 511, a connection recess A 515 b which is a recess of the same depth connected to the end of the non-transmission recess A 5 5 a, and the connection recess A 515 b Is also narrow, and the non-transmission recess A5 with respect to the connection recess A515b
Insertion gap A515c which is a concave portion of the same depth connected to the opposite side of 15a, and transmission projection A4
A projecting plate portion A515d, which protrudes in a plate shape from the slide rack A511 to the front side at the retracted position (lower left) side than 66 and constitutes the left side surface of the insertion gap A515c, and the projecting plate portion A5
A facing arrangement portion A51 which is disposed opposite to the projecting plate portion A515d with an interval equal to or larger than the diameter of the transmission projection A466 on the side of the projecting position (upper right) of 15d.
And 5e.

The protruding length of the protruding plate portion A 515 d is formed longer than the length in the same direction of the facing arrangement portion A 515 e, and in the assembled state (see FIG. 324), the transmitting protrusion A 466 and the arc wall portion A 46
It is possible to abut against 7 in the moving direction.

The opposing placement portion A 515 e can contact (overlap) the transmission projection A 466 in the movement direction, but does not abut on the arc wall portion A 467 in the movement direction (does not overlap). That is, the oppositely disposed portion A 515 e and the arc wall portion A 467 are formed in a dimensional relationship in which the front and rear gap is generated.

The side surfaces of the projecting plate portion A 515 d and the oppositely disposed portion A 515 e are configured as planes orthogonal to the moving direction (direction parallel to the direction A 416 x) of the slide rack A 511.

The connection recess A 515 b has the same function as the relief A A 456 d of the deformed receiving portion A 456. That is, the connection recess A 515 b is configured to be able to receive the transmission protrusion A 466, and the side connected to the non-transmission recess A 515 a is formed along the movement direction of the transmission protrusion A 466. As a result, forward and backward displacement of the transmission projection A 466 with respect to the insertion gap A 515 c can be performed smoothly (with low resistance).

Although not shown in FIGS. 356 (a), 356 (b), 357 (a), 357 (b) and 358, the same phase member A 465 is a drive motor as in the pinned gear A 462. The driving force of the AMT 1 is rotated by being transmitted by the driving gear AMG 1 and the pair of transmission gears A 461 (see FIG. 335). Hereinafter, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and the drive gear AMG1
The displacement mode in which the second displacement member A 490 is displaced from the retracted position toward the extended position will be described in chronological order.

In FIG. 356 (a), the slide rack A511 is disposed at the retraction position side end of the movement range in a state before the drive gear AMG1 is rotated, and accordingly, the second displacement member A49 is provided.
A state where 0 is disposed at the retracted position is illustrated.

In this state, the transmission projection A 466 is moved in the moving direction (direction A 416 x)
), While the arc wall A467 is in the upper right along the moving direction (direction A416x) with respect to the projecting plate A515d at the abutting portion A467a disposed opposite to the projecting plate A515d. Abuts from (the overhanging position side). Thus, the projecting wall portion A515 is formed by the arc wall portion A467.
Since the displacement of d can be restricted, it is possible to prevent the slide rack A 511 from being unintentionally displaced by the external force applied in the non-excitation (non-drive) state of the drive motor AMT 1.

The contact point between the arc wall A 467 and the projecting plate A 515 d is arranged in a straight line parallel to the direction A 416 x, passing through the rotation axis of the same phase member A 465. Therefore, since the load applied from the protruding plate portion A 515 d to the arc wall portion A 467 is configured to pass through the rotation axis of the same phase member A 465, the same phase member A 465 is rotated by the load from the protruding plate portion A 515 d Can be prevented.

Furthermore, since the arc wall portion A 467 is formed to be curved, the contact area between the arc wall portion A 467 and the projecting plate portion A 515 d can be suppressed (theoretically, since the line contact can be made, the contact area Is 0). Therefore, when the same phase member A 465 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 356 (a), it is possible to reduce the frictional force generated between the arc wall A 467 and the projecting plate A 515 d (theoretically, 0). Therefore, it is possible to avoid that an extra driving force for restricting the displacement of the slide rack A 511 is required. That is, the same phase member A4
The displacement of the slide rack A 511 can be restricted only by the driving force required to rotate the H.65.

In addition, actually, the contact area increases with age if the deformation due to the wear of the resin material constituting the arc wall A 467 and the protruding plate A 515 d is taken into consideration, and the arc wall A 467 and the protruding plate A 515
It is considered that the frictional force generated between d and d increases. On the other hand, a low-friction seal may be attached to the arc wall A 467 and the projecting plate A 515 d or a lubricant (such as grease) may be applied to prevent this. In this embodiment, since the ideal contact area is formed small, the area which needs to be dealt with by the low friction seal and the lubricant can be reduced. Therefore, the cost of measures can be reduced.

The external force may be, for example, gravity, a load generated by vibration during an earthquake, or a force generated when the player hits or shakes the pachinko machine A10.

In FIG. 356 (b), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the state in which the transmission protrusion A466 has started to enter the connection recess A 515b is illustrated. From the state of FIG. 356 (a), FIG.
In the state b), the same phase member A 465 is moved from the initial angle d10 to the first angle d11
, But the transmission projection A 466 still moves in the moving direction
Non-contacting in the direction A416x).

On the other hand, the arc wall portion A 467 is still in contact with the projecting plate portion A 515 d at the contact portion A 467 a along the movement direction (direction A 416 x) from the upper right (the overhanging position side). Figure 35.
As shown in FIG. 6 (a) and FIG. 356 (b), since the contact portion A 467a is formed on the outer surface of the arc wall portion A 467, the contact portion A 467a is in the moving direction of the slide rack A 511 (direction A 416x). It does not displace. Therefore, even in the state of FIG. 356 (b), FIG. 356 (a).
Similar to the state shown in FIG. 5, the arrangement of the slide rack A 511 is maintained at the retracted position side end of the movement range.

As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A 467 and the facing portion A 5 5 e, the arc wall A 467 can be placed so as to overlap the back position A 5 5 e. (See FIG. 356 (b)).

In FIG. 357 (a), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 starts entering the insertion gap A515c. From the state of FIG. 356 (a), FIG. 357 (a).
By the time when the same phase member A 465 rotates to the second angle d12 from the initial angle d10, the transmission projection A 466 abuts on the projecting plate portion A 515 d.

In FIG. 357 (a), the straight line passing through the rotation center of the same phase member A 465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A 466 is parallel to the moving direction of the slide rack A 511 (the direction parallel to the direction A 416 x). That is, since the portion farthest from the rotation center of the same phase member A 465 abuts on the projecting plate portion A 515 d, when the same phase member A 465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. 357 (a) The restriction by the same phase member A 465 is released, and the slide rack A5
11 becomes displaceable to the overhanging position side (upper right side).

As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A 467 and the facing portion A 5 5 e, the arc wall A 467 can be placed so as to overlap the back position A 5 5 e. (See FIG. 357 (a)).

In FIG. 357 (b), the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the state in which the transmission protrusion A 466 has entered into the insertion gap A 515c is illustrated. From the state of FIG. 356 (a)
The same phase member A 465 is moved from the initial angle d10 to the third angle d13 until it shifts to the state of b).
Only rotate. With this rotation, the transmission projection A 466 pushes the facing arrangement portion A 515 e, thereby slidingly displaces the slide rack A 511, and the sliding displacement becomes the pinion A 517.
Through the second displacement member A 490.

In FIG. 357 (b), the straight line passing through the rotation center of the same phase member A465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A466 is orthogonal to the moving direction of the slide rack A511 (the direction parallel to the direction A416x). That is, the angle obtained by subtracting the second angle d12 from the third angle d13 is 90 degrees.

As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A 467 and the facing portion A 5 5 e, the arc wall A 467 can be placed so as to overlap the back position A 5 5 e. (See FIG. 357 (b)).

In FIG. 358, the drive motor AMT1 is excited and rotated, and the transmission protrusion A466 is opposed to the facing portion A.
A state where the slide rack A 511 is disposed at the overhanging position side end of the movement range and the second displacement member A 490 is disposed at the overhanging position is illustrated.

By the time the position of FIG. 356 (a) is displaced to the state of FIG. 358, the same phase member A 465 rotates from the initial angle d10 by the fourth angle d14 (performs one rotation or more). With this rotation, the transmission projection A466 pushes the facing arrangement portion A 515e, whereby the slide rack A5
11, and the slide displacement of the second displacement member A4 via the pinion A517.
It is transmitted to 90.

In FIG. 358, the straight line passing through the rotation center of the phase member A 465 and the center of the transmission protrusion A 466 is parallel to the movement direction of the slide rack A 511 (a direction parallel to the direction A 416 x). That is, an angle obtained by subtracting the third angle d13 from the fourth angle d14 is 90 degrees.

As described above, since there is a front and back gap between the arc wall A 467 and the facing portion A 5 5 e, the arc wall A 467 can be placed so as to overlap the back position A 5 5 e. (See Figure 358).

In FIG. 358, since the portion of the transmission projection A 466 farthest from the rotation center of the same phase member A 465 abuts on the facing arrangement portion A 515 e, the slide rack is rotated when the same phase member A 465 rotates beyond the state shown in FIG. There is a possibility that A511 may be displaced to the retracted position side (lower left side). In the present embodiment, as shown enlarged in FIG. 358, the slide rack A511
Is arranged so that rotation of the same phase member A 465 can be permitted from the arrangement of the fourth angle d14 (see FIG. 358) to the allowable angle dd1 in a state where the second position d4 is disposed at the overhanging position side end of the movement range.

That is, since the transmission projection A 466 and the projection plate portion A 515 d contact each other only after the same phase member A 465 is rotated by the allowable angle dd 1, the transmission projection A 466 and the projection protrude until the rotation of the allowable angle dd 1. Because the plate portion A 515d is not in contact and load transmission does not occur,
The arrangement of the slide rack A 511 can be maintained at the overhanging position side end of the movement range.

Therefore, in the series of displacement modes illustrated in FIGS. 356 to 358, the same phase member A46
In the control for stopping the rotation of No. 5 at the fourth angle d14, in fact, the same phase member A 465
Even when the rotation is performed beyond the angle d14, the slide rack A511 can be maintained at the overhanging position side end of the movement range if the excess of the rotation angle is up to the allowable angle dd1. Can be maintained in the overhang position.

In other words, even if the accuracy of the stop position of the same phase member A 465 is not exact (the allowable angle dd 1
Since the arrangement of the second displacement member A 490 can be maintained at the extended position even if there is an error below, the rotational speed of the same phase member A 465 can be increased and the second displacement member A 49 can be made with a simple configuration.
A highly accurate displacement of 0 can be realized (the second displacement member A 490 can be rapidly decelerated and stopped at the overhang position without decelerating and stopping the same phase member A 465 rapidly)
.

In the case where the second displacement member A 490 is driven toward the retracted position (when the driving direction is reversed) by intentionally causing the rotation angle exceeding the allowable angle dd1 from the fourth angle d14 to cause the excess. It can be used as an approach section.

Further, when the transmission projection A466 of the same phase member A465 is disposed at the fourth angle d14 position (see FIG. 358), the transmission projection A466 and the facing arrangement portion A515e are slide racks A51.
Slide rack A51 by abutting in the movement direction of 1 (direction parallel to the direction A416x)
1 can be prevented from returning to the retracted position side (bounding displacement).

As a result, the rotation of the pinion A 517 can be defined (the return rotation can be prevented) in the state of FIG. 358, so that the reinforcing arm A 518 meshed with the pinion A 517 and the reinforcing arm A 518 are fastened and fixed. Can be prevented from rotating back from the extended position (see FIG. 358).

FIG. 359 shows the rear unit B in the CCCLIX-CCCLIX line of FIG. 356 (a).
It is a sectional view of U. In FIG. 359, in order to facilitate understanding, the illustration of the positioning protrusion A483 of the rear plate portion A480 is omitted, and the shape of the main body plate portion A481 is mainly illustrated.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 359, the wiring HC connected to the second displacement member A 490 will be described. Note that in the description of the wiring HC, FIGS. 356 to 358 are referred to as appropriate. Wiring H
C is an electrical wiring composed of a plurality of cables of round cross section connected to the substrate-side connector A 493 c of the second displacement member A 490, and in a space surrounded by the support box portion A 470 and the rear plate portion A 480 It is arranged.

As shown in FIG. 359, the portion on the side to be connected to the substrate connector A493c of the wiring HC passes between the division extension portion A491d1 and the electric decoration substrate A493, and along the ridge portion A491d2, the support box portion A470 It is guided to the space enclosed by and the back plate part A480.

As described above, since the projection A491 d 2 is formed to have a projection length such that the projection A enters into the notch A 474 of the support box A 470, the wiring HC is guided away from the notch A 474. , And contact with the notch A 474 is avoided. Thus, it is possible to prevent the wire HC from rubbing against the notch A 474 and breaking.

On the other hand, the wiring HC is guided to the ridge portion A491 d2 so as to be guided to be close to the rear plate portion A480, and without measures, the wiring HC may rub against the rear plate portion A480 and be disconnected in a short period of time In the present embodiment, the intermediate portion HC of the wiring HC with the rear plate portion A 480 is present.
The friction between the rear plate portion A 480 and the rear plate portion A 480 is suppressed by suitably inserting a. This is discussed in more detail below.

In the present embodiment, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 of the support box portion A470. If it explains in full detail, wiring HC extended from the 3rd connector A416e3 of electric decoration substrate A416 (refer to FIG. 330) is wound around winding part A471a1 formed so that binding band KB can be wound around the middle position of projecting wall part A471a. The side of the second displacement member A 490 connected to the board-side connector A 493 c is bound by the binding band KB and wound around the fastening portion A 475 one turn, and the tip is connected to the board-side connector A 493 c .

The wiring HC is in a slackened state by being wound around the fastening portion A 475 (FIG. 356 (a).
Also in), it is possible to suppress the amount of displacement upward (in the direction in which the wiring HC bound by the binding band KB extends) in which the wiring HC separates from the fastening portion A 475. Thus, the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced without forming a large gap above the fastening portion A 475.

In the present embodiment, the point at which the wiring HC is wound is the fastening portion A 475, which is advantageous in terms of ease of assembly. That is, after the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A475 in the assembly process of fastening and fixing the back plate portion A480 to the support box portion A470, the fastening screw is screwed into the fastening portion A475 through the back plate portion A480. At this time, it is possible to prevent the wire HC from falling off from the fastening portion A 475 by the fastening screw in the process of screwing in before fastening and fixing are completed.

In addition, at the time of the fastening and fixing, the back side (the side where the fastening portion A 475 protrudes) of the support box portion A 470 is directed upward, and the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A 475. Can be assembled while preventing the wiring HC from hanging down in the direction of gravity at the main body box portion A471 by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion A475, so that the assembly can be completed easily. . That is, the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A 475 to facilitate the assembly of the support box portion A 470 and the rear plate portion A 480 as compared with the case where the fastening portion A 475 is designed to be forced to assemble in a downward posture. Can be

Since the winding portion A 471 a 1 is formed on the protruding end side of the protruding wall portion A 471 a, the wiring HC temporarily fixed by the binding band KB is guided (biased) to the rear plate portion A 480 side. As a result, when the wiring HC is wound around the fastening portion A 475, the wiring HC comes closest to the rear plate portion A 480 at the top of the fastening portion A 475 closest to the fastening portion A 475 (see FIG. 359).

Then, the wiring HC is extended toward the substrate-side connector A 493 c while giving a length to the wiring HC so that a tensile load is not given to the wiring HC when the second displacement member A 490 is displaced, and the wirings HC cross each other. In the position, the end of the wiring HC connected to the substrate-side connector A 493 c is wound in such a manner as to slide in between the wiring HC already arranged and the support box part A 470.

Thus, the intermediate portion HCa is the back plate portion A480 of the wiring HC on the substrate side connector A 493 c side.
It is possible to configure a state of abutting from the side (see FIG. 356 (a)), and the wire HC is in
The degree of proximity to the rear plate portion A 480 can be suppressed by 491 d 2.

The displacement mode of the wiring HC at the time of displacement of the second displacement member A 490 will be described.
The wiring HC is not fixed in position by the support box portion A470 or the rear plate portion A480 between the binding band KB and the substrate-side connector A493c of the second displacement member A490. Therefore, the wiring HC between the binding band KB and the board-side connector A 493 c of the second displacement member A 490
By making the displacement (deflection) corresponding to the displacement of the second displacement member A 490 using the entire length of the second displacement member, the load (fatigue) associated with the displacement can be made uniform, so Load can be avoided.

The board side connector A 493 c is a retracted position as compared to a supported projection 491 a functioning as a rotation shaft of the second displacement member A 490 and a reinforcing arm A 518 formed on the overhanging position side of the second displacement member A 490. Arranged on the side. That is, when the second displacement member A 490 is disposed at the retracted position, the inner side (see FIG. 346 (a), right side) of the support plate portion 420 shielding the line of sight toward the second displacement member A 490 is the substrate side. Connector A 493 is provided.

As a result, the possibility of the wiring HC protruding outward of the outer shapes of the support plate portion A420 and the support box portion A470 can be reduced. That is, by arranging the supported projection A491a and the reinforcing arm A518 closer to the overhanging position side (the third symbol display device 81 side), the wiring amount of the second displacement member A490 is secured while securing a large amount of wiring. It is possible to prevent HC from being viewed by the player.

As shown in FIG. 356 (a), the board side connector A 493 c is configured to be able to receive the end portion of the wiring HC along the radial direction of the circle centering on the supported projection A 491a. The board side connector A 493 c is disposed on one side with respect to a straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A 491 a and the center of the fastening portion A 475 (lower right side, see FIG. 356 (a)) , And the case where it is disposed on the other side (upper left side, see FIG. 358) is switched by the displacement of the second displacement member A 490.

Thereby, the board side connector A 49 of the wiring HC in the forward path and the return path of the second displacement member A 490
It can suppress that a difference arises in the displacement aspect of the part of the side connected with 3c. Thereby, the fluctuation of the load applied to the wiring HC can be suppressed, so that the disconnection of the wiring HC can be prevented.

In addition, since the displacement mode of the portion of the wiring HC connected to the substrate-side connector A 493 c can be easily shifted to the displacement toward the straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A 491 a and the center of the fastening portion A 475 The amount can be reduced, and the absolute value of the load applied to the wiring HC can be reduced. This will be described in detail below.

In FIG. 357 (b), the second displacement member A 490 starts to be displaced from the retracted position to the extended position, and is rotated about 45 degrees. In this state, the board side connector A 493
The direction in which the wiring HC connected to c extends is the center of the supported protrusion A491a and the fastening portion A475.
It is almost parallel to the straight line connecting the center of the

In other words, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A 475 is disposed on the bisector of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A 490 passing through the center of the supported projection A 491. That is, by setting the fastening portion A 475 as a position at which the wiring HC is loosely wound to be an intermediate position of the rotation angle of the second displacement member A 490, it is possible to minimize the deformation amount (deflection amount) of the wiring HC. .

In comparison with the retracted state (see FIG. 357 (a)), to describe the local displacement of the wiring HC, there are a portion in contact with the upper portion of the fastening portion A475 and a portion disposed below the fastening portion A475. It is rising slightly. The intermediate portion HCa is disposed at a position not interfering with the wiring HC extending from the substrate connector A 493 c in the front-rear direction.

That is, when the second displacement member A 490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357 (b) to the overhanging position side, the wiring HC on the substrate side connector A 493 c side has an intermediate portion HCa between the rear plate portion A 480 The second displacement member A 490 can be displaced at high speed without rubbing against each other of the wirings HC while the effect due to the penetration into the groove can not be obtained.

Here, as the second displacement member A 490 is displaced from the state shown in FIG. 357 (b) to the overhanging position shown in FIG. 358, the wiring HC on the side connected to the substrate connector A 493 c is in a posture along the horizontal direction. Become. Therefore, a load for maintaining the posture along the horizontal direction is generated as a load applied to the wiring HC, and this is compared to the case where the second displacement member A 490 is in the retracted position (see FIG. 357 (a)). Thus, the load given by the projection A491 d 2 has less influence on the arrangement of the wiring HC.

Therefore, even if the intermediate portion HCa does not enter between the rear plate portion A 480, generation of excessive frictional force between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A 480 is prevented. That is, in the present embodiment,
The intermediate portion HCa is inserted between the rear plate portion A 480 and the wiring HC extending from the substrate-side connector A 493 c only when there is a possibility that excessive frictional force may occur between the rear plate portion A 480 and the wiring HC. An action of separating from the plate portion A 480 is generated.

On the other hand, when the possibility of occurrence of excessive friction is low, as shown in FIG. 357 (b),
By eliminating the front and back overlap of the intermediate portion HCa and the wiring HC extending from the substrate side connector A 493 c, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of extra resistance in the displacement of the second displacement member A 490. High speed displacement can be achieved.

In the overhanging state of the second displacement member A 490 (see FIG. 358), the local displacement of the wiring HC will be described in comparison with the state shown in FIG. 357 (b). The part is slightly lowered, and the part disposed below the fastening portion A 475 is slightly raised. That is, the displacement of the wiring HC is a displacement in such a manner as to approach a straight line connecting the center of the supported projection A 491a and the center of the fastening portion A 475.

As shown in FIG. 358, in the state where the second displacement member A 490 is arranged at the overhanging position (that is, the state rotated 90 degrees from the retracted position), the wiring HC contacts the wiring guide portion A 471c to arrange the wiring. Will be corrected. The wiring guide part A 47 1 c is designed for the purpose of reducing the load given to the wiring HC in this corrected arrangement.

Describing in detail, a fastening portion A in which the arc passing through the board connector A 493 c and contacting the lower end portion of the wiring guide portion A 471c in the overhanging state of the second displacement member A 490 is a path of the wiring HC.
It is comprised so that it may pass between 475 and projecting wall part A471a. Thus, the wiring HC
Can be avoided from being given an excessive load, and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

FIG. 360 is a schematic view showing the rotational angles of the pinned gear A 462 and the same phase member A 465 based on the initial angles d 0 and d 10. In the description of FIG. 360, angles d0 to d6, d10 to d14, and dd1 indicate rotation angles of the pinned gear A 462 and the same phase member A 465 unless otherwise described.

As described above, the first displacement member A 440 is between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5,
The second displacement member A 490 is continuously displaced and stopped after the fifth angle d5, while the second displacement member A 490 stops from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12, while the second angle d12 to the fourth angle d12.
Continue to move to 14

Here, as shown in FIG. 360, a gap of 10 degrees is formed between the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12. That is, in this embodiment, the rotational angle range of the pin gear A 462 and the same phase member A 465 for generating the driving force for displacing the first displacement member A 440 and the driving force for displacing the second displacement member A 490 Pinned gear A 462 for generating
And between the rotation angle range of the same phase member A 465, the angle range which does not generate driving force is inserted. Thereby, the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 can be driven stably.

The setting mode of the angle range is not limited to this. For example, the fifth angle d5 and the second angle d12 may be configured at the same angle. In this case, the second displacement member A 490 starts displacement from the stopped state at the same time as the first displacement member A 440 is switched from the state in which displacement continues to the stopped state. Therefore, the first displacement member A440 is driven by the drive force of the drive motor AMT1.
And the second displacement member A 490 is configured so as not to occur at the same time, a single drive motor AMT 1 makes it possible to use a plurality of members (a first displacement member A 440 and a second displacement member A).
While adopting a configuration for driving 490), the load received by the drive motor AMT1 can be reduced (it can be limited to the load applied from a single member).

Also, for example, the second angle d12 may be disposed between the initial angle d0 and the fifth angle d5. In this case, while forming a section in which the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 are simultaneously displaced, a section in which the driving force of both members of the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member A490 needs to be generated It can be limited between the second angle d12 and the fifth angle d5.

According to the present embodiment, the member in which the displacement occurs at the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 is switched, so that the pinned gear A462 is in one angle range based on the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12. And rotating the same phase member A 465 in reverse
While the first displacement member A440 or the second displacement member A490 is stopped, the other member (second
The displacement member A 490 or the first displacement member A 440) can be reversed.

As described above, it is configured that there is no need to add a large driving force to stop one member (the first displacement member A 440 or the second displacement member A 490). That is, at the contact position for restricting the displacement of one member, the members contact (scrub) in line contact with each other, so that theoretically no frictional force is generated. As a result, the driving force required for the drive motor AMT1 can be suppressed, so that a small drive device can be selected as the drive motor AMT1.

Further, by driving the motor to the fifth angle d5 or the second angle d12 and stopping it, and reversely rotating the drive motor AMT1, only the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is generated, and the second displacement member A49 is generated.
In the case of 0, a driving mode of maintaining in the retracted state is also possible.

As shown in FIG. 360, the sixth angle d6 is set as an angle that does not exceed the fourth angle d14 plus the allowable angle dd1. Therefore, the pinned gear A 462 and the same phase member A 4
The rotation is restricted mechanically at the point of time when the sixth angle d6 is rotated before the point 65 is rotated from the fourth angle d14 by the allowable angle dd1 (see FIG. 345). Therefore, since it does not rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1, the second displacement member A 490 has a low accuracy to stop the same phase member A 465 at the fourth angle d 14 and is easy to over rotate (control mode). The overhang position (Figure 3
58)).

The numerical value of the sixth angle d6 is not limited to this. For example, the sixth angle d6 may be set as an angle slightly exceeding the fourth angle d14 plus the allowable angle dd1 (for example, even if set as an angle which exceeds the fourth angle d14 by about 20 degrees) good). In this case, the pinned gear A 462 and the same phase member A 465 exceed the fourth angle d 14 to allow the allowable angle dd
Continue to rotate beyond the allowable angle dd1 while permitting rotation by one, and immediately stop the displacement of the second displacement member A 490 by mechanical restriction when reaching the sixth angle d6 It can be done.

Thus, the allowable amount for the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 (ie, the fourth amount)
By stopping control at an angle (permissible amount) slightly exceeding the angle d14, the second displacement means A 490 can be prevented from reaching the overhanging position, and the second displacement means A 490 can be largely stopped at the overhanging position). As a result, it is possible to prevent the second displacement member A 490 from making a large displacement by mistake in the case where the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT 1 unintentionally becomes large.

As described above, since the arc wall portion A464 is formed to have a center angle of about 230 degrees, the position at which the first displacement member A440 is restricted even when the rotation angle reaches the sixth angle (the fifth angle d
Since the arc wall A464 is disposed up to the position where the first displacement member A440 is in contact with the position 5), it is possible to maintain the displacement restriction of the first displacement member A440 at the extended position. .

The state in which the arc wall A 467 of the same phase member A 465 abuts on the projecting plate A 515 d corresponds to the state in which the detection sensor A 426 detects that the detection plate A 455 e is stopped and controlled. There is little possibility that the deviation of the stop timing of the drive motor AMT1 unintentionally becomes large in the vicinity of the angle state where the wall portion A467 abuts on the protruding plate portion A515d. Therefore, the arc wall portion A 467 is a second displacement member A 490 from the initial angle d10 to the second angle d12.
Is formed at an angle (about 210 degrees in the present embodiment) smaller than the arc wall portion A464 as a minimum required angle range to maintain the at the retracted position. Thereby, the material cost required for the arc wall A 467 can be suppressed.

Next, the second operation unit A 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 361 to 381. FIG. 361 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700 and the back case A310. As shown in FIG. 361, the second operation unit A700 is formed with a horizontal width exceeding the horizontal width of the visual recognition area of the display of the third symbol display device 81, and is below the visual recognition area of the display of the third symbol display device 81. Will be placed.

FIG. 362 is a front exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700, and FIG. 363 is a rear exploded perspective view of the second operation unit A700. As shown in FIGS. 362 and 363, the second
The operation unit A700 is held by a long rectangular plate member in the left and right, and includes an elevation unit A701 including an elevation unit A702 configured to be capable of elevation operation, and a withdrawal position and an overhang position by the elevation operation of the elevation unit A702. And a rendering unit A 710 configured to be displaceable and capable of operating in a plurality of modes.

The lifting unit A701 supports the left and right long lifting portion A702 on the left and right, and a pair of arm members A703 rotatably supported around the left and right end portions as an axis, and the arm member A703 via a drive mechanism (not shown) And a pair of drive motors A704 for transmitting the driving force to the

As a mechanism for transmitting the driving force from the drive motor A704 to the arm member A703,
For example, a gear transmission mechanism may be exemplified in which gear teeth are formed at the rotation shaft side end of the arm member A 703, and a gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A 704 meshes with the gear teeth.

Further, a long hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a rotating body is provided axially projecting at a position where the pin inserted into the long hole is eccentric and a gear tooth is formed on the outer periphery, and the rotation is It may be a gear link transmission mechanism in which the gear teeth of the body and the gear fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A 704 mesh with each other.

Further, an elongated hole is formed in the arm member A703, and a pin formed at the rotation outer diameter direction end of an auxiliary arm member (not shown) fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor A704 is inserted into the elongated hole. A link transmission mechanism may be used in which the driving force is transmitted from the auxiliary arm member to the arm member A703.

In the present embodiment, the game board A is disposed opposite to the front side of the second operation unit A700.
In correspondence with the fact that the shape on the back side of FIG. 13 is asymmetrical (see FIG. 306), drive motor A7
The arrangement of 04 is considered to be asymmetrical. That is, the gap (space) of the back side configuration of the game board A13
The drive motor A704 is inserted into the control unit to suppress the front-rear width necessary for the arrangement of the game board A13 and the second operation unit A700.

As described above, since there is a circumstance in which the arrangement of the drive motor A704 is desired to be set in accordance with the shape of the game board A13, in the present embodiment, a gear link transmission mechanism or a gear transmission mechanism is adopted rather than the link transmission mechanism. Is preferred.

FIG. 364 is a front exploded perspective view of the rendering unit A 710, and FIG. 365 is a rear exploded perspective view of the rendering unit A 710. In FIG. 364 and FIG. 365, the rendering unit A 710.
An annular front cover A711 which divides the effect range of the present invention, and the annular front cover A711
Skirt-shaped upper cover A7 disposed below the cover and fastened and fixed to an upper cover A 740 described later
12 and the lower unit of the upper cover A 712 are arranged on the back side
A skirt-shaped lower cover A 713 fastened and fixed to the elevating part 01 is disassembled and shown in a state of being separated to the front side.

In FIG. 364 and FIG. 365, an annular rear cover A714 which is formed in an annular shape substantially equivalent to the annular front cover A711 in the front-rear direction and which constitutes an annular internal space IE between the annular front cover A711 is fixed to the upper lid A740, A rotating body A 720 rotatably disposed at the circular center of the annular rear cover A 714 is illustrated.

The rotating body A 720 is configured such that a member having a size that fits in a front view in a circle formed by the inner peripheral surface of the annular front cover A 711 is rotatable around an axis extending in the vertical direction, and is fixed to the annular rear cover A 714 Light emitting means A7 such as LEDs disposed on a plurality of lighting boards A 715
The light emitted from the light source 15a can be received. Light emitting means A 715 a is an electric decoration board A 715
Three are arranged at equal intervals in the side direction on one side of the pentagon formed by.

In the present embodiment, similarly to the light emitting means A 715 a, the electric decoration substrate A 715 is composed of LEDs or the like arranged three at equal intervals in the side direction on one side of the pentagon, and directs the optical axis to the front side A front light emitting means A 715 b is provided. The front light emitting means A 715 b has an annular front cover A 71
The annular front cover A711 is made to emit light by irradiating the back side of the light source 1 with light. That is, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the light-emitting effect through the light transmitting portion partially formed on the annular front cover A711.

In this embodiment, in the aspect that each of the five flat-plate shaped electric decoration substrates A 715 constitutes one side of a pentagon, the electric decoration substrates A 715 above the rotating body A 720 are in a horizontal posture, and the electric decoration substrates below right and left The light emitting means A 715 a is disposed in such a manner that the lower end of the A 715 faces the axis of rotation, and the light axis is directed in the normal direction of the inward surface of each of the illumination boards A 715. That is, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a is emitted toward the center of the pentagon so as to intersect near the center of the pentagon.

Therefore, when the rotating body A 720 rotates, the rotating outer side portion of the rotating body A 720 emits light.
It can be configured to cross the optical axis of the light emitted from 715a. Thereby, the traveling direction of light when light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a is reflected by the rotating body A 720 can be changed along with the rotation of the rotating body A 720, so that refreshing effects can be performed. .

In the present embodiment, in order to make it easy to reflect light by the rotating body A 720, the rotating body A
Plating (gold plating, silver plating, etc.) is applied to the outer surface of 720. The aspect of the outer surface is not limited to plating, and may be various other aspects. For example, a tape of a color that is easily reflected may be attached.

As described above, since the rotating body A 720 rotates about the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, the light traveling on the rotation axis is on the rotation axis of the rotating body A 720 regardless of the rotation of the rotating body A 720. It is irradiated to the same place of. In the present embodiment, the upper part of the rotating body A 720 is opened by the formation of the light passage recess A 722a at that point, and the light passes through.
Details will be described later.

The annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A714 have recessed portions A711a and A714a that form windows on the opposite side edges to allow light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a to pass through.
And a semicircular recessed portion A711b which is recessed in a semicircular shape in cross section to surround the rotation axis of the rotating body A720.
, A 714 b.

The inner peripheral surface of the annular ring except the window portion constituted by the recessed portions A711a and A714a and the other outer surface are plated. Therefore, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a and hitting the rotating body A 720 and reflecting the light can be further applied to the annular front cover A 711 and the annular rear cover A 714 and reflected, so a plurality of light emitted from the same light emitting means A 715 a Can be made visible to the player as light traveling (reflecting) from the point of. Thereby, the number of the light emitting means A 715 a can be reduced while performing a refreshing effect.

In this respect, if the window necessary for transmitting the light from the light emitting means A 715a is made as small as possible, a wider area for reflecting the other light (area to be subjected to plating) is secured. It is advantageous because it can be done. In the present embodiment, the recessed portions A711a, A714
The shape of the window portion constituted by a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer shape of the LED constituting the light emitting means A 715 a, and the area for reflecting the light without impairing the brightness of the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a It can be widely secured.

366 is an exploded front perspective view of a rotating body A 720 of the effect unit A 710, and FIG.
7 is an exploded rear perspective view of a rotating body A720 of the effect unit A710. In FIGS. 366 and 367, the illustration of the annular front cover A711, the upper cover A712, and the lower cover A713 of the effect unit A710 is omitted.

The rotating body A 720 is a set of members each composed of a plurality of rotating members and supported by a plurality of supporting portions A 730 for supporting the plurality of rotating members, and has a pair of members having a substantially hemispherical outer shape. A second rotary member formed of a first rotary member A 721 and a pair of members made of a colored (in this embodiment, blue) light transmissive resin material capable of rotating the outside of the first rotary member 721 And A728.

The first rotating member A 721 is formed by forming a shell-like skeleton having a substantially hemispherical shape from a resin material with low light permeability, which is divided back and forth, and a pair of shell portions A fastened and fixed to the support portion A 730 at the lower side.
An annular gear member 722 and an annular recess rotatably supported by an annular recess formed on the back side of the front shell part A 722, wherein the gear teeth are engraved on the back side. And gear teeth of the annular gear member A723, which are disposed on the back side of the annular gear member A723 and rotatably supported in a manner to be sandwiched between the pair of shell portions A722, and gear teeth A724a provided on the shaft portion It mainly comprises a central rotation member A 724 to be engaged.

A pair of shell parts A 722 are light passing concave parts A concaved in a direction away from each other at the upper part thereof
722a is provided. In at least the front shell A 722, this light passage recess A 72
2a is formed on both the upper and lower sides of the annular gear member A723, and is disposed in such a manner that the majority of the annular gear member A723 enters the front side of the recessed end of the light passage recess A722a.

That is, even if the through hole surrounded by the light passage concave portion A 722a is seen in the top view, most of the annular gear member A 723 is not visually recognized in the direction view, so the central rotation member A 724 disposed inside the annular gear member A 723 Can be seen. Therefore, when the light traveling in the vertical direction passes through the through hole surrounded by the light passing recess A 722 a, the annular gear member A 72
3 can be prevented from blocking the light, and the light can be allowed to reach the central rotation member A 724. Here, with reference to FIG. 368, the outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A 721 will be described.

FIG. 368 is a rear view of the first rotating member A 721. In FIG. 368, in order to make the inside visible, the illustration of the back shell A 722 is omitted, and the support A 7 is for convenience of description.
A stationary gear SG arranged non-rotatably above 30 is shown meshed with the annular gear member A 723.

The outline of the operation mode of the first rotating member A 721 will be described. As described above, the first rotation member A 721 is configured to rotate about a rotation axis (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG) extending in the vertical direction. When this rotation occurs, the relative position between the annular gear member A 723 disposed inside the first rotating member A 721 and the fixed gear SG changes, and accordingly, the annular gear member A 723 and the fixed gear SG are relative to each other. Displace (the engagement relationship changes).

In this embodiment, since the fixed gear SG is non-rotatably fixed to the end of the shaft rod portion A 751 of the box-like portion A 750, relative displacement with the fixed gear SG is secured by rotation of the annular gear member A 723. . When the annular gear member A723 is rotated, the annular gear member A7 is rotated along with the rotation.
A central rotation member A 724 engaged with the gear 23 rotates. The rotation axis of the central rotation member A 724 is
Since it extends in a direction (direction orthogonal to the axis extending in the vertical direction as the rotation axis of the first rotating member A 721 (coaxial with the central axis of the fixed gear SG), the shell A of the first rotating member A 721
Along with the rotation of 722 (lateral rotation of the vertical axis), the central rotation member A 724 rotates in a different manner (vertical rotation of the horizontal axis). The relationship between the rotational directions will be described later.

The rotation axis of the central rotation member A 724 is in synchronization with the rotation of the shell A 722 (in synchronization with the rotation angle)
Since the change continues in the same plane, the player can be made to appear to rotate the central rotation member A 724 with a plurality of upper, lower, left, and right rotation axes. Therefore, by causing the shell A 722 to rotate in one direction, it is possible to cause the central rotation member A 724 to rotate in multiple directions.

In this embodiment, since the number of gear teeth A 724 a and the number of fixed gears SG are the same (10 teeth each), the absolute value of the rotation angle of the shell A 722 and the central rotation member A 724
Synchronize with the absolute value of the rotation angle of. Thereby, the central rotation member A 724 is shown each time the shell portion A 722 is in a posture in which the ring shape can be visually recognized in a front view as illustrated in FIG. 368 during rotation of the shell portion A 722 (every half rotation). As shown in FIG. 368, the disc portion is turned to the front side (returns). Therefore, the reproducibility of the rotation effect can be maintained.

Referring back to FIGS. 366 and 367, description will be made. The second rotating member A728 is a first rotating member A7.
A pair of substantially symmetrical members fastened and fixed to the support portion A 730 below 21 and from the lower side of the first rotation member A 721 through the outside of the first rotation member A 721 is a first rotation member A 7
The rod-shaped extending portion A is formed in a rod shape extending upward in such a manner as to reach a position covering the upper part 21 from the upper side
It has 728a.

The rod-shaped extending portion A728a is formed to be narrower than the outer shape of the first rotating member A721,
When the part of the first rotating member A 721 is hidden due to the difference in arrangement, the first rotating member A 721
In the case where it can be seen outside (when it hardly overlaps with the first rotating member A 721), it can be configured, but the details will be described later.

The outer shapes of the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728 are annular rear covers A 7.
It is configured to be slightly smaller than the inner circumferential diameter of 14, and the gap in the vertical direction is shortened. Thus, the annular rear cover A714 functions as a retaining member for the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728, and the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728 are disposed in the state where the annular rear cover A 714 is disposed. It is possible to prevent careless disassembly that pulls up (disassembles) upward.

As described above, the rotating body A 720 is composed of a plurality of rotating members (the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728) fastened and fixed to the support portion A 730, which are the support portion A 7
It rotates with 30 rotations. Next, the support portion A 730 will be described.

FIG. 369 (a) is a front exploded perspective view of the support portion A 730, and FIG. 369 (b) is a second exploded view.
It is a front disassembled perspective view of support part A735. FIG. 370 (a) is an exploded rear perspective view of the support A730, and FIG. 370 (b) is an exploded rear perspective of the second support A735.

As shown in FIGS. 369 and 370, the support portion A 730 is colored (white in this embodiment).
The first support portion A 731 whose main body is formed in a cylindrical shape from a light impermeable resin material, and the inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the main body of the first support portion A 731 from a colorless light transmissive resin material And a second support A735 configured as a set of divided bodies divided into two in the radial direction, and a box-like shape described later inside the first support A731 and the second support A735. Part A7
Axle rod portion A751 fixed to 50 is inserted and removed by metal ring C ring C1 and fixed gear SG fixed non-rotatably at the tip end side of the rod portion A751 by fitting with the deformed shaft Impossible to be supported.

The first support portion A 731 has a cylindrical main body portion having a through hole A 731 a which has an inner diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the shaft bar portion A 751 of the box-like portion A 750 and through which the shaft bar portion A 751 is insertable A plurality of support plate parts A732 extending in a plate shape from both the upper end of the part in both directions on straight lines and having through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted, and protruding downward from two positions at the lower end of the main body And a pair of projecting portions A733.

The projecting portion A 733 is disposed at a position corresponding to the notch A 772 a of the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 described later, and is a portion that enables transmission of force in the rotational direction by fitting, and is formed with different widths. Ru. Thereby, it is easier to make the angular alignment between the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 and the first support portion A731 at the time of fitting compared to when the width of the pair of projecting portions A733 is formed to be the same. can do.

As shown in FIGS. 369 (b) and 370 (b), the second support portion A 735 is a half cylindrical portion A 736 constituting the cylindrical portion, and a plate in both directions in a straight line from the upper end portion of the half cylindrical portion A 736 And a plurality of semi-supporting plate portions A 737 each having a plurality of semi-supporting plate portions A 737 having a through hole which is extended in a shape and through which a fastening screw can be inserted.

The semi-cylindrical portion A 736 has a recessed fitting portion A 736 a which is recessed in a rectangular shape from the lower end at the center position of the arc at the lower end side portion and a rectangular shape radially outwardly projecting from the end of the arc. And a projecting fitting portion A 736 b.

The recessed fitting portion A 736 a is an inner protrusion A 762 d of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 described later (see FIG. 3).
The protrusion fitting portion A 736 b is a protrusion to be fitted to the notch portion A 762 c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760.

At the fitting position of the recessed fitting portion A 736 a, the wall around the recessed fitting portion A 736 a is disposed to face the inner wall of the cylindrical protrusion A 762 b, and the radially outer side of the half cylindrical portion A 736 is provided on the inner wall The displacement of the second support portion A 735 can be supported undividably by restricting the displacement of the second support portion A 735 by the projection fitting portion A 736 b being engaged with the notch portion A 762 c.

Furthermore, the recessed fitting portion A 736 a and the protruding fitting portion A 736 b may be fitted in a circumferential contact direction of rotation with the notch portion A 762 c of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the shaft rod portion A 751 as a rotation axis. Thus, it also functions as a transmission unit for transmitting the rotation of the large diameter gear LG12 to the second support unit A735. Therefore, the recessed fitting part A 736 a and the protruding fitting part A 736 b can function both to prevent the division of the second support A 736 and to transmit the rotation to the second support A 736.

A groove portion A 735 a recessed along the circumferential direction is formed on the inner surface of the semicylindrical portion in which the semisupporting plate portion A 737 is formed. By the groove portion A 735 a, the inner side surface of the second support portion A 735 and the first
The contact area with the outer surface of the support portion A 731 can be reduced, and the generated frictional force can be reduced.

In particular, at the location disposed between the half support plate portion A 737, there is a possibility that a load may occur during the fastening and fixing of the second rotating member A 728, and the inner diameter may be tightened as compared with the design dimension. . On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the groove A735 is located between the half support plate A737.
Since a is formed, the contact area can be reduced at a portion where sliding friction tends to occur between the second support portion A 735 and the first support portion A 731. As a result, the second supporting portion A735 and the first supporting portion A731 are suppressed while minimizing the reduction in rigidity due to the formation of the groove portion A735a.
And the friction force generated between them can be effectively reduced.

The half support plate portion A 737 has a pair of assembling protrusions A 737 a protruding toward the opposite side of the mating member along the direction in which the second support portion A 735 is divided, and a pair of positions protruding from one divided body The mating projection A 737 b and the insertion hole A 737 c bored in the other divided body as a penetration hole of a size capable of inserting the alignment projection A 737 b, and fastening of the second rotating member A 728 bored in the thickness direction And a pair of fastening holes A737d formed in a size through which the portion A728b (see FIG. 367) can be inserted.

The second support member A 728 (semi-supporting plate part A 737) is aligned with each other by inserting the alignment protrusion A 737 b into the insertion hole A 737 c, and assembled from the outside in the division direction.
367) are coupled to each other by screwing a fastening screw into the fastening portion A 728b and fastening and fixing it. That is, since the fastening screw used for fastening and fixing the second rotation member A 728 can be used also for fastening and fixing the half support plate portion A 737, the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

The assembling projection A 737 a is inserted into a recess formed at a corresponding position of the second rotating member A 728 and utilized for positioning, and the projection interval is a pair of divided bodies constituting the second support portion A 735. Different from each other. That is, the interval between the assembling projections A 737a arranged on the front side is the assembling projection A7 arranged on the rear side.
It is wider than the interval of 37a.

By forming the assembling projections A 737 a at different intervals, each of the pair of members constituting the second rotating member A 728 can be assembled from the correct direction of the second support portion A 735. That is, only when assembling from the correct direction, the assembling projection A 737 a and the second rotating member A 728 can be fitted properly, and when the assembling direction is incorrect, the assembling projection A 737 a The position of the second rotation member A 728 is not matched with the position of the recess, and an error in the assembling direction can be noticed by not assembling.

Further, the second rotating member A 728 is largely different in the presence or absence of the fastening portion A 728 b, and the other configurations are substantially the same. Therefore, the intention is to assemble the pair of members in handling.
An error may occur when trying to assemble two members of one of the pair of members. According to the present embodiment, since the formation intervals of the assembling protrusions A 737a are different (because it is not a common mode), both members of the second rotating member A 728 assembled to the second support portion A 735 are both members It can be made to notice before inserting a fastening screw to the error which it is going to assemble by making it a member of one side).

The second support portion A 735 separates in the radial direction before disassembly before disassembling the cylindrical protrusion A of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760.
Since it is regulated to 762 b (see FIG. 366), the first support A 731 and the second support A 73
The assembly of 5 is performed exclusively by parallel displacement in the axial direction, and along with the parallel displacement, the projecting portion A
733 shows the notch A772a, and the concave fitting portion A736a shows the inner protrusion A762d (FIG. 373).
And the protruding fitting portion A 736 b are respectively fitted to the notch portion A 762 c. Here, from the shape, the second support portion A 735 is assembled first, and in that state, the first support portion A 73
1 is assembled.

Here, in view of the shape of the member on the other side to be assembled, the first support portion A 731 and the second support portion A 731
The posture at the time of being assembled together with the support portion A 735 is not an arbitrary posture, and is limited to a specific posture. Therefore, when assembling the first support portion A 731, there is a possibility that the second support portion A 735 blocks the view and makes it difficult to assemble the first support portion A 731.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second support portion A 735 is formed of a light transmissive resin material and the first support portion A 731 is formed of a light impermeable resin material.
The inner side of the second support portion A 735 can be visually recognized after assembly of the second support portion A 735. In addition, the cylindrical extension portion A772 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770 for assembling the first support portion A731 is the upper lid portion A7.
Since the long projection 40 is disposed above the position 40, the position at which the protruding portion A733 of the first support portion A731 is fitted is not hidden by the upper lid portion A740, and can be configured so as to be easily visible.

Therefore, when assembling the first support portion A 731, the posture can be easily adjusted to a suitable posture, so that the first support portion A 731 and the second support portion A 735 can be easily assembled.

Here, in the upper lid portion A 740 where the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 described later are disposed (stored) between the box-shaped portion A 750 and the box-shaped portion A 750, a through hole A surrounding the central axis of the support portion A 730
Since 741 is bored, in order to disassemble the upper lid portion A 740 and add a hand to the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 or the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770, the shaft rod portion A 751 fixed to the box portion A 750 from the through hole A 741 is It is necessary to displace the upper lid A 740 upward with respect to the box A A 750 in order to remove it.

At this time, with the support portion A 730 being assembled, the support plate portion A 732 or the half support plate portion A
The upper cover A 740 can not be displaced upward due to the interference of 737. Therefore, the upper cover A
Before disassembling the 740, it is necessary to disassemble the support A730. Then, as described above, in order to disassemble the support portion A 730, it is necessary to disassemble the C ring C 1 and the fixed gear SG, and the fixed gear SG is disposed inside the first rotating member A 721 (see FIG. 368). ), It is necessary to disassemble the rotating body A 720 in order to disassemble the fixed gear SG.

As described above, in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770, the plurality of members need to be disassembled in order to access the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 illegally. By making the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 or the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770, tampering that causes a malfunction can be easily prevented.

FIGS. 371 and 372 are front exploded perspective views of the upper lid A 740 and the box-like portion A 750. Note that FIG. 371 shows a direction view looking down obliquely from above, and FIG. 372 shows a direction view looking up obliquely from below (viewing in a direction inclined at 22.5 degrees with respect to the vertical direction).

As shown in FIGS. 371 and 372, the upper lid portion A 740 has through holes A 741 drilled vertically at the left and right center positions, and supports the transmission members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 on the lower surface facing the box portion A 750. A shape (shape such as unevenness) is formed.

The box-like portion A 750 is formed in a box-like shape disposed below the upper lid portion A 740 and having at least the upper surface opened, and the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 are disposed at the open position. Fixed to the bottom plate portion A 750 a of the upper cover portion A 740, and the through hole A 741 of the upper cover portion A 740
Of the metal (in this embodiment, brass) coaxial with the central axis of the shaft (made of brass in this embodiment) A751
And a first detection sensor A 752 comprising a detecting device constituted by a photo coupler method disposed on the upper surface side of the box portion A 750 and a photo coupler method disposed on the lower surface side of the box portion A 750 And a second detection sensor A753 comprising a detection device, a drive motor AMT2 whose main body projects to the lower surface side to be fastened and fixed, a drive gear AMG2 which rotates by excitation of the drive motor AMT2, and a bottom plate A750a And a relay board A 754 in which wiring connected to various sensors A 752 and A 753 and drive motor AMT 2 is relayed.

Figures 373 and 374 show the box-like portion A 750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A.
It is a disassembled front perspective view of 770. FIG. In FIGS. 373 and 374, the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 is illustrated as being separated from the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 in the vertical direction, and in FIG. 373 it is illustrated in a diagonally viewed from above; It is illustrated in a looking up direction.

The upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 are both configured by meshing four gears, and each gear is limited to gears of two types of shapes (sizes). That is, the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 includes a drive gear AMG2, a small diameter small gear PG1 meshed with the drive gear AMG2, a small diameter gear PG2 of the same shape meshed with the small diameter gear PG1, and a small diameter gear PG2 The drive gear AMG2 is meshed with the large diameter gear LG1 of the same shape as the drive gear AMG2.

The upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 is engaged with the large diameter gear LG11 of the same shape as the drive gear AMG2, the large diameter gear LG12 of the same shape engaged with the large diameter gear LG11, and the large diameter gear LG12. A small diameter gear PG11 having the same shape as the gear PG1 and a large diameter gear LG13 having the same shape as the drive gear AMG2 and meshed with the small diameter gear PG11 are formed.

Large-diameter gears LG13 and LG1 disposed on the most downstream side with drive gear AMG2 as the upstream side
The detection target pieces A763 and A773 detected by the first detection sensor A752 and the second detection sensor A753 are formed.

In the process of driving force transmission of each of the transmission mechanisms A 760 and A 770, although small diameter gears are interposed, the large diameter gears are arranged again on the downstream side, so both large diameter gears LG13 and LG1 rotate. The absolute value of the rotation angle in the case where the drive gear AMG2 is equal to the absolute value of the rotation angle of the drive gear AMG2.

In the present embodiment, the detection target pieces A 763 are formed at two positions (180 degrees apart) at equal intervals on the circumference, extending outward in the radial direction from an umbrella portion covering the gear teeth of the large diameter gear LG13 from above. A detection target piece A7 extending in the axial direction from an umbrella part covering the gear teeth of the large diameter gear LG1 from below
The first detection sensor A7 is formed at four locations (90.degree. Intervals) at regular intervals on the circumference.
The first detection sensor A752 and the second detection are performed again by rotating the drive gear AMG2 by 180 degrees from the state in which the detection target pieces A763 and A773 are detected in both the 52 and the second detection sensor A753 (see FIG. 372). It returns to the state in which to-be-detected piece A763, A773 is detected by both of sensor A753. Thus, in the present embodiment, the first detection sensor A75
The detection timings of the second and second detection sensors A 753 can be related.

On the other hand, the reason why the plurality of detection sensors of the first detection sensor A 752 and the second detection sensor A 753 are disposed is that there occurs a timing at which only one detection sensor functions.
Details will be described later.

In the detailed description of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770, since the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 is supported by the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 at a plurality of locations, first, the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 will be described to facilitate understanding. . The lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 has a box-like portion A7.
The lower layers of 50 and the four mutually meshed gears AMG2, PG1, as described above
It is a transmission mechanism comprised from PG2 and LG1.

A plurality of fitting recesses A771 are formed at equal intervals in the circumferential direction on the upper surface side of the drive gear AMG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A770, and a protrusion A protruding inward in the radial direction in one recess A771 thereof.
771a are formed. Thus, the internal shape of one recess A 771 is the other recess A 771.
It is formed to be different from the internal shape of.

The small diameter gear PG2 of the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770 includes a cylindrical extending portion A 772 which cylindrically extends upward from the upper surface so as to surround the shaft portion A 751. At the upper end portion of the cylindrical extension portion A772, a pair of notch portions A772a cut out in a rectangular shape at symmetrical positions across the shaft rod portion A751.
Is formed. The notch portion A772a is a portion to be fitted to the protrusion portion A733 of the support portion, and is formed as a notch having a width different from each other in correspondence with the formation mode of the protrusion portion A733.

The large diameter gear LG1 is disposed under the middle plate portion A750b formed in the upper layer than the bottom plate portion A750a of the box-like portion A750, and the upper plate portion A750b regulates the removal thereof upward. That is, in order to pull out the large diameter gear LG1, the second gear interferes in the vertical direction.
Since it is necessary to remove the detection sensor A753, it is possible to increase the number of steps required to withdraw the large diameter gear LG1. Thereby, it can be made easy to avoid that large diameter gear LG1 is pulled out carelessly.

Further, by dividing the area by the middle plate portion A 750 b, it is possible to easily avoid the contact between the large diameter gear LG 1 and the constituent members of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760. Thereby, it can be avoided that the transmission of the driving force is performed (at the downstream side of the transmission path of the driving force) between the large diameter gear LG1 and the upper layer transmission mechanism A760.

Next, the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 will be described in detail. The upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 is disposed on the upper layer of the box-like portion A 750, and as described above, the four gears LG11,
It is a transmission mechanism comprised from LG12, PG11, LG13.

The driving force is transmitted only when the large diameter gear LG11 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 is rotated in one direction (clockwise in top view) by the one-way clutch housed inside, and the opposite direction
When it rotates in a counterclockwise direction in a top view, it is configured to rotate freely, and includes a plurality of protruding portions A 761 protruding downward from the lower side surface of the one-way clutch.

The protrusion A761 is a curved wall shaped protrusion fitted with the recess A771 of the drive gear AMG2, and a shape in which the corresponding portion A761a corresponding to the protrusion A771a has entered the inside in the radial direction (to the outside in the radial direction It is considered as a straight line shape in which the overhang is suppressed. As a result, assembly can be made possible only in a posture in which the projection A771a of the drive gear AMG2 and the corresponding portion A761a of the large diameter gear LG11 coincide with each other.

The large diameter gear LG12 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 is a cylindrical extension portion A of the small diameter gear PG2 at the central portion.
A through hole A762a having an inside diameter slightly longer than the outside diameter of 772 is bored, and a cylindrical protrusion A762b protruding from the upper surface into a large diameter cylindrical shape and a shaft rod at the protruding tip of the cylindrical protrusion A762b A pair of notches A7 which are formed in a rectangular shape at opposite positions with respect to the central axis of the part A751
With respect to a straight line passing through the center axis of the shaft rod portion A751 and a straight line passing through the center axis of the shaft rod portion A751 and orthogonal to the straight line passing through the center axis of the shaft rod portion A751 And an inner protrusion A762d of

The cylindrical protrusion A 762 b receives the lower end of the second support A 735 (see FIG. 366),
The notch A 762 c and the inner protrusion A 762 d are portions that regulate the displacement of the second support A 735 in the dividing direction, and the projection A 736 b and the recess A 736 a of the second support A 735 respectively. It is a part which fits and can transmit a driving force.

The large-diameter gear LG13 of the upper layer transmission mechanism A760 is formed over the axial direction with the formation of the umbrella portion omitted at the same angular displacement from the detected piece A763 and the detected piece A763 in the same direction. And an elongated gear tooth A764, and a cylindrical function portion A765 coaxially rotatably disposed inside the large diameter gear LG13 and configured to be relatively rotatable with the large diameter gear LG13.

The columnar functional portion A765 is disposed at symmetrical positions with respect to the rotation axis, and includes a pair of rotation restricting protrusions A765a supported by a support groove A750c formed in a groove shape on the upper surface of the box A750. Here, a functional device functioning as a so-called torque limiter (safety clutch) between the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 is accommodated.

That is, when the load generated between the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A765 is smaller (less) than the reference, transmission of torque is maintained, and the large diameter gear LG13 and the cylindrical functional portion A7 are maintained.
It is configured to shut off the transmission of torque if the load generated between 65 and 65 is excessive.

In the present embodiment, the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 when the transmission of driving force to the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 is interrupted by the drive gear AMG 2 rotating counterclockwise in top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG 11 idling. The torque limiter is used to create resistance to make the prevention of rotation of the motor more reliable. Therefore, from this point of view, it functions in the same way as a resistance member that always generates resistance, and a member that generates viscous resistance such as a damper gear.

On the other hand, when the drive gear AMG2 is rotated clockwise as viewed from the top, and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 is rotated without idling, the torque limiter is transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A760. As a result, transmission of torque is cut off, and resistance from the large diameter gear LG13 side can be reduced, so that load applied to the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed and heat generation of the drive motor AMT2 can be suppressed.

Here, when the drive gear AMG2 rotates clockwise in a top view and the one-way clutch inside the large diameter gear LG11 rotates without idling, the torque limiter transmits torque at the start of rotation. After the rotation continues to a certain extent (after a certain angle of rotation), the state is switched to a state in which the torque transmission is canceled. Therefore, before the switch occurs,
A large load is generated between the small diameter gear PG11 and the large diameter gear LG13.

In the present embodiment, the elongated gear teeth A 764 are formed as the portion receiving the large load. That is, the posture of the large diameter gear LG13 when the drive gear AMG2 starts to rotate clockwise as viewed from above, the posture in which the piece to be detected A763 is in the gap of the first detection sensor A752 (FIG.
By controlling so as to be limited to 3), it is possible to limit the gear teeth that mesh with the small diameter gear PG11 to specific gear teeth when the drive gear AMG2 starts rotating clockwise in top view.

By forming the specific gear teeth in the axial direction as elongated gear teeth A 764, the load generated per unit length in the axial direction can be reduced. Thus, the large diameter gear LG13
Durability can be improved.

The first detection sensor A 752 can detect a plurality of objects by detecting the detection target piece A 763 of the large diameter gear LG 13. First of all, the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760
Is rotated to transmit the driving force, and then stopped.
It can be detected that 0 has stopped at an appropriate posture (angle).

Second, when the one-way clutch disposed inside the large diameter gear LG11 is idled to release the transmission of the driving force to the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 (when the drive gear AMG 2 rotates counterclockwise in top view) ), It can be detected that the cancellation of the transmission of the driving force is functioning well. That is, for example, when the interruption (idle rotation) of the driving force transmission is insufficient due to damage to the internal structure of the one-way clutch, or when the torque generation function of the torque limiter is insufficient due to a defect. When the driving force transmitted to the radial gear LG13 exceeds the resistance of the torque limiter, the large diameter gear LG13 is rotated.

When the drive gear AMG2 is controlled to rotate counterclockwise in a top view, the first detection sensor A752 is notified of an error signal when the first detection sensor A752 detects that the detected piece A763 is displaced. Can be used to discover problems that occur in one-way clutches and torque limiters.

As described above, the mechanism that compensates for the cancellation of driving force transmission using the one-way clutch with the function of the torque limiter is effective when the driving force to be transmitted is directed in the horizontal direction as in the present embodiment. is there. That is, in the present embodiment, the driving force is transmitted by the plurality of transmission members that rotate around the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction, but in this configuration, gravity can not be used.

If the driving force to be transmitted has a component in the direction of gravity, the movement of the member to which the driving force is transmitted can be suppressed in the direction in which the transmission of the driving force is released using the weight of the member. In the embodiment, the own weight can not be used, and there is a possibility that the transmission of the driving force may be generated even by the weak load generated by the free rotation of the one-way clutch.

Also, as a structure for suppressing displacement due to idle rotation, it is conceivable to cause friction with other members, but in this case, it is necessary to generate driving force more than friction to drive the members, so another problem May occur. From such a point of view, in the present embodiment, a torque limiter is adopted so that cancellation of the driving force transmission accompanying switching of the driving direction can be reliably generated.

FIG. 375 (a) is a top view of the upper lid A 740, the box A 750, the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760, and the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770. FIG. 375 B is an upper lid A 740, a box A 750
FIG. 20 is a front view of the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 and the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770.

Transmission of the driving force of the drive motor AMT2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 375 (a) and 375 (b). When the drive gear AMG2 is rotated by the excitation of the drive motor AMT2, a projection A761 (see FIG. 374) which is engaged with the recess A771 (see FIG. 373) of the drive gear AMG2.
See also) rotates.

When the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise as viewed from above, as described above, the one-way clutch housed inside the large diameter gear LG11 idles, and the protrusion A761 and the large diameter gear LG11 rotate relative to each other. By doing this, even if the drive gear AMG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 is maintained as it is.

That is, the driving force is transmitted only through the lower transmission path DL1 transmitted through the lower layer transmission mechanism A 770, and the transmission of the driving force through the upper transmission path UL1 transmitted through the upper layer transmission mechanism A 760 is interrupted. Therefore, only the cylindrical extending portion A772 of the cylindrical extending portion A772 and the cylindrical protruding portion A762b fitted to the supporting portion A730 (see FIG. 369) is rotated, and the cylindrical protruding portion A762b is kept as it is. maintain.

Thus, in the assembled state of the rendering unit A 710 (see FIG. 362), the first support A 7 fitted to the cylindrical extension A 772 of the first support A 731 and the second support A 735.
Since only the 31 (see FIG. 369) is rotated and the second support A 735 is maintained as it is, the first support A 731 is fastened and fixed among the first rotation member A 721 and the second rotation member A 728. Only one rotation member A 721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated, and the second rotation member A 728 is maintained as it is.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is clockwise in top view, as described above, the drive force is sufficiently transmitted by the one-way clutch housed inside the large diameter gear LG11, and the projection A761 and the large diameter The gear LG11 rotates synchronously (integrally). That is, drive gear A
When the MG2 rotates, the large diameter gear LG11 also rotates.

That is, the driving force is transmitted not only to the lower transmission path DL1 but also to the upper transmission path UL1. Therefore, the cylindrical extension A772 and the cylindrical protrusion A7 which fit in the support A730 (see FIG. 369)
Both 62b rotate.

Thus, in the assembled state (see FIG. 362) of the rendering unit A 710, both the first support portion A 731 and the second support portion A 735 (see FIG. 369) rotate, and the first support portion A 73
Both the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728 (see FIG. 367), which are fastened and fixed to the first and second support portions A 735 respectively, rotate.

Here, the rotation direction of the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728 will be described. First, the second rotating member A 728 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1. The large diameter gear LG with the rotation of the drive gear AMG2 clockwise in top view
11 rotates clockwise in the top view, and the large diameter gear LG12 meshing with the large diameter gear LG11 rotates in the reverse direction in the top view counterclockwise, so that the rotational direction of the second rotating member A728 is It turns clockwise.

Next, the first rotating member A 721 (see FIG. 367) is rotated by the drive transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1. As drive gear AMG 2 rotates clockwise as viewed from the top, drive gear A
The small diameter gear PG1 meshed with the MG2 rotates counterclockwise as viewed from the top, and the small diameter gear PG2 (see FIG. 373) meshed with the small diameter gear PG1 rotates clockwise as viewed from the top. The direction of rotation is clockwise in top view.

That is, the rotation direction of the first rotation member A 721 and the second rotation member A 728 is the shaft rod portion A 751.
In the opposite direction with the Thereby, the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 7
As compared with the case where the rotation direction of the 28 is the same direction, the player can be made to visually recognize (with a large angle change) as rotating at high speed, or the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 7
28 can be made easy to perform an effect that can appear to be rotating independently.

FIG. 376 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A 721, and FIG. 376 (b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 376 (c) is a top view of the first rotary member A 721 in the direction of the arrow D in FIG.
FIG. 376 (d) is a front view of 1st rotation member A721, FIG. 376 (d) is arrow D of FIG. 376 (c).
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b) show the initial state of the first rotary member A721, and FIGS. 376 (c) and 376 (d) show the shell A 722 of the first rotary member A 721 in the initial state The state (first state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise from the top view is illustrated.

FIG. 377 (a) is a front view of the first rotation member A 721, and FIG. 377 (b) is a front view of FIG.
Fig. 377 (c) is a top view of the first rotating member A 721 in the direction of the arrow D in Fig. 7 (a).
FIG. 377 (d) is a front view of the first rotating member A 721, and FIG. 377 (d) is an arrow D of FIG. 377 (c).
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

In FIGS. 377 (a) and 377 (b), the shell portion A 722 of the first rotating member A 721 is the first.
FIG. 377 shows a state (second state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state.
FIG. 3 (c) and FIG. 377 (d) show a state (third state) after the shell portion A 722 of the first rotating member A 721 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the second state.

FIG. 378 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A 721, and FIG. 378 (b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 378 (c) is a top view of the first rotating member A 721 in the direction of the arrow D in FIG.
FIG. 378 (d) is a front view of the first rotation member A 721, and FIG. 378 (d) is an arrow D of FIG. 378 (c).
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

In FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (b), the shell A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the third.
A state (fourth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state is illustrated in FIG. 378.
FIG. 3 (c) and FIG. 378 (d) show a state (a fifth state) after the shell A 722 of the first rotating member A 721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the fourth state in top view.

FIG. 379 (a) is a front view of the first rotating member A 721, and FIG. 379 (b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 379 (c) is a top view of the first rotating member A 721 as viewed in the direction of arrow D of FIG.
FIG. 379 (d) is an arrow D of FIG. 379 (c).
It is a top view of 1st rotation member A721 in direction view.

In FIGS. 379 (a) and 379 (b), the shell portion A722 of the first rotating member A721 is the fifth.
A state (sixth state) after rotating 45 degrees counterclockwise in top view from the state is illustrated in FIG. 379.
FIG. 3 (c) and FIG. 379 (d) illustrate a state (a seventh state) after the shell A 722 of the first rotating member A 721 has been rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise from the sixth state in top view.

When the shell portion A 722 is rotated 45 degrees counterclockwise in the top view from the seventh state, the first rotating member A 7
21 returns to the initial state. That is, in FIG. 376 to FIG. 379, one section (one cycle) of the rotation of the first rotating member A 721 is illustrated.

In the initial state of the first rotating member A 721 (see FIG. 376 (a)), the shell portion A 72
The side to be visually recognized in a front view of 2 is described as a front shell A 722F, and the opposite side is a back shell A 722B. Similarly, in the initial state of the first rotating member A 721, the central rotating member A7 is
The side which is visually recognized in a front view of the part 24 will be described as a member front face A 724 F, and the opposite side thereof as a member back face A 724 B.

Note that FIG. 376 (a), FIG. 376 (c), FIG. 377 (a), FIG. 377 (c), FIG.
In (a), FIG. 378 (c), FIG. 379 (a) and FIG.
Optical axis KJ of the LED constituting the light emitting means A 715a of FIG.
Fig. 376 (b), Fig. 376 (d), Fig. 377 (b), Fig. 377 (d) and Fig. 378 (b),
In FIGS. 378 (d), 379 (b) and 379 (d), a predetermined virtual plane VS is illustrated. The optical axis KJ passes on the virtual plane VS.

Further, in FIG. 376 (d), FIG. 377 (d), FIG. 378 (d) and FIG. 379 (d), arrows HL and VL schematically showing the reflection direction of light are illustrated. Arrow HL indicates the central rotation member A7
The light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the left and right sides of 24 represents the direction in which the light is reflected by the shell A 722 and travels, and the arrow VL is from the light emitting means A 715a disposed above the central rotating member A 724 The emitted light is reflected by the central rotation member A 724 and represents the traveling direction.

As shown in FIGS. 376 (d), 377 (d), 378 (d) and 379 (d),
The direction of the arrow VL changes by one rotation clockwise in top view, corresponding to one rotation of the first rotating member A 721 counterclockwise in top view. That is, in the present embodiment, the central rotation member A7
The light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the light source 24 is a central rotation member A 724.
As a result, it is possible to advance in the radial direction of a circle centered on the rotation axis of the first rotating member A 721, and to change the direction in the opposite direction to the rotating direction of the first rotating member A 721.

This is difficult to realize, for example, in a configuration in which the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell portion A 722 or the central rotation member A 724. For example, when the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the shell portion A 722, the change in the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means changes in the same rotation direction as the rotation direction of the first rotating member A 721.

Further, for example, since the member front surface A 724 F of the central rotation member A 724 always faces the front side when the first rotation member A 721 is rotated, the member front surface A 724 F and the member back surface A 724 B
In the case where the light emitting means is disposed, the change in the traveling direction of the light irradiated in the normal direction of the surface does not become the change around the rotation axis of the first rotating member A 721 (the rotation having the rotation axis in the front and back direction) Change in direction).

Therefore, compared with the case where the light emitting means is disposed on the side surface of the first rotating member A 721 to perform the light emission effect, it is possible to execute the unexpected light emission effect. For example, as the rotational direction of the change in the traveling direction of the light and the rotational direction of the first rotary member A 721 are opposite, it is possible for the player to rotate as fast as compared to the actual rotational speed. It can make you feel.

As shown in FIGS. 376 to 379, the central rotation member A 724 is also rotated with the rotation of the first rotation member A 721, but the surface viewed from the player is limited to the member front surface A 724F. Therefore, even if the fastening screw for fastening and fixing the central rotation member A 724 is exposed on the back side (see FIG. 368), it is possible to prevent the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player.

That is, since the member back surface A 724 B of the central rotation member A 724 can be configured not as an area to be viewed by the player but as an area intended for another purpose, its appearance (in this embodiment, the light It is possible to select a configuration that is easier to achieve the purpose of reflecting). For example, in the present embodiment, by intentionally exposing the fastening screw, it is possible to cause light reflection utilizing the gloss of the member surface of the fastening screw.

In addition, the aspect of the member surface of a fastening screw can be set arbitrarily. For example, the member surface of the fastening screw may be painted black to make it easy to make a shadow, or the member surface of the fastening screw may be painted colored to reflect the color, or LED may be used to fasten the fastening screw A light emitting means such as may be attached.

The action of the light irradiated to the first rotating member A 721 will be described. In the following description, FIG. 364 is referred to as appropriate. The electric decoration substrate A 715 including the light emitting means A 715 a for irradiating the first rotating member A 721 with light is arranged to constitute each side of the pentagon as described above, and the directions orthogonal to each side The optical axis KJ is disposed along the
The electric decoration substrate A 715 (see FIG. 364) disposed above the first rotation member A 721 will be described first, and the electric decoration substrate A 715 disposed at the left and right of the first rotation member A 721 will be described later.

The light is emitted downward from the light emitting means A 715 a to the electric decoration substrate A 715 disposed above the first rotating member A 721. This light passes through the light passage recess A 722 a and reaches the central rotation member A 724 regardless of the state of the first rotation member A 721. That is, the first rotating member A7
By irradiating the light from the light emitting means A 715 a disposed on the electric decoration substrate A 715 disposed above the light source 21, the light can be continuously applied to the central rotation member A 724 at all times.

In the light emitting means A 715 a, where three LEDs are arranged in parallel in the horizontal direction, the amount of light reaching the central rotation member A 724 may change depending on the state of the first rotation member A 721. That is,
In the initial state (see FIG. 376 (b)), since the light passage recess A 722a is formed in the same direction as the direction in which the light emitting means A 715a is arranged in parallel, the light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A 715a is also rotated centrally. It is easy to reach the member A 724.

On the other hand, in the second state (see FIG. 377 (b)), the light passing recess A 722a does not extend in the direction in which the light emitting means A 715a is arranged in parallel, and light emitted from the left and right light emitting means A 715a is a light passing recess Among the light emitted from the electric decoration substrate A 715 disposed above the central rotation member A 724, the light reaching the central rotation member A 724 is mainly the light emitted from the central light emission means A 715 a because it is hard to enter the A 722 a. Become. Therefore, the difference in the state of the first rotation member A 721 can be associated with the difference in the light emission intensity of the central rotation member A 724.

In this aspect, in the initial state and the fourth state in which the member front surface A 724 F of the central rotation member A 724 is easily visible in a front view, the electric decoration substrate A 71 disposed above the central rotation member A 724
5 to maximize the intensity of light emitted from the light source 5 and reaching the central rotary member A 724
In the second state and the sixth state where it is difficult to visually recognize the front surface A724F of 24 members in a front view, the intensity of light irradiated from the electric decoration substrate A715 disposed above the central rotation member A724 and reaching the central rotation member A724 is minimized It can be done. That is, the legibility of the central rotation member A 724 in a front view and the intensity of light reaching the central rotation member A 724 can be changed correspondingly.

The electric decoration substrate A 715 disposed on the left and right of the first rotation member A 721 includes a light emitting means A 715 a in which the optical axis KJ is disposed on a plane (virtual plane VS) passing through the rotation axis of the shell A 722. Light is emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a toward the first rotating member A 721.
Depending on the state of the rotating member A 721, the places where the light reaches differ.

That is, the state in which the shell portion A 722 is disposed between the central rotation member A 724 and the light emitting means A 715 a (the initial state (see FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b)) or the fourth state (FIG. 378 (a)
And FIG. 378 (b))), the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a has a shell portion A 72.
2 and will not reach the central rotation member A 724.

The shell portion A 722 is curved in such a manner that the width of the shell portion A 722 becomes smaller toward the radially outward direction at the outer peripheral edge portion, and the connection portion A 722 connects the edges of the opening of the shell portion A 722 by an irregular arch bridge.
b. Therefore, even in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A 721, part of the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a to the shell A 722 is a curve of the outer peripheral edge of the shell A 722 or an arch of the connecting portion A 722 b. Can be made to advance toward the player by reflecting on the curvature of.

In addition, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A 721, the shell A 722 reflects the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a toward the player (reflected along the arrow HL) Since the posture is inclined, it is possible to highlight the difference between the light quantity of light traveling to the player in the initial state and the state slightly deviated from the fourth state and the light quantity in the other states. That is, in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A 721, the central rotating member A 724 is visually recognized as dark instantaneously (pulsewise), and in the state slightly deviated from the initial state and the fourth state, the central rotating member A 724 is It is possible to execute a light emission effect of switching to a state in which the image is visually recognized to be bright.

On the other hand, in the state between the initial state and the fourth state in the rotational displacement of the first rotating member A 721, all of the optical axes of the light emitting means A 715 a and the shell A 722 do not overlap. Light reaches the central rotation member A 724.

Thus, the light emitting means A of the electric decoration substrate A 715 disposed on the left and right of the first rotating member A 721
A state in which the light emitted from 715a reaches the central rotation member A 724;
It is possible to switch between the state where it does not reach 24 and the state where the first rotary member A 721 is in the state. In this way, it is possible to execute a light-emitting effect that causes the light reaching the central rotation member A 724 to be viewed as flickering without controlling the light-emitting mode (for example, the blinking mode) of the light-emitting means A 715a.

For example, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a can be viewed as blinking in different lighting or extinguishing times by changing the rotation speed of the first rotating member A 721 while maintaining the lighting state It can be visually recognized as a light emission effect with different blinking cycles).

In this case, when the central rotary member A 724 can not be followed as a still image, and the central rotary member A 724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding a speed (for example, 20 [rps]) at which an afterimage occurs While the central rotating member A 724 is viewed as if it were stopped regardless of the speed, the blinking period of the light emitted to the central rotating member A 724 can be made different depending on the speed.

That is, as the rotational speed of the first rotating member A 721 is higher, the interval until the first rotating member A 721 reaches the initial state or the fourth state can be shortened. Since the period in which the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a) disposed on the left and right of the rotating member A 724 can be shortened, the blinking period of the light emitted to the central rotating member A 724 can be shortened. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first rotating member A7
By changing the rotation speed of 21, it is possible to perform an effect of changing the blinking cycle of the light irradiated to the central rotation member A 724.

In the present embodiment, as illustrated in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A 721, the central rotating member A 724 is in a state in which the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715a and the shell A 722 are opposed to each other. In the rotational axis direction view (or the optical axis direction view of the light emitting means A 715 a), the longitudinal direction is configured to overlap the shell portion A 722. In the present embodiment, the central rotation member A
The longitudinal direction of 724 is defined as a direction parallel to the member front surface A 724 F and the member back surface A 724 B (for example, the arrow L-R direction, the arrow U-D direction, or the direction orthogonal to the arrow F-B in FIG. 376 (a)) , The direction of the short side connects the member front A 724 F and the member back A 724 B (FIG. 37).
6 (b) in the direction of arrow F-B).

In other words, in the initial state or the fourth state of the first rotating member A 721, the longitudinal direction of the central rotating member A 724 is the shell portion A 72 as viewed in the rotational axis direction (or the optical axis direction of the light emitting means A 715 a).
It will be in the position where it fits inside the thickness of 2. As a result, the light shielding effect of the shell A 722 in the initial state and the fourth state of the first rotating member A 721 can be improved. That is, since the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a can be easily prevented from reaching the central rotary member A 724 by shielding the light by the shell A 722, for example, the light from the light emitting means A 715 a is the shell A 722 The central rotating member A 724 can facilitate configuring the situation not to be illuminated.

When the first rotating member A 721 is rotated at a constant speed, the total (proportion) of the time during which the first rotating member A 721 is maintained in the initial state or the fourth state with respect to the time during which the rotation is continued is the rotational speed It is the same regardless of. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the brightness of the first rotating member A 721 visually recognized by the player from changing by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A 721. That is, when the first rotating member A 721 is rotated at high speed, it can be avoided that the first rotating member A 721 is visually recognized as dark.

In the present embodiment, with the light emitting means A 715 a lit, the first rotating member A 72
By rotating 1, it is possible to change the blinking cycle of the light reaching the central rotation member A 724. According to this, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a circuit for causing the light emitting means A 715 a to blink while achieving the same effect as the light emitting means A 715 a itself. Therefore, downsizing of the electric decoration substrate A 715 can be achieved.

As described above, light emitting means A 715 a for emitting light from above the central rotation member A 724,
The light emitting means A 715 a for emitting light from the left and right of the central rotation member A 724 is the first rotation member A.
It is comprised so that how to illuminate the 1st rotation member A721 with respect to the state of 721 may differ. Therefore, by separately controlling, it is possible to execute the light emission effects exemplified below.

For example, the initial state of the first rotating member A 721 (see FIGS. 376 (a) and 376 (b))
Or in the fourth state (see FIGS. 378 (a) and 378 (b)), the central rotating member A7
The light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the light source 24 is turned off, and the light emitting means A 715 a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724 is controlled to light or blink to make the central rotating member A 724 appear dark A light effect can be performed to illuminate the A 722 brightly.

Further, for example, only the light emitting means A 715 a (the light emitting means A 715 a at the center of the light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the central rotating member A 724 is lit or blinked, and the light emitting means A 715 a disposed at the left and right of the central rotating member A 724 is extinguished By performing control, it is possible to illuminate the central rotation member A 724 brightly, and to execute light effects that cause the shell A 722 to be viewed dark.

Also, for example, light is irradiated from both directions in the left and right direction, but light is irradiated only from one direction (upper side) in the vertical direction (reflected from the central rotation member A 724 to the front side every half rotation) A complex light-emitting effect can be performed by utilizing the difference between the case and the case where the light is reflected to the back side. For example, the light emitting means A 715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotation member A 724 emits blue light, and the light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the central rotation member A 724 emits red light. For the player visually recognized from the front, switching between a situation visually recognized with blue light and a situation visually recognized as a mixture of blue light and red light for each half rotation of the first rotating member A 721 Can.

In this case, it is possible to arbitrarily change the cycle in which the appearance of the light changes by changing the rotational speed of the first rotating member A 721 while executing control to continuously turn on without blinking the light. .

An example of stop control of the first rotating member A 721 will be described. As described above, the driving force for rotationally driving the first rotating member A 721 is transmitted through the lower transmission path DL1 (see FIG. 375 (b)), and the large diameter gear LG1 disposed in the lower transmission path DL1. Since the detection target piece A773 (see FIG. 374) is detected by the second detection sensor A 753 at intervals of 90 degrees, the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) rotates the first rotary member A 721 every 90 degrees. The occurrence of rotation can be determined. The state of the first rotating member A 721 can be determined by dividing this determination for each rotation direction of the first rotating member A 721, accumulating the result, and separately determining the accumulated result.

That is, for example, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (positive direction) in which the shell A722 rotates counterclockwise in top view, the detection target piece A773 is the second detection sensor A75.
Each time it is detected to be 3, while adding 1 to the value of the cumulative counter, when the drive motor AMT2 is rotationally driven in the rotation direction (reverse direction) in which the shell A 722 rotates clockwise in top view, Every time A773 is detected by the second detection sensor A753, the value of the accumulation counter is decremented by one.

If the value of the cumulative counter is a multiple of 0 or 4, it is in the initial state (0 or 4).
If it is multiple of 1), it is the second state, if it is (multiple of 0 or 4) +2, it is the fourth state, and if it is (multiple of 0 or 4) +3, it is the sixth state Can.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, even when the rotation angle of the drive motor AMT2 can not be specified, the stop state of the drive motor AMT2 is determined by determining the numerical value of the cumulative counter, and the initial state, The first rotating member A72 in any of the two states, the fourth state or the sixth state
You can stop one.

Therefore, effects can be performed such that the posture in which the first rotating member A 721 stops has different meanings. For example, it can be used as an effect means for informing the difference in the jackpot expectation, informing the information of time (for example, the stop attitude changes every two hours).

In the present embodiment, the case where the detection target pieces A 773 are formed at four locations at equal intervals has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The arrangement of the detection target piece A 773 may be non-uniform, may be formed at three places, at a plurality of five or more places, or may be formed at one place.

FIG. 380 (a) is a front view of the effect unit A 710, and FIG. 380 (b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 380 (c) is a top view of the effect unit A 710 as viewed in the direction of arrow D in 0 (a).
These are front views of effect unit A710, and FIG. 380 (d) is an arrow D of FIG. 380 (c).
It is a top view of production unit A710 in direction view.

FIG. 381 (a) is a front view of the rendering unit A 710, and FIG. 381 (b) is a front view of FIG.
FIG. 381 (c) is a top view of the effect unit A 710 as viewed in the direction of the arrow D in 1 (a).
These are front views of effect unit A710, and FIG. 381 (d) is an arrow D of FIG. 381 (c).
It is a top view of production unit A710 in direction view.

In FIGS. 380 and 381, the state of rotation of the rotating body A 720 is illustrated in time series. That is, the first rotation member A 721 is driven in the rotation direction to rotate counterclockwise in top view, as shown in FIG.
a) and FIG. 380 (b), the initial state of the first rotary member A 721 is shown in FIGS. 380 (c) and 380 (d), and the first state of the first rotary member A 721 is shown in FIG. (B
And the second state of the first rotating member A 721 is the first state in FIGS. 381 (c) and 381 (d).
The third state of the rotating member A 721 is illustrated respectively.

When the first rotating member A 721 is driven in the rotating direction to rotate counterclockwise in a top view, as described above, the driving force is transmitted through the upper transmission path UL1, so the second rotating member A 728 also performs the first rotation. It reversely rotates at the same rotation angle as the member A 721.

That is, in FIGS. 380 (a) and 380 (b), the initial state of the second rotating member A728 in which the rod-like extended portion A728a is disposed on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A721 is illustrated.
c) and in FIG. 380 (d), the rod-like extension portion A 728 a is rotated clockwise in the top view from the initial state.
FIGS. 381 (a) and 381 show the first state of the second rotating member A 728 rotated by 5 degrees.
In (b), the rod-shaped extending portion A 728 a is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in a top view from the first state.
The second state of the rotating member A 728 is illustrated, and in FIGS. 381 (c) and 381 (d), the second rotating member A 728 is rotated 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the second state.
The third state of is illustrated.

In addition, since the pair of rod-like extended portions A 728 a are formed in a substantially rotationally symmetric shape, the second rotating member A 728 is returned to the initial state by rotating 45 degrees clockwise in top view from the third state. Do.

In addition, in FIG. 380 (b), FIG. 380 (d), FIG. 381 (b) and FIG. 381 (d), the annular front cover A711 and the annular rear cover A 714 are schematic views (simplified figure ) Is illustrated by an imaginary line.

In FIGS. 380 (a), 380 (c), 381 (a) and 381 (c), the outer shape of the electric decoration substrate A 715 is illustrated by an imaginary line, and FIGS. 380 (b) and 380 (d). ), Figure 381
In (b) and FIG. 381 (d), a virtual plane VS is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 380 and 381, the second rotating member A 728 is rotated by the first
It passes through the optical axis of the light emitted from the electric decoration substrates A 715 (substrates provided two by two on the left and right) disposed on the left and right sides of the rotating member A 721. Therefore, as in the case of the first rotating member A721, the advancing mode of the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a of the electric decoration substrate A 715 is the second rotating member A7.
It can be changed corresponding to 28 rotations.

Here, unlike the case where the shell portion A 722 of the first rotating member A 721 is formed of a resin material having a low light transmittance, the second rotating member A 728 is formed of a light transmitting resin material. It does not shield the light when passing through the optical axis of the light beam, but acts to produce a change in the light refraction mode and the light color. In the present embodiment, since the second rotating member A 728 is formed of a blue resin material, the light reaching the first rotating member A 721 is colored in blue when the second rotating member A 728 passes the optical axis. It can be changed to (a color mixed with blue).

In the present embodiment, the second rotating member A 728 is formed in a rod shape extending in the direction along the rotation axis and bent along the circumferential direction of rotation, and light emitting means A 715 a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724 It is configured not to overlap with all of the optical axes of.

For example, in the state shown in FIG. 380 (d), the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715 a disposed on the electric decoration board A 715 disposed on the left and right upper sides of the central rotation member A 724 overlaps the second rotation member A 728 Although the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715 a disposed on the electric decoration substrate A 715 does not overlap with the second rotating member A 728, in the state shown in FIG. 381 (d), the central rotating member A
The light axis of the light emitting means A 715 a disposed on the electric decoration substrate A 715 disposed on the left and right lower sides of the 724 and the second rotating member A 728 overlap, and the light emitting means A disposed on the other electric decoration substrate A 715
The optical axis 715a does not overlap the second rotating member A728. Note that Fig. 380 (b) and Fig. 3
In the state shown in 81 (b), the optical axis of any light emitting means A 715a is the second rotating member A72.
8 is configured not to overlap.

Thus, as compared with the case where the optical axes of all the light emitting means A 715 a arranged on the left and right of the central rotation member A 724 and the second rotational member A 728 are switched whether they overlap or not overlap, the central rotation member A 724 It is possible to increase the types of light modes to reach. That is, the second
The mode in which the light passing through the rotating member A 728 reaches the central rotating member A 724, the mode in which only the light reaching from the left and right upper side passes through the second rotating member A 728, and the light reaching only from the left and right lower side the second rotating member It can be increased to the aspect passing A728.

In this case, the light emitting means A 715 a where the optical axis overlaps with the second rotary member A 728 is turned on, and the light emitting means A 715 a where the optical axis does not overlap with the second rotary member A 728 is extinguished. Turns off the light emitting means A 715 a overlapping the second rotating member A 72
The central rotating member A 724 is turned on depending on whether the light emitting means A 715 a does not overlap the light axis 8 with the light axis.
Can change the appearance of That is, the central rotation member A 724 is a second rotation member A 72.
It is possible to switch whether to emit light in a mode in which eight colors are mixed or to emit light regardless of the color of the second rotating member A 728.

In addition, since the direction of the optical axis overlapping with the second rotating member A 728 can be changed from the left and right upper side to the left and right lower side by the arrangement of the second rotating member A 728, similarly, the second rotating member A7
It is possible to switch the portion of the central rotation member A 724 that emits light in a manner in which 28 colors are mixed.

In addition, as illustrated in FIGS. 380 and 381, in the top view, the second rotating member A7
28 is configured so as not to overlap with the light passage recess A 722a. As a result, the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the central rotation member A 724 does not depend on the arrangement of the second rotation member A 728, and does not pass through the second rotation member A 728. A72
Head to 2a.

Therefore, for example, only the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the central rotation member A 724 is turned on, and the light emission means A 715 disposed on the left and right of the central rotation member A 724
The configuration in which a is turned off can prevent the color of light reaching the central rotation member A 724 from being changed by the second rotation member A 728.

If this is to be realized by the light emitting means A 715 a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A 724, the light emitting means A 715 a is turned on at a timing when the second rotating member A 728 does not intersect the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715 a. It is necessary to control to turn off the light emitting means A 715 a at the timing when the light intersects the optical axis (control synchronized with the rotation of the second rotating member A 728), but in this embodiment, it is disposed above the central rotating member A 724 Such control can be made unnecessary by the action of the light emitting means A 715 a.

The second rotary member A 728 partially hides the central rotary member A 724 from the player's view in a posture in which the member front surface A 724 F of the central rotary member A 724 does not face front and the rendering function of the central rotary member A 724 is lowered. As shown in FIG. 381 (a), the light refracted by the second rotating member A 728 is easily transmitted to the player. Thereby, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the rendering function of the rotating body A 720 during the continuation of rotation.

Here, since the rod-like extended portion A 728 a of the second rotating member A 728 is formed in a rotationally symmetric shape, the shape (outer shape) in the front view is switched at an interval of 180 degrees. That is, FIG.
The shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A 728 shown in FIG. 1 (a) is equivalent to the shape (outer shape) of the second rotating member A 728 rotated 180 degrees from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a).

On the other hand, the first rotary member A 721 rotating inward of the second rotary member A 728 is not in the same state at an interval of 180 degrees. That is, when the first rotating member A 721 is rotated 180 degrees from the second state (see FIG. 377 (a)) shown in FIG. 381 (a), the sixth state (see FIG. 379 (a)) is achieved. In the present embodiment, as described above, the second rotating member A728 is the first rotating member A721.
In the posture (see FIG. 381 (a)) arranged before and after the first rotating member A 721 is partially hidden by the second rotating member A 728, the first rotating member A7 is
It can be made difficult to determine whether 21 is in the second state or the sixth state.

Then, from the state where the second rotating member A 728 is arranged as shown in FIG. 381 (a),
If the first rotating member A 721 is in the second state (see FIG. 377 (a)) while the second rotating member A 728 and the first rotating member A 721 are synchronously rotated 45 degrees, the first rotation is performed. The light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the member A 721 is the central rotation member A.
The direction reflected by 724 is the direction toward the front side (see the arrow VL in FIG. 377 (d)), and while the central rotation member A 724 is visually recognized brightly by the player, the first rotation member A 721 is
Is the sixth state (see FIG. 379 (a)), the direction in which light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a disposed above the first rotating member A 721 is reflected by the central rotating member A 724 is the back surface In the direction (see the arrow VL in FIG. 379 (d)) facing the side, the central rotation member A7
24 is viewed dark by the player.

In other words, changing the appearance of the first rotating member A 721 (brightness of the central rotating member A 724) while making the external shape of the second rotating member A 728 to be visually recognized equal while changing the light emitting means A
It can be generated without changing the lighting mode of 715a. In this case,
When the second rotating member A 728 is stopped in the state of FIG. 381 (a) by associating the difference in whether the central rotating member A 724 looks bright or dark with, for example, the level of the jackpot expectation of the special symbol lottery In addition, the sense of expectation for the subsequent operation mode can be enhanced, and the power of attention to the rotating body A 720 can be improved.

Also, in this case, while the second rotating member A 728 and the first rotating member A 721 are synchronously rotated 90 degrees from the state in which the second rotating member A 728 is disposed as illustrated in FIG. 381 (a). The member front surface A 724 F of the central rotation member A 724 rotates 90 degrees from the upward position to the front-back orientation. Along with this, the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728
The direction of the light reflected through the central rotation member A 724 gradually changes from the vertical direction to the front and back direction (the synchronization angle with the rotation angle of the first rotation member A 721 until just before the rotation angle of the light reaches 90 degrees). On the other hand, when the rotation angles of the first rotation member A 721 and the second rotation member A 728 reach 90 degrees, the member front surface A 724 F is directed in the front-rear direction (the inclination with respect to the optical axis KJ from above disappears) And the longitudinal component of the direction of light reflected via the central rotation member A 724 is close to 0, and the light reflection direction returns in the vertical direction.

Thus, in synchronization with the rotation of the first rotary member A 721 from the second state or the sixth state, light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a disposed above the central rotary member A 724 is rotated by the central rotary member A 724. It is possible to gradually increase the forward and backward components of light when it is reflected. As a result, as the rotation time of the first rotating member A 721 becomes longer, the first rotating member A
Since it becomes easy to determine whether the 721 is in the second state or the sixth state, the first rotating member A72 can be used not only at the moment when the first rotating member A721 starts rotating but also after it has been rotated.
The attention to 1 can be maintained high.

In the present embodiment, from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), the second rotating member A 728 is stopped by driving the rotating body A 720 in a direction in which the first rotating member A 721 rotates clockwise in top view. It is also possible to rotate the first rotating member A 721 as it is. In this case,
The light (light along the arrow VL) reflected by the central rotation member A 724 easily passes through the second rotation member A 728 and reaches the player's eyes, so that the central rotation member A 724 is easily visible in color.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), the posture of the first rotary member A 721 can be configured with two 180 degree intervals, and from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a), it is synchronized with the rotation of the second rotary member A 728. Since the first rotation member A 721 can be configured to rotate and the second rotation member A 728 can be maintained from the state shown in FIG. 381 (a) and only the first rotation member A 721 is rotated, A total of four ways of showing can be executed as the way of showing the rotating member A 724 to the player.

The light reflected through the central rotation member A 724 not only functions as changing the brightness of the central rotation member A 724 itself, but also has a function of illuminating a member disposed around the central rotation member A 724.

For example, when light is reflected to the left front side through the central rotation member A 724 (FIG.
d) see as the light that brightly illuminates the left channel (the channel configured on the left side with respect to the center of the horizontal width of the gaming area) in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13 When the light is reflected to the right front side through the central rotation member A 724 (see FIG.
FIG. 376 (refer to FIG. 376 (d)) is a right channel (in the right of the center of the horizontal width of the game area in the game area formed on the front side of the game board A13) It can be used as a light that illuminates the right (the flow path through which the ball fired at the right strike passes).

Also, for example, when light is reflected to the left back side via the central rotation member A 724 (see FIG. 3).
78 (d)) can be used as light to illuminate the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, etc. arranged on the left of the front side of the third symbol display 81 brightly, and the central rotation member A724 can be used. In the case where light is reflected to the right back side via the first direction (see FIG. 379 (d)), the first operation unit A400C, A4 disposed on the front right side of the third symbol display device 81
It can be used as light to illuminate 00D etc. brightly. Thus, the central rotating member A7
Since the light reflected via the light source 24 can be switched in the direction toward the different members, the player's line of sight can be guided to the different members (locations) by switching the light direction.

Further, the second rotating member A 728 is configured to have a vertical length that can divide the inner region of the annular front cover A 711 in the front view into right and left (see FIG. 381 (a)). Thereby, in a state where the second rotating member A 728 is stopped, for example, the rendering unit A 710
Is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 321), the display area of the third symbol display device 81 viewed through the inner region of the annular front cover A711 is divided into right and left It can be divided. That is, the second rotary member A 728 can be used not only as a member that performs the effect by the rotation operation, but also as a member that divides the display area of the display device when it is stopped.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the rotation direction of the drive gear AMG2 is counterclockwise in top view, the first rotation member A721 can be rotated while the second rotation member A728 is stopped. It is possible to execute an effect of rotating the first rotating member A 721 in a state where the display area of the display device is divided.

In the present embodiment, the second rotation member A 728 is configured to rotate only when the first rotation member A 721 is driven in the counterclockwise rotation direction in top view, and reversely rotates (first rotation member A7
The second rotating member A 728 is stopped in the driving mode in which the rotation direction 21 is the rotation direction in the clockwise direction in the top view).

In other words, in one rotation direction, the function of arbitrarily changing the flickering period of the light reaching the central rotation member A 724 by passing the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715 a where the first rotation member A 721 is arranged left and right In the other rotation direction, in addition to the action of changing the flickering cycle, the central rotary member A7 by passing the second rotary member A728 through the optical axis disposed on the left and right
A change in the light emission aspect (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching 24 can be produced.

Thus, the visibility of the light emission effect can be changed by changing the direction of the rotational drive. Since the frequency at which the second rotation member A 728 passes the optical axis depends on the rotation speed of the second rotation member A 728, the variation of the change in the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of the light reaching the central rotation member A 724 is It depends on the resolution (the number of switches) of the rotational speed of the two-rotation member A728.

The rotational speed of the second rotating member A 728 naturally has an allowable limit, and this allowable limit defines the limit of the variation of the change of the light emission aspect, but in the present embodiment, the rotational directions are made different. Since whether the second rotating member A 728 operates or stops can be switched, the light emission mode (color, width, etc.) of light reaching the central rotating member A 724 if the rotation direction is different even if the rotation speed is the same. Can be different.

Therefore, when the first rotation member A 721 or the second rotation member A 728 rotates only in one direction, or when the influence on light does not change even if the rotation directions are different (for example, the second rotation member A 7
When there is no 28 or only the rotation direction of the first rotating member A 721 changes, the second rotating member A 72
Since the change aspect of the visibility of the light which reaches central rotation member A 724 can be doubled in comparison with the case where rotation is maintained etc. 8), the variation of the appearance of central rotation member A 724 is increased. be able to.

Details of how the central rotation member A 724 looks will be described. As described above, the central rotation member A 724 maintains the posture in which the member front face A 724 F faces the front side, and the member front face A 724 F
Repeat the operation of inverting the top and bottom of F.

Therefore, when the central rotation member A 724 can not be tracked as a still image, and the central rotation member A 724 is driven to rotate at a speed exceeding a speed (for example, 20 [rps]) causing an afterimage, the central rotation member As viewed from the front, A724 is viewed as if the inverted shape of the front of the member A724F is combined. That is, in this embodiment, the central rotation member A 724 formed in a star shape having five corners is visually recognized as a star shape having ten corners.

In the present embodiment, the member front surface A 724 F of the central rotation member A 724 is formed to have an asymmetrical shape in the vertical direction, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the member front surface A 724 F of the central rotation member A 724 may be formed into a vertically symmetrical shape. In this case, since there is no difference between the shape visually recognized as an afterimage during rotation (the shape in which the vertically inverted shape is united) and the shape of the member front surface A 724 F, it seems as if the central rotation member A 724 is stopped. Can be made visible.

Further, for example, a characteristic shape or figure is formed at one of the upper and lower sides bordering on the rotation axis of the central rotation member A 724, and another concept is recalled by inverting and combining the shape and the figure. You may.

For example, a central rotational member A7 is drawn by drawing an equilateral triangular figure on the member front surface A724F in a mode in which one side overlaps the rotational shaft in a front view above the rotation shaft of the central rotation member A724.
When turning 24, the rhombic figure can be made to be visible by uniting the equilateral triangle at the top and bottom, and the member front face A724F in such a manner that the lower end portion overlaps the rotation axis in front view above the rotation axis of the central rotation member A724. By drawing the hiragana letter "tsu" (figure) in advance, when the central rotation member A 724 is rotated, the inverted shape merges up and down to make the figure "3" letter (figure) visible be able to. In this way, it is possible to execute an unexpected presentation.

An example of the effect using the second operation unit A 700 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 382 is a front view of an annular front cover A711 and a rotating body A720. Figure 382.
In the state where the rendering unit A 710 is arranged at the overhanging position (see FIG. 321), that is, the third
A state in which the annular front cover A711 and the rotating body A720 are arranged on the front side of the symbol display device 81 is illustrated.

In FIG. 382, the second state of the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728 (FIG. 381).
(See a)), the third symbol display device 81 is provided on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728 and in the area inside the annular front cover A 711 (inside the circular opening). The image displayed by is illustrated.

That is, on the third symbol display device 81, the second rotating member A 728 V on the rotating display is displayed. Thus, even in a state where the second rotating member A 728 is stopped, the player can visually recognize as if the second rotating member A 728 is rotating.

In addition, a means to display 2nd rotation member A728V on a display is not limited to the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81 arrange | positioned at the back side of 2nd rotation member A728. For example, the transmission liquid crystal may be disposed on the front side of the second rotation member A 728, and the transmission liquid crystal may indicate that the second rotation member A 728 rotates. The front side or the back side of the second rotation member A 728 An illumination plate may be disposed on the display, and the figure formed on the illumination plate and the image of the third symbol display device 81 may be combined to form a visible second rotary member A728V on the display. The second rotating member A 728 V on the display may be displayed by a combination of a plurality of display means including the means.

When light is emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a of the electric decoration substrate A 715 in this state, the player anticipates the aspect of the light effect in the rotating state of the second rotating member A 728 but the stopped state of the second rotating member A 728 Since light rendition can be performed in the aspect in, the unexpected high rendition can be performed.

Further, this is not limited to the state in which the rendering unit A 710 of the second operation unit A 700 is stopped at the extended position, and the same applies to vertical movement of the rendering unit A 710. For example, the rendering unit A 710 is configured such that the third symbol display device 81 can not be viewed through the left and right positions of the rotating body A 720 at the retracted position (FIG. 3).
20) On the other hand, at the overhang position, the third symbol display device 8 is indicated through the left and right positions of the rotating body A 720.
1 can be visually recognized (see FIG. 321).

That is, in response to the effect that the effect unit A 710 moves upward toward the extended position, the annular front cover A 711 is on the left and right sides of the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728.
The display area of the third symbol display device 81 visually recognized through the inward (inside of the circular opening) area of the symbol gradually widens. By displaying the second rotating member A 728 V on the display as described above in the area of the third symbol display device 81 visually recognized in this manner, the effect unit A 710 is operated to move upward while the second rotating member A 728 is stopped. When the player controls the second rotating member A
It is possible to execute an effect that makes it feel that the 728 is starting to rotate before long (it can be performed using the illusion of the eye).

At the time of the raising operation of the effect unit A 710 in this case, the outer shape of the rotating body A 720 that allows the player to visually recognize the case where the second rotating member A 728 is actually rotating and the case where the second rotating member A 728 is stopped. In the case where light is emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a while the second rotating member A 728 is actually rotating and when the second rotating member A 728 is stopped. It is possible to change the light emission mode (light reflection mode) of the rotating body A 720 that the player visually recognizes. In this way, it is possible to execute a highly unexpected presentation.

Next, a twenty-third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second rotating member A 728 passes the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715a is described. However, in the twenty-third embodiment, the member passing the optical axis KJ is in the front-rear direction The slide member A2729 moves in parallel. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 383 is a schematic top view schematically showing a first rotating member A2721 in a twenty-third embodiment. As shown in FIG. 383, the slide member A 2729 is configured to be slidably moved between the rear side position intersecting the virtual plane VS and the front side position not intersecting the virtual plane VS.

Therefore, even when the slide member A2729 is disposed at a position intersecting the optical axis KJ at the rear side position, the intersection with the optical axis KJ can be eliminated by moving to the front side position, The way of the light reaching the one rotation member A2721 can be changed. Since the movement of the slide member A2729 is a slide movement in the front-rear direction, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who visually recognizes the slide member A2729 to recognize that the slide member A2729 is moving.

That is, an effect aspect of the first rotating member A2721 in the case where the LED etc. constituting the light emitting means A 715a are lighted while maintaining (while leaving) the shape (outside shape) in front view of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729. It is possible to change (the way of lighting). Thus, unexpected effects can be configured without performing control to change the LEDs to be lighted.

In addition, the material of slide member A2729 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed of a light transmissive resin material, may be formed of a light opaque resin material, or may be formed of a metal material.

Next, a twenty-fourth embodiment will be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, a gear with pin A46
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the pin gear A3462 is the outer surface of the arc wall A464 in the twenty-fourth embodiment. A plurality of outer diameter protrusions A3 protruding in a semicircular shape in cross section radially outward from the
464 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 384 is a rear view of the front unit FU in the twenty-fourth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 384, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed at four locations that divide the circumferential length of the arc wall A464 into approximately five equal parts in a rear view.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, elongated holes (a first elongated hole A 422 a, a second elongated hole A 422 b, a displacement long hole A 453, and a transmission long hole A 45 formed to displace the first displacement member A 440.
4) is formed to be long as compared with the twenty-second embodiment, so that the first displacement member A440 is configured to be displaceable beyond the displacement end on the overhanging position side in the twenty-second embodiment.

In the state shown in FIG. 384, the deformed slide member A455 abuts on the arc wall portion A464 and the movement thereof is restricted, whereby the first displacement member A440 stops at the extended position. When the pin gear A3462 is rotated counterclockwise in a rear view, the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is a protruding plate portion A4.
The irregular slide member A455 is pushed to the upper right direction from the state shown in FIG. 384 every time it abuts on the 56a, and accordingly the long link A 451 is rotated, and the first displacement member A 440 is displaced to the left from the extended position. It can be configured as follows.

Thus, at the timing when the second displacement member A 490 is displaced (see FIG. 360),
The first displacement member A 440 can be configured to be displaced.

Although the size of the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 is randomly illustrated in FIG. 384, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, all the protrusions may be provided in the same size, or outer protrusions A3464 having different sizes may be formed. In this case, they need not all be of different sizes.

In the present embodiment, the outer diameter protrusions A3464 are formed larger in the two closer to the transmission protrusion A463 than in the two farther from the transmission protrusion A463. Therefore, the first displacement member A4
When the pin gear A 3462 is continuously rotated after reaching the overhanging position, the displacement caused by the contact of the outer protrusion A 3464 and the deformed slide member A 455 is later than in the first two times. Two times of become smaller. That is, the first displacement member A after reaching the overhanging position
It is possible to produce effects such that the displacement 440 (reciprocal minute displacement) is gradually contained.

From this point of view, the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 may be formed so as to become smaller as it goes away from the transmission protrusion A 463 along the arc wall portion A 464, or vice versa. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that the displacement width of the displacement (reciprocal minute displacement) of the first displacement member A 440 gradually changes.

In addition, a recessed portion may be formed at a location where the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is formed so as to be recessed inward in the radial direction from the arc wall portion A464. In this case, contrary to the description in the twenty-fourth embodiment, the anomalous slide member A455 is moved from the state shown in FIG. 384 to the lower left direction every time the recessed portion is disposed opposite to the projecting plate portion A456a. It can be configured that it is pulled back by the force, and accordingly the long link A 451 is rotated, and the first displacement member A 440 is displaced to the right (retracted position side) than the overhanging position.

In addition, the formation position of the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is the same as that of the first operation unit A400, A400A, A.
It may be made different (shifted) in 400B, A400C, A400D (see FIG. 319). Thereby, the first operation units A400, A400A, A400B, A400C.
, A400 D (when the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 start to operate at the same timing) in synchronization with the drive motor AMT 1, in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 The timing at which the one displacement member A 440 is displaced can be made different. That is, in the control mode in which the drive motors AMT1 are excited at the same time,
It is possible to shift the timing of displacement (small displacement) generated in the first displacement member A 440 in relation to the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 with a displacement width defined in advance by the arrangement of the outer diameter protrusion A 3464.

For example, each first operation unit A400, A400A, A400B, A400C, A40
The timing when each first displacement member A440 of 0D (see FIG. 319) reaches the overhanging position (see FIG. 320) and the timing when each second displacement member A 490 reaches the overhanging position (see FIG. 320) are the same. , The outer diameter projection A3 after the first displacement member A440 reaches the overhanging position
The timing of occurrence of displacement (small displacement) occurring in the first displacement member A 440 in relation to 464,
It can be adjusted to sequentially generate clockwise from the first operation unit A 400 disposed in the lower left in front view.

This makes it easy to guide the player's line of sight focusing on the displacement of the first displacement member A 440 in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. Further, as described above, since the aspect of light visually recognized through the long hole A 412a (see FIG. 320) can be changed in conjunction with the displacement of the first displacement member A 440, the player who visually recognizes the light can The line of sight can be easily guided in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front. For example, at the time of the jackpot game (special game), it is possible to perform an effect that suggests a right-handed event that is executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the like, using the order of displacement of the first displacement member A440.

The twenty-fifth embodiment will now be described. In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A44
Although the case where 0 displaces the back side of the electric decoration substrate A 416 has been described, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the decorative member A 4550 which is displaced to the front side of the electric decoration substrate A 416 is provided. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 385 (a) is a diagram 339 of the first operation unit A4400 according to the twenty-fifth embodiment.
FIG. 3 is a cross-sectional view along a line corresponding to the CCCXLVIa-CCCXLVIa line of a), and FIG.
85 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the first operation unit A 4400 in the line corresponding to the line CCCXLVIb-CCCXLVIb in FIG. 344 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 385 (a) and 385 (b), the decorative member A4550 includes a plate-shaped decorative plate A4551 and a main body A411.
And a pair of guided portions A4552 guided by the long holes A4411b drilled along a straight line parallel to the direction A416x on the side surface of the front cover A410. It is integrally fixed to the

Because the pair of guided portions A4552 are both inserted into the long hole A4411b,
For the guided portion A4552, only displacement along the long hole A4411b is permitted. Thereby, the attitude | position change of decorative board part A4551 can be suppressed. That is, the displacement of the decorative plate portion A4551 is limited to the slide displacement in the direction parallel to the direction A416x which is the extending direction of the long hole A4411b.

The first displacement member A4440 includes a pair of projecting portions A4442g protruding from the left and right end portions of the interlocking plate portion A4442 to the front side, and is similar to the configuration of the first displacement member A440 except for this.

In the present embodiment, the guided portion A4552 is formed so as to protrude inward of the front cover A410 to a position where it can contact the projecting portion A4442g in the displacement direction. Thereby, the first displacement member A
The decorative member A4550 interlocks with the first displacement member A4440 at the timing when the protruding portion A4442g and the guided portion A4552 abut each other during the displacement of 4440.

The interlocking plate portion A4442 of the first displacement member A4440 is configured to be displaced along with the posture change during the displacement of the guided plate portion A441. With this posture change, the guided portion A4552 is arranged.
The arrangement of the protruding portions A4442g is set so that the protruding portions A4442g can enter between them.
Thus, the decorative member A455 is interlocked with the displacement of the first displacement member A4440 in both the forward and backward directions.
0 can be displaced in both forward and backward directions (FIG. 385 (a) left and right direction).

According to the present embodiment, since the decorative plate portion A4551 is disposed on the front side of the front cover A410, it is possible to configure timing for hiding the through hole A412 with the decorative plate portion A4551.
Thereby, the light traveling through the through hole A 412 can be physically shielded.

In addition, the first displacement member A4440 hidden behind the front cover A410 at the overhang position
Unlike the above, the decorative plate portion A4551 is always arranged so as to be visible to the player without being hidden by the front cover A410. Therefore, the decorative plate portion A4551 is configured such that the opening A 442c of the first displacement member A 4440 has a different shape in each first operation unit A 4400, and in the retracted position, these are configured to form a series of meanings. While being unable to be made visible to the player in a series of senses at the hidden position where it is hidden, it can be used as a means for solving the problem that it is difficult to take a sense of unity in the light emission mode.

That is, the first displacement member A4440 is disposed at the overhanging position and the front cover A41 is configured by similarly configuring the shape of the decoration plate portion A4551 of each first operation unit A4440 and the figure to be drawn.
The sense of unity of the respective first operation units A 4440 in the state of being hidden by 0 (see FIG. 385 (b)) can be created by the decorative plate portion A 4551.

In addition, the light emitting means is at a similar position in the first displacement member A4440 of the plurality of first operation units A4400, and in a position visible in advance through the through hole A412 in a state where the first displacement member A4440 is disposed at the extended position. A445b is provided, and in the state where the first displacement member A4440 is hidden as described above, the light emitting means A445b is simultaneously turned on by a plurality of first operation units A4400, thereby producing a light emission effect having a sense of unity Can be realized.

In the present embodiment, the long hole A4411b is formed utilizing a gap area (area on the retracted position side of the first displacement member A4440) secured by the formation of the electric decoration substrate A416. That is, the space created by limiting the formation range of the electric decoration substrate A416 is a decorative member A4550.
Can be effectively used as a space for arranging a structure for realizing the displacement of

The displaceable range of the decorative member A4550 is limited to the formation range of the long hole A4411 b.
That is, only the space created by limiting the formation range of the electric decoration substrate A 416 can be a range in which not only the first displacement member A 4440 but also the decoration member A 4550 can be displaced. Therefore, the number of members to be displaced can be increased in a range in which the electric decoration substrate A 416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

Before and after the displacement of the decorative member A4550, a change in posture (displacement in the front-rear direction) occurs in the first displacement member A4440. Therefore, the displacement amount (displacement amount in the front-rear direction) of the first displacement member A 4440 can be largely secured in the range in which the electric decoration substrate A 416 is not formed (corresponding range in front view).

In addition, the aspect of decorative member A4550 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed of a light transmitting resin material, may be formed of a low light transmitting resin material, or may be an LED or the like or an electric decoration substrate inside. In addition, through holes may be formed in the decorative member A4550 in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the light irradiated from the electric decoration substrate A 416 can be made visible through the through holes.

A twenty-sixth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. In the twenty-second embodiment, the arcuate wall portion A464 is rotationally displaced along the displacement trajectory of the transmission protrusion A463, and the irregular slide member A45 is obtained even after the transmission protrusion A463 is separated from the irregular slide member A455.
Although the case of restricting the displacement of 5 has been described, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the case where the displacement mode is not limited to rotation will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

FIG. 386 (a) and FIG. 386 (b) are front views of displacement apparatus A5000 in 26th Embodiment. FIG. 386 (a) shows the state during displacement of the displacement member A5001 of the displacement device A5000, and FIG. 386 (b) shows the state where the displacement member A5001 is disposed at the displacement end.

The displacement device A5000 is configured to be slidable along a straight line and is not shown in the drawing.
A displacement member A 5001 biased leftward by a coil spring etc., and its displacement member A 5
Transmission member A 5002 to which the driving force for displacing along the displacement direction of 001 is transmitted, supported member A 5003 rotatably supported at the end of the transmission member A 5002, and the supported member A 5003 Thin-walled part A extending in the rotational direction from both end parts of
5004, a roller member A5005 disposed at the end opposite to the pivotally supported end of the supported member A5003 and a guide groove A5006, A5 in which the roller member A5005 is guided
And 007.

The guide grooves A5006 and A5007 extend along the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001.
A region A5006 and a second region A5007 which deviates from the end of the first region A5006 with respect to the displacement direction of the displacement member A5001 are formed. In the present embodiment, the second area A
Although 5007 is configured in an arc shape, it may be a shape that deviates in the displacement direction of the displacement member A 5001, and is not limited to the arc shape.

The operation of the displacement device 5000 will be described. While the roller member A5005 is guided in the first region A5006 of the guide groove, the displacement member A5001 is pushed to the end of the transmission member A5002 (see FIG. 386 (a)).

On the other hand, at the stage where the roller member A5005 is guided in the second region A5007 of the guide groove (see FIG. 386 (b)), the portion in contact with the displacement member A5001 is switched to the thin portion A5004 and in this state, the displacement member A5001 Can be regulated to the left.

In addition, the outer shape of the thin portion A5004 is set to the second region A50 of the guide groove of the roller member A5005.
The position of the displacement member A 5001 is made constant (at least one section during displacement of 07)
By configuring the contact position of the displacement member A 5001 to be invariable in the displacement direction of the displacement member A 5001), the displacement of the displacement member A 5001 can be restricted in one section described above during the displacement of the transmission member A 5003. .

Further, in the case where the thin portion A5004 is configured to be deformable so as to collapse toward the supported member A5003, the repulsive force of the thin portion A5004 subjected to the deformation and the biasing force applied to the displacement member A5001 are balanced. The displacement member A5001 can be maintained. As a result, even after the contact between the supported member A5003 and the displacement member A5001 is released, the displacement of the displacement member A5001 can be suppressed.

A twenty-seventh embodiment will now be described with reference to FIGS. 387 and 388. 22nd
In the embodiment, the wiring HC is loosely wound around the fastening portion A 475 to be supported from the fastening portion A 475 so as not to come off, but in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the support box portion A 47
The case where the wiring HC is supported so as to be relatively displaceable by the wiring guide member A6560 which is movably supported at 0 will be described. In addition, the same code | symbol is attached | subjected to the part same as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate | omitted.

387 (a), 387 (b) and 388 are rear views of the rear unit BU in the twenty-seventh embodiment. In FIG. 387 (a), the state in which the second displacement member A 490 is disposed at the retracted position is the state in which the second displacement member A 490 is disposed in the extended position in FIG.
In 87 (b), a state in which the second displacement member A 490 is disposed at an intermediate position (about 45 degrees rotational position) between the retracted position and the extended position is illustrated. In FIG. 387 (a), FIG. 387 (b) and FIG. 388, illustration of the rear plate portion A 480 is omitted to facilitate understanding of the structure of the rear unit BU.

As shown in FIGS. 387 (a), 387 (b) and 388, in the present embodiment, the fastening portion A475 (see FIG. 356) is not formed, and instead, the wiring guide member A6560 corresponds to the support box portion A6470. It is supported between the rear plate portion A 480 (see FIG. 359).

The upper end portion of the wiring guide member A6560 is rotatably supported by at least one of the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480. In this embodiment, the rear plate A480 is supported in a state in which the support projection A6471d projecting in a cylindrical shape on the back side of the support box A6470 is inserted into the through hole drilled in the upper end of the wiring guide member A6560. By fixing, wiring guide member A656
0 is pivotally supported by the support projection A6471d in an infallible manner.

The wiring guide member A6560 is formed in a long plate shape, and the main plate portion A6561 spaced apart from the back surface of the support box portion A6470, the lower end portion of the main plate portion A6561, and the middle portion And a plurality of protruding portions A6562 protruding from the side (the support box portion A6470 side).

The main body plate portion A6561 is disposed close to the rear plate portion A480. Thereby, the main body plate portion A6
Since the space on the front side of 561 can be increased, a large arrangement space for the wiring HC can be secured. Accordingly, it is possible to avoid the extra load on the wiring HC.

In addition, since the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480, it is possible to prevent the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 from being rubbed. In the present embodiment, in particular, the wiring HC is guided toward the back side (the rear plate portion A480 side) by the ridge portion A 491 d 2 and the binding band KB, and the position between them (position pinched in the lateral direction) Because the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed, the main body plate portion A6561 can be disposed between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A480 at a position where the wiring HC is closer to the rear plate portion A480,
The rubbing between the wiring HC and the rear plate portion A 480 can be effectively suppressed.

Further, by setting the position where the wiring HC is pressed to the rear plate part A480 side to a position overlapping the main body plate part A6561, the main body plate part A6561 is displaced in the direction along the displacement in synchronization with the displacement of the wiring HC. Can easily occur. In this case, since the absolute value of the relative displacement between the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A6561 can be reduced, the occurrence of rubbing can be suppressed. Therefore, the wear of the wiring HC can be prevented, and the durability of the wiring HC can be improved.

A displacement mode of the wiring guide member A6560 will be described. In the state shown in FIG. 387 (a), the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed at the limit position on the retracted position side. In the state shown in FIG. 387 (b), although displacement of the second displacement member A 490 starts, displacement of the wiring HC is mainly due to small displacement of the board side connector A 493 c in the lateral direction and large displacement in the vertical direction. It occurs vertically. Therefore, the wiring guide member A6560 maintains the posture shown in FIG. 387 (a).

In the state shown in FIG. 387 (b), the upward displacement of the wiring HC corresponds to the protruding portion A on the upper side.
It is specified in 6562. In other words, the projecting portion A6562 can function as a portion that restricts the upper and lower direction displacement limit of the wiring HC.

In the state shown in FIG. 388, since the displacement of the substrate side connector A 493c mainly occurs in the left and right direction, the wiring HC is also displaced in the left and right direction.
The attitude of 6560 changes. In this case, the wiring HC has a margin and the wiring guide member A
Although it is wound around 6560, the lower limit of its displacement can be defined by the lower projecting portion A6562. Therefore, the wiring HC has excess force and the pinion A 517 and the reinforcing arm A 5
It is possible to prevent entry to the 18 side (dropping).

As described above, the portion (the projecting portion A656 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561) where the wire HC is wound
By changing the arrangement of 2), the design length of the wiring HC is compared with the case where the arrangement of the portion where the wiring HC is wound is fixed (see the fastening portion A 475 and FIG. 356 (a)). It can be shortened.

The displacement from FIG. 387 (a) to FIG. 387 (b) will be described from another viewpoint as a policy for changing the arrangement of the location where the wiring HC wraps (projected portion A6562 on the tip side of the main body plate portion A6561). Substrate-side connector A 493 c is displaced in a mode approaching protrusion portion A 6552 (wiring H
C moves toward the protruding portion A6552 side, whereby the portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 of the wiring HC is displaced to the loosening side, while in the displacement from FIG. 387 (b) to FIG. 388, the protruding portion Section A
The board side connector A 493 c is displaced in such a manner as to get away from the 6552 (the wiring HC protrudes
As a result of being displaced to the side away from 6552), the portion wound around the protruding portion A6552 of the wiring HC is displaced to the side where it is tightened. In the present embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 is shown in FIG.
And 388 are configured to be displaceable.

From this, the wiring guide member A6560 suppresses the displacement of the wiring HC to the tightening side, when the part wound around the protruding portion A6552 of the wiring HC is displaced to the tightening side (
It can be said that the wiring HC is configured to be displaceable to the side of expanding the wiring HC. This makes it possible to prevent the curvature radius of curvature of the portion of the wiring HC wound around the protruding portion A6552 from becoming excessively small, and to prevent excessive deformation (such as breakage or chipping) of the wiring HC. .

According to the present embodiment, the wiring guide member A6560 which is not connected to the second displacement member A490.
Is displaced along with the displacement of the wiring HC. Therefore, for example, the member is interlocked with the wiring guide member A6560, and is arranged so as to be visible by the player in any state of FIG. 387 (a), FIG. 387 (b) or FIG. By arranging the decorative member configured to be able to project on the symbol display device 81 side (right side in FIG. 387 (a)), it is possible to execute effects with the decorative member displaced by the displacement of the wiring HC.

In this case, as described above, the second displacement member A490 and the wiring guide member A6560 are not completely interlocked, and the wiring guide member A6560 is stopped while the second displacement member A490 rotates 45 degrees from the retracted position. Since the wiring guide member A 6560 is configured to be displaced when the second displacement member A 490 is further rotated (as displacement timing is deviated), as if the decoration member is the second displacement member A 490 It can be viewed as being displaced independently.

For convenience of explanation, the wiring HC is illustrated as being wound by one rotation (a wiring passing twice between the pair of projecting portions A6562), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of projecting portions A
The wiring HC may be configured to pass only once (does not wind) between 6562.

As mentioned above, although the present invention was explained based on the above-mentioned embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-mentioned form at all, It is easy to be able to carry out various modification improvement in the range which does not deviate from the meaning of the present invention. It can be guessed.

In each of the above-described embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with the configuration of part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to provide another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the tilting device 310 is pressed downward is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the tilting device 310 hangs downward may be taken as an initial position, and the tilting device 310 may be pushed up. In this case, since the force to return the tilting device 310 to the initial position can be covered by gravity, the torsion spring 3
15 can be made unnecessary.

Although the case where the voice coil motor 352 is driven after the tilting device 310 is moved to the final end has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the tilting device 310 is in the first state, the voice coil motor 352 may be driven in advance. In this case, the load required to push in the tilting device 310 from the first state can be increased, and changes in the load can be used for the effect (for example, the effect of "unpressable button" can be performed it can).

In this case, even if the voice coil motor 352 moves to the operation end (end of the overhanging operation), the voice coil motor 352 has a dimensional relationship in which a slight gap is generated between the voice coil motor 352 and the lower frame member 320. Preferably, the lower frame member 320 is disposed. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the generation of an impact sound of a collision with the lower frame member 320 at the time of operation of the voice coil motor 352. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from noticing that the voice coil motor 352 has been stretched in advance, and to notice that the button is in the state of being unable to be pushed in only after the tilting device 310 is pushed in. it can.

Although the case where the engagement rib 344c of the disc cam 344 and the connection pin 344d are relatively fixed has been described in the first embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the engagement rib 344 c may be configured as a separate member and configured to rotate relative to the disc cam 344. In this case, for example, the position of the connection pin 344d can be changed in a state in which the first projecting portion 344c1 and the engaging portion 346d abut, so that the engaging rib 344c is rotated in the forward rolling direction from that state. Immediately after changing the posture of the rotating claw member 347, the degree to which the tilting device 310 is raised can be changed. Therefore, the operating state of the tilting operation of the tilting device 310 can be formed more than in the first embodiment.

Further, the operating state of the tilting device 310 can be sequentially switched (the rising end can be switched sequentially) by the drive mode in which the disk cam 344 is continuously rotated in the forward direction. As a result, by causing the drive motor 342 to operate in one direction, it is possible to perform rendering in a complicated operation mode in which the rising position of the tilting device 310 is sequentially switched while suppressing deterioration of the drive motor 342.

In the third embodiment, the voice coil motor 352 for applying a driving force to the tilting device 310.
Although the case where the operation timing of is controlled by the operation speed of the tilting device 310 or the direction of the operation has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the drive mode of the drive motor 5411 that rotationally drives the weight member 5412 may be controlled by the operating speed of the tilting device 310 or the operating direction. For example, until the tilting device 310 reaches the pushing end (
While lowering operation), the drive motor 5411 is fixed with the position where the center of gravity of the weight member 5412 is disposed above the rotation axis, and immediately before the tilting device 310 starts to move upward after reaching the pushing end. The rotation operation of the drive motor 5411 may be started. In this case, it is possible to reduce the repulsion force for pushing back the tilting device 310 while pressing the tilting device 310 continuously while increasing the repulsion force for pushing back the tilting device 310 at the start of upward movement of the tilting device 310. .

Although the case where the storage member 5430 is fixed to the bottom plate 5321 has been described in the fifth embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the storage device 543 in the tilting device 310
It is also possible to fix 0 and operate the vibration device 5400 inside thereof. Tilting device 31
In the case where the receiving member 5430 is fixed to 0, for example, the convex leg 5424 is fixed to the bottom plate 5321.
The configuration of the flexible member 5420 in the vibrating device 5400 by disposing the convex leg 5424 on the bottom plate 5321 when the tilting device 310 is moved to the lower pushing end position. To change whether or not the weight member 5412 can abut on the housing member 5430.

In this case, the flexible member 5420 disposed inside the accommodation member 5430 moves in conjunction with the tilting operation of the tilting device 310, and at this time, the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes. The degree of change of the shape of the flexible member 5420 changes in conjunction with the magnitude of the tilting speed at the time of operating the tilting device 310, so the flexible member 5420 is operated by operating the tilting device 310 at a predetermined speed or more. The amount of deformation can be increased to form a state in which the weight member 5412 abuts on the housing member 5430. That is, not only when the tilting device 310 is pushed in and pushed in to the end but also when the tilting device 310 is operated at high speed, the player can feel the vibration, so that the player can operate the tilting device 310. You can increase the variation of the production of.

For example, when making the player perform the operation of the tilting device 310, a display such as "Press the button." Is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but "Press the button. By performing the display as “a great chance.”, It is possible to perform an effect of designating how to press the button (the tilting device 310) to the player. In this case, whether or not the player has pressed the button (the tilting device 310) in a designated manner is set as a condition for transmitting the vibration to the player.
The player's willingness to operate the button (the tilting device 310) can be enhanced by the designated pressing method, and the operation of the button (the tilting device 310) can be prevented from becoming monotonous.

The magnitude relationship between the degree of change in the shape of the flexible member 5420 and the degree of the pressing speed of the tilting device 310 may be reversed. That is, when the tilting speed of the tilting device 310 is low, the amount of deformation of the flexible member 5420 may be large, and the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 may be in contact with each other. In this case, a low push-in speed of the tilting device 310 can be set as a condition that the vibration generated from the vibrating device 5400 can be transmitted to the player, and the player is recommended to slow the push-in speed of the tilting device 310 can do.
As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from pushing in the tilting device 310 with force, and to prevent a failure caused by pushing the tilting device 310 in force.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the player can feel the vibration generated from the vibration device 5400 by pushing the tilting device 310 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, while the weight member 5412 of the vibration device 5400 can be brought into contact with the housing member 5430 in a state where the tilting device 310 is not pushed in,
The weight member 5412 may be arranged in such a manner that the weight member 5412 can not be brought into contact with the receiving member 5430 under the condition that the tilting device 310 is pushed to the movement end. In this case, the tilting device 31
In the state where 0 is not operated, the vibration can be transmitted to the player and the effect can be made lively,
A change in the presentation mode to the player in a way that makes it difficult for the surroundings to notice the vibration that stops when pressing.
Because it can be made to recognize the difference in the degree of expectation), only the player who is playing this machine can feel the change of the presentation mode, except for the surrounding players, to produce a premiere feeling Can.

As a variation of the effect, when the player pushes the tilting device 310, the weight member 5412 and the housing member 5430 can not be in contact with each other.
It is desirable to produce both the case 412 and the case where the receiving member 5430 is in a continuously abuttable arrangement, but this can be realized by changing the operation mode of the weight member 5412. For example, the difference in the rotational direction of the weight member 5412 can cause two different cases.

In the fifth embodiment, the disc cams 5344 are caused to fall over in an axial tilt manner.
Although the case where frictional force arises by contact | abutment 44 and the releasing member 346 was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the plate portion in which the shaft support hole 341b of the main body member 341 is bored is partially extended in the direction approaching the disk cam 5344 and configured to abut in the case where the disk cam 5344 is subjected to shaft collapse deformation. It is good. In this case, since the main body member 341 is not an operating part, a large frictional force generated between the disc cam 5344 and the disc cam 5344 is secured as compared with the case where the disc cam 5344 and the operable release member 346 abut. be able to. Therefore, the load applied to the arm member 345 connecting the disc cam 5344 and the tilting device 310 can be sufficiently reduced.

In the eighth embodiment, the case has been described in which both of the panel support devices 600 disposed above and below the inner frame 12 are configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, only the upper or lower surface support device 600 may be configured to be able to abut on the front frame 14. For example, in the upper position, the portion of the multifunctional cover member 171 that interferes with the surface support device 600 may be chamfered so as not to abut the surface support device 600 disposed in the upper position.

In the eighth embodiment, when attaching the game board 13 to the board support device 600, the game board 13 is
Although the case where the upper and lower positions of (1) and (2) have not changed has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the support bottom 12c that supports the lower end face of the game board 13 is configured as an inclined surface that inclines downward toward the front side, and the front side end thereof is the board support device 60 in the released state.
You may comprise so that it may be arrange | positioned below rather than the upper surface of the back side extension board 621c of zero. In this case, when placing the gaming board 13 on the board supporting device 600 in the released state, the gaming board 13 is supported by the back side extending plate 621c, and in the process of fixing the board supporting device 600 from there, the game board 13 can be run on the support bottom 12c. Therefore, the height at which the game board 13 can be placed on the board support device 600 in the released state can be lowered compared to the height when the game board 13 is fixed, so the work of fixing the game board 13 Efficiency can be improved.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the far ball passage portion 145 is configured as a passage that bends to the left and right has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be bending back and forth, or a combination of back and forth bending. In this case, the ball guide opening 5
Just behind point 3, it is preferable to form a long path back and forth because the ball discharges smoothly. In addition, since the range of the ball passage portion 145 along the surface of the game board 13 can be narrowed by providing a route bent back and forth, interference between the firing passage and the ball passage portion 145 is prevented. It is easy to do.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the light guide member 540 is curved so as to face the opening 524 is a concave surface, but this is not necessarily the case. For example,
The position facing the opening 524 may be convex. In this case, the light reaching the player through the opening 524 is viewed lightly. In addition, the light guide member 540 does not have to be curved in the vertical direction, and, for example, a curved portion and a portion extending straight may be mixed at the upper and lower positions.

In the eighth embodiment, the case of forming the route bent upward and downward by the passage forming ribs 467 and 487 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the direction of bending of the path may be left or right, or a combination of top, bottom, left, and right.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha of the rear assembly 480 abuts on the inner side surface 461Hi of the front assembly 460 in the thickness direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi are back side wall portions 461H.
It may be configured to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the. in this case,
Since the speaker connecting wire 453 can be sandwiched between the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha and the inner side surface 461Hi, the resistance in the sandwiching causes the load on the speaker connecting wire 453 in the direction of pulling out the speaker assembly 450. Speaker connection 4 even if it is
53 can be prevented from coming off the speaker 451.

Further, while the auxiliary convex portion 481Ha abuts in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H in the range of the projection length corresponding to the recess depth of the wiring passage concave portion 464, the projection convex portion 481Ha is further projected In the range of the length, a step may be formed in the middle so as to be separated by about the diameter of the speaker connection line 453 in the thickness direction of the inner side surface 461Hi and the rear side wall portion 461H. In this case, the range in which the double wall is formed by the rear side wall portion 461H and the front side wall portion 481H is sufficiently secured, and the speaker connection line 453 can be held while suppressing sound leakage.

In the eighth embodiment, in the case where the speaker assembly 450 includes a double bass reflex type speaker in which the base end side main body portion 461B and the tip end side main body portion 461T correspond to a speaker room and the middle main body portion 461M corresponds to a duct. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the proximal main body 461 B and the intermediate main body 461 can be expanded by expanding the width in the front-rear direction of the intermediate main body 461 M in the same manner as the proximal main body 461 B and the distal main body 461 T.
A large speaker room may be configured together by the M and the tip side main body 461T.

Further, although the proximal main body 461 B has been described as having a larger volume than the distal main body 461 T, the magnitude relationship may be reversed or may be configured in the same volume. Speaker 45
The arrangement of 1 is not limited to the left and right end portions, and may be the center in the left and right direction, or may be a position between the left and right end portions and the center in the left and right direction.

In the eighth embodiment, the rib portions 467 a to 4 constituting the passage forming ribs 467 and 487.
Among the 67e and 487a to 487e, adjacent rib portions are in the left-right direction (the direction in which the proximal main portion 461B and the distal main portion 461T are connected, the opening formed by the front concave portion 471 and the rear concave portion 491 Although the case where they do not overlap in the visual direction) has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, adjacent rib portions (for example, the rib portions 467 d and the rib portions 467 c) may be configured to overlap with each other in the left-right direction. In this case, since the internal path of the speaker assembly 450 can be bent like a maze, for example, the front concave portion 47
By putting a metal fine wire such as a piano wire from the opening formed by 1 and the rear side recessed part 491 and making it difficult to cheat the tip of the game area, the time required for cheating can be extended. It is possible to control cheating. In addition, here, as suppression of the cheating, suppression of cheating itself and obtaining profit of cheating by cheating (successful cheating)
And the like.

In the eighth embodiment described above, the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880 interlocks with the third gear 810G of the slit member 810 via the intermediate gear 808, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the intermediate gear 808 is the second gear 830 of the rotating plate 830.
It may be configured to mesh with the G and the fourth gear 880G of the loose fitting device 880. in this case,
Since the rotary plate 830 and the loose fitting device 880 can be interlocked, it is possible to rotate the loose fitting device 880 not only during the rotation operation of the petal operating device 800 but also during the expansion operation and the concentration operation. it can. As a result, the sliding operation of the petals 802 in the radial direction and the rotating operation of the decorative member 884 can be simultaneously performed, and the effect of the presentation can be improved.

Although the loose fitting device 880 is configured as a device that rotates coaxially with the rotating plate 830, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to expand and contract with the rotation of the rotary plate 830, or may be configured to rotate on an axis different from the rotation axis of the rotary plate 830.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the second effect member 940 is operated by transmitting the driving force through the slide plate 930 which slides by the operation of the driving side arm member 910 has been described, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, by connecting the upper portion of the support base 801 of the petal operating device 800 and the tip end of the second effect member 940, the second effect member 940 is operated based on the displacement of the petal operating device 800. It is good. In this case, the slide plate 930 can be omitted.

In the eighth embodiment, when the board supporting device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in the fixed state, the case where the operation portion back member 155 and the game board 13 are separated above the opening / closing restricting portion 159 is described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the board supporting device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is in a fixed state, the operation portion back member 155 and the game board 13 contact in the front-rear direction above the opening / closing restricting portion 159 Also good. In this case, the upper end portion of the game board 13 is displaced to the front side when the upper surface support device 600 is not in the fixed state, even if the lower surface support device 600 is in the fixed state. The game board 13 is disposed opposite to the operation unit back member 155 as the right side of the board 13 is inclined to the front side)
Since the part of is also displaced to the front side, the operation section back member 155 and the game board 13 can be made to interfere. Thereby, the front frame 14 can be prevented from being closed with respect to the inner frame 12.

In this case, when the game board 13 is installed in the inner frame 12 and the board supporting device 600 disposed below the inner frame 12 is fixed, the board supporting device disposed above the inner frame 12 6
It is determined whether or not 00 is in a fixed state based on the relationship between the operation panel back member 155 disposed opposite to the lower surface support device 600 and the game board 13, and the surface disposed above the inner frame 12 When the support device 600 is not in a fixed state, the front frame 14 can be restricted from closing with respect to the inner frame 12. Thus, the function of determining the state of the panel supporting device 600 installed on the upper side of the inner frame 12 can be removed from the multi-function cover member 171, so that the design freedom of the multi-function cover member 171 can be improved. it can. For example, the multifunctional cover member 171 is recessed to a position where it does not abut on the panel support device 600 regardless of the state of the panel support device 600 (see FIG.
It may be configured to chamfer. In this case, the multifunctional cover member 171 formed of a synthetic resin collides with the metal panel support device 600, whereby the multifunctional cover member 171 is formed.
However, the multifunctional cover member 171 can be used for a long time in another application (for example, an application as a wiring cover) because it is possible to reduce the possibility of breakage.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the right panel unit 500 for emitting the light irradiated to the end face of the light guide member 540 from both sides of the light guide member 540 is disposed at the right end and the front side of the front frame 14 However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be disposed inside the center frame 86. In this case, for example, it is configured to be switchable between a state in which one surface of the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side and a case in which the other surface is disposed on the front side (for example, parallel to the longitudinal direction of the support plate 510 By configuring the right panel unit 500 to rotate about a central axis, it is possible to switch the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86. Also, the mode of light emitted to the center frame 86 and the center frame 86
It is possible to diversify the effects by switching between the moving combination and the moving combination that overhangs inward.

That is, for example, among the plurality of openings 524, only the LEDs 512a at the upper and lower positions corresponding to the top opening 524 are made to emit light, and the right panel unit 500 is arranged with one side on the front side and the other side Consider switching in the case of being placed on the front side. Inner cover member 52
When the surface on the 0 side faces the moving object, the moving object disposed opposite to the location (location near the end) corresponding to the top opening 524 emits light while the outer cover member 560 side is When the surface faces the moving object side, the moving objects facing each other over the wide area of the opening 565 (in a wide area compared to the opening 524 at the top) emit light. Therefore, by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 without switching the LED 512 a to be emitted, it is possible to switch the light emission location of the moving object.

In this case, for example, the rendering effect can be improved by operating the moving combination in accordance with the timing of the change of the light emitting portion. For example, at the timing when the surface on the inner cover member 520 side faces the moving object, the surface changes on the side of the outer cover member 560 while being reduced to fit in the location corresponding to the top opening 524. At the timing to face, the moving object may be configured to extend and contract so as to change in a direction along the longitudinal direction of the right panel unit 500. In this way, switching to change the light emitting location in accordance with the operation of the moving object can be realized by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500 while eliminating the need to switch the LED 512 a that controls the light emission.

Further, in the right panel unit 500, light emitted from the inner cover member 520 side is condensed (brightness is increased, light amount is increased, and light emission is clear), and light emitted from the outer cover member 560 side is Diffuse (lower luminance, smaller amount of light, lighter light emission). Therefore, by switching the attitude of the right panel unit 500, it is possible to emit light (liquid crystal, moving object)
The light emission aspect of can be changed.

Furthermore, the right panel unit 500 is changed so that the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 faces the moving object or liquid crystal (for example, the right panel unit 500 is disposed on the front side of the moving object or liquid crystal) In the above, the front end 551a of the outer lens member 550 is changed to a posture in which it is disposed on the back side of the support plate portion 510, thereby forming a beam shape on the movable
The light can be emitted in a wide range in the direction perpendicular to the direction toward the moving object or the liquid crystal while being irradiated with the light in a narrow state). As a result, it is possible to emit light widely at a position apart from the moving object and the liquid crystal while emitting only the details of the moving object and the liquid crystal.

In the ninth embodiment and the tenth embodiment, the far ball passage 9145, 10145
Although the case where the yarn Y8 is cut by the sheet metal members 9150 and 10150 disposed in the above has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the sheet metal member is partially broken by the load from the yarn Y8, and the broken portion is fragile as falling, and the detection sensor is disposed at a position where the broken portion passes when falling Also good. In this case, it is controlled to issue an alarm and forcibly stop the launch of the ball due to the sheet metal member being detected by the detection sensor, thereby achieving early detection of the wrongdoing and It is possible to minimize the profit (loss received to the gaming machine hall) obtained by the fraudster.

Although the case where the inclined surface 2803T is formed as the inclined surface has been described in the twelfth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, various configurations for improving the frictional force may be added. For example, the friction force may be improved by attaching a rubber sheet to the inclined surface 2803T, or by arranging a spike-like hard member (a member harder than the material of the slit member 810), it is made of resin. The movement resistance may be improved by biting into the slit member 810.

Also, for example, when the slide member 2820 is inclined with respect to the longitudinal direction of the central slit 814, the wall portion of the both-sides slit 815 disposed opposite to the inclined surface 2803T,
A recessed portion may be formed to such an extent that the inclined surface 2803T can enter. In this case, the movement resistance can be improved by the inclined surface 2803T falling into the recess.

In the sixteenth embodiment, by changing the shape of the concave portion 2543 formed in each region of the light guide member 2540, the traveling direction of light is set to be the light collecting direction or the light expanding direction. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, upward concave portions 2543b and 2543e may be formed in all the regions CCVIb to CCVIe. In this case, the traveling direction of the light emitted from both sides of the light guide member 2540 corresponds to each region CCVIb.
In all the CCVIe, the light is inclined upward, so that the light can be easily advanced toward the height of the line of sight of the person who is walking in order to select an aircraft to play. Thereby, the customer attraction effect of the pachinko machine 8010 can be improved.

Also, for example, regions CCVIc and CCV which are regions for emitting light to the inner lens member 530
The downward concave portion 2543 c may be formed in Ie, and the upward concave portion 2543 b may be formed in the regions CCVIb and CCVId which are regions for emitting light to the outer lens member 550. In this case, the light traveling in the direction opposite to the player playing the pachinko 8010 and the light emitted to the outer lens member 550 is inclined upward, so to select the aircraft to play the game The light can be made to advance easily to the height of the line of sight of the person walking on the other hand, while the light traveling to the player side, the light emitted to the inner lens member 530 is inclined downward As a result, for example, it is possible to illuminate the ball stored in the upper plate 17 with light to make the ball appear refreshing. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player playing the game while improving the effect of attracting customers to the pachinko machine 8010.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in the vicinity of the center in the left and right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the position may be changed according to the arrangement of the operation device 10300.

Further, both of those formed corresponding to the arrangement of the operation device 10300 and those formed near the left and right center may be provided. That is, problems with the projecting portion 6413 and the recessed portion 6414 for handling the operation load of the operation device 10300 and the front frame 10014 alone (
The protruding shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 may be provided separately to cope with the ease of holding, the durability, and the like.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the operation device 10300 configured to be operable by the player is disposed above the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recess shape portion 6414 so as to be assembled (replaceable) is described. It is not limited to this. That is, anything that can be assembled (replaced) may be used. For example, it may be an acoustic device such as a speaker box that outputs sound, a vibration device that is configured not to be operated by the player and performs vibration effects, or an electric decoration board that performs light emission effects, or a substrate box For example, it may be something which is not intended to make the player visually recognize directly.

In the seventeenth embodiment, although the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 and the recessed shape portion 6414 are formed in the groove shape formed in the front-rear direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a triangular or circular recess and protrusion may be formed in top view. In this case, a plurality of concave portions and convex portions may be formed, and the sizes of the concave portions and the convex portions are designed based on the amount of the operation load of the operation device 10300 and the frequency of the load applied. It is good.

In addition, a plurality of grooves may be formed in the same groove shape. In this case, by forming a large number of grooves while forming a narrow groove width, the same effect as in the case where one wide groove is formed can be achieved in reducing the contact area with the operation device 10300. Can. When forming a plurality of grooves, each groove does not have to be along the front-rear direction, for example,
It may be formed radially in top view.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the case where the projecting shape portion 6413 can be used as a finger hook when carrying the front frame 10014 by protruding the lower side of the outer shape of the front frame 10014 has been described. It is not something that can be done. For example, the gap between the lower surface of the plate-like support portion 6426 and the recessed portion 6414 may be formed longer in the vertical direction than the finger of the worker who carries the front frame 10014. In this case, the lower surface of the plate-like support 6426 and the recessed portion 64
The front frame 10014 can be easily carried because the finger can be inserted into the gap between the front cover 14 and 14 (can be used as a finger hook).

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the resin member 6427 is disposed below the operation device 10300 and the transmission of the load of the operation device 10300 is relieved has been described. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a member (a coil spring, a torsion spring, etc.) that generates an elastic biasing force may be used, or a device for damping such as a damper may be used.

Although the case where the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400 has been described in the seventeenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be connected to the upper tray 17 or the lower tray unit 6400 via a floating mechanism. In this case, even if the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 have poor flexibility and flexibility, it is possible to suppress transmission of the load generated on the operation device 10300 to the upper tray 17 and the lower tray unit 6400.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the lever member 10340 is rotationally driven about the lever support shaft 10331d1 by the drive motor has been described, but various modes of the drive motor may be exemplified. For example, a load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340 by a load transmission of a simple gear mechanism from a rotating gear rotated by a drive motor, or a mechanism (for example, a rotating cam) not in contact with the gear mechanism in the transmission path. The load may be transmitted to the lever member 10340, or the lever member 1 may be transmitted via the movable clutch 343c and the transmission gear 343b.
By transmitting the load to 0340, it may be formed so as to be able to idle when an overload occurs.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are fastened and fixed in the direction orthogonal to the plane on which the operation load of the operation device 10300 is applied. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when an operation portion that does not move on the plane is disposed (for example, when there is an operation portion that performs an operation to push in the left and right diagonal directions), the balance (average) of the operation direction of each operation portion The direction to be found (for example, the middle angular direction) may be set as the direction of fastening, or the fastening of an operating part with a high frequency of operating instructions (ignoring the operating part where the operating instructions are rare) You may set the direction. Thereby, the occurrence of loose connection due to the operation load can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 are joined together by fastening, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be combined with an adhesive, or may be combined by fitting according to the shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the direction in which the rigidity of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is high (direction along the upper and lower sides) and the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 are described, but this is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, the vibration direction of the vibration device 10366 may be left and right. In this case, since the shapes of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily changed by the generation of the vibration of the vibration device 10366, it is possible to dynamically change the design around the operation device 10300 when the vibration is generated. it can. Further, the aspect of the vibration device 10366 is not limited at all. For example, a direct acting type represented by a voice coil motor or the like, a rotary type represented by a vibrator or the like, or a combination thereof may be used.

Also, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 may be formed of a transparent resin material instead of the opaque resin. In this case, the left front cover 1 can be configured by irradiating light emitted from a predetermined irradiation device onto the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322.
It is possible to produce an effect to change the appearance of light visually recognized through the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 in accordance with the change of the shapes of the 0321 and the right front cover 10322.

In the seventeenth embodiment, although the case where bending is easily suppressed regardless of the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 by forming the left and right muscle portions D24a with different inclinations, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by setting the inclination angles of the left and right muscle parts D24a to the same position without depending on the position, the rigidity is improved between the direction in which the rigidity is improved by the left and right muscle parts D24a and the direction in which the rigidity is weakened in that direction. The difference can be increased.

In this case, for example, by setting the formation direction of the left and right muscle portions D24a along the direction Y17a, the left front cover 10321 and the right front by the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the upward position. While suppressing the bending of the cover 10322, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the vibration generated by the vibration device 10366 when the swinging operation member 10310 is disposed at the downward position is enlarged with respect to the bending. be able to. That is, when the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310 changes, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1 generated by the vibration of the vibration device 10366
The degree of deflection of 0322 can be varied.

Conversely, the direction in which the left and right muscle portions D24a are formed may be the direction along the direction Y17b.
In this case, the vibrating device 1036 when the swing operation member 10310 is disposed at the downward position.
6, while suppressing the deflection of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 due to the deflection, when the swinging operation member 10310 is disposed at the upward position with respect to the deflection, the left front due to the oscillation generated by the vibration device 10366 Cover 10321 and right front cover 103
The deflection of 22 can be increased. That is, by changing the arrangement of the swing operation member 10310, the degree of bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 caused by the vibration of the vibration device 10366 can be made different.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 can be removed from the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily attached. It is not something that can be done. For example, the left cover member 10323 and the right cover member 10324 are integrally formed with the inner case member 10330, and the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 1 are formed there.
A configuration in which 0322 is assembled may be used. In this case, when assembling to the inner case member 10330, the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 can be easily assembled by bending, and after assembling to the front frame 10014 thereafter, the bending of the left front cover 10321 and the right front cover 10322 is suppressed As a result, it is possible to exert a displacement suppression effect due to the interference between the protruding interference portion 6805a and the inner edge Rm1.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate-like protruding portion 6453R of the V-shaped design member 6450 abuts on the plate-like support portion 6426 at the top and bottom is described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, a fastening portion into which a fastening screw is screwed in the front-rear direction is formed at the position of the plate-like projecting portion 6453R, and the fastening screw is a plate extended above the plate-like support 6426 corresponding to the fastening portion. You may comprise so that it may be penetrated to the penetration hole formed in a part. In this case, the plate-like support 642
Not only at the time of rising displacement of 6, but also at the time of falling
It can be transmitted to 0, and the load can be dispersed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the V-shaped design member 6450 has the covers 10321 and 103 into which the size of the gap between the main body portion 6451 and the upper facing portions 6455b and 6456b is inserted.
Although the case where it is formed with the thickness which can be fitted (dimension relation with few gaps) about 22 thickness dimensions was explained, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the thickness dimensions of the covers 10321 and 10322 to be inserted may be short with respect to the dimension of the gap (may be configured so as to form a gap between members at the time of assembly). In this case, when displacement of the covers 10321 and 10322 (displacement of the operation device 10300) is smaller than the gap between the members, contact (collision) between the covers 10321 and 10322 and the V-shaped design member 6450 is prevented from occurring. Since the generation of powder (dust) can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the flange portion 6582 is formed in a flat plate shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it is formed in a bowl-like cross-sectional shape protruding downward from the front side edge of the flange portion 6582, and the opposing plate portion 6 of the dividing member 6560
561 may be formed in a shape that engages with the shape and may be fitted to each other at the time of assembly. In this case, with the dividing member 6560 positioned in the assembled state, the dividing member 65
60 can be prevented from moving away from the back support member 6580 to the front side.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the opposite side surfaces of the enlarged hole 6562a are inclined with respect to the front and rear direction in the cross sectional view. However, it is important that the distance increases toward the front side. It is not something that can be done. For example, only one side surface of the both side surfaces may be inclined, or both side surfaces may be formed in a curved shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, a transparent covering member 654 formed of a colorless and transparent resin material.
The lower edge plate-like portion 6548a and the box-like shape can be made visible to the player who visually recognizes the lower edge plate-like portion 658 of 8 by making it possible to visually recognize the color of the milky white member 6541 and the dividing member 6560 disposed behind it. Although the case where the lower edge of the light receiving unit 6546 is configured to be easily viewed as a series of regions has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the lower edge plate-like portion 6548a may be previously formed to be milky white by forming the transparent covering member 6548 by two-color molding.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the case where the plate guiding unit 6550 is fastened by the fastening screw in the fastening direction in which the plate guiding unit 6550 descends and inclines toward the front side has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be fastened by a fastening screw in a fastening direction inclining downward toward the rear side. The fastening direction can be arbitrarily set by the arrangement space required by the parts disposed in the vicinity of the fastening position and the selection of the side on which the displacement is desired to be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, although a configuration has been described in which a compressive force is generated between the partitioning member 6560 and the back surface supporting member 6580 along with the deformation of the upper lid member 6510, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the dividing member 6560 may be configured to be driven so as to change its longitudinal width, and the degree of the compressive force that may be generated as the upper lid member 6510 deforms may be changed.

That is, if driving is performed so as to shorten the front-rear width of partitioning member 6560 in a mode of displacing the back side edge of partitioning member 6560 to the front side, even if upper lid member 6510 is deformed, partition member 6560 and back support member 6580 A gap can still be generated between them, and a compression force can be made less likely to occur. Since the degree of holding the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be lowered because the compressive force does not easily occur, the degree of displacement of the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be changed in a situation where the upper lid member 6510 is similarly deformed.

In other words, by controlling the front-rear width of dividing member 6560, the behavior of electric decoration board 6570 in a situation where deformation of upper lid member 6510 may occur can be changed, and similarly, to the front side of electric decoration board 6570 It is possible to change the appearance of the irradiated light.

In addition, the front-rear width of the partition member 6560 is usually shortened (the interval between the partition member 6560 and the back surface support member 6580 is kept), the front-rear width is expanded by drive control, and the partition member 6560 and the back surface support It may be configured to change to a situation where a compressive force can occur with the member 6580.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the partition member 6560 and the back support member 6580 supporting the electric decoration substrate 6570 are laminated and arranged on the front side of the front frame 10014. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the electric decoration substrate 6570 is a back support member 6
The electric decoration substrate 6570 may be disposed below the 580, and the partition member 6560 (sound device 6
It may be fastened and fixed to a member (apart from 610), and the electric decoration
It may be inserted (fixed) into the light receiving protrusion portion 6521 b of the transparent cylindrical member 6521 inserted into the 560. In any case, transmission of vibration from the acoustic device 6610 to the electric decoration substrate 6570 can be suppressed.

Further, the back support member 6580 (and the acoustic device 6610) is fixed to the outer frame 11 or the inner frame 12 disposed on the back side of the front frame 10014, while the partitioning member 6560 is the front frame 1.
It may be fixed to 0014. In this case, by opening the front frame 10014, the space between the back support member 6580 and the partitioning member 6560 can be separated.
In the closed state of 014, it is easy to replace the electric decoration board 6570 sandwiched between the back surface support member 6580 and the partition member 6560 or to return the positional deviation.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the plate portion of the acoustic device 6610 is disposed opposite to the head portion of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the vibration is transmitted and the abnormal noise may be generated. Although the case where it is possible to grasp the has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when light travels near the head of the fastening screw and the fastening screw is loosened, the shadow of the fastening screw may be visible from the front side. In this case, since the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be grasped by confirming the presence or absence of the shadow, in a noisy environment, the occurrence of the loosening of the fastening screw is discovered as compared with the case of grasping with abnormal noise. It is easy to do.

In the seventeenth embodiment, although the case where the fastening direction of the fastening screw is inclined in the vertical direction with respect to the front-rear direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the directions may be inclined to the left and right with respect to the front-rear direction, or portions inclined to the upper and lower sides or the right and left may be mixed.

In the seventeenth embodiment described above, the long ribs 6734 and the fins 6735 are formed to extend linearly in a front view, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be formed in a shape extending in a curvilinear manner, or may be formed in a mesh shape or a grid shape.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the side surface of the long rib 6734 is a smooth surface, and the case of suppressing the diffusion of the light from the side surface has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, light leakage from the side surface may be prevented by attaching a light shielding tape to the side surface of the long rib 6734. In this case, the decrease in the energy of light traveling to the fins 6735 can be easily suppressed. In addition, a light shielding tape may be attached to the side surface of the fin 6735. In this case, if the entire side surface is covered, the light at the front side edge can be emphasized, and if a part of the side surface is covered (for example, using a light shielding tape with a polka dot hole), Since the player can visually recognize the light as the light according to the shape of the light shielding tape, the effect of the light traveling through the side surface of the fin 6735 can be improved.

In the seventeenth embodiment, in the horizontal rendering device 6700 on the left side of the pachinko machine 10010, the long rib 6734 is not extended to the back side, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, although the long rib 6734 is extended on the back side, the long rib 6734 may be formed so as not to be coupled to the inward extending portion 6732 at the left and right ends. Also in this case, the light intensity in the vicinity of the glass unit 16 can be suppressed.

In the seventeenth embodiment, the light traveling in the front and rear direction of the long rib 6734 is emitted from the front end of the fin 6735 to improve the light rendering effect of the fin 6735 in a front view. Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a shape (notch (cut) or the like) may be formed to emit at least part of the light traveling through the fin 6735 from the side surface of the fin 6735 in the middle of the front-rear width of the fin 6735.

For example, as shown in the present embodiment, the side surfaces of the fins 6735 are inclined in such a manner that the thickness gradually decreases toward the front side, whereby light reaches the front end of the fins 6735 before reaching the front end. The light may be easily emitted from the side surface of the fin 6735 by being configured so as to easily reach the side surface repeatedly.

In the seventeenth embodiment, although the case where the fastening position of the curved plate member 6750 with respect to the base member 6710 is reduced is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto.
For example, the claws may be fixed by fitting or meshing based on the shape relationship. In this case, since the fastening screw can be eliminated, it is possible to prevent the light rendering effect from being reduced by the shadow of the fastening screw.

Although the case where the electric decorative substrate 18830 slides under the influence of the vibration of the operation device 10300 has been described in the eighteenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, a speaker box similar to the acoustic device 6610 may be disposed close to the back side of the combined base member 18810 so that the electric decoration substrate 18830 can slide also by the vibration of the speaker box. In this case, since the vibration direction of the operation device 10300 (direction along the direction Y17a) and the vibration direction of the speaker box (generally in the front-rear direction) are different, the displacement mode of the electric decoration substrate 18830 can be complicated.

In addition, by generating a sound of a frequency outside the audible range from the speaker, a silent effect is performed in which the player can generate slide movement of the electric decoration board 18830 while maintaining a state in which the player can not hear the sound. can do. At this time, by configuring the vibration of the electric decoration substrate 18830 to be transmitted to the operation device 10300, the operation device 103 can be operated.
The player touching 00 can grasp the vibration derived from the sound output from the speaker. Thereby, for example, by controlling to perform silent presentation when a change in a favorable situation for a player occurs, interest in touching the operation device 10300 can be improved.

Although the case where the electric decoration substrate 18830 is supported so as to float (slide) in the vicinity of the operation device 10300 has been described in the eighteenth embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the electric decoration substrate 6570 of the upper effect device 6500 may be supported so as to float. In this case, the rod member may be fixed to the front frame 10014 and may be floatably supported by a rod member extending from the gap between the left and right acoustic devices 6610 to the front side, or may be fixed to the wall of the acoustic device 6610 May be supported in a floating manner. Further, the sliding direction is not limited to the vertical direction, but may be horizontal or oblique.

In the nineteenth embodiment, the case where the reference line X19 is along the vibration direction Y17a has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case where a plurality of vibration directions Y17a are set, the reference line X19 may be configured to follow the vibration direction Y17a of any of them, or between the plurality of vibration directions Y17a (for example, the middle The reference line X19 may be arranged in the direction of the angle.

Also, in consideration of the frequency of occurrence of vibration and the frequency of operation of the lens member 10317, the reference line X1
The direction of 9 may be set. For example, in the case where the vibration direction Y17a and the operation direction are set in plural in the first direction and the other direction, the frequency of occurrence of the vibration or operation in the first direction is extremely high, and the vibration in the other direction. If the frequency of occurrence of the operation or the operation is low, the reference line X along the first direction
By setting 19, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of loosening of a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the insertion hole 19321a and the fastening portion 19322a.

In the above-described twenty-first embodiment, although the case where the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is not easily transmitted to the operation device 10300 side has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, to the operation device 10300, the main body 6411 of the covering base member 21410
The vibration may be transmitted to the same extent as the vibration transmission. In this case, the vibration device 2
Multiple objects can be vibrated by the 1500.

In the above-described twenty-first embodiment, the case is described where the front surface portion of the overhanging portion De3 on which the protruding portion 21522 is pressed with the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is formed by a plane orthogonal to the front and rear direction. It is not a thing. For example, the front surface portion of the overhanging portion De3 may be formed by a plane which is vertically inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. In this case, the direction of the load applied from the overhang portion De3 to the vibration device 21500 (the normal direction of the front surface portion of the overhang portion De3) is inclined with respect to the front and rear direction. A component in a direction (vertical direction) intersecting with the front-rear direction can be added to the displacement at the time (particularly, the displacement toward the front side). Thereby, the vibration motor 21510 of the vibration device 21500 can be displaced in the vertical direction, and therefore, in addition to the case of collision in the front and rear direction as a collision mode between the eccentric weight 21512 and the covering cover member 21530 It is possible to configure an aspect in which the vehicle collides in a non-guiding direction crossing the guiding direction of 21534), and to complicate the aspect of vibration.

In the above-described twenty-first embodiment, the protruding portion 21534 of the covering cover member 21530 is formed along the front-rear direction which is the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 vibrates (the direction orthogonal to the rotation axis of the eccentric weight 21512). Although explained, it is not necessarily limited to this.
For example, the ridges 21534 may be formed along a direction inclined with respect to the front-rear direction, may be formed along a curved line, or may be formed along a line of an arbitrary shape. . Thereby, the direction in which the vibration motor 21510 and the covering member 21520 are guided by the projecting portion 21534 can be arbitrarily set when the vibration of the vibration device 21500 is generated.

The above-described twenty-first embodiment has described the case where the fastening portions 21457 of the V-shaped design member 21450 are fastened together through the support holes 21428 of the lower plate forming member 21420, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the length of the fastening portion 21457 is slightly increased, and the support hole 214
28 may be configured such that a fastening force is not applied. This makes it difficult to transmit the vibration of the vibration device 21500 to the lower plate forming member 21420 through the plate portion having the support holes 21428, and the ball stored in the lower plate 50 vibrates with the vibration of the vibration device 21500. Because it is possible to avoid doing this, it is possible to execute the vibration effect by the vibration device 21500 without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the formation of the support plate portion A313 is omitted on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed in the back surface case A310 and the end surface is disposed to face the base plate A60 is described. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the support plate portion A313 may be maintained on the side where the notch portion A312a is formed. In this case, while maintaining the rigidity in a state in which the base plate A60 and the rear case A310 are assembled, it is possible to maintain the effect that the boundary of light visually recognized through the base plate A60 of the game board A13 can be obscured. it can.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the rear case A310 is formed in a box shape whose front side is open, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, back case A3
10 may be configured from a plurality of members (as an assembly of divided members), or the outer edge may be configured (a wall portion is not formed) by a columnar portion extending from the rear bottom to the front side You may. In this case, securing of the rigidity can be achieved by fastening and fixing the rear case A310 to the third symbol display device 81 and the other movable units (the first operation unit A400 and the second operation unit A700).

In the twenty-second embodiment, although the case where the portion in the right side portion adjacent to the game board A13 is formed not in a plane but in a linear shape has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the linear portion may be formed on the left side. Further, in the case where the linear portions are formed on both the left and right sides, the formation ratio (ratio) of the left and right ones may be configured to be lower than the other.

Although the case where the metal plate member 75 is disposed on the outer peripheral side of the game board A13 has been described in the twenty-second embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the metal plate is the outer edge member A7
It may be arranged on the inner side (the game area side) of 3. In this case, a metal plate is formed along the curved shape on the inner side of the outer edge member A73 to improve the rigidity of the game board A13 and the operation unit A300 with respect to the metal plate, and the game area. It can be provided with a function to guide the flowing ball. Further, a gap may be provided inside the outer edge member A73, and a metal member may be disposed in the gap.

In the twenty-second embodiment, although the case where the front protrusion A86f capable of coming into contact with the game ball is projected from the back side to the front side of the game area has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. . For example, a flange may be provided extending from the front end of the right flow path forming wall A86d of the center frame A86 to the gaming area side, and a protrusion may be provided to protrude from the back of the flange to the back. In this case, even when the game ball flows down a position closer to the front side of the game area, the projection can be brought into contact with the game ball, so that deceleration of the game ball can be efficiently generated.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the front surface of the electric decoration substrate A416 and the projecting piece A417i do not abut each other in the state where the electric decoration substrate A416 is assembled to the substrate fixing plate A417 has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, electric decoration board A416
Alternatively, another member (for example, a flexible rubber-like member) may be interposed between the front surface of the electric decoration substrate A416 and the projection piece A417i. The load may be transmitted from the projecting piece A417i to the electric decoration substrate A416. Thereby, the electric decoration substrate A 416 can be stably supported.

In the twenty-second embodiment, of the areas of the diffusion plate A 415 of the first operation unit A 400, the second area AC 2 is disposed close to the third symbol display device 81 side, and the plurality of first operation units A 4
Although the case where the third symbol display device 81 is surrounded from the upper side in the second area AC2 of 00 is described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second area AC2 may be dotted around the third symbol display device 81, or the second region AC2 may be displaced so as to reach the front and back of the third symbol display device 81. It may be configured in any arrangement.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the electric decorative substrate A 445 is included in the first displacement member A 440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an electric decoration substrate and a diffusion plate on which light emitting means such as LEDs for emitting light to the front side are disposed may be disposed on the guide plate portion A430 or the support plate portion A420. Thus, the arrangement of the first displacement member A 440 can hide the light emitting means from the player.

In addition, the first displacement member A440 may be configured to move on the front side of the electric decoration substrate A416 or the diffusion plate A415. Even with this configuration, the same effect can be obtained. In this case, the electric decoration substrate A445 may not be disposed on the first displacement member A440. For example, one or more through holes may be formed in the thickness direction of the first displacement member A 440, and light may be transmitted through the through holes. According to this, since the position of the through hole changes due to the difference in the arrangement of the first displacement member A440, it is possible to change the position where the light irradiated to the back side of the first displacement member A440 leaks.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first displacement member A440 is the electric decoration substrate A416 or the diffusion plate A41.
Although the case where one side of 5 is displaced (the electric decorative substrate A 416 is not cut off in a front view) has been described, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be displaced so as to pass (cut) the electric decoration substrate A 416 or the diffusion plate A 415 in a front view. In addition, the entire first displacement member A440 does not have to enter the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view, and a part of the first displacement member A440 is configured not to reach the back side of the diffusion plate A415 in front view It is good.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the electric decorative substrate A 445 is included in the first displacement member A 440 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first displacement member A4
The electric decoration substrate A 445 may not be disposed at 40. In this case, the electric decoration substrate is disposed on the back side of the first displacement member A440, and the front side is irradiated with light, whereby the ventilation opening A443c of the rear lid A443 and the opening A442c of the interlocking plate A442 are provided. The light passing through can be made visible to the player.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall portion A464 of the pinned gear A462 even after the transmission projection A463 of the pinned gear A462 separates from the deformed slide member A455 will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the case where the arc wall portion A464 is not formed, the transmission protrusion A463
Is arranged at a position away from the deformed slide member A455, the arc wall portion A464
The shutter member, which is configured as a separate member from the pin gear A 462, is projected to a position where it was supposed to be disposed, and the displacement of the irregular slide member A 455 is restricted by abutting against the shutter member. good.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case has been described in which the plurality of guided projecting portions A455c disposed in the different-shaped slide member A455 are offset in the direction (left and right) intersecting with the direction A416x. It is not limited. For example, a plurality of guided projections A45
5c may be a straight line parallel to the direction A416x and may be disposed on the same straight line, or the direction A4
You may shift and arrange | position to the direction which cross | intersects 16x and back and front. In any case, the posture of the odd-shaped slide member A 455 can be stabilized.

Although the case where the first displacement member A 440 and the second displacement member A 490 are displaced at different timings has been described in the twenty-second embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the length from the transmission protrusion A463 of the arc wall A464 of the pin gear A462 is shortened (at the same time, the projecting plate A456a is lengthened so as not to interfere with the arc wall A464)
The first displacement member A440 is synchronized with the displacement of the second displacement member A490 from the retracted position toward the extended position by reducing the angular width at which the deformed slide member A455 is restricted by the arc wall A464. It can be displaced from the overhanging position to the retracted position. At this time, the first displacement member A440 and the second displacement member are adjusted by adjusting the length of the arc wall A464 so that the displacement of the first displacement member A440 is contained in the section in which the posture of the first displacement member A440 is maintained. Interference with A 490 can be avoided.

Also, in this case, after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side, does it abut on the transmission projection A463 or abut on the end of the arc wall A464 opposite to the transmission projection A463? Depends on the operation mode of the pinned gear A 462, that is, the drive mode of the drive motor AMT1. That is, by controlling the drive speed (a constant speed or variable speed) of the drive motor AMT1 or the stop timing to be different, the stop position after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the retracted position side can be It can be made to differ by the case where variant slide member A455 (deform to-be-transmitted part A456) contacts arc wall part A464, and the case where it contacts contact projection A463.

Here, the modified slide member A455 (which transmits the driving force to the first displacement member A440 (
Although it has been premised that the deformed receiving portion A456) abuts on at least one of the arc wall portion A464 or the transmitting protrusion A463, it is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, arc wall A
In the case where the 464 and the transmission protrusion A463 are in the predetermined arrangement, the direction A is more than either of them.
A fixed wall may be formed to project toward the deformed slide member A 455 (deformed receiving portion A 456) along the 416 x. In this case, the deformed slide member A 455 (deformed receiving portion A 456) forms the arc wall portion A 46 at the stop position after the first displacement member A 440 is displaced to the retracted position side.
It can be made to differ by the case where it abuts on 4, the case where it abuts on the transmission projection A 463, and the case where it abuts on the fixed wall portion.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the wiring HC is disposed on the outer side of the rotation shaft of the second displacement member A 490 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, reinforcement arm A518
The rotary shaft may be formed in a cylindrical shape, and the wiring HC may pass through the inside of the cylinder to reach the substrate side connector A 493 c. In this case, the displacement of the second displacement member A 490 can prevent displacement (pulling) of the portion of the wiring HC disposed on the opposite side of the second displacement member A 490 via the cylinder.

Although the case where the wiring HC is wound around the fixed fastening portion A 475 has been described in the twenty-second embodiment, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a flexible member formed of a flexible material and having a shape similar to that of the fastening portion A 475 may be fixed to the front side of the rear plate portion A 480, and the wiring HC may be wound around the flexible member. Further, the number of flexible members does not have to be one, and may be plural. In this case, even if the wiring HC is excessively pulled and abuts on the flexible member, the load on the wiring HC can be alleviated by the deformation of the flexible member.

The wiring HC may be supported not by the fastening portion A 475 but by a mere columnar portion (a portion not used for fastening). In this case, a gap (a gap narrower than the width of the wiring HC) may be provided between the columnar portion and the rear plate portion A480. In addition, body box part A471, back plate part A480
Alternatively, a binding band may be loosely wound around a fixing portion separately formed on the wiring guide member A6560 or the like. In this case, since the displacement of the wiring HC can be absorbed by the displacement allowed for the binding band, the load given to the wiring HC can be reduced.

In addition, the fastening portion A 475 may not be fixed, and may be configured to be displaceable along the displacement direction of the wiring HC. In this case, the direction of displacement is not limited to this.
Various aspects are illustrated.

Also, the displacement of the fastening portion A 475 may be generated in synchronization with the displacement of the first displacement member A 440 or the second displacement member A 490. For example, the wiring HC can be prevented from entering the eyes of the player by displacing in the opposite direction as the second displacement member A 490 approaches the overhanging position.

The method of displacing the fastening portion A 475 may be such that the fastening portion A 475 is displaceably supported in the long hole, or the fastening portion A 475 may be configured to be tiltable with the main body box portion A 471 as a fulcrum. In this case, it is desirable that a guide groove, a notch or an interlocking portion be formed in the rear plate portion A480 so as to allow the displacement of the fastening portion A475 while maintaining the coupling state with the fastening portion A475.

Further, although the fastening portion A 475 has been described as a portion where the wiring HC is wound, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a pair of support wall portions formed in the shape of a wall on the upper and lower sides of the wiring HC and restricting the passage of the wiring HC. In this case, the width of the range in which the wiring HC can be displaced can be defined by the support wall.

In the twenty-second embodiment, one end of the wiring HC is connected to the substrate side connector A 493 c of the second displacement member A 490 from the rear side, and the other end is disposed on the front side relative to the substrate side connector A 493 c. The third connector A 416 e 3 has been described as being connected from the rear side, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be disposed inward on the side surface of the back case A310. In this case, since the wiring HC can be connected to the substrate by extending it to the side surface of the back case A310, the length necessary for arranging the wiring HC on the front side can be omitted.

Further, for example, the substrate to which the other end is connected may be disposed in the rear plate portion A 480 disposed on the back side of the substrate connector A 493 c. In this case, it is possible to omit the length necessary for arranging the wiring HC on the front side.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the case where the second displacement member A 490 is displaced from the retracted position to the extended position by driving (excitation) the drive motor AMT1 in one direction has been described. Absent. For example, it is configured to be recessed from the end face of the detection target plate portion A455e in contact with the transmission protrusion A463 toward the opposing arrangement portion A456b, and the pin attached gear A462
May be configured to be permitted beyond the sixth angle. In this case, since the same phase member A 465 can be rotated from the fourth angle d 14 beyond the allowable angle dd 1, the second displacement member A 490 is moved from the retracted position by driving (excitation) the drive motor AMT 1 in one direction. It can be displaced to the overhanging position, and can be returned and displaced to the retracted position. Thereby, by switching the length for driving (excitation) the drive motor AMT1, the displacement aspect of the second displacement member A 490 is displaced from the retracted position to the overhanging position, and the arrangement is maintained; After being displaced to the exit position, it is possible to switch back and forth to the retracted position.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the upper transmission path UL1 and the lower transmission path DL1 are described as the paths through which the driving force is transmitted by the gears, but the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, it may be a cam, a gear belt, or a linear slider.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the electric decoration substrate A 715 for irradiating light to the rotating body A 720 is formed of a flat member is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example,
You may comprise as a sheet-like board | substrate formed in a sheet form from a flexible material. in this case,
A substrate having light emitting means for emitting light to the rotator A 720 can be easily arranged on the circumference surrounding the rotator A 720.

In the twenty-second embodiment, although the case where the rotating body A 720 is disposed at a position which can be always viewed by the player has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, rotating body A7
20 may be configured to be movable to an invisible position where the player can not visually recognize. In this case, the first rotating member A 721 is used as the second rotating member A 7 in a state where the rotating body A 720 is disposed at the invisible position.
By rotating the vertical axis with respect to 28 in the horizontal direction (the second rotating member A 728 is stopped), starting synchronous rotation in that state, and moving it to a position visible to the player while continuing the rotation, The relative relationship between the rotating first rotary member A 721 and the second rotary member A 728 can be noticed. In this way, the rotation of the rotating body A 720 is continued in the case of executing the effect of correlating the information (for example, the jackpot expectation) useful for the player to the relative relationship between the first rotating member A 721 and the second rotating member A 728 at the time of stopping. The power of attention to the rotating body A 720 can be improved.

Although the case where the first operation unit A 400 and the second operation unit A 700 operate independently has been described in the twenty-second embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rendering unit A 710 of the second operation unit A 700 can be tilted forward from the lower end portion,
When the second displacement member A 490 of the first operation unit A 400 is in the overhang position, the effect unit A 71
The presentation unit A 710 may be configured to change to an inclined posture by bringing the two into contact with each other and receiving a load by raising and lowering 0. In this case, an effect of changing the attitude of the effect unit A 710 can be performed by the arrangement of the second displacement member A 490. The configuration for making the rendering unit A 710 tiltable is not limited at all. For example, the effect unit A 710 and the elevation unit may be connected by a flexible member, or may be configured to be pivotally supported by the elevation unit.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the shell portion A 722 is made of an impermeable material, and the first rotating member A
Although the case of shielding the light irradiated toward the central rotation member A 724 in the initial state or the fourth state 721 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, shell A 72
2 may be configured to have a light transmitting portion. Thereby, the first rotating member A721
It is possible to finely adjust the relationship between the posture of the lens and the amount of light reaching the central rotation member A 724.

In the twenty-second embodiment, although the case has been described where the rotation axis of the annular gear member A 723 engaged with the fixed gear SG intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG, this is not necessarily the case. For example, the annular gear member A 723 may be in the form of a linearly extending rack (the radius of curvature corresponds to infinity), or the rotation axis of the meshed gear member may be disposed parallel to the fixed gear SG . A first effect member in which the rotation axis of the gear member to be meshed intersects the axis of the fixed gear SG;
A complex effect can be performed by combining the second effect member in which the rotation axis of the gear member to be engaged is parallel to the axis of the fixed gear SG.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the first region AC1 of the diffusion plate A 415 is formed outside the operation unit A 300. However, the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, by forming the electric decorative substrate A 416 in a C shape concaved outward from the outer side in a front view, the first area AC1 is formed on the inner side of the operation unit A300, and the second area AC2 is the operation unit You may form in the position of the outer side of A300. In this case, the line of sight of the player can be easily guided to the position outside the operation unit A300.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the light is irradiated to the second rotating member A 728 from the left, right, and above is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, rotating body A72
An electric decoration substrate is disposed below 0, and light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the electric decoration substrate is conducted to the second support portion A 735 and supported by the second support portion A 735. To the second rotating member A 728, and may be viewed by the player after the second rotating member A 728 is conducted. In this case, unlike the second support portion A735, the first rotating member A721
Since it is difficult for the first support portion A731 supporting the light to transmit light, it is possible to perform an effect of causing the second rotating member A728 to emit light without emitting the first rotating member A721.

This assumes an effect that is difficult to realize with the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a. That is, the optical axis KJ of the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a is directed to the first rotating member A 721, and the second rotating member A 7 can be disposed between the first rotating member A 721 and the light emitting means A 715 a.
Since 28 transmits light, the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a is used as the second rotating member A 728.
It is difficult to control so as to reach only the first rotation member A 721 and not reach the first rotation member A 721. Therefore, by causing the second support portion A 735 to conduct and causing the light to reach the second rotating member A 728, effects that are difficult to realize with the light emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a can be performed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the first rotary member A 721 supported by the first support portion A 731 disposed inside the rotary shaft is supported by the second rotary portion A 735 disposed outside the rotary shaft. Although the case where it arrange | positions inside the rotating shaft of A728 was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the side opposite to the side supported by the first support A731 is extended to the outside of the rotation axis, and the first rotation member A721 is rotated so as to cover the second rotation member A728 from the outside of the rotation axis from the extended end side The extension may be formed in a direction parallel to the axis. In this case, the first rotation member A 721 supported inside the rotation shaft can be configured to rotate around the rotation shaft outside of the second rotation member A 728, and a surprising effect can be performed.

In the twenty-second embodiment, the central rotation member A 724 is rotationally displaced to provide a light emitting means A7.
Although the case where the area of the central rotation member A 724 in the optical axis direction view of 15a is changed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the light emitting means A 715 can be expanded by expanding the central rotating member A 724 without changing its posture or projecting the movable body from the inside.
The area of the central rotation member A 724 in the optical axis direction view of a may be changed.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the case where the shell portion A 722 interposed between the central rotation member A 724 and the light emitting means A 715 a is rotationally displaced is not limited thereto. For example, the predetermined member may be configured to move forward and backward by linear movement (sliding movement) between the central rotation member A 724 and the light emitting means A 715 a. In addition, the light emitting means A 715 a may be disposed on the predetermined member.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the optical axis of the light emitting means A 715a is always directed to the central rotation member A 724. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, light emitting means A
The optical axis 715 a may be configured to swing around the central rotation member A 724 and to be directed to the central rotation member A 724 at a predetermined timing.

Although the case where the central rotation member A 724 and the shell portion A 722 are driven by the same drive source has been described in the twenty-second embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, separate driving may be performed, or the timing of driving by the same driving source and the timing of another driving may be switched.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the second rotating member A728 is configured not to overlap all of the optical axes of the light emitting means A715a disposed on the left and right of the central rotating member A724, but the present invention is not limited thereto. It is not something that can be done. For example, the second rotation member A 728 may be formed of a plate-like member formed so as to cover a plane passing through the rotation axis as viewed in the rotation axis direction, and timing may overlap with all of the optical axis. In this case, when light is emitted from the light emitting means A 715 a disposed on the left and right of the central rotation member A 724, the influence of the central rotation member A 724 can be increased by the attitude of the second rotational member A 728.

In the twenty-second embodiment, when the shell portion A 722 of the first rotating member A 721 is changed in position by 180 degrees, the shape in front view is different. However, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the posture changes by 180 degrees, the shape in front view may be the same. Thereby, the second state and the sixth state of the first rotating member A 721 can not be recognized from the difference in the shape of the shell portion A 722.

In the twenty-second embodiment described above, the light-emitting means A 715a is disposed on the virtual plane VS with the optical axis KJ facing it. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plurality of planes in which the optical axis KJ is disposed may be set. Further, in this case, the plane through which the optical axis KJ passes may not pass through the rotation axis of the rotating body A 720.

In the twenty-third embodiment described above, the slide member A2729 is displaced in the front-rear direction. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first rotating member A2721 may be configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction, and the light emitting unit A 715 may be configured to be displaceable, and the displacement of the light emitting unit A 715 However, the virtual plane VS may be changed depending on In any case, the appearance of the first rotating member A2721 at the time of lighting of the light emitting means A715 is changed while suppressing the change of the outer shape (shape) of the first rotating member A2721 and the slide member A2729 in front view. be able to.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment described above, the gear with pin A3462 for the irregularly shaped slide member A455
Although the case where a plurality of contact positions are arranged in the circumferential direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, when the protruding tip end portion of the transmission projection A463 is formed to have a large diameter, the position at which the transmission projection A463 abuts on the deformed slide member A455, and the position at which the outer projection A3464 abuts on the deformed slide member A455 May be offset in the front-rear direction.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the gear A3462 having a pin with respect to the odd-shaped slide member A455.
Although the case where several outer diameter protrusion A3464 abuts in the same position was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the longitudinal direction of the protruding plate portion A456a (the direction A
In a direction perpendicular to the surface of the inner wall (the opposite side of the plate to be detected A455e) and further extends along the longitudinal direction from the end portion, and the wall portion orthogonal to the side surface and back view of the extended portion A346
It may be configured to extend to two sides.

In this case, the wall portions orthogonal to each other are not in contact with the arc wall portion A464, and the outer diameter projection A is
By arranging so as to be in contact with the 3464, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 in the direction intersecting with the direction A416x at the time of the abutment between the orthogonal wall and the outer diameter projection A3464. A load in a rotational direction (a load in a braking direction) can be generated in the gear A 3462.

Further, by deforming the second guide hole A 422 b so as to extend in the lateral direction at the longitudinal end (in an L shape), the deformed slide member A 455 can be displaced in the direction intersecting with the direction A 416 x In conjunction with this, the first displacement member A 440 may be displaced. That is, the deformed slide member A455 pushed to the outer diameter protrusion A3464 is the second guide hole A.
By entering the part extending in the short direction of 422 b, the transmission protrusion A455 b is in the direction A41.
It may be configured to be displaced in a direction intersecting with 6x, and the displacement may be transmitted to the first displacement member A440 via the long link A451.

In this case, when the deformed slide member A455 enters a portion of the second guide hole A422b extending in the short direction, the second guide hole A422b and the guided protrusion A455c are directed in the direction A416x.
As a result, the displacement of the profile slide member A455 along the direction A416x can be restricted. Thereby, even after the abutment of the projecting plate portion A456a and the arc wall portion A464 is released, it is possible to regulate the displacement of the deformed slide member A455 along the direction A416x.

The displacement generated in the first displacement member A440 is not limited at all when the deformed slide member A455 enters a portion extending in the lateral direction of the second guide hole A422b. For example, it may be configured to generate displacement along the direction A416x, or may be configured to generate displacement in a direction intersecting with the direction A416x.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 has been described as having a semicircular shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rectangular shape, a triangular shape, a semi-elliptical shape, or any shape may be used. On the other hand, in consideration of durability, it is preferable that the shape of the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 is configured to be tapered (does not increase in width) in the radially outward direction.

In addition, this is also the same as when forming a recessed part instead of outer-diameter protrusion A3464. That is, while the shape may be any shape, it tapers inward in the radial direction (the width does not increase)
It is preferred to be configured as follows.

The shape of the outer diameter protrusion A 3464 may be symmetrical or asymmetrical with respect to a straight line passing through the rotation axis. In this case, when configured in an asymmetrical shape, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A 440 can be changed for each direction.

For example, in the rear view of the outer protrusion A3464, the side surface of the extending tip end side of the arc wall A464 (the opposite side of the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall A464) is the extension base end side Arc wall A46 (compared to the side surface of the transmission protrusion A463 along the circumference of the arc wall A464)
You may comprise so that the angle with respect to the outer peripheral surface of 4 may become small.

In this case, the displacement of the first displacement member A440 caused by contact with the outer diameter projection A3464 under the condition of rotating the pin gear A3462 at a constant speed, the opposite side of the retracted position from the overhang position (the overhang position is exceeded The speed in the case of displacement toward the retracted position can be made greater than the speed in the case of displacement in the direction toward the projecting side). That is, the displacement speed of the first displacement member A 440 can be changed for each direction of displacement.

In addition, as the case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the opposite side of the retracted position, the case where the outer diameter projection A3464 has a projecting shape and is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position beyond the overhanging position In the case where a recess is formed instead of the outer protrusion A3464, the first displacement member A440 is caused to slide as the deformed slide member A455 slides by the size of the recess.
An example is illustrated in which the first displacement member A 440 is displaced to the overhanging position as the deformed slide member A 455 is pushed out on the outer surface of the arc wall portion A 464 and slides after being displaced to the retracted position side.

In the case where the first displacement member A440 is displaced toward the retracted position, the outer diameter projection A is
If the 3464 has a projecting shape, the outer diameter projection A3 is displaced after the first displacement member A440 is displaced to the opposite side of the retracted position as the deformed slide member A455 slides by the projected dimension.
The uneven slide member A45 is released by releasing the contact between the 464 and the irregular slide member A455.
In the case where the first displacement member A 440 is displaced to the overhanging position (retracted position side) as the sliding movement of 5 is illustrated, in the case where a recessed portion is formed instead of the external projection A 3464, the recess is formed. As the deformed slide member A455 is displaced by the size of the installation portion, the first displacement member A4
A case where 40 is displaced from the extended position to the retracted position is illustrated.

In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the main plate portion A6561 is disposed close to the rear plate portion A480. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561
May be disposed at a position away from the rear plate portion A480 (a position close to the support box portion A6470), and the projecting portion A6562 may be provided so as to protrude toward the rear plate portion A480. In addition, body plate part A65
61 may be configured to be thin (for example, sheet-like). In this case, a wide displacement area of the wiring HC can be secured.

Moreover, although the case where main body board part A6561 was formed from elongate shape was demonstrated, it is not necessarily restricted to this. For example, the main body plate portion A6561 may have a wide plate shape. In this case, since a member can be disposed between the rear plate portion A 480 and the wiring HC in a wide range, the possibility of suppressing the rubbing by the synchronous displacement of the wiring HC and the main body plate portion A 651 is raised. can do.

Although the above-described twenty-seventh embodiment has described the case where the projecting portion A6562 is fixed to the main body plate portion A6561, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion A6562 is held displaceably in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561, and the projecting portion A receives the load from the wiring HC.
The main body plate portion A6561A may be configured to rotate in response to the displacement of the 6562. That is, for example, an elongated hole (groove) through which the projecting portion A6562 is inserted is formed in the main body box portion A471, and the elongated hole (groove) displaces the projecting portion A6562 in the longitudinal direction of the main body plate portion A6561. As a result, the main body plate portion A6561 may be formed to have a shape that is rotationally displaced. In this case, the arrangement of the wiring guide member A6560 can be appropriately changed according to the magnitude of the load applied from the wiring HC to the wiring guide member A6560, so the load generated between the wiring HC and the wiring guide member A6560 Can be reduced moderately.

Moreover, although the case where main-body board part A6561 was pivotally supported rotatably was demonstrated, it is not restricted to this. For example, it may be a sliding movement or a movement along a path combining rotation and sliding.

In addition, although the case where the second displacement member A 490 is subjected to the rotational displacement in a reciprocating manner has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, the second displacement member A 490 may be slidingly displaced, or the second rotating member A 490 may be rotationally displaced one or more rotations.

Although the case where the wiring guide member A6560 is disposed on the back side of the support box portion A6470 has been described in the twenty-seventh embodiment, the invention is not necessarily limited thereto. For example, body plate portion A
6561 is disposed on the front side of the support box portion A 6470, and is a through elongated hole for guiding the projecting portion A 6562 to the support box portion A 6470 (long hole along the arc shape centering on the rotation axis of the main body plate portion A 6561) It may be configured such that the projecting portion A6562 protrudes to the back side of the support box portion A6470 through the through hole. In this case, the support box portion A 6470 and the rear plate portion A 480
As compared with the case where the main body plate portion A6561 is disposed therebetween, the space for the volume of the main body plate portion A6561 can be made open. Thereby, it is possible to easily secure a space in which the wiring HC is displaced, and to improve the design freedom of the main body plate portion A6561 (for example, based on the gap dimension between the support box portion A6470 and the rear plate portion A480 Can also be configured as a thick member).

<First control example>
Next, various control examples applicable to the pachinko machine of each embodiment described above will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 389 to 478, a first control example in the pachinko machine of each of the above embodiments will be described. In the configuration used in the first control example, some of the configurations that are the same as those in each of the above embodiments are given different reference numerals, but it is easy to understand the invention of the first control example The contents of the specific configuration are the same as the corresponding configurations of the above-described embodiments, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  First, an outline (specification) of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. The pachinko machine 10 in the first control example has a first area (V area) in which the game ball can enter the ball, inside the variable winning device 65 that can enter the ball when the big win in the special symbol lottery. A sorting device (V) for sorting the second region (non-V region) different from the first region and the gaming ball having flowed into the inside of the variable winning device 65 into either the first region or the second region An official character) is provided. While at least one gaming ball enters (passes) to the first area during one jackpot, a definite variation state of a special symbol is given after the jackpot end, while the first jackpot is hit during the first jackpot If no game balls enter the one area, a time-shortened state of the normal symbol is given after the big hit is finished until the lottery of the special symbol is executed up to 100 times. Therefore, when the jackpot game is executed, it is possible to play the game in anticipation that the game balls are distributed to the first area (V area) by the distribution device (V combination).

  The sorting device (V character) is basically maintained in an arrangement in which the game balls can be distributed to the second area (arrangement in which it can not be distributed to the first area), and a predetermined round (for example, 5 In the round), the arrangement is such that the game ball can be distributed to the first area only during a specific period (for example, 5 seconds after the start of the fifth round and 5 seconds after 10 seconds) . By entering the game ball into the specific winning opening 65a during this specific period, it becomes possible to cause the game ball to enter the first area, and the game state after the big hit is a definite variation of the special symbol which is advantageous. It is possible to shift to the state.

  In the first control example, an opening / closing pattern (for example, 5 seconds after start of the 5th round-9.5 seconds) in which the game ball can reach the sorting apparatus during the specific period in the 5th round The jackpot type (probable variation jackpot) that the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening and closing pattern in which the specified winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds when elapsed, and distribution between the specified period Opening and closing pattern that can not reach the device (for example, opening and closing pattern in which the specified winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds from the start of the fifth round to 4.5 seconds) There is provided at least a jackpot type (usually a jackpot) with which the (large opening) 65a is opened and closed. In the former jackpot type (probable variation jackpot), just by aiming at the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a in the fifth round of jackpot and continuing to shoot the game ball, the game ball can be easily moved to the first area by the sorting apparatus Can be distributed, so after the end of the jackpot, it will be in a state of special variation of the special symbol. On the other hand, in the latter jackpot type (usually the jackpot), all the game balls that have reached the sorting device even if they aim at the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a in the fifth round of the jackpot and continue to shoot the game ball Since it is distributed to the second area, no probability change state is given (time saving state is given).

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when transitioning to the special symbol in the definite variation state, it is determined whether or not to fall to the low probability state of the special symbol every time the drawing condition of the special symbol is established. It is supposed to carry out a lottery. More specifically, when the lottery condition of the special symbol is established in the definite variation state of the special symbol, first, the lottery (fall probability 1/500) of whether to fall to the low probability state of the special symbol is executed and the fall is made When it becomes the corresponding lottery result, while executing the big hit lottery with the lottery probability (1/250) in the low probability state of the special symbol, if it is not the lottery result corresponding to the fall, the high probability state of the special symbol The jackpot lottery is executed at the lottery probability (1/125). On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, regardless of whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a regular jackpot, the time saving state of the normal symbol is until the lottery of the special symbol is finished 100 times after the jackpot end. The configuration is to be maintained. That is, when a definite variation state of a special symbol is set after becoming a definite variation big hit and a big variation is set after the big hit, whether or not a lottery result corresponding to a fall is obtained until 100 lotterys of special symbols are executed. In addition, after the big hit, until the lottery condition of the 100th special symbol is established, the normal state of the normal symbol continues. For this reason, after the big hit end, until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times, because the operation other than the big hit probability becomes almost the same, whether it is a low probability state of special symbol or a definite variation state of special symbol Can be made difficult for the player to recognize. Therefore, if the previous jackpot is usually a jackpot and the special symbol low probability state since the end of the jackpot, or the previous jackpot is a definite variation jackpot, until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times Even if the player falls into the low probability state, the player is continuously encouraged by the player to have a sense of expectation for the fact that the special symbol is in a definite change state until 100 lotterys of the special symbol are executed. You can keep on going. Thus, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation for the game.

  In addition, as described above with reference to FIG. 302 and the like, the second ball entry port (second winning port) 640 flows down the flow path provided on the right side in a front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 A position at which the ball can enter the ball (a position at which the gaming ball which has flowed down the flow path provided on the left side in front view can not enter the ball) is provided. In other words, the electric symbol 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is easy to be released (that is, the game ball is likely to enter the second entrance 640) a definite pattern in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set and In the short time state, the game balls enter at a high ratio (for example, a ratio of one ball to three balls) to the second ball entry port 640 by firing the game balls toward the flow path on the right in front view So you can play the game efficiently. On the other hand, in the normal state in which the normal state of the normal symbol is set, it is difficult for the electric role object 640a attached to the second entrance 640 to be opened (that is, the game ball enters the second entrance 640). Because it is difficult, the game ball which has flowed down the channel provided on the left side in front view to the third symbol display device 81 can enter the ball (a game which has flowed down the channel provided on the right side in front view) A game is played by a game method of aiming at the first ball entry port (first winning opening) 64 provided at a position where the ball can not enter the ball (the difficulty) and firing the game ball. Hereinafter, for the sake of simplicity of the description, firing the gaming ball toward the flow path on the left side in front view with respect to the third symbol display device 81 is referred to as "left strike" and is directed to the flow path on the right side in front view Launching the game ball is referred to as "right strike". In addition, the drawing of the first special symbol (lottery of the special figure 1) that the drawing of the special symbol executed based on the game ball entering the first ball entry port (first winning opening) 64 The special symbol lottery that is executed on the basis of the game ball entering the second entrance (second winning opening) 640, which is called the second special symbol lottery (the special symbol 2 lottery It is called).

  Next, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 in this control example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 389 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the configuration of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in the first control example, and FIG. 389 (b) is a third view in the first control example. It is the model which showed the display content of the symbol display apparatus 81 typically. The third symbol display device 81 is configured by a 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 404), and, for example, three left, middle and right A row of symbols is displayed.

  The third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is composed of nine types of main symbols attached with the numerals "1" to "9". Each main symbol is configured by attaching numbers from "1" to "9" on the rear symbol consisting of a wooden box, and the main symbol with an odd number (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) is The front of the wooden box is almost fully filled with large numbers. On the other hand, the main symbol with an even number (2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached symbol imitating a character such as a shield, a sword, a cloak, etc., almost fully in front of the wooden box. An even number is small in green on the lower right side of and is added so as to be displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

  Moreover, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the same main symbol is displayed when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 404) described later is a big hit (big hit A to E). A consistent variation display is performed, and a jackpot is generated after the variation display is finished. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variable display in which the same main symbol is not aligned is performed.

  Furthermore, if the type of the jackpot that is won is a large jackpot, while the variable display is performed in which the same main symbol with an even number is always aligned, while if it is a positive variation jackpot, the same main symbol with an even number is Either of the same variation display or the variation display in which the same main symbol with an odd number is aligned is executed. That is, not only the jackpot but also the probability change state after the jackpot end is determined by executing the variable display in which the same main symbols with odd numbers are aligned. In the first control example, the ratio at which the variable display in which the same main symbol attached with an odd number is aligned is set to an extremely low probability (for example, a ratio of 1%) in the case of a probability variation jackpot There is. In this way, it is possible to rare cases where it is possible to grasp that the jackpot is a probability variation jackpot from the types of symbols that were prepared when the jackpot was won. As described above, until the drawing of the special symbol 100 times after the end of the big hit is executed, it is maintained in the time-short state of the normal symbol (it discriminates whether it is a definite variation state or not from the operation mode of the electric character 640a It becomes difficult), so it is difficult to grasp whether or not it is a definite variation big hit from the types of main symbols that were gathered at the time of big hit, until the lottery of special symbols is finished 100 times after the big hit is finished In the meantime, it is possible to generate more frequent situations in which it is unknown whether it is a definite change state or a short time state. Therefore, when the jackpot is hit or the jackpot is hit normally, the player's against the jackpot against the fact that the jackpot is in a definite change state until the drawing of the special symbol of 100 times is finished after the end of the jackpot. I can maintain my sense of expectation.

  As shown in FIG. 389 (a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is a main display for displaying the third symbol when the third symbol is variably displayed or when the third symbol is stopped and displayed. Region Dm, small region Ds1 for displaying the number of holding balls of the first special symbol, small region Ds2 for displaying the number of holding balls of the second special symbol, predetermined effects (for example, an interrupt to be described later) It is comprised by small area | region Ds3 for shrinking | reducing and displaying the fluctuation production of a 3rd symbol, while performing continuous hit production | presentation.

  The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 of left, middle and right, and three symbol rows Z1, Z2 and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-described third symbol is displayed in a prescribed order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variable display is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In particular, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in descending order in the left symbol row Z1, and the numbers of the main symbols are arranged in ascending order in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3.

  Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed on the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol stops on the effective line L1 in the order of left symbol row Z1 → right symbol row Z3 → middle symbol row Z2 at each game. Is displayed. If the combination of the big hit symbols (in the present embodiment, the combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a big hit moving image is displayed as a big hit.

  On the other hand, the small area Ds1 is an area for displaying the number of balls (holding balls) for which fluctuation has not been executed among the balls entering the first entrance 64 (the number of holding balls for the first special symbol). The small area Ds2 is an area for displaying the number of balls (holding balls) for which the variation has not been executed among the balls entering the second entrance 640 (the number of holding balls for the second special symbol). Ds3 is an area in which a variation effect is reduced and displayed, for example, when a display effect different from the variation effect is performed in the main display area. By reducing and displaying the fluctuation effect, it is possible to suppress that the display effect different from the fluctuation effect is blocked by the third symbol and hard to be seen.

  On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 389 (b), a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, and a display showing the expectation of jackpot in the background of the third symbol An effect is performed.

  If the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64 while the variable display is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B), the number of times of ball entry is up to 4 times The reserved ball number is indicated by the first symbol display device 37A and also in the small area Ds1. Similarly, when the gaming ball enters the second entrance 640, the number of entrances is suspended up to four times, and the number of holding balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37B and the small area Ds2 Is also shown. In the small area Ds1, one holding ball number design is displayed per one holding ball number of the first special symbol, and in the small area Ds2, one holding ball number design per one holding ball number of the second special symbol Is displayed. That is, in the case where one symbol holding ball number symbol is displayed in the small area Ds1 or the small region Ds2, it indicates that the number of holding balls is one, and in the case where four symbol holding ball numbers are displayed, Indicates that the number of balls held is 4 balls. In addition, when the number-of-held-balls design is not displayed, it indicates that the number of held balls in the first special symbol is 0, that is, there is no held ball. FIG. 389 (b) exemplifies the case where the number of holding balls of the first special symbol is four and the number of holding balls of the second special symbol is zero.

  In the first control example, the ball entering the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 is configured to be held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is four times The number of times is not limited to three, and may be set three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, instead of displaying the number-of-parking balls symbol in the small areas Ds1 and Ds2, the number of holding balls is a part of the third symbol display device 81 by a number, or the area divided into four by the number of holding balls It may be displayed in different modes (for example, colors and lighting patterns). Further, since the number of holding balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the number of holding balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Furthermore, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which corresponds to the maximum number of holdings, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 390 to FIG. 403, various entertainment effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 390 to FIG. 393, in the first control example, the third symbol display device 81 is executed during the gaming state (time reduction state or positive change state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set. Will be described. As described above, in the first control example, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the time saving state and the definite variation state until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times after the big hit is finished. Configured. That is, even when the gaming state after the big hit is set to the short time state, even if it is set to the definite change state, the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times after the previous big hit is finished unless the big hit is made. Until then, it has been configured to be maintained in a time-saving state of the normal symbol. Since the time saving state of this normal symbol is maintained even when it has fallen to the low probability state of the special symbol from being executed after 100 times being executed, the game set at the end of the jackpot Not only the state, but also the timing at which the special symbol changes from the high probability state to the low probability state can be made difficult for the player to distinguish.

  However, if the state of the special symbol of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is a special symbol or a low probability state) is completely indistinguishable, the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set While the game is continuing, the game becomes monotonous, which may make it impossible to sufficiently improve the player's interest in the game. Therefore, in the first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 enables the player to predict the possibility of the probability change state to a certain extent. More specifically, every time when the variable display of the special symbol is executed, one of the three back modes is suggested out of the three back modes that indicate the expectation of the probability change state, taking into consideration the gaming state at the time of execution. It is set as the setting. As a result, since it is possible to realize the game characteristic of predicting the state of the special symbol from the aspect of the back surface mode, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  First, with reference to FIG. 390 (a), a display mode (rear mode) in which the current state is a probability change state and the degree of expectation is relatively low will be described. As shown in FIG. 390 (a), when the back mode (cave search mode) having a relatively low degree of expectation which is a definite change state is set, the character 801 imitating an adventurer possesses a sword and a torch A display mode for searching the inside of the cave is displayed. In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, on the lower right side in the front view, the number of lottery times of the remaining special symbols until the number of lottery times that the time saving state of the normal pattern may end The display area 802 having a horizontally elongated substantially rectangular shape is displayed to indicate the guaranteed number of times. In the example of FIG. 390 (a), the case where 90 times are displayed as the guaranteed number is illustrated. That is, it illustrates the state after the lottery of the special symbol has been executed 10 times since the end of the jackpot. Furthermore, a horizontally long, substantially rectangular display area 803 is displayed below the front view of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. Inside the display area 803, a right-handed image with a horizontally long, substantially elliptical shape in which the character "right-handed" is displayed is displayed on the left and right, and between the right-handed images, "Cave search mode" Is displayed. By these display modes, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues until at least 90 more times the drawing of the special symbol is performed (the time saving state may end when the 90 drawing ends), The player can easily make the player understand that the player should play the game by hitting the right. Also, compared with the temple search mode (see FIG. 390 (b)) and the super temple search mode (see FIG. 391) described later, the display contents are sober and intuitive that the player can It can be understood that the possibility that the state is continuing is relatively low.

  FIG. 390 (b) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the rear mode (temple search mode) in which the current state is a positive change state and having a high degree of expectation is set as compared with the cave search mode. When the temple search mode is set, a display mode in which the character 801 imitating an adventurer searches the temple is displayed, and the character between the right-handed images in the display area 803 is the “temple search mode”. Is changed to The display content of the temple search mode is a display mode that looks brighter than the cave search mode and is a display mode that makes it easy for the player to have a flashy impression, so that the expectation of being a probability variation state is relatively high Can be intuitively understood.

  FIG. 391 is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the back surface mode (super temple search mode) indicating that the degree of expectation that is a definite change state is higher than the temple search mode is set. When the super temple search mode is set, a letter "CHANCE" is displayed on the temple pillar and a torch is placed on the temple pillar. Furthermore, a substantially circular display area 804 in which the character "super" is displayed is displayed on the upper left side of the character "temple search mode" in the display area 803. With these display modes, it is possible to give the player a more impressive impression than in the temple search mode (see FIG. 390 (b)), so it is possible to further improve the expectation for being in a definite change state. In addition, this super temple search mode is a back mode which may be set (transitioned) only when the gaming state is a definite change state and the hold result does not include the lottery result of the fall. That is, at the time of transition to the super temple search mode, not only the definite change state is determined but also the definite change state is continued until at least the reserve ball at the transition point is digested. By doing this, it is possible to please the player.

  As described above, in the first control example, the cave search mode in which the expectation of the probability change state is relatively low and the temple search mode in which the expectation of the probability change state is relatively high during the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. 3 and the super temple search mode 3 to determine that there is no lottery result corresponding to a fall within the hold (it will at least continue the definite change until the hold is absorbed), as well as to determine that it is a definite change state. One of the back modes of the type is set at the time of execution of the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current gaming state from the back mode while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player has an interest in the game. It can be improved. In addition, since it is determined that the gaming state is a definite change state by setting the super temple search mode, if the player is transitioned to the super temple mode while predicting that the game state is a positive change state, It is possible to bring joy to the fact that one's own prediction was correct. On the other hand, when transitioning to the super temple mode even though the special symbol is predicted to be in a low probability state, the player feels pleasure in having been set to a gaming state more advantageous than expected. It can be turned. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is determined that the draw result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the draw for the number of holding balls is executed with the jackpot probability of the definite change state) Because it is possible, it is possible to play the game with greater expectation of becoming a big hit in the hold.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 392 and 393, in the first control example, a lottery of a special symbol of a predetermined number of times (for example, 96 times) without winning a big hit in the state where the time saving state of the normal symbol is set. The following describes the definite variation continuation indication effect that is performed when the is performed. FIG. 392 is a diagram showing a display mode at the start of this definite variation continuous indication effect. The definite change continuation suggestion effect is an effect for indicating whether or not the gaming state is a definite change state, and is executed from the 96th variable display effect to the 99th variable display effect after the jackpot ends. That is, it is an effect which is executed until immediately before the 100th lottery of special symbols which is the number of times of guarantee of the time saving state is executed. In the first control example, in the time saving state, the remaining time saving number is subtracted at the start of the variation of the special symbol. That is, in the time saving state, since the time saving number becomes 0 at the start of the 100th variation display after the big hit end, the time saving state is already finished during execution of the 100th variation display (transition to the normal state State). Therefore, even if it is a definite change state, even if it is a short time state, it is set as the structure which performs notification of whether it is a positive change state or not by the 99th variable display effect maintained in the short time state of a normal symbol reliably. With such a configuration, it is difficult to specify whether or not the definite variation state is continuing until the result of the definite variation continuation indication effect is confirmed (that is, it is a time-saving state from the operation of the electric part 640a) Because it becomes difficult to see if it is a definite change state), the player can be made to play the game paying attention by the positive change continuation indication effect.

  As shown in FIG. 392, when the definite variation continuation suggestive effect is started, an effect that the door 806 appears in front of the character 801 imitating an adventurer is executed. Further, above the door 806, a display area 805 is displayed in which the characters "the door breakthrough mode start !!" and the characters "if the door breaks through, the definite variation continues !?" is displayed. Furthermore, the character displayed between the right-handed images in the display area 803 is changed to the “door breakthrough mode”. By these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that if the character 801 can break through the door, it means that the definite change state is continuing. In this definite variation continuous indication effect (door breakthrough mode), an effect of attacking the door 806 is executed each time the variable display is executed, and if the door 806 can be finally destroyed (breakthrough), a definite variation state The effect that the continuation of is notified is performed.

  FIG. 393 (a) is a diagram showing an effect aspect that suggests that the degree of expectation in which the probability change state continues is relatively low in the probability change continuation suggestive effect (door breakthrough mode). When this low expectation degree rendering mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 393 (a), the character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 with a sword to destroy the door 806 (breakthrough (breakthrough The presentation to try is executed. On the other hand, FIG. 393 (b) is a diagram showing an effect aspect that suggests that the degree of expectation in which the probability change state continues is relatively high in the probability change continuation suggestive effect (door breakthrough mode). When this high expectation game mode is executed, as shown in FIG. 393 (b), the character 801 imitating an adventurer attacks the door 806 by striking the door 806 with a huge hammer. An effect to try to destroy is executed.

  In order to destroy the door 806, it is intuitively apparent to many players that it is more effective to strike with a hammer than with a sword, so it is more effective to strike with a hammer. The player can easily understand that the degree of expectation of breaking through the door 806 is high. Therefore, it is possible to perform the game in anticipation that the effect of striking the door 806 with the hammer more frequently can be performed during execution of the definite variation continuing suggestion effect. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, at the start of the definite variation continuation indication effect, the 96th to 99th lottery results, which are the execution range of the positive variation continuation indication effect, are read ahead, and the variation condition is up to the 99th special symbol lottery Determines whether or not the symbol pattern continues, and if the definite change state continues until the 99th lottery of the special symbol, the selection ratio of the production scenario in which the attack pattern of high expectation is easy to occur is configured to be high . On the other hand, if it has fallen to a short time before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or if the time after the previous big hit was short), an attack pattern with a low expectation occurs The selection rate of the easy-to-make presentation scenario is high. As described above, by setting the effect mode based on the gaming state at the end of the effect, the gaming state after the end of the effect can be notified more accurately.

  Here, if it is configured to execute the definite variation continuation indication effect based on only the gaming state at the start of the effect, it falls to a low probability state during the execution of the positive variation continuation indication effect, and the notification of the continuation of the positive condition state Nevertheless, there is a risk that the time saving state will be ended with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may have a feeling of mistrust to the pachinko machine 10 or the hole due to the contradiction between the effect contents and the actual operation. In addition, as a measure against this, there is also a method in which a definite variation continuation suggestion effect is configured by a effect that is completed by one change, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient effect period. It becomes difficult to

  On the other hand, in the first control example, the definite variation continuation indication suggestion is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the positive variation continuation indication indication is The determination is made based on the gaming state at the time when the final drawing of the special symbol in the execution range of the definite variation continuation effect is performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to diversify the effect mode while making it possible to accurately notify the gaming state at the end of the effect. In addition, when it is a definite change state at the time of effect start, and the holding ball until the end of effect is not held, it is configured such that an effect that is relatively easy to generate an attack pattern with a high degree of expectation is selected. ing. This is lower than the probability that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be a big hit, it is extremely rare to fall to the low probability state of the special symbol within the production period (relatively high probability probability change It is for the effect to end).

  Next, transitions of various states after the end of the probability variation jackpot in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 394 (a), transition of the state in the case of falling to a low probability state within 100 times after the end of the probability variation jackpot will be described. As shown in FIG. 394 (a), when it falls within 100 times, it shifts to the low probability state of special symbol when it falls, but the time saving state of the normal symbol performs the lottery of special symbol 100 times Continue until it is done. Then, in the definite variation continuation indication effect performed in the 96th to 99th variable display effects, an effect that fails to break through the door 806 is performed, and the transition to the normal state is notified.

  On the other hand, FIG. 394 (b) is a diagram showing transition of the state when falling to the low probability state of the special symbol in the drawing of the special symbol after 100 times of the end of the probability variation jackpot. As shown in FIG. 394 (b), when the player falls after 100 rounds after the big hit, the time saving state of the normal symbol and the definite variation state of the special symbol are maintained until the falling. For this reason, in the definite variation continuation indication effect performed over the execution period of the 96th to 99th variable display, the effect of successfully breaking through the door 806 is performed, and the continuation of the positive variation state is notified.

  In this first control example, as in the case of falling in the special symbol lottery after 100 times, also when becoming a big hit in the special symbol drawing during the time saving state of the normal symbol, it is normal at the start of the change The time saving state of the symbol is finished. For this reason, when the time saving state is ended within the number of times of drawing the special symbol of 100 times (that is, within the guarantee number of time saving state), the winning of the jackpot is decided at that time. On the other hand, when the time saving state is ended after 100 times (that is, after the guarantee number of times of the time saving state), it means that it is either a jackpot or a fall. And since the probability (1/125) of winning a big hit is higher than the probability of falling (1/500), it will be a big hit even if the time saving state is ended at the start of fluctuation after 100 times Can be expected. Therefore, since it is possible to play the game paying attention to whether or not the time saving state continues, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the depression stop effect in the first control example will be described. This depression stop effect is an effect in which each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the lens member (PUSH button) 10317 provided on the swing operation member 10310 is pressed. That is, it is an effect that the stop timing of each symbol row can be an arbitrary timing of the player by the operation timing of the player on the PUSH button 10317.

  FIG. 395 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 during execution of the press stop effect. In this depression stop effect, as shown in FIG. 395 (a), button images (the left button image 807aL, the center button image 807aC, the right button image) respectively imitating the PUSH button 10317 below each symbol row in the variable display 807aR) is displayed. In addition, effective period gauges (left effective period gauge 807bL, central effective period gauge 807bC, right effective period gauge 807bR) indicating the remaining periods in which the stop operation for each symbol row is effective are displayed below each button image . With these display contents, the player can easily understand that each symbol row is stopped and displayed each time the PUSH button 10317 is pressed.

  FIG. 395 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode in the case where the player performs the first operation (depression) on the push button 10317 during execution of the depression stop effect. As shown in FIG. 395 (b), when the first operation (pressing) is performed, the left symbol row is stopped and displayed. When the second operation is performed within the operation valid period, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the third operation is performed, the central symbol row is stopped and displayed. In this manner, the player's interest in the game can be improved by configuring the timing of symbol stop to be arbitrarily determined by the player.

  When each symbol row is stopped and displayed according to the operation timing of the player, if the player's operation is too early, time may be too long after all symbol rows are stopped. As a countermeasure against this, in the first control example, when three stop operations are performed early (for example, within 1 second after the start of the effective period), the central symbol row is not immediately stopped and displayed. By performing stop display of the central symbol row through a specific effect, it is configured that the period after the stop display is suppressed from being excessive. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 396 (a), a plurality of specific symbols (symbols with the character Chance Charge) are included based on the third operation (pressing) being executed A particular symbol after the three symbols have moved up and down in the central symbol row (ie after suggesting that any of the three symbols may be displayed as a stop symbol in the central symbol row) (Chance charge symbol) It is configured to execute an effect (chance charge effect) in which symbols other than the symbol are stopped. Thus, depending on the length of the remaining operation effective period at the time of performing the stop operation of the central symbol row (the third press on the PUSH button 10317), the central symbol row may be immediately stopped or displayed as a chance charge By switching whether to fill the time by turning effect, it is possible to suppress that the state in which all the symbol rows are stopped and displayed becomes unnaturally long. Therefore, a more natural presentation mode can be realized.

  In the first control example, in the depression and stop effect, an effect of a pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed in the central symbol row is separately present. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the stop operation for the central symbol row is performed, the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed after passing through the chance charge effect (see FIG. 396 (a)). When the stop display of the chance charge symbol occurs, it develops into a chance charge effect (see FIG. 396 (b)) described later. By setting an effect pattern in which the chance charge symbol is stopped and displayed, the operation stop effect is selected as a simple effect, and even if the chance charge overturn effect occurs, the possibility of developing into the chance charge effect Can make the player think like there is Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 396 (b) and FIG. 397, the presentation aspect of the chance charge presentation mentioned above is demonstrated. FIG. 396 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when the chance charge effect is started. When the chance charge effect is started, the character 801 imitating an adventurer is displayed at the center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and it is set to a mode in which the periphery emits light (a mode in which the aura is covered) Be done. Further, on the right side of the character 801, a vertically elongated substantially rectangular gage KG is displayed. The spirit gauge KG is used to display the degree of the spirit of the character 801 in the form of a meter, and can be displayed in one to six stages. Further, in the display area 805 displayed above the character 801, characters such as "The more chances are stored, the more chances are stored" are displayed. Furthermore, in the display area 803, the characters "Chance Charge remaining 5 times" are displayed. In the chance charge effect of 1, an operation in which the character 801 tries to save spirit is executed five times, and the amount of saved spirit is the size of light around the character 801 (the amount of crawling aura), and the spirit gauge KG It is informed by the meter amount of. With these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that there is a case where the ensuing feeling is good.

  FIG. 397 (a) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode at the end of the chance charge effect. As shown in FIG. 397 (a), in addition to the size of the light around the character 801 (the amount of crawling aura) and the meter amount of the agility gauge KG, the degree of vigor accumulated by the characters displayed in the display area 805 Is notified. In the example of FIG. 397 (a), the state in which the spirit has accumulated up to the fifth of the six steps is illustrated, and in the display area 805, the characters “charge level 5 !!” are displayed. By these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand the amount of the finally accumulated spirit.

  In addition, the spirit gauge accumulated in the chance charge production is consumed to generate some chance up production at each timing until the holding ball at the start of the chance charge production is digested. The chance-up effect is an effect that increases the expectation of the jackpot, and, for example, changes in the display mode of the number-of-held-balls pattern, the occurrence of so-called pseudo-links, the occurrence of cut-in effects, and Outbreak etc. The gas gauge is designed to be consumed until it reaches zero. That is, it is configured so as not to be discarded without being consumed. By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so it is possible to play a game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effects will occur next. . Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, the gage amount of the gage gauge KG stored in the chance charge effect is determined based on the number of balls reserved at the start of the chance charge effect. Then, after the completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is performed (that is, the consumption gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each holding ball. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of the chance charge presentation (processing load when determining the number of gauges).

  FIG. 397 (b) is a diagram showing an example of a display mode when consuming a gas gauge. FIG. 397 (b) illustrates a case where one gauge consumption is consumed and so-called hold change effect is executed as the chance-up effect. That is, as shown in FIG. 397 (b), at the same time as the gauge amount of the gas gauge KG decreases by 1 gauge (consumes), the display mode of the third holding ball number design Hz3 in the small area Ds1 is white to blue An effect that changes to (the expectation increases) is executed. In this way, by setting it as a configuration in which some effect (chance-up effect) that increases the degree of expectation of hitting is performed along with the decrease in the gauge amount of the feeler gauge KG, while the gauge amount of the feeler gauge KG remains , You can play the game looking forward to what kind of chance up production will occur next. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 398, the temporal change of the display mode (render mode) in the variable display effect in which the press stop effect is set will be described. First, referring to FIG. 398 (a), in the depression stop effect not developing into the chance charge effect, the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed after 1 second from the start of the effective period. The time-dependent change of the presentation aspect of is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 398 (a), when the fluctuation display in which only the depression stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, the normal operation is performed for 6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Fluctuation display (simply, fluctuation display in which each symbol row fluctuates in the vertical direction at high speed) is executed, and when 6 seconds elapse, depression stop effect (see FIG. 395 (a)) is started. Then, when the third stop operation is executed after 1 second (when 2 seconds have passed in the example of FIG. 398 (a)) after the effective period of the depression stop effect is started, the left symbol row already stopped And, in addition to the right symbol row, the central symbol row is displayed pseudo stop. The pseudo stop display means that the display is performed in a mode (for example, a mode vibrating with an extremely small amplitude) which is difficult to distinguish from the final stop display. This pseudo stop continues until the stop display timing of the original variable display (the timing when the stop command is received from the main control device 110), and each symbol row is completely stopped and displayed by the stop display timing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 398 (b), the third stop operation (stop operation for the middle symbol row) is executed within 1 second or less from the start of the effective period in the press stop effect that does not develop into the chance charge effect. The time-dependent change of the presentation mode in the case of having been performed is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 398 (b), when the fluctuation display in which only the depression stop effect is set (that is, the chance charge effect is not executed) is executed, the normal operation is performed for 6 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. The variable display is executed, and the depression stop effect (see FIG. 395 (a)) is started when 6 seconds have elapsed. Then, when the third stop operation is performed in the range of 1 second or less (0.5 seconds in the example of FIG. 398 (b)) after the effective period of the depression stop effect is started, chance charge turning effect is produced After (see FIG. 396 (a)) is executed, an effect is executed in which the combination of the missing symbols is stopped and displayed at the stop display timing. As a result, even if three stop operations are executed relatively early after the start of the effective period, it is possible to connect (fill in) the period until the stop display by the chance charge overplay effect, so the off-pattern It is possible to make the transition of the presentation mode up to the stop display of in a natural form. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect mode with less discomfort.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 398 (c), the temporal change of the effect mode in the case of developing into the chance charge effect will be described. As shown in FIG. 398 (c), even when the chance charge effect is developed, the transition of the same effect mode as when the chance charge effect is not executed is performed until the depression stop effect is executed. Then, in the variable display in which the chance charge effect is set, when three stop operations are executed in the press stop effect, the chance charge overrun effect (FIG. 396 (a) regardless of the timing of the third stop operation. Reference) occurs, and then, after 10 seconds from the start of fluctuation, it develops into chance charge presentation.

  As described above, in the first control example, even in the variable display in which only the press and stop effect is set, the chance charge and wound effect can be executed at the end timing of the stop operation, so that the chance charge effect is performed. You can have a sense of expectation for more times more. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 399 to FIG. 401, the interruption continuous hitting effect which is a kind of the entertaining effect in the first control example will be described. The interruption continuous hitting effect is an effect of a display mode such as an effect of an aspect different from the display effect which has been displayed so far suddenly during an ordinary variable display or reach change. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399 (a), an image of a normal variation display effect is performed by executing an interruption continuous hitting effect during execution of the normal variation display effect (see FIG. 389 (b)). The cut-in area CR in which the face of the monster is displayed up is formed (displayed) by being superimposed on (the layer on the near side). That is, as shown in FIG. 399 (a), a display area (cut-in area CR) formed in a band shape directed downward from the upper left side to the lower right side on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. . In this cut-in area CR, as shown in FIG. 399 (a), the display range occupies about 70% of the area on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and a monster is imitated in the central part of the cut-in area CR. The enlarged image is displayed. In addition, a display area 805 in which the characters “Monster group assault!” Is displayed (formed) is displayed above the image imitating the monster in the cut-in area CR. With these display contents, it is easily understood that the player has performed (cut into) an effect completely different from the effect which was being executed until the cut-in area CR was displayed. It can be done. While the cut-in area CR is being formed (that is, while the continuous-on-striking effect is being performed), the display effect which has been performed until just before that is interrupted. That is, all the display effects of the layer on the back side of the cut-in area CR are temporarily stopped, and the effect mode is resumed from the situation at the time of interruption with the end of the interrupting continuous hitting effect. As to the sound (music), it is switched depending on the situation whether to be paused (suspended) or to continue the reproduction. In the first control example, when the interrupt continuous hitting effect is executed during execution of the normal variable display, both the display mode and the voice mode are controlled to be interrupted until the end of the interrupt continuous hit effect, In the case where an interruption continuous hitting effect is executed after the reach occurs (during reach change), only the display mode is interrupted. This is because the music (BGM) more flashy after reaching reach flows as compared to during normal variable display, so that the relatively bright BGM is interrupted, making the player uncomfortable. It is the purpose to suppress that it is held.

  After the cut-in region CR in which an image simulating a monster is displayed is formed after an interruption continuous hitting effect is executed, the player is urged to continuously press the PUSH button 10317 (continuous hit). The display mode is displayed. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 399 (b), the button image BG imitating the PUSH button 10317 is displayed in the cut-in area CR, and the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is valid below it. A gauge image GG is displayed which shows the remaining period in the form of a gauge. Further, above the button image BG, a character of “continuous hit” and an image of three arrows facing the push button image BG are displayed. Furthermore, the display area 805 displays the text "Reduce the monster by continuous hitting !!", and a display area 808 in which the text "100 remaining" is displayed on the right side of the button image BG ( Is displayed. By these display contents, it is possible to easily make the player understand that the number of monsters can be reduced as the push button 10317 is pressed within the continuous hit effective period.

  In the first control example, a plurality of types in which the number of monsters that can be reduced during the continuous hitting effective period (the lower limit value of the number of remaining displayed monsters) is different are provided as the types of interruption continuous hitting effects. It is done. And basically, the larger the number of monsters are killed (the number of remaining monsters is reduced), the higher the jackpot expectation rate is. More specifically, a type of effect that makes it possible to kill all 100 monsters (set the number of remaining monsters to 0) when an interruption continuous hitting effect is set for the fluctuation display of the jackpot. While it is possible to select the mode, it is configured such that it is impossible to reduce the number of monsters to 0 (only up to 3 at the maximum) in the out-of-order variation display.

  In the first control example, the number of monsters to be killed (subtracted) by one push on the PUSH button 10317 is variable according to the length of the remaining effective period. More specifically, the longer the remaining effective period, the smaller the number (subtraction number) of punishments per one press. By configuring in this way, even when a player who is playing fast at a rapid pace of batting, it is possible to suppress that the lower limit number of monsters is subtracted early after the start of the effect.

  Here, conventionally, as one kind of entertainment effect, there is known an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by continuously operating the operation means such as the operation button during a predetermined period. In this operation rendition, it is general that the upper limit value of the variable number of developments (number of developments) is set for each rendition, and the number of operations becomes a specific number of times, so that the evolution of the upper limit The thing was normal. However, in the production of such specifications, when a player with a high speed of operation is playing a game, the stage of development up to the upper limit in the production (variable) is completed early, the stage of the upper limit is low expectation There is a problem in that there is a possibility that the interest of the player may be impaired if it is a stage showing. Furthermore, when a player who is slow in the operation is playing a game, the operation is performed before the specified number of operations for developing up to the development mode of the upper limit despite actively performing the operation. There is a possibility that the period of validity will end and the interest of the player may be lost.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, the number of monsters to be killed (subtracted) by one press is varied according to the length of the remaining effective period, and the longer the remaining effective period is, Since the number of defeats is reduced, even if the pressing speed is fast, it can be suppressed that the lower limit number of monsters is defeated at an early stage. That is, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation of the jackpot from being lost because the remaining 10 bodies that are easily set in the case of detachment and the remaining four bodies stop the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the press. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, even when the player who is slow in pressing is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the second half of the continuous hitting effective period, a relatively large number of defeats is easily selected, so the lower limit is reached among the number of monsters. The possibility can be increased. As a result, the player can enjoy the interruption continuous hitting presentation even for the player who has a slow pace of pressing, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Next, referring to FIG. 400 (a), in an effect such that continuous operation on the PUSH button 10317 is effective, such as continuous continuous hitting operation, the operation (pressing) on the PUSH button 10317 is performed within the continuous hit effective period of the effect. The output aspect of the audio | voice output whenever it detects is demonstrated. As shown in FIG. 400 (a), in order to reproduce voice data in the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 423) which will be described later each time the pressing (operation) to the PUSH button 10317 is detected during the continuous hitting effective period. The audio data corresponding to the depression is reproduced for either of the plurality of channels provided, CN2 and CN3. More specifically, when pressing is first detected in the continuous hitting effective period, the first voice data (first continuous hitting sound) is reproduced to CN2. As shown in FIG. 400 (a), the audio data corresponding to the first consecutive hitting sound is composed of audio data to which an audio of "Bicsy" is output by reproducing. Further, when the second pressing is detected in the continuous hitting effective period, the second voice data (second continuous hitting sound) is reproduced to CN3. As shown in FIG. 400 (a), the voice data corresponding to the second consecutive hitting sound is composed of voice data in which a voice "bassy" is output by being reproduced. From then on, control to reproduce the voice data corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound to CN2 and control to reproduce the voice data corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound to CN3 alternate every time pressing is detected. Repeated. As described above, by outputting voice data corresponding to different voices each time pressing is detected, it is possible to diversify voice modes during continuous hitting. In other words, since it is possible to suppress that the voice mode becomes monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest to the player's game during the continuous hitting effective period. In addition, in the case where only the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel (that is, the control of stopping the output of one sound being reproduced and outputting the other sound) Compared to the case where it is configured to be repeated), the other voice can also be output while maintaining the state in which one voice is output (the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are overlapped and output) Because it can be), it is possible to make the speech aspect more busy during the execution of the batting. More specifically, in the case where the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when the player performs a continuous hitting operation with a rapid hit interval, the head portion of each voice data Only in a monotonous speech mode that is alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and the other audio data on another channel is generated. Can be played. That is, speech based on one speech data and speech based on other speech data can be synthesized and output. As a result, since it is possible to easily output voices other than the head portion of each voice, it is possible to further diversify the voice aspect. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, the audio mode is diversified by alternately reproducing two types of audio data for two channels each time pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected. The present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced by CN1 and CN2 in order. This makes it possible to diversify the speech aspect. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be reproduced in order for three or more channels. By this configuration, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is ended). Since the period of can be made longer, the audio aspect can be made more diversified. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be made different depending on the interval between successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval (e.g., 0.5 seconds or less) having a relatively short interval, three voice modes are sequentially played on three channels. If the player is playing a game while the interval between consecutive hits is relatively long (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval) while configuring, two types of voice data in order to two channels Reproduction may be performed (alternately). With this configuration, the voice output mode can be changed according to the continuous hitting interval, so that the game characteristics of adjusting the continuous hitting interval can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first control example, one continuous hitting sound is output interlockingly with the continuous hitting operation, but it may be possible to output the continuous hitting sound even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed under predetermined conditions . More specifically, for example, when the continuous hitting sound output last in the effective period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, although the first and second consecutive hitting sounds are output as a set in response to the continuous hitting operation, the voice output at the end becomes the first continuous hitting sound. In other words, it is possible to suppress that the voice mode becomes halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the continuous hitting sound output last is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is a fluctuation display corresponding to a predetermined fluctuation type (lottery result) ( For example, it may be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). By configuring in this way, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound output lastly during the interrupting continuous hit production is dare to be the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the game characteristics of. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first and second continuous hitting sounds are alternately output regardless of the interval between the continuous hitting of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the continuous hitting operation is detected in a state where the voice is not reproduced, the first continuous hitting sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between consecutive strikes is too long and the next consecutive strike operation is performed after the completion of the reproduction of one successive strike sound, only the first successive strike sound continues to be output. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, the player who wishes to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous hitting performance. be able to.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 400 (b), the correspondence between the pressing timing in the continuous hit effective period of the continuous hit continuous effect and the subtraction number of the monster will be described. In the example of FIG. 400, a description will be given by taking as an example a correspondence relationship in a type of interruption consecutive hitting effect which makes it possible to kill up to 100 monsters. FIG. 400 (b) is a graph showing the correspondence between the elapsed time (horizontal axis) at the time when pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected and the number of defeats of the monster (vertical axis). As shown in FIG. 400 (b), as the pressing timing is later, the subtractive number of monsters (the number of punishments) increases. As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to suppress early defeat of the lower limit number of monsters. That is, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation of the jackpot from being lost because the remaining 10 bodies that are easily set in the case of detachment and the remaining four bodies stop the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the press. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, even when the player who is slow in pressing is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the second half of the continuous hitting effective period, a relatively large number of defeats is easily selected, so the lower limit is reached among the number of monsters. The possibility can be increased. As a result, the player can enjoy the interruption continuous hitting presentation even for the player who has a slow pace of pressing, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  In addition, the correspondence of a pressing timing and the subtraction number of a monster is not restricted to what is shown to FIG. 400 (b), It can determine arbitrarily. Specifically, for example, by making the inclination smaller (for example, halving) with respect to the correspondence shown in FIG. It can be more difficult to subtract monsters until it is. As a result, since the player can be made to perform the strike more seriously, it is possible to further improve the player's willingness to participate in the interruption strike presentation. On the other hand, on the other hand, if the inclination is increased, it is relatively easy to subtract the number of monsters until the lower limit is reached by continuous hitting. It becomes possible to confirm easily. Therefore, even a player who is not good at continuous hitting can be made to participate actively in the interrupt continuous hitting effect. Further, in the first control example, the correspondence between the depression timing and the subtraction number of the monster is configured to be proportional (a linear function), but the correspondence between the quadratic function and the logarithmic function It is possible to set an arbitrary correspondence of the designer, such as a correspondence or an exponential correspondence. In addition, the correspondence relationship may be configured to be different depending on the type of effect of the continuous hitting strike effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to realize the game characteristics that allow the player to predict the jackpot expectation from the transition of the subtraction number in the continuous hit, so it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 401, a time-dependent change in the effect mode during execution of the variable display effect in which the interruption continuous hitting effect is set will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 401 (a), the temporal change of the effect mode during the execution of the variable display effect in which the interruption continuous hitting effect is not performed will be described. As shown in FIG. 401 (a), when the variable effect is not set, the normal variable display is performed for 10 seconds. Then, while the normal change display is being performed, the change display BGM (music 1) corresponding to the normal change display is reproduced in a loop. This music 1 is justified by three melody parts of A part, B part and C part, and by performing loop reproduction for 10 seconds, it becomes the reproduction position just at the end when 10 seconds elapses Is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 401 (a), normal reach occurs when 10 seconds have elapsed, and the display mode changes to the normal reach variation display mode. At the time of this normal reach occurrence, as shown in FIG. 401 (a), the sound is switched to BGM (music 2) corresponding to the normal reach fluctuation. Similarly to the music 1, the music 2 is also set to the reproduction time so as to end in time with the effect time of the normal reach effect by performing the loop reproduction.

  On the other hand, in the variable display effect where the interruption continuous hitting effect occurs before the normal reach effect occurs, as shown in FIG. 401 (b), two seconds have passed after the normal variable display effect is started , The normal variable display effect is interrupted, and the interruption continuous hitting effect is started (interrupted). When the interruption continuous hitting production is executed, not only the display mode (normal fluctuation display production) but also the voice (normal fluctuation display BGM) is interrupted. Then, when 9 seconds have elapsed after the start of fluctuation (when 7 seconds have passed since the start of the continuous-in-strike effect), the continuous-in-strike effect is ended, and the normal variable display effect and the variable display BGM are resumed from the interruption point. Thereafter, at the timing when 17 seconds have elapsed from the start of fluctuation, normal fluctuation display is ended and normal reach occurs. That is, the normal reach occurs after the normal change display is executed for a total of 10 seconds. After the development to the normal reach, since it is the same as the transition of the display mode (see FIG. 401 (a)) in the variable display in which the interruption continuous hitting production is not set, the description thereof will be omitted here.

  In addition, in the variable display production where interruption continuous hitting production occurs after the normal reach production occurs, as shown in FIG. 401 (c), after the normal variable display for 10 seconds is executed, it develops into reach production It is the same as the transition (see FIG. 401 (a)) of the display mode of the variable display effect in which the interruption continuous hitting effect is not set. Then, when 5 seconds have passed since the development to the normal reach production, the normal reach production is interrupted, and the interruption continuous hitting production is executed for 7 seconds. Then, when the 7 seconds of continuous shooting effects are completed, the normal reach effect that has been interrupted is resumed. In addition, when an interruption continuous hitting production is performed after reach generation, only a display mode is interrupted and it is maintained about a voice output mode as it is. That is, while maintaining the reproduction of the BGM for the reach effect, the BGM for the interruption continuous hitting effect is reproduced on the other channels (for example, CN2 to CN4). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that the relatively lively BGM for the reach effect is suddenly interrupted and the player feels a sense of discomfort.

  In the first control example, as a variation type for which normal reach occurs, a normal reach (off normal reach A, hit normal reach A) with a change time of 30 seconds, and a normal reach (off normal reach B, hit with normal reach B) with a change time of 37 seconds. And are provided. That is, different fluctuation types in which the fluctuation time is different are set for 7 seconds which is the production time of the interruption continuous hitting production. Then, the interruption continuous hitting effect is configured such that the executability is drawn only in the case of the fluctuation type having a fluctuation time of 37 seconds. By configuring in this way, a combination of an effect mode (an effect mode for 30 seconds) that can be set for a variation pattern of 30 seconds and an effect mode of interrupt continuous hitting effects, the variation time of just 37 seconds Can be filled. That is, since it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect mode when the interruption continuous hitting effect is set, display data and audio data can be reduced. Therefore, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. Similarly, with regard to out-of-range fluctuation types in which reach does not occur and fluctuation types that develop into super reach, a plurality of types with different fluctuation times of 7 seconds are similarly set, but in interruption continuous hitting effects, fluctuation types that are long in 7 seconds Only for the configuration that can be set. As a result, since it is possible to fill in the 7 seconds long fluctuation time just by combining the effect mode which can be selected in the 7 seconds short fluctuation type and the effect mode of the interruption continuous hitting effect, the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is increased. Without being, it is possible to execute production appropriately.

  Here, although the details will be described later, in the first control example, the variation time of the first symbol for showing the lottery result of the special symbol along with the execution of the lottery of the special symbol is drawn by the main controller 110 by lottery The determined fluctuation time is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the audio lamp control device 113 selects the fluctuation display effect of the effect period that conforms to the fluctuation time notified by the fluctuation pattern command, and synchronizes with the fluctuation display of the first symbol, and the fluctuation display effect of the third symbol Is configured to run. Then, the fluctuation pattern command output from main controller 110 is composed of a basic time command indicating a basic fluctuation time and an additional time command indicating an additional fluctuation time, and is it a fluctuation time long by 7 seconds? Whether or not it is determined is notified by an additional time command. More specifically, when a variation pattern of variation time of 30 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 0 seconds as an additional variation time Be notified. On the other hand, when a fluctuation pattern of fluctuation time of 37 seconds is determined, a command corresponding to 30 seconds is notified as a basic time command, and a command corresponding to 7 seconds is notified as an additional fluctuation time. . That is, it is configured to be able to identify whether or not it is a variation type that is 7 seconds long according to the notification content of the additional time command. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the variation type of the lottery object of whether or not the execution of the interruption continuous hitting effect can be performed only by confirming the content of the additional time command. In addition, when execution of interruption consecutive hitting production is decided, just filling up the fluctuation time just by setting the production feature which corresponds to the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time which is short by 7 seconds) notified by the basic time command it can. Therefore, since it is possible to easily match the end timing of the effect mode and the end timing of the variable display effect without preparing the effect mode dedicated to the interruption continuous hitting effect, it is possible to provide a suitable effect mode.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 402 to FIG. 403, the pending collective change effect which is a kind of the entertaining effect in the first control example will be described. This holding batch change effect is a effect that may be executed when there are a plurality of holding balls, and among the plurality of holding ball number symbols, at least a part of the holding ball number symbols is one of the players. It is an effect to be changed to a display mode with a high degree of expectation based on the operation of. In FIGS. 402 to 403, there are four holding balls, and the second holding ball number symbol Hz2 is changed to the blue display mode, and the third holding ball number symbol Hz3 is changed to the green display mode. The case where the pending collective change effect is executed will be described as an example. In addition, as a display mode of the number-of-holding balls number pattern, it is comprised so that the expectation degree used as a big hit may become high in order of white, blue, green, and red. Basically, when the start winning combination (the first entry into the ball entry 64 or the second entry into the ball entry 640) is detected, the display mode of the number-of-retention balls pattern is variously acquired based on the start-up combination. It is determined based on a random value (counter value). More specifically, from various random number values acquired at the starting winning combination, the success or failure of the special symbol lottery and the type of fluctuation are predicted (pre-read) in advance, and according to the prediction result (pre-reading result) At the selected lottery probability, it is lottery whether to set the holding ball number design to any display mode. In this lottery, it is controlled so that the ratio set to the number-of-held-ball-numbers pattern of the aspect with a high degree of expectation becomes high, so that the prefetching result corresponding to the lottery result with a high degree of expectation is obtained. In addition, since the timing of the start winning is variable according to the game situation of the player (the pace of firing of the game ball, etc.), the pending collective change presentation is executed independently of the variable display presentation. . That is, it is an effect that may be executed over the fluctuation period of a plurality of fluctuation display effects (which may fall within one fluctuation period).

  FIG. 402 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode at the time when the pending collective change effect is performed. This suspension collective change effect may be executed when a plurality of suspension balls exist at the time of detecting a new start winning combination. When the pending collective change presentation is executed, the pending change character HC indicating the start of the pending collective change presentation first frames in the display into the plane from the upper side of the display screen. As this holding change character HC is shown in FIG. 402 (a), the part corresponding to the face is displayed in a mode that simulates the PUSH button 10317. It is possible to suggest in advance to the player that the effect of pressing the PUSH button 10371 is to be executed by the display mode of the hold change character HC.

  After the pending change character HC has appeared (framed in), as shown in FIG. 402 (b), all the pending ball number designs Hz1 to Hz4 are changed to display modes imitating rocks. That is, temporarily, the degree of expectation (the display color of the number-of-held-balls symbol) indicated by the number-of-held-balls symbol is changed to a concealed state. In addition, a balloon image FG imitating a balloon is displayed above the pending change character HC, and a character "HOLD UP UP WITH A PUSH button!" Is displayed inside the balloon image FG. By this display mode, it is possible to make the player easily understand that the expectation (display color) of any holding ball number pattern is improved by pressing the PUSH button 10317 to the player. it can.

  FIG. 403 (a) is a diagram showing a display mode in the case where the player presses the PUSH button 10317 during execution of the hold batch change presentation. As shown in FIG. 403 (a), when the player depresses the PUSH button 10317, the rocks around all the reserved ball number patterns that have been changed to the display mode imitating a rock are flung away, and a normal reserved ball is displayed. An effect of returning to the display mode of several symbols is executed. In addition, at this time, the degree of expectation indicated by at least a part of the number-of-held balls number pattern is higher than before the occurrence of the held collective change effect. In the example of FIG. 403 (a), the second holding ball number design Hz2 set in the blue display mode before the execution of the holding batch change presentation is changed to the red display mode through the holding batch change presentation. The case is shown.

  Execution of the simultaneous change-in-hold effect determines that the degree of expectation indicated by the at least one open ball number symbol pattern is increased, so that the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until which PUSH button 10317 is pressed, which ball number symbol pattern changes (the degree of expectation rises). Can be done. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the timing preferred by the player. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  FIG. 403 (b) shows a state in which the hold change character HC (mini character) fades out of the screen during the effective period of the hold batch change presentation. When the hold change character HC fades out of the screen, even if the operation effective period in the hold collective change effect remains, the effective period is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 403 (b), even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317, an effect (see FIG. 403 (a)) is executed in which the degree of expectation of each holding ball number symbol changes. There is no. The effect that the mini character is absent is executed, for example, when there is a conflict between another operation effect involving an operation on the push button 10317 and the pending batch change effect. The absence of the hold change character HC corresponding to the hold batch change presentation makes it possible for the player to easily understand that the operation valid period has been temporarily interrupted. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the dissatisfaction with the fact that the effect is not developed by misunderstanding that the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is effective in the holding batch change effect. Therefore, a more suitable presentation mode can be realized.

<Electrical Configuration in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 404 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

  The main controller 110 is mounted with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 201 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are incorporated. Although various commands are transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit by the data transmission / reception circuit in order to instruct the sub control units such as the payout control unit 111 and the audio lamp control unit 113 to operate. Such command is transmitted from the main control unit 110 to the sub control unit in one direction only.

  The main control unit 110 executes main processes of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, setting of display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 405) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 405, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters etc. are MPU201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform a big hit lottery, the setting of the display of the 1st symbol display 37 and the 3rd symbol display 81, the lottery of the display result of the 2nd symbol display 83, etc. Used in

  In the setting of the display of the big hit lottery and the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, a special hit random number counter C1 used for the big hit lottery, a special hit type counter C2 used for selecting the big hit symbol, A stop type counter C3 used to select a stop type, a fall lottery counter C4 used for a fall lottery from a definite change state of a special symbol, a change type counter CS1 used to select a change pattern, and a special hit random number counter The initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of C1 is used. Further, the random number counter C5 is used for lottery of the ordinary symbol (the second symbol display device 83), and the initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the ordinary random number counter C5. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time updating is performed, and the value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 434) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. The RAM 203 is provided with a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a consisting of four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas), and each of these areas enters the ball into the first ball entrance 64 In accordance with the timing, the values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are stored. In addition, in the RAM 203, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b consisting of four holding areas (the first to fourth holding areas) is provided. In each of these areas, the second entrance port 640 is provided. The values of the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and the change type counter CS1 are stored respectively in accordance with the ball landing timing. In addition, the special symbol holding ball execution area is provided in RAM203, the special hitting random number counter C1 which becomes the object which executes the drawing, the special hitting classification counter C2, the stop classification selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, and fluctuation Each value of the type counter CS1 is stored. Furthermore, the RAM 203 is provided with an ordinary symbol holding ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four holding areas (reserved first to fourth areas), and each of these areas has a game ball The value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is stored according to the timing of passing through the normal entry ball entrance (through gate) 67.

  Each counter will be described in detail. The special random number counter C1 is sequentially incremented by 1 within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 for a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 999) It has a back configuration. In particular, when the special hit random number counter C1 makes one revolution, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the special hit random number counter C1.

  Also, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the special per-random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the special per random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values of 0 to 999, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 434).

  The value of the special random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically (in the present embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and when the gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, that value The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 is stored. On the other hand, when the gaming ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b.

  The value of the random number to be the jackpot of the special symbol is set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 407 (a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is When it matches with the value of the jackpot random number set by the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is hit. Also, this special symbol big hit random number table 202a is for high probability (special symbol low probability state time period) of special symbol and high probability of high probability of becoming special symbol big win from that low probability (special symbol special It is divided into two types, one for the period in which the symbol is in a definite variation state), and the number of jackpot random numbers included in each is set differently (see FIG. 407 (a)). Thus, the probability of becoming a jackpot is changed between the low probability time of the special symbol and the high probability time of the special symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be the jackpot.

  The special hit type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when it becomes a big hit of the special symbol, and is sequentially incremented by one within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99) , And reaches a maximum value (e.g., 99 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 99) and then return to 0. The value of the special hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, updated once in each timer interrupt processing), and when the gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value thereof Is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the special symbol holding ball execution area when the drawing of the special symbol is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (when the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol holding ball execution area Stored in).

  Here, if the value of the special hitting random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is not a random number which will be a big hit of the special symbol, that is, if it is a random number which becomes out of special symbol, the first symbol display The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the device 37 is at the time of removal of the special symbol.

  On the other hand, if the value of the special hitting random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area is a random number which becomes the big hit of the special symbol, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 Is the jackpot of a special symbol. In this case, the display mode indicated by the value of the special hit type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is a specific display mode at the time of the jackpot Become.

  The special hit random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 999. In this special winning random number counter C1, at the low probability of the special symbol, there are four random number values that become the big wins of the special symbol, and the random number “0 to 3” is the special symbol big hit random number table for low probability (See FIG. 407 (a)). As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 1000, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 4, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/250". In addition, the random number value (counter value) used as a big hit is common in the lottery of a 1st special symbol, and the lottery of a 2nd special symbol.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the special symbol, there are eight random number values that will be the jackpot of the special symbol, and the values “4 to 11” are stored in the special symbol big hit random number table for high probability ((11) Fig. 407 (a). As described above, when the special symbol has a high probability, the total number of random numbers is 1000, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 8, so the probability of becoming a big symbol for a special symbol is "1/125".

  Further, the value of the special hit type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. And, as shown in FIG. 408 (b), the jackpot type when the jackpot of the first special symbol is a big hit and the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 9” is “big hit A” (15 Become a round oddity jackpot). The jackpot type when the value is "10 to 49" is "jackpot B" (five round probability variation jackpot), and the jackpot type when the value is "50 to 99" is "jackpot C" (5 rounds usually a big hit).

  On the other hand, the jackpot type when the second special symbol lottery is a big hit and the value of the special hit type counter C2 is “0 to 79” is “big hit D” (15 round probability variation big hit). Also, the jackpot type when the value is “80 to 99” is “jackpot E” (15 rounds usually jackpot).

  Thus, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment has one jackpot type out of five types of jackpot types (jackets A to E) according to the type of special symbol and the value of the random number indicated by the special hit type counter C2. It is configured to be determined.

  The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 250, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type of the stop symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As the stop type, for example, after the reach occurs, the final stop design shifts by just one before and after the reach design and stops “front and back out of reach”, and after the reach occurs similarly, the final stop design is the front and rear of the reach design For example, "reach other than out of reach" and "complete out" in which reach does not occur are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and when the gaming ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area 203a (if the special symbol lottery is not being executed, the special symbol holding ball execution area). Also, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, its value is in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (in the special symbol holding ball execution area when the special symbol lottery is not being executed) Stored.

  The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be sequentially incremented by one within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). A rough display mode such as so-called normal reach or super reach is determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Specifically, the determination of the display mode is the determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the fluctuation time determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1, the reach type and the detailed symbol fluctuation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 are determined by the voice lamp control device 113 or the display control device 114 Ru. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a main process (see FIG. 434) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern table 202b (see FIG. 409 (a)) storing a random value for determining one fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is in the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110. Provided in

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 409 and 410, the variation pattern selection table 202b used when the main control device 110 selects a variation pattern will be described. FIG. 409 (a) is a diagram showing the configuration of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b. As shown in FIG. 409 (a), the fluctuation pattern selection table 202b in the first control example is a symbol fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol when the lottery of the special symbol is executed in the normal state. If a special symbol lottery is executed in the game state (certain variation state and time saving state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set, and the table 202b1 for normal, which is referred to determine the change time, symbol fluctuation It comprises at least a probability variation / time reduction table 202b2 which is referred to in order to determine the variation time.

  First, the normal table 202b1 will be described with reference to FIG. 409 (b). FIG. 409 (b) is a diagram showing the defined contents of the table for ordinary use 202b1. Various fluctuation patterns are defined in the table for ordinary use 202b1 corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counter CS1 for each of the fluctuation patterns. Values of and are assigned. In addition, when the result of the determination is a hit, the variation pattern corresponding to the determined jackpot type (a jackpot type determined from the jackpot type selection table 202d by the value of the acquired special punch type counter C2) Is set. Specifically, the type of special symbol (type of symbol) is the first special symbol (special figure 1), the result of the success or failure judgment is a big hit, and the value of the acquired stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50". When the value of the acquired variation type selection counter CS1 is “0 to 180”, a normal reach A with a variation time of 30 seconds is defined as the variation pattern. When the hit normal reach A is determined, a combination of commands indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 0 seconds is output as a variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 0 seconds, when the hit normal reach A is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, as described above, the interruption continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 399) is not executed. Also, when the acquired value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "0 to 50" and the acquired value of the change type selection counter CS1 is "181 to 198", the change pattern has a change time of 37 seconds per normal reach B as a change pattern. Is defined. When the hit normal reach B is determined, a combination of commands indicating a basic time of 30 seconds and an additional time of 7 seconds is output as the variation pattern command. Since the additional time is 7 seconds, when the hit normal reach B is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, whether or not the execution of the interruption continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 399) is drawn is lottery as described above.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 409 (b), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is "51 to 250", and the value of the change type selection counter CS1 is within the range of "0 to 150" as a change pattern. The super reach A with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is defined, and the super reach B with a fluctuation time of 67 seconds is defined in the range where the value of the fluctuation type selection counter CS1 is “151 to 198”. Since the additional time is 0 seconds in the hit super reach A, there is no possibility that the interruption continuous hitting production is executed, while in the hit super reach B, the additional time command indicating that the additional time is 7 seconds is voice Since notification is given to the lamp control device 113, it is randomly determined whether or not the continuous hit hitting effect can be performed.

  Also, when the symbol type is the special figure 1 and the result of the pass / fail judgment is the same, according to the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 as shown in FIG. 409 (b) Thus, a fluctuation pattern in which a fluctuation time of 8 seconds to 67 seconds is set is defined. Even in the case of the deviation, in the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to the additional time of 7 seconds is defined, while the possibility of execution of the interruption continuous hitting effect is drawn in the voice lamp control device 113, the additional time of 0 seconds is In the variation pattern in which the additional time command corresponding to is specified, the interruption continuous hitting presentation is not executed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 409 (b), when the symbol type is the special figure 2, when the result of the pass / fail judgment is hit (big hit D, big hit E), the value of the stop type selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type selection counter Regardless of the value of CS1, a long fluctuation A with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds is specified as the fluctuation pattern, and if the result of judgment of acceptance is out, the value of stop type selection counter C3 and fluctuation type selection counter CS1 Regardless of the value, a deviation time of 150 seconds is defined as a long fluctuation. This is because the gaming efficiency is deteriorated when a right-handed attempt is made to execute a lottery of the second special symbol in which the distribution of the jackpot is advantageous in the normal state (that is, the ratio of becoming the probability variation jackpot is high). The purpose is to suppress unusual game methods in which a right-handed game is played normally.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the prescribed contents of the probability variation / time reduction table 202b2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 410, various variation patterns are respectively set corresponding to the lottery results of the special symbols in the table 202b2 for definite variation and time reduction, and the stop type selection counter C3 is set for each variation pattern. And the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 are allocated. In addition, in the table 202b2 for probability change and time reduction, a point that the relatively short fluctuation time is easily set for the table 202b1 for normal use, and the fluctuation time common to the lottery of the first special symbol and the lottery of the second special symbol Is the only difference in that it is configured to be selected, so the detailed description thereof is omitted here. By configuring to make it easy to set a short fluctuation time, it is possible to execute the drawing of the special symbol more efficiently than the other gaming states during the definite change state in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set and the time reduction state. can do.

  Referring back to FIG. 405, the description will be continued. The ordinary random number counter C5 is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by one in order, for example, within the range of 0 to 239, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Also, when the per-round random number counter C5 makes one revolution, the value of the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the per-round normal random number counter C5. In the present embodiment, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and is acquired when it is detected that the gaming ball has passed the through gate 67, and the normal symbol hold of the RAM 203 is held. It is stored in the ball storage area 203d.

  And the value of the random number which becomes the hit of the normal symbol is specified in the normal hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 407 (b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device, and the value of the common hit random number counter C5 is When it agrees with the value of the random number which becomes a regular specified in the regular random number table 202c, it is determined that the regular symbol is hit. In addition, this ordinary hit random number table is for low probability of normal symbol (during normal condition of normal symbol), and high probability (time symbol of normal symbol) with high probability of being hit with normal symbol from low probability The number of jackpot random numbers that are divided into two types, that is, the period of the state, is set to be different (see FIG. 407 (b)). Thus, the probability of winning is changed between the low probability of the normal symbol and the high probability of the normal symbol by changing the number of random numbers to be hit.

  As shown in FIG. 407 (b), at the time of low probability of the normal symbol, there are two random number values that will hit the normal symbol, and the values are “5, 6”. As described above, when the probability of a normal symbol is low, the total number of random numbers is 240 while the total number of random numbers that are jackpots is 2, so the probability of being a jackpot of a special symbol is "1/120".

  When the gaming ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The symbol change display is usually performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C5 is within the range of "5, 6", it is determined to be won, and after the fluctuation display on the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the stop symbol (second symbol is displayed The symbol “○” is displayed as lit), and the motorized accessory 640 a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the electric role object 640a is opened only for “0.2 seconds × 1 time”, but is open. The time and the number may be set arbitrarily. For example, "0.5 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  On the other hand, at the time of high probability of the normal symbol, there are 200 random number values that become the jackpot of the normal symbol, and the range is “5 to 204”. These random numbers are stored in a normal random number table for high probability. As described above, when the special symbol has a low probability, the total number of random numbers is 240, and the total number of random numbers to be a big hit is 200, so the probability of becoming a big symbol of a special symbol is "1 / 1.2."

  When the gaming ball passes through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 is acquired, and the second symbol display device 83 The variation display of the normal symbol is executed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the acquired normal hit random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the hit of the normal symbol is made. In this case, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol of "o" is lighted and displayed as the stop symbol (the second symbol), and the electric part 640a is opened "one second x 2 times" Be done. As described above, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time becomes very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds" as compared with the normal symbol's low probability, and furthermore, the open period of the electric symbol 640a is Since it becomes very long as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the gaming ball can easily enter the second ball entry port 640. In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of a normal symbol, when the normal symbol comes into contact, the motorized role 64a is opened for only one second twice, but the opening time or The number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, "3 seconds x 2 times" may be opened.

  The ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the ordinary random number counter C5 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425) , Is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 434).

  As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main control unit 110 causes the jackpot lottery and the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the value of the counter or the like. It is possible to execute main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results on the second symbol display device 83.

  Referring back to FIG. 404, the description will be continued. RAM 203 is a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by MPU 201 are stored in addition to the counter buffer shown in FIG. 405, various flags and counters, I / O And a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to be able to receive data (backup) supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

  When the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power shutoff (including the time of the power failure, the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including the power on after the power failure is eliminated, the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power is shut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed when the power is shut off by the main processing (see FIG. 30), and the restoration of each value written to the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 433) when the power is turned on. The power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) as power failure processing is immediately executed.

  Next, specific contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIG. 406 (a). FIG. 406 (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 202 provided in the main control device 110 in the present embodiment. In the ROM 202 of the main control unit 110, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a, the variation pattern selection table 202b, the normal hit random number table 202c, the big hit type selection table 202d, the falling lottery table 202e At least a pattern selection table 202f is stored.

  The special symbol big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 407 (a)) is a data table in which the correspondence between the value of the first hit random number counter C1 and the lottery result is defined. Specifically, in the low probability state of the special symbol, "0 to 3" is defined as the range of the judgment value determined to be the big hit, and the judgment determined to be the big hit in the high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol “4 to 11” is defined as the range of values (see FIG. 407 (a)). When the value of the first hit random number counter C1 acquired based on the start winning combination matches any of the judgment values corresponding to the jackpots specified in the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a (see FIG. 407 (a)) , It is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol.

  The jackpot type selection table 202b (see FIG. 408 (a)) is a data table in which the determination value for determining the jackpot type is stored for each type of special symbol, and the judgment value of the special hit type counter C2 is It is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the big hit type selection table 202b, and the special hit type counter The jackpot type corresponding to the value of C2 is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 408 (a), the jackpot type selection table 202b is a special drawing that is referred to determine the jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot in the first special symbol lottery (lottery of the special figure 1). It consists of at least a table 202d1 for one jackpot, and a table 202d2 for jackpot for a special figure 2 that is referred to determine the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol lottery (lottery of special figure 2) ing. First, with reference to FIG. 408 (a), the details of the special view 1 jackpot table 202d1 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 408 (b), “big hit A” is defined in association with the range of “0 to 9” in the value of the special hit type counter C2 (see FIG. 408 (b)). In this "big hit A", the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a definite change state is given after the big hit ends (an open / close pattern that enables entering the specified winning opening 65a during a period allocated to the V region is set) ) It is a jackpot. Among the 100 counter values that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit A" is 10, so "big hit A" is determined when it becomes the big hit in the first special symbol lottery The proportion is 10% (10/100). This "big hit A" has the largest number of rounds among the big wins of the first special symbol, and an advantageous probability change state is given after the big hit, so the most advantageous big hit among the big wins of the first special symbol It is a type.

  In addition, in the range of “10 to 49”, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit B” (see FIG. 408 (b)). In this "big hit B", the number of rounds is 5 rounds, and after the end of the big hit, a definite change state is given (an open / close pattern enabling entering the specified winning opening 65a during a period allocated to the V region is set) ) It is a jackpot. Among the 100 possible counter values of the special hit type counter C2, the counter value which is "big hit B" is 40, so "big hit B" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the first special symbol lottery The proportion is 40% (40/100). Although this "big hit B" has a smaller number of rounds than "big hit A", it is a relatively advantageous big hit type because a favorable probability change state is given after the big hit.

  In addition, in the range of “50 to 99”, the value of the special hit type counter C2 is defined in association with “big hit C” (see FIG. 408 (b)). In this "big hit C", the number of rounds is 5 rounds, and a time saving state is given after the big hit end (an open / close pattern which makes it impossible to enter the specified winning opening 65a during a period allocated to the V region) is set Be a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the counter value that is the "big hit C" is 50, so the "big hit C" is determined when it becomes the big hit in the first special symbol lottery The proportion is 50% (50/100). This "big hit C" is the most disadvantageous type of jackpot among jackpots of the first special symbol because the number of rounds is the smallest and the gaming state after the big hit is set to a relatively disadvantageous time saving state. . It is configured to be more probable at a lower rate.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 408 (c), the details of the special view 2 jackpot table 202d2 will be described. As shown in FIG. 408 (c), "big hit D" is defined in association with the range of the value of the special hit type counter C2 of "0 to 79" (see FIG. 408 (b)). In this "big hit D", the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a definite change state is given after the big hit ends (an open / close pattern that enables entering the specified winning opening 65a during a period allocated to the V region is set) ) It is a jackpot. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit D" is 80, so "big hit D" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery The proportion is 80% (80/100). This "big hit D" is the most advantageous big hit type because it has the largest number of rounds in the big hit and a favorable probability change state is given after the big hit.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 408 (c), “big hit E” is defined in association with the range of “80 to 99” as the value of the special hit type counter C2 (see FIG. 408 (b)). ). In this "big hit E", the number of rounds is 15 rounds, and a time saving state is given after the end of the big hit (the opening and closing pattern that can not enter the specific winning opening 65a during the period allocated to the V region Be a big hit. Of the 100 counter values that can be taken by the special hit type counter C2, the counter value that is "big hit E" is 20, so "big hit E" is determined when it becomes a big hit in the second special symbol lottery The proportion is 20% (20/100). Although this "big hit E" has the largest number of rounds among the big hits, it is a big hit type that is disadvantageous in terms of gaming state after the big hit because a disadvantageous time saving state is given after the big hit.

  As described above, in the first control example, the probability change big hit (big hit A, B) is configured to be determined at a ratio of 50% when the big win in the drawing of the first special symbol is made, but the second When it becomes a jackpot in the special symbol lottery, the probability variation jackpot (jackpot D) is configured to be determined at a rate of 80%. Therefore, when a jackpot occurs in the second special symbol lottery, it is possible to make the player more strongly expect a probability change state. As described above, in the first control example, when the jackpot type is clearly indicated to the player, it is extremely rare (1% of the probability of becoming a jackpot). And, after the big hit end, until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times, it is maintained in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether the definite change state is set or the time saving state is set from the end of the big hit until the drawing of the special symbol is executed 100 times. Even if the disadvantageous time saving state is set, it is possible to play a game in the expectation of being in a definite changing state until 100 lotterys of special symbols are executed. Moreover, if it is a big hit within 100 times, even if it is a big hit in a short time state, it can seem as if it was a big hit in a positive change state, so a rush of positive change state more than the original It can make you feel like the rate, and the continuation rate is high. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 407 (b)) is a data table in which a hit determination value of a normal symbol is defined (stored). Specifically, in the normal state of the normal symbol, "5, 6" is defined as the determination value to be the hit of the normal symbol (see FIG. 407 (b)). Further, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, “5 to 204” is defined as the determination value which is the hit of the normal symbol (see FIG. 407 (b)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example, the value of the normal hit random number counter C4 acquired based on the game ball passing through the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 and the normal hit random number table 202c are referred to And, it is determined whether it is a hit of a normal symbol.

  The variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIG. 409A) is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode. The details of the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d are as described above in the explanation of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and thus the detailed description thereof is omitted here.

  The falling lottery table 202e is a data table in which the determination value of the falling lottery counter C4 that is determined to be falling is defined. The value of the falling lottery counter C4 acquired when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (in the case of the start winning) in the definite variation state of the special symbol is the falling lottery table 202e It is set to shift to a low probability state of a special symbol (when it falls) when it matches with one of the judgment values defined in.

  More specifically, two determination values of "0, 1" are defined as determination values determined to be falling in the definite variation state of the special symbol. Here, the falling lottery counter C4 is a loop counter whose value is updated in the range of “0 to 999”. Of the 1000 possible values of the fall lottery counter C4, there are two judgment values determined to be fall, so the probability of falling (transition to a low probability state of special symbol) in the special symbol state Is 1/500 (2/1000).

  In addition, only the determination value (determination value for the probability variation state of the special symbol) for determining whether or not it falls in the probability variation state of the special symbol is defined in the fall lottery table 202e in the present embodiment, and the special symbol The judgment value for the low probability state of is not defined. When it is already in the low probability state of the special symbol, it is a waste of processing to determine whether or not to shift to the low probability state of the special symbol.

  In the present embodiment, the falling lottery table 202e is compared with the regularly updated falling lottery counter C4, and it is determined whether the special symbol is changed to the special symbol low probability state (falled) or not. Is determined. That is, it is possible to make the timing for shifting from the definite variation state to the short time state random. Therefore, when transitioning to the definite change state, it is possible to play the game while being nervous about not knowing when the definite change state will end, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first control mode, it is randomly selected (judged) whether or not to shift (fall) to a low probability state of special symbol from the probability variation state of the special symbol, but it is possible to shift to another state A lottery (determination) may be possible. For example, whether or not to shift from the time saving state of the normal symbol to the normal state of the normal symbol may be determined by the lottery performed for each change. Thereby, since the number of continuations of the time saving state of the normal symbol can be made random, in this case as well, it is possible to play the game while feeling tense. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  The open pattern selection table 202f is a data table in which data for setting a pattern according to the jackpot type is defined as an open pattern (opening / closing pattern of the specific winning opening 65a) in the fifth round of the jackpot. Although illustration is omitted, in the fifth round of the probability variation big hit (big hit A, B, D), the sorting device (V combination) is placed in the state of sorting the gaming ball to the first region (V region) An open period (when 5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round), during which the gaming ball can reach the sorting apparatus during the period (5 seconds to 10 seconds after the start of the fifth round). Data for setting an open period (5 seconds) is read out. On the other hand, in the fifth round of the normal big hit (big hit C, E), a period (5 round start) in which the sorting device (V character) is placed in the state of sorting the gaming ball to the second area (non-V area) Set an open period (4.5 seconds from the start of the 5th round to 4.5 seconds) when the game ball can reach the distribution device during the period immediately after 5 seconds) Data to be read out.

  Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 406 (b). FIG. 406 (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 403 (b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 Hold ball number counter 203e, normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f, time reduction counter 203g, probability change flag 203h, large hit start flag 203i, large hit middle flag 203j, probability change setting flag 203k, probability change passing counter 203m, winning number counter 203n, remaining It has at least a ball timer flag 203p, a remaining ball timer 203q, a probability variation effective flag 203r, a probability variation effective timer 203s, an ejection number counter 203t, and other memory areas 203z.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a has four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area), and in each of these areas, a first random number counter C1 and a first type counter The values of C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored.

  More specifically, each value of each counter C1 to C4 and CS1 is acquired at the timing when the game ball reaches the first entry slot 64 (start winning), and the acquired data is four holding areas. Among the vacant areas of (pending first area to pending fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to the winning in time is stored, and in the reserved first area, data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when the lottery of the special symbol is performed, the values of the counters C1 to C4 and CS1 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a are the special symbol Holding ball special symbol Holding ball execution area (see Figure 405) is shifted (moved), it is decided such as drawing of the special symbol on the basis of each value of each counter C1-C4, CS1 which is remembered in that execution area Is done.

  In addition, when data are shifted from the first holding area to the special symbol holding ball execution area, the first holding area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process in which winning data stored in other hold areas (hold second area to hold fourth area) is packed into a hold area (hold first area to hold third area) with one smaller area number. To be done. In the first control example, in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the holding area (second holding area to fourth holding area) in which data of winning is stored.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b has four holding areas in the same manner as the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the respective counter values acquired based on the start winning for the second ball entry port 640 are stored. About the storing method etc. of a counter value, since it is the same as that of special symbol 1 reservation ball storing area 203a, it omits about the detailed explanation.

  The normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four holding areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). In each of these areas, a normal random number counter C5 is stored. More specifically, the value of the counter C5 is acquired at the timing when the gaming ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, and the acquired data is divided into four holding areas (holding first area to holding). Among the vacant areas of the fourth area), the areas are stored in order from the smallest area number (first to fourth). That is, similar to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, data corresponding to a winning is stored while the winning sequence is held. If data is stored in all four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

  Thereafter, in the main control unit 110, when a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the counter C5 stored in the first holding area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C5 stored in the execution area), the determination such as the lottery of the hit of the normal symbol is performed.

  In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserve area to the execution area, the first reserve area becomes empty, so it is the same as the special symbol 1 suspension ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 suspension ball storage area 203b. A shift process is performed to pack winning data stored in another reserve area into a reserve area with a smaller area number. In addition, data shift is also performed only for the holding area in which winning data is stored.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the gaming ball enters the first entry hole 64, and the maximum value of 4 is displayed each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added (see S404 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 426).

  The value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command (S211 in FIG. 426, S405 in FIG. 428) reference). The holding ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 e is changed.

  The voice lamp control device 113 suspends the fluctuation display suspended in the main control device 110 by the suspension ball count command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 retention ball number counter 203 d is changed. You can get the value of the ball number itself. Thereby, the number of holding balls of the variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 is the holding ball of the actual variable display held in the main control device 110 by the influence of noise or the like Even if there is a deviation from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command received.

  The audio lamp control device 113 manages the number of holding balls based on the holding ball number command, and the display hold for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of holding balls every time the number of holding balls changes. Send a ball number command. The display control device 114 displays the number-of-held-balls number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the number of held balls notified by the number-of-held-cells-for-display command.

  The special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is a variation display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on entering the ball into the second ball entry port 640 (start winning combination) It is a counter which counts the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the fluctuation display performed by the display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of this special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is set to zero, and the gaming ball enters the second entry hole 640, and the maximum value 4 is obtained each time the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. Up to one is added (see S410 in FIG. 428). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variation display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S205 of FIG. 426). The value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the holding ball number command similar to the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d.

  The normal symbol holding ball number counter 203 f is the number of holding balls of the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed in the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the gaming ball in the normal ball entry port (through gate) 67 ( It is a counter that counts the number of waits up to 4 times. The initial value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and it is incremented by 1 up to the maximum value 4 each time the game ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of holding balls in the variable display increases. (See S704 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by one each time the variable display of the normal symbol (the second symbol) is newly executed (see S605 in FIG. 430).

  When the game ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of suspension of variable display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, then the value of the normal random number counter C4 is acquired The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 431). On the other hand, when the gaming ball passes through gate 67, if the value of this normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703 of FIG. 431: No).

  The hour-time counter 203g indicates whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and if the value of the time-period counter 203g is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-short state of the normal symbol If the value of the time counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol. At this time, the initial value of the counter 203g is set to zero, and a lottery of special symbols is performed in the main controller 110, and 100 is set at the end of the jackpot each time the jackpot is achieved (FIG. 437) See S1303). In addition, regardless of the jackpot type, when it becomes the jackpot by the lottery of the special symbol, the value is set to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see S310 of FIG. 427). By setting the value to 0 at the start of the variable display indicating a big hit, the possibility that the time saving state is ended, such as becoming out of the normal symbol during the variable display performed in the time saving state of the normal symbol If a certain behavior occurs, the expectation for the jackpot can be improved. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  When a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed, the value of the time reduction counter 203g and the state of the probability change flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the time reduction counter 203g is 1 or more, or the probability change flag 203h is on. For example, it is determined that the time of the normal symbol is medium. In this case, based on the normal hit random number table for high probability time, the lottery of the normal symbol is performed (see S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the symbol of the normal symbol is determined based on the normal hit random number table for low probability. A lottery is performed (see S610 in FIG. 430).

  The probability change flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change state of the special symbol, and if the probability change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is a probability change state of the special symbol, If the flag 203h is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of the special symbol. In addition, as described above, during the definite variation state of the special symbol, it becomes the time saving state of the normal symbol. Therefore, if the probability change flag 203h is on, it indicates that the symbol is a probability change state of the special symbol and that it is a time saving state of the normal symbol.

  When the probability change flag 203h has its initial value set to off, and the gaming ball enters the first area (V area) in the variable winning device 65 in the fifth round of the big hit, at the end of the big hit It is set to on (see S1302 in FIG. 437). In addition, the probability change flag 203h is reset to OFF when the lottery result corresponding to the fall in the probability change state is obtained (see S305 in FIG. 427) and when the jackpot variation display is started (see S310 in FIG. 427). Be done.

  The probability change flag 203h is referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is a probability change state in the special symbol variation start process (see S302 in FIG. 427). Specifically, when the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208) is executed, a lottery of a special symbol is performed. In the special symbol variation start process (FIG. 427, S208), the probability change flag 203h is referred to, and if it is on, the fall lottery is first executed, and if it does not fall, the first hit random number table 202a for high probability time Based on (see FIG. 407 (a)), a lottery of special symbols is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined that the probability change flag 203h is off or the probability change flag 203h is on and it is determined to be a fall by the fall lottery, the special symbol big hit random number table 202a for low probability time (see FIG. 407 (a) On the basis of), the lottery of the special symbol is done.

  Further, the probability change flag 203h is also referred to in order to determine whether or not the gaming state is short in the normal symbol change processing (S608, S614, S620 in FIG. 430). Specifically, if the probability change flag 203h and the above-mentioned hour / minute counter 203g are referred to in the normal symbol variation processing, and the probability change flag 203h is on or the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 1 or more, It is determined that the time saving state of the normal symbol is being performed, and the lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the normal hit random number table 202c (refer to FIG. 407 (b)) for high probability time (refer to S609 in FIG. 430). On the other hand, if the probability change flag 203h is off and the value of the time counter 23g is 0, it is determined that the symbol is in the normal state, and the second hit random number table 202c (FIG. 407 (FIG. b) The lottery of the normal symbol is performed based on the reference) (see S610 in FIG. 430). Also, in the normal symbol variation process, the probability change flag 203h is also referred to when determining the variation time of the normal symbol or the opening time of the motorized combination 640a when the normal symbol is hit (S 614 of FIG. 430, See S620).

  The jackpot start flag 203i is a flag indicating whether to start the jackpot. If the big hit start flag 203i is on, it means that it is the timing to start big hit, and if it is off, it means that it is not the timing to start big hit. The jackpot start flag 203i is set to ON when the end timing of the variable display indicating the jackpot (see S217 in FIG. 426). In addition, the jackpot start flag 203i is set to off when setting the jackpot start (see S1103 in FIG. 435).

  The jackpot flag 203j is a flag indicating whether a jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the jackpot flag 203j is on, it means that the jackpot is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the jackpot is not in progress. The jackpot flag 203j is a jackpot by a special symbol lottery, and is set to ON after the jackpot (special game state) is started (see S1103 in FIG. 435). In addition, it is set to off at the end of the jackpot (special game state) (see S1305 in FIG. 437). In the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426), the jackpot middle flag 203j is referred to, and it is determined whether or not a jackpot is in progress (see S201 in FIG. 426).

  The probability change setting flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to shift the gaming state to the probability change state after the jackpot game. In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not the gaming state is set to the definite changing state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball has entered the first area (V area) during the big hit game. Here, when it is detected that the game ball has entered the first area (the passage of the probability change switch provided in the first area), the probability change setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415 in FIG. 438). . On the other hand, the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to off at the end of the jackpot (see S1305 in FIG. 437). The probability change setting flag 203k is backed up at the time of power-off, and is set to a state immediately before power-off at the time of recovery (at power-on). In addition, when the pachinko machine 10 is initialized, it is set to off.

  If the probability change setting flag 203k is set to ON when the power is turned on, it is determined whether or not the probability change switch has passed before the power is turned off, and if it is determined that it is passing, the probability change setting flag 203k May be set to turn on formally and return. In this case, it can be determined whether the value of the probability variation passage counter 203m, which will be described later, has a value larger than zero. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the damage on the gaming shop side by determining the injustice where only the probability change setting flag 203k is rewritten on and the power is turned on again while the power is off. it can.

  The probability variation pass counter 203m is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls (entered the V area) that have passed the probability variation switch in one round (one round of the jackpot in the present embodiment) in the jackpot game. . It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether all the game balls that have won a prize in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 have been discharged by the sum of the probability variation passage counter 203m and the discharged number counter 203u described later. The probability variation passage counter 203m is incremented by one and updated (S1414 in FIG. 438) when the probability variation switch is passed (when the ball entering the V region is detected). Further, after the process of determining whether or not the number of gaming balls having won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls, the process is reset to "0" which is the initial value (S1511 in FIG. 439). The probability variation pass counter 203m is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The winning number counter 203p is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls that have won in the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 in one round in the jackpot game, and that a winning in the specific winning opening 65a has been detected. Are added and updated one by one (S1403 in FIG. 438). On the other hand, when one round is completed, the number of winnings on the variable winning device 65 (value of the winning number counter 203p) and the number of discharging (total value of the discharged number counter 203u and the probability variation passing counter 203m) is one. After it is determined whether or not it is determined that it is determined, the value is reset to "0" which is an initial value (see S1511 in FIG. 439). The value of the winning number counter 203p is backed up when the power is turned off. Also, in the initialized state, it is set to 0.

  The remaining ball timer flag 203 q is a flag indicating whether or not it is a ball swelling period after the first round is completed and the specific winning opening 65 a is closed. When the remaining ball timer flag 203 q is set to ON, it means that the ball is being thrown. While the remaining ball timer flag 203 q is set to ON, a remaining ball timer 203 r described later is incremented by one and updated (see S1505 in FIG. 439). The remaining ball timer 203r is a counter for determining the time after the specific winning opening 65a is closed, and determines whether the time required for the game balls in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged has elapsed. Is a counter for

  The remaining ball timer 203r is required for the game balls to be discharged to the variable winning device 65 to be discharged when the preset one round is finished and the specific winning opening 65a of the variable winning device 65 is closed. It is a counter for determining whether time has passed. In the present embodiment, the time required for the game balls ejected in the variable winning device 65 to be discharged is 0.5 seconds, and in the present embodiment, the counter value corresponding to 0.8 seconds is the remaining ball timer in advance. It is set as the upper limit of 203r. Based on the upper limit value (0.8 seconds in the present embodiment) of the remaining ball timer 203r, it is determined whether the number of winning to the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharging thereof. (S1507 in FIG. 439). If they do not match, an error command is set to notify that effect. Therefore, it can be early notified that the game ball is clogged in the variable winning device 65. Also, keep the ball in the variable winning device 65 illegally, and wait 5 seconds after the start of the fifth round of the big hit C or big hit E to distribute the game ball to the sorting device (V character) It is possible to control the fraud that leaks.

  It should be noted that if the winning number and the discharging number do not match, a dedicated flag is set to ON, and if the flag is ON, the probability variation setting flag 203k is turned on even if the game ball passes the probability variation switch. The configuration may not be set to By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress that a positive change state is incorrectly given.

  The probability variation effective flag 203s is passed when the game ball passes the probability variation switch (enters the V region) after the V character is switched to the first region (V region) and can not be distributed (the region is entered) It is a flag for determining whether or not to enter the ball. When the probability variation effective flag 203s is set to ON, it indicates that passing the gaming ball through the probability variation switch is a normal period.

  The definite variation effective timer 203t is a counter for counting the time after the definite variation effective flag 203s described above is set to ON. After the V-shaped article is switched to the non-V-side arrangement by this definite variation effective timer 203t, it is possible to determine the period required to normally pass the definite variation switch. In the present embodiment, it takes 0.3 seconds for the gaming ball that has reached the V combination to pass through the probability change switch. The upper limit value of the probability variation effective timer 203t is set to a counter value corresponding to 0.5 seconds, and after that, even if it passes the probability variation switch, it is determined to be incorrect and it is not determined to be passage.

  In this way, the game ball is illegally entered in the V area and the probability change switch is passed, the game ball is pushed up with a piano wire or the like from below the probability change switch and passed, or the magnetic sensor is erroneously detected as passing the magnetic sensor You can control the damage caused by the fraud.

  The discharged number counter 203 u is a counter for counting the number of gaming balls discharged from the variable winning device 65 in one round. The number-of-discharges counter 203 u is reset to 0, which is an initial value, after it is determined that the number of balls having won the variable winning device 65 matches the number of discharged balls (S 1511 in FIG. 439).

  The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110.

  As described above, the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 411, the state transition method of the pachinko machine 10, which is realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203, will be described. explain. FIG. 411 is a diagram showing a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example.

  As shown in FIG. 411, the pachinko machine 10 of the first control example is roughly divided into three gaming states. That is, the normal state shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, the positive variation state shown in the middle of FIG. 411, and the short time state shown in the lower part of FIG. 411 are provided.

  The normal state, as described above, indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the normal state of the normal symbol, and the probability of becoming a big hit is low, and it is difficult for the gaming ball to enter the second ball entry port 640 Since it is difficult for the electric role product 640a to be released, the gaming state is most disadvantageous to the player. In addition, as mentioned above, the definite change state indicates the special variation state of the special symbol and the short time condition of the normal symbol, and the jackpot probability is high, and by hitting the right to the second entrance 640 Because the game ball frequently enters, it becomes the most advantageous game state for the player. In addition, the time saving state indicates the low probability state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol, and although the jackpot probability is low, the game ball to the second entrance 640 by performing a right strike Since the player frequently enters the ball, the gaming state is relatively advantageous to the player.

  As shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, there is a possibility that transition from the normal state to another state occurs only when the jackpot occurs. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 411, when the jackpot of the first special symbol is selected and either jackpot A or B is selected as the jackpot type, the gaming ball enters the V region in the fifth round of the jackpot. On the condition of entering the ball, it shifts to the definite change state after the big hit ends. In the jackpots A and B, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter approximately the V area just by hitting the right in five rounds. In the fifth round, if the player did not hit the game ball, etc., and no game ball enters the V area in the fifth round, the gaming state after the big hit is short. It is set. On the other hand, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 411, when jackpot C is selected as the jackpot type of the first special symbol, it is impossible to enter the game ball in the V area in the fifth round of jackpot (difficult Since it becomes), it shifts to the time saving state after the big hit ends.

  Further, as shown in the interruption of FIG. 411, there is a possibility of shifting to another gaming state from the definite change state to another state also when it falls in a fall lottery as well as when it is a big hit. Specifically, when the jackpot in the probability change state is a jackpot E and the jackpot E determined at a rate of 20%, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the short time state. In addition, when it becomes a lottery result corresponding to a fall by a fall lottery before being set to a definite change state and before a lottery of special symbols is executed 100 times, it also shifts to a time saving state. Furthermore, after being set in the definite variation state, after the drawing of the special symbol is executed 100 times or more, when the drawing result corresponding to the fall is obtained in the fall lottery, the state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, when the jackpot in the probability change state is a jackpot D determined at a rate of 80%, the gaming state after the jackpot end is again set to the probability change state (looping the most advantageous probability change state). For this reason, in a definite change state, it is possible to play a game in expectation of becoming a big hit before falling and a big hit D.

  Also, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 411, from the time saving state to another gaming state, in addition to winning the jackpot, also when the lottery of the special symbol specified number of times is executed after the jackpot end, the other Transition to the state. More specifically, when the jackpot in the time saving state is a jackpot and the jackpot D determined by the rate of 80% is reached, the gaming state after the jackpot end is set to the most advantageous probability change state. In addition, since the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times after the previous jackpot is finished, the state shifts to the most disadvantageous normal state. On the other hand, when it becomes the jackpot E determined at a rate of 20% when it becomes the jackpot of the second special symbol, the gaming state after the jackpot end is again set to the time saving state (time saving state Loop). In the time saving state, the probability of becoming a big hit is 1/250 same as the normal state, so the possibility of winning a big hit again within 100 times is not so high (it will be a big hit again at a rate of about 33%) . Therefore, when the time saving state occurs, the possibility of transition to the normal state increases. In addition, as described above, it is difficult to accurately distinguish between the time saving state and the definite variation state (the operation other than the jackpot probability such as the operation mode of the motorized combination 640a becomes the same), so the time saving state of the normal symbol While is set, it is possible to keep the player having a sense of expectation for being in a definite variation state. That is, even if the time reduction state which is disadvantageous (that is, it is easy to shift to the normal state) is set as compared with the definite change state, it can be made to seem as if the player is playing in the positive change state. The motivation for the game can be maintained high. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  As described above, in the first control example, since it is possible to provide the novel game characteristic of going back and forth between the three types of game states, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Returning to FIG. 404, the description will be continued. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 via a bus line 204 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, an audio lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specified winning opening 65a, and an electric part A solenoid 209 composed of a solenoid or the like for driving an object is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals thereto via the input / output port 205.

  The input / output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 (not shown) including switches and sensors, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115. The MPU 201 outputs signals from the various switches 208. Also, various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

  The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of the winning balls and the lending balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 212 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory or the like.

  The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 is, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, a stack area where the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, various flags and counters , I / O, etc. are stored in the work area (work area). The RAM 213 is configured to be able to receive a backup voltage from the power supply device 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is turned off and to hold (back up) data, and all data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is configured to receive the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 at the time of power interruption due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 432) as processing upon power failure is immediately executed.

  An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The main controller 110, the payout motor 216, the emission control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting a prize ball paid out. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111 but not connected to the main control device 110.

  The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a to have the launch strength of the game ball according to the amount of rotational operation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 instructs the game ball to be launched. is there. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the game ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited corresponding to the amount of rotation of the handle 51, and the gaming ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

  The audio lamp control device 113 performs display control such as output of sound in the audio output device 226, output of lighting and extinguishing in the lamp display device (such as the illumination parts 29 to 33 and the display lamp 34), and fluctuation display effect (variation display) The setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the device 114 is controlled. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing a control program to be executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory or the like.

  An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 configured by an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 225 is connected to the main control unit 110, the display control unit 114, the audio output unit 226, the lamp display unit 227, the frame button 22, the push button 10317 and the like.

  In addition, the audio lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed by the third symbol display device 81, or super reach The voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled so as to change the effect contents of the hour, and the display control device 114 is instructed. When the stage is changed, a back side image change command including information on the changed stage is transmitted to display control device 114 in order to display a back side image corresponding to the changed stage on third symbol display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110, the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, etc., and displays the error command including the type of the error. Send to device 114. In the display control device 114, control is performed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to an error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

  Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 412 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. FIG. The ROM 222 includes a variation pattern selection table 222a, a back mode lottery table 222b, a hold change lottery table 222c, a change point calculation table 222d, a collective change lottery table 222e, a chance charge lottery table 222f, and a continuation indication effect selection table It has at least 222g and an interruption continuous hitting lottery table 222h.

  In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main controller 110, the voice lamp control device 113 roughly indicates the contents of fluctuation indicated by the fluctuation pattern command (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, out of range, etc.) ) Is used to determine the detailed contents of the change. Thereby, more various variation modes can be determined. Here, with respect to the rough fluctuation content instructed from main controller 110, one fluctuation mode among a plurality of types is determined by lottery.

  The back mode lottery table 222b is a data for drawing a change of the back mode to indicate the expectation for which the probability change state is set in the gaming state (the probability change state, the time reduction state) in which the time reduction state of the normal symbol is set Is a prescribed data table. The details of the back mode lottery table 222b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 413 is a diagram showing the definition contents of the rear surface mode selection table 222b.

  As shown in FIG. 413, in the back mode, the back mode lottery table 222b is in a state in which it is determined that the current gaming state is a definite change state, and a lottery result corresponding to a fall is not included in the hold. In order to draw the change of the back mode in a state where the table of the definite variation continued referred to for drawing the change and the current gaming state is the definite change state but the drawing result corresponding to the fall is included in the hold And at least the to-be-falled table to be referred to in order to draw the change of the back surface mode in the state where it has already fallen to the short time state.

  As shown in FIG. 413, the back mode lottery table 222b specifies the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y in association with each combination of the current back mode type and the transition destination (after change) back mode. It is done. Here, the effect lottery counter 223 y is configured by a random number counter whose value is periodically updated, and is updated to any value within the range of “0 to 99” each time the update timing is reached. By using the value of the effect lottery counter 223y, the effect mode and the like of various effects are selected. The effect lottery counter 223y is provided with a separate and independent random number counter for each type of effect for which the lottery is executed. That is, the effect lottery counter 223y is a generic name of random number counters used for lottery of various effects.

  As shown in FIG. 413, in the table for probability variation continuation, the current rear mode is a cave search mode, and the rear mode to be transferred is a temple search mode combination (mode transition from cave search mode to temple search mode), A range “0 to 19” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with one another. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be acquired by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20, so the current gaming state is In a definite change state, and in a state where the lottery result of the fall is not included in the holding state, the rate of transition (change) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 20% (20/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the value “20, 21” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is two, so the current gaming state is a definite change state, And, in a state where the lottery result of the fall is not included in the holding state, the rate of transition (change) from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode is 2% (2/100). When the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is other than the above (that is, the range of “22 to 99”), the mode shift is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

  As described above, in the state where the cave search mode is set, when the table for probability variation continuation is referred to (when the probability variation state and the lottery result of falling within the holding period is not included), the variable display is displayed. Each time it is executed, it shifts from the cave mode to the other mode at a rate of 22%. That is, the number of continuations of the cave search mode decreases to about five times on average. In other words, even if the cave search mode is set, the mode set in the cave search mode is likely to be shortened because the mode shifts to another mode with a relatively short period and higher expectation. The rate of stay in Therefore, the longer the period of stay in the mode with the higher degree of expectation can improve the player's expectation for the continuation of the probability change state, so that the interest of the player in the game can be improved. it can.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the table for probability variation continuation, the range “0” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. Of the 100 random values (counter values) that can be obtained by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is one, so the current gaming state is In a definite change state, and in a state where the lottery result of the fall is not included in the holding state, the ratio of changing (changing) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 1% (1/100). Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the range “1 to 10” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10, so the current gaming state is a definite change state And, in a state in which the lottery result of the fall is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode is 10% (10/100). When the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is other than the above (that is, the range of “11 to 99”), the mode shift is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

  As described above, in the state where the temple search mode is set, the variable display is changed when the table for definite variation is referred to (the positive variation state, and the drawing result of the fall is not included in the hold). It moves to cave exploration mode at a rate of 1% each time it is executed, and it is determined that a probability change state is determined at a rate of 10%, and it is determined that the draw result of the fall is not included in the hold. Transition to mode. That is, it is difficult to shift to the cave search mode with low expectation, and it is easy to shift to the super temple mode with high expectation.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode in the table for probability variation continuation. Further, for the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode, the range “0 to 4” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with it. Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is five, so the current gaming state is a definite change And, in a state in which the lottery result of the fall is not included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). When the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is other than the above (that is, the range of “5 to 99”), the mode shift is not performed. That is, the super temple search mode is maintained.

  Thus, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, the mode is shifted to another mode only at a rate of 5%, and even if the mode is switched, relatively high temple search Since the mode is shifted to the mode, even if the mode is shifted from the highest expectation super temple mode to another back mode, the player's expectation for the probability change state can be maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-fall table, the range “0 to 4” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode. . Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is five, so the current gaming state is a definite change state, And in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is 5% (5/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. When the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is other than the above (that is, the range of “5 to 99”), the mode shift is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-fall table, the range “0 to 9” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode. . Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10, so the current gaming state is a definite change state, And in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 10% (10/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. When the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is other than the above (that is, the range of “10 to 99”), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the non-fall table, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode. On the other hand, the range “0 to 99” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode. That is, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, when the non-fall table is referred to, it shifts to the temple search mode (fall). In the super temple search mode, when the non-fall table is referred to, at the start of the previous change, the draw result of the fall is not included in the hold, and a new one is held by the start of the current variable display. It is only when the holding ball is the lottery result of the fall. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained despite the fact that the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case the system is always shifted to the temple search mode.

  In this way, when the back mode transition lottery is executed with reference to the non-fall table (that is, with the lottery result corresponding to the fall being included in the hold), the positive variation continuation table is referred to. The mode transition rate from the cave exploration mode to the temple exploration mode is lower than in the case where the cave exploration mode is used, and even if the temple exploration mode is switched to, the rate of falling to the cave exploration mode is increased. That is, the stay ratio of the cave search mode with a low degree of expectation is high. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game characteristic of predicting whether or not the current game state is the probability change state based on the stay ratio of the cave search mode, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the table for falling down, the range “0, 1” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode. . Of the 100 random values that can be taken by the effect lottery counter 223y, the number of random values associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the temple search mode is two, so the current gaming state is short In this case, the rate of shifting (changing) from the cave exploration mode to the temple exploration mode is 2% (2/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the cave search mode to the super temple search mode. When the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is other than the above (that is, the range of “2 to 99”), the mode shift is not performed. That is, the cave search mode is maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, in the table for falling down, the range “0 to 29” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the cave search mode . Since the number of random number values associated with the mode shift from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30, out of 100 possible random number values of the effect lottery counter 223y, the current gaming state is a definite change state, And in the state where the lottery result of the fall is included in the pending state, the rate of transition (change) from the temple search mode to the cave search mode is 30% (30/100). On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the temple search mode to the super temple search mode. When the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is other than the above (that is, the range of “30 to 99”), the mode transition is not performed. That is, the temple search mode is maintained.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 413, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the cave search mode in the tumbled table. On the other hand, the range “0 to 99” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the mode transition from the super temple search mode to the temple search mode. That is, in the state where the super temple search mode is set, when the falling table is referred to, it shifts to the temple searching mode (fall) as in the case where the non-fall table is referred to. The case where the fallen table is referred to in the super temple search mode is only a case where it is a definite change state at the start of the previous change and the lottery result of the fall in the special symbol lottery this time. Therefore, in order to prevent the super temple mode from being maintained despite the fact that the lottery result of the fall is included, in this case the system is always shifted to the temple search mode.

  In this way, when the fall mode table is referred to (that is, in the short time state) and the back mode transition lottery is executed, the temple from the cave mode is further compared to the case where the unfall table is referred to. In addition to the mode transition rate to the search mode becoming lower, even if the temple search mode is entered, the rate of falling to the cave search mode becomes significantly high. That is, the stay ratio of the cave search mode with a low degree of expectation is high. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game characteristic of predicting whether or not the current game state is the probability change state based on the stay ratio of the cave search mode, so it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Referring back to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The pending change lottery table 222c refers to the pre-read result executed based on the detection of the start winning for the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, and the number of holding balls number pattern corresponding to the starting winning It is a data table referred when performing drawing of a display mode of this. The details of the pending change lottery table 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 414 (a). FIG. 414 (a) is a diagram showing the definition contents of the hold change lottery table 222c.

  As shown in FIG. 414 (a), in the pending change lottery table 222c, each pending symbol mode (white, blue, green, red) is selected for each prefetch result (variation type), and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y The range of is defined in association. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), when the variation type is "long out", the white retaining symbol is displayed for the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is "0 to 98". A mode is defined in association with a blue reserved symbol mode in association with a value "99" of the effect lottery counter 223y. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, when the pre-reading result becomes the fluctuation type of overdue (the over-prediction result of overdue is notified from the main control device 110 by the prize information command), 99% is held as the number-of-hold ball number symbol corresponding to the start winning. The white reserved symbol form is set at a ratio of (99/100), and the blue reserved symbol form is set at a percentage of 1% (1/100). That is, in the case of a long run, a white reserved symbol form is set substantially, and it is extremely rare in the case where a held change (a reserved symbol form other than white is set).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), with respect to the variation type being “out-of-normal reach”, the white reserved symbol form is associated with the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y “0 to 94”. The blue reserved symbol form is defined in association with the range of the effect lottery counter 223y of "95 to 99". On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the green and red reserved symbol modes. Therefore, when the pre-read result is out of the normal reach variation classification type, the white reserved symbol form is set at a ratio of 95% (95/100) as the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the start winning combination, 5% ( The blue reserved symbol form is set at a rate of 5/100). That is, even in the case of the out-of-normal reach, the white reserved symbol aspect is set at a relatively high rate, and the proportion at which the holding change (the reserved symbol aspect other than white) is set is low.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), when the variation type is "off super reach", the white reserved symbol aspect corresponds to the range of "0 to 74" of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. It is defined and attached, with respect to the range of "75-89", the blue reserved symbol aspect is defined in association, and the green reserved symbol aspect is defined associated with the range "90-97" With respect to the range of "98, 99", a red reserved symbol form is defined in association with it. That is, in the case of the variation type of the deviation super reach where the variation time is long and the relatively flashy (buzzy) effect mode is executed, the ratio of the white reserved symbol mode is 75% (75/100) and others. It becomes lower than the variation type of out-of-line, and the proportion of holding pattern form of blue becomes as high as 10% (10/100). Furthermore, it may be set to a green or red reserved symbol form. That is, the ratio of the green reserved symbol form is 8% (8/100), and the ratio of the red reserved symbol form is 2% (2/100). Therefore, in the case of a green or red reserved symbol form, at least a change type below the normal reach (a change type with a low degree of expectation) is denied, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation for jackpot. be able to.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), with respect to the variation type “per hit normal reach”, the white reserved symbol aspect is associated with the range of the effect lottery counter 223y “0 to 74” For the range of "75 to 84", the blue reserved symbol form is defined in association with the range of "85 to 94", and the green reserved symbol form is defined correspondingly to the range of "85 to 94", With respect to the range of "95 to 99", a red reserved symbol form is defined in association with it. That is, the ratio set to the green or red reserved symbol form is higher than in the case of the out-of-the-page super reach.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 414 (a), when the variation type is "per hit super reach", the white reserved symbol aspect corresponds to the range of "0 to 49" of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. It is defined and attached, with respect to the range of "50 to 59", the blue reserved symbol aspect is defined in correspondence, and for the range of "60 to 84", the green reserved symbol aspect is defined correlated to With respect to the range of "85 to 99", a red reserved symbol form is defined in association with it. That is, the rate of occurrence of the pending change itself is improved and the rate at which the green and red reserved symbol modes are selected is also higher than the variation type of out-of-line super reach or the hit normal reach. Therefore, when it is set to the green or red reserved symbol form, the sense of expectation for the jackpot can be further improved.

  Referring back to FIG. 412, the description will be continued. The change point calculation table 222 d is a data table that is referred to when calculating change points that serve as a reference for judging whether the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 402 and 403) can be executed. Although the details will be described later, this change point is that the variation type of each holding ball and the jackpot expectation degree indicated from the holding symbol aspect are diverging at the lottery time of the holding collective change effect (notice the expectation degree ) Is configured to be set to a larger number of points. As a reserved symbol aspect of a relatively low degree of expectation is set by the held change presentation, it is configured such that an effect of improving the expectation by the held collective change presentation is more easily performed. Thereby, the degree of expectation can be notified more appropriately by the reserved symbol form. Details of the change point calculation table 222d will be described with reference to FIG. 414 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 414 (b), in the change point lottery table 222d, the change point is associated with each of the change types (pre-reading results) of the holding ball and the holding symbol modes set for the holding ball. Are defined. In the first control example, when a plurality of holding balls are held at the time when the start winning is detected, the change point of each holding ball is calculated by the change point lottery table 222d, and the total value of the change points It is set as the structure which carries out a lottery of the execution decision | availability of a reservation batch change production based on. That is, as the total value of the change points is larger, the execution ratio of the pending collective change effect is configured to be higher. As a result, even if a lower expectation level is notified once in the hold change presentation, it is possible to give an opportunity to improve the expectation degree by the hold batch change presentation, so that the expectation degree can be notified more appropriately by the hold symbol mode. Can.

  As shown in FIG. 414 (b), “0” is defined as a change point in association with the short-off and long-out fluctuation types, regardless of the reserved symbol mode. In addition, for fluctuation types of out-of-normal reach, “1” is defined as a change point in relation to the hold symbol form of white hold, and “0” is specified as a change point for other hold symbol forms. Are defined in association with each other. In addition, for variation types of out-of-order super reach, “2” is defined as a change point in relation to the hold symbol form of white hold, and is defined as a change point for the hold symbol form of blue hold "1" is matched and prescribed | regulated, "0" is matched and prescribed | regulated as a change point with respect to the other pending | holding symbol aspect. In addition, for variation types of hit normal reach and hit super reach, 3 is defined as a change point for the hold symbol form of white hold, and is defined as a change point for the hold symbol form of blue hold. 2 is defined in association with 1 and is defined as a change point in association with the green symbol of the hold symbol, and 0 is defined in association with the red symbol of the hold symbol in the red symbol.

  As described above, in the first control example, the number of change points is increased as the reserved symbol aspect having a low degree of expectation is set with respect to the holding ball of the variation type having a high degree of expectation. That is, as the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol aspect is larger, the number of change points is increased, so that the execution of the pending collective change effect is easily permitted. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to notify of a more appropriate degree of expectation by the reserved symbol mode.

  Referring back to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The collective change lottery table 222e is a data table that is referred to when performing a lottery on whether or not the held collective change effect can be performed. The details of the collective change lottery table 222e will be described with reference to FIG. 415 (a). FIG. 415 (a) shows the defined contents of the collective change lottery table 222e. As shown in FIG. 415 (a), in the collective change lottery table 222e, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y for which the execution of the holding collective change presentation is determined is defined in association with each total value of the change points. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415 (a), the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the total value of the change points being zero. In addition, when the total value of the change points is 1, the value “0 to 9” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association, and when the total value of the change points is 2, the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y “0 to 24” are defined in association with each other, and the value “0 to 49” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the total value of the change points of 3 or more. In other words, if the change point is 1, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 10%, and if the change point is 2, the pending collective change effect is selected at a rate of 25%, and the change point is 3 For example, the pending collective change presentation is selected at a rate of 50%.

  As described above, in the first control example, as the total of change points increases (the reserved symbol mode having a low degree of expectation with respect to the holding ball of a high expectation type of fluctuation type is set) The rate of deciding to run is configured to be high. Thus, as the room for improving the degree of expectation of the reserved symbol aspect is larger, the number of change points is increased, so that execution of the pending collective change presentation is easily permitted. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to notify of a more appropriate degree of expectation by the reserved symbol mode.

  Referring back to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The chance charge lottery table 222f is a data table that is referred to in order to draw a lottery of whether or not the chance charge effect is to be performed. The details of the chance charge lottery table 222f will be described with reference to FIG. 415 (b). FIG. 415 (b) is a diagram showing the stipulated contents of the chance charge lottery table 222f. As shown in FIG. 415 (b), in the chance charge lottery table 222f, the number of holding balls and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y determined to execute the chance charge effect are associated for each fluctuation type. It is prescribed.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 415 (b), in the variation pattern of out-of-normal reach and out-of-super reach, with respect to the number of holding balls 0 and 1, the value range of the effect lottery counter 223y 4 ”is defined in association with each other. Further, for the number of holding balls being 2, the range “0 to 14” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association, and for the number of holding balls being three or more, the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is The range "0 to 24" is defined in association with one another. That is, if the number of holding balls is 0 or 1, execution of chance charge presentation is determined at a rate of 5%, and if the number of holding balls is 2, execution of chance charge presentation is determined at a rate of 15%, If the number of holding balls is 3 or more, execution of the chance charge presentation is determined at a rate of 25%.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 415 (b), in the variation pattern of the hit normal reach, the number “0 to 34” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the number of holding balls 0 and 1 On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of holding balls of 2 or more. That is, if the number of balls held is 0 or 1, execution of chance charge effects is determined at a rate of 35%, while if the number of balls held is 2 or more, execution of chance charge effects is determined Absent. That is, when the number of holding balls is 1 or less, the determination ratio of the chance charge effect is higher than that of the out-of-order fluctuation pattern. In addition, the reason for not executing the chance charge effect when the number of balls held is 2 or more is to suppress the problem that the big hit is started before the consumption gauge is exhausted because the gas gauges are accumulated too much. That is, in the case of the hit normal reach, since the fluctuation time is relatively short (there is little opportunity to execute the chance-up effect), the possibility that the spirit gauge will be accumulated exceeds the timing at which the chance-up can be performed. And the number of gas gauges accumulated in the chance charge production is determined according to only the number of holding balls. That is, the larger the number of holding balls, the higher the possibility of setting a larger number of gage gauges. Therefore, in the present control example, execution of the chance charge presentation is avoided when the number of balls held is large under the situation where the change is a win. Thus, it is possible to suppress the problem that the jackpot is started before the consumption gauge number is consumed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 415 (b), in the variation pattern of the hit super reach, the range “0 to 49” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the reserved ball number 0 to 2, and the rule is defined. A range “0 to 9” of the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the number of holding balls being three. On the other hand, the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is not associated with the number of holding balls of four. That is, if the number of holding balls is 0 to 2, execution of chance charge presentation is determined at a rate of 50%, and if the number of holding balls is 3, execution of chance charge presentation is determined at a rate of 10% On the other hand, if the number of holding balls is 4, execution of the chance charge presentation is not determined. That is, when the number of holding balls is 2 or less, the determination ratio of the chance charge presentation is higher than the variation pattern of the out-of-range and the variation pattern of the hit normal reach. Further, when the number of holding balls is 3, the execution ratio of the chance charge effect is low, and when the number of holding balls is 4, the chance charge effect is not performed. This is intended to suppress such a problem that the jackpot is started before the exhaustion gauge is consumed, as in the case of the hit normal reach.

  Referring back to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The continuation suggestion effect selection table 222 g is used to select a presentation scenario of the continuation indication effect to be executed over the 96th to 99th variable display effects after the big hit is finished (that is, after the start of the time saving state of the normal symbol). It is a data table to be referred to. The details of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222 g will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 416 is a diagram showing the definition contents of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222 g. As shown in FIG. 416, the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g is a continuation determination table to be referred to when the continuation of the definite change condition is determined until the end of the continuation suggestion effect, and the continuation suggestion effect is terminated The holding ball is not held, but it is determined that the continuous enrichment table to be referred to when the definite variation state is determined to be maintained within the hold and the end of the continuous suggestion effect is a time-saving state And at least a non-continuing table. In each table, a plurality of combinations (scenarios) of effect modes to be executed in the 96th to 99th variable display are defined.

  As shown in FIG. 416, in the continuation determination table, the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with each of the seven scenarios “01H” to “07H”. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 416, a weak attack with low expectation (see FIG. 393 (a)) is executed in the 96th to 98th variable display, and the high expectation in the 99th variable display A value “0 to 9” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the effect scenario “01H” in a mode in which the strong attack (see FIG. 393 (b)) is executed and the door 806 is broken. Also, a weak attack (see FIG. 393 (a)) is executed in the 96, 97th variable display, and a strong attack (see FIG. 393 (b)) is performed in the 98, 99 variable display, and the door 806 is broken. The value “10 to 19” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the effect scenario “02H” of the mode to be played, and a weak attack (see FIG. 393 (a)) is executed in the 96th variable display. With respect to the effect scenario “03H” in which the strong attack (see FIG. 393 (b)) is executed in the 97th to 99th variable display and the door 806 is broken, the value “20 to 59” of the effect lottery counter 223y is With respect to the rendering scenario “04H” in a mode in which the strong attack (see FIG. 393 (b)) is executed in all the variable displays of the 96th to 99th, which are defined in association with each other, the rendering scenario “04H” The value of the selected counter 223y "60-89" are defined in association with each other. That is, the selection rate of the rendering scenario in which the number of strong attacks is small is low, and the selection rate of the rendering scenario in which the number of strong attacks is high is high.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 416, the continuation determination table is provided with a rendering scenario in a special mode in which the door 806 is broken through less than 99 times. That is, an effect scenario "05H" (a range of the value "90, 91" of the effect lottery counter 223y) and an attack scenario in which the weak attack is performed in the 96th, 97 Perform a weak attack on the second time, and the 96th and 97th weak attack on the presentation scenario “06H” (range of value “92-94” of the effect lottery counter 223y) and the 96th time of the presentation scenario “06H” of an aspect of making a strong attack to break through the door 806 And a rendering scenario “07H” (a range of values “95 to 99” of the rendering lottery counter 223 y) of an aspect in which the door 806 is broken through the strong attack. These special aspects of the scenario may only be set if the continuation determination table is referenced. That is, by executing a special mode of scenario, it may be executed only in a state in which it is determined that the probability change state is continuing until the time when the 99th variable display ends. It is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 416, the continuous enrichment table defines four scenarios “08H” to “0BH”. The flow of the effects of the presentation scenarios “08H” to “0BH” is exactly the same as the flow of the presentation scenarios “01H” to “04H” respectively described above, and thus the details thereof will be omitted here. As shown in FIG. 416, the effect scenario “08H” is defined in association with the value “0 to 14” of the effect lottery counter 223y, and the effect scenario “09H” is the value “15 to 15” of the effect lottery counter 223y. 29 "is defined in association, the value" 30 to 69 "of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario" 0AH ", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in the effect scenario" 0BH " 70 to 99 "are defined in association with each other. That is, similarly to the continuation determination table, the selection rate of the rendering scenario having a small number of strong attacks is low, and the selection ratio of the rendering scenario having a large number of strong attacks is high. In addition, when it becomes a lottery result corresponding to the fall during the progress of the scenario defined in the table for continuous enrichment, the presentation specified in the table for non-continuity from the variable display resulting in the lottery result of the fall. It is switched to the rendering scenario “0CH” which is one of the scenarios. In this way, even if the holding balls for up to the 99th variable display are not held at the start of the continuous suggestion effect, by switching the scenario in the middle, the gaming state at the end of the 99th fluctuation is accurately corrected. It can be informed.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 416, the non-continuance table defines four scenarios “0CH” to “0FH”. The flow of the effects of the presentation scenarios “0CH” to “0FH” is completely the same as the above-described presentation scenarios “01H” to “04H” except that the breakthrough of the door 806 finally fails, so here Details will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 416, the effect scenario “0 CH” is defined in association with the value “0 to 39” of the effect lottery counter 223 y, and the effect scenario “0 DH” is the value “40 ̃ of the effect lottery counter 223 y 79 "is defined in association with the effect scenario" 0EH ", and the value" 80 to 94 "of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect scenario" 0FH ", the value of the effect lottery counter 223y" “95 to 99” are defined in association with each other. That is, contrary to the continuation determination table and the continuation concentration table, the selection rate of the rendering scenario with a small number of strong attacks is high, and the selection ratio of the production scenario with a large number of strong attacks is low. There is. Therefore, the more the number of strong attacks, the lower the possibility that the non-continuation table is referred to and the presentation scenario is determined, and therefore the game is focused on the contents of each attack during the execution of the continuous indication presentation. It can be done. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Referring back to FIG. 412 (a), the description will be continued. The interruption consecutive hitting lottery table 222h is a data table which is referred to in order to draw out the execution possibility of the interruption continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 399) and the effect type. The details of the continuous hit random determination table 222h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 417 is a diagram showing the definition contents of the interruption consecutive hitting lottery table 222h. As shown in FIG. 417, the effect type and the range of the value of the effect lottery counter 223y are defined in association with each other in the interruption continuous hitting lottery table 222h for each change type.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 417, in the long variation pattern, it is executed during the normal variation production period, and it is possible to reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of 10 for the production type of the production mode. The value “0 to 4” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with one another. For this reason, in the case of a long run, an interruption continuous hitting production is executed at a rate of 5% (5/100).

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of out-of-normal reach, it is executed during the normal variation production period, and for the effect type which can reduce the number of monsters to 5 as a minimum, effect lottery The value of the effect lottery counter 223y for the effect type of the effect mode in which the value “0 to 9” of the counter 223y is associated with and defined and executed during reach change and the number of monsters can be reduced to 4 at minimum. “10 to 14” are defined in association with each other. For this reason, in the fluctuation pattern of the out-of-normal reach, it is determined that the ratio is 15% in total, and the execution of the out-of-order continuous hit presentation is performed. In other words, the execution of the continuous hitting strike effect is determined at a higher rate than in the case of the long run.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of the out-of-order super reach, as an interruption continuous hitting effect to be executed during a normal variation effect period, an effect of an effect aspect capable of reducing monsters to the remaining five bodies as a minimum. For the type, the value “0 to 4” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association, and the value of the effect lottery counter 223 y for the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 4 at minimum. “5 to 9” are defined in association with each other. In addition, the value "10 to 14" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the monster to 4 objects at minimum as the interruption continuous hitting effect executed during reach change. The value “15 to 19” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the effect type of the effect aspect that is defined and can reduce the number of monsters to a minimum of three. That is, since the execution ratio of the total continuous hitting strike effect is higher than the out-of-normal reach, and the number of monsters can be reduced to a smaller number of monsters, the player's expectation for jackpot can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of the hit normal reach, an effect type that can reduce the number of monsters to 5 as a minimum, as an interruption continuous hitting effect to be executed during the normal variation effect period. On the other hand, the value “0 to 3” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association, and the value “4” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is for the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce monsters to 0. It is defined in association with it. In addition, the value "5 to 24" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect aspect that can reduce the monster to 4 objects at minimum as the interruption continuous hitting effect executed during the reach change. The value “25” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the effect type of the effect aspect that can be defined so that the number of monsters can be reduced to 0. That is, since the execution ratio of the total continuous hitting strike effect is higher than in the case of the out, and there is a possibility of defeating all the monsters, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 417, in the variation pattern of the hit super reach, as an interruption consecutive hitting effect to be executed during a normal variation effect period, an effect of an effect aspect that can reduce monsters to the remaining four bodies as a minimum. For the type, the value “0, 1” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the type, and for the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce monsters to 0, the value “2” of the effect lottery counter 223 y Are defined in association with each other. In addition, the value "3 to 19" of the effect lottery counter 223y is associated with the effect type of the effect aspect that can reduce the monster to 4 objects at minimum as the interruption continuous hit effect executed during the reach change. The value “20 to 39” of the effect lottery counter 223 y is defined in association with the effect type of the effect mode that can reduce the number of monsters to 3 objects, and the effect mode can reduce the number of monsters to 0 The value "40, 41" of the effect lottery counter 223y is defined in association with the effect type of. That is, the probability of defeating all the monsters is further increased, as well as the execution ratio of the total interruption consecutive hitting production is higher than in the case of the out-of-place or hit normal reach, and therefore the player's expectation for jackpot is improved. Can.

  As described above, in the first control example, the execution timing of the interruption continuous hitting production and the number of monsters that can be defeated are configured to be different for each variation type, and the effect is that all the monsters are eliminated only in the case of the big hit. It was set as the composition which can be chosen. With such a configuration, since the player can perform the player's batting operation more positively during execution of the batting batting production, the player's willingness to participate in the batting batting production can be improved.

  Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 412 (b). FIG. 412 (b) is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. In the RAM 223, a special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, a special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b, a normal holding ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, a stop type selection flag 223e, a gaming state storage area 223f , The hourly guaranteed number counter 223g, the continuous scenario storage area 223h, the right hit during winning flag 223i, the continuous shot type storage area 223j, the chance charge standby flag 223k, the charge number counter 223m, and the charge state number counter 223n , Batch change flag 223p, Change point storage area 223q, Hold symbol state storage area 223r, Variation time timer 223s, Operation valid period timer 223t, Stop operation frequency counter 223u, Continuous hitting valid period timer 223v, Batch Change period And timer 223X, and effect random counter 223Y, and the other memory area 223z are at least provided.

  The special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a is a counter for counting the number of holding balls (the number of waits) corresponding to the drawing of the first special symbol held in the main controller 110 up to four times, and the special symbol 2 holding The number-of-balls counter 223b is a counter that counts the number of holding balls corresponding to the lottery of the second special symbol up to four times.

  As described above, the audio lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e Can not get the value of. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of holding balls is counted based on the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b The number of holding balls is to be managed for each type of special symbol.

  Specifically, in main controller 110, when the number of holding balls in the variable display is added by entering balls into first entrance 64 and second entrance 640, or when the main controller 110 selects a special symbol When the variable display in is executed and the number of holding balls is subtracted, the number of holding balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e The command is sent to the audio lamp controller 113.

  When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 holding ball reception is used from the holding ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a or the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b (see S3910 in FIG. 451). Thus, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b according to the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, The values can be updated while being synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control unit 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e.

  The values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b are used to display the holding ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of holding balls indicated by the command in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b in response to the reception of the holding ball number command. , In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b after storing, the display holding ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

  When the display control device 114 receives this display holding ball number command, the value of the holding ball number indicated by the command, that is, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a of the audio lamp control device 113 and the special symbol 2 holding The drawing of the image is controlled so as to display the holding ball number pattern corresponding to the value of the ball number counter 223 b in the sub display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b are synchronized with the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e. While its value is changed. Accordingly, the number of holding ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. It can be changed while being Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can correctly display the number of the holding balls for which the variable display is held.

  The normal holding ball number counter 223c is different in that the same contents as the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b described above are changed from the special symbol to the normal symbol Since the technical control concept is the same, detailed description will be omitted.

  The fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on when the fluctuation pattern command of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 or the fluctuation pattern command of the second special symbol is received (see S3904 in FIG. 451), and the third symbol is displayed. It is turned off when the setting of the variable display on the display device 81 is made (see S4202 in FIG. 455). When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

  The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when the stop type command of the special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S3907 in FIG. 451), and the stop type in the third symbol display device 81 is set. (See S4208 in FIG. 455). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is determined based on the stop type (in the case of a big hit, a big hit type) extracted from the received stop type command.

  The gaming state storage area 223 f is a storage area for storing data according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The gaming state storage area 223f is updated each time a status command is output from the main control device 110 whenever a change occurs in the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (see S3902 in FIG. 451). Note that the gaming state storage area 223 f is configured of, for example, a 1-byte storage area, and is configured to be able to specify the gaming state according to the state of the lower 2 bits. More specifically, for example, the least significant bit indicates whether or not the time saving state of the normal symbol is in effect, and the bit of the lower second bit indicates whether or not it is a definite variation state of special symbol. Therefore, in the "special symbol low probability state", and "the normal symbol normal state", the lower 2 bits become "00B", and the "special symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol time saving state" Two bits become "01B", and "lower symbol" becomes "11B" in "the special symbol's definite variation state" and "the normal symbol's time saving state". The MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 can grasp the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 on the audio lamp control device 113 side based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223f.

  The hour-time guaranteed number counter 223f is a counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations for which the time-shortened state is guaranteed. At this time, the initial value of the short guarantee number counter 223f is set to 0, and 100 is set to the value when the big hit is finished (see S4107 in FIG. 454). In addition, each time a new variable display execution is set, the value is decremented by one (see S4304 in FIG. 456). As described above, in the first control example, the time saving state of the normal symbol is maintained until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times after the big hit is finished. At this time, by counting the time-limited guaranteed number of times by the short-time guaranteed number counter 223f, the voice lamp control device 113 can accurately grasp the guaranteed number.

  The continuation scenario storage area 223h is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of effect scenario determined from the continuation indication effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start of the definite variation continuation indication effect. When the continuation scenario storage area 223h has an initial value set to 00H and the presentation scenario is determined by lottery using the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) at the start timing of the definite variation continuation indication effect, Data indicating the rendering scenario is stored (see S4409 in FIG. 457). During the execution of the definite variation continuation indication effect, the variation display mode at the start of each variation display is determined based on the data of the continuation scenario storage area 223h (see S4415 in FIG. 457).

  The right hitting middle winning flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot under execution is a jackpot won during the right hitting gaming state (time saving state of a normal symbol). If this right-handed winning flag 223i is on, it indicates that it is a jackpot won during the right-handed gaming state, and if off, it is a jackpot winning during the left-handed gaming state (that is, the first hit) To indicate that At the end of the jackpot, the rear mode is set in accordance with the state of the right-handed winning flag 223i. That is, if it is on, the temple search mode is set, and if it is off, the cave search mode is set (see S4109 and S4110 in FIG. 454). As described above, when the jackpot in the left-handed gaming state (i.e., became the jackpot in the first special symbol lottery), while transitioning to the probability change state only in the proportion of 50%, the jackpot in the right-handed gaming state When it becomes (ie, it will be a jackpot in the second special symbol lottery), it will shift to the probability change state at a rate of 80%. The difference in this ratio is reported by the degree of expectation indicated by the back mode.

  The continuous hit type storage area 223 j is a storage area for storing data indicating the type of interrupt continuous hit effect (execution timing of effect and lower limit value of subtraction number of monster). In accordance with the data of the continuous hit type storage area 223j, the start timing of the interrupt continuous hit effect, the subtraction number of the monster with respect to the pressing of the PUSH button 10317, and the like are set.

  The chance charge waiting flag 223k is a flag indicating whether or not it is a period (chance charge waiting period) from when the execution of the chance charge presentation is determined until the chance charge presentation is actually started. If it indicates that it is a chance charge waiting period. The chance charge waiting flag 223k has an initial value set to off, and is set to on when execution of the chance charge effect is determined (see S4564 in FIG. 459), and execution of the chance charge effect is started. In this case, it is set to off (see S3313 in FIG. 443). If a new start winning combination is detected while the chance charge standby flag 223k is on, the gauge number is added to the number of gauges determined in advance as the number of gauges accumulated in the chance charge effect to be executed thereafter It is determined whether or not it is.

  The charge number counter 223m is a counter that indicates the number of gauges of the gage gauge notified in the chance charge effect. The charge number counter 223m has an initial value set to 0, and when execution of the chance charge effect is determined, a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of balls reserved at the time of determination is set (FIG. 459) See S4563). In addition, each time the gas gauge is consumed, the value is updated by being decremented by one by executing the chance-up effect (see S3559 and S3561 in FIG. 446).

  The charge state number counter 223 n is a counter that indicates the remaining number of fluctuations until consumption of the gas gauge accumulated by the chance charge effect is completed. The charge state frequency counter 223n is set to a value corresponding to the current number of balls held at the start of the chance charge effect (see S3314 in FIG. 443), and is set to a new value every time the variable display effect is executed. It is decremented by one (see S4302 in FIG. 456). While the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not to perform the chance-up effect by consuming the gage whenever it is time to execute the chance-up effect.

  The collective change flag 223p is a flag indicating whether or not the pending collective change effect is being executed, and if it is on, it means that the pending collective change effect is being executed, and if it is off, the pending collective change Indicates that the production is not in progress. The batch change flag 223p has an initial value set to OFF, and is set to ON when the execution of the hold batch change effect is set (see S4059 in FIG. 453).

  The change point storage area 223 q is a storage area for storing change points specified with reference to the change point calculation table 222 d described above. The change point storage area 223 q is configured to be able to separately store change points of the respective holding balls.

  The reserved symbol state storage area 223r is a storage area for storing data indicating the reserved symbol aspect of each of the number-of-held-balls symbols. With the data stored in the reserved symbol state storage area 223r, it is possible to accurately grasp the reserved symbol aspect of each number-of-reserved balls number symbol.

  The fluctuation time timer 223s is a timer for measuring the fluctuation time. The progress of the variable display effect can be accurately determined by the timer value of the fluctuation time timer 223s.

  The operation valid period timer 223t is a timer for measuring a period in which the PUSH button 10317 is valid in the depression stop effect (see FIG. 395). It is determined by the operation valid period timer 223t whether or not the operation on the push button 10317 in the depression and stop effect is treated as valid. In the press stop effect, separate button images and valid period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, but in actuality, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is validated by a single operation valid period. It is determined whether or not it is. With such a configuration, it is possible to simplify the determination as to whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is to be effective, so that the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  The stop operation number counter 223u is a counter that indicates the number of remaining stop operations that can be performed in the press stop effect (see FIG. 395). When the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 3 and the stop operation is detected during the operation valid period, the left symbol row is stopped and the value is 2 and the stop is performed during the operation valid period. When the operation is detected, the right symbol row is stopped and displayed, and when the stop operation is detected during the operation valid period with the value being 1, the central symbol row is displayed stopped.

  The continuous hit effective period timer 223s is a timer for measuring a period in which the continuous hit operation on the push button 10317 is effective in the interrupt continuous hit effect (see FIG. 399). It is determined by the continuous hitting effective period timer 223s whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the continuous effect of continuous hitting is treated as valid.

  The collective change period timer 223x is a timer for measuring a period during which the PUSH button 10317 is enabled in the pending collective change effect (see FIGS. 403 and 404). This batch change period timer 223x determines whether or not the operation on the PUSH button 10317 in the hold batch change effect is treated as valid.

  As described above, the effect lottery counter 223y is a random number counter for executing the lottery of the effect mode.

  The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-described data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. In the other memory area 223z, for example, a winning information storage area or the like for storing winning information based on the winning information command received from the main control device 110 is provided. The winning information storage area has a storage area consisting of four areas (first to fourth areas) for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In addition, it has one execution area. Winning information is stored in each area. In the pachinko machine 10, when the start winning combination is detected in the main control device 110, each of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 acquired according to the start winning combination From the value, the main control unit 110 predicts (estimates) various information (appropriate, stop type, fluctuation pattern) obtained when the lottery of the special symbol corresponding to the starting winning combination is performed, and the various information predicted Is notified from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control unit 113 by a prize information command.

  In the voice lamp control device 113, when the winning information command is received, the various information (pass, stop type, fluctuation pattern) notified by the winning information command is extracted as winning information, and the winning information is the winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, among the vacant areas of the four areas (first area to fourth area), the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (first to fourth). Be done. That is, as the area number is smaller, data corresponding to an earlier winning is stored, and data corresponding to the oldest winning in time is stored in the first area.

  The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing a command received from the main control device 110 until processing corresponding to the command is performed, and an elapsed time timer for counting the rendering time. doing. The command storage area is configured by a ring buffer, and data read / write is performed by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 36) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process is performed. The command is analyzed and processing according to the command is performed.

  The display control device 114 is connected to the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the fluctuation display (variation display of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81) Effects and continuous advance notice effects are controlled. The details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

  The power supply unit 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with a RAM erase switch 122. have. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As a summary, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts AC supplied from the outside, 12 volts voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, solenoids such as solenoid 209, motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and a backup voltage are supplied to the respective control devices 110 to 114 and the like.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting the power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of the stable DC voltage of 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power loss, power loss) occurs when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the blackout signal SG1 is outputted to the main control unit 110 and the payout control unit 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure, and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a 5-volt voltage, which is a driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient for execution of the NMI interrupt processing even after the voltage of the DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, main controller 110 and payout controller 111 can execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 432) normally.

  The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control unit 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed. The main control unit 110 controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data and causing the payout control unit 111 to clear the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Transmit to the device 111.

  Next, an electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 418 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, bus lines 240 and 241 have.

  The output side of the audio lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected via the bus line 240 to the output side of the input port 238. . The image controller 237 is connected to a resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236, and to an output port 239 via a bus line 241. In addition, the third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is a symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 even if it is another model in which the lottery probability of becoming a big hit of a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out by one big symbol of a special symbol differ. The display control device 114 is converted into a common part and the cost is reduced because there are models of the same specifications.

  In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

  First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads out and fetches an instruction code stored at an address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processing according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is configured to be reset by the power supply 115 immediately after the power is turned on (including the recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), and when the system reset is canceled, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of the MPU 231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. When the MPU 231 executes a setting instruction of the instruction pointer, the value of the pointer designated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

  Although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is not stored.

  Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is configured by a NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a large area with a small area. Thus, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. When the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the reading speed is slow particularly when random access is performed. For example, in the case of reading data arranged in a row in a plurality of pages, data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the first page of data. It takes a long time to output data after In addition, when reading out non-consecutive data, a large amount of time is required each time the data is read out. As described above, since the speed for reading the NAND flash memory is low, if the MPU 231 directly reads the control program from the character ROM 234 and executes various processes, it takes time to read the instruction that configures the control program. In the case where a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control apparatus 114 may be degraded.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. Store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes in accordance with the control program stored in the work RAM 233. The work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later, and the data read / write is performed at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read an instruction constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and data of an image displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after system reset release via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 described later to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 stores image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234, which will be described later, into a resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

  The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing the NAND flash memory 234a, the ROM controller 234b, the buffer RAM 234c, and the NOR ROM 234d.

  The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and fixed value data for driving most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, the NAND flash memory is characterized in that a large storage capacity can be obtained with a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thereby, in the pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, for example, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the player's interest.

  The NAND flash memory 234a can also store a control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this manner, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store data of an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional gaming machine. Since the character ROM 234 can be stored, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  The ROM controller 234 b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234, and for example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234 a or the like. Are read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits into which erroneous data has been written) are generated when data is written, or a defective data block in which data can not be written is generated. To Therefore, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and is known to read and write data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding the defective data block. Execute conversion of data address of.

  Since error correction is performed on data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including an error bit by the ROM controller 234b, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, based on erroneous data Thus, it can be suppressed that the MPU 231 performs processing or the image controller 237 generates various images.

  Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and the access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 are different defective data in the individual NAND flash memory 234a. The character ROM 234 can be easily accessed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234 a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complexity of access control to the character ROM 234.

  The buffer RAM 234 c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234 a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b causes one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address. It is determined whether or not the data of (1) is set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, if it is not set, data of one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including data corresponding to the designated address is read out from the NAND type flash memory 234a (or NOR type ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. Do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

  The buffer RAM 234c is configured by two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b outputs data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside, for example, using the other bank with data set in one bank, or designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. Processing for transferring and setting one page of data including data corresponding to the specified address from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and setting the data corresponding to the address designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 to the other The processing of reading out from the bank and outputting it to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading of the character ROM 234 can be improved.

  The NOR type ROM 234 d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234 and has a much smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234 a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234 a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, programs not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

  The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be performed in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release within the range of the capacity of one bank (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) of the buffer RAM 234c in this boot program From the instruction, a predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be smaller than the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and may be appropriately set according to the specification of the display control device 114. It may be.

  When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware, and designates the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is designated to the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is used as one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231.

  When the MPU 231 fetches an instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, increments the instruction pointer 231a by one, and transmits the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR ROM 234 d, the ROM controller 234 b of the character ROM 234 selects from among the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234 c from the NOR ROM 234 d. The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231.

  Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program that should be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset is released are NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the specification of the address to the output of the data in the reading of the first page of data. There's a problem.

  When all control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If it has been, the character ROM 234 has to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a lot of time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 specifies an address "0000H" and then an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of latency before receiving the code. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, since the NOR ROM is a memory that can read data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions are stored in the NOR ROM 234 d from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs. When the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately uses the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d as the buffer RAM 234c. And the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and can start the MPU 231 in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. A fixed amount data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program, a predetermined amount (for example, a capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) program storage area of the work RAM 233 It is programmed to be transferred to the data table storage area 233b and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after releasing the system reset, and the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 A predetermined amount of data is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a while using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c.

  Here, as described above, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured to have a capacity equivalent to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, so the address of the internal bus is specified as "0000H". When the boot program of the first program storage area 234d1 is set to the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set to only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, the process of resetting the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c is unnecessary, so the time for the boot process can be shortened.

  When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the boot pointer stored in the program storage area 233a It is programmed to set a first predetermined address. As a result, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by the predetermined amount by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a becomes the first predetermined one Set to street address.

  Therefore, when a predetermined amount of program among the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a, and Various processing can be performed. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And perform various processes. As described later, since the work RAM 233 is constituted by a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, among the control programs transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, the boot programs stored in the first program storage area 234d1 have the remaining boot programs It is programmed to be included, and is programmed to set the instruction pointer 231a with the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

  Thus, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

  In this remaining boot program, all remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. At the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to a second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 460) stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

  By executing this remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. The various control programs are used to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can perform various controls by reading the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated effects using the third symbol display device 81.

  Further, as described above, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are Even when stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third symbol display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image of one frame based on a later-described drawing list (see FIG. 423) transmitted from the MPU 231, and one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later The image drawn in the buffer is displayed, and the image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by outputting the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer to the third symbol display device 81. . The image controller 237 performs the drawing process of the image for one frame and the display process of the image for one frame, and the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) Parallel processing in

  The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds for which the image rendering process for one frame is completed. Every time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 462 (b)), and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. According to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt processing in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and instructs the image controller 237 to draw, so the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An instruction to draw an image can be received from the MPU 231 every processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on a transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

  The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, before drawing is performed, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on an instruction from the MPU 231.

  Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the reading speed is slower compared to other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to Then, as described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled to be resident without being overwritten.

  Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for the reading can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, the resident video RAM 235 allows image data of an image to be displayed frequently and image data of an image to be displayed immediately after display is determined by the main controller 110 or the display controller 114 Even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image.

  When the display control device 114 renders an image using image data nonresident in the resident video RAM 235, it is necessary for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the rendering is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer image data. As described later, although the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 is used for image drawing, there is a possibility that the image data may be deleted by overwriting, but at the time of image drawing, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed It is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured in the above, and the time required for the reading can be omitted, so that the drawing of the image is immediately performed and the drawn image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 it can.

  Further, by storing the image data also in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so it is not necessary to prepare a large capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, cost increase due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

  The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is a capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data that the MPU 231 sends to the image controller 237 according to the transfer instruction and the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 storing the image data Final address (storage source final address), information of transfer destination (information indicating to which of resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 to transfer), and start of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Address is included. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

  The image controller 237 reads data of one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 according to the various information of the transfer instruction and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. When the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the image data is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the video RAM 236 for ordinary use. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source head address indicated by the transfer instruction.

  Thereby, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 is stored temporarily in the buffer RAM 237a, and thereafter, the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can. Thus, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the ordinary video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, the video RAMs 235 and 236 can not be used for image rendering processing, and as a result, the image rendering or the required time is taken. The third symbol display device 81 can be prevented from not being displayed in time.

  In addition, since transfer from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the regular video RAM 236 perform the image drawing process and the third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine a period of time unused for display processing on the device 81, and simplification of the processing can be achieved.

  The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 continues to be held without being overwritten while the power is on, and the power-on main image area 235a, the back image area 235c, the character pattern area In addition to the error message image area 235f, at least a power-on fluctuation image area 235b and a third symbol area 235d are provided.

  The power-on main image area 235a is a power-on main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until all image data to be resident is stored in the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on variation image area 235b, the game is started by the player while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and entry of the first start opening 64a is detected. In this case, it is an area for storing image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, which displays the lottery result performed in the main control device 110 by the fluctuation effect.

  When the power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started, the MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a. A transfer instruction is sent to the controller 237 (see FIG. 460).

  Here, the power-on fluctuation image will be described. When the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235 a and the power-on fluctuation image area 235 b immediately after power on. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the transfer of the remaining image data is being performed, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to generate the power-on main image (see FIG. 419). The third symbol display device 81 is displayed.

  At this time, when receiving the display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is a variation start instruction command, the display control device 114 displays the main image at power on. On the display screen, the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "○" in the lower right position toward the screen and the power-on fluctuation image of the symbol "X" in the same position as the "○" symbol, fluctuation period The display is repeated alternately. Then, based on the variation pattern command from the main control unit 110 and the stop type command, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the audio lamp control unit 113 cause the lottery performed by the main control unit 110. Judge the result, if it is "big hit of the special symbol", the image showing it is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the fluctuation production, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the image showing it is stopped fluctuation Displayed for a fixed period later.

  The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a when the power is turned on for the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. At power on, it instructs to draw the main image. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person in charge of the hall may confirm the main image when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 While transferring data from character ROM 234 to resident video RAM 235, wait until transfer of image data to resident video RAM 235 is completed without fear that the operation has stopped. Can.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. It is possible to immediately confirm that this is the case, and further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  In addition, when the player starts playing while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, and the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64, the power change image area when the power is turned on. The power-on-time change image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on time change image resident on 235b, and the images showing “o” and “x” are alternately displayed on the third symbol display device 81 Thus, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237. As a result, it is possible to perform simple fluctuation presentation using the power-on fluctuation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Further, at the stage when the main image at power on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the image data corresponding to the fluctuation effect image at power on is already resident in the power on fluctuation image area 235b. When the ball is detected in the first entrance ball 64 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately it can.

  Returning to FIG. 418, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235 c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The third symbol area 235 d is an area for residence of the third symbol used in the fluctuation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-described nine types of main symbols assigned with the numbers of "1" to "9" which are the third symbols are resident. As a result, when the third symbol display device 81 performs the fluctuation effect, it is not necessary to read out the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one, so even if the NAND type flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, in the third symbol display device 81. It is possible to start fluctuating production quickly. Therefore, after entering the ball into the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b, the third symbol display device 81 changes in spite of the fact that the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37 It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the effect is not immediately started.

  The character symbol area 235 e is an area for storing image data corresponding to a character symbol used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In the pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e, whereby display control is performed. When changing the character pattern based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but in the character pattern area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. A predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237 by reading out image data previously resident. As a result, since it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, it is possible to change the character pattern immediately.

  The error message pictorial area 235 f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In this pachinko machine 10, for example, when the sound lamp control device 113 detects a vibration from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back of the game board 13, the sound lamp control device 113 generates a vibration error. The display control unit 114 is notified by an error command. Further, even if the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the occurrence of the error to the display control device 114 together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message corresponding to the received error.

  Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the viewpoint of the player's fraud prevention and the player's protection against the error. In the pachinko machine 10, since the image data corresponding to various error messages are resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, the display control device 114 generates an error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data previously resident in the graphic area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. Thus, there is no need to sequentially read out the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even when using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is received after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

  The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

  The image storage area 236 a is an area for storing image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub areas, and for each sub area, the type of image data stored in the sub area is predetermined.

  Among the image data not required to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 is required to render image data required for subsequent rendering of the image from the character ROM 234 to the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub area to be stored. Thereby, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

  The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a drawing list described later in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

  The first frame buffer 236 b and the second frame buffer 236 c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image of one frame drawn according to an instruction from the MPU 231 into one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby allowing one frame of the frame buffer While expanding the image and expanding the image in one of the frame buffers, the other frame buffer reads the image information of one frame that has been expanded first, and sends a drive signal to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 executes processing for displaying the image for one frame.

  As described above, by providing two of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c as frame buffers, the image controller 237 develops an image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer at the same time. The image for one frame expanded earlier is read out from the other frame buffer, and the image for one frame read out can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, with the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, the drawing processing of the image for one frame is Every 20 milliseconds for completion, either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c is alternately interchanged and designated by the MPU 231.

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various control programs. Configured The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, stored image data determination It has at least a flag 233i, a drawing target buffer flag 233j, a background mode storage area 233k, and an interruption data storage area 233m.

  The program storage area 233a is an area for storing a control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. When all control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 Can be used to easily carry out diversified and complicated renditions.

  The data table storage area 233b is a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as time elapses with respect to one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, It is an area where transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among transfer image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing are stored.

  These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after system reset is released. These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a low reading speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device By using 81, it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition.

  Here, the details of the various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, variation effects, round effects A display data table corresponding to the ending effect and the demonstration effect is prepared.

  The fluctuation effect is an effect started in the third symbol display device 81 when the display fluctuation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. When the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the fluctuation effect is also received. For example, when the change effect is started, if the stop type of the change effect is out, the stop symbol indicating the end is finally displayed stop, while the stop type of the change effect is big hit A, big hit B If it is either, the stop symbol which shows each jackpot is finally displayed stopped. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in the fluctuation effect, and can easily determine the game value to be awarded according to the jackpot type.

  In addition, since the first ball entry port 64 is a winning opening in which five balls are paid out as a winning ball when a ball enters the ball, the electric symbol becomes a big hit of a normal symbol, and the ball enters a second entry If it becomes easy to enter the ball mouth 640, the number of prize balls will increase. As a result, even if the pachinko machine 10 plays a game, it is in a state where it is difficult to reduce the number of balls or a state in which the number of balls is not reduced. You can get a sense of the period that you can get the jackpot of the special symbol without it. Therefore, since the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the will to participate in the game.

  In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next change effect accompanying the start winning is not started even if a predetermined time has passed since the one change effect was stopped. While the third symbol consisting of the main symbols not numbered from "0" to "9" is stopped and displayed, only the back image is changed. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can recognize that the game is not being performed in the pachinko machine 10.

  In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect is stored. In addition, as for the fluctuation display data table which is a display data table for fluctuation presentation, if there are 32 fluctuation demonstration patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one fluctuation presentation pattern, and a total of 32 tables are prepared.

  Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 421 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the variable display data table in the display data table. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address in which the time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed in the third symbol display device 81 is represented as one unit The contents (drawing contents) of an image for one frame are specified in detail.

  In the drawing content, for each sprite that is a display object constituting an image of one frame, the type of the sprite is specified, and according to the type of the sprite, display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semitransparent Drawing information such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite is defined.

  The type of sprite is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement factor is information for specifying the enlargement factor to the standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement factor. Note that if the enlargement ratio is larger than 100%, the sprite is displayed larger than the standard size, and if the enlargement ratio is less than 100%, the sprite is smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

  The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The semitransparent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the semitransparent value, the image is displayed so that the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The alpha blending information is information for specifying a known alpha blending coefficient used when performing superposition processing with another sprite. Color information is information for specifying the color tone of a sprite to be displayed. The filter specification information is information for specifying an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the specified sprite.

  In the variable display data table, as drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address, one back image, nine third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), light in the image Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as a boy image and a character, is defined for each address. Note that one or more pieces of information regarding effects and characters are defined in accordance with the contents to be displayed in the frame.

  Here, the display position of the back image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparency value, alpha blending information, color information and filter designation information Since the variation display data table is constant, only the back surface type, which is information for specifying the type of the back surface image, is defined.

  When it is specified that the MPU 231 displays any of the backgrounds corresponding to the background mode (undersea, beach, background of preparation period, background dedicated to time rendering) according to the back surface type, the player of the background is selected by the player. The back image corresponding to the designated stage is specified as the drawing target, and the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame is specified along with the passage of time.

  In the present embodiment, only the back type is defined as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table, but instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type And position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. The position information may be, for example, information indicating an elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame based on the elapsed time after the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information is displayed.

  Further, the position information may be information indicating an elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the back image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started based on the display database It specifies based on the position of a back surface image, and the elapsed time after drawing of the said image shown by position information (or display of the 3rd symbol display apparatus 81) is started.

  Further, the position information is information indicating an elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed according to the back surface type, and drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81 May indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information (for example, of the range corresponding to the initial position) of the position information together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time after the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started (Information indicating (1)) may be defined as the drawing content of the rear image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating an elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address at which a range of a back image to be displayed is stored.

  In the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2,...), Symbol type offset information is described as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. The offset information is information representing the difference between the numerals attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly identifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is identified by the fact that the display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before and the variation effect to be performed this time The reason is to change according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information until a predetermined time elapses from the start of the change, the offset information from the stop symbol of the change effect performed one before is described. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the audio lamp control device 113 Describe the information. Thereby, the fluctuation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

  In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the third symbol is the variation symbol in the variation production of one before or the stop symbol according to the stop type designated by the main control device 110. The third symbol to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information by managing it with the number given to the symbol and representing the offset information with the difference between the digits given to the respective third symbols.

  In addition, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for the predetermined time that is switched from the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one before to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect currently performed this time It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuatingly displayed at high speed, the third symbol is in a state in which it is not visible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

  The start address of the display data table "0000H" describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 36) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of the Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table Is described.

  The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control unit 110 and displays the selected The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by one, and the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is next processed based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) to be described later is created. By sending this drawing list to the image controller 237, an instruction to draw that image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order defined by the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so the image as defined by the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233 d instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231 .

  Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is activated every time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed as in a conventional pachinko machine, with the diversification of effect images Since the processing of the start and execution of a program that is complicated and enormously takes a great deal of load, the processing capability of the display control device 114 may be limited, which may limit the diversification of effect images that can be controlled. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81.

  Also, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer corresponding to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is displayed one frame at a time according to the set data table. The pachinko machine 10 can be created because an effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning. On the other hand, in game machines and the like other than pachinko machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents are changed on the spot based on the user's operation, and therefore the display contents can not be predicted. The display data table corresponding to the presentation mode can not be provided. Thus, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer according to the presentation mode to be displayed is set, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. The configuration to be performed can be realized for the first time based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning.

  Next, details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 422 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, among the image data of sprites used in effects specified in the display data table, Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

  If all the image data of sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Thereby, the capacity increase of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

  The transfer data table corresponds to an address defined in the display data table, and transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as “transfer target image data”) for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Are described (the addresses “0001H” and “0097H” in FIG. 422 correspond). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

  On the other hand, when there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to the address. Null data is defined (meaning the address “0002H” in FIG. 422).

  As transfer data information, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) Is included.

  As in the case of the display data table, “Start” information indicating the start of the data table is described in “0000H”, which is the start address of the transfer data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 422, In “02F0H”), “End” information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, transfer data information of transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table Is described.

  When MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from main controller 110, the display data table If there is a transfer data table corresponding thereto, the transfer data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, every time the pointer 233f is updated, the display contents specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f are specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 423) to be described later is created. Then, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list created. to add.

  For example, in the example of FIG. 422, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates transfer data information defined at the relevant address of the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the drawing list after the addition is sent to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233 f is “0002H”, since the null data is defined at the address “0002H” of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

  When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to

  Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, it is possible to draw a predetermined sprite based on the display data table.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10, display data is displayed in the display control device 114 according to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 Since the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with setting the table in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table is The data can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  The transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and transfers transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address in correspondence with the address defined in the display data table. Since data information is defined, before the image data of a predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, a wide variety of effect images are easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on time image (power-on time main image and power-on time fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 419 on the third symbol display device 81. After this simple image display flag 233c is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or the power-on change image area 235b of the resident video RAM, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on change image is transferred. , And in the main processing (see FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 460). Then, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display an image other than the power-on image when all resident object image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process. It is set to off (see S9705 in FIG. 471 (b)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 462 (b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simplified command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (figure) so that the power-on image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 462 (b), see S8309). On the other hand, when the simplified image display flag 233 c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110. Processing (see FIGS. 463 to 468) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 469 and 470) are performed.

  Also, the simplified image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S9601 of FIG. 471 (a)), and the simplified image display flag 233c is on. Executes resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 471 (b)) for transferring resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. If the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) for transferring image data necessary for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

  The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110 It is a buffer to The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. The selected display data table is selected and stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233 f one by one, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d, the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 423) in which the contents of the image drawing instruction for the image is described is generated. Thereby, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one and, based on the drawing content defined in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, an image for the image controller 237 every frame. A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 423) describing the contents of the drawing instruction is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  The transfer data table buffer 233 e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main controller 110. Is a buffer for storing The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It stores in the data table buffer 233e. When all the image data of sprites used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing null data that means that there is no transfer target image data in the transfer data table buffer 233 e.

  Then, the MPU 231 defines transfer data information of transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233 f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233 e while adding the pointer 233 f one by one. (That is, if the Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a drawing list (see FIG. 423) described later (see FIG. 423) describing the contents of an image drawing instruction to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

  Thereby, when transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from MPU 231, image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute processing to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, it is necessary for drawing the sprite Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The pointer 233 f is an address at which transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data should be acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. It is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233 f to 0 as the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds from which the image controller 237 finishes drawing the image for one frame (FIG. 462 (b In step S8303), pointer update processing (see S9305 in FIG. 470 (b)) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

  The MPU 231 specifies, from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f every time the pointer 233f is updated, and a drawing list to be described later. (See FIG. 423) is created, and transfer data information of image data of a predetermined sprite for which transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data Add information to the drawing list you created.

  As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233 d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114, a wide variety of effects can be displayed.

  Also, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table. The image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used in the drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  The drawing list area 233g is an image controller for drawing an image of one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list instructed to 237.

  Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 423 is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image of one frame, and as shown in FIG. 423, a back image to be used for an image of one frame, a third pattern (symbol 1, 1 ···, effects (effect 1, effect 2, ···), characters (character 1, character 2, ···, holding ball number design 1, holding ball number design 2, ···, error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite, such as a design. Further, transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is also described in the drawing list.

  The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (video RAM 235 for residence or video RAM 236 for normal use) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, alpha blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated by the image data of the sprite read out from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing is performed according to the rotation angle, and semitransparent according to the semitransparent value. Processing, combining processing with other sprites according to alpha blending information, tone correction processing according to color information, and filtering processing according to the method specified by that information according to filter specification information After that, an image obtained by performing various processes on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236 b or the second frame buffer 236 c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j.

  In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 displays the drawing contents defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the contents of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying the hold ball number pattern) Generate detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing an image of one frame based on an image, a warning image notifying of the occurrence of an error, etc., and the detailed information for each sprite Create a drawing list by sorting.

  Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of data of a sprite (display object) are the sprite type specified in the display data table or the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. It is generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 responds to the sprite type. Thus, it is possible to immediately specify the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, and to easily include the information in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  Further, the MPU 231 is specified in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information, color information and filter specification information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

  Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, then the third symbol (pattern 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...) The detailed information corresponding to the respective sprites is described in the order of the characters (character 1, character 2, ..., holding ball number pattern 1, holding ball number pattern 2, ..., error symbol).

  The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in accordance with the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprite in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  When the transfer data information is described in the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the MPU 231 transfers the transfer data information (a character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a where the transfer target image data is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the image data is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 generates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source head address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236.

  The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 sets time data indicating an effect time of an effect to be displayed based on the display data table in accordance with storing of one display data table in the display data table buffer 233 d. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment).

  Then, the V interrupt process is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed (FIG. 462 (b Each time the display setting process (see) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S9307 in FIG. 469). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is ended, and performs according to the end of the effect Perform various processing.

  The stored image data discrimination flag 233i stores image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all sprites for which the corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not there is.

  The stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" which indicates that the storage state for all the sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Then, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i is performed when a transfer instruction of transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) executed by the MPU 231. It will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction has been set is set to “on” which indicates that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236 a. Also, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite always becomes unstored by the image data of the one sprite being stored. So, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

  Further, when transferring image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i and transfers the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S9813 in FIG. 472). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, the transfer instruction of the image data is set (see S9814 in FIG. 472). The image controller 237 transfers the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of the image data is canceled. As a result, wasteful transfer of data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 can be reduced and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. it can.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233i is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as a “drawing target buffer”) for expanding an image drawn by the image controller 237 out of two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the drawing target buffer when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is zero, and the second frame buffer 236c is specified when it is one. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9902 in FIG. 473).

  Thus, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn on the basis of the drawing list onto the specified drawing object buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out previously developed drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing object buffer simultaneously and in parallel with the drawing processing, and transmits the image to the third symbol display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

  The drawing target buffer flag 233 j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update should be set to "1" by reversing the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, to "1" when the value is "0", and to "0" when the value is "1". Done by Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. In addition, transmission of the drawing list is performed by the V-interrupt performed by the MPU 231 based on the V-interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing and display processes for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 462 (b)) is executed (see S9902 of FIG. 473).

  That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed, and one frame The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. Ru.

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Thereby, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. Ru. Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately replacing and designating images, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image of one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing processing of drawing an image of one frame.

  The background mode storage area 233 k is a storage area for storing data corresponding to the currently set background mode. The interruption data storage area 233 m is a storage area for temporarily holding information indicating the display mode at the time of interruption when interruption of the display mode is instructed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described. FIG. 424 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the audio output device 226. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 424, the audio output device 226 is mounted with an MPU 301 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic device. The MPU 301 is a ROM 302 storing various control programs to be executed by the MPU 301 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data etc. when the control program stored in the ROM 302 is executed. A certain RAM 303 is built in.

  The MPU 301 of the voice output device 226 is electrically connected to the input / output port 305 and the voice synthesis unit 306. When a command specifying audio data is received from the audio lamp control device 113 to the audio output device 226, the command is input to the MPU 301 via the input / output port 305. The audio data specified by the audio lamp control device 113 is read from the ROM 302 and output to the channel corresponding to the audio type of the audio synthesizer 306.

  The speech synthesis unit 306 is configured of a known speech synthesis LSI that synthesizes speech data input to each channel and outputs the synthesized speech data to the amplifier unit 307. The synthetic speech data is amplified by the amplifier unit 307 and input to the speaker unit 308. Thereby, the speaker unit 308 can output various sounds designated by the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the configuration of the ROM 302 provided in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 424, the ROM 302 is provided with at least an audio file storage area 302a.

  The audio file storage area 302 a is a storage area in which an audio file (audio data) used to output music, sound effects and the like in various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 is stored. When execution of various effects is notified by the audio lamp control device 113, an audio file corresponding to the effect is read out from the audio file storage area 302a and output to the corresponding channel of the audio synthesis unit 306.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 303 provided in the audio output device 226 will be described. As shown in FIG. 424, the RAM 303 is provided with at least a continuous hit sound output flag 303a, a reproduction position storage area 303b, and a music output flag 303c.

  The continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is a flag indicating the type of continuous hitting sound (the first continuous hitting sound or the second continuous hitting sound) output most recently during execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect. If the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is 01H, it indicates that the continuous hitting sound output most recently is the first continuous hitting sound, and if it is "02H", it indicates the second continuous hitting sound. By configuring the type of continuous hitting sound output most recently by this continuous hitting sound output flag 303 a so that it can be grasped, it is possible to alternately reproduce different types of continuous hitting sound for different channels each time a continuous hitting operation is detected. it can. Therefore, since it is possible to diversify the sound mode during execution of the continuous hitting operation, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

  The reproduction position storage area 303b is a storage area for storing data indicating the reproduction position at the time of interruption when instructed to interrupt the reproduction of music. When the reproduction of the music is resumed, the reproduction can be accurately resumed from the interrupted reproduction position based on the data stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b.

  The music output in progress flag 303 c is a flag indicating whether or not the variable display effect or the like is executed and the music based on the audio file is being output. If the music output flag 303c is on, it means that the music is being output, and if it is off, it means that the music is not being output.

<About control processing of main controller in first control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 425 to 439. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly classified into a start-up process activated upon power-on, a main process executed after the start-up process, and a timer activated periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, timer interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing will be described first, and then start processing And the main processing will be described.

  FIG. 425 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, read processing of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, while reading the states of various switches connected to the main control device 110, the state of the switches is determined to store detection information (winning detection information).

  Next, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the ordinary initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), and the updated value of the normal initial value random number counter CINI2 is RAM 203 In the corresponding buffer area of

  Furthermore, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, the variation type counter CS1, and the normal hit random number counter C5 are updated (S103). Specifically, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the falling lottery counter C4 are respectively incremented by 1, and their counter values are maximum values (in this example, 999, respectively). When it reaches 99, 250, 999, 198, 239), clear each to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C5 and CS1 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  Next, special symbol variation processing for setting a variation pattern or the like of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 while executing processing for displaying in the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S104), and thereafter, A start winning process is executed in association with a winning (start winning) on the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 426 to 429.

  After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for performing display in the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process accompanying passing of the ball at the normal entrance is performed. Execute (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation process and the through gate passage process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 430 and 431. After the through gate passing process is executed, the launch control process is executed (S108), and then the other winning process is executed (S109). Furthermore, other processing to be executed periodically is executed (S110), and the timer interrupt processing is ended. The firing control process detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 by the touch sensor 51a, and firing the ball on condition that the strike stop switch 51b for stopping the firing is not operated. Is a process to determine the on / off of the The main controller 110 instructs the launch controller 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 426, special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 426 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device It is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81, and the like.

  In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the present is currently in the middle of a special symbol (S201). As a big hit of the special symbol, during the display showing the big hit of the special symbol (including during the big hit game of the special symbol) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and during the special symbol The middle of the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game is included. As a result of the determination, if it is during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: Yes), this processing ends.

  If it is not during the jackpot of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol) and the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e (holding of the fluctuation display in the special symbol The number of times N2) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204), and the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is not 0 ((S204) S 204: Yes), the value (N 2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e is decremented by 1 (S 205), and the holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e changed by the calculation is set (S206). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203 e from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value the second special symbol holding ball number counter 223 b of the RAM 223 Store in

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After the process of S207 is executed, the process proceeds to the process of S208.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S204 that the value of the second special symbol holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S204: No), the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d acquired in the process of S203 It is determined whether the value (N1) is 0 (S209). If it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is 1 A subtraction is performed (S210), and a ball holding number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value into the first special symbol holding ball number counter 223 a of the RAM 223 Store in

  After setting the holding ball number command in the process of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). In the process of S212, a process of shifting data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a in order toward the execution area is performed. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the special symbol variation start process for setting the variation start of the special symbol (first symbol) is executed (S208), and the present process is ended. In addition, the special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time of the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S213). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display performed in the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time If has not passed (S213: No), the display of the first symbol display device is updated (S214), and this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S213, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S213: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by a special symbol variation start process (S208) described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S208) is executed, values of various counters stored in an execution area provided in common to the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b Based on the special symbol lottery is performed. More specifically, according to the value of the special hit random number counter C1, whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is determined is determined, and when it is the jackpot of the special symbol, the jackpot according to the value of the special hit type counter C2. The type is determined.

  In this control example, when it comes to big hit A as a stop symbol of the first symbol (special symbol), the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and red if it becomes big hit B Turn on the LED and turn on the green LED if it becomes big hit C, turn on the blue LED and the red LED if it turns big on D, and turn the red LED if it turns big on E And turn on the green LED. In addition, it is set to light the blue LED and the green LED when it is out. In addition, although the display of each LED is cancelled | released, when the next fluctuation | variation display is started, it is good also as what makes it light only for several seconds after the stop of a fluctuation | variation.

  After the process of S215 is finished, when the variable display under execution is started in the first symbol display device 37, the lottery result of the special symbol performed in the special symbol variation start process (S208) (this lottery result ) Determines whether the special symbol is a jackpot (S216). If the lottery result this time is the big hit of the special symbol (S216: Yes), the big hit start flag 203i is set to ON (S217). Then, a stop command is set (S218), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S216 that the present lottery result is not a big hit (S216: No), the process of S217 is skipped, and after the process of S218 is performed, the present process is ended.

  Next, referring to FIG. 427, the special symbol variation start process (S208) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 427 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start process (S208). This special symbol variation start process (S208) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 1 Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b, the lottery of "big hit of the special symbol" or "out of the special symbol" is performed (decision determination) and the first symbol display device 37 and a process for determining the effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  In the special symbol change start process (S208), first, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type counter C3, the fall lottery counter C4, the change type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area Each value is acquired (S301). Next, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is currently in a definite state (high probability state of special symbol) (S302). The determination as to whether or not a definite change is being made is executed by determining whether the value of the positive change flag 203h is 1 or more. Here, the probability change flag 203h is set to a predetermined value based on the end of the jackpot game. On the other hand, the value is set to 0 based on the start of the jackpot game.

  In the process of S302, when it is determined that the probability change is in progress (S302: Yes), since the pachinko machine 10 is in a probability change (high probability state of special symbol), the fall lottery counter C4 acquired in the processing of S301. By comparing the value with the falling lottery table 202e (refer to FIG. 407 (c)), a lottery (falling lottery) is performed to determine whether or not the special symbol's probability change state falls to the special symbol's low probability state S303). Specifically, the value of the falling lottery counter C4 is compared one by one with the two random numbers stored in the falling lottery table 202e. As described above, two random numbers "0, 1" are set corresponding to the fall to the low probability state during the probability change (the high probability state of the special symbol), and the value of the fall lottery counter C4 When the random numbers corresponding to these falls coincide with each other, it is determined to fall to the low probability state. When the lottery result of the falling lottery is acquired in the process of S303, the process proceeds to the process of S304.

  In the process of S304, it is determined whether or not it is a lottery result corresponding to the special symbol falling to a low probability state (S304), and when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the falling (S304: Yes) The probability change flag 203h is set to OFF (S305), a state command indicating falling to the low probability state is set (S306), and the process proceeds to S307.

  On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the process of probability variation (high probability state of special symbol), ie, low probability state of special symbol (S302: No) The process is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S307.

  In the process of S307, whether the jackpot of the special symbol is based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 407 (a)) for low probability. The result of lottery is acquired (S307). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the four random number values stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. Four random numbers from "0 to 3" are set as the random numbers for the special symbol in the low probability state of the special symbol, and the value of the special random number counter C1 and the random number for these hits are specified. When it matches, it determines with it being a jackpot of a special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S309.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the lottery result does not correspond to the fall in the process of S304 (S304: No), the process proceeds to S308. In the process of S308, whether the jackpot of the special symbol is based on the value of the special hit random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the special symbol big hit random number table 202a (refer to FIG. 407 (a)) for high probability. The result of lottery is acquired (S308). Specifically, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is compared one by one with the eight random numbers stored in the special symbol big hit random number table 202a. As a random number value which becomes a big hit of the special symbol in the high probability state of the special symbol, eight “4 to 11” are set, and the value of the special random number counter C1 and the random number which becomes these hits are When it matches, it determines with it being a jackpot of a special symbol. When the lottery result of the special symbol is acquired, the process proceeds to S309.

  In the process of S309, whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the process of S307 or S308 is the jackpot of the special symbol (ie, the value of the special winning random number counter C1 acquired and the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a Determine if it matches the judgment value set (S309), and if it is judged that it is a big hit of the special symbol (S309: Yes), set the value of the hour change counter 203g and the probability change flag to the initial value It resets (S310), and based on the value of the special hitting type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of big hit is set (S311). More specifically, the value of the special hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the big hit type selection table 202d, and the jackpot type of the five types of special symbols (big hit A ~ Of the jackpot E), it is determined which jackpot type this time. As described above, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9" at the jackpot of the first special symbol, it is judged to be jackpot A (15R probability variation jackpot), "10 to 49" If it is within the range, it is determined that the jackpot B (5R probability variation jackpot), and if it is within the range of “50 to 99”, it is determined that the jackpot C (5R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408 (b)) . Also, if the value of the special hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 79" at the big hit of the second special symbol, it is determined to be the big hit D (15R probability variation big hit), and in the range of "80 to 99" If there is, it is determined that the jackpot E (15R normal jackpot) (see FIG. 408 (c)).

  In the process of S311, the display mode (lighting states of the LEDs 37A and 37B) of the first symbol display device 37 is set in accordance with the determined jackpot type (big hit A to E). Also, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to stop and display the stop symbol corresponding to the big hit type, the big hit type (big hit A to E) is set as the stop type. The display pattern of the stop symbol set in the process of S311 is stopped and displayed by the process of S215 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) described above.

  Next, with reference to the variation pattern selection table 202b (see FIG. 409 (a) and FIG. 410), the variation pattern at the time of the jackpot winning is selected. Here, in the present control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 409 (b) and FIG. 410, the game set in order to facilitate setting of a different variation pattern according to the set gaming state. The variation time of the special symbol is configured to be set with reference to a different data table according to the state. Specifically, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the normal table 222b1 (see FIG. 409 (a)) in the variation pattern selection table 222b, while the gaming state is In the case of the definite variation state or the short time state, the variation pattern is determined with reference to the probability variation / shortening table 222b2 (see FIG. 410) of the variation pattern selection table 202b (S312). After the process of S312 ends, the process proceeds to S318. When the fluctuation pattern is set in the process of S312, the fluctuation time (display time) of the fluctuation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops until it stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, based on the value of fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area of RAM 203 and the value of stop type selection counter C3, the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined .

  On the other hand, in the process of S309, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is out (S309: No), next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving counter 203g is a value larger than 0 or not. (S313). In the process of S313, when it is determined that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is larger than 0 (ie, 1 or more) (S313: Yes), the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is decremented by 1 (S314). A state command indicating the value of the time-to-midtime counter 203g after subtraction is set (S315), and the process proceeds to the process of S316. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S313 that the value of the hour / minute counter 203g is 0 (S313: No), the processes of S314 and S315 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S316.

  In the process of S316, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is removed and set to the display mode corresponding to the symbol, and the stop type selection stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol holding ball execution area Based on the values of the counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern (variation time) at the time of deviation is determined (S317). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S312, the fluctuation time of symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the values of stop type selection counter C3 and fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the special symbol holding ball execution area .

  In the process of S312 or the process of S318 executed after the process of S317 ends, the variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S312 or the process of S317 is set. (S318). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S312 or S317 is set (S319). When the process of S319 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (S104).

  Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 428 is a flowchart showing the start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), determines whether or not the first ball entrance 64 has a winning (start winning), and there is a starting winning. It is a process for executing prefetching of the lottery result in the special symbol from the holding process of the value indicated by the various random number counters and the value indicated by the held various random number counters.

  When the start winning process (S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the gaming ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d (number of holding N1 of the variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S402) . Then, it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S403).

  Then, in the process of S401, when it is determined that there is no winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: No), the process proceeds to S408, and even if there is a winning on the first entrance 64 ( S401: Yes), in the process of S403, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is not less than 4 (that is, the upper limit 4) (S403: No), the process of S407 Transition to On the other hand, in the process of S401, it is determined that there is a winning on the first entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and in the process of S403, the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is When it is determined that it is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is incremented by 1 (S404). Then, the first special symbol holding ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

  The ball holding ball number command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) described later executed by the MPU 201. , And sent to the audio lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the holding ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203 d from the holding ball number command, and extracts the extracted value to the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223 a of the RAM 223 Store.

  After setting the holding ball number command by the process of S405, the special hit random number counter C1, the special hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the falling lottery counter C4, the change type, updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above Each value of the counter CS1 is stored in the first area of the vacant holding areas (the first holding area to the fourth holding area) of the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area. After the process of S406, next, the prefetch process is executed (S407), and the process proceeds to S408. The detailed contents of this pre-reading process (S407) will be described later with reference to FIG. 429, but the values of various counters obtained for entering into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 Based on the above, the process of determining (prefetching) each lottery result to be executed at the start of the fluctuation in advance is executed.

  In addition, about each process of S408-S413, only by changing each process of S401-S407 mentioned above based on the ball entering to the 1st ball entrance 64 to the process based on ball entering to the 2nd starting opening 640 , S401 to S406 are substantially the same as the processing of S401 to S406, so the detailed description thereof will be omitted. After the process of S413 is performed, a prefetch process is performed (S414 (S407)), and then the process ends.

  In the present control example, although the values of the respective counters are acquired based on the ball entry, they may be acquired at the start of fluctuation. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the use of the storage area of the RAM 203 without requiring a storage area for storing the value of each counter until the start of fluctuation. Further, among the counters, a part of the counters (for example, only the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be acquired at the start of the fluctuation. By configuring in this way, a counter related to the hit / not determination at the time of entering the ball can be obtained, and a counter not involved in the hit / off determination can be obtained later, and the amount of data to be stored is maintained while maintaining the fairness of the game. It can be suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 429, prefetch processing (S407 (S414)) which is one of the start winning processing (S105) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 429 is a flowchart showing this pre-reading process (S407 (S414)).

  In the pre-reading process, first, it is determined whether there is a new winning combination (S501). In the process of S501, when the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d or the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 203e is added, it is determined that there is a new winning. . When it is determined in the process of S501 that there is no new winning combination (S501: No), the present process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is a new winning (S501: Yes), then it is determined whether the current winning is the special symbol 1 (first special symbol) (S502), and it is the special symbol 1 If it is determined (S502: Yes), lottery results for each counter value acquired this time are acquired in advance based on the special symbol big hit random number table 202a and the special figure 1 big hit table 202d1 (S503), and to the processing of S504. Transition. In the process of S504, as a lottery result acquired in advance, a winning information command including a jackpot determination result and a jackpot type is set (S504), and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, in the process of S502, when it is determined that the current winning is not the special symbol 1 (special figure 1), that is, the special symbol 2 (special figure 2) (S502: No), each counter acquired this time The lottery result for the value is acquired in advance based on the special symbol jackpot random number table 202a and the special figure 2 jackpot table 202d2 (S505), and the prize information judgment result and the winning information command including the jackpot type as the lottery result acquired in advance. Are set (S504), and the process ends.

  As described above, since the result of the determination of the qualification in advance before the start of the change is output as the winning information command to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the holding ball is established, the voice lamp control device 113 It is possible to recognize in advance the result of the pass / fail judgment and the hit type. Therefore, the warning lamp control device 113 causes the player to inform the player of the result of the judgment on the holding ball in advance based on the winning information command (for example, the color of the held symbol is changed to a color suggesting the result of the judgment on the ball) And an effect such as outputting a notification sound for notifying of the result of determination of the propriety of the holding ball. In addition, since one winning information command is output to the holding ball every time the holding ball is established, the winning lamp information command may also recognize the establishment of the holding ball in the voice lamp control device 113. it can. In the pre-reading process (see S407 of FIG. 429) in this control example, when it is determined that there is no new winning in the process of S501 (S501: No), this process is directly ended. Not limited to this, for example, it is configured to set a winning information command again for each counter value already stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b. Also good. By configuring in this way, even if it is determined that the advance effect is not to be executed in response to the winning information command received by the voice lamp control device 113, the advance effect is executed again for the same holding symbol. It can be determined whether or not to. Further, in the present control example, a lottery result based on each counter value acquired on the main control device 110 side is discriminated in advance, and information for indicating the prior discrimination result is set as a prize information command. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a prize information command, and the lottery result is determined in advance based on the prize information command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side. You may configure. In addition, in the case where information for indicating each acquired counter value is set as a prize information command, encryption is performed so that the currently acquired counter value is not specified to the player who acquired the prize information command illegally. It is good to constitute so that a prize information command may be outputted dividing into a plurality of timings.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 430, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 430 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and is associated with the second symbol variation display performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second ball entry port 640 This is a process for controlling the opening time of the motorized accessory 640a and the like.

  In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the current moment is in the middle of a normal symbol (second symbol) (S601). As the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol), the opening and closing control of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is made on the second symbol display device 83. Included. As a result of the determination, if it is in the middle of the hit of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: Yes), this processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is not in the middle of the normal symbol (the second symbol) (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode 83 is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (number M of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 (S605).

  Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, processing is performed to shift data stored in the reserved first area to the reserved fourth area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the areas within each area are: first holding area → execution area, second holding area → first holding area, third holding area → second holding area, second holding area → third holding area Shift data After shifting the data, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607), and the process shifts to the process of S608.

  In the process of S608, it is determined whether or not the time is in the middle (a high probability state of a normal symbol) (S608). In the process of S608, if the value of the time variation counter 203g is 1 or more or the value of the probability variation flag 203h is on, the time variation is checked. If the value of the time counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off, it is determined that the time is not short. In the process of S608, when it is determined that the time is short (normal high symbol state) (the value of the time counter 203g is 1 or more, or the probability change flag 203h is on) (S608: Yes) Since the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired in the process of S603 and the normal hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 407 (b)) for high probability Based on the drawing, a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609), and the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S609, specifically, the value of the normal random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the normal random number table 202c for high probability (see FIG. 407 (b)). As described above, if the value of the normal random number counter C5 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 205 to 239", it is normally It is determined that the symbol is dislocated (see FIG. 407 (b)).

  On the other hand, in the process of S608, when it is not determined that the time is short (normal high symbol state) (the value of the time counter 203g is 0 and the probability change flag 203h is off) (S608: No) Since the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state (normal state, latent state) of a normal symbol, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 acquired in the processing of S603, and the normal hit random number table 202c for low probability Based on (407 (b)), a lottery result of whether or not a normal symbol is hit is acquired (S610). Specifically, the value of the ordinary random number counter C5 is compared with the random value stored in the ordinary random number table 202c (see FIG. 407 (b)) for low probability. As described above, if the value of the normal random number counter C5 is in the range of "5, 6", it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 7 to 239" It is determined that the symbol is dislocated (see FIG. 407 (b)).

  In this control example, during the jackpot of the special symbol, the lottery of the normal symbol is configured to be less likely to hit. This is because during the jackpot of the special symbol (that is, in the special game state), the player hits the ball in an attempt to win the specified winning opening 65a, so the motorized role 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is opened. It is for the game ball which it was going to be made to be able to be made to be a specific winning a prize mouth 65a to be suppressed as much as possible from entering the second ball entrance 640.

  After the process of S609 or S610 is performed, the process proceeds to S611. In the process of S611, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol acquired by the process of S609 or S610 is the hit of the normal symbol (S611), and when it is determined that the hit is the normal symbol (S611: Yes), the hit display mode is set (S612), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S612, after the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “o” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in S611 that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S611: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S613), and the process proceeds to S614. In the process of S 613, after the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is finished, the symbol “×” is set to be lit and displayed as a stop symbol (second symbol).

  In the process of S614, it is determined whether or not the current time is short (in the high probability state of the normal symbol) (S614), if in the short time (high probability state of the normal symbol) (S614: Yes) Then, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S615), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, in the process of S614, if the time is not short (normal pattern high probability state), that is, if the normal pattern low probability state (S614: No), the fluctuation time of the variable display in the second symbol display device 83 is 30 It sets to second (S616), and ends this processing.

  On the other hand, in the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S602: Yes), whether or not the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S617). In addition, before the fluctuation display is started in the second symbol display device 83, the fluctuation time here is a time preset by the processing of S615 or the processing of S616.

  In the process of S617, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S617: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S617, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has elapsed (S617: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S618). In the process of S618, if the lottery of the normal symbol becomes a hit, and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "o" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 (lit It is set to be displayed. On the other hand, if the normal symbol lottery is out and the display mode is set by the processing of S613, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (displayed) on the second symbol display device 83. Are set to When the stop display is set by the process of S618, the second symbol display updating process (see S1009) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is executed next, the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is changed. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S613.

  Then, when the variable display under execution in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol (this lottery result) performed by the ordinary symbol variation processing is a hit of the ordinary symbol Is determined (S619). If the current lottery result is not a normal symbol (S619: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the current lottery result is a normal symbol hit (S619: Yes), then it is determined whether the current time is short or not (S620). If it is determined that the time is short (S620: Yes), the opening time and the number of times of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to 1 second × 2 times (S622), and the processing of S623 is performed. Transition.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the time is not short in the process of S620 (S620: No), the opening time and the number of times of the first motorized symbol 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are 0.2 seconds x 1 Is set (S 622), and the process proceeds to the processing of S 623.

  In the processing of S623 executed after the processing of S6212 or S622, the opening / closing control start of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is set (S623), and this processing is ended. When start of the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is set by the process of S623, the motored workpiece opening / closing process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 434) is performed next. The opening / closing control is started, and the opening / closing control of the motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S621 or S622 of FIG. 430 end.

  In this way, except in the jackpot of the special symbol, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, compared with the low probability state of the normal symbol, the time of the variable display becomes very short with "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and further Since the release period of the second ball entry port 640 becomes very long, such as “0.2 seconds × 1 time → 1 second × 2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640.

  In this control example, although the open time and open frequency per long time are the same operation in the normal state and the latent state, the present invention is not limited thereto, and different open time and open frequency may be set. It is also good. In addition, in this control example, the opening operation content of the first motorized winning object 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the start of fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery). Without limitation, for example, based on the gaming state set at the start of the fluctuation of the normal symbol (at the time of lottery), the success / failure determination of the normal symbol is executed, and the game at the time when the variation time of the normal symbol won is passed You may comprise so that the opening operation | movement content of the 1st electrically-driven combination thing 640a may be set based on a state. That is, in this control example, since the gaming state is variably set based on the drawing of the special symbol, the gaming state may be variably set during the fluctuation of the normal symbol. In such a case, for example, during the jackpot game or when the opening operation content of the first motorized product 640a is set based on the gaming state set at the start of variation of common symbol (at the time of lottery), for example There is a problem that the first motorized combination 640a is opened for a long time during the high probability state of the symbol. On the other hand, the first electric winning combination 640a is configured to be set to set the opening operation content of the first electric combination 640a based on the gaming state at the time when the variation time of the normal symbol that has won the win has passed. The opening operation of can be executed with contents suitable for the gaming state set.

  Next, the through gate passing process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 431 is a flowchart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 425), and it is judged whether or not the passing of the ball in the ordinary ball entry port (through gate) 67 has occurred, and the passing of the ball was made. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the normal random number counter C5.

  In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entry (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, passage of the ball at the normal entry (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the gaming ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number M of holdings of variable display in the normal symbol) is acquired (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S703).

  If the game ball has not passed through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or if the game ball has passed through the normal entry (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter If the value (M) of 203f is not less than 4 (S703: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the gaming ball passes through the normal entrance (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), and the value (M) of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), The value (M) of the symbol holding ball number counter 203f is incremented by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the normal hit random number counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is the first of the vacant hold areas (hold first area to hold fourth area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 After storing in the area (S 705), the process ends. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol holding ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the holding first area is made the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the pending second area is set, if the value is 2, the pending third area is set, and if the value is 3, the pending fourth area is set as the first area.

  Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 432 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout or the like, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control under execution and starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information (S801), and ends the NMI interrupt processing. Do.

  The above-described NMI interrupt processing is also executed by the payout and emission control device 111 in the same manner, and the power disconnection occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is shut off due to the occurrence of a blackout, the blackout signal SG1 is output from the blackout monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed Start the NMI interrupt processing.

  Next, referring to FIG. 433, a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 when the main control apparatus 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 433 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by the reset upon power-on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process associated with power on is executed (S901). For example, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control devices such as the audio lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, wait processing (wait time of 1 second in this control example) A process for setting is executed (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

  After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process proceeds to S913. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is further determined whether or not the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905). If not stored (S905: No) Since there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power-off did not end normally, the process proceeds to S913 also in this case.

  If the occurrence information of power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value stored at the time of power-off, the backed up data is destroyed, so the process also proceeds to S913. As described later in the process of S1016 in FIG. 434, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at a work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly stored.

  In the process of S913, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 to be the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S913). When receiving the payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and can start payout control of gaming balls. After transmission of the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing (S914, S915) of RAM 203.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 when initializing the RAM data at the time of power on, for example, at the time of opening of a hall. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the start-up process is executed, the RAM initialization process (S914, S915) is executed. In addition, the initialization process (S 914, S 915) of the RAM 203 is also executed similarly when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.). . In the initialization process of the RAM (S914, S915), the use area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S914), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S915). After execution of the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S911.

  On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), occurrence information of power supply interruption is stored (S905: Yes), and if the RAM determination value (checksum value etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes, a state command indicating the value of the hour / minute counter 203g and the state of the probability change flag 203h (that is, the gaming state at start-up) is transmitted (S908). Next, while holding the backed up data in the RAM 203, the power-off occurrence information is cleared (S909). Next, a payout recovery command at the time of power recovery for transmitting the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side back to the gaming state at the time of the driving power shutoff is transmitted (S910), and the process shifts to the processing of S911. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout recovery command, it holds the data stored in the RAM 213, and can start the payout control of the gaming balls.

  In the process of S 911, an effect permission command is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113, and the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are permitted to execute various effects. Then, the interruption is permitted (S912), and the process shifts to the main processing described later.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 434, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 after the above-described start-up process will be described. FIG. 434 is a flowchart showing this main processing. In this main processing, main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, each processing of S1001 to S1007 is executed as a periodic processing of 4 m second cycle, and the counter updating processing of S1010 and S1011 is executed with the remaining time.

  In the main processing, first, while the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425) is being executed, output data such as a command stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 The external output processing to be transmitted to the control device is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of winning detection information detected in the switch reading processing of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425) is determined, and if there is winning detection information, the payout control device 111 corresponds to the acquired ball number. Send an award ball command. Further, the ball number command for holding balls set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 426) and the start winning process (see FIG. 428) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the winning command set in the start winning process (see FIG. 428) or the pre-reading process (see FIG. 429) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81, the stop type command and the like are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113.

  Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the update value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

  When the variation type counter CS1 is updated, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, if the special symbol is in the jackpot state, execution of the jackpot effect or variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the specific winning opening 65a is opened according to the content (big hit type) of the jackpot game to be executed, and the maximum opening time of the specific winning opening 65a has elapsed, or the number of balls specified in the specific winning opening 65a Determine if you have won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning hole 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning hole 65a is repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. The details of the jackpot control process (S1004) will be described later with reference to FIGS. In the present control example, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but may be executed in the timer interrupt process. Moreover, in this control example, the jackpot game contents (classification of the opened entrance, opening time, opening number (number of rounds), opening period, interval period, ending period) corresponding to the jackpot type is a jackpot scenario The jackpot scenario stored in advance and corresponding to the jackpot type set at the time of jackpot winning is read, and a jackpot game is executed based on the read jackpot scenario.

  Next, a motorized item opening and closing process is performed to control the opening and closing of the motorized accessory 640a attached to the second ball entry port 640 (S1005). In the motorized product opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the motorized workpiece 640a is set in the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 430), the opening / closing control of the motorized workpiece 640a is started. The opening and closing control of the first motorized accessory 640a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S621 or the process of S622 in FIG. 430 in the normal symbol variation process end.

  Next, the first symbol display updating process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol Start at devices 37A, 37B. In this control example, until the fluctuation time has elapsed since the start of fluctuation, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the LED is on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is on, the blue LED is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

  The main processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main processing is executed, the player can not confirm the change of the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, each time the main processing is performed, a counter (not shown) is counted by one so that the player can check the change in the lighting color of the LED, and the LED reaches 100 when the counter reaches 100. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

  In addition, in the first symbol display update process, the first symbol display device when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S312 or the process of S317 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) ends. End the fluctuation display being executed in 37 and display the symbol set by the processing of S311 or S316 of the special symbol fluctuation start process (see Fig. 427), the stop symbol (the first symbol) in the first symbol display device Stop display (lighting display) on 37.

  Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update processing, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the processing of S615 or the processing of S616 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 430), the variation display is started in the second symbol display device 83 Do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, a variable display is performed in which the symbol of "o" as the second symbol and the symbol of "x" are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update processing, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the processing of S 618 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 430), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83 In the display mode set by the processing of S612 or the processing of S613 of normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 430), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 Turn on).

  After that, it is judged whether or not the occurrence information of the power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008), and if the occurrence information of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: No), the power failure signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 SG1 is not output and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (S1009) If the predetermined time has already passed (S1009: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described S1001 and subsequent steps are repeatedly executed.

  On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main processing of this time (S1009: No), the first main processing is performed until the predetermined time is reached. 1) The update of the initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the variation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S1010, S1011).

  First, update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is executed (S1010). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by one, and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (999, 239 in this control example) . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1011).

  Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1007 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly executing the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using such remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (ie, The initial value of the special hit random number counter C1 and the initial value of the normal hit random number counter C5 can be updated at random, and the change type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

  Further, in the process of S1008, if the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the RAM 203 (S1008: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of the power failure or the power-off, and the power failure monitoring circuit 252 outputs the power failure signal SG1. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 432 has been executed, so the processing at the time of the power-off after S1012 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt processing is inhibited (S1012), and a power-off command indicating that the power is shut off is sent to another control device (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the audio lamp control device 113). And transmit (S1013). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is stored (S1014), the access to the RAM 203 is inhibited (S1015), and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely shut off and the processing can not be performed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in a stack area and a work area backed up in the RAM 203.

  Note that the processing of S1008 is at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1007, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1010 and S1011 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of main controller 110, since the occurrence information of the power-off is confirmed at the timing when each setting is finished, when returning from the power-off state, the process is performed after the end of the start-up process. It is possible to start from the process of S1001. That is, as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process, the process can be started from the process of S1001. Therefore, in the process at the time of power shutoff, the stack pointer has a predetermined value (in the initialization process) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By being set to the initial value, it is possible to start from the process of S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or runaway.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 435, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 435 is a flowchart showing the jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 434), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of the special symbol, the execution of various effects according to the jackpot, the specific winning opening ( Large opening port) A process for opening or closing the opening 65a.

  In the jackpot control process (S1004), it is determined first whether the jackpot start flag 203i is on (S1101). If it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203i is on (S1101: Yes), the jackpot opening command is set (S1102), the jackpot start flag 203i is turned off, and the jackpot flag 203j is turned on (S1103). , End this process. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1101 that the big hit start flag 203i is off (S1101: No), then whether or not the current is a big hit of the special symbol (ie, the big hit flag 203j is on) Or not) is judged (S1104). If it is determined in the process of S1104 that the present is not a big hit (the big hit flag 203j is off) (S1104: No), the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1104 that the present is a big hit (the big hit flag 203j is on) (S1104: Yes), then it is determined whether it is the start timing of a new round ( S1105).

  If it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is the start timing of a new round (S1105: Yes), the jackpot operation setting process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds is executed (S1106 ), End this processing. Details of the jackpot operation setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1105: No), it is next determined whether it is the start timing of the ending period of the currently executed round (S1107) . Here, in the present control example, when the final round of the jackpot ends, it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period. If it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending period (S1107: Yes), an ending command is set (S1108), and this processing is ended. The ending command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201, voice lamp control It is sent to the device 113. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, it transmits the ending command for display to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, an ending effect indicating the end of the jackpot is started in the third symbol display device 81.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1107 that it is not the start timing of the ending period currently being executed (S1107: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the big hit (S1109). Here, the end timing of the jackpot indicates the case where the execution period of the ending effect has passed. If it is determined in the process of S1109 that the end timing of the jackpot is determined (S1109: Yes), a jackpot end process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end is executed (S1110), and the present process is ended. The details of the jackpot end processing will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is not the timing of the big hit end (S1109: No), the winning process for performing control according to the winning on the specific winning opening 65a is executed (S1111). An abnormality process is performed to determine whether the ball entering the winning opening 65a has been discharged normally (S1112), and then the process ends. Details of the winning process and the abnormality process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 438 and 439.

  Next, the details of the jackpot operation setting process (S1106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 436 is a flowchart showing this jackpot operation setting process (S1106). The jackpot operation setting process (S1106) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a according to the number of rounds.

  When the jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436) is started, first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of five rounds (that is, the round in which the V combination operates) (S1201). When it is determined in the process of S1201 that it is the start timing of the 5th round (S1201: Yes), the start of the operation scenario of V combination is set (S1202), and the release pattern of the specific winning opening 65a corresponding to the jackpot type Is set (S1203), and the process proceeds to S1205.

  As described above, in the first control example, a common operation scenario is set for the V combination regardless of the jackpot type (irrespectively). Specifically, an operation scenario in which the game balls can be distributed to the V area from 5 seconds to 10 seconds after 5 rounds start is set. On the other hand, as described above, the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a is set to a different opening pattern depending on whether it is a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. Specifically, in the case of a probability variation big hit, the opening and closing pattern (5th round) in which the game ball can reach the V character while the V character changes the arrangement to distribute the game ball to the V region While the specified winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed in the opening and closing pattern in which the specified winning opening 65a is opened for 5 seconds after 5 seconds to the start of 9.5 seconds, In the case of the jackpot, the opening and closing pattern in which the V character can not reach the opening and closing pattern while changing the arrangement to distribute the game ball to the V area (4.5 seconds have elapsed from the start of the fifth round The special winning opening (large opening) 65a is opened and closed with the opening and closing pattern in which the specific winning opening 65a is opened for 4.5 seconds until time.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1201 that the start timing of the fifth round is not reached (S1201: No), the specific winning a prize opening 65a is set open (S1204), and the process proceeds to S1205. In the process of S1205 executed after the process of S1203 or S1204, a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1205), and the process ends.

  The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and an audio lamp is displayed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the sound lamp control device 113 sets a display round number command for displaying the newly started round number on the third symbol display device 81. Thereby, the display content of the third symbol display device 81 can be updated according to the number of rounds of the jackpot.

  By executing this jackpot operation setting process (see FIG. 436), it is possible to open the specific winning opening 65a in each round of jackpot and set it in a state where it is possible to enter the V area in the fifth round. Can. As a result, in jackpots A, B and D, the game ball almost certainly enters the V area and passes the probability change switch only by the player hitting the right in the fifth round, so after the jackpot ends It can be made to shift to a definite variation state (a special symbol variation state and a normal symbol short time state). Further, in the case of the jackpots C and E, since it becomes difficult to make the game ball enter the V area even if you hit the right, it is possible to set the time-saving state after the jackpot end. As a result, the lottery of the first special symbol in which the jackpot C is determined at a relatively high rate (50% rate) in the case of a jackpot is regarded as a disadvantage for the player and is relatively large. The lottery of the second special symbol in which the jackpot E is determined at a low rate (rate of 20%) can be made a lottery advantageous to the player.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process (S1110) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 437. FIG. 437 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (S1110). The jackpot end process (S1110) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for setting the gaming state after the jackpot end.

  In the jackpot end process (S1110), first, it is determined whether the probability change setting flag 203k is on (S1301). If it is determined in the process of S1301 that the probability variation setting flag 203k is on (S1301: Yes), it means that the gaming ball has passed the probability variation switch during the big hit, so the probability variation flag 203h is set to on Then, the state after the big hit is set to a definite change state (S1302), and the process proceeds to the process of S1303. On the other hand, if the probability variation setting flag 203k is off in the processing of S1301 (S1301: No), it means that the gaming ball has not passed the probability variation switch during the jackpot, so the processing of S1302 is skipped Then, after the big hit end is set to the low probability state of the special symbol, it moves to the processing of S1303.

  In the process of S1303, 100 is set to the value of the hour and hour counter 203g (S1303), and based on the state of the probability variation flag 203h and the hour and hour counter 203g, a state command (jackpot end command for indicating the gaming state after the big hit ends ) Is set (S1304). The status command (big hit end command) set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is included in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 434) executed by the MPU 201. Are transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113. When receiving the state command, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the game state storage area 223 f in accordance with the gaming state notified by the state command. Thereby, in the sound lamp control device 113, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 can be accurately grasped. Next, the jackpot flag 203j and the probability variation setting flag 203k are both set to off (S1305), and the process ends.

  By executing this jackpot end process (see FIG. 437), it is possible to accurately set the gaming state after the jackpot end depending on whether or not the gaming ball has passed the probability change switch during jackpot.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 438, details of the winning process (S1111) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 438 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1111). The winning process (S1111) is executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, is a process for performing control in accordance with the winning on the specific winning opening 65a.

  In this winning process (S1111), first, it is determined whether the current period is a round effective period (S1401). Here, the round effective period is a period in which a round game is set, that is, a period from the open state of the specific winning opening 65a to the end of the interval period. In the process of S1401, if it is not a round effective period (S1401: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1401 that the present is a round effective period (S1401: Yes), then it is determined whether or not a winning on the specified winning opening 65a is detected (S1402). If a winning is detected (S1402: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the winning number counter 203p and updated (S1403), and a winning command indicating that a winning to the specific winning opening 65a has been detected is set (S1404), the process proceeds to S1405. On the other hand, in the process of S1402, if a winning on the specific winning opening 65a is not detected (S1402: No), the processes of S1403 and S1404 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1405.

  In the process of S1405, it is determined whether the value of the winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405), and if the value of the winning number counter 203p is 10 or more (S1405: Yes), the process proceeds to S1407. On the other hand, in the process of S1405, when it is determined that the value of the winning number counter is 9 or less (S1405: No), it is determined whether the round time has elapsed (S1406), and the round time has elapsed ((S1406) The processing shifts to the processing of S1406: Yes) and S1407. In the process of S1406, when 30 seconds have elapsed from the start of the round, it is determined that the round time has elapsed.

  In the process of S1407, the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set (S1407), and a closing command indicating that the closing of the specific winning opening 65a is set is set (S1408). Next, it is determined whether the closing of the specified winning combination opening 65a this time is closing based on the end of one round (S1409) and when it is determined that closing is based on the end of five rounds (S1409: Yes), V bonus By setting the flow path solenoid for changing V to OFF, the state of the V combination is set to an arrangement where the gaming ball can be distributed to the non-V area (S1410), and the process proceeds to S1411. On the other hand, in the process of S1409, when it is determined that the closing of the specific winning hole 65a this time is closing due to the completion of a round other than 5 rounds (S1409: No), the flow path solenoid is set to ON. Since there is no possibility, the process of S1410 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1411.

  In the process of S1411, the remaining ball timer flag 203q, the probability variation effective flag 203s, and the round end flag are set to ON (S1411), and the process proceeds to S1412. When it is determined that the value of the winning number counter 203p is 9 or less in the process of S1405 (S1405: No), and it is determined that the round time has not elapsed in the process of S1406 (S1406: No), The processing of S1407 to S1411 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S1412.

  In the process of S1412, it is determined whether the round end flag is on (S1412), and if the round end flag is off (S1412: No), the process proceeds to S1413. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1412 that the round end flag is on (S1412: Yes), it is then determined whether the probability variation effective flag 203s is on (S1416). In the process of S1416, if the probability variation effective flag 203s is off (S1416: No), this process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation effective flag 203s is on (S1416: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation effective timer 203t (S1417), and then it is determined whether the value of the probability variation effective timer 203t is the upper limit ( S1418). Then, if the value of the probability variation effective timer 203t is not the upper limit value (S1418: No), the processing proceeds to step S1413 to monitor the probability variation switch and execute the processing of updating the probability variation setting flag 203k. Thus, if the probability variation effective timer 203t is not the upper limit value, it is determined whether the ball has passed the probability variation switch, so the probability variation state can be set in consideration of the time of the ball. In addition, since there is an upper limit to the time determined to be effective, it is possible to suppress the probability variation state being given by passing the gaming ball to the probability variation switch illegally.

  On the other hand, if the value of the definite variation effective timer 203t is the upper limit (S1418: Yes), the definite variation effective flag 203s and the round end flag are set to OFF (S1419), and the value of the definite variation effective timer 203t is reset (S1420) , End this process.

  Further, in the process of S1413, it is determined whether or not the gaming ball has passed the probability change switch (S1413), and if the gaming ball has not passed the probability change switch (S1413: No), this processing is ended. On the other hand, if the gaming ball has passed the probability variation switch (S1413: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the probability variation passing counter 203m (S1414), and the probability variation setting flag 203k is set to ON (S1415). Finish.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 439, the abnormality processing (S1112) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 will be described. FIG. 439 is a flowchart showing this abnormality processing (S1112). This abnormality process (S1112) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 435), and as described above, determines whether or not the ball entering the specified winning hole 65a has been discharged normally. It is a process for

  In the abnormality processing (S1112), first, it is determined whether the present is a round effective period (S1501), and if it is not a round effective period (S1501: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the round effective period (S1501: Yes), then whether the gaming ball has passed the ball outlet switch (whether the gaming ball discharged from the variable winning device 65 has been detected) or not It discriminates (S1502).

  When it is determined in the process of S1502 that the gaming ball has passed the ball outlet switch (the gaming ball has been ejected from the variable winning device 65) (S1502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the ejection number counter 203u. (S1503), the process proceeds to S1504. On the other hand, if the gaming ball has not passed the ball outlet switch in the process of S1502 (S1502: No), the process of S1503 is skipped and the process proceeds to S1504.

  In the process of S1504, it is determined whether the remaining ball timer flag 203q is on (S1504). If it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203 q is off (S 1504: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if the remaining ball timer flag 203 q is on (S 1504: Yes), since the ball is being brushed, the value of the remaining ball timer 203 r is updated by adding 1 (S 1505). Next, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506), and if the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is not the upper limit value (S1506: No), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), next, the number of discharged items (total value of the value of the probability variation passage counter 203m and the value of the discharged number counter 203u) It is determined whether or not the number (the value of the winning number counter 203p) matches (S1507).

  If it is determined in the process of S1507 that the number of discharged items and the number of winning are not identical (S1507: No), an error command is set (S1508), and the process proceeds to S1509. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, a character indicating a winning number mismatch error) is displayed, and an error signal is output to the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the fraudulent action of illegally causing the game ball to enter the V area and passing the probability change switch while the V area is closed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1507 that the discharged number and the winning number match (S1507: Yes), the process of S1508 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S1509. In the process of S1509, the remaining ball timer flag 203q is set to OFF (S1509), and then the value of the remaining ball timer 203r is reset (S1510). Thereafter, the values of the winning number counter 203p, the discharged number counter 203u, and the probability variation passing counter 203m are reset (S1511), and the present process is ended.

  By executing this abnormal processing (see FIG. 439), a ball clogged inside the variable winning device 65, etc., the occurrence of the problem that the ball entering the specified winning opening 65a will not be discharged normally. It can be detected and reported early.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in First Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 440 to 458, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 can be roughly classified into a start-up process which is started upon turning on the power and a main process which is executed after the start-up process.

  First, with reference to FIG. 440, the start-up process performed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 440 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

  When the start-up process is performed, first, an initial setting process is performed according to the power-on (S3001). Specifically, a predetermined value determined in advance is set in the stack pointer. Thereafter, depending on whether the power-off process flag is on or not, the power-on process of S3119 (see FIG. 441) is performed due to a momentary voltage drop (a momentary power failure, so-called “temporary power failure”) in the current startup process. It is judged whether or not it is started during the execution of (S3002). As described later with reference to FIG. 441, when the power-off command is received from the main control device 110 (see S3116 in FIG. 441), the audio lamp control device 113 executes the power-off process of S3119. The power-off processing flag is turned on before the power-off processing is performed, and the power-off processing flag is turned off after the power-off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power-off process of S3119 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off process flag.

  If the power-off process flag is off (S3002: No), the current start-up process is started after the power is completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power-off of S3119 occurs. It was started after completing execution of the process, or was started after reset (only without receiving a power-off command from the main control unit 110) by resetting only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control unit 113 due to noise or the like. is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003).

  Confirmation of data corruption in the RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, in the specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword "55AAh" is written by the process of S3006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55 AAh", there is no data destruction of the RAM 223, and conversely, if "55 AAh", the data destruction of the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If data corruption in the RAM 223 is confirmed (S3003: Yes), the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data corruption of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S3008.

  In addition, since the keyword of "55AAh" is not memorize | stored in the specific area | region of RAM223 when the start-up process this time is started after the power supply was cut off completely (The memory of RAM223 is lost by power-off. From the above, it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3004. On the other hand, the current start-up process is started after completing the execution of the power-off process of S3119 after a momentary power failure has occurred, or reset only to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. When it is started, the keyword “55AAh” is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3003: No), and the process proceeds to S3008.

  If the power-off process flag is on (S3002: Yes), the current start-up process is performed after the instantaneous power failure has occurred, and during the execution of the power-off process of S3119, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 is reset and started. In such a case, since the power-off process is being executed, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct. Therefore, since control can not be continued in such a case, the process proceeds to S3004 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

  In the process of S3004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S3004). As a check method, first, “0FFh” is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether it is “0FFh”, and if “0FFh”, it is determined that it is normal. The writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of “55h”, “0AAh”, and “00h” next to “0FFh”. By the read / write check of the RAM 223, all storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to zero.

  If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223, and RAM destruction check data is set (S3006). By checking the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether there is data corruption in the RAM 223 or not. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any of the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S3007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is shut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34. Note that the voice output device 226 may output a voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may

  In the process of S3008, it is determined whether the power-off flag is on (S3008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S3119 is performed (see S3118 in FIG. 441). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S3119 is performed, the process of S3008 when the power-off flag is turned on is that the current start-up process is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S3119 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S3009), and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S3010). The permission is set (S3011). The work area of the RAM 223 is an area other than the area for storing a command or the like received from the main control device 110. When the process of S3011 ends, next, it is determined whether a status command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3012). This status command is a command set in the process of S908 of the start-up process (see FIG. 433) executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. If it is determined in the process of S3012 that a status command has been received (S3012: Yes), information indicating the received status command is set in the status setting area (S3013), and the main process (see FIG. 441) is performed. And transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3012 that the status command has not been received (S3012: No), the process of S3013 is skipped and the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 441).

  On the other hand, the reason for reaching the processing of S3008 in the state where the power-off flag is turned off is that, for example, the current startup processing is started after the power is completely shut off, and the processing of S3004 through S3006 is performed. It is a case where the processing is reached or the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110) due to noise or the like. Therefore, in such a case (S3008: No), S3009 which is a clear process of the work area of the RAM 223 is skipped, the process proceeds to S3010, and the processes of S3010 to S3013 described above are executed to execute the main process (FIG. (See 441).

  As described above, the main control unit 110 outputs a command capable of determining whether or not the symbol is being hit for a long time when the power is turned on, and the voice lamp control unit 113 also determines the state Can.

  The reason for skipping the clearing process of S3009 is that, when the process of S3008 is performed via the processes of S3004 to S3006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S3004, If the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset only due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data of the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, and the audio lamp control device 113 is stored. It is because control of can be continued.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 441, the main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 after the start-up processing of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 441 is a flowchart showing this main processing. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed since the main process was started or the present S3101 process is executed (S3101), and 1 ms or more has elapsed If not (S3101: No), the processing proceeds to S3114 without performing the processing of S3102 to S3113. In the process of S3101, the process of determining whether 1 ms has elapsed is mainly the process relating to display (rendering) in S3102 to S3113, and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S3114, the variable display setting process of S3115, and the process of updating various counter values (not shown) in a short cycle. That is, by executing the process of S3114 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the process of S3115 in a short cycle, it is received by the command determination process. Based on the command, it is possible to set the setting related to the variable effect without delay.

  If one millisecond or more has elapsed in the process of S3101 (S3101: Yes), first, various commands to the display control apparatus 114 set by the processes of S3103 to S3115 are transmitted to the display control apparatus 114 (S3102) ). Next, the setting of the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the output of each lamp are set so as to be the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S3108 described later (S3103), and then the power on notification process is executed (S3104). The power on notification process is to notify that the power is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is made by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. It will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 so as to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to step S3105 without performing notification by the power on notification process.

  In the process of S3105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and thereafter, the number-of-helds display update process is executed (S3106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player for a predetermined time, setting for switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen is performed, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is sent to the device 114. In the number-of-holds display update processing, processing for lighting the holding lamp (not shown) according to the values of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b and the value of the normal holding ball number counter 223c Is done.

  Thereafter, the frame button input monitoring and effect process is executed (S3107). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, the input whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed in order to enhance the effect is monitored, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. It is a process set to perform an effect.

  When the frame button input monitoring / rendering process ends, the lamp editing process is executed (S3108), and then the sound editing / output process is executed (S3109). In the lamp editing process, lighting patterns and the like of the electric decoration portions 29 to 33 are set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the audio output device 226 is set to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the audio output device 226 according to the setting.

  After the process of S3109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S3110), and the process shifts to the process of S3111. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set. The lamp editing process of S3108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S3109 is also executed in time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

  After the process of S3110 is finished, an effect updating process for updating the effect mode of various effects executed during the execution of the variable display effect is then executed (S3111). The effect update process (S3111) will be described later with reference to FIGS. After the effect update process (S3111) is executed, the operation situation (presence or absence of depression) of the PUSH button 10317 is then monitored, and when depression is detected, control according to the situation of depression is detected. The depression detection process is executed (S3112). The details of the pressing detection process (S3112) will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the process of S3112 ends, the counter updating process is executed (S3113). In this counter update process (S3113), a process for updating the value of the counter (for example, the effect lottery counter 223y for drawing the effect mode) necessary for executing various effects is executed.

  When the process of S3113 ends, next, a command determination process for executing control in accordance with various commands received from the main control device 110 is executed (S3114). The details (S3114) of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. After executing the command determination process (S3114), the variable display setting process is performed (S3115). In the fluctuation display setting process, in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to execute fluctuation presentation, a fluctuation pattern command for display is generated and set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of the variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

  When the process of S3115 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 233 (S3116). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are turned on (S3118), and the power-off process is executed (S3119). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S3120), and then the process is looped endlessly. In the power-off process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is inhibited, and each output port is turned off, and the outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the storage of the occurrence information of the power-off is also erased.

  On the other hand, if the occurrence information of the power-off is not stored in the process of S3116 (S3116: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117) and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S3117: No), the process returns to S3101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3117: Yes), the processing is endlessly looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, since the main processing is not executed if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinite, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, and can call a clerk or the like in the hall to ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, notification of the destruction of the RAM may be performed by the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 442, the effect update process (S3111) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 442 is a flowchart showing this effect update process (S3111). This effect update process (S3111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, various effects executed during the execution of the variable display effect It is a process for updating the presentation mode of.

  In the effect updating process (S3111), first, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s is a value larger than 0 (S3201), and when it is determined that the value is 0 (S3201: No), Since this means that the variable display is not being performed, and that there is no possibility that the effect to be updated is being performed, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s is a value larger than 0 (that is, is a value of 1 or more) (S3201: Yes), the value of the fluctuation time timer is subtracted (S3202), and then A pressing and stopping effect process for updating the effect mode during execution of the pressing and stopping effect (see FIG. 395) is executed (S3203). The details of the pressing and stopping effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S3203 is finished, next, an interruption continuous hitting presentation process for updating the effect mode during execution of the interruption continuous hitting presentation (see FIG. 399) is executed (S3204). In addition, the details of the continuous hit generation process (S3204) will be described later with reference to FIG. Further, when the process of S3204 is finished, next, a batch change presentation process for updating the effect mode during execution of the pending batch change presentation (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is executed (S3205). The details of the collective change effect process (S3205) will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S3205 ends, charge consumption processing for setting the consumption of the gas gauge charged in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 397) is executed (S3206), and this processing is ended. The details of the charge consumption process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 443, the pressing and stopping effect process (S3203) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 443 is a flowchart showing this pressing and stopping effect process (S3203). The depression stop effect process (S3203) is performed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, the depression stop effect (see FIG. 395) is performed. It is the process for updating the presentation mode in.

  In this pressing and stopping effect process (see FIG. 443), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pressing and stopping effect (see FIG. 395) (S3301). In the process of S3301, when it is determined that it is the start timing of depression stop production (refer to FIG. 395) (S3301: Yes), the start of depression stop production is set (S3302) A timer value corresponding to the second is set (S3303). Next, the value of the stop operation number counter 223 u is set to 3 (S 3304), and the present process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3301 that it is not the start timing of the depression stop production (S3301: No), it is then determined whether the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is larger than 0 (S3305). If it is determined in the process of S3305 that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is larger than 0 (S3305: Yes), the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is updated (S3306), and then the updated operation valid period timer It is determined whether the value of 223t is 0 (S3307). When it is determined in the process of S3307 that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t after the update is not 0 (S3307: No), the process is ended as it is. If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t after updating is 0 (S3307: Yes), it is next determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3308). If it is determined in the process of S3308 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3308: Yes), the stop display of the chance charge symbol is set (S3309), and the present process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3308 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3308: No), only the pressing stop effect (see FIG. 395) is set for the current variable display effect. Since it means that the operation effective period (3 seconds) has elapsed without performing the stop operation by the player in the state (the execution of the chance charge effect was not set), the stop display of the out-of-design is set. Then (S3310), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3305 that the value of the operation effective period timer 223t is 0 (S3305: No), it is then determined whether the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has passed (S3311) When it is determined that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has not elapsed (S3311: No), the present processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3311 that the stop display period of the chance charge symbol has elapsed (S3311: Yes), the start of the chance charge effect corresponding to the value of the charge number counter 223m is set (S3312). The charge standby flag 223k is set to off (S3313). Next, a value corresponding to the current number of balls held is set as the value of the charge state number counter 223n (S3314), and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 444, the interruption continuous hitting presentation process (S3204) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 444 is a flow chart showing this interruption continuous hitting effect process (S3204). This interruption continuous hitting production process (S3204) is executed in the effect renewal process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and effects during execution of the interruption continuous hitting presentation (see FIG. 399) It is a process for updating an aspect.

  When this interruption successive hitting production process (see FIG. 444) is executed, first, it is judged whether or not it is a start timing of the interruption consecutive hitting presentation (S3401). In the process of S3401, if it is determined that it is the start timing of the interruption continuous hitting production (S3401: Yes), then, from the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s, whether or not the current fluctuation time is the time indicating the before reach Is determined (S3402). If it is determined in the process of S3402 that it is a fluctuation time indicating reach before (S3402: Yes), "01H" is set to the pause flag after setting pause for both display and sound The process proceeds to S3404) and S3405. Specifically, in the process of S3404, the display suspension command indicating the start of the display mode stop (suspension) is set to be output to the display control device 114, and the BGM output stop (suspension) start Are set to output to the audio output device 226.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3402 that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s is not the timer value indicating before reaching (S3402: No), the temporary stop (suspension) of only the display mode is set and the temporary stop flag Is set to “02H” (S3403), and the process shifts to the processing of S3405. In the process of S3405 which is executed after the process of S3403 or S3404 is finished, the start of the interruption continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 399) is set (S3405), and this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3401 that it is not the start timing of the interruption continuous hitting production (S3401: No), it is next determined whether it is the start timing of the continuous hitting period (S3406). In the process of S3406, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the continuous hitting period (S3406: Yes), a timer value corresponding to 5 seconds is set to the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v (S3407), and this processing is ended. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3406 that it is not the start timing of the continuous hitting period (S3406: No), it is next determined whether the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is larger than 0 (S3408). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is larger than 0 (S3408: Yes), the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is decremented by 1 (S3409), and then the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v after subtraction Whether or not 0 is determined (S3410). If it is determined that the value of the successive hit effective period timer 223v after the subtraction is 0 (S3410: Yes), this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3410 that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v after subtraction is not 0 (S3410: No), the display of the ending image of the continuous hit continuous effect is set (S3411), and then This process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3408 that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3408: No), it is next determined whether it is the end timing of the interrupting continuous hitting production (S3412) . If it is determined in the process of S3412 that it is the end timing of the interruption continuous hitting production (S3412: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pause flag is "01H" (S3413). If it is determined that the value of the pause flag is “01H” (S 3413: Yes), it means that both the display and the sound have been stopped (suspended) at the start of the interruption continuous hitting production, so the display Both the mode and the voice mode are set to resume from the pause position (S3414). That is, while setting the output of the display interruption command indicating the end of the interruption of the display mode to the display control device 114, the interruption of the audio mode indicating the end of the interruption of the sound mode Set the output. When the process of S3414 ends, the process proceeds to S3415.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3413 that the value of the pause flag is not "01H" (S3413: No), this means that the value of the pause flag is "02H", and only the display mode is temporary. In order to mean that the display mode has been stopped (suspended), the restart of the display mode from the pause position is set (that is, the output of the display interrupt command indicating the end of the suspension of the display mode to the display control device 114). After setting (S3416), the process proceeds to S3415. In the process of S3415 executed after the process of S3414 or S3416, by setting the temporary stop flag to "00H" which is the initial value (S3415), neither voice nor display is suspended (suspended) And end this process.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3412 that it is not the end timing of the interruption continuous hitting effect (S3412: No), the present process is ended as it is.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 445, the collective change production process (S3205) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 445 is a flowchart showing the collective change effect process (S3205). This collective change production process (S3205) is executed in the production update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and the holding collective change production (see FIGS. 402 and 403) is performed. It is the process for updating the presentation mode in.

  In the collective change production process (see FIG. 445), first, it is determined whether the collective change flag 223p is on (S3501), and it is determined that the collective change flag 223p is not on (is off) ( S3501: No), meaning that it is not during the execution period of the pending collective change presentation (see FIG. 402 and FIG. 403), and there is no possibility of setting for the pending collective change presentation, so this processing ends. When it is determined that the collective change flag 223p is on (S3501: Yes), next, in the pending collective change effect, the timing when the effective period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 for collectively changing the held symbol aspect is started It is determined whether or not (S3502). In the process of S3502, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the effective period of the operation to the PUSH button 10317 (S3502: Yes), by setting the timer value corresponding to 3 seconds to the value of the batch change period timer 223x ( In step S3503, the effective period of the operation on the PUSH button 10317 is set to 3 seconds, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of 3502 that it is not the start timing of the effective period (S3502: No), next, whether the value of the batch change period timer 223x is larger than 0 (that is, the operation of the PUSH button 10317 is effective) It is judged whether or not it is within the period (S3504). If it is determined in the process of S3504 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is larger than 0 (S3504: Yes), the value of the batch change period timer 223x is decremented by 1 (S3505), and the batch change period timer 223x after subtraction is Whether or not the value of is 0 is determined (S3506). If it is determined in the process of S3506 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x after subtraction is not 0 (S3506: No), this process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3506 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x after subtraction is 0 (S3506: Yes), the number of holding balls in the holding symbol mode indicated by the data of the holding symbol mode storage area 223r The symbol is set to be changed and displayed (S3507), the values of the collective change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the collective change period timer 223x are all reset (S3508), and this processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3504 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3504: No), the present process ends.

  Next, charge consumption processing (S3206) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 446 is a flowchart showing this charge consumption processing (S3206). This charge consumption process (S3206) is executed in the effect update process (see FIG. 442) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and is charged in the chance charge effect (see FIG. 397) as described above. It is a process for setting the consumption of the pressure gauge.

  In the charge consumption process (S3206), first, it is determined whether the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S3551), and when it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is 0 (S3551: No) Since this means that there is no room for consuming a spirit gauge and generating a chance-up effect, the present processing ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3551 that the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than 0 (S3551: Yes), next, it is determined whether it is an executable timing of charge consumption effect (S3552). When it is determined in the process of S3552 that it is not an executable timing of charge consumption effect (S3552: No), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3552 that the charge consumption effect can be executed (S3552: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 ( S3553). If it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223 n is 0 (S 3553: Yes), it means that it is the last variation display that enables consumption of the gage gauge, and the gage gauge in this fluctuation display Because it is necessary to consume all of the items, the process (S3560 and S3561 processes) for setting the chance-up effect is performed by consuming the gas gauge.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3553 that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is not 0 (S3553: No), next, the fluctuation display currently being executed (the fluctuation concerned) is the expectation of the super reach or more. It is determined whether or not the effect mode to be shown is the set variable display (S3554). If it is determined that the change is not the expectation of super reach or more (or less than normal reach effect) (S3354: No), next, whether or not hold of super reach or more is included in the charge state range (S3555). If it is determined that the charge of the super reach is included in the charge state range (S3555: Yes), then the value of the charge counter 223m is the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of balls in the charge range. It is determined whether or not it is larger (S3556). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of holding balls in the charge range (S3556: Yes), holding balls of super reach effect or more with many chances of being able to execute chance increase effect Even if it is included, it means that the gauge number (charge number) of the gas gauge is larger than the number of holding balls, so it is important to reduce the gas gauge in this fluctuation. Processing for consuming a gauge and setting a chance-up effect (each processing of S3558 and S3559) is executed.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3556 that the value of the charge number counter 223m is equal to or less than the value obtained by adding 2 to the number of balls held in the charge range (S3556: No), fluctuation display with super reach effect set The above variation means that by consuming the gas gauge at the execution timing of multiple chance up effects in the case, it is possible to fully consume the gas gauge within the range of the value of the charge state frequency counter 223 n. This process is ended without setting consumption of the gas gauge in.

  Also, if it is determined in the process of S3555 that the state of charge status includes suspension of super reach or higher (S3555: No), then the value of charge number counter 223m is within the charge range. It is determined whether it is larger than the number (S3557). If it is determined that the value of the charge number counter 223m is less than or equal to the number of balls held in the charge range (S3557: No), the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3557 that the value of the charge number counter 223m is larger than the number of holding balls in the charge range (S3557: Yes), the number of gauges of the gas gauge (number of charges) is the number of holding balls. Since it means that many remain, in order to reduce the gage gauge in the fluctuation, the gage gauge is consumed and processing (S3558, each processing of S3559) for setting up a chance up production is performed.

  In the process of S3558, the charge consumption effect of the effect mode according to the execution timing is set (S3558), the value of the charge number counter 223m is decremented by 1 (S3559), and then the process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3554 that the variation is equal to or greater than the super reach (S3354: Yes), the charge consumption effect of the effect mode according to the execution timing is set (S3560), and the value of the charge number counter 223m Is decremented by 1 (S3561), and then the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 447, the pressing detection processing (S3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 447 is a flowchart showing this pressing detection process (S3112). This pressing detection processing (S3112) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and monitors the operation status (presence or absence of pressing) of the PUSH button 10317. When pressing is detected, this is processing for executing control according to the situation of the pressing.

  In the pressing detection process (S3112), first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected (S3601), and when it is determined that pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is not detected (S3601: No) This process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that pressing of the PUSH button 10317 has been detected (S3601: Yes), it is next determined whether the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is larger than 0 (S3602). If it is determined that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is larger than 0 (S3602: Yes), it means that the PUSH button 10317 has been pressed (operated) during the valid period in the depression stop effect (see FIG. 395). Therefore, the stop operation detection process for performing control corresponding to the stop operation during the execution of the press stop effect is executed (S3603), and this process is ended. The details of the stop operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 448.

  When it is determined in the process of S3602 that the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is 0 (S3602: No), next, whether the value of the continuous hitting valid period timer 223v is larger than 0 (that is, continuous hitting in the interrupt continuous hitting effect) It is determined whether or not it is a valid period of the operation (S3604). If it is determined that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is larger than 0 (S3604: Yes), a continuous hitting operation detection process for executing control corresponding to the continuous hitting operation during execution of the interrupt continuous hitting production is executed (S3605) Then, the process ends. The details of the continuous hitting operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When it is determined in the process of S3604 that the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v is 0 (S3604: No), next, whether the value of the collective change period timer 223x is larger than 0 (that is, in the pending collective change effect) It is determined whether or not it is a valid period of the PUSH button 10317 (S3606). If it is determined that the value of the collective change period timer 223x is larger than 0 (S3606: Yes), change operation detection processing for performing control for setting the collective change is executed while the pending collective change presentation is being executed. (S3607) After that, this processing ends. The details of the change operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3606 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), this process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 448, the stop operation detection process (S3603) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 448 is a flowchart showing this stop operation detection process (S3603). This stop operation detection process (S3603) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, is the stop operation during execution of the press stop effect. It is a process for performing corresponding control.

  In the stop operation detection process (S3603), first, it is determined whether the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is larger than 1 (S3701), and when it is determined that the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is larger than 1 (S3701) : Yes), the stop display of the symbol row corresponding to the value of the stop operation number counter 223 u is set (S 3702), and the process shifts to the processing of S 3709. In the process of S3702, if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 3, the stop operation of the left symbol row is set, while if the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 2, the stop operation of the right symbol row is Set

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3701 that the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is 1 or less (S3701: No), it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3703). If it is determined in the process of S3703 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S3703: Yes), it means that the execution of the chance charge effect is being performed, which means that the variable display is being performed, so the remaining period By setting the stop display effect of the chance charge symbol, it is informed that the chance charge effect is started (S3707), and the process proceeds to S3708.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3703 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S3703: No), it is next determined whether or not an operation effective period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704). If it is determined that the operation effective period remains for 2 seconds or more (S3704: Yes), the execution of the chance charge overriding effect (see FIG. 396 (a)) is set in the remaining period (S3705), and the process proceeds to S3708. Do. By performing the processing of S3705, in the variable display in which only the pressing stop effect is set, if three pressings are completed at an early stage (within one second after the start) in the effective period, the setting is immediately removed. It is possible to execute a chance charge overdue effect having a longer rendering period than stopping the symbol. Therefore, since the effect period can be varied according to the speed of the player's operation (pressing), a more preferable effect aspect can be realized.

  In the process of S3704, when it is determined that the operation effective period does not remain for 2 seconds or more (less than 2 seconds) (S3704: No), the stop display of the middle symbol row is set to be a combination of outlying symbols. (S3706), the processing proceeds to S3708.

  In the process of S3708 executed after any of the processes of S3705 to S3707, the value of the operation valid period timer 223t is reset to 0 (S3708), and the process proceeds to the process of S3709. In the process of S3709 executed after the process of S3702 or S3708, the value of the stop operation number counter 223u is decremented by 1 and updated (S3709), and this process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 449, continuous hit operation detection processing (S3605) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 449 is a flow chart showing this continuous hitting operation detection processing (S3605). The continuous hitting operation detection process (S3605) is executed in the pressing detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, to the continuous hitting operation during execution of the interrupt continuous hitting effect. It is a process for executing the corresponding control.

  In the continuous hitting operation detection process (S3605), first, the remaining effective period (T) is specified from the value of the continuous hitting effective period timer 223v (S3751), and then the number of monsters corresponding to the type of effect of the current interruption continuous hitting effect The lower limit (D) is calculated (S3752). Note that the lower limit value of the number of monsters is defined in advance for each effect type in the interruption consecutive hitting lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) as described above. When the process of S3752 is finished, next, “T / 5 seconds × (100 bodies−D)” is calculated (S3753), and a value obtained by subtracting the calculated value from the current number of remaining monsters is calculated (S3754) ). Note that in the process of S3754, values after the decimal point are rounded off. When the process of S3754 ends, next, it is determined whether or not the calculated number of monsters is less than the lower limit value in the effect type of the current interruption continuous hitting effect (S3755).

  If it is determined in the process of S3755 that the number of monsters below the lower limit has been calculated (S3755: Yes), the display of the remaining number of monsters is updated to the lower limit (S3756), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3755 that the calculated number of monsters is equal to or more than the lower limit (S3755: No), the specified subtraction number is subtracted from the display of the remaining number of monsters and updated (S3757) , End this process.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 450, the change operation detection process (S3607) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 450 is a flowchart showing this change operation detection process (S3607). This change operation detection process (S3607) is executed in the press detection process (see FIG. 447) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and as described above, batch execution during batch on-hold change presentation. It is a process for performing control for setting a change.

  In the change operation detection process (S3607), first, the change point corresponding to each holding ball is specified from the data of the change point storage area 223q (S3801), and the aspect of the holding ball having one or more change points is uniformly increased by one step. As such, the data of the reserved symbol form storage area 223r is updated (S3802). Next, the change type of hold 1 is specified (S 3803), and the hold symbol form is specified according to the specified change type, the hold change lottery table 222 c and the effect lottery counter (S 3804). Then, it is determined whether or not the specified reserved symbol mode has a higher degree of expectation than the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (S3805). If it is determined that the identified symbol pattern mode has a higher expectation than the data of the symbol pattern storage area 223r (S3805: Yes), data indicating the symbol pattern storage area 223r is data indicating a symbol pattern aspect that has been identified (S3806), and the process proceeds to S3807.

  On the other hand, in the process of S3805, when it is determined that the specified reserved symbol mode is not a higher expectation than the data of the reserved symbol mode storage area 223r (S3805: No), the process of S38006 is skipped and the process proceeds to S3807 Transition.

  In the processing of S3807, it is determined whether or not the rank increase lottery of the holding symbol form by the processing of S3804 to S3806 has been completed for all the holding balls (S3807), the drawing for all the holding balls has not ended If it is determined that (S3807: No), the time at which the start-up winning has been detected is specified as a change type of the new holding ball than the holding ball subjected to the current lottery (S3808), and the process returns to S3804.

  In the process of S3807, when it is determined that the rank-up lottery for all the holding balls is finished (S3807: Yes), the display of the holding symbol mode indicated by the data of the holding symbol mode storage area 223r is set (S3809). The values of the change flag 223p, the change point storage area 223q, and the collective change period timer 223x are all reset (S3810), and the process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 451, the command determination processing (S3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 451 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S3114). This command determination process (S3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. .

  In the command determination process (S3114), first, the unprocessed command received from main controller 110 is read out from the command storage area provided in RAM 223, analyzed, and the unprocessed command received from main controller 110 is It is determined whether a status command is included therein (S3901). If it is determined in the process of S3901 that a status command is included in the unprocessed command received from the main control device 110 (S3901: Yes), the game is played according to the gaming status notified by the received command. The data in the state storage area 223f is updated (S3902), and then the process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S3901 that the status command has not been received (S3901: No), next, the variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (variations among unprocessed commands) It is determined whether a pattern command is included (S3903). If it is determined in the process of S3903 that the fluctuation pattern command is received (S3903: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON (S3904), and the fluctuation pattern is extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command (S3905) Then, the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3903 that the variation pattern command has not been received (S3903: No), it is then determined whether a stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3906). If it is determined in the process of S3906 that the stop type command has been received (S3906: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S3907), and the stop type is extracted from the received command. Then (S3908), the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S3909 that the stop type command has not been received (S3906: No), it is then determined whether or not the ball holding ball number command has been received (S3909). In the process of S3909, when it is determined that the holding ball number command has been received (S3909: Yes), the holding ball number is extracted from the received command, and the corresponding special symbol holding ball number counter (special symbol 1 holding ball number) The values of the counter 223a and the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b) are updated (S3910), and this processing is ended. Here, the number of holding balls corresponding to the first special symbol is stored in the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223a, and the number of holding balls corresponding to the second special symbol is the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b Stored. In addition, when the ball holding number command indicating the number of balls holding the normal symbol is received, information for indicating the number of holding balls is stored in the normal ball holding number counter 223c. In this control example, since the information indicating the current holding ball number is included in the holding ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, for example, the power holding ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113 side Even if the value is deleted, the value of each holding ball number counter can be restored to an appropriate value by receiving the holding ball number command to be transmitted next. In this case, in the process (see S908 in FIG. 433) of transmitting the status command of the start-up process (see FIG. 433) of the main control unit 110, each ball holding ball number command may be transmitted.

  On the other hand, if the holding ball number command has not been received in the process of S3909 (S3909: No), it is then determined whether a winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S3911). In the process of S3911, when it is determined that the winning information command is received (S3911: Yes), various effects (pre-reading effects) are set according to the type of winning information notified by the winning information command. The winning information command process for the game is executed (S3912), and this process is ended. The details of the winning information command process (S3912) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 452 and 453.

  In the process of S3911, when it is determined that the prize information command is not received (S3911: No), next, various commands related to the hit (opening command, number of rounds command, big hit end command, and ending command (S3913), and if it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S3913: Yes), control according to the type of command associated with the win is executed. In step S3914, a hit related command process is executed to end the present process. This hit related command processing (S3914) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, in the process of S3913, when it is determined that the command related to the hit is not received from the main control device 110 (S3913: No), the process is ended thereafter.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 452, details of the winning information command process (S3912) which is one process in the command determination process (S3114) will be described. FIG. 452 is a flow chart showing this winning information command processing (S3912). In the prize information command process (S3912), first, data indicating the lottery result notified by the command is stored in the vacant area of the prize information storage area (S4001), and the process proceeds to the process of S4002. In the process of S4001, data indicating the winning information notified by the command is stored in the vacant area having the smallest number among the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area.

  In the process of S4002, it is determined whether the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S4002). When it is determined that the chance charge standby flag 223k is on (S4002: No), it means that the fluctuation display effect with the chance charge effect set is being executed and the chance charge effect has not been started yet. Therefore, according to the content of the newly detected start winning, the number of gauges (number of charges) of the gage gauge charged in the chance charge effect is added to the value previously determined at the start of the change. Execute the process More specifically, it is first determined whether or not the current winning information command is a winning information command indicating a win (S4003), and if it is determined that the winning information command indicates a win (S4003: Yes) 2.) The value of the charge number counter 223m is updated by adding 2 (S4004), and the process proceeds to the process of S4006. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4003 that the current winning information command is not a winning information command indicating a hit (is a winning information command indicating an omission) (S4003: No), the value of the charge number counter 223m is used. 1 is added for update (S4005), and the process proceeds to the process of S4006.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4002 that the chance charge standby flag 223k is off (S4002: No), there is no possibility to add the number of gauges (number of charges) of the gage, so each of S4003 to S4006 The processing is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S4006. In the process of S4006, it is determined whether or not the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (S4006). If it is determined in the process of S4006 that the lottery result corresponding to the fall has been notified (S4006: Yes), then whether or not the rendering mode corresponding to the scenario for continuous enrichment in the probability variation continuation suggestive rendering is being executed It discriminates (S4007). In the process of S4007, when the data in the continuous scenario storage area 223h is any of "08H" to "0BH" corresponding to the continuous enrichment scenario, the presentation aspect corresponding to the continuous enrichment scenario is being executed. Determine that there is.

  In the process of S4007, when it is determined that the continual suggestion effect of the scenario for continuous enrichment is being executed (S4007: Yes), next, the winning information notified by the present prize information command is a definite variation continuation suggestive effect It is determined whether or not it is winning combination information to be digested during execution (S4008). That is, it is determined whether or not it is decided to fall from the probability variation state of the special symbol to the low probability state during execution of the definite variation continuation indication effect by the new winning information, and it is digested during the continuation indication effect. (S4008: Yes), it is referred to the non-continuation table of the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) when it is determined that it is the winning information (determination of falling during execution of the definite variation continuation suggestion effect). Then, the continuation suggestion rendering scenario is determined (S4009), data indicating the selected scenario is overwritten in the continuation scenario storage area 223h (S4010), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4011. In each process of S4009 and S4010, the rendering scenario of “0CH” in the non-continuity table is stored in the continuum storage area 223h.

  In the first control example, when the new start winning combination is a lottery result corresponding to a fall in the number of times of fluctuation within the execution range of the definite variation continuation suggestion effect, the configuration scenario of “0CH” is always set However, the present invention is not limited to this, and one scenario may be determined by lottery from among the four rendering scenarios (one of “0 CH” to “0 FH”) defined in the non-continuance table. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to further diversify the presentation mode at the time of fall.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4006, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponding to the fall is not notified (S4006: No), when it is determined that the probability variation continuation suggestion effect of the scenario for continuous enrichment is not under execution (S4007: No And, when it is determined that the new winning information notified by the current winning information command is not the winning information to be digested during the execution of the definite variation continuation suggestion effect (S4008: No), the effect in the positive variation continuation indication effect Since there is no need to rewrite the scenario to the scenario for the non-continuance table, the process directly proceeds to the process of S4011.

  By performing each processing of S4006 to S4010, the start time of the definite variation continuation indication effect is the definite variation state, and the change probability probability variable variation probability at the end of the number of times the number of holding balls is not accumulated Continuation indication production is executed, when the start winning prize which corresponds to the fall occurs after that, in the result of definite variation continuation indication production, it has fallen by switching to the production scenario for non-continuation (the production scenario of “0CH”) Can be reported. That is, although it is possible to suppress the effect mode as if it has continued even though it has been dropped, it is possible to realize a more preferable effect mode.

  Further, in the process of S4011, the on-hold notice lottery process for drawing out the on-off change effect and the on-off collective change effect on the basis of the winning information notified by the winning information command is executed (S4011) Finish. The details of the on-hold notice lottery process will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 453 is a flow chart showing this on-hold notice lottery process (S4011). In the on-hold notice lottery process (S4011), first, data indicating a on-hold on-hold symbol form is stored in the vacant area of the on-hold symbol form storage area 223r (S4051). More specifically, in the vacant area of the reserved symbol form storage area 223r, data indicating the white reserved reserved symbol form is stored in the area with the smallest number. When the process of S4051 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the batch change flag 223p is on (S4052), and when it is determined that the batch change flag 223p is on (S4052: Yes), white hold is suspended. The symbol mode is set to be displayed as a held symbol corresponding to the new winning information (S4053), and this processing is ended. By executing the process of S4053, the number-of-held-balls pattern changed to a mode imitating a rock by the simultaneous change-in-hold effect and the number-of-held balls number pattern based on the start winning combination newly detected after the start of the simultaneous change-in-hold effect. Since it is possible to make the reserved symbol form different from each other, the player can easily understand the range of the number-of-held-balls pattern to be subjected to the held collective change effect. Therefore, it is possible to realize an effect aspect that is easier for the player to understand.

  In this first control example, although it was configured to uniformly set the number of holding balls number pattern based on the starting winning combination detected after the start of the holding batch change effect, in the holding pattern aspect of white holding, it is limited to this is not. For example, it is good also as composition which performs a lottery of a reservation pattern aspect using a reservation change lottery table 222c (refer to Drawing 414 (a)) about a new number-of-ball-holding number pattern. As a result, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of becoming a big hit against not only the number-of-held-balls pattern that is the object of the held collective change effect but also the number-of-held-balls number pattern based on the new starting winning combination. Further, for example, a new start winning combination detected after the start of the pending collective change presentation may be added to the target of the pending collective change presentation. In this case, it may be configured to always add the number-of-hold ball number design based on the new start winning combination to the target of the pending collective change effect, or as the configuration to be added to the target of the pending collective change effect only under predetermined conditions. It is also good. In addition, as predetermined conditions, for example, when the winning combination information corresponding to the new start winning combination indicates the jackpot expectation degree of being out of the super reach, it may be configured to be included in the execution target of the batch change staging effect. For example, only when winning information corresponding to a change type having a higher degree of expectation than the holding ball in the range in which the holding batch change presentation is set is newly notified, the configuration is included in the execution target of the holding batch change presentation It is also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for jackpot when the number-of-held balls number design based on the new start winning combination is added to the execution target of the held batch change presentation.

  If it is determined in the process of S4052 that the batch change flag 223p is off (S4052: No), it is then determined whether the number of holding balls is greater than 1 (S4054), and the number of holding balls is 1 or less When it is determined that (S4054: No), there is no possibility to execute the pending batch change effect, so to the process of S4060 for drawing the pending symbol mode of the pending ball number design corresponding to the new winning information Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4054 that the number of holding balls is larger than 1 (more than 2) (S4054: Yes), data of the winning information storage area and data of the holding symbol pattern storage area 223r The change point is calculated according to the change point calculation table 222 d (S 4055), and it is determined whether the pending collective change effect can be performed or not according to the calculated change point, the collective change lottery table 222 e and the effect lottery counter. (S4056). Next, it is determined whether or not the determination result by the process of S 4056 is the determination result corresponding to the execution of the pending collective change effect (S 4057), and it is not determined that it is the determination result corresponding to the execution of the pending collective change effect In the case (S4057: No), the processing proceeds to S4060 for drawing the reserved symbol aspect of the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the new winning information. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4057 that the determination result corresponds to the execution of the pending collective change presentation (S4057: Yes), the execution of the pending collective change presentation is set (S4058), and the batch change flag 223p is turned on. Is set (S4059), and the process ends.

  In the process of S4060, the pending change lottery table 222c (refer to FIG. 414A) is read (S4060), and the pending change lottery table 222c read out, according to the winning information notified by the command, and the value of the effect lottery counter The reserved symbol form is determined (S4061). Then, according to the holding symbol aspect determined in the processing of S4061, the data corresponding to the latest winning information in the holding symbol aspect storage area 223r is updated (S4062), and the holding symbol aspect of the aspect shown by the updated data The display is set (S4063), and the process ends.

  By executing the on-hold notice lottery process (see FIG. 453), various effect modes using the on-hold ball number design can be suitably set.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 454, the contents of the hit related command process (S 3914) described above will be described. FIG. 454 is a flowchart showing the contents of the hit related command process (S3914). The hit related command processing (S3914) is executed in the command determination processing (see FIG. 451) of the voice lamp control device 113, and when the command related to the touch is received from the main control device 110, It is processing for performing control according to the type of the received command.

  In the hit related command processing (see FIG. 454), first, it is determined whether or not the command received this time is an opening command (S4101). If it is determined that the command received this time is the opening command (S4101: Yes), the display opening command according to the received opening command is set (S4102), and then this process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S4101 that the command received this time is not the opening command (S4101: No), it is then determined whether the command received this time is the round number command (S4103). If it is determined that there is a command (S4103: Yes), a round number command for display is set based on the round number indicated by the round number information included in the received round number command (S4104), and the process ends.

  If it is determined in the process of S4103 that the command received this time is not the round number command (S4103: No), it is determined whether the command received this time is the big hit end command (S4105) and it is the big hit end command If it is determined (S4105: Yes), the data of the gaming state storage area 223f is updated according to the information indicating the gaming state after the big hit end included in the received big hit end command (S4106), and then the right strike It is determined whether the middle winning flag 223i is on (S4107). If it is determined that the right hit while the winning flag 223i is on (S4107: Yes), a jackpot has occurred during a definite change or a time saving state in which the player plays a game with a right hit (that is, a so-called continuous break has occurred) Set the back mode for high expectation (see Fig. 390 (b)) (S4109), which means that the jackpot in the second special symbol lottery where the percentage of probability variation jackpot is high means This process ends. In setting the back mode for high expectation uniformly, it is difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the definite change state is set, thereby making it possible to predict the current game state to the player. It is to realize.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4107, when it is determined that the right hitting in progress winning flag 223i is off (S4107: No), it became a big hit in the normal state of playing a game by left hitting (so-called, winning in first hit) Since it means that the percentage of the probability variation jackpot is low and the jackpot in the first special symbol drawing is low, set the back mode for low expectation (see Figure 390 (a)) (S4108), Thereafter, the process ends. In setting the back mode for low expectation uniformly, it is difficult to understand whether the time saving state is set or the definite change state is set, thereby making it possible to predict the current game state to the player. It is to realize.

  If it is determined that the big hit end command has not been received in the process of S4105 (S4105: No), it is then determined whether the command received this time is the ending command (S4110), and it is the ending command. If it is determined (S4110: Yes), a display ending command is set (S4111), and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4110 that the ending command has not been received (S4110: No), the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 455, the variable display setting process (S3115) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 455 is a flowchart showing the variation display setting process (S3115). This variation display setting process (S3115) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 441) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform variation effects, This is a process for generating and setting a display variation pattern command based on the variation pattern command received from the main control unit 110.

  In the fluctuation display setting process (S3115), first, it is judged whether or not the fluctuation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4201). When it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, off) (S4201: No), since the fluctuation pattern command is not received from the main control device 110, the process of S4207 is performed. Transition to On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S4201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S4202), and the fluctuation pattern type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the display fluctuation pattern command is RAM 223 It acquires from (S4203).

  Next, a fluctuation effect setting process for setting an effect mode to be performed with the extracted fluctuation pattern (variation time) is executed (S4204). The contents of the change effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the process of S4204 is completed, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the effect mode determined in the process of S4204 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 ( S4205). The display control device 114 receives the display variation pattern command so that variation display of the third symbol is performed in the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

  Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area is shifted (S4206). In this process, data stored in the first to fourth areas of the winning information storage area is shifted in order toward the execution area. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the following order: first area → execution area, second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S4207.

  In the process of S4207, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is on (S4207). When it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not on (that is, off) (S4207: No), this process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S4207: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S4208), and the stop type in the fluctuation effect extracted from the stop type command is RAM 223 It acquires from (S4209). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the fluctuation effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S4210), and the process shifts to the processing of S4211.

  In the process of S4211, a stop type command for display for notifying the display control device 114 is generated based on the set stop type, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4211). . The display control device 114 receives the display stop type command so that the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The stop display of the fluctuation effect is controlled. After the processing of S4211 is executed, the present processing ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 456, the contents of the fluctuation effect setting process (S4204) which is one process in the fluctuation display setting process (see FIG. 455) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 456 is a flowchart showing the contents of the fluctuation effect setting process (S4204). In this variation effect setting process (S4204), a process for setting a detailed effect aspect (preliminary content) of the variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the variation of the special symbol is executed.

  In the fluctuation effect setting process (S4204), first, it is determined whether the value of the charge state number counter 223n is larger than 0 (S4301), and if it is determined that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is larger than 0 (S4301) Yes: The value of the charge state number counter 223 n is decremented by 1 (S4302), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4303. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4301 that the value of the charge state number counter 223n is 0 (S4301: No), the process of S4302 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S4303.

  In the process of S4303, it is determined whether or not the value of the hour reduction guaranteed number counter 223g is larger than 0 (S4303). If it is determined that the value of the hour-time guaranteed number counter 223g is 0 (S4303: No), the process proceeds to S4311. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4303 that the value of the hourly guaranteed number counter 223g is larger than 0 (S4303: Yes), the value of the hourly guaranteed number counter 223g is decremented by 1 (S4304). It is determined whether the value of the hour-time guaranteed number counter 223g is larger than 0 (S4305). If it is determined in the process of S4305 that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is 0 (S4305: No), the process proceeds to the process of S4311. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4305 that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 0 (S4305: Yes), then whether the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 4 It is determined whether or not it is (S4306). If it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the time saving guaranteed number counter 223g after subtraction is greater than 4 (S4306: Yes), the process proceeds to S4312.

  In the processing of S4311, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability change state (S4311). Here, based on the data stored in the gaming state storage area 223f, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is a probability variation state. If it is determined in the process of S4311 that the present is a definite change state (S4311: Yes), it means that the positive change state continues over 100 times after the end of the big hit, so a drawing of the rear mode is performed To move to the processing of S4312. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4311 that the present is not a positive change state (S4311: No), the process of S4312 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S4313.

  In the processing of S4312, in the gaming state (time reduction state, probability change state) in which the player plays a game by right-handling, one drawing mode is selected from among the plurality of back modes indicating the expectation of the probability change state with the lottery probability according to the gaming state In step S4312, a back mode lottery process is performed to shift the process to step S4313. The details of the rear mode lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 458.

  In the process of S4313, an effect mode selection process for selecting an effect mode in the variable display effect is executed (S4313), and then the process ends. The details of the effect mode selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 459.

  Further, in the variation effect setting process in the first control example, when it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the time short guarantee number counter 223g after subtraction is 4 or less (S4306: No), In order to mean that it is an execution period (the fluctuation period of the 96th to 99th variable display after the end of the big hit), next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit (S4307). In the process of S4307, when it is determined that the lottery result is a big hit (S4307: Yes), a jackpot production mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuous suggestion effect is set as a variation display mode for this time (S4308). The winning flag is set to on (S4309), and the process ends. In addition, as a jackpot effect mode dedicated to the execution period of the continuous suggestion effect, for example, an adventurer who breaks through the door 806 by an effect breaking through the door 806 is executed to find a treasure on the other side of the door 806 , And the effect of being notified of the jackpot is performed.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4307, when it is determined that the lottery result of the special symbol is not the jackpot of the special symbol (S4307: No), the continuation indication effect setting for setting the effect mode in the execution period of the definite variation continuation indication effect The process is executed (S4310), and the process ends. The details of the continuation suggestive effect setting process (S4310) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 457, the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) which is one process in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. Do. FIG. 457 is a flowchart showing the contents of the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310).

  When the continuation suggestion effect setting process (S4310) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the hour reduction guarantee number counter 223g is 4 or not (S4401), and the value of the time reduction guarantee number counter 223g is not 4 (3 If it is determined that the following is true (S4401: No), the data in the continuation scenario storage area 223h is read (S4411), and it is determined whether the read out scenario is a continuation enrichment scenario (S4412). If it is determined in the process of S4412 that the scenario read out is not a scenario for continuous enrichment (S4412: No), the process proceeds to S4415. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4412 that the scenario read out is the scenario for continuous enrichment (S4412: Yes), it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol this time is the lottery result of falling ( When it is determined that the result is not a lottery result of falling (S4413: No), the process proceeds to S4415. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4413 that the result of the fall is a lottery result (S4413: Yes), the effect scenario is switched to "0CH" (S4414), and the process proceeds to S4415.

  In the process of S4415, from the scenario read out from the continuous scenario storage area 223h, the effect mode of the fluctuation number corresponding to the value of the time saving number counter 223g is read (S4415), and the read effect mode is taken as the display mode of the current fluctuation pattern. It sets (S4416). Next, it is determined whether or not the final rendering mode of the scenario has been set (S4417), and if it is determined that the final rendering mode of the scenario has been set (S4417: Yes), the data of the continuation scenario storage area 223h Is reset to "00H" (S4418), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4417 that the final rendering mode of the scenario is not set (S4417: No), the process of S4418 is skipped, and the process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4401 that the value of the hourly guaranteed number counter 223g is 4 (S4401: Yes), this means that it is the start timing of the probability variation continuation suggestion effect (see FIG. 392). Execute processing for determining a presentation scenario of the continuous indication presentation. Specifically, first, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a definite change state (S4402). If it is determined in the process of S4402 that the current gaming state is a definite change state (S4402: Yes), the data of the prize information storage area is read (S4403), and the lottery result of the fall is included in the prize information It is determined whether or not there is (S4404). In the process of S4404, if it is determined that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the winning information (S4404: No), whether four winning information is stored next (ie, definite variation continuation suggestive effect) It is determined whether or not the holding ball until the end has already been held (S4405).

  If it is determined in the process of S4405 that four winning combination information is stored (S4405: Yes), the continuation suggestion rendering scenario is referred to by referring to the continuation determination table in the continuation suggestion rendering selection table 222g (see FIG. 416). Are determined (S4406), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4409. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4405 that the four winning combination information is not stored (S4405: No), the continuation suggestion table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416) is referred to, and the continuation suggestion is made. A presentation scenario is determined (S4407), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4409.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4402 that the current gaming state is not a definite change state (S4402: No), and in the process of S4404, the lottery result of the fall is included in the winning information If it is determined that (S4404: Yes), referring to the non-continuation table in the continuation suggestion effect selection table 222g (see FIG. 416), the effect scenario is determined (S4408), and the process proceeds to S4409.

  In the process of S4409 executed after any of the processes of S4406 to S4408, data indicating the selected rendering scenario is stored in the continuation scenario storage area 223h (S4409), and the first change in the determined scenario is made. The effect mode of is set as the effect mode of the current fluctuation pattern (S4410), and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 458, the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312) which is one process in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 458 is a flowchart showing the contents of the back mode lottery process (S4312).

  When the back mode lottery process (S4312) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of the big hit (S4501). If it is determined that the current fluctuation pattern is the jackpot fluctuation pattern (S4501: Yes), the fluctuation display mode for the jackpot is selected as the fluctuation display mode (S4502), and the right-handed hit flag 223i is set to ON. Then (S4503), the process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4501 that the current fluctuation pattern is not the fluctuation pattern of the big hit (S4501: No), next, it is determined whether or not the current gaming state is the definite change state (S4504) . If it is determined that the current gaming state is not a definite change state (S4504: No), the back mode is referred to with reference to the fallen table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y. Is drawn (S4505), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4510.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4504 that the current gaming state is a definite change state (S4504: Yes), the data of the winning information storage area is read (S4506), and then the lottery result of falling in the winning information Is determined (S4507). When it is determined in the process of S4507 that the lottery result of the fall is included in the winning information (S4507: Yes), the non-fall table in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery counter 223y The rear mode is drawn with reference to the value of (S4508), and the process proceeds to S4510.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4507, when it is determined that the lottery result of the fall is not included in the winning information (S4507: No), the table for definite variation continuation in the back mode lottery table 222b (see FIG. 413) and the effect lottery The rear mode is drawn with reference to the value of the counter 223y (S4509), and the process proceeds to S4510.

  In the process of S4510 executed after any of the processes of S4505, S4508, and S4509, the lottery result of each process is a lottery result indicating a change to the back mode different from the current back mode. It is determined whether or not it is (S4510). In the process of S4510, when it is determined that the lottery result corresponds to the change of the back surface mode (S4510: Yes), the display back surface change command indicating the back surface mode after the change is set (S4511), and this processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4510 that the rear surface mode is not to be changed (S4510: No), the process of S4511 is skipped, and the process ends.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 459, the content of the effect mode selection process (S4313) which is one process in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described. . FIG. 459 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect mode selection process (S4313).

  When the effect mode selection process (S4313) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not a variation pattern command including an additional time command (including an additional time command indicating an additional time of 7 seconds) has been received (S4551). If it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command including the additional time command has not been received (S4551: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4551 that the fluctuation pattern command including the additional time command has been received (S4551: Yes), the interruption consecutive hitting lottery table 222h (see FIG. 417) is read (S4552). Whether or not execution and type of interruption continuous hitting production is determined according to the value of 223y (S4553), next, it is determined whether or not a lottery result corresponding to execution of the interruption continuous hitting production has been reached (S4554). If it is determined in the process of S4554 that the lottery result corresponding to the execution of the interruption continuous hitting production has come (S4554: Yes), data corresponding to the type of the interruption continuous hitting presentation to be executed is stored in the continuous hitting type storage area 223j (S4555 ) Next, it is determined whether or not the type of the interruption continuous hitting effect is a type to be executed before reaching (S4556). In the process of S4556, when it is determined that the type is the interruption continuous hitting effect to be executed before reaching (S4556: Yes), the voice mode corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4558). Transfer to processing.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4556 that the type of the determined continuous blowout effect is not the type to be executed before reaching (S4556: No), the variation time indicated by the basic time command and the additional time command are The voice mode corresponding to the sum of the variation time shown is determined (S4557), and the process proceeds to S4559.

  In the process of S4559, the display mode corresponding to the fluctuation time indicated by the basic time command is determined (S4559), and this process is ended. As described above, in the first control example, whether or not the change type is 7 seconds long can be easily identified depending on the presence or absence of the addition time short command. In this way, it is possible to determine whether or not it is the variation type of the lottery object of whether or not the execution of the interruption continuous hitting effect can be performed only by confirming the content of the additional time command. In addition, when execution of interruption consecutive hitting production is decided, just filling up the fluctuation time just by setting the production feature which corresponds to the fluctuation time (the fluctuation time which is short by 7 seconds) notified by the basic time command it can. Therefore, since it is possible to easily match the end timing of the effect mode and the end timing of the variable display effect without preparing the effect mode dedicated to the interruption continuous hitting effect, it is possible to provide a suitable effect mode.

  On the other hand, in the process of S4554, when it is determined that the interruption continuous hitting production is not executed (S4554: No), the chance charge lottery table 222f (refer to FIG. 415 (b)) is read (S4560), and this variation type Whether the chance charge effect (see FIGS. 396 (b) and 397 (a)) is executable or not is determined according to the number of holding balls and the value of the effect lottery counter 223y (S4561), and then the process of S4561 It is determined whether or not the execution of the chance charge presentation has been determined by the determination (lottery drawing) according to (S4562). If it is determined in the process of S456 that execution of the chance charge effect is not determined (S4562: No), an effect mode corresponding to the fluctuation type indicated by the fluctuation pattern command is determined (S4566), and this processing is ended. .

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4562 that execution of the chance charge effect is determined (S4562: Yes), a value obtained by adding 1 to the number of holding balls is set as the value of the charge number counter 223m (S4563) The charge standby flag 223k is set to ON (S4564), an effect mode including a chance charge effect is determined as the current fluctuation display mode (S4565), and this processing is ended. As described above, in the first control example, when execution of the chance charge effect is determined, the gauge amount of the charge gauge KG stored in the chance charge effect (charge number counter 223 m based on the number of holding balls at the determination time point (The value of) is determined. Then, after the completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is performed (that is, the consumption gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each holding ball. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of the chance charge presentation (processing load when determining the number of gauges).

Regarding Control Processing of Display Control Device in First Control Example
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 460 to 473. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process which is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. When the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal are simultaneously performed, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the contents of the command received from the audio lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected to execute the V interrupt process.

  First, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 460 is a flowchart showing this main processing. The main processing is to execute initialization processing at power on.

  Specifically, the start of the main process is performed according to the following flow. When power is supplied from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to the hardware configuration. The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is designated to the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. And outputs corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, and starts execution of processing according to the fetched instruction to start main processing.

  Here, if all boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 are temporarily stored in the NAND flash memory 234a after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 states that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, it is necessary to read one page of data including data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, because of the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read and set it in the buffer RAM 234c, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after specifying the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to activate the MPU 231 becomes long, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

  On the other hand, the NOR type ROM can be operated at high speed by storing a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released among the boot programs as in this control example. Since it is a memory that can read out data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after releasing the system reset, the character ROM 234 immediately enters the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive an instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main processing in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be immediately started.

  When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 is enabled to execute various controls for the third symbol display device 81. Launch

  Here, the boot process (S8001) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 461 is a flowchart showing the boot process (S8001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114.

  As described above, in the present control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are not stored in the dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine, and are stored in the third symbol display device 81. A character ROM 234 provided for storing data of an image to be displayed is stored. Since the character ROM 234 is constituted by the NAND flash memory 234a which can achieve a small area and a large capacity, not only image data but also a control program can be sufficiently stored, while the control is performed. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, since the reading speed of the NAND flash memory is slow especially when random access is performed, the MPU 231 directly reads and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND flash memory 234 a as the MPU 231. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be degraded. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a or data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by DRAM. A process of transferring to and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

  Specifically, first, based on the hardware operation of the above-mentioned MPU 231 and character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the boot program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c. The control program stored in the two program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount (S8101). The predetermined amount of control program transferred here includes the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

  Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8101.

  Also, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S8102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading out the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 reads out the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a instead of reading out the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetching the instruction, and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is configured by the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch an instruction at high speed and execute processing for the instruction.

  When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, subsequently, it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. Among the control programs, the remaining control programs not transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b by a predetermined amount (S8103). Specifically, the control program and part of fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored as data tables. It transfers to the storage area 233b.

  Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed after the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the end of this boot processing (see S8001 in FIG. 460). By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 460) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is completed, and this boot process is ended.

  As described above, when the boot process (S8001) is executed, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-described second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use it to execute various processes.

  Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, the control program and fixed value data are released after the system reset is released from the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and By transferring data to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read out the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM having a high reading speed to perform various controls. It is possible to maintain high processing performance, and it is possible to easily execute diversified and complicated rendition using the auxiliary effect part.

  On the other hand, without storing all boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234 d, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first are stored by the MPU 231 after system reset release, and the remaining boot programs are NAND flash memory 234 a. Even in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, since the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding the extremely small capacity NOR ROM 234 d, the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can.

  In the boot process shown in FIG. 461, a predetermined amount of control program transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, but not necessarily limited thereto, the control program of a predetermined amount transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 is a boot program that executes the boot process to be processed following the process of S8102. It may be part of The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is used as an instruction pointer The process set in 231 a may be executed. Then, the processing of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

  Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and then, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, a part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the program storage area 233a A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program in the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a in the instruction pointer 231a is S8101. And after repeating the process of S8102 several times including the process of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

  Thus, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 can not be transferred to the program storage area 233a at one time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. A predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a by using the boot program.

  Further, in this control example, a case was described in which a part of the boot program to be executed by the MPU 231 at the time of system reset release is stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the boot process is started, the MPU 231 may execute the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102. As a result, since the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a is unnecessary, the number of transfer processes of the program to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, the control of the auxiliary rendering unit in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, can be started earlier.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. When the boot process ends, next, the initialization process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings for the register group in the MPU 231, the I / O device, and the like are performed. Further, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Furthermore, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. Note that “off” or “0” is set as an initial value of each flag unless otherwise specified.

  Furthermore, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, the image is drawn to the image controller 237 so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire third display screen 81. And instructs to execute display processing. Thus, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color over the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. Thereby, in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, immediately after the power is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 checks whether the image of the color according to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or not. Whether or not activation can be started normally can be determined easily and immediately.

  Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). In this transfer instruction, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination When the power is turned on, the image controller 237 receives image data corresponding to the main image from the character ROM 234 when the power for the resident video RAM 235 is turned on. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

  Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. When all transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided in the image controller 237 or a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. Then, the MPU 231 reads out information of a partial area of this register or built-in memory as needed, and detects writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby grasping that the transfer of the image data specified by the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

  At power-on, the image data transferred to the main image area 235a is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off. When transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power on to the main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8003, next, the fluctuation image at power on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the image data to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235 (S8004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image is stored, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) And the start address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b which is the transfer destination, and the image controller follows the transfer instruction to transmit the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. It is transferred to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. Then, the image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is shut off.

  When transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image to the power-on fluctuation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 in the process of S8004, next, the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S8005). Thus, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 471 (a)) described later. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing transfer to the image controller 237 is executed to transfer the image (see S9602 in FIG. 471 (a)).

  The simplified image display flag 233c is a transfer instruction from the character ROM 234 of the resident video RAM 235 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It will remain on until it is finished. As a result, during the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)), the images at the time of power on (the main image at the time of power on and the fluctuation image at the time of power on) shown in FIGS. As described above, the simplified command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462 (b)) and the simplified display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462 (b)) are performed.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow reading speed is It takes a lot of time to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in the main processing, after the power is turned on, first, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the power-on main image is third By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall, when the power is turned on displayed on the third symbol display device 81 You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so the player is resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235 Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed, without fear that the operation has stopped.

  In addition, also in the operation check in the factory etc. at the time of manufacture, the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately when the power is turned on, and the third symbol display device 81 starts the operation without problems by the power on. This can be confirmed immediately, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed as the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the efficiency of the operation check.

  The display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10 also transfers the power-on fluctuation image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 along with the power-on main image after power-on, so the power-on main image is the third symbol Since the player starts playing the game while being displayed on the display device 81, there is a ball entry (start winning) into the first start opening 64, and the start instruction of the fluctuation effect is sent from the main control unit 110 to the voice lamp control device In the case of via the display 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, a power fluctuation image, not shown, may be displayed immediately during the fluctuation effect period to perform a simple fluctuation effect. it can. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can surely confirm that the lottery has been performed by the simple fluctuation effect.

  Also, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image at power-on continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, so it takes time to transfer the data, so that the time for which the main image is continuously displayed when the power is turned on becomes longer after the power is turned on. However, in the pachinko machine 10, since a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after power on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, for example, while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

  After the processing of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 462 (a), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 462 (a) is a flowchart showing command interruption processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes a command interrupt process.

  In this command interruption process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process or the simple command determination process of V interrupt process described later, and the process according to the command is performed.

  Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 462 (b). FIG. 462 (b) is a flowchart showing the V interruption process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, and an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the drawing of the image is performed. By creating a list (see FIG. 423) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display process of the image.

  As described above, this V interrupt processing is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated every 20 milliseconds when the image controller 237 completes drawing processing of an image of one frame, and is sent to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, the drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image when the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that drawing of a new image is started during image drawing, or It is possible to prevent the image from being developed in response to a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

  Here, first, an outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt processing, as shown in FIG. 462 (b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed, so the normal effect image is not the third power pattern, not the power-on image. A command determination process (S8302) is executed to display on the display device 81, and then a display setting process (S8303) is executed.

  In the command determination process (S8302), the contents of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the variation display data table corresponding to the demonstration display data table or the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

  In this command determination process, all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed to execute the process. This is because command determination processing is performed at an interval of 20 milliseconds at which V interrupt processing is executed, and it is highly likely that a plurality of commands are stored in the command buffer area within that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the fluctuation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display fluctuation pattern command, the display stop type command and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the aspect and the type of stop of the fluctuation effect selected by the main controller 110 and the audio lamp control device 113 can be grasped quickly, and the effect image according to the aspect It is possible to control the drawing of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The details of the command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 463 to 468.

  In the display setting process (S8303), the image for one frame to be displayed next in the third symbol display device 81 based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302) and the like. Concretely identify the contents of Further, according to the status of the process, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233 d. The details of the display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 469 to 470.

  After the display setting process is executed, task processing is then executed (S8304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the contents of the image of the next one frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S8303) or the simple display setting processing (S8309) While specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be processed, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

  Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simplified image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set the instructions. Also, while the simplified image display flag 233c is off, based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, predetermined image data is sent from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 for normal use. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236, the image controller 237 is notified of continuous notification even when a continuous notification command (not shown) is received from the audio lamp control device 113. A transfer instruction to transfer the image data of the continuous notice image used in the effect and the image data of the back image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is set. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472.

  Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame, parameters necessary for drawing the respective sprites determined in the task process (S8304), and a transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S8305) The drawing list shown in FIG. 423 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. Thus, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt processing ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, there is, for example, a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the updating process is performed each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command is compared with the stop type counter, and the third symbol display device The stop symbol after the fluctuation effect displayed on 81 is finally set.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301: Yes), this means that the transfer of all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. In order to display the power-on image (not shown) on the third symbol display device 81, the simplified command determination process (S8308) is executed, and then the simplified display setting process (S8309) is executed to shift to the process of S8304. Do.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 463 to 468, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S8302) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 463 is a flowchart showing this command determination processing.

  In this command determination process (FIG. 463, S8302), first, as shown in FIG. 463, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401). (S8401: No), the command determination process is ended and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), a new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the on state is set to ON (S8402). For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the type of the command is analyzed (S8403).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S8404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), variation pattern command processing is executed. Then (S8405), the process returns to S8401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 464 (a), the details of the fluctuation pattern command processing (S8405) will be described. FIG. 464 (a) is a flowchart showing variation pattern command processing. The variation pattern command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the fluctuation pattern command processing, first, the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation effect pattern indicated by the display fluctuation pattern command is determined, and the determined fluctuation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S8501).

  Here, since the determination of the start of the change is always made several seconds or more apart in main controller 110, two or more display change pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible when two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is erroneously displayed It may be interpreted as a fluctuation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time is the shortest. Are set in the display data table buffer 233 d.

  Assuming that the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, in fact, the fluctuation effect having fluctuation time shorter than the set display data table is the main control device When indicated by 110, while the third symbol display device 81 is displaying the fluctuation effect according to the set fluctuation display data table, the next display fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 As another variable display is suddenly started, the player may feel discomfort.

  On the other hand, by setting the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having the shortest fluctuation time to the display data table buffer 233 d as in this control example, the fluctuation is actually longer than the display data table set. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main controller 110, as described later, after the fluctuation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is ended, the main display device 110 for the next display Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can easily feel the third symbol display device 81 3 You can keep watching the pattern fluctuation.

  Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S8501 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b, and it is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each of the fluctuation display data tables corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S8501 is turned on, and other fluctuation The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S8503). In the display setting process, the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d easily corresponds to which fluctuation pattern by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S8503. It can be judged.

  Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8504), 233 f is initialized to 0 (S8505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S8506), the variation pattern command is ended, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized in the process of S8505, from the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8501. At the same time that the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by the processing of S8502. The transfer data information specified in the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the image data of the sprite required in the variable display data table set in advance from the character ROM 234 for the normal video R To be transferred to the image storage area 236a of M236, to control the image controller 237.

  Further, in the display setting process, the time of the fluctuation effect defined in the fluctuation display data table is measured using the clock counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S8504, and when the fluctuation effect in the fluctuation display data table is ended. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8404 that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether there is a display suspension type command among the unprocessed commands (S8406), for display If there is a stop type command (S 8406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S 8407), and the process returns to S 840 1.

  Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S8407) will be described with reference to FIG. 464 (b). FIG. 464 (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command process. The stop type command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the audio lamp control device 114.

  In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the display stop type command is determined (S8601), and the stop type table and the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)) The stop symbol after variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set by comparing the value of the stop type counter updated every time the is executed (S8602).

  Then, among the stop symbol determination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. It sets to (S8603). Thereafter, the process returns to the process of S8401 of FIG.

  Here, as described above, in the fluctuation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation based on the data table The offset information (pattern offset information) from the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is described. In the above-described task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop symbol discrimination flag set by S8603, and the specified stop By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. And the address in which the image data corresponding to this specified 3rd design was stored is specified. The image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235 d of the resident video RAM 235 as described above.

  Referring back to FIG. 463, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8406 that there is no display stop type command (S8406: No), then it is determined whether there is a display interrupt command among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If it is determined that the display suspension command has been received (S8408: Yes), suspension command processing is executed (S8409). The details of the suspend command process (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Here, the interruption command processing (S8409) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 465 is a flow chart showing this interruption command processing (S8409).

  In the suspend command process (FIG. 465, S8409), it is determined first whether the received command is a command indicating the start of suspend (S8701). If it is determined in the process of S8701 that the received command is a command indicating the start of suspension (S8701: Yes), data indicating the type of the current display data table, the value of the pointer, and the value of the clock counter is suspended data It stores in storage area 233m (S8702), and sets an interruption continuous hitting production display data table to display data table buffer 233d (S8703). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the interrupt continuous hit effect display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8704), and the time data is set in the clock counter 233h based on the interrupt continuous hit effect display data table (S8705) The pointer 233 f is initialized (S 8706), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S8701 that the received command is not a command indicating the start of the interruption (that is, a command indicating the end of the interruption) (S8701: No), it is stored in the interruption data storage area 233m. Identifies the type of display data table, the value of pointer 233f, and the value of time counter 233h based on the current data (S8707), and updates display data table buffer 233d, pointer 233f, and time counter 233h based on the specified result Then (S8708), the process ends.

  By executing this interruption command processing, the progress status of the display effect paused (suspended) at the start of the interruption continuous hitting production is held in the interruption data storage area 233 m, and the interruption data storage area at the end of the interruption continuous hitting presentation The display mode can be resumed from the display mode at the time of interruption held at 233 m.

  Returning to FIG. 463, the description will be continued. In the process of S8408, when it is determined that there is no display interruption command (S8408: No), it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the display opening If there is a command (S8410: Yes), an opening command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the opening command process (S8411) will be described with reference to FIG. 466 (a). FIG. 466 (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display opening command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8801 is determined and read out from the data table storage area 233b and is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8802).

  Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, the time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the finalized display flag are set to OFF (S8805), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  By executing the opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8804, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8801, At the same time as the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next are specified in the third symbol display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is extracted by the processing of S8802 while extracting the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233 f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the necessary sprite image data in the set opening display data table is the character ROM 234 in advance As it will be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, and controls the image controller 237.

  Referring back to FIG. 463, the description will be continued. If it is determined in the process of S8410 that there is no display opening command (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S8412), and display is performed. If there is a command for the number of rounds (S8412: Yes), the command processing for the number of rounds is executed (S8413), and the process returns to the process of S8401.

  Here, the details of the round number command process (S8413) will be described with reference to FIG. 466 (b). FIG. 466 (b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The round number command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display round number command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The table buffer 233d is set (S8901). Next, null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S8902).

  Then, based on the number-of-rounds display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8904). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S8905), and the round number command processing ends, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8412 that there is no display round number command (S8412: No), it is then determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S8414). If there is an ending command for use (S8414: Yes), an ending command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the ending command process (S8415) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 467 is a flowchart showing the ending command process. The ending command process is to execute a process corresponding to the display ending command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b. The buffer 233d is set (S9001). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9002).

  Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S9001, time data representing the rendering time is set in the clock counter 233h (S9003), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S9004). Then, the demonstration display flag and the finalization display flag are both set to OFF (S9005), the ending command processing is ended, and the processing returns to the command determination processing.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8414 that there is no display ending command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command in the unprocessed commands (S8416), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S8416: Yes), the rear image change command processing is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 468 (a), the details of the rear image change command processing (S8417) will be described. FIG. 468 (a) is a flowchart showing the back image change command processing. The rear image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the rear image change command received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In the rear surface image change command processing, first, the rear surface image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9603) of the change of the rear surface image accompanying the reception of the rear surface image change command in the on state is set to on (S9101) . Then, among the rear surface image determination flags provided for each rear surface image type), the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the rear surface image change command is turned on, and the rear surface corresponding to other rear surface image types The image determination flag is set to off (S9102), the rear image change command processing ends, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

  In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set in the process of S9101 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set in the process of S9102. . Then, if the identified back image type is the back surface B or back surface C, as described above, part of the image data corresponding to the back image is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235 Since the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236, the transfer instruction for the image controller 237 is set.

  Further, in the task processing, when displaying any one of the plurality of back surface types is specified by the back surface type of the back image defined in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the processing of S9102 At that time, specify the back image type to be displayed, and further specify the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236?) And the address of that RAM are specified.

  Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds. Therefore, the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should not be two or more back image change commands stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc. and another command is erroneously changed to the back image It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9102, when it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received earlier is turned on. Alternatively, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image command received later may be turned on. Further, any one rear surface image change command may be extracted, and the rear surface image determination flag corresponding to the rear surface image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the rear image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to set appropriately according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8416 that there is no rear image change command (S8416: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8418). For example (S8418: Yes), error command processing is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

  Here, the details of the error command processing (S8419) will be described with reference to FIG. 468 (b). FIG. 468 (b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

  In the error command processing, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the on state is set to on (S9201). Then, among error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S9202). The process ends and returns to the command determination process.

  In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9201, the type of the generated error is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S9202, and the error type is handled. The process is executed to display a warning image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

  If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in step S9202, the error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, since the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person in charge of the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence status of the error.

  Here, it returns to the explanation of FIG. If it is determined in the process of S8418 that there is no error command (S8418: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S8420), and the process returns to S8401.

  In the process of S8401 executed again after the process of each command is executed, it is determined again whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes ), The processing of S8402 to S8420 is executed again. Then, the processes of S8401 to S8420 are repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in S8401 that there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, this command determination process finish.

  In the simplified command determination process (S8308) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)), the same process as the command determination process is performed. However, in the simplified command determination process, from the unprocessed command stored in the command buffer area, the command necessary to display the power-on image shown in FIG. 419, that is, the display fluctuation pattern command and the display stop Only the type command is extracted, and variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 464 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 464 (b)), which are processing corresponding to the respective commands, are executed. The command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

  Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (refer to FIG. 464 (a)) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image upon power on is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in the processing of S8501. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image necessary for the setting are stored in the power-on main motion image area 235a and the power-on fluctuation moving image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the processing of S8502, processing of writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 469 to 470, details of the above-described display setting process (S8303) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 469 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

  In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 469, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9301), and if the new command flag is not on, ie, off (S9301: No), It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process to be executed first, and the process of S9302 to S9304 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S9305. On the other hand, if the new flag is on (S9301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process to be executed earlier, and after setting the new command flag to off (S9302), S9303 to S9304. The processing corresponding to the new command is executed by the processing of

  In the process of S9303, it is determined whether the error occurrence flag is on (S9303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S9304).

  Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 470 (a) is a flowchart showing a warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data that causes the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image corresponding to the error that has occurred. First, with reference to the error determination flag, all the error determinations for which ON is set Warning image data for displaying on the third symbol display device 81 a warning image of an error corresponding to the flag is developed (S9401).

  In task processing, based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the warning image is specified, and for each sprite, drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio and rotation angle is performed. Determine the various required parameters.

  Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, the description returns to FIG. After the warning image setting process (S9304) or in the process of S9303, if it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, ie, off (S9303: No), the process proceeds to S9305.

  At S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 470 (b). FIG. 470 (b) is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. In this pointer update process, transfer data information of the corresponding drawing content or transfer target image data is acquired from the display data table and transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233 d and the transfer data table buffer 233 e. This is a process of updating the pointer 233 f for specifying the address to be done.

  In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233 f (S9501). That is, in principle, the pointer 233 f is updated so that only one is added each time the V interrupt processing is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined at the address "0001H" and thereafter, the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with being stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing, so each address Substantial data can be read out from the data table.

  After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the process of S9501, next, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the pointer 233f after the update is End information Is determined (S9502). As a result, if it is the End information (S9502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f is updated in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, beyond the address where the entity data is written.

  Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9503), and if it is a demonstration display data table (S9503: Yes), the display data is displayed. The time data corresponding to the rendering time of the demonstration display data table set in the table buffer 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is set to 1 for initialization (S9505), and this processing ends And return to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 ( S9506), end this processing, and return to the display setting processing. Thereby, in the display setting process, when the display data table other than the demonstration display data table, for example, the variable display data table, is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the previous address at which the End information is described Since the drawing contents of are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the end information (S9502: No), this process ends, and the process returns to the display setting process.

  Here, returning to FIG. 469, the description will be continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is acquired from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents expanded in the process of S9306 together with the warning image etc. expanded in advance, and the display coordinates for each sprite Determine various parameters necessary for drawing, such as position, magnification, and rotation angle.

  Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S9307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after subtraction is 0 or less (S9308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S 9308: No), the display setting process is ended as it is, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the clock counter 233 h is 0 or less (S 9308: Yes), it means that the effect time of the effect corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d has elapsed. At this time, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to finish the variable display and to perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the finalized display flag is on or not. (S9309).

  As a result, if the finalized display flag is off (S9309: No), the finalized display is not yet performed, and the finalized display is displayed, so the finalized display data table is first displayed in the display data table buffer 233d. The setting is made (S9310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9311). Then, the time data corresponding to the rendering time in the finalized display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after the final display flag indicating that the final display effect is being performed in the on state is set to on (S9314), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is directly copied to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233 (S9315) Return to the V interrupt processing.

  Thereby, when the variation display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variation effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. As such, the drawing contents can be set. In addition, it is possible to easily change the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to the determined display effect simply by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d to the determined display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by activating another program as in the prior art, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore, the MPU 231 does not burden much. A variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114.

  In addition, the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S9315 is used to identify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variable effect to be performed. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the fluctuation effect changes in accordance with the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago, and in the fluctuation display data table, the fluctuation based on the data table is The symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed one time ago is described until the predetermined time passes since it is started. In the task processing (S8304), until the predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed one time ago is specified from the previous stop symbol discrimination flag set in S9315, and The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the identified stop symbol. Thereby, the fluctuation effect is started from the stop symbol in the immediately preceding fluctuation effect.

  On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the finalized display flag is not off but on (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether the demonstration display flag is on (S9316). Then, if the demonstration display flag is off (S9316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less as the finalized display effect ends, so the demonstration display data table is displayed data table The buffer 233d is set (S9317), and then the null data is written to the transfer data table buffer 233e to clear the contents (S9318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), a demonstration display flag indicating that a demonstration effect is being performed in the on state is set on (S9321), this processing is ended, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

  In the process of S9316, if the demonstration display flag is on (S9316: Yes), the demonstration effect is performed after the completion of the definite display effect, which means that the demonstration effect is ended, so the display setting process is ended as it is And return to V interrupt processing. Then, in this case, as described above, various settings are performed so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process performed in the next V interruption process. The demonstration effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

  In the simplified display setting process (S8309) executed when the simplified image display flag 233c is on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)), the same process as the display setting process is performed. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on-time fluctuation images according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command for a predetermined time after the effect time of the fluctuation effect by the power-on time fluctuation image is over A process of setting a display data table defining stop display of the image (see FIGS. 419 (b) and (c)) in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 471 and 472, details of the above-described transfer setting process (S 8305) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 471 (a) is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

  In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601). Then, if the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601: Yes), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is not transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9602) to end the transfer setting process and return to the V interrupt process. Thereby, a transfer instruction for transferring image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 471 (b).

  On the other hand, if the simplified image display flag 233c is not on as a result of the process of S9601, that is, if it is off (S9601: No), all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is a resident video from the character ROM 234 It is transferred to the RAM 235. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is ended, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 471 (b), the resident image transfer setting process (S9602) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 471 (b) is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9602).

  In the resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not transfer instruction of untransferred image data is given to the image controller 237 (S9701), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S9701: Yes) Furthermore, it is determined whether the transfer process of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S9702). In the process of S9702, after the transfer instruction of the image data is issued to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing has not ended in the processing of S9702 (S9702: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this resident image transfer setting processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9702: Yes), the process moves to S9703. Also, as a result of the process of S9701, even when a transfer instruction of untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the process proceeds to S9703.

  In the process of S9703, it is determined whether all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S9703), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S9703: No) A transfer instruction to the image controller 237 is set to transfer the resident target image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended.

  As a result, transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the data described in the drawing list. The resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 based on the data information. In the transfer data information, the start address and the final address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data for residence is stored, the information of the transfer destination (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here) The start address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 to store the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes the image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer process from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a. To the designated address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  As a result of the process of S9703, if all resident target image data has been transferred (S9703: Yes), the simplified image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705), and the resident image transfer setting process is ended. Thus, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 462 (b)), the command is not the simple command determination process (see S8308 in FIG. 462 (b)) and the simple display setting process (see S8309 in FIG. 462 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 463 to 282) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 469 to 470 (a) and (b)) are performed, drawing of an image at normal time is set. An image at a normal time is displayed on the 3 symbol display device 81. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 472) (see S9601: No in FIG. 471A).

  By executing the resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 performs all residency to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 except for the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image already transferred in the main process. Object image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without being overwritten while the power is on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process is resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is on.

  Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 is used. The image drawing process can be performed in Thus, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for the reading can be omitted, and the drawing of the image can be immediately performed to display the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81.

  In particular, image data for frequently displayed images such as a back image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message in the resident video RAM 235, the main controller 110, the audio lamp controller 113, and the display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is made to reside immediately after the display is decided by the display etc., even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings The responsiveness until the third symbol display device 81 displays an image can be kept high.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 472, a normal image transfer setting process (S9603) which is one process of the transfer setting process (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control apparatus 114 will be described. FIG. 472 is a flowchart showing the normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

  In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9305) of the display setting process (S8303) executed earlier is performed. The information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9801). Then, it is determined whether the acquired information is transfer data information (S9802), and if it is transfer data information (S9802: Yes), character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored from the transfer data information The start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of, and the start address of the transfer destination (video RAM for normal use 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9803) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S9804), and the process proceeds to S9805.

  If the acquired information is not transfer data information but null data in the process of S9802 (S9802: No), the process of S9803 and S9804 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S9805. In the process of S9805, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer instruction is newly set to the image controller 237 after the previous transfer of the image data is completed (S9805), and the transfer instruction is set. If it is (S9805: Yes), it is further determined whether the transfer of the image data performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S9806).

  In the process of S9806, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed when a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237. . Then, if it is determined that the transfer processing has not ended in the processing of S9806 (S9806: No), since the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9806: Yes), the process proceeds to S9807. Further, as a result of the process of S9805, even when the transfer instruction of the image data is not set to the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer process (S9805: No), the process proceeds to S9807.

  In the process of S9807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9807), and if the transfer start flag is on (S9807: Yes), since there is image data to be transferred, the transfer start flag Is turned off (S9808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S9803 is set as the transfer target image data, and then the process proceeds to the process of S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9807: No), it is then determined whether the rear image change flag is on (S9809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S9809: No), since there is no image data to be transferred, the normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S9809: Yes), it means that the back image is changed, so after setting the back image change flag to off (S9810), the back image provided for each back image type Among the determination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S9811). Furthermore, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image determination flag in the on state is stored, and the transfer destination (normally The start address of the video RAM 236) is acquired (S9812), and the process proceeds to S9813.

  If the back image discrimination flag in the on state is that of the back A, all the corresponding image data is resident in the back image area 235 c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 There is no data. Therefore, in the process of S9812, if the back image determination flag in the on state is that of the back A, the normal image transfer process is ended as it is.

  In the process of S9813, it is determined whether transfer target image data is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). The determination in the process of S9813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the storage image data determination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite as the transfer target is the normal video If it is determined that the stored state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

  If the transfer target image data is stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S9813 (S9813: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The normal image transfer setting process is ended as it is. As a result, unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, so that the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. Can be

  On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S9813 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S9814). As a result, transfer data information of transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, it is possible to transfer the image data of the transfer target image from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start and end addresses of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the transfer target image is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, transfer) The start address of the sub area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 to store the image data of the transfer target image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on the transfer data information, reads out the image data designated by the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and designates the designated video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). To the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

  After the process of S9814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and the normal transfer setting process is ended. As described above, updating of the stored image data determination flag 233i sets the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the transfer target image data to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites to be stored in the area to "off".

  As described above, by executing the normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process previously executed, and as a result, the display stop type command is executed. When it is determined that the indicated stop type information is a stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used for the rear image. Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer 233 d in response to a command (for example, display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110. At the same time, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Then, the MPU 231 executes the normal image transfer setting process to send the image controller 237 the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233 f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233 e. Since the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233 d is reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing. Can.

  Here, in the transfer data table, image data corresponding to a predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a until drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a in accordance with the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, whereby the predetermined is performed according to the display data table. When drawing a sprite, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

  Thereby, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed, an image necessary for display can be read out from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236. The corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while drawing the image of each sprite designated in the data table. Also, by describing the transfer data table, only image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

  Further, in the transfer data table, transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that processing relating to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in units of sprites, transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, an increase in load applied to transfer can be efficiently suppressed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 473, details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S8306) which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 473 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

  In the drawing process, types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S8304) and parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, semi-transparent value, α blending information) The drawing list shown in FIG. 423 is generated from the color information, the filter specification information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305) (S9901). That is, in the process of S9901, based on the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S8304), the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite. Then, with respect to the specified storage RAM type and address, the necessary parameters for the sprite determined by the task processing are associated. Then, the sprites are rearranged in the order of the sprites to be placed on the front side from the sprites to be placed on the back side in the image for one frame, and then details for each sprite in the sprite order after the rearrangement. The drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite as proper drawing information (detailed information). When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which transfer target image data is stored as transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. , The final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

  As described above, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 where the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 According to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and the address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

  When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233 j are transmitted to the image controller (S9902). Here, in the case where the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is 1 including the information for expanding the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236 b as drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing development of the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236 c as drawing object buffer information.

  The image controller 237 draws images sequentially from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, and expands it by overwriting in the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image of one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be placed closest to the back, and the sprite drawn last can be placed closest to the front.

  If transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 storing the transfer target image data from the transfer data information And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 thereafter, and drawing of an image according to the drawing list is performed.

  The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from the frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing object buffer information, and the image information together with the drive signal is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Send to Thereby, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In addition, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 while the image drawn in one frame buffer is expanded, and the drawing process and the display process are simultaneously processed in parallel. Can.

  In the drawing process, after the process of S9902, the drawing object buffer flag 233j is updated (S9903). Then, the drawing process ends, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The update of the drawing target buffer flag 233 j is performed by inverting the value, that is, setting “1” when the value is “0”, and setting “0” when the value is “1”. To be done. Thereby, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

  Here, transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds for which the image drawing process and display process for one frame are completed. It is performed each time the drawing process of the loading process (see FIG. 462 (b)) is performed. Thus, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. The second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of a minute is read. Accordingly, the image information of the image developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

  Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer from which image information of one frame is read. Be done. Therefore, the image information of the image developed in the second frame buffer 236c earlier can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . Thereafter, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds between the frame buffer for expanding an image of one frame and the frame buffer from which image information for one frame is read. By alternately specifying, it is possible to perform display processing of an image of one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing of an image of one frame.

<Control Process of Voice Output Device in First Control Example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 in the first control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 474 to 478. First, main processing executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described with reference to FIG. 474 (a). FIG. 474 (a) is a flowchart showing the contents of this main processing.

  When the main processing of the voice output device 226 is executed, first, command determination processing for performing control according to various commands received from the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (20001). Details of the command determination process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S20001, an audio setting process for reproducing audio data (audio file) according to the effect is executed (S20001). The details of the voice setting process (S20001) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process of S20001 ends, it is determined whether or not the occurrence information of the power-off is stored in the work RAM 303 (S20003). If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S20003 (S20003: Yes), the power-off flag and the power-off process flag are both turned on (S20005), and the power-off process is executed (S20006). After execution of the power-off process, the power-off process flag is turned off (S20007), and then the process is looped endlessly.

  On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S20003 (S20003: No), it is judged based on the keyword stored in the RAM 303 whether or not the RAM 303 is destroyed (S20004) and the RAM 303 is destroyed. If not (S20004: No), the processing returns to S20001 and the main processing is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 303 is destroyed (S20004: Yes), the processing is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 474 (b), the command interruption process executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 474 (b) is a flow chart showing the contents of this command interruption process. This command interruption process (see FIG. 474 (b)) is a process executed each time a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113.

  In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the RAM 303 (S20101), and the process is ended. The various commands stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are read out by the command determination process described later, and a process corresponding to the command is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 475, a command determination process (S20001) which is one process in the main process (see FIG. 474 (a)) executed by the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226 will be described. FIG. 475 is a flowchart showing the contents of the command determination process (S20001).

  In the command determination process (S20001), first, it is determined whether there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S20201). If there is no unprocessed new command (S20201: No), the command determination process is ended. And return to the main process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S20201: Yes), a new command flag indicating that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S20202), and then the unstored in the command buffer area For all processing commands, the type of the command is analyzed (S20203).

  Then, it is first determined whether or not there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S20204). This voice change pattern command is also displayed when the display change pattern command is output (see S4205 in FIG. 455) in the change display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 455). It is set to notify the type of voice to be reproduced and the output timing according to the mode.

  If it is determined in the process of S20204 that there is an audio variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S20204: Yes), the music and sound effects to be used during execution of the notified variation pattern command are specified (S20205) ), The specified music, the output channel of the sound effect, and the output timing are set (S20206), and the process returns to S20201.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20204 that there is no variation pattern command for voice (S20204: No), then it is determined whether or not the continuous command for voice is included in the unprocessed commands ( S20207), if the voice continuous hit command is included (S20207: Yes), it means that the player has performed the continuous hit operation, so the continuous hit sound command processing for setting the playback (output) of the continuous hit sound Is executed (S20208), and the process returns to the process of S20201. The details of the continuous hit sound command processing (S20208) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20207 that the unprocessed command does not include the voice continuous hit sound command (S20207: No), then it is determined whether or not the voice interrupt command is included. (S20209), if it is determined that the voice continuous hit sound command is included in the unprocessed command (S20209: Yes), the suspend command processing for setting the suspend and resume of the BGM being played back The process is executed (S20210), and the process returns to the process of S20201. The details of the interruption command process will be described later with reference to FIG. 747. On the other hand, in the process of S20209, if there is no voice interruption command among the unprocessed commands (S20209: No), the process corresponding to the other unprocessed commands is executed (S20211), and the process returns to S20201.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 476, the details of the continuous hit sound command processing (S20208) will be described. FIG. 476 is a flowchart showing the continuous hit sound command processing (S20208). The continuous hitting sound command process (S20208) is executed in the command determination process (FIG. 475) of the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and as described above, is a process for setting reproduction (output) of the continuous hitting sound.

  In the continuous hitting sound command processing (S20208), first, it is determined whether "00H" is set to the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (S20301). If it is determined in the process of S20301 that "00H" is set to the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (S20301: Yes), the continuous hitting sound command for the first continuous hitting operation in the interrupt continuous hitting effect (see FIG. 399) In order to mean that it has been received, the process shifts to the process of S20305 in order to reproduce the first consecutive hitting sound.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that "00H" is not set to the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (S20301: No), next, whether "01H" is set to the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (S20302). In the process of S20302, when it is determined that "01H" is not set to the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (that is, the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a is "02H") (S20302: No), 1 Since it means that the continuous hitting sound outputted last time is the second continuous hitting sound in the interruption continuous hitting production, in order to reproduce the first continuous hitting sound also in this case, the process proceeds to the processing of S20305.

  In the process of S20305, playback of the voice file corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound is set for CN2 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 424) (S20305), and the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a corresponds to the first continuous hitting sound. This processing is updated (set) to "01H" (S20306), and this processing ends.

  On the other hand, in the process of S20302, if it is determined that "01H" is set as the value of the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a (that is, the continuous hitting sound output last time is the first continuous hitting sound) (S20302: Yes) The reproduction of the voice file corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound is set to CN3 of the voice synthesis unit 306 (see FIG. 424) (S20303), and the continuous hitting sound output flag 303a corresponds to the second continuous hitting sound "02H" (S20304), and the process ends.

  By executing the continuous hitting sound command processing, two types of audio data can be alternately reproduced on two channels each time a continuous hitting operation is executed, so that the audio aspect can be diversified. . In addition, in the case where only the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel (that is, the control of stopping the output of one sound being reproduced and outputting the other sound) Compared to the case where it is configured to be repeated), the other voice can also be output while maintaining the state in which one voice is output (the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are overlapped and output) Because it can be), it is possible to make the speech aspect more busy during the execution of the batting. More specifically, in the case where the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when the player performs a continuous hitting operation with a rapid hit interval, the head portion of each voice data Only in a monotonous speech mode that is alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and the other audio data on another channel is generated. Can be played. That is, speech based on one speech data and speech based on other speech data can be synthesized and output. As a result, since it is possible to easily output voices other than the head portion of each voice, it is possible to further diversify the voice aspect. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, two types of audio data (continuous hitting sound) are alternately output to two channels each time a continuous hitting operation is detected, but the present invention is not limited to this. Three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced by CN1 and CN2 in order. This makes it possible to diversify the speech aspect. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be reproduced in order for three or more channels. By this configuration, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is ended). Since the period of can be made longer, the audio aspect can be made more diversified. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be made different depending on the interval between successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval (e.g., 0.5 seconds or less) having a relatively short interval, three voice modes are sequentially played on three channels. If the player is playing a game while the interval between consecutive hits is relatively long (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval) while configuring, two types of voice data in order to two channels Reproduction may be performed (alternately). With this configuration, the voice output mode can be changed according to the continuous hitting interval, so that the game characteristics of adjusting the continuous hitting interval can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first control example, one continuous hitting sound is output interlockingly with the continuous hitting operation, but it may be possible to output the continuous hitting sound even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed under predetermined conditions . More specifically, for example, when the continuous hitting sound output last in the effective period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, although the first and second consecutive hitting sounds are output as a set in response to the continuous hitting operation, the voice output at the end becomes the first continuous hitting sound. In other words, it is possible to suppress that the voice mode becomes halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the continuous hitting sound output last is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is a fluctuation display corresponding to a predetermined fluctuation type (lottery result) ( For example, it may be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). By configuring in this way, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound output lastly during the interrupting continuous hit production is dare to be the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the game characteristics of. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first and second continuous hitting sounds are alternately output regardless of the interval between the continuous hitting of the player, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the continuous hitting operation is detected in a state where the voice is not reproduced, the first continuous hitting sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between consecutive strikes is too long and the next consecutive strike operation is performed after the completion of the reproduction of one successive strike sound, only the first successive strike sound continues to be output. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, the player who wishes to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous hitting performance. be able to.

  Next, interrupt command processing (S20210) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 477 is a flowchart showing this interruption command process (S20210). The interruption command process (S20210) is a process that is executed in the command determination process (FIG. 475) in the MPU 301 of the audio output device 226, and is a process for setting interruption and resumption of BGM being reproduced.

  In the interruption command process (S20210), first, it is determined whether or not the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (S20401). If it is determined that the received command is a command indicating the start of interruption (S20401: Yes), data indicating the reproduction position of the fluctuation BGM being reproduced is stored in the reproduction position storage area 303b (S20402), and CN1 The reproduction of BGM for the interruption continuous hitting production is set (S20403), and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S20401 that the received command is not a command indicating the start of the interruption (ie, a command indicating the end of the interruption) (S20401: No), the BGM of the interruption continuous hit presentation BGM The reproduction is ended (S20404), the data in the reproduction position storage area 303b is read (S20405), and the reproduction of BGM for variation from the read reproduction position is restarted at CN1 (S20406), and then this processing is ended.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 478, the details of the voice setting process (S20002) will be described. FIG. 478 is a flowchart showing the audio setting process (S20002). The voice setting process (S20002) is executed in the main process (FIG. 474) in the MPU 301 of the voice output device 226.

  In this voice setting process (S20002), first, it is determined whether or not the present time is a music output timing (S20501). When it is determined that the present is not the output timing of the music (S20501: No), the present processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, in the process of S20501, when it is determined that the present time is the output timing of the music (S20501: Yes), the audio file corresponding to the current music is read (S20502), and the read audio file is reproduced to the corresponding channel Then, the music output flag 303c is set to ON (S20504), and the process ends.

  As explained above, in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, when the jackpot is won, regardless of the jackpot type, after the jackpot is finished, the time symbol of the ordinary symbol is held until the drawing of the special symbol is executed 100 times. It was configured to continue the state. That is, the operation (operation mode of the motorized accessory 640a) is common to the probability variation big hit and the normal big hit until 100 lotterys of special symbols are executed after the big hit end. Then, at the time when the drawing of the special symbol 100 times after the big hit is finished, only when the gaming state is the definite variation state, the time saving state of the normal symbol continues even after 100 times. That is, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state after the big hit end, and the probability change state is set as the gaming state after the big hit end, and it is shifted to the low probability state of the special symbol within 100 times. In this case, the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended at the timing when the drawing of the special symbol of the 100th time is executed, and it is configured to shift to the normal state. By configuring in this way, it is a case where a relatively disadvantageous time saving state is set after the big hit end, or a case where it has fallen to a low probability state within 100 times after the probability changing state is set, Also, until the special symbol lottery of 100 times is executed, it becomes difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a time saving state or a definite variation state, so at least 100 special symbol drawing is executed. In the meantime, the player can continue to have a sense of expectation that the gaming state is a definite change state.

  Also, in the first control example, when the time saving state of the normal symbol is at the jackpot winning time, the gaming state is set to the normal state at the start of the variable display to indicate the jackpot (normal symbol time saving state End)). By configuring in this way, it is possible to limit the case where the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended within 100 times after the big hit end, to the case where the fluctuation pattern of the big hit is started, so after the big hit end, 100 During the execution of the variable display production within the times, the behavior with high probability that the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended (for example, the variation time of the normal symbol exceeds 3 seconds, or the normal symbol lottery is out) And when the pattern of 0.2 seconds.times.1 is executed as the opening pattern of the motorized role product 640a), the player can be pleased. Therefore, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the lottery result of the normal symbol, the operation mode of the electric role piece 640a and the like until the lottery of the special symbol is executed 100 times after the big hit end.

  Further, in the first control example, the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 enables the player to predict the possibility of the probability change state to a certain extent. More specifically, while in the gaming state in which the time saving state of the normal pattern is set, the cave search mode with a relatively low expectation of the probability change state, the temple search mode with a relatively high expectation of the probability change state, and It is determined that there is a drawing result corresponding to a fall within the hold on the certain thing (it is determined that the definite change state continues at least until the hold is absorbed). One of them is set at the time of execution of the variable display effect based on the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, it is possible to give the player the pleasure of predicting the current gaming state from the back mode while the time saving state of the normal symbol is set, so that the player has an interest in the game. It can be improved. In addition, since it is determined that the gaming state is a definite change state by setting the super temple search mode, if the player is transitioned to the super temple mode while predicting that the game state is a positive change state, It is possible to bring joy to the fact that one's own prediction was correct. On the other hand, when transitioning to the super temple mode even though the special symbol is predicted to be in a low probability state, the player feels pleasure in having been set to a gaming state more advantageous than expected. It can be turned. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. Furthermore, by setting the super temple mode, it is determined that the draw result corresponding to the fall is not included in the hold (at least the draw for the number of holding balls is executed with the jackpot probability of the definite change state) Because it is possible, it is possible to play the game with greater expectation of becoming a big hit in the hold.

  Also, in the first control example, regardless of the gaming state, over the fluctuation display of the specific range which is executed before the drawing of 100 special symbols for which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed is finished ( That is, just before the lottery of the special symbol of 100 times is over, over the 96th to 99th variable display after the big hit end), the definite change continuation indication effect for notifying whether the definite change state is continuing or not It has a configuration to execute. When starting this definite variation continuation indication effect, look ahead to the lottery results from the 96th to 99th runs, which is the execution range of the constant variation continuation indication effect, and whether or not the definite variation state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery If it is determined that the probability change state continues until the 99th special symbol lottery, the selection rate of the rendering scenario in which the attack pattern with high expectation is likely to occur is increased. On the other hand, if it has fallen to a short time before the 99th special symbol lottery is executed (or if the time after the previous big hit was short), an attack pattern with a low expectation occurs The selection rate of the easy-to-make presentation scenario is high. As described above, by setting the effect mode based on the gaming state at the end of the effect, the gaming state after the end of the effect can be notified more accurately. Here, if it is configured to execute the definite variation continuation indication effect based on only the gaming state at the start of the effect, it falls to a low probability state during the execution of the positive variation continuation indication effect, and the notification of the continuation of the positive condition state Nevertheless, there is a risk that the time saving state will be ended with the start of the 100th special symbol lottery. In this case, there is a possibility that the player may have a feeling of mistrust to the pachinko machine 10 or the hole due to the contradiction between the effect contents and the actual operation. In addition, as a measure against this, there is also a method in which a definite variation continuation suggestion effect is configured by a effect that is completed by one change, but with this method, it is difficult to secure a sufficient effect period. It becomes difficult to On the other hand, in the first control example, the definite variation continuation indication suggestion is executed over the last four fluctuation displays in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is guaranteed, and the notification content of the positive variation continuation indication indication is The determination is made based on the gaming state at the time when the final drawing of the special symbol in the execution range of the definite variation continuation effect is performed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to diversify the effect mode while making it possible to accurately notify the gaming state at the end of the effect. In addition, when it is a definite change state at the time of effect start, and the holding ball until the end of effect is not held, it is configured such that an effect that is relatively easy to generate an attack pattern with a high degree of expectation is selected. ing. This is lower than the probability that the lottery result corresponding to the fall will be a big hit, it is extremely rare to fall to the low probability state of the special symbol within the production period (relatively high probability probability change It is for the effect to end).

  Further, in the first control example, as a kind of the entertainment effect, it is possible to execute the press stop effect that the stop operation of each symbol row is executed according to the operation timing of the player to the PUSH button 10317. This depression stop effect is basically an effect that suggests that there is a possibility of developing into a chance charge effect. In this depression stop production, each symbol row is stopped and displayed in a mere combination in accordance with the depression timing of the player if it does not develop to chance charge production, but if it develops to chance charge production, it is a chance The charge symbol is stopped (simulated) and the progress to the chance charge presentation is notified. As described above, by changing the stop timing of each symbol row according to the pressing timing of the player, the timing at which the player is notified of whether or not to develop the chance charge effect can be set as the timing preferred by the player. It can be adjusted. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, in the pressing and stopping effect that does not develop into the chance charge effect, at least the mode at the time of the stop display of the central symbol line is made different according to the timing when the stopping operation is performed on all the symbol lines. More specifically, when the prescribed number of times (three times) of stop operations are completed within a predetermined period (one second) (that is, a relatively early stage) after the start of the effective period of the stop operation, the effect is relatively displayed. If the stop display of the central symbol row is performed by chance charge turn effect with a long time, while the predetermined number of stop operations are completed after the predetermined period (one second) elapses, the central symbol row is immediately detached. An effect (that is, a relatively short effect) to be stopped and displayed with a symbol is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the period after the stop display becomes too long or on the contrary by the completion timing of the stop operation of the player, and it is not based on the completion timing of the stop operation. It is possible to make the transition of the presentation mode up to the stop display of the outlying design appear natural. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an effect mode with less discomfort. In addition, in the press stop effect in the first control example, although different button images and valid period gauges are displayed for each symbol row on the display screen, the PUSH button 10317 is actually performed by a single operation valid period. It is determined whether or not the operation of (1) is to be validated. Then, according to the number of times the stop operation (press on the PUSH button 10317) is performed in the operation valid period of 1, the symbol row for setting the stop display is varied (determines whether the stop operation for all symbol rows has been performed Yes). This makes it possible to simplify the determination as to whether or not the stop operation of each symbol row is to be made effective, so that the processing load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  Further, in the first control example, chance charge presentation can be performed as a kind of entertainment presentation. This chance charge effect is the number of times (minimum guarantee number of times) that a specific effect mode (chance up effect) is performed within a predetermined number of changes (during the time all the holding balls are suspended at the start of the effect). It is an effect of an aspect which indicates (informs) the player in advance. The guaranteed number of chance-up effects reported in this chance charge effect (the number of gauges of accumulated gage gauges) generates some chance-up effects at each timing until the holding ball is consumed at the start of the chance charge effect. To be consumed. Here, the chance-up effect is an effect that increases the expectation of the jackpot, for example, changes in the display mode of the number-of-held-balls pattern, the occurrence of so-called pseudo-links, the occurrence of cut-in effects, red letters The generation of the words of The gas gauge is designed to be consumed until it reaches zero. That is, it is configured so as not to be discarded without being consumed. By configuring in this manner, the player can easily grasp the remaining number of chance-up effects, so it is possible to play a game looking forward to what kind of chance-up effects will occur next. . Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In the first control example, the gage amount of the gage gauge stored in the chance charge effect is determined based on the number of holding balls at the start of the chance charge effect. Then, after the completion of the chance charge effect, the pace at which the chance-up effect is performed (that is, the consumption gauge is consumed) is changed in consideration of the lottery result of each holding ball. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to reduce the processing load at the start of the chance charge presentation (processing load when determining the number of gauges).

  Further, in the first control example, as a kind of entertainment effect, it is configured to be able to execute an interruption continuous hitting effect. This interruption continuous hitting presentation is a presentation of a display mode as if the presentation of an aspect different from the display presentation which had been displayed suddenly during the normal fluctuation display or reach fluctuation suddenly cuts in, and the player On the other hand, it is comprised by the production | presentation of the production | presentation aspect which urges to operate the PUSH button 10317 by specific operation aspect (continuous hit operation aspect). In this interruption continuous hitting production, the stage showing the effect aspect is developed according to the player's continuous hitting operation (the number of displayed monsters is reduced), the effect which shows that the degree of expectation of becoming a big hit is high is there. As a result, since the player can be made to perform the continuous hitting operation positively, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to participate in the interruption continuous hitting presentation. In this case, it is determined that the additional time command is not a command indicating 0 seconds (a command indicating 7 seconds) among the basic time command constituting the variation pattern command and the additional time command. It is an effect that may be executed. Here, the fluctuation time is set by the sum of the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time notified by the additional time command. And when execution of interruption continuation hitting production is decided, executing interruption continuation hitting production with period of the same length as the addition time which is notified with addition time command, usual fluctuation indicatory production (execution of interruption continuation hitting execution With regard to the effect mode of the period other than the period, the effect mode of the period having the same length as the basic time notified by the basic time command is set. By configuring in this way, even if the variable display effect in which the interruption continuous hitting effect is set is executed, it is possible to use the effect mode corresponding to the basic time command, so the storage capacity of the pachinko machine 10 is reduced can do.

  Moreover, in the interruption continuous hitting production in the first control example, plural types of voice data (voice data corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound and voice data corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound) every time the continuous hitting operation is executed. The audio data of 1) is reproduced from the above. More specifically, when the odd-numbered consecutive hitting operation is detected in the effective period of the continuous hitting operation in 1 interruption continuous hitting production, the voice data corresponding to the first continuous hitting sound is reproduced to CN2 in the voice synthesis unit 306 On the other hand, when the even-numbered continuous hitting operation is detected, the voice data corresponding to the second continuous hitting sound is reproduced to CN3 in the voice synthesis unit 306. As described above, each time a continuous hitting operation is performed, one of a plurality of different voice data is output to any of a plurality of different channels (a first continuous hitting sound and a second continuous hitting sound as CN1 and CN2). By alternately outputting, it is possible to diversify the voice aspect while performing the continuous hitting operation. In other words, since it is possible to suppress that the voice mode becomes monotonous, it is possible to improve the interest to the player's game during the continuous hitting effective period. In addition, in the case where only the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel (that is, the control of stopping the output of one sound being reproduced and outputting the other sound) Compared to the case where it is configured to be repeated), the other voice can also be output while maintaining the state in which one voice is output (the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are overlapped and output) Because it can be), it is possible to make the speech aspect more busy during the execution of the batting. More specifically, in the case where the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately reproduced on a single channel, when the player performs a continuous hitting operation with a rapid hit interval, the head portion of each voice data Only in a monotonous speech mode that is alternately repeated. On the other hand, if a plurality of audio data are sequentially reproduced on a plurality of channels, the output of one audio data reproduced on one channel is not interrupted, and the other audio data on another channel is generated. Can be played. That is, speech based on one speech data and speech based on other speech data can be synthesized and output. As a result, since it is possible to easily output voices other than the head portion of each voice, it is possible to further diversify the voice aspect. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  Moreover, in the interruption continuous hitting production in the first control example, the subtraction number of the monster increases as the pressing timing becomes later (the remaining time of the effective period decreases) in the effective period in which the continuous hitting operation becomes effective It is configured such that the stage of high expectation degree stage is easily set. As a result, even if the player presses the PUSH button 10317 at a fast pace, it is possible to suppress early defeat of the lower limit number of monsters. That is, it is possible to suppress the player's expectation of the jackpot from being lost because the remaining 10 bodies that are easily set in the case of detachment and the remaining four bodies stop the subtraction of the number of monsters based on the press. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved. In addition, even when the player who is slow in pressing is playing a game, if the pressing is performed in the second half of the continuous hitting effective period, a relatively large number of defeats is easily selected, so the lower limit is reached among the number of monsters. The possibility can be increased. As a result, the player can enjoy the interruption continuous hitting presentation even for the player who has a slow pace of pressing, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, in the first control example, as a kind of interest effect, the plurality of reserved ball number symbols being held are changed to a specific mode (a display mode like an appearance like a rock) different from the normal design mode. Is configured to be executable. In this pending collective change effect, at least one pending ball number symbol by the player performing a specific operation (a pressing operation on the PUSH button 10317) after the plurality of pending ball number symbols are changed to a specific mode. However, an effect is performed in which the degree of expectation is changed to a mode having a higher degree of expectation than the reserved symbol mode before being changed to the specific mode. Execution of the simultaneous change-in-hold effect determines that the degree of expectation indicated by the at least one open ball number symbol pattern is increased, so that the player's expectation for the jackpot can be improved. In addition, since it is not known until which PUSH button 10317 is pressed, which ball number symbol pattern changes (the degree of expectation rises). Can be done. Furthermore, since the degree of expectation is notified by pressing the PUSH button 10317, the notification timing can be adjusted to the timing preferred by the player. Therefore, the convenience of the player can be improved.

  In the first control example, during execution of the interruption continuous hitting production, the voice aspect is reproduced by alternately reproducing two types of audio data for two channels each time pressing of the PUSH button 10317 is detected. Although the configuration has been diversified, the present invention is not limited to this, and three or more types of audio data may be alternately reproduced to CN1 and CN2 in order. This makes it possible to diversify the speech aspect. Further, in this case, the number of channels for reproducing the audio data is not limited to two, and the audio data may be reproduced in order for three or more channels. By this configuration, after one audio data is reproduced for one channel, the next audio data is reproduced for the same channel (the audio data being reproduced is ended). Since the period of can be made longer, the audio aspect can be made more diversified. Furthermore, the type of audio data to be output may be made different depending on the interval between successive hits. Specifically, for example, when a player playing a game with a relatively short interval (e.g., 0.5 seconds or less) having a relatively short interval, three voice modes are sequentially played on three channels. If the player is playing a game while the interval between consecutive hits is relatively long (for example, an interval longer than 0.5 second interval) while configuring, two types of voice data in order to two channels Reproduction may be performed (alternately). With this configuration, the voice output mode can be changed according to the continuous hitting interval, so that the game characteristics of adjusting the continuous hitting interval can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In the first control example, one of the consecutive hitting sounds is output interlockingly with the continuous hitting operation during execution of the interruption continuous hitting production, but under the predetermined condition, the continuous hitting sound is outputted even if the continuous hitting operation is not performed. It may be configured to be able to output. More specifically, for example, when the continuous hitting sound output last in the effective period of the continuous hitting operation is the first continuous hitting sound, the second continuous hitting sound may be output after the end. With this configuration, although the first and second consecutive hitting sounds are output as a set in response to the continuous hitting operation, the voice output at the end becomes the first continuous hitting sound. In other words, it is possible to suppress that the voice mode becomes halfway. Therefore, the voice mode can be set more suitably. In this case, when the continuous hitting sound output last is the first continuous hitting sound, the control to output the second continuous hitting sound after the end is a fluctuation display corresponding to a predetermined fluctuation type (lottery result) ( For example, it may be set only during execution of the jackpot fluctuation). By configuring in this way, for the player who wants to know whether or not it is a predetermined variation type, the continuous hitting sound output lastly during the interrupting continuous hit production is dare to be the first continuous hitting sound. It is possible to realize the game characteristics of. Thus, the interest of the player in the game can be improved.

  In the first control example, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately output regardless of the interval between the continuous hitting of the player during execution of the interrupting continuous hit production, but it is limited to this is not. For example, when the continuous hitting operation is detected in a state where the voice is not reproduced, the first continuous hitting sound may be output without fail. That is, if the interval between consecutive strikes is too long and the next consecutive strike operation is performed after the completion of the reproduction of one successive strike sound, only the first successive strike sound continues to be output. It may be configured. By configuring in this way, the player who wishes to diversify the voice mode can execute the continuous hitting operation at a faster pace, thereby improving the player's willingness to participate in the interrupt continuous hitting performance. be able to.

  In the first control example, each time a continuous hitting operation is detected, voice data (voice file) corresponding to the first hit sound and voice data (voice file) corresponding to the second hit sound alternate in different channels. The audio data may be reproduced differently (or the audio data may be subjected to predetermined processing) under predetermined conditions. More specifically, for example, the playback speed may be changed (or the audio data may be processed) so that the output period of each hit sound is variable according to the interval between the player's hit operations. . That is, when the interval of the player's continuous hitting operation is longer than a predetermined interval (for example, one second interval), the output period may be configured to be long (for example, 1.5 seconds or more). By configuring in this way, even when a player with a long batting interval is playing a game, it is relatively easy to overlap and output the other batting tone during the output of one batting tone, The audio aspect can be diversified. In this first control example, the first continuous hitting sound and the second continuous hitting sound are alternately output (reproduced) to different channels based on the execution of the continuous hitting operation, but the present control Is not limited to the case based on the continuous hitting operation. The same control may be performed when outputting a start winning sound based on a start winning or when outputting a winning sound based on detection of a winning on the specific winning opening 65a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to more preferably output the voice, so it is possible to further improve the player's interest in the game. Further, the present control can be adopted also when outputting a sound effect in which an output period is set in advance as part of the variable display effect. By configuring in this manner, when sound effects and the like are continuously output in a relatively short time, it is possible to more preferably output the voice, thereby further improving the interest of the player in the game. it can.

  In the first control example, if the execution timing of the interruption continuous hitting production is before reaching, both the display mode and the voice mode are interrupted to execute the interruption continuous hitting presentation, while the execution timing of the interruption continuous hitting presentation is in the reach effect If it is, only the display mode is interrupted to execute the interruption continuous hitting effect, but it is not limited to this. For example, in the interruption continuous hitting production executed before reaching, only the display mode is interrupted, while in the interruption continuous hitting execution executed after reaching, both the display mode and the sound mode are interrupted. Good. Since the sound output before reaching is relatively plain, it is difficult to disturb the sound of the interruption continuous hitting presentation without interrupting the output. On the other hand, since a loud voice is likely to be output after reaching, it is possible to prevent the voice of the continuous shooting strike effect from being hard to hear by interrupting the voice mode. Therefore, it is possible to more preferably set the sound mode of the interruption continuous hitting effect. Further, for example, both the display mode and the voice mode may be suspended regardless of the execution timing of the interruption continuous hitting effect, and conversely, only the display mode may be suspended regardless of the execution timing. . Moreover, it is not limited to the control which switches the object (at least one of the voice mode and the display mode) to be interrupted according to the execution timing of the interruption continuous hitting effect, and it may be controlled to switch according to other conditions . More specifically, for example, it may be configured to determine whether to suspend both the voice and the display or to suspend only one of them by lottery at the start of the continuous shooting effect. In this case, the probability that it is determined to interrupt both may be made different depending on whether it is a jackpot or a jackpot. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game paying attention to whether both the voice and the display are interrupted or only one is interrupted. Can improve the interest for Further, in the first control example, only the effect with 7 seconds of presentation time is provided as the interruption continuous hitting presentation, but a plurality of interruption continuous hitting presentation with different presentation times may be provided. In this case, by providing a command indicating an additional time different from 0 seconds and 7 seconds as the additional time command, an interruption continuous hitting presentation of production time according to the additional time notified by the additional time command is performed You may configure it. As a result, it is possible to further diversify the effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game. Also, instead of or in addition to increasing the variation of the additional time that can be notified by the additional time command, the total notified by the variation pattern command (that is, the basic time notified by the basic time command and the additional time command The composition time of the production time of the interruption continuous hitting production so that the difference between the fluctuation time of the addition time notified by and the production time of the interruption continuous hitting production becomes the basic time which can be notified by the basic time command It may be More specifically, for example, in the case where the fluctuation time of 67 seconds is notified of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach B, 37 seconds as the production time of the interruption continuous hitting production so that 30 seconds as the basic time of the normal reach will be left. May be set. By configuring in this way, just by setting the effect mode for 30 seconds, which is the basic time, together with the effect time of the interruption continuous hitting effect, just end the fluctuation display effect in time with the end of the fluctuation time. Since it is possible, it is possible to suitably set the effect mode of the variable display effect in which the interrupt continuous hit effect is set, without providing a dedicated variable display mode of the interrupt continuous hit effect. In addition, when adopting this control (control to determine the effect time of the interruption continuous hitting production so that the fluctuation time for the basic time remains), executing the interruption continuous hitting presentation even if the additional time is 0 seconds it can. That is, the present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine 10 having a specification in which the additional time command does not exist in the first place. Therefore, since the execution opportunity of the interruption continuous hitting production can be increased, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player in the game.

  In this first control example, when the number of times of drawing the special symbol exceeds 100 times after the big hit and the definite change state continues, the low of the special symbol is based on the drawing result corresponding to the fall. While it was made to fall to a probability state and it was made to end the time saving state of a normal symbol, it is not restricted to this. The condition for ending the time saving state of the normal symbol may be different from the condition for falling to the low probability state of the special symbol even after the number of drawing times of the special symbol exceeds 100 times. Specifically, for example, even if it is configured to execute the lottery at the start of fluctuation separately from the fall lottery from the definite change state, whether or not the time reduction state of the normal symbol is to be dropped to the normal state of the normal symbol. Good. For example, when it becomes a specific lottery result by the lottery of a special symbol, it is good also as composition which ends only a time saving state. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state of the normal symbol is ended, it can be configured such that the definite variation state of the special symbol may continue, so immediately after the time shortening state of the normal symbol is ended It is possible to suppress the player from quitting the game and to continue the game in anticipation that the special variation state of the special symbol is continuing. Therefore, the operation rate of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

  In this first control example, although it was configured to uniformly set the number of holding balls number pattern based on the starting winning combination detected after the start of the holding batch change production to the holding symbol pattern of white holding, it is not limited to this . For example, it is good also as composition which performs a lottery of a reservation pattern aspect using a reservation change lottery table 222c (refer to Drawing 414 (a)) about a new number-of-ball-holding number pattern. As a result, it is possible to have a feeling of expectation of becoming a big hit against not only the number-of-held-balls pattern that is the object of the held collective change effect but also the number-of-held-balls number pattern based on the new starting winning combination. Further, for example, a new start winning combination detected after the start of the pending collective change presentation may be added to the target of the pending collective change presentation. In this case, it may be configured to always add the number-of-hold ball number design based on the new start winning combination to the target of the pending collective change effect, or as the configuration to be added to the target of the pending collective change effect only under predetermined conditions. It is also good. In addition, as predetermined conditions, for example, when the winning combination information corresponding to the new start winning combination indicates the jackpot expectation degree of being out of the super reach, it may be configured to be included in the execution target of the batch change staging effect. For example, only when winning information corresponding to a change type having a higher degree of expectation than the holding ball in the range in which the holding batch change presentation is set is newly notified, the configuration is included in the execution target of the holding batch change presentation It is also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of expectation for jackpot when the number-of-held balls number design based on the new start winning combination is added to the execution target of the held batch change presentation.

<Second control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 516, a second control example will be described. In the first control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 411, the gaming state is the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol), the definite variation state (the high probability state of the special symbol, ordinary It is possible to set the high probability state of the symbol) and the short time state (low probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol), and win the big hit of the special symbol lottery (special figure lottery), fall of the falling lottery, special The game state is configured to be variably set based on the number of times of figure fluctuation (the number of times of special figure lottery).

  On the other hand, in the second control example, in addition to the normal state, the probability change state, and the short time state, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of ordinary symbol) can be set as gaming state Configured. Moreover, it is comprised so that a small hit may be won in a part when not having won a big hit in a special figure lottery. Here, small hits that can be won in the special drawing lottery will be described.

  When a small hit is won in the special figure lottery, a small hit game different from the big hit game performed when the big hit is selected is executed. In this control example, the small hit game is configured so that the amount of bonus (number of winning balls) awarded to the player is smaller than that of the big hit game. Specifically, the variable winning device 65 is used in the big hit game. The small game is configured to execute the round game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened for only one round, while the small game is configured to execute the round game in which the open operation is performed for five or more rounds. Further, after the end of the jackpot game, a gaming state corresponding to the winning jackpot type is set. In other words, while it is configured to be able to vary the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, and the gaming state set after the jackpot game is finished, when it is won in the small hit, small It is configured such that the gaming state at the time of winning the winning and the gaming state set after the small hitting game can not be varied.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the high probability state of the normal symbol is low probability based on having won the small hit in the special drawing lottery in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (probability change state, time saving state) It is configured to shift to the state. That is, as a condition (time reduction end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, the first time reduction end condition (special figure fluctuation number of times 100 times provided in the first control example described above) In addition to the above, the second short time ending condition (small hit winning) is provided. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  In this control example, a plurality of small hitting types set in the case of winning a small hitting (a small hitting A, a small hitting B) are provided, and the set small hitting category is a specific small hitting category (small hitting A) In addition, the second time-shortening end condition described above is established. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state only when the specific small hitting type is won, so the high probability state of the normal symbol ends based on the small hitting win. It is possible to set when and when not finished. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  In this control example, as in the first control example described above, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and based on the small hit winning Even when the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation. Thus, regardless of the trigger for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol is ended for the player by making the timing for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol the same. It is possible to make it difficult to understand what the reason for this is.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when the specific small hitting type (small hitting A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice), the above-described second time saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  In the above description, the game state (short time state, positive change state) where the motorized character 640A is easy to open is generally set to a high probability state of the normal symbol The easy gaming state (the gaming state in which the high probability state of the common drawing is set) is also referred to simply as the time saving state.

  In addition, in this control example, when a small hit is won in the special figure lottery, a plurality of small hit types can be set, but the same small hit game is also possible when any small hit type is set. Configured to be run. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the small hitting type set this time based on the small hitting game playing mode (opening operation mode of the variable winning device 65). Therefore, each time a small hit game is executed, a time reduction end condition (second time reduction end condition for ending the time saving state by predicting whether or not a specific small hit type (small hit A) is set. ) Can be enjoyed until the establishment of.

  In this control example, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, it is set based on the number of times of special figure fluctuation in a period in which the time saving state is set or the specific small winning (small hitting A) winning count. The time reduction end condition is set, but not limited to this, for example, the number of times of fluctuation of a specific special figure type (for example, the second special symbol (special figure 2)) as the number of times of special figure fluctuation (The number of lottery times) The number of times that the special feature fluctuation number accumulated only, the number of outliers for which the result of the special pattern lottery is off (lottery result other than jackpot win, jackpot win) A time saving end condition may be established which is satisfied when a predetermined number of times is reached.

  In the first control example mentioned above, when a definite change state or time saving state is set after the big hit game end, time saving state (high probability state of normal symbol) is guaranteed until the number of times of special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times. In contrast, in the second control example, the second time reduction end condition can be established before the number of times the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times. And, if the second time shortening end condition is satisfied before the special figure fluctuation number of times reaches 100 times, the time reduction state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is based on the second time shortening end condition being satisfied. It is configured to end.

  In the second control example configured in this way, the back mode effect described with reference to FIGS. 390 and 391 of the first control example described above (high probability state of special symbol based on lottery result of falling lottery) In the effect for suggesting to the player whether or not it has ended, it is configured to notify that the time saving state has ended. Thereby, it is possible to execute the back mode effect according to the gaming state variably set according to the lottery result of the falling lottery and the presence or absence of the time saving end condition. The detailed content of this back mode effect will be described later.

<About the contents of effects in the pachinko machine of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 479-FIG. 487, the contents of effects performed in the pachinko machine 10 of the second control example will be described.

  Here, with reference to FIGS. 479 to 481, the contents of the above-described back mode effect will be described. FIG. 479 (a) shows an example of an effect to be executed when the prize information (prize information indicating small winning A winning) indicating that the second time short completion condition is satisfied in the temple search mode is on hold FIG. 479 (b) is a schematic view showing an example of an effect to be executed when the special figure 2 variation having won the small hit A is started during the temple search mode. Note that among the display elements shown in the respective drawings, the display elements that are the same as in the first control example described above are given the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 479 (a) shows the display screen during the special figure 2 variation where the special figure variation count is 77th since the end of the big hit game, and in the display area 802, the special figure variation count "23 times" is displayed as a remaining period display mode which shows the remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) until 100 reaches 100 times. Then, as shown in FIG. 479 (a), if there is a special figure 2 reserve (displayed with the letter "small" in the figure) having the prize information indicating that the small hit A will be won, the temple The effect of shaking the pillars of the temple is executed, and the word “pinch” is displayed on the pillars of the temple. Then, in the display area 812 in which a comment for suggesting a game situation is displayed, a comment of "What is it? What ?!" is displayed.

  By setting such a display mode, it is possible for the player to think that the time saving state is established until the number of times of special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times, and thus the time saving state as in the first control example. Compared to setting the guaranteed number of times the game is executed, it is possible to suppress the game from becoming monotonous.

  Further, in the present control example, when the above-mentioned second time-shortening completion condition is satisfied, or when the big win is won in the special figure lottery, the special figure fluctuation frequency reaches 100 times after the big hit game is over By the time, the time saving state is configured to end. Therefore, by executing the end suggestion effect which suggests that the time saving state shown in FIG. 479 (a) is ended, the jackpot winning which becomes advantageous to the player, or the end of the time saving state which becomes disadvantageous to the player It can be suggested that either is set. As a result, the player can be made to pay attention to the effect result of the end suggestion effect, and it is possible to suppress the player from getting bored early in the game.

  In the present control example, the termination suggestion effect (see FIG. 479 (a)) is executed when the special-image-pending reserve stored contains the winning information satisfying the condition for terminating the time saving state. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, as in this control example, the small hitting type set at the time of small hitting winning and the small hitting number of times the specific small hitting type is set In the pachinko machine 10 configured to establish the second time-short end condition based on the end suggestion effect is executed based on the small hit win, or the end suggestion effect is executed based on the type of the small hit type set. You may run it. Also, in this case, it is configured that it is easier for the end suggestion effect to be executed than winning in the small hitting type that can not become a success trigger, if the small hitting type that can trigger the establishment of the second time shortening end condition is elected. Furthermore, it is preferable that the end suggestion effect is more easily performed as the number of times of winning of the small hitting type that can become a formation opportunity approaches the number of times of winning where the second time shortening end condition is satisfied.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to predict to the player whether or not the time saving end condition is likely to be established in accordance with the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect, so how often the end suggestion effect is The player can be made to watch if it is being executed. Therefore, the rendering effect can be enhanced. Also, the execution frequency of the termination suggestion effect may be varied based on whether or not the high probability state (probability state) of the special symbol is set. It is good to constitute so that end suggestion production may be performed more easily than the case where is set.

  That is, in the state in which the probability change state is set, the probability of winning a jackpot in the special drawing lottery is higher than in the case where the time reduction state is set; Even if the state ends, it is possible to increase the rate of ending the time saving state triggered by the jackpot win. Therefore, in the case where the probability change state is set, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation for the end suggestion effect by making the end suggestion effect easier to be executed than in the case where the time saving state is set. .

  It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited thereto, and the termination suggestion effect may be more difficult to be executed when the probability change state is set than when the time saving state is set, or after the big hit game is over. If the time reduction state is set, and if the probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game and then transition to the time reduction state based on having won the fall lottery, the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect is different It may be configured to In addition, if the execution frequency of the end suggestion effect is different on the basis of the period (number of times of special chart fluctuation) required from winning the fall after setting the definite change state and the elapsed period (number of times of special chart fluctuation) after winning the fall It may be configured to

  Then, when time elapses from the state shown in FIG. 479 (a) and the special figure fluctuation that the second time shortening end condition is satisfied is started, the display screen shown in FIG. 479 (b) is displayed. In this control example, the time reduction state (normal pattern high probability state) is ended at the start timing of the special figure variation in which the second time reduction end condition is satisfied, and the lottery result of the special figure lottery is a big hit Also, since it is configured to end the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) at the start timing of the special figure change, in any case, the display screen shown in FIG. 479 (b) is displayed Be done.

  FIG. 479 (b) shows a scene of an effect in which the main character 801 falls into the pit 820, and the display area 806 displays “the temple as the end notification mode 822 indicating that the time saving state has ended. The characters "end of search" are displayed, and the characters "left-handed" are displayed as a notification notification form 821 for guiding the player to the gaming method after the end of the time saving state. Then, a comment of "It's a pitfall !!" is displayed as a display mode 812 for notifying the player of the contents of the effect being executed. In the display area 802, "? Times" is displayed as a remaining period display mode indicating a remaining period (remaining fluctuation period) until the number of times the special map fluctuation reaches 100 times.

  Next, the continuation of the effects shown in FIG. 479 (b) will be described with reference to FIGS. 480 and 481. FIG. 480 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the effect contents displayed when the effect result of pitfall effect is a big hit, and FIG. 480 (b) is the effect result of pitfall effect It is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the contents of an effect displayed when it is an end of time saving state. 480 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the contents of the effect displayed during the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation after the end of the big hit game and the 99th rotation, and FIG. 481 (b) is It is the schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen which shows the presentation result of the fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation | variation of the 99th rotation after the end of a big hit game.

  When the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479 (b) described above is executed based on the jackpot winning of the special drawing lottery, as shown in FIG. 480 (a), a display mode in which the character 801 finds the treasure box 807 Is displayed, and in the display area Ds3 indicating the lottery result of the special symbol, the display mode of "333" indicating the jackpot winning is displayed. Then, “right-handed” is displayed in the display areas 821 and 823 as a guide display mode for showing the gaming method in the big hit game, and the display area 806 is “lottery result notification mode for showing a big hit win”. The comment of treasure discovery !! is displayed.

  On the other hand, when the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479 (b) described above is executed based on the establishment of the second time short completion condition, the character 801 goes through the woods as shown in FIG. 480 (b). Wow background mode (lost child mode) is set. This lost child mode is a latent condition (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol) by the establishment of the second time short end condition during the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) Normal condition (low probability state of special symbol, normal symbol) by the establishment of the second time short end condition when the state is set, and during the short time state (low probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) Low probability state) is set.

  As described above, when the stray mode is set, since the symbol is in a low probability state of the normal symbol, "left-handed" is displayed in the display areas 821 and 823 as a guidance display mode for showing the game method to the player. In the display area 806, characters of "lost child mode entry" are displayed to indicate that "lost child mode" is set as the background mode. In addition, a display mode "341" indicating a small hit (small hit A) is displayed in the display area Ds3 indicating the lottery result of the special symbol.

  This "lost child mode" is configured to be set continuously until the number of times of special figure variation executed after the big hit game ends reaches 99 times, and the special figure 99 after the big hit ends When the change is executed, as shown in FIG. 481 (a), an effect is performed in which the character 801 stands on a branch and selects the traveling direction. Then, when the character 801 walks in the selected direction of movement, as shown in FIG. 481 (b), a game state notification mode 821 for indicating the current game state is displayed.

  According to the example shown in FIG. 481 (b), a game state notification mode 821 indicating that the current game state is the normal state is displayed, and “in the normal state” is displayed in the display area 806. The words "to mode" are displayed, and the background mode effect is ended. On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, the character of "continuation" is displayed as the game state notification mode 821 when the current game state is the latent state at the stage where the special figure fluctuation is executed 99 times after the big hit end. It is displayed, and the lost child mode continues until the gaming state shifts from the latent state to the normal state by the fall lottery.

  That is, in the present control example, when the stray mode is set even after the special pattern fluctuation is executed 99 times after the big hit, it is determined that the latent state is set. . In this way, during the predetermined period (99 special feature fluctuations) after the end of the jackpot game, even if the time saving state ends, it is played whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state After making the jackpot game is over by executing the effect to make it easy for the player to understand the current gaming state after the predetermined period (special pattern fluctuation 99 times) has been made incomprehensible It is possible to make it difficult for the player to stop the game while (the special figure fluctuation of 99 times) has elapsed, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game. In addition, after the predetermined period (special pattern fluctuation 99 times) has elapsed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing an excessively disadvantageous game by notifying the player of the current gaming state in an easy-to-understand manner. can do.

  In this control example, the timing at which the current gaming state is notified to the player is fixed to the timing at which the special figure fluctuation is executed 99 times after the end of the big hit game, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, a plurality of timings (for example, timings when the number of times of special figure fluctuation after the big hit game is 10, 30, 70, 90) is set as the gaming state informing possible timing, and the time is reduced when the timing is reached It is determined whether or not the state is ended (whether or not the second time saving end condition is satisfied), and the effect for notifying the current game state when it is determined that the time saving state is ended (see FIG. 481 (b)) may be executed. In addition, measuring means is provided for measuring the number of times of special figure fluctuation after the second time short completion condition is satisfied (after the stray mode is set), and the number of measurement results of the measuring means is a predetermined number (for example, 20, 30, In order to notify the current gaming state on the basis of the result of the drawing, a lottery is performed to determine whether to execute the effect (see FIG. 481 (b)) for notifying the current gaming state at the timing when You may comprise so that the production | presentation (refer FIG. 481 (b)) may be performed.

  By configuring in this way, the second time saving end condition is satisfied immediately after the time saving state (the high probability state of the normal symbol) is set, and the time saving state (the high probability state of the normal symbol) ends, useless Can prevent the player from playing a game during the lost child mode for a long period of time.

  In this control example, even when the jackpot is won while the lost child mode is set, the effects shown in FIGS. 481 (a) and 481 (b) are executed, and the game state notification mode 821 It is configured to be displayed in the characters of "big hit". As a result, even when the effect (see FIG. 481 (b)) for notifying the current gaming state is started, since it is possible to wait for the effect result while expecting a jackpot win, the effect of the effect to the end Can be enhanced.

  Also, although detailed description will be omitted, as in the first control example described above, the gaming state at the execution timing of the special figure fluctuation to be executed is predicted based on the preliminary reading result of special figure suspension, and the prediction result The game state notification mode 821 may be displayed in advance based on the above.

  As described above, in the present control example, when the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) is set after the big hit game is over, the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) ends at various timings. As described above, since the transition process of the gaming state is different depending on the timing at which the second time short completion condition is satisfied and the timing for the falling election by the falling lottery, the game in the various gaming states is made available to the player. To improve the interest of the game. In addition, a background mode corresponding to each gaming state is set as the background mode effect, and the latent state is set when the time saving state (high probability state of the normal symbol) is ended. Since the background mode (stray mode) is set to make it difficult for the player to understand whether the normal state or the normal state is set, the player can continue playing the game.

  Also, when a big hit is won during the background mode (during right hit game), "left hit" is notified during the special figure change period showing the big hit win, and after the special figure change is stopped (fixed display), " Triggering the termination of the time saving state (see FIG. 479 (b)) in the case where the time saving state ends during background mode effect (during left hitting game) by configuring to notify “right hitting”. Can be unified regardless of In this control example, when the time saving state ends, “left-handed” is unified and notified (displayed), but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the special drawing in which the time saving state is ended. It may be configured to unify and notify (display) the period “right-handed” until the fluctuation is stopped and displayed (finalized display).

  Further, in this control example, an example of effect for making it difficult for the player to understand the trigger for ending the time saving state has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this and it is possible to change part of effect mode of the effect to be executed. Thus, the player may be configured to indicate to the player the end timing of the time saving state established this time, for example, in the end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 479 (a), it is displayed on the pillar column color or pillars. By changing the type of character, it may be configured to suggest to the player the end trigger of the time-shortening state established this time, or in the pitfall effect shown in FIG. 479 (b), The color or the display mode of the display area 812 may be changed to indicate to the player an end trigger of the time saving state established this time.

  In this control example, when the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is set after the big hit game end, the first time short to end the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) based on the number of times of special figure variation. A termination condition (special figure fluctuation 100 times) is set, and until the first time shortening termination condition is satisfied, a second time shortening termination condition satisfied when a specific small winning is won a predetermined number of times by the special drawing lottery is met When or when the jackpot is won, it is configured to end the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) at that time.

  Furthermore, in this control example, in order to end the above-mentioned time saving state, the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation in which various conditions are satisfied. That is, when setting the special drawing fluctuation frequency 100 times as the first time shortening end condition, the time shortening state is ended at the start timing of the 100th special drawing fluctuation with the time shortening state set, and the second time shortening When it is decided to win twice as a specific small hit (small hit A) as the ending condition, the second small hit A won in the state where the time saving state is set Start timing of the special figure change The time saving state is ended, and the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation which is won by the jackpot when the time saving state is set.

  By configuring in this way, when the time saving state ends while the first time short ending condition is not satisfied, a drawing result indicating that the special figure fluctuation in progress indicates a big hit, or a drawing showing a small hit is displayed. Since it is possible to inform the player that the stop display is made in a mode, the player is given interest by the special view until the special view fluctuation that is being executed when the time saving state ends is stopped and displayed. It is possible to focus on the change effect to be executed in response to the change.

  In addition, in the present control example, since the condition established when the player wins a plurality of small hits is set as the second short time ending condition, for example, the special drawing lottery result executed during the short time state is closely watched If the time saving state ends in a state where the first time saving end condition is not satisfied and the small hitting state has not been won by determining the presence or absence of the small hitting, it is under execution. It becomes possible to grasp that the lottery result of special figure fluctuation is a big hit. As described above, it is difficult to identify the time reduction end condition established this time only by the end timing of the time reduction state, and the game content (special figure lottery result) in the time reduction state (high probability state of ordinary symbol) and the end timing of the time reduction state By making it possible to specify the time saving end condition established this time based on and, the player can be made to have interest by the game content (special figure lottery result) in the time saving state, which is advantageous for the player It is possible to suppress that the game in the short time state, which is the normal game state, becomes monotonous.

  In this control example, the game content of the big hit game (for example, round game, 15 round game) to be executed when winning a big hit by special figure fluctuation and a small hit game to be executed when a small hit is won The game contents (one round game) are different from each other, so it is possible to determine the lottery result of the special drawing lottery after the fact based on the contents of the hit game to be executed. For example, as a game type of a big hit game to be executed based on winning a big hit in a special figure lottery, a hit of the same as a small hit game (concept also including a difference to the extent that a player is difficult to identify) The game type in which the game is executed may be settable.

  By configuring in this manner, a part of the jackpot game executed based on winning the jackpot in the special figure lottery, and a small hitting game executed based on the winning in the small hit in the special figure lottery Since it is possible to unify the game contents of the winning game (the contents of the opening operation to the variable winning device 65), the hit game executed this time based on the playing contents of the hit game is a big hit game or a small hit It can be made difficult for the player to distinguish whether it is a game or not.

  Also, in this case, when the jackpot game is executed in which the same hit game content as the small hit game is set, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability state of normal symbol) after the end of the jackpot game Should be configurable. By configuring in this way, the game after the end of the small hit game based on the small hit winning that the second time short end condition is satisfied (left hit game), and the game after the end of the big hit game (left hit game), Can be made identical. Therefore, when the time saving state ends while the first time shortening end condition is not established, the game content of the winning game (big hit game, small hit game) to be executed (opening operation content for the variable winning device 65), and the hit It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand what time termination condition established this time is based on the game content (left hitting game) executed after the end of the game (big hit game, small hit game).

  Furthermore, in this control example, although the probability state of the special symbol and the probability state of the normal symbol are variably settable based on the jackpot winning, when the small hitting is won, the high probability of the ordinary symbol It is configured to be variable only from the state to the low probability state. In other words, jackpot winning is a trigger that can be variably set the game state in the range of 1, small hit winning is configured to be a trigger that can be variably set in the game range of 2 narrower than the range of 1 There is. As described above, the player can predict the gaming state to be set in the future when the lottery result of the special drawing lottery is grasped by changing the range of the gaming state which can be variably set based on the drawing result of the special drawing lottery. It can be made easy.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 482 and FIG. 483, the contents of effects in the serif zone executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present control example will be described. In this control example, the serif zone can be set based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. When this serif zone is set, the character of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) among the third symbols displayed stop on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. An effect is produced in which each third symbol emits words.

  Here, in the case of executing the effect that each third symbol emits serif in correspondence with the display mode (for example, the character) of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) which is displayed in a stopped state first, If the same display mode continues as the display mode (for example, a character) of the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) which is stopped and displayed on the screen, the same speech effect is executed, and the effect The problem is that the

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the character of the left third symbol LZ (refer to FIG. 482 (a)) stopped and displayed in the past and information (past information) indicating the set speech can be stored. The present invention is configured to set an effect mode (character, speech) of a speech effect to be newly executed based on the stored past information. As a result, a variety of presentation modes can be set as a presentation mode of speech effects, and presentation effects can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, in the second control example, when setting a new production mode of speech effect, the production mode is set based on the result of the special symbol lottery (special drawing lottery). Thereby, for example, it is possible to intentionally set an effect mode (for example, an effect mode in which the same character is continuously set) giving a sense of discomfort to the player when the result of the special figure lottery is a big hit. Become. Accordingly, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of the special drawing lottery based on the presentation mode of the speech effect, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the presentation and to improve the interest of the game.

  Also, in the second control example, a plurality of characters that can be stopped and displayed in the left third symbol LZ (see FIG. 482 (a)) are a plurality of groups (in this control example, a land creature group and a sea creature group In the case where the third symbols corresponding to the characters in the same group are stopped and displayed, and the third symbols corresponding to the characters in different groups are stopped and displayed. It is configured to make the contents different. Thereby, it is possible to predict the displayed serif by grasping the third symbol to be stopped and displayed prior to the timing at which the serif is displayed (the timing at which each third symbol is stopped and displayed). Become. Therefore, it can be enjoyed whether the content of the predicted speech and the content of the speech actually displayed match.

  Here, the selection method of the character used for the speech effect and the specific serif contents will be described later with reference to FIGS. 495 to 497, and first, for the presentation contents displayed during the speech effect, FIG. 482, and This will be described with reference to FIG. 483. FIG. 482 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the display screen when the left third symbol LZ is stopped and displayed in the dialogue effect, and FIG. 482 (b) is the right right in the dialogue effect 3 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen when symbol RZ is stopped and displayed. FIG. And FIG. 483 (a) is a schematic diagram which showed typically an example of the display screen at the time of being in a reach state by a speech effect, and FIG. 483 (b) is belonging to a different group by a speech effect. FIG. 7 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of a display screen when the character is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 482 (a), when the speech zone is set, the display area 806 displays the character “serif zone” as an effect notification mode for notifying the player that the speech zone is set. Be done. Then, the left third symbol LZ, middle third symbol CZ and right third symbol RZ are variably displayed at the center of the display screen, and attached to the third symbol which is stopped and displayed at the timing when each third symbol is stopped and displayed. The words corresponding to the selected character are displayed. In the state in which the serif zone is set, the third symbol is a fused third symbol in which the number aspect which is identification information for indicating the lottery result of the special symbol and the character aspect corresponding to the number aspect are fused. In the figure shown in FIG. 482 (a), the third symbol in the fusion state is used as the left third symbol LZ, in which the character aspect of "zou" and the number aspect of "1" are stopped and displayed. , the character of "Hello" is displayed as words LZ1.

  In the present control example, different character modes are associated with each of the nine types of number modes. The detailed description about the display mode of each fusion 3rd design is later mentioned with reference to FIG. 495 (a).

  Further, in this control example, the speech output in the speech effect is output by the audio output device 226 as an audio. As a result, it becomes possible to identify the effect to be performed by hearing, so the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it becomes possible to identify the effect mode (voice mode) of speech effects even to a nearby player who has difficulty in visually recognizing the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, the jackpot win When a speech effect with a high degree of expectation is executed, it becomes possible to obtain a sense of superiority.

  FIG. 482 (b) shows a state in which the effect has progressed from the state of FIG. 482 (a) described above and the right third symbol RZ is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 482 (b), as the right third symbol RZ, the fusion third symbol combining the character mode of "lion" and the number mode of "2" is stopped and displayed, and the character of "long time no see" as serif RZ1. Is displayed. Here, in FIG. 482 (b), since the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ both stop at the fused third symbol having characters belonging to the same group (living group on land), A serif effect that a conversation is established is being performed.

  In the variable display shown in FIG. 482 (b), in the case of FIG. 483 (a), the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ both have the character mode of "Zou" and the numeral of "1". The fused third symbol fused with the aspect is stopped and displayed, and the reach state in which the left third symbol LZ and the right third symbol RZ are stopped and displayed in the same fused third symbol is displayed. Then, the words "I like the weather" are displayed as the speech LZ1, and the characters "Tsutsui Tsui" are displayed as the speech RZ1.

  Next, variable operation effects will be described with reference to FIGS. 484 and 485. FIG. In the second control example, a variable operation effect that allows the player to operate the lever member 10340 that can move between the first position (origin position) and the second position (operation position) is executable. . This variable operation effect usually includes a preparation effect to be performed during the effect preparation processing period (two seconds) for moving the lever member 10340, which is usually located at the first position, to the second position, and a lever that is located at the second position An operation instruction effect performed during an operation instruction period (3 seconds) for causing the player to operate the member 10340, and an operation corresponding operation effect indicating that the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, It is configured to execute the result presentation which is executed during the result display period (two seconds) showing the presentation result of the variable operation presentation.

  Further, a variable operation effective period for effectively determining the player's operation on the operation means (lever member 10340) is set corresponding to the period in which the operation instruction period (3 seconds) is set. If the player operates the lever member 10340 during this operation instruction period, and the operation is determined to be effective, the operation corresponding rendering is executed without waiting for the elapse of the operation instruction period, and thereafter, the result effect is displayed. It is configured to be displayed. As a result, since the effect presentation can be displayed in response to the operation to the operation means performed by the player, it is possible to cause the player to operate the operation means eagerly. In addition, without being limited to this, when the player operates the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period and the operation is effectively determined, only the operation corresponding to the operation is executed, and the result is obtained after the operation instruction period has elapsed. You may comprise so that presentation may be performed.

  Here, the contents of the various effects performed during the variable operation effect will be briefly described. First, during the preparation effect, an effect is performed that suggests that the effect of causing the player to operate the lever member 10340 will soon be performed. Specifically, an image imitating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the player is informed that the lever member 10340 has moved from the first position to the second position. The preparation effect is executed in the effect mode.

  In this control example, since the operation means is operated from the second position toward the first position during the variable operation effect, the lever member 10340 is thus moved from the first position to the second position. By notifying the player of the preparation effect indicating that the player is moving, it is possible to easily grasp the direction in which the player operates the lever member 10340 by the variable operation effect of this time. In addition, when performing the variable operation effect for causing the player to operate from the second position to a third position different from the first position after the operation means moves from the first position to the second position, the preparation is performed. The player is informed that the operation means moves to the first position, the second position, and the third position during the effect, and the game is performed that the operation means is located at the second position when the effect preparation process is completed. It is preferable to configure so as to set an effect mode for notifying a person. That is, it is preferable that the preparation effect is used to notify the operation means of the operation contents of the operation means to be performed by the player.

  Then, when the preparation effect is finished, next, an operation instruction effect for causing the player to operate the operation means (lever member 10340) is executed. Here, contents of the operation instruction effect will be described with reference to FIG. 484 (a). FIG. 484 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the effect screen displayed during the operation instruction effect. As shown in FIG. 484 (a), when the operation instruction effect is executed, an image simulating the lever member 10340 is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the lever member 10340 is moved downward (first position) The display mode prompting the user to depress the button) and the comment of “press the lever” are displayed.

  In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted in FIG. 484 (a), the period gauge for showing the elapsed period of an operation indication period (3 second), and a remaining period is also displayed. And although illustration is omitted, when the player depresses the lever member 10340 during the operation instruction period, an operation corresponding effect indicating that the operation means has been operated during the operation effective period (for example, display of a comment indicating the completion of the operation Is displayed, and then the rendering result is displayed. About this presentation result, since it is the same as that of the presentation result of the various presentation using the operation means used for the 1st control example mentioned above, the detailed explanation is omitted.

  As described above, in this control example, the operating means (lever member 10340) positioned at the first position (origin position) is moved to the second position (operation position) as the variable operation effect, and then the player Thus, it is possible to execute an effect of performing an operation of moving the operation means from the second position to the first position. Thereby, as in the first control example described above, the player's sense of operation can be improved as compared to the case where the effect of merely pressing the PUSH button 10317 is performed as the operation effect, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. Can.

  However, when the variable operation effect described above is executed, if the player does not operate the operation means (the lever member 10340) during the operation effective period, the lever member 10340 receives the second operation even after the end of the variable operation effect. There is a problem that the structure of the operation device 10300 having the lever member 10340 becomes unstable because it is positioned. In addition to the lever member 10340, the operation device 10300 used in the present control example is provided with operation means (PUSH button 10317), and when the lever member 10340 remains at the second position, other operations are performed. There is a problem that it becomes difficult to press the means (PUSH button 10317).

  With respect to such a problem, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation effect, and when the lever member 10340 is not positioned at the first position, the lever member using the drive means Although it is conceivable to execute operation control (return operation control) for forcibly returning 10340 to the first position, the lever member 10340 is moved to the second position in order to improve the player's feeling of operation to the operation means. There is still the problem that the effect of rendering can not be enhanced because the player is moved from the second position to the first position without intervention by the player despite the movement.

  On the other hand, in this control example, the position of the lever member 10340 is determined at the end timing of the variable operation effect, and when the lever member 10340 is not positioned at the first position, the next variable operation effect is It is configured to be easy to execute. With this configuration, the lever member 10340 which has been moved to the second position can be easily moved to the first position by the player's operation, so the lever member can be enhanced while enhancing the rendering effect. 10340 can be moved to a first position (origin position).

  Furthermore, in the present control example, the upper limit is provided in a period when the next variable operation effect is easily performed, and the driving means (when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position even after the period has elapsed The drive motor is used to execute return operation control for moving the lever member 10340 to the first position. As a result, it is possible to suppress the player from performing the variable operation effect excessively.

  Here, when executing the return operation control, the player applies a force against the force generated when the lever member 10340 positioned at the second position moves toward the first position. That is, if the player pushes the lever member 10340 so that the lever member 10340 does not move to the first position, the return operation control causes a problem that the lever member 10340 can not be moved to the first position. .

  Therefore, if return operation control is performed so as to move the lever member 10340 to the first position with a force stronger than the force that can be applied by the player, the player may be injured, and the lever member If the return operation control is continuously performed until the 10340 is moved to the first position, there is a problem that the drive motor for driving the lever member 10340 is excessively loaded to cause a failure.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position after the return operation control for a predetermined period (5 seconds) is completed, the initial position of the lever member 10340 Is configured to execute a process of switching the position from the first position to the second position, and is configured to perform an effect in which the second position becomes the initial position.

  When the variable operation effect is executed with the second position being the initial position, the lever member 10340 in the effect preparation period in which the effect preparation process is executed is moved from the second position to the first position, and the operation instruction is issued. As an effect, an effect (see FIG. 484 (b)) of operating the lever member 10340 from the first position to the second position is performed. As described above, by varying the effect mode of the variable operation effect, the player can be made interested in the variable operation effect, and the effect can be enhanced.

  In addition, when it is determined that the position of the lever member 10340 is neither the first position nor the second position after the end of the variable operation effect, that is, both the origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af described later are set on. If not, it is conceivable that the player holds the lever member 10340 at an intermediate position between the first position and the second position, so the player takes his hand off the lever member 10340 as an effect aspect of the next variable operation effect. In order to make it do, it is constituted so that a production | presentation aspect using the touch sensor which has a detection area formed in the position which overlaps with the display screen of the 3rd symbol display 81 may be set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 485, an image 891 imitating a hand is displayed corresponding to the detection area 890 of the touch sensor displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the detection area 890 is touched. As described above, the characters “touch” are displayed in the display area 892, and a comment “touch the liquid crystal” for displaying the operation content of the operation effect this time is displayed in the display area 806. By executing the effect of causing the liquid crystal to touch (touch effect) as described above, the player can release the hand from the lever member 10340 and touch the liquid crystal. And in this control example, it is comprised so that return operation control of lever member 10340 may be performed according to the execution period of touch production. Thereby, the lever member 10340 can be reliably moved to the first position.

  In the second control example, the touch sensor is configured to be operable with one hand, but in this case it is possible to operate the touch sensor while holding the lever member 10340 by releasing the hand from the operation handle. Therefore, in addition to the touch effect for operating the touch sensor, it is preferable to configure to also execute a launch effect for prompting the player to shoot the ball by operating the operation handle. Thus, the player's hand can be more easily released from the lever member 10340.

  In addition, only the above-described emission effect may be executed, or an effect mode using both hands as a touch effect, for example, in the game board 13, an interval of 20 cm or more is provided so as not to reach with one hand. A plurality of touch sensors may be provided to be formed, and touch effects for operating the plurality of touch sensors simultaneously may be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 486 to FIG. 488, the contents of the hold effect in the second control example will be described. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, the special drawing based on the special drawing change effect that can be executed corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the special symbol, and the special drawing start winning combination There is a hold effect that can be executed when the hold is obtained, and an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be set in any of the effects.

  As described above, the special figure change production is executed based on the special figure change, and the hold production is performed based on the acquisition of the special figure hold, and the hold production is performed even while the special figure change production is being executed. Can be performed at various timings, and the interest of the game is improved, but the operation effect derived from the special figure variation effect and the operation derived from the hold effect The effect and the effect are simultaneously executed, and it is difficult for the player to understand which operation effect is variable based on the result of the operation performed by the player on the operation means.

  On the other hand, in this control example, when the execution condition of one operation effect is satisfied, the execution situation of the other operation effect is determined, and based on the result of the determination, the execution start timing of one operation effect is set. It is configured to be variable. This makes it possible to suppress the simultaneous execution of a plurality of operation effects, and provide the player with an operation effect that is easy to understand. Furthermore, it is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests that the operation effect is waiting to be executed using a period from when the execution condition of the operation effect is established to when the operation effect is actually executed. doing. As a result, it can be suggested that a new operation effect is to be executed after the currently-executed operation effect is finished, so that the player can play a game while expecting a future effect to be executed.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 486, the contents of the standby effect to be executed when the operation effects overlap will be described. FIG. 486 (a) schematically illustrates an example of the standby effect displayed on the display screen when the condition capable of performing the operation effect as the hold effect is established while the operation effect is being executed in the special view fluctuation effect FIG. 486 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of display contents displayed on the display screen after the end of the standby effect. In addition, about the operation production derived from the special figure change production performed in this control example, since it is the same as the 1st control example mentioned above, the detailed explanation about the contents of the production and the execution opportunity is omitted.

  FIG. 486 (a) shows the display area on the upper left side of the display screen (see FIG. 389) of the third symbol display device 81, specifically, the number of holding balls of the first special symbol (special figure 1) It is the schematic diagram which expanded display area Ds1 vicinity in which the display mode (holding ball pattern) for [is displayed]. As described above, since the standby effect shown in FIG. 486 (a) is performed when the operation effect derived from the special figure fluctuation effect is executed, the illustration is omitted in FIG. 486 (a). However, in the approximate center of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the operation effect derived from the special figure fluctuation effect is executed.

  In FIG. 486 (a), while the first holding ball symbol Hz1 to the fourth holding ball symbol Hz4 are displayed as the holding symbol of the special view 1, the fourth holding ball symbol Hz4 is displayed on the display screen. On the basis of that (on the basis of the fact that the voice lamp control device 113 has received a winning information command indicating winning information to be the fourth holding ball of the special figure 1), it is shown that standby effect is being executed.

  That is, on the basis of having received the winning information command indicating the winning information which is the fourth holding ball of the special figure 1, when executing the operation effect (holding operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means as the holding effect When it is determined that the execution condition of the hold operation effect is satisfied, and it is determined that the operation effect (the special operation effect effect) is being executed as the special figure change effect at that time (the wait condition of the hold operation effect is satisfied) Standby presentation that indicates that the hold operation presentation is to be performed.

  In this standby effect, an effect is produced in which the suggestion character HC1 appears (frames in) in the display screen while rotating the display portion (the head in FIG. 486 (a)) having a plurality of display surfaces. The suggested character HC1 has three display surfaces, and the characters "PUSH", "red", and "chance" are displayed on each of them. Then, during the standby effect, after rotating the display region, the specific display region is stopped and displayed as a result of the standby effect at a position that is easier to visually recognize than the other display regions.

  For example, when the hold operation effect is executed after the standby effect, the specific display portion where the character "PUSH" is displayed as the result of the standby effect is displayed at a position where it is easier to visually recognize than the other display portions. , Hold operation effect is executed.

  As described above, when the standby effect is being executed, the effect of rotating the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 framed in to the display screen is performed, and the player is given a part of the rotating display portion. By displaying the display mode (“PUSH”) for operating the operation means, it can be suggested to the player that the hold operation effect is in the standby state. In addition, by displaying a display mode ("PUSH") for causing the player to operate the operation means ("PUSH"), the player is notified that the operation effective period of the hold operation effect is not set at the present time (during standby effect). It can be reported in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In this control example, an effect mode is shown in which the suggested character HC1 frames into the display screen while the standby effect is being executed, but the suggested character HC1 is only a part of the standby effect period. May be configured to be framed in. In addition, as a standby effect, an effect of rotating in a state in which predetermined display modes (“PUSH”, “red”, “chance”) are displayed on a plurality of display surfaces that are the display portions of the suggested character HC1 is performed However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode displayed on a plurality of display surfaces serving as the display part of the suggested character HC1 may be changed during standby effect, or without displaying the display mode. You may comprise so that the presentation which rotates a display site | part may be performed.

  Further, in the effect of rotating the display region of the suggested character HC1 executed during the standby effect, the rotational speed of the display region may be varied according to the degree of progress of the standby effect. For example, the closer to the end timing of the standby effect You may comprise so that a rotational speed may be reduced. By this configuration, it is difficult to understand what the suggestion character HC1 suggests after the waiting effect is executed, and it is easy for the player to grasp the suggestion content of the suggestion character HC1 with the passage of time. can do. Thus, the player can be made interested in the contents of the standby effect.

  Furthermore, the rotational speed of the display part of the suggested character HC1 may be varied based on the contents of the operation to the operation means in the special figure operation effect being executed, for example, the player may It is preferable to increase the rotational speed based on the operation of the operation means. By configuring in this manner, in a state in which the operation means is actively operated during special drawing operation rendition, the display region of the suggestion character HC1 is rotated at high speed, and displayed on the display region of the suggestion character HC1. Character of "PUSH" can be made hard to identify. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to play a game by concentrating on special drawing operation effects.

  The relationship between the operation mode of the player to the operation means for the special view operation effect and the effect mode displayed during the standby effect is not limited to this, and the player can operate the operation means during the special operation action effect. The display mode displayed on each display surface of the display portion of the suggested character HC1 may be changed based on the operation.

  In this control example, when the waiting effect shown in FIG. 486 (a) is finished, it is determined again whether the hold operation effect can be executed, and if it is determined that the holding operation effect can be executed, the display region of the suggested character HC1 is displayed. The stop display is made so that the characters “PUSH” can be identified, but if it is determined that the hold operation effect can not be performed after the end of the standby effect, the display portion of the suggested character HC1 is “red” or “chance” It is configured to stop display so that characters can be identified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 486 (b), when the display position of the suggested character HC1 is stopped and displayed so that the character of "red" can be identified, the holding ball pattern is not performed without executing the operation effect. A holding effect of changing the display mode of (in FIG. 486 (a), the second holding ball pattern that is the blue display mode is variable to the red display mode) is executed.

  In this way, when the execution condition of the hold operation effect is satisfied and the hold operation effect can not be executed immediately, the standby effect is executed, and is it possible to execute the hold operation effect at the end timing of the standby effect? The determination of the execution condition of the standby effect can be simplified by configuring the determination result of the standby effect to be variable based on the result of the determination again.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 487 and FIG. 488, a flow of setting of operation effects in the second control example will be described. In the second control example, the effect mode of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is set at different timings in the first half period (first period) of the special figure fluctuation period and the second half period (second period) It is composed of Specifically, the presentation mode of the special figure fluctuation effect corresponding to the first half period (first period) of the special figure fluctuation period is set at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation (the timing when the fluctuation pattern command is received), and the special figure The effect mode of the special figure fluctuation presentation corresponding to the second half period (second period) of the fluctuation period is configured to be set after a predetermined period has elapsed after the special figure fluctuation has elapsed.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, information (first information) used to set an effect mode (first effect mode) of the change effect corresponding to the first period of the special figure change period, and 2 of the second special figure change period The information (second information) used to set the effect mode (second effect mode) of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the period is different, and specifically, the first effect mode is the main control device 110. The effect mode is set based on the variation pattern command output from the second effect mode, and the second effect mode is effect information (information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak) stored when the first effect mode is set, It is configured to be set based on information (setting status of the standby flag 223 ah) indicating whether the holding effect (the holding operation effect) is in the standby state.

  Here, the setting method of the special figure fluctuation presentation and the holding presentation will be described with reference to FIGS. 487 and 488. FIG. 487 is a diagram showing a setting method of various effects when the condition for executing the hold operation effect is established as the hold effect during the first period of the special figure fluctuation period, and FIG. 488 is a diagram of the special figure fluctuation period It is the figure which showed the setting method of various production when execution condition of suspension operation production is satisfied as suspension production in the 2nd period.

  As shown in FIG. 487, the variation pattern command is output from main controller 110 to audio lamp controller 113 at the timing when the special figure variation is executed. Then, on the audio lamp control device 11 side, the fluctuation pattern is based on information indicating the special drawing fluctuation time included in the received fluctuation pattern command, information indicating the lottery result of the special drawing lottery, and information indicating the stop type of the special drawing. The variation presentation of the first period is set with reference to the table 223a. Specifically, the variation rendering mode of the first period and the rendering information indicating the length of the second period are set and stored in the rendering information storage area 223ak.

  Here, when the operation effect (special view operation effect) is set as the variation effect mode of the set first period, the special view operation effect is executed according to the execution timing of the special view operation effect, and the game is played. An effective period of time for effectively determining the operation performed by the user on the operation means is set. Then, during the period during which the variation effect of the first period is being executed, the start winning for a special symbol (the ball winning for the first winning opening 64) occurs, and the prefetch result corresponding to the starting winning from the main controller 110 When the winning information command including the character is output toward the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 side executes a determination processing as to whether or not to execute the hold effect based on the winning information command received, and further, When it is determined that the on-hold effect has been executed, processing for setting the effect mode of the on-off effect is executed.

  Effect mode other than operation effect (hold operation effect) as effect mode of hold effect (for example, without using the operation of the operation means by the player, based on the elapsed time, display of any of the special figure holding ball design Hz1 to Hz4 When the effect mode of changing the mode is set, the hold effect is executed without determining the effect mode of the special figure fluctuation effect being executed. On the other hand, when the operation effect (on hold operation effect) is set as the effect mode of the on hold effect, in order to determine whether the current time is a state in which the on hold operation effect can be executed, the special figure fluctuation effect (the first Analysis contents of the special figure fluctuation effect during the period) is analyzed, and it is judged whether the operation effect does not overlap. Here, the effect of the special figure fluctuation effect is read out by reading out the effect information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak Analyze the content.

  According to this analysis, when it is determined that the operation effect is duplicated, that is, when the current time is within the period in which the special view operation effect is being executed, or when the hold operation effect is executed, If it is determined that the diagram operation effect is executed, the hold operation effect is not executed within the first period of the special image fluctuation period, and the standby effect is executed (see FIG. 486 (a)).

  Then, at a timing (a timing at which 28 seconds have elapsed from the start of the special figure fluctuation) at the timing of setting the rendering mode of the second period of the special figure fluctuation period (period of 30 seconds to 60 seconds of the special figure fluctuation period), The effect mode during the second period based on the effect results of various effects in (for example, the effect result for the operation effect), the effect information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak, and the standby status of the hold operation effect Set In addition, although detailed description is omitted, priority is provided to the information to be referred to when setting the effect mode in the second period, and information which is overlapped when setting the effect mode is It is comprised so that a production | presentation aspect may be set based on the information to which the high priority is set. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation under execution is a big hit, various information for indicating the lottery result of the fluctuation is set to have a higher priority than the waiting information of the hold operation effect. If the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed is out of order, it is preferable that the standby information of the holding operation effect has higher priority than the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation being executed. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to execute the effects performed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the player's interest.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 488, an effect setting method for a case where a new special figure winning combination occurs during the second period of the special figure fluctuation period will be described. As shown in FIG. 488, if the timing when the winning information command is received and it is determined that the holding operation effect is to be executed is in the second period of the special figure fluctuation effect, is it possible to execute the holding operation effect at that time? If it is determined that execution is possible, the hold operation effect is executed as it is, and if it is determined that the operation is not possible (difficult), the hold operation effect is not executed as the current hold effect. .

  As described above, in the present control example, the first period length and the first period are based on the fluctuation time information included in the received fluctuation pattern command at the start timing of the execution of the fluctuation design of the special symbol (special figure fluctuation production). Although the length of two periods is set and the effect mode is set according to the length of the set period, the effect mode to be executed in the first half period is set without being limited thereto. The set execution period of the effect mode may be set as the first period, and the remaining period may be set as the second period. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to set the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed in the first half period without worrying about the effect period, it is possible to easily increase the types of effects to be performed.

  Further, in the present control example, although the hold operation effect in the standby state during the first period is configured to be executable during the second period, the effect mode of the hold operation effect performed from the first period It may be configured to make (the presentation content, the presentation period) different from the presentation mode of the hold operation presentation performed after the second period (executed after the standby), for example, during the first period It is good to constitute so that a production | presentation period may become shorter than the production | presentation aspect of the pending | holding operation production performed in the 2nd period of the production | presentation aspect of the held | held operation production | presentation.

  By configuring in this way, the waiting effect is executed, and thereafter, when the holding operation effect is performed, the holding operation effect using a long period is executed, so it is easy to enhance the effect of the holding operation effect. can do. Therefore, when the standby effect is executed, it is possible to play the game while expecting the hold operation effect to be executed.

  Furthermore, if a new special signal hold is acquired during the waiting period during which the hold operation effect is on standby, the pending operation effect is also performed in which the prefetching result corresponding to the newly acquired special signal hold is also reflected. Good to configure. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to cause the player to play the game eagerly while the standby effect is being performed. In addition, in the hold operation effect executed after the standby effect, effects capable of changing the display modes of the plurality of special view hold can be performed, so that the effect can be enhanced.

  Next, a method of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 realized by performing control based on various tables defined in the ROM 202 and various flags and counters provided in the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. 489. explain. FIG. 489 is a transition diagram showing a flow of state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 489, in the second control example, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is in the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low in ordinary symbol) The point that made it possible to set the probability state) and the point that made it possible to set the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) after the end of the jackpot game when winning a big hit in the special figure lottery And, it is largely different in that a state transition to end the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is provided based on having won the small hit in the special figure lottery.

  That is, in the first control example described above, since only the normal state can be set as the gaming state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, in the case where the big hit game is not executed after the time saving state ends. The player could easily determine that the currently set gaming state is the normal state, but in the second control example, the game state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set is set. Since the normal state and the latent state can be set, it is difficult for the player to easily determine the set gaming state when the jackpot game is not executed after the time saving state ends. Can.

  Also, among gaming states in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set, the high probability state of the special symbol is set in the latent state and the low probability state of the special symbol is set in the normal state. Also in the special symbol lottery, it is configured such that the game state that is more likely to win the jackpot in the special symbol lottery, that is, the game state that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, even after the time saving state ends, it is possible to cause the player to perform the game while expecting that the currently set gaming state is the latent state, the time saving state With the end of the game, it is difficult to stop the game.

  Here, with reference to FIG. 489, the flow of the gaming state transition of the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be specifically described. The detailed description of the same flow as the first control example described above is omitted. First, when the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability state of the normal symbol) is set, the normal symbol is in the low probability state, and the second special symbol (special figure 2) will be triggered. Since it is a gaming state in which it is difficult to win the ball to the second winning opening 640, the ball is awarded to the first winning opening 64 serving as a start trigger of the first special symbol (special figure 1) as in the first control example described above. A special figure 1 game (left strike game) to be made is executed.

  And, when winning a big hit (big hit probability 1/250) by the special figure 1 lottery, a different gaming state is set after the big hit according to the type of the big hit. Specifically, if the type of jackpot that won is "jackpot A, B" (50% of the whole jackpot), the probability change state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability state of normal symbol) after the end of the jackpot game Is set, and when it is "big hit C" (30% of the big hit overall), the time saving state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set after the big hit game end, with "big hit F" In some cases (20% of the entire jackpot), the normal state is set again after the jackpot game is over.

  Next, when the time saving state is set, the normal symbol is in the high probability state, and it is the gaming state where it is easy to get the ball to the second winning opening 640 which is the start timing of the special view 2 As in the first control example, a special figure 2 game (right-handed game) in which a ball is made to win a second winning opening 640 serving as a start trigger of special figure 2 is executed.

  And, when winning a big hit (big hit probability 1/250) in the special figure 2 lottery, different game state is set after the big hit end according to the big hit type which is won. Specifically, if the type of jackpot that has won is "jackpot D" (80% of the whole jackpot), a probability change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and if it is "jackpot E, G" (jackpot overall 20%) is configured to set the time saving state again after the end of the jackpot game. That is, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the definite variation state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is always set after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, in this control example, similarly to the first control example described above, each time a lottery condition of a special symbol is established, a lottery (so-called, fall lottery) of whether or not to fall to a low probability state of a special symbol is made. It has a configuration to execute. Furthermore, there are a plurality of conditions for shifting the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) to the normal pattern low probability state, and after the time short state set in the first control example is set In addition to the first time short end condition established when the number of times the special figure fluctuation number reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), a specific lottery result other than the jackpot win (for example, A second time saving end condition is established, which is satisfied when the number of times the small winning A wins) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 times), and a time saving state (normal) when any time saving ending condition is satisfied. It is configured to shift the high probability state of the symbol to the low probability state of the normal symbol.

  As described above, in the present control example, when a definite change state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol high probability state) is set after the end of the big hit game, during the definite change state, aim at the big hit by special drawing lottery A game in which the high probability state of the special symbol is shifted to the low probability state while running the game (fall lottery), and a game in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state (special figure lottery) It will run in parallel. In addition, any timing is earlier without giving relevance to the timing of shifting the probability state of the special symbol based on the falling lottery and the timing of shifting the probability state of the normal symbol based on the special drawing lottery. Since it is configured to be determined based on a predetermined lottery result, it is possible to set transition of the gaming state in a complicated manner for the player.

  Return to FIG. 489 and continue the explanation. If you win a small hit (1/100) in the definite change state, if the small hit type is other than a specific small hit type (small hit B) (50% of the entire small hit), or the first specific small If it is a hit type (small hit A), without changing the gaming state, if it is the second specific small hit type (small hit A), the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state It is configured to be migrated. Furthermore, the fall lottery is executed in the same manner as the first control example described above, and the special drawing lottery number of times since the probability change state is set is won by the fall lottery with a timing less than 100 times (fall probability 1/500) In case of transition to the time saving state, transition to the normal state if the special drawing lottery number from the definite variation state is set to fall win in the fall lottery at the timing of 100 times or more (fall probability 1/500) It is configured as follows.

  In this control example, when the win is not won during the definite change state and the time saving end condition is not satisfied, the positive change state continues until the big hit is won in the special drawing lottery. Not limited to this, there is provided a configuration to shift the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state when the special figure fluctuation number (special figure lottery number) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 150 times) Also good. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to set the gaming state (probable change state) advantageous to the player for a long period of time, and to suppress the player from being provided with the excessively advantageous gaming state. it can. Also, in this case, when the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is set at the timing of shifting the high probability state of the special symbol to the low probability state, the high probability state of the ordinary symbol is also combined into the low probability state. It may be configured to make the transition.

  Finally, when the latent state is set, the normal symbol is in the low probability state, and the gaming state in which it is difficult to get the ball to the second winning opening 640 which is the start trigger of the special figure 2 is the normal state. In the same manner, a special figure 1 game (left-handed game) is executed in which a ball is won in the first winning opening 64 serving as a start trigger of the special figure 1.

  And, when winning a big hit (big hit probability 1/125) in the special figure 1 lottery, different game state is set after the big hit end according to the big hit type which is won. Specifically, if the type of jackpot that has won is "jackpot A, B" (50% of the whole jackpot), a positive change state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and it is "jackpot C, F" (jackpot 50% of the whole is configured so that the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  That is, in the case where the jackpot is won during the latent state, the player is more likely to set a gaming state advantageous to the player after the end of the jackpot game than when the jackpot is won during the normal state. . By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to make the gaming state more advantageous to the latent state than to the normal state, so that the current setting is made to the player even after the time saving state has ended. Since it is possible to play a game while expecting that the playing state being played is a latent state, it is possible to make it difficult to stop the game triggered by the end of the time saving state. In addition, since the low probability state of the normal symbol is set during the latent state, if you win the fall lottery and make the high probability state of the special symbol shift to the low probability state, the number of special drawing lottery times Regardless of, will transition to the normal state.

  As described above, in the second control example, a high probability state (a positive change state or a short time state) of the normal symbol is set after the end of the jackpot game, and thereafter, the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times (first When the high probability state of the normal symbol is finished until the time saving end condition is satisfied, the time saving end condition (the second time closing end condition) is set based on the big hit in the special drawing lottery or the small hit win. It will be Therefore, when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends before the first time short completion condition is established, it is possible to play the game while expecting whether or not the jackpot is won by the special drawing lottery.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, similarly to the first control described above, the player is not notified of the fall election even if the fall lottery is won in the period until the special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times. There is. And, when the high probability state of the normal symbol ends in the period until special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times, same back mode (stolen mode) regardless of the game state (normal state or latent state) ) Is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the big hit end, whether the present is a definite variation state (high probability state of the special symbol, high probability state of the normal symbol) or short time state (special In addition to making it difficult to understand whether the symbol is in the low probability state or the normal symbol high probability state), even after the normal symbol high probability state ends, the current latent state (special symbol high probability state, normal symbol It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether it is the low probability state) or the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state).

  Therefore, it can be easily determined that the currently set gaming state is a gaming state (for example, a normal state) which is disadvantageous to the player, and it is possible to suppress that the game is stopped early.

<Electrical Configuration in Second Control Example>
Next, an electrical configuration in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 490 to 498. In this control example, with respect to the electrical configuration of the first control example described above, the configuration of various counters of the main control device 110, the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the configuration of the RAM 203, and the sound lamp It differs in the point which added a new element to composition of ROM222 of MPU221 of control device 113, and composition of RAM223. The same elements as in the first control example are assigned the same reference numerals and detailed explanations thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to FIG. 490, the configuration of various counters in the second control example will be described. FIG. 490 is a schematic view schematically showing a counter configuration in the second control example. The second control example is configured to be able to win a small hit in the special symbol lottery with respect to the first control example described above, and is acquired when the jackpot in the special figure lottery is not won. Based on the value of the special random number counter C1, the small random number 2 table 202ab (see FIG. 493 (a)) is used to determine the presence or absence of a small hit. Then, when a small winning is won in the special figure lottery, using the small hitting type selection 2 table 202 ac based on the acquired value of the small hitting type counter C 6 in order to select the small hitting type of the small winning per selected The small hit type is configured to be selectable. In addition, the detailed content of the small hitting classification which can be selected by this control example is mentioned later.

  In the second control example configured as described above, the small hitting type counter C6 described above is added to the various counters of the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10, and the value of the obtained small hitting type counter C6 A small hit classification counter storage area for special symbol 1 holding ball number storage area 203a and special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b is provided with a small hit classification counter buffer for temporarily storing It differs in the point provided. Moreover, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 490, storage of each counter provided in the special symbol 1 holding ball number storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b also in the special symbol holding ball execution area This is different from the first control example in that an area is provided and a small hit type counter storage area is also provided.

  In addition, although details will be described later, in the second control example, it is made not to win a small hit in the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery), and only in the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) It is configured to be able to win a small hit. As described above, the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area is also provided by providing a small hitting type storage area for the special symbol 1 holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to the special figure (special figure 1) which can not be won. The configuration of the special symbol 2 holding ball storage area 203b can be unified. In addition, it is possible to unify the contents of processing (information acquisition processing) executed when acquisition conditions for acquiring values of various counters are satisfied. In other words, by special processing 1 lottery it is not necessary to win a small hit in the process to obtain the value of the small hit type counter C6 becomes unnecessary, and by darely provided a configuration to store the value of the small hit type counter C6 obtained , When the acquisition condition of Special Figure 1 is satisfied (when the ball is won in the first winning opening 64), and when the acquisition condition of Special Figure 2 is satisfied (when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640) , And the common processing can be executed, and the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

  Furthermore, when the game property is changed so that the small figure wins even in the special figure 1 lottery, since the change process can be easily executed, diversification of the game property can be easily performed. As in the present control example, the value of the small hit type counter C6 is obtained when the acquisition condition of the special view 1 is satisfied without using a configuration for simplifying the entire processing by providing the unnecessary processing. It may be configured not to acquire As a result, since information (value of the small hit type counter C6) which is not actually used for the game is not obtained, it is possible to reliably prevent an act of analyzing the game contents based on the information obtained unnecessarily. it can.

  As described above, in the second control example, the special hit random number counter C1 is used for the small hit lottery for drawing the presence or absence of the small hit among the special symbol lottery (special drawing lottery), and the small hit type is selected. When doing this, the small hitting type counter C6 is used. An initial value random number counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol are used to set the initial value of the small hit type counter C6. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and it returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is an execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 425), and some counters are periodically updated in the main processing (see FIG. 434) The updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. In the RAM 203, a first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a corresponding to a winning on the first winning opening 64 consisting of four holding areas (first to fourth holding areas), and four holding areas (first holding A second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning of the second winning opening 640 consisting of the first to fourth areas), and the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a is provided with the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a. According to the winning timing to the winning opening 64 (according to the establishment of the acquisition conditions), special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, stop type selection counter C3, fluctuation type counter CS1, fall lottery counter C4, small hits Each value of the type counter C6 is stored.

  And, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is satisfied, various values stored in the first holding area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are the first special symbol Shifting to the execution area, special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started. In addition, in the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203a, according to the winning timing to the second winning opening 640 (according to the establishment of acquisition conditions), special hit random number counter C1, special hit type counter C2, stop type The values of the selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the falling lottery counter C4, and the small hitting type counter C6 are stored.

  And, when the starting condition (variation condition) of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is satisfied, various values stored in the first holding area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a are the first special symbol Shifting to the execution area, special symbol variation based on the stored various values is started.

  In this control example, when drawing the presence or absence of the small hit, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 is used. That is, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot has been won by the special drawing lottery so that neither the jackpot nor the small hitting will be won in one special drawing lottery, and it is determined that the jackpot has not been won In this case, it is configured to determine whether or not the small win is won, so that it is possible to determine the big hit and the small hit using the common counter (special hit random number counter C1). doing. The present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated counter (for example, a small hit random number counter) for determining the presence or absence of a small hit may be provided.

  Further, in the present control example, when the acquisition condition is satisfied based on the ball winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 (for example, the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second The value of each main counter mentioned above is acquired when there is a vacant space in the storage area of the special symbol holding ball storage area 203b), and the acquired value is stored in the corresponding holding ball storage area Although it is configured to be stored, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is new in a state where there is a space in the storage area of the first special symbol holding ball storage area 203a or the second special symbol holding ball storage area 203b. When there is a prize, only the right to acquire the value of various counters is stored in the corresponding holding ball storage area, and the value of various counters is established based on the fact that the variation condition of the special symbol is established. It may be configured to acquire, or only a specific counter value is acquired based on the ball winning in the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640, and the remaining counter values are satisfied. It may be configured to obtain in case.

  As described above, in the present control example, as compared with the first control example described above, it is configured to be able to win a small hit in the special symbol lottery (special figure lottery), and the acquired small hit type Various controls are performed based on the value of the counter C6. Although the illustration is omitted, the value of the small hit type counter C obtained is configured to be used for various processes as the other counters, and S406 in the start winning process (see FIG. 428), and In the process of S413, a process is executed in which the value of the small hitting type counter C6 acquired similarly to the other counters is stored in the corresponding holding ball storage area. Also, in the processing of S503 and S505 in the pre-reading process (see FIG. 429), the result of the small winning lottery corresponding to the new winning is obtained, and the presence or absence of small hitting is won as the winning information command set in the processing of S504. And, the winning a prize information command which includes the information which shows the small hitting classification which is set is set.

  Furthermore, although detailed explanation is omitted, when the small figure is won in the special figure lottery, the small figure winning is displayed after the special figure fluctuation for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery is stopped (confirmed display) The small hit control process based on the small hit is set by the small hit control process executed every 4 milliseconds in the main process (see FIG. 434) of the main controller 110 setting the flag (small hit start flag) to be ON. A process is performed to execute.

  When this small hitting control process is executed, it is first determined whether the small hitting winning flag (small hitting start flag) is set to on, and if it is determined that it is set to on, it is set. The opening operation for executing the small hitting game according to the small hitting type is set, the small hitting middle flag is set on, and the small hitting start flag is set off. In this control example, when the small hitting game is executed, the variable winning device 65 is configured to be opened. Specifically, the opening period of the small hitting game (the closing period of the variable winning device 65 ( 0.2 seconds), round game period (open period of variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)), ending period (closed period of variable winning device 65 (0.2 seconds)) Is set.

  In this control example, even when any of the plurality of small hit types is set, the above-described opening operation is set. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from easily identifying the small hit type set for the small hit that has won this time based on the game content of the small hit game (the open operation content of the variable winning device 65). it can.

  The game content of the small hit game is not limited to this, and different game contents may be set according to the small hit type, for example, a small hit type for which a time saving end condition can be established, and others The game content of the small hit game executed with the small hit type may be made different. In addition, as described above, in this control example, the period in which the variable winning device 65 which is opened during the small hit game is in the open state is configured to be shorter than the big hit game, and is more specific than the big hit game A hit game in which it is difficult to win a ball in the winning opening 65 is configured to be executed. In addition, about the specific content of the small hitting game in this control example, only the period when the variable winning device 65 is in the open state and the period when it is in the closed state are made different, and other than that are in the first control example. It is the same as the jackpot game mentioned above.

  Therefore, since various processing contents executed during the small hit game are the same as the processing (see FIGS. 434 to 436) related to the jackpot control of the first control example described above, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 491 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 491 (a), in the second control example, a jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is provided instead of the jackpot type selection table 202c (see FIG. 408) in the first control example described above. And a small hitting random number 2 table 202ab which is referred to when determining the presence or absence of a small hitting, and a small hitting type selection table 202ac which is referred to when selecting a small hitting type which is set when a small hitting is won; It differs in the point which added the time reduction end condition selection table 202ad in which the time reduction end condition for ending the time reduction state (the high probability state of a normal symbol) is specified. The other elements are the same, and the detailed description of the same elements is omitted.

  The jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is used when selecting the jackpot type set at the time of jackpot winning, and it is defined with respect to the jackpot type selection table 202d (see FIG. 408 (a)) of the first control example. It differs in the point which added the jackpot classification being done. Specifically, "big hit F" can be selected as a big hit type when winning a big hit in a special figure 1 lottery, and "big hit G" is selected as a big hit type when a big hit is won in a special figure 2 lottery It differs in that it is configured to obtain. In addition, it is different in that it is configured to set the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the set jackpot type and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning.

  Here, contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 492 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 492 (a), the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa is selected for the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 to be referred to when the special figure 1 lottery wins the jackpot, and the special figure 2 lottery is won the jackpot And the special-figure 2 jackpot 2 table 202aa2 referred to in the case where it is referred to.

  Next, the contents of the special view 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 492 (b). FIG. 492 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the special view 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1. Similar to the special figure 1 jackpot table 202d1 described above, the special figure 1 jackpot 2 table 202aa1 is a data table used when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery. As shown in FIG. 492 (b), in this control example, when the special figure 1 lottery wins the big hit, as the big hit type "big hit A", "big hit B", "big hit C", "big hit F" Four types can be set. And the content (round game number) of the jackpot game is defined corresponding to the set jackpot type. Furthermore, corresponding to the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is defined for each jackpot type.

  Specifically, the "big hit A" is in the range of "0 to 9", the "big hit B" is in the range of "10 to 49", and the value of the obtained special hit type counter C is "50 to 79". In the range of "big hit C", in the range of "80 to 99", "big hit F" is defined. When "big hit A" is set as the big hit type, "15 round (R) round games" is executed as a big hit game. Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, the "probable change state" is set after the jackpot game is over.

  When "big hit B" is set as the big hit type, "round game of 5 rounds (R)" is executed as a big hit game. Then, regardless of the gaming state at the time of the jackpot winning, the "probable change state" is set after the jackpot game is over.

  In addition, when “big hit C” is set as the big hit type, “round game of 5 rounds (R)” is executed as a big hit game. And, if the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is normal state, "time saving state" is set after the jackpot gaming is over, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is other than the normal state (latency state, probability change state, time saving state) In this case, the "time saving state" is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  Finally, when "big hit F" is set as the big hit type, "round game of 5 rounds (R)" is executed as a big hit game. And, if the gaming state at the time of jackpot win is normal state, “normal state” is set after the jackpot game is over, and the gaming state at jackpot win is other than the normal state (latency state, probability change state, time saving state) In this case, the "time saving state" is set after the end of the jackpot game.

  In this control example, the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed (left-handed game) is configured to be executed in the normal state and the latent state, and the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used. In the effect mode of the effect to be executed (background mode effect), the same effect mode (stray mode) is set in the case where the normal state is set and in the case where the latent state is set. Configured.

  And, as described above, the gaming state which is more disadvantageous to the player when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the latent state than in the case where the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state It is configured that it is difficult to set the status). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make the gaming state more advantageous to the player in the latent state than in the normal state. A game can be played while expecting that the latent state is set. In addition, as described above, it is configured that the probability of winning the jackpot in the special figure lottery is higher in the latent state which is the high probability state of the special symbol than in the normal state which is the low probability state of the special symbol. Therefore, it is possible for the player to make the game state more advantageous to the latent state than to the normal state.

  Moreover, as a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the time reduction state, the probability change state in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed (right-handed game) is executed, for example, already acquired at the time of jackpot win There is a pattern in which the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 suspension is executed during the definite change state or the time saving state set after the big hit game is over. In this control example, when winning a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery with such a pattern, the game state is set with the same content as when winning a big hit in the special figure 1 lottery during the latent state. Configured.

  By configuring in this manner, a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 suspension immediately after the gaming state (probable change state, time reduction state) for causing the player to perform the right-handed game is set. It is possible to suppress setting of a gaming state (normal state) in which a left hitting game is performed after the end of the big hit game. Therefore, although the right-handed game advantageous to the player is once set, the left-handed game is set without executing the special figure 2 lottery by the right-handed game, thereby reducing the player's willingness to play It is possible to suppress the situation that

  Next, with reference to FIG. 492 (c), the contents of the special view 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 included in the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa will be described. FIG. 492 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2. The special figure 2 jackpot 2 table 222aa2 is a data table to be referred to when selecting the jackpot type when the jackpot is won by the special figure 2 lottery.

  As shown in FIG. 492 (c), in this control example, when the special figure 2 lottery is won, it is possible to set three types of "big hit D", "big hit E" and "big hit G" as the big hit type. It is composed of And the content (round game number) of the jackpot game is defined corresponding to the set jackpot type. Furthermore, corresponding to the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game is defined for each jackpot type.

  Specifically, the "big hit D" is in the range of "0 to 79", the "big hit E" is in the range of "80 to 89", and "90 to 99" in the acquired value of the special hit type counter C. The jackpot G is defined in the range of. In this control example, when a big hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery, “15 round (R) round game” is executed as a big hit game regardless of the set big hit type. And according to the jackpot type set, it is comprised so that the game state set after the jackpot game end may be varied.

  Specifically, when "big hit D" is set, regardless of the gaming state at the time of big hit, "probable change state" is set after the big hit game is ended, and "big hit E" is set. The "time saving state" is set after the end of the jackpot game regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot win. And when "big hit G" is set, if the gaming state at the time of big hit is "probable change state", "normal state" is set after the end of big hit game, and other than positive change state (normal state, When the latent state, the time saving state is set, the “time saving state” is set after the end of the big hit game.

  The small hit random number 2 table 202ab is a data table for determining whether or not the small hit was won in the special drawing lottery, and is referred to when the big hit is not won in the special drawing lottery (in the case of winning out) It is a thing. The small hit random number 2 table 202ab determines whether the lottery result is a small hit in the out-of-time change process (see S351 in FIG. 500) executed in the special symbol change start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499). It will be referenced when you

  Here, the contents of the small hitting random number 2 table 202ab will be described with reference to FIG. 493 (a). FIG. 493 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the small hitting random number 2 table 202ab. As shown in FIG. 493 (a), the small hitting random number 2 table 202ab defines the value of the special hitting random number counter C1 which will be a small hitting for each symbol type (special symbol type), and each special symbol type is specified. When the lottery of is performed, the result of the special drawing lottery is a small winning by comparing the acquired value of the special random number counter C1 with the judgment value defined in the small random number 2 table 202ab. It is judged whether or not.

  Specifically, the symbol type is "special figure 1" and the value of the special hitting random number counter C1 which is a small hitting win is not defined, and the symbol type is "special figure 2" is a small hitting special "0 to 4" is defined as the value of the per-random number counter C1. That is, in this control example, the small hit is won only in the special figure 2 lottery, and the small hit probability in the special figure 2 lottery is defined to be 1/100. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the lottery result different between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, so that diversification of the game can be realized, and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  Moreover, although details will be described later, in this control example, if a specific small hit (small hit A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice) during a time saving state (high probability state of a normal symbol), a time saving end condition (second time shorting) The termination condition is satisfied, and the time saving state is terminated. As described above, since this control example does not win a small hit by the special figure 1 lottery, the special figure 1 lottery based on the special figure 1 suspension is executed immediately after the time saving state is set. The second time saving end condition is not satisfied based on the lottery.

  Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery executed in the normal state, and the time saving state is set after the jackpot game is finished, that is, the time saving state is set in the state where the special figure 2 suspension is not obtained It is possible to suppress that the time saving state is ended by the special figure 1 lottery performed in the case. Further, as in the first control example described above, this control example is configured to end the time saving state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, so it is executed, for example, immediately after the time saving state is set. When the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the special drawing lottery (the first special drawing lottery after the time saving state is set), the short time playing game (time saving game), that is, the opening operation of the electric role 640a There is a problem that the time saving state ends without causing the second winning opening 640 to play a game for winning a ball.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, since the second time reduction end condition is not established by the special figure 1 lottery, a big hit is won in the special figure 1 lottery executed in the normal state, If the time saving state is set after the end of the big hit game, that is, if the time saving state is set in a state in which the special figure 2 hold is not obtained, the time saving state ends without causing time saving game Can be suppressed. Further, in the present control example, since the number of times of winning for the small winning that satisfies the second time saving end condition is “two times”, the time saving state is not finished by one special drawing lottery in the time saving state. There is. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the end of the time saving state without causing the time saving game to be performed even though the time saving state is set.

  Here, in the case of winning a small hit in the special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery), a different winning game is executed as in the case of winning the large win, and specifically, the variable winning A hit game in which the device 65 is opened for a predetermined period (for example, 0.2 seconds), that is, a hit game which can give a player a smaller bonus than the jackpot game is executed.

  In this control example, the same winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is likely to win the ball from the first state (closed state) where the same winning opening (specific winning opening 65a) is difficult to win the ball when the small hit is won and the big hit is selected Although it is configured that a hit game is executed to open the variable winning device 65 so as to change to two states (opened state), the present invention is not limited thereto, and a variable that differs between the big hit game and the small hit game The winning device may be configured to open.

  In this case, the bonus (the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins) granted when the ball wins in the winning opening possessed by the variable winning device to be opened during the small hitting game, the opening operation during the big hit game It may be configured to be smaller than the case where the ball wins in the winning opening possessed by the variable winning device to be controlled, or may be opened during the small hitting game than the winning opening possessed by the variable winning device opened during the big hit game The winning opening included in the variable winning device to be operated may be configured to be more difficult to win a ball.

  In this control example, in the special figure lottery, a data table (special symbol jackpot random number table 202a) for judging whether or not the jackpot was won, and a data table for judging whether the jackpot is won for the small jack (small punch random number 2 Although the table 203ab) and are separately used, the present invention is not limited thereto, and it is configured to use one data table to determine whether or not the special drawing lottery of this time is a big hit or a small hit. It is good. In this case, for example, the value of the special hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the small hit in the big hit random number table 202a may be defined without overlapping with the value of the special hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the big hit. By configuring in this manner, the number of data tables that the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 has can be reduced.

  The small hit type selection 2 table 202 ac is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type set at the time of the small hit, and is referred to when the small hit is won in the special drawing lottery is there. The small hitting type selection 2 table 202ac of this control example is configured to be able to select the small hitting A and the small hitting B as the small hitting types, and is executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see S258 in FIG. 499). If it is determined that the special drawing lottery result in this time is a small hit (see S371 in FIG. 500) in the outlier variation process (see S351 in FIG. 500), it is referred to determine the small hit type See S374 in FIG. 500).

  Here, the contents of the small hitting type selection 2 table 202 ac will be described with reference to FIG. 493 (b). FIG. 493 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the small hitting type selection 2 table 202ac. In the small hitting type selection 2 table 202 ac, different small hitting types are defined corresponding to the value of the obtained small hitting type counter C 6. Specifically, “small hit A” is defined in the range of “0 to 64” and “small hit B” is defined in the range of “65 to 99” in the value of the small hit type counter C6 acquired. Although the detailed description will be described later, in this control example, a predetermined small hit (for example, a small hit A) is specified in a state (a short time state, a positive change state) in which a short time state (normal pattern high probability state) is set. When the number of times (for example, twice) is won, the time saving state (the high probability state of the normal symbol) is ended. That is, as a condition (time saving end condition) for shifting the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) to the normal symbol low probability state, a time saving end condition (second time saving end condition) based on small hitting is set Are configured to be

  Here, when the time saving end condition is established in a state in which the time saving state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the high probability of the normal symbol) is set, the normal state (the low probability state of the special symbol, the low probability of the normal symbol) Is set. In this control example, as in the first control example described above, since the game state is more advantageous for the player in the time reduction state than in the normal state, the player can save time as long as possible. Will be playing while expecting to be set.

  On the other hand, in the present control example, as described above, since the time saving end condition is established based on the small hitting win, it is known to the player at which timing the time saving state ends. It can be difficult. Therefore, the player who is playing a game in the time saving state can be made to play a game with tension.

  In addition, in this control example, as the time control ending condition same as the first control example described above, the number of lottery times (the number of fluctuation) of the special symbol executed in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set For example, a time saving end condition that is satisfied when reaching 100 times is also set. In this way, an upper limit can be set during a period in which a gaming state in which the player is advantageous is set (a period in which the time saving state is set), and therefore, it is suppressed that the player is given extra benefits. can do.

  Similarly, in the state in which the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbol, high probability of normal symbol) is set, when time saving end condition is satisfied, the latent state (high probability state of special symbol, low probability of normal symbol) ) Is set. Also in this case, the probability change state is more advantageous to the player than the latent state. In this control example as well as the first control example described above, when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set after the end of the big hit game, a predetermined period after the end of the big hit game (the number of times of special figure fluctuation is 100 times) Special period effect is executed in the period until it reaches), and the normal mode or the latent state is set during the mode effect, the same mode (stray The mode is set, and the mode effect corresponding to the lost mode is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state while the mode effect is being performed. Here, the difference between the normal state and the latent state will be described. In the normal state and the latent state, the low probability state of the normal symbol is set in both cases, and the electric role object 640a is opened based on the common figure, and the ball is hard to win in the second winning opening 640 Therefore, the game state is such that a left-handed game (special figure 1 game) in which the first winning opening 64 is made to win a ball is executed, but the normal state is a low probability state of a special symbol, Since the certain state is a high probability state of the special symbol, the probability of winning a big hit in the special symbol lottery (special figure lottery) is more likely to be a latent state (one big win probability 1) than the normal state (one big win probability 1/250) / 125) is higher.

  Furthermore, when the jackpot is won, the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot is made different depending on whether the jackpot is won during the normal state or the jackpot during the latent state. The game is configured such that the player can more easily set a game state more advantageous to the player when the jackpot is won during the latent state than when the jackpot is won during the normal state. Specifically, the ratio of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game in the case of winning the jackpot in the normal state is configured to be 50% probability change state, 30% time saving state, and 20% normal state On the other hand, the ratio of the gaming state set after the end of the jackpot game when the jackpot is won in the latent state is 50% of probability change state and 50% of time reduction state. Therefore, the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

  As described above, in the present control example, the normal state is set during the mode effect that is executed during a predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game (period in which the number of times of special figure fluctuation reaches 100 times). When the latent state is set, the same mode (stray mode) is set, and the mode effect is performed in the same effect mode. With this configuration, while the mode effect corresponding to the lost mode (normal mode or mode for indicating the latent state) is being executed, the current state is the normal mode or the latent state. The player can be prevented from being easily identified. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the situation where the player immediately stops the game when the time saving state or the definite variation state ends.

  Furthermore, in this control example, the current gaming state is normal for the player at the timing when the mode effect is ended (the timing when the number of times the special figure fluctuation executed after the big hit game ends reaches 100 times). It is configured to be able to execute notification effects capable of identifying whether there is a certain condition or a latent condition. This makes it difficult for the player to play a game (for example, in spite of the fact that the normal state is set), by executing an effect that makes it difficult to tell whether the current state is the normal state or the latent state. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game in which it is determined that the certain state is set.

  The time saving end condition selection table 202 ad is a data table for setting a condition (time saving end condition) for ending the time saving state (normal symbol high probability state) set after the big hit game is completed. It is referred to in setting timing (end timing of the big hit game).

  Here, the contents of the time saving end condition selection table 202 ad will be described with reference to FIG. 493 (c). FIG. 493 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents defined in the time saving end condition selection table 202ad. As shown in FIG. 493 (c), the time saving end condition selection table 202ad is defined such that different time saving end conditions are set according to the set jackpot type, and specifically, as the jackpot type “ After the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot A, E, F, G "is set," 100 "is set in the value of the time saving medium counter 203j, and the value is not set in the small hitting counter 203aa. Ru.

  Although details will be described later, the time-span-middle counter 203 j is a counter whose value is decremented by one each time a special figure fluctuation is executed during the time-span state, and when the value of the counter becomes “0”, It is determined that the condition for ending the time saving state (first time shortening end condition) is satisfied. Also, the small hitting counter 203 aa decrements its value by 1 every time it wins a specific small hitting (small hitting A) during the short time condition (every time the special drawing fluctuation won in a specific small hitting is executed). When the value of the counter becomes “0”, it is determined that the condition for ending the time saving state (second time reduction ending condition) is satisfied.

  That is, after the end of the jackpot game in which "big hit A, E, F, G" is set, the second short time finish condition (time short end condition established based on the small hit win) is not set time short state is set .

  On the other hand, after the end of the big hit game in which "big hit B, C, D" is set as the big hit type, "100" is set to the value of the time saving medium counter 203j, and "2" is set to the value of the small hit counter 203aa. The short stop condition is set. That is, after the end of the jackpot game in which "big jack B, C, D" is set, when the small jack A is elected twice as a second time short end condition (time short end condition established based on the small hit win) A time saving end condition is established, and a time saving state is set.

  In this control example, as described above, the gaming state in which the time saving state (the high probability state of the normal symbol) is set is a gaming state advantageous to the player than the gaming state in which the low probability state of the normal symbol is set. Therefore, by providing the short time state in which the second short time ending condition is set and the short time state in which the second short time ending condition is not set, the time shortness in which the gaming state advantageous to the player is easy to be continued It is possible to set the state and the short time state that is difficult to continue.

  In this control example, regardless of which jackpot type the time saving state is set, "100 times" is set as the number of times of fluctuation (special figure fluctuation number) of the special symbol as the first time shortening end condition. Although it is configured as described above, the present invention is not limited to this, and different first time saving end conditions may be set according to the jackpot type, or a jackpot type in which the first time saving end condition is not set may be provided. Furthermore, although the big hit type which sets up the 2nd time shortening end condition and the big hit type which does not set are provided, it may be possible to set different end conditions as the 2nd time saving end condition according to the big hit type. Furthermore, in the present control example, the time saving state is ended when either the first time reducing end condition or the second time reducing end condition is satisfied, but the present invention is not limited thereto. The time saving state may be ended when the ending condition and the second time shortening ending condition are satisfied.

  In addition, in the present control example, although the time saving state is ended at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation even when any time shortening end condition is satisfied, the present invention is not limited thereto. The short time state may be ended at different timings according to the type of the time short end condition, for example, when the first time short end condition is met, the timing when the satisfied special view fluctuation is stopped and the stop indication is ended The time saving state may be ended at the timing (when the symbol determination display period has elapsed), or when the second time saving end condition is satisfied, the second time saving end condition is satisfied. Based on the timing to stop display of the figure fluctuation, the timing to end the stop display (the timing when the symbol determination display period has elapsed), or the small hit winning that the second time short end condition is satisfied And timing the hit game is executed may be terminated time-shortening condition at a timing when the small hit game is finished. With this configuration, by grasping the timing at which the time saving state ends, it becomes possible to make the player predict the time saving end condition established this time.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control apparatus 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 491 (b). The RAM 203 of the second control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 203 of the first control example described above in that a small hit middle flag 203 aa and a small hit counter 203 ab are added, and the other is the same. About the same element, the same numerals are attached and the detailed explanation is omitted.

  The small hit middle flag 203aa is a flag used to determine whether or not the small hit game is currently in progress, and is set to ON when the small hit game is being executed. Although detailed description of the specific processing content is omitted, in this control example, it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed in the special figure fluctuation processing (see S104 of FIG. 426) of the first control example described above (see FIG. When it is determined that the current lottery result is not a jackpot (S216 in FIG. 426; No), a process of determining whether the current lottery result is a small hit is added, and the process is performed. When it is determined that the current lottery result is a small hit, a control process for starting a small hit game is executed, and a flag indicating that the small hit game can be performed (for example, Set the small hit start flag) to on. Then, in the main process (see FIG. 434) of the main control unit 110 of the first control example described above, a flag (for example, a small hit start flag) indicating that the small hit game can be executed is set to ON. To periodically (every 4 milliseconds) determine whether it has been set, and to make a small hit game according to a predetermined opening operation rule when it is determined that it is set to ON The small hit middle flag 203aa is set to ON while executing the control process of And, when the small hitting game which is executed with the control processing in order to execute the small hitting game ends, the small hitting middle flag 203aa is set to off.

  In this control example, the variable winning device 65 is operated to open during the small hitting game, but during this small hitting game, the ball winning the variable winning device 65 plays the game ball to the second area. The sorting device (V combination) is configured to be maintained in a sortable arrangement (arrangement in which it can not be distributed to the first area), and the ball wins the variable winning device 65 during the small hitting game Even if, it is comprised so that the 1st field (V field) may not be passed. As a result, even though the ball passes through the first area (V area) while the variable winning device 65 is in the opening operation, there is a situation where a positive change state (high probability state of special symbol) is not given To suppress that.

  In this control example, the number of devices disposed on the game board 13 can be reduced by making the same winning device open by small hit game and the winning device open by big hit game, thereby reducing the cost. Although reduction is intended, the present invention is not limited to this, and a small winning game dedicated winning device may be provided separately from the variable winning device 65. In this case, a small winning game-dedicated winning device (small hitting winning device) may be provided at a position apart from the second winning opening 640 which is a starting condition of the special figure 2 lottery that can win a small hitting, for example, In the case of a pachinko machine 10 using a configuration of the gaming board 13 capable of winning a ball in the second winning opening 640 by the right-handed game, the area where the ball fired by the left-handed game can flow down (right-handed game It is good to constitute so that a small hit winning device may be disposed in a region where it is difficult (or impossible) for the ball fired by the to flow down. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for a player who is performing a right-handed game to execute the special figure 2 lottery to notice that a small hit game has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand when the above-described second time reduction end condition is satisfied. Further, in this case, it is preferable that a period (fixed display period) in which the result of the special drawing lottery is stopped and displayed is extended in a part of the case where the result of the special drawing 2 lottery is out. Thereby, since the period until the next special figure lottery is performed can be lengthened after the result of the special figure lottery is stopped and displayed, the next special figure is executed by the small hitting game being executed It is a player whether a predetermined period is required before the lottery is executed, or a predetermined period is required until the next special drawing lottery is executed because the stop display with a long fixed display period is performed. Can make it hard to grasp.

  The small hit counter 203ab is a counter for counting the number of times the small hit A is selected in the special figure 2 lottery and the small hit A is set as the small hit type, and after the big hit game is over, the time saving end condition selection table 202ad A value to be the second time-shortening end condition is set by reference. Then, when the small hitting A is set during the time saving state, the value is decremented by one. Then, the value of the small hitting counter 203ab after subtraction is referred to when it is judged whether or not the time saving state is ended, and the control for ending the time saving state when the value after subtraction becomes 0. Is executed.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 494 to 498. FIG. The present control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the configuration is added to the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113. First, the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the present control example will be described with reference to FIG. 494 (a). FIG. 494 (a) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example. The ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in this control example is different from the ROM 222 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above in that a serif mode related table 222aa and an operation effect switching table 222ab are added. Different, otherwise identical. In FIG. 494 (a), although a part of the same elements as the first control example is omitted, the same elements are included, and the detailed description thereof is omitted.

  The speech mode related table 222aa is a data table for setting an effect mode of the speech effect to be executed when the speech mode is set. Here, the serif mode set in the present control example will be briefly described. The speech mode is one of the presentation modes set based on the variation pattern command output from the main control unit 110, and when the speech mode is set, the "serif" described above with reference to FIGS. 483 and 484. A zone is displayed, and an effect of displaying a serif corresponding to the stop display mode of the third symbol (output from the voice output device 226) is performed.

  Next, the detailed contents of the speech mode related table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 495. First, with reference to FIG. 495 (a), the display mode of each symbol variably displayed as the third symbol (fusion third symbol) when the speech mode is set will be described. FIG. 495 (a) is a figure showing the correspondence of each symbol. As shown in FIG. 495 (a), the fusion third symbol is formed in a display mode in which the number mode which is identification information for showing the lottery result of the special figure lottery and the character mode which shows the character emitting the speech are fused. In the example, numeral patterns are attached corresponding to each character pattern. The image data of the fusion third symbol is stored in the character ROM of the display control device 114, and the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display command indicating that the serif mode is set to the display control device 114. When it does, it is used as the image data which shows the identification information in order to show the lottery result of the special design.

  In this control example, different character modes are associated with the number modes 1 to 9, and further, the large character modes are associated with "1 to 4" of the number mode and "5 to 9". The fusion 3rd pattern is formed so that another may separate. Specifically, the character mode included in the biological group of land is set to the fusion third symbol corresponding to "1-4" in the number embodiment, and the fusion third symbol corresponding to "5 to 9" is set. , And character aspects included in the marine life group are set.

  Next, contents of the speech mode related table 222aa will be described with reference to FIG. 495 (b). FIG. 495 (b) is a schematic view showing the content of the speech mode related table 222aa. As shown in FIG. 495 (b), the speech mode related table 222aa includes a speech state setting table 222aa1 for setting the present speech progress, a character selection table 222aa2 for selecting a character that emits speech, and the like. The serif selection table 222aa3 for setting the serif contents of is selected, with reference to each table, the fusion third symbol to be stopped and displayed during the serif mode is selected, and furthermore, each fusion third symbol is It is configured to select the type of speech to be emitted.

  First, the contents of the speech state setting table 222aa1 will be described with reference to FIG. 495 (c). FIG. 495 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the speech state setting table 222aa1. The speech state setting table 222aa1 is based on the history information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac in which the history information of the fused third symbol stopped and displayed in the state in which the speech mode is set is stored. This is a data table to be referred to when setting the state, and as shown in FIG. 495 (c), each speech state is defined based on the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac. Based on the selected serif state, the type of the fused third symbol to be stopped and displayed next, and the serif content (serif form) to be displayed (output) during the serif mode are selected.

  Next, contents of the character selection table 222aa2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 496 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the character selection table 222aa2. The character selection table 222aa2 is a different character based on the serif state set using the serif state setting table 222aa1, the determination result of the special figure variation to be targeted, and the acquired value of the character selection counter 223ad It is configured that the left fusion third symbol) to be stopped first is selected.

  Next, the contents of the speech selection table 222aa3 will be described with reference to FIG. 497. FIG. 497 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the speech selection table 222aa3. This dialogue selection table 222aa3 is a type of right fusion third symbol, middle fusion third symbol, based on the dialogue state set using the dialogue state setting table 222aa1 and the character selected by the character selection table 222aa2. And it is a data table for selecting the serif contents (serif form) of each fusion 3rd pattern.

  The operation effect switching table 222ab is a data table for switching the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed when the variable operation effect is set based on the fluctuation pattern output from the main control device 110. In this control example, when the variable operation effect is set, after moving the lever member 10340 (hereinafter referred to as the lever member 10340) of the operation device 10300 from the origin position to the operation position (raising position), as shown in FIG. As shown in 484 (a), a variable operation effect for causing the player to operate the lever member 10340 (depression operation) is executed.

  However, in the state where the effect period of the variable operation effect (operation effective period) has elapsed, if the depressing operation is not performed on the lever member 10340, the effect period of the variable operation effect (operation effective period) has elapsed. Regardless, the lever member 10340 remains in the operating position (raised position). In this case, the lever member 10340 is moved from the operating position (raising position) to the home position using the driving means (motor or the like) for variably operating the lever member 10340, and the lever member 10340 is in the initial state (home position). It is possible to return the lever member 10340 to the state before the variable operation effect is started by executing the return process for positioning the lever in the position, but using this configuration enhances the effect Since the lever member 10340 returns to the initial position without the player operating the lever member 10340 positioned in the operating position despite the fact that the lever member 10340 is moved to the operating position for the purpose, the rendering effect is There was a problem that it could not be raised.

  On the other hand, in the second control example, the normal state (the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position) when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the operation position in the state where the effect period of the variable operation effect has elapsed. The depression operation effect for performing the depression operation on the lever member 10340 is configured to be easier to be executed than in the state of FIG. That is, in order to execute one variable operation effect, effect preparation processing is performed to move the operation means (lever member 10340) from the first position (origin position) to the second position (operation position), and effect preparation processing After the game is completed, the player is configured to execute the variable operation effect for moving the operation means from the second position to the first position to the player, and the player operates the operation means during the variable operation effect If the operating means (lever member 10340) does not move to the first position (if it continues to be at the second position), the operating means is at the second position even after the variable operation effect is finished. It is configured to maintain the state (state in which the effect preparation process has been completed) positioned at (the operating position), and in the state in which the effect preparation process is completed, the above-described depression operation effect is easily performed. ing.

  With this configuration, it is possible to cause the operation means (the lever member 10340) for which the effect preparation process has been executed to execute the depression operation effect a plurality of times in order to execute one depression operation effect. Therefore, the operation means can be easily moved to the initial position by the operation of the player.

  Further, in the present control example, in the state where the effect preparation process is completed (the operation means is positioned at the operation position), the operation means is performed although the depression operation effect is performed a predetermined number of times (twice) Is at the second position (operating position), the operating means is moved to the first position (home position) using drive means (such as a motor) for variably operating the operating means (lever member 10340) It is configured to move (perform recovery processing). By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the depression operation effect is performed relentlessly. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution frequency of the effect of giving dissatisfaction to the player who does not want to perform the operation on the operation means. Further, in this case, storage means capable of storing that the return process has been performed is provided, and when the return process is performed, that is, a state in which the effect preparation process is completed (a state where the operation means is in the operating position) In the case where it is stored that the state where the operation means is positioned at the second position (operation position) has appeared despite the fact that the depression operation effect has been performed a predetermined number of times (two times). The variable operation effect may be difficult to be executed. This makes it possible to provide an effect corresponding to the player's preference.

  Here, the contents of the operation effect switching table 222ab will be described with reference to FIG. 498. FIG. 498 is a schematic view schematically showing the content of the operation effect switching table 222ab. The operation effect switching table 222ab is referred to when switching the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed according to the setting status of the initial position fluctuation flag 223ag, the origin point detection flag 223ae, and the operation position detection flag 223af. is there.

  Specifically, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is off, the origin detection flag 223ae is off, and the operating position detection flag 223af is off, the touch effect (see FIG. 485) is set as the effect mode of the variable operation effect. When the operation position detection flag 223af is turned on, a lever push-up effect (see FIG. 484 (b)) is set. When the initial position switching flag 223ag is off and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever depression effect (see FIG. 484 (a)) is set regardless of the setting status of the operation position detection flag 223af.

  When the initial position switching flag 223ag is on, the origin point detection flag 223ae is off, and the operation position detection flag 223af is off, touch effect is set, and when the operation position detection flag 223af is on, the lever is pushed up. An effect is set. Finally, when the initial position switching flag 223ag is on and the origin detection flag 223ae is on, the lever depression effect is set regardless of the setting status of the operating position detection flag 223af.

  Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIG. 494 (b). FIG. 494 (b) is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. As shown in FIG. 494 (b), the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example is the special figure fluctuation frequency counter 223 aa with respect to the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 in the first control example described above. Effect mode storage area 223ab, stop symbol information storage area 223ac, character selection counter 223ad, origin detection flag 223ae, operation position detection flag 223af, initial position change flag 223ag, return operation timer 223ah, operation effect flag 223ai, effect standby The difference is that a flag 223aj, an effect information storage area 223ak, a variable operation effective period timer 223am, a second variation time timer 223an, a pressing effect prohibit flag 223ao, and a variable effect priority flag 223ap are added, and the other is the same. As shown in FIG. 494 (b), for convenience of explanation, some of the elements of the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above are omitted, but the voice lamp control of this control example is The RAM 223 of the device 113 has all the elements of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 of the first control example described above, and the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  The special figure fluctuation number counter 223aa is a counter for measuring the number of fluctuations of the special symbol (special figure), and when the time saving state (normal pattern high probability state) is set after the big hit game is over, the big hit game It is for measuring the period until the number of times of special figure fluctuation executed after the end reaches 100 times. In this control example, when the second time-shortening completion condition is satisfied, the time-saving state (the high probability state of the normal symbol) is before the number of times of special figure fluctuation executed after the big hit game ends reaches 100 times. Although the name and the configuration are separated because they may end, the specific contents of the special figure fluctuation number counter 223aa are the same as the time saving guaranteed number counter 223g in the first control example described above.

  The effect mode storage area 223ab is a storage area for storing the effect mode set by the background mode effect, and temporarily displays the back mode set in the back mode lottery process 2 (see S4362 in FIG. 515). It is something to remember.

  The stop symbol information storage area 223 ac is a storage area for storing stop symbol information (type of left symbol, set words) in the state where the speech mode is set.

  The character selection counter 223ad is a loop counter which is a kind of effect counter, and the value thereof is referred to when setting the character with reference to the character selection table 2222aa2.

  The origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af are flags for indicating the position of the lever member 10340, and an origin detection sensor (not shown) that the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position (origin position) ) Detects that the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the operation position detection flag 223af is turned on when the operation position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the lever member 10340 is in the operation position. Set to

  When both the origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af are set to OFF, it is determined that the lever member 10340 is positioned between the initial position and the operation position, and the origin detection flag 223ae When both of the operating position detection flags 223af are set to ON, failure of detection means (home position detection sensor, operation position detection sensor) for detecting the position of the lever member 10340, or failure of the lever member 10340 Is considered to be an abnormal state.

  Although detailed description is omitted, here, when it is determined that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state, an operation representation effect is produced using an abnormal time selection table in which the variable operation representation using the lever member 10340 is not selected. While the mode is set, an error command indicating that the lever member 10340 is in an abnormal state is output to the outside.

  The initial position change flag 223ag is a flag for changing the initial position of the lever member 10340. The initial position change flag 223ag is set to off during a normal state where the initial position of the lever member 10340 is the home position. It is set to ON when using the position as the origin position. According to the setting condition of the initial position change flag 223ag, the effect mode of the variable operation effect is set.

  This eliminates the need to repeatedly execute the return processing that is executed after the execution period of the operation effect has passed. In addition, failure in the operation device 10300 can be suppressed by executing the return process against the force for maintaining the operation position.

  The return operation timer 223ah is a timer for measuring an elapsed time during return processing for driving the lever member 10340 toward the initial position, and is set to a predetermined value (for example, 5) when the return processing is executed. A value indicating seconds is set. Then, the value of the recovery operation timer 223ah is decremented by the counter updating process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113 which is periodically executed. It is comprised so that return processing may be performed until it becomes. The value (time) set in the recovery operation timer 223af is set to be longer than the time required for one recovery process, and when the recovery process is executed once, the lever member A plurality of return processes are performed on 10340.

  The operation effect flag 223 ai is a flag for determining whether the operation effect is currently being performed, and is set to ON when the operation effect is executed, and is set to OFF when the operation effect is ended. . This control example is configured to be able to set (execute) the operation effect at different occasions. Specifically, when setting an effect (variation effect) corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, and the special figure starting port (No. In the case where an effect (hold effect) is set based on the winning of the ball in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640), the operation effect is configured to be executable.

  The effect standby flag 223aj is a flag for indicating that the operation effect is in the execution standby state, and is set to ON when waiting for the execution of the operation effect. If the timing at which the effect standby flag 223aj determines that the operation effect can be executed as the hold effect is during the first period of the fluctuation effect and the operation effect is performed as the fluctuation effect, Set to on.

  And in the timing which sets the production | presentation aspect with respect to the 2nd period of a fluctuation production, a production | presentation aspect is set based on the setting condition of a flag.

  The effect information storage area 223ak is a storage area for temporarily storing information on each effect. Various presentation modes are set using the information stored in the presentation information storage area 223ak.

  The variable operation effective period timer 223am measures the variable operation effective period for effectively determining the operation on the operation means (lever member 10340) executed by the player when the variable operation effect is set as the operation effect. Timer, and when executing variable operation effect, a value corresponding to the variable operation effect to be executed is set, and the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113 periodically executed. It is subtracted by the counter updating process (see S3113 in FIG. 502). Then, a period until it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am becomes 0 is set as the variable operation valid period.

  The second fluctuation time timer 223 an is a timer for measuring the elapsed period of the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, and is a timing to set the effect mode of the second period in the effect period of the fluctuation effect Is referred to when it is determined whether it has reached. In the second variation time timer 223an, a value calculated as the timing for setting the effect mode of the second period in the normal effect setting process (see S4351 in FIG. 513) is set (see S5215 in FIG. 513), It is subtracted by the counter update process (see S3113 in FIG. 502) of the main process 2 (see FIG. 502) of the audio lamp control device 113 which is periodically executed. Then, when it is determined in the effect update process 2 (see S3151 in FIG. 503) that the value is 0 (S3255 in FIG. 503: Yes), the second for setting the effect mode corresponding to the second period A period setting process is executed (see S3256 in FIG. 505).

  The pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is a flag for indicating a period during which the pressing effect for operating the PUSH button 10317 is prohibited as the variation effect corresponding to the special figure variation, and the pressing effect is selected. Is set to on during a period that prohibits

  In this control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 207 to 211, one operation device 10300 includes the PUSH button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and the PUSH button moves by moving the lever member 10340. 10317 is also configured to move in conjunction. Therefore, in the present control example, while the return processing for moving the lever member 10340 to the initial position is being executed, the depression effect for causing the player to operate the PUSH button 10317 is not performed.

  By configuring in this manner, the PUSH button 10317 moves in conjunction with the movement of the lever member 10340 in a state where the player tries to press the PUSH button 10317 based on the execution of the pressing effect, and the smooth operation is performed. It is possible to suppress the problem that the PUSH button 10317 can not be pressed.

  In addition, the depression effect is executed while the return process of the lever member 10340 is being executed, thereby suppressing the player from gazing at the operation device 10300 during the return process and giving the player a sense of discomfort with the effect. can do. In the present control example, the pressing effect prohibition flag 223ao is set so that the pressing effect is not executed during the return processing of the lever member 10340. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the pressing effect is executed During the operation, the return processing of the lever member 10340 may not be executed. In this case, the same effect as the above-described effect can be obtained.

  The variable effect priority flag 223ap preferentially changes the variable operation when setting an operation effect (a variable operation effect, a pressing effect, etc.) for operating the operating means (for example, the lever member 10340, PUSH button 10317) for the player. It is a flag for indicating a period in which the effect is set, and is set to ON during a period in which the variable operation effect is preferentially set.

  The variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to ON when the variable operation effect is ended in a state where the lever member 10340 is at the second position (operation position). Thereby, in the state where the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position (operating position), the variable operation effect can be set more easily than in the state where the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position (origin position). Can. In addition, in the state where the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position (operation position), it is possible to make it difficult to execute other operation effects (for example, depression effects).

  As described above, in this control example, the operation device 10300 uses the configuration having the PUSH button 10317 and the lever member 10340, and when the lever member 10340 is in the operation position, it is in the initial position. The lever member 10340 separates from the base of the operation device 10300 more than in the case. Then, since the PUSH button 10317 is provided on the tip end side of the lever member 10340 (the opposite side to the base of the operation device 10300), the PUSH button 10317 is directed to the PUSH button 10317 in the state where the lever member 10340 is in the operating position. In addition to the case where the pressing operation is performed on the push button 10317 in a state where the lever member 10340 is positioned at the initial position when the pressing operation is performed, various structures of the operation device 10300 (for example, the lever member 10340) ), Which may lead to failure of the operation device 10300. On the other hand, in the present control example, in the state where the lever member 10340 is located at the operating position, the variable operation presentation is selected preferentially as the operation presentation, so it is positioned at the operation position The lever member 10340 can be easily moved to the initial position by the operation of the player, and the failure of the operation device 10300 can be suppressed.

  In this control example, when the operation effect is set in a state where the lever member 10340 is at the operation position, the variable operation effect is selected prior to other operation effects. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, even in the case where a change effect for which no operation effect is set is set, the variable operation effect may be set instead of the effect mode of the change effect. The variable operation effect may be selected more easily in the case where the lever member 10340 is in the operating position than in the case where the lever member 10340 is in the initial position. Also, other than the fluctuation effect executed corresponding to the special figure fluctuation, for example, it is executed during the common game fluctuation presentation, the big hit game, the small hit game which is executed corresponding to the normal symbol fluctuation (common figure fluctuation) In the case of the hit game effect, the variable operation effect may be selected more easily in the case where the lever member 10340 is located at the operation position than when the lever member 10340 is located at the initial position.

<About control processing of main controller in second control example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control apparatus 110 in the second control example will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 499 to 501. Hereinafter, the same control processing as that of the first control example is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, the details of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 499. The special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) is a process executed instead of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 427) in the first control example.

  Of the special symbol variation start process 2 (S258) in this second control example, in each of S301 to S309, S310 to 313, S315, S318 and S319, the special symbol variation start process in the first control example (FIG. 427) The same processing as each processing of S301 to S309, S310 to S313, S315, S318 and S319) is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S309 that the jackpot of the special symbol is determined (S309: Yes), the jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type selection 2 table 202aa (S352), and the process proceeds to S310.

  Further, after the processing of S313 is performed in the processing of S313, the processing of S315 is not performed, and the processing of S315 is performed. After the process of S315 is performed, the out-of-time variation process is performed without executing the processes of S316 and S317 (S351), and the process proceeds to S318. Note that details of the out-of-time variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 500, details of the out-of-time variation processing (S351) in the second control example will be described. The out-of-time variation process (S351) is a process executed in the special symbol variation start process 2 (see FIG. 499) in the second control example, and the result of the special figure lottery is other than a big hit (outside or small Is executed when the

  When the out-of-time variation process (S 351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (S 371), and it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (outside) (S371: No), the display mode at the time of removal is set (S372), the fluctuation pattern at the time of removal is determined (S373), and the process proceeds to S381. Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the dislocated symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the fluctuation pattern (variation corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 Determine the time).

  If it is determined in the process of S371 that the current lottery result is a small hit (S371: Yes), a small hit type is determined based on the small hit type selection 2 table 202ac (S374).

  Here, the small hitting type is determined by comparing the value of the small hitting type counter C6 acquired in the process of S301 with the random number value stored in the small hitting type selection 2 table 202ac (see FIG. 493 (b)). Set Specifically, if the value of the small hitting type counter C6 is in the range of "0 to 64", the small hitting A is set, and if it is in the range of "65 to 99", the small hitting B is set.

  After the process of S374, it is determined whether the determined small hitting type is the small hitting A (S375). When it is determined that the small hitting type is not the small hitting A (the small hitting B) (S375: No), the process proceeds to S381. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hitting type is the small hitting A (S 375: Yes), the value of the small hitting counter 203 ab is incremented by 1 (S 376), and then the value of the small hitting counter 203 ab after addition is 2 It is determined whether it is (S377).

  When it is determined that the value of the small hitting counter 203ab after the addition is not 2 (S377: No), the process proceeds to S380. When it is determined that the value of the small hitting counter 203ab after the addition is 2 (S377: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the second short finish condition is satisfied by the current small hitting win, the time saving state (normal symbol In order to shift the high probability state) to the low probability state, reset the value of the time saving counter 203g to the initial value (S378), set the state command indicating the time saving end (S379), and shift to the processing of S380. Do.

  In the process of S380, the variation pattern (small hitting variation pattern) corresponding to the small winning hit this time is determined. Although detailed description is omitted, when winning in a small hit in the special figure lottery, the same variation pattern as in the case of winning in a large hit in the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example described above is set. That is, of the variation pattern selection table 202b, the variation pattern to be referred to when a big hit is won in the special view lottery is determined. With this configuration, it is possible to make the variation pattern determined based on the small hit win the same as the variation pattern determined based on the big win. Therefore, since the effect mode of the special figure variation production performed based on the determined variation pattern can be made the same, it is possible to make it difficult to understand whether the player has won the big hit or the small hit.

  In the process of S381, a fluctuation pattern command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the fluctuation pattern determined in the processes of S373 and S380 is set (S381). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set (S 382). The fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp control device 113 is processed in the processing of S1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 434) in the first control example. Will be sent. When the process of S382 is finished, the process returns to the special symbol variation process.

  Next, the details of the jackpot end process 2 (S1160) in the present second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. The jackpot end process 2 (S1160) is a process that is executed instead of the jackpot end process (see FIG. 437) in the first control example.

  In the processes of S1301 to S1302 and S1305 among the jackpot end process 2 (S1160) in the second control example, the processes of S1301 to S1302 and S1305 of the jackpot end process 2 (see FIG. 437) in the first control example The same process as each process is performed.

  After executing the processing of S1301 and S1302, the gaming state at the time of big hit is read (S1351), and the presence or absence of the time saving state setting is determined based on the read gaming state and the big hit type (S1352). Here, in the second control example, as the other memory area 203z of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the current gaming state, the gaming state at the time of winning (when the win is determined by the special drawing lottery), and It has storage means (playing state storage means) capable of temporarily storing the gaming state at the start of the game. Then, in the process of S1351 described above, a process of reading out the gaming state at the time of the big hit from the gaming state storage means which the other memory area 203z has is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a new gaming state based on the past gaming state (the gaming state at the time when the setting condition of the gaming state is established), not limited to the gaming state currently set. Can provide various games.

  Next, it is determined whether or not there is a setting of the time saving state (S1353). If it is determined that the time saving state is set (S1353: Yes), values are set to various counters based on the contents defined in the time saving end condition selection table 202ad (S1354), and the gaming state after the big hit ends The big hit end command which shows is set (S1355), it moves to the processing of S1305.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1353 that the setting of the time saving state is not set (S1353: No), the process of S1354 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S1355.

<Control Process of Voice Lamp Controller in Second Control Example>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to flowcharts in FIGS. 502 to 516. In the second control example, in addition to the first control example described above, processing for performing variable operation effects for operating the lever member 10340 which is a variable operation member is added, and a serif mode as a fluctuation effect Can be set in addition to the point for adding processing for setting the point, the point for changing the processing content for setting the effect mode of the variation effect that is set when the variation pattern command is received, and the winning information command is received To change the processing content for setting a special hold effect (hold notice effect), and in the process of selecting the back mode, to select the latent mode to be executed when the latent state or the normal state is set The difference is in that processing of was added, and the others are the same. Hereinafter, the same control processing as that of the first control example is denoted by the same reference numeral, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

  First, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 502, main processing 2 executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 502 is a flowchart showing the main process 2. The main process 2 is a process that is executed instead of the main process (see FIG. 441) in the first control example.

  Of the main processing 2 in the second control example, the processing of S3102 to S3110 and S3116 to 3120 is the same as the processing of S3102 to S3110 and S3116 to 3120 of the main processing (see FIG. 441) in the first control example. Processing is performed.

  After executing the process of S3110, the effect update process 2 is executed (S3151). The details of the effect execution process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 503 to 505. After the processing of S3151, the depression detection processing 2 is executed (S3152). The details of the pressing detection process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 506 and 507. After the process of S3152, the operation effect management process is executed (S3153). The details of the operation effect management process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the process of S3153, the variable operation means management process is executed (S3154). The details of the variable operation means management processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 509. After the processing of S3154 is executed, command determination processing 2 is executed (S3155). After executing the process of S3155, the variable display setting process 2 is executed (S3156), and the process shifts to the process of S3116.

  Next, the effect update process 2 (S3151) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 503 is a flowchart showing this effect update process 2 (S3151). This effect updating process 2 (S3151) is a process that is executed instead of the effect updating process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example, and sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation, and periodically It is variable while judging the progress of the fluctuation effect (variation display effect) based on the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s that measures the fluctuation time (variation elapsed time, fluctuation remaining period) of the special figure fluctuation by updating the value. The effect updating process in the first control example described above is the process for updating the effect content of the operation effect or executing the fluctuation effect corresponding to the second period (the second half period of the special figure fluctuation under execution) The processing added to FIG. 442) is executed.

  Also, the second variation time timer 223 an, which measures the period from the start timing of the special figure variation to the setting of the effect aspect of the variation effect corresponding to the second period, is updated similarly to the variation time timer 223 s described above Is configured to execute processing for setting the presentation mode of the second period when the value becomes 0 (when it is determined that it is the timing to set the presentation mode of the second period) doing.

  Of the effect update process 2 (S3151) in this second control example, in each process of S3201 to S3206, the same process as each process of S3201 to S3206 of the effect update process (see FIG. 442) in the first control example To be executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S3201 that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s is 0, that is, if it is determined that the present is not in the special figure fluctuation (S3201), the process proceeds to S3255.

  On the other hand, after the process of S3206 is performed, the variable operation effect process is executed (S3251), and the process proceeds to S3252. The details of the variable operation effect process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In the process of S3252, it is determined whether the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s indicates the start timing of the second period (S3252). When it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s indicates the second period start timing (S3252: Yes), the information indicating the fluctuation display mode of the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak is read out (S3253) Based on the read information, a display variation pattern command is set (S3254), and the process proceeds to S3255.

  Although the detailed description will be described later, in the present control example, when the variation pattern command is received, the production mode of the variation display effect is not set for the whole period of the variation time included in the variation pattern command. Only in the (first period), the effect mode is set. Specifically, as described above with reference to FIG. 487, when the received fluctuation pattern command includes information indicating a fluctuation time of 60 seconds (a fluctuation effect corresponding to a fluctuation time of 60 seconds is set In the case where the variation pattern command is received, presentation period information indicating that the present variation time is 60 seconds, and the presentation period is the first period (30 seconds), the second period (30 seconds) The effect information storage area 223ak stores each period information divided into the first period effect mode information indicating the effect mode set for the first period. Then, a value corresponding to the second fluctuation time timer 223 an is set in order to measure a second period effect mode setting timing (28 seconds after the start of fluctuation) indicating a timing of setting an effect mode corresponding to the second period.

  By configuring in this manner, it becomes possible to execute the process for setting the effect mode of the second period effect 28 seconds after the start of the special figure change. The exercise information storage area 223ak is also configured to store the rendering result (for example, the rendering result of the operation rendering performed during the first period) for the rendering performed during the first period, The effect mode of the second period effect is set based on various information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak.

  Thereby, even at a timing different from the timing at which the fluctuation pattern command is received from main controller 110, it is possible to set the effect mode of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the remaining period (second period) of the special figure fluctuation period. . Further, since it is possible to set the second period effect based on the information indicating the effect result of the effect already performed (effect performed during the first period), the start timing of the special figure change is It is possible to make it easier to set a variety of effect modes than when setting the effect mode of change effects for the entire period of the figure fluctuation period.

  In this control example, an example is shown in which the special map fluctuation period is divided into two periods of a first period (first half period) and a second period (second half period), but three or more periods are not limited thereto. The variation periods may be divided, and the presentation mode corresponding to each variation period may be set before reaching each variation period. Also, in this control example, the timing before the arrival timing of the second period (FIG. 487) is not the arrival timing of the second period (the timing of 30 seconds after the start of the special pattern fluctuation in the example shown in FIG. 487). In the example shown, the presentation mode in the second period is set at 28 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation), and once stored in the presentation information storage area 223ak, then at the arrival timing of the second period, By configuring the variable presentation to be performed in the presentation mode stored in the presentation information storage area 223ak, it is possible to simplify the process to be executed at the arrival timing of the second period, but However, the present invention may be configured to execute a process for setting an effect mode during the second period at the arrival timing of the second period. By configuring in this way, the processing to be executed at the arrival timing of the second period increases, but without storing the effect mode set corresponding to the second period in the effect information storage area 223ak, Since it is possible to execute as it is, it is possible to simplify the storage area for storing the information indicating the presentation mode of the fluctuation presentation.

  In the process of S3252, when it is determined that the value of the fluctuation time timer 223s does not indicate the start timing of the second period (the timing of 30 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation start in the example of FIG. 487) (S3252: No , S3253 and S3254 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S3255.

  In the process of S3255, it is determined whether the value of the second variation time timer 223an is 0 (S3255). If it is determined that the value of the second fluctuation time timer 223an is not 0 (S3255: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the value of the second fluctuation time timer 223an is 0 (S3255: Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the timing to set the rendering mode of the second period, the second period setting process is executed. (S3256) After that, this processing ends. The details of the second period setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 504, the variable operation effect process (S3251) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 504 is a flowchart showing the variable operation effect process (S3251). The variable operation effect process (S3251) is a process executed in the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example.

  In the variable operation effect process (S3251), a process for setting an effect mode of the variable operation effect and a process for ending the variable operation effect are executed. As described with reference to FIGS. 485 and 486, in this control example, as an effect mode of the variable operation effect, a depressing operation effect of depressing the lever member 10340, a pushing effect of pushing up the lever member 10340, and a lever member 10340. Instead of this, it is possible to set the touch effect to touch the detection range of the touch sensor, and to set the effect mode according to the position condition of the lever member 10340 at the execution timing of the variable operation effect doing.

  With this configuration, it is possible to suppress a situation in which contradiction occurs between the effect mode of the variable operation effect to be executed and the position condition of the lever member 10340. Specifically, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the depression operation effect is performed in a state where the lever member 10340 is already lowered.

  In this control example, for convenience of explanation, it is described that a touch effect which does not allow the player to perform an operation on the lever member 10340 is included as a part of the variable operation effect. As described above, the touch effect is an operation effect using a touch sensor, and is an operation effect not using the lever member 10340 which is a variable operation member. However, by performing an effect for touching the detection range of the touch sensor, it is an operation effect for creating a state in which the player's hand is separated from the lever member 10340. For example, the lever member It becomes an effect for releasing the hand from the lever member 10340 which is the variable operation member for the player who holds 10340 continuously. Therefore, if it sees in a broad sense concept, it becomes a part of variable operation production. That is, in this control example, as a variable operation effect, a depression operation effect (see FIG. 18) for moving the variable operation member (lever member 10340) positioned at the second position (operation position) toward the first position (origin position). 484 (see (a)) and a push-up operation effect to move the variable operation member (lever member 10340) positioned at the first position (the origin position) toward the second position (the origin position) (FIG. 484 (b) And a touch effect (see FIG. 485) for releasing the hand from the variable operation member (lever member 10340).

  When the variable operation effect process (S3251) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601). Here, the determination is performed based on the effect mode information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak and the value of the fluctuation time counter 223s.

  When it is determined in the process of S4601 that the present time is the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601: Yes), the effect mode of the current variable operation effect is set with reference to the operation effect switching table 222ab (S4602) A value corresponding to the operation effect period is set in the variable operation effective period timer 223am corresponding to the set effect mode (S4603), the in-operation effect flag 223ai is set to ON (S4604), and the process proceeds to S4608.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4601 that the current time is not the start timing of the variable operation effect (S4601: No), it is next determined whether the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4605) . When it is determined that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4605: Yes), a rendering mode indicating the end of the variable operation rendering is set (S4606), and the operation rendering flag 223ai is set to off ( The process shifts to the processing of S4607) and S4608. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is not 0 (S4605: No), the processing of S4606 and S4607 is skipped, and the processing shifts to the processing of S4608.

  In the process of S4608, a display command indicating the effect mode set this time is set (S4608), and then the process ends. Thereby, it is possible to execute the effect corresponding to the start timing and the end timing of the variable operation effect.

  Next, the second period setting process (S3256) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 505 is a flowchart showing the second period setting process (S3256).

  The second period setting process (S3256) is a process executed within the effect update process 2 (FIG. 503) in the second control example. In the second period setting process (S3256), a process for setting an effect mode corresponding to the second period (second half period) in the effect period of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation being executed is executed. . In addition, when the hold operation effect is on standby (the effect standby flag 223 ah is set to ON), the processing for setting the effect mode for executing the hold operation effect during the second period is executed. .

  When the second period setting process (S3256) is started, first, information related to the special figure fluctuation being executed (information corresponding to various information contained in the corresponding fluctuation pattern command) from the effect information storage area 223ak, The information on the rendering result of the first period and the information on the second period (information indicating the length of the second period) are read (S4701), and then it is determined whether the rendering standby flag 223ah is on (S4702) . If it is determined that the effect standby flag 223 ah is not on (is off) (S 4702: No), it is then determined whether or not there is additional effect information during the first effect period (S 4703). The additional effect information determined in the process of S4703 is the effect of the player on the operation unit (e.g., PUSH button 10317, lever member 10340) among the effects to be executed during the first period (the first effect period). Like information for showing the rendering result of the rendering (for example, special drawing manipulation rendering) in which the rendering result is variable based on the executed operation content, of the variation rendering performed during the first period (the first rendering period) Among the effects configured such that one of the effect modes is selected from the plurality of effect modes according to the selection condition (operation to the operation means) established during the first period as the effect mode (set Information to indicate the presentation mode. In this additional presentation information, when a presentation mode is selected based on a selection condition established from among a plurality of presentation modes, information for indicating the selected presentation mode is added to the presentation information storage area 223ak as additional presentation information. Stored.

  If it is determined based on the information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak that there is additional effect information during the first effect period (S 4703: Yes), the variation display mode corresponding to the additional effect information is set ( The process shifts to the processing of S4705) and S4710. When it is determined that there is no additional effect information during the first effect period (S4703: No), the variation display mode is set based on the information regarding the second period stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4704), It transfers to the process of S4710.

  Thus, in the present control example, the second period (second effect period) is based on the contents of the additional effect information (stored in the effect information storage area 223ak) acquired during the first period (first effect period). Because it is configured to be able to set the production mode, the production mode of the fluctuation production to be executed corresponding to the fluctuation time of one special figure fluctuation is divided into a plurality of production periods and set at different timings When configured to, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel uncomfortable when the effect modes set in each effect period are combined. Therefore, the rendering effect in the whole fluctuation rendering can be enhanced.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4702 that the effect waiting flag 223ah is on (S4702: Yes), it is determined whether the pending collective change effect is possible during the second effect period (S4706). If it is determined that the pending collective change presentation is possible during the second effect period (S4706: Yes), the variable display mode corresponding to the pending collective change presentation is set (S4707), and the process proceeds to S4709. When it is determined that the pending collective change presentation is not possible during the second presentation period (S4706: No), the variation display mode is set based on the information regarding the second period stored in the presentation information storage area 223ak ( The process shifts to the processing of S4708) and S4709.

  Here, specifically explaining the processing content executed in S4706, in the present control example, the present special figure fluctuation is a special figure fluctuation that has won a big hit, or a special drawing lottery result is out of order. If there is a fluctuation pattern (for example, a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation time for a long time is set) with a high expectation of a big hit as a fluctuation pattern, the second half of the special figure fluctuation effect (equivalent to the second period) In this case, a special figure fluctuation effect (for example, a super reach effect) is suggested to be easily performed to indicate to the player that there is a high possibility that the special figure fluctuation this time is a big hit.

  In such a case, that is, when an effect for making the player interested in the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation in progress is executed, the newly acquired winning information (special figure reservation) By performing the hold production for suggesting the content in the second half period (second period) of the special figure change production, the interest for the special figure change production becomes thin, there is a problem that the production effect is reduced there were. Therefore, in this control example, it is configured to determine the presence / absence of execution of the hold operation effect based on the information for setting the effect mode of the second period (various types of information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak) doing. As a result, it is possible to make it easy to understand the effects (special figure fluctuation effect, hold effect) that should be made to make the player gaze during the second period. In addition, without restricting to this, it is simply determined whether the length of the second period is longer than the execution period of the hold operation effect (hold batch change effect), and a period in which the hold operation effect during the second period can be executed. May be determined to be able to secure the display result indicating that the hold operation effect is not to be executed during the second period is displayed as the effect result of the effect executed during the first period Or may be determined based on the determination result.

  In addition, although the processing of S4708 described above, that is, although the effect waiting flag 223ah is set to on during the first period, the holding operation effect (holding batch change effect) during the second period can not be executed. If it is determined that the display area of the suggested character HC1 is stopped in the display mode (display mode other than "PUSH") without operating the operation means as shown in FIG. 486 (b), the stop is performed An effect that is changed to an effect mode according to the displayed mode is executed.

  In this control example, as shown in FIG. 486 (a), when the execution of the hold operation effect is in the standby state, the suggestion character HC1 is displayed, and the effect of rotating the display portion of the suggestion character HC1 is executed. It is configured as follows. By rotating and displaying the display portion in this manner, it is possible to execute an effect that suggests the possibility that the hold operation effect will be performed later, and even if the hold operation effect is not performed as described above. The game can be continued without giving the player a sense of dissatisfaction.

  In the process of S4709, the effect standby flag 223ah is set to OFF (S4709), and the process proceeds to the process of S4710. In the process of S4710, each information set this time is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S4710), and then this process is ended.

  Next, pressing detection processing 2 (S3152) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 506 is a flowchart showing this pressing detection process 2 (S3152). The depression detection process 2 (S3152) is executed instead of the depression detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example, and is referred to when the depression operation to the PUSH button 10317 is performed. And a variable operation detection process that is executed when the lever member 10340 is variably operated.

  In the processes of S3601 to S3607 among the processes of pressing detection process 2 (S3152) in the second control example, the same processes as the processes of S3601 to S3607 of the pressing detection process (see FIG. 447) in the first control example are performed. To be executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S3601 that pressing of the PUSH button is not detected (S3601: No), the process proceeds to S3653. If it is determined in the process of S3606 that the value of the batch change period timer 223x is 0 (S3606: No), it is then determined whether the value of the other pressing effective period timer is greater than 0 (S3606: No) S3651). If it is determined that the value of the other pressing effective period timer is larger than 0 (S3651: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the effect being executed is set (S3652), and thereafter, the process proceeds to S3653. If it is determined that the value of the other pressing effective period timer is 0 (S3651: No), the process proceeds to S3653.

  In the process of S3653, it is determined whether or not the operation on the operation means (lever member 10340, touch sensor) used for the variable operation effect is detected (S3653). If it is determined that the operation on the operation means used for the variable operation effect is detected (S3653: Yes), the variable operation detection process is executed (S3654). The details of the variable operation detection process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Here, the processing content of S3653 will be described. As described above, in this control example, the lever member 10340 is configured to be variably operable between the first position (origin position) and the second position (operation position). When the detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lever member 10340 is at the first position detects the lever member 10340, the origin detection flag 223ae is set to ON, and the lever A detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the member 10340 is in the second position is configured such that the operation position detection flag 223af is set to ON when the lever member 10340 is detected. doing.

  Then, after the origin point detection flag 223ae in the on state is set to off, the actuation position detection flag 223af in the off state is set to on, or the actuation position detection flag 223af in the on state is off When the origin detection flag 223ae in the OFF state is set to ON after setting to, it is determined in the process of S3653 that the operation on the lever member 10340 is detected.

  The method of determining that the operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected is not limited to the method of this control example. For example, the setting state (on state, one of the detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, actuation position detection flag 223af) When it is determined that the OFF state is switched, it may be configured to determine that the operation on the lever member 10340 has been detected, or one of the detection flags (the origin detection flag 223ae, the operation position detection flag 223af) When it is determined that the setting state (on state, off state) is switched, it is determined that the first operation is performed, and the setting state (on state) of both detection flags (origin detection flag 223ae, actuation position detection flag 223af) And when it is determined that the off state has been switched (by the operation detection content in this control example). If the second operation is determined to be detected, it may be configured such that different detection results are obtained when the first operation is established and when the second operation is established. . Furthermore, when the second operation described above is established, the lever member 10340 positioned at the origin position is operated until the setting state of the other detection flag is switched after the setting state of one detection flag is switched. Alternatively, different detection results may be obtained based on the time required to move the lever member 10340 positioned at the operating position to the home position.

  When it is determined in the process of S3653 that the operation on the operation means used for the variable operation effect is not detected (S3653: No), this process is ended as it is.

  Next, the variable operation detection process (S3654) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 507 is a flowchart showing the variable operation detection process (S3654). The variable operation detection process (S3654) is a process that is executed within the pressing detection process 2 (FIG. 506) in the second control example.

  When the variable operation detection process (S3654) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is larger than 0 (S4801). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable operation effect is currently being executed. If it is determined in the process of S4801 that the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is larger than 0 (S4801: Yes), the operating means (lever member 10340, touch within the variable operation effective period set for the variable operation effect is Since the sensor) is operated, the effect mode corresponding to the effect being executed is set (S4802), the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is reset to 0 (S4803), and then this processing is ended. Do.

  On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is not larger than 0 (is 0) (S4801: No), it is next determined whether the origin detection flag 223ae is on ( S4804). If it is determined that the origin point detection flag 223ae is on (S4804: Yes), it is then determined whether the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4805: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to off (S4806), and the process proceeds to the processing of S4807. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4805: No), the process of S4806 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4807. In the process of S4807, a lock process for fixing the variable operation means at the origin position is set (S4807), and then the process ends.

  When the lever member 10340 which is not located at the origin position is moved to the origin position during the period in which the variable operation effective period is not set by executing the processing described above, the lever member 10340 is at the origin position Will be locked. Therefore, even if the lever member 10340 is left with the lever member 10340 positioned at a position other than the home position while the variable operation effect is being performed, the lever member 10340 is merely moved to the home position. Can be locked securely.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4804 that the origin point detection flag 223ae is off (S4804: No), it is next determined whether the operation position detection flag 223af is on (S4808). If it is determined that the operating position detection flag 223af is off (S4808: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the operation position detection flag 223af is on (S4808: Yes), it is then determined whether the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4809). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4809: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set to off (S4810), and then the process ends. If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4809: No), the process of S4810 is skipped, and the present process is ended.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 508, the operation effect management process (S3153) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 508 is a flowchart showing the operation effect management process (S3153). The operation effect management process (S3153) is a process executed in the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example, and updates the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am during the variable operation effect period. Processing is performed.

  When the operation effect management process (S3153) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the variable operation effective period timer 223am is larger than 0 (S4901). If it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is 0 (S4901: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is larger than 0 (S4901: Yes), the value of the variable operation valid period timer 223am is updated (S4902), and then the updated variable operation valid period timer 223am is updated. It is determined whether the value is 0 (S4903). If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is not 0 (S4903: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the value of the updated variable operation effective period timer 223am is 0 (S4903: Yes), it is then determined whether the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4904). If it is determined that the initial position change flag 223ag is on (S4904: Yes), an initial recovery operation scenario is set (S4905), and a value corresponding to 5 seconds is set as the value of the recovery operation timer 223ah (S4906) And the depression effect prohibition flag 223ao is set to ON (S4907), and then this processing is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4904 that the initial position change flag 223ag is off (S4904: No), it is next determined whether the origin detection flag 223ae is on (S4908). If it is determined that the origin point detection flag 223ae is on (S4908: Yes), this processing ends. If it is determined that the origin point detection flag 223ae is off (S4908: No), the variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to on (S4909), and then the process ends.

  Next, the variable operation means management process (S3154) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 509 is a flowchart showing the variable operation means management processing (S3154). The variable operation means management process (S3154) is a process executed in the main process 2 (FIG. 502) in the second control example.

  When the variable operation means management process (S3154) is started, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the recovery operation timer 223ah is larger than 0 (S5001). If it is determined that the value of the recovery operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5001: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the value of the recovery operation timer 223ah is larger than 0 (S5001: Yes), the value of the recovery operation timer 223ah is updated (S5002), and the updated value of the recovery operation timer 223ah is 0 It is determined whether or not it is (S5003). If it is determined that the updated value of the recovery operation timer 223ah is not 0 (S5003: No), the recovery operation corresponding to the value of the recovery operation timer 223ah is set (S5004), and then this process ends. .

  If it is determined in the process of S5003 that the value of the updated recovery operation timer 223ah is 0 (S5003: Yes), the depression effect prohibition flag 223ao is set to OFF (S5005), and then the origin detection flag 223ae Is checked (S5006). If it is determined that the origin point detection flag 223ae is on (S5006: Yes), information indicating that the variable operation means is in the normal position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5007), and then this process ends. Do.

  If it is determined in the process of S5006 that the origin point detection flag 223ae is off (S5006: No), it is next determined whether the operation position detection flag 223af is on (S5008). If it is determined that the operation position detection flag 223af is on (S5008: Yes), the initial position change flag 223ag is set on (S5009), and information indicating that the variable operation means is in the opposite position is stored as effect information This is stored in the area 223ak (S5010), and then this process is ended.

  If it is determined in the process of S5008 that the actuation position detection flag 223af is off (S5008: No), information indicating that the variable operation means is an unknown position is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5011), Thereafter, the process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 510, the on-hold notice lottery process 2 (S4031) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 510 is a flow chart showing the on-hold notice lottery process 2 (S4031). The on-hold notice lottery process 2 (S4031) is a process executed instead of the on-hold notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example.

  S4051 to S4057 and S4060 of the suspension notice lottery process (see FIG. 453) in the first control example in each process of S4051 to S4057 and S4060 to S4063 among the suspension forecoming lottery process 2 (S4031) in the second control example The same processing as each processing of ̃S4063 is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4057 that the pending collective change effect has been executed (S4057: Yes), an execution timing setting process is executed (S4081), and then this process is ended. The details of the execution timing setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 511.

  Next, the execution timing setting process (S4081) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 511 is a flowchart showing this execution timing setting process (S4081). The execution timing setting process (S4081) is a process executed in the pending notice lottery process 2 (FIG. 510) in the second control example.

  When the execution timing setting process (S4081) is started, first, the information stored in the effect information storage area 223ak is read (S5101), and then it is determined whether the operation effect flag 223ai is on or not. (S5102). If it is determined that the operation effect in-progress flag 223ai is off (S5102: No), it is then determined whether or not the execution period of the pending collective change presentation can be secured (S5103), of the pending collective change presentation If it is determined that the execution period can be secured (S5103: Yes), the execution of the pending batch change presentation is set (S5104), the batch change flag 223p is set to ON (S5105), and then this process ends. Do. When it is determined in the process of S5103 that the execution period of the on-hold batch change effect can not be secured (S5103: No), the processes of S5104 and S5105 are skipped, and the process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5102 that the flag 223ai during operation effect is on (S5102: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the current fluctuation effect is in effect for the first period ( S5106). If it is determined that the current fluctuation effect is in effect for the first period (S5106: Yes), the effect standby flag 223aj is set to ON (S5107), and the display of the holding symbol mode indicating waiting is set ( S5108), and then this process ends.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5106 that the current fluctuation effect is not being performed during the first period (S5106: No), then whether or not the current fluctuation effect is during the second period. When it is determined that the current fluctuation effect is not being performed during the second period (S5109: No), this processing is ended as it is. If it is determined that the current fluctuation effect is in effect for the second period (S5109: Yes), display of the held symbol form corresponding to the latest winning information is set (S5110), and then this process is ended. .

  Next, with reference to a flowchart of FIG. 512, the variation effect setting process 2 (S4252) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 512 is a flowchart showing the variation effect setting process 2 (S4252). The fluctuation effect setting process 2 (S4252) is a process that is executed instead of the fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example.

  Of the fluctuation effect setting process 2 (S4252) in this second control example, in each of S4301 to S4311 and S4313, each of S4301 to S4311 and S4313 in the fluctuation effect setting process (see FIG. 456) in the first control example The same process as the process is performed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4311 that the current state is the positive variation state (S4311: Yes), the back mode lottery process 2 is executed (S4352), and the process proceeds to S4312. The details of the back mode lottery process 2 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 515 and 516.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S4311 that the present is not a definite variation state (S4311: No), the normal effect setting process is executed (S4351), and the process proceeds to S4313. The details of the normal effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 513 and 514.

  Next, the normal effect setting process (S4351) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 513. FIG. 513 is a flowchart showing the normal effect setting process (S4351). The normal effect setting process (S4351) is a process executed in the variation effect setting process 2 (FIG. 512) in the second control example.

  When the normal effect setting process (S4351) is started, first, it is determined whether the current state is the normal state (S5201). If it is determined that the current state is not the normal state (S5201: No), the process proceeds to S5214. If it is determined that the current state is the normal state (S5201: Yes), it is then determined whether the current state is the speech mode (S5202). When it is determined that the present is in the speech mode (S5202: Yes), the speech mode setting process is executed (S5203), and the process proceeds to S5204. The details of the speech mode setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If it is determined in the process of S5202 that the current mode is not in the speech mode (S5202: No), the process of S5203 is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S5204.

  In the process of S5204, it is determined whether the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not 30 seconds or more (S5204: No), the fluctuation display mode corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is set (S5205), and then the process proceeds to S5214. In the process of S5204, when it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (S5204: Yes), the first period (first half) corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern is extracted (S5206), and then, during the operation effect It is determined whether the flag 223ai is on (S5207). If it is determined that the operation effect flag 223ai is on (S5207: Yes), the variation display mode is set from among the effect mode group not using the operation effect as the effect mode of the first period (S5208), and then , And proceeds to the process of S5214.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S5207 that the flag during operation effect 223ai is off (S5207: No), it is next determined whether or not there is an operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210). If it is determined that there is an operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: Yes), it is next determined whether or not the variable effect priority flag 223ap is on (S5211). If it is determined that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is on (S5211: Yes), the variable operation effect is set as the operation effect (S5212), the variable effect priority flag 223ap is set to OFF (S5213), and the process of S5214 is performed. Transition to

  Further, in the process of S5210, when it is determined that there is no operation effect in the set effect mode (S5210: No), and when it is determined in the process of S5211 that the variable effect priority flag 223ap is off (S5211: No) And the process of S5214.

  In the process of S5214, a value obtained by subtracting 2 seconds from the number of seconds corresponding to the first period is calculated (S5214), and a data value corresponding to the calculated value is set in the second fluctuation time timer 223an (S5215). The set information is stored in the effect information storage area 223ak (S5216), and then the process ends.

  Next, the speech mode setting process (S5203) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. FIG. 514 is a flowchart showing the speech mode setting process (S5203). The speech mode setting process (S5203) is a process executed within the normal effect setting process (FIG. 513) in the second control example.

  When the speech mode setting process (S5203) is started, first, the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is read (S5301), and it is determined whether or not there is a second stop symbol information storage ( S5302). When it is determined that the second stop symbol information is not stored (S5302: No), the stop character corresponding to the lottery result and the words are randomly selected, and the effect mode of the speech effect is set (S5303), and the process of S5306 Transfer to processing.

  If it is determined in the process of S5302 that the second stop symbol information is stored (S5302: Yes), the speech state is set based on the speech state setting table 222aa1 (S5304), and the set speech state and yes or no Based on the determination result, the stop character is selected with reference to the character selection table 222aa2 (S5305), and the process proceeds to S5306.

  In the process of S5306, referring to the dialogue selection table 222aa3, the effect mode of the dialogue effect of this time is set (S5306), the information stored in the stop symbol information storage area 223ac is shifted by one (S5307), The set effect mode is stored in the previous storage area (S5308), and then the process ends.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 515, the rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 515 is a flowchart showing the back mode lottery process 2 (S4362). The back mode lottery process 2 (S4362) is a process that is executed instead of the back mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example.

  Of the rear mode lottery process 2 (S4362) in the second control example, S4501 to S4504 and S4506 in the rear mode lottery process (see FIG. 458) in the first control example in the respective processes of S4501 to S4504 and S4506 to S4511. The same processing as each processing of ̃S4511 is executed.

  If it is determined in the process of S4504 that the current gaming state is not a definite change state (S4504: No), the back surface mode setting process is executed after the time saving ends (S4551), and the process proceeds to S4510. The details of the rear surface mode setting process after the short time will be described later with reference to FIG. 516.

  Next, with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 516, a description will be given of the processing for setting the rear surface mode (S4551) after time saving which is executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example. FIG. 516 is a flowchart showing the rear surface mode setting process (S4551) after the short time ends. The back side mode setting process (S4551) after the short time is a process executed in the back mode lottery process 2 (FIG. 515) in the second control example.

  When the rear surface mode setting process (S4551) is started after the time saving, it is first determined whether the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state (S4561). If it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal state or the latent state (S4561: Yes), the back mode corresponding to the lost mode is determined (S4562), and then this process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S456 that the current gaming state is not the normal state or the latent state (S4561: No), the back surface mode is referred to with reference to the fallen table and the value of the effect lottery counter. Is drawn (S4563), and then the process ends.

<About the 1st modification of the 2nd control example>
Next, a first modification of the second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, an operation effect for operating the operation means as a hold effect while the operation effect for operating the operation means in the special image fluctuation effect (special image operation effect) is being executed. When the execution condition for executing (hold operation effect) is satisfied, the execution timing of each operation effect is configured so as not to overlap. On the other hand, in the first modification, the gaming environment adjustment means capable of adjusting the volume level of the pachinko machine 10 output from the voice output device 226, the brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, etc. The display has an operation means for adjustment (for example, a first button (for example, a button composed of an up arrow button and a down arrow button) with which the player can select an operation content, and a display of the third symbol display device 81 The player can operate the second button (for example, a button displayed as menu / decision on the pressed surface of the button) operated when displaying the menu screen on the screen or deciding the selection content. It is possible to set the game environment to suit the taste of

  Here, the method of adjusting the gaming environment will be briefly described. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on and the second button described above is pressed, a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. A menu screen for adjusting the game environment is displayed. The menu screen includes a volume adjustment display mode for adjusting the volume level, a light amount adjustment display mode for adjusting the brightness, a game information display mode for checking the game information of the pachinko machine 10, and a menu screen An end display mode to end the is displayed, and an arbitrary display mode is selected by operating the above-described first button, and the corresponding screen is displayed when the second button is pressed.

  When the first button is operated and the volume adjustment display mode is selected and the second button is pressed, the volume adjustment screen is displayed. On this volume adjustment screen, a volume indicator indicating the volume of the pachinko machine 10 stepwise is displayed, and the volume level of the pachinko machine 10 can be variably operated by operating the first button and varying the volume indicator. It is configured. In this case, each time the first button is operated to change the volume indicator, the demonstration voice (for example, the speech of the character 801) is output at a volume corresponding to the selected volume level. As a result, the player can easily grasp how much the volume corresponding to the volume level currently selected is. Then, by operating the second button in a state where the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the currently selected volume level is determined, and the volume adjustment is completed.

  In addition, when the second button is pressed in a state where the light amount display mode is selected, a light amount adjustment screen is displayed. On the light amount adjustment screen, a light amount indicator indicating the brightness (light amount) of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 of the pachinko machine 10 in a stepwise manner is displayed. The light amount can be adjusted based on the content of the operation on the button. The brightness of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the amount of light determined here (specifically, the brightness of the backlight for illuminating the display surface of the liquid crystal display constituting the third symbol display device 81 ) Can be adjusted.

  Furthermore, when the second button is pressed in a state where the gaming state display mode is selected, the gaming nature of the pachinko machine 10 and the past gaming history are displayed.

  As described above, in the state where the second button is operated and the menu screen is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol is acquired based on the fluctuation effect of the special symbol or the start winning of the special symbol. It will be in a state where visual effects based on hold are difficult to see. Furthermore, since it is necessary to provide a plurality of operation means in the limited space of the pachinko machine 10, the game environment is adjusted with the operation means (lever member 10340. PUSH button 10317) used for each control example described above. It is necessary to arrange the adjustment operation means (first button, second button) for the same in the vicinity.

  Therefore, during adjustment of the game environment (during operation of the first button and the second button), the special figure operation effect is executed as a variation effect of the special symbol, or the hold operation effect is executed as a hold effect. If this is done, there is a problem that when the game environment is adjusted, not the adjustment operation means but the operation means is operated erroneously, and an unintended effect is executed.

  On the other hand, in the first modification, as in the second control example described above, execution conditions for executing operation effects (special drawing operation effects, hold operation effects) for operating the operation means are satisfied. If it is determined that it is during a period of operating the adjusting operation means (period of displaying the menu screen) and it is determined that it is a period of operating the adjusting operation means, execution of the operation effect is waited for It is configured as follows.

  By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which different operation means are operated at the same time, so it is possible to provide a game easy for the player to understand. Furthermore, the player adjusts the game environment in a state in which the waiting effect is executed and the suggested character HC1 (see FIG. 486 (a)) indicating that the execution of the operation effect is waiting is displayed. When the first button is operated, the rotational speed of the display portion of the suggested character HC1 is increased, and the image is displayed at a high speed.

  Thereby, when the standby effect is being executed while adjusting the game environment, when the adjusting operation means is operated to adjust the game environment, the display content suggested to be displayed by the effect mode of the standby effect is displayed. It can be confusing. Specifically, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the character of "PUSH" which prompts the user to operate the operation means displayed on the display part of the suggested character HC1. Therefore, it is possible to suppress that the player who recognizes the character of "PUSH" rotated and displayed by the suggestion character HC1 erroneously operates the operation means or the adjustment operation means.

  On the other hand, when the operation effect using the operation means is being executed, since the effective period capable of effectively determining the operation to the second button is not set, the player can substitute for the operation means. Even if the second button is operated by mistake, the menu screen is not displayed. Thus, the adjustment operation means is disposed in the vicinity of the operation means, and the menu screen is displayed when the second button is erroneously operated during the operation effect, thereby suppressing the situation of significantly reducing the effect of the effect. Can.

  Note that the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the first modified example, and the operation means (lever member 10340, PUSH button even when the first button or the second button is operated while the operation effect is being executed. 10317) may be configured to be performed, or during the period in which the operation valid period is not set for the first button and the second button, the first button, the A configuration may be used in which a physical restriction is provided so that the player can not press the 2 button.

<About the 2nd modification of the 2nd control example>
Next, a second modification of the second control example will be described. In the second control example described above, an operation effect for operating the operation means as a hold effect while the operation effect for operating the operation means in the special image fluctuation effect (special image operation effect) is being executed. When an execution condition for executing (hold operation effect) is satisfied, the game is difficult for the player to understand by configuring so that the execution timing of each operation effect does not overlap, that is, one operation effect (for example, Even if the operating means is operated to the special drawing operation effect), the game that the effect aspect of the other operation effect (for example, hold operation effect) is varied based on the operation of the operating means is not executed Was configured. On the other hand, in the second modification, the operation effect for operating the operation means by the special figure fluctuation effect (special figure operation effect) and the operation effect for operating the operation means as the hold effect (hold operation In the case where the effects are performed redundantly (the operation effective period set for each operation effect overlaps), the operation effect that is easy for the player to understand is set by setting a special operation effect mode. It is configured to be executable. Specifically, it is configured to be able to execute a combined operation effect which combines the special view operation effect and the hold operation effect.

  The combined operation effect is an operation in which the effect mode for indicating the result result of the special image operation effect or the effect result of the hold operation effect is set as the effect mode of the effect performed based on the operation of the operation means. It is an effect, and specifically, an operation effective period in which an operation effective period capable of effectively judging an operation on the operation means in 10 seconds from 5 seconds to 15 seconds after the start of the special figure fluctuation is set, for example The player operates the operating means once in a state where an operation effect (so-called, continuous hit effect) for changing the effect mode based on the number of times the player operates the operating means is set. When the execution condition of the hold operation effect for changing the display pattern of the hold symbol) is satisfied, the fusion operation effect is executed in which 10 seconds which is the operation effective period of the special view operation effect is set.

  And, while the fusion operation production is being executed, the final production result (production result of special drawing operation production and presentation result of hold operation production) is configured to be displayed at the elapsed timing of the operation effective period And, every time the player operates the operation means during the operation effective period, an effect of gradually changing the effect mode of the special view operation effect and the effect mode of the hold operation effect is executed.

  That is, as in the case of the hold operation effect described above, the effect result is displayed by setting it as the fusion operation effect with respect to the operation effect set so that the effect result is displayed based on one operation in a single operation. The content of the operation to the operation means required until is different is configured so as to notify the effect result with the elapse of a specific effect period (operation effective period).

  As described above, when the execution timings of a plurality of operation effects having different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect result of the operation effect overlap, the display condition (operation condition) of each overlapping operation effect is a specific condition By executing the combined operation effect corrected to become, when the operation effect is executed redundantly, the operation effect on the unintended side first displays the effect result, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand Can be suppressed.

  Further, in the above-described example, the specific condition is set so that the display condition is difficult to be satisfied when the execution timings of the plurality of operation effects having different display conditions (operation conditions) for displaying the effect result of the operation effect overlap. It is configured to set. As a result, the period in which the combined operation effect is executed can be made longer than the period in which the operation effect is independently executed, so that it is easy for the player to recognize that the combined operation effect is performed. it can.

  Furthermore, in the example described above, the operation valid period set for the combined operation effect is configured to be the same as the operation valid period set for any of the overlapping operation effects. As a result, the fusion operation presentation can be performed without newly setting the operation effective period for the fusion operation presentation only, so that the processing load of the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition, you may comprise so that the operation effective period only for fusion operation production may be set, without restricting to this.

  The effects of the combined operation effect described above will be described in detail. In this combined operation effect, on the appearance, effects are performed such that each operation effect appears to be performed in an overlapping manner. That is, the effects in which the special view operation effect and the hold operation effect are respectively executed are executed. And when each operation presentation is performed alone, the operation suggestion mode which suggests the contents of operation to the operation means to each operation production, and the production mode set when operation is performed to the operation means Are configured differently.

  Specifically, when the fusion operation effect is executed, a comment of “set operation start” is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as a display mode indicating that the fusion operation effect is executed for the player. While being displayed on the screen, one display mode for operating the operation means (for example, the PUSH button 10317) is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.

  Then, when the player operates (presses) the operation means (PUSH button 10317) during the effective period of the combined operation effect, the operation content of the current operation is determined by the operation determination means, and among the combined operation effects, any effect mode Decide whether to make And the production mode of the operation production used as the object of the production mode to be varied is changed. In this case, for example, as in the case of the hold operation effect described above, when executed alone, a display mode (for example, changing the color of the hold symbol from blue to red) indicating the result of the hold operation effect by one operation. And the display mode (blue) is displayed as the effect mode of the fusion operation effect, when the fusion operation effect including the operation effect configured to be displayed is changed. An effect of changing the holding symbol to a display mode (for example, a holding symbol with a crack in blue) different from the display mode (red holding symbol) indicating the staging result of the holding operation effect is executed.

  Thus, the player can be notified that the hold operation effect is being executed as part of the fusion operation effect, and the period until the effect result of the hold operation effect is displayed can be delayed. Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to operate the operation means eagerly until the fusion operation effect ends. In this case, when the effect of the operation effect to be executed is an effect of changing the specific display mode in stages, a display mode indicating the current stage and a display mode of the stage indicated by the presentation result, It is preferable that the display mode of the stage positioned between is displayed during the fusion operation rendition. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the result of the combined operation effect.

  In addition, while the fusion operation effect is being executed, the informing means (for example, the third symbol) which informs the player which effect mode of the operation effect can be varied when the operation means is operated next. It is preferable to provide notification by bringing the position of the operation means displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 closer to any of the effect positions of the plurality of operation effects being executed. Thereby, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand effect. In the present modification, only one operation means is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 when the fusion operation effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The number of operation means corresponding to the number of the operation effects may be displayed, and the corresponding operation means may be alternately displayed as the notification means described above.

  Furthermore, in the second modification described above, an example in which two operation effects are fused as the combined operation effect is described, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and even if three or more operation effects are fused. good. Further, using the configuration of the second control example described above and the configuration of the second modification, the standby period after the execution condition of the operation effect is established is set for either or both. Alternatively, after adjusting the execution period so that a plurality of operation effects are simultaneously performed, the combined operation effect may be performed.

<About the 3rd modification of the 2nd control example>
Next, a third modification of the second control example described above will be described. In the second control example described above, the lever member in the case of executing the variable operation effect is provided with the lever member 10340 that can move between the first position (origin position) and the second position (operating position) as variable operation means. By changing the effect mode of the variable operation effect according to the position condition of 10340, the effect content of the variable operation effect and the operation content that can actually be performed on the lever member 10340 are not different. Were to be configured. Then, regardless of the operation of the player, the lever member 10340 is returned using the drive motor as a return control for returning the lever member 10340 not located at the first position (origin position) to the first position (origin position). I used a configuration to move. Also, in order to prevent the player from operating the lever member 10340 positioned at the first position (origin position) by the player (operating to move it toward the second position direction) except during a period during which the variable operation effect is being performed. By using this lock configuration, the operation to move the lever member 10340 positioned at the first position (origin position) unnecessarily is not performed.

  However, in the configuration of the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 positioned at a position other than the first position (for example, the second position or an intermediate position between the first position and the second position) is always operated by the player. As a result, there is a possibility that the lever member 10340 may be moved unnecessarily.

  On the other hand, in the third modification, biasing means (for example, a spring member) for always applying a biasing force directed to the first position direction to the lever member 10340 is provided, except for the first position. The lever member 10340 positioned at all times is configured to move toward the first position. Furthermore, when the lever member 10340 is positioned at the second position, it has a second lock configuration for maintaining that position.

  In the third modification thus configured, the lever member 10340 can be maintained at either the first position or the second position, and an intermediate position between the first position and the second position. Because the lever member 10340 positioned at is moved to the first position by the biasing means, the lever member 10340 can be prevented from being positioned at the intermediate position when the player is not holding it. .

  Also in the third modification configured as described above, when it is determined that the player is positioned at the intermediate position by holding the lever member 10340 (ie, the origin detection flag 223ae and the operation position detection flag 223af are In the case where it is determined that all are set in the off state), an effect (touch effect) for causing the player to release the hand from the lever member 10340 is executed. Then, when the player releases the lever member 10340 based on the touch effect, the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position (origin position) by the action of the biasing means.

  As described above, in the third modification, the player moves the lever member 10340 positioned at the intermediate position to the first position by holding the lever member 10340. It is only necessary to execute an effect (for example, touch effect) for making it easy to separate from the lever member 10340, and there is no need to execute the return operation control in accordance with the touch effect as in the second control example described above. The configuration for moving the member 10340 to the first position can be simplified.

  Further, in the third modification, as a means for moving the lever member 10340 toward the first position, a first moving means using a drive means (drive motor) and a second movement using an urging means The first moving means and the second moving means have different moving speeds for moving the lever member 10340. Specifically, the moving speed of the first moving means is higher than that of the second moving means.

  Thereby, for example, when the timing to execute the variable operation effect using the lever member 10340 is already set, and the lever member 10340 has to be positioned at the first position within the predetermined period, When it is configured to move the lever member 10340 to the first position using the first moving means with the execution, and the timing at which the variable manipulation effect using the lever member 10340 is performed next is not set, ie, The second moving means may be used to move the lever member 10340 to the first position when no restriction is provided for the period until the lever member 10340 is moved to the first position. . As described above, by varying the speed at which the lever member 10340 is moved according to the situation, it is possible to suppress applying a load to the lever member 10340 more than necessary.

  As in the second control example and the third modification example described above, the first position using the variable operation means configured to be movable between the first position and the second position based on the operation of the player. The first variable operation effect for moving the variable operation means from the second position direction to the second position direction, and the second variable operation effect for moving the variable operation means from the second position toward the first position direction can be executed. Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute movement control for moving the variable operation means to the first position or the second position without being based on the player's operation, the second variable operation effect is executed, While the player is performing an operation to move the variable operating means toward the first position, the variable operating means is moved toward the first position using the first moving means, the second moving means, etc. Case, the first moving means, the second moving means, etc. And when there is no Rukoto, it may be provided.

  With this configuration, when the player operates the variable operation means, it is possible to change the force (depressing force) applied by the player to the variable operation means. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by making the operation feeling of the player different in moving the variable operation means in the same direction as the variable operation effect. In this case, it is preferable that the force (depression force) given by the player be varied with respect to the variable operation means in accordance with the effect result of the variable operation effect. Also, when executing the first variable operation effect described above, the force given by the player to the variable operation means according to the effect result of the variable operation effect using the first moving means, the second moving means, etc. The push-up force may be varied.

  As described above, in the second control example, the normal symbol is selected based on having won a small hit in the special drawing lottery in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set (certain change state, time saving state). It is configured to shift the high probability state of to the low probability state. That is, as a condition (time reduction end condition) for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state, the first time reduction end condition (special figure fluctuation number of times 100 times provided in the first control example described above) In addition to the above, the second short time ending condition (small hit winning) is provided. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  In this control example, a plurality of small hitting types set in the case of winning a small hitting (a small hitting A, a small hitting B) are provided, and the set small hitting category is a specific small hitting category (small hitting A) In addition, the second time-shortening end condition described above is established. By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal symbol shifts to the low probability state only when the specific small hitting type is won, so the high probability state of the normal symbol ends based on the small hitting win. It is possible to set when and when not finished. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing for shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  Furthermore, the present control example is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, as in the first control example described above, and based on the small hit winning Even when the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state, the high probability state of the normal symbol is shifted to the low probability state at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation. Thus, regardless of the trigger for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol, the high probability state of the normal symbol is ended for the player by making the timing for ending the high probability state of the normal symbol the same. It is possible to make it difficult to understand what the reason for this is.

  Furthermore, in the present control example, when the specific small hitting type (small hitting A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice), the above-described second time saving end condition is satisfied. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing of shifting the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state.

  In this control example, the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be shifted to the low probability state when the above-described first time short end condition or the second time short end condition is satisfied. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be shifted to the low probability state when both the first short time ending condition and the second short time ending condition are satisfied. In addition, the order of establishment of the first time reduction end condition and the second time reduction end condition may be defined. For example, when the second time reduction end condition is satisfied after the first time reduction end condition is satisfied, the normal symbol is formed. The high probability state may be configured to transition to the low probability state.

  Further, in this control example, when the second time short end condition is satisfied based on the winning of the small hit in the special figure lottery, it is configured to shift the high probability state of the normal symbol to the low probability state However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the high probability state of the special symbol may be shifted to the low probability state based on winning of the small hit in the special drawing lottery. Thereby, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the high probability state of the special symbol shifts to the low probability state.

  In the second control example described above, the second short time ending condition is satisfied when a specific small hit (small hit A) is won a predetermined number of times (twice), but a high probability state of a normal symbol In the state where is set, it may be possible to configure a suggestion effect that suggests that the second time short end condition has won a specific small hit (small hit A) that can be met, may be executed suggestion effects to be performed When the number of wins in a specific small hit (small hit A) at which the second time-short end condition can be met reaches the number of semi-establishment times that is less than the number of wins at which the second time short-end condition holds. It is good to be configured to be variable.

  By configuring in this manner, it is possible to predict the period until the second time-short end condition is satisfied in the state where the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In addition, the above-mentioned suggestion effect may be executed during the variation display of a special symbol to indicate that a specific small hit (small hit A) is won, or the specific small hit (small hit A) is elected It may be executed at the timing when the special symbol is stopped and displayed (fixed display) in the display mode indicating that it has been done, or it may be executed during the small hitting game corresponding to the specific small hitting (small hitting A), You may carry out during the change of the special symbol after the small hit game corresponding to a specific small hit (small hit A) ends.

  In addition, as a variation time of the special symbol that can be set when winning a specific small hit (small hit A), providing a variation time that can not be set in other lottery results, the game by the length of the variation time of the special symbol It may be configured to indicate that the player has won a specific small hit (small hit A). Furthermore, as a variation time of the next special symbol winning a specific small hit (small hit A), a variation time that can not be set in other lottery results is provided, and the player is specified by the length of the variation time of the special symbol. It may be configured to indicate that the small hit (small hit A) of has been won.

  In the second control example described above, variable operation means (lever member 10340) capable of moving between the first position (origin position) and the second position (operation position) is provided, and variable control using the variable operation means The operation effects are configured to be executable. Then, after performing control (effect preparation control) for moving the variable operation means from the first position to the second position using the electric drive means (drive motor etc.), the variable operation means The variable operation effect of moving toward the first position direction can be performed.

  As described above, by using the variable operation effect, since it is possible to execute an effect of greatly displacing the operation means to the player, it is possible to provide the player with a powerful effect. Further, since the variable operation means can be moved toward the first position by the operation of the player, processing for returning the variable operation means to the first position (origin position) after execution of the variable operation effect is omitted. It can be made easy.

  And the position judging means which judges the position of the variable operation means at the timing when the execution period of the variable operation effect has passed is provided, and the judgment result of the position judging means judges that the variable operation means is not at the first position. In this case, the variable operation effect is configured to be easily performed.

  Thereby, the variable operation means can be easily returned to the first position by the operation of the variable operation means by the player. When it is determined that the variable operation means is not positioned at the first position although the variable operation effect is performed a predetermined number of times in a period in which the state in which the variable operation effect is easily performed is set. The electric drive source (drive motor) is used to execute return processing for returning the variable operation means to the first position.

  Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player's willingness to be reduced by excessively performing the variable operation effect for the player who does not want to operate the variable operation means. Furthermore, in the second control example, the operation means (touch sensor) other than the variable operation means is operated in order to facilitate execution of the above-mentioned return processing in a state where the player releases the variable operation means. It is configured to execute a touch effect.

  As a result, since the return processing can be executed while the player is operating the touch sensor, it can be made difficult for the player to understand that the return processing has been executed. Further, the return processing is performed in a state where the player is holding the variable operation means, and it is possible to suppress an excessive load on the variable operation means to cause a failure.

  In the second control example described above, the lever member 10340 capable of moving between the first position and the second position is used as the variable operation means, but the configuration of the variable operation means is not limited to this. It may be configured to be movable between one position, a second position, and a further different third position, or can be moved to the third position only after being moved from the first position to the second position. It may be configured as follows. Further, the configuration may be such that the pressing operation and the moving operation are combined, and for example, the configuration may be such that the first position and the second position can be moved by pressing a predetermined pressing unit.

  Further, the variable operation means is a start-up process (start-up process of the audio lamp control device 113) executed when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on as drive control of the electric drive source (drive motor) for the variable operation means. An origin return process of moving to the origin position may be executed, or when a specific effect is executed, an electric drive source (drive motor) is used to lock the variable operation means not to move Control may be performed. Further, as lock control for restricting the movement of the variable operation means, a stopper (for example, a pin to be protruded by solenoid drive) may be provided on the movement path of the variable operation means.

  In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is updated in the main control unit 110 (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the holding ball number command is Although the case of transmitting from the main control unit 110 to the audio lamp control unit 113 has been described, this is not necessarily the case. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 203d is increased in the main control device 110, the holding number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the audio lamp control device 113. In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223b by one when the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received. As a result, the number of times the main controller 110 transmits the number-of-holds command to the voice lamp control device 113 and the number of times the voice lamp control device 113 receives the number-of-holds command can be reduced. The control load on the audio lamp control device 113 can be reduced.

  In each of the above control examples, the winnings to the first entrance 64 and the passing of the through gate 67 are each held up to four times at maximum, but the maximum number of holding balls is limited to four times Alternatively, the number may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight). In addition, the number of balls in the variable display based on winning on the first entrance 64, the number of areas divided into four or a part of the third symbol display device 81 by the number of balls It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first symbol display device 37, and the number of holding balls is notified by the light emitting member You may configure it.

  Further, as shown in the above control examples, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbols as identification information are vertically scrolled on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as the longitudinal direction or L-shape. In addition, the dynamic display of identification information is not limited to the variable display of symbols, and, for example, one or more characters may be displayed in various ways along with the symbols or in addition to the symbols, or may be displayed in various ways. It also includes the effect display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

  In each of the control examples described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (the third symbol display device 81), but using a configuration other than that. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for the display means for displaying the main symbol to be displayed emphatically to the player and the display means for displaying the subordinate symbol. Moreover, you may use structures other than a liquid crystal display as a structure of a display means.

  In each of the control examples described above, the right-handed game aiming at the right area of the gaming board 13 is executed in the gaming state (time reduction state) which is advantageous to the player, and the left area of the gaming board 13 in the normal gaming state. It is configured to execute the left-handed game aiming at the left-handed game, but it is sufficient if the aiming area of the game board 13 is made different according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time saving state You may make the game run right. Further, while aiming at the same area, the game in different gaming states may be configured to be executable.

  In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used to determine that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation as the operating means that can be operated by the player. Operation means configured as a lever that can be operated by tilting the player left and right or back and forth, or that the player is operated due to contact or proximity to the player A possible touch sensor type operation means, a wireless operation means capable of determining that the operation has been made by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Also, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (the first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. The operation control may be partially or entirely performed by the audio lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110.

  In each control example mentioned above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect performed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although the main control device 110 different from the control device 113 is configured to execute, without being limited thereto, processing for executing a game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects The processing for this may be configured to be performed by the same control device. With such a configuration, it is possible to execute a plurality of different processes by one control device.

  The present invention may be implemented on a type of pachinko machine or the like different from the above-described embodiments. For example, a pachinko machine (common name, two-time, three-time, and so on) in which the jackpot expected value can be increased until the jackpot state occurs a plurality of times (for example, two times, three times) including the jackpot once May be implemented as In addition, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, as a prerequisite to winning a ball in a predetermined area. In addition, it is possible to have the winning device which possesses special territory such as V zone and to execute to the pachinko machine which becomes special game state as a necessary condition making the special territory win the ball. Further, the pachinko machine may be implemented as a pachinko machine that is provided with a plurality of combinations of probabilities related to the jackpot lottery (generally referred to as setting), and the setting can be changed on the game shop side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines may be implemented, such as arelapachis, ball balls, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which so-called pachinko machines and slot machines are fused.

  In addition, as a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of stages of setting, any combination of jackpot probability (combination of jackpot probability in low probability state and jackpot probability in positive change state) in any of plural stages (for example, 6 stages) Although what can be set to is mentioned as a representative example, it is not restricted to this. As a pachinko machine that can change the proportion of each jackpot symbol (each jackpot type) determined in the case of jackpot, for example, instead of or in combination with the jackpot probability, according to the setting May be That is, the rate at which the jackpot of the type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied according to the setting, or the rate at which the jackpot of the type disadvantageous to the player may be varied. More specifically, for example, the rate at which a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is determined is varied depending on the setting, or the small number of rounds (for example, two rounds) is determined It is also possible to vary the degree of advantage for each setting by varying the ratio according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio in which the jackpot to which a large number of short time (for example, 100 times) is given after the big jack end is determined is varied according to the setting, or the small jack (for example, 0 times) is given The rate at which is determined may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the jackpot ends, the rate at which the jackpot is determined to shift (or is easy to shift) to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a probability change state) can be varied according to the setting, or the disadvantageous gaming state (eg, normal state) Depending on the setting, the rate at which the jackpot is determined (or is easy to shift) may be changed. In addition, a jackpot type may be provided in which the proportion determined only in a specific setting is significantly high (which is hardly determined in other settings). Specifically, for example, the setting is configured to be settable in six stages from 1 to 6, and the most advantageous setting is set as setting 6. And in setting 6, while the number of rounds is determined the number of rounds of six rounds at a rate of 2% when becoming a big hit, in other settings only six rounds of jackpots are determined at a rate of 0.01% It is good also as composition. By configuring in this way, when the jackpot ends in six rounds, the possibility of being the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so the player is made to play by paying attention to the number of rounds of the jackpot be able to. Also, instead of or in addition to this, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of becoming the jackpot type to which 66 times of time reduction may be given after the jackpot end may be configured to be higher than other settings. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to play a game paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. In addition, instead of or in addition to these, for example, during the execution of the jackpot game jackpot type in which the big winning opening (or prizes inside the big winning mouth etc) operates with an operation pattern different from other jackpot types A configuration may be provided, and the jackpot type may be configured to be easily determined in a specific setting (a ratio to be determined is increased). Also, in the case of changing the combination of jackpot probability according to the setting, in the low probability state, the jackpot probability is increased as the setting is more advantageous to the player, while in the probability change state, the jackpot is set in a disadvantageous setting for the player. It is good also as composition which makes a jackpot probability high so that it exists. In this configuration, in particular, in the definite change state, the more the number of drawing special symbols, the easier it is to increase the number of balls (the number of prize balls to be paid out tends to be larger than the number of game balls fired) It is effective in the gaming machine. More specifically, for example, by applying to a game machine of a type that lasts until the probability change state wins the next big win, and in the probability change state is a small hit type with high probability, the advantage of high setting is achieved The sex can be further enhanced. That is, if the probability of becoming a big hit in the probability change state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big hit is likely to be large, so there are many chances to obtain a winning ball as a small hit. Therefore, in the definite change state, it becomes easier for the player to obtain more prize balls until the next big hit.

  Furthermore, in the above embodiments, two types of special symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are used as a plurality of special symbol types, but the type of the special symbol is not limited to this, and three or more The special symbol type of may be used, or only one special symbol type may be used. Moreover, in each embodiment mentioned above, the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is performed according to the rule in which several special symbols were predetermined, and the game property in which a lottery (fluctuation) is independently performed were demonstrated. However, each of the game characteristics described in the embodiments may be replaced or combined.

  In the slot machine, for example, a symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where the coin is inserted and the symbol effective line is determined, and the symbol is stopped and determined by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, as a basic concept of the slot machine, “a display device is provided which displays the identification information after displaying the identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is derived from the operation of the starting operation means (for example The variable display of identification information is started, and the variable display of identification information is stopped and fixedly displayed due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a predetermined game value to the player, as a prerequisite that the combination of identification information at the time is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. An example is given.

  In addition, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device is provided which variably displays a symbol row consisting of a plurality of symbols and then displays the symbols, and is provided with a handle for ball launch. Not included. In this case, after the injection of a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the variation of the symbol is started due to the operation of the operation lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button or By the passage of time, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game for giving a predetermined game value to the player is generated as a necessary condition that the determined symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol. Is a lot of balls being dispensed to the lower tray. If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, only balls can be handled as gaming value in the gaming hall, so the gaming value is found in the current gaming hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and the restriction on the installation location of gaming machines.

  All or a part of the embodiments described above and each control example may be combined.

  Hereinafter, the concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiment in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention will be described.

<Point where the player's push direction is from the back to the front>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by the player, the operating device is disposed at a first state in a normal state and at a position where the operating means protrudes relative to the player than the first state. It is possible to configure two states, and includes urging means for urging the operation means from the first state to the second state, and the pushing direction of the operation means in the second state is the front side from the back side to the player A game machine A1 characterized in that it is directed to the side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (e.g., JP-A-2014-14421)
8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the player performs the operation in a mode that enhances the player's expectation of a big hit at the advanced position, so that the player can easily operate the operating means at the advanced position with a large acceleration. The strength of the operation means had to be designed high. In this case, the operation means becomes heavy as a whole, and there is a problem that the drive means for driving the operation means becomes large.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, when the pushing operation is performed in the second state, the pushing direction of the operation means is the direction from the back side to the front side for the player. In this case, the force of pressing can be released by causing the portion not to be divided as the operation as a slip between the player's hand and the operation means.

Also, in the case where the operation means is pushed and operated centering on the shoulders and elbows, from the gaming attitude of the player,
Since it is difficult to apply a force in the forward direction, the player's force on the operation means can be naturally weakened.

In the gaming machine A1, the operation device is rotatable about an axis arranged at the back of the player, and configured to be capable of tilting operation up and down around the axis and having the operation means A game machine A2 comprising tilting means, wherein the tilting means arranges the operating means in the second state in the opposite direction of the player.

According to the gaming machine A2, the tilting means having the operating means is configured to rotate, and in the second state, the operating means is disposed in the opposite direction of the player, so that the game is performed in the second state. It is possible to prevent the user from performing an operation to strike the operating means.

Also, by placing the hand near the shaft and tilting the hand around that position, the operation means can be easily pushed in and operated, so it is possible to provide a new pushing operation method that is hard to have the pushing acceleration. It is possible to prevent the operating device from being damaged by the player's pressing operation.

With the method of the new pressing operation, for example, the outer side surface of the left hand little finger is placed near the shaft, and the thumb is directed to the operating means from the state where the hand is raised in the vertical direction and the hand is arranged near the operating means A method of operating in a manner of tipping down, or a method of operating in a mode of dropping the palm toward the operating means from the state where the tip of the middle finger is placed near the shaft and arranged with the palm facing the operating means Be done.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, in the first state, a pressing operation direction of the operating means is in the vertical direction.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2, the direction of the pressing operation of the operating means in the first state is the vertical direction, so that the operability in the first state is ensured. It is possible to prevent breakage due to the pushing operation in the state.

In the gaming machine A3, the operation device is configured such that the operation means is configured to be automatically operable, and the drive device includes a drive means for generating a drive force for the automatic operation. A game machine A4 characterized in that it operates in the direction of movement and not in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A3, the driving force of the driving means for automatically operating the operation device acts only in the pushing operation direction, so the driving force in the direction opposite to the player's operation direction Can be prevented from acting. Therefore, the driving means can be prevented from being damaged by the operation of the player.

For example, by setting the button to be capable of pressing only the button, it is possible to prevent the driving means from receiving a high load by being pulled from the player in the reverse direction when performing an operation to retract the button.

The gaming machine A4 is capable of forming a maintenance state for maintaining the operation device in the first state or the second state, and further includes a maintenance means operated by the drive means, the drive means comprising the eccentric portion. The rotating means has a rotating means for transmitting the driving force to the operating means, and the phase changing of the rotating means is enabled between the first phase and the second phase different from the first phase while the maintaining means is maintained. Between the first phase and the second phase, the movable range of the operation means is changed when the maintenance state is released, and in any of the first phase and the second phase,
A game machine A5 configured to be capable of releasing the maintenance state by the same rotation.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A4, it is possible to change the phase of the driving means while maintaining the maintaining means, and in the phase after the change, rotate the movement to release the maintaining state. By making the means, the moving means can move the moving width of the operating device by means of the biasing means. Therefore, the operation mode by the biasing means can be configured in a plurality.

In the gaming machine A5, the maintaining means is movable in the urging direction of the urging means in the maintaining state, and the moving speed of the maintaining means is increased or decreased according to the rotational speed of the rotating means. A game machine A6 configured to move the operation means following the movement of the maintaining means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the movement of the urging means in the direction of the urging force is limited to one movement mode because it is caused only by the urging force. Since it is possible to add a movement mode of moving following the maintenance means to the operation means, it is possible to increase the types of movement modes of the operation means. Thereby, the attention degree of the operation device can be improved.

One of the gaming machines A1 to A6 includes a light emitting means disposed inside the operation device and emitting light toward the player, wherein the second state is compared with the first state. However, from the player's point of view, the area of the operation means is reduced, and the irradiation range of the light emitted by the light emitting means is expanded.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines A1 to A6, the light emitting means is provided, and the light emitting means emits light in the second state compared to the first state in the player's viewpoint. Since the area of the operation means decreases while the irradiation range of the light to be irradiated is expanded, the player can be made to pay attention to the light, the effect of the presentation can be improved, and it is difficult to press the operation means The player's power at the time of operation can be reduced by setting it as the mode.

In the gaming machine A7, the operation means is made of a non-permeable material, and the movement of the operation means between the display means and the display means causes the area of the exposed portion of the light emitting means to change. Feature game machine A8.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A7, the operation means is made of non-transparent material, and the operation means moves toward and away from the display means with the display means. Since the area of the exposed portion changes, it is possible to prevent the emitted light from being reflected on the display means and making it difficult to see the image on the display means.

<Point that makes the repulsive force at normal time small while enabling to cope with a series of hits>
In an operating device having an operating means by which a player can perform an operation up to the end position, the first state and a second movable range of operation up to the end position compared to the first state are second
And a first drive means for generating a driving force for moving from the second state to the first state, and a biasing means for generating a biasing force for moving from the first state to the second state A game machine B1 comprising a second drive means for generating a driving force for moving the operation means from the first state to the second state in accordance with the operation of the player in the game machine.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (e.g., JP-A-2014-14421)
8). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the force for returning the operating means to the initial position is generated by the spring, and the operating means is operated automatically by the drive motor. In this case, the return of the operation means is delayed, and when the player's operation is fast, the player does not follow the player's operation when the operation of the player is fast, which makes it difficult for the player to perform the continuous hitting operation. There was a problem.

According to the gaming machine B1, by setting the urging force weak, the driving force of the motor can be reduced when moving the operating means by the first driving means, while the return of the operating means is desired to be quickened. 2
Since the return can be made faster by pushing back the operation means by the drive means, the player can enjoy the continuous hitting operation.

The gaming machine B1 includes continuous hitting determination means for determining whether or not the continuous hitting operation is performed by the sensor detection value of the operating means of the stroke within a predetermined time, and the second driving means A game machine B2 characterized by determining whether to drive.

According to the gaming machine B2, it is determined whether or not to drive the second driving means based on the detection value of the continuous hitting determination means, so the player is not performing the continuous hitting operation (for example, single push operation or long press) The second drive means operates only when an operation or the like is performed, and the player can be prevented from feeling the load of pushing back his hand.

In the gaming machine B2, an end detection means for detecting the position of the operation means and detecting whether the operation means is arranged at the end position and whether the operation means is arranged at the position changed a predetermined amount from the end position Moving direction determination means for determining the direction of movement of the operation means from the time relationship between the detection value of the end detection means and the detection value of the position difference detection means; The second driving means is driven when the direction of movement determined by the movement direction is a direction to return from the pushing end to the first state, the game machine B3.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B2, if the direction of movement determined by the movement direction determination means is the direction to return from the end to pressing to the first state, that is, the player's hand Since the second drive means is driven at the timing of moving in the separating direction, it is possible to generate a load that pushes back the operation means in synchronization with the movement of the player.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the high load from being applied to the hand of the player by operating the second drive device in the direction opposite to the moving direction of the hand of the player.

In any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the second drive means is constituted by a voice coil motor which is displacing in a direction connecting the first state and the second state of the operation means. Gaming machine B4.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, it is possible to generate a driving force for moving the operation means by effectively utilizing the vibration displacement of the voice coil motor.

One of the gaming machines B1 to B3 includes a support frame for supporting the operation means, and the second drive means elastically supports a drive motor for rotating an eccentric weight and the drive motor on the support frame. A supporting means, the driving means for moving the operating means from the position of the first state to the position of the second state as the operation means approaches the end position; A game machine B5, wherein the eccentric weight is in contact with the support frame in a state where the operation means is disposed at the end position, and generates a driving force.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the driving force by the second driving means is generated by the driving force generated by the supporting means and the contact between the eccentric weight and the support frame. By separately generating the driving force, it is possible to adjust the driving force applied to the operating means while maintaining the rotation of the driving motor. At this time, it is not necessary to perform control to start or stop the rotation of the drive motor, and it can be performed while maintaining the rotation of the drive motor.

In the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means based on the operation means being disposed at the end position, and contacts the support frame. A game machine B6 characterized by

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B5, the eccentric weight moves closer to the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means and abuts against the support frame. The drive motor can be moved in a direction away from the support frame in the movement direction of the operation means. As a result, since the support means for supporting the drive motor is moved in the direction away from the support frame (in the direction approaching the operation means), the driving force for pushing back the operation means can be further increased.

<Point that uses VCM as a braking device and a vibration presentation device>
A detection sensor is provided for detecting a position near the end position of the operation means, and the detection sensor is composed of a plurality of sensors, and measurement means for measuring the speed of the operation means from the detection interval of the detection sensor Threshold determination means for determining whether or not the measured value measured by the sensor is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold value, and repulsion means for generating a driving force directed in the direction opposite to the pressing direction of the operation means; The driving force generated by the repelling means is increased when the measured threshold value is equal to or greater than the predetermined threshold value as compared to when the threshold value measured by the threshold value judging means is less than the predetermined threshold value. A game machine C1 to be characterized.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (e.g., JP-A-2014-14421)
8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when emphasis is placed on the player being able to operate lightly, the operation resistance is lowered and the operation means may be damaged by the operation of the player. Although it is possible to lower the speed and reduce the possibility of breakage of the operation means, the power required for the player's operation increases and there is a problem that the operation of the operation means becomes a burden for the weak player. .

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, the threshold determination means determines whether the speed of the operation means is equal to or higher than the threshold, and when the speed is equal to or higher than the threshold, the driving force generated by the repulsion means is increased. Therefore, when the speed of the operating means is equal to or less than the threshold, the operating resistance can be reduced, and the operating means can be decelerated only when necessary. Therefore, the repulsion means can improve the operability and prevent the breakage.

In the gaming machine C1, the repelling means includes a voice coil motor generating a driving force directed in the direction opposite to the pushing direction of the operation means, and the threshold measured by the threshold judging means is equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold. Before the control for pushing the voice coil motor into the extended position is performed and the operation means is disposed at a position where it can be abutted with the voice coil motor,
A game machine C2 characterized in that the voice coil motor is driven in advance.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the voice coil motor can be driven and controlled, and the operation means can be decelerated, and the operation means is disposed at a position where contact with the voice coil motor is possible. By causing the voice coil motor to be driven before switching, it is possible to suppress an impact generated between the operation means and the voice coil motor.

In the game machine C1 or C2, after the operation means and the voice coil motor abut against each other, control is performed to increase the current supplied to the voice coil motor.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1 or C2, after the operating means and the voice coil motor abut, control is performed to increase the current supplied to the voice coil motor. The degree of braking the operation means can be gradually improved while suppressing the occurrence of a large load at the moment of contact with the voice coil motor, and the sense of discomfort felt by the player at the time of operation can be reduced.

In the game machine C1, the repulsion means is disposed so as to be in contact with the operation means, and generates a driving force corresponding to a deformation amount deformed by the movement of the operation means by spring elasticity. .

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C1, the repulsion means generates the driving force corresponding to the deformation amount by the spring elasticity, so that the driving force does not delay even when the moving speed of the operating means is high. Can be generated.

In the gaming machine C4, the repulsion means compares the value measured by the threshold determination means with the value measured with the threshold value determination means or less when the value measured with the threshold value determination means is greater than or equal to the predetermined threshold value. A game machine C5 characterized in that the movable area of the end of the repelling means and the end opposite to the side in contact with the operation means is narrowed.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine C4, the movable area of the end of the repelling means and the end opposite to the side in contact with the operating means is narrowed to operate the operating means The faster the speed, the more the elastic force generated by the repelling means can be increased.

<Disruption of the drive means by the clutch prevents damage to the drive means>
In the operation device having operation means operated by the player, the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means. And a releasing means for releasing the transmission of the driving force, the releasing means providing the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmission means is equal to or more than a predetermined amount. A game machine D1 characterized by canceling transmission.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured such that operation means operable by a player moves back and forth between a first position and a second position (e.g., JP-A-2014-14421)
8). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the operating means is operated automatically for presentation, there is a risk that a large load may be generated in the drive system when the operating means is operated during the automatic operation. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D1, the releasing means is configured to release the transmission of the driving force when the load generated between the driving means and the operating means via the transmitting means exceeds the predetermined amount. Therefore, even if the player operates the operation means while the operation means is operating automatically, the transmission of the load to the drive system is canceled (discontinued), and the load applied to the drive system can be suppressed. it can.

In the gaming machine D1, the driving means is capable of driving in a first direction and driving in a second direction opposite to the first direction, and is being driven in the first direction, A game machine D2 characterized in that the release by the release means functions regardless of whether the second direction is being driven.

Here, depending on the operating direction of the driving means, it can be determined whether or not the transmission of the driving force can be canceled:
When the player operates the operating means in the direction of movement in which the transmission of the driving force can not be canceled, a large load may be generated on the driving means. Therefore, the freedom of presentation when operating the operation means is reduced.

When the button is driven between the first position and the second position, the lock member for locking the button is moved in the release direction or the release direction depending on whether the drive means rotates forward or backward. Switch whether to move in the reverse direction. In this case, although the operation of the button can be made in two modes (a release pattern and a pattern not released), the interruption of the driving force needs to be performed in both of them.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, transmission of the driving force can be canceled (disconnected) in both directions of the driving direction regardless of the driving direction of the driving means. The degree of freedom of the operation of automatically operating the operation means can be improved.

In addition, as a method of the cancellation | release of transmission, it is illustrated that a clutch moves to the direction which cross | intersects the operation direction of a drive means. The intersecting direction is, for example, the meaning excluding the circumferential direction when the drive means rotates, and the clutch may move in the rotational axis direction or may move in the radial direction.

The gaming machine D1 or D2 includes urging means for urging the drive means and the transmission means to a state capable of transmitting a driving force, and the release means is an abutment portion between the drive means and the transmission means. And an engaging tooth for transmitting the driving force in a state in which they engage with each other, and the engaging tooth has both sides facing the movement direction of the driving means from the contact surface. A gaming machine D3 characterized in that it is configured to be inclined with respect to the contact surface in a manner that tapers away as it goes away.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D1 or D2, the biasing means presses the driving means and the transmitting means, and the releasing means engages with the driving force in the engaged state on the contact surface to be pressed. Since the engaging teeth are provided in such a manner that both surfaces opposite to the operating direction of the drive means taper in such a manner as to move away from the contact surface while transmitting, the transmission means can be It can be separated, which can cancel the transmission of the driving force.

Further, between the drive means and the transmission means, an urging force by the urging means is always applied, and when the transmission means is separated from the drive means, the urging force is exerted in the movement direction of the drive means via the engagement teeth. It is loaded. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a sudden change in the load applied to the drive means between the state in which the driving force is transmitted and the state in which the transmission is released.

The size of the engagement portion of the engagement teeth decreases in the circumferential direction of the transmission means as the transmission means gets farther from the drive means. Therefore, when the phase difference between the transmission means and the drive means becomes large, it is possible to prevent the load generated in the circumferential direction of the transmission means from becoming excessive.

In addition, in the released state, the resistance is periodically restored, not completely away from the resistance. Thereby, when the player releases the hand, it is possible to start operating the button within a short time.

That is, if the player is holding the button when the button is actuated, "as effect",
One phase of button operation has passed. Then, if the player releases his hand on the way from the end of that one phase, the period in which the button is stopped will be longer,
The sense of "moving out of the player's load" is diminished.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D3, after the player releases his hand and the load is released, the operation means can be started within a short time. This makes it possible to produce a feeling of movement as the player's load has been relieved.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, an engagement surface between the transmission means and the release means is
A game machine D4 characterized in that it is formed of sawtooth shapes engaging with each other.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, when the load from the player is released, the releasing means can be easily returned to the engagement position with the transmitting means at an early stage.
That is, when there is a flat surface parallel to the direction in which the transmission means and the release means move close to each other at the tip of the engagement surface, the transmission means and the release means butt in the plane to transmit the release means It is possible to prevent the movement along the direction away from the means from being stopped. Therefore, after the load from the player is released, the operation means can be operated early.

In any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the operation mode of the operation means differs between the case where the drive means is continuously operated in the forward direction and the case where the drive means is continuously operated in the reverse direction. A game machine D5 characterized by

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the driving power transmission is canceled without being limited to one of the operation modes while preparing a plurality of operation modes of the operating means. It can be carried out.

In the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference between whether the drive means operates in the forward direction or in the reverse direction, the operation mode of the operation means is the operation mode of the predetermined period from the start of the operation of the drive means. Similarly, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the operation after the predetermined period has elapsed is different.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, when there is a difference in the operation direction of the drive means in the operation mode of the operation means, the operation mode of the predetermined period from the operation start time of the drive means is the same Since the operation after the lapse of the predetermined period is different, the player's attention to the operation means can be improved.

Here, by intermingling the difference in the operation mode of the operation means with the information which is profitable for the player such as the jackpot expectation degree, the operation of the operation means for the player for a predetermined period until the operation mode of the operation means changes. You can watch over

In addition, since this difference in the operation mode is caused by the difference in the operation direction of the drive means, if the operation direction of the drive means can be confirmed in advance, the player must grasp the difference such as the jackpot expectation without watching over the operation of the operation means. Can. However, normally, the driving means is concealed from the player, and the difference in the operating direction can not be recognized from vibration noise etc., so the operating direction of the driving means can not be confirmed in advance. Can watch the operation of the operation means.

<Change the position of the projection of the cam based on the rotation of the cam>
In the operation device having operation means operated by the player, the operation device includes drive means for generating a driving force for operating the operation means, and transmission means for transmitting the driving force of the drive means to the operation means. First means configured to operate the operation means between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and suppressing change of the position of the operation means from the first position Biasing means for biasing the operating means in the direction from the first position to the second position, and operating means for moving from the first position to the second position by the biasing force of the biasing means A gaming machine comprising: a termination unit that variably forms a movement termination of the first control unit, wherein the first unit suppresses change in position of the operation unit by engaging with the operation unit; Said operation of one means Releasing load means for applying a load to the first means to release the engagement with the means, wherein release of the engagement by the release load means and change in movement end of the operating means in the end means are single Game machine E characterized by being performed by drive means of
One.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the movable operation means is fixed at the first position by the cam and is released by the release load means, thereby causing the biasing force of the biasing means to perform the extension operation. There is a gaming machine capable of changing the displacement amount of the extension operation by the termination means (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the displacement amount of the extension operation of the operation means is changed according to the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing, the phase of the cam at the time of releasing the fixing is changed variously. The cam for moving the means and the release load means for releasing the fixing were operated with different driving forces. Therefore, there is a problem that a plurality of driving means is required, and the arrangement space of the driving means is increased.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine E1, the release load means for releasing the fixing of the operation means is driven by the drive means for driving the operation means. Thus, the drive means for changing the end position of the operation means by the end means and the drive means for moving the release load means can both be used, so that the number of drive means can be reduced.

In the game machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means is performed based on the operation of the transfer means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine E1, a change in the position of the release load means can be generated based on the operation of the transmission means. The state of the loading means can be determined. As a result, the number of detection means such as a position sensor that detects the state of the release load means can be reduced, and the number of parts can be reduced.

In addition, as a switching method of the state of the release load means, in the case where the transmission means is composed of a cam and the release load means is composed of a projection that rotates coaxially with the cam, a method of shifting the rotation cycle of the cam and the projection A method of synchronizing the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection with other phases such that the rotation of the cam and the rotation of the projection are out of synchronization when the cam is disposed in a predetermined phase,
It is illustrated.

In the gaming machine E2, the release load means is operated by the load given from the first means.
A game machine E3 which is disposed movably with respect to the transmission means, and whether or not the release load means and the transmission means operate in synchronization is switched by the operation of the release load means.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E2, the release load means is disposed movably with respect to the transmission means by the load from the first means, and the release load means operates by the release load means. Since it is switched whether or not the synchronization means and the transmission means operate synchronously, it is possible to change the synchronization state between the release load means and the transmission means without adding a member.

In the gaming machine E2, the transmission means includes a first rotating member that rotates, the operating means is supported eccentrically with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotating member, and the release load means is rotated in a second rotation. A game machine E4 comprising members, wherein rotation cycles of the first rotation member and the second rotation member are different.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E2, the first rotating member and the second rotating member are operated by a single drive means, but the rotation cycles are different, so the second rotation means is a predetermined one. A plurality of types of phases of the first rotating member can be prepared when the first means is released by coming into contact with the first means in phase.

According to this configuration, since the operation of the first means is released from the state where the operation means is maintained at the first position, and a plurality of types of end positions can be prepared when moving toward the second position. ,
You can broaden the range of the production. For example, an effect of gradually releasing the end position from the first position or an effect of gradually bringing the end position closer to the first position can be realized with the same configuration.

<Vibration device supported by soft case>
In an operating device having an operating means operated by a player, the operating device has a first position, and a second position where the operating means reaches when the player performs an operation from the first position In the gaming machine, wherein the operation means is disposed at the first position. When the operation unit is disposed at the second position, the vibration unit can be in contact with the receiving unit. A game machine F1 characterized in that it is in a state of contact.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with operation means operable by the player and vibration means for transmitting a vibration to the player via the operation means or the casing of the game machine (for example,
See JP-A-2014-144218). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, regardless of whether or not the operating means is operated, when the vibrating means vibrates, the vibration is transmitted to the operating means or the housing of the gaming machine, so that the operating means Alternatively, since the information is transmitted to the player touching the frame of the gaming machine, the effect of transmitting the vibration immediately after operating the operation means is as follows:
It is necessary to operate the vibration means after detecting the operation of the operation means. Therefore, after the player operates the operation means, it is necessary to operate the vibration means before releasing the hand from the operation means, and the mode of the operation of the player (for example, the operation of releasing the operation means at the moment of pushing the operation means) According to the above aspect, the start of the vibration may not be in time before releasing the hand, and there is a problem that the player may not notice the vibration.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine F1, depending on whether the operating means is arranged at the first position or operated by the player and arranged at the second position, it is determined whether the vibrating portion abuts the receiving means or not Since the change occurs, even when the vibration unit is vibrated continuously, the player can feel the vibration only when the player operates the operation means. In addition, since the vibration of the vibrating portion occurs before the player performs the pressing operation, the vibrating portion can be vibrated before the player releases the hand regardless of the mode of the player's operation. Vibration can be transmitted to

In the gaming machine F1, in the separated state, the vibration means is disposed so as to overhang an occupied area occupied when the operation means is arranged at the second position, and the operation means is moved to the second position. Thus, the vibration means is moved out of the occupied area to change to the contact state.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F1, the vibration means is moved based on the movement of the operation means to change from the separated state to the abutting state, so depending on the degree of movement of the operation means The contact strength between the operating means or the receiving means and the vibrating portion can be changed
The intensity of the transmitted vibration can also be changed. Therefore, the effect of changing the strength of the transmitted vibration with respect to the player's operation strength can be performed by similarly vibrating the vibration means without changing the special drive mode.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the vibration means is supported by the receiving means via a support means having a spring elasticity.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the support means can position the receiving means while suppressing transmission of the vibration of the vibrating means to the receiving means. As a result, the receiving means and the vibrating means can be separated, transmission of vibration can be prevented, and displacement generated in the vibrating means at the time of vibration can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F3, in the contact state, the supporting means is expanded and contracted based on the vibration of the vibrating portion.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, it is possible to increase the load generated when the vibrating portion and the receiving means abut, by utilizing the elasticity of the supporting means. That is, by the expansion and contraction of the support means, momentum can be applied when the vibration part moves in the direction close to the receiving means.

In the gaming machine F3, the support means is configured to be resistant to deformation along the movement direction of the operation means.
A game machine F5 characterized in that it is lowered compared to the deformation resistance in the direction perpendicular to the movement direction of the operation means.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine F3, when the operating means is operated and interferes with the supporting means due to the difference in deformation resistance of the supporting means, the direction in which the supporting means is deformed can be set finely it can.

Thereby, even if the difference in the movement amount of the operation means is small, the expansion / contraction amount of the support means can be different, and the load generated between the vibrating portion and the reception means can be different. .

In addition, as a method of differentiating the deformation resistance, when the support means is constituted by a rubber member surrounding the vibration means, the method of extending the rubber leg along the operation direction of the operation means, the support means encloses the vibration means A method of manufacturing a rubber member by two-color molding and changing the deformation resistance in each direction when it is constituted of a rubber member, and a rail for guiding the support means to operate the operation means in the direction along the operation direction For example, a method comprising: a coil spring which biases the vibration means along the operation direction of the operation means.

In the gaming machine F3, a portion to which the vibrating portion abuts is the receiving means, and the receiving means is configured as a means separate from the operation means.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F3, vibration is not transmitted to the player through the operating means, but is transmitted to the player through the receiving means which is a means separate from the operating means. Thus, the transmission of the vibration of the vibration means to the drive means via the operation means and the transmission means can be suppressed, so that the load on the drive means can be suppressed. Thereby, the durability of the drive means can be improved.

Further, since it is possible to suppress the transmission of the vibration to the player's hand operating the operation means, it is possible to prevent the player surprised by the vibration from stopping the operation at the time of the operation.

In addition, as the receiving means, for example, a part of the frame of the gaming machine, a part near the upper tray to which the game ball is supplied, an edge part of the glass frame, etc. A portion which may be touched by the hand, a storage portion which partially encloses the operation means, and the like are exemplified.

<One-touch mounting of cam and shaft. Shape deformation (elastic deformation) possible at the mounting part>
In an operation device having operation means operated by a player, the operation device is configured to be movable between a first position and a second position different from the first position, and the operation means is And a transmission unit for transmitting the drive force of the drive unit to the operation unit, the transmission unit including a deformation portion elastically deformed by an overload. Gaming machine G1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, an operating means operable by a player, a driving means for generating a driving force for driving the operating means, and a transmitting means for transmitting the driving force from the driving means to the operating means There is a game machine provided (for example, refer to JP-A-2014-144218).
. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when the player holds and secures the operation means, when the drive means generates a driving force for driving the operation means, the connection portion between the transmission means and the operation means,
There is a problem that load is accumulated at the connecting portion between the transmitting means and the driving means, and there is a possibility that these connecting portions may be broken.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G1, when the operation device is overloaded, the deformation portion of the transmission means is elastically deformed to connect the connection portion between the operation means and the transmission means, the drive means and the transmission means It is possible to ease the load given to the connecting part with the.

In the gaming machine G1, the transmission means includes a cam member rotatably supported, the deformation portion constitutes a connecting portion with the rotation shaft of the cam member, and the elasticity of the deformation portion causes the rotation shaft to rotate. A gaming machine G2 characterized in that a fixed force of

According to the gaming machine G2, the deformation portion plays a role as a portion responsible for elastic deformation of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft of the transmission means, and a role as a portion generating a supporting force of the cam member with respect to the rotation shaft.
Equipped with Therefore, the configuration of the transmission member can be simplified by sharing the function. For example, individual fixing members such as e-rings can be omitted.

In the gaming machine G2, the cam member is provided with a convex portion which is provided in parallel with the rotation axis, the convex portion and the operation means are connected, and the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is made to the cam member A game machine G3 characterized in that the rotating shaft is inclined with respect to it.

Here, the elastic deformation of the transmission means can also be performed, for example, by displacing the convex portion along the circumferential direction of the cam member. However, in this case, it is difficult to configure the cam member and the convex portion with one member, and the number of members may be increased.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is such that the rotary shaft is inclined with respect to the cam member. The cam member can be easily configured from a single member as compared with the case of sliding movement relative to the case, and the members can be simplified.

In the gaming machine G3, the resistance of the elastic deformation of the deformation portion is compared with the first rotation direction in which the cam member is rotated about a straight line connecting the rotation axis and the convex portion. A gaming machine characterized in that deformation resistance is larger in a second rotation direction in which a straight line connecting the convex portion and a straight line perpendicular to both the extending direction of the rotating shaft is the axis. G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3, the deformation resistance of the deformation portion is made different for each direction so that the state after the deformation portion is elastically deformed in the rotational axis direction view is The tip end of the convex portion of the convex portion can be displaced in the direction along the circumferential direction of the cam member as compared with the state before being elastically deformed. Thereby, since the convex portion can be displaced along the direction in which the convex portion of the cam member tends to move, the elastic deformation of the deformable portion alleviates the load generated between the convex portion and the operation means. can do.

The gaming machine G3 or G4 includes a friction member spaced apart by a predetermined distance along a direction parallel to the rotation axis of the cam member, and the deformation of the deformation portion causes the cam member to change its posture. A game machine G5 characterized in that the cam member and the friction member abut.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G3 or G4, when an overload is applied to the operation means, the deformation of the deformation portion is elastically deformed to change the posture of the cam member, and the cam member and the friction member Can increase the operating resistance of the cam member itself, thereby reducing the load applied to the connecting portion between the cam member and the operation means.

A game machine G6 comprising: detection means for detecting that at least a part of the cam member tilts with respect to an axis in any one of the game machines G3 to G5.

Here, in a situation where the operating device is overloaded and the driving means is operating but the operating means is not operating, for example, the displacement expected by the driving of the driving means and the actual displacement of the operating means In the case where it is detected that an overload occurs on the basis of the difference between them, it is necessary to drive the drive means for a predetermined period before detecting the occurrence of the overload. This period can be shortened as the arrangement interval of the detection means for detecting the displacement shift is smaller, but as the arrangement interval of the detection means is smaller, the configuration of the detection means becomes complicated and expensive. Therefore, there has been a problem that it is difficult to provide an arrangement for detecting the occurrence of an overload early, at low cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects exerted by any of the gaming machines G3 to G5, the detecting means detects whether or not at least a part of the cam member tilts with respect to the axis. Thus, it is possible to determine that an overload has occurred at the same time as the detection means detects at least a part of the cam member, without having to drive the drive means for a predetermined period while suppressing the additional number of detection means. This makes it possible to reduce the load applied to the drive means when an overload occurs.

<Strain with ball and thread protection structure. Gaming machine H>
In a game machine provided with a ball ball passage through which a ball falling back toward the launcher can be passed among the game balls fired to the game area, the ball passage allows the passage of the falling ball A game machine H1 comprising a one-way blocking means for blocking the advancing of a backflowing object.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a thread cutting blade is disposed inside a guiding path for guiding the gaming ball from the upper tray to the launcher, and cheating is carried out by driving the gaming ball to which the yarn is connected into the gaming area. There is a gaming machine provided with a function to prevent (cut the thread) (e.g.
4179)). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the yarn is pressed against the yarn cutting teeth at the time of firing, and the yarn is cut by the tension generated at that time. If the firing strength of the game ball is weak, the gaming ball can not cut the yarn completely. It may be returned to the player as a foul ball.
Therefore, for example, an illegal tool in which gaming balls are connected to both ends of a thread is prepared, and one game ball connected to one end of the thread is discharged to the far ball passage by firing with a low firing intensity and returned to the player side. By holding the other game ball connected to the other end of the yarn into the game area while holding the one game ball held, it is possible to remove the yarn from the guide path, and through the far ball passage Since the game ball and the other game ball can be connected by the yarn, the yarn connected to the other game ball is externally loaded, and the other game ball placed in the game area There is a problem that there is a possibility that it may be possible to obtain an unfair advantage.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine H1, the one-way obstruction means is used even when an illegal act is performed to load the other gaming ball by using the yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage. However, by blocking the movement of the thread in the backflow direction of the gaming ball, it is possible to make it difficult to generate fraudulent benefits.

In the gaming machine H1, a game ball H2 characterized in that the far ball passage includes a bending portion that bends a flow-down path of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1, since the yarn guided along the path of the gaming ball can be rubbed with the bending portion, the yarn can be cut early.

In the gaming machine H2, the bending portion includes load means for applying a load to the backward flowing object without giving a load to the flowing gaming ball on the inside corner side of the bend.
.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine H2, the load means can apply a load to an object (for example, a thread-like member) that flows backward.

In the gaming machine H3, the loading means is disposed in a recessed portion which is recessed with a width smaller than the diameter of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3, by preventing the game ball from entering the recess of the recessed portion, the load means and the game ball are prevented from colliding, and the load means is broken. Can be prevented.

A gaming machine H5 characterized in that the gaming machine H3 or H4 is provided with a regulation means for regulating the movement of the load means to the outside of the ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H3 or H4, the movement of the load means outward of the ball passage is restricted by the restriction means, so that between the thread-like member and the load means When the load is generated, the load means is deformed outward of the ball ball passage to prevent the load applied to the member on the yarn from being weakened.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, a payout is provided which is a portion for receiving the gaming balls to be paid out from the payout device in the receiving tray, which is a tray which the balls reach first on the front side of the front door A game machine H6 characterized in that the ball discharge portion is disposed above the discharge side outlet of the far ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines H1 to H5, the gaming ball paid out from the payout device passes through the front of the discharge side outlet of the far ball passage, thereby passing through the far ball passage When an illegal act is performed that applies a load to the other game ball using the yarn guided to the game area, the game ball to be paid out is intentionally hit to apply a load and reduce the durability of the yarn. be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines H1 to H6, the lower end of the payout ball discharge portion, which is a portion for discharging the gaming balls to be paid out from the payout device, to the receiving tray which is a plate that the balls reach first on the front side of the front door A gaming machine H7 characterized in that it is lower than the lower end of the discharge side outlet of the far ball passage.

According to the gaming machine H7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines H1 to H6, an illegal act of applying a load to the other gaming ball using a yarn guided to the gaming area through the foul ball passage was performed In some cases, the gaming balls to be paid out can make it easy to damage the yarn.

<Structure of the panel holder. Gaming machine I>
A game means to be used during the game, and a receiving means which is open on one side opposite to the game means and is capable of receiving the game means from the one side, the receiving means comprising the game means The game apparatus is provided with a state change means capable of making the game means available for use from an unusable state which is an unusable state, the state change means including the game means in the use state In this case, the game machine I1 is provided with a proximity means that is in proximity to the game means from the one side.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is possible to rotate in a rotating direction parallel to the front of the gaming board and fix the gaming board to the inner frame, and change the state in the released state where the gaming board can be removed from the inner frame There is a gaming machine provided with fixing means (see, for example, JP-A-2005-230420). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the fixing means is configured to be changeable only after the game board is pushed into the position of use, so when the game board is pushed halfway, pushing again It is necessary to perform repetitive work, and there is a problem that work efficiency may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine I1, since the state change means is provided with the proximity means approaching from the receiving side (one side) to the gaming means when putting the gaming means into use, pushing of the game board Even if it is halfway, the proximity means comes in contact with the game board and adds a pushing force.
The game board can be pushed to the position of use state.

In the gaming machine I1, the gaming machine I2 is characterized in that the state changing means displaces the gaming means to the one side as the state is changed to an unusable state in which the gaming means can not be used. .

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the gaming means is displaced to the receiving side (one side) along with the state change of the gaming means to the unusable state. The effect is that the work efficiency of the work can be improved.

In the gaming machine I1 or I2, the state change unit is characterized in that the proximity unit retracts to the outside of the game unit along with making the game unit unusable. A game machine I3.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I1 or I2, the proximity means is retracted to the outside of the gaming means, so that the working efficiency of the removal operation of the gaming means can be improved The operation efficiency can be further improved since the method is performed along with the disabling of the means.

In any one of the gaming machines I1 to I3, the gaming machine I4 comprises contact means for receiving a load from the gaming means when changing to a usable state.

According to the gaming machine I4, since the contact means receives a load from the game means, the state change means changes state to the usable state, and the state change means can be used as a series of flows by an operation to press the game means It is possible to change the state.

In the gaming machine I4, the gaming means is supported on a shaft at one side of the receiving means and is configured to be received by the receiving means by being approached at the other side, and the state change means is the receiving means It is disposed on the other side of the game machine I5.

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine I4, the width dimension of the gaming means is utilized,
The load can be efficiently applied to the contact means through the game means.

One of the gaming machines I1 to I5 includes closing means for closing the opening on the one side of the receiving means, and the state changing means can not be used to make the gaming means unusable. In maintaining the state, the game machine I6 is provided with a blockade restricting portion that can not block the opening on one side of the game means.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines I1 to I5, the state changing means can use the gaming means according to whether or not the closing means can block the opening on one side of the gaming means. It can be determined whether or not to. As a result, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the closing means blocks the opening on one side of the game means even though the game means maintains the unusable state.

<With the reverse cup and the harness band, the piano wire got no goto. Gaming machine J>
A game means used during the game, and a receiving means opened at one side opposite to the game means and capable of receiving the game means from the one side, and the receiving means is the game means A game machine J1 comprising arrangement means disposed on a path communicated with the outside, wherein the arrangement means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of an object from the outside at a plurality of points.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a fraud prevention unit for preventing fraud with respect to a fraudulent act of inserting a piano wire from the rotary shaft side of a front frame (for example,
26573)). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is only one fraud prevention unit, and there is a problem that the fraud prevention effect is not sufficient.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means is disposed on the path where the piano wire is likely to be inserted, and the arrangement means is configured to be capable of suppressing the entry of the piano wire at a plurality of points. Can improve the effect of

In the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means includes a first means for suppressing the entry of members from the outside at a first location, and a second means for inhibiting the entry of members from the outside at a second location,
A game machine J2 characterized by suppressing the entry of external members in different ways.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1, the arrangement means differs in the method of suppressing the entry of the member from the outside between the first place and the second place. As compared with the case of increasing the number of members, the entry of members from the outside can be further suppressed.

In addition, the method of suppressing the approach from the outside is not limited at all. For example, it may be a method of restraining entry by closing the route, or a method of restraining fraud by detecting heat and sounding an alarm.

In the game machine J1 or J2, the arrangement means includes an intrusion restricting portion formed of a cup shape opened toward the outside of the receiving means.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine J1 or J2, the intrusion control portion is formed in a cup shape, so that it is possible to prevent further intrusion of the member which has invaded.

In the gaming machine J3, the placement means includes support means for supporting the electrical wiring, and the support means is disposed downstream of the entry restricting portion in the route from the outside to the game means. A game machine J4 that features.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, when a fraud occurs that causes the entry control section to penetrate with high heat, detecting changes (such as disconnection due to heat) that occur in the wiring due to the high heat The effect of suppressing the entry of the member can easily be produced.

In any one of the game machines J1 to J4, the arrangement means includes a member which has entered from the outside,
A gaming machine J5 characterized in that it comprises cancellation means for guiding to a cancellation area far from the gaming means.

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines J1 to J4, the members entering from the outside are guided by the arranging means to the elimination area far from the gaming means, so that entering of the members entering from outside Even if the degree becomes stronger, it is possible to prevent the member entering from the outside from reaching the gaming means.

The structure of the decorative board of <5 sheet structure. Tamper prevention is also involved. Gaming machine K>
It is disposed between the first means and the second means along the first direction, and the first means and the second means oppositely disposed along the first direction and having at least one side connected. A gaming machine comprising: a connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means, the connecting direction of the connecting portion being set in a second direction intersecting the first direction A game machine K1 characterized by

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, it is disposed between a first means and a second means along a first direction, and a first means and a second means which are oppositely disposed and connected by at least one side. And a third means (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573).
However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the connection of each member is performed by the existing method such as adhesion and screwing, and the load along the first direction is not the first when the first means and the second means are connected. There is a problem that the third means may be damaged by being subjected to the third means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine K1, since the connecting direction of the connecting portion connecting the first means and the second means is set to the second direction intersecting the first direction, the first direction of the third means is the first direction. It is possible to reduce the load that can be applied. This can prevent the third means from being damaged.

In the gaming machine K1, a gaming machine K2 characterized in that the connecting portion is disposed apart from the third means.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K1, it is possible to prevent the load from being applied from the connecting portion to the third means.

The gaming machine K1 or K2 includes connected means connected and fixed to the other side of the first means and the second means, and the one side of the first means and the second means corresponds to the connected means. A gaming machine K3 characterized in that the second means is displaced relative to the first means in a third direction which is close to each other and engaged with each other.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K1 or K2, the gaming machine K3 includes connected means connected to the other side of the first means and the second means, and one side of the first means and the second means Is fixed by engagement caused by displacing the second means with respect to the first means in the third direction adjacent to the coupled means, so that the first means directed in the direction intersecting the third direction and The resistance to the decomposition of the second means can be improved.

In the gaming machine K3, a gaming machine K4 characterized in that the one side of the first means and the second means is exposed outward.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K3, one side of the first means and the second means is arranged exposed outward, so the state of the fitting portion can be easily confirmed. be able to.
As a result, even if a fraudulent action occurs in which the fitting portion is broken and the first means and the second means are disassembled, it is possible to accelerate the detection of the fraudulent action.

In the gaming machine K3 or K4, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed to the connected means, and the direction of the fastening and fixing is the same as the third direction. .

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine K3 or K4, the fastening direction between the first means and the second means and the connected means is set to the same direction as the third direction. The tightening strength can reinforce the fitting strength.

In any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, light is emitted toward the first means or the second means, and light irradiating means fixed to the connected means and one of the first means or the second means A gaming machine K6 comprising: a light guiding means fixed to the member and configured to be capable of introducing the light irradiated by the light irradiating means into the inside thereof.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K3 to K5, positional deviation between the first means and the second means and the light guiding means can be prevented.

In the gaming machine K6, a gaming machine K7 comprising contact means for surface contact in an area where the other member of the first means or the second means faces the light guiding means.

According to the gaming machine K7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine K6, maintaining an interval for the size of the contact means in the opposing area of the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guide means. Can.
Thereby, when the first means or the second means receives a load in the opposite direction and is displaced, the distance between the other member of the first means or the second means and the light guiding means is prevented from changing. Can.

This prevents the positional relationship between the first means, the second means, and the light guiding means from changing even if a load is applied in the opposite direction when the first means or the second means illegally attempts to disassemble. can do.

<Point L utilizing curved light guiding means. Not reached as points>
A light guiding unit formed in a curved wave shape as viewed in the irradiation direction of light passing through the inside, and a projection unit disposed opposite to the light guiding unit and onto which the light passing through the light guiding unit is projected; A game machine L1 characterized in that the projection means includes a concave facing portion disposed facing the concave portion of the light guiding means, and a convex facing portion disposed opposite the convex portion of the light guiding means.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a light guide plate for uniformly emitting surface light from the end face (see, for example, JP-A-2016-26573). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the light guide plate is formed in a flat plate shape, it is necessary to change the intensity of the incident light in order to partially change the intensity of the surface emitting light. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine L1, since the projection means includes the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion and the convex facing portion are provided even if the intensity of light incident on the light guiding means is constant. Department and
The emission intensity of the projection means can be changed.

In the gaming machine L1, the projected portion is characterized in that the concave facing portion is made of a light transmitting material, and the convex facing portion is made of a material that is less likely to transmit light than the concave facing portion. The gaming machine L2 to be.

According to the gaming machine L2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L1, by intentionally weakening the intensity of the light transmitted through the convex facing portion, the concave facing portion where the light emitted from the light guiding means is condensed The effect of the effect by the light of can be improved.

The gaming machine L2 includes reverse projection means disposed on the opposite side of the projection means across the light guide means and from which light passing through the light guide means is projected, the reverse projection means A gaming machine L3 characterized in that a portion of the light means facing the concave portion and a portion facing the convex portion of the light guiding means are made of materials having substantially the same light transmittance.

According to the gaming machine L3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine L2, a portion of the light guiding means of the opposite projection means facing the concave portion and a portion of the light guiding means facing the convex portion are light Since the transparency is formed of substantially the same material, by causing the same light to be incident on the light guiding means, a rendering aspect of light visually recognized through the projection means and a rendering aspect of light visually recognized through the opposite projection means And can be different.

<Arrangement structure of bass reflex speakers. Gaming machine M>
First means and second means which are disposed opposite to each other and fixed to each other to constitute an inner space in a fixed state, acoustic means disposed in a state where at least a part of the inner space is made to enter, and And Bending means for forming a bending path in the internal space.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which speakers are provided at both left and right ends of a front frame and effects are produced by sounds output from the speakers (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2016-1).
6088). And in such a gaming machine, the vibration wave advancing to the back side of the speaker main body is advanced to the center position of the right and left sides of the gaming machine and sent out to the outside of the gaming machine.
There is a problem that the path length of the vibration wave is defined in the left and right width of the gaming machine, although it is easy to perform the production of listening to the bass.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine M1, since the bending path is formed in the inner space of the first means and the second means by the bending means, by forming a path longer than the length of one piece, The definition of the left and right width can be released to allow the vibration wave to travel at an arbitrary distance.

In the gaming machine M1, the first means and the second means are fastened and fixed in such a manner that a load is applied in the opposite direction, and the bending means is rib-shaped from at least one of the first means or the second means to the other. A gaming machine M2 comprising: a projecting portion provided in a projecting manner, wherein a projecting end of the projecting portion abuts on the other of the first means or the second means.

According to the gaming machine M2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine M1, in the direction in which the fastening force is applied to the first means and the second means, the protruding tip of the projecting portion and the other of the first means or the second means By being in contact with each other, it is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the protruding portion and the other of the first means or the second means in conjunction with fastening and fixing. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the fluid such as the vibration wave from passing through the gap of the bending path.

The gaming machine M1 or M2 includes an opening for connecting the internal space and the outside, and the opening is passed through the opening to the internal space and the outside and is connected to the acoustic means Game machine M3 characterized in that it is closed.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1 or M2, the opening is closed by the passing member connected to the sound means, making it unnecessary to prepare an additional closing member, With the passage member passing from the inner space to the outside, the wall constituting the inner space can be appropriately closed.

In the gaming machine M3, the opening is disposed closer to the sound means than the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine M4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M3, when passing the wiring of the acoustic means from the internal space to the outside through the opening, the wiring of the acoustic means is prevented from being pinched and broken by the protruding portion be able to.

In any one of the gaming machines M1 to M4, a support fastening means to which at least one of the first means or the second means is fastened and fixed, and a presentation means disposed below the support fastening means and performing effects accompanying the game And, wherein the effect means supports the support and fastening means from below, a game machine M5.

According to the gaming machine M5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines M1 to M4, the supporting and fastening means is supported by the rendering means from below, so that the weight for the supporting and fastening means is not compressed. The thing can be adopted.

<Movable unit, reverse rotating flower. The petals that stop on the way. Gaming machine N>
A base member, a first displacement means displaceably supported by the base member, a drive means for applying a driving force to the first displacement means, a following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in the displacement direction; A second switchable in a non-following state in which the first displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the displacement direction
A third displacement means for displacing in a direction opposite to a displacement direction of the second displacement means by a driving force of the driving means when at least the second displacement means is brought into a following state, A game machine N1 characterized by comprising:

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the second displacement means is displaced in the expansion / contraction direction of the first displacement means as the first displacement means is expanded / contracted, while the first displacement means is operated near the extension end When doing, there is a gaming machine in which the second displacement means is displaced in a direction different from the expansion / contraction direction of the first displacement means (see, for example, JP-A-2011-229580). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the direction of displacement of the first displacement means is the same as the direction of displacement of the second displacement means when the first displacement means is extended and contracted, so that the effect is slow and the effect is not sufficient. There was a point.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine N1, at least in the following state of the second displacement means, the third
Since the displacement means is displaced in the direction opposite to the displacement direction of the second displacement means, the displacement speed of the second displacement means can be visually recognized as the speed based on the third displacement means. Therefore, compared to the speed at which the second displacement means is actually driven, the speed of the second displacement means which the player feels as a sensation can be increased.

The gaming machine N1 includes resistance means for generating a resistance to displacement of the second displacement means, and the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing a switching point between the follow state and the non-follow state. A game machine N2 to be

According to the gaming machine N2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine N1, the following state in which the second displacement means follows the first displacement means and the non-following state in which the second displacement means deviates from the tracking state As the switching point is made variable, it is possible to increase the types of displacement modes of the second displacement means with respect to the first displacement means. Thereby, the rendering effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine N2, the resistance means is configured to be capable of changing the state of the second displacement means using the driving force when operating the second displacement means in the non-following state. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2, the driving force for switching the state of the second displacement means can be generated by the driving means for driving the first displacement means, so that the driving means is also used. be able to.

In the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means is disposed so as to be visible from the front.

According to the gaming machine N4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N2 or N3, the resistance means can be made visible to the player by configuring the resistance means to be visible by making the resistance means visible. It can be shared with the function as a rendering device.

The gaming machine N4 includes rod-like shaft means fixed to the base member, and the shaft means coaxially rotatably supports the first displacement means, the second displacement means, and the resistance means. A gaming machine N5.

According to the gaming machine N5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N4, the shaft means functioning as the rotation shaft of the first displacement means, the second displacement means and the resistance means is fixed to the base member. Since the posture of the other member or means is also changed following the change of the posture of any one of the second displacement means or the resistance means, the displacement resistance is prevented from rising excessively. Can.

<Utilization of shell button, hole. Not reached as points>
In a gaming machine provided with a first means and an accommodation means configured to accommodate the first means, the accommodation means is an opening for receiving the first means when the first means is accommodated. A game machine O1 comprising: an opening; and a second opening having a width equal to or greater than the width of a gap between the first opening and the first means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine including an operating means operable by a player and an upper tray for covering the operating means from below, wherein the operating means is moved up and down with respect to the upper tray (e.g. See open 2012-048970)). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when a foreign matter is inserted into the gap between the upper plate and the operation means, the foreign matter remains inside, which may cause a malfunction. .

On the other hand, in the gaming machine O1, since the second opening formed with a width equal to or greater than the width of the gap between the first opening of the housing means and the first means is provided, foreign objects are accommodated through the second opening. It can be easily removed outside the means. This can prevent the foreign matter from remaining inside.

In the gaming machine O1, the housing means includes a support portion for supporting the first means, and the second opening is disposed on the opposite side of the support portion with the first means interposed therebetween. A game machine O2.

According to the gaming machine O2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1, the second opening can be formed while maintaining the support strength of the support portion.

In the gaming machine O1 or O2, the storage means includes a low water resistance portion with low water resistance, and the second opening is disposed around the low water resistance portion.

According to the gaming machine O3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine O1 or O2, before the water reaches the low water resistant portion, the water can be discharged outward along the second opening. That is, the second opening can be used both for the purpose of passing a predetermined solid object and for the purpose of discharging a liquid such as water.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O3, a plurality of the second openings are formed, and the plurality of second openings are configured from a shape based on a shape projected in the direction of the solid object. A game machine O4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine O4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O3, a plurality of second
Since the opening is configured in a shape based on the shape of the direction of the solid object, the solid object can be easily removed through the second opening.

In any one of the game machines O1 to O4, the second opening is disposed closer to the player than the first means.

According to the gaming machine O5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines O1 to O4, in the state where the solid object is blocked at a part of the second opening, the shadow of the solid object is viewed by the player It can be done. This makes it possible for the player to notice that the solid object is inserted between the first means and the storage means, so that the possibility of the solid object remaining can be reduced. .

<Points concerning device of bottom shape of glass frame (front frame)>
A gaming machine comprising a first means and a first supporting means for supporting the first means, wherein the first supporting means comprises a projecting shape projecting from a lower surface. P1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a glass frame (front frame) on which the operation handle is disposed is removable from an outer frame on which the gaming board is disposed (e.g. See 2015-159837). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, since the bottom of the glass frame is formed in a flat shape, there is a possibility that the bottom of the glass frame may slip when holding it with a finger and there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of ease of handling. There was a problem.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine P1, the first support means is prevented from sliding off the hand by the projection shaped portion protruding from the bottom surface of the first support means functioning as a finger hooking portion Can be improved in terms of ease of handling.

In addition, arrangement | positioning of a projecting part is not limited at all, What is necessary is just to be provided in the outward direction of a 1st support means. For example, it may be provided protruding in the vertical direction or may be provided protruding in the front side.

The gaming machine P1 includes the second support means for detachably supporting the first support means, and the projecting shape portion is separated from the support position where the first support means is supported by the second support means. Game machine P2 characterized in that it is arranged.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the projecting shape portion is protruded downward from the lower bottom surface at a position away from the position where the weight of the first support means is mainly applied as the supporting position. Therefore, the first support means can be made easier to hold. Thereby, the attachment and detachment operation to the 2nd support means of the 1st support means can be made easy.

The position away from the support position is not limited at all. For example,
The position may be closer to the front side when the support means is supported on the front side of the second support means, or may be closer to the other end when the first support means is pivotally supported by the second support means at one end. It may be a position, or may be a position opposite to the pivotal support position based on the plate storing the gaming balls.

In the gaming machine P1 or P2, the first support means includes a recessed portion which is recessed outward from the inner side, and the first means separates a gap from the recessed portion. A game machine P3 characterized by being disposed opposite to the recessed portion.

According to the gaming machine P3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P1 or P2, a part of the support position of the first means and the first support means is a gap by the recessed portion, whereby the first means is provided. Powder (abrasive powder, dust) that may be generated when the first means and the first support means rub due to positional deviation
Can be reduced. That is, it is possible to prevent powder from accumulating in the movable portion and causing an operation failure, or powder from being accumulated in the detection portion of the detection device and being erroneously sensed.

As described above, the concave shape portion is not only at the time of non-operation (for example, when the glass frame is opened for error release, at the time of maintenance, at the time of glass frame replacement, etc.) In the middle or in the game waiting state (demonstration screen display state), etc., the effect is exerted.

In the gaming machine P3, a gaming machine P4 characterized in that the recessed portion is disposed inside a range in which the protruding portion protrudes.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P3, it is possible to prevent the portion where the recessed portion is formed to be extremely thin compared to other portions and to prevent the strength from being insufficient. it can. In addition, by forming the recessed portion on the back of the protruding portion, the protruding portion can be bent and deformed in the inward and outward directions, so even if a large load is applied to the protruding portion, It is possible to suppress cracking of the shaped portion.

The load applied to the projecting portion may be, for example, the weight of the first support means which may be applied during transport or temporary placement, the load applied when moving the first support means, or the like.
The load etc. which are added by what the thing (such as a thousand box) moved by a player or a store clerk in the vicinity of a support means collides are illustrated.

In the gaming machine P4, the first means is a portion of the first support means on the outer side of the recessed portion and is supported in such a manner as to abut on an overlapping portion overlapping in the inward / outward direction with the projecting portion. A game machine P5 comprising a contact means and an operation unit positioned on the contact means and configured to be operable by the player.

According to the gaming machine P5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P4, the supporting thickness of the overlapping position for supporting the abutting means can be sufficiently secured while maintaining the effect of the recessed portion, It is possible to suppress deformation of the first support means at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine P5, the contact means is provided continuously with the operation unit, and includes an impact damping means configured to be able to damp an impact, and the impact damping means is formed of the recessed portion. A game machine P6 characterized in that it is formed with a short width in comparison with the width.

According to the gaming machine P6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine P5, the shock transmitted from the operation unit to the contact means can be damped by the shock damping means, and the distance between the shock damping means and the overlapping portion is increased. Thus, the impact can be damped also by the deformation (deflection) of the contact means.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an impact damping means. For example, a mass member formed of a flexible material may be used, an elastic member such as a coil spring may be used, a device such as a damper, or a damping device may be used.

In any one of the game machines P3 to P6, the concave shape portion includes a first portion facing the first means and a second portion extending from the first portion, and the first portion The game machine P7 is characterized in that the degree of depression is larger than the second portion.

According to the gaming machine P7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines P3 to P6, a sufficient space is prepared for the first portion where a large load is expected to be applied, and compared to the first portion. By forming the space of the second portion which is expected to have a small applied load small, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the recessed portion while maintaining high durability.

In addition, with the degree of recess, for example, the depth of recess (the deeper the degree of recess is, the deeper), the width of the recess (the larger the degree of recess, the wider) and the like are exemplified.

If the structure of the first means is complicated and the portion facing the first means has a smaller load than the other portion, the concave shape corresponding to the other portion is applied. The degree of recess of the part may be formed large.

Further, the shape of the recessed portion may be designed based on, for example, the magnitude of the load occurrence frequency without being limited to the magnitude of the load. In this case, the load occurrence frequency may be based on the magnitude of the occurrence frequency in the entire business hours of the game arcade, or the occurrence frequency in a predetermined state of the gaming machine (a gaming state such as a predetermined effect state or a specific gaming state). It may be based on the size of

In any one of the game machines P1 to P7, the projecting shape portion is formed along the front-rear direction below the bottom surface portion of the first support means, and the formation range becomes wider toward the front side. A gaming machine P8.

According to the gaming machine P8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P7, the load resistance of the front portion where the load is concentrated when the first supporting means stands alone can be improved. Even in the storage method in which the single support means is placed on the floor alone, the first support means can be stored for a long time without the first support means falling down.

In addition, what is examined at the time of the design of the projecting portion is not limited to the weight of the first support means. For example, the shape of the projecting portion may be designed in consideration of the size of the load generated at the time of operation of the first means and the frequency of load generation.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, a lower surface of the first support means is formed as an inclined surface which inclines upward in a direction away from the second support means.

According to the gaming machine P9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P8, the first support means can be easily made to stand alone, and further, the contact portion with the floor is limited to the projecting shape portion As a result, it is possible to prevent the parts other than the projecting shape from being soiled.

<Point on deformation mode based on support structure and shape of collar>
A gaming machine, comprising: operation means operable by a player; first support means for supporting the operation means; and second support means for supporting at least one of the first support means or the operation means. A game machine Q1 characterized in that the first support means is configured to be deformable in the direction in which the gap between the operation means and the second support means is narrowed.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which operation means such as effect buttons are supported by a glass frame (see, for example, JP-A-2016-106830). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, measures against positional displacement occurring in the area around the operating means are insufficient due to the load when operating the operating means, and measures against positional deviation occurring in the area around the operating means There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of perspective.

For example, when the player's weight is placed on the operating means and the operating means is lowered, the second support means is also lowered simultaneously. At this time, the descent distance of the front side portion of the second support means tends to be longer than the descent distance of the operation means. At this time, depending on the difference in descent distance,
There may be a gap between the operating means and the second support means.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine Q1, even if the second support means is lowered excessively, the first support means is deformed to suppress the formation of a gap between the operation means and the second support means. can do. That is, since the operating means can tolerate an extra downward movement (sinking),
The support aspect of the operation means can be simplified.

The operation direction is not limited at all. For example, it may be a descending direction, an ascending direction, a pushing direction along the back and forth direction, a rotation (rotation) direction, or a combination thereof.

Moreover, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect contact | abutted from the operation direction except the case where the normal line extended from a contact surface corresponds with the operation direction. For example, the contact surface may be formed as a surface that spreads in a mortar shape (cross-sectional V shape) in the operation direction. In this case, the operation direction can be moved closer to the center of the bottom of the mortar (V-shape) formed by the contact surface, and in addition, the reaction force becomes larger as the center is moved closer to the bottom. Can be done.

Further, a common support means may be provided to commonly support the first support means and the second support means. In this case, the first support means and the second support means may be coupled (coupled, fitted) at a position opposite to the support position supported by the common support means.

In the gaming machine Q1, the first support means is made of a flexible material, and a support portion for supporting the operation means and a game ball are configured to be able to be held, and the operation means via the first support means. And a game ball holding unit connected to the game machine Q2.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a gap between the operation means and the gaming ball holding portion.

In addition, when the first support means is formed of a flexible member, or when the first support means is connected to the operation means or the game ball holding portion in a floating structure, the vibration when operating the operation means remains the game ball hold Since it can be prevented from being transmitted to the unit, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of abnormal noise due to the position shift of the game ball held by the game ball holding unit every time the operating means is operated.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as a structure of vibration transmission prevention (suppression). For example,
In the second direction, the vibration transmission may be maintained while the vibration transmission is prevented in the second direction. In this case, by generating the vibration in the second direction, it is possible to intentionally generate an abnormal sound, and it is possible to execute an effect by the sound.

In the gaming machine Q2, the operation means includes an operation unit configured to be operable by the player,
As the first support means is farther from the operation unit in the connection position with the game ball holding unit,
A game machine Q3 characterized in that it is disposed on the front side.

In the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine Q2, in the vicinity of the operation unit, which is a position that is easily displaced as the operation is performed, the connection position is shifted to the back side to reduce the absolute amount of displacement. While suppressing the generation of the gap between the ball holding portion and the first support means, by arranging the connecting position on the front side (closer to the player) in the operation portion far where it is difficult to shift with the operation. The design can be improved.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q3, the operation means includes an operation portion configured to be operable by a player, a main body portion supported by the first support means, the operation portion, and the main body portion. A connecting portion to be connected, the operating portion is formed wider than the connecting portion, the first support means is formed of a plurality of divided bodies, and can be attached and detached in a direction sandwiching the connecting portion Even, it is comprised in the aspect which encloses the said connection part, and the game machine Q4 characterized by the above-mentioned.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the assembly of the first support means can be facilitated while the size of the operation unit is sufficiently ensured.

In addition, the method of fixation of the 1st support means formed from a division body illustrates various aspects.
For example, a plurality of divided bodies may be respectively connected to the operating means, and one divided body connected to the operating means among the plurality of divided bodies, and another divided body connected to the divided bodies You may

Moreover, the fixed position and fixed aspect of a division body illustrate various aspects. For example, fitting may be performed or fastening may be performed.

In the case of fastening, by fixing the divided bodies at a plurality of positions along the operation direction of the operation unit, the impact generated when the operation unit is operated can be dispersed and received at a plurality of fixed positions, Since durability of fixation of a division body can be improved, generation | occurrence | production of position shift of a 1st support means can be suppressed.

Furthermore, by setting the fastening direction to a direction intersecting (for example, orthogonal to) the operating direction of the operating unit, the direction of the load by the operation of the operating unit and the direction of tightening of the fastening screw can be made different. It can suppress that a fastening screw loosens by the impact at the time of operation.

In the gaming machine Q4, a gaming machine Q5 characterized in that a fastening direction of fastening means for fastening the divided body intersects with the operating direction of the operation unit.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4, the load at the time of operation of the operation unit can be suppressed from being applied to the fastening direction, so the fastening by the fastening means becomes loose at the time of operation.
It is possible to prevent the fixation of the split body from being released.

In addition, various modes are illustrated as a direction intersecting with the operation direction. For example, when the operation direction is a rotation direction along a circle centered on a predetermined rotation axis, the direction intersecting the operation direction is a direction intersecting a plane orthogonal to the predetermined rotation axis (for example, a predetermined direction The direction along the rotation axis is illustrated.

Also, for example, when the operation direction is a direction along a predetermined straight line (in the case of a push-in operation or a pull-out operation), the direction intersecting the operation direction is along a plane intersecting the predetermined straight line. Direction is illustrated.

In this case, when a plurality of predetermined straight lines (line along the operation direction having a high ratio (frequency) in operation) is assumed during the game, at least one of the plurality of planes intersecting each of the straight lines is assumed. The fastening direction may be set in a direction along one plane, or the fastening direction may be set in a direction intersecting with any of the intersections of a plurality of planes, that is, any of a plurality of predetermined straight lines.

In the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, the fastening points of the divided body are formed at a plurality of places, and a first plane including one fastening point and a second plane including another fastening point are configured as different planes. A game machine Q6 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine Q6, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine Q4 or Q5, even when a large load is applied to one fastening point (including the first plane), a large load is simultaneously applied to the other fastening points. Since it can be prevented that the split body is applied, it is possible to prevent the split body from being displaced simultaneously or loosened at both fastening points.

In addition, when the operation part is operated, the fastening location of a division body may be arrange | positioned in the location where load concentrates. Also in this case, since another fastening point is disposed on a plane different from the plane where the load is concentrated, it is possible that the division body is displaced or the fastening is loosened by the load at the time of operation. Can be prevented.

In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the operation means includes detection means configured to detect a predetermined operation of the operation unit, and the detection means is disposed at a position away from the dividing position of the divided body. A game machine Q7 characterized by being provided.

According to the gaming machine Q7, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q6, the holding power tends to be insufficient at the division position, and the operation portion moves when the operation portion is operated at the division position. There is a risk that powder (dust etc.) may be generated due to friction between the part and the divided body, and since the detection means is disposed away from the division position, detection of powder (dust etc.) is suppressed can do. Thus, the occurrence of false detection can be suppressed.

In any one of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the operation means is an interference means which interferes with the divided body in a division direction view on the side separated in the divided direction (proximity separating direction) of the divided body when the game is possible A game machine Q8 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q8, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q4 to Q7, the interference means can suppress positional deviation of the operating means with respect to the divided body in the dividing direction.

The interference means may be formed to interfere with the operation means in the assembled state but not to interfere with the operation means, for example, at the time of the assembling operation before the assembled state. For example, in the case where the split body is formed of a flexible material, the split body can be bent at the time of assembling work, so that interference with the interference means can be easily avoided, maintaining ease of assembly. can do.

Also, for example, even when the divided body is formed of a hard material, it may be configured not to interfere with the interference means in the process of assembling. That is, it may be formed from a shape that does not interfere with each other in the assembling direction (for example, the direction in which the divided bodies are brought closer for assembling) before fastening. In this case, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the divided body at the time of playing, while securing the ease of assembly.

In any one of the game machines Q1 to Q8, the second support means includes a receiving recess portion which is recessed so as to be able to receive the first support means.

According to the gaming machine Q9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q8, since the first support means is received by the receiving recess, the first support means is not affected by the positional deviation of the operation means. Even in the case of misalignment, the operation means and the first support means can be returned to their original positions at an early stage by the repulsive force from the receiving recess.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, the first support means is formed in a curved shape along a circle in which the center of the curvature radius is disposed on the operation unit side of the operation means. Q10.

According to the gaming machine Q10, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q9, a large area in which the operation unit can be arranged can be secured, and in addition, the player cramps when gripping the operation unit. It can prevent you from feeling. Thereby, the design of the operation unit can be improved and the operability of the operation unit can be improved.

In any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the first support means includes a streak-like portion which is processed into a streak shape for reinforcement, and the extending direction of the streak-like portion is formed in different directions in each area. A game machine Q11 characterized by being.

According to the gaming machine Q11, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q10, the extending direction of the streaks is different in each area, so that the first support means having anisotropic rigidity. Can be configured.

In addition, the design standard of the extension direction of a streak-like part is not limited at all. For example, it may be designed as an extension direction with a good yield from the shape of the first support means, or when the load generated at the time of operation of the operation means acts in a different manner in each area, it is the best to cope with the load The extending direction of the streaks may be designed as the direction.

<Points on support structure of speaker and board>
Vibration means, light emitting means disposed at a position to which the vibration is transmitted and configured to be capable of emitting light;
In the gaming machine provided with the above, the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means.

Here, in gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which a speaker and a light emitting element are arranged side by side (see, for example, JP-A-2016-16088). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of light emission effect.

Specifically, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, in order to prevent the substrate from receiving the vibration of the speaker, a light emitting element (such as an LED, a fluorescent lamp, or a discharge tube) is disposed behind the speaker, and the speaker is disposed. It becomes dark because the light emission can not be produced at the place where in this case,
In the front area where the gaming machine is easily visible, the area that can be rendered lively becomes narrow. First of all, since the size of gaming machines represented by pachinko machines etc. is roughly determined from the standard,
Securing a light emitting effect area is recognized as an important issue.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R1, since the light emitting means has a displaceable width with respect to the vibrating means, the light emitting means can receive the vibration of the vibrating device, and the arrangement of the light emitting means Can be closer to As a result, the front area can be viewed brightly regardless of the vibration generation part of the vibration means, so that it can be improved from the viewpoint of the light emission effect.

In addition, the aspect of a vibration means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an acoustic means configured to be able to output voice, or an operating means incorporating a vibration device. Also, the means is not limited to the means that can be actively vibrated, but may be means that can be vibrated (passively vibrated) with respect to the load of external force.

Various aspects are illustrated as an acoustic means. For example, a diaphragm provided in a speaker,
For example, a discharge port through which the back pressure of the vibration of the speaker found in the bass reflex type speaker is discharged, a path from the vibrating portion to the discharge port, and the like are exemplified.

The vibration device may be a vibration device (for example, a vibrator) by rotational drive,
It may be a vibration device (for example, a voice coil motor) that generates vibration by linear drive.

In addition, the aspect of proximity | contact arrangement | positioning is not limited at all, What is necessary is just an aspect which a player can visually recognize the light of a light emission means. For example, the light emitting means may be stacked on the vibrating means,
In that case, the stacking direction may be the front-rear direction, may be a direction inclined upward or downward with respect to the front-rear direction, or may be a direction inclined inward from the left and right ends.

The gaming machine R1 includes a plurality of the vibration means, and a light emitting substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed, and the light emitting substrate is stacked on the plurality of vibration means. .

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the substrate for light emission tends to be displaced (vibration, positional deviation, etc.) due to the influence of the vibration generated when the vibration means outputs a sound. Since the effect mode of the light emitting means can be changed, the displacement mode of the light emitting substrate can be made different by changing the vibration means for outputting the sound, so the type (variation of variation in the effect mode of the light emitting means ) Can be increased.

Note that the light emitting substrate may be single or plural. In the case of a plurality of sheets, at least one light emitting substrate may be stacked and arranged on a plurality of vibration means. In this case, since it is possible to provide a combination of the light emitting substrate which is displaced by the vibration generated from the vibration means and the light emitting substrate which is not displaced, it is possible to further increase the types of changes in the effect mode of the light emitting means.

The gaming machine R2 includes holding means for holding the vibration means, the light emitting substrate is not fixed relative to the holding means in the stacking direction, and the holding means is configured to emit the light along the stacking direction. A game machine R3 characterized in that a load in a direction of suppressing displacement of a substrate is generated.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, displacement of the light emitting substrate and displacement of the holding means can be suppressed.

Note that the non-fixed aspect is not limited to the case where the light emitting substrate and the holding means are not mechanically connected. For example, even if the light emitting substrate and the holding means are connected by screws, it can be said that the light emitting substrate is not fixed as long as the fastening force does not act (for example, mere retention).

Moreover, the expression "non-fixed" does not assume that a large displacement is allowed. For example, the front and back position of the light emission substrate is defined (the front and back position stability, small vibration is permitted) by fixing two plate members which define the front and back position of the light emission substrate to the holding means. By surrounding the direction perpendicular to the front and back with a frame member having a slightly large frame shape, it is possible to suppress the displacement in the direction (upper and lower, right and left) different from the front and rear direction.

Thus, as in the case of the vibration means, the influence of the vibration generated from the vibration means on the light emission substrate can be reduced as compared with the case where the light emission substrate is fixed to the holding means. Can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine R2 or R3, first and second members disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate in the stacking direction, fixing means for fixing the first and second members to the holding means, and Restricting means for restricting the moving direction of the first member and the second member in the stacking direction, the fixing means advancing toward the holding means along a direction inclined with respect to the stacking direction. A game machine R4 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2 or R3, the direction in which the first member and the second member are stacked does not coincide with the advancing direction of the fixing means, and the first member and the second member Since the movement of the fixing means in the direction of movement is restricted, even if loosening occurs in the fixing by the fixing means (even if some fixing means are loosened), the displacement of the fixing means is compared with the displacement of the fixing means. Thus, the displacement of the first member and the second member can be reduced.

Thereby, the positional relationship between the first member and the second member can be easily maintained. In other words, it is possible to prevent the first member and the second member from being separated or approached more than expected.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect to advance. For example, the rod-like member may be inserted into the through hole, or the fastening screw may be fastened to the screw hole.

In any one of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the light emitting substrate includes a first displacement area configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement area in which displacement is suppressed as compared to the first displacement area. A game machine R5 characterized by

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines R2 to R4, the change in the light emission mode when the light emission substrate is displaced due to the vibration of the vibration means is changed for each area of the light emission substrate It can be done.

As a result, by designing the aspect of the light emission effect in the first displacement area and the aspect of the light emission effect in the second displacement area in different modes, an excellent effect can be exhibited. For example, as a first refracting means for receiving and refracting light emitted from the first displacement area, a surface light emitting means for performing uniform light emission effect by surface light emission is disposed, while the light emitted from the second displacement area is refracted As a second refracting means for elevating the edge, an edge light emitting means is provided which shows light of high brightness to the player by totally reflecting light incident from one end (edge) and emitting the light from the other end (edge). Thus, it is possible to perform novel light-emitting effects with different light emission modes (for example, luminance) in each area.

In addition, the aspect of suppression of a displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be an aspect of suppression defined from the positional relationship between the light emitting substrate and the plurality of vibration means, or an aspect defined from the holding aspect of the light emitting substrate.

For example, as the positional relationship between the plurality of vibration means and the light emission substrate, in the area equally positioned from each vibration means, the influence from one vibration means is offset by the influence from the other vibration means. , Displacement may be suppressed.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R5, a fastening screw for fastening and fixing, and an opposing portion disposed to face the head of the fastening screw, and when the fastening screw is loosened, the head of the fastening screw A game machine R6 characterized in that a part and the opposite part are disposed so as to be in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine R6, in addition to the advantageous effects of any of the gaming machines R1 to R5, the fastening relationship is further deteriorated when the fastening screw is loosened by restricting the progress of the fastening screw by the facing portion. Can be prevented.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated about the response after slack generate | occur | produces in a fastening screw. For example, when loosening occurs in the fastening screw, the loosening may be electrically detected. Alternatively, the opposing portion may be formed on the surface of the vibrating device so that loosening occurs in the fastening screw. When it is vibrated, abnormal noise may be generated to notice looseness, or a special maintenance may be provided to fix a loose part by periodic maintenance.

Any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, comprising: first and second members disposed on both sides of the light emitting substrate; and connection means fastened and fixed to the first and second members,
The connection means may be configured in a manner in which deformation in a direction intersecting the connection direction is more easily generated as compared to the deformation in the connection direction connecting the first member and the second member. Feature game machine R7.

Here, in the case where the connecting means is configured in such a manner that deformation in the connecting direction is easily generated, the distance between the connecting positions will change in both directions of extension and contraction, and the advantageous effect and the adverse effect are periodical Is not preferred.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine R7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R6, the connecting means is deformed in the direction intersecting with the connecting direction to change only the side of the connecting position closer. It is possible to preferentially generate a load in the direction in which the first member and the second member push each other.

As a result, the load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed can be increased only in a situation where the connection means is deformed (for example, a situation in which a load is generated in the connection means). The load in the direction in which the first member and the second member are pressed can be increased only when the light emitting substrate is easily shaken by the vibration by the vibration means while setting the load in the opposing direction of the member and the second member low. Vibration of the substrate can be suppressed.

In addition, the aspect which a deformation | transformation produces easily in a predetermined direction is not limited at all. For example, the shape of the connection means may be formed in a mode in which the thickness is different in each direction, or the size of the load generated in the connection means may be changed in each direction.

Moreover, the switching aspect of the load of the direction which mutually presses is not limited at all. For example, a drive device may be provided to displace either the first member or the second member. According to this, it is possible to change the load in the direction of pressing the first member and the second member at an arbitrary timing by the control of the drive device.

In any one of the game machines R1 to R7, the vibration means may be configured to change the direction of vibration in a first direction along the displaceable width and in a second direction intersecting the first direction. Feature game machine R8.

According to the gaming machine R8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines R1 to R7, plural types of actions of the vibration of the vibration means on the light emitting means can be configured.

<Technical thought of the side light emitting means. Edge light travels to the side or back of the member>
A light emitting means configured to be capable of emitting light, and a light guiding means capable of guiding light, wherein the light guiding means guides the light emitted from the light emitting means in a first mode. A game machine S1 comprising: a light guiding means; and a second light guiding means for guiding light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine configured to make LED light incident from an end of a plate-like member and emit the light from the surface of the plate-like member (e.g.
159875). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect.

Describing in detail, as in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when performing the light emission effect with the LED substrate formed from a flat plate, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which helps to reduce the cost, but as it is It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the difference in the light emission mode (bright and dark, intensity, luminance, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED tends to lower the rendering effect, and the light emission mode is weak to eliminate this. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for rendering increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in inhibiting cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it has been inevitable to select whether to improve the rendering effect or to reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured to be able to guide the light from the light emitting means in different modes, so the rendering effect is reduced even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different. It is possible to suppress (change). Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light guide means. For example, it may be a light transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, or a member that emits surface light in a form close to uniform light like rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material It may be a white member that is used, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or shoji, a display that is projected (projected) on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or the like It may be a member of the above aspect.

In the gaming machine S1, the light guiding means is configured so that the way of lighting changes stepwise according to the difference in distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S1, even when the substrate on which the light guiding means is disposed is formed of a flat plate, the light guiding means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface. If you
It is possible to execute an effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine S1 or S2 includes storage means for storing the light emission means, and a light emission substrate on which the light emission means is disposed, the storage means supporting the light emission substrate, and the light guide means Is fixed in at least a first position, and shielding means configured to be able to shield between the light guiding means and the player, the first position being outside the outline of the shielding means A game machine S3 characterized in that the game machine is disposed on the side.

In the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the fixing at the first position can be loosened with the shielding means assembled, so the position of the light guiding means with respect to the supporting means can be facilitated. It can be adjusted. Accordingly, it becomes easy to repair the positional deviation between the light emitting means and the light guiding means, and maintenance can be improved.

In addition, the aspect of shielding of a shielding means is not limited at all. For example, while shielding the player from touching the light guiding means, it may be configured to be viewable, or may be configured such that the player can neither touch nor see the light guiding means. You may.

In addition, when the first position is formed at a plurality of places, all the first positions may be arranged outward of the outline of the shielding means, or at least one of the plurality of first positions is It may be arranged outside the outline of the shielding means.

In the gaming machine S3, the light emission substrate is not fixed relative to the support means and the light guide means, the light guide means is in the form of a long plate, and the first position is the light guide means. A game machine S4 characterized in that the game machine is disposed at an end in the long direction.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S3, the light guiding means is formed into a long plate shape,
Since the first position is disposed at the end in the longitudinal direction, the positional deviation of the light guide can be easily corrected by loosening the fixing of the first position and applying a load in the short direction of the light guide. .

More specifically, the correction of the positional deviation of the light guiding means is compensated by the deformation of the light guiding means in the lateral direction, or
The position of the light guide means, even in the case where only one end in the longitudinal direction is loosened and the fixation is maintained at the other end, by compensating for slippage by applying a strong load. Deviation can be easily repaired.

In addition, in the case of a support mode in which the light emitting substrate is pressed against the supporting unit by the light guiding unit, the degree of supporting the light emitting substrate on the supporting unit can be weakened as the light guiding unit is bent and deformed.
Therefore, even if the light guiding means is not removed from the supporting means, the degree of support of the light emitting substrate can be weakened by loosening the fixing at the first position and causing the light guiding means to be bent and deformed. Thus, the positional deviation of the light emitting substrate can be corrected.

The adjustment range of the position adjustment is not limited at all. For example, based on a design that is mechanically restricted so that the portion to be irradiated of the light guiding means from the outer shape of the light emitting means disposed on the light emitting substrate is not misaligned so as to completely deviate in the irradiation direction. The adjustment width may be enough to correct the positional deviation at the time (small adjustment width), or based on the design to secure a large adjustment width in advance, from the outer shape of the light emitting means The position of the light guiding means may be adjustable to a position completely out of sight (large adjustment range).

In this case, the light emitting means and the light guiding means can have the same structure, and change the aspect of the light emitting effect visually recognized at the same effect. In this case, for example, when preparing a gaming machine having the same configuration so as to be playable with another game characteristic (for example, when configuring a gaming machine with a different specification),
Since the aspect of the light emission effect can be changed by adjusting the position of the light guide without significantly changing the mechanical configuration of each part, the burden (for example, cost) relating to the manufacture of the gaming machine can be reduced.

In addition, the non-fixed aspect is not limited at all. For example, an aspect other than the case of fixing by a fixing tool such as a fastening screw may be generally expressed as non-fixed. Also, an end is an expression of intention to avoid being limited to the end. That is, the first position may be disposed at a position including the periphery of the longitudinal direction end.

In the gaming machine S3 or S4, the shielding means is fixed to the support means, and the light guiding means and the shielding means are configured to be able to reduce the relative position deviation as the distance between the light guiding means and the shielding means is reduced. A game machine S5 comprising: a unit, and the misalignment prevention unit including a fixing unit with the support means.

Here, it is necessary to connect a wire that conducts electricity to the substrate for light emission, and the misalignment or chipping of the wire directly affects the malfunction of the light emitting means. It is preferable that the substrate and the supporting means be configured so as not to be easily displaced.

Considering the rendering effect, it is preferable that the light guiding means be easy to align if the positional deviation has occurred, on the premise that the positional deviation with the light emitting substrate is not easily generated. It is considered that it is preferable to hold on the support means side. On the other hand, if positional deviation occurs between the light guiding means and the shielding means, the light guiding means and the shielding means may collide and the appearance may be deteriorated, and it may be considered that holding on the shielding means side is preferable.

Since the shielding means is a place where the player can touch, it is preferable that the shielding means be fixed to the base supporting means in consideration of the strength. Thus, the support modes expected for each means were various.

According to the gaming machine S5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine S3 or S4, the positional deviation prevention unit facilitates the mutual alignment during assembly without directly fixing the light guiding means and the shielding means. In addition to the above, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the shielding means can be easily maintained during the game.

In addition, the aspect of a position shift prevention part is not limited at all. For example, concavities and convexities having the same shape may be used, and the concavable and convexities may be fixed such that the shape along the assembling direction does not change, or a convex that tapers toward the opposite member. It may be configured with a shape and a concave shape that expands.

In any one of the game machines S1 to S5, the light guiding means is equivalent to a main body, a separation extending portion extending from the main body to a side away from the light emitting means, and an outer shape of the extending portion. Total extending light emission provided in a mode in which light incident on the oppositely extending portion is totally reflected, the oppositely extending portion extending toward the light emitting means in a cross-sectional shape A game machine S6 characterized by comprising a section.

According to the gaming machine S6, the light emitted from the total reflection light emitting portion can be prevented from entering the portion other than the facing extension portion. Therefore, the separating and extending portion, the facing extension portion, and the other portions And the effect of changing the aspect of light (separating light) at short width boundaries can be made feasible.

The form of total reflection is not limited at all. For example, the positional relationship between the light guiding means and the light emitting means, the direction of the light to be irradiated, the width of the light to be irradiated, the material and shape of the light guiding means,
And combinations thereof.

In the gaming machine S6, the light guiding means forms an outline of a covering portion covering the light emitting substrate and an outline of the covering portion, and is formed from a frame shape similar to the outline of the light emitting substrate A game machine S7, comprising: a frame portion, wherein the oppositely extending portion is extended from the covering portion and coupled to the frame portion.

According to the gaming machine S7, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine S6, light can be made incident from the joining portion to the frame, so that the effect of the light emission effect of the frame can be improved, and the facing extension portion By functioning as a reinforcing rib, the strength of the light guide can be improved.

According to this, if the frame portion is extended to the back of the light emitting means along the direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means, it is possible to perform the effect of lighting the opposite side of the emission direction.

In the gaming machine S7, the oppositely extending portion is formed in a long shape along the covering portion, and is coupled to the frame at one end in the longitudinal direction, and is connected to the frame at the other end. A game machine S8 characterized by being separated.

According to the gaming machine S8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S7, based on the design of the facing extension,
Since it is possible to configure the end that allows light to enter the frame in the longitudinal direction and the end that is restricted from entering, it is possible to improve the design freedom of the light-emitting effect using the frame.

In any one of the game machines S6 to S8, the light emitting means is disposed at the projection position of the facing extension part and the separation extension part, and the inclination angle of the tip shape of the separation extension part with respect to the irradiation direction of light is The gaming machine S9 is characterized in that the smaller it is, the closer it is to the end of the cross-sectional shape of the facing extension part and the separating extension part.

According to the gaming machine S9, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines S6 to S8, the light emission intensity of the light emitting means even if the tip shape of the separation and extension portion is a shape inclined with respect to the plane of the light emission substrate. Can be performed without giving the player a sense of discomfort. That is, the entire cross-sectional shape of the separation and extension part can be made to emit light to the same extent.

<Technical thought of top light emitting means. Points to change the way of lighting at a distance from the light emitting means>
A light receiving unit configured to emit light; and a light receiving unit configured to receive light, wherein the light receiving unit is a first light receiving unit configured to receive the light emitted from the light emitting unit in a first mode; A game machine T1 comprising: second light receiving means for receiving the light emitted from the light emitting means in a mode different from the first mode.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, LED light is made to enter from the edge of the planar member,
There is a gaming machine configured to emit light from the surface of the planar member (e.g.
-159875)). However, the conventional gaming machine described above has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect.

Describing in detail, as in the above-described conventional gaming machine, when performing the light emission effect with the LED substrate formed from a flat plate, the price of the substrate can be reduced, which helps to reduce the cost, but as it is It was difficult to achieve both.

That is, the difference in the light emission mode (bright and dark, intensity, luminance, etc.) between the near position and the far position with respect to the LED tends to lower the rendering effect, and the light emission mode is weak to eliminate this. It is possible to increase the number of LEDs that tend to be (dark), but in that case, the number of LED elements required for rendering increases with respect to the area of the LED substrate, which results in inhibiting cost reduction. It will be. Therefore, it has been inevitable to select whether to improve the rendering effect or to reduce the cost.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine T1, since the light receiving means is configured to be able to receive the light from the light emitting means in different modes, the rendering effect is reduced even if the distance based on the light emitting means is different (change Can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to improve from the viewpoint of the effect of the light emission effect while reducing the cost.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect of a light receiving means. For example, it may be a light transmitting member made of a colorless or colored transparent member, or a member that emits surface light in a form close to uniform light like rubbed glass, or formed by curing a resin or the like of a milky white material It may be a white member that is used, a member that allows light to pass through a gap similar to a screen door or shoji, a display that is projected (projected) on the member itself similar to a transmissive liquid crystal, or the like It may be a member of the above aspect.

In the game machine T1, a game machine T2 characterized in that the light receiving means is configured such that the way of lighting changes stepwise according to the difference in the distance from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine T2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1, even when the substrate on which the light receiving means is disposed is formed of a flat plate, the light receiving means is formed in a plate shape forming a curved surface To
It is possible to execute an effect of causing the curved surface to emit light uniformly (uniformly).

The gaming machine T1 or T2 includes storage means for storing the light emission means, and a light emission substrate on which the light emission means is disposed, and the storage means is disposed opposite to one surface of the light emission substrate. A game unit T3 comprising: partitioning means for partitioning an area to be illuminated, wherein the light receiving means is configured to change the way of lighting for each of the areas partitioned by the partitioning means.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, since the frame of the dividing means is arranged at the boundary where the way of lighting the light receiving means changes, the way of lighting the light receiving means changes rapidly It is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player when making it happen. As a result, even when the number of light emitting substrates is small, it is possible to improve the rendering effect of the light emitting effect using the light emitting substrates.

In the game machine T3, the game machine T4 is characterized in that the division means supports the light emission substrate in a direction opposed to the biasing force applied to the light emission substrate.

According to the gaming machine T4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3, the assembling operation can be facilitated by facilitating the alignment of the substrate for light emission and the partitioning means, and the substrate for light emission at the time of use It is possible to suppress the positional deviation between the and the dividing means.

In the gaming machine T3 or T4, the dividing means includes a through hole formed corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the light receiving means is inserted through the through hole. A game machine T5 characterized by comprising a section.

According to the gaming machine T5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T3 or T4, the distance between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit can be narrowed without being influenced by the dimensions of the dividing means. It becomes easy to make total reflection easy, and it can prevent that the intensity | strength of the light radiate | emitted from a light emission means falls.

In the gaming machine T5, the dividing means is provided with a non-penetrating through hole which is drilled corresponding to the shape of the light emitting portion disposed on the light emitting substrate, and the non-penetrating through hole is ,
The game machine T6 is formed in a mode in which the opening is enlarged as the light emission substrate is separated from the light emission substrate, and is abutted with the light receiving means from the opposite side of the light emission substrate.

According to the gaming machine T6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T5, the through hole into which the insertion portion is not inserted can be configured as a means for emitting light emitted from the light emitting portion at a wide angle, and additionally The light leakage can be suppressed by narrowing the gap between them.

In any one of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the light receiving means is characterized in that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape is formed larger on the side farther from the light emitting means than on the side closer to the light emitting means. T7.

According to the gaming machine T7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines T1 to T6, the area in which the player visually recognizes the light via the light receiving means is enlarged compared to the area where the light emitting means is formed. Can.

In the gaming machine T7, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and an extraction boundary surface portion intersecting the light conduction portion, and the extraction boundary surface is a portion of the light conduction portion, A game machine T8 characterized in that the front-rear direction surface portion in the extending direction is arranged to be shorter than the inclined surface portion.

According to the gaming machine T8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine T7, even when the light receiving means is formed in such a manner that the outer shape of the cross-sectional shape becomes larger toward the front, it is a case where the extraction boundary surface portion is formed. However, the thickness of the light conducting portion can be easily made uniform. Thereby, total reflection can be easily maintained in the extending direction of the light conducting portion.

In the gaming machine T7 or T8, the light receiving means includes a light conducting portion extending from the light emitting means side, and the light conducting portion is formed in a line including the base end of the insertion portion. Feature game machine T9.

According to the gaming machine T9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T7 or T8, it is easy to visually recognize the light emitted from the LED of the light emitting means as a linear light (a light in which the light from the point light source is mixed) Therefore, the feeling like a point light source can be reduced without increasing the number of LEDs.

<Point consisting of two directions where the fastening direction inclines>
In the gaming machine, provided with a first means and a second means fixed to the first means by a fixing means, the fixing means comprises: a first fixing means for generating a fixing force in a first direction; And second fixing means for generating a fixing force in a second direction which is inclined with respect to the direction.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a front frame is formed by uniting a plurality of structures with fastening screws inserted in the front-rear direction (see, for example, JP-A-2016-41185). . However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the shape of the structure is defined by the arrangement of the fixing means, and there is a problem that the design freedom of the structure is reduced.

For example, when a fastening screw inserted in the front-rear direction is inserted into the fixing means, the light emitting member such as an LED can not be disposed at a position that interferes with the fastening screw in a front view in one section through which the fastening screw is inserted. That is, since the region in which the fixing means can be disposed substantially corresponds to the limit position of the outer shape of the light emitting member, the size of the structure is limited to the position in which the fixing means can be disposed.

In other words, the shape of the support plate for supporting the light emission substrate from the back side needs to be larger than that of the light emission substrate by an amount corresponding to the arrangement of the fixing means. The size of the light emitting substrate is limited.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U1, since the insertion direction of the fastening screw for fixing the fixing means is constituted by the first direction and the second direction which are mutually inclined, all the fixing means are along the longitudinal direction. Compared to the case of being inserted, it is possible to secure a wide effect area on the side of causing the player to visually recognize.

In the gaming machine U1, the fixing means includes an outer surface, a first surface formed along the first direction, and a second surface formed along the second direction. Gaming machine U2
.

According to the gaming machine U2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, since the outer surface is formed along the direction of the fixing force applied to the fixing means, sufficient resistance is obtained even if the outer surface is likely to be deformed by external force. Force can be generated, and deformation of the outer surface can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, at least one of the fixing points of the fixing means is provided with a suppressing means for suppressing a decrease in fixing force.

Here, assuming that the first means and the second means are formed of a resin molded product, and the removal direction of the resin mold for manufacturing is one direction, the first direction or the second direction mutually inclined and the removal direction are Since it inclines, there exists a possibility that fixing force may become weak by the 1st or 2nd fixing means corresponding to the inclined side.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine U3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine U1 or U2, a reduction in the fixing force can be suppressed by the suppressing means. Therefore, the fastening screw used for fastening the fixing means is a common part can do.

In addition, the structure of the said suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a loosening prevention means for preventing the occurrence of looseness in fixation, or it may be a looseness control means for regulating further loosening when looseness in fixation occurs.

In the gaming machine U3, the suppressing means includes notifying means capable of notifying a fixing failure of the fixing means.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U3, since the fixing means of the fixing means is notified by the notifying means, early detection of the occurrence of loosening of the fastening screw can be achieved.

The configuration of the notification means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means for electrically notifying as a detection means such as a sensor, or a structural means for causing a change in appearance.
As structural means, for example, transmission change means for changing the transmission intensity of vibration generated inside the game machine to the outside of the game machine, light effect change means for blocking light emission from the inside and generating a shadow that can be seen in appearance For example, a vibration notification means or the like may be made to contact the vibration part of the vibration device to generate abnormal noise or strengthen the vibration to notice the player.

The game machine according to any one of the inventions U2 to U4 comprises a third means disposed between the first means and the second means, the third means comprising the first and second surfaces. A game machine U5 characterized in that it is disposed between.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines U2 to U4, the first means and the second means can generate resistance as a component direction of the fixing force of the fixing means in a plurality of directions. As a result, the third means can be easily kept safe.

The configuration of the third means is not limited at all. For example, the third means may be configured to make the player visually recognize the first means side, and not make the player visually recognize the second means side. In this case, by setting the side where the distance between the first surface and the second surface is wide as the first means side and the narrow side as the second means side, while ensuring a wide area for the player to visually recognize, the side which is not made visible The area occupied by the configuration can be narrowed.

The gaming machine U5 includes a fourth means disposed on the opposite side of the third means across the first face, and the first face is formed to be inclined with respect to the front-rear direction. A gaming machine U
6

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, the area occupied by the third means and the area occupied by the fourth means in front view can be made to interfere with each other, so the third means and the fourth means It is possible to secure a large placeable area of

In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs at predetermined intervals, respectively.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the first fixing means and the second fixing means are arranged in pairs at predetermined intervals, so that in one fixing means It is possible to prevent the deformation along the direction of generation of the fixing force from occurring in the other fixing means. That is, since the deformation in the direction intersecting with the direction in which the fixing force is generated can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the fixing means from being loosened.

<Stiffness reduction due to the notch (through hole) on the back case side is assisted by the rigidity of the game board>
In a gaming machine including a game board and an opposing means in which an edge is disposed opposite to the game board, the opposing means is provided with a proximity portion disposed close to the game board at the edge on the left and right sides A game machine ZA1 characterized in that the formation mode of the proximity portion is asymmetric.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a gaming board constituting a gaming area and a back case on which a movable unit and the like are disposed (see, for example, JP-A-2016-77627). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, sufficient space for disposing the movable unit etc. can be secured because the internal space of the back case is eroded into the space occupied by the connection position of the game board and the back case. There was a problem that it became difficult.

In particular, with a right-handed machine that performs a game by right-handing in a definite change state (high probability state) or a big hit game (special game state), the player's gaze is often concentrated on the right side of the game area. It has been required to secure the internal space of the back case on the back side of the flow path (the flow path on the right side of the liquid crystal device) where the hit gaming ball flows down.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZA1, the formation mode of the proximity portion is left-right asymmetry,
Since the arrangement of the left and right edges of the opposing means to the game board can be left and right asymmetrical, the internal area of either the left or the other opposing means is secured instead of sacrificing the internal area of either the left or the other opposing means. It is easy to do. Thereby, the arrangement freedom of the opposing means to the game board can be improved, the arrangement space of the movable unit and the like can be sufficiently secured, and the freedom of the rendering for the player to visually recognize through the game board is improved. be able to. For example, the vicinity of the end of the game board (for example, the right-handed flow path) can be illuminated by the light emitting means of the moving object, or can be illuminated by light emitted from the liquid crystal display device.

In addition, the aspect of formation of a proximity | contact part is not limited at all. For example, the game board may be in contact with the game board, the game board may be arranged apart from the game board, or a combination thereof.

In addition, the formation aspect of a proximity | contact part is not limited at all. For example, an area may be secured in which a connecting portion (contact portion) used for connecting with a game board is not formed in a wide range,
The connection portion (contact portion) may be disposed after suppressing the area occupied by the connection portion (contact portion).

Moreover, as a left-right asymmetrical aspect, it is not limited at all. For example, the area where the proximity portion is formed may be asymmetric, or the direction of formation of the proximity portion may be left-right asymmetry, or the functional portion (female screw to which the fastening screw is fastened and fixed) disposed in the proximity portion The formation position of the formed fastening portion or the like, the formation direction (for example, the direction in which the insertion direction of the fastening screw is set in the front-rear direction, the left-right direction, or other directions) or the number of formation may be left-right asymmetry.

In the gaming machine ZA1, the opposing means includes an arrangement portion in which the proximity portion is formed at an end portion on the game board side and is oppositely disposed in the left-right direction. The formation direction of the proximity portion with respect to the arrangement portion is left A game machine ZA2 characterized by being asymmetrically configured.

According to the gaming machine ZA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZA1, the area between the placement units can be configured asymmetrically with respect to the gaming board. The mode in which the forming direction is left-right asymmetric is not limited at all. For example, the forming direction may be the opposite direction (the same direction on the left and right) with respect to the left-right symmetrical direction, or may be the forming direction in the direction intersecting on the left and right (for example, the orthogonal direction).

Further, as the forming direction, for example, an extending direction (a direction in which the plate-like portion is extended) (a direction in which the plate-like portion is extended), a recessing direction (a direction in which the recess is recessed) formed as a notch is cut.

In the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the proximity portion includes an opposing surface which is a surface facing the gaming board and an opposing side which is a side opposing the gaming board, and a portion to the left side of the gaming board is compared The gaming machine ZA3 is characterized in that the proportion of the opposite side to the right side of the gaming board is greater than that of the opposite surface.

According to the gaming machine ZA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZA1 or ZA2, the right / left width of the proximity portion can be narrower in the right side of the gaming board compared to the left side of the gaming board.

A game machine ZA4 characterized in that any one of the game machines ZA1 to ZA3 includes a restraining means for restraining displacement of the game board or the opposing means in the opposite direction.

According to the gaming machine ZA4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA3, the rigidity of the opposing means can be reinforced by the suppressing means. In addition, arrangement | positioning of a suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be disposed at a position away from the game board (including a position contacting the opposing means) or may be disposed at a position away from the opposing means (including a position abutting on the game board) And may be disposed at a position between the gaming board and the opposing means (including a position in contact with at least one of the gaming board or the opposing means).

In the gaming machine ZA4, the suppressing means is disposed on the gaming board side.

According to the gaming machine ZA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZA4, maintenance of the strength (retention of rigidity) of the entire gaming unit can be achieved without providing a special member in the facing means.

In the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, the suppressing means includes an overlapping portion that overlaps the outermost side surface of the opposing means in a front view.

According to the gaming machine ZA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZA4 or ZA5, it is possible to prevent the design freedom of the interior of the gaming board from being sacrificed, so while securing the space for the right-handed flow path in the gaming area It is possible to maintain the strength of the entire gaming unit (secure the rigidity).

In any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the opposing means is provided with a non-contacting portion not in contact with the gaming board at an edge on the gaming board side of the outermost side in the predetermined direction. The game machine ZA7 that features.

According to the gaming machine ZA7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA6, the gap between the gaming board and the non-contacting portion is the location of the drive of the variable winning opening, or the drive Or, it can be effectively used by setting a route of wiring connected to a winning sensor or a light emitting device, or setting a position of the light emitting device.

In any one of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the gaming board is formed of a resin material,
The opposing means comprises rendering means disposed between the gaming board and the gaming machine, and the front end of the rendering means is arranged to be able to be disposed on the front side of the front end of the opposing means. ZA8
.

According to the gaming machine ZA8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZA1 to ZA7, the arrangement space of the rendering means can be extended to the front side.

<Various light emission modes for movable roles>
Light emitting means for emitting light to a predetermined light emitting area, and displacement means configured such that a first position at least partially overlapping the light emitting area in a predetermined direction is included in at least a part of the displacement section;
A gaming machine ZB1 comprising: a gaming area ZB1 in which the light emitting area is configured to be visible in a plurality of types of light emission modes corresponding to the arrangement of the displacement means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured such that the light emitting means and the displacement means overlap in a front view (see, for example, JP-A-2016-159178). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the light emitting means and the displacing means are only visually recognized alone, and the effect of rendering using the overlapping becomes insufficient. That is, the light emitting means is hidden by the displacing means by disposing the displacing means on the front side of the light emitting means.
There was a problem that the effect of rendering was insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZB1, since the light emitting means is configured to be visible in different light emitting modes entangled with the mode of the displacement means, it is possible to achieve diversification of the effect modes.

In addition, as an aspect of the displacement means, for example, an arrangement aspect of the displacement means, a displacement aspect of the displacement means, an aspect (direction) of the displacement means, a light emission aspect of the light emitting means disposed in the displacement means, etc. It is illustrated. As an arrangement aspect of the displacement means, a case where a part of the displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, a case where the whole displacement means overlaps with the light emitting means, etc. are exemplified. As a displacement mode of the displacement means,
A case where the displacing means is displaced toward the light emitting means, a case where the displacing means is displaced away from the light emitting means, and the like are exemplified. As a mode of the direction (orientation) of the displacement means, the surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, the back surface of the displacement means faces the light emitting means side, the surface between the direction faces the light emitting means, etc. It is illustrated.

As a light emission mode of the light emission means, an aspect in which the light emission means for emitting light toward the displacement means is turned on, blinks or is extinguished, an aspect in which the light emission means for emitting light toward the side away from the displacement means is lighted, blinks or is extinguished Is illustrated.

In the gaming machine ZB1, the possible area is a first state in which the displacement means is disposed at the first position, and a second state in which the displacement means is disposed at a second position different from the first position. A game machine ZB2 characterized in that it is possible to configure the case where the light emission modes viewed from the predetermined direction are different.

According to the gaming machine ZB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZB1, the light emission mode can be made different by the change of the position of the displacement means, so the impression given to the player while keeping the light emission mode of the displacement means alone Can change suddenly.

In the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the light emitting means includes a substrate on which the light emitting portion is disposed, and a refracting means disposed to be able to refract light emitted from the light emitting portion, and the substrate is the predetermined one The game machine ZB3 is disposed outside of the possible area in a directional view, and the refraction means includes a first refracting portion that overlaps the possible area in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine ZB1 or ZB2, the mode of light visually recognized through the first refracting portion is a combination of light emitted from the light emitting portion and color or light and shade based on the displacement means Can be expressed by

Further, by narrowing the formation range of the substrate, it is possible to secure an area for arranging another component, for example, a drive device that generates a driving force of the displacement means, and a space for displacing the displacement means.

In the gaming machine ZB3, the displacement means is characterized in that displacement at a position overlapping with the possible area in the predetermined direction view is larger than displacement at other positions.

According to the gaming machine ZB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZB3, the displacement of the displacing means is suppressed when the light emitting means occupies a large space, and the displacement of the displacing means is increased when the space occupied by the light emitting means is small. As a result, the freedom of displacement of the displacement means can be maximized while the space occupied by the light emitting means and displacement means is jointly reduced.

In addition, the aspect of the magnitude of a displacement is not limited at all. For example, the absolute value of the displacement of the displacement means may be compared, the positive and negative may be provided in opposite directions, and the comparison may be made with the displacement of the displacement means in a predetermined direction (component). The comparison may be made including the number of members configured in the displacement means and displaced.

In any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means includes a second light emitting means for emitting light in a manner visible from the predetermined direction, and a transmitting means for transmitting light emitted from the second light emitting means. The game machine ZB5 is characterized in that the transmitting means has a shape in which the width in the direction intersecting the direction of displacement of the displacement means changes along the direction of displacement.

According to the gaming machine ZB5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB4, the displacement means is disposed at which position of the displacement section the width of the light of the second light emitting means viewed through the possible area It can be changed by

In any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the possible area is disposed on the center side of a window portion which is opened so as to allow the liquid crystal display area to be visible.

According to the gaming machine ZB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB5, the change in the light emission mode of the available area can be used to guide the player's gaze toward the liquid crystal display area.

In addition, the arrangement | positioning aspect of a possible area | region is not limited in any way, Various aspects are illustrated.
For example, it may be an aspect scattered around the window (including the case where there is one possible area),
It may be a circular (arc) shape surrounding the window.

In any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, the gaming machine comprises a substrate on which the light emitting means is disposed,
A game machine ZB7 characterized in that the substrate is not provided with a fastening means for fastening at an end portion on the possible area side.

According to the gaming machine ZB7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZB1 to ZB6, it is possible to secure the arrangement space of the light emitting means on the possible area side, and the shadow of the fastening means occurs in the possible area It can be avoided.

In the gaming machine ZB7, a gaming machine ZB8 characterized in that it has a covering means disposed in a manner to cover between the possible area and the substrate in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZB8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZB7, since the boundary position between the possible area and the substrate is concealed by the covering means, the visibility of the light is deteriorated near the edge of the substrate. Even if it is, it can be avoided to show it to the player.

The gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8 is provided with a substrate holding means for holding the substrate, and the substrate holding means is provided with a gap forming portion for forming a gap to facilitate assembly of the substrate,
A game machine ZB9 characterized in that the gap forming portion is closed in the assembled state.

According to the gaming machine ZB9, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine ZB7 or ZB8, it is possible to avoid problems such as light leakage from the clearance forming portion while exhibiting the effect of facilitating the assembly of the substrate by the clearance forming portion. . In addition, the gap forming portion may be used for engagement with another member and may be used for alignment of the other member.

In any one of game machines ZB7 to ZB9, the substrate includes a connector portion to which a wire is connected, and the connector portion is disposed at a position away from the end portion on the possible area side. Game machine ZB10.

According to the gaming machine ZB10, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZB7 to ZB9, by applying a load to the wiring connected to the connector section, generating a moment starting from the end on the possible area side Therefore, even in a situation where the substrate can not be taken out directly, the substrate can be easily taken out.

<Transmission of driving force to multiple members, switching between transmission and shutoff>
A displacing displacement means, a driving means for generating a driving force for displacing the displacing means, and a driving force generated by the driving means can be transmitted to the displacing means in a predetermined state Transmission means, wherein the transmission means comprises a transmission portion for transmitting a driving force to a predetermined transmission portion of the displacement means, and in the drive state of the drive means, the transmission portion is the transmission target A game machine ZC1 characterized in that the displacement of the displacement means can be suppressed when it is not in contact with a part.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided to a recess of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP 2010-234152 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine,
Since the maintenance of the attitude of the displacement member is performed by the support by the cylindrical portion, there is a problem that it is difficult to perform other effects using the cylindrical portion in the state where the attitude of the displacement member is maintained.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZC1, since the displacement of the displacing means can be suppressed even in the non-contacting state of the transmitting part, the transmitting part can be changed to another effect while the posture of the displacing means is maintained. It can be used.

In addition, the aspect of a transmission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a single or a plurality of gears disposed between the displacement means and the drive means, or a mode exemplified by a mechanism such as a slider crank or a cam in which a plurality of members interact with each other.

In addition, the aspect which enables suppression of a displacement is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode that is biased by gravity or an elastic force based on a spring member, or it may be a mode that is locked (engaged) by a claw-like member, or abuts against a member having a function as a stopper to suppress It is also possible that the In addition, as restraining is possible, an aspect in which the displacement of the displacement means is reduced, an aspect in which the displacement of the displacement means is prevented (restricted), and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine ZC1, the transmission means includes a formation portion formed along the movement trajectory of the transmission portion, and the formation portion is not in the movement direction of the displacement means with respect to the displacement means. A game machine ZC2 characterized in that it is capable of coming into contact with the displacement means in the state of being in contact.

According to the gaming machine ZC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC1, the displacement of the displacing means can be suppressed by the contact between the forming portion and the displacing means, thereby improving the stability of the arrangement of the displacing means against external force be able to.

In the gaming machine ZC2, the formation portion is extended from the transmission portion along the displacement direction of the transmission means, and the distance from the displacement means is longer than the distance between the transmission portion and the displacement means. A game machine ZC3 characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine ZC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC2, in the opposing direction of the displacement means and the transmission means, a portion where a load is generated during transmission of driving force and a portion where a load is generated during displacement suppression It can be staggered.

In the gaming machine ZC3, the displacing means is a one-side functional unit formed on one side in the moving direction of the displacing means with respect to the portion to be transferred, and the other side of the displacing portion in the moving direction of the displacing portion And the other-side functional part is formed on the same plane as the movement locus of the formation part, and the other-side function part is provided outward of the movement locus of the formation part A game machine ZC4 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine ZC4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC3, it is possible to set the moving direction in which movement is suppressed by the forming unit to one side.

In any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the displacement means comprises a first displacement means and a second displacement means different from the first displacement means, and the transmission means comprises the first displacement means and the second displacement means. A game machine ZC5 characterized in that the transmission mode to the displacement means is changeable for each operation section.

In addition, how to switch the transmission mode is not limited at all. For example, when the driving force is transmitted to one of the first displacement means or the second displacement means, the transmission of the driving force to the other may be cut off, or the transmission may be made to the first displacement means and the second displacement means. The aspect which changes the ratio of the driving force to be carried out may be sufficient.

According to the gaming machine ZC5, in addition to the advantageous effects of any one of the gaming machines ZC1 to ZC4, the plurality of displacing means can be displaced in different displacement modes by one transmission means.

In the gaming machine ZC5, the first displacement means is disposed on one side of the transmission means, and the second displacement means is disposed on the other side of the transmission means.

According to the gaming machine ZC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZC5, it is possible to improve the setting freedom of the combination of the displacement modes of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the combination of the displacement aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. For example, the timing may include timing at which the first displacement means and the second displacement means are displaced synchronously, or the transmission or interruption of the driving force to the first displacement means and the second displacement means may be reversed and synchronized. It does not have to be displaced.

In addition, in the case where the timing of displacement in synchronization is included, the displacement mode may be changed by changing the relative speed of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In the game machine ZC5 or ZC6, the direction of the displacement of the first displacement means and the direction of the displacement of the second displacement means are set in opposite directions.

According to the gaming machine ZC7, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZC5 or ZC6, the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be made to visually recognize each other in the common area, so the first displacement means and the second displacement Even when the effect area in which the means is displaced is narrow, effective effects can be performed.

In addition, the aspect of a 1st displacement means and a 2nd displacement means is not limited at all. For example,
Alternatively, the plurality of displacing means stacked in the back and forth direction may be projected to a common area at another timing, or the initial arrangement may be configured to pass through the common range while moving the plurality of movable members It is good.

<A deviation of stop position is prevented by the load generating part catching up and making contact>
In the gaming machine, the gaming machine further comprises a first displacement means configured to be displaceable, and a second displacement means configured to displace the first displacement means by displacing in a predetermined direction.
The load generating unit is configured to apply a load in a direction along the predetermined direction to displace the first displacement unit, and the first displacement unit includes a loaded unit that receives a load from the load generation unit, the load generation The gaming machine is characterized in that the part is configured to be separated from the load receiving part during displacement along the predetermined direction, and to be able to abut on a predetermined part different from the load receiving part of the first displacement means. ZD1
.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which a cylindrical portion used for driving force transmission is guided to a recess of a displacement member, and the arrangement of the cylindrical portion corresponds to the posture of the displacement member (for example, See JP 2010-234152 A). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine,
When the cylindrical portion is moved excessively due to a defect in the drive transmission, the position of the displacement member is shifted from the moving end, which may cause the player to feel discomfort.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating portion is separated from the load-receiving portion during displacement, and is abutted to a predetermined portion different from the load-receiving portion, causing an excessive displacement in the second displacement means. However, this can prevent the first displacement means from being disposed at an unintended position.

In the gaming machine ZD1, the load generating unit is configured such that, when the first displacement means is disposed at one end of the displaceable section, the load directed from the other side to the one side in the predetermined direction is the predetermined portion A game machine ZD2 characterized in that it is configured to be grantable to the game machine ZD2.

According to the gaming machine ZD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZD1, when the first displacement means is disposed at one end of the predetermined direction, the load generating portion to the first displacement means in the predetermined direction Since the load in the direction from the other side to the one side is applied, the first displacing means can be pressed to the one end of the predetermined direction by the load.

The game machine ZD1 or ZD2 includes a drive unit configured to be capable of driving the second displacement unit, and the load generation unit is further connected to the first side on the other side in the predetermined direction than the load-receiving unit.
A game machine ZD3 characterized in that it abuts on the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZD3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZD1 or ZD2, the second displacement means can be mechanically stopped by the contact between the load generating portion and the first displacement means. Even if the timing accuracy is low, the end positions of the first displacement means and the second displacement means can be easily made constant. Thus, it is possible to suppress the positional deviation of the first displacement means and the second displacement means from the end position while rapidly setting the stop of the first displacement means and the second displacement means.

In addition, the part which measures against a rare event that the second displacement means moves excessively is
By providing the load at a location different from the load receiving part which receives the load by each driving force transmission, even if the load receiving part is deformed, the fail safe function can be exhibited without any problem.

A game machine ZD4 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines ZD1 to ZD3, a restricting means capable of restricting the first displacement means at one end in the predetermined direction.

According to the gaming machine ZD4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD3, while the first displacement means is regulated at one end in a predetermined direction by the regulation means, the second displacement means is One displacement means can be displaced independently.

In addition, the aspect of a control means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a claw-like member that engages with, and engages with, the displacement direction of the first displacement means, or may be regulated by gravity or an urging force by an elastic member, or a part of the second displacement means It may be configured by

In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, the gaming machine includes detection means configured to be capable of detecting that the first displacement means is disposed at one end of the predetermined direction, the first displacement means comprising
A game machine ZD5 comprising: a detected part whose position is detected in the detecting means, and the load generating part abuts on the detected part.

According to the gaming machine ZD5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD4, it is possible to limit the portion damaged due to the load at the time of contact to the detected portion.

In addition, by linking the life that can be calculated from the number of times of displacement (the number of times of driving) of the second displacement means and the durability of the detection piece, it is possible to determine a detection defect based on breakage of the detection piece. It is possible to grasp the replacement time (maintenance time) of the displacement means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the direction of the load applied from the load generation unit to the predetermined part crosses the direction of the load applied from the load generation unit to the load receiving unit A game machine ZD6 characterized by

According to the gaming machine ZD6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD5, the first
A plurality of directions of movement of the displacement means can be facilitated.

In any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are disposed at predetermined intervals in a direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZD7, in any one of the gaming machines ZD1 to ZD6, the loaded portion and the predetermined portion are arranged at the same position when viewed from the direction orthogonal to the predetermined direction,
It is possible to narrow the area required for the arrangement of the load receiving portion and the predetermined portion.

<Technical thought held using flexibility of follow-up means>
In a gaming machine provided with a displacement means configured to displace a predetermined area, and a follow-up means for following the displacement of the displacement means, preventing the predetermined part of the follow-up means from entering the predetermined area side A game machine ZE1 comprising means.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine configured such that flexible wiring is routed along the direction of displacement of the displacement means (see, for example, JP 2012-157474 A)
. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, setting the length of the wiring in comparison with the displacement means has an advantage that the deflection of the wiring is unlikely to occur when the displacement means is displaced, while the biting of the wiring into the displacement means In addition to the necessity of forming a temporary fixing portion for temporarily fixing the wiring so as not to displace the wiring relatively in each place of the displacement means in order to prevent this, the displacement means is disposed at a predetermined position while wiring the wiring to the temporary fixing portion. Usually, it takes a long time to assemble as it is assembled.
As a result, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in design and assembly efficiency may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZE1, the following means such as wiring is prevented from being displaced to the predetermined area side by the preventing means, so that the following means is rubbed and damaged by the displacement means. It can be suppressed. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the need to form a plurality of temporary fixing parts in the displacement means, and to improve the design freedom of the displacement means and the assembly efficiency.

In the game machine ZE1, the prevention means supports the follow-up means so as to be relatively displaceable in a predetermined direction in which a change in the distance to the change means occurs with the displacement of the change means.

According to the gaming machine ZE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE1, the preventing means supports the following means in such a manner that the distance between the preventing means and the displacing means changes with the displacement of the displacing means. Compared with the case where the position of the following means is fixed by a fixing member such as a binding band, the load given to the following means can be reduced.

In addition, the aspect of a prevention means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a columnar part capable of winding the following means, or may be a claw-like part capable of sandwiching the following means. In addition, when the prevention means is formed as a columnar portion, for example, the columnar portion may be formed as a fastening portion used when fastening and fixing members to each other, or used for alignment when assembling the members. You may form as a positioning part.

Also, the aspect of the tracking means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an electrical wiring that supplies electricity to the displacing means, or a strip-shaped member that is displaced based on the displacement of the displacing means, a figure or pattern is drawn on the surface, and the figure or pattern is made visible to the player It may be a strip-shaped effect member for assisting the effect, or may be an elastic means such as a coil spring for generating an urging force for assisting the displacement of the displacing means.

In the game machine ZE1 or ZE2, the follow-up means is configured to be capable of supplying electricity to the displacement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE1 or ZE2, electricity can be favorably supplied to the displacement means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, the predetermined direction is a direction intersecting the direction in which the displacement means is displaced, and the follow-up means is configured to surround the prevention means. The gaming machine ZE4.

According to the gaming machine ZE4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE3, it is possible to avoid the situation where the following means is greatly extended to one side. That is, since the range in which the following means can be displaced can be disposed on both sides of the preventing means, the area where the interference between the following means and other members needs to be avoided can be limited to the range around the preventing means. .

In addition, it is not necessary to form a relief for causing the following means to enter from the displacement end of the displacement means to the outside in the displacement direction. Thereby, the displacement means can be disposed in a space-saving manner.

One of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4 comprises a shielding means for shielding at least a part of the displacement means, and the following means is connected to the displacement means at an inward position of the shielding means. The gaming machine ZE5.

According to the gaming machine ZE5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE4, the shielding means can prevent the player from visually recognizing the connecting portion between the following means and the displacing means. In addition, inward here means the inside direction in, when the edge in front view is made into the external shape.

In the gaming machine ZE5, the displacement means is configured to be rotatable about a first axis, and the first axis is disposed at an outer edge portion of the shielding means.

According to the gaming machine ZE6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE5, a large amount of extension of the shielding means of the displacing means from the outer periphery (outer edge portion) is ensured while keeping the following means out of the player's view be able to.

In the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, the preventing means is a straight line equally dividing the rotatable angle of the displacement means about the first axis, and is disposed on a straight line passing through the first axis. A game machine ZE7 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine ZE7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE5 or ZE6, it is possible to suppress the absolute value of the displacement amount of the following means.

In any one of game machines ZE1 to ZE7, the displacement means includes a guide portion for guiding the follow-up means in a direction away from the displacement trajectory.

According to the gaming machine ZE8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE7, rubbing with the displacing means can be prevented, and the durability of the following means can be improved.

In the gaming machine ZE8, the guiding portion is extended in a direction orthogonal to the outer shape of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE8, the area occupied by the following means can be narrowed near the displacement means, and the area of the gap through which the following means can pass can be narrowed. The rigidity of the external means for holding the displacement means can be improved as compared to the case where the air gap is large.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, the following means is formed in a string shape or a band shape, one end is connected to the displacement means, the other end is connected to the gaming machine, and is directed to both ends Gaming machine ZE10 characterized in that it is guided from one side of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine ZE10, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE9, it is possible to apply a load in the pulling direction from one side of the predetermined area at both ends of the following means. Thereby, the entire following means can be balanced with the load given from the guide unit.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10, the following means is configured to be wound on the preventing means in a loosening direction by displacing the displacing means from the pre-displacement position to the post-displacement position. Machine ZE11.

According to the gaming machine ZE11, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE10,
By absorbing the displacement of the displacing means by loosening (sagging) of the following means, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive load on the following means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11, the positioning means is provided between the displacement means and the following means, and the positioning means is provided with a positioning unit for positioning the positioning means. A game machine Z characterized in that it is disposed outside the movement track of the following means
E12.

According to the gaming machine ZE12, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZE1 to ZE11,
Since it is possible to prevent the alignment unit from eroding the displacement space of the following means, it is possible to minimize the load applied to the following means along with the displacement of the changing means.

In the gaming machine ZE12, the following means is configured to be wound around the preventing means, and the following means is set to have a larger displacement than the first displacement portion (weak displacement portion) and the first displacement portion. A second displacement portion (strong displacement portion), and the first displacement portion is disposed between the second displacement portion and the arrangement means.

According to the gaming machine ZE13, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZE12, it is possible to limit the location where damage is likely to occur by coming into contact with the placement means of the following means. Therefore, since the location which needs reinforcement can be limited, durability improvement can be aimed at at low cost.

In addition, the aspect of comparison of the magnitude of the displacement of a 1st displacement part and a 2nd displacement part is not limited at all. For example, linear distances at positions before and after displacement may be compared, or when displacement occurs in a plurality of directions, the displacement may be limited to displacement in a predetermined direction (or on a predetermined surface).

In the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the preventing means includes a projecting portion protruding from the arranging means, and the following means is wound around the projecting portion.

According to the gaming machine ZE14, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZE12 or ZE13, the fixing means can be assembled from the upper side to the arranging means while supporting the following means which is dropped by its own weight by the arranging means. And the fixing means can be easily assembled.

<Technical thought that the displacement mode (transmission mode) changes by forward and reverse rotation>
A game machine comprising: driving means; displacement means configured to be displaceable by the driving force of the driving means; and transmission means configured to be capable of transmitting the driving force generated by the driving means to the displacement means. The driving means generates a driving force in a first direction; and
In the second drive mode generating the driving force in the second direction different from the direction, wherein the displacement means is driven in the first drive mode in the first drive mode, and in the second drive mode A game machine ZF1 characterized by being displaceable in the second displacement mode to be driven.

A gaming machine such as a pachinko machine includes a first displacement means and a second displacement means displaced by a driving force of a common drive device, and the direction of displacement is reversed by reversing the drive direction of the drive device in forward and reverse directions There is a gaming machine configured (see, for example, JP-A-2013-146413).
. However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the first driving mechanism is driven by the length for driving the driving device in the positive direction
The displacement modes of the displacing means and the second displacing means remain changed, and even if the driving directions of the drive device are switched in the forward and reverse directions, both the first displacing means and the second displacing means are displaced. Therefore, there is a problem that the degree of improvement of the rendering effect by adopting a device capable of driving in forward and reverse directions as the driving device is insufficient.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZF1, the displacement mode of the displacing means is changeable by changing the direction in which the driving force is generated. It is possible to sufficiently improve the used rendering effect.

The gaming machine ZF1 includes a light emitting means for emitting light directed to the displacement means, and the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in such a manner as to pass through the optical axis of the light emitted from the light emitting means. With gaming machine ZF2.

According to the gaming machine ZF2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZF1, the position at which the light emitted from the light emitting means intersects the displacing means can be changed during displacing the displacing means. Can produce a dramatic effect that changes over time.

The gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2 includes displacement suppression means for suppressing displacement of at least a part of the transmission means, the transmission means being at least one of the first drive aspect and the second drive aspect of the drive means. A game machine ZF3 comprising a suppression area in which transmission of a driving force is suppressed, and the displacement suppression means being capable of suppressing a predetermined displacement in the suppression area.

According to the gaming machine ZF3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZF1 or ZF2, the displacement suppressing means causes the transmission means to be displaced unintentionally by being displaced when transmission of the driving force is suppressed, thereby causing displacement in an unintended displacement mode. It is possible to prevent the means from being displaced.

Further, the visibility of the displacing means can be maintained high as compared with the case where the displacing means is stopped by directly contacting the displacing means with another member. Therefore, the displacement means of the appropriate displacement mode can be configured so as to be easily viewed by the player.

In addition, the aspect of a displacement suppression means is not limited at all. For example, it may be an engagement device that produces viscous resistance represented by a damper device or the like, or a resistance device that produces resistance by its own weight, or when resistance by its own weight tends to be insufficient (for example, displacement of displacement means) In the case where the direction is parallel to the horizontal direction), the idle motion can not be suppressed by the bias of gravity, so that, for example, a device whose resistance can be varied according to a displacement mode such as a torque limiter may be used.

The gaming machine ZF3 includes a detection unit configured to detect the displacement of the displacement suppression unit, and the displacement suppression unit generates resistance when the operation speed of the transmission unit in the suppression area is lower than a predetermined speed. The resistance is suppressed when the operating speed of the transmission means in the suppression area is equal to or higher than a predetermined speed, and the detection means is the detected portion of the displacement suppression means at a position where the displacement suppression means generates the resistance. A game machine ZF4 characterized in that the game machine is arranged to be detectable.

According to the gaming machine ZF4, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine ZF3, is the detecting means functioning well in detecting the stop position of the displacement suppressing means and suppressing the displacement in the suppressing area of the transmitting means in the displacement suppressing means? It can be used for both detection and

In any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the displacement means is a first displacement means which is rotationally displaced about a first axis, and a second which is rotationally displaced the outside of the first displacement means about the first axis. A gaming machine ZF5 comprising displacement means, configured to be capable of suppressing displacement of the second displacement means in the first drive aspect or the second drive aspect.

According to the gaming machine ZF5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF4, the first
In the drive mode or the second drive mode, since the displacement of the second displacement means can be suppressed, in this suppressed state, the second displacement means is disposed between the player and the first displacement means, and the field of view The second displacement means can be configured in two ways, in which the second displacement means is disposed outward between the player and the first displacement means and does not obstruct the field of view. In the drive aspect which does not suppress the displacement of (1), displacement is possible, so that the effect by the displacement means can be configured in a total of three displacement forms.

In any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the transmitting means includes a light transmitting means formed of a light transmitting material on the side of the connection position with the displacement means.
.

According to the gaming machine ZF6, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF5, the light transmitting means has the effect of facilitating the assembly of the displacing means, and the light emission effect by conducting light toward the displacing means And the effect that makes it possible.

In any one of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the displacement means is a first displacement means that is rotationally displaced about a first axis, and the transmission means of the first displacement means is rotationally displaced about a first axis. And second displacement means connected to the transmission means outside the connection position of the first and second displacement means, and the second displacement means is configured to overlap the first displacement means in the first axial direction view. Feature game machine ZF7.

According to the gaming machine ZF7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZF1 to ZF6, the second
The displacement of the displacement means can be prevented by the first displacement means. Thereby, the arrangement of the separate retaining member can be eliminated.

<Vibration device next to device (P9 policy 1)>
The first operation means configured to be operable by the player, the second operation means disposed at a position different from the first operation means and configured to be operable by the player, and the first operation means The second
A game machine ZG1 comprising: load generation means disposed on the operation means side and capable of generating loads directed to the first operation means and the second operation means.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a plurality of operation devices and a drive device for producing effects for driving the operation devices (for example, JP-A-2016-159)
178)). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the vibration device is disposed in each operation device, the space necessary for arranging each operation device is large, and the number of arrangeable operation devices is easily limited. In addition, there is a problem that the cost increases due to the increase in the number of drive devices.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZG1, since the load generation means is disposed on the second operation means side with respect to the first operation means, the load generation means comprises the first operation means and the second operation means (ie, Can also be used to drive a plurality of operating means). Thereby, the space required for the arrangement of the first operation means and the second operation means can be reduced, and the upper limit of the number of arrangeable operation means can be increased. In addition, since the number of load generating means can be reduced, the cost for configuring the gaming machine can be reduced.

In addition, the aspect of a load generation | occurrence | production means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a means configured to be able to vibrate (repeat at high speed repeatedly), a means to generate a load at a predetermined cycle like a pump, or a means configured to include an arm member that changes its posture by the displacement of a cam. good. Moreover, the aspect of a load is not limited at all. For example, the load may be mechanically transmitted in the contact state, or may be a load (wind pressure, sound pressure, high pressure, etc.) transmitted in the non-contact state.

In the gaming machine ZG1, the load generating means is disposed between the first operating means and the second operating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine ZG1, the load can be transmitted to both the first operation means and the second operation means to the same extent.

In the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the first operation means is operated to fire game balls toward the game area, and the load generation means covers the first operation means at least partially from a predetermined direction. A game machine ZG3 characterized in that the game machine is disposed in the installation means.

According to the gaming machine ZG3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG1 or ZG2, the load generating means is disposed at a position where the finger of the player operating the first operating means is sandwiched between the player and the first operating means. The load generated from the load generating means can be easily transmitted to the hand of the player.

For example, in the process of moving the finger of the player by operating the finger close to the first operation means and releasing the finger from the first operation means after the operation is completed, the covering means is disposed at a position where the player's fingers easily pass By arranging the covering means so as to cover from the direction in which the finger easily interferes with the finger, it is possible to easily transmit the load of the load generating means to the player particularly while the finger is moving.

In addition, for example, by arranging the covering means at a position where the finger contacts with high probability when the player operates the first operation means, the load of the load generation means is increased during the operation of the first operation means. A state easy to transmit to the player can be configured.

The present idea is different from the idea of providing the load generating means in the first operation means.
That is, since the load generation means is disposed on the second operation means side with respect to the first operation means, the load generation means is disposed at a position different from the first operation means.

Intervening means which is interposed between the load generating means, the first operating means and the second operating means and is configured to be capable of transmitting a load to the first operating means and the second operating means in the gaming machine ZG3 And the intervening means is configured such that the strength of vibration transmission to the first operation means is higher than the strength of vibration transmission to the second operation means.
4

According to the gaming machine ZG4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG3, it is possible to concentrate load transmission on the first operation means side.

In the gaming machine ZG4, the intervening means is configured to be capable of changing the strength of the load transmission by displacing the load generating means with the drive of the load generating means.

According to the gaming machine ZG5, in addition to the effects achieved by the gaming machine ZG4, the strength of the load transmitted through the intervening means is improved when the load generating means is driven compared to when the load generating means is not driven Since the first operation means and the second operation means operate in an interlocking manner (oscillation) by the load given to the pachinko machine by the player, etc.
It is possible to execute an effect of strongly operating (vibrating) the operating means and the second operating means.

One of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5 includes holding means for holding the load generating means in a displaceable manner, and the holding means includes a guide unit for guiding the displacement of the load generating means. .

According to the gaming machine ZG6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZG1 to ZG5, the safety of the player can be secured by defining the displacement direction of the load generating means. That is, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a defect such as an unintentional collision of the displaced member which is displaced due to the vibration of the load generating means against the player.

Also, regardless of the structure of the load generating means itself, the load generating means can be displaced in the desired direction if guided in the desired direction, so the load generation employed to realize the desired operation (vibration) effect It is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the means.

In the gaming machine ZG6, the holding means is configured in such a manner as to allow displacement of the load generating means in a cross direction crossing the direction guided by the guide portion.
G7.

According to the gaming machine ZG7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZG6, the load generation means can be configured to be displaced in the cross direction at the time of switching between the non-driving state and the driving state. And the load generating means can be displaced in different manners. Thereby, the rendering effect by the load generation means can be improved.

In addition, various aspects are illustrated as an aspect which permits displacement. For example, a second holding means for guiding the holding means may be provided, and the guiding direction by the second holding means may be configured to intersect the guiding direction of the guiding portion, and the load generating means may be between the holding means It may be configured to interpose a flexible member, and deformation may occur due to deformation of the flexible member.

<Vibration means (P9 policy 2) for covering means>
The covering means comprising: a frame means configured in a frame shape; a covering means for covering at least a part of the frame means from the front side; and a vibrating means disposed on the covering means and configured to be vibratable The means is
A gaming machine ZH1 comprising an allowance portion which allows displacement, and configured to be capable of transmitting the vibration of the vibration means via the allowance portion.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a front frame and vibration means disposed on the front side of the front frame (see, for example, JP-A-2015-159837). But,
In the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to suppress the vibration of the vibration means to such an extent that the vibration of a predetermined strength or more is not transmitted to the front frame side (internal mechanism side). was there.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZH1, the vibration means is disposed on the covering means, and displacement of the covering means is permitted, so that vibration can be transmitted to the player side via the covering means. On the other hand, by absorbing the vibration by the displacement of the covering means, the transmission of the vibration to the frame means can be suppressed.
Thus, the allowable level of the vibration intensity of the vibration means can be increased.

In addition, the aspect of a tolerance | permissible part is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured in a connection mode on the premise of displacement of a slide, a ring, a gear or the like, and displacement may occur by operation of a slide, a link, a gear or the like, or compared with other parts It may be flexible and may generate displacement due to overload.

In the gaming machine ZH1, the gaming unit ZH2 is characterized in that the covering means is configured such that the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction is smaller than the allowable amount of displacement in the horizontal direction.
.

According to the gaming machine ZH2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZH1, the effect of the permissible part is maintained by the horizontal displacement while the player puts his hand on the covering means, and the gravity direction When a load is applied, it is possible to prevent the displacement means from being displaced excessively and disturbing the player's posture. That is, by suppressing the allowable amount of displacement in the vertical direction to be small, the structure can be stabilized as a product.

In the game machine ZH1 or ZH2, the covering means is formed in a bag shape opened on the side of the frame means.

According to the gaming machine ZH3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZH1 or ZH2, since the frame means side is configured in the form of a bag opened, the edge of the bag and the frame means are disposed opposite to each other
It is possible to reduce the contact area between the covering means and the frame means which are in contact and in which vibration transmission is performed. Thus, vibration transmission to the side of the frame means can be suppressed, so that transmission of vibration to the main substrate, the ball passage and the main electric configuration disposed on the side of the frame means can be avoided.

In any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH3, the vibration means includes an arrangement portion disposed on the frame means side, and the frame means includes a support portion for supporting the arrangement portion, the arrangement The department is
A gaming machine ZH4 characterized in that the deformation resistance is lower than that of the supporting portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH3, the displacement range of the vibrating means is limited while maintaining the suppression of the vibration transmission to the frame means side, and the arrangement portion As compared with the case of being configured to be hard, biting can be caused by utilizing the low deformation resistance, and a large absolute value of the displacement amount of the vibrating means to the side of the frame means can be secured. As a result, the covering means on which the vibration means is disposed can be easily displaced to a large extent.

In any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the covering means includes a first covering portion and a second covering portion having a deformation resistance lower than that of the first covering portion, and the vibrating means is A game machine ZH5 comprising a contact portion connected to the first covering portion and the second covering portion and capable of being in local contact with the first covering portion.

According to the gaming machine ZH5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH4, the contact position of the first covering portion having high deformation resistance and the contact portion by locally contacting the contact portion. Can be used as a fixed point (reference point) of vibration. That is, the absolute value of the displacement of the vibration means and the second covering portion based on the contact position can be increased.

The game machine according to any one of the game machines ZH1 to ZH5 includes a ball launch operating means operated to launch game balls toward the game area, and the covering means includes at least a gap between the ball launch operating means and the ball launch operating means. A game machine ZH6 characterized by having a predetermined member interposed.

According to the gaming machine ZH6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZH1 to ZH5, it is possible to suppress the vibration transmission to the ball firing operation means.

<Points characterized by blocking the light itself by displacement of goods>
In a gaming machine comprising a light emitting means and an irradiated means to which light from the light emitting means is irradiated, changing the appearance of the irradiated means while leaving the outer shape in a predetermined direction of the irradiated means. Feature game machine ZI1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine provided with light emitting means which is mounted on a movable character and configured to be able to execute a light emission effect (see, for example, JP-A-2015-208360)
. However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, a member which is displaced so as to interfere with the optical axis of the light emitting means is not provided, and it is necessary to control the light emitting means in order to change the mode of the light emission effect. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in the method of realizing the light emission effect because the data capacity is compressed for the control and the substrate is enlarged.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine ZI1, for example, the displacing means is configured to be capable of displacing the first position and the second position, and displacing the displacing means interferes with the light emitted from the light emitting means. By configuring so as to be able to, it is possible to switch the aspect of the light emission effect by the displacement of the displacement means. Therefore, the aspect of the light emission effect can be changed without controlling the light emitting means, and data for control can be eliminated, or the circuit for control can be dispensed with to miniaturize the substrate. it can. Thereby, it is possible to improve the method of realizing the light emission effect.

In addition, the aspect of a displacement is not limited at all, and various aspects are illustrated. For example, it may be a rotation, a linear slide, or a displacement along a predetermined curve. In the case where the displacement mode of the displacement means is a linear slide, the direction of the slide coincides with the predetermined direction in comparison with the case where the direction of the slide intersects with the predetermined direction. The outer shape can be easily maintained.

In addition, the aspect of the irradiation means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to rotate on a rotation axis that intersects the optical axis, and the projection area may be changed due to the difference in posture, or the member is configured to protrude from the inside without scaling. The relative projection area may be changed by displacement.

The mode of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to be rotationally displaced around the irradiated means, or may slide on a plane to enter the side of the irradiated means (between the light emitting means).

Moreover, the aspect in the case of leaving the external shape of a displacement means is not limited at all.
For example, the displacement means may be viewed as being stopped, or the absolute value of the displacement amount may be smaller than that of the irradiated means, and the displacement of the displacement means may not be recognized by the player. It may be an aspect.

Further, the displacement means may be displaced in relation to the light emitting means. The light emitting means may be configured to be directed to the irradiated means at any timing of the displacement.

The mode of the light emitting means is not limited at all. For example, the position may be fixed or may be displaceable. In the displaceable state, the light emitting means may be disposed on the displacing means, or the light emitting means and the displacing means may be displaced separately (independently). Also, the irradiation direction may be fixed, or the irradiation direction may be variable.

The displacement of the light emitting means may be such that the light axis is directed to the light receiving means and slides in a mode in which the light emitting means approaches or is separated from the light emitting means. It may be a rotating one.

The light emission aspect of the light emission means is not limited at all. For example, it may be one that maintains the lighting state at all times, or one that can switch between lighting and extinguishing.

In the gaming machine ZI1, a difference in the appearance of the irradiated means is caused by the irradiated means reflecting light emitted from the light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZI1, it is possible to immediately recognize the difference in the irradiated means when the light emitting means irradiates light, so that the attention to the timing of light irradiation can be improved. . According to this, the irradiated means is a displaceable means,
It may be a non-displaceable means.

In the game machine ZI1 or ZI2, the degree of the difference in the appearance of the irradiated means changes based on the displacement of the irradiated means.

According to the gaming machine ZI3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine ZI1 or ZI2, it is possible to improve the attention to the irradiated means.

In addition, the aspect of the displacement which becomes the basis of the difference in how to look at an irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a constant (periodic) displacement which continues at a constant speed, or may be an irregular displacement. In addition, it may be a momentary displacement, or may be a slow speed (a displacement of, for example, 1 [mm / min], etc., so that it is difficult for a player to grasp the displacement.

In any one of game machines ZI1 to ZI3, the game machine ZI4 can be configured to change the direction in which the light from the light emitting means is reflected.

According to the gaming machine ZI4, in any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, while maintaining the outer shape of the irradiated means, it is possible to make different the places to be highlighted by the light reflected through the irradiated means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, the direction in which the light is reflected is the same while the configuration is such that at least one of the light quantity and the color of the light can be different. .

According to the gaming machine ZI5, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI3, it is possible to improve the attention to the light emission mode of the irradiated means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, the light axis is configured to be capable of irradiating light to the light receiving means in an irradiation mode in which the optical axis does not interfere with the movement trajectory of the displacement means arranged around the light irradiating means A game machine ZI6 comprising a shielding light emitting means.

According to the gaming machine ZI6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI5, the light can be emitted from the non-shielded light emitting means without depending on the disposition of the displacing means so that the light can be emitted to the irradiated means. It is possible to avoid that the irradiated means is viewed darker than necessary.

In any one of the game machines ZI1 to ZI6, the irradiation unit is a first irradiation unit.
And a second irradiated means configured to be disposed at a shielding position capable of shielding light emitted from the light emitting means toward the first irradiated means, the first irradiated means comprising the light emitting means As compared with the case where the second irradiated means is not arranged at the shielding position, the area when viewed in the optical axis direction is smaller when the second irradiated means is arranged at the shielding position. A game machine ZI7 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI7, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI6, the first
It can be made difficult for light to reach the irradiated means. That is, the effect of shielding light can be improved. The change in the area of the first irradiation means may occur only when light is emitted from the light emitting means.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light emitting means is configured to irradiate light to the light receiving means with a plurality of optical axes, and the light receiving means is capable of intersecting the plurality of optical axes at a predetermined position. A game machine ZI8 characterized in that it is configured.

According to the gaming machine ZI8, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI7, the light axis of the light emitting means is increased (for example, the number of LEDs is increased) to increase the light amount of light received by the irradiated means. It can be done.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light receiving means includes driving means configured to be able to synchronously drive the light receiving means and displacement means disposed around the light receiving means, the light receiving means being displaced Game machine ZI 9 characterized in that the predetermined first surface is directed to the same side, and the displacing means is configured to periodically displace the first position and the second position.
.

According to the gaming machine ZI9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI8, the light emission aspect of the irradiated means generated by the arrangement of the displacing means while suppressing a large change in the visibility of the irradiated means For example, the switching timing of light and dark can be changed by the speed change of the displacement means.

In addition, the displacement aspect of a to-be-irradiated means is not limited at all. For example, sliding displacement or rotational displacement may be used. The rotational displacement may be, for example, a rotational displacement occurring on a rotational axis along the display surface of the display device, or may be a rotational displacement occurring on a rotational axis orthogonal to the display surface of the display area.

In any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, at least one of the displacement means disposed around the irradiation means and the irradiation means has a surface on the light emission means side, and the displacement means is disposed at the second position. A game machine ZI 10 characterized in that the traveling direction of the light emitted from the light emitting means can be changed to the player side along with the above.

According to the gaming machine ZI10, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines ZI1 to ZI9, the light emitting means emits light when the displacement means is disposed at the first position and when it is disposed at the second position. This makes it possible to increase the difference in the degree to which the light travels toward the player.

<Feature AA group> (lever UP control)
At least an operation means operable by a player in a first direction from a predetermined first position, and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the operation based on operation of the operation means In the gaming machine, the notification means capable of notifying an operation suggestion mode suggesting that the operation means is operated in the first direction, and the state in which the release condition is satisfied after being operated in the first direction. A game machine AA1 comprising: specific effect setting means capable of setting a specific effect when the operation means is not located at the specific position.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggested effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified There was something for the player to entertain. In addition, in the above-described gaming machine, there has been a case where the player operates in a state where the operating means is moved from the initial position in order to enhance the rendering effect (for example, JP 2013-090780 A). In such a gaming machine, even when the operating means is moved from the initial position, when the player does not operate the operating means, the operating means in the movable state is initialized regardless of the operation of the player. It is necessary to execute control to return to the position, and there is a problem that the effect of the presentation is reduced and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine AA1, the specific effect is set by the specific effect setting means when the operation means is not located at the specific position in the state where the release condition is satisfied, so the operation means is located at the specific position If not, it is possible to provide the player with an effect. Therefore, even if the operating means is not operated after moving the operating means, it is possible to suppress the reduction of the rendering effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AA1, it is possible to move the operating means to always move the operating means toward the specific position, and to move the operating means from the specific position to the first position different from the specific position. A game machine AA2 comprising a movement control means, wherein the operation means is located at the specific position by operating in the first direction from the first position.

  According to the gaming machine AA2, when the player operates the operation means located at the first position, the operation means can be moved to the specific position. The action of moving the operating means to a specific position can be performed simultaneously. Thus, the operation effect can be smoothly performed, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  The gaming machine AA2 has a second operation means operable by a player different from the operation means, and the specific effect at least includes a suggestion mode indicating that the second operation means is operated. A gaming machine AA3 characterized in that it is a game.

  According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AA2, a specific effect including a suggestion mode that suggests operating the second operating means is executed, so that the second operating means can be operated easily. It becomes possible. Therefore, the player can release the hand from the operation means, and the operation means can be easily moved to the specific position by the urging means, so that the operation means can be easily positioned at the predetermined position, and the operation effect can be There is an effect that it can be made easy to carry out.

  A game machine AA4 characterized in that any one of the game machines AA1 to AA3 has fixing means for fixing the operation means so that operation becomes difficult at the specific position.

  According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines A1 to A3, when the operation means is located at the specific position, the movement of the operation means is restricted by the fixing means. Can suppress that the operation means is operated regardless of. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the operating means is operated unnecessarily and cause a failure.

  One of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4 has a launching means capable of launching the gaming ball based on the operation of the player, and the specific effect includes an aspect for urging the player to launch the gaming ball. Game machine AA5 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AA1 to AA4, an aspect for prompting the player to shoot the gaming ball is included as a specific effect, so when the specific effect is executed, It is possible to actively prompt the player to launch the game ball. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect that makes it easy for the player to release the hand from the operation means, so it is easy to move the operation means to the specific position, so it is easy to position the operation means at a predetermined position There is an effect that the operation effect can be easily performed.

<Features AB group> (Complex control of pending PUSH and PUSH advance notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the discrimination means A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means In the gaming machine having the identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, the operation means capable of performing the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means operable by the player and the operation means. An effect execution means, an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect which makes it possible to change the aspect of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and Gaming machine AB1, wherein the work director and said identification symbols effect are those having a regulating means for regulating the running in period overlap.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggested effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified There was something for the player to entertain. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-090780). Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there have been provided a plurality of conditions for executing the operation effect to further enhance the effect. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation effects are executed redundantly, resulting in effects that are difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine AB1, it is possible to regulate that the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are performed in the overlapping period by the restricting means, so that it is possible to prevent a plurality of operation effects from being performed in duplicate. Is possible. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AB1, the restriction means is configured to set a period for restricting the execution of the operation effect mode in a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed, and to execute the identification symbol effect within that period. A game machine AB2 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AB1, a period during which the execution of the operation effect mode is restricted is set by the restricting means during the period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed. Since the symbol effect is performed, it is possible to smoothly execute a plurality of operation effects. Therefore, a plurality of operation effects can be executed in an easy-to-understand manner for the player, and the effect of the effects can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, in the period during which the operation effect is executed, an aspect variable effect in which the aspect of the identification symbol is variably displayed without the operation means being operated is configured to be executable. A game machine AB3 characterized by being.

  According to the gaming machine AB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, since the aspect variable effect is executable during the period when the operation effect is executed, it is identified whether the aspect variable effect is executed It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand whether or not the symbol effect is executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Characteristics AC group> (Power support termination control by falling)
A variable that can be changed into a ball entering means in which game balls can enter, a first state in which game balls can enter in the ball entering means, and a second state in which entering balls is more difficult than the first state A member, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquiring means, and the discriminating means Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the user, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the determination result of the identification of the display means A bonus giving means capable of giving an advantage advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed, a first probability as a probability of being discriminated as the specific discrimination result, and a second higher than the first probability Probability setting means capable of setting the probability and the probability setting means Determining means capable of performing determination when the second probability is set, and probability control means for setting the first probability based on the determination result being a specific determination result by the determination means; When the special gaming state is set by the setting means capable of setting the specific gaming state in which the variable member is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than in the normal gaming state, the normal gaming state In the gaming machine having an ending condition determination means for determining establishment of an ending condition for setting a gaming state, the setting means can set the special gaming state when the second probability is set. The termination condition determination unit is configured to set the second probability to the first probability in a state where a predetermined period has elapsed after the special gaming state is set. Gaming machine AC1, wherein the serial is intended to determine the establishment of termination conditions.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, it is possible to set a high probability state in which it is easy to win in the game state and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win in the game state, and to shift the game state to the low probability state when the high probability state is set. In some cases, a lottery (so-called falling lottery) is executed. Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, there have been those configured to be able to set a specific gaming state in which a game success lottery is easy to be executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-269007). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is no relation between the timing of transitioning from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. It became difficult, and there was a problem that the interest of the game fell. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine AC1, since the normal gaming state is set when the first probability is set by the probability control means, the setting situation of the probability setting means and the setting situation of the setting means may be associated and varied. it can. Therefore, it is possible to make the transition state of the gaming state easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine AC1, the determination means executes the determination when a determination condition for the determination means to execute the determination is satisfied.

  According to the gaming machine AC2, since the determination by the determination means can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied, it is suppressed that the determination is excessively performed by the determination means in the state where the second probability is set. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine AC2, the determination means performs the determination before dynamic display of the identification information is started based on the information acquired by the acquisition means. Machine AC3.

  According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC2, the determination by the determination means is executed before the dynamic display of the identification information is started, so the execution is performed based on the satisfaction of the determination condition. It is possible to execute dynamic display of identification information for indicating the result of the determination made on the basis of the determination result of the determination means. Thereby, when the determination means determines that the determination result is a specific determination result, the determination of the determination means to be executed based on the establishment of the determination condition serving as the determination trigger can be executed with the first probability. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

  In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the probability control means determines the first probability prior to the start of the dynamic display of the identification information when the determination means determines that the specific determination result is obtained. A game machine AC4 characterized by being set.

  According to the gaming machine AC4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC3, when the determination result of the determining means is a specific determination result, the probability control means starts the dynamic display of the identification information. The first probability is set earlier than that. Therefore, since the dynamic display of the identification information based on the second probability can be suppressed after the specific determination result is determined, it is possible to provide the appropriate game to the player. effective.

  In any one of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the setting means sets the normal gaming state based on the fact that the special gaming state is set and it is determined that the specific determination result is obtained. A game machine AC5 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine AC5, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AC1 to AC4, the normal gaming state is set by the setting means even when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. When the normal gaming state is set by the means, it may be difficult for the player to understand whether the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result or the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. It can provide the pleasure to be able to predict. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

<Feature AD group> (burst interruption production)
In a gaming machine having an effect execution means capable of executing an effect and an effect period determination means for determining an execution period of an effect to be executed by the effect execution means, a period during which the effect is executed by the effect execution means The specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect by interrupting at least a part of the effect being performed by the effect execution means, and the said effect execution means being executed when the specific effect is performed A game machine AD1 comprising setting means capable of changing and setting the effect to be interrupted in accordance with the state of the effect.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, the suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result can be executed, and the player can enjoy the period until the lottery result is notified. Furthermore, there is a gaming machine in which the effect of the suggested effect is further enhanced by executing various effects as the suggested effect at various timings (for example, JP-A-2014-209952). In such a gaming machine, even while one suggestion effect is being executed, another suggestion effect can be executed, so the kind of effect to be executed can be increased and the effect can be enhanced. is there. However, in the gaming machine described above, since the other suggestion effects are executed regardless of the indication situation of the one suggestion effect being executed, the player can be determined by the sudden change of the suggestion effects to be executed. And the player's willingness to play has been reduced. Furthermore, when the suggestion effect in execution indicates a predetermined process change (for example, story development), the predetermined process change aspect is ended halfway by switching the suggestion effect. Therefore, there is a problem that the player is more confused. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by executing various suggestion effects without disturbing the player in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine AD1, since the setting means can change the mode of effect interrupted by execution of the specific effect, the effect is interrupted in the middle of execution, and the player is confused. It can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand effect to the player in a gaming machine which can execute a plurality of effects overlapping.

  In the gaming machine AD1, the effect to be executed by the effect executing means includes an effect by sound, and the setting means is configured to interrupt the effect by the sound according to the state of the effect, and A game machine AD2 characterized by setting a case in which an effect by voice is not interrupted.

  According to the gaming machine AD2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1, interruption is made because it is possible to set the case of continuing only the sound and the case of also interrupting the sound when the effect is interrupted. It is possible to change the interruption mode of the effect according to the content of the effect. Therefore, the degree of interest of the player for the interrupted effect can be made different, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

  In this case, on the basis of the effect mode of the specific effect and the effect mode of the interrupted effect, it may be determined whether or not the audio output is interrupted, and the sound set as the effect mode of the specific effect When the type and the sound type set as the effect mode of the effect to be interrupted are the same sound type, the output of the sound may be interrupted. By configuring in this manner, it is possible to suppress the output of the interrupted presentation effect and the provision of an unintelligible presentation that is confused with the sound set as the presentation mode of the specific presentation.

  In addition, it may be configured to determine whether or not to interrupt the output of sound according to the interruption timing of the effect. In this case, when the remaining period of the effect to be interrupted is equal to or less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second or less), even if the effect is interrupted, only the sound can be output to the end. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that the effect has been interrupted.

  In the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, when the identification symbol is displayed in a specific combination on the display unit in which a plurality of identification symbols are dynamically displayed as one of the effects executed by the effect execution unit, and the display unit Of the plurality of identification symbols, the other identification symbol being displayed in a state where one identification symbol is dynamically displayed. The gaming machine AD3 is characterized by changing and setting the effect to be interrupted depending on whether or not the reach display mode displayed in the combination that can be the specific combination is displayed. .

  According to the gaming machine AD3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD1 or AD2, the presentation can be changed depending on whether the presentation to be interrupted is before or after the reach display. That is, it is possible to change the aspect of the effect set by the setting means based on the interruption timing of the effect performed by the effect execution means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the interruption of the effect.

  In the gaming machine AD3, when the effect to be executed by the effect item means is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, the setting unit interrupts the effect by the voice, and the reach display mode is performed. A game machine AD4 characterized by setting an effect so as not to interrupt the effect by the voice when it is interrupted after being displayed.

  According to the gaming machine AD4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AD3, when the effect is interrupted before the reach display mode is displayed, the sound is interrupted, and when the effect is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, It is possible not to interrupt the voice. Therefore, even if the presentation is interrupted after the reach display mode is displayed, the voice can be continuously output, so the player is confused that the reach display mode is discarded halfway There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the

<Feature AE group> (Button continuous hit sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means for changing an effect based on an operation of the operation means, the first operation is performed each time the operation means is operated. A game machine AE1 comprising voice control means capable of alternately outputting a sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggested effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified There has been something for the player to enjoy (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in the above-described gaming machine, when the player operates the operation means, there has been one which outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly received. In such a gaming machine, whether or not the player can operate the operation means can be easily determined by the outputted operation sound, but until the output of one operation sound is completed When the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if the operation sound to be output is a single sound. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easy for the player to hear the operation sound to be output and outputting the operation sound rich in variations.

  According to the gaming machine AE1, the first operation sound and the second operation sound are alternately output when the player operates the operation means a plurality of times, so that only one type of operation sound is output. There is an effect that it is possible to output an operation sound rich in variations as compared to the above. In addition, since different operation sounds are alternately output, even when the operation means is operated at a short interval (an interval shorter than the output period of one operation sound), the player operates the operation means to the player Can be easily determined by the operation sound. Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AE1, the sound control means causes the first operation sound to be output during a first period, and the operation is next performed so that the first operation sound is output before the first period elapses. In this case, the game machine AE2 is characterized in that the first operation sound being output is stopped and the output of the first operation sound is newly started.

  According to the gaming machine AE2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AE1, when the next first operation sound is outputted within the first period in which the first operation sound is outputted, the first operation sound being outputted In this case, the player is notified of the fact that the new operation has been performed can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, the voice control means causes the second operation sound to be output during the second period, and the second operation sound is subsequently output before the second period elapses. In this case, the second operation sound being output is stopped to newly start the output of the second operation sound. A game machine E3.

  According to the gaming machine AE3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AE1 or AE2, when the next second operation sound is output within the second period in which the second operation sound is output, the second currently output operation is performed. Since the operation sound is stopped and a new second operation sound is output, it is possible to notify the player that the new operation has been performed in an easy-to-understand manner.

  In any one of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing continuous operation effects in which an aspect of the effect changes in response to continuous operation of the operating means a plurality of times. A game machine AE4 characterized by

  According to the gaming machine AE4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AE1 to AE3, the variable situation of the presentation mode is performed by executing the continuous operation effect in response to the operation means being operated a plurality of times in succession. Thus, the player can be informed that the operation means has been operated. As a result, it is possible to determine that the operation to the operation means has been received, by the operation sound and the effect. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

<Feature AF group> (pending notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the discrimination means A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means In the gaming machine having the identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, the operation means capable of performing the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means operable by the player and the operation means. The effect executing means, and the identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing the identification symbol effect capable of changing the aspect of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means The game is characterized in that the identification symbol effect execution means executes the identification symbol effect on two or more of the identification symbols when a plurality of identification symbols are displayed on the display means. Machine AF1.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols variably based on the winning of the game balls on the start winning opening, and inform the player of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is configured to be able to be held a plurality of times, and the holding symbol corresponding to the number of holding memories is displayed, and the displayed holding symbol is displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending advance presentation effect that can notify in advance information related to a corresponding lottery using (for example, JP-A-2009-297071). In the above-described gaming machine, it is possible to change the color and shape of the reserved symbol, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol will be a big hit, before the variable indicator is started. It was possible to raise the sense of expectation of the person. However, when a reserve announcement effect occurs, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to have a sense of expectation with respect to the reserve symbols not targeted for the reserve announcement, and the game intention is reduced. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine AF1, as the identification symbol effect is performed on two or more identification symbols as one identification symbol effect, the target range of the identification symbol effect can be expanded, and the identification can be performed. It is possible to reduce the number of identification symbols that are not targeted for symbol effects. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine AF1 has a predetermination means capable of performing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect execution means A game machine AF2 characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is changed based on the determination result by the previous determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AF2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AF1, the aspect of the identification symbol can be varied based on the discrimination result of the prior discrimination means. Can be Therefore, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the identification symbol effect executing means varies the aspect of the two or more identification symbols based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition by the operation of the operation means. Feature game machine AF3.

  According to the gaming machine AF3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AF1 or AF2, the aspect of the two or more identification symbols can be varied based on the operation to the operation means, so the effect to be executed for the player It has the effect of being able to raise the willingness to participate in

  In any one of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is displayed in a plurality of rotational directions, and the identification symbol effect is A game machine AF4 comprising a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operation means is not effective during the period in which the game is performed.

  According to the gaming machine AF4, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AF1 to AF3, the identification symbol effect is executed across a period in which the identification information is displayed in a plurality of rotational directions, and further, the identification symbol effect is A regulation period in which the operation to the operation means is not determined to be effective is provided during the execution period. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at what timing to operate the operation means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine AF4, a specific effect is performed in a period other than the restriction period among the periods in which the identification symbol effect is being executed. A game machine AF5 characterized in that the specific effect is performed.

  According to the gaming machine AF5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AF4, by executing the specific effect, the game during the identification symbol production is whether or not it is during the restriction period during which the operation of the operating means is not valid. Since it is possible for the player to easily make a decision, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that the player can easily understand.

<Characteristic AG group> (Small hit in a certain fall)
A variable that can be changed into a ball entering means in which game balls can enter, a first state in which game balls can enter in the ball entering means, and a second state in which entering balls is more difficult than the first state A member, an acquiring means capable of acquiring information based on the game ball entering the ball entering means, a discriminating means capable of performing discrimination based on the information acquired by the acquiring means, and the discriminating means Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the user, a dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information displayed on the display means, and the determination result of the identification of the display means A bonus giving means capable of giving a player a benefit advantageous to the player when the identification information is displayed, a first probability as a judgment probability judged to be the specific judgment result, and a first probability higher than the first probability Probability setting means that can set 2 probability and gaming state A gaming machine having setting means capable of setting a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state in which the variable member is more easily changed from the second state to the first state than the normal gaming state; The probability setting means sets the first probability when the first transition condition is satisfied in a state where the second probability is set, and the setting means sets the specific gaming state. If the second transition condition is satisfied in the running state, the normal gaming state is set, and different effect modes can be set based on the establishment order of the first transition condition and the second transition condition A game machine AG1 comprising: an effect mode setting means; and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect based on the effect mode set by the effect mode setting means.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, it is possible to set a high probability state in which it is easy to win in the game state and a low probability state in which it is difficult to win in the game state, and to shift the game state to the low probability state when the high probability state is set. In some cases, a lottery (so-called falling lottery) is executed. Furthermore, in the gaming machine described above, there have been those configured to be able to set a specific gaming state in which a game success lottery is easy to be executed and a normal gaming state in which it is difficult to be executed. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2010-269007). However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, there is no relation between the timing of transitioning from the high probability state to the low probability state and the timing of transitioning from the specific gaming state to the normal gaming state. It became difficult, and there was a problem that the interest of the game fell. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine AG1, since the effects are executed in different effect modes based on the establishment order of the first transition condition and the second transition condition, the current gaming situation is predicted based on the contents of the effect to be executed. The effect is that the interest of the game can be improved.

  In the gaming machine AG1, the discrimination means can discriminate the special discrimination result different from the specific discrimination result, and the second transition condition is that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is the special discrimination result Gaming machine AG2 characterized by being established based on the following.

  According to the gaming machine AG2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG1, the second transition condition is satisfied based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means, and therefore the discrimination by the discrimination means may be a discrimination result more advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide the player with a case where the determination result is disadvantageous. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an interest in the determination result of the determination means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine AG2 has counting means capable of counting the number of times the determination result of the determination means becomes the special determination result in a state where the specific gaming state is set, and the second transition condition is the counting A game machine AG3 characterized in that the second transition condition is satisfied when a result of the counting by means becomes a predetermined counting result.

  According to the gaming machine AG3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AG2, the second transition condition is satisfied when the number of times the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a special discrimination result reaches a predetermined number of times. By determining that the result is a special discrimination result, it is possible to provide enjoyment to predict the period until the second transition condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode setting means is based on the determination probability set by the probability setting means and the gaming state set by the setting means. A gaming machine AG4 characterized in that

  According to the gaming machine AG4, in addition to the effects achieved by any of the gaming machines AG1 to AG3, the effect mode is set based on the set determination probability and the gaming state, so based on the effect to be executed, There is an effect that it is possible to provide enjoyment to predict the current game situation and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AG4, in the effect mode setting means, the first probability is set by the probability setting means, and the first gaming state in which the normal gaming state is set by the setting means, and the probability setting means. A game machine AG5 characterized in that the same effect mode is set in the second gaming state in which the second probability is set and the normal gaming state is set by the setting means.

  According to the gaming machine AG5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG4, the first probability is set, the first gaming state in which the normal gaming state is set, and the second probability are set, and the normal gaming state is set. Since the same effect mode is set in the second gaming state being played, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to distinguish between the first gaming state and the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the current game situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine AG5 includes determination means capable of performing determination when the second probability is set by the probability setting means, and the determination means determines that the determination means performs the determination. The above determination is executed when a condition is established, and the first transition condition is established when the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result. .

  According to the gaming machine AC6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AG5, since the determination by the determination means can be executed when the determination condition is satisfied, the determination means is excessively set with the second probability set. It is possible to suppress that the determination is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that a proper game can be provided to the player.

  In the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the presentation mode setting means suggests the determination probability set by the probability setting means when a predetermined period has elapsed after the benefit giving means gives the benefit. A game machine AC7 characterized by setting a suggestion effect mode for the game.

  According to the gaming machine AC7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AG5 or AG6, the suggestion effect mode is set when the predetermined period has passed after the benefit is given by the benefit giving means, so the first gaming state Alternatively, when the second gaming state is set, the player can be made to grasp the current gaming state based on the content of the suggestion effect mode. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the player to continue the game until the predetermined period has elapsed, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

<Features AH group> (Complex control development with pending PUSH and PUSH advance notice)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the discrimination means A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means In the gaming machine having the identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, the operation means capable of being operated by the player and the operation means capable of changing the effect mode by operating the operation means An effect execution means, an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect which makes it possible to change the aspect of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and Specific effect execution means capable of executing a specific effect based on the operation of the operation means in the overlapping period, when the effect effect and the identification symbol effect are performed in overlapping periods; A game machine AH1 characterized by having:

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggested effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified There was something for the player to entertain. (For example, Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2013-090780). Further, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there have been provided a plurality of conditions for executing the operation effect to further enhance the effect. In this case, there is a problem that a plurality of operation effects are executed redundantly, resulting in effects that are difficult for the player to understand, and the interest of the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved in the above-described gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine AH1, since the specific effect is executed when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are executed in overlapping periods, even if the operation effect and the identification symbol effect overlap, the player is It is possible to execute an effect that is easy to understand. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to enhance the rendering effect and improve the interest of the game.

  The gaming machine AH1 includes setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period, and the specific effect includes the operation AH2 characterized by including a suggestion mode indicating the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed by operating the means.

  According to the gaming machine AH2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AH1, it is possible to suggest to the player an effect to be varied when operating the operating means by the effect specifying effect exhibited by the gaming machine AH. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of executing an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

  In the gaming machine AH1 or AH2, during the overlapping period, the number of times the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is varied is set to be different based on the operation of the operation means. A game machine AH3 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine AH3, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AA1 or AA2, the number of times of operation variable is different depending on whether the operation effect or the variable operation effect is performed alone or not. It is possible to Therefore, there is an effect that the stage effect of the specific stage can be enhanced.

  When one of the gaming machines AH1 to AH3 is executed in a period in which the operation effect and the identification symbol effect overlap, at least one of them is varied by operating the operation means a plurality of times. A game machine AH4 characterized by having switching setting means for setting as described above.

  According to the gaming machine AH4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AH1 to AH3, when the operation production and the identification symbol production are performed in overlapping periods, at least the number of operations corresponding to one of the operation effects Can be easily made to grasp that a specific effect is being performed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the specific effect from being completed in a short period of time and an effect that is difficult for the player to understand to be executed.

  In the game machine AH4, a game machine AH5 characterized in that the specific effect includes one in which an execution period of the operation effect mode after being changed is set to be longer than a normal time.

  According to the gaming machine AH5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AH4, since the execution period of the operation presentation mode is set to be longer than that during the specific effect, the specific effect is executed for the player Since the information can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner, there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

<Features AI group> (Pending advance notice development)
Acquisition means capable of acquiring information, storage means storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means, and the discrimination means A display means for displaying identification information for indicating a determination result, a dynamic display means for causing the display means to dynamically display the identification information, and an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means In the gaming machine having the identification symbol display means to be displayed on the display means, the operation means capable of performing the operation effect in which the effect mode is changed by operating the operation means operable by the player and the operation means. An effect execution means, an identification symbol effect execution means capable of executing an identification symbol effect which makes it possible to change the aspect of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means, and Effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode of the identification symbol effect being executed based on the fact that the predetermined change condition is satisfied during the period when the identification symbol effect is being executed by the separate symbol effect execution means; A game machine AI1 characterized by comprising:

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, some gaming machines such as pachinko machines display symbols variably based on the winning of the game balls on the start winning opening, and inform the player of the result of the lottery after the variation display is completed. Furthermore, the lottery performed based on the winning of the game ball to the start winning opening is configured to be able to be held a plurality of times, and the holding symbol corresponding to the number of holding memories is displayed, and the displayed holding symbol is displayed. There is one that is configured to be able to execute a pending advance presentation effect that can notify in advance information related to a corresponding lottery using (for example, JP-A-2009-297071). In the above-described gaming machine, it is possible to change the color and shape of the reserved symbol, thereby suggesting the degree of expectation that the variable symbol corresponding to the reserved symbol will be a big hit, before the variable indicator is started. It was possible to raise the sense of expectation of the person. However, since the content of the pending notice effect can not be made to correspond to the change in the gaming situation after the pending notice effect occurs, the player may have a sense of expectation for the contents of the pending notice effect. It becomes difficult and there is a problem that the game will be reduced. It aims at solving the problem etc. which were illustrated above.

  According to the gaming machine AI1, when the change condition is satisfied during the execution of the identification symbol effect, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the identification symbol effect under execution, so it is possible to enhance the effect of the identification symbol effect it can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the game intention and to improve the interest of the game.

  In the gaming machine AI1, the gaming machine is characterized in that the change condition is satisfied based on the fact that the new information is stored in the storage means during the period when the identification symbol effect is being executed. AI2.

  According to the gaming machine AI2, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine A1, since the effect mode of the identification symbol effect can be varied based on the fact that new information is stored in the storage means, the identification symbol effect is being executed. Also in this case, it is possible to cause the player to play the game with enthusiasm to store new information in the storage means, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

  The gaming machine AI2 has a predetermination means capable of performing the determination before the information stored in the storage means is determined by the determination means, and the identification symbol effect execution means A game machine AI3 characterized in that the mode of the identification symbol is changed based on the determination result by the previous determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AI3, since the aspect of the identification symbol is changed based on the discrimination result of the prior discrimination means in addition to the effect exhibited by the gaming machine AI2, interest in the identification symbol effect to be executed is provided. The effect is that the effect can be enhanced.

  In the gaming machine AI3, the effect mode variable means changes the effect mode on the basis of the determination result of the prior determination means with respect to the information serving as a trigger when the change condition is established. Machine AI4.

  According to the gaming machine AI4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AI3, since it is possible to vary the effect mode of the identification symbol effect based on the result of the prior determination with respect to the newly stored information, Identification symbols in a wider range than the identification symbol range indicated by the identification symbol effect in can be targeted for effects. Therefore, the player can be made to have a sense of expectation with respect to the identification symbol effect, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  In any one of the game machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect executing means executes the identification symbol effect over a period in which the identification information is displayed in a plurality of rotational directions, and the identification symbol effect is performed. A gaming machine AI5 comprising a regulation period setting means for setting a regulation period during which the operation of the operation means is not effective during the period in which the game is being performed.

  According to the gaming machine AI5, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines AI1 to AI4, the identification symbol effect is executed across a period in which the identification information is displayed in a plurality of rotational directions, and further, the identification symbol effect is A regulation period in which the operation to the operation means is not determined to be effective is provided during the execution period. As a result, it is possible to entertain the player at what timing to operate the operation means, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine AI5, of the periods in which the identification symbol effect is being executed, the specific effect is executed in a period other than the restriction period.

  According to the gaming machine AI6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AI5, by executing a specific effect, the gaming machine AI6 is playing a game during the identification symbol production, whether or not it is during a restriction period during which the operation of the operating means is not valid. Since it is possible for the player to easily make a decision, there is an effect that it is possible to execute an effect that the player can easily understand.

<Feature AJ group> (Button continuous hit sound control)
In a gaming machine having an operation means operable by a player and an effect execution means for changing an effect based on the operation of the operation means, as an operation sound each time the operation means is operated A voice control unit capable of outputting at least a first operation sound and a second operation sound different from the first operation sound, and a type of the operation sound output by the voice control unit can be set The voice setting means includes a voice determination means capable of determining the type of the operation sound output by the voice control means, and the voice setting means is based on the determination result of the voice determination means. A game machine AJ1 characterized by setting a type of operation sound.

  Conventionally, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, when the game ball enters the starting opening provided on the gaming board surface, the success or failure of the game is lottery, and it is advantageous for the player if the lottery result is a hit. There is a thing that the privilege game which becomes is executed. Then, before the lottery result is notified, an operation effect for causing the player to operate the operation means can be executed as a suggested effect for suggesting the lottery result, and a period until the lottery result is notified There has been something for the player to enjoy (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). Further, in the above-described gaming machine, when the player operates the operation means, there has been one which outputs an operation sound in order to notify that the operation has been correctly received. In such a gaming machine, whether or not the player can operate the operation means can be easily determined by the outputted operation sound, but until the output of one operation sound is completed When the next operation is performed during the period, that is, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, there is a problem that it becomes difficult for the player to hear the operation sound output corresponding to each operation. In addition, there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous if the operation sound to be output is a single sound. In the above-described gaming machine, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game in which the interest of the game is improved by making it easy for the player to hear the operation sound to be output and outputting the operation sound rich in variations.

  According to the gaming machine AJ1, since it is possible to set a new type of operation sound based on the type of operation sound that is actually output, it is possible to output an operation sound that is easy for the player to understand It has the effect of being able to improve the interest.

  In the game machine AJ1, the sound setting means sets the operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound determined by the sound determination means.

  According to the gaming machine AJ2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AJ1, it becomes possible to set an operation sound of a type different from the type of the operation sound that is actually output, so various operation sounds are output Thus, it is possible to execute an effect rich in variations, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the game machine AJ1 or AJ2, the sound setting means sets the first operation sound when the sound judging means judges that the operation sound is not outputted. Machine AJ3.

  According to the gaming machine AJ3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ1 or AJ2, when the operation sound is not output, the first operation sound is set by the sound setting means. Therefore, the operation sound can be output by giving predetermined regularity to the operation of the operation means, and there is an effect that the rendering effect can be enhanced.

  In any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the operation setting means is capable of determining an interval of the operation to be performed on the operation means, and the sound setting means is a determination result of the operation state determination means A game machine AJ4 characterized in that a third operation sound different from the first operation sound and the second operation sound can be set when a specific situation determination result is obtained.

  According to the gaming machine AJ4, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ3, the third operation sound can be set on the basis of the determination result of the operation status determination means. It can provide fun operating means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In the gaming machine AJ4, when the interval of the operation performed on the operation means is shorter than a predetermined period, the operation state determination means determines the specific state determination result. AJ5 gaming machine.

  According to the gaming machine AJ5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ4, the third operation sound is output when the interval of the operation performed on the operation means is shorter than the predetermined period, There is an effect that it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to participate in the game.

  In any one of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the effect executing means executes the effect during a predetermined effect period, and based on the determination result of the voice determining means when the effect period has elapsed. Pseudo sound setting means capable of setting a pseudo sound after the lapse of the effect period, wherein the sound control means can also output the pseudo sound set by the pseudo sound setting means A game machine AJ6 characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine AJ6, in addition to the effects produced by any of the gaming machines AJ1 to AJ5, the pseudo sound can be output based on the type of the operation sound output when the rendering period elapses, so the rendering period ends Even if the type of the operation sound being output at any time is any type, it is possible to end the output control of the sound without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine AJ6, the pseudo sound setting means sets a pseudo sound corresponding to the second operation sound when the sound judging means judges the type of the operation sound different from the second operation sound. A game machine AJ7 characterized in that it is a game.

  According to the gaming machine AJ7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AJ6, the pseudo sound corresponds to the second operation sound when the type of the operation sound output when the effect period is over is other than the second operation sound. Since the voice is output, the end voice of the voice to be output by the voice control unit can be unified. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide an effect without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

  In the gaming machine AJ7, the discrimination means capable of performing discrimination when the discrimination condition is satisfied, the display means on which the identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means is displayed, and the identification information in the display means Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying for a period, and the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode indicating that the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result A privilege giving means for giving a privilege based on the event, and the effect period is set during a dynamic display period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display, The pseudo sound setting means is more likely to stop display in the specific display mode when the identification information dynamically displayed while the effect is being performed is stopped in the specific display mode. , Serial gaming machine AJ8, characterized in that it is intended to easily set the pseudo-speech.

  According to the gaming machine AJ8, in addition to the effects exhibited by the gaming machine AJ7, the pseudo sound is produced by the effect executed during the dynamic display period of the identification information indicating that the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a specific discrimination result. Since it is made easy to output, there is an effect that the player can be interested in the end contents of the sound outputted by the sound control means.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine Z1. Above all, the basic configuration of a pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, the ball is fired to a predetermined game area, and the ball is at an operating opening arranged at a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning (or passing through the operation opening), identification information dynamically displayed on the display device may be determined and stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when the special game state occurs, the variable winning device (specific winning opening) disposed at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable the ball to be won, and the value according to the number of winnings There is a case where a value (including not only prize balls but also data etc. written to a magnetic card) is given.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the slot machine, “a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying the identification information is provided. The dynamic display of the identification information is started as a result, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or when the predetermined time elapses. It is a gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generation means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, as a necessary condition that the final identification information of is a specific identification information. In this case, the game medium may be a coin, a medal or the like as a representative example.

  In any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the integrated gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information sequence consisting of a plurality of identification information and subsequently displaying identification information, and for starting operation means (for example, operation lever) Fluctuation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stop (for example, the stop button) or when a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generation means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the finalized identification information upon stopping is the specific identification information, and using a ball as a game medium and the identification information In order to start the dynamic display of the game, a predetermined number of balls are required, and when a special gaming state occurs, a large number of balls are paid out.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
81 3rd symbol display device (display means)
203a Special symbol 1 Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
203b Special symbol 2 Hold ball storage area (part of storage means)
10317 PUSH button (operation means)
S309 Discrimination Means S406, S413 Acquisition Means S4053, S4063 Identification Symbol Display Means S4205 Dynamic Display Means S5104 Identification Symbol Effect Execution Means S5108 Specific Effect Execution Means

Claims (3)

Acquisition means that can acquire information,
Storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means;
Discrimination means capable of performing discrimination based on the information stored in the storage means;
Display means for displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means;
Dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means;
A gaming machine having identification symbol display means for causing the display means to display an identification symbol corresponding to the information stored in the storage means;
Operation means operable by the player;
Operation effect execution means capable of executing an operation effect whose effect mode is variable by operating the operation means;
An identification symbol effect executing means capable of executing an identification symbol effect capable of changing the aspect of the identification symbol displayed by operating the operation means;
Specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect based on an operation of the operation means in the overlapping period when the operation effect and the identification symbol effect are performed in an overlapping period; A game machine characterized by having. It has setting means for setting the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed when the operation means is operated in the overlapping period,
The indication effect indicating the operation effect or the identification symbol effect to be changed by operating the operation means is included in the specific effect. Of gaming machines.   In the overlapping period, the number of times of operation in which the operation effect or the identification symbol effect is varied is set to be different based on the operation of the operation means. Or the gaming machine described in 2.

Images